MASTER 
NEGATIVE 
NO. 92-81119-3 


MICROFILMED 1993 
COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES/NEW YORK 


| as part of the | 
"Foundations of Western Civilization Preservation Project” 


Funded by the 
NATIONAL ENDOWMENT FOR THE HUMANITIES 


Reproductions may not be made without permission from 
Columbia University Library 


COPYRIGHT STATEMENT 


The copyright law of the United States - Title 17, United 
States Code - concerns the making of photocopies or 
other reproductions of copyrighted material. 


Under certain conditions specified in the law, libraries and 
archives are authorized to furnish a photocopy or other 
reproduction. One of these specified conditions is that the 
photocopy or other reproduction is not to be “used for any 
purpose other than private study, scholarship, or 
research." If a user makes a request for, or later uses, a 
photocopy or reproduction for purposes in excess of "fair 
use," that user may be liable for copyright infringement. 


This institution reserves the right to refuse to accept a 
copy order if, in its judgement, fulfillment of the order 
would involve violation of the copyright law. 


-XENOPHON 


| TITLE: 


THE FIRST FOUR BOOKS 


OF XENOPHON'S... 


PLACE: 


BOSTON 


| DATE: 


1894 


Master Negative # 


44. - BINA-3 


COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES 
PRESERVATION DEPARTMENT 


BIBLIOGRAPHIC MICROFORM TARGET 


Original Material as Filmed - Existing Bibliographic Record 


| Se wan 


ii iil 


) 
ΒΒΧΜ Anabasis. 1894, | 
IE942 | 


Xenophon. 


The first four books of Xenophon's Anabasis, with notes 
adapted to the latest edition of Goodwin's Greek graminar, 
and to Hadley’s Greek erammar (revised by Allen) Edited 
by William W. Goodwin ... and John Williams White ... 
Rev. ed. Boston, New York (ete.; Ginn and company (°1894, 


lii, 274 p. front.. illus., double map. 19, 


Appended, (viii, 290 p.) with special t.-p.: An illustrated dictionary 
to Nenophon's Anabusis with groups of words etymologically related, by 


John Williams White ... and Morris H. Morgan ... Boston, New York 
yete., Ginn & company (°1891, 


1, Persia—Hist.—Ancient fo A. Db. 640. 2. Cyrus, the Younger, d. zn. o. 
401. I. Goodwin, William Watson, 1831-1912, ed, 11. White, John 
Williams, 1849-1917, joint ed. Wm. Morgan, Morris Hicky, 1859-1910, 

Another co .y in Plimpton Library. 32—15583 


Library of Congress ( PA4IS4.A5G6 18949 1894, 
ι34}}1) 888.3 


mee 


Pita Iludyy 


Restrictions on Use: 


INITIALS | 


γ- 


Association for information and Image Management 


1100 Wayne Avenue, Suite 1100 
Silver Spring, Maryland 20910 


301/587-8202 


Centimeter 
1s 4 7 8 ὁ wb hee ..:.:.: 


3 4 3 


2 
Inches LO 5128 155 
== εἰς [32 [22 


| 6.3 
u lies 


[35 1.2 1. 


MANUFACTURED TO AIIM STANDARDS 
BY APPLIED IMAGE, INC. 


Sse 


πὰς ie 
a habs 


“a 
* 


ἄν ἢ 
a 
ὁ Wy 


? 


~~ -: τὴ 0 κύρυ 


ae Ae . 


ieee ς 2 
ἀρ τς 


% 


vast 


a 


™ 


“* 


ae 
ἠ 4 


4 


! 


ene 


¥ 


0 ἡ Hil 
" 


- 


Mal iii 
hist wenn Hl 


Ἷ [se aval | TES AS 


Cohuubia University 
Library 


* 
Mortimer Lamson Earle 


BORN 1864-DIED 1905 
ἰς 


PROFESSOR OF CLASSICAL PHILOLOGY 
ΙΝ COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY 
SCHOLAR AUTHOR TEACHER 


* 


AS A MEMORIAL OF HIS LIFE AND WORK 
HIS STUDENTS AND FRIENDS GAVE. 
HIS LIBRARY 
TO HIS ALMA MATER 
A. D. 1907 


Κλεινὸς δ᾽ ὃ πόνος μοι 


θεοῖσιν δούλαν χέρ᾽ ἔχειν. 


μὴ 


THE 


FIRST FOUR BOOKS 


OF 


XENOPHON'S ANABASIS, 


AN 


With Totes 


ADAPTED TO THE LATEST EDITION OF GOODWIN’S 
GREEK GRAMMAR, AND TO HADLEY’S GREEK 
GRAMMAR (REVISED BY ALLEN). 


EDITED BY 


WILLIAM W. GOODWIN, LL.D. AND D.C.L., 


ELIOT PROFESSOR OF GREEK LITERATURE, 
AND 


JOHN WILLIAMS WHITE, Pu.D., 


PROFESSOR OF GREEK, 


IN HARVARD UNIVERSITY. 


REVISED EDITION. 


BOSTON : 


PUBLISHED BY GINN & COMPANY. 
1894. 


PREFACE. 


Tu1s volume contains the first four books of Xenophon’s 
|Anabasis, edited for the use of schools. These books include 
the mustering of the Greek army which invaded Persia in the 
service of Cyrus the Younger, the march into the Great King’s 
᾿ ountry, the battle οὗ Cunaxa, and the death of Cyrus; and 

COPYRIGHT, 1894 } hey carry the narrative of the retreat of the Ten Thousand 
By WILLIAM W. GoopWIN AND JoHN WILLIAMS WHITE, idown to their arrival at Trapezus after their perilous march 
Hfrom the neighborhood of Babylon. The editors believe that 
j his is as much of the Anabasis as it is advisable for pupils 
, o read before entering college, and no more than is needed to 
jprepare them for the study of more difficult Greek prose. No 
bther work is, on the whole, so well adapted to the needs of 
beginners in Greek as the Anabasis; but, if the standard of 
beholarship in our classical schools is ever to approach that 
of similar institutions in other countries, they must extend 
{ heir teaching of Attic prose to other authors than Xenophon. 
| The present edition contains an Introduction, written by 
Mr. White, which seeks to give the information on history 
and on military antiquities which is needed for the under- 
Btanding of the Anabasis. The editors have not added a 
piography of Xenophon, as this is easily found in the ency- 
Plopeedias and classical dictionaries which are accessible to 
all. The new Dictionary to the Anabasis, prepared by Messrs. 
White and Morgan, is an important part of this volume ; 
f/and to this the pupil is constantly referred, not only for the 
jjmeaning and use of words, but also for many matters of 


ἢ 
| 


| 


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 


tv PREFACE. 


history and antiquities which are not discussed in the Intro- 
duction. As the notes have been written for those who can 
always refer to this Dictionary and to the Introduction, much 
information which would otherwise be found in the notes 
has there been omitted. It is feared that this may give the 
notes, especially those on the earlier books, the appearance of 
being exclusively grammatical; but the constant reference to 
the Introduction and the Dictionary will, it is hoped, correct 
this impression. 

The notes on the first two books have been prepared 
chiefly by Mr. White, those on the last two chiefly by Mr. 
Goodwin. It will be seen that these notes make no pre- 
tension to learning, and aim merely at aiding beginners in 
laying a solid foundation for future scholarship. The gram- 
matical aid is given in great measure through references, 
in which form alone it can be systematic. Young students 
need to be referred to more detailed statements of the 
general principles involved in the new constructions which 
they constantly meet in reading, than can be given in a 
commentary; and frequent reference to the grammar is 
the only sure means of fixing in the mind the important 
principles of syntax. At the same time, the grammatical 
references are seldom given without at least some hint of 
the point of construction which is involved: this will 
help those to whom a construction is new, while it will 
save others the trouble of looking up an explanation of 
what they already understand. References to parallel 
passages are freely given, as the comparison of similar 
expressions is one of the best ways of fixing in the mind 
the knowledge of even familiar idioms. This is often highly 
useful, even. when it has the appearance of tedious repe- 
tition. It will be seen that the notes on the first book, 
which it is assumed will be used for giving a solid founda- 
tion in the general principles of Greek syntax, are especially 


PREFACE. Vv 


copious ; while those on the three following books are written 
for pupils who are supposed to have mastered the rudiments 
of Greek. In the opinion of the editors it is highly desir- 
able to use as small a portion as possible of classic literature 
as a corpus vile for the more minute dissection, and to enable 
pupils at the earliest possible moment to read Greek and 
Latin with an appreciative mind. 

It is of course impossible in a school-book like this to give 
special credit for every remark which is wholly or partly 
borrowed. The editors must therefore express, once for all, 
their obligations to the long and familiar line of commentators 
on Xenophon, whose diligence has rendered further originality 
well-nigh impossible. American scholars will long remember 
gratefully the learning and fidelity with which the late 
Professor Alpheus Crosby devoted himself to the interpreta- 
tion of the Anabasis. 

The text of this edition is based on that of Hug, in the 
Teubner text-edition of 1889, so far as this is determined by 
Hug’s valuable recension of the Paris Codex C; the editors 
have, however, used their own discretion with regard to many 
conjectural emendations which Hug has introduced into his 
text. They have attempted to follow the best ancient tradition 
and at the same time to put a readable and consistent text 
into the hands of school-boys. 

The map of the march of the Ten Thousand Greeks in this 
volume is copied chiefly from Kiepert’s map in Rehdantz’s 
Anabasis. 


CAMBRIDGE, Mass., May, 1894. 


it iii, 


INTRODUCTION. 


XENOPHON’S ANABASIS. 


1. The Anabasis of Xenophon tells the story of the Expe- 
dition of Cyrus the Younger against his brother Artaxerxes 
to wrest from his possession the throne of Persia, of the 
retreat to the Black Sea, after the death of Cyrus, of the 
Greeks whom he had gathered under his command, and of 
their subsequent return to western Asia Minor. The expe- 
dition set out from Sardis in the spring of 401 8. ο., and six 
months later a battle was fought at the village of Cunaxa, 
some forty or fifty miles from Babylon. In this battle Cyrus 
was killed in a hand-to-hand encounter with' his brother ; 
and the Greeks, although they twice met and twice routed in 
a single day the vast forces which Artaxerxes brought against 
them, suffered virtual defeat in losing their leader. 

2. Their march from Sardis to Cunaxa had lain through 
southern Asia Minor and across the desert of Arabia. But 
this route, the only one- with which they were acquainted, 
was closed to them ; for if they had undertaken to return as 
they came, they would have perished of hunger in the desert. 
They set out, therefore, northward under the guidance of 
Ariaeus, who had been the commander of the barbarian forces 
of Cyrus ; but after a single day’s march, they entered into 
negotiations with the king which led to a treaty. By the 
terms of this treaty, Tissaphernes, one of the king’s four 
generals in the battle, was to lead them back in safety to 
Ionia. At the river Zapatas, however, Tissaphernes treacher- 
ously entrapped five of the generals, four of whom were soon 


after put to death. 


ὙΠ INTRODUCTION. [9 3. 


3. Great dejection in consequence fell upon the army ; 
but, recovering their courage, especially under the exhorta- 
tions of Xenophon, they elected new generals, and began 
their retreat along the upper waters of the Tigris and through 
the highlands of Armenia to the Greek colonies on the Black 
Sea. This “Retreat of the Ten Thousand” from the river 
Zapatas to Trapezus, the modern Trebizond, was one of incred- 
ible hardship,—a nearly constant fight for over three 
months through an enemy’s country in the winter time. 
Xenophon’s narrative of it contains by far the most vivid 
picture that has ever been given of the temper, discipline, 
and endurance of those citizen-soldiers who constituted the 
armies of Greece; and along with that an authentic and 
most interesting account of the tribes of Asiatic mountaineers 
who lived just outside the circle of the civilized world. The 
story of the advance, of the battle, and of the retreat to 
Trapezus is told in the first four books of the Anabdasis. 
These books are included in the present edition. 

4. The Greeks reached Trapezus at the end of the winter 
in 400 8. ο., and after a month’s halt proceeded westward, 
partly by land and partly by sea, to Chrysopolis on the 
Thracian Bosphorus, opposite Byzantium, which they reached 
in the summer. After passing over into Thrace and subse- 
quently returning to Asia, in the spring of 399 8. ο. they 
joined the army of Thibron, the general then in command of 
the Lacedaemonian forces on the coast of Asia Minor. The 
last three books of the Anadasis contain the account of the 
return of the Greeks from Trapezus to Chrysopolis, and of 
their subsequent operations until they joined forces with 
Thibron, when, as the “Ten Thousand,” they disappear from 
history. 

1JIn chapters LXIX., LXX., and LXXI. of his History of Greece, 
Grote gives an account of the events covered by the Anabasis, which in 


its interest rivals the original. Grote’s chapters constitute an excellent 
running commentary on Xenophon’s text. 


§ 6.] PERSIA AND THE PERSIANS. ix 


5. Such, in brief, is the story of the Anabasis. The expe- 
dition failed, but it produced a profound impression on the 
contemporary Greek world. It proved that an army of 
disciplined Greeks, under the command of skilful leaders, 
might penetrate even to the heart of the empire of the Great 
King and work its will against whatever odds. It showed 
the impotence of Persia, and confirmed the contemptuous 
judgment of the Younger Cyrus, who said to the Greek 
generals and captains assembled at the last council of war, 
before the battle at Cunaxa, that he was ashamed to think 
how worthless they would find his countrymen to be. To 
the modern reader interested in Greek studies, Xenophon’s 
graphic narrative is a new revelation of the marvellous 
strength and force of the Hellenic character. It also gives 
him glimpses of that older oriental civilization, with which 
the Greeks here came into conflict on its own soil. Some 
previous knowledge of the history and institutions of Persia, 
the scene of the action of the Anabasis, is necessary to a 
proper understanding of Xenophon’s narration. 


PERSIA AND THE PERSIANS. 


6. The Persian empire was founded by Cyrus the Great 
(v. Kipos).1 He himself tells us who he was. “I am Cyrus,” 
he says on one of the Babylonian cylinders, “king of hosts, 
great king, mighty king, king of Babylon, king of Sumer and 
Akkad, king of the four regions; son of Cambyses, great 
king, king of Anshan; grandson of Cyrus, great king, king 
of Anshan ; great-grandson of Teispes, great king, king of 
Anshan.” It is probable that his ancestors were of Iranian 
stock, like the Medes, and that they had come from the north 


1 When a Greek word is thus cited in parentheses in the Introduction, 
read the corresponding article in the Dictionary at the end of this book. 


x INTRODUCTION. [8 6. 


to settle in that rugged but fruitful country on the Persian 
Gulf, which the Greeks called Persis, and the Romans Persis 
or Persia (v. Πέρσης). The first great leader of the race was 
Achaemenes, and the earliest royal city was Pasargadae, near 
which grew up Persepolis. 

Ancient Persis is in the same latitude with lower Egypt, 
but is high land. The early Persians who made it their 
home were a hardy race, born to conquest. They came into 
possession of Elam, or Susiane (v. Σοῦσα) ; and Teispes, son of 
Achaemenes, became king of Anshan, in Elam, as well as of 
Persis. On his death the royal house of the Achaemenidae 
divided into two branches. One ruled in Anshan, the other 
in Persis. The line of Anshan embraced Cyrus I., son of 
Teispes, Cambyses I., and Cyrus the Great (Cyrus II.); the 
line of Persis, Ariaramnes, son of Teispes, Artames, and 
Hystaspes, a contemporary of Cyrus the Great. 

7. These genealogical facts, established by records contem- 
porary with Cyrus the Great and Darius I., his successor once 
removed, were not known to the Greeks. Among them many 
legends grew up about the name of the great Cyrus. The 
best known is recorded by Herodotus with minute details. 
This made Cyrus the grandson of Astyages, king of Media, 
who had married his daughter Mandane to Cambyses, a 
Persian of middle rank, in fear of a dream. This dream the 
Magi interpreted to mean that his daughter would bear a son 
who would one day become the ruler of all Asia. But we 
now know that Cambyses, father of Cyrus, was a king, reign- 
ing in Elam ; and there is no proof of any blood relationship 
between him and the royal house of Media. 

_ 8. When Cyrus came to the throne, there were three great 
kingdoms in Asia, the Median, the Lydian, and the Baby- 
lonian. The kings of Elam and of Persis were at this time 
vassals of Astyages the Mede. But in 549 8. ο., when Media 
and Babylon were at war, Cyrus raised the standard of revolt 


§ 9.] - PERSIA AND THE PERSIANS. xi 


and defeated Astyages in battle. The latter was deposed by 
his own subjects and delivered to the conqueror in chains. 
The kings who had been his vassals, the king of Persis 
included, acknowledged the sovereignty of Cyrus. Thus was 
founded the great empire of the Persians. Cyrus swept on 
from conquest to conquest. In 546, Sardis, the capital of 
the kingdom of Lydia, fell before an irresistible assault. 
The Greek cities of the coast yielded to force of arms. In 
upper Asia Cyrus carried the bounds of his empire eastward 
to the borders of India, and in 538 8.6. he overthrew the 
kingdom of Babylon. He died in 529 8. c. and was buried at 
Pasargadae. The ruins of his tomb still exist, a grave- 
chamber standing on a base of seven retreating steps, all 
of solid blocks of white marble. On it was the simple 
inscription, “Ὁ Man! I am Cyrus, son of Cambyses, who 
founded the greatness of Persia and ruled Asia. Grudge me 
not this monument.” 

9. Cyrus was succeeded by his son Cambyses, a man of 
suspicious and ungovernable temper. His reign is marked 
by the conquest of Egypt and Libya, against which Cyrus 
had not turned his arms. Cambyses had a younger brother, 
Bardes, called Smerdis by the Greeks, whom in jealousy and 
distrust he had had secretly assassinated before he set out on 
his Egyptian campaign. He tarried long in the west, and a 
Magian priest, who chanced to resemble the murdered man, 
knowing how Cambyses was hated by his subjects, proclaimed 
himself to be the missing Bardes and usurped the throne. 
When Cambyses heard the news, he called together the 
noblest of the Persians, confessed his crime, and slew himself. 
His reign had lasted but a few years, and he left no son. 
Justice quickly overtook the usurper. Darius, the son of 
Hystaspes, of that branch of the house of Achaemenes that 
had ruled in Persis (see § 6), formed a conspiracy, and with 
the help of six faithful followers, sought out the impostor in 


xii INTRODUCTION. [9 9. 


Media, got access to his presence by stratagem, and slew him 
in the night time in the castle to which he had withdrawn for 
safety. The false king had ruled but seven months. 

10. Darius proclaimed himself king, but he was met by 
resistance on all sides. The first six years of his reign, which 


In these years he fought nineteen pitched battles. He was 
often in desperate straits. But he was a man of extraor- 
dinary resource and finally overcame all obstacles. He him- 
self records the names of thirty countries of which he had 
become king. 

The empire which he established was bounded on the north 
by the Danube, the Black sea, the Caucasian mountains, the 
Caspian sea, the sea of Aral, and the river Sir; on the east 
by Eastern Turkestan, the eastern limit of the Punjaub, and 
the Indus ; on the south by the Arabian sea, the Persian gulf, 
the desert of Arabia, the Red sea, Nubia, and the Libyan 
desert ; and on the west by the gulf of Sidra, the Mediter- 
ranean and Aegean seas, and the western limit of Eastern 
Roumelia and Bulgaria. The area of this vast empire has 
been estimated to have been over 2,000,000 square miles, ten 
times that of the German Empire. Its population has been 
estimated to have numbered 80,000,000, nearly twice that of 
Germany in 1885. 

11. When Darius had securely established his authority 
over all parts of his empire, he set to work on the reorganiza- 
tion of its administration. The principle he adopted was that 
of uniformity of control, a principle as difficult of application 
as it was necessary in an empire composed of such diverse 
nationalities. He divided the empire, as he himself tells us, 
into twenty-three satrapies or provinces. These satrapies 
were in fact kingdoms. Territorially, each of them, on the 
average, was one fourth larger than all New England. Each 
province was under fhe government of three officers, a satrap 


§ 12.] PERSIA AND THE PERSIANS. xiii 


or viceroy, who had the entire charge of the civil administra- 
tion of his satrapy, a military commander, who received his 
orders from the king but looked to the satrap for the pay and 
maintenance of his troops, and a royal secretary, whose duty 
was to keep the king informed of the conduct of his two 
colleagues, while all the orders of the satrap passed through 
his hands. These three powers balanced one another ; real 
authority remained vested in the king. High officials of the 
court also were frequently sent out to inspect the provinces. 

The satraps were selected with care, and the sons of 
the noblest Persians were specially trained at court to be 
governors. From the first, great discretionary powers were 
given the satraps. Many of them were far removed from the 
central government, and might be called upon to act in cases 
where delay would have been dangerous. The fact that they 
were often relatives or special favorites of the king increased 
their power. Little by little they encroached upon the func- 
tions of the two other officers, until by the end of the fifth 
century B.c. their authority within their own provinces was 
almost absolute. 

12. The system of government established by Darius 
worked well in practice. In particular, the revenues of the 
government increased rapidly. Darius was thrifty, and im- 
posed tribute (δασμός) in money and kind on all his subjects 
except the inhabitants of Persis, the cradle of the race. His 
predecessors had been content to accept voluntary gifts. 
Herodotus tells us that his subjects were wont to say that 
“Gyrus had the soul of a father, Cambyses that of a master, 
Darius that of a huckster.” But his tax, which was based 
upon the productiveness of the land, was impartially imposed. 
The annual royal revenue has been estimated to have 
amounted to $175,000,000. Darius also endeavored to intro- 
duce a uniform gold and silver coinage throughout the empire 
(v. δαρεικός), but did not meet with complete success. 


xiv INTRODUCTION. [$ 12. 


To facilitate trade and the quick movement of troops, he 
improved existing roads and built new ones throughout the 
empire. The “Royal Road,” doubtless in existence before 
his time, ran from Susa to Nineveh, thence west to the 
Cilician Gates, thence north through Tyana and Mazaca to 
Pteria, thence west across the Halys by a fortified bridge 
(the other rivers being crossed by boats) to Ancyra, thence 
southwest through Pessinus and Ceramon Agora to Sardis 
and Ephesus. This was called the “Royal Road” because 
the service of the “ Great King” passed over it. Along this 
road, between Susa and Sardis, Darius established 111 
stations, where mounted couriers were kept ready day and 
night to forward the royal despatches. Orders were trans- 
mitted by this simple device, the first postal service of which 
we have any knowledge, with astonishing rapidity. 

13. Darius died in 486 8. c. after a reign of 36 years. Its 
‘last years were made memorable by the revolt in 500 B.c. of 
the Greek cities of Asia Minor along the entire Mediterranean 
coast, which it took five years to subdue, and by the two 
fruitless expeditions which Darius sent against the Greeks on 
the continent. The defeat of the Persians at Marathon in 
490 B.c. was a momentous event in the history of Greece. 
Darius was succeeded by his son Xerxes, whose humiliating 
defeat at Salamis in 480 s.c. forever freed the Greeks from 
the danger of Persian conquest. Xerxes was at once weak 
and arrogant, cowardly and cruel, and most of his successors 
were of the same type. Nothing prevented the dissolution of 
the empire but the ingenuity and skill with which Darius had 
consolidated it. Xerxes was assassinated in his chamber in 
465 s.c. His successor Artaxerxes reigned 40 years, and 
left the kingdom to his only legitimate son, Xerxes II. The 
latter after a reign of six weeks, was murdered by his illegit- 
imate brother Sogdianus. He ruled six months and was in 
turn murdered by another brother, Darius II., who came to 


§ 14.] PERSIA AND THE PERSIANS. XV 


the throne in 425 z.c. This Darius was the father of the 
two brothers whose struggle for the throne is recorded in the 
first book of the Anabasis. 

14. At the time of the expedition of Cyrus the Younger, 
the Persian army consisted of infantry, cavalry, and war- 
chariots. Their commander-in-chief was the king. Under 
him were four generals, each in command of a great division 
which comprised different ethnic divisions and numbered at 
the battle of Cunaxa 300,000 men. Each of the smaller 
ethnic divisions had also its own tribal commander, and was 
separately organized. The infantry was divided into regi- 
ments of 1000 and companies of 100 men, and the cavalry 
into squadrons of 70. Each regiment, company, and squadron 
had its own commanders. 

The Persian foot-soldier carried for defense a wicker-shield 
(yéppov). Unlike the Greek infantry man, he had neither 
helmet, cuirass, nor greaves, but wore in their stead cap, 
jacket, and trousers of leather. His offensive weapons were 
a great bow (τόξον) and quiver (φαρέτρα), a spear (παλτόν), a 
short sword (ἀκινάκης), and sometimes a battle-axe (odyapis). 
The slingers (v. σφενδονήτης), an important division of the 
military force, were separately organized. While the general 
equipment was as described above, some ethnic divisions were 
armed after their own peculiar fashion. The Egyptians, for 
example, at the battle of Cunaxa carried wooden shields that 
reached to their feet ; and the Chabyles, a brave and warlike 
tribe in Pontus on the frontier of Armenia, wore linen 
cuirasses, had greaves and helmets, and carried spears which, 
on the testimony of Xenophon, were fifteen cubits long. 

The cavalry were equipped with helmets, cuirass (λευκο- 
θώραξ), and armor for the thighs (παραμηρίδια), and each 
cavalryman carried two spears and a sword. The head and 
body of the horse also were protected (v. προμετωπίδιον, προ- 
στερνίδιον). The war chariots carried scythes (v. δρεπανηφόρος), 


Xvl INTRODUCTION. [8. 14. 


and in battle were posted at intervals in front of the troops 
of the line, the cavalry being stationed on the wings. 


CYRUS THE YOUNGER. 


15. Darius II. (v. Δαρεῖος), a natural son of Artaxerxes 1.; 
same to the throne by the murder of his brother (8 13). He 
was himself a man of feeble character, and was instigated to 
the deed by his wife and half-sister Parysatis, a woman of a 
pold, intriguing, and cruel disposition, who exercised great 
‘nfluence over her husband. Their oldest son was Artaxerxes 

surnamed Mnemon on account of his great 
accession of Darius to the 
throne. : 
usually so called to distinguish him from Cyrus the Great, 
the founder of the empire (§ 6). The younger son was born 
in the purple. 

16. After the disastrous defeat of the Athenians in Sicily 
in 413 B.c., the Peloponnesian war had broken out afresh. 
For over 60 years the Greek cities on the coast of Asia Minor 
had been practically independent of Persian control, but 
Darius now determined, if possible, to reéstablish the imperial 
authority. He gave orders to Tissaphernes, satrap of Lydia 
and general commander of the military forces of western 
Asia Minor, and to Pharnabazus, satrap of Phrygia on the 
Hellespont, to collect the tribute that had once been imposed 
on the Greek cities.. Though at enmity with one another, the 
two satraps joined, in 412 B.C., in seeking the intervention of 
Sparta, in order to wrest the Ionic cities of the seaboard from 
Athenian control. Sparta received heavy subsidies. But 
Tissaphernes was a double-dealer, and his real policy was not 
to render efficient help to Sparta in her war with Athens, 
but to weaken both. ‘He wished to see no Greek state grow 


§ 18.] CYRUS THE YOUNGER. XVll 


strong at the expense of the others, but to keep them all weak 
alike, distracted by internecine strife.” 

17. In 407 B.c. oceurred an event of great importance to 
the cause of Sparta. The younger Cyrus was sent down to 
the coast by his father as satrap of Lydia, Phrygia the 
Greater, and Cappadocia, and military commander of the 
forces that mustered at Castolus. He was at this time only 
17 years of age. Xenophon gives his commission in the 
Hellenica’: καὶ Κῦρος (sc. αὐτοῖς ἀπήντησεν), ἄρξων πάντων τῶν 
ἐπὶ θαλάττῃ καὶ συμπολεμήσων Λακεδαιμονίοις, ἐπιστολήν τε ἔφερε 
τοῖς κάτω πᾶσι τὸ βασίλειον σφράγισμα ἔχουσαν, ἐν ἣ ἐνῆν καὶ 
τάδε" Καταπέμπω Κῦρον κάρανον τῶν εἰς Καστωλὸν ἀθροιζομένων. 
Tissaphernes retained authority over the Greek cities of the 
sea-board, so far as they were under Persian control, and was 
made satrap of Caria. But after the accession of Artaxerxes, 
when trouble arose between Cyrus and Tissaphernes, the 
Greek cities of the coast revolted to Cyrus, with the single 
exception of Miletus. Cyrus and Tissaphernes were at this 
time at open war with one another ; there had long been real 
enmity between them. 

18. The policy adopted by Cyrus was in marked contrast 
to that of Tissaphernes, who had played fast and loose with 
the Spartans. The latter sent out Lysander as admiral in 
407 B.c.; and he at once proceeded to Ephesus, and there 
with seventy sail awaited the coming of the young prince. 
When Cyrus arrived at Sardis, Lysander went up to pay him 
a visit, with the ambassadors from Lacedaemon. He begged 
Cyrus to show zeal in the prosecution of the war against the 
Athenians, that ancient enemy by whom the Persian arms 
had been so signally defeated. The answer of the youthful 
ruler is memorable? : Κῦρος δὲ τόν τε πατέρα ἔφη ταῦτα ἐπεσταλ- 


1 Hellen. i. 4. 3. The persons whom Cyrus met as he came down to 
the coast were Greek ambassadors on their way to the Great King. 


2 Hellen. i. 5. 3. 


ΧΥΠ INTRODUCTION. [$ 18 


κέναι καὶ αὐτὸς οὐκ ἄλλ᾽ ἐγνωκέναι, ἀλλὰ πάντα ποιήσειν " ἔχων δὲ 
ἥκειν τάλαντα πενταπόσια- ἐὰν δὲ ταῦτα ἐκλίπῃ, τοῖς ἰδίοις χρή- 
wonton ἔφη ἃ ὁ πατὴρ αὐτῷ ἔδωκεν. ἐὰν δὲ al ταῦτα, καὶ τὸν 
θρόνον κατακόψειν ἐφ᾽ οὗ ἐκάθητο, ὄντα ἀργυροῦν καὶ χρυσοῦν. 
After dinner, when Cyrus drank to the health of the Spartan 
admiral and asked him what he could do to gratify him most 
Lysander replied, “Add an obol to the sailors’ pay.” a 
did this, and raised their pay to four obols a day paid all 
arrears, and gave them a month’s pay in μόνο The 
enthusiasm of the Spartan army was great, and the ΝΙΝ 
were correspondingly depressed. The latter sent ambassadors 
to Cyrus, but he refused to receive them, and repulsed with 
contempt the advice of Tissaphernes to render efficient aid 
neither to Athens nor to Sparta. The interest of ( bein: di 
the Lacedaemonian cause was strengthened by the personal 
regard which he conceived for Lysander. He felt a 
admiration for the character and abilities of this able sake 
mander, and bestowed upon him later a signal saiiihe of 
confidence. 
rapes. olneo ese rhepredabant 
rs ξ ‘ather would name him as his 
successor, to the exclusion of his older brother Artaxerxes 
who was of a timid disposition. His expectation was ‘net 
unreasonable. The law of succession to the Persian throne 
was at best uncertain. He was the favorite son of the iste, 
whom indeed he much resembled in disposition. He saa 
born after his father’s accession to the royal power. He bees 
the name of the great founder of the empire. So pa was 
his confidence that even before his father’s death he assumed 
royal prerogatives. It was a Persian custom that those who 
appeared in the presence of the king should thrust their 
hands into certain long sleeves which rendered the hands for 
the moment incapable of use. In 405 8. c., two first-cousins 
of Cyrus met him and neglected thus to conceal their hands, 


§ 20.] CYRUS THE YOUNGER. xix 


He had them put to death. The parents in grief and anger 
urged upon Darius the danger of overlooking such insolence, 
and on the plea of illness, which was indeed well founded, the 
king summoned Cyrus to his bedside. Darius then lay ill at 
Thamneria, in Media, near the territory of the Cadusians, 
against whom he had marched to put down a revolt. 

20. Cyrus realized the importance of obeying this summons 
at once, for his brother and rival was already with the king. 
Lysander happened to be with him when he received the 
message. ΤῸ him Cyrus turned over the treasure which he 
had in hand, and he assigned to him also his entire personal 
revenue from the province of which he was satrap, to be used in 
prosecution of the war. The timely aid thus rendered to the 
Lacedaemonians did much to hasten the end of the Peloponne- 
sian War. He then set out from Sardis with a body-guard 
of 300 Greeks under the command of Xenias the Parrhasian. 
This was the first time that a Persian had ever appeared at 
court with a Greek escort. They were so well remunerated 
that the rate of their pay became celebrated. Cyrus took 
with him also Tissaphernes, ostensibly as a friend, but in 
reality because he feared to leave him behind. He proved to 
be a dangerous companion. Darius died soon after the 
arrival of the younger son. The hopes of the ambitious 
young prince were destroyed at one blow. Notwithstanding 
the intercession of Parysatis, Darius had failed to name 
Cyrus as his successor to the throne, and Artaxerxes became 
king. 

Xenophon evidently discredits a story current in antiquity, 
but which nevertheless may well be true. It was an ancient 
Persian custom that the king on coming to the throne must 
go to Pasargadae (§ 6), and there, in the temple, with solemn 
ceremonial lay aside his robe and put on that of Cyrus the 
Great. The story relates that Tissaphernes appeared before 
the king in the temple, with a priest who charged Cyrus 


xX INTRODUCTION. [ὃ 20. 


with the intention of concealing himself there and falling 
upon his brother and slaying him in the midst of the solemn 
rites. According to another version of the story, Cyrus was 
actually discovered hidden in the temple. He was arrested, 
and was about to be put instantly to death when Parysatis 
threw her arms about him and saved his life. He returned 
in disgrace to his satrapy. The first book of the Anabasis 
gives an account of the ambitious young ruler from this time 
until his ill-fated death on the battle-field of Cunaxa. 


MILITARY MATTERS.’ 


21. The employment of Greek mercenaries, by either 
foreign or Greek states, was comparatively rare before the 
close of the Peloponnesian War. The first considerable body 
of Greek mercenary troops of which we have definite knowl- 
edge was that collected by Cyrus the Younger, the “Ten 
Thousand,” who made the memorable advance and retreat 
described in the Anabasis. At least five thousand of these, 
after their return in 399 B. c., were taken into the pay of the 
Lacedaemonian general Thibron, who was then about to 
prosecute in Asia Minor the war which Sparta had under- 
taken against Persia in behalf of the Greek cities of- the 
coast. They returned to Greece with Agesilaus in 394 8. c., 
took part in the stubborn fight at Coronea, and were then 
dismissed from his service. But they were veritable soldiers 
of fortune ; and they seem to have held together, and to have 
formed part of the mercenary troops that played so important 
a rdle in the Corinthian war. 


1 The military organization of the “Ten Thousand’’ was in some 
respects peculiar. The student is warned that the following is not an 
account of either the Athenian or Spartan military systems, but is 
intended to interpret in particular the first four books of the Anabasis. 


§ 23.] MILITARY MATTERS. χχὶ 


22. The Greek troops enlisted by Cyrus, with their com- 


hel dead ο 


manders, were the following : — 


Xenias, an Arcadian. . . . 4000 hoplites. 

Proxenus, a Boeotian , 1 6 500 gymnetes. 
Sophaenetus, an Arcadian . . 1000 

Socrates, an Achaean . . . 500 

Pasion, a Megarian . . . . 300 300 peltasts. 


Menon, a Thessalian. . . . 1000 500 ( 
800 « 


Clearchus, a Lacedaemonian . 1000 200 bowmen. 
40 horse. 


Sosis,a Syracusan .. . - 3800 
Agias,! an Arcadian . . . . 1000 
Chirisophus, a Lacedaemonian 700 


Deserters from the king. . . 400 


23. There were ten generals. Two of them deserted on 
the march inland, Xenias and Pasion ; five of the others were 
entrapped by Tissaphernes at the Great Zab (the Zapetas), 
Proxenus, Socrates, Menon, Clearchus, and Agias. In their 
places were chosen respectively Xenophon, an Athenian, 
Xanthicles, an Achaean, Philisius, an Achaean, Timasion, a 
Dardanian, and Cleanor, an Arcadian. The general most 
trusted by Cyrus was Clearchus, a soldier of great ability and 
experience. He was in command of the Greek troops in the 
battle at Cunaxa; and after the death of Cyrus he became 
by common consent their leader, until he was captured and 
slain. In the retreat from the Great Zab to Trapezus, the 
command was held by Chirisophus and Xenophon in common. 


1 The MSS. say “ Sophaenetus, the Arcadian” (i. 2. 9) ; but Sophae- 
netus had already joined Cyrus with 1000 hoplites at Sardis (1. 2. 3). 
The text is probably due to a copyist’s error, who should have written 
᾿Αγίας. Agias was one of the five generals entrapped and put to death 
by Tissaphernes after the battle at Cunaxa (ii. 5. 31 ff.), and it is incred- 
ible that Xenophon should not have named him, with his contingent, in 
the enumeration of the forces brought together by Cyrus. 


ΧΧΙΪ INTRODUCTION. [§ 23. 


The total number of hoplites was 11,700, of light armed 
troops 2,300, of cavalry 40. But definite losses occurred. 
Two companies of Menon’s hoplites, numbering 100 or 200 
men,’ were lost in the passage over the mountains into Cilicia. 
The 40 horse and 300 light armed troops, mostly Thracians, 
deserted to the king after the battle at Cunaxa. Nicarchus, 
a captain, with 20 men, went off between dark and daylight 
at the Great Zab. There were other heavier losses, whose 
numbers are not recorded, by disease, by the snow, and by 
the hands of the enemy. At the time when the Greeks 
forced their way into Colchis, when they were within two 
days march of the sea at Trapezus, they were able to muster 
for active duty only about 9,800 men, — 8000 hoplites and 
1800 light armed. 

24. With the exception of the 700 hoplites under Chiriso- 
phus, whom the Ephors at Sparta sent out to the aid of 
Cyrus, these troops were mercenaries. They were commis- 
sioned by no state. They were soldiers of fortune in search 
of adventure and a well-filled purse. The close of the Pelo- 
ponnesian War, by the extinction of the power of Athens, 
had thrown many men, inured to arms, out of employment. 
Many of them were men of ability. Cyrus already had 
Greeks in his employ, in the different garrisons of his 
satrapy ; and such was his reputation for generosity and 
upright dealing, that others enlisted in numbers when it was 
known that he was about to undertake a campaign against 
the Pisidians, which was his announced purpose. 

Xenophon says that the majority of them had left home 
not because their means were scanty, but attracted by the 
fame of Cyrus’s virtues ; that many of them brought followers 
with them, and that others had expended money on the 
expedition. The majority of them were Peloponnesians ; 
more than one-half were Arcadians and Achaeans. The 4000 


1 See i. 2. 26. 


§ 25.] MILITARY MATTERS. ΧΧΙ 


under Xenias had been enlisted by the commanders of the 
garrisons. The others, except those with Chirisophus, were 
brought together by generals whom Cyrus commissioned and 
to whom he furnished the necessary funds. These in turn 
appointed captains, who enlisted companies. The members 
of a company generally came from the same neighborhood, 
and were united by ties of race and previous friendship. 

95. These mercenaries brought with them their own arms, 
but received pay and means of daily support from Cyrus 
(v. μισθός). At first this amounted to a daric a month for each 
man, or 4 obols a day. Later Cyrus promised to raise the 
pay to a daric and a half a month, or 6 obols a day. A 
captain received twice and a general four times the amount 
paid to the common soldier. One half of this amount was 
the soldier’s pay for service ; the other half went for daily 
rations (σιτηρέσιον), since the army had no commisariat in the 
modern sense, but each soldier bought his own provisions 
(8. 26). With the rate of pay at a daric and a half, the pay- 
roll of the Greeks amounted, when the complement of mer- 
cenary troops was greatest, to over 20,000 darics a month 
(v. δαρεικός), at a time when the buying-power of money was 
much greater thar it is now. | 

Cyrus seems to have offered no bounties to induce men to 
enlist, but his promises after they joined him were alluring. 
When he reached the Euphrates and the real object of his 
expedition was made known, he promised each man five minas 
of silver (v. μνᾶ) when he got to Babylon, and he agreed to 
continue the pay of the Greeks until their return to Tonia. 
In a later time the Greek mercenary received pay only until 
the object of the expedition on which he had enlisted was 
accomplished. He got home as best he could. Just before 
the battle at Cunaxa, Cyrus’s promises were profuse, though 
doubtless sincere. He purposed, he said, to put his friends 
in places of power and profit, and only feared that his friends 


XXiv INTRODUCTION. [8 25. 


would be too few. He added specifically that in the event of 
victory he would give each of the Greeks a golden crown. 
The soldiers were elated. But his premature death in the 
battle that immediately followed destroyed all their hopes of 
gain. 

26. Rations were not supplied the soldier after the modern 
fashion. A market (ἀγορά) was set up in camp, where he 
bought his supplies. On the advance this market was estab- 
lished in the barbarian contingent of Cyrus’s troops, and was 
conducted by regular dealers, mainly Lydians, who accom- 
panied the army on the march. The supplies consisted 
chiefly of grain in the form of flour, and wine. Allowing a 
choenix (χοῖνιξ) of grain per diem to each man, the daily 
amount consumed by the Greek contingent was over 400 
bushels. These supplies were carried on wagons and beasts 
of burden, and were renewed by the dealers from the sur- 
rounding country by purchase on the days when the army 
rested from its march. Sometimes the ordinary supplies 
failed altogether, and the soldiers subsisted on meat.. This 
was accounted a hardship. Cyrus had with him a special 
train of 400 wagons loaded with flour and wine, in order 
that, if provisions failed, he might be able to supply the 
Greeks. The soldiers were, of course, free to make their 
purchases where they saw fit, and a market was sometimes 
furnished by the inhabitants of the country through which 
they were passing. Occasionally on the march inland they 
resorted to plunder. This happened once also just before 
they reached the Great Zab. 

The Greeks were in straits for supplies after the battle at 
Junaxa, and the first demand which they made on the king 
was for provisions. In the subsequent compact with Tissa- 
phernes, who was to lead them back to the coast, it was 
specially agreed that the Greeks should purchase their food 
from the market furnished by the barbarians ; only when the 


§ 27.] MILITARY MATTERS. XXV 


barbarians failed to supply a market were they to “take” 
what they needed from the surrounding country. From the 
Great Zab to the sea they lived exclusively by plundering. 
During this time each soldier received what he needed for 
daily support ; also other booty, especially captives, became 
common property (κοινόν). 

97. The men enlisted by Cyrus were naturally independent 
in disposition, and the maintenance of military discipline 
among them proved to be difficult. They demanded to be 
consulted or informed before measures were taken. Cyrus 
himself, their commander, whose control of his own troops 
was absolute, realized that he had no real authority over these 
Greeks, and used with great skill the only argument available 
for him. He appealed to their love of gain. They paid secant 
respect also to their own generals. More than 2000 of them 
at one time took their kits and baggage and transferred them- 
selves bodily to another leader. They expressed publicly and 
without fear their opinion of the conduct of their commanders, 
and remonstrated with them to their faces. 

Once when Clearchus, the Spartan, a severe disciplinarian, 
whose soul must have been tried by the spirit of independence 
among his men, attempted to force his division forward 
against their will, they pelted him and his baggage train with 
stones. Realizing his impotence, he then called them together 
in assembly, and argued the matter with them in two meetings. 
The government of these Greek troops was in fact democratic. 
The generals and captains constituted a deliberative council. 
In case of all important measures about which there might be 
difference of opinion, proposals were submitted to a general 
assembly of the soldiers, before whom arguments were offered 
in favor of the measures proposed and with whom rested their 
ratification or rejection. Anybody was free to express his 
views. The final vote was taken by show of hands. It seems 
probable that, in case of a vacancy, the soldiers chose their 


ΧΧΥΪ INTRODUCTION. [$ 27. 


own commanders, under the direction of their superior 
officers. 

28. But although independent in spirit, these men were 
not captious, and they realized, especially after the battle at 
Cunaxa, the gravity of their situation and the importance of 
discipline. They were certainly brave. They had too a 
saving sense of humor, and were in general humane to their 
foes and kindly to one another. At Tyriaeum Cyrus held a 
show review at the request of the Cilician queen. The Greeks 
had small opinion of the prowess of Cyrus’s barbarian contin- 
gent ; and’ in the review, when ordered to charge as in battle, 
they spontaneously made a mock attack on the barbarian 
camp. Cyrus’s native troops were panic-stricken, the queen 
fled precipitately in her carriage, and the market people 
abandoned their wares and took to their heels. The Greeks, 
we are told, dispersed to their own camp with a roar of 
laughter. A couple of good jests are recorded, made publicly 
by Chirisophus and Xenophon, at times when the situation 
was grave. 

In the battle at Cunaxa the Greeks did not indiscriminately 
slaughter the flying Persians, although these were completely 
at their mercy, but simply compelled them to throw away 
their arms. It is significant that Xenophon says nothing 
about the Persian losses in the battle. The slaughter of the 
Carduchian before the eyes of his fellow, and the mutilation 
of the bodies of the enemy slain at the ravine, were acts which 
seemed sternly demanded by the circumstances. When, on the 
capture of the stronghold of the Taochi, the women in their 
terror threw their children over the cliffs and leaped after 
them, and the men followed, Xenophon records that the sight 
was “fearful.” In the mountains of Carduchia, the Greeks 
set their newly acquired captives at liberty, although every 
addition to the numbers of the implacable foe by whom they 
were surrounded diminished their own chances of escape. 


§ 29.] MILITARY MATTERS. XXvil 


Fifteen years before this, Athenians had massacred in cold 
blood the whole adult male population of the island of Melos, 
Greeks slain by Greeks. 

In their treatment of one another, in times of danger, these 
soldiers of fortune proved themselves trusty comrades. They 
cared solicitously for the sick and wounded, and under the 
most trying circumstances refused to abandon them to the 
foe. Xenophon’s life was once saved by a brave Arcadian at 
the imminent risk of his own. And they were companionable. 
Gathered about the camp-fires above the banks of the Cen- 
trites, they recalled the hardships, just happily ended, of 
their incredible seven days’ march through the mountains of 
the Carduchians. In the Armenian highlands they quartered 
themselves in different villages, and gave themselves over to 
feasting and drinking for a week. Visitors had to take break- 
fast wherever they turned in, and to drink from the common 
bowl. And when at last they came in sight of the sea, on the 
summit of Mt. Theches, “they fell to embracing one another, 
generals and captains and all, and the tears rolled down their 
cheeks.” 

29. These men were controlled by a strong religious senti- 
ment, which made itself manifest both in their lives and in 
their formal observance of religious rites. A thoroughly 
depraved man like Menon stood out conspicuously among 
them by reason of his wickedness. They felt gratitude to 
the Gods when they had escaped a danger, and feared to 
commit an unworthy act through dread of their anger. They 
swore in the name of the Gods, and imprecated the divine 
wrath upon their foes. They had faith in omens, made vows, 
believed in dreams, poured libations, and offered prayers. 
The burial of their fallen comrades was a sacred duty, to be 
fulfilled at any cost. They offered frequent sacrifice to the 

Gods in order to learn their will and to propitiate their favor, 
and in gratitude for their protection. The rite was sometimes 


XXViil INTRODUCTION. [$ 29. 


especially impressive, as when at the Centrites the army was 
gathered on the southern bank of the river, with the enemy 
. in full view on the other side, and the seers slaughtered the 
victims over the stream. | 
A compact was sealed with a solemn oath, sworn in the 
name of the Gods, and with the slaughter of victims, or with 
oath and the giving and taking of right hands, or, as when 
they made compact with the Macronians, with oath and the 
exchange of spears. “The Gods will be our allies,” said 
Xenophon at the Great Zab, “for we have kept our oaths 
sworn in their name, the Gods, who are able in a moment to 
make the great small, and who at will can save the lowly with 
ease, even though they be in sore straits.” The language of 
Clearchus, in his conference with Tissaphernes, is still ‘ie 
remarkable. ‘Our oaths,” he said, “sworn in the name of 
the Gods, forbid us to be enemies. I envy not the man whose 
conscience tells him that he has disregarded these. <A war 
with the Gods! With what speed may one flee from them 
and escape? Into what darkness may he slink away ? Into 
what strong place may he withdraw himself? All things are 
in all ways subject to the Gods, and everywhere the Gods are 
the masters of all alike.” 

30. Cyrus’s Greek troops consisted of heavy armed infantry 
(v. ὁπλίτης), light-armed infantry (v. γυμνής), and cavalry 
(v. ἱππεύς). The light-armed troops were principally peltasts 
(v. πελταστής), but comprehended also bowmen (v. τοξότης) and 
javelin throwers (v. ἀκοντιστής). The last were unimportant 
and there were no slingers (v. σφενδονήτης) in the army until 
necessity compelled the Greeks, when on the retreat, to 
organize a company of 200 of them. The 40 cavalrymen 
originally brought by Clearchus deserted after the battle at 

1 Cyrus had triremes (Ὁ. τριήρης) also at his command, 25 of his own, 


and 35 sent to his aid by the Spartans. But these, in the nature of the 
case, were but of slight service in the expedition against his brother. 


§ 31.] MILITARY MATTERS. xxix 


Cunaxa, but a new troop of 50 horse was organized on the 
retreat at the same time with the company of 200 slingers. 

The heavy infantry was organized in battalions of varying 
strength (v. τάξις), consisting of the hoplites under the com- 
mand of a general, and in companies, with a normal strength 
of 100 (v. λόχος). The company consisted of two divisions of 
50 (uv. πεντηκοστύς), and four of 25 (v. évwporia), each larger 
division containing two smaller ones. The officers of the 
heavy infantry were the general (v. στρατηγός), lieutenant 
general (v. ὑποστρατηγός)» captain (v. λοχαγός), lieutenant 
(v. ὑπολοχαγός), commander of a half company (v. πεντηκοντήρ); 
and commander of a quarter company (¥. ἐνωμοτάρχης). It 
seems probable that there were but two enomotarchs, in com- 
mand of the second and fourth enomoties, the two pente- 
conters being at the head of the first and third enomoties. 
(See § 327.) 

Of the organization of the light-armed troops in the Anabasis 
little can be affirmed with certainty, and the body of horse 
was small. The commanders of the divisions of the former 
were apparently called taxiarchs (ὕ. ταξίαρχος), and the pel- 
tasts seem to have been organized in companies. In the 
battle at Cunaxa, the whole body of peltasts was drawn up 
together under the command of Episthenes. In the retreat 
to Trapezus, they were assigned to different generals, accord- 
ing to need. Both the bowmen and slingers were under their 
own commanders. ‘The commander of the ὅθ horse was 
Lycius, an Athenian. 

31. The heavy infantry (v. ὁπλίτης) carried six pieces of 
armor, —four for defence, helmet (κράνος), cuirass * (θώραξ, 


1 The view has been advanced that the hoplites in the army of Cyrus 
wore no cuirass, and i. 2. 16 has been cited in proof. But the argument 
is based on a probable misinterpretation of the passage (see the note), 
and is contradicted by the fact that elsewhere in the Anabasis cuirasses 
are specifically mentioned as worn. by Greeks. 


Xxx INTRODUCTION. [§ 31. 


σπολάς), Shield (ἀσπίς), and greaves (κνημίς), and two for 
offence, spear (δόρυ) and sword (ξίφος). 

Of the light infantry, the peltasts (v. πελταστής) carried for 
defence the target (πέλτη), and were armed with short spears 
for hurling and probably with a sword ; the javelin throwers 
(v. ἀκοντιστής) were armed only with javelins (v. ἀκόντιον) ; 
the bowmen (Ὁ. τοξότης) were generally without defensive 
armor, and carried only bow (τόξον), quiver (φαρέτρα), and 
arrows (v. τόξευμα) ; the slingers (v. σφενδονήτης) had only 
their slings and missiles (v. σφενδόνη). 

The cavalry (v. ἱππεύς) were protected by helmet, cuirass, 
and cavalry boots, but carried no shield. ‘Their offensive 
armor consisted of spear and sword. 

We have some slight evidence as to the effectiveness of the 
armor carried by the Greeks and the foes opposed to them. 
A Greek metal shield and metal or leathern cuirass could not 
withstand an arrow, but both might be pierced by it and the 
wearer might be killed. The javelin carried the least distance, 
the arrow and missile from the sling farther. The Rhodian 
slingers, with their lead bullets, shot twice as far as the 
Persian slingers, who used big stones. When the Greeks 
were about to cross the Centrites, 200 Greek feet in width, 
we are told that the light-armed troops of the enemy, posted 
on bluffs distant 300 or 400 feet from the other side of the 
river, were not able to reach them with bow and sling, that 
is, the arrows and slingstones of these barbarians failed to 
carry 500 or 600 feet. 

32. The tactical unit of the Greek heavy infantry in the 
Anabasis seems to have been the enomoty (évwporia), con- 
sisting of 24 men with their leader (ἐνωμοτάρχης). When 


1 The protection of the horse by frontlet and breastplate (προμετωτί- 
διον, προστερνίδιον), although specially commended by Xenophon in his 


Treatise on Horsemanship, seems to have been the practice not of the 
Greeks but of the orientals. 


MILITARY MATTERS. χχχὶ 


ranged in order of battle they were in rank and file, 
with a front of three and depth of eight. See Fig. 1. The 
frst man in the file had a post of honor, since he was the 
first to meet the enemy. The last man in the 


_ file (οὐραγός) was also in an important position, 


since he became the leader of the file when 

it faced about. Since the hoplite was heavily 

armed, he needed space to move in, both in 

front and at the side. We have no information 

as to the space allowed in classical times ; but 

later military writers state that in march 

order the ranks and files were six Greek feet 

(υ. πούς) apart, and that in order of battle the MeN 
files were three and the ranks two Greek feet i, order ot Battle. 
apart.? 

Four enomoties constituted the company of 96 men. The 
four enomotarchs, or the two penteconters and two enomo- 
tarchs (§ 30%), completed the full number of 100 men 
(λόχος). When the four enomoties were ranged side by i 


δ 


O7 OF OF OF OF OF OF ΟἿ 
O-7 OF OF OF OF OF OF OF 
ΟἹ OF OF OF OF C7 Οἡ O77 


Fig, 2.— Company (four Enomoties) in Order of Battle. 


with a depth of eight, the company was in order of battle. 
Companies so ranged constituted the line of battle (φάλαγξ). 
See Fig. 2. Each company then consisted of 12 files and 


The phalanx has the epithet πυκνή in ii. 3. 3. 


ΧΧΧΙΪ INTRODUCTION. 


8 ranks.1. The officers of the company (ὃ 307), marching 
on foot, probably had their places in front of their respective 
divisions, but exact information on this point is lacking. The 
general, also, was probably in front of his division. We 
know that he was mounted. The phalanx was divided into 
the right wing, the centre, and the left wing. The right wing 
was the post of danger, and therefore of honor, since the right 
side of those in the right wing was exposed (the shield being 
carried on the left arm) if the enemy outflanked. 
33. Evolutions without individual change of place were 
made to the right, ἐπὶ δόρυ (the spear being carried in the right 
hand), or to the left, ἐπ᾿ ἀσπίδα (the 
ha shield being carried on the left arm), 
either with the quarter turn, ‘right 
face,’ ‘left face,’ or with the half turn, 
‘right about face,’ ‘left about face.’ 
Evolutions of entire divisions, such 


Loy 407 


e.g. as the company, were made with- 
out change of front, also to the right 
and left, by wheeling, the leader of the 
right or left file maintaining his place 
and serving as the pivot on which the 


entire body turned. 

To effect a complete change of front 
in a body of troops in line, such as the 
phalanx, so that it faced in the op- 
posite direction, the troops counter- 


to 40 40 49 40 40 407407407 407407 


EEE LL be doz bop δου 207 207 27 δον 


Lo 40 40 40 40 40 40 407 407407 407407407407 407 


Ὁ New Front. marched. The counter-march was 


Fig. 3.—Enomoty executing executed by the Lacedaemonians as 
mite follows (Fig. 3). The troops made 


1 The depth of the phalanx was usually, but not always, 8 men. When 
Cyrus exhibited his troops to Queen Epyaxa at Tyriaeum, the Greek 
phalanx was drawn up four deep (i. 2. 15), in order to make the greater 
show. The 10,600 hoplites that he had with him at this time, drawn up 
four deep (106 companies each with a front of 24), made a line nearly a 
mile and a half long. 


§ 34.] MILITARY MATTERS. XXXI1ll 


the half turn, ‘left about face.’ The οὐραγοί then remained 
where they were. Each file leader next passed to the right 
of his file to the new front. The second, third, etc. ranks 
followed in order and placed themselves behind the front 
rank, until finally the seventh rank had taken position behind 
the sixth and in front of the οὐραγοί, who were now in their 
proper place in the rear.? 

34. In contrast with the order of 
battle, or phalanx (8 32%), was the order 
of march, in column (κατὰ κέρας), with 
narrow front and great depth, in which 
the separate parts of the force (enomoty, 
company, taxis) followed one another. 
An entire force might thus march in 


single, double, triple file, eéc., as cireum- 
stances rendered advisable. 

A body of troops marching three 
abreast, in column, formed in line of 
battle, if the enemy appeared in the 
front, as follows (Fig. 4). The first eno- _ i 
moty of 24 men, 3 abreast and 8 deep, a Ma er peat 
halted, and the other enomoties marched Ο"")} reformed in Line of 
in order to the left (παρ᾽ ἀσπίδα) into wii 
position, the second beside the first, the third beside the 
second, ete. 

A body of troops in battle line formed in column for 
marching, three abreast, if the march was to be straight for- 
ward and if the change of formation began at the right, as 
follows (Fig. 5). The first enomoty on the right marched 
directly forward, the second enotomy took position behind it, 
and the others followed in order. The right wing then led 


1 Cf. i. 10. 6, where the Greeks used the counter-march (στραφέντες) 
in changing front to meet the king, who was advancing with the apparent 
intention of attacking them in the rear. 


XXXIV INTRODUCTION. [$ 34. 


the column. The change of formation might begin at the 
left, the left wing leading the column. 

Shortly before the second charge of the Greeks at the battle 
at Cunaxa, the Greeks were in battle-line, at right angles to 
the Euphrates, facing upstream. They feared that the army 
of the king, who was advancing against them with his right 
wing over against their right wing (§ 45%), would take them 
7] in the right flank and enfold them on 
both sides. They therefore deliberated 
whether they should not retire their 
$| right wing and bring their whole line 
|_| into position parallel with the river, 
which would then be a defence in their 
rear. This change, by which the new 
line would have been put at right angles 
to the original line, would probably have 
been executed? as follows (Fig. 6). The 
Α τῇ first company on the left of the line 

(No. 10) would have advanced a distance 

Fig. 5. —Two Companies equal to nearly one half of the length of 
(eight Enomoties) in Line of the line, and quarter wheeled to the 
Battle(I.)reformedinColumn, , 
the right wing leading (η.ὕ. | Tight; the second company (No. 9) would 

have fallen in behind, halted 36 feet (the 
length of front of a company) from the first company, and 
also quarter wheeled to the right ; the manceuvre would have 
been made by each of the eight remaining companies in order, 
so that all would have stood in a continuous line. The line 
as now formed would have faced directly away from the river 
and rested upon it.? 


2 


8/7/6)/5 |} 443) 2),1 


1 The manceuvre was not in fact executed, although the contrary view 
is held by many commentators. See note on § 457. 


2 Xenophon says in the passage under consideration, καὶ ἐδόκει αὐτοῖς 
ἀναπτύσσειν τὸ κέρας καὶ ποιήσασθαι ὄπισθεν τὸν ποταμόν (i. 10.9). The word 
ἀναπτύσσειν, Which means 1. unfold, 2. fold back, has here been variously 


MILITARY MATTERS. 


Fig. 6. —Ten Companies executing the contemplated 
manceuvre at the Euphrates. 


τ πὸ ποι πε - 5 


interpreted. Three principal explanations of the change of position 
contemplated by the Greeks deserve consideration. First, as explained 
above, they planned to retire (‘fold back’) their exposed right wing, and 
to put the river, as a defence, behind their entire force. Secondly, 
it is thought that their purpose was to deploy or extend (‘open out’) 
their right wing. This deployment of the right wing would have made 
the subsequent change of position more difficult, and we fail to see its 
object if the whole force was ultimately to be brought into position 
parallel to the river. Thirdly, the plan of the Greeks is thought to have 
been to wheel their right wing toward the rear, so that it should be at an 
angle of not more than ninety degrees to its original position, and so that 
it would, in a sense, have had the river behind it, the centre and left 
wing remaining as before. The Greeks would thus have presented to the 
enemy a front and a defensive flank. The position would, in fact, have 
been solely a defensive one, in which it would have been impossible for 
the Greeks to charge ; the troops posted at the angle, moreover, would 
have been peculiarly exposed in case of the enemy’s attack. 


ΧΧΧΥΪ INTRODUCTION. [8 35. 


35. The common order of march was in column (§ 34°), the 
right wing leading. The column commonly marched two 
abreast,! and was very long. Ten thousand men marching 
thus, with six feet of space between each pair (§ 32"), would 
form a line nearly six miles long. Each general was at the 
head of his own division on horseback. The light-armed 
troops went before and on each side, to make observation of 
the country and as a protection against surprises, or were 
placed wherever the special circumstances demanded. The 
discipline was not rigid, and many soldiers left the ranks. 
Nor were those in the ranks fully armed, since much of the 
armor was carried on wagons and by the beasts of burden. 


If the enemy appeared, the column was formed into line of 
battle (34%). This took time, and if the enemy’s appearance 
was unexpected, it was often attended with great confusion.’ 
Occasionally the march was made in line of battle, some- 
times even for an entire day; but this was unusual, and hap- 
pened only when an attack of the enemy was imminent or 


the situation was otherwise full of danger. The discipline 
was not rigid even in this case, and the men sometimes left 
the ranks. If indications of the presence of the enemy 
appeared, scouts were sent out. 

36. A peculiar formation for battle, to which the Greeks 
resorted on the retreat, was the λόχοι ὄρθιοι or companies in 
column (ὄρθιος). This formation was especially serviceable 
in attacking a height. The enemy was in front and above, 
and the attacking force was in line. (See Fig. 7.) Each com- 


1 The enomoties were here ranged in order one behind the other. In 
single file the enomoty would be 24 men deep, in double file 12, in triple 
file 8, etc. The formation of the enomoty in any desired order of 
arrangement was easy, since the number of men was small. If the order 
of march was two abreast, the enomoty would have to be re-formed in 3 
files and 8 ranks before the evolution described in ὃ 34%. 


2 This happened before the battle at Cunaxa. Cf. i. 8. 2-4, 14. 


§ 36.] MILITARY MATTERS. xXxxvii 


pany was brought into column by itself by deploying the 
second, third, and fourth enomoties in order behind the first. 
Each company thus formed had a front of 3 and a depth of 
32, or, if the front was doubled, a front of 6 and a depth of 16. 


Il " Il II 
13 9 5 1 


14 10 


15 il 


16 12 8 
16| 15/14/13 }12)11}10)}9)8)7)/6),5)/4;);3,2)2 


Fig. 7.— Four Companies (sixteen Enomoties) in Line (1.) 

re-formed in Company Columns (Il.). 
The company thus formed a compact body, with greater depth 
than front (therefore called ὄρθιος). It was in line with the 
companies on each side of it, but separated from them by a 
considerable interval of space. These intervals between com- 
panies could be increased by extending the line of companies 
to the right and left. The superiority of this formation to 
the ordinary phalanx in certain situations was found to be 
very great.? 

It was once used by the Greeks on the retreat in crossing a 
river, when the cavalry οὗ. the enemy was in force on the 
opposite bank and their infantry was on higher ground in the 
rear of the cavalry. On this occasion the rear guard, who 
had formed in λόχοι ὄρθιοι, were compelled to re-form in line 
of battle to repel the attack of an enemy in the rear. This 
was done by reversing the evolution just described. The 
companies in column, with space between them, halted facing 
the enemy. ‘The second, third, and fourth enomoties were 
then moved to the left {παρ᾽ ἀσπίδα) into position by the side 
of the first (cf. § 34%). 


1 Xenophon himself gives a graphic enumeration of these advantages _ 
in iv. 8. 10-13. 


XXXViil INTRODUCTION. [§ 87. 


37. When five of their generals were entrapped at the 
Great Zab by the treachery of Tissaphernes, the Greeks 
realized that their retreat would have to be made under a 
running fire. They therefore adopted, on the advice of 
Xenophon, the hollow square (πλαίσιον) as their order of 

4 march. By means of 
this formation, they pre- 
sented a front to the 
enemy on all sides.’ See 
Fig. 8. 

The square was formed 
of the hoplite forces. If 
we assume that the hop- 
lites available at this 
time for this service 
numbered 10,000 (§ 23) 
and that they were as- 
signed in equal numbers 
to each of the four sides 
of the square, each divi- 
sion contained 25 com- 

co panies of 100 men. Τῇ 

Fig. 8.— The Hollow Square. the troops were ranged 

|. στόμα. 2. πλευρά. 83. οὐρά. 8 deep, the length of 

ligarse sna hapne lao each division, with 300 
ggage Train. 

men in the line, was a 

trifle less than 900 Greek -feet, if we allow (8 32%) 3 feet to 

each man. We have incidental confirmation that the square 

was very large. Just before the Greeks reached the confines 

of Carduchia, the barbarians seized a height on their right 

commanding the pass through which lay their way. But the 

peak of the mountain, from which was an approach to the 

height held by the barbarians, was not yet occupied, and the 


SS aS ἢ se ἃ ᾿-- Ἢ 
. μα κ κν αὶ Κ Ὁ ΚΝ 


et ee fe, ey et ee ee 


1 See iii. 2. 36 and 37. 


§ 87.] MILITARY MATTERS. ΧΧΧΙΧ 


Greeks determined to seize it. Quick action was necessary, 
in order to anticipate the enemy ; and Xenophon, who had 
come to the front of the square to consult with Chirisophus, 
asked the latter to send troops with him from the van, ‘since 
it was a long way to fetch men from the rear.’ * 

The front (στόμα) was drawn up in the order of the phalanx, 
with a front of 300 and a depth of 8. The rear (οὐρά) was 
similarly arranged, but with the order of ranks reversed, the 
file leaders (δ 321) and the officers being on the outside and 
the οὐραγοί on the inside. Onthe march, therefore, the οὐραγοί 
led the οὐρά ; but if an attack was made from the rear, the 
whole body of the rear turned ‘right about face’ to the 
enemy. The flanks (πλευρά) were also arranged with the first 
rank and the officers on the outside and the οὐραγοί on the 
inside. On the march, each flank formed a column, with a 
front of 8 and a depth of 300. In case of attack on either 
side, they faced the enemy by making the quarter-turn (‘right 
face,’ ‘left face’) to the right or left, thus presenting the 
regular phalanx to the enemy. Chirisophus was put in com- 
mand of the base of the square, and Xenophon and Timasion 
of the rear, and the two oldest of the other generals had 
charge of the two flanks. 

The peltasts were probably arranged in four divisions. 
These supported the four divisions of the hoplites, and had 
their places either inside or outside of the square as circum- 
stances demanded. ὙΠῸ baggage, which had been reduced to 
the smallest possible amount (§ 391), and the camp followers 
were inside the square, with the heaviest part of the train 
probably so arranged that it could follow the road over which 
the square was travelling. The enemy attacked the square 
at long range with” mounted bowmen, bowmen on foot, and 
slingers. In order to repel these more effectually, the Greeks 
organized a body of 200 slingers and a troop of 50 horse. 


1 See iii. 4. 37-43. 


xl INTRODUCTION. [ 37. 


The Greek slingers, skirmishing at long range, proved to be 
superior to those of the Persians. The bowmen also were of 
service, but the range was too great for the javelin throwers 
and peltasts. When, however, the Greeks charged the enemy, 
as was occasionally necessary, the attacking force consisted of 
hoplites, peltasts, and (after its organization) the cavalry. 


When skirmishing, the slingers and bowmen were posted, 


outside the square. 

38. This order of march was in the main effective, but it 
was found to have its disadvantages with an enemy in the 
rear. When the Greeks came to a bridge or a ford, and the 
wings pressed in, there was great confusion. Everybody was 
in a hurry to get on. Again, when the obstruction was passed 
and the wings separated, a vacant space was left at the rear 
between the flanks, where the rear division reformed with 
difficulty. The men lost confidence, and the whole force was 
in danger. 

To remedy this evil, the generals organized six special com- 
panies of 100 men,! each under command of a captain, pente- 
conters (§ 307), and enomotarchs. When on the march the 
flanks closed in, these six companies fell to the rear, so as to 
free the wings. When the flanks opened again, they filled up 
the gap. If the gap was narrow, they filled it by companies, 
that is with the companies in column, probably with a front 
of 3 and a depth of 32, so that the six companies had a front 
of 18; if broader, by fifties, each company having a front of 
6 and a depth of 16 ; if still broader, by enomoties, each com- 
pany being ranged in ordinary line of battle with a front of 
12 and a depth of 8. 

These companies were in fact a picked body of 600 men, 
intended not only to relieve the pressure caused by the closing 
in of the wings, but also to form an efficient guard at the rear 
(doubtless assisted by the skirmishers, that is, the slingers 


1 See iii. 4. 19-28. 


§ 39.] MILITARY MATTERS. ΧΙ 


and bowmen), while the main force defiled in order through 
the narrow pass. ‘The wings could march at the same time, 
with narrow masses of the baggage-train between them, over 
an ordinary bridge ; but the van and rear were obliged to 
defile. Xenophon says that the presence of the six companies 
at the rear prevented confusion, and that, if any part of the 
force needed help, they came to its assistance. Three hundred 
of them were subsequently stationed in the van. 

The use of the hollow square was abandoned when the 
Greeks got out of Assyria and began their seven days’ march 
through the mountains of the Carduchians. Tissaphernes 
and Ariaeus here abandoned the pursuit, giving the Greeks up 
as lost, and returned to Asia Minor. Through the mountains 
the Greeks were forced to march in column (8 35°), the passes 
being narrow. Through the plain of Armenia and during 
their subsequent course to the sea, they marched either 
in column or in line of battle (§ 357) as circumstances 
demanded. 

39. The baggage-train of the Ten Thousand was of formi- 
dable dimensions. Wagons and sumpters carried the tents 
and much personal property of the soldiers (σκεύη), including 
often even their arms. At the Great Zab the Greeks burnt 
their tents and wagons and all superfluous baggage; but even 
then the train was heavy, including the necessary equipment 
of 10,000 or 12,000 men (§ 23%), the beasts of burden used for 
its transport, booty in cattle and captives, women and boys, 
the sick and wounded, and those needed to take charge of all 
this. The non-combatants (ὄχλος) were thus a numerous 
body. The day after the Greeks entered the fastnesses of 
the Carduchians, they determined to take only the best of the 
sumpters and to let all the recently captured slaves go free. 
The reason for this was that “with so many mouths to feed, 
twice the amount of provisions had to be provided and 
carried ” (iv. 1, 13). 


ΧΙ INTRODUCTION. [§ 39. 


On the march inland to Cunaxa, each general seems to have 
had the baggage of his division under his own charge. The 
wagons that transported the provisions during this time were 
a part of the baggage-train of Cyrus’s barbarian contingent 
(§ 26"). During the battle at Cunaxa the baggage-train and 
camp-followers were all gathered in the camp, which was 
hastily pitched not far from the rear of the phalanx. On the 
march to join forces with Ariaeus, on the second night after 
the battle, the baggage-train was placed on the left, between 
the troops and the Euphrates. On the retreat to the Black 
Sea, at first the baggage and non-combatants were put inside 
the hollow square (8 579) ; when the square was abandoned, 
they were placed between the van and rear of the force. The 
train was here at all times an impediment to rapid marching, 
and frequently compelled the Greeks to take the longer way. 

40. The march began betimes in the morning. The tents 
were struck, the baggage and tents were packed and put on 
the wagons and sumpters, the men fell in, and the army got 
under way. It is not possible to determine whether, on 
the advance to Cunaxa, the generals with their respective 
divisions led the column in turn on successive days ; on the 
retreat from the Great Zab, Chirisophus led the van and 
Xenophon commanded the rear. There was, however, daily 
change in the company that led the column, and the captain 
in command was accounted to have a position of special honor 
and responsibility. Towards the end of the forenoon a halt 
was called, and breakfast (ἄριστον) was taken. After break- 
fast the march was resumed. There were occasional marches 
by night, and then the army got under way with special care. 
After dinner, at the first signal of the trumpet, the men 
packed up ; at the second signal, the baggage was put on the 
beasts of burden ; at the third, the march began. 

When the day’s march was ended, the army halted and 
encamped. The different divisions of the Greek force 


§ 41.] MILITARY MATTERS. xiii 


encamped separately, except in times of danger, and even 
when they were all in one camp each division had its own 
place. On the march to Cunaxa the barbarian troops of 
Cyrus encamped apart from the Greeks. When the halt was 
made, the cattle were unyoked, the baggage unpacked, and 
the tents pitched. The latter were made of hides stretched 
on a wooden framework. When the Greeks had burnt their 
tents at the Great Zab, they encamped in villages wherever 
this was possible. The Anabasis gives us no information in 
regard to the form of the camp or in regard to its inner 
arrangement, but it was not fortified. There was a place in 
the camp where the arms were stacked, but its precise situa- 
tion cannot be determined. 

After the tents had been pitched and the arms had been 
stacked, fuel and fodder were gathered, fircs were built, and 
dinner was prepared. This was the chief meal of the day. 
Sentinels, who had been given the pass-word, were posted, 
and the men turned in. Whether the night was divided into 
three or four watches is uncertain. The last watch began at 
early dawn. A panic in camp at night was a serious matter. 
Announcements were made by a herald, or the word was 
passed along. a i 

41. A day’s march, or ‘stage’ (σταθμός), varied in length 
according to circumstances. Xenophon enumerates 84 stages, 
with a total distance of 517 parasangs, between Sardis and 
the vicinity of Cunaxa. This makes the average length of 
the day’s march a little more than six parasangs. The longest 
stages were 10 parasangs. If the parasang (παρασάγγης) 18 
reckoned as equal to 30 stadia and the stadium (στάδιον) at 
582.5 English feet, the parasang was equal to about 3.3 
ordinary English miles. The average day’s march, on this 
calculation, would be about 20 miles. And this probably 
represents about what Xenophon thought to be a fair day’s 
march. 


xliv INTRODUCTION. [§ 41. 


But it is evident from various considerations, that Xeno- 
phon did not mean by ‘parasang’ an exact and invariable 
distance. In the first place he had no means, except just at 
the first, of measuring accurately the day’s march. Again, 
the daily rate of speed, as he reports it, was greater by nearly 
one half, when the Greeks were travelling, in the month of 
January, through the territory of the Chalybes,—who were the 
bravest people that they met, were heavily armed, fought 
with them hand to hand, and kept up the fight for seven 
days, —than between Celaenae and Peltae in the month of 
April, where there was no hindrance. Xenophon probably 
measures parasangs by time rather than by distance, as Grote 
first suggested... He had opportunity in the early marches, 
where the army after leaving Sardis travelled at first over a 
measured road, to observe how long it took them to march 
one, two, or three parasangs, and in the subsequent marches 
he called that length of time one, two, or three parasangs. A 
certain number of hours of marching meant to him a certain 
number of parasangs. 

42. Although Cyrus was anxious to join issue with his 
brother in battle, and made his march inland to Cunaxa as 
rapidly as possible, nevertheless between Sardis and Cunaxa 
he spent 96 days in camp. His longest halt, 30 days, was at 
Celaenae, where he waited for reinforcements. He was 
detained 20 days at Tarsus by the refusal of his Greek troops 
to advance. His other halts lasted from 3 to 7 days, and 
were made mainly to rest his troops ; although they were 
utilized for other purposes, such as provisioning, review, 
enumeration of the troops, and celebration of festivals and 
games. Some of the marches without days of rest were long. 
That between Myriandus and Thapsacus lasted 12 days, but 
the troops were in camp 7 days before it began and 5 days 
after it was finished. Twice the force marched 9 days con- 


1 History of Greece, vol. VIII. p. 316, note 3 (chap. Lx1x). 


§ 43.] MILITARY MATTERS. xlv 


tinuously. Just before the battle at Cunaxa they were on 
the march 19 days, 13 through the desert and 6 in Babylonia, 
with a review held at midnight on the third night before the 
battle. 

But the hardships of the march inland to Cunaxa were 
slight compared with those of the retreat to Trapezus. The 
Greeks spent 132 days in getting from the villages near 
Babylon, where they began their march northward under the 
guidance of Tissaphernes, to the Black Sea at Trapezus. 
Only 24 of these were spent in camp; and the halt was forced 
in every instance by lack of supplies, by exhaustion, by sick- 
ness, or by other causes. During the month of November 
they marched 22 days without a day of rest in camp, including 
7 days of continuous fighting in the mountains of the Cardu- 
chians. In December and January they were 31 days contin- 
uously on the march. 

We know with certainty from the narrative of Xenophon 
that the march from Sardis to the battle-field took 182 days. 
ΠῚ September 3, 401 B.c., is accepted as the date of the 
battle, the march from Sardis began on March 6, 401 8. σ. 
We know with less certainty, since the narrative is not always 
clear, that the Greeks were 158 days in reaching Trapezus, 
reckoning from the day after the battle, and including the 26 
days which elapsed before they began their march northward. 
This calculation brings them to Trapezus on February 8, 
400 8. ο. 

43. The Greeks fought one great battle in this memorable 
campaign, and many smaller ones. During the retreat they 
showed great resource in meeting peculiar conditions. Xeno- 
phon’s invention, for example, of the ὄρθιοι λόχοι (8 36) was 
admirably adapted for storming a height, and it seems sin- 
gular that it should not have been adopted by commanders in 
later times. Their almost total lack of cavalry forced the 
Greeks to devise substitutes, such, for example, as the 600 


xlvi INTRODUCTION. [8 43. 


picked hoplites who protected their hollow square (8 387). 
Their light-armed troops were employed with effect in various 
ways. In the battle at Cunaxa they were placed in a body at 
the right of the phalanx, the barbarian troops of Cyrus being 
stationed at the left. When the Greeks were about to storm 
the position of the Colchians and had reformed the phalanx 
in company columns, the peltasts to the number of 1800 were 
posted in three divisions at the right and left and centre. 
But they depended chiefly on their heavy infantry, and the 
normal order for battle was the phalanx. 

In battle the phalanx presented a solid array of heavily 
armed men, eight ranks deep, divided into the right and left 
wings and centre (§ 327). When the army was already in 
line, sacrifice was offered and the omens were taken. The 
men went into the fight unwillingly if the auspices were not 
favorable. Sometimes a simple prayer was offered. The 
commander meanwhile might address his men, seeking to 
rouse their courage. The watch-word (σύνθημα), the means 
by which friend was to be distinguished from foe in the 
battle, was given out and passed down the ranks and returned 
again. In the battle at Cunaxa the watch-word was Ζεὺς 
Σωτὴρ καὶ Νίκη. The paean was raised, all the men joining in 
it, and, under its inspiring strains, the advance began in even 
line. At the sound of the trumpet, with shields forward and 
spears in rest, the men raised the battle-cry, the pace quick- 
ened to a run, and the phalanx charged. If the enemy gave 
way, the victors pursued, preserving their line. The recall 
was sounded with the trumpet. Sacrifice was offered to the 
Gods in thanksgiving and a trophy (τρόπαιον) was erected. 

44. The battle at Cunaxa was fought on the left bank of 
the Euphrates. In their first position the forces of Cyrus 
were drawn up at right angles to the river, facing down 
stream. The Greek phalanx had a front of about three 
quarters of a mile in length. Clearchus had the right wing 


MILITARY MATTERS. 


MLITTTIIT TTI iti 
8 


Ι. - First position of Cyrus facing down stream. 
11. — First position of King facing up stream. 
111. — Second position of King facing down stream. 


IV. — Second position of Greek Troops facing up stream. 


ΚΝ 


. Paphlagonian Cavalry. 7. Position of King. 
. Greek light-armed Troops. 8. Troops of Tissaphernes. 
. Greek Phalanx. 9. Troops of Gobryas. 


. Position of Cyrus. 11. Hill. 


1 
2 
3 
4. Native Troops of Cyrus. 10. Troops of Arbaces. 
5 
6. Cyreian Camp. 12. Cunaxa. 


The dotted lines indicate the scythe-bearing chariots, posted in front of the 
Persian forces in both armies. 


xlvili INTRODUCTION. [§ 44. 


of the phalanx. Menon commanded the left wing ; the other 
generals were posted at the centre. On the right of the 
phalanx the Greek light-armed troops were posted. On their 
right and next to the river was Cyrus’s Paphlagonian cavalry. 
On the left of the phalanx were the barbarian troops of Cyrus, 
under his own command, and probably arranged like the 
forces of the king, in solid squares. This diminished greatly 
the length of their front. There were 100,000 of these. 
Cyrus with his body guard of 600 horse, was probably at the 
centre. In front of these troops were drawn up his twenty 
scythe-bearing chariots. 

Xenophon records that the king brought 900,000 men and 
150 chariots into the battle, in three divisions, under the 
command of Tissaphernes (who was at the left), Gobryas, and 
Arbaces. The king’s troops were drawn up in solid squares, 
race by race. He himself was posted at their centre, with a 
guard of 6000 horse under the command of Artagerses. These 
forces were so vast that, notwithstanding their arrangement 


in solid squares, the king himself at the centre was beyond 
the left wing of Cyrus, and practically out of the battle. 
And yet the front of the entire force of Cyrus must have 
measured more than a mile, at the lowest calculation.’ 

45. When the army of the king had advanced so far that 
it was only three or four stades (two fifths of a mile) from 
the army of Cyrus, the Greeks also began to move forward. 


1 We cannot determine the exact length of the line because we do not 
know how the 2300 or 2500 light-armed troops of Cyrus were drawn up. 
From the fact recorded by Xenophon (i. 10. 7), that when Tissaphernes 
charged through them with his horse they made a gap and let him pass, 
they would seem to have been in line. The length of the line of the 
hoplites can be determined with approximate accuracy. This line was 
very thin (8 men deep), as contrasted with the solid squares of the king’s 
forces (which must have had an average depth of some 185 men), and so 
faced at least one third of the king’s army. ‘These last were the troops 
that took to flight in the first charge, some 300,000 men. 


§ 45.] MILITARY MATTERS. xlix 


Their line was long and thin, and a part of it bellied out in 
front. The part left behind quickened its pace to a run. 
All then charged double quick, and the left of the barbarians 
under the command of Tissaphernes, which was opposed to 
them, took to flight. Cyrus did not join in the pursuit, but 
waited to see what the king would do. The latter, finding 
that the enemy did not engage him, began to wheel his centre 
and right wing to the left. Cyrus, fearing that he would 
thus get in the rear of the Greeks, charged him, and was 
slain in the hand to hand engagement that followed. The 
king advanced, the troops of Ariaeus flying before him, as far 
as the Cyrelan camp. 

The king, with his centre and right wing, was now plunder- 
ing the camp, and the Greek heavy and light-armed infantry 
had pursued the king’s left wing far down the river. The 
opposing forces were thus at this time over three miles apart. 
The king now first learned that his left had been put to rout, 
and at once massed his troops in line and advanced in the 
direction of the Greeks. The Greeks thereupon changed 
front by counter-marching (8 33°), so that the troops under 
Clearchus now constituted the left wing of their phalanx. 
The king, however, did not advance against the Greeks 
straight down the river from the Cyreian camp, as at first he 
seemed to intend to do, but took the course by which he had 
passed earlier in the day outside their right (original left) 
wing. This carried him away from the river, and brought 
his right wing over against the right wing of the Greeks. 
The Greeks feared that if he advanced in this manner he 
would take them in the right flank, enfold them on both sides, 
and cut them down ; and they made up their minds that they 
must retire the wing that was specially exposed and bring 
their whole line into position parallel with the river, which 
would be a defénse in their rear. But they mistook the king’s 
real intention, and the contemplated change of position was 


INTRODUCTION. [8 45. 


never executed.! While they were deliberating, the king, 


doubtless elated by the death of Cyrus, of which he supposed 
the Greeks had been informed, and confident in his numbers, 
so moved his line toward the Euphrates as he advanced that 
his right wing, when he finally came into position, rested on 
the river. The two armies were now again face to face, at 
ht angles to the Euphrates, as in their first encounter, but 


rig 
with positions relatively reversed. The Greeks charged, put 


the barbarians again to flight, and remained the masters of 


the field. It was now nearly sunset. 


1 Observe the language of the historian in i. 10.10. ἐν ᾧ δὲ ταῦτα 
liberating about this. For the manner in 


ἐβουλεύοντο, while they were de 
ld probably have been executed, 


which the contemplated manoeuvre wou 
see ὃ 344, 


REMARKS 


ON 


iain IV. 1. 88. 20-28 anp 2. §§ 1-22 (pp. 118-123). 


Pie pe edie approaching a hill, which had a steep road, aabb 
aes nea ΠΤ 70 This was the only road visible to the 
vid CoE sy avepa ὁδός (p. 119, 6; p. 121,5 and 15). This 
at the top of the hill (τὸ 

ὁμαλόν, p. 122, 29) through 

a defile or outlet, bb, call- 

ed ἡ ἔκβασις, which was 

seen to be guarded by the 

enemy posted at the end 

of a narrow path, eee, at 

the point f (p. 121, 5; οὗ 

p. 118, 24). The guide 

told the generals of a 

circuitous road, cece, by 

which the summit could 

be reached without pass- 

ing through the ἔκβασις 

(p. 119,12). The volun- 

teers set out late in the 

afternoon by this road, 

intending to capture a 

height (8) at a critical 

point on the pass (p. 119, 

14), and at daybreak to 

attack the enemy at ἢ (p. 120 

(p. 120, 6), while the rest pail sid casts ke ae μὰ pater 


of th ἡ! 
Θ army should co- tof. 4: position seized by the volunteers at night. 


operate with them from ἐς first hill captured by Xenophon (p. 121, 29). 
below. After the depart- εἰ; second hill captured by Xen. (ρ. 129, 6). 3: the 
kpov of Ρ. 121, 2, the third hill captured by Xen. 


ure of the volunteers 

ι ' »  (p. 122,18). 5: hill i i 

Xenophon tried to divert by the boa Bnei. 

the i : 

2 Pret of the enemy from the attack on the height, by marching 
main road towards the ἔκβασις (p. 120, 11); but his way led across 


"ἢ 4 Ν 
/ τε at) eo "y'' 7 οντας dve ! εἰ. ὕω. Antex, ! Oo PT 


r ᾿ 
, | 
f eal, Saranod, . * a 


| 
hi REMARKS. | C ef. fur The odes σ-ἐουνϑν Mat. nf a 
a ravine (p. 120, 13), down which the enemy hurled stones, so that he 

was unable even to approach the entrance (εἴσοδος) of the ἔκβασις. In the 

meantime the volunteers with the guide ascended the road cc, but turned 

off into the narrow path ee, which led them to 4, where they surprised 

some guards of the enemy. They thought this position was the ἄκρον (3) 

which they had hoped to capture: but this proved to be a still higher | =ENO®OQNTOS 


Cul δὲ 


point which the enemy held. But from their position (4) there was a | ἽΠΠΠΠΠΠΠ ΓΙ 4 


Caw aoe ow 


path (ἔφοδος, p. 121, 4) leading to the important point f, where the enemy : ik tt κατα βὰς ᾿ 
was posted on the main road. In the morning the volunteers attacked ΚΥΡ ΟΥ ΑΝ ΑΒ ΑΣΙΣ 
and routed the enemy on the main road, which Chirisophus now began , 
to ascend, while other Greeks climbed up the side of the hill as they best 
could, to join the volunteers on the height (p. 121, 14-19). : BOOK I 

Xenophon in the meantime, with the rear-guard and the baggage, began j 
to mount the road cc. He was unable to take the narrow path ee, which 
the volunteers had taken, because this was not fit for the cattle (p. 121, 27; Ι 
cf. p. 119, 12); so that he was obliged to proceed by the same road cc. ᾿ i Δαρείου καὶ Παρυσάτιδος γίγνονται παῖδες δα: ὦ 
This led him to a hill (1) held by the enemy (p. 121, 24), which he capt- ᾿ πρεσβύτερος μὲν ao é , ἕ ᾿ Ἷ Ki vo, 
ured ; leaving a guard to hold this, he proceeded to a second hill (2) and eee ey , » i αἀξέρξης, νεώτερος δὲ Kvpos 4 
captured this. He next came to the hill (3) which the volunteers thought ἐπεὶ δὲ ἠσθένει Δαρεῖος καὶ ὑπώπτευε τελευτὴν τοῦ 
they had taken in the night (p. 122, 19), but which the enemy still βίου, ἐβούλ ετὸ τὼ ἈΠ ΠΥ bond ᾿ Η Ἔ 
held. This position was unexpectedly evacuated by the enemy, who had ΩΣ β ἘΝ ᾿ τῷ ; ρ ils Seep O μεν 2 Ἵ wi ' 
seen the capture of the first hill and were eager to recover it : this they 7 ; ‘ent ii Wied sti iii ETUYX AVE * Kupov de μετα- ἊΣ 
did, putting to death or flight the guard left there by Xenophon (p. 123, 3). 3 πέμπεται απὸ THS ἀρχῆς ἧς αὐτὸν σατράπην ἐποί σε 
In the meantime Xenophon, with his youngest troops, took possession of 4 καὶ στρα ὃν δὲ αὐτὸν ἀπέδ Ἵ “ Τ ; 
the hill (3) which the enemy had left, and ordered the rest of his men to | ali αὐτὸν ἄπε ειξε πάντων οσοι εἷς a 
proceed by the road ce to the plain (ὁμαλόν) on the summit (p. 122, 29). ἀναβαίνει οὖν ὁ of fee aa 


Darius summons his two sons to Thamneria. 


| Καστωλοῦ πεδίον ἀθροίζονται. 
The enemy then appeared on a hill (5) opposite to the height (3) on which Ι Κῦρος λαβὼν Τισσ αφέρνην᾽ ὡς φίλον καὶ Δ “EX: 
. i ial i 


Xenophon stood, and before long a great crowd of Carduchians had 10 λήνων € ΕΟ, ων Ἷ 5 
assembled. When Xenophon and his men left their position on the hill Ἶ ΟΣ ΘΝ ἀνέβη τριακοσίους, ἄρχοντα δὲ 


(i δ..." sf ’ 
to join their comrades on the summit (p. 123, 13-15), the enemy mounted αὐτῶν Reviav Παρράσιον. Urnbe κοι. ὕξζα ρράξιον >btibet 


the hill (3) and rolled stones down upon the departing Greeks. With Dari ; δ νὰν @a. MILE 
arius d Artax i : ‘ IN 
some difficulty the Greeks escaped, and soon all parts of the army were —— erxes is made king. Cyrus is arrested and ᾿ ,. 3,1 


united on the summit, where comfortable quarters awaited them. : ‘ Ce eee 
Emet δὲ ἐτελεύτησε Δαρεῖος καὶ κατέστη εἰς τὴν 3 
βασιλείαν ᾿Αρταξέρξης, Τισσαφέρνης διαβάλλει τὸν 
Κῦρον πρὸς τὸν ἀδελφὸν ὡς ἐπιβουλεύοι αὐτῷ. ὁ δὲ ef. He 
15 πείθεται καὶ συλλαμβάνει Κῦρον ὡς ἀνοκνενῶν" ἢ, = 


‘ , 3 Ld Ni, 3» 7 
δὲ μήτηρ ἐξαιτησαμένη αὐτὸν ἀποπέμπει πάλιν ἐπὶ 


δ.» , 
Τὴν ἀρχήῆν. of. An. τ». 6.1753 


fords 


Ἢ vith, 


M “ 2 > 
OM MavavVY' OV tawv Φω 
: 


ω" 


Cyrus plots his brother’s overthrow, and wins Persian support. The king hoodwinked. 


Ὁ δ᾽ ὡς ἀπῆλθε κινδυνεύσας καὶ ἀτιμασθείς, βου- 4 Πρὸς δὲ βασιλέα πέμπων ἠξίου ἀδελφὸς ὦ ὧν αὐτοῦ 8. 
λεύεται ὅπως μήποτε ἔτι ἔσται ἐπὶ τῷ ἀδελφῷ, ἀλλά, | δοθῆναι οἷ ταύτας τὰς πόλεις μᾶλλον 7 ἡ Τισσαφέρνην 
ἣν δύνηται; pam ιλεύσ ει ἀντ᾽ ἐκείνου. Παρύσ ατις μὲν 7 ἄρχειν αὐτῶν, Kal ἡ μήτηρ συνέπραττεν αὐτῷ ταῦτα᾽ 
“οὐ ὁ Ἶ μήτηρ ὑπῆρχε τῷ Κύρῳ; Φφιλοὺσ a αὐτὸν μᾶλλον͵ ὥστε βασιλεὺς τὴν μὲν πρὸς ἑαυτὸν ἐπιβουλὴν οὐκ 
ὅ ἢ τὸν Bac ἱλεύοντα ᾿Αρταξ έρξην. ὅστις δ᾽ ἀφικνεῖτο | 5 ἠσθάνετο, Τισσαφέρνει δὲ ἐνόμιζε πολεμοῦντα αὐτὸν 
τῶν παρὰ βασιλέως πρὸς αὐτόν, πάντας οὕτω διατι- ἀμφὶ τὰ στρατεύματα ¢ δαπανᾶν ὦστε οὐδὲν ἤχθετο 
ε 


θεὶς ἀπεπέμπετο @OTE αὐτῷ μᾶλλον φίλους εἶναι ἢ 7 αὐτῶν πολεμούντων. καὶ γὰρ ὁ Κῦρος ἀπέπεμπε 


βασιλεῖ, καὶ τῶν παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ δὲ βαρβάρων ἐπεμε- . τοὺς γιγνομένους δασμοὺς βασιλεὶ ἐκ τῶν πόλεων 
~ ~ Ν »Ἢ Ν " ΓΙ ~ 
" λεῖτο ὡς πολεμεῖν TE ἱκανοὶ ειησαν και ευνοικὼς Ι ὧν Τισσαφέρνους ἐ ἐτύγχανεν ἔχων. L.Affean. . 1 P. a ,ν. 


ω " - Ada 
10 ἔχοιεν AUTH. A third contingent is collected by Clearchus in the Chersonese. 


Cyrus collects also a Greek armament. He strengthens his garrisons. ᾿ me 


Ψ ἃ " , > ~ , > , 
Αλλο δὲ στράτευμα αὐτῷ συνελέγετο ἐν Χερρονή- 9 
Siege of Miletus. ρ μ ι Ύ ρρονή 


ἊΝ > > ,) > , “ , , 
ow τῇ κατ᾽ ἀντιπέρας ᾿Αβύδου τόνδε τὸν τρόπον. 
Κλέαρχος Λακεδαιμόνιος φυγὰς ἦν τούτῳ συγγε- 
PX μ εν ere 
/ ε a > / + AM ἃ / in 
νόμενος ὃ Κῦρος ἠγάσθη τε αὐτὸν καὶ δίδωσιν αὐτῷ 
i? or ε \ A ~ dl 
μυρίους δαρεικούς. ὁ δὲ λαβὼν τὸ χρυσίον στρά- 
τευμα συνέλεξεν ἀπὸ τούτων τῶν χρημάτων καὶ ἐπο- 
4 > Cll ε al Ἂ ν. A“ 
λέμει. ἐκ Χερρονήσου ὁρμώμενος τοῖς Θρᾳξὶ τοῖς | 
e Ἂ - 9 ἊΝ Ἂ 3 , iy hd 
umep Ἑλλήσποντον οἰκοῦσι καὶ ὠφέλει τοὺς “Ἑλλη---«ντο 
9 "Ἤ ζ 
vas’ ὥστε καὶ χρήματα συνεβάλλοντο αὐτῷ εἰς THY | 
᾿ a ἌᾺ εε i ἃ ‘al 
τροφὴν τῶν στρατιωτῶν at Ἑλλησποντιακαὶ πόλεις 5. 
ΙΕ ~ ᾿ ἌᾺ > > 9 | > - 
20 €KOVTQL. TOUTO δ᾽ αὖ οὕτω τρεφόμενον ἐλάνθανεν Lf. < wai) 
αὐτῷ TO στράτευμα. 


»¥ ε dl 
Τὴν δὲ Ἑλληνικὴν δύναμιν ἤθροιζεν ὡς μάλιστα 
᾿ς ἐδύνατο ἐπικρυπτόμενος, ὅπως ὅτι ἀπαρασκευότατον 
Ὗν “- Ἂ “ἢ 
᾿ὐλάβοι βασιλέα. ὧδε οὖν ἐποιεῖτο τὴν συλλογήν. 
ε ἤ Me Ν > ~ ΦΥ͂ ’ λ a 
ὁπόσας εἶχε φυλακὰς ἐν ταῖς πόλεσι παρήγγειλε τοις 
/ ¥ 
15 φρουράρχοις ἑκάστοις λαμβάνειν ἄνδρας Πελοπον- 
, bid / \ r / ε 3 λ ἢ 
νησίους ὅτι πλείστους καὶ βελτίστους, ὡς ἐπιβουλεύ- 
~ ".. | 5 e 
οντος Τισσαφέρνους ταῖς πόλεσι. Kal yap ἦσαν αἱ 
r i πόλεις T φέρνους τὸ ἀρχαῖον ἐκ βασι- 
Ιωνικαὶ πόλεις Τισσαφέρνους PX 4 
ll : Ἃ “ 
λέως δεδομέναι, τότε δὲ ἀφειστήκεσαν πρὸς Κῦρον 
20 πᾶσαι πλὴν Μιλήτον᾽ ἐν Μιλήτῳ δὲ Τισσαφέρνης 
προαισθόμενος τὰ αὐτὰ ταῦτα βουλενομένους;, ἀπο- 
στῆναι πρὸς Κῦρον, τοὺς μὲν ἀπέκτεινε τοὺς δ᾽ ἐξέ 
βαλεν. 6 δὲ Κῦρος ὑπολαβὼν τοὺς φεύγοντας συλ- 
\ ‘ ~ 
λέξας στράτευμα ἐπολιόρκει Μίλητον καὶ κατὰ γὴν 
~ hy, 

25 καὶ κατὰ θάλατταν Kal ἐπειρᾶτο κατάγειν τοὺς ἐκπε- 
Ma ANI fi ἴω 
«τοπτωκότας. καὶ αὕτη αὖ ἄλλη πρόφασις ἣν αὐτῷ τοῦ 


ΝΣ 


ἀθροίζειν στράτευμα. af» Rowmaeit ἐγ, Ἂι 


.ἡν νιν... Gey ὦ pte », ὦ Ὑ 
‘ 


Aristippus also enlists mercenaries in Thessaly. 


᾿Αρίστιππος δὲ ὁ Θετταλὸς ξένος ὧν ἐτύγχανεν 10 


αὐτῷ, καὶ πιεζόμενος ὑπὸ τῶν οἴκοι ἀντιστασιωτῶν 
» Ἂ Ν ἴω Ἃ 3 A Mi, > dl 
ἔρχεται πρὸς τὸν Κῦρον καὶ αἰτεῖ αὐτὸν εἰς δισχιλί- 
25 ους ξένους καὶ τριῶν μηνῶν μισθόν, ὡς οὕτως | περι- 
γενόμενος ἂν τῶν ἀντιστασιωτῶν. ὁ δὲ Κῦρος δίδω- 


eM AM "αι 


Nw 


ANABASIS I. κι, 11 and 2. 1-2. 


σιν αὐτῷ εἰς τετρακισχιλίους καὶ ἐξ μηνῶν μισθόν, 
καὶ δεῖται αὐτοῦ μὴ πρόσθεν καταλῦσαι πρὸς τοὺς 
ἀντιστασιώτας πρὶν ἂν αὐτῷ 'συμβουλεύσηται. OUTH 
δὲ αὖ τὸ ἐν Θετταλίᾳ ἐλάνθανεν αὐτῷ τρεφόμενον 


5 στράτευμα. 
Other Greek generals are summoned. 


᾽ 
Πρόξενον δὲ τὸν Βοιώτιον ἕένον ὄντα ἐκέλευσε λα-11 


βόντα ἄνδρας ὅτι πλείστους παραγενέσθαι, ὡς εἰς 
Πισίδας βουλόμενος στρατεύεσθαι, ὡς πράγματα 
παρεχόντων τῶν Πισιδῶν τῇ ἑαυτοῦ χώρᾳ. Σοφαί- 
10 verov δὲ τὸν Στυμφάλιον καὶ Σωκράτην τὸν Ἀχαιὸν, 
ἕένους ὄντας καὶ τούτους, ἐκέλευσεν ἄνδρας λαβόντας 
ἐλθεῖν ὅτι πλείστους, ὡς πολεμήσων Τισσαφέρνει σὺν 
τοῖς φυγάσι τοῖς Μιλησίων. καὶ ἐποίουν οὕτως οὗτοι. 


Muster of the troops at Sardis. 


\ 


) ‘as , ¥ 
Il. Ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἐδόκει αὐτῷ ἤδη πορεύεσθαι ἄνω, THY 
Ι a , , ἢ 2 
15 μὲν πρόφασιν ἐποιεῖτο ὡς Πισίδας βουλόμενος ἐκβα 
~ ν κ᾿ Ψ ε FAA 
λεῖν παντάπασιν ἐκ THs χώρας. καὶ ἀθροίζει ws ἐπι 
ε Γ᾿ 9 ~ 
τούτους τό Te βαρβαρικὸν καὶ τὸ EAAnviKoy. ἐνταὺ- 
ὶ Ἴ 5 τε Κλεά λαβόντι ἥκειν 
θα καὶ παραγγέλλει τῷ τε Κλεάρχῳ λα ἢ 
ω My. a , 
ὅσον ἦν αὐτῷ στράτευμα, καὶ τῳ Ἀριστίππῳ συναλ- 
a ᾽ν. ε ~ 
20 λαγέντι πρὸς τοὺς οἴκοι ἀποπέμψαι πρὸς εαυτὸν 


~ 


εἶχε στράτευμα: καὶ Ξενίᾳ, τῷ ᾿Αρκάδι, ὃς αὐτῷ 
προειστήκει τοῦ ἐν ταῖς πόλεσι ξενικοῦ, NKEW παραγ 
γέλλει λαβόντα τοὺς ἄλλους πλὴν ὁπόσοι ἱκανοὶ 
ἦσαν τὰς ἀκροπόλεις φυλάττειν. ἐκάλεσε δὲ καὶ 
οῃ τοὺς Μίλητον πολιορκοῦντας; καὶ τοὺς φυγάδας ἐκέ- 
λευσε σὺν αὐτῷ στρατεύεσθαι, ὑποσχόμενος αὐτοῖς, 
εἰ καλῶς καταπράξειεν ἐφ᾽ ἃ ἐστρατεύετο, μὴ -πρό- 


a 
# +. tyt ee ris 


1 


ANABASIS I. 2. 3-6. 5 


“ ἅ 9 x - ld ¥ ε 
σθεν παύσασθαι πρὶν αὐτοὺς καταγάγοι οἴκαδε. οἵ 
i “ 3 "al > / Ν 3 ” hs 
δὲ ἡδέως ἐπείθοντο - ἐπίστευον yap αὐτῷ - Kat ha- 
Υ͂ Ν bid ~~ 3 / 
βόντες τὰ ὅπλα παρῆσαν εἰς Σάρδεις. | 
Ξενίας μὲν δὴ τοὺς ἐκ τῶν πόλεων λαβὼν παρεγέ 
r Ψ s al ὃ ε λί νι Ni TI “ 
5 vero εἰς Σάρδεις ὁπλίτας εἰς τετρακισχιλίους, ΤΙρόξε- 
νος δὲ παρῆν ἔχων ὁπλίτας μὲν εἰς πεντακοσίους καὶ 
λί ly δὲ “ “ δὲ ε 
χιλίους γυμνῆτας δὲ πεντακοσίους, Σοφαίνετος OE ὁ 
4 ε al ¥ - , 4 ε 
Στυμφάλιος ὁπλίτας ἔχων χιλίους, Σωκράτης δὲ ὁ 
5 Ἂ ε “ » ε “ lal » Ε 
Αχαιὸς ὁπλίτας ἔχων ws πεντακοσίους ἸΙασίων δὲ ὁ 
10 Μεγαρεὺς τριακοσίους μὲν ὁπλίτας τριακοσίους δὲ 
πελταστὰς ἔχων παρεγένετο: Hv δὲ καὶ οὗτος καὶ O 
‘a ᾽ν 
Σωκράτης τῶν ἀμφὶ Μίλητον στρατευομένων. 
Tissaphernes warns the king. 


Οὗτοι μὲν εἰς Σάρδεις αὐτῷ ἀφίκοντο. Τισσα- 
φέρνης δὲ κατανοήσας ταῦτα, καὶ μείζονα ἡγησάμε- 
> r 4 
15 vos εἶναι ἢ ὡς ἐπὶ Πισίδας τὴν παρασκευήν, πορεύε- 
ε / “ νὰ ἡ , ε , ¥ ε 
ται ὡς βασιλέα 7 ἐδύνατο τάχιστα ἱππέας ἔχων ὡς 
“ \ ‘ \ nt 3 ‘ ¥ 
πεντακοσίους. καὶ βασιλεὺς μὲν δὴ ἐπεὶ ἤκουσε 
ἤ ~ 7 ἤ 3 Vd 
Τισσαφέρνους τὸν Κύρου στόλον, ἀντιπαρεσκευά- 
ζετο. 
March through Lydia and Phrygia to Colossae and Celaenae. 
20 Κῦρος δὲ ἔχων ovs εἴρηκα ὡρμᾶτο ἀπὸ Σάρδεων - 
ν 5 / \ “Ἃ ral \ ~ 
καὶ ἐξελαύνει διὰ τῆς Λυδίας σταθμοὺς τρεῖς παρα- 
)» » ly. rl 2 x / 4 
σάγγας εἴκοσι καὶ δύο ἐπὶ τὸν Μαίανδρον ποταμόν. 
, \ 7 ri M4 / . AA ε ‘ 
τούτου τὸ εὖρος δύο πλέθρα. γέφυρα δὲ ἐπῆν ἑπτὰ 
ἐζευγμένη πλοίοις. τοῦτον διαβὰς ἐξελαύνει διὰ 
᾽ ip." 7 “ 3 Ἃ 3 
25 Φρυγίας σταθμὸν ἕνα παρασάγγας ὀκτὼ εἷς Κολοσ- 
σάς, πόλιν οἰκουμένην. εὐδαίμονα καὶ μεγάλην. ἐν- 
ἴω ¥ € “ ¢€ “ \ Ὅ Ud ε 
ταῦθα ἔμεινεν ἡμέρας ἑπτά: καὶ ἧκε Μένων o Θετ- 


6 ANABASIS I. 2. 7-9. 


‘ ε - » . “ \ ‘ 
ταλὸς ὁπλίτας ἔχων χιλίους Kal πελταστὰς TEVTAKO- 


σίους. Δόλοπας καὶ Αἰνιᾶνας καὶ Ὀλυνθίους. ἐντεῦ- 7 


3 “ Ἂ ω; / ¥ 
θεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς τρεῖς παρασάγγας εἰκοσιν 


cis Κελαινάς, τῆς Φρυγίας πόλιν οἰκουμένην, μεγάλην  ; 


δ καὶ εὐδαίμονα. 
Royal palaces at Celaenae. The myth of Marsyas. 
b ἴω ἢ ἢ Ya ἈΝ / ᾽ 
Ἐνταῦθα Κύρῳ βασίλεια ἦν καὶ παράδεισος μέγας 
3 / / / |||) Ὁ > / ANA A 
ἀγρίων θηρίων πλήρης; ἃ ἐκεινος ἐθήρευεν ἀπὸ ιπ- 
που ὁπότε γυμνάσαι βούλοιτο ἑαυτόν τε καὶ τοὺς 
bid ‘ / \ slip / wlll ya Ε / 
ἵππους. διὰ μέσου δὲ τοῦ παραδείσου per ὁ Matar 
10 8pos ποταμός. αἱ δὲ πηγαὶ αὐτοῦ εἰσιν ἐκ τῶν βασι- 


λείων - ῥεῖ δὲ καὶ διὰ τῆς Κελαινῶν πόλεως. | ἔστι 8 


δὲ καὶ μεγάλου βασιλέως βασίλεια ἐν Κελαιναῖς 
ἐρυμνὰ ἐπὶ ταῖς πηγαῖς τοῦ Μαρσύου ποταμοῦ ὑπὸ 
΄ "5 ld Εν Ν Ν - \ “Ἂ , Ν 
τῇ ἀκροπόλει" pel δὲ καὶ οὗτος διὰ τῆς πόλεως καὶ 
15 ἐμβάλλει εἰς τὸν Μαίανδρον " τοῦ δὲ Μαρσύου τὸ 
5 ry ᾽ Ν Ἃ / i ἴω 5 ἊΝ ’ὔ 
εὖρός ἐστιν εἴκοσι καὶ πέντε ποδῶν. ἐνταῦθα λέγεται 
᾿Απόλλων ἐκδεῖραι Μαρσύαν νικήσας ἐρίζοντά οἱ 
~ ἮΝ 
περὶ σοφίας, καὶ τὸ δέρμα κρεμάσαι ἐν τῳ ἄντρῳ 
bid ε / Ν ‘ Ὁ ε Ν ‘and 
ὅθεν ai πηγαί: διὰ δὲ τοῦτο ὁ ποταμὸς καλεῖται Μαρ- 


φῇ σύας. ἐνταῦθα Ξέρξης; ὅτε ἐκ τῆς Ἑλλάδος ἡττη- 9 


θεὶς τῇ μάχῃ ἀπεχώρει, λέγεται οἰκοδομῆσαι ταῦτά 
‘ “ Ἂ Ἂ A > ve 
re TA βασίλεια καὶ THY Κελαινὼν ἀκρόπολιν. 
Review and numbering of the Greek forces. 

> κι ¥ a Ῥ, ἡ ’ 1 @ 
Ἐνταῦθα ἔμεινε Κῦρος ἡμέρας τριάκοντα " καὶ ἯΚΕ 
‘ al 
Κλέαρχος ἔχων ὁπλίτας χιλίους καὶ πελταστὰς Θρᾳ- 
οξ κας ὀκτακοσίους καὶ τοξότας Κρητας διακοσίους. 
; bid ip." Ἃ a iy ε / ¥ ε di 
-o- ἅμα δὲ Kal Σῶσις παρὴν ὁ Συρακούσιος ἔχων ὅπλι:- 
, \ “ Ε» Ἂ ¥ ε WK 
τας τριακοσίους, καὶ Σοφαίνετος ὁ Αρκὰς ἔχων omhi- 


el 


᾿ 
Ml ““Ὃ“Ἢ“. ' 
i wees του A, Tre ero , 7 
v 
Cet 283 ev wees ys 


ANABASIS I. 2. 10-12 το τοι Tih 


oe 


/ x || 2 ~ ἴω 
τας χιλίους. καὶ ἐνταῦθα Κῦρος ἐξέτασιν καὶ ἀριθ- 
‘ "ἣν ε ni > id ἊΝ 
μὸν τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἐποίησεν ἐν τῷ παραδείσῳ, καὶ 
3 ld ε “ ξ a 
ἐγένοντο οἱ σύμπαντες ὁπλῖται μὲν μύριοι καὶ χίλιοι, 


πελτασταὶ δὲ ἀμφὶ τοὺς δισχιλίους. 


March to Peltae. Celebration of the Lycaea. 


to the borders of Mysia. 


March continued 


3 “ἣν ᾽ 
δ Ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς δύο παρασάγγας 10 


V4 3 “ 
δέκα εἰς Πέλτας, πόλιν οἰκουμένην. ἐνταῦθ᾽ ἔμεινεν 
.1 ᾽ ΜᾺ ΕῚ o 
ἡμέρας τρεῖς: ev αἷς Ἐενίας ὁ ᾿Αρκὰς τὰ Λύκαια 
ἔθυσε Ἅ > ant “0 A δὲ “ > ’ 
καὶ ἀγῶνα ἔθηκε: τὰ δὲ ἀθλα ἦσαν στλεγγί- 
Ἂ 5 - “~ A 
δες χρυσαῖ: ἐθεώρει δὲ τὸν ἀγῶνα καὶ Κῦρος. ἐν- 
a 3 A 
ι0 τεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς δύο παρασάγγας δώδεκα 
3 al | al 
εἰς Κεράμων ἀγοράν, πόλιν οἰκουμένην, ἐσχάτην 
"Ἶ ~ 
πρὸς TH Μυσίᾳ χώρᾳ. 


Thence eastward. Pay of the troops in arrears. Visit οὗ Epyaxa. 


Ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς τρεῖς παρασάγγας 11 
τριάκοντα εἰς Καὕστρου πεδίον, πόλιν οἰκουμένην. 
15 ἐνταῦθ᾽ ἔμεινεν ἡμέρας πέντε - καὶ τοῖς στρατιώταις 
ὠφείλετο μισθὸς πλέον ἢ τριῶν μηνῶν, καὶ πολλάκις 
ἰόντες ἐπὶ τὰς θύρας ἀπήτουν. 


4 ὁ δὲ ἐλπίδας λέγων 
διῆγε καὶ δῆλος ἦν ἀνιώμενος: οὐ γὰρ ἦν πρὸς τοῦ 


? 


of. Lueran, kre ΚΝ μέ Tees Tov cou 
9 


yt Teewey 


ra Γ / ¥ A 
Κύρου τρόπου" ἔχοντα μὴ ἀποδιδόναι. ἐνταῦθα ἀφι-12 < <*> 


20 κνεῖται Ἔ“πύαξα ἡ Συεννέσιος γυνὴ τοῦ Κιλίκων βασι- 
λέως παρὰ Κῦρον - καὶ ἐλέγετο Κύρῳ δοῦναι χρήμα- 
τα πολλά. τῇ δ᾽ οὖν στρατιᾷ τότε ἀπέδωκε Κῦρος 
μισθὸν τεττάρων μηνῶν. εἶχε δὲ ἡ Κίλισσα φυλα- 
κὴν περὶ αὑτὴν Κίλικας καὶ ᾿Ασπενδίους: ἐλέγετο 

"5 δὲ καὶ συγγενέσθαι Κῦρον τῇ Κιλίσσῃ. fo συγ 


Ὑ" λ. ave pic 


αι. ὃ ὃ 
4 » j 


8 ANABASIS I. 2. 13-17. 


March continued through Phrygia, and review of all the troops at 
Tyriaeum. 
‘ 4 , 
Ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς δύο παρασάγγας 18 


δέκα εἰς Θύμβριον, πόλιν οἰκουμένην. ἐνταῦθα ἦν 

παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν κρήνη ἡ Μίδου καλουμένη τοῦ Φρυγῶν 

βασιλέως, ἐφ᾽ 7) λέγεται Μίδας τὸν Σάτυρον θηρεῦσαι 

5 οἴνῳ κεράσας αὐτήν. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς 14 
δύο παρασάγγας δέκα εἰς Τυριαῖον, πόλιν οἰκουμέ 
νην. ἐνταῦθα ἔμεινεν ἡμέρας τρεῖς. καὶ λέγεται 
0. δεηθῆναι ἡ Κίλισσα Κύρου ἐπιδεῖξαι τὸ στράτευμα 
αὑτῇ: βουλόμενος οὖν ἐπιδεῖξαι ἐξέτασιν ποιεῖται ἐν 

τὸ τῷ πεδίῳ τῶν Ἑλλήνων καὶ τῶν βαρβάρων. ἐκέλευσε: 
δὲ τοὺς Ἕλληνας ὡς νόμος αὐτοῖς εἰς μάχην οὕτω 
are ταχθῆναι καὶ στῆναι, συντάξαι δ᾽ ἕκαστον τοὺς ἕαυ- 
‘rod. ἐτάχθησαν οὖν ἐπὶ τεττάρων: εἶχε δὲ τὸ μὲν 
δεξιὸν Μένων καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, τὸ δὲ εὐώνυμον Khe- 


\ / wl. 
15 αρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου, τὸ δὲ μέσον οἱ ἄλλοι oTpaTy- 
Ὁ 


γοί. ἐθεώρει οὖν ὁ Κῦρος πρῶτον μὲν τοὺς BapBa-16 


al 


ε \ / Ν ir ἃ 

ρους οἱ δὲ παρήλαυνον τεταγμένοι κατὰ tas καὶ 
" ἥ bd > 

κατὰ τάξεις: εἶτα δὲ τοὺς Ἕλληνας; παῤβελαύνων ἐφ 
᾽ > ‘ 

ἅρματος καὶ ἡ Κίλισσα ἐφ᾽ ἁρμαμάξης. εἶχον δὲ 


' , ~ ἴω a ‘ 
‘*'»' πάντες κράνη χαλκα καὶ χιτῶνας φοινικοῦς καὶ κνη" 


μῖδας καὶ τὰς ἀσπίδας ἐκκεκαλυμμένας. 


Mock charge of the Greeks. The barbarians panic-stricken. 


Ἐπειδὴ δὲ πάντας παρήλασε, στήσας τὸ ἅρμα 


πρὸ τῆς φάλαγγος μέσης, πέμψας Πίγρητα τὸν €p- 
μηνέα παρὰ τοὺς στρατηγοὺς τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἐκέλευσε 
ο" προβαλέσθαι τὰ ὅπλα καὶ ἐπιχωρῆσαι ὅλην τὴν 
φάλαγγα. οἱ δὲ ταῦτα προεῖπον τοῖς στρατιώταις" 


Ϊ a “νη 3 ~ 
καὶ ἐπεὶ ἐσάλπιγξε, προβαλλόμενοι τὰ ὅπλα ἐπῇσαν. 


ANABASIS I. 2. 18-21. 


ἐκ δὲ τούτου θᾶττον προϊόντων σὺν κραυγῇ ἀπὸ TOU 
, ἴω 
αὐτομάτου δρόμος ἐγένετο τοῖς στρατιώταις ἐπὶ τὰς 
σκηνάς, τῶν δὲ βαρβάρων φόβος πολύς, καὶ ἥ TE18 
χη » + ν fig ε )» ‘ ε » “~ 
Κίλισσα ἔφυγεν ἐπὶ τῆς ἁρμαμάξης καὶ οἱ ἐκ τῆς 
ν 3» ial , int ¥ Γν Ἵ rd > 
δ ἀγορᾶς καταλιπόντες τὰ ὦνια ἔφυγον. οἱ δὲ Ἕλλη- 
νες σὺν γέλωτι ἐπὶ τὰς σκηνὰς ἦλθον. ἡ δὲ Κίλισ- 
σα ἰδοῦσα τὴν λαμπρότητα καὶ τὴν τάξιν τοῦ στρα- 
"A > A il \ 7 Ἂ | ~ 
τεύματος ἐθαύμασε. Κῦρος δὲ ἥσθη τὸν ἐκ τῶν 
Ἑλλήνων εἰς τοὺς βαρβάρους φόβον ἰδών. 


March through Lycaonia and Cappadocia. Epyaxa returns home. 


10 Ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς τρεῖς παρασάγγας 19 


Ν > > , Ι ~ , dl 3 Ld 
εἴκοσιν εἰς Ἰκόνιον! τῆς Φρυγίας πόλιν ἐσχάτην. - 


" A ¥ ~ ε - > ~~ > ,» 4 
ἐνταῦθα ἔμεινε τρεῖς ἡμέρας. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει διὰ 
τῆς Λυκαονίας σταθμοὺς πέντε παρασάγγας τριά- 
κοντα. ταύτην τὴν χώραν ἐπέτρεψε διαρπάσαι τοῖς 
ν ε ῪΝὯἪἝ ~ 

Ἑλλησιν ὡς πολεμίαν οὖσαν. ἐντεῦθεν Κῦρος τὴν 30 

/ > ly 4 2 - ἡ»: i" 
Κίλισσαν eis τὴν Κιλικίαν ἀποπέμπει τὴν ταχίστην 

cig πῇ 

ὁδόν - καὶ συνέπεμψεν αὐτῇ ἱ τοὺς στρατιώτας  οὗς 
Mévov εἶχε καὶ αὐτόν. Κῦρος δὲ μετὰ τῶν ἄλλων 

3 4 ‘ "al ns! all 

ἐξελαύνει διὰ Καππαδοκίας σταθμοὺς τέτταρας πα- 
20 ρασάγγας εἴκοσι καὶ πέντε πρὸς Adva, πόλιν οἰκου- 


μα , ‘ 8 ’, 3 τ ¥ Ἴ, 
μένην, μεγάλην καὶ εὐδαίμονα. ἐνταυῦύῦα ἐμειναν (οἱ 


ε ’ ~ 3 © an > Ψ ¥ , 
ἡμέρας τρεῖς - ἐν ᾧ Κῦρος ἀπέκτεινεν ἄνδρα Πέρσην 
Μεγαφέρνην, φοινικιστὴν βασίλειον, καὶ ἕτερόν τινα 


» 


D5 αὐτῷ ΟΠ ΔδΔιεπτεασαλιῖένος ζ οἱ Nn, fret ow Ne 
; * dl * " * 
Syennesis abandons the Pass: into Cilicia. 


“ ε / γ ᾽ > / > , 
των ὑπάρχων δυνάστην, αἰτιασάμενος ἐπιβουλεύειν 


Ἐντεῦθεν ἐπειρῶντο εἰσβάλλειν εἰς τὴν Κιλικίαν" 21 
e A > 
ἡ δὲ εἰσβολὴ 


‘ 


ἣν ὁδὸς ἁμαξιτὸς ὀρθία ἰσχυρῶς καὶ 
i ft ὦ ee i ΔΙ" L fs και of nN » Ι | 
i λοι 


a δ» cme “-. ὡ. 


ΟΝ 


ee le 


’ 


ΩΝ - 
"ἡ; ) ᾿ 3) 


᾿ " 4 WH 7 7 ὃν 
{ Reeckher γι. ω}}. ..ἕ Ror. σὸν. = 
( ee Ἶ / w / CW , iQ 
oy . ν»»" 


Let, A wteeed Oe 1g φ eh ιν 
ANABASIS I. 2. 22-25. 
¢ ἔ. χ' Ὁ" ie 


te thi!” oe 


ll 


(v “ , ie ot 


> “ | | 3 ~ “ v > SAVER 

ἀμήχανος εἰσελθεῖν στρατεύματι, εἰ τις ἐκώλνεν. 
I a ¥ Ἢ 

ἐλέγετο δὲ καὶ Συέννεσις εἶναι ἐπὶ τῶν ἄκρων φυλάτ- 
ε φ᾽ > ll / 

των τὴν εἰσβολήν - διὸ ἔμειναν ἡμέραν ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ. 
“ , Φ \ 

τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ ἧκεν ἄγγελος λέγων ὅτι λελοιπῶς 
μ Pui ‘ ¥ 3 i θ Y Ν Μ ; O 

δ εἴη Συέννεσις τὰ ἄκρα, ἐπεὶ ἤσθετο οτι TO Μένωνος 
- ¥ ~ > / ι ν 

στράτευμα ἤδη ἐν Κιλικίᾳ ἦν εἴσω τῶν ὀρέων, καὶ OTL 
i sf + AM ’ 3 », 

τριήρεις ἤκουε πριπλεούσας ἀπ᾽ ᾿Ιωνίας εἰς Κιλικίαν 


i 4 > o i l 
‘ser ‘wag Λακεδαιμονίων καὶ avrov Κύρου. 


#) it 
ef » rm ΔΝ 


{ῳ ! 
ἵν 
Ἵ 


2 


Cyrus crosses the mountains and descends to Tarsus. 
Κῦρος δ᾽ οὖν ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὰ ὄρη οὐδενὸς κωλύον- 22 
10 Tos, καὶ εἶδε τὰς σκηνὰς οὗ οἱ Κίλικες ἐφύλαττον, 
ἐντεῦθεν δὲ κατέβαινεν εἰς πεδίον μέγα καὶ καλόν, 
ἐπίρρυτον; καὶ δένδρων παντοδαπῶν σύμπλεων καὶ 
ἀμπέλων - πολὺ δὲ καὶ σήσαμον καὶ μελίνην καὶ 


i " Ι HAIN AN Hh, 
κέγχρον καὶ πυροὺς καὶ κριθὰς φέρει!  opos δ᾽ αὐτὸ “(. 


“ὦ ΝΙΝ ἡ > 
τὸ περιέχει ὀχυρὸν Kal ὑψηλὸν πάντῃ ἐκ θαλάττης εἰς 3. 
~ / » 
θάλατταν. καταβὰς δὲ διὰ τούτου τοῦ πεδίου ἤλασε33 
/ ‘ ¥ 
σταθμοὺς τέτταρας παρασάγγας πέντε καὶ εἰκοσιν 
ἴω , \ > / 
εἰς Ταρσούς; τῆς Κιλικίας πόλιν μεγάλην Kat evoai- 
» Φ ‘ / ἋἋλ ᾿ ὃ "" 
μονα, ἔνθα ἦν τὰ Σνεννέσιος βασίλεια" διὰ μέσου 
a ~ " » > , 
20 δὲ τῆς πόλεως ῥεῖ ποταμὸς Κύδνος ὄνομα, Evpos δύο 
πλέθρων. 
He finds the town abandoned and plundered. 
»"» Ν, 
Ταύτην τὴν πόλιν ἐξέλιπον οἱ ἐνοικοῦντες μετὰ "4 
2S A »” ‘ € 
Συεννέσιος εἰς χωρίον ὀχυρὸν ἐπὶ τὰ ὁρη πλὴν οἱ 
ἴα] ‘ ‘ ¢ ‘ ‘ 
τὰ καπηλεῖα exovTes: ἔμειναν δὲ Kal οἱ Tapa THY 
»“. Ἁ 3 “Ἃ 3 rd 
25 θάλατταν οἰκοῦντες ἐν Σόλοις καὶ ἐν Ἴσσοις. Ἐπύ- 325 
Ἄ κ᾿ / Ν ὃ il Κ / ld ε έ- 
ata δὲ ἡ Συεννέσιος γυνὴ προτέρᾳ Κύρου πέντε Hu 
9 Ν, AM i δὲ Ὁ ἃ λῃ a“ 
pas εἰς Ταρσοὺς ἀφίκετο" ἐν ὃὲ τῇ ὑπερβολῃ τῶν 


A 
bow 


ANABASIS I. 2. 26,27 and 3. 1, 2. | ao 


> / ly > Ἂ “4 4 ld A ral 
ὀρέων τῇ εἰς TO πεδίον δύο λόχοι τοῦ Μένωνος oTpa- °/-¥. 2 
͵ 7 Υ͂ e Ν » ε “ al 
τεύματος ἀπώλοντο" οἱ μὲν ἔφασαν apmalovTas τι 
κατακοπῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν Κιλίκων, οἱ δὲ ὑπολειφθέντας 
‘ > » ε a in ¥ fh ὌΝ 
καὶ οὐ δυναμένους εὑρεῖν τὸ ἄλλο στράτευμα οὐδὲ 
‘ ε \ 5 , 9 , > 3 
δτὰς ὁδοὺς εἶτα πλανωμένους ἀπολέσθαι: ἦσαν ὃ 


οὖν οὗτοι ἑκατὸν ὁπλῖται. οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι ἐπεὶ ἧκον, 26 
‘al / ie \ i, » ~ " 
τήν τε πόλιν διήρπασαν; διὰ τὸν ὄλεθρον τῶν συ- 8. 
ἴω i, ~ 
στρατιωτῶν ὀργιζόμενοι, καὶ Ta βασίλεια τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ. 
Friendly meeting of Cyrus and Syennesis, and exchange of gifts. 
ἴω Ἀ 3 \ > ᾽ὔ 3 \ 7 ld 
Κῦρος δὲ ἐπεὶ εἰσήλασεν εἰς τὴν πόλιν, μετεπέμ- 
x .ν ν | 
10 TeTO τὸν Συέννεσιν πρὸς ἑαυτόν - ὁ δ᾽ οὔτε πρότερον |; 
> ’; ’ ε ἴω 3 a“ > ~ » » 
οὐδενί πω κρείττονι ἑαυτοῦ εἰς χεῖρας ἐλθεῖν ἔφη οὔτε 
ἢ) Κ / 2 2 nO X ‘ e N ἌΝ » bs 
τότε Κύρῳ ἰέναι ἡθελε, πρὶν ἡ γυνὴ αὐτὸν ἔπεισε καὶ 
’ Ἂ in δὲ “Ἂ 3 \ Υ͂ 
πίστεις ἔλαβε. μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα ἐπεὶ συνεγένοντο 27 
ἀλλήλοις, Συέννεσις μὲν ἔδωκε Κύρῳ χρήματα πολλὰ 
> lb," dl “a ν 5 “" li ἃ , 
ι €ls τὴν στρατιάν, Κῦρος δὲ ἐκείνῳ δῶρα ἃ νομίζεται 
¥? ‘am al " ν “~ 
παρὰ βασιλεῖ τίμια; ἵππον χρυσοχάλινον καὶ oTpe ~~: ' 
ἴω X / ἃ ᾽, ἴω Nee 
πτὸν χρυσοῦν καὶ ψέλια καὶ ἀκινάκην χρυσοῦν Kal 
in ’ I, Ἂ ἤ i? 3 “ 
στολὴν Περσικήν, καὶ τὴν χώραν μηκέτι ἀφαρπαάαζε- 
fn," 0 TM, 3 . dl 3 “ ¥ by "4 
σθαι" τὰ δὲ ἡρπασμένα ἀνδράποδα, nv που ἐντυγχά- 
δ ' I f 7 ' 
ν᾽ δὲ Φ ot om ¢ WA 7 wr, P ll ea δι. 


“ἴσχε. at hosts ὰ 
Clearchus in great danger. 


~ 


> ld 
200 νωσιν, ἀπολαμβάνειν. 
The troops refuse to advance. 
ΠῚ. Ἐνταῦθα ἔμεινε Κῦρος καὶ ἡ στρατιὰ ἡμέρας 1 
εἴκοσιν - οἱ γὰρ στρατιῶται οὐκ ἔφασαν ἰέναι τοῦ .-: 
c , 4 ¥ a, V4 + IN 
πρόσω: ὑπώπτευον yap ἤδη ἐπὶ βασιλέα ἰέναι - μι- 
σθωθῆναι δὲ οὐκ ἐπὶ τούτῳ ἔφασαν. πρῶτος δὲ Κλέ “-. 
or ‘ eA , > , 27 e OA 
25 apxos τοὺς αὑτοῦ στρατιώτας ἐβιάζετο ἰέναι - οἱ δὲ 
> ἡ ¥ a ea , “κῶν δ 8 
αὐτόν τε ἔβαλλον καὶ τὰ ὑποζύγια τὰ ἐκείνου, ἐπεὶ 


ἄρξαιντο προϊέναι. Κλέαρχος δὲ τότε μὲν μικβὸν 3 


ἀ χ! βιπ Ξ. 


ANABASIS I. 3. 3-6. ANABASIS I. 3. 7-10. 


~ ν 2 > ~ Ἂ 
ἐξέφυγε μὴ καταπετρωθῆναι; ὑστερον δ᾽, ~ ἔγνω 
; > 
ὅτι οὐ } σασθαι, συνήγαγεν ἐκκλησίαν 
αι βιάσασθαι; y 
ὅτι ov δυνήσεται B σ ; y ge ai 
τῶν αὑτοῦ στρατιωτῶν. καὶ πρῶτον pe 
a > 
πολὺν χρόνον ἑστώς - οἱ δὲ ὁρωντες ἐθαύμαζον Kat 
, 
ἐσιώπων " εἶτα δὲ ἔλεξε τοιάδε. 


Speech of Clearchus: ‘‘ Cyrus has been my friend.’ 


» \ Ν ε slg bd » or cal ld ‘al “ 
ἐγὼ σὺν ὑμῖν ἕψομαι καὶ ὅ τι ἂν δέῃ πείσομαι. νομίζω 
Ν ε ~ > i. Me \ 4 \ » Ἁ 
γὰρ ὑμᾶς ἐμοὶ εἶναι καὶ πατρίδα καὶ φίλους καὶ 
“ A ~ 
συμμάχους, Kal σὺν ὑμῖν μὲν av οἶμαι εἶναι τίμιος 
Y Ἅ me ε» δὲ ¥ Ἂ 3 ral ε μ᾿ " 
ὅπου GV ὦ, ὑμῶν δὲ ἔρημος ὧν οὐκ ἀν ἱκανὸς εἰναι 
δ οὔτ᾽ dv φίλον ὠφελῆσαι οὔτ᾽ ἂν ἐχθρὸν ἀλέξασθαι. 
ΤᾺ > > aA a“ ν 
ὡς ἐμοῦ οὖν ἰόντος ὅπῃ ἂν καὶ ὑμεῖς, οὕτω τὴν γνώ- 
“" " of μη a . ¥ 
*AySpES TTPATLWTAL, 1) θαυμάζετε ὅτι χαλεπῶς μην éxered 
“, ρ Pp ip SAE ‘ 4 Kv- : 
φέρω τοῖς παροῦσι πραγμασιν. ἐμοι yap ἕένος ; The soldiers are pleased. Clearchus refuses to go to Cyrus. 
~ / ’ ~ ΓῪ ~ wn 
pos ἐγένετο καί με φεύγοντα ἐκ τῆς πατρίδος τά TE | Ταῦτα εἶπεν: οἱ δὲ στρατιῶται οἵ τε αὐτοῦ ἐκείνου 7 
, ἃ » κα | » κι 
ἄλλα ἐτίμησε καὶ μυρίους ἔδωκε δαρεικοὺς * ous ἐγὼ β καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι ταῦτα ἀκούσαντες ἐπήνεσαν - παρὰ δὲ 
‘ >. | l ‘ aA 
10 λαβὼν οὐκ εἰς τὸ ἴδιον κατεθέμην ἐμοὶ οὐδὲ καθηδυ- 10 Ξενίου καὶ Πασίωνος πλείους ἢ δισχίλιοι λαβόντες 
| ν ἃ 
πάθησα, ἀλλ᾽ εἰς ὑμᾶς ἐδαπάνων. ] τὰ ὅπλα καὶ τὰ σκευοφόρα ἐστρατοπεδεύσαντο παρὰ 
΄ / ων ,. dl | Ὧν NX 
« When he summoned me from Thrace, I obeyed.”’ : Κλέαρχον. Κυρος δὲ τούτοις ἄπορων TE και λυπού- 8 
/ Ν - € δ 2 
Kal πρῶτον μὲν πρὸς τοὺς Θρᾷκας ἐπολέμησα: μενος μετεπέμπετο τὸν Κλέαρχον" ὁ δὲ ἰέναι μὲν οὐκ 
αι " " κ᾿ A b | ¥ / A sl “ V4 > ~| = 
: ὑνὰρ τῆς ‘EAAdSos ἐτιμωρούμην μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν, ἐκ ἤθελε, λάθρᾳ δὲ τῶν στρατιωτῶν πέμπων αὐτῳ αγγε- 
| ») a ε ’ rd > 
rT xX r — δὲ οὺς ἐξελαύνων βουλομένους 15 λον ἔλεγε θαρρεῖν ως καταστησομενων τουτων εἰς τὸ 
TNS €ppov?) " a i , , ae Seu αἰ. > 4 3 
i lt abe evouxoovtas "EXAnvas THY γῆν. ] δέον. μεταπέμπεσθαι δ᾽ ἐκέλευεν αὐτόν αὐτὸς ὃ 
9 ε ἴω > / > 
ἘΣῪ 8¢ Kipos éxdhei, λαβὸν dps ewopevopmy» — | cont ee 


2 a 4 . d ch of Clearchus: ‘‘ We must be on our guard, and 
, , , "τὸν ἀνθ᾽ ὧν εὖ ἔπαθον | Second spee guard, 
ἵνα εἴ TL δέοιτο ὠφελοίην avTov ' take good counsel.’’ 


Mera δὲ ταῦτα συναγαγὼν τούς θ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ στρα- 9 

ἢ) \ ln! “Ἢ ΕῚ lal Ν ra Ν 
τιώτας καὶ τοὺς προσελθόντας αὐτῷ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων 

» ~ 
20 τὸν βουλόμενον, ἔλεξε τοιάδε. “Avdpes στρατιῶται, 
Ν ἂ | /, lig 7 ν ¥ ~ ed ~~ 
τὰ μὲν δὴ Κύρου δῆλον ὅτι οὕτως ἔχει πρὸς ἡμᾶς 
ἦν ~ ¥ ~ 
ὦσπερ τὰ ἡμέτερα πρὸς ἐκεῖνον - οὔτε yap ἡμεῖς 
ἐκείνου ἔτι στρατιῶται, ἐπεΐ γε οὐ συνεπόμεθα αὐτῷ, 


ὑπ᾽ ἐκείνου. 
“But now, as between him and you, I choose iil 
Smee Ἐπεὶ δὲ ὑμεῖς ov βούλεσθε συμπορεύεσθαι; ἀνάγκη δ 
29 δή μοι ἢ ὑμᾶς προδόντα τῇ Κύρου qui a. 
πρὸς ἐκεῖνον ψευσάμενον μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν εἶναι. εἰ μὲν Ἶ 
τ δίκαια ποιήσω οὐκ οἶδα; αἱρήσομαι ὃ οὖν ὑμᾶς κα 
σὺν ὑμῖν ὅ τι ἂν δέῃ πείσομαι. καὶ ὀὕποτε épet ov- 
Seis ὡς ἐγώ, Ἕλληνας ἌΣ εἰς ss nai eA 
25 προδοὺς TOUS Ἕλληνας Ὁ pine a 
εἱλόμην; ἀλλ᾽ ἐπεὶ ὑμεῖς ἐμοι οὐκ ἐθέλετε πείθεσσαι, 8 


Ν » » ΝΜ / bid ᾽ > 
οὔτε ἐκεῖνος ἔτι ἡμῖν μισθοδότης. ὅτι μέντοι ἀδι- τὸ 
OR ta) / εν ε ἴω 78 ν A 
55 κεῖσθαι νομίζει ὑφ᾽ ἡμῶν ol0a* WOTE Kal μεταπεμ- 
» > “ > 52 / 3 o \ \ , 
πομένου αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἐθέλω ἐλθεῖν, τὸ μὲν μέγιστον 


> , 9 , ᾽ a , ᾽ , 
αισχνυνομεένος OTL σύνοιδα εμανυτῳ πταντα, ἐψευσμένος 


" i 
γ Φ a." Ci γυ ζ 


bem. Col, 


” 


t Yhe Bhd aay μῶν μὰ μων 
ἔγαυβ. δι νον 


14 ANABASIS I. 3. 11-14. 


αὐτόν. ἔπειτα καὶ δεδιὼς μὴ λαβών με δίκην ἐπιθῃ 
4 ,ὔ “-,ο1Μ, νυ a 9 ἴω > Ν > ΜᾺ > ' 
ὧν νομίζει vr ἐμου ἠδικῆσθαι. ἐμοὶ οὖν δοκεῖ οὐχ 11 
ν it ε ~ ἤ > > > “A | ἴω ΕῚ a! 
ὧρα εἶναι ἡμῖν καθεύδειν οὐδ᾽ ἀμελεῖν μων αὕτων, 
2 ‘ il ν \ “ » il \ 
ἀλλὰ βουλεύεσθαι 6 τι χρὴ ποιεῖν ἐκ τούτων. Kab 
δ ἕως τε μένομεν αὐτοῦ σκεπτέον μοι δοκεῖ εἶναι ὅπως 
ε , / / ¥ »ν » 5 , 
«ὡς ἀσφαλέστατα μένωμεν, EL TE ἤδη δοκεῖ ἀπιέναι; 
¥ ε 3 aN ¥ ν» "." "5 , 
ὅπως «ὡς»ἀσφαλέστατα ἄπιμεν Kal OTWS TA ETUTTT 
¥ ~ Ν 
δεια ἕξομεν - ἄνευ γὰρ τούτων οὔτε στρατηγοῦ οὔτε 
ἰδιώτου ὄφελος οὐδέν. 
“ἐ Cyrus can be severe, and he has great resources.’ 
an τ 5 
10 Ὁ δ᾽ ἀνὴρ πολλου μὲν ἄξιος φίλος ᾧ ἂν φίλος 7,12 
ἤ 5° > A i. . Ἅ - ht ¥ de 
χαλεπώτατος ἐχθρὸς ᾧ ἂν πολέμιος ἢ, EXEL OF 
δύναμιν καὶ πεζὴν καὶ ἱππικὴν καὶ ναυτικὴν ἣν 
Tal ," 
πάντες ὁμοίως ὁρῶμέν TE καὶ ἐπιστάμεθα. καὶ γὰρ 
ἴω ἊΜ ~ ν 
οὐδὲ πόρρω δοκοῦμέν μοι αὐτου καθῆσθαι. ὠστε 
15 ὧρα λέγειν ὅ τι τις γιγνώσκει ἄριστον εἶναι. ταῦτα 
εἰπὼν ἐπαύσατο. 
Other speakers come forward. 
> \ / > / ε Ἁ > en ᾿ ἢ 
Ex δὲ τούτου ἀνίσταντο οἱ μὲν ἐκ του αὐτομάτου, 18 
λέξοντες ἃ ἐγίγνωσκον; οἱ δὲ καὶ ὑπ᾽ ἐκείνου ἐγκέ- 
» ~ ‘al 
λευστοι, ἐπιδεικνύντες οἵα εἴη ἡ ἀπορία ἄνευ τῆς Κυ- 
) ))},λ»»,» eee a eee | ς- ἋΣ δ 
20 ρου γνώμης Kat μένειν και ἀπιέναι. εἷς O€ OY εἰπε; 14 
ἄπ ee e ’ “ 
προὸ ποιούμενος σπεύδειν ὡς τάχιστα πορεύεσθαι 
εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα, στρατηγοὺς μὲν ἑλέσθαι ἄλλους ὡς 
ἢ bs ib. a al 3 ld Ἂ ὃ 3 
τάχιστα, εἰ μὴ βούλεται Κλέαρχος ἀπάγειν" τα 
> , ᾽ν» , ε ,» a am » κ᾿ 
ἐπιτήδει᾽ ἀγοράζεσθαι --- ἢ δ᾽ ἀγορὰ ἦν ἐν τῷ βαρ- 
ἊΝ Ἂ 
25 βαρικῷ στρατεύματι ---καὶ συσκευάζεσθαι: ἐλθόντας 
‘ ἊἪ > ral val ε > ’ὔ 2% δὲ ‘ 
δὲ Κῦρον αἰτεῖν πλοῖα, ws ἀποπλέοιεν - ἐὰν O€ μὴ 
SSe a ε , > alas Vy διὰ φιλί 
Sq ταῦτα, ἡγεμόνα αἰτεῖν Κυρον ὄστις Oa Pb ias 


ANABASIS I. 3. 15-18, 15 


“Ὁ ᾽ > ’ 
Τ ἮΝ 
nS χώρας ἀπάξει. ἐὰν δὲ μηδὲ ἡγεμόνα διδῷ, συν- 
τάττεσθαι τὴν Taxi 7 = καὶ i 
Ἣν ταχίστην, πέμψαι δὲ καὶ προκαταλη- 
ομένου ] 
ψ μένο ε νὴ ἄκρα, ὁπως μὴ φθάσωσι μήτε Κῦρος 
μήτε οἱ Κίλικες καταλαβόν D ὺ 
TES, ὧν πολλοὺς καὶ ὰ 
δχρήματα ἔχομεν ἀνηρπακότε ὗ am me 
χρή spouse ς. οὗτος μὲν τοιαῦτα 
. “ > 
μετὰ 0€ TovToy Κλέαρχος εἶπε τοσοῦτον 


Clearchus refuses to take the lead. 


ε Ἂ al 
Ὡς μὲν στρατηγήσοντα ἐμὲ ταύτην τὴν OTpaTy-15 


,ὕ A ξ a 
γίαν μηδεὶς ὑμῶν λεγέτω- πολλὰ γὰρ ἐνορῶ δι᾽ ἃ 
ἐμοὶ τουτο οὐ ποιητέον - ὡς δὲ τῷ ἀνδρὶ ὃν ἂν ἕ 
τῳ ἀνὸρὶ ὃν ἄν ἕλησθε 


Ἢ e “ ‘ ’ 
10 πείσομαι ἢ δυνατὸν μάλιστα. ἵνα εἰδῆτε ὅτι καὶ ap- ἴ. « 
χεσθαι ἐπίσταμαι ὦ ὍΝ iil ih 
μαι ws τις καὶ ἄλλος μάλιστα avOpa- “**°* 


πων. 
Counter-proposals. 


\ rn ¥ > 
Mera τοῦτον ἄλλος ἀνέστη, ἐπιδεικνὺς μὲν Tv 16 


; ‘ 
εὐήθειαν τοῦ τὰ πλοῖα αἰτεῖν κελεύοντος, ὥσπε 
15 πάλιν τὸν σγόλον. Κύρου ποιουμένου, ἐπιδεικνὺς δὲ 
ὡς εὔηθες εἴη ἡγεμόνα αἰτεῖν παρὰ τούτου ᾧ λυμαι- 
νόμεθα τὴν πρᾶξιν. εἰ δὲ καὶ τῷ ἡγεμόνι πσυμίννν 
μεν ὃν av Κῦρος δῷ, τί κωλύει καὶ τὰ ἄκρα hur 
κελεύειν Κῦρον προκαταλαβεῖν ; ἐγὼ γὰ he 
_ ere 7p αβεῖν ; ἐγὼ yap ὀκνοίην 17 
20 μὲν ἂν εἰς τὰ πλοῖα ἐμβαίνειν ἃ ἡμῖν δοίη, μὴ ἡμᾶς 
ταῖς τρυήρεσι καταδύσῃ, φοβοίμην δ᾽ ἂν τῷ ἡγεμόνι 
ᾧ δοίη ἕπεσθαι, μὴ ἡμᾶς ἀγάγῃ ὅθεν οὖν ἔσται 
ἐξελθεῖν - βουλοίμην δ᾽ dv ἄκοντος ἀπιὼν Κύρου 
λαθεῖν αὐτὸν ἀπελθών - ὃ οὐ δυνατόν ἐστιν. Γ 
aK Σ ket us address ih directly to Cyrus.’’ 
a ἐγώ φημι ταῦτα μὲν φλυαρίας εἶναι: δοκεῖ 18 
έ μοι ἄνδρας ἐλθόντας πρὸς Κῦρον οἵτινες ἐπι- 
τήδειοι σὺν Κλεάρχῳ ἐρωτᾶν ἐκεῖνον τί βούλεται 


. " ἰ 


“ῦ 


| 

. | 

᾿ 
Ait 
i a 
ol 


——— Hi: 


CL. Dew - δα. 1, it 
ὶ a r 


ANABASIS I. 3. 19-21 and 4. 1. ANABASIS I. 4. 2-5 17 


¢ 14 ~ A ν ὃν" \ ε “ Φ χ my 
ἡμῖν χρῆσθαι - καὶ ἐὰν μὲν ἢ πρᾶξις ἦ παραπλησία 
ν μ Ν , > “Ὁ ~ , ν ᾽ν ] , “ 
οἵᾳπερ καὶ πρόσθεν ἐχρῆτο τοις ξένοις, ἕπεσθαι Kat στάδιον. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς δύο παρα 


ἡμᾶς καὶ μὴ κακίους εἶναι τῶν π 
4 . ἐὰν δὲ μείζων ἡ πρᾶξις τῆς πρόσθεν φαΐ; 19 λιν [ἐπὶ τῇ fren hiok 
αναβάντων - ἐὰν δὲ μείζων ἡ πράξις τῆς MPT”? την πόλιν (ἐπὶ τῇ θαλάττῃζοἰκουμένην, μεγάλην καὶ 
li t é 
ied > ἍΜ 3 a » “- 
δ εὐδαίμονα. ἐνταῦθα ἔμειναν ἡμέρας τρεῖς - καὶ Κύρῳ 2 
« 


Ful > Ἃ ‘ "il Γ Ἴ 
yas πέντε ἐπὶ τὸν Πύραμον ποταμόν, οὗ ἦν τὸ εὖρος -- 
" , ᾽ Ἢ 3 > Ὁ 
ρόσθεν τούτῳ συν- σάγγας πεντεκαίδεκα εἰς Ἰσσούς, τῆς Κιλικίας ἐσχά- 
j A 


Wh » / \ > / > a Δ 
ὄνηται καὶ ἐπιπονωτέρα καὶ ἐπικινδυνοτέρα, ἀξιοῦν ἢ 
’ὔ ε ~ ¥ λ θ ἤ ‘ φ λί ἀφ έ. yee " " a " 
πείσαντα ἡμᾶς ἄγειν ἢ πεισθέντα πρὸς φιλίαν apt παρῆσαν αἵ ἐκ Πελοποννήσου νῆες τριάκοντα καὶ 
bal Ν Δ a > Δ ᾽ν. / 

ναι" οὕτω yap Kal ἑπόμενοι ἂν φίλοι αὐτῷ καὶ πρὸ- β πέντε καὶ ἐπ᾽ αὐταῖς ναύαρχος Πυθαγόρας Λακε 
ν 5 / > “ a ν ee “i } 
θυμοι ἑποίμεθα καὶ ἀπιόντες ἀσφαλῶς av ἀπίοιμεν' δαιμόνιος. ἡγεῖτο δ᾽ αὐταῖς Ταμὼς Αἰγύπτιος ἐξ ‘ ἐκ > oa 
σ ν ἃ Ν κι ’ > a a ε ω ν“ ret Ni “Ὁ ΜΟΩΝΙ 
ὅ τι δ᾽ ἂν πρὸς ταῦτα λέγῃ ἀπαγγεῖλαι δεῦρο" ἡμᾶς Εφέσου, ἔχων ναῦς ἑτέρας Κύρου πέντε καὶ εἴκο- a 


108° ἀκούσαντας πρὸς ταῦτα βουλεύεσθαι. 


, Ὁ 3 / / “ ' Cn 
10 cu, αἷς ἐπολιόρκει Μίλητον. παρῆν δὲ καὶ Xepioo- 3 had ὦ 
x bean σεῦ 


" * ‘ . ᾿ 1 ἃ + / ΠΝ ἴω A 
The suggestion is adopted. Cyrus explains his plan an promises bos Λακεδαιμόνιος ἐπι τῶν νεων. μετάπεμπτος ὑπ " 


more pay. τω, 
Kul 


Ἔδοξε ταῦτα, καὶ ἄνδρας ἑλόμενοι σὺν Κλεάρχῳ 2 eink ee eat 
nm κι κ᾿ apa vpw. Qu Εε VPNneE @ ha \ / 
πέμπουσιν Ob ἠρώτων Κῦρον τὰ δόξαντα TH στρατιᾳ. i ‘ r Ψ Ἢ ὍΡΜΟΝ παρὰ τὴν Κύρου 
» vynv. ἐνταῦῦα Kal ο 4 ΄ 
ὁ δ᾽ ἀπεκρίνατο ὅτι ἀκούει ᾿Αβροκόμαν ἐχθρὸν ἂν- : =a ; ΤΥ Αβροκόμα μισθοφό- 
15 pou nves ἀποστάντες ἦλθον παρὰ Κῦρον terpa- 
+ 


Spa ἐπὶ τῷ Εὐφράτῃ ποταμῷ εἶναι, ἀπέχοντα δώδεκα Sonia d ' 
" a " LOL OTTALTQL καὶ συ "ΩΣ , 
is σταθμούς. πρὸς τοῦτον οὖν ἔφη βούλεσθαι ἐλθεῖν" | νεστρατεύοντο ἐπὶ βασιλέα. 
kl \ Ἔν»... \ δί ¥ 16 > ll Ὰ ν ν᾿» 

κἂν μὲν ἢ ἐκεῖ, τὴν δίκην ἔφη χρήξειν ἐπισειναι αὐτῷ, 

λ δὲ "ἢ | ane » ng ‘ A ὰ ΄ θ 

ἣν δὲ φεύγῃ: ἡμεῖς ἐκει πρὸς ταῦτα βουλευσόμεθα. 
᾿ἀγγέλλουσι τοῖς 21 


Advance. Safe passage of the ‘‘ Syrian Gateway.” 


3 “A > A 
Ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμὸν ἕνα παρασάγγας 4 


nn Ἢ / νιν ") tan 
ἀκούσαντες δὲ ταῦτα οἱ αἱρετοὶ πέντε ἐπὶ πύλας τῆς Κιλικίας καὶ τῆς Συρίας. ἦσαν ἀκτὰς). 
i Po. ς 


, “Ὁ ν κ - ἣ > bid ¥ | 
we στρατιώταις" τοις δὲ ὑποψία μὲν ἣν͵ οτι ἄγει προς 
p20 βασιλέα, ὅμως δὲ ἐδόκει ἕπεσθαι. προσαιτοῦσι δὲ 
“wh / ε \ ΄“Ὁ € ~ ε ld “ 
on *-Suubov: ὃ δὲ Κῦρος ὑπισχνεῖται ἡμιόλιον πᾶσι 
δώσειν οὗ πρότερον ἔφερον, ἀντὶ δαρεικοῦ τρία ἡμι- 
δαρεικὰ τοῦ μηνὸς τῷ στρατιώτῃ " ὅτι δὲ ἐπὶ βασιλέα 
¥ ὌΝν » o~ ¥ "ὃ \ ¥ ~ »ὝΜ 
ἄγοι οὐδὲ ἐνταῦθα ἤκουσεν οὐθεὶς ἐν γέ τῷ φανερῷ. 
Advance. Arrival of the ships at Issus with reinforcements. 
a , , 
25 «IV. Ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς δύο παρασάγ- 
΄ eA MU. , , © °° . 4 , 
yas δέκα ἐπὶ τὸν Vapor ποταμόν, ov ἣν τὸ εὕρος τρια 
, > “~ > il Ἃ ν ld 
πλέθρα. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμὸν ἕνα παρασάγ- 


δὲ ταῦτα δύο Tet it τὸ μὲν ἔ 5 δ τῇ 
av τείχη, Kal TO μὲν ἔσωθεν τὸ πρὸ τῆς 


20 Κιλικίας Συέν i ὶ f 7, TO 
| νεσις εἶχε καὶ Κιλίκων φυλακή, τὸ δὲ 
» Ἃ \ “ ld 
ἔξω TO πρὸ τῆς Συρίας βασιλέως ἐλέγετο φυλακὴ 
VA / Ἃ ’ \ ~ 
φυλάττειν.) διὰ μέσου δὲ pet τούτων ποταμὸς Κάρ- 
» > 7 , 
gos ὄνομα, εὖρος πλέθρου, ἅπαν δὲ τὸ μέσον τῶν ᾿" 
κ΄ > | V4 a tal c 
τειχῶν ἦσαν στάδιοι τρεῖς - Kal παρελθεῖν οὐκ ἦν =: 
on A \ ε , 
25 Bia: ἦν yap ἡ πάροδος στενὴ καὶ τὰ τείχη εἰς THY 
θάλατταν καθήκ ὕπερθεν δ᾽ 7 τραι ἠλί 
ἥκοντα; ὕπερθεν 0 ἦσαν πέτραι ἡλιί- 


~My, \ “a ν᾿ 
Baro: ἐπὶ δὲ τοῖς τείχεσιν ἀμφοτέροις ἐφειστήκεσαν 
rl ᾽ Ψ A w 
πύλαι. ταύτης ἕνεκα τῆς παρόδου Κῦρος τὰς vais 5 


Ei) νιν Tee £0 As. YoOorrrfotv HO TBE 
ry Cpe tal, 


ANABASIS | 4- 6-8. 


? 


/ 


had Sert-for a ἱ : ᾿ : 
μετεπέμψατο, ὅπως ὁπλίτας ἀποβιβάσειεν εἰσω Kal 


ἔξω τῶν πυλῶν βιασομένους τοὺς πολεμίους εἰ φυ- 
λάττοιεν ἐπὶ ταῖς Συρίαις πύλαις, ὅπερ ᾧετο ποιήσειν 
ὁ Κῦρος τὸν ᾿Αβροκόμαν, ἔχοντα πολὺ στράτευμα. 
δ᾽Αβροκόμας δὲ οὐ τοῦτ᾽ ἐποίησεν, ἀλλ ἐπεὶ ἤκουσε 
Κῦρον ἐν Κιλικίᾳ ὄντα, ἀναστρέψας ἐκ Φοινίκης παρὰ 
βασιλέα ἀπήλαυνεν, ἔχων, ὡς ἐλέγετο. τριάκοντα μυ- 
ριάδας στρατιᾶς. 
Advance. Xenias and Pasion abandon the expedition. 
Ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει διὰ Συρίας σταθμὸν ἕνα παρα- 
τοσάγγας πέντε εἰς Μυρίανδον, πόλιν οἰκουμένην ὑπὸ 


“ > , > > ‘ , 
Φοινίκων ἐπὶ τῇ θαλάττῃ - ἐμπόριον δ᾽ ἦν τὸ χωρίον 


, ᾽ au S| ae 
καὶ ὥρμουν αὐτόθι ὁλκάδες πολλαί. ἐνταῦθ᾽ ἔμειναν 7 


ε 


ἡμέρας ἑπτά. καὶ Ξενίας ὁ ᾿Αρκὰς καὶ Πασίων ὁ 
. Μεγαρεὺς ἐμβάντες εἰς πλοῖον καὶ τὰ πλείστου ἄξια 
15 ἐνθέμενοι ἀπέπλευσαν, ὡς μὲν τοῖς πλείστοις ἐδόκουν, 
φιλοτιμηθέντες ὅτι τοὺς στρατιώτας αὐτῶν τοὺς παρὰ 
Κλέαρχον ἀπελθόντας ὡς ἀπιόντας εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα 
πάλιν καὶ οὐ πρὸς βασιλέα εἴα Κῦρος τὸν Κλέαρχον 
ἔχειν. ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἦσαν ἀφανεῖς, διῆλθε λόγος ὅτι Star 
20 κοι αὐτοὺς Κῦρος τριήρεσι - καὶ οἱ μὲν ηὔχοντο ὡς 
δειλοὺς ὄντας αὐτοὺς ληφθῆναι, οἱ δ᾽ ᾧκτέειρον εἰ 
ἁλώσοιντο. 
Cyrus refuses to pursue the deserters. The Greeks are pleased. 
Κῦρος δὲ συγκαλέσας τοὺς στρατηγοὺς hcg 
᾿Απολελοίπασιν ἡμᾶς Ξενίας καὶ Πασίων. ἀλλ εὖ 
a5 γε μέντοι ἐπιστάσθων ὅτι οὔτε ἀποδεδράκασιν, οἶδα 
γὰρ ὅπῃ οἴχονται οὔτε ἀποπεφεύγασιν, ἔχω γὰρ 
τριήρεις ὦστε ἑλεῖν τὸ ἐκείνων πλοῖον. ἄλλα μὰ 


ANABASIS I. 4. 9.11. 


\ \ > ¥ > Ν 4 Ὁ» » “Ὁ > ‘ 
τοὺς θεοὺς οὐκ ἔγωγε αὐτοὺς διώξω, οὐδ᾽ ἐρεῖ οὐδεὶς 
ὡς ἐγὼ ἕως μὲν ἂν παρῇ τις χρῶμαι, ἐπειδὰν δὲ 
3 a Ν \ > ‘ “ “~ 
ἀπιέναι βούληται, συλλαβὼν καὶ αὐτοὺς κακὼς TOLW 

i)" in," ll by ly > Ἃ pe > / ν 
καὶ τὰ χρήματα ἀποσυλῶ. ἀλλὰ ἰόντων, εἰδότες ὅτι 

“ἢ ~ 

5 κακίους εἰσὶ περὶ ἡμᾶς ἢ ἡμεῖς περὶ ἐκείνους. KaiTOL 
ἔχω γε αὐτῶν καὶ τέκνα καὶ γυναῖκας ἐν Τράλλεσι 
rl > > ON al ᾿ »* > > 
φρουρούμενα: ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ τούτων στερήσονται; ἀλλ 

> Ἂ Υ͂ Ψ ‘ Me. > “~ 
ἀπολήψονται τῆς πρόσθεν ἕνεκα περὶ ἐμὲ ἀρετῆς. 

ε ,. 


" a“ > ε MM ¥ \ 
καὶ ὁ μὲν ταῦτα εἶπεν: οἱ δὲ Ἕλληνες, εἴ τις Kal 
3 , iy ἣ ‘ > , > , I. 

10 ἀθυμότερος ἣν πρὸς τὴν ἀνάβασιν, ἀκούοντες τὴν 


ad > ‘ ga \ k “ 
Κύρου ἀρετὴν ἥδιον καὶ προθυμότερον συνεπορεύ-. 


ΟΡΤΟ. 


υὔυνννο 


Advance to Thapsacus on the Euphrates. 


an κι , 
Mera ταῦτα Κῦρος ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς τέτταρας 
παρασάγγας εἴκοσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Χάλον ποταμόν, ὄντα 
SU , , > 3 ’ , Nie 
15TO εὖρος πλέθρου, πλήρη δ᾽ ἰχθύων μεγάλων καὶ 


ΤῊ μ΄ ἃ ε 4 ‘ 5 ἢ i. > ~ 
πραέων, οὗς οἱ Σύροι θεοὺς ἐνόμιζον καὶ ἀδικεῖν 
i ἣν " , Ὺ» 


ν ᾿ | 
ϑιώδομαι 
wil ᾿ 1 


yr if 
Kom 


1.» ¥ Oe Ν ᾿ ἘΣ δὲ A 3 Φ 
οὐκ εἴων, οὐδὲ τὰς περιστεράς. αἱ δὲ κώμαι ἐν αἷς -. 

τ» ’ , > > 4 , 
ἐσκήνουν Παρυσάτιδος ἦσαν εἰς ζώνην δεδομέναι. 
ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς πέντε παρασάγγας τρι-1ο 
20 ἄκοντα ἐπὶ τὰς πηγὰς τοῦ Δάρδατος ποταμοῦ, οὗ τὸ 
εὖρος πλέθρου. ἐνταῦθα ἦσαν τὰ Βελέσυος βασίλεια - ν “| 
τοῦ Συρίας ἄρξαντος; καὶ παράδεισος πάνυ μέγας καὶ “ὁ 


» 4 9 4 4 
καλός, ἔχων πάντα ὅσα ὧραι φύουσι. 


Κῦρος δ᾽ 


> > Ἀ I” 3 aa! 
αὐτὸν ἐξέκοψε καὶ Ta βασίλεια κατέκαυσεν. ἐντεῦθεν 11 


.ν" 2 ,» | Ν My “4 , 

25 ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς τρεῖς παρασάγγας πεντεκαίδεκα 
Ἄν Ἂ > ld Υ͂ μή ‘ εν , 
ἐπὶ τὸν Ἑὐφράτην ποταμόν, ovTa τὸ εὖρος τεττάρων 

/ ip. / me ie ϑ ~ , ‘ 3 , 
σταδίων: καὶ πόλις αὐτόθι κεῖτο μεγάλη καὶ evdai- 


“ ἊΨ 3 a ¥ ε lq / " 
μων Θάψακος ὄνομα. ἐνταῦθα ἔμεινεν ἡμέρας πέντε, 


% > ἐν 
“Ἔ" A ¢ TEENY NT ove: 1 MAE 
‘ 


) 


ξ f / 


m «. »» | D ἊΝ , | 

Ae ᾿ i iki | Π μὲ 4 ll yer Ἂ γι "δ᾽ θ ‘ Τ' 

* f “ται. ἄντοις ; Ι will Sp WS μόνοις Wtietera tore rd ουσεται 
AN bw fi 


ANABAS Tg. ὅδ, Ὁ 21 


aRenvteta't ere 


ANABASIS I. 4. 12-15. 


The real object of the expedition is disclosed. The soldiers are 
angry. Promises of ae 


Kal Κῦρος μεταπεμψάμενος τοὺς στρατηγοὺς τῶν 
aly 2 ¥ ν εο. εν » Ν , 
νυ ἔλεγεν ὅτι ἡ ὁδὸς ἔσοιτο πρὸς βασιλέα 


νειν, καὶ ὡς προθυμοτάτοις οὖσιν ὑμῖν χάριν εἴσεται 
Κῦρος καὶ ἀποδώσει. ἐπίσταται δ᾽ εἴ τις καὶ ἄλλος - 
ἣν δὲ ἀποψηφίσωνται οἱ ἄλλοι, ἄπιμεν μὲν ἅπαντες 
μέγαν. εἰς Βαβυλώνα- καὶ κελεύει αὐτοὺς λέγειν ταῦ- τοὔμπαλιν, ὑμῖν δὲ ὡς μόνοις πειθομένοις. πιστοτά- 
οὐ δδιω ὅτοις χρήσεται καὶ εἰς φρούρια καὶ εἰς λοχαγίας, καὶ | 

£\$3 ἄλλου οὗτινος av δέησθε οἶδα ὅτι ὡς φίλοι τεύξεσθε 
Κύρου. 


τα τοῖς στρατιώταις καὶ ἀναπείθειν ἕπεσθαι. 
5 ποιήσαντες ἐκκλησίαν ἀπήγγελλον ταῦτα" 
στρατιῶται ἐχαλέπαινον. τοῖς στρατηγοῖς καὶ the 
᾿ς σαν αὐτοὺς πάλαι ταῦτ᾽ εἰδότας κρύπτειν, καὶ οὐκ 
πα έφασαν ἰέναι ἐὰν μή τις αὐτοῖς χρήματα διδῷ, 
ποις ὥσπερ τοῖς προτέροις μετὰ Κύρου ἀναβᾶσᾳ καὶ 
“Ἰοταῦτα οὐκ ἐπὶ μάχην ἰόντων, ἀλλὰ καλοῦντος τοῦ «ἐν»: 
πατρὸς Κῦρον. ταῦτα ob στρατηγοὶ Κύρῳ dry 13 
γὴν ὁ δ᾽ uma Xero ἀνδρὶ ἑκάστῳ δώσειν πέντε 
ἀργυρίου μνᾶς, ἐπὴν εἰ 


" μισθὸν ἐντελῆ μέχρι ἂν καταστήσῃ τοὺς Ἕλληνας 
τὸ μὲν δὴ πολὺ τοῦ Ἑλληνικοῦ 


᾿Ακούσαντες ταῦτα ἐπείθοντο καὶ διέβησαν πρὶν 16 : 
τοὺς ἄλλους dmoxpwacGat. 


ow τὸ 


Κῦρος δ᾽ ἐπεὶ ἤσθετο «᾿, os 
10 διαβεβηκότας, ἥσθη τε καὶ τῷ στρατεύματι πέμψας *, i τὴς τὰ 
Γλοῦν εἶπεν - Ἐγὼ μέν, ὦ ἄνδρες, ἤδη ὑ ὑμᾶς ἐπαινῶ: ss 
ὅπως δὲ Kal ὑμεῖς ἐμὲ ἐπαινέσετε ἐμοὶ μελήσει, ἢ 
μηκέτι με Κῦρον νομίζετε. οἱ μὲν δὴ στρατιῶται ἐν 17 
ἐλπίσι μεγάλαις ὄντες ηὔχοντο αὐτὸν εὐτυχῆσαι, 
15 Μένωνι δὲ καὶ Sapa ἐλέγετο πέμψαι μεγαλοπρεπῶς. 


15 εἰς Ἰωνίαν πάλιν. Passage of the Euphrates, and advance to the Araxes. 


ἊΜ Ἀ ν᾽ Ll 
Ταῦτα δὲ ποιήσας διέβαινε: συνείπετο δὲ καὶ τὸ 


ν > ’» 
οὕτως ἐπείσθη. 


Clever device of Menon to win the favor of Cyrus. 
Μένων δὲ πρὶν δῆλον εἶναι τί ποιησονστα οἱ ἄλλοι 
στρατιῶται, πότερον ἕψονται Κύρῳ ἡ οὔ, συνέλεξε τὸ 
αὑτοῦ στράτευμα χωρὶς τῶν ἄλλων καὶ ἔλεξε τάδε. 


{:|,30 “AvOpes, € ἐάν μοι πεισθῆτε, οὔτε κινδυνεύσαντες οὕτε 14 


πονήσαντες τῶν ἄλλων ᾿ πλέον προτιμήσεσθε στρα- 


τιωτῶν ὑπὸ Κύρου. τί οὖν κελεύω ποιῆσαι; νῦν 


δεῖται Κῦρος ἕπεσθαι τοὺς Ἕλληνας ἐπὶ βασιλέα - 
ρ n 


ἊΝ , >, aA νΥ AEE , 
ἄλλο στράτευμα αὐτῷ ἅπαν. καὶ τῶν διαβαινόντων 
‘ Is. > h, > ἴω ἴω 
τὸν ποταμὸν οὐδεὶς ἐβρέχθη ἀνωτέρω τῶν μαστῶν 


ὑπὸ τοῦ τυ. Ι οἱ δὲ Θαψακηνοὶ ἔλεγον ὅτι οὐ-18 


τότε, ἀλλὰ πλοίοις, ἃ τότε ᾿Αβροκόμας προϊὼν κατέ. bit” 


ἐδόκει δὴ θεῖον εἶναι 
bs o ε ω 
καὶ σαφώς ὑποχωρῆσαι τὸν ποταμὸν Κύρῳ ὡς βασι- 


καυσεν, ἵνα μὴ Κῦρος διαβῇ. 


λεύσοντι. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει διὰ τῆς Συρίας σταθ- 19 


20 πώποθ᾽ οὗτος 6 ποταμὸς διαβατὸς γένοιτο πεζῇ εἶ μὴ Fo ᾿ 
b 


ἐγὼ οὖν φημι ὑμᾶς χρῆναι διαβῆναι τὸν Εὐφράτην 25 μοὺς ἐννέα παρασάγγας πεντήκοντα" 


ν Ἂν πόγαμὸν πρὶν δῆλον εἶναι ὅ τι οἱ ἄλλοι Ἕλληνες 


ἀποκρινοῦνται ᾿'Κῦρφ. ἣν μὲν γὰρ ψηφίσωνται ἕπε- 15 
σθαι, ὑμεῖς δόξετε αἴτιοι εἶναι ἄρξαντες τοῦ dia Bai- 


A " ~ 
καὶ ἀφικνοῦν- 


Ν \ >A , , 3 κι > κι 
TAL προς TOV ράξην iyi ἐνταῦθα nag K@ [LOL 


πολλχαὶ μεσταὶ σίτου καὶ οἴνου. ἐνταῦθα ἔμειναν ᾿ 


ἡμέρας τρεῖς καὶ ἐπεσιτίσαντο. 


ANABASIS I. 5. 1-4. 


Advance through the desert of Arabia. The cavalry go hunting. 

V. Ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει διὰ τῆς ᾿Αραβίας, τὸν Εὐ- 1 
φράτην ποταμὸν ἐν δεξιᾷ ἔχων, σταθμοὺς ἐρήμους 
πέντε παρασάγγας τριάκοντα καὶ πέντε. ἐν τούτῳ δὲ 

o , 5" Ἀ ΠῚ ἴω δί bid ε λὲ ν θ “dll 
τῷ τόπῳ ἦν μὲν ἡ γῆ πεδίον aay ὁμαλες ὥσπερ θά 

δλαττα, ἀψινθίου δὲ πλῆρες " εἰ δέ τι καὶ ἄλλο ἐνῆν 
.ν “ἃ “ ν > " - 7 > ’ 
ὕλης ἢ καλάμου; ἀπαντα σαν εὐώδη ὠσπερ ἀρώματα" 

Ld 3 > Ν 2) , ‘ ~ ἊΜ 
δένδρον ὃ οὐδὲν ἐνῆν, θηρία δὲ παντοια; πλεῖστοι 2 
3, ll ‘ \ i. ε a 2 ~ 
ὄνοι ἄγριοι; πολλαὶ δὲ στρουθοὶ αἱ μεγάλαι" ἐνῆσαν 

Ἂ ᾿». , ἡ Ἃ “ “ ἣ in," ’ ε 
δὲ καὶ ὠτίδες καὶ δορκάδες - ταῦτα δὲ τὰ θηρία ov 
ε ΜᾺ ee ‘dp »ὕ, \ ε Ν Ν 3 , ’ 

10 ἱππεῖς ἐνίοτε ἐδίωκον. καὶ οἱ μὲν OVOL, ἐπεὶ TLS διώ- - 

᾿ “ΨΖ a Cay) 
κοι, προδραμόντες͵ ἕστασαν" πολὺ γὰρ τῶν ἵππων 
¥ ων ‘ f > ‘ Ud ΕΥ 
ἔτρεχον θᾶττον - καὶ πάλιν, ἐπεὶ πλησιάζοιεν οἱ ὑπποι; 

.ν ν > , ‘ 5 5 A ΠῚ Ν , 
ταὐτὸν ἐποίουν, καὶ οὐκ ἦν λαβεῖν εἰ μὴ διαστάντες 
ε ε o " / A \ ᾿ Ὁ 

οἱ ἱππεῖς θηρῷεν διαδεχόμενοι. τὰ δὲ κρέα τῶν 


τ ἁλισκομένων͵ ἦν παραπλήσια τοῖς ἐλαφείοις, ἁπαλώ- 
τερα δέ. στρουθὸν δὲ οὐδεὶς ἔλαβεν οἱ δὲ διώξαν- 3 
τες τῶν ἱππέων ταχὺ ἐπαύοντο" πολὺ γὰρ ἀπέσπα ᾿ 
φεύγουσα; τοῖς μὲν ποσὶ δρόμῳ, ταῖς δὲ πτέρυξιν +} 


Ν Ψ ¢ / ; Ν \ ey Ἂ .». 
αἴρουσα ὥσπερ ἱστίῳ χρωμένη. τὰς δὲ ὠτίδας ἂν 
20 τις ταχὺ ἀνιστῇ ἔστι λαμβάνειν: πέτονται γὰρ βραχὺ 
ὥσπερ πέρδικες καὶ ταχὺ ἀπαγορεύουσι. τὰ δὲ κρέα 
αὐτῶν ἥδιστα ἦν. 
March to Corsote and Pylae. Cattle perish in the desert. 
The supply of grain fails. 


Πορευόμενοι δὲ διὰ ταύτης τῆς χώρας ἀφικνοῦνται 4 
ἐπὶ τὸν Μάσκαν ποταμόν; τὸ εὖρος πλεθριαῖον. 
κ᾿ σι > , AN, , ” > 4. Δ 
ο5 ἐνταῦθα ἦν πόλις ἐρήμη, μεγάλη, ὄνομα δ᾽ αὐτῃ 
Κορσωτή᾽ περιερρεῖτο δ᾽ αὕτη ὑπὸ τοῦ Μάσκᾷ 
κύκλῳ. ἐνταῦθ᾽ ἔμειναν ἡμέρας τρεῖς καὶ ἐπεσιτί- 


δεν. ἃ 


ὧπν Rielle Ea A Mea © 


ἀν “tes awayerevery 
Ay ζ΄, ι. 


, 
υνν ν᾿" ἡ 
p ae ἡ as oF 
ἢ! ἐν}. aA Ne ὃ ἐγὸς ον δυὸ εν 


! 


ANABASIS I. 5. 5-8, 23 


σαντο. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς ἐρήμους τρεισ- ὅ 
καίδεκα παρασάγγας ἐνενήκοντα τὸν Evdparnv 
ποταμὸν ἐν δεξιᾷ ἔχων, καὶ ἀφικνεῖται ἐπὶ Πύλας. 
ἐν τούτοις τοῖς σταθμοῖς πολλὰ τῶν ὑποζυγίων ἀπώ- 
5 Aero ὑπὸ λιμοῦ: οὐ γὰρ ἦν χόρτος οὐδὲ ἄλλο οὐδὲν 
δένδρον, ἀλλὰ ψιλὴ ἣν ἅπασα ἡ χώρα. οἱ δὲ ἐνοι- 
κοῦντες ὄνους ἀλέτας παρὰ τὸν ποταμὸν ὀρύττοντες 
καὶ ποιοῦντες εἰς Βαβυλῶνα ἦγον καὶ ἐπώλουν καὶ 
ἀνταγοράζοντες σῖτον ἔζων. τὸ δὲ στράτευμα ὃ σῖτος 
10 ἐπέλιπε, καὶ πρίασθαι οὐκ Hv εἰ μὴ ἐν τῇ Λυδίᾳ 
ἀγορῷ ἐν τῷ Κύρου βαρβαρικῷ, τὴν καπίθην ἀλζόζωνν 
ἢ ἀλφίτων τεττάρων σίγλων. 6 δὲ σίγλος δύναται 
ἑπτὰ ὀβολοὺς καὶ ἡμιωβόλιον ᾿Αττικούς - ἡ δὲ καπίθ 
δύο χοίνικας ᾿Αττικὰς ἐχώρει. κρέα οὖν ἐσθίοντες οἱ 
15 στρατιῶται διεγίγνοντο. ἦν δὲ τούτων τῶν σταθμῶν 
οὗς πάνυ μακροὺς ἤλαυνεν, ὁπότε ἢ πρὸς ὕδωρ βού- 
λοιτο διατελέσαι ἢ πρὸς χιλόν. 


Splendid discipline of the Persian nobles. 

Kai δή ποτε στενοχωρίας καὶ πηλοῦ φανέντος 
ταῖς ἁμάξαις δυσπορεύτου, ἐπέστη ὁ Κῦρος σὺν τοῖς 
20 περὶ αὐτὸν ἀρίστοις καὶ εὐδαιμονεστάτοις καὶ ἔταξε 
Γλοῦν καὶ Πίγρητα λαβόντας τοῦ βαρβαρικοῦ στρα- 
τοῦ συνεκβιβάζειν τὰς ἁμάξας. ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἐδόκουν 

αὐτῷ σχολαίως ποιεῖν, ὥσπερ ὀργῇ ἐκέ ὺ 
περὶ αὐτὸν Πέρσας νῶν anata alae Sid 
ερὶ αὖτ ισπεῦσαι 
ο"τὰς ἁμάξας. ἔνθα δὴ μέρος τι τῆς εὐταξίας ἣν θεά- 
σασθαι- ῥίψαντες γὰρ τοὺς πορφυροῦς Kavdus ὅπου 
ἔτυχεν ἕκαστος ἑστηκώς, ἵεντο ὥσπερ ἂν δράμοι τις 
περὶ νίκης καὶ μάλα κατὰ πρανοῦς γηλόφου, ἔχοντες 


24 ANABASIS I. 5. 9-11. 


τούς τε πολυτελεῖς χιτῶνας Kal Tas ποικίλας ἀναξυ- 
ρίδας, ἔνιοι δὲ καὶ στρεπτοὺς περὶ τοῖς τραχήλοις 
καὶ ψέλια περὶ ταῖς χερσίν - εὐθὺς δὲ σὺν τούτοις 
εἰσπηδήσαντες εἰς τὸν πηλὸν θᾶττον ἢ ὡς τις ἂν weETO 

5 μετεώρους ἐξεκόμισαν τὰς ἁμάξας. 

Rapidity of the march explained. Traffic with Charmande. 

Td δὲ σύμπαν δῆλος ἦν Κῦρος ὡς σπεύδων πᾶσαν 


hn 


"1 ν , Ἂν 
“τὴν ὁδὸν καὶ οὐ διατρίβων ὅπου μὴ ἐπισιτισμοὺυ ἐνεκα 


> “ bd 
ἢ Twos ἄλλου ἀναγκαίου ἐκαθέζετο, νομίζων, ὅσῳ 
\ μ᾿ »ν vA > / λ “ 
μὲν θᾶττον ἔλθοι, τοσούτῳ ἀπαρασκενοτέρῳ βασιλεὶ 
“Ἢ ν \ Υ͂ ‘ Ld 
τὸμαχεῖσθαι, ὅσῳ δὲ σχολαίτερον, τοσούτῳ πλέον 
»Ἅ \ ~ > 
συναγείρεσθαι βασιλεῖ στράτευμα. καὶ συνιδεῖν ὃ 
~ ἴω Ld > \ / 
ἣν τῷ προσέχοντι Tov νοῦν ἡ βασιλέως ἀρχὴ πλήθει 
: Ν > A ‘ 
μὲν χώρας καὶ ἀνθρώπων ἰσχυρὰ οὖσα, τοῖς δὲ 
~ ἴω ~ Ih all 
μήκεσι τῶν ὁδῶν καὶ τῷ διεσπάσθαι τὰς δυνάμεις 


ἴτοιρ ἀσθενὴς εἴ τις διὰ ταχέων τὸν πόλεμον ἐποιεῖτο. 
i πέραν δὲ τοῦ Εὐφράτου ποταμοῦ κατὰ τοὺς ἐρήμους 10 
σταθμοὺς ἦν πόλις εὐδαίμων καὶ μεγάλη, ὄνομα δὲ 
Χαρμάνδη - ἐκ ταύτης οἱ στρατιῶται ἠγόραζον τὰ 
Ht Anion- ἀχιτήδεια, σχεδίαις διαβαίνοντες ὧδε. διφθέρας ἃς 


| Be 2.2 » i 
3 mK « 


Ts 


ῦ . f, 


ἄπουν 


“ήωι ny 


> r V4 Hl A " x Τ , ͵ , 5 
90 εἶχον στεγάσματα ᾿ἐπίμπλασαν χόρτου κούφου, εἶτα 
͵ nw ξε . ν ~ , 
συνῆγον Kal συνέσπων, ὡς μὴ ἅπτεσθαι τῆς κάρφης 
hy hy Ly / ὃ ᾽ ὃ “ Ἂ 
τὸ ὕδωρ ἐπὶ τούτων διέβαινον καὶ ἐλάμβανον τὰ 
> il ; I a “~ 
ἐπιτήδεια, οἶνόν Te ἐκ τῆς βαλάνου πεποιημένον τῆς 
ἀπὸ τοῦ φοίνικος καὶ σῖτον μελίνης - τοῦτο γὰρ ἣν 
95 ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ πλεῖστον. 
A quarrel at the ford. Clearchus attacked. 


στρατιωτῶν καὶ τῶν Κλεάρχου, ὁ Κλέαρχος κρίνας 


~ ~ wl , 
᾿Αμφιλεξάντων δέ τι ἐνταῦθα τῶν τε τοῦ Μένωνος 11 


ANABASIS I. 5, 12-14, 25 


ἀδικεῖν τὸν τοῦ Μένωνος πληγὰς ἐνέβαλεν - ὁ δὲ 
3 \ A A ε ~ al ¥ > 4 
ἐλθὼν πρὸς τὸ ἑαυτοῦ στράτευμα ἔλεγεν - ἀκούσαν- 
τες δὲ οἱ στρατιῶται ἐχαλέπαινον καὶ ὠργίζοντο 
> A van) ,ὔ : ἴω \ + AMM A κα , 4 
ἰσχυρὼς TH Κλεάρχῳ. Τῇ δὲ αὐτῃ ἡμέρᾳ Κλέαρχος 12 
ὅ ἐλθὼν ἐπὶ τὴν διάβασιν τοῦ ποταμοῦ καὶ ἐκεῖ κατα- 
/ ~ > ᾽ν > ᾽ ἊΝ Ἂ ε ἴω 
σκεψάμενος τὴν ἀγορὰν ἀφιππεύει ἐπὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ 
σκηνὴν διὰ τοῦ Μένωνος στρατεύματος σὺν ὀλίγοις 
A | > ᾽ “ \ » e 3 > = 
τοῖς περὶ αὐτόν - Κῦρος δὲ οὔπω ἧκεν, ἀλλ᾽ ἔτι προσ- 
ἤλαυνε: τῶν δὲ Μένωνος στρατιωτῶν ξύλα σχίζων 
ε 5 , , Y “AM A )ὴ 
10TUS ὡς εἶδε Κλέαρχον διελαύνοντα, ἵησι τῇ ἀξίνῃ: 


ἴω ν ᾿ 
καὶ οὗτος μὲν αὐτοῦ ἥμαρτεν - ἄλλος δὲ λίθῳ ' καὶ !. 


ἄλλος, εἶτα πολλοί, κραυγῆς γενομένης. 


Clearchus advances with his horse against Menon’s troops. 
Proxenus interposes. 


ε Ἁ vl > x ε ω ad Ἀ 
Ο δὲ καταφεύγει εἰς τὸ ἑαυτοῦ στράτευμα, καὶ 13 
ΔΝ ld > a. \ i, \ ε , 
εὐθὺς παραγγέλλει εἰς τὰ ὅπλα - καὶ τοὺς μὲν ὁπλίτας 
ι αὐτοῦ ἐκέλευσε μεῖναι τὰς ἀσπίδας πρὸς τὰ γόνατα 
»") , ἃ δὲ ‘ Ἃ o ‘ hy" e , 
θέντας, αὐτὸς δὲ λαβὼν τοὺς Θρᾷκας καὶ τοὺς ἱππέας 
3 π᾿ - aA 
ol ἦσαν αὐτῷ ἐν τῷ στρατεύματι πλείους ἢ τετταρά- 
4 δὲ ε N “ ly ν AA 
κοντα — τούτων O€ οἱ πλεῖστοι Θρᾷκες ---ἥλαυνεν ἐπὶ 
Ἂ / .ν » » ’ὔ 3 ~ \ al eli 
τοὺς Μένωνος, wot ἐκείνους ἐκπεπλῆχθαι καὶ αὐτὸν 
ra 4 » + lly, Ms ε Ν »ν 
20 Μένωνα, καὶ τρέχειν ἐπὶ τὰ ὁπλα: of δὲ καὶ ἔστασαν - 
ε δὲ / 5: ¥ 
ὁ δὲ IIpogevos — ἔτυχε 14 
¥ ᾽ν \ νυ ~ 
yap ὕστερος προσιὼν καὶ τάξις αὐτῷ ἑπομένη τῶν 


ἀποροῦντες τῷ πράγματι. 


ε a 92 λ > 9 \ , 5 , ¥ 
omhirav — εὐθὺς οὖν εἰς τὸ μέσον ἀμφοτέρων ἄγων 
» Ν ΄ν ἣ 25 a ‘a , Ἅ “ 
ἔθετο τὰ ὅπλα καὶ ἐδεῖτο τοῦ Κλεάρχου μὴ ποιεῖν 
~ ε >) 2 | ν > Δ 3 - - 
2ravTa. ὁ δ᾽ ἐχαλέπαινεν ὅτι αὐτοῦ ὀλίγου δεήσαν- 
τος καταλευσθῆναι πράως λέγοι τὸ αὑτοῦ πάθος, 
> , / lll, > ψ. id + AN sll 
ἐκέλευσέ TE αὐτὸν EK τοῦ μέσου ἐξίστασθαι. 


« 
Vo 


, 


.. 


' Ἤ κω 
( ne aa 


ANABASIS I. 5. 15-17 and 6. 1-2. 


Cyrus comes up and quickly stops the quarrel. 


Ἔν τούτῳ δὲ ἐπήει καὶ Κῦρος καὶ ἐπύθετο 7015 
~ Or δ᾽ » ‘ Ν 3 Ἂ ~ b, 
πρᾶγμα. εὐθὺς ὃ ἔλαβε τὰ παλτὰ εἰς Tas χεῖρας Kal 


‘ ἊΜ ll ἊΝ li νὴ > ¢ 3 Ἃ 
σὺν τοῖς παρουσι τῶν πιστῶν ἧκεν ἐλαύνων εἰς TO 


μέσον, καὶ λέγει τάδε. Κλέαρχε καὶ Πρόξενε καὶ 0116 


ὅ ἄλλοι οἱ παρόντες Ἕλληνες, οὐκ ἴστε ὅ τι ποιεῖτε. εἰ 
γάρ τινα ἀλλήλοις μάχην συνάψετε, νομίζετε ἐν τῇδε 
τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐμέ τε κατακεκόψεσθαι καὶ ὑμᾶς οὐ πολὺ 
ἐμοῦ ὕστερον - κακῶς γὰρ τῶν ἡμετέρων ἐχόντων 
πάντες οὗτοι οὗς ὁρᾶτε βάρβαροι πολεμιώτεροι ἡμῖν 


» ἊΜ ‘ ~~ m= " vA di 
10 ἔσονται τῶν παρὰ βασιλεῖ οντων. ἀκούσας TaVTA17 


ε - ? c wl NA ’ i, Υ͂ 2 / 
ὁ Κλέαρχος ἐν ἑαυτῷ ἐγένετο: Kal παυσάμενοι ἀμφό- 
τεροι κατὰ χώραν ἔθεντο τὰ ὅπλα. 
Treacherous proposal of Orontas. 
VI. Ἐντεῦθεν προϊόντων ἐφαίνετο ἴχνη ἵππων Kat 
, SAA > > ε , ε ΄ 
κόπρος’ εἰκάζετο δ᾽ εἶναι ὁ στίβος ὡς δισχιλίων 
τὸ ἵππων. οὗτοι epee: ἔκαον Kal χιλὸν καὶ εἴ τι 
Υ 
ἄλλο χρήσιμον ἦν. ᾽Ορόντας δὲ Πέρσης ἀνήρ, γένει 
τε προσήκων βασιλεῖ καὶ τὰ πολέμια λεγόμενος ἐν 
ῃ ~ > , ~ > ᾿ , i, ᾽ 
τοῖς ἀρίστοις Περσῶν, ἐπιβουλεύει Κύρῳ, καὶ πρόσθεν 
/ Ἃ Nl ιν > > 
πολεμήσας, καταλλαγεὶς δέ. οὗτος Κύρῳ εἶπεν, εἰ 
90 αὐτῷ δοίη ἱππέας χιλίους, ὅτι τοὺς προκατακάοντας 
ε V4 Ἅ Cl “Δ 3 ὃ i a -~ 
ἱππέας ἢ κατακάνοι ἂν evedpevoas ἢ ζώντας πολ- 
λοὺς αὐτῶν av ἕλοι καὶ κωλύσειε τοῦ κάειν ἐπιόντας. 
ἃ ν ᾽ / > 7 > “ 
καὶ ποιήσειεν ὦστε μήποτε δύνασθαι αὐτοὺς ἰδόντας 
τὸ Κύρου στράτευμα βασιλεῖ διαγγεῖλαι. τῷ δὲ 
, > , a“ 2a 7 >) 7 > ‘ 
25 Κύρῳ ἀκούσαντι ταῦτα ἐδόκει ὠφέλιμα εἶναι, Kal 
> ᾿ lly, A / > « 4 »»Ἅ 
ἐκέλευσεν αὐτὸν λαμβάνειν μέρος παρ᾽ ἑκάστου τῶν 


ἡγεμόνων. 


ANABASIS I. 6. 38. 27 


The traitor betrayed, and brought to trial. 

Ὁ δ᾽ Ὀρόντας νομίσας ἑτοίμους εἶναι αὑτῷ τοὺς 3 
ἱππέας γράφει ἐπιστολὴν παρὰ βασιλέα ὅτι ἥξοι 
ἔχων ἱππέας ὡς av δύνηται πλείστους - ἀλλὰ φράσαι 
τοῖς ἑαυτοῦ ἱππεῦσιν ἐκέλευεν ὡς φίλιον αὐτὸν ὑπο 

5 δέχεσθαι. | ἐνῆν δὲ ἐν τῇ ἐπιστολῇ καὶ τῆς πρόσθεν 
φιλίας ὑπομνήματα καὶ πίστεως. ταύτην τὴν ἐπι- 
στολὴν δίδωσι πιστῷ ἀνδρί, ὡς wero: ὁ δὲ λαβὼν 
Κύρῳ δίδωσιν. ἀναγνοὺς δὲ αὐτὴν ὁ Κῦρος συλλαμ- 4 
βάνει ᾽Ορόνταν, καὶ συγκαλεῖ εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ σκηνὴν 

10 Πέρσας τοὺς ἀρίστους τῶν περὶ αὐτὸν ἑπτά, καὶ τοὺς 
τῶν Ἑλλήνων στρατηγοὺς ἐκέλευσεν ὁπλίτας ἀγα; 
γεῖν, τούτους δὲ θέσθαι τὰ ὅπλα περὶ τὴν αὑτοῦ 
σκηνήν. οἱ δὲ ταῦτα ἐποίησαν, ἀγαγόντες ὡς τρισ- 
χιλίους ὁπλίτας. Κλέαρχον δὲ καὶ εἴσω παρεκάλεσε 

15 σύμβουλον, ὅς γε καὶ αὐτῷ καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἐδόκει 
προτιμηθῆναι μάλιστα τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἐξῆλ- 
θεν, ἐξήγγειλε τοῖς φίλοις τὴν κρίσιν τοῦ Ὀρόντα 


ὡς ἐγένετο. οὐ γὰρ ἀπόρρητον ἦν. ἔφη δὲ Κῦρον 
ἄρχειν τοῦ λόγου ὧδε. 


Speech of Cyrus: ‘‘ Twice before has this man been false to me, 
and “ae have I forgiven him.” 


0 Παρεκάλεσα ὑμᾶς, ἄνδρες φίλοι, ὅπως σὺν ὑμῖν 6 
βουλευόμενος ὅ τι δίκαιόν ἐστι καὶ πρὸς θεῶν καὶ 
πρὸς ἀνθρώπων τοῦτο πράξω περὶ ᾿ρόντα τουτουί. 
τοῦτον γὰρ πρῶτον μὲν ὁ ἐμὸς πατὴρ ἔδωκεν ὑπή- 
κοον εἶναι ἐμοί ἐπεὶ δὲ ταχθείς, ὡς ἔφη αὐτός, ὑπὸ 

25 τοῦ ἐμοῦ ἀδελφοῦ οὗτος ἐπολέμησεν ἐμοὶ ἔχων τὴν 
ἐν Σάρδεσιν ἀκρόπολιν, καὶ ἐγὼ αὐτὸν προσπολεμῶν 
ἐποίησα wore δόξαι τούτῳ τοῦ πρὸς ἐμὲ πολέμου 


ANABASIS I. 6. 10-11 and 7. 1-3. 29 
28 ANABASIS I. 6. 7-9. 4 and 7 


f a dl , » A » » , 
oe ταύτῃ δὲ TH γνώμῃ ἔφη καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους προσθέσθαι. 10 
παύσασθαι, καὶ δεξιὰν ἔλαβον καὶ ἔδωκα, μετὰ ταῦτα, 7 Η) ἢ γνώμῃ ἔφη ρ 


i al / ¥ ν δι Cae , 
ἔφη, ὦ ᾽Ορόντα, ἔστιν ὅ τι σε ἠδίκησα ; ἀπεκρίνατο 
ro mann > ~ YY 
ὅτι ov. πάλιν δὲ ὁ Κῦρος ἠρώτα, Οὐκοῦν ὕστερον, 
ε | Ally Hi A ~ joe " AM ” ϊὃ , 
ὡς αὐτὸς σὺ ὁμολογεῖς; οὐδὲν ὑπ᾽ ἐμοὺ ἀδικούμενος 
~ > al Ἃ 3 \ 4 
δ ἀποστὰς εἰς Μυσοὺς κακῶς ἐποίεις τὴν ἐμὴν χώραν 
> a ¥ ε A 
6 τι ἐδύνω ; ἔφη ὁ Opdrtas. Οὐκοῦν, ἔφη ὁ Κῦρος, 
- λυ» νυν ‘ A Sy 20 ‘ (8 ‘ 
ὁπότ᾽ αὖ ἔγνως τὴν σαυτοῦ δύναμιν, ἐλθὼν ἐπὶ τὸν 
ny / / » \ 
τῆς Apréudos βωμὸν μεταμέλειν τέ σοι ἔφησθα, καὶ 
/ ἂν 3 
πείσας ἐμὲ πιστὰ πάλιν ἔδωκάς μοι καὶ ἔλαβες παρ 
"ΚΝ. ‘ ag ¢ , > , 
10 ἐμοῦ ; καὶ ταῦθ᾽ ὡμολόγει ὁ ‘Opdrtas. 


“δ confesses that he has no excuse for this third attempt. He 
cannot be trusted. What shall be done with him? ”’ 


ἴω ε > a il Ὁ In 
Ti οὖν, ἔφη ὁ Κῦρος, ἀδικηθεὶς ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ νῦν τὸ 

Ν / . 3 al 
τρίτον ἐπιβουλεύων μοι φανερὸς γέγονας ; εἰπόντος 
“Ἢ. Ι , c a 
δὲ τοῦ “Opovra ὅτι οὐδὲν ἀδικηθείς, ἠρώτησεν ὁ Κυ- 
3 / ε ἴω > ‘ 4 4 id ov 
pos αὐτόν, Opodoyets οὖν περὶ ἐμὲ ἄδικος yeyevn 

᾿ Ν > Υ͂ ¥ eo 2 “ 3 “ 
ιόσθαι; Ἢ γὰρ ἀνάγκη, ἔφη ὁ Ορόντας. ἐκ τούτου 
»". Ν > “a s mo’ a 
πάλιν ἠρώτησεν ὁ Κῦρος, Er. οὖν av γένοιο To ἐμῳ 
~ \ , Mi € \ 
ἀδελφῷ πολέμιος, ἐμοὶ δὲ φίλος καὶ πιστός ; ὁ δὲ 
Me ” “ »ν 
ἀπεκρίνατο ὅτι οὐδ᾽ εἰ γενοίμην, ὦ Κῦρε, col γ᾽ ἂν 

~ “~ 4 [«] 

ποτε ἔτι δόξαιμι. πρὸς ταῦτα Κύρος εἶπε τοῖς παρ- 

~ a 4 , a 
οἡ οῦσιν, Ὁ μὲν ἀνὴρ τοιαῦτα μὲν πεποίηκε, τοιαῦτα 

~ ~ 4 , 3 , 
δὲ λέγει - ὑμῶν δὲ σὺ mpwros, ὦ Κλέαρχε; ἀπόφηναι 
γνώμην ὅ τι σοι δοκεῖ. 


Clearchus advises that he be put to death. The others concur, 
and Orontas is led away. 


> Ἀ Ν 
Κλέαρχος δὲ εἶπε τάδε. Συμβουλεύω ἐγὼ τὸν 

~ tan) ε / ε 
ἄνδρα τοῦτον ἐκποδὼν ποιεῖσθαι ὡς τάχιστα, ὡς 
la / ~ td θ DOV: λὴ  “ 
25 μηκέτι δέῃ τοῦτον φυλάττεσθαι, ἀλλὰ σχολὴ 7 ἡμῖν 


“- > ‘ , 3 a 
τὸ κατὰ τοῦτον εἶναι TOUS ἐθελοντὰς φίλους εὖ ποιεῖν. 


μετὰ ταῦτα, ἔφη, κελεύοντος Κύρου ἔλαβον τῆς ζώνης 
τὸν ᾿᾽Ορόνταν ἐπὶ θανάτῳ ἅπαντες ἀναστάντες καὶ of 
συγγενεῖς - εἶτα δ᾽ ἐξῆγον αὐτὸν οἷς προσετάχθη. 
ὃ ἐπεὶ δὲ εἶδον αὐτὸν οἵπερ πρόσθεν προσεκύνουν, καὶ 


/ / ‘ll > ) ν ΝᾺ “ 
ΤΟΤΕ πτροσέκνυνησαν, KQLTTEp εἰδότες OTL ἐπὶ θάνατον 


¥ > \ A > x > » \ 3 4 
ἄγοιτο. ἐπεὶ δὲ εἰς τὴν Αρταπάτου σκηνὴν εἰσήχθη 11 


τοῦ πιστοτάτου τῶν Κῦρου σκηπτούχων, μετὰ ταῦτα 
» ἴω 3 , ¥ , > ‘ 7 , 
οὔτε ζώντα ᾿Ορόνταν οὔτε τεθνηκότα οὐδεὶς εἶδε πώ- 
:0 νυν »" ἡ νιν ty νυν ¥ 
10 ποτε οὐδὲ ὅπως ἀπέθανεν οὐδεὶς εἰδὼς ἔλεγεν - εἴκαζον 
δὲ ἄλλοι ἄλλως. τάφος δὲ οὐδεὶς πώποτε αὐτοῦ 
ἐφάνη. 
Advance. Midnight review. Council of war. 
VII. ᾿Εντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει διὰ τῆς Βαβυλωνίας σταθ- 
μούς τρεῖς παρασάγγας δώδεκα. ἐν δὲ τῷ τρίτῳ 
lal A > , A A ε , ν 
ιό σταθμῷ Κῦρος ἐξέτασιν ποιεῖται τῶν Ἑλλήνων καὶ 
τῶν βαρβάρων ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ περὶ μέσας νύκτας - 
Ὁ 7 \ > ‘ 2 ‘a ν ν ld Ν᾿ 
ἐδόκει γὰρ εἰς τὴν ἐπιοῦσαν ἕω ἥξειν βασιλέα σὺν 
τῷ στρατεύματι μαχούμενον - καὶ ἐκέλευε Κλέαρχον 
μὲν τοῦ δεξιοῦ κέρως ἡγεῖσθαι, Μένωνα δὲ τοῦ εὐω- 
, ἃ Ν ‘ ε ‘al al ‘ \ Ἂ 
20 νύμου, αὐτὸς δὲ τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ διέταξε. μετὰ δὲ τὴν 
Ψ w , ν 
ἐξέτασιν ἅμα τῇ ἐπιούσῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἥκοντες αὐτόμολοι 
Ἁ ὔ / > / ᾽ \ “Ὁ 
παρὰ μεγάλου βασιλέως ἀπήγγελλον Κύρῳ περὶ τῆς 
βασιλέως στρατιᾶς. Κῦρος δὲ συγκαλέσας τοὺς 
Ἃ ‘ x ~ ε / 
στρατηγοὺς καὶ λοχαγοὺς τῶν Ἑλλήνων συνεβου- 
25 λεύετό τε πῶς av τὴν μάχην ποιοῖτο καὶ αὐτὸς παρή- 
νει θαρρύνων τοιάδε. 
Speech of Cyrus encouraging the Greek generals and captains. 
5, . 
Ω ἄνδρες Ἕλληνες, οὐκ ἀνθρώπων ἀπορῶν βαρ- 
βάρων συμμάχους ὑμᾶς ἄγω, ἀλλὰ νομίζων ἀμείνους 


ANABASIS I. 7. 4-7 ANABASIS I. 7. 8-12. 31 


a Ἵ ὑμᾶς εἶ διὰ ένηται, ἀλλὰ μὴ οὐκ ἔχω ἱκανοὺς οἷς δῶς ὑμῶν δὲ 
ν , ολλῶν βαρβάρων ὑμᾶς εἰναι, Oa : γένηται, μὴ 7 ‘ 
1 celui ᾿ ἐμ nf if i “EAA / \ 4 ες »“ “ ὃ # 
τοῦτο προσέλαβον. ὅπως οὖν ἔσεσθε ἄνδρες ἀξιοι τῶν ἥνων καὶ στέφανον ἑκάστῳ χρυσοῦν Séow. 
nS € (ας ἧς KE θ ὶ ἧς ὑμᾶς ἐγὼ εὐδαι- 
τῆς ἐλευθερίας ἧς κέκτησθε καὶ ἧς ὑμᾶς Cy 


More promises. Cyrus confident that the king will fight. 

εξ / Ἅ 

: ὉΠ ὠς ” ὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἑλοίμην av 
. ἰστε OTL τὴν EAEVVEP 

μονίζω - εὑ yap 


Οἱ δὲ ταῦτα ἀκούσαντες αὐτοί τε ἦσαν πολὺ προ- 

“Ἢ " ~ ¥ " ra 3 A Ἢ 

θυμότεροι καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἐξήγγελλον. εἰσῇσαν δὲ 
> 2  Ν ν xX ." “ » ε / 

ὅπαρ avTov οἱ TE στρατηγοὶ Kal τῶν ἄλλων Ἑλλήνων 

». 3 Δ > / - - ¥ ἂν rll 

τινὲς ἀξιοῦντες εἰδέναι τί σφίσιν ἔσται ἐὰν κρατή- 


, Φ 
"ἀντὶ ὧν ἔχω πάντων καὶ ἄλλων πολλαπλασίων. ὅπως 4 
ae > Ὁ ε “~ > | 

δὲ καὶ εἰδῆτε εἰς οἷον ἔρχεσθε ἀγώνα; vpas εἰδὼς 
i ‘ ‘ o~ a 
διδάξω. τὸ μὲν yap πλῆθος πολὺ καὶ κραυγῇ πολλῃ 


ἂν δὲ ταῦτα ἀνά θε, τὰ ἄλλα καὶ 
ἐπίασιν: av δὲ ταῦτα ἀνάσχησθε, 


ε \ > Ν ε ,) Ἃ Υ͂ > - 
σωσιν. ὁ δὲ ἐμπιπλὰς ἁπάντων τὴν γνώμην απέ 
πέμπε. παρεκελεύοντο δὲ αὐτῷ πάντες ὅσοιπερ διε- 
λέγοντο μὴ μάχεσθαι, ἀλλ᾽ ὄπισθεν ἑαυτῶν τάττε- 

ι0 σθαι. ἐν δὲ τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ Κλέ DOE 7 
' Ὁ καιρῳ τούτῳ Κλέαρχος ὧδέ πως ἤρετο 
Ἀ ἴω » ᾽ a) “i “ ‘ 
tov Kupov: Ove yap σοι μαχεῖσθαι, ὦ Κῦρε, τὸν 
ἀδελφόν ; Νὴ Δί᾽, ἔφη ὁ Κῦρος, εἴπερ γε Δαρείου 
ἐν ον καὶ Παρυσάτιδός ἐστι παῖς, ἐμὸς͵ δὲ ἀδελφός, οὐκ 
αντ j > Ν ».ν αὶ ν 4 ἱ 
Objection of Gaulites. Answer of Cyrus. ἀμόχει Ταῦτ eyw λήψομαι. 


αἰσχύνεσθαί μοι δοκῶ οἵους ἡμῖν γνώσεσψε τοὺς ἐν 

107TH χώρᾳ ὄντας ἀνθρώπους. ὑμῶν δὲ ἀνδρῶν ee 

καὶ εὖ TOV ἐμῶν γενομένων, Eye npn τὸν μὲν οἴκαδε 

τς aun «ἀν βουλόμενον ἀπιέναι τοῖς οἴκοι ζηλωτὸν ποιήσω ἀπελ- 
᾿ βεῖν, πολλοὺς δὲ οἶμαι ποιήσειν τὰ παρ ἐμοι ἑλέσθαι 


' ᾿ i Ι ᾿ ot) gels ὸ Numbers of the opposing forces. 
15 Ἐνταῦθα Γαυλίτης παρῶν, φυγὰς ἀαμιος; mors υ 3 κι ‘si mn 9» , > ᾿. A a 
yl i as te 5 “Evravda δὴ ἐν τῇ ἐξοπλισίᾳ ἀριθμὸς ἐγένετο τῶν 10 
δὲ Κυρῳ; εἶπε: Και μὴν. ὦ UPS, 4 μι»; ΄ 3 Ν ron \ ΄ ΄ 
ΕἾ al tied Wa ae Sa ο μὲν Ἑλλήνων ἀσπὶς μυρία καὶ τετρακοσία, πελτασταί 
ἈΝ ὃ οὕτῳ εἶναι TOU κιν- ) 
πολλὰ υπισχνει νυν OLA sibel Τ \ , \ , n \ \ , 
: " A eae ἢ (τι, οὐ μεμνήσε- | δὲ δισχίλιοι καὶ πεντακόσιοι, τῶν δὲ μετὰ Κύρου 
δύνου 7 POOLOVTOS, av δὲ ευ γένηται ΤῸ i μ , , ὃ , : (δ μ᾿ 0 ὃ , 
fie ἔνιοι δὲ οὐδ᾽ εἰ μεμνῃό TE καὶ βούλοιο βαρβάρων δέκα μυριάδες καὶ ἅρματα ρεπανηφόρα 
σθαί σε φασιν. €VLOL OE OU ELV?) ae Te Ἂ ‘ mtg 7 ag “1 
Sr A 9 ε ee ἀμφὶ Ta εἴκοσι: τῶν δὲ πολεμίων ἐλέγοντο εἶναι τι 
20 δύνασθαι ἂν ἀποδοῦναι ὁσα ὑπισχνεῖ. - πῆς | 20 ἑκατὸν tap γρουνν μὰ Sent ee dé 
ΤΠ ιν» 20 ἑκατὸν καὶ εἰ υ πανηφόρα 
ταῦτα ἔλεξεν ὁ Κῦρος - AXA ἔστι μὲν ἡμῖν, ὦ avopeEs, ᾿ κε i Ρ ἐ ' PP Ἵ ἡ i " 
ΠΡ ; ΝΠ} βρίαν μέχρι οὗ διακόσια. ἄλλοι δὲ ἦσαν ἑξακισχίλιοι ἱππεῖς, ὧν 
ἡ ἀρχὴ ἡ πατρῴα πρὸς μὲν μεσημβρίαν μ ΧΡ Μ "Aurenche Disses. δι ack aimee β 
ἌΨΥΎ α ν᾿ νυ ὃ αὖ πρὸ αὐτοῦ βασι- 
διὰ καῦμα οὐ δύνανται οἰκεῖν ἄνθρωποι, πρὸς OE iii cin Hai Ni fl si ' 
᾿ eo. os «ὸ δ' ἂν μόνω των λέως τεταγμένοι ἦσαν. τοῦ δὲ βασιλέως στρατεύ-12 
προ χνννο τὸ eG Ἃ 7 ατος ἦσαν ἄρχοντες καὶ στρατηγοὶ καὶ ἡγεμόνες 
ε ἴω 3 ἥν 4 
δ πάντα σατραπεύουσιν οἱ TOV ἐμου ἀδελφοῦ pi iil Ἢ ἡ" Ἵ ἫΧ BS ΓΙ] aN Pi i 
δ ες, « a es ᾿ 25 TETTAPES, τριάκοντα μυριάδων ἕκαστος οκομας 
ἣν δ᾽ ἡμεῖς νικήσωμεν, ἡμᾶς δεῖ τοὺς ἡμετέρους he αφέ oT β ge πῶ νὰ των estates 
n . τ | ισσα ς, Γωβρύα . τούτων δὲ παρε: 
φίλους τούτων ἐγκρατεῖς ποιῆσαι. ὥστε οὗ ἔνννν | ° i i idl adic " oe 
Eee μὴ οὐκ ἔχω ὅ τι δῶ ἑκάστῳ τῶν φίλων ἀν εὖ Ϊ γένοντο ἐν τῇ μάχῃ ἐνενήκοντα μυριάδες καὶ ap 


32 ANABASIS I. 7. 13-17. 


para δρεπανηφόρα ἑκατὸν καὶ πεντήκοντα - ᾿Αβρο- 
κόμας δὲ ὑστέρησε τῆς μάχης ἡμέραις πέντε, ἐκ 
Φοινίκης ἐλαύνων. ταῦτα δὲ ἤγγελλον πρὸς Κῦρον οἱ 18» 
αὐτομολήσαντες παρὰ μεγάλου βασιλέως πρὸ τῆς 
δμάχης, καὶ μετὰ τὴν μάχην οἵ ὕστερον ἐλήφθησαν 
τῶν πολεμίων ταὐτὰ ἤγγελλον. 


Advance. The great trench. Traces of the king’s retreat. 


a ν΄ Ψ 
Ἐντεῦθεν δὲ Κῦρος ἐξελαύνει σταθμὸν ἕνα παρα- 14 
“ stl ‘ 
odyyas τρεῖς συντεταγμένῳ τῷ στρατεύματι παντὶ 
‘ »"»ε a ‘ va > » Ἢ 
καὶ τῷ Ἑλληνικῳ καὶ τῷ βαρβαρικῷ wero yap 
ἴω Ἂ er ‘ ‘ , 
ιοταύτῃ TH ἡμέρᾳ μαχεῖσθαι βασιλέα" κατὰ yap pe 
ao > 2 by “ 
σον τὸν σταθμὸν τοῦτον τάφρος ἦν ὀρυκτὴ βαθεῖα, 
Ν )ν. > > Ἁ / ‘ δὲ (θ > x A 
TO μὲν εὖρος ὀργυιαὶ πέντε, TO OE βάθος ὀργυιαὶ τρεις. 
/ i MM , ¥ 5 \ ‘a δί Ns, ὃ / 
παρετέτατο δὲ ἡ τάφρος ἄνω διὰ τοὺ πεδίου ἐπὶ Oars 
~ / » 
δεκα παρασάγγας μέχρι τοῦ Μηδίας τείχους. [ἔνθα 
“~ ι Δ δ ἡ 
ιδ αἱ διώρυχες, ἀπὸ τοῦ Τίγρητος ποταμοὺυ ρέουσαι" 
σι a A 
εἰσὶ δὲ τέτταρες, τὸ μὲν εὖρος πλεθριαῖαι, βαθεῖαι δὲ 
~ “ “di ~ / > 
ἰσχυρῶς, Kal πλοῖα πλεῖ ἐν αὐταῖς oLTaywya* εἰσ- 
> ΣΕ al 
βάλλουσι δὲ εἰς τὸν Εὐφράτην, διαλείπουσι δ᾽ ἑκά- 
" ᾿ δ᾽ ¥ ΓῚ δὲ ᾿ 
στη παρασάγγην; γέφυραι ἔπεισιν.] ἦν δὲ παρὰ 
"οτὸν Εὐφράτην πάροδος στενὴ μεταξὺ τοῦ ποταμοῦ 
A Δ > r 
καὶ τῆς τάφρου ὡς εἴκοσι ποδῶν TO EUpos* ταύτην 16 
Ν hs ral Ἅ a NA > ‘ 5» Ἵ 
δὲ τὴν τάφρον βασιλεὺς ποιεῖ μέγας ἄντι ἐρύματος, 
~ al 
ἐπειδὴ πυνθάνεται Κῦρον προσελαύνοντα. ταύτην 
‘ ‘ , ~ , Ν ε hs nr 
δὴ τὴν πάροδον Κῦρός τε καὶ ἢ στρατιὰ παρηλῦε 
“κι ᾽ \ > 7 
ο5 καὶ ἐγένοντο εἴσω τῆς τάφρου. ταύτῃ μὲν οὖν TIT 
ε » > 3 La λ 4 tAX ε 
ἡμέρᾳ οὐκ ἐμαχέσατο βασιλεύς, ἀλλ ὑποχωρούντων 
Υ " 
φανερὰ ἦσαν καὶ ἵππων καὶ ἀνθρώπων ἴχνη πολλά. 


ANABASIS I. γ. 18-20 and 8. 1-3. 33 


A soothsayer rewarded. Cyrus advances with less caution. 


3 “~ Ὺὰ 
Ενταῦθα Κῦρος Σιλανὸν καλέσας τὸν ᾿Αμπρακιώ-18 
A ἴω 
THY μάντιν ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ δαρεικοὺς τρισχιλίους, ὅτι 
lg ε - > > 
τῇ ἑνδεκάτῃ am ἐκείνης ἡμέρᾳ προθυόμενος εἶπεν 
ag a van a 
αὐτῷ ὅτι βασιλεὺς ov μαχεῖται δέκα ἡμερῶν, Κῦρος 
3 > ¥ A 
58° εἶπεν, Οὐκ apa ἔτι μαχεῖται, εἰ ἐν ταύταις οὐ 
A “~ ¢ Fl ἮΝ 3 3 A € 
μαχεῖται ταῖς nucpas: ἐὰν δ᾽ ἀληθεύσῃς, ὑπισ- 
“κι "il A 
χνοῦμαί σοι δέκα τάλαντα. τοῦτο τὸ χρυσίον τότε 
. “ὃ > Ἃ “δὰ ε / e 4 A y,' > 
ἀπέδωκεν, ἐπεὶ παρῆλθον αἱ δέκα ἡμέραι. ᾿ἐπεὶ δ᾽ 19 
» ν᾿ ~ ᾽ Ψ 3 aA. yi Ἂ ip. K 4 ἥ 
ἐπὶ TH τάφρῳ οὐκ ἐκώλυε βασιλεὺς τὸ Κύρου στρά- 
10revpa διαβαίνειν, ἔδοξε καὶ Κύρῳ καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις 
, , A , 9 ne , a 
ἀπεγνωκέναι τοῦ μάχεσθαι ὥστε τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ Κῦρος 
Ψ ὔ ~ ᾿ ~ Ἁ 
ἐπορεύετο ἠμελημένως μᾶλλον, τῇ δὲ τρίτῃ ἐπί τεϑ0 
τοῦ ἅρματος καθήμενος τὴν πορείαν ἐποιεῖτο Kal ὀλί- 
> , » » ε “Ὁ Ἂ δὲ i b] -~ 
yous ἐν τάξει ἔχων TPO αὑτοῦ, TO δὲ πολὺ αὐτῷ 
,.. ἴω 
15 ἀνατεταραγμένον ἐπορεύετο καὶ τῶν ὄπλων τοῖς στρα- 
᾽ i," MAM ε ili » ν κ᾿ tl 
τιώταις πολλὰ ἐπὶ ἁμαξῶν ἤγετο καὶ ὑποζυγίων. 
‘“‘The king is coming!’’ The call to arms. ᾿ 
> ‘ 
VIII. Kai ἤδη τε ἣν ἀμφὶ ἀγορὰν πλήθουσαν Kat 
’ Φ ε ff] ‘ ¥ 6 ¥ dr v4 ee 
πλησίον ἦν ὁ σταθμὸς ἔνθα ἔμελλε καταλύειν, ἡνίκα « 
~ \ “ ἴω 
Πατηγύας ἀνὴρ Πέρσης τῶν ἀμφὶ Κῦρον πιστῶν 
Ν ΄ a 
09 προφαίνεται ἐλαύνων ἀνὰ κράτος ἱδροῦντι τῷ ἵππῳ,. 
\ 9 ὯΝ i 1 2 4 Ν 5» 2 " i 
καὶ εὐθὺς πᾶσιν οἷς ἐνετύγχανεν ἐβόα καὶ BapBapt- ., 


κῶς καὶ ἑλληνικῶς ὅτι βασιλεὺς σὺν στρατεύματι i - 
A >> 


ἴω ε 3 

πολλῷ προσέρχεται ὡς εἰς μάχην παρεσκευασμένος. 
» \ ‘ , > “2 Be ‘ Ὁ 7 vf 
ἔνθα δὴ πολὺς τάραχος ἐγένετο - αὐτίκα yap ἐδόκουν 2 
ον \ Υ͂ 4 > la , 3 

ου οἱ Ἕλληνες καὶ πάντες δὲ ἀτάκτοις σφίσιν ἐπιπε- 
σεῖσθαι.- Κῦρός τε καταπηδήσας ἀπὸ τοῦ ἅρματος 3 
ip. VA + x > lb. ey Ἃ 9 Ν 
τὸν θώρακα ἐνέδυ καὶ ἀναβὰς ἐπὶ τὸν ἵππον τὰ 


. MA, 


ANABASIS I. 8. 49. | ANABASIS I. 8, 10-13. 35 


παλτὰ εἰς τὰς χεῖρας ἔλαβε, τοῖς τε ἄλλοις πᾶσι β τοῦ εὐωνύμου τῶν πολεμίων - Τισσαφέρνης ἐλέγετο 
παρήγγελλεν ἐξοπλίζεσθαι καὶ καθίστασθαι εἰς τὴν τούτων ἄρχειν Ι ἐχόμενοι δὲ γερροφόροι, ἐχόμενοι δὲ 
ἑαυτοῦ τάξιν ἕκαστον. ὁπλῖται σὺν ποδήρεσι ξυλίναις ἀσπίσιν. Αἰγύπτιοι 
The order of battle. Armor of Cyrus and his body-guard. δ᾽ οὗτοι ἐλέγοντο εἶναι - ἄλλοι δ᾽ ἱππεῖς, ἄλλοι τοξό- 
Ἔνθα δὴ σὺν πολλῇ σπουδῇ καθίσταντο, Κλέαρ- 4 ὅταν. πάντες δ᾽ οὗτοι κατὰ ἔθνη ἐν πλαισίῳ πλήρει 
5 os μὲν τὰ δεξιὰ τοῦ κέρατος ἔχων πρὸς τῷ Εὐφράτῃ ἀνθρ igri ipl τὸ ἔθνος ἐπορεύετο. πρὸ €10 
ποταμῷ, Πρόξενος δὲ ἐχόμενος, οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι μετὰ i ig ἅρματα διαλείποντα συχνὸν am ἀλλήλων τὰ 
τοῦτον, Μένων δὲ καὶ τὸ στράτευμα τὸ εὐώνυμον δὴ δρεπανηφόρα καλούμενα - εἶχον δὲ τὰ δρέπανα 
κέρας ἔσχε τοῦ Ἑλληνικοῦ. τοῦ δὲ βαρβαρικοῦ 5 wel ἀξόνων εἰς πλάγιον ἀποτεταμένα καὶ ὑπὸ τοῖς “ YF 
ἱππεῖς μὲν Παφλαγόνες εἰς χιλίους παρὰ Κλέαρχον 10 δίφροις εἰς γῆν βλέποντα, ὡς διακόπτειν ὅτῳ ἐντυγ- ἽΝ 
10 ἔστησαν ἐν τῷ δεξιῷ καὶ τὸ Ἑλληνικὸν πελταστικόν. ἈΠ ἣ δὲ γνώμη nv ὡς εἰς τὰς τάξεις τῶν Ἕλ- .;. cone 
ἐτιπιαοχοςἐν δὲ τῷ εὐωνύμῳ ᾿Αριαῖός τε ὁ Κύρου ὕπαρχος καὶ λήνων ἐλῶντα καὶ διακόψοντα. ὃ μέντοι Κῦρος τ ic ᾿ 
τὸ ἄλλο βαρβαρικόν. Κῦρος δὲ καὶ οἱ ἱππεῖς τού- 6 εἶπεν ὅτε καλέσας παρεκελεύετο τοῖς Ἕλλησι τὴν | 
του ὅσον ἑξακόσιοι ὡπλισμένοι θώραξι μὲν αὐτοὶ. καὶ κρανγὴν ΤῸ βαρβάρων ἀνέχεσθαι, ἐψεύσθη τοῦτο " 
παραμηριδίοις καὶ κράνεσι πάντες πλὴν Κύρου᾽ 169 ee ἀλλὰ σιγῇ ὡς ἀνυστὸν καὶ ἡσυχῇ ἐν 
ι6 Κῦρος δὲ ψιλὴν ἔχων τὴν κεφαλὴν εἰς τὴν μάχην ἴσῳ καὶ βραδέως προσῇσαν. “-ὠὐ σον οι... 
καθίστατο" λέγεται δὲ καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους Πέρσας ψιλαῖς | Clearchus refuses to attack the Persian centre. 


ἡ τουν 


Ν 


» ~ a > a 
ταῖς κεφαλαῖς ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ διακινδυνεύειν. οἱ δ᾽ 7 Καὶ ἐν τούτῳ Κῦρος παρελαύνων αὐτὸς σὺν Πί 1. 
sd “ MI, Ν , ᾽ν \ f » κἉ a Vy " 
i+. St ἵπποι πάντες οἵ μετὰ Κύρου εἴχον Kat προμετωπίδια γρητι τῷ ἑρμηνεῖ καὶ ἄλλοις τρισὶν ἢ τέτταρσι τῷ 
“a . , > δ ‘ , ee κι 
*.' καὶ προστερνίδια- εἶχον δὲ καὶ μαχαίρας οἱ ὕππεις Κλεάρχῳ ἐβόα ἄγειν τὸ στράτευμα κατὰ μέσον τὸ 
ε / ἴω A 
20 Ἑλληνικάς. 90 τῶν πολεμίων, ὅτι ἐκεῖ. βασιλεὺς εἴη: κἂν τοῦτ᾽, ἔφη, 
In the afternoon the enemy appear, prepared for battle. νικῶμεν, πάνθ᾽ ἡμῖν πεποίηται. ὁρῶν δὲ ὁ Κλέαρ- 13 
i ἊΝ 4 ε a \ ¥ ΜῊ A r . 
Καὶ ἤδη τε ἣν μέσον ἡμέρας καὶ οὔπω καταφανεὶς 8 χος τὸ μέσον στῖφος καὶ ἀκούων Κύρου ἔξω ὄντα τοῦ 
> ε V4 4. A ’ ἡ ᾿ / “- 1 " 
ἦσαν οἱ πολέμιοι - ἡνίκα δὲ δείλη ἐγίγνετο,, ἐφάνη εὐωνύμου βασιλέα ---- τοσοῦτον γὰρ πλήθει περιῆν 
‘ ν / Ane ld Ν “~ i " Ἵ - - 
κονιορτὸς ὥσπερ νεφέλη λευκή, “χρόνῳ δὲ συχνῷ βασιλεὺς ὥστε μέσον τῶν ἑαυτοῦ ἔχων τοῦ Κύρου 


4 . 


ν ν ~ Ν ς 3 ὅἬ ¥ i. »νν 
ὕστερον WOTEP μελανία τις ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ ἐπὶ πολύ. : 25 εὐωνύμου ἔξω ἦν ---- ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως ὁ Κλέαρχος οὐκ ἤθελεν 
ν δὲ 9 v4 AN / δὴ Ν V4 3 / ν » κ᾿. "» Ἁ " » ' 
25 OTE O€ ἐγγύτερον ἐγίγνοντο, τάχα OF) Καὶ χαλκός τις ἀποσπάσαι ἀπὸ τοῦ ποταμοῦ τὸ δεξιὸν κέρας; 
ἴω ) \ "a 

ἤστραπτε Kal αἱ λόγχαι καὶ αἱ τάξεις καταφανεῖς | φοβούμενος μὴ κυκλωθείη᾽ ἑκατέρωθεν, τῷ δὲ Κύρῳ 
A > 4 | ‘ ~ » wall 

ἐγίγνοντο. καὶ ἦσαν ἱππεῖς μὲν λευκοθώρακες ἐπὶ 9 ἀπεκρίνατό ὅτι αὐτῷ μέλοι ὅπως καλῶς ἔχοι. 


ὼ 
“ἄντωι 


MA ll 


ll i oe a ἤ Ι 
IPod. διικοι.. navies ταὶ δόρετεα. Κρουσαντες 
‘ “" As Nn! 


Cre cg ae 


36 ANABASIS I. 8. 14-19. 


Final preparations. The sacrifices favorable. The watchword. 
Kai ἐν τού D Ὁ τὸ μὲν βαρβαρικὸν στρά-14 
αἱ ἐν τούτῳ τῷ καιρῷ τὸ μὲν βαρβαρικὸν oTpa-1 
ε Ab ld ‘ i MM i A ἢν Ι 9 ” 
τευμα ὁμαλῶς προΐει, τὸ δὲ Ἑλληνικὸν ἔτι ἐν τῷ 
~ } ἴω ’ Ἁ 
αὐτῷ μένον συνετάττετο ἐκ τῶν ἔτι προσιόντων. καὶ 
‘ill , ἴω ~ 
ὁ Κῦρος παρελαύνων ov πάνυ πρὸς αὐτῷ τῳ στρα- 
lb » ‘ 
δτεύματι κατεθεᾶτο ἑκατέρωσε ἀποβλέπων εἴς TE TOUS 

/ Ν ‘ / 7 N δὲ » ν rl ‘a 

πολεμίους Kai τοὺς φίλους. ἰδὼν δὲ αὐτὸν ἀπὸ τοῦ 15 
ω o “~ € 
Ἑλληνικοῦ Ξενοφῶν ᾿Αθηναῖος, πελάσας ws συναν- 
“ ¥ ¥ / ]]- δ᾽ > , i 
THO AL ἤρετο εἴ TL παραγγέλλοι: ὁ ὃ ἐπιστήσας εἶπε 
i, Ld μι / ἡμῖν Ψ ‘ 1 2 x mn! ‘ 
he- καὶ λέγειν ἐκέλευε πᾶσιν ὁτι καὶ Ta ἱερὰ καλὰ καὶ 
a ¥ 
“© 1074 σφάγια καλά. ταῦτα δὲ λέγων θορύβου yKovee 16 
Ἀ “~ , 77 | ¥ " ε rd ¥ 
διὰ τῶν τάξεων ἰόντος, Kal ἤρετο Tis ὁ θόρυβος εἴη. 
ε νι. / x ν / M4 5 / 
ὁ δὲ Κλέαρχος εἶπεν ὅτι σύνθημα παρέρχεται δεύτε- 

» Ἃ dé > 4 / , Ἃ 
ρον ἤδη. καὶ ὃς ἐθαύμασε τίς παραγγέλλει; καὶ 
»ν bid ¥ ‘ ’ θ ε 5° > ᾽ ‘ 
ἤρετο ὅ τι εἴη TO σύνθημα. ὁ δ᾽ ἀπεκρίνατο, Ζεὺς 

᾿δσωτὴρ καὶ νίκη. ὁ δὲ Κῦρος ἀκούσας, ᾿Αλλὰ 17 
δέχομαί τε, ἔφη; καὶ τοῦτο ἔστω. 


The Greeks charge on the run. The left wing of the king’s army 
takes to flight. His chariots are useless. 


Ταῦτα δ᾽ εἰπὼν εἰς THY αὑτοῦ χώραν ἀπήλαυνε- 
Ν > - - a Ld al Pl A ἤ 
.- καὶ οὐκέτι τρία ἢ τέτταρα στάδια διειχέτην τὼ φά- 
λαγγε ἀπ᾿ ἀλλήλων ἡνίκα ἐπαιάνιζόν τε οἱ Ἕλληνες 
᾿.. ¥ 3 al » ἢ a] Vd € δὲ 
90 καὶ ἤρχοντο ἀντίοι ἰέναι τοῖς πολεμίοις. ὡς δὲ18 
\ “ 3 / "4 ~ / Ἂ, ε 
+f, Avr an. πορευομένων ἐξεκύμαινέ τι τῆς φάλαγγος, τὸ ὑπολει- 
Δ... νυ κα’ , ¥ ὃ / θεῖ ν. »ν» > θέ 
ἦν πόμενον ἤρξατο δρόμῳ θεῖν - καὶ ἅμα ἐφθέγξαντο 


Plut. Man. cb ὶ ἘΠ ι 
33 πάντες οἷον τῷ Ἐνυαλίῳ ἐλελίζουσι, καὶ πάντες δὲ 


ν , ͵΄ ε Ὗ »" » , Ὗ 4 
ἔθεον. λέγουσι δέ τινες ὡς Kal ταῖς ἀσπίσι πρὸς τὰ 4}. An... 


ἔτ δόρατα ἐδούπησαν φόβον ποιοῦντες τοῖς ἵπποις ὁ ὁ 
| 4 


od. Α..... πρὶν δὲ τόξευμα ἐξικνεῖσθαι ἐκκλίνουσιν οἱ βάρβα- 19 


Beach, tend » 4 " AI 00 Sy Si, 4 κ᾿ 
| pot και φεύγουσι και ἐνταῦυσα { EOLWKOV μεν κατα 
"». 


»" 
. ἢ 


Ὁ ΤΡ ᾿ , J 
x Demeh. δὲ ele. 103 Ta p A@Mata φερε TO 


οι " > “om, . “enn νι Ν ᾿ “hy, 2 
“ce ἐκ τν Oe δι Ee Carre "Se ta Sf Oh il || Ἐν Se be Ceol + hh 


-ς 


αὐ νῶν Terry KO awapasis I. 8. 20-94 37 


- ἐμὰ Dae 
κράτος οἱ Ἕλληνες, ἐβόων δὲ ἀλλήλοις μὴ θεῖν δρό- 
fo, ἀλλ᾽ ἐν τάξει ἕπεσθαι. τὰ δ᾽ ἅρματα ἐφέροντορο 
τὰ μὲν δι’ αὐτῶν τῶν πολεμίων, τὰ δὲ καὶ διὰ 
τῶν Ἑλλήνων “κενὰ ἡνιόχων. οἱ δ᾽ ἐπεὶ προΐδοιεν, 

δδιίσταντο - ἔστι δ᾽ ὅστις καὶ κατελήφθη ὥσπερ ἐν 
ἱπποδρόμῳ ἐκπλαγείς - καὶ οὐδὲν μέντοι οὐδὲ τοῦ- 
τον παθεῖν ἔφασαν, οὐδ᾽ ἄλλος δὲ τῶν Ἑλλήνων 
ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ μάχῃ ἔπαθεν οὐδεὶς οὐδέν, πλὴν ἐπὶ 
τῷ εὐωνύμῳ τοξευθῆναί τις ἐλέγετο. 

The king himself holds the centre, and begins to move. 

10 Κύρρς δ᾽ ὁρῶν τοὺς Ἕλληνας νικῶντας τὸ καθ᾽ 21 
αὑτοὺς καὶ διώκοντας, ἡδόμενος καὶ προσκυνούμενος , - ᾿ 
ἤδη ὡς βασιλεὺς ὑπὸ τῶν ἀμφ᾽ αὐτόν, οὐδ᾽ ὡς ἐξή- nage 271 
χθη διώκειν, ἀλλὰ συνεσπειραμένην ἔχων τὴν τῶν Ἶ 
σὺν ἑαυτῷ ἑξακοσίων ἱππέων τάξιν ἐπεμελεῖτο ὅ τι 

ιὸ ποιήσει βασιλεύς. καὶ yap ἤδει αὐτὸν ὅτι μέσον 
ἔχοι τοῦ Περσικοῦ στρατεύματος. [ καὶ πάντες δ᾽ οἱ 22 «ἐ.Αν- ' 
tov βαρβάρων ἄρχοντες μέσον ἔχοντες τὸ αὑτῶν “ἢ 
ἡγοῦνται; νομίζοντες οὕτω καὶ ἐν ἀσφαλεστάτῳ εἶναι, 
ἣν ἢ ἡ ἰσχὺς αὐτῶν ἑκατέρωθεν, καὶ εἴ τι παραγ- ἡ ay 

20 γεῖλαι χρήζοιεν, ἡμίσει av χρόνῳ αἰσθάνεσθαι τὸ 
στράτευμα,» καὶ βασιλεὺς δὴ τότε μέσον ἔχων τῆς 23 
αὑτοῦ στρατιᾶς ὅμως ἔξω ἐγένετο τοῦ Κύρου εὐωνύ- 
μου κέρατος. ἐπεὶ δ᾽ οὐδεὶς αὐτῷ ἐμάχετο ἐκ τοῦ 
ἀντίου οὐδὲ τοῖς αὐτρῦ τεταγμένοις 


δι, aw. 3, hue} 


» 3 a 
ἔμπροσθεν, ἐπέ. 
᾿ ε 
25 καμπτεν WS εἰς κύκλωσιν. «ἰ 7 - 7.},5Σ 
Cyrus charges, and attacks the king in person. 
Ἔνθα δὴ Kd δεί ὴ ὁ 
νῦα On Kupos δείσας μὴ ὄπισθεν γενόμενος 94 
€ 
κατακόψῃ τὸ Ἑλληνικὸν ἐλαύνει avtios: καὶ ἐμβα- 


38 ANABASIS I. 8. 25-29. 


λὼν σὺν τοῖς ἑξακοσίοις νικᾷ τοὺς πρὸ βασιλέως 
τεταγμένον: καὶ εἰς φυγὴν ἔτρεψε τοὺς ἑξακισχιλίους, 
καὶ ἀποκτεῖναι λέγεται αὐτὸς τῇ ἑαυτοῦ χειρὶ ᾽Ἄρτα- 
γέρσην τὸν ἄρχοντα αὐτῶν. ὡς δ᾽ ἡ τροπὴ ἐγένετο, 25 
δ διασπείρονται καὶ οἱ Κύρου ᾿ἑξακόσιοι εἰς τὸ διώκειν 
ὁρμήσαντες, πλὴν πάνυ ὀλίγοι ἀμφ᾽ αὐτὸν κατε- 
λείῤθησαν, σχεδὸν οἱ ὁμοτράπεζοι καλούμενοι. σὺν 26 


τούτοις δὲ ὦν καθορᾷ βασιλέα καὶ τὸ app ἐκεῖνον 
καὶ εὐθὺς οὐκ ἠνέσχετο, ἀλλ᾽ εἰπὼν Τὸν 


στῖφος 
y ’ > > A \ ri A a 
10 avo pa ὁ ail @ ἵετο ἐπ avUTOV Kal Tale KATA TO 


στέρνον καὶ TH POTKe διὰ τοῦ θώρακος, ws φησι 
Κτησίας 6 ἰατρός. καὶ ἰᾶσθαι αὐτὸς τὸ τραῦμά φησι. 


Cyrus and his immediate followers are slain. 


Παίοντα δ᾽ αὐτὸν ἀκοντίζει τις παλτῷ ὑπὸ τὸν 21 
ὀφθαλμὸν βιαίως - καὶ ἐνταῦθα μαχόμενοι καὶ βασι- 
τ λεὺς καὶ Κῦρος καὶ οἱ ἀμφ᾽ αὐτοὺς ὑπὲρ ἑκατέρου, 
ὁπόσοι μὲν τῶν ἀμφὶ βασι ἀπέθνῃσκον Κτησίας 
λέγει" παρ᾽ ἐκείνῳ γὰρ ἦν" Κῦρος δὲ αὐτός τε ἀπέ 
θανε καὶ ὀκτὼ οἱ ἄριστοι τῶν περὶ αὐτὸν ἔκειντο ἐπ᾽ 
αὐτῷ. ᾿Αρταπάτης δ᾽ ὁ πιστότατος αὐτῷ τῶν σκὴη- 28 
20 πτούχων λέγεται ἐπειδὴ πεπτωκότα εἶδε Κῦρον, κατα- 
πηδήσας ἀπὸ τοῦ ἵππου περιπεσεῖν αὐτῷ. καὶ 0129 
μέν φασι βασωα κελεῦσαί τινα ἐπισφάξαι αὐτὸν 


δὲ. Cynefr. . ,Κύρφ, οἱ δ᾽ ἑαυτὸν; ἐπισφάξασθαι σπασάμενον τὸν 


ἀκινάκην * εἶχε γὰρ χρυσοῦν. καὶ στρεπτὸν δ᾽ 


25 ἐφόρει καὶ ψέλια καὶ τάλλα ὥσπερ OL ἄριστοι Περ- 
Gav: ἐτετίμητο γὰρ ὑπὸ Κύρου δι’ εὔνοιάν τε καὶ 


πιστότητα. 


ANABASIS I. 9. 1-6. 39 


So died Cyrus, the kingliest man since Cyrus the Great. 

ΙΧ. Κῦρος μὲν οὖν οὕτως ἐτελεύτησεν, ἀνὴρ ὧν 
Περσῶν τῶν μετὰ Κῦρον τὸν ἀρχαῖον γενομένων 
βασιλικώτατός τε καὶ ἄρχειν ἀξιώτατος, ὡς παρὰ 
πάντων ὁμολογεῖται τῶν Κύρου δοκούντων ἐ ἐν πείρᾳ 


δ γενέσθαι. 
Reared at court, he was as a boy modest and brave. 
Πρῶτον μὲν yap ἔτι παῖς ὧν ὅτ᾽ ἐπαιδεύετο καὶ 
σὺν τῷ ἀδελφῷ καὶ σὺν τοῖς ἄλλοις παισί, πάντων 
πάντα κράτιστος ἐνομέζατο. πάντες γὰρ οἱ τῶν 
ἀρίστων Περσῶν παῖδες ἐπὶ ταῖς βασιλέως θύραις 
10 παιδεύονται - ἔνθα πολλὴν μὲν σωφροσύνην κατα- 
μάθοι͵ ἄν τις, αἰσχρὸν δ᾽ οὐδὲν οὔτ᾽ ἀκοῦσαι οὔτ᾽ 
ἰδεῖν ἔστι. θεῶνται δ᾽ οἱ παῖδες καὶ τιμωμένους ὑπὸ 
βασιλέως καὶ ἀκούουσι, καὶ ἄλλους ἀτιμαζομένους - 
ὥστε εὐθὺς παῖδες ὄντες μανθάνουσιν ἄρχειν τε καὶ 
ιὸ ἄρχεσθαι. ἔνθα Κῦρος αἰδημονέστατος μὲν πρῶτον 
τῶν ἡλικιωτῶν ἐδόκει εἶναι, τοῖς τε πρεσβυτέροις καὶ 
τῶν ἑαυτοῦ ὑποδεεστέρων μᾶλλον πείθεσθαι, ἔπειτα 
δὲ φιλιππότατος καὶ τοῖς ἵπποις ἄριστα χρῆσθαι. 
ἔκρινον δ᾽ αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν εἰς τὸν πόλεμον ἔργων 
20 τοξικῆς τε καὶ ἀκοῤτίσεως, φελομαδέσσατον τ 
καὶ μεν πηβέσοτον, ἐπεὶ δὲ τῇ ἡλικίᾳ ἔπρεπε, καὶ 
φιλοθηρότατος ἦν καὶ πρὸς τὰ θηρία μέντοι φιλο. 
κινδυνότατος. καὶ ἄρκτον ποτὲ ἐπιφερομένην οὐκ 
ἔτρεσεν, ἀλλὰ συμπεσὼν ᾿κάτεσπάσοη ἀπὸ τοῦ 
25 ἵππου, καὶ τὰ μὲν ἔπαθεν, ὦ ὧν καὶ τὰς ὠτειλὰς εἶχε, 
καὶ τὸν πρῶτον μώντοι βοηθή- 
σαντα πολλοῖς μακαριστὸν ἐποίησεν. 


τέλος δὲ κατέκανε ° 


Vv 


, ay 
4 ἂν wf 
δ, Mf PLT Dy ce 


40 ANABASIS I. 9. 7-13. 


As governor on the coast, he kept faith with friend and foe. 
Ἐπεὶ δὲ κατεπέμφθη ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρὸς σατράπης 
Λυδίας τε καὶ Φρυγίας τῆς μεγάλης καὶ Καππαδο- 
ΠΣ... κίας, στρατηγὸς δὲ Καϊ) πάντων ἀπεδείχθη οἷς καθή- 
“κει εἰς Καστωλοῦ πεδίον ἀθροίζεσθαι, πρῶτον μὲν 
5 ἐπέδειξεν αὑτὸν ὅτι περὶ πλείστου ποιοῖτο, εἴ τῳ 
σπείσαιτο καὶ εἴ τῳ συνθοῖτο καὶ εἴ τῳ ὑπόσχοιτό 
τι, μηδαμῶς ψεύδεσθαι. καὶ γὰρ οὖν ἐπίστευον μὲν 
αὐτῷ αἱ πόλεις ἐπιτρεπόμεναι, ἐπίστευον 5° ot 
ἄνδρες - καὶ εἴ τις πολέμιος ἐγένετο, σπεισαμένου 
10 Κύρου ἐπίστευε μηδὲν ἂν παρὰ τὰς σπονδὰς παθεῖν. 
τοιγαροῦν ἐπεὶ Τισσαφέρνει ἐπολέμησε, πᾶσαι αἱ 
πόλεις ἑκοῦσαι Κῦρον εἵλοντο ἀντὶ Τισσαφέρνους 
πλὴν Μιλησίων : οὗτοι δὲ, ὅτι οὐκ ἤθελε τοὺς φεύ- 
γοντας προέσθαι, ἐφοβοῦντο αὐτόν. καὶ γὰρ ἔργῳ 10 
15 ἐπεδείκνυτο καὶ ἔλεγεν ὅτι οὐκ ἄν ποτε mpooiro; ἐπεὶ 
ἅπαξ φίλος αὐτοῖς ἐγένετο, οὐδ᾽ εἰ ἔτι μὲν μείους 
γένοιντο; ἔτι δὲ κάκιον πράξειαν. 


He rewarded his friends, requited his foes, and punished 
bgp sok 


Φανερὸς δ᾽ ἦν καὶ εἴ τίς τι ἀγαθὸν ἢ Ἶ κακὸν ποιή-1ι * 


σειεν αὐτόν, νικᾶν πειρώμενος * καὶ εὐχὴν δέ τινες 


οὐ αὐτοῦ ἐξέφερον ὡς εὔχοιτο τοσοῦτον χρόνον ζῆν“; | 


ἔστε νικῴη Kal τοὺς εὖ Kal τοὺς κακῶς ποιοῦντας 
ἀλεξόμενος. καὶ γὰρ οὖν πλεῖστοι δὴ αὐτῷ ἑνί γε12 
ἀνδρὶ τῶν ep ἡμῶν ἐπεθύμησαν καὶ χρήματα καὶ 
πόλεις καὶ τὰ ἑαυτῶν σώματα προέσθαι. οὐ μὲν δὴ 13 
95 οὐδὲ τοῦτ᾽ ἄν τις εἴποι ὡς τοὺς κακούργους Kal adi 
κους εἴα καταγελᾶν, ἀλλὰ ἀφειδέστατα πάντων ἐτι- 
μωρεῖτο: πολλάκις δ᾽ ἦν ἰδεῖν παρὰ τὰς στειβομένας 


ANABASIS I. 9. 14-19. 41 


ε Ἂ ᾿ν ΜΆ Ἃ ~ * “ , 
ὁδοὺς καὶ ποδῶν καὶ χειρῶν καὶ ὀφθαλμῶν στερομέ. 
3 "4 ν 3 3 i / 3 sl > - 
vous ἀνθρώπους: wot ἐν τῇ Κύρου ἀρχῇ ἐγένετο 
ἂν \ / a a 
καὶ Ἕλληνι καὶ βαρβάρῳ μηδὲν ἀδικοῦντι ἀδεῶς 
9 ¥ 
πορεύεσθαι ὅπῃ τις ἤθελεν, ἔχοντι 6 τι προχωροίη. 
He especially honored the brave and upright. 
- al 3 θ Ἂ 3 ld ε / 

5 Τούς ye μέντοι ἀγαθοὺς εἰς πόλεμον ὡμολόγητο 14 
διαφερόντως τιμᾶν. καὶ πρῶτον μὲν Hv αὐτῷ πόλε- 
μος πρὸς Πισίδας καὶ Μυσούς - στρατευόμενος οὖν 

ἃ > hs > ᾽ ‘ ἤ ἃ ΝΒ ἡ » “ 
καὶ αὐτὸς εἰς ταύτας τὰς χώρας ovs ἑώρα ἐθέλοντας 
κινδυνεύειν, τούτους καὶ ἄρχοντας ἐποίει ἧς κατε- 
- Υ͂ » I! ‘ ¥ "ἡ ᾿ νΚ'' 
10 στρέφετο χώρας, ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ ἄλλοις δώροις ἐτίμα - 
ν / he ‘ > hy > ’ 
ὥστε φαίνεσθαι τοὺς μὲν ἀγαθοὺς εὐδαιμονεστάτους, 15 
‘ δὲ by ὃ 4 / 5» A > 
τοὺς δὲ κακοὺς δούλους τούτων ἀξιοῦσθαι εἶναι. 
τοιγαροῦν πολλὴ Hv ἀφθονία αὐτῷ τῶν ἐθελόντων 
V4 ν » ἊΝ μ᾿ “ » 
κινδυνεύειν, ὅπου τις οἴοιτο Κῦρον αἰσθήσεσθαι. εἴς 16 
bye μὴν δικαιοσύνην εἴ τις φανερὸς γένοιτο ἐπιδεί- 
κνυσθαι βουλόμενος, περὶ παντὸς ἐποιεῖτο τούτους 
πλουσιωτέρους ποιεῖν τῶν ἐκ τοῦ ἀδίκου φιλοκερ- 
δούντων. 
Loyalty and honest service won from him reward. 
¥ A 
Καὶ yap οὖν adda τε πολλὰ δικαίως αὐτῷ διεχει- 17 
20 ρίζετο καὶ στρατεύματι ἀληθινῷ ἐχρήσατο. καὶ γὰρ 
᾿ : 

στρατηγοὶ καὶ λοχαγοί, ot χρημάτων ἕνεκα πρὸς 
3 ‘a ¥ ¥ 4 " 4 
ἐκεῖνον ἔπλευσαν, ἔγνωσαν κερδαλεώτερον εἶνᾳι Κύρῳ 

~ a “ἃ ν ᾿. Γ A“ Will > I," 

καλῶς πειθαρχεῖν ἢ τὸ κατὰ μῆνα κέρδος. ἀλλὰ 18 

᾽ν. ¥ ! ~ » ‘ 

μὴν εἴ tis γέ τι αὐτῷ προστάξαντι καλῶς ὑπηρετή- 

25 σειεν, οὐδενὶ πώποτε ἀχάριστον εἴασε τὴν προθυμίαν. 
τοιγαροῦν κράτιστοι δὴ ὑπηρέται παντὸς ἔργου Κύρῳ 

»ι / , > ΄ aa ea Ga 4) ae 
ἐλέχθησαν γενέσθαι. εἰ δέ twa ὁρῴη δεινὸν ὄντα 19 


2 ANABASIS I. 9. 20-24. 


/ / hy 
οἰκονόμον ἐκ τοῦ δικαίου καὶ κατασκευάζοντα TE ἧς 
~ > / “Δ 
ἄρχοι χώρας καὶ προσόδους ποιοῦντα; οὐδένα av 
, Y 
πώποτε ἀφείλετο, ἀλλ᾽ ἀεὶ πλείω προσεδίδου - ὥστε 
3 ὯΝ ‘\ ν 
καὶ ἡδέως ἐπόνουν καὶ θαρραλέως ἐκτῶντο καὶ ὅσα 
" ‘ant ¥ 3 ᾿ν il 
5 ἐπέπατό τις ἥκιστα Κῦρον ἐκρυπτεν " οὐ yap φθονῶν 
~ -~ lp bY ral tAAG Ἢ ενος 
τοῖς φανερῶς πλουτοῦσιν ἐφαίνετο, ἀλλα πειρὼμ 
~ ἴω ἴω ) 4 
χρῆσθαι τοῖς TOY ἀποκρυπτομένων χρήμασι. 


He served his friends, and in his benefactors studied their 
characters and needs. 


Φίλους ye μὴν ὅσους ποιήσαιτο καὶ εὔνους γνοίη 20 
ὄντας καὶ ἱκανοὺς κρίνειε συνεργοὺς εἶναί ὅ τι τυγχά- 
ovo. βουλόμενος κατεργάζεσθαι, ὁμολογεῖται πρὸς 
πάντων κράτιστος δὴ γενέσθαι θεραπεύειν. καὶ yap 21 
αὐτὸ τοῦτο οὗπερ αὐτὸς ἕνεκα φίλων wero δεῖσθαι, 
ὡς συνεργοὺς ἔχοι; καὶ αὐτὸς ἐπειρᾶτο συνεργὸς τοῖς 
φίλοις κράτιστος εἶναι τούτου ὅτου αἰσθάνοιτο ἐκα- 
ἰδστον ἐπιθυμοῦντα. δῶρα δὲ πλεῖστα μὲν οἶμαι εἷς 22 
γε ἀνὴρ ἐλάμβανε διὰ πολλά: ταῦτα δὲ πάντων δὴ 
μάλιστα τοῖς φίλοις διεδίδου, πρὸς τοὺς τρόπους 
ἑκάστου σκοπῶν καὶ ὅτου μάλιστα ὁρῴη ἕκαστον 
δεόμενον. 


He unselfishly shared everything with them, and delighted to show 
them personal attention. 


» Καὶ ὅσα τῷ σώματι αὐτοῦ πέμποι τις ἢ ὡς εἰς 23 
πόλεμον ἢ ὡς εἰς καλλωπισμόν, καὶ περὶ τούτων 
λέγειν αὐτὸν ἔφασαν ὅτι τὸ μὲν ἑαυτοῦ σώμα οὐκ ἀν 
δύναιτο τούτοις πᾶσι κοσμηθῆναι, φίλους δὲ καλώς 
κεκοσμημένους μέγιστον κόσμον ἀνδρὶ νομίζοι. καὶ 

ςτὸ μὲν τὰ μεγάλα νικᾶν τοὺς φίλους εὖ ποιοῦντα 
οὐδὲν θαυμαστόν, ἐπειδή γε καὶ δυνατώτερος ἦν τὸ 


ANABASIS I. 9. 25-29. 43 


‘ ἊΝ sl " "“ 
δὲ τῇ ἐπιμελείᾳ περιεῖναι τῶν φίλων καὶ τῷ προθυ- γὺυ Y 


μεῖσθαι χαρίζεσθαι, ταῦτα ἔμοιγε μᾶλλον δοκεῖ 
ἀγαστὰ εἶναι. Κῦρος γὰρ ἔπεμπε βίκους οἴνου ἡμι- 25 
“a 4 ε “ il e i “ “ ν 
δεεῖς πολλάκις ὁπότε πάνυ ἡδὺν λάβοι, λέγων ὅτι 
Ψ \ “ / , ει» nfl 3 Ud 
5 οὔπω δὴ πολλοῦ χρόνου τούτου ἡδίονι οἴνῳ ἐπιτύχοι" 
τοῦτον οὖν σοὶ ἔπεμψε καὶ δεῖταί σου τήμερον τοῦτον 
> A Ἂ 4 al A 4 I.’ ft 
ἐκπιεῖν σὺν οἷς μάλιστα φιλεῖς. πολλάκις δὲ χῆνας 26 
ε , ¥ oe e ᾽ ,» Ν 
ἡμυιβρώτους ἔπεμπε καὶ ἄρτων ἡμίσεα καὶ adda τοι- 
‘aan 3 , , \ / Vd i 
avTa, ἐπιλέγειν κελεύων τὸν φέροντα, Τούτοις naoOy 
ap Vd > " \ 4 FAN 
10 Κῦρος - βούλεται οὖν Kat σὲ τούτων γεύσασθαι. 
ν ν᾿ ‘ / / » > Ν i" 4 
ὅπου δὲ χιλὸς σπάνιος πάνυ εἴη, αὐτὸς δὲ δύναιτο 27 
“ ‘ ~ ‘ » ε rh 
παρασκευάσασθαι διὰ τὸ πολλοὺς ἔχειν ὑπηρέτας 
ἂ bt Ἂ 3 ll dl Ψ ld x‘ 
καὶ διὰ τὴν ἐπιμέλειαν, διαπέμπων ἐκέλευε τοὺς 
φίλους τοῖς τὰ ἑαυτῶν σώματα ἄγουσιν ἵπποις ἐμ- 
4 μων ‘ 4 ε Ἂ “Ὁ ‘ 
15 βάλλειν τοῦτον τὸν χιλόν, ὡς μὴ πεινώντες TOUS 
ε Ὁ “ ¥ 3 Ἁ al a A 
ἑαυτοῦ φίλους ἄγωσιν. εἰ δὲ δή ποτε πορεύοιτο καὶ28 
πλεῖστοι μέλλοιεν ὄψεσθαι, προσκαλῶν τοὺς φίλους 
> ~ ε ᾽ὔ ἃ “~ 
ἐσπουδαιολογεῖτο, ws δηλοίη ovs τιμᾷ. 


No man was ever more beloved. His friends were loyal even 
to the last. 


y Wet , 55 ® > “μα , ee," 
ὥστε ἐγὼ μέν ye ἐξ ὧν ἀκούω οὐδένα κρίνω ὑπὸ 
20 πλειόνων πεφιλῆσθαι οὔτε Ἑλλήνων οὔτε βαρβάρων. 
τεκμήριον δὲ τούτου καὶ τόδε. παρὰ μὲν Κύρου 99 
ὃ Υ Ν b | har > ᾽ Ἃ ’ Ἅ 
ούλον ὄντος οὐδεὶς ἀπήει πρὸς βασιλέα, πλὴν 
3 “ 5 ’ \ 4' ᾿ ἃ ¥ 4 
Ορόντας ἐπεχείρησε: Kal οὗτος δὴ ὃν wero πιστόν 
ν᾿, \ ,» Γ , , aA ε κι 
οἱ εἶναι ταχὺ αὐτὸν ηὗρε Κύρῳ φιλαίτερον ἢ ἑαυτῷ - 
| ; " Ἂ 
δδ σαρὰ δὲ βασιλέως πολλοὶ πρὸς Κῦρον ἀπῆλθον, 
3 Wy, / > / 2 - A @ “ 
ἐπειδὴ πολέμιοι ἀλλήλοις ἐγένοντο, καὶ οὗτοι μέντοι 
οἱ μᾶλιστα UT αὐτοῦ ἀγαπώμενοι, νομίζοντες παρὰ 


> 
EMEVy ov 


44 ANABASIS I. 9. 30, 31 and το. 1-3. 


Κύρῳ ὁ ἐγαθοὶ ἀξιωτέρας ἂν τιμῆ ά ἢ 
ύρῳ ὄντες ἀγαθοὶ ἀξιωτέρας av τιμὴς τυγχάνειν ἢ 
παρὰ βασιλεῖ. μέγα δὲ τεκμήριον καὶ τὸ ἐν τῇ 80 
τελευτῇ τοῦ βίου αὐτῷ γενόμενον ὅτι καὶ αὐτὸς ἣν 

3 Ἂ x ral 2 - > ; Ν Ἂ Ἂ 
ἀγαθὸς καὶ κρίνειν ὀρθῶς ἐδύνατο τοὺς πιστοὺς καὶ 

¥ ᾿.. ἤ > / \ > “~ 
δεὔνους καὶ βεβαίους. ἀποθνήσκοντος yap αὑτοῦ 81 

/ i. ἌΝ » Ἀ / > , 
πάντες οἱ περὶ αὐτὸν φίλοι καὶ συντράπεζοι ἀπέθα- 

ΚΝ 

νον μαχόμενοι πλὴν ᾿Αριαίου " οὗτος δὲ τεταγμένος 
ἐτύγχανεν ἐπὶ τῷ εὐωνύμῳ τοῦ ἱππικοῦ ἄρχων" ὡς 

3 » Ι ἊΜ ’ ¥ ¥ ᾽ν ‘ 

δ᾽ ἤσθετο Κῦρον πεπτωκότα, ἔφυγεν ἔχων καὶ TO 


/ “Ὁ ΒΘ ε “Ὁ 
10 στράτευμα παν οὐ TYELTO- 


Cyrus’s camp plundered. The Greek guard makes a stand. 
X. Ἐνταῦθα δὴ Κύρου ἀποτέμνεται ἡ κεφαλὴ καὶ 1 
ἡ χεὶρ ἡ δεξιά. βασιλεὺς δὲ καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ διώκων 
ἃ 
εἰσπίπτει εἰς τὸ Κύρειον στρατόπεδον - καὶ οἱ μὲν 
Ν᾿ il > ᾽ ἦν > ᾽ν / ‘ a“ 
μετὰ ᾿Αριαίου οὐκέτι ἵστανται, ἀλλὰ φεύγουσι διὰ τοῦ 


ε ἊΝ Ld > lp. Ν ¥ ν 
15 αὑτῶν στρατοπέδου εἰς τὸν σταθμὸν ἔνθεν ὠρμηντο᾽ 


τέτταρες δ᾽ ἐλέγοντο παρασάγγαι εἶναι τῆς ὁδοῦ. 
βασιλεὺς δὲ καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ τά τε ἄλλα πολλὰ διαρ- 2 
πάζουσι, καὶ τὴν Φωκαΐδα τὴν Κύρου παλλακίδα τὴν 
σοφὴν καὶ καλὴν λεγομένην εἶναι λαμβάνει. ἡ δὲ 3 


20 Μιλησία ἡ νεωτέρα ληφθεῖσα ὑπὸ τῶν ἀμφὶ βασιλέα 


3 UA ᾽ν bv. ε / a ¥ 3 
ἐκφεύγει γυμνὴ πρὸς τών Ἑλλήνων, οἱ ἐτυχον ἐν 
τοῖς σκευοφόροις ὅπλα ἔχοντες καὶ ἀντιταχθέντες 

᾿ ‘ iy ε “ 3 / Ε \ \ 
πολλοὺς μὲν τῶν ἁρπαζόντων ἀπέκτειναν; OL δὲ καὶ 


? , π᾿ A > ae , 3 δ Ν , 

‘ αὐτῶν ἀπέθανον - ov μὴν ἔφυγόν ye, ἀλλὰ καὶ Tav- 
3 . ᾿ 

την ἔσωσαν καὶ ἄλλα ὁπόσα ἐντὸς αὐτῶν καὶ χρή- 


΄ ¥ 
para Kat ἄνθρωποι ἐγένοντο πᾶντα ἔσωσαν. 


ANABASIS I. 10. 48. 45 


The king masses his troops in line. The Greeks face right about, 
ready for attack, but he withdraws to their right. 


Ἐνταῦθα διέσχον ἀλλήλων βασιλεύς τε Kal οἱ 
ν ε “ ll e Ν ᾿ ‘ 
EAAnves ὡς τριάκοντα στάδια, οἱ μὲν διώκοντες TOUS 
ε ἴω 
καθ᾽ αὑτοὺς ὡς πάντας νικῶντες, οἱ δ᾽ ἁρπάζοντες 
ε ν᾿ , κι AA δ᾽ ¥ θ ε \ 
ὡς ἤδη πάντες νικῶντες. ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἤσθοντο οἱ μὲν 
ν + ‘ x κ᾿ , > A 
5 Ἕλληνες ὅτι βασιλεὺς σὺν τῳ στρατεύματι ἐν τοις 
σκευοφόροις εἴη, βασιλεὺς δ᾽ αὖ ἤκουσε Τισσαφέρ- 
bid ΕΥ γι Ν᾿ > € ἣν iv | 3 
νους ὅτι οἱ Ἕλληνες νικῷεν τὸ καθ᾽ αὑτοὺς καὶ εἰς 
Ν 
τὸ πρόσθεν οἴχονται διώκοντες, ἔνθα δὴ βασιλεὺς 
μὲν ἀθροίζει τε τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ καὶ συντάττεται, ὁ δὲ 
10 Κλέαρχος ἐβουλεύετο Πρόξενον καλέσας, πλησιαΐ- 
τατος γὰρ ἦν; εἰ πέμποιέν τινας ἢ πάντες ἴοιεν ἐπὶ 
4 4 ὃ > ᾿ 3 dl ‘ ~ 
τὸ στρατόπεδον ἀρήξοντες. ἐν τούτῳ καὶ βασιλεὺς 
A = ‘ , -ι x7 »” ee 
δῆλος ἦν προσιὼν πάλιν ὡς ἐδόκει ὄπισθεν. καὶ οἱ 
4 9 / 4 ε dl 
μὲν Ἕλληνες στραφέντες παρεσκευάζοντο ws ταύτῃ 
r Ld ἃ ὃ , ε δὲ λ ht Vd ‘ 
15 προσιόντος καὶ δεξόμενοι, ὁ δὲ βασιλεὺς ταύτῃ μὲν 
3 i .Ν δὲ nr ¥ a“ > vd / 
οὐκ ἦγεν, ἣ δὲ παρῆλθεν ἔξω τοῦ εὐωνύμου κέρατος 
\ if \ \ ~ 
ταύτῃ Kal ἀπῆγεν, ἀναλαβὼν καὶ τοὺς ἐν τῇ μάχῃ 
Ν \ ν 3 , ‘ 
πρὸς τοὺς Ἕλληνας αὐτομολήσαντας καὶ Τισσα- 
hy, hy" i 
φέρνην καὶ τοὺς σὺν αὐτῳ. 
How Tissaphernes had charged through the Greek line. 
ε A / 9 hi / Ρ > 
20 ‘O yap Τισσαφέρνης ἐν τῇ πρώτῃ συνόδῳ οὐκ 
¥ 3 Ν 4 Ἃ, ~ ~ lt ᾽ν; 
ἔφυγεν, ἀλλὰ διήλασε παρὰ τὸν ποταμὸν κατὰ τοὺς 


ν 
Ἕλληνας πελταστάς - διελαύνων δὲ κατέκανε μὲν 


Ld bmn ͵7 ΓΟ; 
οὐδένα, διαστάντες δ᾽ οἱ Ἕλληνες ἔπαιον καὶ. ἠκόν-͵ -““ 


τιζον αὐτούς - ᾿Ἐπισθένης δὲ ᾿Αμφιπολίτης ἦρχε τῶν 

a a ἡ , ΄ὕ . ὦν  ν 
5 πελταστῶν καὶ ἐλέγετο φρόνιμος γενέσθαι. ὃ δ᾽ οὖν 8 
Τισσαφέρνης ὡς μεῖον ἔχων ἀπηλλάγη, πάλιν μὲν 


46 ANABASIS I. 10. 9-14. ANABASIS I. το. 15-19. 41 


οὐκ ἀναστρέφει, εἰς δὲ τὸ στρατόπεδον ἀφικόμενος τας τὰ ὑπὲρ τοῦ λόφου τί ἐστιν ἀπαγγεῖλαι. Kal δ15 
Ν ~ ε / 9 a , “. a a 4 ¥ / bay \ > / bid “ i" 
τὸ των Ἑλλήνων ἐκεῖ συντυγχάνει βασιλεῖ, καὶ ὁμοῦ Λύκιος ἤλασέ τε καὶ ἰδὼν ἀπαγγέλλει ὅτι φεύγουσιν κατ- 


ον 


δὴ γ / 3 , ν κ" 4 va 
Ἴ πάλιν συνταξάμενοι ἐπορβρένοντο. ᾿ ava KpaTos. indy 


; 
The king’s flank movement a failure. His troops are routed. At sunset the Greeks retire to their plundered camp. 


Ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἦσαν κατὰ τὸ εὐώνυμον τῶν Ἑλλήνων 9 Σχεδὸν δ᾽ ὅτε ταῦτα ἦν καὶ ἥλιος ἐδύετο. ἐνταῦθα 16 
σ ~ ein 
ὅ κέρας, ἔδεισαν οἱ Ἕλληνες μὴ προσάγοιεν πρὸς τὸ β δ δ᾽ ἔστησαν οἱ Ἕλληνες καὶ θέμενοι τὰ ὅπλα ἀνεπαύ- ᾿. ὃ 7 
κέρας καὶ περιπτύξαντες ἀμφοτέρωθεν αὐτοὺς κατα- | οντο" καὶ ἅμα μὲν ἐθαύμαζον ὅτι οὐδαμοῦ Κῦρος 
/ i \ 286 > ~ > , ‘ , / δ᾽ TAX ν 5, > ‘a ὑδεὶ γι, 3 Ἂ 
κόψειαν - καὶ ἐδόκει αὐτοῖς ἀναπτύσσειν τὸ κερας ; φαίνοιτο οὐδ᾽ ἄλλος ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ οὐδεὶς παρειὴ" Ov yap 
‘ 4 θ Ν Ν, , > [2 ἃ "ὃ . " θ , +0 ¥ oN ὃ " 
καὶ ποιήσασθαι ὄπισθεν τὸν ποταμὸν. ἐν ᾧ δὲ 10 θέσαν auTov TEVVYYHKOTA, α εἰκαζον ἢ OLWKOVTA 
ταῦτα ἐβουλεύοντο, καὶ δὴ βασιλεὺς παραμειψάμενος οἴχεσθαι ἢ καταληψήμενον τι προεληλακέναι. καὶ 17 
10 εἰς τὸ αὐτὸ σχῆμα κατέστησεν ἀντίαν τὴν φάλαγγα 10 αὐτοὶ <Poulenayse εἰ αὐτοῦ μείναντες τὰ σκευοφόρα 
ν i CT ἢ 
ὥσπερ TO πρώτον μαχούμενος συνήει. ws δὲ εἶδον ἐνταῦθα ἄγοιντο ἢ ἀπίοιεν ἐπὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον. ἔδο- 
Εν > / Ν 4 , > ~ > ’ \ 4 ~ 9 4 
ot Ἕλληνες ἐγγύς τε ὄντας καὶ παρατεταγμένους, ξεν αὐτοῖς ἀπιέναι - καὶ ἀφικνοῦνται ἀμφὶ δορπη- 
~ . ᾽ν ia ἴω 
αὖθις παιανίσαντες ἐπῇσαν πολὺ ἔτι προθυμότερον ἢ | στὸν ἐπὶ τὰς σκηνάς. ταύτης μὲν τῆς ἡμέρας τοῦτο 18 
, ᾿ in οἱ. 
τὸ πρόσθεν. οἱ δ᾽ αὖ βάρβαροι οὐκ ἐδέχοντο, ἀλλὰ 11 Ϊ τὸ τέλος ἐγένετο. καταλαμβάνουσι δὲ τῶν τε ἄλλων ..... 
FE > / * \ ἢ » ξ >. , ᾿ " “ ." λ A ὃ / \ » / 
16 ἐκ πλείονος ἢ τὸ πρόσθεν ἔφευγον - οἱ δ᾽ ἐπεδίωκον | 15 χρημάτων Ta “TheoTa διηρπασμένα καὶ εἰ TL σιτίον 
Vd rl / > ἊΜ »» εν ζ “ἃ A Ky x In ε V4 Ἂ μι 4, ~ 
μέχρι κώμης TOS: ἐνταῦθα δ᾽ ἔστησαν οἱ Ἕλληνες - ἢ ποτὸν ἦν, καὶ τὰς ἁμάξας μεστὰς ἀλεύρων καὶ 
" »" » o 4 4 4 5.15" a / + ἃ 4 a) ν ¥ Ν 
ὕπερ γὰρ τῆς κώμης γήλοφος ἦν, ἐφ᾽ οὗ ἀνεστράφη- 12 οἴνου, as παρεσκευάσατο Κῦρος, ἵνα εἴ ποτε σφοδρὰ 
aA ων 
σαν οἱ ἀμφὶ βασιλέα, πεζοὶ μὲν ὀὐκέτι, τῶν δὲ ἱπ- ‘ie τὸ στράτευμα λάβοι ἔνδεια, διαδοίη τοῖς Ἕλλησιν — 
V4 ὃ , 3 / Y \ , \ ᾿ > 5° Ὄ , εξ a 2 Ψ A 
πέων ὃ λόφος ἐνεσλησθη, ὥστε τὸ ποιούμενον μὴ | ἦσαν O αὗται τετρακόσιαι ὡς ἐλέγοντο ἁμαξαι---- καὶ 
} , , εν a , y ¥ 
20 γιγνώσκειν. καὶ τὸ βασίλειον σημεῖον ὁρᾶν ἐφασαν, | 20 ταῦτας ΤΟΤΕ OL συν βασιλεῖ διήρπασαν. WOTE ἄδει- 19 
ἀετόν τινα χρυσοῦν! ἐπὶ πέλτῃ ἐπὶ ξύλου la ἀνατεταμέ. | πνοι ἦσαν οἱ πλεῖστοι τῶν Ἑλλήνων - ἦσαν δὲ Kal 
_ vov. ἐπεὶ δὲ καὶ ἐνταῦθ᾽ ἐχώρουν οἱ Ἕλληνες; dei-13 ἀνάριστοι: πρὶν γὰρ δὴ καταλῦσαι τὸ στράτευμα 
"ἽἼΠΠ Ss ν » , ες A > ‘ ν . 2.0) . of ἡ Ν ¥ \ ν᾽» , A 3, \ 
P23, ovat δὴ Kat τὸν λόφον οἱ ἱππεῖς - οὐ μὴν ἔτι ἀθρόοι Ὶ πρὸς ἀριστον βασιλεὺς ἐφάνη. ταύτην μὲν οὖν τὴν 
7 | : 
ἀλλ᾽ ἄλλοι ἄλλοθεν - ἀψιλοῦτο δ᾽ ὁ λόφος τῶν UT νύκτα οὕτω διεγένοντο. 
δῦ πέων - τέλος δὲ καὶ πάντες ἀπεχώρησαν. ὁ οὖν 14 
Κλέαρχος οὐκ ἀνεβίβαζεν ἐπὶ τὸν λόφον, ἀλλ᾽ ὑπ᾽ 
αὐτὸν στήσας τὸ στράτευμα πέμπει Λύκιον τὸν Συρα- 


“ΝΗ 
κόσιον καὶ ἄλλον ἐπὶ τὸν λόφον καὶ κελεύει κατιδόν- 


ANABASIS Il. 1. 1-4 ANABASIS IIL. 1, 5-8, 49 


t”''y Nil ΝΗ “τιον 


ni spe λούει, aphiars ¥e¢ ἐπαγγελλόμεθα δὲ ᾿Αριαίῳ, ἐὰν ἐνθάδε ἔλθῃ, εἰς τὸν 
we by a Νυνρῦσκει “ 
“ROOK ul. 


My i ν 6 


θρόνον τὸν βασίλειον καθιεῖν αὐτόν - τῶν γὰρ μάχῃ 


il N i, ¥ 3 ὔ ~ > ly" 3 7 
νικώντων Και TO αρχέειν €OTL. Ταῦτα ELTTWYV ἀποστέλ- 


_ Tidings reach the Greeks of the death of Cyrus. a!) » , ν})}}»»"» ae , \ 

: aL ag ἐν i ni ΠῚ ἢ λει τοὺς ἀγγέλους καὶ σὺν αὐτοῖς Χειρίσοφον τὸν 
I.) Qs μὲν οὖν ἠθροίσθη Κύρῳ τὸ Ἑλληνικὸν ὅτε , pate? ‘ , “ur > 
MP iy ei a f ᾿ ain δ Λάκωνα καὶ Μένωνα τὸν Θετταλόν - Kal yap αὐτὸς 
ἐπὶ τὸν ἀδελφὸν ᾿Αρταξέρξην ἐστρατεύετο, καὶ ὅσα δ i a a a ὅν , 
ay il pe ioe ΠΡ ΤΥ eNN RO ang Μένων ἐβούλετο - ἦν yap φίλος καὶ ξένος ᾿Αριαίου. 
ἐν τῇ ἀνόδῳ ἐπράχθη καὶ ὡς ἡ μάχη ἐγένετο καὶ ὡς δὰ δὲ , +S: , 
ll il lt isnt ah ll f inl οἱ μὲν ῴχοντο, Κλέαρχος O€ περιέμενε" TO O€ OTPA- 
Κῦρος ἐτελεύτησε καὶ ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον ἐλθόν- εἰ ὰ ig aw ἀρ Ὁ 
ἽΝ : ; 11 ‘em τευμα ἐπορίζετο σῖτον ὅπως ἐδύνατο ἐκ τῶν ὑποζυ- 
δτες ot EdAnves ἐκοιμήθησαν οἰόμενοι τὰ πάντα νικᾶν 


᾽ Md ‘ an \ » , δὲ 
γίων κόπτοντες τοὺς βοῦς καὶ ὄνους ξύλοις δὲ 


Ἁ ~ ~ | -~ / ἤ al Ψ 
καὶ Κῦρον ζῆν, ἐν τῷ πρόσθεν λόγῳ δεὸ Loran] ἅ α Ἢ δ i 
ie ih ζῆν, ili. ii ie. " 10 ἐχρῶντο μικρὸν προϊόντες ἀπὸ τῆς φάλαγγος οὗ ἡ 
δὲ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ συνελθόντες οἱ στρατηγοὶ ἐθαύμαζον ὅτι ΤΣ: ΩΣ a sl ee 4 
: μάχη ἐγένετο τοῖς τε οἰστοῖς πολλοῖς οὖσιν, OUS 


Κῦρος οὔτε ἄλλον πέμποι σημανοῦντα ὅ τι ὴ ι ε je 
Ρ ᾿ ἫΝ XP” ἠνάγκαζον ot Ἕλληνες ἐκβάλλειν τοὺς αὐτομολοῦν- 


~ » aN > ~ 
ποιεῖν οὔτε αὐτὸς φαίνοιτο. ἔδοξεν οὖν αὐτοῖς συ- ‘ , ὠὠμιν ; . Ἁ 
τας παρὰ βασιλέως, καὶ τοῖς γέρροις καὶ ταῖς 


10 σκευασαμένοις ἃ εἶχον καὶ ἐξοπλισαμένοις προϊέναι δ} Ἀ , Bee Ὁ} , . gy 

ἀσπίσι ταῖς ξυλίναις ταῖς Αἰγυπτίαις - πολλαὶ δὲ 

Ἂ ») ip Nid - / ¥ - 

lb καὶ πέλται καὶ ἅμαξαι ἦσαν φέρεσθαι ἔρημοι : οἷς 

πᾶσι χρώμενοι κρέα ἕψοντες ἤσθιον ἐκείνην τὴν 
ἡμέραν. 


The king demands the unconditional surrender of the Greeks. 


L-+- εἰς τὸ πρόσθεν ἕως Κύρῳ συμμίξειαν. ἤδη δὲ ἐν 
ὁρμῇ ὄντων ἅμα ἡλίῳ ἀνέχοντι ἦλθε Προκλῆς ὁ 
Τευθρανίας ἄρχων, γεγονὼς ἀπὸ Δαμαράτου τοῦ 
Λάκωνος, καὶ Γλοῦς ὁ Ταμώ. οὗτοι ἔλεγον ὅτι Κῦ- 


15 pos μὲν τέθνηκεν, ᾿Αριαῖος δὲ πεφευγὼς ἐν τῷ σταθ- 
Καὶ ἤδη τε ἦν περὶ πλήθουσαν ἀγορὰν καὶ ἔρχον- 


~ » | a ¥ / ν fig 
μῷ εἴ μετὰ τῶν ἄλλων βαρβάρων ὅθεν τῇ προτε- ; " : ; 4 
ται παρὰ βασιλέως καὶ Τισσαφέρνους κήρυκες, οἱ 


-, ραίᾳ ὥρμηντο, καὶ λέγοι ὅτι ταύτην μὲν τὴν ἡμέραν 
“περιμενοῖεν αὐτοὺς εἰ μέλλοιεν ἥκειν, τῇ δὲ ἄλλῃ 
ἀπιέναι φαίη ἐπὶ ᾿Ιωνίας, ὅθενπερ ἦλθε. 


20 μὲν ἄλλοι βάρβαροι, ἦν δ᾽ αὐτῶν Φαλῖνος εἷς Ἕλλην, 

ὃς ἐτύγχανε παρὰ Τισδαφέρναι ὧν καὶ ἐντίμως ἔχων. 
They offer to make Ariaeus king. Slaughter of the baggage-cattle. καὶ γὰρ ἘΡ οσεποιεῖτο᾽ ἐπισῚ apa πρὸ τῶν ἀμφὶ 
2 Ταῦτα ἀκούσαντες οἱ στρατηγοὶ καὶ of ἄλλοι “ED- τάξεις τε καὶ ὁπλομαχίαν. οὗτοι δὲ προσελθόντες 
ληνες πυνθανόμενοι βαρέως ἔφερον. Κλέαρχος δὲ 


τάδε εἶπεν. ᾿Αλλ᾽ ὥφελε μὲν Κῦρος ζῆν - ἐπεὶ δὲ 


καὶ καλέσαντες τοὺς τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἄρχοντας λέγου- 
25 σιν ὅτι βασιλεὺς κελεύει τοὺς Ἕλληνας, ἐπεὶ νικῶν 
τυγχάνει καὶ Κῦρον ἀπέκτονε, παραδόντας τὰ ὅπλα 


4 > - 3 / bid ε ~ ~ , 
τετελεύτηκεν, ἀπαγγέλλετε Aptaim ort ἡμεῖς νικωμέν Ἢ lit f il aa 
ἰόντας ἐπὶ tas βασιλέως θύρας εὑρίσκεσθαι ἄν τι 


᾿ ‘ € ε a 1) % ¥ e a“ 4 \ 
τε βασιλέα Kal ὡς ὁρᾶτε οὐδεὶς ETL ἡμῖν μάχεται, καὶ 


i > ἤ 
26 εἰ μὴ ὑμεῖς ἤλθετε, ἐπορευόμεθα ἄν ἐπὶ βασιλέα. δύνωνται ἀγαθόν. 


50 ANABASIS Il. 1. 9-12. 


The Greeks make answer. Phalinus replies to Proxenus. 
Ταῦτα μὲν εἶπον οἱ βασιλέως κήρυκες - ot δὲ 
. 
Ἕλληνες βαρέως μὲν ἤκουσαν, ὅμως δὲ Κλέαρχος 
τοσοῦτον εἶπεν ὅτι οὐ τῶν νικώντων εἴη τὰ ὅπλα 
“Ἢ > 
παραδιδόναι - ἀλλ᾽, ἔφη, ὑμεῖς μέν, ὦ ἄνδρες oTpa- 
δτηγοί, τούτοις ἀποκρίνασθε ὅ τι κάλλιστόν τε καὶ 
¥ ¥ 3 \ ‘ > / 7 > , ᾽; 
ἄριστον ἔχετε: ἐγὼ δὲ αὐτίκα ἥξω. ἐκάλεσε γάρ 
τις αὐτὸν τῶν ὑπηρετῶν, ὅπως ἴδοι τὰ ἱερὰ ἐξῃρη- 
μένα: ἔτυχε γὰρ θυόμενος. ἔνθα δὴ ἀπεκρίνατο το 
, | ths 4 Ἅ Ψ ᾿ Ἅ 
Κλεάνωρ ὁ ᾿Αρκὰς πρεσβύτατος ὧν ὅτι πρόσθεν ἂν 
10 ἀποθάνοιεν ἢ τὰ ὅπλα παραδοίησαν -᾿ Πρόξενος δὲ ὁ 
ἊΜ μὺ | 
Θηβαῖος, ᾿Αλλ᾽ ἐγώ, ἔφη. ὦ Φαλῖνε, θαυμάζω πότερα 


ὡς κρατῶν βασιλεὺς αἰτεῖ τὰ ὅπλα ἢ ὡς διὰ φιλίαν 


ν᾽ 


δῶρα. εἰ μὲν γὰρ ὡς κρατῶν, τί δεῖ αὐτὸν αἰτεῖν 
καὶ οὐ λαβεῖν ἐλθόντα ; εἰ δὲ πείσας βούλεται 
mM ~ / Al i. “Ὁ ’ ΒΝ A ti 
15 λαβεῖν, λεγέτω Ti ἔσται τοῖς στρατιώταις ἐὰν αὕτῳ 
ταῦτα χαρίσωνται. πρὸς ταῦτα Φαλῖνος εἶπε, Βασι-11 
~ ~ ἣ ων 
λεὺς νικᾶν ἡγεῖται, ἐπεὶ Κῦρον ἀπέκτονε. τίς γὰρ 
αὐτῷ ἔστιν ὅστις τῆς ἀρχῆς ἀντιποιεῖται; νομίζει δὲ 
ἴω ἴω a “— o~ 
καὶ ὑμᾶς ἑαυτοῦ εἶναι, ἔχων ἐν μέσῃ τῇ ἑαυτοῦ χώρᾳ 
"ν, “Ὁ 3 Ἃ tl / Ν Δ 2 ry 
90 καὶ ποταμῶν ἐντὸς ἀδιαβάτων, καὶ πλῆθος ἀνθρώπων 
3 7 κ᾿ ~ / > ~ ν » 3 3 al 
ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς δυνάμενος ἀγαγεῖν ὅσον οὐδ᾽ εἰ παρέχοι 
ὑμῖν δύναισθε ἂν ἀποκτεῖναι. 


Theopompus threatens, and Phalinus twits him. Conciliatory 
answers. 


a 3 ‘a ὦ 

Μετὰ τοῦτον Θεόπομπος ᾿Αθηναῖος εἶπεν. Ὦ Φα-12 
λῖνε, νῦν, ὡς σὺ ὁρᾷς, ἡμῖν οὐδὲν ἔστιν ἀγαθὸν ἄλλο 
3 Ν ν \ > / ν ‘ > ¥ 7 
οδεῖ μὴ ὅπλα καὶ ἀρετή. ὅπλα μὲν οὖν ἔχοντες οἱό- 
Ἅ ‘ il > iy “ ἤ 33 ἃ 
μεθα ἂν καὶ τῇ ἀρετῇ χρῆσθαι, παραδόντες δ᾽ ἄν 

“~ Ν dl F ~ 

ταῦτα Kal τῶν σωμάτων στερηθῆναι. μὴ οὖν οἴου 


ANABASIS II. x. 13-18. 51 


x Nd 9 Ν Ld ~ »ν ε il , 3 μ᾿ 
τὰ μόνα ἀγαθὰ ἡμῖν ὄντα ὑμῖν παραδώσειν, ἀλλὰ 
σὺν τούτοις καὶ περὶ τῶν ὑμετέρων ἀγαθῶν paxov- 

ἴω ἴω Ἀ 
μεθα. ἀκούσας δὲ ταῦτα ὁ Φαλῖνος ἐγέλασε καὶ 18 

a 5 
εἶπεν, ᾿Αλλὰ φιλοσόφῳ μὲν ἔοικας, ὦ νεανίσκε, Kal 

al > > vd ¥ al > ) » > » 

δ λέγεις οὐκ ἀχάριστα" ἴσθι μέντοι ἀνόητος ὧν, εἰ οἴει 
τὴν ὑμετέραν ἀρετὴν περιγενέσθαι ἂν τῆς βασιλέως 

΄ ¥ 1 », ¥ ΄, ᾿ 
δυνάμεως. ἄλλους δέ τινας ἔφασαν λέγειν ὕπομα- 14 
\ 
λακιζομένους ws καὶ Κύρῳ πιστοὶ ἐγένοντο καὶ Ba- 
σιλεῖ ἂν πολλοῦ ἀξιοι γένοιντο εἰ βούλοιτο φίλος 

" V4 ," » » 4 “A eS) ν» 

10 γενέσθαι" καὶ εἴτε ἄλλο τι θέλοι χρῆσθαι εἴτ᾽ ἔπ 
Αἴγυπτον στρατεύειν, συγκαταστρέψαιντ᾽ ἂν αὐτῷ. 

Clearchus appeals to Phalinus to advise them what to do. 
Ἐ ΄ Κλέ "ἢ ." “ f εἶ "ὃ 
ν τούτῳ Κλέαρχος ἧκε, καὶ ἠρώτησεν εἰ 707 16 
ἀποκεκριμένοι εἶεν. Φαλῖνος δὲ ὑπολαβὼν εἶπεν, 
Οὗτοι μέν, ὦ Κλέαρχε, ἄλλος ἄλλα λέγει: σὺ δ᾽ 
va Ψ “4 a 

15 ἡμῖν εἰπὲ τί λέγεις. ὁ δ᾽ εἶπεν, Eye σε, ὦ Φαλῖνε, 16 
¥ δ > δὲ ᾿, ξ TAX , " , 
ἄσμενος ἑώρακα, οἶμαι δὲ Kal οἱ ἄλλοι πάντες" σύ 

Ν Ψ Ὁ νι Κὶ _ a 3, ν A 
τε yap Ἕλλην εἶ Kal ἡμεῖς τοσοῦτοι ὄντες σους σὺ 
εν} 3 A io Mi / / 
ὁρᾷς - ἐν τοιούτοις δὲ ὅντε ψρϑγμάσι συμβουλευδ. 

Pl Ι [4 Ἂ ill ~ 
μεθά σοι τί χρὴ ποιεῖν περὶ ὧν λέγεις. σὺ οὖν πρὸς 17 

a“ / em 9 ὃ “Ὁ / 

20 θεῶν συμβούλευσον ἡμῖν ὅ τι σοι δοκεῖ κάλλιστον 
καὶ ἄριστον εἶναι, καὶ ὅ σοι τιμὴν οἴσει εἰς τὸν 
» al Ἄν / bid λ᾽ al 
ἔπειτα χρόνον ἀεὶ λεγόμενον, ὅτι Φαλινὸς ποτε πεμ- 

\ ν 
φθεὶς παρὰ βασιλέως κελεύσων τοὺς Ἕλληνας τὰ 
ὅπλα παραδοῦναι συμβουλευομένοις συνεβούλευσεν 

3 “Ὁ / i ὴ ν 3 ᾽ ’ 9 ἊΜ 

25 αὐτοῖς τάδε. οἶσθα δὲ ὅτι ἀνάγκη λέγεσθαι ἐν τῇ 

A ‘al 
Ἑλλάδι ἃ ἂν συμβουλεύσῃς. ὁ δὲ Κλέαρχος ταῦτα 18 

ε / 4 Ἁ » Νὰ in ‘ ld 

ὑπήγετο βουλόμενος καὶ αὑτὸν τὸν Tapa βασιλέως 
͵ A wn Ψ 
πρεσβεύοντα συμβουλεῦσαι μὴ παραδοῦναι τὰ ὅπλα, 


ANABASIS II. x. 19-23. ANABASIS II. 2. 1-5. 53 


ὅπως εὐέλπιδες μᾶλλον elev οἱ Ἕλληνες. Φαλῖνος Ariaeus declines the offer of the Greeks, but invites them to join him. 
δὲ ὑποστρέψας παρὰ τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ εἶπεν, Eyo, εἰ 19 II. Φαλῖνος μὲν δὴ ῴᾧχετο καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ. οἱ δὲ 
~ a val ν ΨΥ / Ὃ ™ ‘ rd - 
μὲν τῶν μυρίων ἐλπίδων pia τις ὑμῖν ἐστι σωθῆναι β παρὰ ᾿Αριαίου ἧκον Προκλῆς καὶ Χειρίσοφος - Μέ- 
λ » λ ~ , Ἀ ὃ ὃ , de > ~ oF \ ἿΑ ’ e δὲ ἔλ 
πολεμοῦντας βασιλεῖ, συμβουλεύω μὴ Tapad.oovar νων O€ αὑτου ἐμενε Tapa Ἀριαιῳ: οὔτοι OE ἐλεγον 
be Ἃ > ~ > a 
5Ta ὅπλα. εἰ δέ τοι μηδεμία σωτηρίας ἐστὶν ἐλπὶς ὅτι πολλοὺς φαίη ᾿Αριαῖος εἶναι Πέρσας ἑαυτοῦ Beh- 
ti / , ᾽ ιν» 9 4 ἃ > a > ’ θ 9 κ᾿ d , 
ἄκοντος βασιλέως, συμβουλεύω σῴζεσθαι ὑμῖν ὅπῃ 5τίους, οὗς οὐκ av ἀνασχέσθαι αὐτοῦ βασιλεύοντος ° 
, > > > / 4 Ψ ¥ , an 
Suvarov. ἀλλ᾽ εἰ βούλεσθε συναπιέναι, ἥκειν ἤδη κελεύει τῆς 
νυκτός. εἰ δὲ μή, αὔριον πρῷ ἀπιέναι φησίν. ὁ δὲ 
The Greeks refuse fo give up their arms. Phalinus proposes a truce. i : i » ἜΣ, ρ ἀμ» P¢ ““ i aah ΘΝ 
" ‘A Κλέαρχος εἶπεν, ᾿Αλλ᾽ οὕτω χρὴ ποιεῖν - ἐὰν μὲν 
Κλέαρχος δὲ πρὸς ταῦτα εἶπεν, ᾿Αλλὰ ταῦτα μὲν 20 a ΓΑ ‘Vg ᾿ all ; : μ 
. pil κωμεν, ὥσπερ λέγετε. εἰ δὲ πράττετε ὁποῖον 
δὴ σὺ λέγεις. παρ᾽ ἡμῶν δὲ ἀπάγγελλε τάδε ὅτι 7 aires eal fea μ » P i ; [ 
εὐ δι χα δὼ. δ Ag 5 , 10 ἄν τι ὑμῖν οἴησθε μάλιστα συμφέρειν. ὅ τι δὲ ποιή- 
10 ἡμεῖς οἰόμεθα, εἰ μὲν δέοι βασιλεῖ φίλους εἶναι, πλεί- ΣΤ [Ἂν μι 
x ¥ > , ¥ . Ἅ σοι οὐδὲ TOUTOLS €ELTTE. 
ovos ἂν ἄξιοι εἶναι φίλοι ἔχοντες Ta ὅπλα ἢ Tapa- ᾿ 
, ¥ > Or O7 "ν a " Conference of the Greeks. The invitation accepted. Clearchus 
δόντες ἄλλῳ, εἰ. δὲ δέοι πολεμεῖν, ἄμεινον av πολεμεῖν in command. 
Ν» ἊΨ nn Oo / ε \ o al 
ἔχοντες TA ὅπλα ἢ ἄλλῳ παραδόντες. ὁ δὲ Padivos2i Μετὰ ταῦτα ἤδη ἡλίου δύνοντος συγκαλέσας τοὺς 
κὰκ ~ ‘ Ν > a“ > ih! \ , 
εἶπε, Ταῦτα μὲν δὴ ἀπαγγελοῦμεν - ἀλλὰ καὶ τάδε | στρατηγοὺς Kal λοχαγοὺς ἔλεξε τοιάδε. Ἔμοί, ὦ 
δ" RE EP B Late. ἃ , a "ἃ » ! oe θ , 27 .» ,ὕ 3 » ἢ Ν 
15 ὑμῖν εἰπεῖν ἐκέλευσε βασιλεύς, οτι μένουσι μὲν ὑμιν ἄνδρες, θυομένῳ ἰέναι ἐπὶ βασιλέα οὐκ ἐγίγνετο τὰ 
val MIO “9. A Ν A ] 
αὐτοῦ σπονδαὶ εἴησαν, προϊοῦσι δὲ καὶ ἀπιοῦσι πόλ- : Is tepd. Kal εἰκότως apa οὐκ ἐγίγνετο: ws yap ἐγὼ 
¥ > ‘ ‘ , , A rd os 
Eos. εἴπατε οὖν Kal περὶ τούτου πότερα μενεῖτε | νῦν πυνθάνομαι, ἐν μέσῳ ἡμῶν καὶ βασιλέως ὁ 
» / 9 Ἅ ε , » »ὦ "» i 
καὶ σπονδαί εἰσιν ἢ ὡς πολέμου ὄντος Tap ὑμῶν , Τίγρης ποταμός ἐστι ναυσίπορος, ὃν οὐκ ἂν Suvai- 
9 κ᾿ , a > " ’ Ν κ᾿ A a 
ἀπαγγελῶ. Κλέαρχος δ᾽ ἔλεξεν, ᾿Απάγγελλε τοίνυν 22 ' μεθα ἄνευ πλοίων διαβῆναι. πλοῖα δὲ ἡμεῖς οὐκ 
‘ ᾽ν / bid ‘ e a“ Ν ~ a “ 
20 καὶ περὶ τούτου ὅτι Kal ἡμῖν ταὐτὰ δοκεῖ ἅπερ καὶ ἔχομεν. οὐ μὲν δὴ αὐτοῦ γε μένειν οἷόν τε- τὰ γὰρ 
“ PMI “" νυ a ε a + 
βασιλεῖ. Ti οὖν ταῦτά ἐστιν ; ἔφη ὁ Φαλῖνος. ἀπε- 20 ἐπιτήδεια οὐκ ἔστιν ἔχειν - ἰέναι δὲ παρὰ τοὺς Κύρου 
i Vd a \ dl Υ > A 4) 
kpivato Κλέαρχος, Ἢν μὲν μένωμεν, σπονδαΐ, ἀπι- φίλους πάνυ καλὰ ἡμῖν τὰ ἱερὰ ἦν. ὧδε οὖν χρὴ 
ω A ᾿ “᾿ 7 , ε \ / > , ᾿ A iy 
ovat δὲ καὶ προϊοῦσι πόλεμος. ὁ δὲ πάλιν ἠρώτησε, 23 Ι ποιεῖν - ἀπιόντας δειπνεῖν 6 τι τις ἔχει: ἐπειδὰν δὲ 
Σπονδὰς ἢ πόλεμον a λῶ; Κλέ δὲ ταὐτὰ Ἵ Ἴ is a jeoBat, σ᾽ ileoO 
n pov ἀπαγγελῶ ; Κλέαρχος δὲ ταὐτὰ σημήνῃ τῷ κέρατι ὡς ἀναπαύεσθαι, συσκευάζεσθε: 
IN , > , \ ‘ , > a 
25 πάλιν ἀπεκρίνατο, Σπονδαὶ μὲν μένουσιν, ἀπιοῦσι δὲ ἐπειδὰν δὲ τὸ δεύτερον, ἀνατίθεσθε ἐπὶ τὰ ὑποζύγια" 


“ ill »» ἢ bid A / > / | ral A Ι 
καὶ προϊοῦσι πόλεμος. ὅ τι δὲ ποιήσοι οὐ διεσή- | 25 ἐπὶ δὲ τῷ τρίτῳ ἕπεσθε τῷ ἡγουμένῳ, TA μὲν ὑποζύ- 


μήνε. | i] για ἔχοντες πρὸς τοῦ ποταμοῦ, τὰ δὲ ὅπλα ἔξω. 
ταῦτ᾽ ἀκούσαντες οἱ στρατηγοὶ καὶ λοχαγοὶ ἀπῆλ- ὅ 


δά ANABASIS II. 2. 6-10. 


Ν > - 7 \ Ἃ ls. c h > 
Gov καὶ ἐποίουν οὕτω. καὶ TO λοιπὸν ὁ μὲν ἦρχεν; 
ε Ν > / » ε ral > x c -~ bid 
ot δὲ ἐπείθοντο, οὐχ ἑλόμενοι, ἀλλὰ ὁρῶντες OTL 
~ ¥ 
μόνος ἐφρόνει οἷα δεῖ τὸν ἄρχοντα, οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι 
“Ὁ f ἊΝ ll 4 3 
ἄπειροι ἦσαν. | ἀριθμὸς τῆς ὁδοῦ ἣν ἦλθον ἐξ Ἔφέ. 
“ fl ~ Ν ~ ‘ 
5a0u τῆς Ἰωνίας μέχρι τῆς μάχης σταθμοὶ τρεῖς Kal 
ἐνενήκοντα, παρασάγγαι πέντε καὶ τριάκοντα καὶ 
πεντακόσιοι, στάδιοι πεντήκοντα καὶ ἑξακισχίλιοι 


ἣ ὕ SA \ ~ , “"ἪἌ ἢ» > > 
καὶ μύριοι: ἄπο δὲ τῆς μάχης ἐλέγοντο εἶναι εἰς 


Βαβυλῶνα στάδιοι ἑξήκοντα καὶ τριακόσιοι. 


First desertion. The Greeks join Ariaeus. Solemn covenant. 
10 Ἐντεῦθεν, ἐπεὶ σκότος ἐγένετο, Μιλτοκύθης μὲν ὁ 
~ ¥ Ι ε / Ν > ε “ > 
Θρᾷξ ἔχων τούς τε ἱππέας τοὺς μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ εἰς 

ἢ) Ν ἊΝ ω “~ ε , 
τετταράκοντα καὶ Tov πεζῶν Θρᾳκῶν ws τριακοσίους 
ηὐτομόλησε πρὸς βασιλέα. Κλέαρχος δὲ τοῖς ἄλλοις 
ἡγεῖτο κατὰ τὰ παρηγγελμένα, οἱ δ᾽ εἵποντο- καὶ 
16 ἀφικνοῦνται εἰς τὸν πρῶτον σταθμὸν παρ᾽ ᾿Αριαῖον 
καὶ τὴν ἐκείνου στρατιὰν ἀμφὶ μέσας νύκτας - καὶ 
5 / / a, = i ε y." ." 
ἐν τάξει θέμενοι τὰ ὅπλα συνῆλθον ot στρατηγοὶ Kat 

ἂ ῪΝᾺ ε ie > 2 o~ \ ¥ 

λοχαγοὶ τῶν Ἑλλήνων παρ Αριαιον- καὶ ὠμοσαν 
ἦν ν. x “2 ἴω ‘ o " 3 “"4ἅ ε 
οἵ τε Ἕλληνες καὶ ὁ Aptatos καὶ τῶν σὺν αὕτῳ OL 
20 κράτιστοι μήτε προδώσειν ἀλλήλους σύμμαχοί τε 

¥ ε I! ἢ ἢ ᾽ν e / 
ἔσεσθαι - οἱ δὲ βάρβαροι προσώμοσαν Kat ἡγήσε- 

3 / o Mh, / o 
σθαι ἀδόλως. ταῦτα δ᾽ ὥμοσαν, σφάξαντες ταῦρον 

᾿.. » Ν Ἅ > » / e \ ν 
καὶ κάπρον καὶ κριὸν εἰς ἀσπίδα, οἱ μὲν Ἕλληνες 
βάπτοντες ξίφος, οἱ δὲ βάρβαροι λόγχην. 
Plan of retreat. 


> ¥ 
25 Ἐπεὶ δὲ τὰ πιστὰ ἐγένετο, εἶπεν ὁ Κλέαρχος, Aye 10 


la - >? ids > / € "ΣΝ Ν᾿ / > Ν i. 
δή, ὦ ᾿Αριαῖε, ἐπείπερ ὁ αὐτὸς ὑμῖν στόλος ἐστὶ καὶ 
on ¥ EE , , 
ἡμῖν, εἰπὲ τίνα γνώμην ἔχεις περὶ τῆς πορείας, πότε- 


ANABASIS II. 2. 11-15. δ 


¥ Ψ ¥ MIN ν. " V4 
pov ἄπιμεν ἤνπερ ἤλθομεν ἢ ἄλλην τινὰ ἐννενοηκέ- 
ναι δοκεῖς ὁδὸν κρείττω. ὁ δ᾽ εἶπεν, Ἣν μὲν ἤλθομεν 11 

> ᾿ i “ὁ 4 \ ἴω » sul ε 4 
ἀπιόντες παντελῶς ἂν ὑπὸ λιμοῦ ἀπολοίμεθα - ὑπάρ- 
χει γὰρ νῦν ἡμῖν οὐδὲν τῶν ἐπιτηδείων. ἑπτακαίδεκα 
5 γὰρ σταθμῶν τῶν ἐγγυτάτω οὐδὲ δεῦρο ἰόντες ἐκ τῆς 

ἤ > 5 Ν ¥ - »ν ὃ V4 > 
χώρας οὐδὲν εἴχομεν λαμβάνειν - ἔνθα δέ τι ἦν, 
ἡμεῖς διαπορευόμενοι κατεδαπανήσαμεν. νῦν δ᾽ 
ἐπινοοῦμεν πορεύεσθαι μακροτέραν μέν, τῶν δ᾽ ἐπι- 
τηδείων οὐκ ἀπορήσομεν. πορευτέον δ᾽ ἡμῖν τοὺς 12 
10 πρώτους σταθμοὺς ὡς ἂν δυνώμεθα μακροτάτους, ἵνα 
ὡς πλεῖστον ἀποσπάσωμεν τοῦ βασιλικοῦ στρατεύ- 
λ Ν ν ’ Ἅ a ε A ει 3 4 
ματος - ἢν yap ἅπαξ δύο ἢ τριῶν ἡμερῶν ὁδὸν ἀπό- 
σχωμεν, οὐκέτι μὴ δύνηται βασιλεὺς ἡμᾶς καταλα- 
βεῖν. ὀλίγῳ μὲν γὰρ στρατεύματι οὐ τολμήσει ἐφέ- 

hy" , = 4 > , al 
ιόπεσθαι πολὺν δ᾽ ἔχων στόλον ov δυνήσεται ταχέως 
πορεύεσθαι: ἴσως δὲ καὶ τῶν ἐπιτηδείων σπανιεῖ. 

ταύτην, ἔφη; τὴν γνώμην ἔχω ἔγωγε. 
The retreat begins. Traces of the king’s army. 

i a 
Hv δὲ αὕτη ἡ στρατηγία οὐδὲν ἄλλο δυναμένη ἢ 13 
ἀποδρᾶναι ἢ ἀποφυγεῖν - ἡ δὲ τύχη ἐστρατήγησε 
0 κάλλιον. ἐπεὶ γὰρ ἡμέρα ἐγένετο, ἐπορεύοντο ἐν 
ὃ ἕ νη Mi ‘ ὅλ λ ζό ne bid ὁλί 
εξιᾷ ἔχοντες τὸν ἥλιον, λογιζόμενοι ἡξειν ἅμα ἡλίῳ 
δύνοντι εἰς κώμας τῆς Βαβυλωνίας χώρας - καὶ τοῦτο 
μὲν οὐκ ἐψεύσθησαν. ἔτι δὲ ἀμφὶ δείλην ἔδοξαν 14 


’ ε ΜΝ ε - x ie ε ld a x 
πολεμίους ὁρᾶν ἱππέας - καὶ τῶν τε Ἑλλήνων οἵ μὴ 


i MO ΓῚ A / 3, > A , “0 x 
25 ἐτυχον ἐν TALS τάξεσιν ὄντες εἰς Tas τάξεις ἔθεον, καὶ 


3 a Ν κῇ' Ἂ 2. > ε / Wf 
Αριαῖος, ἐτύγχανε yap ἐφ᾽ ἁμάξης πορευόμενος 
διότι ἐτέτρωτο, καταβὰς ἐθωρακίζετο καὶ οἱ σὺν 
ὑτῷ. ἐν ᾧ δὲ ὠὡπλίζοντο ἧκον λέγοντες OL προπεμ- 15 
αὐτῷ. ἐν ᾧ ἡ γοντες οἱ προπεμ' 


δ6 ANABASIS II. 2. 16-20. ANABASIS II. 2, 21 and 3. 15. δ᾽ 


φθέντες σκοποὶ ὅτι οὐκ ἱππεῖς εἶεν ἀλλ᾽ ὑποζύγια κηρύξαντα' ὅτι προαγορεύουσιν οἱ ἄρχοντες, ὃς ἂν 
νέμοιτο. καὶ εὐθὺς ἔγνωσαν πάντες ὅτι ἐγγύς που τὸν ἀφέντα τὸν ὄνον εἰς τὰ ὅπλα μηνύσῃ; ὅτι λήψεται 
ἐστρατοπεδεύετο βασιλεύς - καὶ γὰρ καπνὸς ἐφαίνετο μισθὸν τάλαντον. ἐπεὶ δὲ ταῦτα ἐκηρύχθη. ἔγνωσαν 21 
ἐν κώμαις οὐ πρόσω. οἱ στρατιῶται ὅτι κενὸς ὁ φόβος εἴη καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες 
First encampment. The enemy terrified. 5 OWOL. ἅμα δὲ ὄρθρῳ παρήγγειλεν ὃ Κλέαρχος εἰς 
δ Κλέαρχος δὲ ἐπὶ μὲν τοὺς πολεμίους οὐκ ἦγεν " 16 τάξιν τὰ ὅπλα τίθεσθαι τοὺς Ἕλληνας ἧπερ εἶχον 
ἤδει γὰρ καὶ ἀπειρηκότας τοὺς στρατιώτας Kal ἀσί- ὅτε ἦν ἡ μάχη. 
τους OVTAS ° non δὲ καὶ ὀψὲ ἦν * ov μέντοι οὐδὲ ἀπέ. Heralds from the king propose a truce. : 
κλινε, φυλαττόμενος μὴ δοκοίη φεύγειν, ἀλλ᾽ εὐθύω- / TIT. Ὃ δὲ δὴ ἔγραψα ὅτι βασιλεὺς ἐξεπλάγη τῇ 
ρον ἄγων ἅμα τῷ ἡλίῳ δυομένῳ εἰς τὰς ἐγγυτάτω | ἐφόδῳ, τῷδε δῆλον ἦν. τῇ μὲν yap πρόσθεν ἡμέρᾳ 
ιοκώμας τοὺς πρώτους ἔχων κατεσκήνωσεν, ἐξ ὧν το πέμπων τὰ ὅπλα παραδιδόναι ἐκέλευε, τότε δὲ ἅμα 
διήρπαστο ὑπὸ τοῦ βασιλικοῦ στρατεύματος καὶ ͵ ἡλίῳ ἀνατέλλοντι κήρυκας ἔπεμψε περὶ σπονδῶν. 
αὐτὰ τὰ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν ξύλα. οἱ μὲν οὖν πρῶτοι 1Ἱ | οἱ δ᾽ ἐπεὶ ἦλθον πρὸς τοὺς προφύλακας, ἐζήτουν 
ὅμως τρόπῳ τινὶ ἐστρατοπεδεύσαντο, οἱ δὲ ὕστεροι β τοὺς ἄρχοντας. ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἀπήγγελλον οἱ προφύ- 
σκοταῖοι προσιόντες ὡς ἐτύγχανον ἕκαστοι ηὐλίζον- λακες, Κλέαρχος τυχὼν τότε τὰς τάξεις ἐπισκοπῶν 
15T0, καὶ κραυγὴν πολλὴν ἐποίουν καλοῦντες ἀλλή- ι εἶπε τοῖς προφύλαξι κελεύειν τοὺς κήρυκας περιμέ- | 
λους, στε καὶ τοὺς πολεμίους ἀκούειν - ὦστε οἱ μὲν νειν ἄχρι ἂν σχολάσῃ. ἐπεὶ δὲ κατέστησε τὸ στρά- 
ἐγγύτατα τῶν πολεμίων καὶ ἔφυγον ἐκ τῶν σκηνω- τευμα ὥστε καλῶς ἔχειν ὁρᾶσθαι πάντῃ φάλαγγα 
μάτων. δῆλον δὲ τοῦτο τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ ἐγένετο. οὔτε: πυκνήν, ἐκτὸς τῶν ὅπλων δὲ μηδένα καταφανὴ εἶναι, 
γὰρ ὑποζύγιον er οὐδὲν ἐφάνη οὔτε στρατόπεδον | ἐκάλεσε τοὺς ἀγγέλους, καὶ αὐτός τε προῆλθε τούς 
90 οὔτε καπνὸς οὐδαμοῦ πλησίον. ἐξεπλάγη δέ, ὡς 20T€ εὐοπλοτάτους ἔχων καὶ εὐειδεστάτους τῶν αὑτοῦ 
ἔοικε, καὶ βασιλεὺς τῇ ἐφόδῳ τοῦ στρατεύματος. | στρατιωτῶν καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις στρατηγοῖς ταὐτὰ ἔφρα- 
[5 ἐδήλωσε δὲ τοῦτο οἷς τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ ἔπραττε. σεν. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἦν πρὸς τοῖς ἀγγέλοις, ἀνηρώτα τί 4 
Panic in the Greek camp. | βούλοιντο. οἱ δ᾽ ἔλεγον ὅτι περὶ σπονδῶν ἥκοιεν 
Προϊούσης μέντοι τῆς νυκτὸς ταύτης καὶ τοῖς 19 ἄνδρες οἵτινες ἱκανοὶ ἔσονται τά τε παρὰ βασιλέως 
Ἕλλησι φόβος ἐμπίπτει, καὶ θόρυβος καὶ δοῦπος ἦν 25 τοῖς Ἕλλησιν ἀπαγγεῖλαι καὶ τὰ παρὰ τῶν Ἑλλήνων 
25 οἷον εἰκὸς φόβου ἐμπεσόντος γίγνεσθαι. Κλέαρχος 20 βασιλεῖ. 
δὲ Τολμίδην Ἠλεῖον, ὃν ἐτύγχανεν ἔχων παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ Ι If the truce is made, the Greeks shall have supplies. 
κήρυκα ἄριστον τῶν τότε, ἀνειπεῖν ἐκέλευσε σιγὴν ] Ὁ δὲ ἀπεκρίνατο, ᾿Απαγγέλλετε τοίνυν αὐτῷ ὅτι 5 


’ ~ A ¥ ‘ > ¥ δ᾽ Ε 
μάχης δεῖ TPWTOV* ἄριστον yap οὐκ εστιν OVO O 


»Ἅ al i" Ἢ; “ἥν nih, “μμἱ, ! " ΨΧ 
Ba\ ws Wh sth Mem, { γεὸ. σοι ρκοδαιδι /* (AD αὐγνιοΐ } 
M Kf w ‘ , 


ἵν, 


58 ANABASIS II. 3. 6-10. 


τολμήσων περὶ σπονδῶν λέγειν τοῖς Ἕλλησι μὴ 
πορίσας ἄριστον. ταῦτα ἀκούσαντες οἱ ἄγγελοι 
ἀπήλαυνον, καὶ ἧκον ταχύ. ᾧ καὶ δῆλον ἣν ὅτι 
ἐγγύς που βασιλεὺς ἦν ἢ ἄλλος τις ᾧ ἐπετέτακτο 
δταῦτα πράττειν - ἔλεγον δὲ ὅτι εἰκότα δοκοῖεν λέγειν 
βασιλεῖ, καὶ ἥκοιεν ἡγεμόνας ἔχοντες ol αὐτούς, ἐὰν 
σπονδαὶ γένωνται, ἄξουσιν ἔνθεν ἕξουσι τὰ ἐπιτήδεια. 
ὁ δὲ ἠρώτα εἰ αὐτοῖς τοῖς ἀνδράσι σπένδοιτο τοῖς 
ἰοῦσι καὶ ἀπιοῦσιν, ἢ καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἔσοιντο σπον- 
10Sai. οἱ δέ, Ἅπασιν, ἔφασαν, μέχρι ἂν βασιλεῖ τὰ 
gap ὑμῶν διαγγελθῇ. 


The truce is concluded, and the Greeks follow their guides. 


ε 


Ἐπεὶ δὲ ταῦτα εἶπον, μεταστησάμενος αὐτοὺς ὁ 
Κλέαρχος ἐβουλεύετο . καὶ ἐδόκει τὰς σπονδὰς ‘Tor 
εἶσθαι ταχύ τε Kal καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν ἐλθεῖν τε ἐπὶ τὰ 

τι ἐπιτήδεια καὶ λαβεῖν. ὁ δὲ Κλέαρχος εἶπε; Δοκεὶ 
μὲν κἀμοὶ ταῦτα - οὐ μέντοι ταχύ γε ἀπαγγελῶ, ἀλλὰ 
διατρίψω ἔστ᾽ ἂν ὀκνήσωσιν οἱ ἄγγελοι μὴ ἀποδόξῃ 
ἡμῖν τὰς σπονδὰς ποιήσασθαι. οἶμαί γε μέντοι, 
ἔφη. καὶ τοῖς ἡμετέροις στρατιώταις τὸν αὐτὸν φόβον 

29 παρέσεσθαι. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἐδόκει καιρὸς εἶναι, ἀπήγγελ- 
λεν ὅτι σπένδοιτο, καὶ εὐθὺς ἡγεῖσθαι ἐκέλευε πρὸς 
τἀπιτήδεια. καὶ οἱ μὲν ἡγοῦντο, Κλέαρχος μέντοι 10 
ἐπορεύετο τὰς μὲν σπονδὰς ποιησάμενος, τὸ δὲ στρά- 
τευμα ἔχων ἐν τάξει, καὶ αὐτὸς ὠπισϑοφυλάκει. καὶ 

ο5 ἐνετύγχανον τάφροις καὶ αὐλῶσιν ὕδατος πλήρεσι» 
ὡς μὴ δύνασθαι διαβαίνειν ἄνευ γεφυρῶν - ἀλλ 
ἐποιοῦντο ἐκ τῶν φοινίκων ot ἦσαν ἐκπεπτωκότες, 
τοὺς δὲ καὶ ἐξέκοπτον. 


ANABASIS II. 3. 11-16, 59 


Clearchus a vigorous commander. He suspects the king. 


Kat ἐνταῦθα jv Κλέαρχον καταμαθεῖν ws ἐπεστά: 1 
TEL, ἐν μὲν TH ἀριστερᾷ χειρὶ τὸ δόρυ ἔχων, ἐν δὲ TH 
iy “ A ¥ 3 silly al {ἢν Ἂ 
δεξιᾷ βακτηρίαν - καὶ εἴ τις αὐτῷ δοκοίη τῶν πρὸς 
τοῦτο τεταγμένων βλακεύειν, ἐκλεγόμενος τὸν ἐπιτή- 
» » +) lll, , ° > 
δ δειον ἔπαισεν ἄν, καὶ ἅμα αὐτὸς προσελάμβαωνὲν εἰς 
ν a 
Tov πηλὸν ἐμβαίνων- ὥστε πᾶσιν αἰσχύνην εἶναι 
\ > , | A: \ ll. 5 
μὴ οὐ συσπουδάζειν. καὶ ἐτάχθησαν πρὸς αὐτὸ οἱ 12 
> , ¥ Γ , ἣν 3 Ν \ ‘ / 
εἰς τριάκοντα ETN γεγονότες - ἐπεὶ δὲ Kal Κλέαρχον 
. νν'Γ.,'᾽ ᾽ sal ‘ € if 
ἑώρων σπουδάζοντα, προσελάμβανον καὶ οἱ πρεσβύ- 
10Tepor. πολὺ δὲ μᾶλλον 6 Κλέαρχος ἔσπευδεν, ὗπο-13 
, ν "᾿"» ν , 53 N , 9 
TTEVOV μὴ ἀεὶ οὕτω πλήρεις εἶναι τὰς τάφρους ὕδα- 
ἈΝ» Ψ , , ¥ > »¢ 
TOS ". οὐ γὰρ ἦν ὡρα οἵα τό πεδίον ἄρδειν - ἀλλ᾽ iva 
| ν 
ἤδη πολλὰ προφαίνοιτο τοῖς Ἕλλησι δεινὰ εἰς τὴν 
πορείαν, τούτου ἕνεκα βασιλέα ὑπώπτευεν ἐπὶ τὸ 
/ ." > Ld Τ' 
15 πεδίον τὸ ὕδωρ ἀφεικέναι. 
Ample supplies secured. 


Πορευόμενοι δὲ ἀφίκοντο eis κώμας ὅθεν ἀπέδειξαν 14. 
Ε κα ‘4 λ / ie MA “ὃ Ὁ δὲ Ἂν 
οἱ ἡγεμόνες λαμβάνειν τὰ ἐπιτήδεια. ἐνῆν δὲ σῖτος 
πολὺς καὶ οἶνος φοινίκων καὶ ὄξος ἑψητὸν ἀπὸ τῶν ἱ 
a! 3. αν κυ , A ΄ ν \ : 
αὐτῶν. αὐταὶ δὲ αἱ βάλανοι τῶν φοινίκων οἵας μὲν 16 κ--..-- 
> na ¢ ¥ ἐδ a A . ἡ Ν᾿ 6.23,69 
30 ἐν τοῖς EAAnow ἔστιν ἰδεῖν τοῖς οἰκέταις ἀπέκειντο, , 
ai δὲ τοῖς δεσπόταις ἀποκείμεναι ἦσαν ἀπόλεκτοι, 
θαυμάσιαι τοῦ κάλλους καὶ μεγέθους, ἡ δὲ ὄψις 
,ν 7 Ι δ) ὃ ΄, Ν ὃ , ΄ 
ἠλέκτρου οὐδὲν διέφερε. τὰς δέ τινας ἕηραίνοντες 
τραγήματα ἀπετίθεσαν. καὶ ἦν καὶ παρὰ πότον ἡδὺ 
25 μέν, κεφαλαλγὲς δέ. ἐνταῦθα καὶ τὸν ἐγκέφαλον 16 
τοῦ φοίνικος πρῶτον ἔφαγον οἱ στρατιῶται, καὶ οἱ 
 Σ 4 , + is Ἂ ba 3 ld ly 
πολλοὶ ἐθαύμασαν τό τε εἶδος Kal τὴν ἰδιότητα τῆς 


- 


00 ANABASIS II. 3. 17-20. 


ἡδονῆς. ἦν δὲ σφόδρα καὶ τοῦτο κεφαλαλγές. ὁ 
δὲ φοῖνιξ ὅθεν ἐξαιρεθείη ὁ ἐγκέφαλος ὅλος αὐαίνετο. 
Conference with Tissaphernes. 

9, ~ » ε ᾽ ~ A a” ᾽ 
Ενταῦθα ἔμειναν ἡμέρας τρεῖς - καὶ παρὰ μεγάλου 17 
/ Ὁ / ᾽ν ε “ ld 
βασιλέως ἧκε Τισσαφέρνης Kat ὁ τῆς βασιλέως 
5γυναικὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ ἄλλοι Πέρσαι τρεῖς - δοῦλοι 
\ ‘ 7 > N x > / > A εξ a 
δὲ πολλοὶ εἵποντο. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἀπήντησαν αὐτοῖς οἱ τῶν 
Ἑλλήνων στρατηγοί, ἔλεγε πρῶτος Τισσαφέρνης du 
5 ν 
ἑρμηνέως τοιάδε. ᾿Εγώ, ὦ ἄνδρες “Ἕλληνες, γείτων 18 
οἰκῶ τῇ Ἑλλάδι, καὶ ἐπεὶ ὑμᾶς εἶδον εἰς πολλὰ καὶ 
ν 
ιο ἀμήχανα πεπτωκότας, εὕρημα ἐποιησάμην εἴ πως 
δυναίμην παρὰ βασιλέως αἰτήσασθαι δοῦναι ἐμοὶ 
> κ᾿ ca 9 a , > ‘ a 5 
ἀποσῶσαι ὑμᾶς εἰς THY Ἑλλάδα. οἶμαι yap av οὐκ 
» Ἴ a » ~ 
ἀχαρίστως μοι ἔχειν οὔτε πρὸς ὑμῶν οὔτε πρὸς τῆς 
πάσης Ἑλλάδος. ταῦτα δὲ γνοὺς nrovunv βασιλέα, 19 
~ ¥ ἮΝ 
15 λέγων αὐτῷ ὅτι δικαίως ἄν μοι χαρίζοιτο, ὅτι αὐτῷ 
Κῦρόν τε ἐπιστρατεύοντα πρῶτος ἤγγειλα καὶ βοή- 
θειαν ἔχων ἅμα τῇ ἀγγελίᾳ ἀφικόμην, καὶ μόνος 
ἊΝ ‘ ‘ γι ’ > ¥ 
τῶν κατὰ τοὺς Ἕλληνας τεταγμένων οὐκ edvyor, 
ἀλλὰ διήλασα καὶ συνέμιξα βασιλεῖ ἐν τῷ ὑμετέρῳ 
, » Ν » / > Ν ἴω > / 
90 στρατοπέδῳ, ἔνθα βασιλεὺς ἀφίκετο ἐπεὶ Kupov ἀπέ- 
Ἃ A ly il ἥ 7 7 ‘ 
κτεινε, καὶ τοὺς σὺν Κύρῳ βαρβάρους ἐδίωξα σὺν 
~ ~ “~ “~ > ~ ΄ἦ ἮΝ 
τοῖσδε τοῖς παροῦσι νῦν MET ἐμοῦ, οἵπερ αὐτῷ εἰσι 
πιστότατοι. 


Why the Greeks undertook the expedition. 
return home. 


Ν ‘ ‘ / ε ld , il ᾿ 
Καὶ περι μεν τούτων ὑπέσχετο μοι βουλεύσεσθαι " 30 


Now they would 


, ,) ε Δ > Mal 3 , ᾽ ΄ 
o5 ἐρέσθαι δέ με ὑμᾶς ἐκέλευεν ἐλθόντα τίνος ἕνεκεν 
‘ ao 
ἐστρατεύσατε ἐπ᾿ αὐτόν. Kal συμβουλεύω ὑμῖν 


’ὕ > ’, Ld 3 ’ “ ae 
μέτρβιως ἀποκρίνασθαι, "να μοι €UT PAKTOTEPOV 7) εαν 


ANABASIS Il. 3. 21-26. 61 


δύ 3 \ Ε » 3 9 “ , 
τι δύνωμαι ἀγαθὸν ὑμῖν παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ διαπράξασθαι. 
πρὸς ταῦτα μεταστάντες οἱ Ἕλληνες ἐβουλεύοντο - 21 
iy. 7 Ἢ / > = ε “Ὁ » 
καὶ ἀπεκρίναντο, Κλέαρχος δ᾽ ἔλεγεν - Ἡμεῖς οὔτε 
/ TAT ε “ » ¥ 2 f 
συνήλθομεν ws βασιλεῖ πολεμήσοντες οὔτε ἐπορευό- 
ὄμεθα ἐπὶ βασιλέα, ἀλλὰ πολλὰς προφάσεις Κῦρος 
᾿φύρισκεν, ὡς καὶ σὺ εὖ οἶσθα, ἵνα ὑμᾶς τε ἀπαρα- 


, ᾿ , ν ἡ κ > , AN » ᾽ν» , ill 
σκεύους λάβοι καὶ ἡμᾶς ἐνθάδε ἀγάγοι. ἐπεὶ μέντοι 22 / ay - 


"ὃ Sy ε ἴω ν ὃ Ὁ Ν 3 4 θ \ 
non αὐτὸν ἑωρῶμεν ἐν δεινῷ ὄντα, ἡσχύνθημεν καὶ 
ἴω > a“ 
θεοὺς καὶ ἀνθρώπους προδοῦναι αὐτόν, ἐν τῷ πρό- 
A ν» > » > A 
10 eOev χρόνῳ παρέχοντες ἡμᾶς αὐτοὺς εὖ ποιεῖν. ἐπεὶ 23 
Wis. a / » ἌᾺ " , A 
δὲ Κῦρος τέθνηκεν, οὔτε βασιλεῖ ἀντιποιούμεθα τῆς 
9 A ν» ν 9 ψ , a \ 
ἀρχῆς οὔτ᾽ ἔστιν ὅτου ἕνεκα βουλοίμεθα ἄν τὴν 
βασιλέως χώραν κακῶς ποιεῖν, οὐδ᾽ αὐτὸν ἀποκτεῖ- 
em ¥ 
var ἂν ἐθέλοιμεν - πορενοίμεθα δ᾽ ἂν οἴκαδε, εἴ τις 
15 ἡμᾶς μὴ λυποίη- ἀδικοῦντα μέντοι πειρασόμεθα σὺν 
ἴω a ἮΝ Ld al 
τοῖς θεοῖς ἀμύνασθαι. ἐὰν μέντοι τις ἡμᾶς Kal εὖ 
ἊΝ yl ¥ 
ποιῶν ὑπάρχῃ; καὶ τούτου εἴς γε δύναμιν οὐχ ἡττη- 
σόμεθα εὖ ποιοῦντες. 


The king consents. Compact with Tissaphernes. 


Ὁ μὲν οὕτως εἶπεν - ἀκούσας δὲ ὁ Τισσἀφέρνης, 2 

20 Ταῦτα, ἔφη. ἐγὼ ἀπαγγελῶ βασιλεῖ καὶ ὑμῖν πάλιν 

Ν AE RI , > 3 I Κ ε Ν 

τὰ παρ᾽ ἐκείνου - μέχρι δ᾽ ἄν ἐγὼ ἤκω ai σπονδαὶ 

ih A“ 

μενόντων - ἀγορὰν δὲ ἡμεῖς παρέξομεν. καὶ εἰς μὲν 25 

Ἂ ε / 3 “" Ψ 3 εΕεΥ > , 
τὴν ὑστεραίαν οὐχ ἧκεν - ὥσθ᾽ οἱ Ἕλληνες ἐφρόν- 

ἴω ν 

τιζον - τῇ δὲ τρίτῃ ἥκων ἔλεγεν ὅτι διαπεπραγμένος 

ν ‘ “4 ὃ ig > ἦν , ui, 
95 ἥκοι παρὰ βασιλέως δοθῆναι αὐτῷ σῴζειν τοὺς 
Ἕλληνας, καίπερ πολλῶν ἀντιλεγόντων ὡς οὐκ ἄξιον 
Ν “ > ἴω x »""» ε i. ’ 
εἴη βασιλεῖ ἀφεῖναι τοὺς ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτὸν στρατευσαμέ 


Ν Ὃ ‘ ἣν » 5 A 
vous. τέλος δὲ εἶπε, Καὶ νῦν ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν πιστὰ 26 


/ 


i 


4 


¥ 


€ 


o. 


αὐτω 
¢ 


" 
i 
1 


62 ANABASIS II. 3. 27-29 and 4. 1-3. 


λαβεῖν παρ᾽ ἡμῶν ἢ μὴν φιλίαν παρέξειν ὑμῖν τὴν 
ρ᾽ ἡμῶν ἦ μὴ ρ μῖν τὴ 

᾿ ν sQe > , > \ ἔν , > \ 
χώραν καὶ ἀδόλως ἀπάξειν εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα ἀγορὰν 
παρέχοντας - ὅπου δ᾽ ἂν μὴ ἢ πρίασθαι, λαμβάνειν 


ANABASIS Il. 4. 4-7. 63 


Ἃ «« ~ > ᾽ Ἃ Ν 

οὐκ ἐπιστάμεθα ὅτι βασιλεὺς ἡμᾶς ἀπολέσαι ay περὶ 

‘ ᾿ ν \ a TAX Ἕλλ σι 
παντὸς ποιήσαιτο, ἵνα καὶ τοῖς ἀλλοις ἢ 

a ω ,» ~ 

φόβος εἴη ἐπὶ βασιλέα μέγαν στρατεύειν ; καὶ νῦν 

a , > ily x 

μὲν ἡμᾶς ὑπάγεται μένειν διὰ τὸ διεσπάρθαι αὐτῷ TO 


€ ~ " ἴω. , > 2 | > ; 6 ἴω, Ἁ 
ὑμᾶς ἐκ τῆς χώρας ἐάσομεν τὰ ἐπιτήδεια. ὑμᾶς δὲ 21 
4 δ iy , > / - \ 4 ε \ 
τσ. δαὖ ἡμῖν δεήσει ὀμόσαι ἢ μὴν πορεύεσθαι ὡς διὰ 
>. via Φιλίας ἀσινῶς, σῖτα καὶ ποτὰ λαμβάνοντας ὁπόταν 


Tlie μὴ ἀγορὰν παρέχωμεν - ἢν δὲ παρέχωμεν ἀγοράν, 


4 ~ > ~ ε ᾽ 
ὃ στράτευμα: ἐπὴν δὲ πάλιν ἀλισθῇ αὐτῷ ἡ στρατιά, 
ε ~ » / 
οὐκ ἔστιν ὅπως οὐκ ἐπιθήσεται ἡμῖν. ἴσως δέ που 
/ ε ¥ Ἕ ly 
ἢ ἀποσκάπτει τι ἢ ἀποτειχίζει, ὡς ἄπορος ἢ ἡ ὁδός. 


᾽ Ld , Ν > / ~ » A 
wvoupevous ἕξειν Ta ἐπιτήδεια. ταῦτα ἔδοξε, καὶ 28 


¥ ‘ Ν » ll ‘ ε “νη 
ὦμοσαν καὶ δεξιὰς ἔδοσαν Τισσαφέρνης καὶ ὁ τῆς 
10 βασιλέως γυναικὸς ἀδελφὸς τοῖς τῶν Ἑλλήνων 
κι " a 0) κ᾿ “κα 
στρατηγοῖς καὶ λοχαγοῖς καὶ ἔλαβον παρὰ τῶν Ἕλ- 


λήνων. μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα Τισσαφέρνης εἶπε, Νῦν μὲν 99 


δὴ ἄπειμι ὡς βασιλέα. ἐπειδὰν δὲ διαπράξωμαι ἃ 
Y μι 
δέομαι, ἥξω συσκευασάμενος ὡς ἀπάξων ὑμᾶς εἰς 
NX ε ld x ν»ν» > \ any, ἣ 3 σι » 4 
1s THv Ἑλλάδα καὶ αὐτὸς ἀπιὼν ἐπὶ τὴν ἐμαυτοῦ ἀρχήν. 
γ Ariaeus less friendly. The Greeks grow uneasy. 
IV. Mera ταῦτα περιέμενον Τισσαφέρνην οἵ τε 
ν a 
Ελληνες καὶ ὁ ᾿Αριαῖος ἐγγὺς ἀλλήλων ἐστρατοπε- 
δευμένοι ἡμέρας πλείους ἢ εἴκοσιν. ἐν δὲ ταύταις 
» ~ " b ~ ἣ e » ᾿». 4 ε 
ἀφικνοῦνται πρὸς ᾿Αριαῖον καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ καὶ οἱ 
¥ > ~ Ν % ‘ ‘ > / ~ 
30 ἄλλοι ἀναγκαῖοι Kal πρὸς τοὺς σὺν ἐκείνῳ Περσῶν 
τινες, παρεθάρρυνόν τε καὶ δεξιὰς ἐνίοις παρὰ βασι- 
λέως ἔφερον μὴ μνησικακήσειν βασιλέα αὐτοῖς τῆς 
σὺν Κύρῳ é f δὲ ἀλλ δενὸς τῶ 
ρῳ ἐπιστρατείας μηδὲ ἄλλου μηδενὸς τῶν 
παροιχομένων. τούτων δὲ γιγνομένων ἔνδηλοι ἦσαν 
ε WE " iy Ld ae \ 
26 οἱ περὶ Αριαιον ἧττον προσέχοντες τοῖς Ελλησι τὸν 
~ 7 i, Ν o~ ἊΝ \ Ἂ “Ὁ ε 
νοῦν - ὥστε καὶ διὰ τοῦτο τοῖς μὲν πολλοῖς τῶν ‘BA- 
ἢ I » » ᾿ dl lly al 
λήνων οὐκ ἤρεσκον, ἀλλὰ προσιόντες τῷ Κλεάρχῳ 


᾽ν ‘ a ¥ a “ , Δ 
ἔλεγον καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις στρατηγοῖς, Τί μένομεν; ἡ 8 


Alo > "4d 3 
οὐ γάρ ποτε ἑκών γε βουλήσεται ἡμᾶς ἐλθόντας εἰς 
“~ ε Ε Ὁ ᾽ 3, 
τὴν Ἑλλάδα ἀπαγγεῖλαι ὡς ἡμεῖς τοσοίδε ὄντες 
ἴω ~ > μὴν "» ui) 
10 ἐνικῶμεν βασιλέα ἐπὶ ταῖς θύραις αὐτοῦ Kal καταγε 
οἱ ᾿ 


ν ὅσοι. pemeg 
/ @ 


λάσαντες ἀπήλθομεν. 


ne . G fw 
“1Ὲ we break the truce, we are lost. I have faith in the king.”’ 


Κλέαρχος δὲ ἀπεκρίνατο τοῖς ταῦτα λέγουσιν, 
Ἐγὼ ἐνθυμοῦμαι μὲν καὶ ταῦτα πάντα ἐννοῶ δ᾽ 
ὅτι εἰ νῦν ἄπιμεν, δόξομεν ἐπὶ πολέμῳ ἀπιέναι καὶ 

15 Tapa τὰς σπονδὰς ποιεῖν. ἔπειτα πρῶτον μὲν ἀγο- 
\ > x ld A lig > bs Ψ 3 . 
ρὰν οὐδεὶς παρέξει ἡμῖν οὐδὲ ὅθεν ἐπισιτιούμεθα 
αὖθις δὲ ὁ ἡγησόμενος οὐδεὶς ἔσται - καὶ ἅμα ταῦτα 
ποιούντων ἡμῶν εὐθὺς ᾿Αριαῖος ἀφεστήξει- ὥστε 
φίλος ἡμῖν οὐδεὶς λελείψεται;: ἀλλὰ καὶ οἱ πρόσθεν 
90 ὄντες πολέμιοι ἡμῖν ἔσονται. ποταμὸς δ᾽ εἰ μέν τις 
καὶ ἄλλος ἄρα ἡμῖν ἐστι διαβατέος οὐκ οἶδα τὸν δ᾽ 
οὖν Εὐφράτην ἴσμεν ὅτι ἀδύνατον διαβῆναι κωλυόν- 
των πολεμίων. οὐ μὲν δὴ av μάχεσθαί γε δέῃ ἱππεῖς 
εἰσιν ἡμῖν σύμμαχοι, τῶν δὲ πολεμίων ἱππεῖς εἰσιν 
95 οἱ πλεῖστοι καὶ πλείστου ἄξιοι: WOTE νικῶντες μὲν 
τίνα ἂν ἀποκτείναιμεν ; ἡττωμένων δὲ οὐδένα οἷόν τε 
σωθῆναι: ἐγὼ μὲν οὖν βασιλέα, ᾧ οὕτω πολλά ἐστι 
τὰ σύμμαχα, εἴπερ προθυμεῖται ἡμᾶς ἀπολέσαι; οὐκ 


θ4 ANABASIS Il. 4. 8-13. 


γ Ψ a ν᾿ . " \ \ a \ 
οἶδα ὅ τι δεῖ αὐτὸν ὀμόσαι Kai δεξιὰν δοῦναι Kat 
θεοὺς ἐπιορκῆσαι καὶ τὰ ἑαυτοῦ πιστὰ ἄπιστα ποιῆ- 

bd a 

σαι Ἕλλησί te καὶ βαρβάροις. τοιαῦτα πολλὰ 
ἔλεγεν. 

Tissaphernes returns and the march begins. Mutual distrust. 

> \ ἢ Ὅ - ¥ A ᾿ dbs 

5 ἘΝ δὲ τούτῳ ἧκε Τισσαφέρνης ἔχων τὴν ἑαυτοῦ 
δύναμιν ὡς εἰς οἶκον ἀπιὼν καὶ ᾿᾽᾿Ορόντας τὴν ἑαυτοῦ 
, > δ ‘ x , x , 
δύναμιν - ἦγε δὲ καὶ τὴν θυγατέρα τὴν βασιλέως 
ν ν᾿ a > Δ \ ¥ i € al 
ἐπὶ γάμῳ. ἐντεῦθεν δὲ ἤδη Τισσαφέρνους ἡγουμέ 
νου καὶ ἀγορὰν παρέχοντος ἐπορεύοντο - ἐπορεύετο 
τὸ δὲ καὶ ᾿Αριαῖος τὸ Κύρου βαρβαρικὸν ἔχων στρά- 
τευμα ἅμα Τισσαφέρνει καὶ ᾿Ορόντᾳ καὶ συνεστρα- 
ἢ i, > al € ἂν ε ὌΝ 

τοπεδεύετο σὺν ἐκείνοις. οἱ δὲ Ἕλληνες ὑφορῶντες 10 
τούτους αὐτοὶ ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτῶν ἐχώρουν ἡγεμόνας ἔχοντες. 
> / ,. ε al 3 rd > 
ἐστρατοπεδεύοντο δὲ ἑκάστοτε ἀπέχοντες ἀλλήλων 


al Ν ~ > 4 Ν 3 ll 
τὸ παρασάγγην καὶ μεῖον - ἐφυλάττοντο δὲ ἀμφότεροι 
ν “ > ral ‘ 3 Ἂ “ἣν ε ‘al 
ὥσπερ πολεμίους ἀλλήλους, καὶ εὐθὺς τοῦτο ὑποψίαν 


τον » » ἡ ἣ "ν , > “ > ~ 
Ἰ Cnn. n.s. παρεῖχεν. ἐνίοτε δὲ καὶ ξυλιζόμενοι ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ 11 
my 24 p.12.0) ΜΝ , . νυ κ᾿ 4 Ν 
καὶ χόρτον καὶ ἄλλα τοιαῦτα συλλέγοντες πληγὰς 
a 5 - ν Ἀ ἴω ὟΝ A 
ἐνέτεινον ἀλλήλοις - ὥστε Kal τοῦτο ἔχθραν παρεῖχε. 
March to the Tigris. The Persians cross to the other side. 
20 Διελθόντες δὲ τρεῖς σταθμοὺς ἀφίκοντο πρὸς τὸ 19 
Μηδίας καλούμενον τεῖχος, καὶ παρῆλθον εἴσω 
᾿Ὶ ἴω, , > ,ὔ / 5" ἴω > 
αὐτοῦ. ἦν δὲ φκοδομημένον πλίνθοις ὀπταῖς ἐν 
Ἂ ν 
ἀσφάλτῳ κειμέναις, εὖρος εἴκοσι ποδῶν, ὕψος δὲ 
ἑκατόν - μῆκος δ᾽ ἐλέγετο εἶναι εἴκοσι παρασαγγῶν᾽ 
25 ἀπέχει δὲ Βαβυλῶνος οὐ πολύ. ἐντεῦθεν δ᾽ ἐπορεύ- 13 
θησὰν σταθμοὺς δύο παρασάγγας ὀκτώ. καὶ διέβη- 
"ἢ , ‘ ‘  " \ p" 
σαν διώρυχας δύο, τὴν μὲν ἐπὶ γεφύρας, τὴν δὲ 


mh Α Δ", νιν. 


,37.!] 


τ: 


ANABASIS Ll. 4. 14-17. 65 


3 s ͵ ε , ® δ᾽ > > A a 
ἐζευγμένην πλοίοις ἑπτά - αὗται ὃ ἦσαν ἄπο TOU 
ω μὴ “ \ 

Τίγρητος ποταμοῦ - κατετέτμηντο δὲ ἐξ αὐτῶν Kat 

‘as ld ¥ 

τάφροι ἐπὶ THY χώραν, ai μὲν πρῶται μεγάλαι, ἔπειτα 
Ἂ 3 οἱ \ ‘ Ν» 4 ν > 
δὲ ἐλάττους - τέλος δὲ καὶ μικροὶ OKXETOL, ὠσπερ ἐν 
“Ἁ ἴω ‘ 
5TH Ἑλλάδι ἐπὶ τὰς pedivas: καὶ ἀφικνοῦνται ἐπὶ 


τὸν Τίγρητα ποταμόν - πρὸς ᾧ πόλις ἦν μεγάλη καὶ 


“ ΘΘῬΥΝ * » ae ἴω 
πολυάνθρωπος ἧ ὄνομα Σιττάκη, ἀπέχουσα τοῦ πο- 
ΓΟ ν 
ταμοῦ σταδίους πεντεκαίδεκα. ot μὲν οὖν Ἕλληνες 14 
᾿ 
παρ᾽ αὐτὴν ἐσκήνησαν ἐγγὺς παραδείσου μεγάλου 
" x “ἢν \ 5 al lal ὃ , 5 ε δὲ - 
10 καὶ καλοῦ Kat δασέος παντοίων δένδρων, οἱ δὲ Bap- 
Ἅ dl > ra 
βαροι διαβεβηκότες τὸν Τίγρητα - ov μέντοι κατα- 
φανεῖς ἦσαν. 
‘¢ Beware of a night attack, and guard the bridge!” 
Μετὰ δὲ τὸ δεῖπνον ἔτυχον ἐν περιπάτῳ ὄντες πρὸ 15 
τῶν ὅπλων Πρόξενος καὶ Ἐενοφῶν - καὶ προσελθὼν 
¥ / > f ‘ 5X “7ὥ“ν" ἃ io 
15 ἄνθρωπός τις ἠρώτησε τοὺς προφύλακας ποῦ ay Wor 
Ἁ 
Πρόξενον ἢ Κλέαρχον - Μένωνα δὲ οὐκ ἐζήτει, καὶ 
‘a “ \ 
ταῦτα παρ᾽ Apvaiov av τοῦ Μένωνος ξένου. ἐπεὶ δὲ 16 
; > 9 > ld > a a > ε Ν 
Πρόξενος εἶπεν ὅτι αὐτός εἰμι ὃν ζητεῖς, εἶπεν ὁ ar 
ἴω » » “ 
θρωπος τάδε. ᾿Ἐπεμψέ με ᾿Αριαῖος καὶ Αρτάοζος, 
“μη ν κ᾿ “" > ‘ X Ld 
20 πιστοὶ ὄντες Κύρῳ καὶ ὑμῖν εὖνοι, καὶ κελεύουσι φυ- 
ἴω Ἂ ΜΝ ‘al 
λάττεσθαι μὴ ὑμῖν ἐπιθῶνται τῆς νυκτὸς οἱ BapBa- 
a , 
por: ἔστι δὲ στράτευμα πολὺ ἐν τῷ πλησίον Tapa- 
“~ - 
δείσῳ. καὶ παρὰ τὴν γέφυραν τοῦ Τίγρητος Tora-17 
a , 4 X / ε ὃ a“ ay, 
μοῦ πέμψαι κελεύουσι φυλακήν, ὡς διανοεῖται αὑτὴν 
~ ~ "Al ὮΝ ’ ε ᾿ 
ο5 λῦσαι Τισσαφέρνης τῆς νυκτός, ἐὰν δύνηται, ὡς μὴ 
“ A ἴω “ ‘ 
διαβῆτε ἀλλ᾽ ἐν μέσῳ ἀποληφθῆτε τοῦ ποταμοῦ Kat 


τῆς διώρυχος. 


ANABASIS II. 4. 18-23. 


The warning is seen to be inconsistent. 
᾿Ακούσαντες ταῦτα ἄγουσιν αὐτὸν παρὰ Tov Κλέ 18 
‘ / ra / ε x "4 3 / 
apxov καὶ ppalovow a λέγει. ὁ δὲ Κλέαρχος axov- 
σας ἐταράχθη σφόδρα καὶ ἐφοβεῖτο. νεανίσκος d€19 
τις τῶν παρόντων ἐννοήσας εἶπεν ὡς οὐκ ἀκόλουθα 
ν / >  » Ν , \ , a 
5 εἴη τό τε ἐπιθήσεσθαι καὶ λύσειν THY γέφυραν. δῆλον 
yap ὅτι ἐπιτιθεμένους ἢ νικᾶν δεήσει ἢ ἡττᾶσθαι. 
> ν > A "αν". AME. ‘ , i 
oe. ἐὰν μὲν οὖν νικῶσι, τί δεῖ λύειν αὐτοὺς THY γέφυραν , 
ΨὉΝ ‘ ἍΔ ‘ μι Me af ¥ a Ψ 
οὐδὲ yap ἂν πολλαὶ γέφυραι ὦσιν ἔχοιμεν ἄν οποι 
φυγόντες ἡμεῖς σωθῶμεν. 
10 λελυμένης τῆς γεφύρας οὐχ ἕξουσιν ἐκεῖνοι ὅποι φύ- 


εν. A ε ~ ~ 
εαν δὲ ημέεις νικωμεν. 20 


γωσιν: οὐδὲ μὴν βοηθῆσαι πολλῶν ὄντων πέραν 
b | ᾿ ψ A / ᾽ “~ / 
οὐδεὶς αὐτοῖς δυνήσεται λελυμένης τῆς γεφύρας. 
Its object becomes clear. The Greeks cross the river at daybreak. 
᾿Ακούσας δὲ ὁ Κλέαρχος ταῦτα ἤρετο τὸν ἄγγελον 21 
πόση τις εἴη χώρα ἡ ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ Τίγρητος καὶ τῆς 
15 διώρυχος. 
καὶ πόλεις πολλαὶ καὶ μεγάλαι. 


ε \ " bid hy in, “ ¥ 
ὁ δὲ εἶπεν ὅτι πολλὴ καὶ κῶμαι ἔνεισι 
Ἂ ‘ b | dl 
τότε δὴ Kal ἐγνώ-32 
σθη ὅτι οἱ βάρβαροι τὸν ἄνθρωπον ὑποπέμψαιεν, 
> “ \ εον Ld Ν ’ 
ὀκνοῦντες μὴ οἱ Ἕλληνες διελόντες τὴν γέφυραν 
μείναιεν ἐν τῇ νήσῳ ἐρύματα ἔχοντες ἔνθεν μὲν τὸν 
“ i ¥ \ Ν ἥ ~ > > 4 
0 Τίγρητα, ἔνθεν δὲ τὴν διώρυχα, τὰ δ᾽ ἐπιτήδεια 
ἔχοιεν ἐκ τῆς ἐν μέσῳ χώρας πολλῆς καὶ ἀγαθῆς 
οὔσης καὶ τῶν ἐργασομένων ἐνόντων, εἶτα δὲ καὶ 
3 i, / ¥ VA / ~ 
ἀποστροφὴ γένοιτο εἴ τις βούλοιτο βασιλέα κακῶς 
ποιεῖν. 
x Ἂ ~ > ἢ , NA A / 
25 Μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα ἀνεπαύοντο" ἐπὶ μέντοι THY γέφυ- 23 
Ψ ‘ ¥ aT ea 90" 
ραν ὅμως φυλακὴν ἔπεμψαν " καὶ οὔτε ἐπέθετο οὐδεὶς 


οὐδαμόθεν οὔτε πρὸς τὴν γέφυραν οὐδεὶς ἦλθε τῶν 


x i 
\ 
»% 


ANABASIS II. 4. 24-27. 67 

πολεμίων, ὡς οἱ φυλάττοντες ἀπήγγελλον. ἐπειδὴ 24 
δὲ ἕως ἐγένετο, διέβαινον τὴν γέφυραν ἐζευγμένην 
πλοίοις τριάκοντα καὶ ἑπτὰ ὡς οἷόν τε μάλιστα 

cll 3 ,) ld sli in 
πεφυλαγμένως: ἐξήγγελλον yap τινες τῶν Tapa 

5 Τισσαφέρνους Ἑλλήνων ὡς διαβαινόντων μέλλοιεν 
ἐπιθήσεσθαι. ἀλλὰ ταῦτα μὲν ψευδῆ ἦν διαβαι- 

/ - ε lp , ~ > ἥ  ᾿ 
νόντων μέντοι ὁ Τλοῦς αὐτοῖς ἐπεφάνη pet ἄλλων 
ἴω 9 Ἂ “ > Ν \ 
σκοπῶν εἰ διαβαίνοιεν τὸν ποταμόν ἐπειδὴ δὲ εἶδεν, 
ᾧχετο ἀπελαύνων. τὲ 
The march continued to the river Zapatas. 

10 ᾿Απὸ δὲ τοῦ Τίγρητος ἐπορεύθησαν σταθμοὺς τέτ- 35 
ταρας παρασάγγας εἴκοσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Φύσκον ποταμόν, 

‘ > id Nt \ rd \ 3 ῃθ 
τὸ εὖρος πλέθρου: ἐπῆν δὲ γέφυρα. καὶ ἐνταῦθα 
Ay , / v ᾿ ἡ Ὰ ἃ 3 , 
ὠκεῖτο πόλις μεγάλη ὄνομα Onis: πρὸς ἣν ἀπὴν- 
τησε τοῖς Ἕλλησιν ὁ Κύρου καὶ ᾿Αρταξέρξου νόθος 

15 ἀδελφὸς ἀπὸ Σούσων καὶ ᾿Εκβατάνων στρατιὰν πολ- 
λὴν ἄγων ὡς βοηθήσων βασιλεῖ - καὶ ἐπιστήσας τὸ 
ἑαυτοῦ στράτευμα παρερχομένους τοὺς Ἕλληνας ἐθε- 

, ε Χ ,ὕ mae \ > , 3 , 
ώρει. 6 δὲ Κλέαρχος ἡγεῖτο μὲν εἰς δύο, ἐπορεύετο 26 
ἂν ᾿ ee > / bid \ ral 
δὲ ἄλλοτε καὶ ἄλλοτε ἐφιστάμενος - ὅσον δὲ χρόνον 
207d ἡγούμενον τοῦ στρατεύματος ἐπιστήσειε, τοσοῦ- 
τον ἣν ἀνάγκη χρόνον δι᾿ ὅλου τοῦ στρατεύματος 
γίγνεσθαι τὴν ἐπίστασιν - στε τὸ στράτευμα καὶ 
αὐτοῖς τοῖς Ἕλλησι δόξαι πάμπολυ εἶναι, καὶ τὸν 
Πέρσην ἐκπεπλῆχθαι θεωροῦντα. 

8 Ἐντεῦθεν δ᾽ ἐπορεύθησαν διὰ τῆς Μηδίας σταθ-21 
μοὺς ἐρήμους ἐξ παρασάγγας τριάκοντα εἰς τὰς 
Παρυσάτιδος κώμας τῆς Κύρου καὶ βασιλέως μη- 

, , al Vd > i ὃ 
τρός. ταύτας Τισσαφέρνης Κύρῳ ἐπεγγελῶν διαρ- 


68 ANABASIS II. 4. 28 and 5. 1-5. 


~ ν 
πάσαι τοῖς Ἕλλησιν ἐπέτρεψε πλὴν ἀνδραπόδων. 
> ‘ ~ ‘ i, ἢ ~ » ᾽ 
ἐνῆν δὲ σῖτος πολὺς καὶ πρόβατα καὶ ἄλλα χρή- 
ματα. ἐντεῦθεν δ᾽ ἐπορεύθησαν σταθμοὺς ἐρήμους 28 
τέτταρας παρασάγγας εἴκοσι τὸν Τίγρητα ποταμὸν 
> > ἥν > ‘ a , A 
dev ἀριστερᾳ ἔχοντες. ἐν δὲ τῷ πρώτῳ σταθμῷ 
᾽ ω ἴω ~ 
πέραν TOV ποταμοῦ πόλις κεῖτο μεγάλη καὶ εὐδαΐ- 
sll / 3 ᾿ ἡ ε ᾽ il » ON 
μων ὄνομα Kawai, ἐξ ἧς οἱ βάρβαροι διῆγον ἐπὶ 
σχεδίαις διφθερίναις ἄρτους, τυρούς, οἶνον. 
Clearchus has a personal interview with Tissaphernes. 


V. Mera ταῦτα ἀφικνοῦνται ἐπὶ τὸν Ζαπάταν πο- 1 
“ Ἂ > la , \ > ἴω 
Ιοταμόν, τὸ εὖρος τεττάρων πλέθρων. καὶ ἐνταῦθα 
ἔμειναν ἡμέρας τρεῖς - ἐν δὲ ταύταις ὑποψίαι μὲν 
ἦσαν, φανερὰ δὲ οὐδεμία ἐφαίνετο ἐπιβουλή. ἔδοξεν 2 
οὖν τῷ Κλεά σθ » T 7 ὶ 
vw τῳ Κλεάρχῳ συγγενέσθαι τῷ Τισσαφέρνει καὶ͵ 
εἴ πως δύναιτο, παῦσαι τὰς ὑποψίας πρὶν ἐξ αὐτῶν 
, Yl i, ¥ ᾽ > “ 9 
1s πόλεμον γενέσθαι" Kai ἔπεμψέ τινα ἐροῦντα ὅτι 
/ ene / ε δὲ ε / ee 
συγγενέσθαι αὐτῷ χρήζει. ὁ δὲ ἑτοίμως ἐκέλευεν 
ἥκειν. 
“Let us dispel, if possible, this growing distrust.”’ 
Ἐπειδὴ δὲ συνῆλθον, λέγει ὁ Κλέαρχος τάδε. 3 
Ἐγώ, ὧ T φέ οἶδα μὲν ἡμῖν ὅ 
γώ, ὦ Τισσαφέρνη, οἶδα μὲν ἡμῖν ὅρκους γεγενη- 
va Ν ὃ I, 5 5 4 \ >) / > ’ 
20 μένους καὶ δεξιὰς δεδομένας μὴ ἀδικήσειν ἀλλή- 
λους - φυλαττόμενον δὲ σέ τε ὁρῶ ὡς πολεμίους 
~ ε ~ ~ ~ 
ἡμᾶς Kal ἡμεῖς ὁρῶντες ταῦτα ἀντιφυλαττόμεθα. 
3 lp. Ἂ “ > ᾽ ¥ A > rl 
ἐπεὶ δὲ σκοπῶν ov δύναμαι οὔτε σὲ αἰσθέσθαι πει- 4 
ρώμενον ἡμᾶς κακῶς ποιεῖν ἐγώ τε σαφῶς οἶδα ὅτι 
€ “ ὑδὲ 3 “ A δέ x5 , 
25 NMELS γε οὐδὲ ἐπινοοῦμεν τοιοῦτον οὐδέν, ἔδοξέ μοι 
3 “ by ~ ν > - > / 
εἰς λόγους σοι ἐλθεῖν, ὅπως εἰ δυναίμεθα ἐξέλοιμεν 
3 / ‘ > ; Ἁ A - > , | 
ἀλλήλων τὴν ἀπιστίαν. καὶ γὰρ οἶδα ἀνθρώπους 5 


ANABASIS II. 5. 6-10. 69 


tant » a 
ἤδη; τοὺς μὲν ἐκ διαβολῆς τοὺς δὲ καὶ ἐξ ὑποψίας, ot 
Ἂ 
φοβηθέντες ἀλλήλους φθάσαι βουλόμενοι πρὶν πα- 
~ ἊΝ» J 

θεῖν ἐποίησαν ἀνήκεστα κακὰ τοὺς οὔτε μέλλοντας 
Ἂ 5 > / a 2 7 \ > 4 

out av βουλομένους τοιοῦτον οὐδέν. τὰς οὖν τοιαύτας 

δ ἀγνωμοσύνας νομίζων συνουσίαις μάλιστα ἂν παύ- 


εσθαι, ἥκω καὶ διδάσκειν σε βούλομαι ὡς σὺ ἡμῖν 


+ | 3 li 3 ~ 
οὐκ ὀρθῶς ἀπιστεῖς. 
“If we break our oaths, the gods will take vengeance on us.” 
ao ~ ἊΝ 9 
Πρῶτον μὲν yap καὶ μέγιστον οἱ θεῶν ἡμᾶς ὅρκοι 
λ , / S >, X , bid δὲ Α 
κωλύουσι πολεμίους εἶναι ἀλλήλοις - ὅστις δὲ τούτων 
il ‘aa a) ¥ H 
τὸ σύνοιδεν αὑτῷ παρημεληκώς, τοῦτον ἐγὼ οὔποτ᾽ ἂν 
> / Ν in lp 4 > 
εὐδαιμονίσαιμι. τὸν yap θεῶν πόλεμον οὐκ οἶδα 
ν»» »"» ’ a 4 4 » " 4 gl 5 
OUT ἀπὸ ποίου av τάχους φεύγων τις ἀποφύγοι OUT 
> ~ A ἡ 3 ld Δ ¥ " aA > 2 4 
εἰς ποῖον av σκότος ἀποδραίη οὔθ᾽ ὅπως ἂν εἰς ἐχυρὸν 
χωρίον ἀποσταΐη. πάντῃ γὰρ πάντα τοῖς θεοῖς ὗπο- 
15 χείρια καὶ πανταχῇ πάντων ἴσον οἱ θεοὶ κρατοῦσι. 
“You, Tissaphernes, are now our only hope.” 
\ ἢ \ a »- \ κι Ψ Ψ 
Περὶ μεν δὴ τῶν θεῶν τε καὶ τῶν ορκων οὕτω γι- 8 
γνώσκω, Tap οὗς ἡμεῖς τὴν φιλίαν συνθέμενοι κατε- 
θέμεθα. τῶν δ᾽ ἀνθρωπίνων σὲ ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ παρόντι 
a“ Ν A ‘ 
νομίζω μέγιστον εἶναι ἡμῖν ἀγαθόν. σὺν μὲν yap 
¢ ‘ a ‘ ὁδὲ ¥ iain δὲ Ν ὃ 
0 σοὶ πᾶσα μεν οδὸς εὔπορος πᾶς δὲ ποταμὸς διαβα- 
TOS, τῶν τε ἐπιτηδείων οὐκ ἀπορία. ἄνευ δὲ σοῦ 
“~ hs ὃ ‘ i ε δὃ / Oe ἊΝ a ee 
πᾶσα μὲν διὰ σκότους ἡ ὁδός: οὐδὲν γὰρ αὐτῆς 
ἐπιστάμεθα. πᾶς δὲ ποταμὸς δύσπορος, πᾶς δὲ 
3 a ‘ 4 
ὄχλος φοβερός, φοβερώτατον δ᾽ ἐρημία: μεστὴ yap 
~ > » > / > A γὼ \ / 
3ὅ πολλῆς ἀπορίας ἐστίν. εἰ δὲ δὴ Kal μανέντες oe 10 
“Ὁ Ὁ Ὁ 
κατακτείναιμεν, ἄλλο τι ἂν ἢ τὸν εὐεργέτην κατα- 
΄ Ἵ x , \ , ¥ 5 3 
κτείναντες πρὸς βασιλέα τὸν μέγιστον ἔφεδρον ἀγωνι- 


70 ANABASIS Il. 5. 11-15. ANABASIS Il. 5. 16-20. 71 


Coimefa; ὅσων δὲ δὴ καὶ οἵων ἂν ἐλπιδων ἐμαυτὸν | λέγειν ὥστε σὲ πεῖσαι λέγων ὡς ἡμεῖς σοὶ ἐπιβου- 
στερήσαιμι εἰ σέ τι κακὸν ἐπιχειρήσαιμι ποιεῖν, | λεύομεν. Κλέαρχος μὲν οὖν τοσαῦτα εἶπε: Τισσα- 
ταῦτα λέξω. ἐγὼ γὰρ Κῦρον ἐπεθύμησά μοι φίλον 11 : φέρνης δὲ ὧδε ἀπημείφθη.  - ee hy 
γενέσθαι, νομίζων τῶν τότε ἱκανώτατον εἶναι εὖ ) ‘Nor should you, Clearchus, distrust us. Think how completely: 
5 ποιεῖν ὃν βούλοιτο. σὲ δὲ νῦν ὁρῶ τὴν TE Κύρου you ” in our waitabaad 
δύναμιν Kal χώραν ἔχοντα καὶ τὴν σαυτοῦ χώραν "ANN ἥδομαι μέν, ὦ Κλέαρχε; ἀκούων sigh ppove:26 
σῴζοντα, τὴν δὲ βασιλέως δύναμιν, ἧ Κῦρος πολεμίᾳ 5pous λόγους ταῦτα γὰρ γιγνώσκων; εἰ τι ἐμοὶ κακὸν 
βουλεύοις, ἅμα ἄν μοι δοκεῖς καὶ σαυτῷ κακόνους 
εἶνα. ὡς δ᾽ ἂν μάθῃς ὅτι οὐδ᾽ ἂν ὑμεῖς δικαίως 
οὔτε βασιλεῖ οὔτ᾽ ἐμοὶ ἀπιστοίητε, ἀντάκουσον. εἰ 1Π 
ὧν ἔχω ἐλπίδας καὶ σὲ βουλήσεσθαι φίλον ἡμῖν γὰρ ὑμᾶς ἐβουλόμεθα ἀπολέσαι, πότερά σοι δοκοῦ- 
εἶναι. ιὸ μεν ἱππέων πλήθους ἀπορεῖν ἢ πεζῶν ἢ ὁπλίσεως ἐν 

“ And an alliance with us would make you invincible. Who has ἧ ὑμᾶς μὲν βλάπτειν ἱκανοὶ εἴημεν ἄν, ἀντιπάσχειν 

δ ΓΙ Π....ν , | δὲ οὐδεὶς κίνδυνος; ἀλλὰ χωρίων ἐπιτηδείων ὑμῖν 18 

ΓΤ ΤΥ tag σπε ἐπιτίθεσθαι ἀπορεῖν ἄν σοι δοκοῦμεν ; οὐ τοσαῦτα, 

μὲν πεδία ἃ ὑμεῖς φίλια ὄντα σὺν πολλῷ πόνῳ δια- 
τὸ πορεύεσθε, τοσαῦτα δὲ ὄρη ὁρᾶτε ὑμῖν ὄντα πορευ-. “πὸ 
τέα, ἃ ἡμῖν ἔξεστι προκαταλαβοῦσιν ἄπορα ὑμῖν Crna 38 

παρέχειν, τοσοῦτοι δ᾽ εἰσὶ ποταμοὶ ἐφ᾽ ὧν ἔἕξεστν Δ 

ἡμῖν ταμιεύεσθαι ὁπόσοις ἂν ὑμῶν βουλώμεθα μάχε- 

σθαι; εἰσὶ δ᾽ αὐτῶν οὖς οὐδ᾽ ἂν παντάπασι δια- 
90 βαίητε εἰ μὴ ἡμεῖς ὑμᾶς διαπορεύοιμεν. ᾿ εἰ δ᾽ ἐν 19 

πᾶσι τούτοις ἡττῴμεθα, ἀλλὰ τό γέ τοι πῦρ κρεῖττον 

τοῦ καρποῦ ἐστιν: ὃν ἡμεῖς δυναίμεθ᾽ ἂν κατακαύ- 

σαντες λιμὸν ὑμῖν ἀντιτάξαι, ᾧ ὑμεῖς οὐδ᾽ εἰ πάνυ 

ἀγαθοὶ εἴητε μάχεσθαι ἂν δύναισθε. 


᾽ κι Ν 4 Md 7 δ 

ἐχρῆτο, σοὶ ταύτην σύμμαχον οὖσαν. τούτων δὲ: 
rl » , ν A 

τοιούτων ὄντων Tis οὕτω μαίνεται ὅστις οὐ βούλεται 


\ A A 
10 σοὶ φίλος εἶναι; ἀλλὰ μὴν ἐρῶ yap καὶ ταῦτα ἐξ 


ἊΝ 


/ * \ ΜΝ ἢ al Ν Δ 
νομίζω av σὺν τῇ παρούσῃ δυνάμει ταπεινοὺς ὑμῖν 


" 
-- οεδοινν 


ιόπαρασχεῖν- οἶδα δὲ καὶ Πισίδας - ἀκούω δὲ καὶ 
»ν ~ d ~ 
ἄλλα ἔθνη πολλὰ τοιαῦτα εἶναι, ἃ οἶμαι ἂν παῦσαι 
" ἴω ty “nm ε ’ > ἤ Ψ al 
ἐνοχλοῦντα ἀεὶ TH ὑμετέρᾳ εὐδαιμονί. Αἰγυπτίους 

ld eo / c ~ “ 
δέ, οἷς μάλιστα ὑμᾶς νῦν γιγνώσκω τεθυμωμένους. 
o / ~ 

οὐχ ὁρῶ ποίᾳ δυνάμει συμμάχῳ χρησάμενοι μᾶλλον 


[a+ 20 dv κολάσέσθε τῆς νῦν σὺν ἐμοὶ οὔσης. ἀλλὰ μὴν 14 


ἔν γε τοῖς πέριξ οἰκοῦσι σύ, εἰ μὲν βούλοιό τῳ φίλος 
> ε , a ¥ 9 ὃ “ιν, , ε 
εἶναι, ὡς μέγιστος ἄν εἴης, εἰ δέ τίς σε λυποίη, ὡς 
“ > ¥ ἴω 
δεσπότης ἀναστρέφοιο ἔχων ἡμᾶς ὑπηρέτας, οἵ σοι 
“Ὁ ~ ~ ~ 
οὐκ av Tov μισθοῦ ἕνεκα μόνον ὑπηρετοῖμεν ἀλλὰ 
‘\ ~ il Ἁ ΓΟ 
οῦ καὶ τῆς χάριτος ἣν σωθέντες ὑπὸ σοῦ σοὶ ἂν ἔχοιμεν ' 
ὃ , "}}αυ»» A , 0 , σ ἢ ‘We also are God-fearing and honorable men ; and to me personally 
ἱκαίως. εἐμοι μὲν TAVTA πᾶντα EVUVMLOVLEV® OUT 15 the friendship of you Greeks is most important.” 
‘a \ > Ν ν" Ν5)'ὶ σα 3 ~ ¥ Ἁ “Ὁ . ~ Ἃ 
δοκεῖ θαυμαστὸν εἶναι τὸ σὲ ἡμῖν ἀπιστεῖν ὥστε καὶ 95 Πῶς dv οὖν ἔχοντες τοσούτους πόρους πρὸς τὸ 20 


= » ἃ ᾽ ᾿ ‘0 , bid > \ 3 3, oa A ‘ , δέ ‘AMA a 9 “ ὃ 
ηθστ ἂν GROVE GL τὸ ονομᾶ TES ουνζὼς COTS. θεινος : ὑμῖν πολεμεῖν, καὶ τούτων μηδένα ἡμῖν ἐπικινόυνον, 


2 


72 ANABASIS II. 5. 21-26, 


ἔπειτα ἐκ τούτων πάντων τοῦτον ἂν τὸν τρόπον 
ἐξελοίμεθα ὃς μόνος μὲν πρὸς θεῶν ἀσεβής, μόνος 
δὲ πρὸς ἀνθρώπων αἰσχρός ; παντάπασι δὲ ἀπόρων 21 
ἐστὶ καὶ ἀμηχάνων καὶ ἐν ἀνάγκῃ ἐχομένων, καὶ 

τούτων πονηρῶν, οἵτινες ἐθέλουσι SV ἐπιορκίας τε 
πρὸς θεοὺς καὶ ἀπιστίας πρὸς ἀνθρώπους πράττειν 
τι. οὐχ οὕτως ἡμεῖς, ὦ Κλέαρχε, οὔτε ἀλόγιστοι 
οὔτε ἠλίθιοί ἐσμεν. ἀλλὰ τί δὴ ὑμᾶς ἐξὸν ἀπολέσαι 9» 
οὐκ ἐπὶ τοῦτο ἤλθομεν ; εὖ ἴσθι ὅτι ὁ ἐμὸς ἔρως τού- 

τότου αἴτιος τὸ τοῖς Ἕλλησιν ἐμὲ πιστὸν γενέσθαι, καὶ 
ᾧ Κῦρος ἀνέβη ξενικῷ διὰ μισθοδοσίας᾽ πιστεύων 
τούτῳ ἐμὲ καταβῆναι δι᾽ εὐεργεσίας ἰσχυρόν. ὅσα 
δ᾽ ἐμοὶ χρήσιμοι ὑμεῖς ἐστε τὰ μὲν καὶ σὺ εἶπας, τὸ 
δὲ μέγιστον ἐγὼ οἶδα - τὴν μὲν γὰρ ἐπὶ τῇ κεφαλῇ 

ιότιάραν βασιλεῖ μόνῳ ἔξεστιν ὀρθὴν ἔχειν, τὴν δ᾽ ἐν" 
τῇ καρδίᾳ ἴσως ἂν ὑμῶν παρόντων καὶ ἕτερος εὐπε- 
τῶς ἔχοι. 


Clearchus is deceived by the crafty proposal of Tissaphernes for 
another interview. 


Ταῦτα εἰπὼν ἔδοξε τῷ Κλεάρχῳ ἀληθῆ λέγειν - 24 

καὶ εἶπεν, Οὐκοῦν, ἔφη, οἵτινες τοιούτων ἡμῖν εἰς 
30 φιλίαν ὑπαρχόντων πειρῶνται διαβάλλοντες ποιῆσαι 

πολεμίους ἡμᾶς ἀξιοί εἰσι τὰ ἔσχατα παθεῖν ; Καὶ 95 

ἐγὼ μέν γε, ἔφη ὁ Τισσαφέρνης, εἰ βούλεσθέ μοι οἵ 

τε στρατηγοὶ καὶ οἱ λοχαγοὶ ἐλθεῖν ἐν τῷ ἐμφανεῖ, 

λέξω τοὺς πρὸς ἐμὲ λέγοντας ὡς σὺ ἐμοὶ ἐπιβουλεύεις 
9ὅ καὶ τῇ σὺν ἐμοὶ στρατιᾷ. ᾿Ἐγὼ δέ, ἔφη ὁ Κλέαρχος, 26 

ἄξω πάντας, καὶ σοὶ αὖ δηλώσω ὅθεν ἐγὼ περὶ σοῦ 

ει: ἃ 

ἀκούω. 


ANABASIS II. 5. 27-32. 


He persuades four other generals and twenty captains to 
accompany him. 


Ἐκ τούτων δὴ τῶν λόγων ὁ Τισσαφέρνης φιλο- 2 
Ἀ 
φρονούμενος τότε μὲν μένειν τε αὐτὸν ἐκέλευε καὶ 


i > al ig Ν ᾿ al c - 
σύνδειπνον ἐποιήσατο. τῇ δὲ ὑστεραίᾳ ὃ Κλέαρχος 
ἐλθὼν ἐπὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον δῆλός T ἦν πάνυ φιλικῶς 

"Al in ” » ~ a F 

5 οἰόμενος διακεῖσθαι τῷ Τισσαφέρνει καὶ a ἔλεγεν 
» ~ > 4 » — > ν᾽, ' ‘A 
ἐκεῖνος ἀπήγγελλεν, ἔφη TE χρῆναι ἱέναι Tapa Τισ- 

a ἃ μι td A aA A 2, θῶ ὃ 
σαφέρνην ovs ἐκέλευσε, καὶ ol av ἐλεγχθωσι Ova- 
ἴω ‘ 
βάλλοντες τῶν Ἑλλήνων, ὡς προδότας αὐτοὺς καὶ 
ry ~ ν » A e ᾽ 
κακόνους τοῖς Ἕλλησιν ὄντας τιμωρηθῆναι. ὑπώ-28 
10 wreve δὲ εἶναι τὸν διαβάλλοντα Μένωνα, εἰδὼς αὐτὸν 
ὶ λάθ εγενημένον Τισσαφέρνει μετ᾽ Apt- 
καὶ λάθρᾳ ovyyeyerny. pve per’ Ap 


‘il Ἁ / 3 iy a I dl bid l ᾿» 
αἴου καὶ στασιάζοντα αὐτῷ καὶ ἐπιβουλεύοντα, ὁπως 5“τι 


“ 
τὸ στράτευμα ἅπαν πρὸς αὑτὸν λαβὼν φίλος ἢ Τισ- 
σαφέρνει. ἐβούλετο δὲ καὶ ὁ Κλέαρχος ἅπαν τὸ 39 
ιὸ στράτευμα πρὸς ἑαυτὸν ἔχειν τὴν γνώμην καὶ τοὺς 
παραλυποῦντας ἐκποδὼν εἶναι. τῶν δὲ στρατιωτῶν 
ἀντέλεγόν τινες αὐτῷ μὴ ἰέναι πάντας τοὺς λοχαγοὺς 
‘\ ‘ In "ἡ Ld ε A 
καὶ στρατηγοὺς μηδὲ πιστεύειν Τισσαφέρνει. ὁ 5€30 
Κλέαρχος ἰσχυρῶς κατέτεινεν, ἔστε διεπράξατο πέντε 
90 μὲν στρατηγοὺς ἰέναι, εἴκοσι δὲ λοχαγούς - συνηκο- 
λούθησαν δὲ ὡς εἰς ἀγορὰν καὶ τῶν ἄλλων στρατιω- 
τῶν ὡς διακόσιοι. 
They are entrapped and either seized or slain. 
Ἐπεὶ δὲ ἦσαν ἐπὶ ταῖς θύραις ταῖς Τισσαφέρνους, 31 
ε Ἁ Ἂ / » , 
οἱ μὲν στρατηγοὶ παρεκλήθησαν εἴσω, Πρόξενος 
25 Βοιώτιος, Μένων Θετταλός, ᾿Αγίας ᾿λρκάς, Κλέαρχος 
/ i > )Ἤ < A ly. + Mall, | “ 
Λάκων, Σωκράτης Axatos: οἱ δὲ λοχαγοὶ ἐπὶ ταῖς 


θύραις ἔμενον. οὐ πολλῷ δὲ ὕστερον ἀπὸ τοῦ αὐτοῦ 32 


€ 


~ 


74 ANABASIS II. 5. 33-38. 


ral ν > = sl ,. eo ᾿ 
σημείου οἵ τ᾽ ἔνδον συνελαμβάνοντο καὶ οἱ ἔξω κατε- 
κόπησαν. μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα τῶν βαρβάρων τινὲς 
ἱππέων διὰ τοῦ πεδίου ἐλαύνοντες ᾧτινι ἐντυγχάνοιεν 
Ἕλληνι ἢ δούλῳ ἢ ἐλευθέρῳ πάντας ἔκτεινον. οἵ δὲ 38 
ων ᾽ ε , 3 , > κι 
δ᾽ Ἕλληνες τήν τε ἱππασίαν ἐθαύμαζον ἐκ τοῦ στρατο- 
πέδου ὁρῶντες καὶ ὅ τι ἐποίουν ἠμφεγνόουν, πρὶν 
4 
Νίκαρχος ᾿Αρκὰς ἧκε φεύγων τετρωμένος εἰς τὴν 
γαστέρα καὶ τὰ ἔντερα ἐν ταῖς χερσὶν ἔχων, καὶ εἶπε 
πάντα τὰ γεγενημένα. 


Alarm in the Greek camp. Ariaeus comes up and calls for some 
general or captain. 


7 
10 Ἔκ τούτου δὴ οἱ Ἕλληνες ἔθεον ἐπὶ τὰ ὅπλα 34 
πάντες ἐκπεπληγμένοι καὶ νομίζοντες αὐτίκα ἥξειν 
αὐτοὺς ἐπὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον. οἱ δὲ πάντες μὲν οὐκ 85 
ἦλθον, ᾿Αριαῖος δὲ καὶ ᾿Αρτάοζος καὶ Μιθραδάτης. 
| ar , / ε \ a ε / ε 
ot ἦσαν Κύρῳ πιστότατοι - ὁ δὲ τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἑρμη- 
᾿» / “Ἢ 
τὸ νεὺς ἔφη καὶ τὸν Τισσαφέρνους ἀδελφὸν σὺν αὐτοῖς 
ε vl ‘ f vA Ν \ ¥ 
ὁρᾶν καὶ γιγνώσκειν - συνηκολούθουν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι 
Περσῶν τεθωρακισμένοι εἰς τριακοσίους. οὗτοι ἐπεὶ 36 
> \ > a A ¥ » »ν ᾳ4 
ἐγγὺς ἦσαν, προσελθεῖν ἐκέλευον εἴ τις εἴη τῶν Ἕλ- 
al 
λήνων στρατηγὸς ἢ λοχαγός, ἵνα ἀπαγγείλωσι τὰ 
0 παρὰ βασιλέως. μετὰ ταῦτα ἐξῆλθον φυλαττόμενοι 37 
~ ε ᾿ ly. X Cal > ἥ 
τῶν Ῥλλήνων στρατηγοὶ μὲν Κλεάνωρ Ορχομένιος 
καὶ Lodhaiveros Στυμφάλιος, σὺν αὐτοῖς δὲ Ξενοφῶν 
᾿Αθηναῖος, ὅπως μάθοι τὰ περὶ Προξένου: Χειρίσο- 
Ν Ἂ ἢ > ᾿». > 4 | ‘ ¥ 
dos δὲ ἐτύγχανεν ἀπὼν ἐν κώμῃ τινὶ σὺν ἄλλοις 


25 ἐπισιτιζόμενος. 
His attempt to deceive the Greeks cleverly balked by Xenophon. 


> \ ‘|| > > V4 > > ~ 
Επειδὴ δὲ ἐστησαν εἰς ἐπήκοον, εἶπεν Aptatos 38 
τάδε. Κλέαρχος μέν, ὦ ἄνδρες Ἕλληνες, ἐπεὶ ἐπι- 


ANABASIS II. 5. 39-42 and 6. 1. Td 


~ b Val Ν Ν δὰ ἡ » A 
ορκῶν τε ἐφάνη καὶ Tas σπονδὰς λύων, EXEL τὴν 
\ bid 
δίκην καὶ τέθνηκε, Πρόξενος δὲ καὶ Μένων, ore κα- 
ἢ “~ 3 “ 3 “ “~ 
τήγγειλαν αὐτοῦ τὴν ἐπιβουλήν, ἐν μεγάλῃ τιμῃ 
3 ε iy Ν ‘ ‘ bd b ~ ε ~ 
εἰσιν. ὑμᾶς δὲ βασιλεὺς τὰ ὅπλα ἀπαιτεῖ ἑαυτοῦ 
> “- ώλἀώλδιι. " 
δγὰρ εἶναί φησιν, ἐπείπερ Κύρου ἦσαν Tov ἐκείνου 
4 ‘an bd 
δούλου. πρὸς ταῦτα ἀπεκρίναντο ot Ἕλληνες, ἔλεγε 39 
δὲ Κλεάνωρ ὁ ᾿Ορχομένιος - Ὦ κάκιστε ἀνθρώπων 
᾿Αριαῖε καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι ὅσοι ἦτε Κύρου φίλοι, οὐκ 
3 , ¥ ‘ i: A f} 4 "“ 3 4 
αἰσχύνεσθε οὔτε θεοὺς οὔτ᾽ ἀνθρώπους, οἵτινες ὁμὸ- 
“Ἂ i κ᾿ ‘ ~ 
10 TavTEs ἡμῖν τοὺς αὐτοὺς φίλους Kat ἐχθροὺς νομιεῖν, 
προδόντες ἡμᾶς σὺν Τισσαφέρνει τῷ ἀθεωτάτῳ τε 
¥ N “δ Ψν 
καὶ πανουργοτάτῳ τούς τε ἄνδρας αὐτοὺς οἷς ὥμνυτε 
> ’ A x ¥ ic ~ ὃ ὃ ᾽; 
ἀπολωλέκατε καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους ἡμᾶς προδεὸδωκότες 
in’ A“ ’ > | Ἂ an! » θ . 
σὺν τοῖς πολεμίοις Eh ημᾶς ἐρχεσθε; 
15 ‘O δὲ ᾿Αριαῖος εἶπε: Κλέαρχος γὰρ πρόσθεν ἐπι- 40 
’ὔ ‘ AM f \ 
βουλεύων φανερὸς ἐγένετο Τισσαφέρνει τε καὶ 
ἴω ~ ἴω 3 
Ὀρόντᾳ, καὶ πᾶσιν ἡμῖν τοῖς σὺν τούτοις. ἐπὶ τού- 
“~ ’ 
τοις Ξενοφῶν τάδε εἶπε: Κλέαρχος μὲν τοίνυν εἰ 41 
‘ i" ν ἔλ i! ὃ - ly. δί » , 
παρὰ τοὺς ὅρκους EVE τὰς σπονὸάς, τὴν δίκην EXEL 
20 δίκαιον γὰρ ἀπόλλυσθαι τοὺς ἐπιορκοῦντας - Πρόξε- 
| ᾿.. ie 3 “ > ᾽ν. € dl x b , 
νος δὲ καὶ Μένων ἐπείπερ εἰσὶν ὑμέτεροι μὲν εὐεργέ- 
ται, ἡμέτεροι δὲ στρατηγοί, πέμψατε αὐτοὺς δεῦρο" 
A I 9 Al »” > Pl sal 
δῆλον yap ὅτι φίλοι ye ὄντες ἀμφοτέροις πειράσον- 
ται καὶ ὑμῖν καὶ ἡμῖν τὰ βέλτιστα συμβουλεῦσαι. 
25 πρὸς ταῦτα οἱ βάρβαροι πολὺν χρόνον διαλεχθέντες 45 
ἀλλήλοις ἀπῆλθον οὐδὲν ἀποκρινάμενοι. 


Life and character of Clearchus. ai 


VI. Οἱ μὲν δὴ στρατηγοὶ οὕτω ληφθέντες avy- 1 
χθησαν ὡς βασιλέα καὶ ἀποτμηθέντες τὰς κεφαλὰς 


76 ANABASIS II. 6. 2-6. 


> ᾿ e Ἁ “~ ral 
ἐτελεύτησαν, εἷς μὲν αὐτῶν Κλέαρχος ὁμολογουμέ- 
» ’ o~ > ~ 
vos ἐκ πάντων τῶν ἐμπείρως αὐτοῦ ἐχόντων δόξας 
ὔ » Ν Ν 
γενέσθαι ἀνὴρ καὶ πολεμικὸς καὶ φιλοπόλεμος ἐσχά- 
‘ ‘ »νΨ A , > Ἂ 
τως. καὶ γὰρ δὴ ἕως μὲν πόλεμος ἦν τοῖς Λακεδαι- 
- f " \ > θ ᾽ὔ , " Ἀ 4 
δ μονίοις πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους παρέμενεν, ἐπειδὴ δὲ 
> / > ’; » I at 
εἰρήνη ἐγένετο, ἀναπείσας τὴν αὑτοῦ πόλιν ὡς OL 
“ > ἴω ‘ ν \ 
Θρᾷκες ἀδικοῦσι τοὺς Ἕλληνας καὶ διαπραξάμενος 
ε 9 / Ν ω 
ὡς ἐδύνατο παρὰ τῶν ἐφόρων, ἐξέπλει ὡς πολεμήσων 
Ἄ“Ὰ ε 4 4 4 
τοῖς ὑπὲρ Χερρονήσου καὶ Περίνθου Opakiv. ἐπεὶ 
Ν / 
10 de μεταγνόντες πως οἱ ἔφοροι non ἔξω ὄντος ἀπο- 
ra > » ᾿ “~~ ’ > ~ , “~ 39 »᾽᾽ 
στρέφειν αὐτὸν ἐπειρῶντο ἐξ ᾿Ισθμοῦ, ἐνταῦθα οὐκέτι 
f > Ψ » 
πείθεται, ἀλλ᾽ ᾧχετο πλέων εἰς Ἑλλήσποντον. ἐκ 
ἤ ‘ 24 40 ε Ἀ ἴω > , o~ “- 
τούτου καὶ ἐθανατώθη ὑπὸ τῶν ἐν Σπάρτῃ τελῶν ὡς 
" ἴω » ‘ Ν ὁ » “ 
ἀπειθῶν. ἤδη δὲ φυγὰς ὧν ἔρχεται πρὸς Κῦρον, καὶ 
15 € ᾽ A X ’ » ~ ἮΝ “ἢ 
ὃ ὁποίοις μὲν λόγοις ἔπεισε Κῦρον ἄλλῃ γέγραπται, 
Sid δὲ Me ‘dla Kv f 5 / ε », | 
ίδωσι δὲ αὐτῷ Κῦρος μυρίους δαρεικούς - ὁ δὲ 
Ἁ Ψ b ᾿.. " / > / » > 
λαβὼν οὐκ ἐπι ῥᾳθυμίαν ἐτράπετο, ἀλλ᾽ ἀπὸ τούτων 
~ , ") ἮΝ 
τῶν χρημάτων συλλέξας στράτευμα ἐπολέμει τοῖς 
᾿ 4 F »" κ΄ ), 
Θρᾳξί, καὶ μάχῃ τε ἐνίκησε καὶ ἀπὸ τούτου δὴ ἔφερε 
A Φ ᾽ Ἁ ~ ~ 
20 καὶ ἦγε τούτους καὶ πολεμῶν διεγένετο μέχρι Κῦρος 
> ᾿ “~ ~ 
ἐδεήθη τοῦ στρατεύματος - τότε δὲ ἀπῆλθεν ws σὺν 
ἐκείνῳ αὖ πολεμήσων. 
He was a born soldier, and an excellent though harsh disciplinarian. 
a > a 
Ταῦτα οὖν φιλοπολέμου μοι δοκεῖ ἀνδρὸς ἔργα 
> 9 on ‘ > 
εἶναι, ὅστις ἐξὸν μὲν εἰρήνην ἔχειν ἄνευ αἰσχύνης 
Ν ᾽ ε ~ ~ κ΄ 
δ καὶ βλάβης αἱρεῖται πολεμεῖν, ἐξὸν δὲ ῥᾳθυμεῖν βού- 
~ ν ~ bP uth, 1 
λεται πονεῖν ὦστε πολεμεῖν, ἐξὸν δὲ χρήματα ἔχειν 
ἀκινδύνως αἱρεῖται πολεμῶν μείονα ταῦτα ποιεῖν - 
> “ \ 7 
ἐκεῖνος δὲ ὥσπερ εἰς παιδικὰ ἢ εἰς ἄλλην τινὰ 


ANABASIS II. 6. 7-12. 17 


¥ κι ψ 
ἡδονὴν ἤθελε δαπανᾶν εἰς πόλεμον. οὕτω μὲν φιλο- 
ld i μ᾿ \ > “ 9D » > ψ 
πόλεμος ἦν - πολεμικὸς δὲ αὖ ταύτῃ ἐδόκει εἶναι OTL 
, , > ν A » \ ᾿ ¥ eM 
φιλοκίνδυνός TE ἦν Kal ἡμέρας Kal νυκτὸς ἄγων ἐπι 
Ἂ an € 
τοὺς πολεμίους καὶ ἐν τοῖς δεινοῖς φρόνιμος, ὡς οἱ 
"παρόντες πανταχοῦ πάντες ὡμολόγουν. καὶ ἀρχικὸς 
δ᾽ ἐλέγετο εἶναι ὡς δυνατὸν ἐκ τοῦ τοιούτου τρόπου 
“ σ 
οἷον κἀκεῖνος εἶχεν. ἱκανὸς μὲν γὰρ ὡς τις καὶ 
¥ , > ¢ ¥ ε Ν PANY ‘ 
ἄλλος φροντίζειν ἣν ows ἔχοι ἡ στρατιὰ αὑτῷ TA 
ἐπιτήδεια καὶ παρασκευάζειν ταῦτα, ἱκανὸς δὲ καὶ 
10 ἐμποιῆσαι τοῖς παροῦσιν ὡς πειστέον εἴη Κλεάρχῳ. 
τοῦτο δ᾽ ἐποίει ἐκ τοῦ χαλεπὸς εἶναι καὶ γὰρ ὁρᾶν 
‘ > \ ‘an “an , , » ΄, > 
στυγνὸς ἦν καὶ τῇ φωνῇ τραχύς, ἐκόλαζέ τε ἰσχυ- 
ρῶς, καὶ ὀργῇ ἐνίοτε, ὡς καὶ αὐτῷ μεταμέλειν ἔσθ᾽ 
9 Ν , ᾿" AN "ἡ 3 ΄ -Ν 
ὅτε. καὶ γνώμῃ δ᾽ ἐκόλαζεν " ἀκολάστου γὰρ oTpa-10 
Vd > A ε “Ἃ » - 3 \ ‘ , 
15 τεύματος οὐδὲν ἡγεῖτο ὄφελος εἰναι; ἀλλὰ καὶ λέγειν 
"ν᾿ ¥ ε δέ ‘ , ἴω θ » 
αὐτὸν ἔφασαν ὡς δέσι τὸν στρατιῴτην φοβεῖσθαι 
Ἂμ Ν ¥ a ba ’ 3 / “ἡ 
μᾶλλον τὸν ἄρχοντα ἢ τοὺς πολεμίους, εἰ μέλλοι ἢ 
it saci 3 
φυλακὰς φυλάξειν ἢ φίλων ἀφέξεσθαι ἢ ἀπροφασί- 
στως ἰέναι πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους. 


His men believed in him, but did not love him. 


> \ > A A ¥ > rot. , 
2 Ἔν μὲν οὖν τοῖς δεινοῖς ἤθελον αὐτοῦ ἀκούειν 11 
la ‘ > ¥ € ἴω ε “ \ 
σφόδρα καὶ οὐκ ἄλλον ἡροῦντο οἱ στρατιωται" καὶ 
‘ γν" \ Cd \ > | 2 a ¥ 
yap τὸ στυγνὸν τότε φαιδρὸν αὐτοῦ ἐν τοῖς ἄλλοις 
, » ld ‘ ~ ‘ > 
προσώποις ἔφασαν φαίνεσθαι καὶ τὸ χαλεπὸν ἐρρω- 
μένον πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους ἐδόκει εἶναι, ὥστε σωτή- 
25 ριον; οὐκέτι χαλεπὸν ἐφαίνετο ὅτε δ᾽ ἔξω τοῦ δεινοῦ 12 
A > al ‘ » 5 rd > ᾽ 
γένοιντο καὶ ἐξείη πρὸς ἄλλον ἀρξομένους ἀπιέναι; 
πολλοὶ αὐτὸν ἀπέλειπον - τὸ γὰρ ἐπίχαρι οὐκ εἶχεν, 
3 NE: A. ν. 5 iinet ἡ“ 9 7 Ν 
ἀλλ᾽ ἀεὶ χαλεπὸς ἣν καὶ ὦμος" ὥστε διέκειντο πρὸς 


78 ANABASIS 11. 6. 13-19. 


ν ἊΝ ε "ἢν hy “ \ / 
αὐτὸν οἱ στρατιῶται ὥσπερ παῖδες πρὸς διδάσκαλον. 
καὶ γὰρ οὖν φιλίᾳ μὲν καὶ εὐνοίᾳ ἑ ; ὑδέ 
γαρ ᾳ μεν και εὐνοιᾳ ἐπομενους οὐόέποτε 13 
il ll ν δὲ δεν aN , ὍΔ" κι 
εἶχεν " οἵτινες O€ ἡ ὑπὸ πόλεως τεταγμένοι ἢ ὑπὸ τοῦ 
~ ~~ »¥ \ > f “ 
δεῖσθαι ἢ ἄλλῃ τινὶ ἀνάγκῃ κατεχόμενοι παρείησαν 
> r” ,) ’ ~ 
δ αὐτῷ, σφόδρα πειθομένοις ἐχρῆτο. ἐπεὶ Se ἡρξαντο 14 
~ \ > A ᾿ ᾿ ¥ 3 
νικᾶν σὺν αὐτῷ τοὺς πολεμίους, ἤδη μεγάλα ἦν τὰ 
/ “ Ψ ~ 
χρησίμους ποιοῦντα εἷναι τοὺς σὺν αὐτῷ στρατιώ- 
“ hs, Ν 
τας" τό TE γὰρ πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους θαρραλέως 
» “~ i, \ \ ~ 
ἔχειν παρὴν καὶ τὸ τὴν Tap ἐκείνου τιμωρίαν φοβεῖ- 
ral ἴω 
ΙΊόσθαι εὐτάκτους ἐποίει. τοιοῦτος μὲν δὴ ἄρχων ἣν." 15 
¥ A ε Ν Ν 
ἄρχεσθαι δὲ ὑπὸ ἄλλων οὐ μάλα ἐθέλειν ἐλέγετο. 
> δὲ Ld > X , > Ν Ν / ¥ 
ἣν O€ ore ἐτελεύτα ἀμφὶ τὰ πεντήκοντα ἔτη. 
Proxenus was ambitious, but strictly upright. 
/ \ 
Πρόξενος δὲ ὁ Βοιώτιος εὐθὺς μὲν μειράκιον ὧν 16 
3 
ἐπεθύμει γενέσθαι ἀνὴρ τὰ μεγάλα πράττειν ἱκανός - 
‘ A > 
ι καὶ διὰ ταύτην τὴν ἐπιθυμίαν ἔδωκε Topyia apyv- 
‘ 
‘a / 3 ,» 
ριον τῷ Λεοντίνῳ. ἐπεὶ δὲ συνεγένετο ἐκείνῳ, ἱκανὸς 1Ἱ 
; "ὃ ey ‘ ¥ ‘ ’ “ἃ ~ 
"νομίσας ἤδη εἶναι καὶ ἄρχειν καὶ φίλος ὧν τοῖς 
Ld Ἃ ε o~ ~ 
πρώτοις μὴ ἡττᾶσθαι εὐεργετῶν, ἦλθεν εἰς ταύτας 
‘ ‘ Kv / ν » la > ’ 
τὰς σὺν Κύρῳ πράξεις - καὶ wero κτήσεσθαι ἐκ τού- 
»” al Ἁ ; 
0 των ὄνομα μέγα καὶ δύνὰμιν μεγάλην καὶ χρήματα 
ral ἴω 
πολλά. τοσούτων δ᾽ ἐπιθυμῶν σφόδρα ἔνδηλον αὖ 18 
\ “ > A 
καὶ τοῦτο εἶχεν ὅτι τούτων οὐδὲν av θέλοι κτᾶσθαι 
\ by / > Ν ΗΝ ἴω 
μετὰ ἀδικίας, ἀλλὰ σὺν τῷ δικαίῳ καὶ καλῷ ᾧετο 
_ δεῖν τούτων τυγχάνειν, ἄνευ δὲ τούτων μή. 


As a commander he failed to inspire his men with either 
L. Ean Nth. 441-942 respect or fear. 
! ῥ , 


Ν 4 ΤΩ ral 
2 “Apyxew δὲ καλῶν μὲν καὶ ἀγαθῶν δυνατὸς ἦν - 19 
> , ~~ 2 ‘a “ » 
οὐ μέντοι οὔτ᾽ αἰδῶ τοῖς στρατιώταις ἑαυτοῦ οὔτε 
“ ε Ν 3 “ > Ν Ἁ 3 ἢ “ 
φόβον ἱκανὸς ἐμποιῆσαι, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἠσχύνετο μᾶλλον 


ANABASIS II. 6. 20-25. 19 


‘ , “ἡ eo » ’ 3 ~ Ν , 

TOUS στρατιώτας ἢ οἱ ἀρχόμενοι ἐκεῖνον - Kal φοβού- 

a > \ \ > V4 A 

μενος μᾶλλον ἦν φανερὸς τὸ ἀπεχθάνεσθαι τοῖς 

x la A > 

στρατιώταις ἢ οἱ στρατιῶται τὸ ἀπιστεῖν ἐκείνῳ. 

¥ νι "2 A ᾿ I, Ν > \ An \ 
WETO δὲ ἀρκεῖν πρὸς TO ἀρχικὸν εἶναι καὶ δοκεῖν τὸν 20 

ω al a a Ὧν i. 

“μὲν καλῶς ποιοῦντα ἐπαινεῖν, τὸν δὲ ἀδικοῦντα μὴ 

~ ἮΝ “~ i, 

ἐπαινεῖν. τοιγαροῦν αὐτῷ οἱ μὲν καλοί τε καὶ ἀγα- 
νι. , > ey e ιν 3 ΄ 
Jot τῶν συνόντων εὖνοι ἦσαν, οἱ δὲ ἄδικοι ἐπεβού- 


λευον ὡς εὐμεταχειρίστῳ ὄντι. ὅτε δὲ ἀπέθνῃσκεν + 


/ 
ae) 0 » ε ὔὕ 
Hv ETWVY WS τριάκοντα. 


Menon’s greed for gain was appalling. He was a bad and shame- 
less man, without a single redeeming quality. 


10 Μένων δὲ ὁ Θετταλὸς δῆλος ἦν ἐπιθυμῶν μὲν 21 
a Ψ" A > a +e 7 , 
πλουτεῖν ἰσχυρῶς, ἐπιθυμῶν δὲ ἄρχειν, ὅπως πλείω 
λαμβάνοι, ἐπιθυμῶν δὲ τιμᾶσθαι, ἵνα πλείω Kepdai- 
ν 3 ro Φ A ᾽ , 
νοι " φίλος τε ἐβούλετο εἶναι τοῖς μέγιστα δυναμέ 
ν > νην \ ᾿ / 2 ,᾿": I, ~ 
νοις, ἵνα ἀδικῶν μὴ διδοίη δίκην. ἐπὶ δὲ τὸ KaTEp-2 
MI ,ὕ Ὄ 3 ,ὕ , ¥ ει 
ιό γάζεσθαι ὧν ἐπιθυμοίη σνντομωτάτην wero ὁδὸν 
> ‘ lll Ἃ Ν ral Wc MA Ὁ 
εἶναι διὰ τοῦ ἐπιορκεῖν τε καὶ ψεύδεσθαι καὶ ἐξαπα- 
~ i. > 6 ἊΝ Ἁ 3 Ἅ ~ I i wll > ἤ 
τᾶν, τὸ δ᾽ ἁπλοῦν καὶ ἀληθὲς τὸ αὐτὸ τῴ ἠλιθίῳ 
εἶναι. στέργων δὲ φανερὸς μὲν ἦν οὐδένα, ὅτῳ δὲ 28 
᾽ “ - - ¥ > ral , 
φαίη φίλος εἶναι, τούτῳ ἔνδηλος ἐγίγνετο ἐπιβου- 
20 λεύων. 
, / ε Ἂ ‘All , | 
συνόντων πάντων ὡς καταγελῶν ἀεὶ διελέγετο. 


Ὶ 


Ka 24 | , 
~ \ A , / | > ’ἅὕ 
τοῖς μὲν τῶν πολεμίων κτήμασιν οὐκ ἐπεβούλευε. 
x Ἂ » > 3 A , 
χαλεπὸν yap wero εἶναι τὰ τῶν φυλαττομένων hap- 
Vd Ἂ μ᾿ id Υ͂ , » > , er 
βάνειν - τὰ δὲ τῶν φίλων μόνος ᾧετο εἰδέναι ῥᾷστον 
~ a 
25 ὃν ἀφύλακτα λαμβάνειν. 
> , \ > a ε 3 c ral > A 
ἐπιόρκους Kal ἀδίκους ws εὖ ὡπλισμένους ἐφοβεῖτο. 
“~ ‘ ε ’, Ν ΚΣ ᾽ > a ε bg , 
τοῖς δὲ ὁσίοις καὶ ἀλήθειαν ἀσκοῦσιν ὡς ἀνάνδροις 


er in! > / 
και OD OUS μεν αἰσθάνοιτο 25 


ἐπειρᾶτο χρῆσθαι. 


‘ Ἢ A > in ᾽ ~ \ 
και πολεμίου μεν οὐδενὸς κατεγέλα: τῶν δὲ | ° 


ἐς, »»- 
ν 


o, ¥ 


80 ANABASIS II. 6. 26-30. 


Y 
Ωσπερ δέ τις ἀγάλλεται ἐπὶ θεοσεβείᾳ καὶ ahy-26 


θείᾳ καὶ δικαιότητι, οὕτω Μένων ἠγάλλετο τῷ ἐξαπα- 
τἂν δύνασθαι, τῷ πλάσασθαι ψευδῆ, τῷ φίλους 
διαγελᾶν - τὸν δὲ μὴ πανοῦργον τῶν ἀπαιδεύτων ἀεὶ 
5 ἐνόμιζεν εἶναι. καὶ παρ᾽ οἷς μὲν ἐπεχείρει πρωτεύειν 
φιλίᾳ, διαβάλλων τοὺς πρώτους τοῦτο wero δεῖν 
κτήσασθαι. 
παρέχεσθαι ἐκ τοῦ συναδικεῖν αὐτοῖς ἐμηχανᾶτο. 
τιμᾶσθαι δὲ καὶ θεραπεύεσθαι ἠξίου ἐπιδεικνύμενος 
10 ὅτι πλεῖστα δύναιτο καὶ ἐθέλοι ἂν ἀδικεῖν. εὐεργε- 
σίαν δὲ κατέλεγεν, ὁπότε τις αὐτοῦ ἀφίστατο, ὅτι 


, > “~ b 9 ᾽ 
χρώμενος αὐτῳ οὐκ ἀπώλεσεν αὐτόν. καὶ τὰ μὲν δὴ 28 


ἴω, ". “ἣν 6 
ἀφανῆ ἔξεστι περὶ αὐτοῦ ψεύδεσθαι, ἃ δὲ πάντες 
Γἦ ΠΥ + , ‘9 , \ ¥ ε A 
ἴσασι τάδ᾽ ἐστί. παρὰ ᾿Αριστίππου μὲν ἔτι ὡραῖος 
“-φτἋα ~ »“ 
ιὸ ὧν στρατηγεῖν διεπράξατο τῶν ξένων, ᾿Αριαίῳ δὲ 
/ Ν ν Ll ~ 7 bi , 
βαρβάρῳ ὄντι, ὅτι μειρακίοις καλοῖς ἥδετο, οἰκειό- 
ε o 
τατος ἔτι ὡραῖος ὧν ἐγένετο, αὐτὸς δὲ παιδικὰ εἶχε 
Θαρύπαν ἀγένειος ὧν γενειῶντα. 


His end was fitting. The other two generals. 


᾿Αποθνῃσκόντων δὲ TO Ἵ ὅτι ἐ Ἵ 
no ν συστρατήγων ὅτι ἐστρά- 29 


20Tevoav ἐπὶ βασιλέα σὺν Κύρῳ, ταὐτὰ πεποιηκὼς 
» 2 Λ ᾽ν. \ by. ~ Ν) , 
οὐκ ἀπέθανε, pera δὲ τὸν τῶν ἄλλων θάνατον στρα- 

ἴω θ ᾽ν ε ,ν. / > i 3 

τηγῶν τιμωρηθεὶς ὑπὸ βασιλέως ἀπέθανεν, ovx 
ν li ‘ c ¥ \ > 
ὥσπερ Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἀλλοι στρατηγοὶ ἀποτμη- 
θέ Ν ld ν i “ »»Ἥ» 
ἔντες τὰς κεφαλάς, ὅσπερ τάχιστος θάνατος δοκεῖ 

25elvar, ἀλλὰ ζῶν αἰκισθεὶς ἐνιαυτὸν ὡς πονηρὸς 
λέγεται τῆς τελευτῆς τυχεῖν. 


᾿Αγίας δὲ ὁ ᾿Αρκὰς καὶ Σωκράτης ὁ ᾿Αχαιὸς καὶ 80 


,ὔ " θ ᾽ Τὴ \ » 3 ε > , 
τούτω ἀπεθανέτην. τούτων δὲ οὔθ᾽ ὡς ἐν πολέμῳ 
4 


‘ δὲ θ s ‘ , 
TO € πεισομένους TOUS στρατιωτας 27 


ANABASIS III. x. 1-3. 81 


ty > ‘ » ¥ ν᾿ 3 / 9 ‘ > + 
κακῶν οὐδεὶς κατεγέλα ovT εἰς φιλίαν αὑτοὺς ἐμέμ- 
» \ ὟΝ 3 \ ~ / Ν 
φετο. ἤστην δὲ ἄμφω ἀμφὶ τὰ πέντε και τριάκοντα 


¥ 3 \ γῆν 
ETN) ATO YEVEAS. 


BOOK III. 


Distress of the Greeks at the loss of their leaders. 


toca μὲν δὴ ἐν TH Κύρου ἀναβάσει ot Ἕλληνες 


¥ / Ἂ ld Ν bid 3 ». ~ 3 
5 ἔπραξαν μέχρι τῆς μάχης; καὶ ὅσα ἐπει Kupos ἐτε- 
λεύτησεν ἐγένετο ἀπιόντων τῶν Ἑλλήνων σὺν Τισ- 
ld 3 ἴων ὃ A > ~ , θ r , 5 
σαφέρνει ἐν Tals σπονδαῖς, ἐν τῷ TpOTVEY λόγῳ OE 
, "νῶι ε \ , 5 
δήλωται.͵ ἐπεὶ δὲ οἱ στρατηγοὶ συνειλημμένοι σαν 
καὶ τῶν λοχαγῶν καὶ τῶν στρατιωτῶν οἱ συνεπόμε- 
κ᾿ Ψ 
10 vou ἀπωλώλεσαν, ἐν πολλῇ δὴ ἀπορίᾳ ἦσαν οἱ Ελ- 


βάρβαροι, μόνοι δὲ καταλελειμμένοι ἦσαν οὐδὲ 
ε i OE) Vd » ν ὃ λ 5 
ἱππέα οὐδένα σύμμαχον ἔχοντες, ὥστε εὐδηλον ἣν 
20 ὅτι νικῶντες μὲν οὐδένα ἂν κατακάνοιεν, ἡττηθέντων 
,. 3 γ᾿ , \ a ral ol MN AMM I , Ἂ 
δὲ αὐτῶν οὐδεὶς ἂν λειφθείη - ταῦτ᾽ ἐννοούμενοι καὶ 

> 4 ¥ > “ ‘ > ii > x ε Nd 
ἀθύμως ἔχοντες ὀλίγοι μὲν avTwY εἰς THY ἐσπέραν 
/ 3 , νυ ἢ δὲ ‘a NI κ΄ lls δὲ ‘ 
σίτου ἐγεύσαντο, ὀλίγοι δὲ πῦρ ἀνέκαυσαν, ἐπὶ OE τὰ 

3 

ὅπλα πολλοὶ οὐκ ἦλθον ταύτην τὴν νύκτα, ἀνεπαύ- 
͵ , 
95 οντο δὲ ὅπου ἐτύγχανεν ἕκαστος, οὐ δυνάμενοι καθεύ- 
δειν ὑπὸ λύπης καὶ πόθου πατρίδων, γονέων, γυναι- 


αὖ ᾿ =F Ὶ ra 4 


82 ANABASIS ΠῚ. 1. 4.8. β ANABASIS III 9-13. 83 
Ws x AMI Ne ii " Ι 


κῶν, Tat δ. δ Δ «Ὁ 
ἵν 3) = ous ovmot ἐνόμιζον ἔτι ὄψεσθαι. οὕτω καὶ Κῦρον μέλλοντας ἤδη ὁρμᾶν τὴν ἄνω ὁδόν, καὶ 
, / > 
μεν OF) OLAKELMLEVOL TTAVTES ἀνεπαύοντο. | , =e sisi ἅμ" " sinh 
ἀμὴν ἀπ συνεστάθη Κύρῳ. προθυμουμένου δὲ τοῦ Προξένου 9 
phon’s connection with the expedition. Socrates and the ὶ ὁ Ky θ a a ey 5 δὲ 
a hy kat ὁ Κῦρος συμπρουθυμεῖτο μεῖναι αὑτὸν, εἰπε Oc 
Ἦν δέ τις ἐν τῇ ily - Ἢ ὅτι ἐπειδὰν τά fa λήξῃ; εὐθὺς ἀποπέμ- 
᾿ ς γ ΤῊ στρατιᾳ Ξενοφῶν Αθηναῖος. ὃς 4 i nc sil i ii A cee Ἢ ba sing vs Te 
Ov nl » ¥ 
TE στρατηγὸς οὔτε λοχαγὸς οὔτε στρατιώτη ε 5 er avTov. ἐλέγετο δὲ ὁ στόλος εἶναι εἰς Πισίδας. 
συν ΄ > ‘ # 3 , ‘ ‘ 3 δι eo 
gach ἘΠῚ: ἀλλὰ Πρόξενος αὐτὸν μετεπέμψατο ἐστρατεύετο μὲν δὴ οὕτως ἐξαπατηθείς οὐχ ὑπὸ 
οικ 1 ous a A A f . hea 
: c εν ξένος ὧν ἀρχαῖος - ὑπισχνεῖτο δὲ αὐτῷ. εἰ Προξένον οὐ yap ἤδει τὴν ἐπὶ Baqynéeroppyy οὐδὲ 
..,2΄ν"ν " , ; t | ᾽ A » ᾿ the 
Ἄλθοι, Φίλον αὐτὸν Κύρῳ ποιήσειν, ὃν αὐτὸς ἔφη ἄλλος οὐδεὶς τῶν Ἑλλήνων πλὴν Κλεάρχου " ἔπει 
κρείττω ἑαυτῷ νομίζειν TH (ὃ ον μέντοι εἰς Κιλικίαν ἦλθον, σαφὲς πᾶσιν ἤδη ἐδόκει 
=| “ν 3 ] ‘ τὴν ΡΝ si 9 Ferre 5 y c , ᾽ν " ἧι , , x 
‘ : ω | 
Ξενοφῶν ἀναγνοὺς τὴν ἐπιστολὴν ἀνακοινοῦται Σω- 10 εἶναι ὅτι ὁ στόλος εἴη ἐπὶ βασιλέα! φοβούμενοι δὲ 
10 κράτει τῷ ᾿Αθηναίῳ i γῇ , \ ¢ τὴν ὁδὸν καὶ ἄκοντες ὅμως οἱ πολλοὶ Ot αἰσχύνην 
Α ἡναίῳ περὶ τῆς πορείας. καὶ ὁ Σωκρά- ” μ σχυνη 
ly." 
καὶ ἀλλήλων καὶ Κύρου συνηκολούθησαν: ὧν εἷς 


καὶ Ξενοφῶν ἦν... ; 


ε ἢ / Ἃ Ἃ 
τῆς ὑποπτεύσας μή τι πρὸς τῆς πόλεως ὑπαίτιον εἴη 
᾽ ral 
Κύρῳ φίλον γενέσθαι, ὅτι ἐδόκει ὁ Κῦρος προθύμως 
Xenophon’s dream. 


μὴν " ἃ νὴ > , 
τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις ἐπὶ τὰς Αθήνας συμπολεμῆσαι, 
et δὲ ἀπορία ἦν, ἐλυπεῖτο μὲν σὺν τοῖς ἄλλοις 11 


τ καὶ οὐκ ἐδύνατο καθεύδειν - μικρὸν δ᾽ ὕπνου λαχὼν 
εἶδεν ὄναρ. ἔδοξεν αὐτῷ βροντῆς γενομένης σκης- 
πτὸς πεσεῖν εἰς τὴν πατρῴαν οἰκίαν, καὶ ἐκ τούτου 
λάμπεσθαι πᾶσα. περίφοβος δ᾽ εὐθὺς ἀνηγέρθη,: 


μος ἢ 
o ᾿Απόλλ ts ob j ἐπεὶ δὲ | n 
ων θεοῖς οἷς ἔδει θύειν. ἐπεὶ δὲ πάλιν ἦλθε, 7 | καὶ τὸ ὄναρ τῇ μὲν ἔκρινεν ἀγαθόν, ὅτι ἐν σάγους ὃν 
κινδύνοις φῶς μέγα ἐκ Διὸς ἰδεῖν ἔδοξε- τῇ δὲ 


a 2. ν ᾽ ~ "“»ΝἌ 
QTO αὐτὸν OT 200 , A a 
ι οὐ τοῦτο πρῶτον ἠρώτα πότερον λῷον καὶ ἐφοβεῖτο, ὅτι ἀπὸ Διὸς μὲν βασιλέως τὸ ὄναρ 
ἴω Ν / 
ἐδόκει αὐτῷ εἶναι, κύκλῳ δὲ ἐδόκει λάμπεσθαι τὸ. 


πῦρ, μὴ οὐ δύναιτο ἐκ τῆς χώρας ἐξελθεῖν τῆς βασι- 

, by > ¥ “4 ε ld r > ἊΜ 
λέως ἀλλ εἰργοιτο πάντοθεν ὑπὸ τινων ἀποριων. 
ὴ ἐστὶ τὸ τοιοῦτον ὄναρ ἰδεῖν ἔξεστι 13 


| 


συμβουλεύει τῷ Ἐενοφῶντι ἐλθόντα εἰς Δελφοὺς ἀνα- 
15 κοινῶσαι τῷ θεῷ περὶ τῆς πορείας. ἐλθὼν δ᾽ ὁ Ξενο- 6 

φῶν ἐπήρετο τὸν ᾿Απόλλω τίνι ἂν θεῶν θύων καὶ 

εὐχόμενος κάλλιστα καὶ ἄριστα ἔλθοι τὴν ὁδὸν ἣν 

ἐπινοεῖ καὶ καλῶς πράξας σωθείη. καὶ ἀνεῖλεν αὐτῷ 

ΐ 


/ ‘ / “~ r 
20 λέγει τὴν μαντείαν TH Σωκράτει. ὃ δ᾽ ἀκούσας ἡτι- 90 καὶ 
t 


¥ > γὴν / xa ᾽ 
εἴη αὐτῷ πορεύεσθαι ἢ μένειν, ἀλλ᾽ αὐτὸς κρίνας 


.» > », .».9 , 
ἱτέον εἶναι τοῦτ᾽ ἐπυνθάνετο ὅπως ἂν κάλλιστα TO- 


΄ Sy, , ¥ να “ 
ρευθείη. ἐπεὶ μέντοι οὕτως NPOv, ταῦτ᾽, edn, χρὴ 


25 ποιεῖν ὅσα O θεὸς ἐκέλ p | 
εος εκε EVO EV. »" « by Ἂ μιν. ney “ιν 25 ὁποῖόν TL μὲν ὃ 
' ~ ἴω, I Ἂ ΚΡ ’ 
σκοπεῖν ἐκ τῶν συμβάντων μετὰ τὸ οναρ. γίγνεται 


,ν (ὃ 00 > δὴ 3 “ θ "ἰῇ Ἂ » 
γὰρ τάδε. εὐθὺς ἐπειόη ἀνηγερνη πρῶτον μέν EVVOLA 

. κ΄ 5 ὔ , , OI, δὲ Ν , 
αὐτῷ ἐμπίπτει TL κατάκειμαι, ἢ νὺξ προβαίνει" 


Xenophon had been led by false representations to join Cyrus 
ε b,! ᾿» iain 9 ; 
O μὲν δὴ Ξενοφῶν οὕτω θυσάμενος οἷς ἀνεῖλεν 6 8 
θεὸς ἐξέπλει, καὶ λ iver ἐν Σά 
; , κατα αμβάνει εν Σάρδεσι Πρόξενον 


84 ‘  ANABASIS III. rx. 14-18, 


9 ‘ »ν AT 4 ‘ 
ἅμα δὲ TH ἡμέρᾳ εἰκὸς τοὺς πολεμίους ἥξειν. εἰ δὲ 
δ»ν θ ν ἡ X a / > ὃ ᾿. ‘ a. > / 
γενησόμεθα ἐπὶ βασιλεῖ, τί ἐμποδὼν μὴ οὐχὶ πάντα 
». ‘ X il > ὃ al / Ἂ Hy lal 
μὲν Ta χαλεπώτατα ἐπιδόντας πάντα δὲ τὰ δεινό- 
/ ~ 
tata παθόντας ὑβριζομένους ἀποθανεῖν ; ὅπως δ᾽ 
" 5 ’ὔ θ ὃ ‘ / ον » ΜΝ 
ὃ ἀμυνούμεθα οὐδεὶς παρασκευάζεται οὐδὲ ἐπιμελεῖται, 
@ ν. ν 
adda κατακείμεθα ὥσπερ ἐξὸν ἡσυχίαν ἄγειν. ἐγὼ 14 
5 Ἂ > / “~ » 
οὖν τὸν ἐκ ποίας πόλεως στρατηγὸν προσδοκῶ ταῦτα 
, “~ ~ 
πράξειν ; ποίαν δ᾽ ἡλικίαν ἐμαυτῷ ἐλθεῖν ἀναμένω ; 
3 ᾽ν. » Ν᾿ 
ov yap eywy er. πρεσβύτερος ἔσομαι, ἐὰν τήμερον 
10 προδῶ ἐμαυτὸν τοῖς πολεμίοις. 
Address of Xenophon to the captains οὗ Proxenus. No hope 
of mercy from the king. 
Ἧ / ll ‘ ~ ‘ ral 
K τούτου ἀνίσταται Kal συγκαλεῖ τοὺς Προξένου 15 
~ \ ~ 
mpwtov λοχαγούς. ἐπεὶ δὲ συνῆλθον, ἔλεξεν - ᾿Εγώ, 
“Ὁ ¥ 5 d / ¥ 4 4 ν 
ὦ avopes hoxayoi, ovte καθεύδειν δύναμαι, ὥσπερ 
᾿ o> € Δ ¥ “ὦ a 
οἶμαι οὐδ᾽ ὑμεῖς, οὔτε κατακεῖσθαι ἔτι, ὁρῶν ἐν οἵοις 
15 b / « ‘ Ἃ X “ ὃ "Ὁ Ψ 3 al 
5€Tmev. οἱ μέν yap πολέμιοι δῆλον OTL οὐ πρότερον 16 
Ν € ~ Ἃ / 
πρὸς ἡμᾶς τὸν πόλεμον ἐξέφηναν πρὶν ἐνόμισαν 
Γω i | € ~ wi “~ 
καλῶς Ta ἑαυτῶν παρασκευάσασθαι, ἡμῶν δ᾽ οὐδεὶς 
30." 9 “~ 
οὐδὲν ἀντεπιμελεῖται ὅπως ὡς κάλλιστα ἀγωνιού- 
)ν. Ἁ » κε “ 
μεθα. καὶ μὴν εἰ ὑφησόμεθα καὶ ἐπὶ βασιλεῖ γενη- 17 
“ ’ 3 ἴω 
20 σόμεθα, τί οἰόμεθα πείσεσθαι; ὃς καὶ τοῦ ὁμομη- 
/ ἴω 
τρίου ἀδελφοῦ καὶ τεθνηκότος ἤδη ἀποτεμὼν τὴν 
lh, ‘ ‘ a“ ~ 
κεφαλὴν καὶ THY χεῖρα ἀνεσταύρωσεν : ἡμᾶς δέ, οἷς 
‘ \ 3 ν a 
κηδεμὼν μὲν οὐδεὶς πάρεστιν, ἐστρατεύσαμεν δὲ ἐπ᾽ 
> Ss ε ὃ vr 3 ᾿. / dl ν » 
αὐτὸν ὡς δουλον ἀντὶ βασιλέως ποιήσοντες καὶ ἀπο- 
ων 3 ~ 
25 κτενοῦντες εἰ δυναίμεθα, τί ἂν οἰόμεθα παθεῖν ; ἄρ᾽ 15 
> “ἃ Ἁ a“ “~ 
οὐκ ἂν ἐπὶ πᾶν ἔλθοι ὡς ἡμᾶς τὰ ἔσχατα αἰκισάμε- 
lb > “ 
vos πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις φόβον παράσχοι τοῦ στρατεῦ- 


om 
> / & 


γνδιγὼν am CU Te! .»... 


ANABASIS III. 1. 19-23. 


x ν » 3 al 
wai ποτε ἐπ᾽ αὐτόν ; ἀλλ᾽ ὅπως τοι μὴ ἐπ ἐκείνῳ 
γενησόμεθα πάντα ποιητέον. 

Open war is better than treacherous peace. 
> % \ > Γἦ ᾿ ε ὃ . 9 ¥ 
Eyw μὲν οὖν ἐστε μὲν αἱ σπονόαι σαν OVTOTE 19 
ἐπαυό ἡμᾶς μὲν οἰκτεί βασιλέα δὲ καὶ τοὺς 
ἐπανόμην ἡμᾶς μὲν οἰκτείρων, βασιλέ ; π᾿ 
a a , aA 
sovv αὐτῷ μακαρίζων, διαθεώμενος αὐτῶν ὁσὴν μὲν 
/ ἃ bd ¥ ε δὲ ¥ A i, > “ὃ 
χώραν καὶ οἵαν ἔχοιεν, ὡς 0€ αφθονα Ta ἐπιτήδεια, 
Ὁ hd ἂ lull \ , 
ὅσους δὲ θεράποντας, ὅσα δὲ κτήνη, χρυσὸν δέ, 
~ ~ “ἤν ε / > 
ἐσθῆτα δέ: τὰ δ᾽ ad τῶν στρατιωτῶν ὁπότε EvOv-2 
ἴω ~ 3 ~ ε wil 
μοίμην, ὅτι τῶν μὲν ἀγαθῶν τούτων οὐδενὸς ἡμῖν 
“ > »," “ θ ν 5° > Ἢ θ "ὃ ᾿ 
10 μετείη εἰ μὴ πριαίμεθα, ὅτου ὠνησόμεθα yoew y 
¥ /, / he 
ἔτι ὀλίγους ἔχοντας, ἄλλως δέ πως πορίζεσθαι τὰ 


3 “ὁ 3 ἤ Ψ "ὃ Vd 
ἐπιτήδεια Ἴ ὠνουμένους ορκους ἢ 1) κατέχοντας 
j “- 


ων vT οὖν λογιζό ἐνίοτε τὰς σπονδὰς {"..-«-ὧὐ 
ἡμᾶς" ταὺυτ οὖν λογιξομέενος EVLOTE τᾶς ΑἸ τότ 


». ἊΜ > \ , 
μᾶλλον ἐφοβούμην ἢ viv τὸν πόλεμον. ἐπεὶ μέντοι 21 
~ A“ A 
15 ἐκεῖνοι ἔλυσαν τὰς σπονδάς, λελύσθαι por δοκεῖ Kat 
Pa eng ν " καὶ εὶ ,ὕ 3 , > ,ὕ Codd. 
ἡ ἐκείνων ὑβρις Kal ἢ ἡμετέρα ἀσάφεια. ἐν μέσῳ «ἰώ 
\ » “ὦ A \ 3 θὰ 10λ € rd Δ ἀμ ω 
γὰρ non κεῖται ταῦτα τὰ ἀγαθὰ αὔλα ὁπότεροι ay “δ π΄ 


” Ὶ i, > ε , : 
ἡμῶν ἄνδρες ἀμείνονες ὦσιν, ἀγωνοθέται δ᾽ ot θεοί ae 
a e εν ἡ μη! 
εἰσιν, οἱ σὺν ἡμῖν, ὡς τὸ εἰκός, ἔσονται. οὗτοι μὲν 22 
ε “ \ ac MM ἡ 
20 γὰρ αὐτοὺς ἐπιωρκήκασιν . ἡμεῖς δὲ πολλὰ ὁρώντες 
~ ~ \ ‘ “ 
ἀγαθὰ στερρῶς αὐτῶν ἀπειχόμεθα διὰ τοὺς τῶν 
θεῶν ὅρκους - ὦστε ἐξεῖναί μοι δοκεῖ ἰέναι ἐπὶ τὸν 
> an! I te | "al “ A 4 ἊΝ 
ἀγῶνα πολὺ σὺν φρονήματι μείζονι ἢ τούτοις. ἐτι 93 
A Nt 
δ᾽ ἔχομεν σώματα ἱκανώτερα τούτων καὶ ψύχη Kal 
, ne 7, »» ' 32 \ Ν ‘ 
25 θάλπη Kal πόνους φέρειν - ἔχομεν δὲ Kal ψυχᾶς σὺν 
A ~ > ’ 6 δὲ ¥ 5 ‘ Ν ". 
τοῖς θεοῖς ἀμείνονας - οἱ δὲ ἀνὸρες καὶ τρωτοὶ καὶ 
\ Ay ε ” Ἅ ε θ ν γῪ Ἂ 4 θ 
θνητοὶ μᾶλλον ἡμῶν, ἢν ot θεοὶ ὠσπερ τὸ πρόσθεν 


νίκην ἡμῖν διδώσιν. 


ANABASIS ΠῚ, 1. 24-29. 


Xenophon urges immediate action. He will follow or lead. 


"ANN ἴσως yap καὶ ἄλλοι ταῦτα ἐνθυμοῦνται, πρὸς 24 


μὴν lll. Ν , ¥ > » ¢ ~ 
παρακαλοῦντας ἐπὶ Ta κάλλιστα ἔργα, ἀλλ᾽ ἡμεῖς 
ἮΝ a! > ἴω ᾽ν i ¥ ιν \ 
apfwpev τοῦ ἐξορμῆσαι καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους ἐπὶ τὴν 
δάρετήν. φάνητε τῶν λοχαγῶν ἄριστοι καὶ τῶν 
στρατηγῶν ἀξιοστρατηγότεροι. κἀγὼ δέ, εἰ μὲν 25 
ε A 3 / 2 ~ ANT. i 7 ε “A , 
ὑμεῖς ἐθέλετε ἐξορμᾶν ἐπὶ ταῦτα, ἕπεσθαι ὑμῖν Bov- 
λομαι, εἰ δ᾽ ὑμεῖς τάττετέ με ἡγεῖσθαι, οὐδὲν προφα- 
/ \ e “ > Ἂ Ἃ ᾽ / ε A 
σίζομαι τὴν ἡλικίαν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἀκμάζειν ἡγοῦμαι 
10 ἐρύκειν ἀπ᾿ ἐμαυτοῦ τὰ κακά. 
All urge Xenophon to take command, except Apollonides. 
Xenophon’s reply to him. 


‘O μὲν ταῦτ᾽ ἔλεξεν, οἱ δὲ λοχαγοὶ ἀκούσαντες 26 
ἡγεῖσθαι ἐκέλευον πάντες, πλὴν ᾿Απολλωνίδης τις 
ἣν βοιωτιάζων τῇ φωνῇ. οὗτος δ᾽ εἶπεν ὅτι φλυα- 

’ bid / ¥ ’ al a“ “Δ 
ροΐη ὅστις λέγει ἄλλως πως σωτηρίας ἂν τυχεῖν ἡ 

/ / 3 ᾿ν ν ¥ , 
15 βασιλέα πείσας εἰ δύναιτο: Kal ἅμα ἤρχετο λέγειν 
" 3 ry ε / -- ~ ly ε ᾽. 
τὰς ἀπορίας. 6 μέντοι Ἐενοφῶν μεταξὺ ὑπολαβὼν 27 
@ ""} i 
ἔλεξεν ὧδε. Ὦ θαυμασιώτατε ἄνθρωπε, σύγε οὐδὲ 
ὁρῶν γιγνώσκεις οὐδὲ ἀκούων μέμνησαι. ἐν ταὐτῷ 
/ > 4 ν ᾽ > ᾽ν. ἴω 
γε μέντοι ἦσθα τούτοις ὅτε βασιλεύς, ἐπεὶ Κῦρος 
90 ἀπέθανε, καταφρονήσας ἐπὶ τούτῳ πέμπων ἐκέλευε 
δό »" νυν 9 ᾿ ν Ὁ ‘an > / 
παραδιδόναι τὰ ὅπλα. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἡμεῖς ov παραδόντες 28 
ἀλλ᾽ ἐξοπλισάμενοι ἐλθόντες παρεσκηνήσαμεν αὐτῷ 
ρ 1) ἢ μ t? 
τί οὐκ ἐποίησε πρέσβεις πέμπων καὶ σπονδὰς αἰτῶν 
καὶ παρέχων τὰ ἐπιτήδεια, ἔστε σπονδῶν ἔτυχεν ; 
,", »ῳνυν " ε ‘ ‘ 1) N \ 
25 ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ad οἱ στρατηγοὶ Kal λοχαγοί, ὥσπερ δὴ σὺ 29 
, ᾽ ’ a ¥ ψ > 
κελεύεις, εἰς λόγους αὐτοῖς ἄνευ ὅπλων ἦλθον πι- 
στεύσαντες ταῖς σπονδαῖς, οὐ νῦν ἐκεῖνοι παιόμενοι, 


ANABASIS III. 1. 30-34. 87 


~ / 
κεντούμενοι, ὑβριζόμενοι οὐδὲ ἀποθανεῖν οἱ τλήμονες 
Η ἣν 4 Υ 
δύνανται, καὶ μάλ᾽ οἶμαι ἐρῶντες τούτου; ἃ GU 
πάντα εἰδὼς τοὺς μὲν ἀμύνεσθαι κελεύοντας φλυα- 
Ἂ ,.Σ » 
ρεῖν φῇς, πείθειν δὲ πάλιν κελεύεις ἰόντας ; ἐμοί, ὦ 80 
~ ἴω 4 
5 ἄνδρες, δοκεῖ τὸν ἄνθρωπον τοῦτον μήτε προσίεσθαι 
~ ~ / ~ , 
εἰς ταὐτὸν ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς, ἀφελομένους τε τὴν λοχαγίαν 
“~ 4 A 
σκεύη ἀναθέντας ὡς τοιούτῳ χρῆσθαι. οὗτος yap 
‘ “ A ε 
καὶ τὴν πατρίδα καταισχύνει καὶ πᾶσαν τὴν Ἐλ- 
Adda, ὅτι Ἕλλην ὧν τοιοῦτός ἐστιν. 
Apollonides is expelled, and a meeting of officers is called. 
“~ dl iy 
10 Ἐντεῦθεν ὑπολαβὼν ᾿Αγασίας Στυμφάλιος εἶπεν " 31 
3 ‘ 4 ¥ a“ 4 / "δὲ 
Αλλὰ τούτῳ γε οὔτε τῆς Βοιωτίας προσήκει οὐδεν 
A A 4," >) μὰ 
οὔτε τῆς Ἑλλάδος παντάπασιν, ἐπεὶ ἐγὼ αὐτὸν εἶδον 
Hd / \ 
ὥσπερ Λυδὸν ἀμφότερα τὰ ὦτα τετρυπημένον. Kal 
ἷ ὕ υ ty οὖν ἀπήλ - ot δὲ ad-32- 
εἶχεν οὕτως. τοῦτον μὲν οὖν ἀπήλασαν" οἱ OE α 
ν ‘ in an 
15 λοι παρὰ Tas τάξεις ἰόντες ὅπου μὲν στρατηγὸς TwS 
ε / ‘ ¥ 
cin Tov στρατηγὸν παρεκάλουν, ὁπόθεν δὲ οἴχοιτο 
Ν “ ¥ Ν 
τὸν ὑποστράτηγον, ὅπου δ᾽ αὖ λοχαγὸς σῶς εἴη τὸν 
᾿ a > ‘\ ‘al 
λοχαγόν. ἐπεὶ δὲ πάντες συνῆλθον, εἰς TO πρόσθεν 33 
td 
τῶν ὅπλων ἐκαθέζοντο - καὶ ἐγένοντο οἱ συνελθόντες 
‘ x Ἃ > ᾽ν Ἂ ε ld bid δὲ 
90 στρατηγοὶ καὶ λοχαγοὶ ἀμφὶ τοὺς ἑκατὸν. OTE OE 
ἴω iy 5" ~ ΒΕ , 
ταῦτα ἣν σχεδὸν μέσαι ἦσαν νύκτες. ἐνταῦθα lepar- 34 
Ἠλεῖ j ὃν τῶν Προξένου Aoxa- 
νυμος Ἠλεῖος πρεσβύτατος ὧν τῶν Ἰἱροξένου λοχα — 
ly a a ee “ἡ 
γῶν ἤρχετο λέγειν ὧδε. Ἡμῖν, ὦ ἄνδρες στρατηγοὶ * η0) 
ων ¥ ‘ 3 Ἂ 
καὶ λοχαγοί, ὁρῶσι τὰ παρόντα ἔδοξε καὶ αὐτοῖς 
~ ν sl 
οὐ συνελθεῖν Kal ὑμᾶς παρακαλέσαι, ὅπως βουλευσαι- 
4 Lal > » ‘ ,, 
μεθα εἴ τι δυναίμεθα ἀγαθόν. λέξον δ᾽, ἔφη; καὶ σύ, 
> a 9 \ \ PAM cy 
ὦ Ἐενοφῶν, ἀπερ καὶ πρὸς μας. 
ν΄ 


ANABASIS III. 1. 35-38, 


Address of Xenophon. Great responsibility of the officers. 
a “ ἴω 
Ex τούτου λέγει τάδε Ἐενοφῶν. ᾿Αλλὰ ταῦτα μὲν 35 
δὴ / > ἢ bid ᾿, i. ᾽; 
ἢ πάντες ἐπιστάμεθα ὅτι βασιλεὺς καὶ Τισσαφέρ- 
ἃ \ ὃ / / ε “ “Ὁ 3 
νης οὗς μὲν ἐδυνήθησαν συνειλήφασιν ἡμῶν, τοῖς ὃ 
Ν ~ 
ἄλλοις δῆλον ὅτι ἐπιβουλεύουσιν, ὡς ἢν δύνωνται 
δἀπολέσωσιν. ἡμῖν δέ γε οἶμαι πάντα ποιητέα ὡς 
᾿.. “~~ ~ 
μήποτε ἐπὶ τοῖς βαρβάροις γενώμεθα, ἀλλὰ μάλλον 
Ἂ ᾽ “ > ~ 
ἐκεῖνοι ἐφ᾽ ἡμῖν. εὖ τοίνυν ἐπίστασθε ὅτι ὑμεῖς 36 
“~ ¥ ν lal 
τοσοῦτοι ὄντες ὅσοι νῦν συνεληλύθατε μέγιστον 
- ᾿ 
ἔχετε καιρόν. οἱ γὰρ στρατιῶται οὗτοι πάντες πρὸς 
" ll * \ Ἂ ω wn 
10vpas βλέπουσι, κἀν μὲν ὑμᾶς ὁρῶσιν ἀθυμοῦντας, 
᾽ν. a 
πάντες κακοὶ ἔσονται, ἣν δὲ ὑμεῖς αὐτοί τε παρα- 
, \ 4% mt ‘ ΄ Ν x 
σκευαζόμενοι φανεροὶ ἦτε ἐπὶ TOUS πολεμίους Kal TOUS 
¥ κι > »¥ 9 y ea \ 
ἄλλους παρακαλῆτε, εὖ ἔστε OTL ἕψονται ὑμῖν καὶ 
ral ~ ¥ / y. / ld 
πειράσονται μιμεῖσθαι. ἴσως δέ τοι Kal δίκαιόν 31 
ιὸ ἐστιν ὑμᾶς διαφέρειν τι τούτων. ὑμεῖς γάρ ἐστε 
~ ‘ 
στρατηγοί, ὑμεῖς ταξίαρχοι καὶ λοχαγοί: καὶ ὅτε 
> ~ Ν ‘ o~ 
εἰρήνη ἦν, ὑμεῖς καὶ χρήμασι καὶ τιμαῖς τούτων 
ἴω, Ἃ ἊΜ ‘ 
ἐπλεονεκτεῖτε: Kal νῦν τοίνυν, ἐπεὶ πόλεμός ἐστιν, 
> “~ ~ e ΄Ὁ ΕῚ Ἂ > , o Pd 
ἀξιοῦν Set ὑμᾶς αὐτοὺς ἀμείνους τε τοῦ πλήθους 
90 εἶναι καὶ προβουλεύειν τούτων καὶ προπονεῖν ἦν 
που δέῃ. 


They must choose new officers and encourage the dejected soldiers. 
Ν “ “ᾳ»Ἤ » > a 4 “ / > il 
Kat νυν TPWTOV μεν οἰμαι αν υμας μέγα ὠφελῆης- 38 
ἢ “ 
σαι τὸ στράτευμα, εἰ ἐπιμεληθείητε ὅπως ἀντὶ τῶν 
᾽ ε i ᾿.. .. 
ἀπολωλότων ὡς τάχιστα στρατήγοι Kat λοχαγοὶ 
ral ¥ ᾿ Δ 
985 ἀντικατασταθῶσιν. ἄνευ γὰρ ἀρχόντων οὐδὲν ἂν 
Ν Ν » ᾿ ‘ , ε x I 
οὔτε καλὸν οὔτε ἀγαθὸν γένοιτο ὡς μὲν συνελόντι 
> ~ ἮΝ ‘a b δὲ ὃ ‘ Ἂ λ ~ , 
ELTTELY OVOAJLOV, EV OE OF) τοις πολεμικοις παντάπασιν. 


ANABASIS III. 1. 39-45. 89 


~ cll x 
ἡ μὲν yap εὐταξία σῴζειν δοκεῖ, ἡ δὲ ἀταξία πολλοὺς 
ld x‘ » 
ἤδη ἀπολώλεκεν. ἐπειδὰν δὲ καταστήσησθε τοὺς ap-39 
~ ἡ 
χοντας ὅσους δεῖ, ἣν καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους στρατιώτας συλ- 


ΓῪ “ἡ ξ ἊΜ VA 3 
λέγητε καὶ παραθαρρύνητε, οἶμαι ἀν ὑμας πάνυ ἐν 


“~ ~ ἊΝ 3 y κ᾿ vil 2? θ “ Ae 40 
δ καιρῳ ποιῆσαι. νυν γαρ ισως και υμεις αιἰσσανεσ 


ὡς ἀθύμως μὲν ἦλθον ἐπὶ τὰ ὅπλα, ἀθύμως δὲ πρὸς 
τὰς φυλακάς. ὥστε οὕτω γ᾽ ἐχόντων οὐκ οἶδα ὅ τι ἂν 
τις χρήσαιτο αὐτοῖς εἴτε νυκτὸς δέοι εἴτε καὶ ἡμέρας. 
ἣν δέ τις αὐτῶν τρέψῃ τὰς γνώμας, ὡς μὴ τοῦτο 41 


‘i > Is. ip ᾿ “ 
10 μόνον ἐννοῶνται τί πείσονται ἀλλὰ καὶ TL ποιήσουσι; 


> “ ‘ i," bid 
πολὺ εὐθυμότεροι ἔσονται. ἐπίστασθε yap δὴ ὅτι 42 
ἴω ¥ > Ἃ ε 3 iy al In! 
οὔτε πλῆθός ἐστιν οὔτε ἰσχὺς ἡ ἐν TH πολέμῳ TAS 
a Ἅ \ “ ‘a a 
νίκας ποιοῦσα, ἀλλ᾽ ὁπότεροι av σὺν τοῖς θεοῖς ταῖς 


\ Ἂ “ 
ψυχαῖς ἐρρωμενέστεροι ἴωσιν ἐπὶ τοὺς πολεμίους, 


" ὔ » ᾽ 9 
1b τούτους WS ἐπὶ TO πολὺ οἱ ἀντίοι OV δέχονται. ἐντε- 43 


θύμημαι δ᾽ ἔγωγε, ὦ ἄνδρες, καὶ τοῦτο; ὅτι ὁπόσοι 
μὲν μαστεύουσι ζῆν ἐκ παντὸς τρόπου ἐν τοῖς woke 
μικοῖς, οὗτοι μὲν κακῶς TE καὶ αἰσχρῶς ὡς emt 70 
πολὺ ἀποθνήσκουσιν, ὁπόσοι δὲ τὸν μὲν θάνατον 


pa > ah aA > , 
20 ἐγνώκασι πᾶσι κοινὸν εἶναι καὶ ἀναγκαῖον ἀνθρώ- 


ποις, περὶ δὲ τοῦ καλῶς ἀποθνήσκειν ἀγωνίζονται; 
τούτους ὁρῶ μᾶλλόν πως εἰς τὸ γῆρας ἀφικνουμένους 
καὶ ἕως ἂν ζῶσιν εὐδαιμονέστερον διάγοντας. ἃ καὶ 44 
ἡμᾶς δεῖ νῦν καταμαθόντας, ἐν τοιούτῳ γὰρ καιρῷ 


γιὰ » Ἀ ᾿ 
25 ἐσμεν; αὐτούς TE ἄνδρας ἀγαθοὺς εἶναι καὶ τοὺς αλ- 


λους παρακαλεῖν. 


Speech οὗ Chirisophus. Five new generals are chosen, Xenophon 
taking the place of Proxenus. 


Ἂ μ. “ 
Ὁ μὲν ταῦτα εἰπὼν ἐπαύσατο. μετὰ δὲ τοῦτον 45 
rd » “Ὃ ἴω 
εἶπε Χειρίσοφος - ᾿Αλλὰ πρόσθεν μέν; ὦ -ΞἘενοφῶν, 


90 ANABASIS III. 1. 46, 47 and 2. 1-3. 


“ , ST ν » 9 
τοσοῦτον μόνον σε ἐγίγνωσκον ὅσον ἤκουον ᾿Αθη- 
a 5 κ᾿ \ ν» a 3.1» @ , 
ναῖον εἶναι, νῦν δὲ καὶ ἐπαινῶ σε ἐφ᾽ οἷς λέγεις τε 
\ / \ / ¥ y ᾽ > 
καὶ πράττεις καὶ βουλοίμην av ὅτι πλείστους εἶναι 
τοιούτους - κοινὸν γὰρ ἂν εἴη τὸ ἀγαθόν. καὶ νῦν, 46 
» 4 Ν 
ὅδ ἔφη, μὴ μέλλωμεν, ὦ ἄνδρες, ἀλλ᾽ ἀπελθόντες ἤδη 
A ¥ 
αἱρεῖσθε οἱ δεόμενοι ἄρχοντας, καὶ ἑλόμενοι ἥκετε 
εἰς τὸ μέσον τοῦ στρατοπέδου καὶ τοὺς αἱρεθέντας 
¥ ¥ > κι κι 
ἄγετε. ἔπειτ᾽ Exel συγκαλοῦμεν τοὺς ἄλλους στρα- 
τιώτας. παρέστω δ᾽ ἡμῖν, ἔφη, καὶ Τολμίδης ὁ 41 
ἴω \ ν Ὁ)» > \ 3 “ ε \ / 
τὸ κῆρυξ. καὶ ἅμα ταῦτ᾽ εἰπὼν ἀνέστη, ὡς μὴ μέλλοιτο 
> In 4 ~ , > / € ᾿ 
ἀλλὰ περαίνοιτο τὰ δέοντα. ἐκ τούτου ἠρέθησαν 
» > Ἀ Ἂ Vd “ἢ al 
ἄρχοντες avTt μὲν Κλεάρχου Τιμασίων Aapdaveis, 
ἀντὶ δὲ Σωκράτους Ἐανθικλῆς ᾿Αχαιός, ἀντὶ δὲ 
3 
Αγίου Κλεάνωρ ᾿Αρκάς, ἀντὶ δὲ Μένωνος Φιλήσιος 
15 ᾽᾿Αχαιός, ἀντὶ δὲ Προξένου Ξενοφῶν ᾿Αθηναῖος. 
Assembly of the soldiers. Speech of Chirisophus. 
> h, \ bd 
II. ᾿Επεὶ δὲ npnvto, ἡμέρα τε σχεδὸν ὑπέφαινε 1 
| > "ν᾿ ld Ὁ ε Ἂ Ἅ » > 
Kal εἰς TO μέσον ἧκον οἱ ἄρχοντες, καὶ ἔδοξεν ai- 
τοῖς προφυλακὰς καταστήσαντας συγκαλεῖν τοὺς 
στρατιώτας. ἐπεὶ δὲ καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι στρατιῶται συν- 
90 ἦλθον, ἀνέστη πρῶτος μὲν Χειρίσοφος ὁ Λακεδαι- 
ld » ὅλ δὸ i 5 ” Ν 
μόνιος καὶ ἔλεξεν ὧδε. “Avdpes στρατιῶται, χαλεπὰ 2 
μὲν τὰ παρόντα, ὁπότε ἀνδρῶν στρατηγῶν τοιούτων 
στερόμεθα καὶ λοχαγῶν καὶ στρατιωτῶν, πρὸς δ᾽ 
» ‘ c > νυ» ili ε ul 4 ἊΝ 
ἔτι καὶ οἱ ἀμφὶ ᾿Αριαῖον ot πρόσθεν σύμμαχοι ὄντες 
25 προδεδώκασιν ἡμᾶς - ὅμως δὲ δεῖ ἐκ τῶν παρόντων 3 
» 
ἄνδρας ἀγαθοὺς τελέθειν καὶ μὴ ὑφίεσθαι, ἀλλὰ πει- 
“ θ ν al Ν ὃ , θ ii ΜΝ , 
paola ὅπως ἣν μεν δυνώμεθα καλῶς νικῶντες σῳζώ- 
3 δὲ ld > Ν " > / 
μεθα- εἰ δὲ μή, ἀλλὰ καλῶς γε ἀποθνήσκωμεν, 


ANABASIS ILII. 2. 4-7. 91 


ε i , 4 r ἴω ~ 
ὑποχείριοι δὲ μηδέποτε γενώμεθα ζῶντες τοῖς πολε- 
μίοις. οἶμαι γὰρ ἂν ἡμᾶς τοιαῦτα παθεῖν οἷα τοὺς 
ἐχθροὺς oi θεοὶ ποιήσειαν. 
Speech of Cleanor. Perfidy of the Persians. 
°E \ / Κλ Nl μὴ "0 ᾽) Ψ ~ 
πὶ τούτῳ Κλεάνωρ ὁ ᾿Ορχομένιος ἀνέστη καὶ 
δ ἔλεξεν ὧδε. ᾿Αλλ᾽ ὁρᾶτε μέν, ὦ ἄνδρες, τὴν βασι- 
λέως ἐπιορκίαν καὶ ἀσέβειαν, ὁρᾶτε δὲ τὴν Τισσα- 
φέρνους ἀπιστίαν, ὅστις λέγων ὡς γείτων τε εἴη τῆς 
ε / Ἃ nN ld eal ’ ‘do 
Ελλάδος Kat περὶ πλείστου av ποιήσαιτο σῶσαι 
~ ‘ ad 
ἡμᾶς, Kal ἐπὶ τούτοις αὐτὸς ὀμόσας ἡμῖν, αὐτὸς 
10 δεξιὰς δούς, αὐτὸς ἐξαπατήσας συνέλαβε τοὺς στρα- 
τηγούς, καὶ οὐδὲ Δία ξένιον ἡδέσθη, ἀλλὰ Κλεάρχῳ 
καὶ ὁμοτράπεζος γενόμενος αὐτοῖς τούτοις ἐξαπατή- 
Ἂ ἊΝ 3 ra > “ , 5 e ~ 
σας τοὺς ἄνδρας ἀπολώλεκεν. ᾿Αριαῖος δέ, ὃν ἡμεῖς 
3 ’ rl »ἭἍ A > i. ‘ 
ἠθέλομεν βασιλέα καθιστάναι, καὶ ἐδώκαμεν καὶ 
3 ld ‘ x - > / ‘A e 
15 ἐλάβομεν πιστὰ μὴ προδώσειν ἀλλήλους, Kal οὗτος 
» A Ἀ ral ¥ Aw rd b 
οὔτε τοὺς θεοὺς δείσας οὔτε Κῦρον τεθνηκότα aide 
al / ἤ ε ν᾿ 4 ΜᾺ ~ 
σθείς, τιμώμενος μάλιστα ὑπὸ Κύρου ζῶντος νῦν 
Ν ᾿ > / 2 ᾿ > Ἂ ε ~ 4 Ἂ, 
πρὸς τοὺς ἐκείνου ἐχθίστους ἀποστὰς ἡμᾶς τοὺς 
Κύρου φίλους κακῶς ποιεῖν πειρᾶται. ἀλλὰ τούτους 
20 μὲν οἱ θεοὶ ἀποτίσαιντο- ἡμᾶς δὲ δεῖ ταῦτα ὁρῶντας 
dl > if lg ¥ ε Ἃ 4 > ᾿ν ’ 
μήποτε ἐξαπατηθῆναι ἔτι ὑπὸ τούτων, ἀλλὰ μαχομέ- 
νους ὡς ἂν δυνώμεθα κράτιστα τοῦτο ὅ τι av δοκῇ 
τοῖς θεοῖς πάσχειν. / 


Xenophon, arrayed in his best armor, begins a long harangue (8-32). 
We must fight our way home and trust in the Gods. 


a x 
Ἔκ τούτου Ξενοφῶν ἀνίσταται ἐσταλμένος ἐπὶ 7 
, ε 299 7 i 4 4 ¥ ’ 
οδ πόλεμον ὡς ἐδύνατο κάλλιστα, νομίζων, εἴτε νίκην 
διδοῖεν οἱ θεοί, τὸν κάλλιστον κόσμον τῷ νικᾶν πρέ 
¥ ” / 3 “ἤν ¥ γον Lf 
mew, εἴτε τελευτᾶν δέοι, ὀρθῶς ἔχειν τῶν καλλίστων 


" wig, 


a 


92 ANABASIS LL. 2. 8-10, 


ἑαυτὸν ἀξιώσαντα ἐν τούτοις τῆς τελευτῆς τυγχάνειν" 
~ / \ ¥ ® \ ἃ ἴω la 
Tov λόγου δὲ ἤρχετο ὧδε. Τὴν μὲν τῶν βαρβάρων 8 
» i i," > ᾽ ’ Ἀ / » if 
ἐπιορκίαν τε Kal ἀπιστίαν λέγει μὲν Κλεάνωρ, ἐπί- 
‘ Je A > > ‘ > , 
στασθε δὲ καὶ ὑμεῖς οἶμαι. εἰ μὲν οὖν βουλόμεθα 
» ~ ᾽ν / + My )» ε lly Ἂ 
5 πάλιν αὐτοῖς διὰ φιλίας ἰέναι, ἀνάγκη ἡμᾶς πολλὴν 
ἀθυμίαν ἔχειν, ὁρῶντας καὶ τοὺς στρατηγούς, ot διὰ 
hy ἢ 
πίστεως αὐτοῖς ἑαυτοὺς ἐνεχείρισαν, οἷα πεπόνθασιν" 
3 / i ‘ ἊΝ μὲ hl , 
εἰ μέντοι διανοούμεθα σὺν τοῖς ὅπλοις ὧν τε πεποιή- 
/ > “ 3 Ὁ ᾿ Ν ». ‘ Ἃ 
κασι δίκην ἐπιθεῖναι αὐτοῖς καὶ τὸ λοιπὸν διὰ παντὸς 
/ » ~ 3 Ρ Ν Δ ~ ‘ acd ay 
10 πολέμου αὐτοῖς ἰέναι, σὺν τοῖς θεοῖς πολλαὶ ἡμῖν 


‘ ho MAI / a / 
καὶ καλαὶ ἐλπίδες εἰσὶ σωτηρίας. 


A sneeze is taken as a good omen, and Xenophon continues his 
speech. The Gods will be on our side. 


Τοῦτο δὲ λέγοντος αὐτοῦ πτάρνυταί τις. ἀκού- 
> € lal ‘ “ ξ a“ 
σαντες δ᾽ οἱ στρατιῶται πάντες μιᾷ ὁρμῇ προσε- 
, Ν , , ἃ ν»ὦἡ A > A 
κύνησαν τὸν θεόν, καὶ ὁ Ξενοφῶν εἶπε: Δοκεῖ 
+ ¥ ἣ \ ee 
15 μοι; ὦ ἄνδρες, ἐπεὶ περὶ σωτηρίας ἡμῶν λεγόντων 
οἰωνὸς τοῦ Διὸς τοῦ σωτῆρος ἐφά εὔξασθαι τῷ 
νὸς ς ἢρος ἐφάνη, a τῷ 
~ ’ὔ Ὁ “ἃ ἴω > 
θεῷ τούτῳ θύσειν σωτήρια ὅπου av πρῶτον εἰς φιλίαν 
χώραν ἀφικώμεθα, συνεπεύξασθαι δὲ καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις 
" \ ~ ἴω 
θεοῖς θύσειν κατὰ δύναμιν. καὶ ὅτῳ δοκεῖ ταῦτ᾽, 
~ Ν 
90 ἔφη, ἀνατεινάτω τὴν χεῖρα. καὶ ἀνέτειναν ἅπαντες. 
¥ Ν Ν abi 
ἐκ τούτου ηὔξαντο καὶ ἐπαιάνισαν. ἐπεὶ δὲ τὰ τῶν 
ζω a > ¥ / ΑΝ » , 
θεῶν καλῶς εἶχεν, ἤρχετο πάλιν ὧδε. ᾿Ετύγχανον 10 
λέγων ὅτι πολλαὶ καὶ καλαὶ ἐλπίδες ἡμῖν εἶεν owry- 
"»» ‘ A vn 
pias. πρῶτον μὲν yap ἡμεῖς μὲν ἐμπεδοῦμεν τοὺς 
25 τῶν θεῶν ὅρκους, οἱ δὲ πολέμιοι ἐπιωρκήκασί τε καὶ 
bs δ ‘ ν᾿ Ψ ΝΑ ν 3 
τὰς σπονδὰς παρὰ τοὺς ὅρκους λελύκασιν. οὕτω ὃ 
ἐχόντων εἰκὸς τοῖς μὲν πολεμίοις ἐναντίους εἶναι 
‘ ~ ν᾽) bid 
τοὺς θεούς, ἡμῖν δὲ συμμάχους, οἵπερ ἱκανοί εἰσι Kal 


" 


ANABASIS III. 2. 11-15. 93 


‘ ‘ Ἂ Ν Ν ἣν 
τοὺς μεγάλους ταχὺ μικροὺς ποιεῖν καὶ τοὺς μικρους, 
a 3 Ἂ - Ἅ 3 go A aN 
κἂν ἐν δεινοῖς ὦσι, σῴζειν εὐπετῶς ὅταν βούλωνται. 


Our ancestors defeated the Persians at Marathon and Salamis, and 
you have done the same at Cunaxa. 


a. dl Ἃ ε sli ‘ ‘\ “ 
Ἔπειτα δὲ ἀναμνήσω yap ὑμᾶς Kal τοὺς τῶν Tpo-11 
A Y 9 ids ε > ᾿ 
γόνων τῶν ἡμετέρων κινδύνους, ἵνα εἰδῆτε ὡς aya- 
a) ‘a i a) 
δθοῖς τε ὑμῖν προσήκει εἶναι ow@lovTal TE σὺν τοῖς 
~ \ > 4 i € > dl > al A 
θεοῖς καὶ ἐκ πάνυ δεινῶν ot ἀγαθοί, ἐλθόντων μὲν 
Ν ' ΨᾺ Ν “ i | > a“ i] A aN 
yap Περσῶν καὶ τῶν σὺν αὐτοῖς παμπληθεῖ στόλῳ 
A ν»» 
ὡς ἀφανιούντων τὰς ᾿Αθήνας, ὑποστῆναι αὐτοὶ ᾿Αθη- 
ναῖοι τολμήσαντες ἐνίκησαν αὐτούς. καὶ εὐξάμενοι 12 
ἴω ld “ἕν 
10 ΤΏ ᾿Αρτέμιδι ὁπόσους κατακάνοιεν τῶν πολεμίων 
τοσαύτας χιμαίρας καταθύσειν τῇ θεῷ, ἐπεὶ οὐκ 
ἴω. ἊΜ ν᾿ 
εἶχον ἱκανὰς εὑρεῖν, ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς κατ᾽ ἐνιαυτὸν πεν- 

, , \ » κι 9 , » Ψ 
τακοσίας θύειν, καὶ ἔτι νῦν ἀποθύουσιν. ἔπειτα, ὅτε 13 
Ξέρξης ὕστερον ἀγείρας τὴν ἀναρίθμητον στρατιὰν΄.- 

᾿ 
ιο ἦλθεν ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα, καὶ τότε ἐνίκων οἱ ἡμέτεροι 
‘ ἴω 
πρόγονοι τοὺς τούτων προγόνους καὶ κατὰ γὴν καὶ 
hy Ἂ / AMM a 
κατὰ θάλατταν. ὧν ἔστι μὲν τεκμήρια ὁρᾶν τὰ τρό- 
παια, μέγιστον δὲ μνημεῖον ἡ ἐλευθερία τῶν πόλεων 
> Φ' ε ~ 3 ’ὔ θ ‘\ 3 ld ὑδέ 4 
ἐν αἷς ὑμεῖς ἐγένεσθε καὶ ἐτράφητε- οὐδένα yap 
o , 9 ‘ ‘ θ ‘ A | 
ο ἄνθρωπον δεσπότην ἀλλὰ τοὺς θεοὺς προσκυνεῖτε.. 
"a 
τοιούτων μέν ἐστε προγόνων. 
> “A 4 ε ἊΜ ’ 3 , > > » 
ἐρῶ ὡς ὑμεῖς καταισχύνετε αὐτούς: ἀλλ. οὕπῳ 
/ : A 
πολλαὶ ἡμέραι ad ov ἀντιταξάμενοι τούτοις τοῖς 


> Ἢ » ld ᾽ δ ~ > ~ | 
ἐκείνων ἐκγόνοις πολλαπλασίους ὑμῶν ἐνικατε σὺν 


25 τοῖς θεοῖς. 


You have tried the Persians and found them cowards. Their cavalry 
are merely sO many men. 


Καὶ τότε μὲν δὴ περὶ τῆς Κύρου βασιλείας ἄνδρες 15 
ἦτε ἀγαθοί. νῦν δ᾽ ὁπότε περὶ τῆς ὑμετέρας σωτη- 


, / 
~ CBee Cre 


ANABASIS Il. 2. 16-19, 


ε 


’ ᾽ / 3 m 

ρίας ὁ ἀγών ἐστι πολὺ δήπου ayes προσήκει καὶ 
ἀμείνονας καὶ προθυμοτέρους εἶναι. ἀλλὰ μὴν καὶ 16 
θαρραλεωτέρους νῦν πρέπει εἶναι πρὸς τοὺς πολε- 


ANABASIS III. 2. 20-23. 95 


We can seize native guides who will be better than Tissaphernes ; ‘i 
is cheaper to plunder than to buy provisions ; and no river is 
impassable at its source. 


Ei δὲ δὴ Tas μὲν μάχας θαρρεῖτε, ὅτι δὲ οὐκέτι 90 


pious. τότε μὲν γὰρ ἄπειροι ὄντες αὐτῶν τό τε πλῆ- 
δθος ἄμετρον “ὁρῶντες, ὅμως ἐτολμήσατε δὺν τῷ 
πατρίῳ φρονήματι ἰέναι εἰς αὐτούς - νῦν δὲ δότε 
καὶ πεῖραν ἤδη ἔχετε αὐτῶν ὅτι οὐ θέλουσι καὶ Tod- 
λαπλάσιοι ὄντες δέχεσθαι ὑμᾶς, τί ἔτι ὑμῖν προσήκει 
τούτους φοβεῖσθαι ; μηδὲ μέντοι τοῦτο μεῖον Soéyre 17 
10 ἔχειν, εἰ οἱ Κύρειοι πρόσθεν σὺν ἡμῖν ταττόμενοι νῦν | 
ἀφεστήκασιν. ἔτι yap οὗτοι κακίονές εἰσι τῶν ὑφ᾽ 
ἡμῶν ἡττημένων - ἔφευγον γοῦν πρὸς ἐκείνους κατα- 
λιπόντες ἡμᾶς. τοὺς δ᾽ ἐθέλοντας φυγῆς ἄρχειν 
πολὺ κρεῖττον σὺν τοῖς πολεμίοις ταττομένους ἢ ἐν 
15TH ἡμετέρᾳ τάξει ὁρᾶν. εἰ δέ τις ὑμῶν ἀθυμεῖ ὅτι 18 
ἡμῖν μὲν οὐκ εἰσὶν ἱππεῖς, τοῖς δὲ πολεμίοις πολλοὶ 
πάρεισιν, ἐνθυμήθητε ὅτι οἱ μύριοι ἱππεῖς οὐδὲν 
ἄλλο ἢ μύριοί εἰσιν ἄνθρωποι. ὑπὸ μὲν γὰρ ἵππου 
ἐν μάχῃ οὐδεὶς πώποτε οὔτε δηχθεὶς οὔτε λακτισθεὶς 


ἡμῖν Τισσαφέρνης ἡγήσεται οὐδὲ βασιλεὺς ἀγορὰν 
παρέξει, τοῦτο ἄχθεσθε, σκέψασθε πότερον κρεῖττον 
Τισσαφέρνην ἡγεμόνα ἔχον" ὃς ἐπιβουλεύων ἡμῖν 
δφανερός ἐστιν, ἢ οὕς av ἡμεῖς. ἄνδρας λαβόντες 
ἡγεῖσθαι κελεύωμεν, οἱ εἴσονται ὅτι ἦν τι περὶ ἤναι 
ἁμαρτάνωσι mept Tas ἑαυτῶν ψυχὰς καὶ σώματα 
ἁμαρτάνουσι. τὰ δὲ ἐνπήθμα πότερον ὠνεῖσθαι 21 
Kpeirror ἐκ τῆς ἀγορᾶς ἧς οὗτοι παρεῖχον, μικρὰ 
10 μέτρα πολλοῦ ἀργυρίου, μηδὲ τοῦτο ἔτι ἔχοντας, ἦ 
αὐτοὺς λαμβάνειν, ἤνπερ κρατῶμεν, μέτρῳ Xpape 
vous ὁπόσῳ ἂν ἕκαστος βούληται. εἰ δὲ ταῦτα μὲν 22 
puyparnere ὅτι κρείττονα, τοὺς δὲ ποταμοὺς ἄπορον 
νομίζετε εἶναι καὶ μεγάλως ἡγεῖσθε ἐξαπατηθῆναι 
15 διαβάντες, σκέψασθε εἰ ἄρα τοῦτο καὶ μωρότατον 
πεὐοιηποσεν οἱ βάρβαροι. πάντες γὰρ ποταμοί, εἰ 
καὶ πρόσω τῶν πηγῶν ἄποροί εἰσι; προῖοννι πρὸς 
τὰς πηγὰς διαβατοὶ yeyvovras οὐδὲ TO γόνυ βρέχον.- 
τες. εἰ δὲ μήθ᾽ οἱ ποταμοὶ διήσονσιν ἡγεμών TE ZB 
20 μηδεὶς ἡμῖν Ψανδηοι, οὐδ᾽ ὡς sec τ ἀθυμητεῦν. 
ἐπιστάμεθα μὲν γὰρ Μυσούς, οὗς οὐκ ἄν mere φαίη- 
μεν Bekrious εἶναι, ot ev TH βασιλέως χώρῳ πολλάς 
τε καὶ εὐδαίμονας καὶ μεγάλας πόλεις οἰκοῦσιν, ἐπι- 
στάμεθα δὲ Πισίδας ὡσαύτως, Λυκάονας δὲ καὶ 
25 αὐτοὶ εἴδομεν ὅ ὅτι ἐν τοῖς πεδίοις τὰ ἐρυμνὰ καταλα- 
βόντες τὴν τούτων χώραν καρποῦνται. 


20 ἀπέθανεν, οἱ δὲ ἄνδρες εἰσὶν οἱ ποιοῦντες 6 τι ἂν ἐν 
ταῖς μάχαις γίγνηται. οὐκοῦν τῶν ἱππέων πολὺ 19 
: ἡμεῖς ἐπ᾿ ἀσφαλεστέρου ὀχήματός ἐσμεν : οἱ μὲν 
 ᾿ γὰρ ἐφ᾽ ἵππων κρέμανται φοβούμενοι οὐχ ἡμᾶς ; 
ae ᾿ μόνον ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸ καταπεσεῖν " ἡμεῖς δ᾽ ἐπὶ γῆς 


Jatt tel 


rv # 25 βεβηκότες πολὺ μὲν ἰσχυρότερον παΐσομεν HY τις 

᾿ προσίῃ, πολὺ δὲ μᾶλλον ὁ ὅτου ἂν βουλώμεθα τευξό- 

μεθα. ἑνὶ δὲ μόνῳ προέχουσιν οἱ ἱππεῖς ἡμᾶς" 
φεύγειν αὐτοῖς ἀσφαλέστερόν ἐστιν ἢ ἡμῖν. 


yo ! | 


του. Σκχτπε uwe ἐν unt nF, 1 


- term. ovat. otf. 


96 ANABASIS III. 2. 24-27. ANABASIS IIL. 2. 28-32. 97 


If we pretended that we wished to remain here, the king would do a \ es \ , ¥ 
: , αγειν 
his best to help us home. But we must go ‘home ourselves and σαι. ΓΕ Ase oa ον ὄχλον μεν. παρέχον ΟῚ 


send our poor friends here to get rich. συνωφελοῦσι δ᾽ οὐδὲν οὔτε εἰς τὸ μάχεσθαι ouT εἰς 
Καὶ ἡμᾶς δ᾽ dv ἔφην ἔγωγε χρῆναι μήπω φανε- 34 τὸ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια ἔχειν. ἔτι δὲ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων σκευῶν 28 
ροὺς εἶναι οἴκαδε ὡρμημένους, ἀλλὰ κατασκευάζε- | τὰ περιττὰ ἀπαλλάξωμεν πλὴν ὅσα πολέμου ἕνεκεν 
σθαι ὡς αὐτοῦ που οἰκήσοντας. οἶδα γὰρ ὅτι καὶ ' 5 ἢ σίτων ἢ ποτῶν ἔχομεν; ἵνα ὡς πλεῖστοι μὲν ἡμῶν 
Μυσοῖς βασιλεὺς πολλοὺς μὲν ἡγεμόνας ἂν δοίη. ἐν τοῖς ὅπλοις ὦσιν, ὡς ἐλάχιστοι δὲ σκενοφορῶσι. 
δπολλοὺς δ᾽ ἂν ὁμήρους τοῦ ἀδόλως ἐκπέμψειν, καὶ | κρατουμένων μὲν γὰρ ἐπίστασθε ὅτι πάντα ἀλλό- 
ὁδοποιήσειέ γ᾽ av αὐτοῖς καὶ εἰ σὺν τεθρίπποις βού- | τρια: ἢν δὲ KpaT@per, καὶ τοὺς πολεμίους δεῖ σκευ- 
λοιντο ἀπιέναι. καὶ ἡμῖν γ᾽ ἂν οἶδ᾽ ὅτι τρισάσμε- : opdpous ἡμετέρους νομίζειν. λοιπόν pot εἰπεῖν ὅπερ 29 
νος ταῦτ᾽ ἐποίει, εἰ ἑώρα ἡμᾶς μένειν κατασκευαζο- | 10 καὶ μέγιστον νομίζω εἶναι. ὁρᾶτε γὰρ καὶ τοὺς πο- 
μένους. ἀλλὰ γὰρ δέδοικα μή, ἂν ἅπαξ μάθωμεν 35 | λεμίους ὅτι οὐ πρόσθεν ἐξενεγκεῖν ἐτόλμησαν πρὸς 
10 ἀργοὶ ζῆν καὶ ἐν ἀφθόνοις βιοτεύειν, καὶ Μήδων δὲ i ἡμᾶς πόλεμον πρὶν τοὺς στρατηγοὺς ἡμῶν συνέλα- 
καὶ Περσῶν καλαῖς καὶ μεγάλαις γυναιξὶ καὶ παρθέ. βον, νομίζοντες ὄντων μὲν τῶν ἀρχόντων καὶ ἡμῶν 
νοις ὁμιλεῖν, μὴ ὥσπερ οἱ λωτοφάγοι ἐπιλαθώμεθα πειθομένων ἱκανοὺς εἶναι ἡμᾶς περιγενέσθαι τῷ πο- 
τῆς οἴκαδε ὁδοῦ. δοκεῖ οὖν μοι εἰκὸς καὶ δίκαιον 26 ιὸ λέμῳ, λαβόντες δὲ τοὺς ἄρχοντας ἀναρχίᾳ ἂν καὶ 
εἶναι πρῶτον εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα καὶ πρὸς τοὺς οἰκείους ἀταξίᾳ ἐνόμιζον ἡμᾶς ἀπολέσθαι. δεῖ οὖν πολὺ μὲν 80 
Is πειρᾶσθαι ἀφικνεῖσθαι καὶ ἐπιδεῖξαι τοῖς Ἕλλησιν τοὺς ἄρχοντας ἐπιμελεστέρους γενέσθαι τοὺς νῦν 
ὅτι ἑκόντες πένονται, ἐξὸν αὐτοῖς τοὺς .νῦν σκληρῶς τῶν πρόσθεν, πολὺ δὲ τοὺς ἀρχομένους EUTAKTOTE- 
ἐκεῖ πολιτεύοντας ἐνθάδε κομισαμένους πλουσίους ρους καὶ πειθομένους μᾶλλον τοῖς ἄρχουσι νῦν n 
ὁρᾶν. ἀλλὰ γάρ, ὦ dvdpes, πάντα ταῦτα τἀγαθὰ 20 πρόσθεν : ἢν δέ τις ἀπειθῇ, ψηφίσασθαι τὸν ἀεὶϑι 
δῆχον ὅτι τῶν κρατούντων ἐστί. ὑμῶν ἐντυγχάνοντα σὺν τῷ ἄρχοντι κολάζειν: οὕτως 
We must burn our tents and wagons and get rid of all superfluous οἱ πολέμιοι πλεῖστον ἐψευσμένοι ἔσονται, τῇδε γὰρ 


baggage. Finally, the officers must be more vigilant and the a , " “μ᾿ , Ν 
soldiers more obedient than ever before. τῇ ἡμέρᾳ μυρίους οψονται ἀνθ᾽ ἑνὸς Κλεάρχους τοὺς 


80 Τοῦτο δὴ δεῖ λέγειν, ὅπως av πορευοίμεθά τε ὡς 27 οὐδενὶ ἐπιτρέψοντας κακῷ εἰναι. ἀλλὰ γὰρ καὶ πε-82 
᾿ [-} ¥ ‘ Ε Ld ee 
ἀσφαλέστατα καὶ εἰ μάχεσθαι δέοι ὡς κράτιστα 25 ραίνειν ἤδη ὥρα" ἴσως yap οἱ πολέμιοι αὐτίκα παρ- 

Γω γι > al A “a ¥ 3 
μαχοίμεθα. πρῶτον μὲν τοίνυν, ἔφη, δοκεῖ μοι κατα- | έσονται. ὅτῳ οὖν ταῦτα δοκεῖ καλῶς ἔχειν, ἐπικυ- 


Ὁ hs nl ἃ ε ’ ν ¥ / 3 , 
καῦσαι τὰς ἁμάξας ἃς ἔχομεν, ἵνα μὴ τὰ ζεύγη ρωσάτω ὡς τάχιστα; ἵνα ἔργῳ περαίνηται. εἰ δέ τι 
eo a ey Ἴ Δ , , . κ᾿» , aM 
ἡμῶν στρατηγῇ: ἀλλὰ πορευώμεθα ὅπῃ av TH στρα- ἄλλο βέλτιον ἢ ταύτῃ; τολμάτω καὶ ὁ ἰδιώτης διδά 

ly ' / ¥ 4 - , . “ " il Mal 

ὅδτιᾳ σ υμφέρῃ" ἔπειτα καὶ τὰς σκηνὰς συγκατακαῦ- σκειν - πάντες γὰρ κοινης σωτηρίας δεόμεθα. 


98 ANABASIS III. 2. 33-38. 


Adoption of Xenophon’s proposals. Vote to march to some neigh- 
boring villages for provisions. 


ἴω r ἐν" 3 3 3 
Μετὰ ταῦτα Χειρίσοφος εἶπεν - ᾿Αλλ᾽ εἰ μέν τινος 33 


¥ ~ ~ 
ἄλλου det πρὸς τούτοις οἷς λέγει Ξενοφῶν, καὶ αὐτίκα 


» ᾿ “ ἃ | ~ ¥ “A ε ἢ 
ἐξέσται ποιέειν" α δὲ νυν ειρηκε δοκεῖ μοι ως τάχιστα 


᾿ὕ ¥ > » NMA κ᾿ κι 
ψηφίσασθαι ἄριστον εἶναι: καὶ ὅτῳ δοκεῖ ταῦτα, 


Ἤη = io | “Ὁ > / al 2 Ἅ 
Ὁ ανατεινάτω THV χειρα. ανετειναν TTAVTES. αναστας 34 


> ~ 5' 
δὲ πάλιν εἶπε Ξενοφῶν - Ὦ ἄνδρες, ἀκούσατε ὧν 
~ ~ Ψ sf eT νυ 
προσδοκεῖ μοι. δῆλον ὅτι πορεύεσθαι ἡμᾶς δεῖ ὅπου 
Ψ ln 3 ra > ᾿ ἣ ὔ > \ 
ἕξομεν τὰ ἐπιτήδεια - ἀκούω δὲ κώμας εἶναι καλὰς 


> \ ¥y δί b ᾽ » a” 5 
ov πλέον εἴκοσι σταδίων ἀπεχούσας - οὐκ ἂν οὖν 35 


/ bs al 7 ᾿.. 
10 θαυμάζοιμι εἰ οἱ πολέμιοι, ὥσπερ οἱ δειλοὶ κύνες 
Ν \, i / ἃ / “ἃ 
τοὺς μὲν παριόντας διώκουσί τε καὶ δάκνουσιν ἢν 


, Ν \ ΄ 4 > ‘ oy) 9 
δύνωνται, TOUS δὲ διώκοντας φεύγουσιν, ει Καὶ αντοι 


aA κι A ¥ ΓῚ 
ἡμῖν ἀπιοῦσιν ἐπακολουθοῖεν. ἴσως οὖν ἀσφαλέ. 36 


στερον ἡμῖν πορεύεσθαι πλαίσιον ποιησαμένους τῶν 
Ἰδδπλων, ἵνα τὰ σκευοφόρα καὶ ὁ πολὺς ὄχλος ἐν 
» ’ ἢ > > a > , , 4 
ἀσφαλεστέρῳ ἢ. εἰ οὖν νῦν ἀποδειχθείη τίνας χρὴ 
ἡγεῖσθαι τοῦ πλαισίου καὶ τὰ πρόσθεν κοσμεῖν καὶ 
τίνας ἐπὶ τῶν πλευρῶν ἑκατέρων εἶναι, τίνας δ᾽ ὀπι- 
σθοφυλακεῖν, οὐκ ἂν ὁπότε οἱ πολέμιοι ἔλθοιεν βου- 
90 λεύεσθαι ἡμᾶς δέοι, ἀλλὰ γρῴμεθα ἂν εὐθὺς τοῖς 
> \ 4 »ἍἬ , ε a! » 
τεταγμένοις. εἰ μὲν οὖν ἀλλο τις βέλτιον Opa, ἄλλως 37 
» ,ὔ > Mal lal In 4 ἊἪ 3 i. Ἃ 
ἐχέτω - εἰ δέ, Χειρίσοφος μὲν ἡγοῖτο, ἐπειδὴ καὶ 
Λακεδαιμόνιός ἐστι" τῶν δὲ πλευρῶν ἑκατέρων δύο 
τὼ πρεσβυτάτω στρατηγὼ ἐπιμελοίσθην - ὀπισθο- 
ΜᾺ 3 ε ΜΝ ε ἢ 3 \ \ “ 
25 φυλακοῖμεν δ᾽ ἡμεῖς οἱ νεώτεροι ἐγὼ καὶ Τιμασίων 
τὸ νῦν εἶναι. τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν πειρώμενοι ταύτης τῆς 38 
ld , bid a Ay / ~ 
τάξεως βουλευσόμεθα ὅ τι dv ἀεὶ κράτιστον δοκῇ 
εἶναι. εἶ δέ τις ἄλλο ὁρᾷ βέλτιον, λεξάτω. ἐπεὶ δ᾽ 


ANABASIS ΠῚ. 2. 39 and 3. 1-3. 99 


οὐδεὶς ἀντέλεγεν, εἶπεν, Ὅτῳ δοκεῖ ταῦτα, ἀνατει. 
νάτω τὴν χεῖρα. ἔδοξε ταῦτα. Νὺυν TOMA, ἔφη; 39 
ἀπιόντας ποιεῖν δεῖ τὰ δεδογμένα. Kat ὕστε τε 
ὑμῶν τοὺς οἰκείους ἐπιθυμεῖ ἰδεῖν, μεμνήσθω ἀνὴρ 
δ ἀγαθὸς εἶναι. οὐ γὰρ ἔστιν ἄλλως τούτον TUXELY ° 
ὅστις τε ζῆν ἐπιθυμεῖ, πειράσθω νικᾶν - τῶν μὲν γὰρ 
νικώντων τὸ κατακαίνειν, τῶν δὲ ἡττωμένων τὸ ἀπο- 
θνήσκειν ἐστί: καὶ εἴ τις δὲ χρημότων ἐπιθυμεῖ, 
κρατεῖν πειράσθω τῶν γὰρ νικώντων ἐστὶ καὶ τὰ 
ιὸ ἑαυτῶν σῴζειν καὶ τὰ τῶν ἡττωμένων λαμβάνειν. 


The Greeks burn their wagons, etc. Mithridates offers his help, 
but is rejected as a spy. 


III. Τούτων λεχθέντων ἀνέστησαν καὶ ἀπελθόντες | 
κατέκαον τὰς ἁμάξας καὶ τὰς σκηνάς, τῶν δὲ πέριτ- 
τῶν ὅτου μὲν δέοιτό τις μετεδίδοσαν ἀλλήλοις, τὰ δὲ 
ἄλλα εἰς τὸ πῦρ ἐρρίπτουν. ταῦτα ποιήσαντες ἡρι- 

τὸ στοποιοῦντος ἀριστοποιουμένων δὲ αὐτῶν epxeras 
Μιθραδάτης σὺν ἱππεῦσιν ὡς τριάκοντα; nee παν. 
σάμενος τοὺς στρατηγοὺς εἰς ἐπήκοον λέγει ὧδε. 
Ἐγώ, ὦ ἄνδρες Ἕλληνες, καὶ Κύρῳ πιστὸς ἦν, ὡς 
ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε, καὶ νῦν ὑμῖν εὔνους . καὶ ἐνθάδε δ 

9 εἰμὲ σὺν πολλῷ φόβῳ διάγων. εἰ οὖν ὄρ σὴν ὑμᾶς 
σωτήριόν τι βουλευομένους, ἔλθοιμι ἂν. «ρὸν ὑμᾶς 
καὶ τοὺς θεράποντας πάντας ἔχων. λέξατε οὖν mpos 
με τί ἐν νῷ ἔχετε ὡς φίλον τε καὶ εὔνουν καὶ βουλό- 
μενον κοινῇ σὺν ὑμῖν τὸν στόλον ποιεῖσθαι. βουλευ- 

25 ομένοις τοῖς στρατηγοῖς ἔδοξεν ἀποκρίνασθαι τάδε: 
καὶ ἔλεγε Χειρίσοφος - Ἡμῖν δοκεῖ, εἰ κὦ τὰν εῷ 
ἡμᾶς ἀπιέναι οἴκαδε, διαπορεύεσθαι τὴν χώραν ὡς 
ἂν δυνώμεθα ἀσινέστατα - ἣν δέ τις ἡμᾶς τῆς ὁδοῦ 


100 ANABASIS IIT. 3. 4 8, ANABASIS III. 3, 9-15. 101 


ἀποκωλύῃ; διαπολεμεῖν τούτῳ ὡς ἄν δυνώμεθα κρά- ] κοντες δὲ οὐδένα κατελάμβανον τῶν πολεμίων. οὔτε 
τιστα. ἐκ τούτου ἐπειρᾶτο Μιθραδάτης διδάσκειν γὰρ ἱππεῖς ἦσαν τοῖς Ἕλλησιν οὔτε οἱ πεζοὶ yt 
ὡς ἄπορον εἴη βασιλέως ἄκοντος σωθῆναι. ἔνθα δὴ ! πεζοὺς ἐκ πολλοῦ φεύγοντας ἐδύναντο see δον 
᾿ ἐγιγνώσκετο ὅτι ὑπόπεμπτος εἴη - καὶ γὰρ τῶν Τισ- Ϊ νειν ἐν ὀλίγῳ χωρίῳ: πολὺ γὰρ οὐχ οἷόν τε Ἢ ΜΗ 
“ δσαφέρνους τις οἰκείων παρηκολουθήκει πίστεως ἕνεκα. . τοῦ ἄλλου στρατεύματος διώκειν - οἱ δὲ BapBapor10 
καὶ ἐκ τούτου ἐδόκει τοῖς στρατηγοῖς βέλτιον εἶναι | ἱππεῖς Kal φεύγοντες ἅμα ἐτίτρωσκον εἰς τούπισθεν 
δόγμα ποιήσασθαι τὸν πόλεμον ἀκήρυκτον εἶναι ἔστ᾽ | τοξεύοντες ἀπὸ τῶν ἵππων, ὁπόσον δὲ διώξειαν οἱ 
ἐν τῇ πολεμίᾳ εἶεν - διέφθειρον γὰρ προσιόντες τοὺς Ἕλληνες, τοσοῦτον πάλιν ἐπαναχωρεῖν μαχομένους 
στρατιώτας, καὶ ἕνα γε λοχαγὸν διέφθειραν Νίκαρχον ἔδει. ὦστε τῆς ἡμέρας ὅλης διῆλθον οὐ το ya 11 
10 'ApKdda, καὶ ᾧχετο ἀπιὼν νυκτὸς σὺν ἀνθρώποις ὡς | 10Kat εἴκοσι σταδίων, ἀλλὰ δείλης ἀφίκοντο εἰς τὰς 
εἴκοσι. κώμας. ἔνθα δὴ πάλιν ἀθυμία ἦν. καὶ Χειρίσοφος 
The Greeks are attacked by Mithridates. Xenophon charges the καὶ ot πρεσβύτατοι τῶν στρατηγῶν Ξενοφῶντα ἡτι- 
enemy without success, and is censured by his colleagues. | ὥντο ὅτι ἐδίωκεν ἀπὸ τῆς φάλαγγος Kal αὐτός τε 
Μετὰ ταῦτα ἀριστήσαντες καὶ διαβάντες τὸν Ζα- ἐκινδύνευε καὶ TOUS πολεμίους οὐδὲν μᾶλλον ἐδύ- 
πάταν ποταμὸν ἐπορεύοντο τεταγμένοι, τὰ ὑποζύγια 


15 vato βλάπτειν. 
i τὸν ὄνλον ἐν μέσῳ ἔ ) πολὺ δὲ λη- ὶ ' ἤΠ ΠΝ ΜΙ 
wl lari‘ ania EXOVTES. OV TOAV OC TPOEAY Xenophon’s defence. Adoption of his plan for providing slingers 


UAvOorav αὐτῶν ἐπιφαίνεται πάλιν ὁ Μιθραδάτης, and caveey: a 
᾿Ακούσας δὲ Ξενοφῶν ἔλεγεν ὅτι ὀρθῶς ἡτιῶντο 12 


Ἃ My ip," » 3 il 4 tAX 3 il 
καὶ αὐτὸ TO ἔργον αὐτοῖς papTupoin. a ἐγώ, 
Ν > , 5 , > δὲ “ Ψ ε Las 5 
ἔφη, ἠναγκάσθην διώκειν, ἐπειδὴ ἑώρων ἡμᾶς ἐν 


ε / ¥ € ἢ Ἁ / x 

ἱππέας ἔχων ws διακοσίους Kal τοξότας καὶ σφενδο- 
/ 3 al di > Ἃ Ἁ 2 vd 

νῆτας εἰς τετρακοσίους μάλα ἐλαφροὺς καὶ εὐζώνους. 
i, f \ ε ’ a ᾿ ‘ ν 

καὶ προσῇει μὲν ὡς φίλος ὧν πρὸς τοὺς Ἕλληνας - 


τῷ μένειν κακῶς μὲν πάσχοντας, ἀντιποιεῖν δὲ οὐδὲν 
90 δυναμένους. ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἐδιώκομεν, ἀληθῆ, ἔφη; ὑμεῖς 13 
λέγετε: κακῶς μὲν γὰρ ποιεῖν οὐδὲν μᾶλλον ἐδυνά- 
μεθα τοὺς πολεμίους, ἀνεχωροῦμεν δὲ πάνυ χαλεπῶς. 
τοῖς οὖν θεοῖς χάρις ὅτι οὐ σὺν πολλῇ ῥώμῃ ἀλλὰ 14 


b | ᾿ , κ᾿ Ἅ 3 / > il ε ‘ > lb > ‘ll 
ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἐγγὺς ἐγένοντο, ἐξαπίνης οἱ μὲν αὐτῶν ἐτό- 
" yl ¢ ~ \ ἢ € > 3 al Ἃ 
20 ξευον καὶ ἱππεῖς καὶ πεζοί, οἱ ὃ ἐσφενδόνων, καὶ 
ἐτίτρωσκον. οἱ δὲ ὀπισθοφύλακες τῶν Ἑλλήνων 
ἔπασχον μὲν κακῶς, ἀντεποίουν δ᾽ οὐδέν - οἵ τε γὰρ 
~ ri il ~ 3 ) ᾿.. ν 
Κρῆτες βραχύτερα τῶν Περσῶν ἐτόξευον καὶ ἅμα ᾽ ᾿ Meld & 
a ‘\ aly Ml 5 
ψιλοὶ ὄντες εἴσω τῶν ὅπλων κατεκέκλειντο, οἵ TE σὺν ὀλίγοις ἦλθον, wore βλάψαι με i i 
ο᾽ δηλῶσαι δὲ ὧν δεόμεθα. νῦν yap οἱ μὲν πολέμιοι 15 
A Ψ ¥ ε A 
τοξεύουσι καὶ σφενδονῶσιν ὅσον οὔτε οἱ Κρῆτες 
] \ , 
ἀντιτοξεύειν δύνανται οὔτε οἵ ἐκ χειρὸς βάλλοντες 
a Ν \ 
ἐξικνεῖσθαι - ὅταν δὲ αὐτοὺς διώκωμεν, πολὺ μὲν οὐχ 


by \ F > ' “ἃ ε > o~ 
δ ἀκοντισταὶ βραχύτερα ἠκόντιζον ἢ ws ἐξικνεῖσθαι 
ω ὃ o~ b / hr ω 25 / ὃ 
τῶν σφενδονητῶν. ἐκ τούτου Ξενοφῶντι ἐδόκει διω- 
κτέον εἶναι" καὶ ἐδίωκον τῶν ὁπλιτῶν καὶ τῶν πελτα- 
a va ‘ "»» a“ " 
στων οἱ ἐτυχὸον σὺν αὐτῷ ὀπισθοφυλακοῦντες - διώ- 


)2 ANABASIS III. 3. 16-20. 


οἷόν τε χωρίον ἀπὸ τοῦ στρατεύματος διώκειν, ἐν 
> / Ἁ μ᾿ 3 by ‘ ¥ bs A Δ Υ͂ 
ὀλίγῳ δὲ οὐδ᾽ εἰ ταχὺς εἴη πεζὸς πεζὸν ἀν διώκων 


,ὔ > , cs € “ > 3 ’ mt 
καταλαμβάνοι ἐκ τόξου ῥύματος. ἡμεῖς οὖν εἰ μέλ- 1 


λοιμεν τούτους εἴργειν ὦστε μὴ δύνασθαι βλάπτειν 
δ ἡμᾶς πορευομένους, σφενδονητῶν τὴν ταχίστην δεῖ 
καὶ ἱππέων. ἀκούω δ᾽ εἶναι ἐν τῷ στρατεύματι ἡμῶν 
Ῥοδίους, ὧν τοὺς πολλούς φασιν ἐπίστασθαι σφεν- 
δονᾶν, καὶ τὸ βέλος αὐτῶν καὶ διπλάσιον φέρεσθαι 


τῶν Περσικῶν σφενδονῶν. ἐκεῖναι γὰρ διὰ τὸ χει- 17 


10 ροπληθέσι τοῖς λίθοις σφενδονᾶν ἐπὶ βραχὺ ἐξικνοῦν- 
e + ἥ Ν ΔΝ > / 
ται, οἱ δὲ Ῥόδιοι καὶ ταῖς μολυβδίσιν ἐπίστανται 


χρῆσθαι. ἢν οὖν αὐτῶν ἐπισκεψώμεθα τίνες πέπαν- 18 


/ \ r \ A 3 ω 3 r 
ται σφενδόνας. Kal τούτῳ μεν δῶμεν αὐτῶν ἀργύριον, 
τῷ δὲ ἄλλας πλέκειν ἐθέλοντι ἄλλο ἀργύριον τελῶ- 
15 ὶ τῷ σφενδονᾶν ἐν τῷ TE ένῳ ἐθέλ 
μεν, καὶ τῷ σφενδονᾶν ἐν τῷ τεταγμένῳ ἐθέλοντι 
ἮΝ Ἂ > ἤ ε / ¥ 4 ~ 
ἄλλην τινὰ ἀτέλειαν εὑρίσκωμεν, ἴσως τινὲς φανοῦν- 


~ 5» »Ἥ o~ Ὗ 
ται ἱκανοὶ ἡμᾶς ὠφελεῖν. ἐὁρῶ δὲ ἵππους ὄντας ἐν 19 


al ᾽ὔ ‘ ᾽ " 2 ’ 4 δὲ 

τῷ στρατεύματι, τοὺς μέν. τινας Tap ἐμοΐ, τοὺς δὲ 
ἊὉᾳ ‘ 

τῶν Κλεάρχου καταλελειμμένους, πολλοὺς δὲ καὶ 
“ Ἅ 

30 ἄλλους αἰχμαλώτους σκευοφοροῦντας. ἄν οὖν τού- 

τους πάντας ἐκλέξαντες σκενοφόρα μὲν ἀντιδῶμεν, 

ν > / ¥ 
τοὺς Se ἵππους εἰς ἱππέας κατασκευάσωμεν, ἴσως Kal 


4 ‘ 9 / » ‘ 
οὗτοί τι TOUS φεύγοντας ἀνιάσουσιν. ἔδοξε καὶ 30 


ἴω ᾿. Ἃ ~ 

ταῦτα. καὶ ταύτης τῆς νυκτὸς σφενδονῆται μὲν εἰς 
» “ 3 Pl ν Ν Ν κ᾿ “ > Υ͂ 
25 διακοσίους ἐγένοντο, ἵπποι δὲ καὶ ἱππεῖς ἐδοκιμάσθη- 
o \ 
σαν τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ εἰς πεντήκοντα, Kal σπολάδες Kal 
~ Ν ν 
θώρακες αὐτοῖς ἐπορίσθησαν, καὶ ἵππαρχος ἐπε- 
/ 
στάθη Λύκιος 6 Πολυστράτου ᾿Αθηναῖος. 


ANABASIS III. 4. 1-5. 103 


The Greeks are again attacked by Mithridates, who is repulsed 
with loss. 


“ , ‘ ε rd vg i 3 
IV. Meivartes δὲ ταύτην THY ἡμέραν TH ἀλλῃ ἐπο- 
’ὔ “ Υ͂ Ἂ 
ρεύοντο πρῳαίτερον ἀναστάντες - χαράδραν γὰρ ἔδει 
> ‘ ὃ an AINE AM, .» ἴω » " fa “ὦ > a 
αὐτοὺς διαβῆναι ἐφ᾽ ἣ ἐφοβοῦντο μὴ ἐπιθοῖντο αὕτοις 
διαβαίνουσιν οἱ πολέμιοι. διαβεβηκόσι δὲ αὐτοῖς 
,) ᾽ ε Υ͂ » 4 ld dl 
5maduv φαίνεται ὁ Μιθραδάτης, ἔχων ἱππέας χιλίους; 
/ Ἂ Ν “ 3 rll 
τοξότας δὲ καὶ σφενδονήτας εἰς τετρακισχιλίους - 
ἢ In ¥ ,) | ae ε 
τοσούτους γὰρ ἤτησε Τισσαφέρνην, καὶ ἔλαβεν ὑπο- 
σχόμενος, ἂν τούτους λάβῃ; παραδώσειν αὐτῷ τοὺς 
“τ᾿ ᾽ ν > ly Vd 
EdAnvas, καταφρονήσας, ὅτι ἐν TH πρόσθεν προσ- 


10 βολῇ ὀλίγους ἔχων ἔπαθε μὲν οὐδέν, πολλὰ δὲ κακὰ 


“Ὁ ν 
ἐνόμιζε ποιῆσαι. ἐπεὶ δὲ οἱ Ἕλληνες διαβεβηκότες 
> Ἂ “ἋἊ ld Ψ 3 Ἁ “Ἵ ld 
ἀπεῖχον τῆς χαράδρας ὅσον ὀκτὼ σταδίους, διέβαινε 
Ν ε v ¥ \ Υ dl 
καὶ ὃ Μιθραδάτης ἔχων τὴν δύναμιν. παρήγγελτο 
δὲ τῶν πελταστῶν οὖς ἔδει διώκειν καὶ τῶν ὁπλιτῶν, 
Ν ~ ¢ sip ν ap , ε > 
15 καὶ τοῖς ἱππεῦσιν εἴρητο θαρροῦσι διώκειν ὡς ἐφεψο- 
a ¢ wi 3 \ Ν᾿ ld 
μένης ἱκανῆς δυνάμεως. ἐπεὶ δὲ ὁ Μιθραδάτης κατ- 
εἰλήφει, καὶ ἤδη σφενδόναι καὶ τοξεύματα ἐξικνοῦν- 
9 / ~ ν ”~ ,) “"- 9 Δ Δ 
το, ἐσήμηνε τοῖς Ἕλλησι τῇ σάλπιγγι, καὶ εὐθὺς 
» ε 2 ¥ ip! ee A Ἂ ε in! 
ἔθεον ὁμόσε οἷς εἴρητο Kal οἱ ἱππεῖς ἤλαυνον. ot δὲ 
3 3 > > » al Ἂ, “ 3 
οὐ οὐκ ἐδέξαντο, ἀλλ᾽ ἔφευγον ἐπὶ τὴν χαράδραν. ἐν 
, ἴω ᾽; ~ ἤ sll li he - 
ταύτῃ τῇ διώξει τοῖς βαρβάροις τῶν τε πεζῶν ἀπέ- 
θ λλοὶ καὶ τῶν ἱππέων ἐν τῇ χαράδρᾳ ζωοὶ 
ανον πολλοὶ καὶ τῶν ἃ ἢ χαράδρς 
| al > 2 v ‘ \ > ἤ 
ἐλήφθησαν εἰς ὀκτωκαίδεκα. τοὺς δὲ ἀποθανόντας 
αὐτοκέλευστοι οἱ Ἕλληνες ἠκίσαντο, ὡς ὅτι φοβερώ- 
οὔ τατον τοῖς πολεμίοις εἴη ὁρᾶν. 


104 ANABASIS III. 4. 6-12. 


The march continued to Larissa and afterwards to Mespila, on the 
Tigris. A sight of ancient Nineveh. Account of the ruins. 


‘\ € ἣ / 9 “ by “~ ε 
Καὶ οἱ μὲν πολέμιοι οὕτω πράξαντες ἀπῆλθον, οἱ 
δὲ Ἕλληνες ἀσφαλῶς πορευόμενοι τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς 
e rl > al »  Ἃ i" al / b | ~ 
ἡμέρας ἀφίκοντο ἐπὶ τὸν Τίγρητα ποταμόν. ἐνταῦθα 7 
Aus ἦν ἐρή εγάλη, ὄνομα δ᾽ αὐτῇ ἦν Ad 
πόλις ἣν ἐρήμη μεγάλη, ὄνομα δ᾽ αὐτῇ ἦν Λάρισσα 
» 3» > Ἂ i, Ν lg sind Ἂ ul 
δ ᾧκουν δ᾽ αὐτὴν τὸ παλαιὸν Μῆδοι. τοῦ δὲ τείχους 
»" π > A > / \ ¥ 4 ν 3 
αὐτῆς ἦν τὸ εὖρος πέντε καὶ εἴκοσι πόδες, ὕψος ὃ 
€ al li Ν ἤ ε dl ’ ͵ 
ἑκατόν - τοῦ δὲ κύκλου ἡ περίοδος δύο παρασάγγαι - 
ὠκοδόμητο δὲ πλίνθοις κεραμεαῖς - κρηπὶς δ᾽ ὑπὴν 
ὀκοδόμη ραμ pn ῆ 
/ bid ¥ “ , 
λιθίνη τὸ ὕψος εἴκοσι ποδῶν. ταύτην βασιλεὺς ὁ 
10 Περσῶν, ὅτε παρὰ Μήδων τὴν ἀρχὴν ἐλάμβανον 
Πέρσαι, πολιορκῶν οὐδενὶ τρόπῳ ἐδύνατο ἑλεῖν - ἥλιον 
δὲ νεφέλη προκαλύψασα ἠφάνισε μέχρι ἐξέλιπον οἱ 
ἄνθρωποι, καὶ οὕτως ἑάλω. παρὰ ταύτην τὴν πόλιν 9 
> Ν [4 ‘ I > wlll. Ἄ \ \ 
ἦν πυραμὶς λιθίνη, τὸ μὲν εὖρος ἑνὸς πλέθρου, τὸ δὲ 
15 ὕψος δύο πλέθρων. ἐπὶ ταύτης πολλοὶ τῶν βαρβάρων 
ἦσαν ἐκ τῶν πλησίον κωμῶν ἀποπεφευγότες. ἐντεῦ-10 
3 > / im. ν / a 
θεν δ᾽ ἐπορεύθησαν σταθμὸν ἕνα παρασάγγας ἕξ 
πρὸς τεῖχος ἔρημον μέγα κείμενον - ὄνομα δὲ ἦν τῇ 
πόλει Μέσπιλα: Μῆδοι δ᾽ αὐτήν ποτε ῴᾧκουν. ἦν 
20 δὲ ἡ μὲν κρηπὶς λίθου ξεστοῦ κογχυλιάτου, τὸ εὖρος 
πεντήκοντα ποδῶν καὶ τὸ ὕψος πεντήκοντα. ἐπὶ δὲ: 
ταύτῃ ἐπῳκοδόμητο πλίνθινον τεῖχος, τὸ μὲν εὖρος 
/ “ἣν Ν Ail ε ’ a“ Ν ’ 
πεντήκοντα ποδῶν, τὸ δὲ ὕψος ἑκατόν - τοῦ δὲ τείχους 
4 ᾽ ἃ / > ~ / ᾽ 
ἡ περίοδος ἐξ παρασάγγαι. ἐνταῦθα λέγεται Μήδεια 
᾿ , a ¢ ge δα ᾿ 
25 γυνὴ βασιλέως καταφυγεῖν ὅτε ἀπώλλυσαν τὴν ἀρχὴν 
ὑπὸ Περσῶν Μῆδοι. ταύτην δὲ τὴν πόλιν πολιορκῶν 12 
ε Ἂ ‘ > 3 4 ν / © ~ 
ὁ Περσῶν βασιλεὺς οὐκ ἐδύνατο οὔτε χρόνῳ ἑλεῖν 


ANABASIS III. 4. 13-17. 105 


οὔτε Bia: Ζεὺς δὲ βροντῇ κατέπληξε τοὺς ἐνοικοῦν- 
τας, καὶ οὕτως ἑάλω. 
Tissaphernes threatens the Greeks, but is kept off. 
Ἐντεῦθεν δ᾽ ἐπορεύθησαν σταθμὸν ἕνα παρασάγ- 13 
γας τέτταρας. εἰς τοῦτον δὲ τὸν σταθμὸν Τισσα- 
, 3 , y “κα , > ¥ \ 
5 φέρνης ἐπεφάνη, οὖς τε αὐτὸς ἱππέας ἦλθεν ἔχων καὶ 
x > / 4 ἣν Ν Nd ld 
τὴν Ὀρόντα δύναμιν τοῦ τὴν βασιλέως θυγατέρα 
» i. a “a ¥ 9 dl ᾽ x 
ἔχοντος Kal ovs Κῦρος ἔχων ἀνέβη βαρβάρους kat 
οὗς ὁ βασιλέως ἀδελφὸς ἔχων βασιλεῖ ἐβοήθει, καὶ 
‘ 4 ν Ν 5 " ν» ν μ 
πρὸς τούτοις ὅσους βασιλεὺς ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ, ὠστε τὸ 
al , 3 - 3 I. _ | Ἂ > Pal 
ιο στράτευμα πάμπολυ ἐφάνη. ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἐγγὺς ἐγένετο, 14 
τὰς μὲν τῶν τάξεων ὄπισθεν καταστήσας, τὰς δὲ εἰς 
Ν Ἑ ἤ 3 a 4 > ,ν κῃ 
τὰ πλάγια παραγαγών, ἐμβαλεῖν μὲν οὐκ ἐτόλμησεν 
οὐδ᾽ ἐβούλετο διακινδυνεύειν, σψενδονᾶν δὲ παρήγ- 
γειλε καὶ τοξεύειν. ἐπεὶ δὲ διαταχθέντες οἱ Ῥόδιοι 15 
3 , Ἂ ε if dl a Κ'ΥῦΥ x 
15 ἐσφενδόνησαν καὶ ot Σκύθαι τοξόται ἐτόξευσαν καὶ 
> \ € / 3 / Oe Ν 3 ᾽ὔ 
οὐδεὶς ἡμάρτανεν ἀνδρός, οὐδὲ γὰρ εἰ πάνυ προυθυ- 
ἴω ee > | ε ᾽ ld - 
petro ῥάδιον ἦν, καὶ ὁ Τισσαφέρνης μάλα ταχέως 
» al > / ‘ 8 »¥ , > 4 
ἔξω βελῶν ἀπεχώρει καὶ ai ἄλλαι τάξεις ἀπεχώρη- 
σαν. καὶ τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς ἡμέρας οἱ μὲν ἐπορεύοντο, 16 
e > ν \ 3 dl 3 , « ᾿ “~ 
90 οἱ δ᾽ εἵποντο" καὶ οὐκέτι ἐσίνοντο οἱ βάρβαροι τῇ 
, > dl I'd ‘ ν ε , ἴω 
τότε ἀκροβολίσει - μακρότερον γὰρ οἵ τε Ῥόδιοι τῶν 
Περσῶν ἐσφενδόνων καὶ (οἱ Κρῆτες ἐτόξευον.) μεγάλα 17 
ν 
δὲ καὶ τὰ τόξα τὰ Περσικά ἐστιν - ὥστε χρήσιμα ἦν 
ὁπόσα ἁλίσκοιτο τῶν τοξευμάτων τοῖς Κρησί, καὶ 
25 διετέλουν χρώμενοι τοῖς τῶν πολεμίων τοξεύμασι, 
καὶ ἐμελέτων τοξεύειν ἄνω ἱέντες μακράν. ἐὑρίσκετο 
Ἢ Ἢ an . » A , A , 
δὲ καὶ νεῦρα πολλὰ ἐν ταῖς κώμαις καὶ μόλυβδος, 
ὦὧστε χρῆσθαι εἰς τὰς σφενδόνας. 


Ἂν 


ra 7 2 4 


S27 XK 3 (0 ) TEL a 
106 ANABASIS III. 4. 18-22 ANABASIS III. 4. 23-28. 107 


After a day’s halt, the Greeks proceed four days. Change in the νότερον εἴη τὸ διέχον, κατὰ λόχους; εἰ δὲ πλατύτερον, 
order of march. 


‘ ’ Ν wt , > \ 5 V4 

Kat ταύτῃ μὲν TH ἡμέρᾳ; ἔπει KaTETTPATOTEdEL- 18 
,΄͵)οην - > / > vl ε 
ovto of Ἕλληνες κώμαις ἐπιτυχόντες, ἀπῆλθον οἱ 
~ Ὁ > ’ 3 
βάρβαροι μεῖον ἔχοντες τῇ ἀκροβολίσει " τὴν ὃ 


| ~ e V4 ¥ αν "ν > / 
ETLOVO AY ἡμέραν εμειναν OL EAAnves Kal ἐπεσιτι- 


nt εἰν 3 Ν Ld , > 5 /, 
κατὰ πεντηκοστῦς, εἰ δὲ πάνυ πλατύ, κατ᾽ ἐνωμοτίας" 

y man, > ‘ , > ‘ \ " 
στε ἀεὶ ἔκπλεων εἶναι τὸ μέσον. εἰ δὲ Kat διαβαΐ- 33 
he! - - a - > 3 “ 
νειν τινὰ δέοι διάβασιν ἢ γέφυραν, οὐκ ἐταράττοντο, 

δ ἀλλ᾽ ἐν τῷ μέ ἐλ ὶ διέβ - καὶ εἴ 
ν τῷ μέρει οἵ λοχαγοὶ διέβαινον - καὶ εἴ που 
~ "» 4, “~ 
δέοι τι τῆς φάλαγγος, ἐπιπαρῇσαν οὗτοι. τούτῳ TH 


Ὃ \ ‘ ~ > ~ ᾽ὔ ro \ 
σαντο" ἦν yap πολὺς GLTOS ἐν ταις κώμαις. τῇ δὲ ΤΊ ΓΕ 
τρόπῳ ἐπορεύθησαν σταθμοὺς τέτταρας. 


ὑστεραίᾳ ἐπορεύοντο διὰ τοῦ πεδίου, καὶ Τισσαφέρ- 
Y ᾽ , ¥ . 2.3 The Greeks are attacked in descendinga hill. They come to some 
μὴ i νὰ ur iil οβ ΝΣ alin ἔνθα δὴ ay ΝΣ ἣν villages on high land δἱ night. 
intial whariae ee τάξις ΝΡ Ἡνίκα δὲ τὸν πέμπτον ἐπορεύοντο, εἶδον βασίλειόν 24 
πῃ. as iA ΜΟΝῊ γὰρ στῶν Ἣν μὲν τι καὶ περὶ αὐτὸ κώμας πολλάς, τὴν δὲ ὁδὸν πρὸς τὸ 
j ὰ κέ ῦ πλαισίου ἢ ὁδοῦ στενοτέ Γ Γ εἰμὴ Γ 
’ ἣν x ε Μὴν 
vidi ἐπηηρή. aia iil vigil ei ὰ ile 10 χωρίον τοῦτο διὰ γηλόφων ὑψηλῶν γιγνομένην, οἵ 
οὔσης ἢ ὀρέων ἀναγκαζόντων ἢ γεφύρας, ἐκθλίβε- καθῆκον ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄρους ὑφ᾽ ᾧ ἣν ἡ κώμη. καὶ εἶδον 


« 


x ε , ᾿ν / ld ν Ἀ 
υ ο ¥ ν ¢ lan! 
σθαι iy ὁπλίτας isi ipa ever Pau al "ΩΝ μὲν τοὺς λόφους ἄσμενοι οἵ Ἕλληνες, ὡς εἰκὸς τῶν 
- 3, al bh. A i 
πιεζομ sane tina gay, ie lig ae πολεμίων ὄντων ἱππέων - ἐπεὶ δὲ πορευόμενοι ἐκ τοῦ 25 
" a A 
ae a ἀν ee eo (oo πεδίου ἀνέβησαν ἐπὶ τὸν πρῶτον γήλοφον καὶ κατέ 


ἣν , ‘ , A "ἡ κι δ , 
16 a διάσχῃ ihe i wg vba il διασπᾶσθαι lest yg 15 βαινον ὡς ἐπὶ τὸν ἕτερον ἀναβαίνειν, ἐνταῦθα ἐπι- 
ἐκθλιβομένους μα κενὸν γίγνεσθαι τὸ μέσον τῶν γίγνονται οἱ βάρβαροι καὶ ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑψηλοῦ εἰς τὸ 
κεράτων, καὶ ἀδυμεῖν τοὺς ταῦτα πάσχοντας πολε- πρανὲς ἔβαλλον, ἐσφενδόνων, ἐτόξευον ὑπὸ μαστί- 2% 


- ΕΞ er ep ee — 


᾽ ε / ‘ ε / 4 » V4 
μίων ἑπομένων. καὶ ὁπότε δέοι γέφυραν διαβαίνειν 
ἢ ἄλλην τινὰ διάβασιν, ἔσπευδεν ἕκαστος βουλόμε- 


/ “ \ > / > 3 a A 
20 vos φθάσαι πρῶτος - καὶ εὐεπίθετον ἦν ἐνταῦθα τοῖς 


“Ἅ 3 ty. δὲ Ὁ» » ε / 
πολεμίοις. ἐπεὶ O€ ταῦτ ἐγνωσαν οἱ στρατηγοί, 21 


ἐποίησαν €€ λόχους ἀνὰ ἑκατὸν ἄνδρας, καὶ λοχα- 
yous ἐπέστησαν καὶ ἄλλους πεντηκοντῆρας καὶ ah- 
λους ἐνωμοτάρχους. οὕτω δὲ πορευόμενοι, ὁπότε 
25 μὲν συγκύπτοι τὰ κέρατα, ὑπέμενον ὕστεροι οἱ λοχα- 


4 ν \ > ἴω, “Ἃ V4 / 4 lil 
yol ὥστε μὴ ἐνοχλεῖν τοῖς κέρασι, τότε δὲ παρῆγον 
¥ κι , . δὲ ,ὕ ε An 
ἔξωθεν τῶν κεράτων. ὁπότε δὲ διάσχοιεν ai πλευραὶ 2 


~ a ‘ / a 3 dl > \ 
τοῦ πλαισίου, TO μέσον ἂν ἐξεπίμπλασαν, εἰ μὲν OTE 


γων, καὶ πολλοὺς ἐτίτρωσκον καὶ ἐκράτησαν τῶν 
€ al rl Ἂ Al > | » lin 
Ελλήνων γυμνήτων Kal κατέκλεισαν αὐτοὺς εἴσω τῶν 
90 ὅπλων - ὦστε παντάπασι ταύτην τὴν ἡμέραν ἄχρη- 
στοι ἦσαν ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ ὄντες καὶ οἱ σφενδονῆται καὶ οἵ 
ld 3 " \ , εν > ld Ἂς 
τοξόται. ἐπεὶ δὲ πιεζόμενοι οἱ “Ἕλληνες ἐπεχείρησαν 27 
διώκειν, σχολῇ μὲν ἐπὶ τὸ ἄκρον ἀφικνοῦνται ὁπλῖται 
»” ε \ - Ἂ > “ Vd A 
ὄντες, οἱ δὲ πολέμιοι ταχὺ ἀπεπήδων. πάλιν δὲ 28 
ε / 9 “ἢ > Ἂ ν "αὶ Ἐ 
25 ὁπότε ἀπίοιεν πρὸς τὸ ἄλλο στράτευμα ταῦτα ἐπα- 
i 5 Χ “ ld rd > A 2) Υ͂ 
σχον, καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ δευτέρου γηλόφου ταὐτὰ ἐγίγνετο, 
ν iy a) / , ¥ > aA ‘ a 
GoTE ἀπὸ TOD τρίτου γηλόφου ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς μὴ κινεῖν 
τοὺς στρατιώτας πρὶν ἀπὸ τῆς δεξιᾶς πλευρᾶς τοῦ 


108 “ANABASIS ΠΙ. 4. 29-35. 
! 


ἄν ἃ. yok fv A 0 eae wenn i ἤν oe » Moon yd » Me a. ὃ 


rd 3 - ‘ ‘ \ »” > lp 
πλαισίου ἀνήγαγον πελταστὰς πρὸς TO OpOS. ἐπει 29 
> e a“ 
δ᾽ οὗτοι ἐγένοντο ὑπὲρ τῶν ἑπομένων πολεμίων, OUK- 
᾿ 3 ll ε / ~ / 
έτι ἐπετίθεντο οἱ πολέμιοι τοῖς καταβαίνουσι, δεδοι- 
“ “ 
κότες μὴ ἀποτμηθείησαν καὶ ἀμφοτέρωθεν αὐτῶν 
Ld ε ν ~ 
δ γένοιντο οἱ πολέμιοι. οὕτω τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς ἡμέρας 30 
πορευόμενοι, οἵ μὲν τῇ ὁδῷ κατὰ τοὺς γηλόφους; οἱ 
Ν 
δὲ κατὰ τὸ ὄρος ἐπιπαριόντες, ἀφίκοντο εἰς τὰς κώ- 
᾽ν. hy 
pas: καὶ ἰατροὺς κατέστησαν ὀκτώ" πολλοὶ yap 
Ψ 
ἦσαν οἱ τετρωμένοι. 


Halt of three days. The Greeks encamp when attacked. The enemy 
withdraw when night comes on. A Persian camp at night. 


ι᾽ Ἐνταῦθα ἔμειναν ἡμέρας τρεῖς Kal τῶν τετρωμένων 31 
Ψ ὋΟΥ > / ‘ > ¥ > 
ἕνεκα Kal ἅμα ἐπιτήδεια πολλὰ εἶχον, ahevpa, οἶνον; 
κριθὰς ἵπποις συμβεβλημένας πολλάς. ταῦτα δὲ 
συνενηνεγμένα ἦν τῷ σατραπεύοντι τῆς χώρας. τε- 

ἢ 3 ε ld > Ἂ 4 > x 
τάρτῃ δ᾽ ἡμέρᾳ καταβαίνουσιν εἰς τὸ πεδίον. ἐπεὶ 32 
Ν / > hy Vd ‘ ll “ 

τὸ δὲ κατέλαβεν αὐτοὺς Τισσαφέρνης σὺν τῇ δυνάμει, 
ἐδίδαξεν αὐτοὺς ἡ ἀνάγκη κατασκηνῆσαι οὗ πρῶτον 
εἶδον κώμην καὶ μὴ πορεύεσθαι ἔτι μαχομένους’ 
πολλοὶ γὰρ ἦσαν οἱ ἀπόμαχοι, οἵ τε τετρωμένοι καὶ 
ε > - tl ‘ ε “ / in 9 
οἱ ἐκείνους φέροντες καὶ οἱ τῶν φερόντων Ta ὄπλα 

90 δεξάμενοι. ἐπεὶ δὲ κατεσκήνησαν καὶ ἐπεχείρησαν 33 

". "» > , ε ’ ‘ \ , 
αὐτοῖς ἀκροβολίζεσθαι οἱ βάρβαροι πρὸς τὴν κώμην 
Vd ‘ dl .ν ~ ‘ 
προσιόντες, πολὺ περιῆσαν οἱ Ελληνες " πολὺ γὰρ 
/ > / ε - > / «a rl 
διέφερον ἐκ χώρας ὁρμῶντες ἀλέξασθαι ἢ πορευόμε- 
> a A , , Me a 
νοι ἐπιοῦσι τοῖς πολεμίοις μάχεσθαι. ἡνίκα δ᾽ ἦν 84 
» ’ σ > > ᾿, a ᾿, ¥ 
5 ἤδη δείλη, wpa ἦν ἀπιέναι τοῖς Todepiors* οὕποτε 
γὰρ μεῖον ἀπεστρατοπεδεύοντο οἵ βάρβαροι τοῦ 
Ἑλληνικοῦ ἑξήκοντα σταδίων, φοβούμενοι μὴ τῆς 


‘ εν 3 ἡῃν > Ὁ Ἂ x 
νυκτὸς οἱ Ἕλληνες ἐπιθῶνται αὐτοῖς. πονηρὸν yap 35 


\, 


ANABASIS ILI. 4. 36-39. 109 


νυκτός ἐστι στράτευμα Περσικόν. οἵ τε γὰρ ἵπποι 
αὐτοῖς δέδενται καὶ ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ πεποδισμένοι 
εἰσὶ τοῦ μὴ φεύγειν ἕνεκα εἰ λυθείησαν, ἐάν τέ τις 
θόρυβος γίγνηται; δεῖ ἐπισάξαι τὸν ἵππον Πέρσῃ 

ὃ ἀνδρὶ καὶ χαλινῶσαι; δεῖ καὶ θωρακισθέντα ἀναβη- 
ναι ἐπὶ τὸν ἵππον. ταῦτα δὲ πάντα χαλεπὰ νύκτωρ 
καὶ θορύβου ὄντος. τούτου ἕνεκα πόρρω ἀπεσκήνουν 
τῶν Ἑλλήνων. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἐγίγνωσκον αὐτοὺς οἱ Ἕλλη- 86 
νες βουλομένους ἀπιέναι καὶ διαγγελλομένους; eK 

10 ρυξε τοῖς Ἕλλησι συσκευάζεσθαι ἀκουόντων Ὁ» 
πολεμίων. καὶ χρόνον μέν τινα ἐπέσχον τῆς πορείας 
οἱ βάρβαροι; ἐπειδὴ δὲ ὀψὲ ἐγίγνετο; ἀπῇσαν. οὐ 
γὰρ ἐδόκει λύειν αὐτοὺς νυκτὸς πορεύεσθαι καὶ κατα- 
γεσθαι ἐπὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον. 


The Greeks also decamp at once. On the fourth day they see the 
enemy on a height commanding the road. Xenophon disobeys 
an order to bring his peltasts from the rear, and comes up alone. 


15 Ἐπειδὴ δὲ σαφῶς ἀπιόντας ἤδη ἑώρων οἱ Ἕλλη- 37 
ves, ἐπορεύοντο καὶ αὐτοὶ ἀναζεύξαντες καὶ διῆλθον 
ὅσον ἑξήκοντα σταδίους. καὶ γίγνεται τοσοῦτον με- 
ταξὺ τῶν στρατευμάτων ὥστε τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ οὐκ ἐφά- 
νησαν οἱ πολέμιοι οὐδὲ τῇ τρίτῃ: τῇ δὲ τετάρτῃ 

20 νυκτὸς προελθόντες καταλαμβάνουσι χωρίον ὑπερδέ. 
ἕιον οἱ βάρβαροι, 7 ἔμελλον οἱ Ἕλληνες παριέναι; 
ἀκρωνυχίαν ὄρους; ὑφ᾽ ἣν ἡ κατάβασις ἦν εἰς τὸ 
πεδίον. ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἑώρα Χειρίσοφος προκατειλημ- 38 
μένην τὴν ἀκρωνυχίαν, καλεῖ Ἐενοφῶντα ἀπὸ τῆς 

25 οὐρᾶς καὶ κελεύει λαβόντα τοὺς πελταστὰς παραγε- 
νέσθαι εἰς τὸ πρόσθεν. ὁ δὲ Ξενοφῶν τοὺς μὲν πελ- 39 
ταστὰς οὐκ ἦγεν" ἐπιφαινόμενον γὰρ ἑώρα Τισσα- 


110 ANABASIS ΠῚ. 4. 40-44. 1 ANABASIS III. 4. 45-49 and 5. 1. 111 


φέρνην kal τὸ στράτευμα πᾶν" αὐτὸς δὲ προσελάσας ᾿ εὐθὺς καὶ αὐτοὶ ὥρμησαν ἁμιλλᾶσθαι ἐπὶ τὸ ἄκρον. 

ἠρώτα Τί καλεῖς ; ὁ δὲ λέγει αὐτῷ, Ἔξεστιν ὁρᾶν. | καὶ ἐνταῦθα πολλὴ μὲν κραυγὴ ἦν τοῦ ᾿Ἑλληνικοῦ 45 

προκατείληπται γὰρ ἡμῖν ὁ ὑπὲρ τῆς καταβάσεως στρατεύματος διακελευομένων τοῖς ἑαυτῶν, πολλὴ δὲ ὁ... 

λόφος, καὶ οὐκ ἔστι παρελθεῖν εἰ μὴ τούτους ἀποκό- | κραυγὴ τῶν ἀμφὶ Τισσαφέρνην τοὺς. Carer δῶκα: 
ὄψομεν. ἀλλὰ τί οὐκ ἦγες τοὺς πελταστάς ; ὁ δὲ 40 δ λευομένων. Ξενοφῶν δὲ παρελαύνων ἐπὶ τοῦ ἵππου 46 

λέγει ὅτι οὐκ ἐδόκει αὐτῷ ἔρημα καταλιπεῖν τὰ ὄπι- παρεκελεύετο, Ανδρες, νῦν ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα νομίζετε 

σθεν πολεμίων ἐπιφαινομένων. ᾿Αλλὰ μὴν ὥρα γ᾽, ἁμιλλᾶσθαι, νῦν πρὸς τοὺς παῖδας καὶ τὰς γυναῖκας; 

ἔφη, βουλεύεσθαι πῶς τις τοὺς ἄνδρας ἀπελᾷ ἀπὸ β νῦν ὀλίγον πονήσαντες ἀμαχεὶ τὴν λοιπὴν πορευσό- 

τοῦ λόφου. μεθα. Σωτηρίδας δὲ ὁ Σικυώνιος εἶπεν, Οὐκ ἐξ ἴσου; 47 


Xenophon captures a height above the enemy’s position, and the 0g = ov. ὁ 4} ee ‘ ) 1} ἢ ἃ 
' ' ' ε υ μεν yap ε OU OYEL, ἔγω 
Persians retreat. Adventure with Soteridas. | 7 Revo aad. aul ig φ μῶν ἈΠ 


\ ~ “ Ἁ 5 ᾿") rl eo μὰ ie 

| i Ἀ ae δὲ χαλεπῶς κάμνω THY ἀσπίδα φέρων. καὶ ὃς ἀκού- 48 
10 Ἐνταῦθα Ἐενοφῶν ὁρᾷ τοῦ ὄρους τὴν κορυφὴν 41 ul i : ἡ ΓΙ. "Ὁ 
ἐπ. ϑ 1... ὕψψ 1 τ , : ὌΝ σας ταῦτα καταπηδήσας ἀπὸ τοῦ ἵππου ὠθεῖται 
ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ τοῦ ἑαυτὼν στρατεύματος οὖσαν, καὶ ἀπὸ ΤΙΣ ΠΣ I si lsat tt Ρ bl ee Ὁ t 
, ἀν 5. ἀν ᾽ τ ε , αὐτὸν ἐκ τῆς τάξεως, Kal THY ἀσπίδα ἀφελόμενος ὡς 
ταύτης ἔφοδον ἐπὶ τὸν λόφον ἔνθα ἦσαν οἵ πολέμιοι, sly ᾿ i A f ui ΤΉΝ 
ἌΡ , 5 , a uli ε ἐδύνατο τάχιστα ἔχων ἐπορεύετο - ἐτύγχανε δὲ καὶ 
καὶ λέγει, Κράτιστον, ὦ Χειρίσοφε, ἡμῖν ἵεσθαι ὡς : : ae ae κι ἢ ἈΠῸ» 
, A ee * ‘ A , ᾿ 15 θώρακα EX@V TOV ἱππικὸν " WOT ἐπιέζετο. καὶ τοῖς 
τάχιστα ἐπὶ τὸ ἄκρον" ἣν γὰρ τοῦτο λάβωμεν, ov cel ig ayia f a" 
, , ile it ie eit ica ae , μὲν ἔμπροσθεν ὑπάγειν παρεκελεύετο, τοῖς δὲ ὄπι- 
15 δυνήσονται μένειν οἱ ὑπὲρ τῆς ὁδοῦ. ἀλλά, εἰ βού- ; i ΠΣ aghast 
ἐλ} μάταν τὸν 2 \ ἂν 297 , σθεν παριέναι, μόλις ἑπόμενος. oft δ᾽ ἄλλοι στρα- 49 
λει, μένε ἐπὶ τῷ στρατεύματι, ἐγὼ δ᾽ ἐθέλω πορεύε- ii i {65 i "i : 
> 94 , eae EE > ν gy τιῶται παίουσι καὶ βάλλονσι Kal λοιδοροῦσι τὸν 
σθαι- εἰ δὲ χρήζεις, πορεύου ἐπὶ τὸ ὄρος, ἐγὼ δὲ 


᾿ " Σωτηρίδαν, ἔστε ἠνάγκασαν λαβόντα τὴν ἀσπίδα 
μενῶ αὐτοῦ. Αλλὰ δίδωμί σοι, ἔφη ὁ Χειρίσοφος, 42 “ΩΤΉΡ ? quay B 7 


i oe 

i 20 πορεύεσθαι. ὁ δὲ ἀναβάς, ἕως μὲν βάσιμα ἦν, ἐπὶ 
ὁπότερον βούλει ἑλέσθαι. εἰπὼν ὁ Ἐενοφῶν ὅτι νεώ- is ᾿ ἄρχε B ide ΠΣ βάσιν lil 
τοῦ ἵππου ἦγεν, ἐπεὶ δὲ ἄβατα ἦν, καταλιπὼν τὸν 


30 τερός ἐστιν αἱρεῖται πορεύεσθαι, κελεύει δέ οἱ συμ- i ‘ i Ἶ ᾿ ἘΝ ΝᾺ ὟΝ 
, ἐν a i ν la ἵππον ἔσπευδε πεζῇ. καὶ φθάνουσιν ἐπὶ τῷ ἄκρῳ 
πέμψαι ἀπὸ του στόματος ἄνδρας ᾿ pakpov yap nv ᾿ 


, ln ᾽ 
ns " 'ν ενόμενοι τοὺς πολεμίους. 
ἀπὸ τῆς οὐρᾶς λαβεῖν. καὶ ὁ Χειρίσοφος συμπέμ- 43 aa Γ 


SIE ee, a , ae δ ‘ ' The Persians take flight, and the Greeks descend to one of several 
TEL TOUS ἀπὸ τοῦ στόματος πελταστάς, ἔλαβε δὲ τοὺς | rich villages in the plain. Tissaphernes attempts to burn these. 


“ 4 ’ 3 . . 
κατὰ μέσον τοῦ πλαισίον. συνέπεσθαι δ᾽ ἐκέλευσεν Jests concerning this. 


ra | ¥ ‘ ¢€ A , , » 
ο" αὐτῷ καὶ τοὺς τριακοσίους οὖς αὐτὸς εἶχε τῶν ἐπι- ᾿ V. Ἔνθα δὴ οἱ μὲν βάρβαροι στραφέντες ἔφευγον 1 
“ wn a | “- | 39 7 ς A? > 4, Ν 
λέκτων ἐπὶ τῷ στόματι τοῦ πλαισίου. ἐντεῦθεν ἐπο- 44 25 ἢ ἕκαστος ἐδύνατο, οἱ δὲ Ἕλληνες εἶχον τὸ ἄκρον. 
“ἡ “~ 
οἱ δὲ ἀμφὶ Τισσαφέρνην καὶ ᾿Αριαῖον ἀποτραπόμενοι 


ρεύοντο ὡς ἐδύναντο τάχιστα. οἱ δ᾽ ἐπὶ τοῦ λόφου 
» ἡ μ᾿ td A rs 
ἄλλην ὁδὸν ῴᾧχοντο. οἱ δὲ ἀμφὶ Χειρίσοφον κατα- 


’ ε ae Τὰ ᾿ ’ ν ἃ ν ᾿ 
πολέμιοι ὡς ἐνόησαν αὑτῶν τὴν πορείαν ἐπὶ τὸ ἄκρον, 


112 ANABASIS Ll. 5. 2-7. 


βάντες ἐστρατοπεδεύοντο ἐν κώμῃ μεστῇ πολλῶν 
ἀγαθῶν. ἦσαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλαι κῶμαι πολλαὶ πλήρεις 


sil > a“ Ψ al -“ / Ν Ἄ ἢ “ 
πολλῶν ἀγαθῶν ἐν τούτῳ τῷ πεδίῳ παρὰ τὸν Τίγρητα 


/ ε al 7 «= / > al ε ll 
ποταμόν. ἡνίκα δ᾽ ἦν δείλη, ἐξαπίνης οἱ πολέμιοι 
a , > A / \ ve , , 
5 ἐπιφαίνονται ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ, καὶ τῶν Ἑλλήνων κατέκο- 
ψάν τινας τῶν ἐσκεδασμένων ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ καθ᾽ 
ε Pal Ἁ A ‘\ ." ᾽ 
ἁρπαγήν - καὶ γὰρ νομαὶ πολλαὶ βοσκημάτων διαβι- 
βαζόμεναι εἰς τὸ πέραν τοῦ ποταμοῦ κατελήφθησαν. 
" ἴω “ \ ε x ly ᾽ 3 
ἐνταῦθα Τισσαφέρνης καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ κάειν ἐπεχεί- 
‘ " x o Cry / / > / 
lopyoav Tas κώμας. καὶ Tov Ἑλλήνων μάλα ἠθύμη- 
σάν τινες, ἐννοούμενοι μὴ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια, εἰ κάοιεν, 
> ¥ ε ly al ‘ ε ht > ᾿ν, 
οὐκ ἔχοιεν ὅποθεν λαμβάνοιεν. καὶ οἱ μὲν ἀμφὶ 
Χειρίσοφον ἀπῇσαν ἐκ τῆς βοηθείας - ὁ δὲ Ἐενοφῶν 
3 \ “ rl Ἀ A Ε / 3 \ ily 
ἐπεὶ κατέβη, παρελαύνων Tas τάξεις ἡνίκα ἀπὸ τῆς 
ν a 
15 βοηθείας ἀπήντησαν οἱ Ἕλληνες, ἔλεγεν, ‘Opare, ὦ 
¥ b ε / ly ἢ »ν» ε “ 
ἄνδρες Ἕλληνες, ὑφιέντας τὴν χώραν ἤδη ἡμετέραν 
εἶναι ; ἃ γὰρ ὅτε ἐσπένδοντο διεπράττοντο, μὴ κάειν 
bh. ld / Δ 3 \ / € > 
τὴν βασιλέως χώραν, νῦν αὐτοὶ Kaovow ὡς adXo- 
ld > A ral / € ~ ‘ > / 
Tpiav. ἀλλ᾽ ἐάν που καταλίπωσί γε αὑτοῖς Ta ἐπιτή- 
ἂν ν ll > ‘dips ᾽ > > 
90 Seta, ὄψονται Kal ἡμᾶς ἐνταῦθα πορευομένους. ἀλλ᾽, 
ie ¥ A A 
ὦ Χειρίσοφε, ἔφη, δοκεῖ μοι βοηθεῖν ἐπὶ τοὺς κάον- 
ε SA a ε , ε 8) , > 
τας WS UTEP τῆς ἡμετέρας. ὁ O€ Χειρίσοφος εἶπεν, 
Οὔκουν ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ - ἀλλὰ καὶ ἡμεῖς, ἔφη, κάωμεν, 
ν A 
καὶ οὕτω θᾶττον παύσονται. 


Perplexity about crossing the Tigris. A proposal to carry the army 
over on a bridge of inflated skins. This is rejected, and they 
turn about and march southward a single day. 


25 Ἐπεὶ δὲ- ἐπὶ tas σκηνὰς ἀπῆλθον, ot μὲν ἄλλοι 
Ἁ ν᾿ ν᾽ % μ᾿ ‘ He 

περὶ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια ἦσαν, στρατηγοὶ δὲ καὶ λοχαγοὶ 

a \ 5» a ,» Pa ¥ \ 
συνῆλθον. καὶ ἐνταῦθα πολλὴ ἀπορία ἦν. ἔνθεν μὲν 


ANABASIS III. 5. 8-13. 113 


yap ὄρη ἦν ὑπερύψηλα, ἔνθεν δὲ ὁ ποταμὸς τοσοῦτος 
Ἂ ᾽ ε a x ἤ ¢ al , 
τὸ βάθος ws μηδὲ τὰ δόρατα ὑπερέχειν πειρωμένοις 
“~ , > Fal δ᾽ 3 ~ λθ ᾿" 
τοῦ βάθους. ἀπορουμένοις δ᾽ αὐτοῖς προσελθών τις 
Ἂν" 5 , 
ἀνὴρ Ῥόδιος εἶπεν, ᾿Εγὼ θέλω, ὦ ἄνδρες, διαβιβάσαι 
ie \ 4 ε λί kal 3 » ae dé 
ὑμᾶς κατὰ τετρακισχιλίους ὁπλίτας, ἄν ἐμοὶ ὧν δέο- 
μαι ὑπηρετήσητε καὶ τάλαντον μισθὸν πορίσητε. 
ἐρωτώμενος δὲ ὅτου δέοιτο, ᾿Ασκῶν, ἐφη; δισχιλίων 
᾽ "" » ε “~ 4 Ι ".. καὶ x 
δεήσομαι: πολλὰ δ᾽ ὁρῶ πρόβατα καὶ αἶγας Kal 
ἮΝ  Ν ἃ > ὃ ral x A ’; δ δί 
βοῦς καὶ ὄνους. ἃ ἀποδαρέντα καὶ φυσηθέντα ῥᾳδίως 
A ~ 
ιο ἂν παρέχοι τὴν διάβασιν. δεήσομαι δὲ καὶ τῶν 10 
κι Ὄ A ἈΚ ΄ , , 
δεσμῶν οἷς χρῆσθε περὶ τὰ ὑποζύγια τούτοις ζεύξας 
In" » ~ ~ > rl ε ’ A > , 
τοὺς ἀσκοὺς πρὸς ἀλλήλους, ορμίσας ἕκαστον ἀσκὸν 
᾽ > / Ἁ > A 9 > , > A 
λίθους ἀρτήσας Kal ἀφεὶς ὠσπερ ἀγκύρας εἰς TO 
ὕδωρ. διαγαγὼν καὶ ἀμφοτέρωθεν δήσας ἐπιβαλῶ 
ν A “~ 2 ’ὔ ν ἣ > 2 ὃ 4 
15vAnV Kal γῆν ἐπιφορήσω" oTL μὲν οὖν οὐ KaTaov- 11 
> ral Vd ¥ θ “~ A > "μ᾿ ὃ ’ὕ 
σεσθε αὐτίκα μάλα εἴσεσθε: πᾶς γὰρ ἀσκὸς δύο 
a A ν “ 
ἄνδρας ἕξει τοῦ μὴ καταδῦναι. ὥστε δὲ μὴ ὀλισθά- 
νειν ἡ ὕλη καὶ ἡ γῆ σχήσει. ἀκούσασι ταῦτα τοῖς 12 
ἌΜᾺ > » 
στρατηγοῖς τὸ μὲν ἐνθύμημα χαρίεν ἐδόκει εἶναι, τὸ 
Ed 
90 δ᾽ ἔργον ἀδύνατον - ἦσαν γὰρ οἱ κωλύσοντες πέραν 
δ ie ~ A tM ~ 4 Oe a  » 
πολλοὶ ἱππεῖς, ot εὐθὺς τοῖς πρώτοις οὐδὲν ἂν ἐπέτρε- 
πον τούτων ποιεῖν. ἐνταῦθα τὴν μὲν ὑστεραίαν ἐπαν- 13 
εχώρουν εἰς τοὔμπαλιν εἰς τὰς ἀκαύστους κώμας, 
, » PP dla ν e ᾽ὔ 9 
κατακαύσαντες ἔνθεν ἐξῇσαν - ὠστε ot πολέμιοι οὐ 


vay vlna > 
25 προσήλαυνον, ἀλλὰ ἐθεῶντο καὶ ὁμοιοι ἦσαν θαυμά- 


ν ,»" / a 
Cew ὅποι ποτὲ τρέψονται ot Eddnves καὶ τί ἐν νῷ 


ἔχοιεν. 


ANABASIS ΠῚ. 5. 14-18. 


Questioning of prisoners about the roads. It is decided to march 
northward through the land of the Carduchi into Armenia. The 
army is to be ready to march at any moment during the coming 
night. 


57 ω ε A ¥ la tt ν» ’ὔ 
Οὐ νταῦθα οἱ μὲν ἄλλοι στρατιῶται ἐπὶ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια 14 


"ἡ ε δὲ \ ,) “ " 
ἦσαν - οἱ δὲ στρατηγοὶ πάλιν συνῆλθον, καὶ συνα- 


ε ‘ c λ / aX Ν ri λ il 
yeyour ς TOUS EQAAWKOTAS 7) eyXov ΤΡ κυκ ῳ τασον 


χώραν τίς ἑκάστη εἴη. οἱ δὲ ἔλεγον ὅτι τὰ μὲν 15 


δ πρὸς μεσημβρίαν τῆς ἐπὶ Βαβυλῶνα εἴη καὶ Μηδίαν, 
ὃ lll. il ¢ δὲ Ν ν Te , \ 
ι ἧσπερ ἥκοιεν, ἡ δὲ πρὸς ἕω ἐπὶ Σοῦσά TE Kal 
"ExBarava φέροι. ἔνθα θερίζειν λέγεται βασιλεύς. ἡ 
A ἢ ᾽ν. in. i ‘ ε / > ᾽ὔ i 
δὲ διαβάντι τὸν ποταμὸν πρὸς ἑσπέραν ἐπί Λυδίαν 


| 3 al / ε Ἂ Ἂ -~ 2 ral \ ips 
Kat Ἰωνίαν φέροι. ) de διὰ Των οβεέεων και T POs 


10 ἄρκτον τετραμμένη ὅτι εἰς Καρδούχους ἄγοι. τούτους 16 


,. » > ΜᾺ "» ᾿. Ἀ »” » « > 
δὲ ἔφασαν οἰκεῖν ἀνὰ τὰ ὄρη καὶ πολεμικοὺς εἶναι. 
᾽ν. ~ 
καὶ βασιλέως οὐκ ἀκούειν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐμβαλεῖν ποτε 
3 » ly ᾿ i, x “ al 
εἰς αὐτοὺς βασιλικὴν στρατιὰν δώδεκα μυριάδας - 
ἢ 3 > ral > ~ ~ i" al 
τούτων δ᾽ οὐδένα ἀπονοστῆσαι διὰ τὴν δυσχωρίαν. 
15 ὁπότε μέντοι πρὸς τὸν σατράπην τὸν ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ 
᾿. ἴω 
σπείσαιντο, καὶ ἐπιμιγνύναι σφῶν τε πρὸς ἐκείνους 


‘ _ rl i 4 > / a ε 
και ἐκεινῶν προς ἑαυτούς. ακουσαντες Ταντὰ OL1I7T 


στρατηγοὶ ἐκάθισαν χωρὶς τοὺς ἑκασταχόσε φάσκον- 
3 > ‘ ΝΙ͂Ν / bid "ol 

τας εἰδέναι, οὐδὲν δῆλον ποιήσαντες ὅποι πορεύεσθαι 

90 ἔμελλον. ἐδόκει δὲ τοῖς στρατηγοῖς ἀναγκαῖον εἶναι 

ls sl bo - 3 ἢ > / , 

διὰ τῶν ὀρέων εἰς Καρδούχους ἐμβάλλειν - τούτους 

ν Φ 

γὰρ διελθόντας ἔφασαν εἰς ᾿Αρμενίαν ἡξειν, ἧς 

Ὀρόντας ἦρχε πολλῆς καὶ εὐδαίμονος. ἐντεῦθεν δ᾽ 
» » > Ψ "Δ Wea , 

εὔπορον ἔφασαν εἶναι ὅποι τις ἐθέλοι πορεύεσθαι. 


Ay ,ὔ 37) / ~ AVL ὶ ὃ Ἵ n 
95 ει TOUVTOLS ἐθύσαντο. οΤως ἡνικα και OKOLY) TYHS 18 


ν ᾽ν. / “A ᾿. ‘ ε Ἂ 

ὥρας τὴν πορείαν ποιοῖντο: τὴν γὰρ ὑπερβολὴν 
ἴω > Ll > ᾿) Ἂ “ ,.. 

τῶν ὀρέων ἐδεδοίκεσαν μὴ προκαταληφθείη - καὶ παρ- 


ANABASIS IV. 1. 1-4. 115 


“ 
ἤγγειλαν, ἐπειδὴ δειπνήσειαν, συσκευασαμενους 


ἤ > , Ν Ψ θ Ἂ -) io ¥ MM 
πάντας ἀναπαύεσθαι. καὶ ἔπεσθαι ἡνίκ ay τις παρ 


αγγέλλῃ. 


BOOK IV. 


Summary of preceding accounts. 


ἢ 


5 μάχης, καὶ ὅσα μετὰ τὴν μάχην ἐν ταῖς σπονδαῖς ἃς 
βασιλεὺς καὶ οἱ σὺν Κύρῳ ἀναβάντες Ἕλληνες ἐποιή- 
σαντο, καὶ ὅσα παραβάντος τὰς σπονδὰς βασιλέως 
καὶ Τισσαφέρνους ἐπολεμήθη πρὸς τοὺς Ἕλληνας 
ἐπακολουθοῦντος τοῦ Περσικοῦ στρατεύματος, ἐν τῷ 

10 πρόσθεν λόγῳ δεδήλωται. 


The Greeks enter the mountains. Flight of the Carduchians. 
Mountain villages. 


ih 
Ἐπεὶ δὲ ἀφίκοντο ἔνθα ὁ μὲν Τίγρης ποταμὸς παν- 
, ¥ = ὃ . κ»" ‘0 \ , θ , 
᾿τάπασιν ἄπορος ἣν διὰ τὸ βάθος καὶ μέγεθος, πάρο- 
μή 3 “ 
δος δὲ οὐκ ἦν, ἀλλὰ τὰ Καρδούχεια ὄρη ἀπότομα 
“~ a“ “ A a 
ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ τοῦ ποταμοῦ ἐκρέματο, ἐδόκει δὴ τοῖς 
A ἴω > ἊΝ» 
ιὸ στρατηγοῖς διὰ τῶν ὀρέων πορευτέον εἶναι. ἤκουον 
γὰρ τῶν ἁλισκομένων ὅτι εἰ διέλθοιεν τὰ Καρδούχεια 
a A a“ dl 
ὄρη: ἐν TH Appevia τὰς πηγὰς τοῦ Τίγρητος ποτα- 
D, ἦν μὲ DN dua By L, Hv δὲ μὴ Bov- 
μοῦ, nv μὲν βούλωνται. διαβήσονται, ἢ μὴ 
ἴω al x In ‘ 
λωνται, περιίασι. καὶ τοῦ Εὐφράτου δὲ τὰς πηγὰς 
ye > ATT 
20 ἐλέγετο ov πρόσω τοῦ Τίγρητος εἶναι, Kal ἐστιν 
3 ‘ 
οὕτως ἔχον. τὴν δ᾽ εἰς τοὺς Kapdovxous ἐμβολὴν 
a A Ψ 
ὧδε ποιοῦνται, ἅμα μὲν λαθεῖν πειρώμενοι, apa 
rN N 
δὲ φθάσαι πρὶν τοὺς πολεμίους καταλαβεῖν τὰ 


ἄκρα. 


I. [Ὅσα μὲν δὴ ἐν τῇ ἀναβάσει ἐγένετο μέχρι τῆς 1 


‘ 2 RE ES Ft ES le ay ay ee we 


: 
πον...“ νυν. 


— a 


z ————_ 


a 


—— 


\ 


110 ANABASIS IV. 1. 5-10. ἱ ANABASIS IV. 1, 11-16. 117 


Ἡνίκα δ᾽ ἣν ἀμφὶ τὴν τελευταίαν φυλακὴν καὶ ᾿ γέντες τινὲς τῶν Καρδούχων τοῖς τελευταίοις ἐπετί- 
ἐλείπετο τῆς νυκτὸς ὅσον σκοταίους διελθεῖν τὸ πε- Ϊ θεντο. καὶ ἀπέκτεινάν τινας καὶ λίθοις καὶ τοξεύμασι 
δίον, τηνικαῦτα ἀναστάντες ἀπὸ παραγγέλσεως πο- ! κατέτρωσαν, ὀλίγοι ὄντες - ἐξ ἀπροσδοκήτου yap 
ρευόμενοι ἀφικνοῦνται ἅμα τῇ ἡμέρᾳ πρὸς τὸ ὅρος. ᾽ αὐτοῖς ἐπέπεσε τὸ Ἑλληνικόν. εἰ μέντοι τότε πλείους 11 

δένθα δή Χειρίσοφος μὲν ἡγεῖτο τοῦ στρατεύματος δ συνελέγησαν, ἐκινδύνευσεν ἂν διαφθαρῆναι πολὺ 
λαβὼν τὸ ἀμφ᾽ αὑτὸν καὶ τοὺς γυμνῆτας πάντας. ᾿ τοῦ στρατεύματος. καὶ ταύτην μὲν τὴν νύκτα οὕτως 
Ξενοφῶν δὲ σὺν τοῖς ὀπισθοφύλαξιν ὁπλίταις εἵπετο ἐν ταῖς κώμαις ηὐλίσθησαν - οἱ δὲ Καρδοῦχοι πυρὰ 
οὐδένα ἔχων γυμνῆτα οὐδεὶς γὰρ κίνδυνος ἐδόκει | πολλὰ ἔκαον κύκλῳ ἐπὶ τῶν ὀρέων καὶ συνεώρων ἀλ- 
εἶναι μή τις ἄνω πορευομένων ἐκ τοῦ ὄπισθεν ἐπί- : λήλους. ἅμα δὲ TH ἡμέρᾳ συνελθοῦσι τοῖς στρατη- 12 
10@70LTO. καὶ ἐπὶ μὲν τὸ ἄκρον ἀναβαίνει Χειρίσοφος το οῖς καὶ λοχαγοῖς τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἔδοξε τῶν τε ὑποζυ- 
πρίν τινας αἰσθέσθαι τῶν πολεμίων - ἔπειτα δ᾽ ὑφη- | yiov Ta ἀναγκαῖα καὶ δυνατώτατα ἔχοντας πορεύ- 
γεῖτο- ἐφείπετο δὲ ἀεὶ τὸ ὑπερβάλλον τοῦ στρατεύ- εσθαι, καταλιπόντας τἄλλα, καὶ ὅσα ἦν νεωστὶ αἰχ- 
ματος εἰς τὰς κώμας τὰς ἐν τοῖς ἀγκεσίτε καὶ μυχοῖς ! μάλωτα ἀνδράποδα ἐν τῇ στρατιᾷ πάντα ἀφεῖναι. 
τῶν ὀρέων. ἔνθα δὴ οἱ μὲν Καρδοῦχοι ἐκλιπόντες σχολαίαν γὰρ ἐποίουν τὴν πορείαν πολλὰ ὄντα τὰ 13 
τὸ τὰς οἰκίας ἔχοντες καὶ γυναῖκας καὶ παῖδας ἔφευγον | 15 ὑποζύγια καὶ τὰ αἰχμάλωτα, πολλοὶ δὲ οἱ ἐπὶ τούτοις 
ἐπὶ τὰ ὄρη. τὰ δὲ ἐπιτήδεια πολλὰ ἦν λαμβάνειν, ; ὄντες ἀπόμαχοι ἦσαν, διπλάσιά τε ἐπιτήδεια ἔδει 
ἦσαν δὲ καὶ χαλκώμασι παμπόλλοις κατεσκευασμέ | πορίζεσθαι καὶ φέρεσθαι πολλῶν τῶν ἀνθρώπων 
vat ai οἰκίαι, ὧν οὐδὲν ἔφερον οἱ Ἕλληνες οὐδὲ τοὺς ὄντων. δόξαν δὲ ταῦτα, ἐκήρυξαν οὕτω ποιεῖν. ἐπεὶ 14 
ἀνθρώπους ἐδίωκον, ὑποφειδόμενοι εἴ πως ἐθελήσειαν δὲ ἀριστήσαντες ἐπορεύοντο, ὑποστήσαντες ἐν τῷ 
90 οἱ Καρδοῦχοι διιέναι αὐτοὺς ὡς διὰ φιλίας τῆς χώρας, 90 στενῷ οἱ στρατηγοί, εἴ τι εὑρίσκοιεν τῶν εἰρημένων 
ἐπείπερ βασιλεῖ πολέμιοι ἦσαν - τὰ μέντοι ἐπιτήδεια μὴ ἀφειμένον, ἀφῃροῦντο, οἱ δ᾽ ἐπείθοντο, πλὴν εἴ 
ὅπου τις ἐπιτυγχάνοι ἐλάμβανον - ἀνάγκη γὰρ ἦν. τίς τι ἔκλεψεν, οἷον, ἢ παιδὸς ἐπιθυμήσας ἢ γυναικὸς 
οἱ δὲ Καρδοῦχοι οὔτε καλούντων ὑπήκουον οὔτε ἄλλο τῶν εὐπρεπῶν. καὶ ταύτην μὲν τὴν ἡμέραν οὕτως 
φιλικὸν οὐδὲν ἐποίουν. | ἐπορεύθησαν, τὰ μέν TL μαχόμενοι τὰ δὲ καὶ ἀναπαυ- 


25 όμενοι. 
ete itl ewe ce a “,ὦ»ν΄νἝν " . ᾿ March in a storm under attack. Dispute between Chirisophus 
25 Ἐπεὶ δὲ οἱ τελευταῖοι τῶν Ἑλλήνων κατέβαινον εἰς 10 and Xenophon. 


x , > A ~ »¥ + A 4 ‘ 3 δὲ AA ΄ ,΄ \ λ. , > 
τὰς κώμας ἀπὸ τοῦ ἄκρου ἤδη σκοταῖοι.---- διὰ γὰρ Εἰς δὲ τὴν ὑστεραίαν γίγνεται χειμὼν πολύς, ἀναγ- 15 
" ie Ν > ε Ν » ») 
τὸ στενὴν εἶναι τὴν ὁδὸν ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν ἡ ἀνάβα- καῖον δ᾽ ἦν πορεύεσθαι: οὐ γὰρ ἣν ἱκανὰ τἀπιτή- 
~ "ν. ~ In / > , 
σις αὐτοῖς ἐγένετο καὶ κατάβασις ---- τότε δὴ συλλε- | Sera. καὶ ἡγεῖτο μὲν Χειρίσοφος, ὠπισθοφυλάκει 


An attack in the rear. Captives set free, and animals left behind. 


118 ANABASIS IV. 1. 16-22. 


, o ‘ c ; b | li > , Τ 
δὲ Ξενοφῶν. καὶ οἱ πολέμιοι ἰσχυρῶς ἐπετίθεντο, 16 
καὶ στενῶν ὄντων τῶν χωρίων ἐγγὺς προσιόντες ἐτό- 

. Σ Ἅ Nl > , εν 
ἕευον καὶ ἐσφενδόνων - ὦστε ἠναγκάζοντο ot Ελλη- 
νες ἐπιδιώκοντες καὶ πάλιν ἀναχάζοντες σχολῇ πορεύ- 
δεσθαι. καὶ θαμινὰ παρήγγελλεν ὁ Ἐενοφῶν ὑπομέ 
νειν, ὅτε οἱ πολέμιοι ἰσχυρῶς ἐπικέοιντο. ἐνταῦθα 617 


/ ¥ Ἂ Ψ ~ ε / / 
Χειρίσοφος ἄλλοτε μὲν ὅτε παρεγγυῳτο ὑπέμενε, τότε 
δὲ οὐχ ὑπέμενεν, ἀλλ᾽ ἦγε ταχέως καὶ παρηγγύα ἕπε- 

Ψ a > ¢ a , ¥ 1 9? 
σθαι, ὥστε δῆλον ἦν ὅτι πρᾶγμά τι εἴη - σχολὴ ὃ 
' 3 ὕ 3 ~ ’ ‘ ¥ “ “ Ψ 
10 οὐκ ἦν ἰδεῖν παρελθόντι τὸ αἴτιον τῆς σπουδῆς: ὥστε 
ε 4 ε al ἊΝ 3 / “~ > / 
ἡ πορεία ὁμοία φυγῇ ἐγίγνετο τοῖς ὀπισθοφύλαξι. 
\ My -~ = “ > ‘ 2 Ν in 
καὶ ἐνταῦθα ἀποθνήσκει ἀνὴρ ἀγαθὸς Λακωνικὸς 18 
Κλεώνυμος τοξευθεὶς διὰ τῆς ἀσπίδος καὶ τῆς σπο- 

“ 3 Ν i Ἅ / > ‘ Ἂ 
λάδος εἰς τὰς πλευράς, καὶ Βασίας ᾿Αρκὰς διαμπερὲς 
τὸτὴν κεφαλήν. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἀφίκοντο ἐπὶ σταθμόν, εὐθὺς 19 

΄ ΓῚ »ᾳ. 
ὥσπερ εἶχεν ὁ Ἐενοφῶν ἐλθὼν πρὸς τὸν Χειρίσοφον 
3 “~ . bid ψ ε ll 3 3 3 rl 
ἠτιᾶτο αὐτὸν ὅτι οὐχ ὑπέμεινεν, ἀλλ᾽ ἠναγκάζοντο 
φεύγοντες ἅμα μάχεσθαι. καὶ νῦν δύο καλώ τε καὶ 
ἀγαθὼ ἄνδρε τέθνατον καὶ οὔτε ἀνελέσθαι οὔτε θάψαι 
20 ἐδυνάμεθα. ἀποκρίνεται 6 Χειρίσοφος, Βλέψον, ἔφη; 309 
Ν | ae Hy ly. ys € ¥ / > ld ᾽ 3 
πρὸς τὰ ὄρη καὶ ἰδὲ ὡς ἄβατα πάντα ἐστί" μία ὃ 
yl ὁδὲ ἃ εξ νυν > θί μ ἡ , 3 θ ’ 
αὕτη ὁδὸς ἣν ὁρᾷς ὀρθία, καὶ ἐπὶ ταύτῃ ἀνθρώπων 
¢ ἴω ν»Ἅ / » ἊΝ Δ ἤ 
ὁρᾶν ἔξεστί σοι ὄχλον τοσοῦτον, ot κατειληφότες 

/ Ν ¥ ~ » > ". ¥ Ἃ 
φυλάττουσι τὴν ἔκβασιν. TavT ἔγω ἔσπευδον καὶ 21 

x Δ / > € “ ¥ , al 

25 διὰ τοῦτό σε οὐχ ὑπέμενον, εἴ πως δυναίμην φθάσαι 

py, iy Ν ε / 4 > ε al 
πρὶν κατειλῆφθαι τὴν ὑπερβολήν - οἱ δ᾽ ἡγεμόνες 
οὗς ἔχομεν οὔ φασιν εἶναι ἄλλην ὁδόν. ὁ δὲ Fevo-2 
dav λέγει, ᾿Αλλ᾽ ἐγὼ ἔχω δύο ἄνδρας. ἐπεὶ γὰρ 

“ “ ν ἴω 
ἡμῖν πράγματα παρεῖχον, ἐνηδρεύσαμεν, ὁπερ ἡμᾶς 


ANABASIS IV. 1. 23-28. 119 


,. ἴω 
καὶ ἀναπνεῦσαι ἐποίησε, καὶ ἀπεκτείναμέν τινας 
AUT \ κι , a > A , 
αὐτῶν, καὶ ζῶντας προυθυμήθημεν λαβεῖν avrov τού- 
του ἕνεκα ὅπως ἡγεμόσιν εἰδόσι τὴν χώραν χρησαῖ- 


μεθα. 


Xenophon’s two prisoners. One is made guide. Call for volunteers 
to seize a height. 


hr ᾿. > ~ > Υ͂ ~ > , »ν 
5 Καὶ εὐθὺς ἀγαγόντες τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ἤλεγχον 23 
διαλαβόντες εἴ τινα εἰδεῖεν ἄλλην ὁδὸν ἢ τὴν φανε- 
ράν. ὁ μὲν οὖν ἕτερος οὐκ ἔφη μάλα πολλῶν φόβων 
’ > ‘ ἂ oN > 4 ¥ 
προσαγομένων - ἐπεὶ δὲ οὐδὲν ὠφέλιμον ἔλεγεν, 
δ en “ Εν» a / ε δὲ 4 \ ¥ 
ὁρῶντος τοῦ ἑτέρου κατεσφάγη. ὁ δὲ λοιπὸς ἔλεξεν 24 
ων hy A ‘ ἴω 3 Ἢ biel y 9 ἴω 
100TL οὗτος μεν διὰ ταῦτα οὐ φαίη εἰδέναι ὅτι αὐτῷ 
ae θ , 3 “ » ἃ ὃ Hn MI » 5 ὃ Ud AN 
ἐτύγχανε θυγάτηρ ἐκεῖ Tap ἀνδρὶ ἐκδεδομένη " αὑτὸς 
>| ΄ » ‘ ‘ ε / , 
δ᾽ ἔφη ἡγήσεσθαι δυνατὴν καὶ ὑποζυγίοις πορεύε- 
εῷ ἡ 3 , πὴ ast aa 3 > A ΄ 
σθαι ὁδόν. ἐρωτώμενος δ᾽ εἰ εἴη τι ἐν αὐτῇ δυσπά- 2% 
5 ¥ ‘ 
ριτον χωρίον, ἔφη εἶναι ἄκρον ὃ εἰ μή τις προκατα- 
15 λήψοιτο, ἀδύνατον ἔσεσθαι παρελθεῖν. ἐνταῦθα δ᾽ 26 
Ὄ » ᾽ ‘ \ ν᾿ Ἃ 
ἐδόκει συγκαλέσαντας λοχαγοὺς καὶ πελταστὰς καὶ 
τῶν ὁπλιτῶν λέγειν τε τὰ παρόντα καὶ ἐρωτᾶν εἴ τις 
Ss A ¥ Ψ A 3 θὲ 0 >. > , 
αὐτῶν ἔστιν ὅστις ἀνὴρ ἀγαθὸς ἐθέλοι ἂν γενέσθαι 
ν᾿ Int 20 \ 4 A e dl ‘din 
καὶ ὑποστὰς ἐθελοντὴς πορεύεσθαι. ὑφίσταται τῶν 27 
20 μὲν ὁπλιτῶν ᾿Αριστώνυμος Μεθυδριεὺς ᾿Αρκὰς καὶ 
᾿Αγασίας Στυμφάλιος ᾿Αρκάς, ἀντιστασιάζων δὲ αὐ- 
τοῖς Καλλίμαχος Παρράσιος ᾿Αρκὰς - καὶ οὗτος ἔφη 
ἐθέλειν πορεύεσθαι προσλαβὼν ἐθελοντὰς ἐκ παντὸς 
ΜᾺ Vd A / ¥ 75 bid ν 
τοῦ στρατεύματος - ἐγὼ γάρ, ἔφη; οἶδα ὁτι ἐψονται 
Or ‘ a / 3 Ὁ“ Ε μὰ 3 ’ ᾿" an 
25 πολλοὶ TOV νέων ἐμοῦ ἡγουμένον. ἐκ τούτου EPWTW- 28 
σιν εἴ τις καὶ τῶν γυμνήτων ταξιάρχων ἐθέλοι oup- 
πορεύεσθαι. ὑφίσταται ᾿Αριστέας Χῖος, ὃς πολλα- 
χοῦ πολλοῦ ἄξιος τῇ στρατιᾷ εἰς τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐγένετο. 


190 ANABASIS IV. 2. 1-5. 


The attacking party set forth, while Xenophon makes a diversion. 
The enemy roll huge stones down the mountain. An outpost 
captured. 


II. Kai ἦν μὲν δείλη, οἱ δ᾽ ἐκέλευον αὐτοὺς ἐμφα- 
γόντας πορεύεσθαι. καὶ τὸν ἡγεμόνα. δήσαντες πα- 
ραδιδόασιν αὐτοῖς, καὶ συντίθενται τὴν μὲν νύκτα, 

ν Ν 
ἣν λάβωσι τὸ ἄκρον, τὸ χωρίον φυλάττειν, ἅμα δὲ 
ill ΗΕ Ful wl / ral , Ἃ ln," Ν ¥ 
δτῇ ἡμέρᾳ TH σάλπιγγι σημαΐνειν - καὶ τοὺς μὲν ἄνω 

I ll Ν Ν 
ὄντας ἰέναι ἐπὶ τοὺς κατέχοντας τὴν φανερὰν ἔκβα- 
> Ν Ν / 3 / ε bal 
ow, αὐτοὶ δὲ συμβοηθήσειν ἐκβαίνοντες ws av 
“ἐν Ἂ 4 
δύνωνται τάχιστα. ταῦτα συνθέμενοι οἱ μὲν ἐπορεύ- 
“" ν . »ν ᾽ 
ovto πλῆθος ὡς δισχίλιοι: καὶ ὕδωρ πολὺ ἦν ἐξ 
ιοοὐρανοῦ- Ξενοφῶν δὲ ἔχων τοὺς ὀπισθοφύλακας 
~ | bid “~ 
ἡγεῖτο πρὸς τὴν φανερὰν ἔκβασιν, ὅπως ταύτῃ τῇ 
~ o Ἀ ε / 
ὁδῷ οἱ πολέμιοι προσέχοιεν TOV νοῦν Kal ὡς μάλιστα 
Re ε ld 3 \ de > a (ὃ ε 
λάθοιεν οἱ περιιόντες. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἦσαν ἐπὶ χαράδρᾳ οἱ 
ἃ ¥ > 
ὀπισθοφύλακες ἣν ἔδει διαβάντας πρὸς τὸ ὄρθιον ἐκ- 
ἴω “ 
15 βαίνειν, τηνικαῦτα ἐκυλίνδουν οἱ βάρβαροι ὁλοιτρό- 
« ra , ri ᾿.. aN 4 A , 
yous ἁμαξιαίους Kat μείζους καὶ ἐλάττους, ot φερόμε- 
ἊΝ Ἃ 
νοὶ πρὸς τὰς πέτρας παίοντες διεσφενδονῶντο - καὶ 
/ 7 \ / "4 ΡΥ vt “ὃ ¥ 
παντάπασιν οὐδὲ πελάσαι οἷόν T HY TH εἰσόδω. EVLOL 
ἣ ω ὧν > ‘\ / 5 , TAX 3 
δὲ τῶν λοχαγῶν, εἰ μὴ ταύτῃ δύναιντο, ἀλλῃ ἐπει- 
φρρῶντο. καὶ ταῦτα ἐποίουν μέχρι σκότος ἐγένετο " 
“) fl 
ἐπεὶ δὲ ᾧοντο ἀφανεῖς εἶναι ἀπιόντες, τότε ἀπῆλθον 
ἐπὶ τὸ δεῖπνον - ἐτύγχανον δὲ καὶ ἀνάριστοι ὄντες 


A / ε “ / 
αὐτῶν οἱ ὀπισθοφυλακήσαντες! οἱ μέντοι πολέμιοι 


οὐδὲν ἐπαύσαντο δι᾽ ὅλης τῆς νυκτὸς κυλινδοῦντες 
ο"τοὺς λίθους - τεκμαίρεσθαι δ᾽ ἦν τῷ ψόφῳ. οἱ δ᾽ 
ἔχοντες τὸν ἡγεμόνα κύκλῳ περιιόντες καταλαμβά- 
νουσι τοὺς φύλακας ἀμφὶ πῦρ καθημένους - καὶ τοὺς 


ANABASIS IV. 2. 6.11. 21 


Ν ᾿ δὲ ὃ A 3 Ν > 
μὲν κατακανόντες τοὺς δὲ καταδιώξαντες αὐτοὶ ἐν- 
ay? »¥ ε » ~ 
ταῦθ᾽ ἔμενον ὡς TO ἄκρον κατέχοντες. οἱ δ᾽ οὐ κατεῖ- 
> A \ > ε x σι » Oy ε Ἂ 
χον; ἀλλὰ μαστὸς ἣν ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν παρ᾽ ὃν ἦν ἡ στενὴ 

ν ~ > = al 

αὕτη ὁδὸς ἐφ᾽ 7 ἐκάθηντο οἱ φύλακες. ἔφοδος μέντοι 
ὅ αὐτόθεν ἐπὶ τοὺς πολεμίους ἦν οἱ ἐπὶ τῇ φανερᾷ ὁδῷ 
δ μίους ἦν οἱ ἐπὶ τῇ φανερᾷ ὁδᾷ 


ἐκάθηντο. 
Battle for the heights. One hill captured. 


Kat τὴν μὲν νύκτα ἐνταῦθα διήγαγον - ἐπεὶ δ᾽ 
ἡμέρα ὑπέφαινεν, ἐπορεύοντο σιγῇ συντεταγμένοι ἐπὶ 
‘ ’ i Ἂ ε “ 3 "αἱ ν > ἊΨ 
τοὺς πολεμίους - καὶ γὰρ ὁμίχλη ἐγένετο, woT ἔλα- 
10 ov ἐγγὺς προσελθόντες. ἐπεὶ δὲ εἶδον ἀλλήλους, 7H 
τε σάλπιγξ ἐφθέγξατο καὶ ἀλαλάξαντες ἵεντο ἐπὶ 
τοὺς ἀνθρώπους : οἱ δὲ οὐκ ἐδέξαντο, ἀλλὰ λιπόντες 
ly, € x‘ / > al > Na » ‘ 
τὴν ὁδὸν φεύγοντες ὀλίγοι ἀπέθνῃσκον - εὔζωνοι yap 
> ε δὲ 2 by ‘il > ra ἊΝ al 
ἦσαν. οἱ ὃὲ ἀμφὶ Χειρίσοφον ἀκούσαντες τῆς σαλ- 
Ψ ΔΝ ν ¥ Ν i \ ε ld 
ls muyyos εὐθὺς ἵεντο ἄνω κατὰ τὴν φανερὰν ὁδόν - 
»ν 4 ~ ἴω A 5 ἴω Ἂ ly > 
ἄλλοι δὲ τῶν στρατηγῶν κατὰ ἀτριβεῖς ὁδοὺς ἐπο- 
ρεύοντο ἧ ἔτυχον ἕκαστοι ὄντες, καὶ ἀναβάντες ὡς 
φῷ ἡ ee > 4 ‘and / ‘ ἊΝ 
ἐδύναντο ἀνίμων ἀλλήλους τοῖς δόρασι. καὶ οὗτοι 
πρῶτοι συνέμιξαν τοῖς προκαταλαβοῦσι τὸ χωρίον. 
20 Ξενοφῶν δὲ ἔχων τῶν ὀπισθοφυλάκων τοὺς ἡμίσεις 
ἐπορεύετο ἧπερ οἱ τὸν ἡγεμόνα ἔχοντες - εὐοδωτάτη 
γὰρ ἦν τοῖς ὑποζυγίοις - τοὺς δὲ ἡμίσεις ὄπισθεν 
τῶν ὑποζυγίων ἔταξε. πορευόμενοι δ᾽ ἐντυγχάνουσι! 10 
λόφῳ ὑπὲρ τῆς ὁδοῦ κατειλημμένῳ ὑπὸ τῶν πολε- 
‘ “Ἢ a a > ld > > Υ͂ “ἡ ὃ “ἢν θ > ‘ 
25 μίων, οὗς ἢ ἀποκόψαι ἦν ἀνάγκη ἢ διεζεῦχθαι ἀπὸ 
an ¥ ε / \ 9 Ν \ Ἄ > , 
τῶν ἄλλων Ἑλλήνων. καὶ αὐτοὶ μὲν av ἐπορεύθη- 
σαν ἧπερ οἱ ἄλλοι, τὰ δὲ ὑποζύγια οὐκ ἦν ἄλλῃ 
ἢ ταύτῃ ἐκβῆναι. ἔνθα δὴ παρακελευσάμενοι ἀλλή-11 
λοις προσβάλλουσι πρὸς τὸν λόφον ὀρθίοις τοῖς 


33 ANABASIS IV. 2. 12-16. 


λόχοις, οὐ κύκλῳ ἀλλὰ καταλιπόντες ἄφοδον Tots 

/ | - 4 i, / A > Ν 
πολεμίοις εἰ βούλοιντο φεύγειν. καὶ τέως μὲν αὑτοὺς 12 

» ral ν 3 ἥ bia ¢ / 

ἀναβαίνοντας ὅπῃ ἐδύναντο ἕκαστος οἱ βάρβαροι 

ἐτόξευον καὶ ἔβαλλον, ἐγγὺς δ᾽ οὐ προσίεντο, ἀλλὰ 

iy , Ν / ‘ ie MN / 

δ φυγῇ λείπουσι τὸ χωρίον. Kal τοῦτόν τε παρεληλύ- 

|  Υ ‘ ν ε ἴω » 
θεσαν οἱ Ἕλληνες, καὶ ἕτερον ὁρῶσιν ἔμπροσθεν 
λόφον κατεχόμενον ἐπὶ τοῦτον αὖθις ἐδόκει πορεύε- 


σθαι. 
Two more hills captured, and the first lost. 


Ἐννοήσας δ᾽ ὁ Ξενοφῶν μή, εἰ ἔρημον καταλίποι 13 
ιτὸτὸν ἡλωκότα λόφον, καὶ πάλιν λαβόντες οἵ πολέμιοι 
ἐπιθοῖντο τοῖς ὑποζυγίοις παριοῦσιν ---- ἐπὶ πολὺ δ᾽ 
ἣν τὰ ὑποζύγια, ἅτε διὰ στενῆς τῆς ὁδοῦ πορευόμενα 
--- καταλείπει ἐπὶ τοῦ λόφου λοχαγοὺς Κηφισόδωρον 
Κηφισοφῶντος ᾿Αθηναῖον καὶ ᾿Αμφικράτην ᾿Αμφιδή- 
15p.ov ᾿Αθηναῖον καὶ ᾿Αρχαγόραν ᾿Αργεῖον φυγάδα, 
αὐτὸς δὲ σὺν τοῖς λοιποῖς ἐπορεύετο ἐπὶ τὸν δεύτερον 
, ΝΟ a , ‘ a eI oe ¥ 
λόφον, καὶ τῷ αὐτῷ τρόπῳ καὶ τοῦτον αἱροῦσιν. ETL14 
> MAT ΄ \ κ > fs , 
δ᾽ αὐτοῖς τρίτος μαστὸς λοιπὸς ἦν πολὺ ὀρθιώτατος 
Β " Ws tg ll. li ‘ ᾽ ἴω. “ 

ὁ ὑπὲρ τῆς ἐπὶ TO πυρὶ καταληφθείσης φυλακῆς τῆς 
ο0 νυκτὸς ὑπὸ τῶν ἐθελοντῶν. ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἐγγὺς ἐγένοντο 15 
οἱ Ἕλληνες, λείπουσιν οἱ βάρβαροι ἀμαχητὶ τὸν 

ν ἴω 

μαστόν, ὦστε θαυμαστὸν πᾶσι γενέσθαι, καὶ ὑπώ- 

πτευον δείσαντας αὐτοὺς μὴ κυκλωθέντες πολιορκοῖν- 

το ἀπολιπέιν. οἱ δ᾽ ἄρα ἀπὸ τοῦ ἄκρου καθορῶντες 

~~ = ᾽ iP Ν ἃ ly, > " 

257a ὄπισθεν γιγνόμενα πάντες ἐπὶ τοὺς ὀπισθοφύλα- 

Kas ἐχώρουν. καὶ Ξενοφῶν μὲν σὺν τοῖς νεωτάτοις 16 
> Va » νυ ‘ ¥ Ν \ ¥ > ᾽ 

ἀνέβαινεν ἐπὶ τὸ ἄκρον, τοὺς δὲ ἄλλους ἐκέλευσεν 

_cc- ὑπάγειν, ὅπως οἱ τελευταῖοι λόχοι προσμίξειαν, καὶ 

λθ ld ‘ ᾽ν ὁδὲ 3 tl ἃ .: λ “ A 4 θ Ν, 

προελθόντας κατὰ τὴν ὁδὸν ἐν τῷ ὁμαλῷ θέσθαι τὰ 


ANABASIS IV. 2. 17-23. 


Ψ = fa, , a ’ 5 3 

ὅπλα εἶπε. καὶ ἐν τούτῳ τῷ χρόνῳ ἦλθεν ᾿Αρχαγό- 1Ἱ 
Β » ~ 

pas ὁ Apyetos πεφευγώς, καὶ λέγει ὡς ἀπεκόπησαν 

> ‘ “ ~ 

ἀπὸ τοῦ λόφου Kat ὅτι τεθνᾶσι Κηφισόδωρος καὶ 


᾿Αμφικράτης καὶ ἄλλοι ὅσοι μὴ ἁλάμενοι κατὰ τῆς Tes 


΄“ ΝΜ 
5 πέτρας πρὸς τοὺς ὀπισθοφύλακας ἀφίκοντο. Sala 


Negotiations for a truce. General attack of the natives. 
Burial of the dead. 
ii \ 
Ταῦτα δὲ διαπραξάμενοι οἱ βάρβαροι ἧκόν ἐπ᾿ 18 
3 ’ , ἬΝ “ “, 
ἀντίπορον λόφον τῷ μαστῷ καὶ Ξενοφῶν διελέγετο 
3 ~ > ε “ 
αὐτοῖς δι᾿ ἑρμηνέως περὶ σπονδῶν καὶ τοὺς νεκροὺς 
> al μ᾿ 
ἀπήτει. οἱ δὲ ἔφασαν ἀποδώσειν ἐφ᾽ ᾧ μὴ κάειν τὰς 19 
> ἴω ἊΜ 
10 οἰκίας. συνωμολόγει ταῦτα ὁ Ἐενοφῶν. ἐν ᾧ δὲ τὸ 
\ TAX , / ε δὲ ΜᾺ ᾿ 
μὲν ἄλλο στράτευμα παρῇει οἱ δὲ ταῦτα διελέγοντο, 
af © 2 Ml ‘a 
πάντες οἱ EK τούτου τοῦ τόπου συνερρύησαν. ἐνταῦθα 20 
Ψ ε 
ἵσταντο οἱ πολέμιοι, καὶ ἐπεὶ ἤρξαντο καταβαίνειν 
> ‘ ~ ἴω x Int ¥ ¥ ‘ bid 
ἀπὸ τοῦ μαστοῦ πρὸς τοὺς ἄλλους ἔνθα τὰ ὅπλα 
¥ Y ‘ κι 
15 ἔκειτο, ἵεντο δὴ οἱ πολέμιοι πολλῷ πλήθει καὶ θορύβῳ: 
[ 
Ἂ 3 \ > “ἱ ᾿. ~ fig ἴω ~ 
Kal ἐπεὶ ἐγένοντο ἐπὶ τῆς κορυφῆς τοῦ μαστοῦ ad’ 
ΓῚ a 
ov Ἐενοφῶν κατέβαινεν, ἐκυλίνδουν πέτρους - καὶ ἑνὸς 
x / ~ / mame ~ \ € ε 
μὲν κατέαξαν τὸ σκέλος, Ἐενοφῶντα δὲ ὁ ὑπασπι- 
Ν » ἣ 3 
στὴς ἔχων τὴν ἀσπίδα ἀπέλιπεν - Εὐρύλοχος δὲ 21 
ὦ Ὁ ᾿ > ‘ ἊΝ κι καὶ ΄ . 
20 Λουσιεὺς ᾿Αρκὰς προσέδραμεν αὐτῷ ὁπλίτης, καὶ 
i. > ‘died ld > 
πρὸ ἀμφοῖν προβεβλημένος ἀπεχώρει, Kal οἱ ἄλλοι 
Ν ‘ wb ' a 
πρὸς τοὺς συντεταγμένους ἀπῆλθον. ἐκ δὲ τούτου 22 
~ ε ἊΜ 3 vd Ἂ ε “ ᾽ν 3 Υ͂ 
πᾶν ὁμοῦ ἐγένετο τὸ “Ἑλληνικόν, καὶ ἐσκήνησαν 
> aN dr Ἂ Ν λ A + Al \ 3 ’ 
αὐτοῦ ἐν πολλαῖς καὶ καλαῖς οἰκίαις καὶ ἐπιτηδείοις 
“ ‘ Ν 7 
25 δαψιλέσι - Kal yap οἶνος πολὺς ἦν, ὥστε ἐν λάκκοις 
“ > “A 
κονιατοῖς εἶχον. Ξενοφῶν δὲ καὶ Χειρίσοφος διεπρά- 23 
ν , ‘ 
Eavro ὥστε λαβόντες τοὺς νεκροὺς ἀπέδοσαν Tov 


ty 9 
ANABASIS IV. 2. 24-28 and 3. 1. ANABASIS IV. 3. 2-6. 125 


ἡγεμόνα ' καὶ πάντα ἐποίησαν τοῖς ἀποθανοῦσιν ἐκ ποταμόν, εὖρος ὡς δίπλεθρον, ὃς ὁρίζει τὴν ᾿Αρμενίαν 

τῶν δυνατῶν, ὥσπερ νομίζεται ἀνδράσιν ἀγαθοῖς. καὶ τὴν τῶν Καρδούχων χώραν. καὶ οἱ “Ἕλληνες tal 
ταῦθα ἀνέπνευσαν ἄσμενοι ἰδόντες πεδίον - ἀπεῖχε 
δὲ τῶν ὀρέων ὁ ποταμὸς ἐξ ἢ ἑπτὰ στάδια τῶν Καρ- 

δ δούχων. τότε μὲν οὖν ηὐλίσθησαν μάλα ἡδέως καὶ 
τἀπιτήδεια ἔχοντες καὶ πολλὰ τῶν παρεληλυθότων 
πόνων μνημονεύοντες. ἑπτὰ γὰρ ἡμέρας ὅσασπερ 
ἐπορεύθησαν διὰ τῶν Καρδούχων πάσας μαχόμενοι 
διετέλεσαν, καὶ ἔπαθον κακὰ ὅσα οὐδὲ τὰ σύμπαντα 

τὸ ὑπὸ βασιλέως καὶ Τισσαφέρνους. ὡς οὖν ἀπηλλαγ- 
μένοι τούτων ἡδέως ἐκοιμήθησαν. 

“Awa δὲ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ὁρῶσιν ἱππέας που πέραν τοῦ 
ποταμοῦ ἐξωπλισμένους ὡς κωλύσοντας διαβαίνειν, 
πεζοὺς δ᾽ ἐπὶ ταῖς ὄχθαις παρατεταγμένους ἄνω τῶν 

15 ἱππέων ὡς κωλύσοντας εἰς τὴν ᾿Αρμενίαν ἐκβαίνειν. 
ἦσαν δ᾽ οὗτοι Ὀρόντα καὶ ᾿Αρτούχα ᾿Αρμένιοι καὶ 
Μάρδοι καὶ Χαλδαῖοι μισθοφόροι. ἐλέγοντο δὲ οἱ 
Χαλδαῖοι ἐλεύθεροί τε καὶ ἄλκιμοι εἶναι: ὅπλα δ᾽. 


Fighting the way. The Carduchian bowmen. 
Τῇ δὲ ὑστεραίᾳ ἄνευ ἡγεμόνος ἐπορεύοντο - μαχό- 34 
μενοι δ᾽ οἱ πολέμιοι καὶ ὅπῃ εἴη στενὸν χωρίον προ- 
“ , “ i, / ε “ bh, 
δ καταλαμβάνοντες ἐκώλυον Tas παρόδους. ὁπότε μὲν 25 
> ‘ , , -- ~ ¥ > / 
οὖν τοὺς πρώτους κωλύοιεν, Ξενοφῶν ὄπισθεν ἐκβαΐ- 

Ν Ν Ἂ ¥ ‘ > / ~ e an 
νων πρὸς τὰ ὄρη ἔλυε THY ἀπόφραξιν τῆς ὁδοῦ 
τοῖς πρώτοις, ἀνωτέρω πειρώμενος γίγνεσθαι τῶν 

“ ε / Ἂ “Ὁ Ν 9 ~ | 
κωλυόντων, ὁπότε δὲ τοῖς ὄπισθεν ἐπιθοῖντο, Xeupi- 26 
10 codos ἐκβαίνων καὶ πειρώμενος ἀνωτέρω γίγνεσθαι 
ἴω, / ¥ ᾽ν. 3 ἢ -~ / 
τῶν κωλυόντων ἔλυε τὴν ἀπόφραξιν τῆς παρόδου 
“Ὁ 3, Ἂ Ἃ ν bd > rl 3 a ᾽ν. 
τοῖς ὄπισθεν - καὶ ἀεὶ οὕτως ἐβοήθουν ἀλλήλοις καὶ 
> ~ b Υ͂ 3 al > Ἂ ᾿ ε ll 
ἰσχυρῶς ἀλλήλων ἐπεμέλοντο. ἦν δὲ Kal ὁπότεξι 
αὐτοῖς τοῖς ἀναβᾶσι πολλὰ πράγματα παρεῖχον οἱ 
15 βάρβαροι πάλιν καταβαίνουσιν - ἐλαφροὶ γὰρ ἦσαν 
Ψ ᾿.. 3 ra / > / > \ ᾽ν. 
ὥστε καὶ ἐγγύθεν φεύγοντες ἀποφεύγειν - οὐδὲν γὰρ 
εἶχον ἄλλο ἢ τόξα καὶ σφενδόνας. ἄριστοι δὲ τοξό- 28 
> Φ \ / > ᾽ν. / Ἃ xX / 
ται ἦσαν εἶχον δὲ τόξα ἐγγὺς τριπήχη; τὰ δὲ τοξεύ- 
/ a ὃ / ἢν δὲ hn. ‘ c / 
para πλέον ἢ Oumnxn: εἷλκον O€ Tas νευρᾶς οπότε 


> 4 Ἃ Ν λό ε δὲ ” θ 4 

εἶχον γέρρα μακρὰ καὶ λόγχας. αἱ ὃὲ οχὕαι αὗται 
~ " ΄ oe ae 

20 ἐφ᾽ ὧν παρατεταγμένοι οὗτοι ἦσαν τρία ἢ τέτταρα 
ld ~All “ a 3 "» . ὁδὸ δὲ ,) ε 
πλέθρα ἀπὸ τοῦ ποταμοῦ ἀπεῖχον - οὐδὸς OE μία ἢ 

ν A , 
ὁρωμένη ἦν ἄγουσα ἄνω ὥσπερ χειροποίητος " ταύτῃ 
an bi 3 \ \ ld 
ἐπειρῶντο διαβαίνειν οἱ Ἕλληνες. ἐπει δὲ πειρωμέ- 

ἴω ~ , ‘ 
νοις TO TE ὕδωρ ὑπὲρ τῶν μαστῶν ἐφαίνετο, καὶ τρα- 
Ἃ A 

250s ἦν ὁ ποταμὸς μεγάλοις λίθοις καὶ ὀλισθηροῖς, 
‘ ¥ > 3 a “5 να, | ae 3 δὲ , 
καὶ οὔτ᾽ ἐν τῷ ὕδατι τὰ ὅπλα ἦν ἔχειν (εἰ OE μή: 
κι A . ¢ ¥ 
ἥρπαζεν ὃ ποταμός), ἐπί τε τῆς κεφαλῆς τὰ ὅπλα εἴ 
ν") x bd “ Heil im Τ᾽ Ν 4 \ 
τις φέροι, γυμνοὶ ἐγίγνοντο πρὸς τὰ τοξεύματα καὶ 
“ ,) 
τἄλλα βέλη "- ἀνεχώρησαν καὶ αὐτοῦ ἐστρατοπεδεύ- 


ἢ x ‘ il “ / ~ > “ ‘ 

20 τοξεύοιεν πρὸς TO κάτω τοῦ τόξου τῷ ἀριστερῷ ποδὶ 
al ‘ \ A > ἡ Ἂ ΜΝ 

προσβαίνοντες. τὰ δὲ τοξεύματα ἐχώρει διὰ τῶν 

> ᾿ Ν ‘ ων , +] ἴω 4 > A 

ἀσπίδων καὶ διὰ τῶν θωράκων. ἐχρῶντο δὲ αὐτοῖς 

οἱ Ἕλληνες, ἐπεὶ λάβοιεν, ἀκοντίοις ἐναγκυλῶντες. 

ἐν τούτοις τοῖς χωρίοις οἱ Κρῆτες χρησιμώτατοι ἐγέ. 

ϑῦνοντο. ἦρχε δὲ αὐτῶν Στρατοκλῆς Κρής. 

The Armenian frontier. The passage of the Centrites disputed. 

III. Ταύτην δ᾽ ad τὴν ἡμέραν ηὐλίσθησαν ἐν ταῖς 


~ ἴω ‘a ~ Ἅ Ν 
κώμαις ταῖς ὑπὲρ τοῦ πεδίου τοῦ παρὰ τὸν Κεντρίτην δι ἡ , 
30 σαντο παρα TOV ποταμον. 


ANABASIS IV. 3. 7-12. 


Xenophon’s dream. A ford discovered. 


” \ \ a 
Ενθα δὲ αὐτοὶ τὴν πρόσθεν νύκτα ἦσαν ἐπὶ τοῦ 7 


Ν ἡ hs ἥ ‘ al 
ὄρους ἑώρων τοὺς Kapdovyous πολλοὺς συνειλεγμέ. 
νους ἐν τοῖς ὅπλοις. ἐνταῦθα δὴ πολλὴ ἀθυμία ἣν 
a F¢ aa) ἴω a“ 
τοῖς Ἕλλησιν, ὁρῶσι μὲν τοῦ ποταμοῦ THY δυσπο- 
“ ε vl hn Mn ᾽ ἥ ε “ 
δ ρίαν, ὁρῶσι δὲ τοὺς διαβαίνειν κωλύσοντας, ὁρῶσι 
δὲ ‘an , > ld Ν 4 
é tots διαβαίνουσιν ἐπικεισομένους τοὺς Kapdov- 
»” 
xous ὄπισθεν. ταύτην μὲν οὖν THY ἡμέραν καὶ νύκτα 
ἔμειναν ἐν πολλῇ ἀπορίᾳ ὅ Ξενοφῶν δὲ ὁ 
μ vy πολλῇ ἀπορίᾳ ὄντες. Ἐενοφῶν δὲ ovap 
> y nA 
εἶδεν - ἔδοξεν ἐν πέδαις δεδέσθαι, αὗται δὲ αὐτῷ 
3 ἤ “~ ν ~ Ἃ rl 
10 αὐτόμαται περιρρυῆναι, wate λυθῆναι καὶ διαβαίνειν 
ἡ > , eA ae > ¥ ‘ 
ὁπόσον ἐβούλετο. ἐπεὶ δὲ ὄρθρος ἦν, ἔρχεται πρὸς 
᾿ , ‘ , 7 2 , ¥ va! 
τὸν Χειρίσοφον καὶ λέγει ὅτι ἐλπίδας ἔχει καλῶς 
» Ν A "ον ΚΝ ε . ν , 
ἔσεσθαι, kai διηγεῖται αὐτῷ τὸ ὄναρ. 6 δὲ ἥδετό τε 
"ν᾿ ε 
καὶ ὡς τάχιστα ἕως ὑπέφαινεν ἐθύοντο πάντες παρόν- 
H ε “a aA ‘ λιὰ > Ay > 4 A 
15 TES οἱ στρατηγοί: Kal τὰ ἱερὰ Kaha ἦν εὐθὺς ἐπι TOU 
πρώτου. καὶ ἀπιόντες ἀπὸ τῶν ἱερῶν οἱ στρατηγοὶ 
b, ἊΝ ἊΝ A 
καὶ λοχαγοὶ παρήγγελλον TH στρατιᾷ ἀριστοποιεῖ- 
σθαι. 
‘ ἴω ων ~ 
Kai ἀριστῶντι τῷ Ξενοφῶντι προσέτρεχον δύο!το 
Wveavickw: ἤδεσαν γὰρ πάντες ὅτι ἐξείη αὐτῷ καὶ 
ἀριστῶντι καὶ δειπνοῦντι προσελθεῖν καὶ εἰ καθεύδοι 
ἐπεγείραντα εἰπεῖν, εἴ τίς τι ἔχοι τῶν πρὸς τὸν πόλε- 
i ᾽ν. ἢ ¥ ν / “ 
μον. καὶ τότε ἔλεγον ὅτι τυγχάνοιεν φρύγανα συλ-11 
λέγοντες ὡς ἐπὶ πῦρ, κάπειτα κατίδοιεν ἐν τῷ πέραν 
25 ἐν πέτραις καθηκούσαις ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν τὸν ποταμὸν γέ. 
Ἂ ν 
ροντά τε καὶ γυναῖκα καὶ παιδίσκας ὥσπερ μαρσί- 
πους ἱματίων κατατιθεμένους ἐν πέτρᾳ ἀντρώδει. 
ἰδοῦσι δὲ σφίσι δόξαι ἀσφαλὲς εἶναι διαβῆναι οὐδὲ 12 
γὰρ τοῖς πολεμίοις ἱππεῦσι προσβατὸν εἶναι κατὰ 


ANABASIS IV. 3. 13-17. 


Ὁ 3 , > ¥ » ~ 5» (ὃ 
τοῦτο. ἐκδύντες δ᾽ ἔφασαν ἔχοντες τὰ ἐγχειρίδια 
γυμνοὶ ὡς νευσόμενοι διαβαίνειν - πορευόμενοι δὲ 
πρόσθεν διαβῆναι πρὶν βρέξαι τὰ αἰδοῖα - καὶ δια- 

al Υ δ ε ’ aN 7 
βάντες, λαβόντες τὰ ἱμάτια πάλιν Ἠκειν. 

Plans for crossing the river. Paean sung at the ford. 


“ ‘ A 
δ Εὐθὺς οὖν 6 Ἐενοφῶν αὐτὸς τε ἔσπενδε Kat τοῖς 13 
νεανίσκοις ἐγχεῖν ἐκέλευε καὶ εὔχεσθαι τοῖς φήνασι 
~ A Wr » 
θεοῖς τά τε ὀνείρατα καὶ τὸν πόρον καὶ Ta λοιπὰ | 
9 , 2 ld “ 5° Ov Oy Ν dl 
ἀγαθὰ ἐπιτελέσαι. σπείσας δ᾽ εὐθὺς ἦγε τοὺς veavi- 
σκους παρὰ τὸν Χειρίσοφον, καὶ διηγοῦνται ταὐτά. 
10 ἀκούσας δὲ καὶ ὁ Χειρίσοφος σπονδὰς ἐποίει. σπεί- 14 
\ ~ \ ¥ 4 , 
σαντες δὲ τοῖς μὲν ἄλλοις παρήγγελλον συσκευά- 
li 
ζεσθαι, αὐτοὶ δὲ συγκαλέσαντες τοὺς στρατηγοὺς 
3 “Ἢ bd aA / ~ ἣ ‘ 
ἐβουλεύοντο ὅπως av κάλλιστα διαβαῖεν Kat τοὺς τε 
~ “ὦ , 
ἔμπροσθεν νικῷεν καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν ὄπισθεν μηδὲν πά- 
/ i» MA > ~ » \ 
ιόσχοιεν κακόν. Kal ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς Χειρίσοφον μὲν 15 
~ Ψ “ 
ἡγεῖσθαι καὶ διαβαίνειν ἔχοντα TO ἡμισυ τοῦ στρα- 
4 Ν δ᾽ ν » ε , ᾿ς =| “ 
τεύματος, τὸ δ᾽ ἥμισυ ἔτι ὑπομένειν σὺν Ἐενοφώῶντι; 
Ν ν κε 4 ‘ μ᾽ Ν 3 Nf 4 5 
τὰ δὲ ὑποζύγια καὶ τὸν ὄχλον ἐν μέσῳ τούτων ὃια- 
᾽ὔ 3 I! A “Ὁ Δ > 9. 4 
βαίνειν. ἐπεὶ δὲ ταῦτα καλῶς εἶχεν, ἐπορεύοντο " 16 
20 ἡγοῦντο δ᾽ οἱ νεανίσκοι ἐν ἀριστερᾷ ἔχοντες τὸν 
, εν SR ηι , ε , 
ποταμόν ὁδὸς δὲ ἦν ἐπὶ τὴν διάβασιν ὡς τέτταρες 
στάδιοι. 
Πορευομένων δ᾽ αὐτῶν ἀντιπαρῇσαν ai τάξεις τῶν 1Ἱ 
ε 4 > \ ἂν Ἂ x al x Ν 
ἱππέων. ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἦσαν κατὰ τὴν διάβασιν καὶ τὰς 
25 ὄχθας τοῦ ποταμοῦ, ἔθεντο τὰ ὅπλα, καὶ αὐτὸς πρῶ- 
V4 Nd "ν 5 i 3 ld 
tos Χειρίσοφος στεφανωσάμενος καὶ ἀποδὺς ἐλάμ- 
ae ‘ A ¥ “ 4 X 
Bave τὰ ὅπλα Kat τοῖς ἄλλοις πᾶσι παρήγγελλε, καὶ 
‘ A 3 Al ¥ hy lil » rl 
τοὺς λοχαγοὺς ἐκέλευεν ἄγειν τοὺς λόχους ὀρθίους, 


128 ANABASIS IV. 3. 18-23. 


hy Ν 3 3 »» ‘ » » ὃ σχ' 4 a ‘ 
τοὺς μὲν ἐν ἀριστερᾷ τοὺς δ᾽ ἐν δεξιᾷ ἑαυτοῦ. καὶ 18 
οἱ μὲν μάντεις ἐσφαγιάζοντο εἰς τὸν ποταμόν - ot δὲ 
Ν 
πολέμιοι ἐτόξευον καὶ ἐσφενδόνων - ἀλλ᾽ οὕπω ἐξι- 
rn > \ \ . ὼ ᾿ , > " 
κνοῦντο. ἐπεὶ δὲ καλὰ ἦν τὰ σφάγια, ἐπαιάνιζον 19 


ANABASIS 1V. 3. 24-28. 129 


Ξενοφῶν δ᾽ ἐπεὶ τὰ πέραν ἑώρα καλῶς γιγνόμενα; 24 
ἀπεχώρει τὴν ταχίστην πρὸς τὸ διαβαῖνον στρά- 
τευμα καὶ yap οἱ Καρδοῦχοι φανεροὶ ἤδη ἦσαν εἰς 
τὸ πεδίον καταβαίνοντες ὡς ἐπιθησόμενοι τοῖς τελευ- 


‘D ; | ¥ a 
ὅ πάντες οἱ στρατιῶται Kal ἀνηλάλαζον, συνωλόλυζον | "ταίοις. καὶ Χειρίσοφος μὲν τὰ ἄνω κατεῖχε, Λύκιος 25 
Σ i : 2 4 ° Ar > Ν > md ct Ὶ 4 A > “ > al 5 ὃ ~ ὅλ ~ 
δὲ καὶ ai γυναῖκες ἄπασαι- πολλαὶ yap ἦσαν ἑταῖ- δὲ σὺν ὀλίγοις ἐπιχειρήσας ἐπιδιῶξαι ἔλαβε τῶν 
0 \ A "εἰ 3 ly 4 
pat ἐν τῷ στρατεύματι. σκευοφόρων τὰ ὑπολειπόμενα καὶ μετὰ τούτων ἐσθῆτά 
bs , la 
τε καλὴν Kal ἐκπώματα. Kal τὰ μὲν σκευοφόρα τῶν 2 
A " 
Ἑλλήνων καὶ 6 ὄχλος ἀκμὴν διέβαινε, Ἐενοφῶν δὲ 
’ \ ‘ ὃ , 9 lf WM λ “0 
10 στρέψας πρὸς τοὺς Καρδούχους ἀντία τὰ oma ἐθετο, 
“A A > > ’; ’ 
καὶ παρήγγειλε τοῖς λοχαγοῖς κατ ἐνωμοτίας ποιὴ- 
~ ’; 3 > ᾽᾽ 
σασθαι ἕκαστον τὸν ἑαυτοῦ λόχον, παρ᾽ ἀσπίδα 
ν χα 4 Ἂ 
παραγαγόντας τὴν ἐνωμοτίαν ἐπὶ φάλαγγος " Kat 
Ἂ ‘ - Ἃ “ἣν 
τοὺς μὲν λοχαγοὺς καὶ τοὺς ἐνωμοτᾶρχους πρὸς τῶν 
ha! 4 4 x 
15 Καρδούχων ἰέναι, οὐραγοὺς δὲ καταστήσασθαι πρὸς 


Chirisophus crosses easily, but Xenophon is attacked. 
‘ al Ν ral \ ‘ 
Kat Χειρίσοφος μὲν ἐνέβαινε καὶ οἱ σὺν ἐκείνῳ" 20 
ἊΜ ἴω ‘ 
ὁ δὲ Ξενοφῶν τῶν ὀπισθοφυλάκων λαβὼν τοὺς εὐζω- 
4 » ᾿ . “ / ly Ἃ ll \ 
ιονοτάτους ἔθει ἀνὰ κράτος πάλιν ἐπὶ τὸν πόρον τὸν 
Ν ‘ ¥ XN > Ν “ > 4 Ν 
κατὰ τὴν ἔκβασιν τὴν εἰς τὰ τῶν ᾿Αρμενίων Opn, 
᾿ Ν 
προσποιούμενος ταύτῃ διαβὰς ἀποκλείσειν τοὺς παρὰ 
‘ ‘ < ᾽ Ν A 
τὸν ποταμὸν ἱππέας. οἱ δὲ πολέμιοι ὁρῶντες μὲν 21 
~ b Ν ra > o »» ~ 
Tous ἀμφὶ Χειρίσοφον εὐπετῶς τὸ ὕδωρ περῶντας, 


ιὸ ὁρῶντες δὲ τοὺς ἀμφὶ Ἐενοφῶντα θέοντας εἰς τοὐμ- | του ποταμου. 
Chirisophus sends help. Xenophon repels an attack and crosses 
the river. 


Oi δὲ KapSodyou ὡς ἑώρων τοὺς ὀπιθοφύλακας 27 
τοῦ ὄχλου ψιλουμένους καὶ ὀλίγους ἤδη φαινομένους, 
θᾶττον δὴ ἐπῇσαν adds τινας ἄδοντες. ὁ δὲ Χειρί- 

0 σοφος, ἐπεὶ τὰ παρ᾽ αὐτῷ ἀσφαλῶς εἶχε, πέμπει 
παρὰ Ἐξενοφῶντα τοὺς πελταστὰς καὶ σφενδονήτας 
καὶ τοξότας καὶ κελεύει ποιεῖν ὅ τι ἂν παραγγέλλῃ. 
ἰδὼν δ᾽ αὐτοὺς διαβαίνοντας ὃ Ἐενοφῶν πέμψας ay-28 
γελον κελεύει αὐτοῦ μεῖναι ἐπὶ τοῦ ποταμοῦ μὴ δια- 

25 βάντας - ὅταν δ᾽ ἄρξωνται αὐτρὶ διαβαίνειν, ἐναντί- 
ovs ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν σφῶν ἐμβαίνειν ὡς διαβησομέ 
νους, διηγκυλωμένους τοὺς ἀκοντιστὰς καὶ ἐπιβε- 
βλημένους τοὺς τοξότας - μὴ πρόσὼ δὲ τοῦ ποταμοῦ 


“ i. > - ᾿ 
παλιν, δείσαντες μὴ ἀποκλεισθείησαν φεύγουσιν 
3 Ν i ε ἊΜ ~ - 
ἀνὰ κράτος ὡς πρὸς THY TOU ποταμοῦ ἄνω ἔκβασιν. 
3 ᾿.. A Ν in! ε | 3 » ¥ ¥ ‘ ‘ 
ἐπεὶ δὲ κατὰ THY ὁδὸν ἐγένοντο, ἔτεινον ἄνω πρὸς TO 
Ν / »ε is ld ¥ vi € ᾿ Ἃ 
ὅρος. Λύκιος δ᾽ ὁ τὴν τάξιν ἔχων τῶν ἱππέων καὶ 22 
> , ε . , a a A > Ν 
20 Αἰσχίνης ὁ τὴν τάξιν τῶν πελταστῶν τῶν ἀμφὶ Χει- 
᾽ν 
ρίσοφον ἐπεὶ ἑώρων ἀνὰ κράτος φεύγοντας, εἵποντο - 
ε δὲ “ ἃ Mead i , > \ 
οἱ 0€ στρατιῶται ἐβόων μὴ ἀπολείπεσθαι, ἀλλὰ συν- 
᾿ »” \ 
εκβαίνειν ἐπὶ τὸ Opos. Χειρίσοφος δ᾽ αὖ ἐπεὶ διέβη; 23 
‘ A ε La > sD 7 > he! Ν he! Ν 
τοὺς μὲν ἱππέας οὐκ ἐδίωκεν, εὐθὺς δὲ κατὰ τὰς προσ- 
/ Ἂ ν ἃ Ἂ Ν 3 al Alt, hy 
25 ἠκούσας ὄχθας ἐπὶ τὸν ποταμὸν ἐξέβαινεν ἐπὶ τοὺς 
¥ ' δ»ν ~ ~ 
ἄνω πολεμίους. οἱ δὲ ἄνω, ὁρῶντες μὲν τοὺς ἑαυτῶν 
ε dl , ε ~ > «€ / / b A 
ἱππέας φεύγοντας, ὁρῶντες δ᾽ ὁπλίτας σφίσιν ἐπιόν- 
τας; ἐκλείπουσι τὰ ὑπὲρ τοῦ ποταμοῦ ἄκρα. 


180 ANABASIS IV. 4. 29-34. 


7 poBai is δὲ ᾿ ἑαυτῷ ἤγγειλεν, ἐπει- 29 
ροβαίνειν. τοῖς δὲ παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ παρήγγειλεν, ἐπ 


δὰν σφενδόνη ἐξικνῆται καὶ ἀσπὶς ψοφῇ; παιανί- 
~ 3 ᾿. / My Ν 7 ᾽ 

σαντας θεῖν εἰς τοὺς πολεμίους - ἐπειδὰν δ᾽ ἀναστρέ. 
ψωσιν οἱ πολέμιοι καὶ ἐκ τοῦ ποταμοῦ ὁ σαλπικτὴς 
ral Ν if > ἦ Ν᾿ / ε ἊΝ 

δ σημήνῃ τὸ πολεμικόν, ἀναστρέψαντας ἐπὶ δόρυ ἡγεῖ- 
Ν i, > 4 ily Ν al Ν a 

σθαι μὲν τοὺς οὐραγούς, θεῖν δὲ πάντας καὶ διαβαΐ- 
νειν ὅτι τάχιστα ἧ ἕκαστος τὴν τάξιν εἶχεν, ὡς μὴ 
᾽ , > , Y ® ¥ ¥ ἃ 
ἐμποδίζειν ἀλλήλους - ὅτι οὗτος ἄριστος ἔσοιτο ὃς 


Ἅ "“ > ly / / ε \ ‘an 
dv πρῶτος ἐν τῷ πέραν γένηται. ot δὲ Καρδοῦχοι 30 


10 ὁρῶντες ὀλίγους ἤδη τοὺς λοιποὺς ---- πολλοὶ γὰρ καὶ 
τῶν μένειν τεταγμένων ᾧχοντο ἐπιμελόμενοι οἱ μὲν 
ε - € \ ~ ε 7 « ~ > ~ Ν 
ὑποζυγίων, οἱ δὲ σκευῶν, οἱ δ᾽ ἑταιρῶν ---- ἐνταῦθα δὴ 
ἐπέκειντο θρασέως καὶ ἤρχοντο σφενδονᾶν καὶ το- 
ξεύειν. 
ν 
15 Οἱ δὲ Ἕλληνες παιανίσαντες ὥρμησαν δρόμῳ ἐπ᾽ 31 
᾽ , ε ‘ > "Ὁ. 7 ‘ \ > ε 
αὐτούς - οἱ δὲ οὐκ ἐδέξαντο: καὶ γὰρ ἦσαν ὠπλι- 
σμένοι ὡς μὲν ἐν τοῖς ὄρεσιν ἱκανῶς πρὸς τὸ ἐπιδρα- 
~ i il Ἃ δὲ Ν 3 “~ , > 
μεῖν καὶ φεύγειν, πρὸς δὲ τὸ εἰς χεῖρας δέχεσθαι οὐχ 
ἱκανῶς. ἐν τούτῳ σημαίνει ὁ σαλπικτής - καὶ οὗ 82 
20 μὲν πολέμιοι ἔφευγον πολὺ ἔτι θᾶττον, οἱ δὲ Ἕλληνες 
τἀναντία στρέψαντες ἔφευγον διὰ τοῦ ποταμοῦ ὅτι 
τάχιστα. τῶν δὲ πολεμίων οἱ μέν τινες αἰσθόμενοι 33 
»Ν ah. Ἂ \ Ἃ / > a 
πάλιν ἔδραμον ἐπὶ τὸν ποταμὸν καὶ τοξεύοντες ὀλί- 
» ε \ ,μ. ἃ , ¥ ἴω 
yous ἐτρωσαν; οἱ δὲ πολλοὶ καὶ πέραν ὄντων τῶν 
95 Ἑλλήνων ἔτι φανεροὶ ἦσαν φεύγοντες. οἱ δὲ ὑπαν- 34 
τήσαντες ἀνδριζόμενοι καὶ προσωτέρω τοῦ καιροῦ 
a ν ~ ἴω 
προϊόντες ὕστερον τῶν μετὰ Ἐενοφῶντος διέβησαν 
πάλιν - καὶ ἐτρώθησαν τινες καὶ τούτων. 


, ν ' , sills 
Pee. ἀνα βολεως offrero fronget nti 


ANABASIS IV. 4. 1.7. 131 


March through Armenia. They pass the sources of the Tigris and 
come to the Teleboas. Visit of Tiribazus, the Persian governor. 


IV. Ἐπεὶ δὲ διέβησαν, συνταξάμενοι ἀμφὶ μέσον 
ε ld 3 il ὃ ν “ > ld δί hd 
ἡμέρας ἐπορεύθησαν διὰ τῆς Appevias πεδίον amay 
καὶ λείους γηλόφους οὐ μεῖον ἢ πέντε παρασάγγας - 
οὐ γὰρ ἦσαν ἐγγὺς τοῦ ποταμοῦ κῶμαι διὰ τοὺς πο- 
il x ‘ ‘ al 3 A ἃ 3 ral 
5 M€“ous τοὺς πρὸς τοὺς Kapdovxous. εἰς δὲ ἣν ἀφί- 
κοντο κώμην μεγάλη τε ἣν καὶ βασίλειον εἶχε τῷ 
σατράπῃ καὶ ἐπὶ ταῖς πλείσταις οἰκίαις τύρσεις ἐπή- 
σαν" ἐπιτήδεια δ᾽ ἣν δαψιλῆ. ἐντεῦθεν δ᾽ ἐπορεύ- 
θησαν σταθμοὺς δύο παρασάγγας δέκα μέχρι ὑπερ- 
ιοῆλθον τὰς πηγὰς τοῦ Τίγρητος ποταμοῦ. ἐντεῦθεν 
δ᾽ ἐπορεύθησαν σταθμοὺς τρεῖς παρασάγγας πεντε- 
καίδεκα ἐπὶ τὸν Τηλεβόαν ποταμόν. οὗτος δ᾽ ἦν 
‘ A 4 > » “A A b \ Ἂ 
καλὸς μέν, μέγας δ᾽ οὐ - κῶμαι δὲ πολλαὶ περὶ τὸν 
Ν > ε δ “ a > dl > A 
ποταμὸν ἦσαν. ὁ δὲ τόπος οὗτος Appevia ἐκαλεῖτο 
ε Ὗ ε ΄ὕἽ ΟΣ > > > » ’, 
ιὸ ἡ πρὸς ἑσπέραν. ὕπαρχος δ᾽ ἦν αὐτῆς Τιρίβαζος, 
€ iy. ~ - ἤ A ε la ll 
ὁ καὶ βασιλεῖ φίλος γενόμενος, Kal ὁπότε παρείη; 
οὐδεὶς ἄλλος βασιλέα ἐπὶ τὸν ἵππον ἀνέβαλλεν. 
οὗτος προσήλασεν ἱππέας ἔχων, καὶ προπέμψας 
ε - My ν , ~ ἊΜ » 
ἑρμηνέα εἶπεν ὅτι βούλοιτο διαλεχθῆναι τοῖς ap- 
90 χουσι. τοῖς δὲ στρατηγοῖς ἔδοξεν ἀκοῦσαι καὶ προσ- 
‘al > 3 ul 3 “ al θέ ε δὲ > 
ελθόντες eis ἐπήκοον ἠρώτων τί θέλοι. ὁ O€ εἶπεν 


«e by lh 
ὅτι σπείσασθαι βούλοιτο ἐφ᾽ ᾧ μήτε αὐτὸς τοὺς Eh- 


t 
~ 3 
ληνας ἀδικεῖν μήτε ἐκείνους κάειν τὰς οἰκίας, λαμ- 
βάνειν τε τἀπιτήδεια ὅσων δέοιντο. ἔδοξε ταῦτα τοῖς 
A ‘ 
2 στρατηγοῖς Kal ἐσπείσαντο ἐπὶ τούτοις. 
March of three days. Two heavy falls of snow. 
A x % 
Ἐντεῦθεν δ᾽ ἐπορεύθησαν σταθμοὺς τρεῖς διὰ 
" , ᾽ Ἂ rl 
πεδίου παρασάγγας πεντεκαίδεκα - καὶ Τιρίβαζος 


182 ANABASIS IV. 4. 8-13. 


Pl ¥ Ἂ ε μην / > / ε 
παρηκολούθει ἔχων τὴν ἑαυτοῦ δύναμιν ἀπέχων ὡς 
id \ 9 ’ > ; Ἃ / 
δέκα σταδίους - Kal ἀφίκοντο εἰς βασίλεια καὶ κώμας 
/ Ν ~ ll ᾿ / Fl 
πέριξ πολλὰς πολλῶν τῶν ἐπιτηδείων μεστάς. στρα- 
τοπεδευομένων δ᾽ αὐτῶν γίγνεται τῆς νυκτὸς χιὼν 
5 πολλή - καὶ ἕωθεν ἔδοξε διασκηνῆσαι τὰς τάξεις καὶ 
τοὺς στρατηγοὺς κατὰ τὰς κώμας - οὐ γὰρ ἑώρων 
πολέμιον οὐδένα καὶ ἀσφαλὲς ἐδόκει εἶναι διὰ τὸ 
“" κι , : A > <a , 9 
πλῆθος τῆς χιόνος. ἐνταῦθα εἶχον τὰ ἐπιτήδεια ὅσα 
ἐστὶν ἀγαθά, ἱερεῖα, σῖτον, οἴνους παλαιοὺς εὐώδεις, 
3 “ Ἂ ἤ “ν \ 2? 
το ἀσταφίδας, ὄσπρια παντοδαπά. τῶν δὲ ἀποσκεδαν- 
νυμένων τινὲς ἀπὸ τοῦ στρατοπέδου ἔλεγον ὅτι κατί- 
δοιεν στράτευμα καὶ νύκτωρ πολλὰ πυρὰ φαίνοιτο. 
ἐδόκει δὴ τοῖς στρατηγοῖς οὐκ ἀσφαλὲς εἶναι δια- 10 
σκηνοῦν, ἀλλὰ συναγαγεῖν τὸ στράτευμα πάλιν. 
» ~ Ἂ Ν Ἅ 3 / al 
τὸ ἐντεῦθεν συνῆλθον - καὶ yap ἐδόκει διαιθριάζειν. 
νυκτερευόντων δ᾽ αὐτῶν ἐνταῦθα ἐπιπίπτει χιὼν ἄπλε- 11 
ν > , "ν Ἃ bid " hy > ’ 
τος, ὦστε ἀποκρύψαι καὶ τὰ ὅπλα καὶ τοὺς ἀνθρώ- 
mi | 
mous ‘KaTakepevous: καὶ τὰ ὑποζύγια συνεπόδισεν 
ἡ χιών - καὶ πολὺς ὄκνος ἦν ἀνίστασθαι - κατακει- 
90 μένων γὰρ ἀλεεινὸν ἦν ἡ χιὼν ἐπιπεπτωκυῖα ὅτῳ 
᾿ , > ᾽ν δὲ 155] il αὶ ‘ 
μὴ παραρρνείη. ἐπεὶ δὲ Ἐενοφῶν ἐτόλμησε γυμνὸς 12 
3 In , al lt Mi. ld x ¥ 
ἀναστὰς σχίζειν ξύλα, τάχ᾽ ἀναστάς τις Kal ἄλλος 
" ; 3 v ¥ 3 ν᾿ ,) ἂν» 
ἐκείνου ἀφελόμενος ἔσχιζεν. ἐκ δὲ τούτου καὶ ἄλλοι 
ἀναστάντες πῦρ ἔκαον καὶ ἐχρίοντο " πολὺ γὰρ ἐν- 13 


. vO ee ~ ® > ἊΜ > > 2) / 
φόταυθα εὑρίσκετο χριμα, ᾧ EXPWYTO ἄντ ἐλαίου, 


ANABASIS IV. 4. 14-20. 133 


Village quarters. A Persian prisoner. Capture of the governor’s tent. 


N A 30 7 , , > > 

Mera ταῦτα ἐδόκει πάλιν διασκηνητέον εἶναι εἰς 14 
τὰς κώμας εἰς στέγας. ἔνθα δὴ οἱ στρατιῶται σὺν 

~ ~ “ δ Ά, 
πολλῇ κραυγῇ καὶ ἡδονῇ ἧἦὅσαν ἐπὶ τὰς στέγας καὶ 
τὰ ἐπιτήδεια - ὅσοι δὲ ὅτε τὸ πρότερον ἀπῇσαν τὰς 

3 al 3 ral ε ‘ > - “ ΟΝ 

δοἰκίας ἐνέπρησαν ὑπὸ ἀτασθαλίας δίκην ἐδίδοσαν 
κακῶς σκηνοῦντες. ἐντεῦθεν ἔπεμψαν νυκτὸς Anpo-15 
) , ¥ , ai ‘ 3, » 
κράτην Τημνίτην ἄνδρας δόντες ἐπὶ τὰ ὄρη ἔνθα 
ἔφασαν οἱ ἀποσκεδαννύμενοι καθορᾶν τὰ πυρά 

Ὁ Ἂ 9 “ ἃ ’ a Ἢ 3 a 

οὗτος yap ἐδόκει Kal πρότερον πολλὰ ἤδη ἀληθεῦσαι 
ιοτοιαῦτα, τὰ ὄντα τε ὡς ὄντα καὶ τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς οὐκ 
3 nN Ν x ‘ in! > ¥ > “A ¥ 
ὄντα. πορευθεὶς δὲ τὰ μὲν πυρὰ οὐκ ἔφη ἰδεῖν, ἄνδρα 16 

, Ἃ * ¥ ¥ a Ἂ Ἃ 
δὲ συλλαβὼν ἧκεν ἄγων ἔχοντα τόξον Περσικὸν καὶ 
φαρέτραν καὶ σάγαριν οἵανπερ καὶ αἱ ᾿Αμαζόνες 
¥ > , ‘ \ ¥ , " 
ἔχουσιν. ἐρωτώμενος δὲ ποδαπὸς εἴη, Πέρσης μεν 17 

15 ἔφη εἶναι, πορεύεσθαι δ᾽ ἀπὸ τοῦ Τιριβάζου στρατο- 

I ν 3 4 ’ e Ν > rl » ἃ 
πέδου ὅπως ἐπιτήδεια λάβοι. οἱ δὲ ἠρώτων αὐτὸν 
τὸ στράτευμα ὁπόσον τε εἴη καὶ ἐπὶ τίνι συνειλεγμέ 

ε .» 9 , ᾿. νῃν , ε κι 
νον. ὁ δὲ εἶπεν ὅτι Τιρίβαζος εἴη ἔχων τήν τε ἑαυτοῦ 18 
δύναμιν καὶ μισθοφόρους Χάλυβας καὶ Tadxous ° 
“ ‘ 2 ν ¥ ε “ἊΝ ΜΙΝ ε ~ 
20 παρεσκευάσθαι δὲ αὐτὸν ἔφη ws ἐπὶ τῇ ὑπερβολῃ 

“~ A ἴω. 4, ~ 

τοῦ ὄρους ἐν τοῖς στενοῖς ἧπερ μοναχῇ εἴη πορεία, 
3 A > “ A ν 
ἐνταῦθα ἐπιθησόμενον τοῖς Ελλησιν. . 

᾿Ακούσᾶσι τοῖς στρατηγοῖς ταῦτα ἔδοξε τὸ στρά- 19 

τευμα συναγαγεῖν - καὶ εὐθὺς φύλακας καταλιπόντες 


\ AAA A A / 7 “ » “2 MMR Nc 
25 καὶ στρατηγὸν emt τοῖς μένουσι Σοφαίνετον Στυμφά- ? x αὐτο 
MLE 


’ Ν / ‘ > ᾽ > ἴω, 
OVELOV και σησάαμινον και ἀμυγδάλινον €kK τῶν 


o Ἃ Ll > ‘ il 2 ee il 
κρῶν καὶ τερμίνθινον. ἐκ δὲ τῶν αὐτῶν το y 
ΤΠ ΤῊΣ ΓΙ λιον ἐπορεύοντο ἔχοντες ἡγεμόνα τὸν ἁλόντα avOpw- 
ὶ εὑρίσκετο. 
ial ae ΞΥ mov. ἐπειδὴ δὲ ὑπερέβαλλον τὰ ὄρη; οἱ TeATaTTAL 2 


ee ᾽ν ¥ 
προϊόντες καὶ κατιδόντες TO στρατόπεδον οὐκ ἔμειναν 


134 ANABASIS IV. 4. 21, 22 and 5. 1-4. 


‘ € ἤ >  Υ / » > | Ν / 
τοὺς ὁπλίτας, ἀλλ᾽ ἀνακραγόντες ἔθεον ἐπὶ TO στρατό- 


πεδον. οἱ δὲ βάρβαροι ἀκούσαντες τὸν θόρυβον οὐχ 21 


ε » > 7) 7 ἣ ν᾿ a / 
ὑπέμειναν, ἀλλ᾽ ἔφευγον - ὅμως δὲ καὶ ἀπέθανόν τινες 
o / ἂν ν 3 ¥ \ ε 
τῶν βαρβάρων καὶ ἵπποι ἡλωσαν εἰς εἰκοσι, καὶ 7 
Ἁ " ll lll 5 " Ὁ Ν 3 ie 
δ σκηνὴ ἡ Τιριβάζου ἑάλω καὶ ἐν αὐτῃ κλῖναι apyupo- 

Ἴ [ Mee ‘ ‘tl Ν 

inet MLE ποδες καὶ ἐκπώματα καὶ οἱ ἀρτοκόποι καὶ οἱ οἰνοχόοι 


, > 3 Ν " νυν» ἡ a“ ε ω 
φάσκοντες ειναι. ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἐπύθοντο ταντα OL TWY 22 


ε o / > i > ~ 3 / i, ral 
ὁπλιτῶν στρατηγοί, ἐδόκει αὐτοῖς ἀπιέναι THY ταχίσ- 

‘ “A 
την ἐπὶ TO στρατόπεδον, μή τις ἐπίθεσις γένοιτο τοῖς 
1ὸ καταλελειμμένοις. καὶ εὐθὺς ἀνακαλεσάμενοι τῇ 
/ > ly XN 7 rl ᾽ Ν »ν ὃ Ν 
σάλπιγγι ἀπῇσαν, καὶ ἀφίκοντο αὐθημερὸν ἐπὶ τὸ 

στρατόπεδον. 


Passage of the Euphrates. Snow six feet deep. 
V. Τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ ἐδόκει πορευτέον εἶναι ὅπῃ dv- 
ι [ t 
/ Ἃ ~ 
ναιντο τάχιστα πρὶν συλλεγῆναι τὸ στράτευμα πάλιν 
ιὸ καὶ καταλαβεῖν τὰ στενά. συσκευασάμενοι δ᾽ εὐθὺς 
ἐπορεύοντο διὰ χιόνος πολλῆς ἡγεμόνας ἔχοντες 
ἢ Ν μι Ν ε 4 Ν ¥ sa? 
πολλούς - καὶ αὐθημερὸν ὑπερβαλόντες τὸ ἄκρον ἐφ 
ᾧ ἔμελλεν ἐπιτίθεσθαι Τιρίβαζος κατεστρατοπεδεύ- 
σαντο. ἐντεῦθεν δ᾽ ἐπορεύθησαν σταθμοὺς ἐρήμους 
δ0τρεῖς παρασάγγας πεντεκαίδεκα ἐπὶ τὸν Εὐφράτην 


/ Ν / al. A Ἃ Ἅ 
ποταμόν, καὶ διέβαινον αὐτὸν βρεχόμενοι πρὸς τὸν 


ὀμφαλόν. ἐλέγοντο δ᾽ οὐδ᾽ αἱ πηγαὶ πρόσω εἶναι. 
3 o 2 ἢ ‘ / ~ iy." - 
ἐντεῦθεν ἐπορεύοντο διὰ χιόνος πολλῆς Kal πεδίου 
σταθμοὺς τρεῖς παρασάγγας δέκα. ὁ δὲ τρίτος eye 
25 νετο χαλεπός, καὶ ἄνεμος βορρᾶς ἐναντίος ἔπνει παν- 
τάπασιν ἀποκάων πάντα καὶ πηγνὺς τοὺς ἀνθρώπους. 
¥ ‘ - , , = , A 
ἔνθα δὴ τῶν μάντεών tis εἶπε σφαγιάσασθαι τῷ 
bi ral ‘ ἤ 5 ~ »! o~ 
ἀνέμῳ, καὶ σφαγιάζεται - καὶ πᾶσι δὴ περιφανῶς 


ANABASIS IV. 5. 5-10. 135 


“ὃ & > a Ν λ he ἴω v4 iy δὲ 
ἔδοξεν ἀνεῖναι τὸ χαλεπὸν τοῦ πνεύματος. ἣν OE 
~~ al i» al > dl 9 Ἃ lin € 
τῆς χιόνος τὸ βάθος ὀργυιά-: ὥστε Kal τῶν ὑποζυ- 
γίων καὶ τῶν ἀνδραπόδων πολλὰ ἀπώλετο καὶ τῶν 
στρατιωτῶν ὡς τριάκοντα. διεγένοντο δὲ τὴν νύκτα 
"πῦρ κάοντες " ξύλα δ᾽ ἦν ἐν τῷ σταθμῷ πολλά- οἱ δὲ 
"ϑενΝ , ,ὕ 3 > ε > ἔν Y 
ὀψὲ προσιόντες ξύλα οὐκ εἶχον. οἱ οὖν πάλαι NKOY- 
τες καὶ πῦρ κάοντες οὐ προσίεσαν πρὸς τὸ πῦρ τοὺς 
a aie > A ὃ a > ~ ‘ al χλλ 
ὀψίζοντας, εἰ μὴ μεταδοῖεν αὕτοις πυροὺς ἢ ἄλλο τι 
εἴ τι ἔχοιεν βρωτόν. ἔνθα δὴ μετεδίδοσαν ἀλλήλοις 
10 ὧν εἶχον ἕκαστοι. ἔνθα δὲ τὸ πῦρ ἐκάετο, διατηκο- 
μένης τῆς χιόνος βόθροι ἐγίγνοντο μεγάλοι ἔστε ἐπὶ 
\ 5 / 5 hy δὲ Oo ‘a Ν 10 ian 
τὸ δάπεδον: οὗ δὴ παρὴν μετρεῖν τὸ βάθος τῆς 

χιόνος. 


Many are attacked by bu/imy, and are restored by Xenophon. Some 
perish from cold and hunger. Chirisophus is quartered in a 
village. 


> ‘a * ᾽ν 3 “ e rd bd 3 ra 
Ἐντεῦθεν δὲ τὴν ἐπιοῦσαν ἡμέραν ὅλην ἐπορεύοντο 7 
15 διὰ χιόνος, καὶ πολλοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἐβουλιμίασαν. 

A a A 
Ξενοφῶν δ᾽ ὀπισθοφυλακῶν καὶ καταλαμβάνων τοὺς 
πίπτοντας τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἠγνόει ὅ τι τὸ πάθος εἴη. 

3 Ἃ Ἁ ὦ , 2 sl ΜᾺ 3 al bd ἴων 
ἐπειδὴ δὲ εἶπέ τις αὐτῷ τῶν ἐμπείρων ὅτι σαφῶς 
βουλιμιῶσι κἄν τι φάγωσιν ἀναστήσονται; περιιὼν 
l Ν \ € ' ¥ ’ὔ ε “ / did 
20 περὶ TA ὑποζύγια, εἰ πού TL ὁρῴη βρωτόν, διεδίδου 
καὶ διέπεμπε διδόντας τοὺς δυναμένους παρατρέχειν 
A “a > i / 2 ,) ty ’ 
τοῖς βουλιμιῶσιν. ἐπειδὴ δέ τι ἐμφάγοιεν, ἀνίσταντο 
καὶ ἐπορεύοντό. 
Πορευομένων δὲ Χειρίσοφος μὲν ἀμφὶ κνέφας 
25 πρὸς κώμην ἀφικνεῖται, καὶ ὑδροφορούσας ἐκ τῆς 
κώμης πρὸς τῇ κρήνῃ γυναῖκας καὶ κόρας καταλαμ- 
βάνει ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ ἐρύματος. αὗται ἠρώτων αὖ- τὸ 


136 ANABASIS IV. 5, 11-15. 


‘ , > ε IE ‘ > ae 
τοὺς tives εἶεν. ὁ δ᾽ ἑρμηνεὺς εἶπε περσιστὶ ott 
παρὰ βασιλέως πορεύονται πρὸς τὸν σατράπην. αἱ 

| ‘ul bid » > a ¥ 3 , ἢ il 9 
δὲ ἀπεκρίναντο ὅτι οὐκ ἐνταῦθα εἴη, ἀλλ᾽ ἀπέχει ὅσον 

, ε > eA A A AU ‘ ᾿ , 
παρασάγγην. οἱ δ᾽, ἐπεὶ ὀψὲ ἦν, πρὸς τὸν Kwpap- 
δ χην συνεισέρχονται εἰς τὸ ἔρυμα σὺν ταῖς ὑδροφό- 
, Ν i ba Ms > / a 
pois. Χειρίσοφος μὲν οὖν καὶ ὅσοι ἐδυνήθησαν τοῦ 11 
στρατεύματος ἐνταῦθα ἐστρατοπεδεύσαντο, τῶν δ᾽ 
Ν o~ ε x ᾽ / x 
ἄλλων στρατιωτῶν οἱ μὴ δυνάμενοι διατελέσαι τὴν 
ὁδὸν ἐνυκτέρευσαν ἄσιτοι καὶ ἄνευ πυρός" καὶ ἐν- 
10 ταῦθά τινες ἀπώλοντο τῶν στρατιωτῶν. 
Continued suffering from frost and exposure. Despair of the invalids. 
"Edeirovto δὲ τῶν πολεμίων συνειλεγμένοι τινὲς 12 
“ ν 
καὶ τὰ μὴ δυνάμενα τῶν ὑποζυγίων ἥρπαζον καὶ 
> / > / Ν »ν ΝΣ , ’ 4 “ 
ἀλλήλοις ἐμάχοντο περὶ αὐτῶν. ἐλείποντο δὲ τῶν 
στρατιωτῶν οἵ τε διεφθαρμένοι ὑπὸ τῆς χιόνος τοὺς 
15 ὀφθαλμοὺς οἵ τε ὑπὸ τοῦ ψύχους τοὺς δακτύλους τῶν 
ἴω > “ > \ A i" b A 
ποδῶν ἀποσεσηπότες. ἦν δὲ τοῖς μὲν ὀφθαλμοῖς 13 
“ ¥ ii 
ἐπικούρημα τῆς χιόνος εἴ TLS μέλαν TL ἔχων TPO TOV 
μι -~ 3 " “ Ἂ ~ ¥ A Ἂ 
ὀφθαλμῶν ἐπορεύετο, τῶν δὲ ποδῶν εἴ τις κινοῖτο καὶ 
δέποτε ἡσυχίαν ἔχοι καὶ εἰς τὴν νύκτα ὑπολύοιτο -" 
μη 


Γ bid ,ν. ε ld 3 li > ἢ > ‘ 
29 ὅσοι δὲ ὑποδεδεμένοι ἐκοιμῶντο, εἰσεδύοντο εἰς τοὺς 14 


᾿ 


Sia 


πόδας οἱ ἱμάντες Kal TA ὑποδήματα περιεπήγνυντο " 
Ἃ ‘ > 3 δὴ 3 al ~ io ~ ε / 

καὶ yap ἦσαν, ἐπειδὴ ἐπέλιπε τὰ ἀρχαῖα ὑποδήματᾳ; 

καρβάτιναι πεποιημέναι ἐκ τῶν νεοδάρτων βοῶν. 

διὰ τὰς τοιαύτας οὖν ἀνάγκας ὑπελείποντό τινες τῶν 15 

ἴω Ν 3 
ς5 στρατιωτῶν - καὶ ἰδόντες μέλαν τι χωρίον διὰ τὸ 

5» “ 3 / hy. , ¥ ᾿ 

ἐκλελοιπέναι αὐτόθι τὴν χιόνα εἴκαζον τετηκέναι - 
» » »ὔ ὃ ‘ / Ν a ’ > > 4 

καὶ ἐτετήκει διὰ κρήνην τινὰ ἣ πλησίον ἦν ἀτμίζουσα 


5 ld 3 ΓΑ 2 3 , 3 / ‘ > 
ἐν νάπῃ. ἐνταῦθ᾽ ἐκτραπόμενοι ἐκάθηντο καὶ οὐκ 


ἔφασαν πορεύεσθαι. 


ANABASIS IV. 5. 16-21. 137 


Ὁ δὲ Ξενοφῶν ἔχων ὀπισθοφύλακας ws ἤσθετο, 16 
ἐδεῖτο αὐτῶν πάσῃ τέχνῃ καὶ μηχανῇ μὴ ἀπολείπε- 

ld ν ν \ } 
σθαι, λέγων ὅτι ἕπονται πολλοὶ πολέμιοι συνειλεγ- 

lal \ o | - ε A ld 
μένοι, Kal τελευτῶν ἐχαλέπαινεν. οἱ δὲ σφάττειν 
5 ἐκέλευον > οὐ γὰρ ἂν δύνασθαι πορευθῆναι. ἐνταῦθα 11 

) > x c - ld 

ἔδοξε κράτιστον εἷναι τοὺς ἑπομένους πολεμίους φο- 
A ‘i ‘ 
βῆσαι, εἴ τις δύναιτο, μὴ ἐπίοιεν τοῖς κάμνουσι. καὶ 
Ἣν μ᾿ / ¥ ε A “~ A , 
ἣν μὲν σκότος ἤδη, οἱ δὲ προσῇσαν πολλῷ θορύβῳ 
ἀμφὶ ὧν εἶχον διαφερόμενοι. ἔνθα δὴ οἱ ὀπισθοφύ- 18 
10 axes ἅτε ὑγιαίνοντες ἐξαναστάντες ἔδραμον εἰς τοὺς 
πολεμίους - οἱ δὲ κάμνοντες ἀνακραγόντες ὅσον ἐδύ- 
vavTo μέγιστον τὰς ἀσπίδας πρὸς τὰ δόρατα ἔκρου- 

e ‘ V4 Nd 4 ε ‘ 4 
σαν. οἱ δὲ πολέμιοι δείσαντες ἧκαν ἑαυτοὺς κατὰ 
τῆς χιόνος εἰς τὴν νάπην, καὶ οὐδεὶς ἔτι οὐδαμοῦ 

ι ἐφθέγξατο. καὶ Ἐενοφῶν μὲν καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, 19 
Ἂ ‘a ‘din bd 
εἰπόντες τοῖς ἀσθενοῦσιν ὅτι TH ὑστεραίᾳ ἠἡξουσί 
τινες ἐπ᾽ αὐτούς, πορευόμενοι πρὶν τέτταρα στάδια 
A ΜΝ ΜΝ Ἀ 
διελθεῖν ἐντυγχάνουσιν ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ ἀναπανομένοις ἐπὶ 
τῆς χιόνος τοῖς στρατιώταις ἐγκεκαλυμμένοις, καὶ --σ΄ 
20 οὐδὲ φυλακὴ οὐδεμία κἀθειστήκει - καὶ ἀνίστασαν 
9 hy, 8 >) 9 . = > ε 
αὐτοὺς. οἱ δ᾽ ἔλεγον ὅτι οἱ ἔμπροσθεν οὐχ ὑποχω- 
ροῖεν. ΄ ὃ δὲ παριὼν καὶ παραπέμπων τῶν πελταστῶν 2 
~ > ld 3 ,) Pal sll ¥ ly. 
τοὺς ἰσχυροτάτους ἐκέλευε σκέψασθαι τί εἴη TO κω- 
al ν 
λῦον. οἱ δὲ ἀπήγγελλον ὅτι ὅλον οὕτως ἀναπαύοιτο 
2570 στράτευμα. ἐνταῦθα καὶ οἱ περὶ Ἐενοφῶντα ηὐλί- 5ι 
> ~ Ἂ ν Κ᾿ in bil 
σθησαν αὐτοῦ ἄνευ πυρὸς καὶ ἄδειπνοι; φυλακὰς οἵας 
ἐδύναντο καταστησάμενοι. ἐπεὶ δὲ πρὸς ἡμέραν ἦν, 
"» κ᾿ ΄ Ν ‘ > aie a 
ὁ μὲν Ἐενοφῶν πέμψας πρὸς τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας τοὺς 
νεωτάτους ἀναστήσαντας ἐκέλευεν ἀναγκάζεψ προΐ- 


30 έναι. 


138 ANABASIS IV. 5. 22-27. | ANABASIS IV. 5. 28-32. 139 


Chirisophus sends help to the rear. All encamp in villages. An Ἵ καὶ πάνυ ἄκρατος ἦν, εἰ μή τις ὕδωρ ἐπιχέοι - καὶ 


underground village. Armenian beer. , ἐῶν , ee 5 
5 ‘ , , , “ » A , πανυ ἡδὺ συμμαθόντι TO πωμα, ἢν. 
Εν δὲ τούτῳ Χειρίσοφος πέμπει τῶν ἐκ τῆς κωμῆς 22 


σκεψομένους πῶς ἔχοιεν οἱ τελευταῖοι. οἱ δὲ ἄσμενοι ' The village chief meer gaa ΣΤ feasting of the 
a i ; 


ἰδόντες τοὺς μὲν ἀσθενοῦντας τούτοις παρέδοσαν “Ὁ Ἦν ΜΠ NT 1 : ; , 
Ο δὲ Ξενοφῶν τὸν ἄρχοντα τῆς κώμης ταύτης 28 


κομίζειν ἐπὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον, αὐτοὶ δὲ ἐπορεύοντο, ᾿ Han : Mai οὐ ἢ 
σύνδειπνον ἐποιήσατο, καὶ θαρρεῖν αὐτὸν ἐκέλευε 


5" καὶ πρὶν εἴκοσι στάδια διεληλυθέναι ἦσαν πρὸς τῇ 


» ἴω - 2) ee 
Hy , oy oh) ν᾽ ὧν , δ λέγων ὅτι οὔτε τῶν τέκνων στερήσοιτο τὴν τε οἰκίαν 
κώμῃ ἔνθα Χειρίσοφος ηὐλίζετο. ἐπεὶ δὲ συνεγέ- 23 ἢ ΕΣ : ashi ΤΠ ih : 
αὐτοῦ ἀντεμπλήσαντες τῶν ἐπιτηδείων ἀπίασιν, ἣν 
ἴω] “ ’ 
ἀγαθόν τι τῷ στρατεύματι ἐξηγησάμενος φαίνηται 
ἔστ᾽ ἂν ἐν ἄλλῳ ἔθνει γένωνται. 6 δὲ ταῦτα ὑπισ- 29 


χνεῖτο, καὶ φιλοφρονούμενος οἶνον ἔφρασεν ἔνθα 


vovto ἀλλήλοις, ἔδοξε κατὰ τὰς κώμας ἀσφαλὲς 
> ‘ ᾽ a“ ‘ , A b | ~ 
εἶναι Tas τάξεις σκηνοῦν. Kal Χειρίσοφος μὲν αὐτοῦ 
¥ ε ," ¥ ἤ ἃ ΝΒ “ il 

ἔμενεν, οἱ δὲ ἄλλοι διαλαχόντες as ἑώρων κώμας 


10 ἐπορεύοντο ἕκαστοι τοὺς ἑαυτῶν ἔχοντες. i : i epee i ALL. 
᾽ Ἀ 10 ἦν κατορω ένος. ταύτην μὲν οὖν τὴν νύκτα ὃια- 
Ev0a δὴ Πολυκράτης ᾿Αθηναῖος λοχαγὸς ἐκέλευ- 24 ee ee lal ly 
"πὰ" .2....» ν ἐπ ἴθ , σκηνήσαντες οὕτως ἐκοιμήθησαν ἐν πᾶσιν ἀφθόνοις 

σεν ἀφιέναι ἑαυτόν - καὶ λαβὼν τοὺς εὐζώνους, θέων i i it i i li "τὰ : 

πάντες οἱ στρατιῶται, ἐν φυλακῃ ἔχοντες τὸν κωμάρ- 


+ ANN ‘ / a ix: / nf Ἂ λ / 
ἐπὶ THY κώμην ἣν εἰλήχει Ἐενοφῶν καταλαμβάνει ti. iy a ge i 
χην καὶ τὰ τέκνα αὐτοῦ ὁμοῦ ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς. 


lal ¥ ‘ / \ a 
πάντας ἔνδον τοὺς κωμήτας Kal τὸν κωμάρχην, Kal 


Ἀ , ς Τῇ δ᾽ ἐπιούσῃ ἡμέρᾳ Ἐενοφῶν λαβὼν τὸν κωμάρ- 

τὸ πώλους εἰς δασμὸν βασιλεῖ τρεφομένους ἑπτακαΐί- "ΕΝ ΠΣ Ξ J β si i 
ὌΠ an , Na τῷ IsxXnv πρὸς Χειρίσοφον ἐπορεύετο: ὅπου δὲ Tapio 

Sexa, καὶ τὴν θυγατέρα τοῦ κωμάρχου ἐνάτην ἡμέραν 

γεγαμημένην - ὃ δ᾽ ἀνὴρ αὐτῆς λαγὼς ᾧχετο θηρά- 

σων καὶ οὐχ ἥλω ἐν ταῖς κώμαις. ai δ᾽ οἰκίαι ἦσαν 2% 


κώμην, ἐτρέπετο πρὸς τοὺς ἐν ταῖς κώμαις καὶ κατε- 
λάμβανε πανταχοῦ εὐωχουμένους καὶ εὐθυμουμένους, 
Ml ἍΝ , ἌΝ καὶ οὐδαμόθεν ἀφίεσαν πρὶν παραθεῖναι αὐτοῖς ἄρι- 
κατάγειοι, τὸ μὲν στόμα ὥσπερ φρέατος, κάτω ἀφο i h 1 ἢ ἢ 
στον οὐκ ἦν δ᾽ ὅπου οὐ παρετίθεσαν ἐπὶ τὴν αὐτὴν 81 
ορτράπεζαν κρέα ἄρνεια, ἐρίφεια, χοίρεια, μόσχεια;,. 
ὀρνίθεια, σὺν πολλοῖς ἄρτοις τοῖς μὲν πυρίνοις τοῖς 


3 ~ ε ‘ ¥ ~ Ἀ ε ᾽᾽Ὅ > al 
90 εὐρεῖαι - αἱ δὲ εἴσοδοι τοῖς μὲν ὑποζυγίοις ὀρυκταΐ, 
ε ν κ᾿ ’ ν ν / 5 A a 
οἱ δὲ ἄνθρωποι κατέβαινον ἐπὶ κλίμακος. ἐν δὲ ταῖς 

oA > i ? ld »” ᾿ 1 
οἰκίαις ἦσαν αἶγες, oles, βόες, ὄρνιθες, Kal τὰ ἔκγονα 

‘ * ν᾿ ra , | a 5 , 
τούτων - τὰ δὲ κτήνη πάντα χιλῷ ἔνδον ἐτρέφοντο. 

ἦσαν δὲ καὶ πυροὶ καὶ κριθαὶ καὶ ὄσπρια καὶ οἶνος 26 


i ee πὸ eT - Ὁ: a 


δὲ κριθίνοις. ὁπότε δέ τις φιλοφρονούμενός τῳ Bov- 32 


λοιτο προπιεῖν, εἷλκεν ἐπὶ τὸν κρατῆρα, ἔνθεν ἐπικύ- 


: - > A Sit Δ a ψαντα ἔδει ῥοφοῦντα πίνειν ὥσπερ βοῦν. Kal τῷ 
95 κρίθινος ἐν κρατῆρσιν. ἐνῆσαν δὲ καὶ αὐταὶ αἱ ; al : δ i Le 
sis “ hi a ii 25 κωμάρχῃ ἐδίδοσαν λαμβάνειν 6 τι βούλοιτο. ὃ δὲ 
κριθαὶ ἰσοχειλεῖς, καὶ κάλαμοι ἐνέκειντο, οἱ μὲν ε τς, τ, a f f 
, © δὲ ἐλά , me , ἄλλο μὲν οὐδὲν ἐδέχετο, ὅπου δέ τινα τῶν συγγενῶν 
μείζους οἱ δὲ ἐλάττους, γόνατα οὐκ ἔχοντες. τούτους 27 ; 


i» ε ~ > 7 , 
ἴδοι. πρὸς ἑαυτὸν ἀεὶ ἐλάμβανεν. 
ἔδει ὁπότε τις διψῴη λαβόντα εἰς τὸ στόμα μύζειν. si al μβ 


140 ANABASIS IV. 5. 33-36 and 6. 1. 


Ν M4 
Ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἦλθον πρὸς Χειρίσοφον, κατελάμβανον 33 
κἀκείνους σκηνοῦντας ἐστεφανωμένους τοῦ ξηροῦ 
χιλοῦ στεφάνοις, καὶ διακονοῦντας ᾿Αρμενίους παῖδας 
iy “ ~ o~ ἴω 
σὺν ταῖς βαρβαρικαῖς στολαῖς - τοῖς παισὶν ἐδείκνυ- 
ν 3 “Ἃ 9 / ~ 3 ‘ 2 » 
δσαν ὥσπερ ἐνεοῖς ὅ τι δέοι ποιεῖν. ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἀλλήλους 34 
ἐφιλοφρονήσαντο Χειρίσοφος καὶ Ἐενοφῶν, κοινῇ 
δὴ ἀνηρώτων τὸν κωμάρχην διὰ τοῦ περσίζοντος 
ε , ᾿ ¥ ε ΄ ε = ¥ g 3 , 
ἑρμηνέως τίς εἴη ἡ χώρα. ὁ δ᾽ ἔλεγεν ὅτι Appevia. 
\ ἤ Ψ ἤ dl € Ψ / ε 3 
καὶ πάλιν ἠρώτων τίνι οἱ ἵπποι τρέφοιντο. ὁ ὃ 
10 ἔλεγεν ὅτι βασιλεῖ δασμός " τὴν δὲ πλησίον χώραν 
ἔφη εἶναι Χάλυβας, καὶ τὴν ὁδὸν ἔφραζεν ἧ εἴη. καὶ 85 
» aA 
αὐτὸν τότε μὲν ᾧχετο ἄγων Ἐενοφῶν πρὸς τοὺς 
ε a “4 . νυ a γι Me AA ἡ“ 
ἑαυτοῦ οἰκέτας. καὶ ἵππον ὃν εἰλήφει παλαίτερον 
, a , ᾽ , A Ψ 
δίδωσι τῷ κωμάρχῃ ἀναθρέψαντι καταθῦσαι, ὅτι 
¥ , ν" ¢ i. > lilly , ὃ ὃ Ν ‘ > 
15 ἤκουεν αὐτὸν ἱερὸν εἶναι τοῦ Ἡλίου, δεδιὼς μὴ ἄπο- 
θάνῃ: ἐκεκάκωτο γὰρ ὑπὸ τῆς πορείας - αὐτὸς δὲ τῶν 
, ri ‘ a“ ¥ ~ Ἀ 
πώλων λαμβάνει, καὶ τῶν ἄλλων στρατηγὼν Kat 
λοχαγῶν ἔδωκεν ἑκάστῳ πῶλον. ἦσαν δ᾽ οἱ ταύτῃ 86 
ἵπποι μείονες μὲν τῶν Περσικῶν, θυμοειδέστεροι δὲ 
v4 3 ἴω ‘ ‘ ὃ ὃ “ ε / 4 
οἡ πολύ. ἐνταῦθα δὴ καὶ διδάσκει ὁ κωμάρχης περὶ 
τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἵππων καὶ τῶν ὑποζυγίων σακία 
A ». Ν 
περιειλεῖν, ὅταν διὰ τῆς χιόνος aywou ° ἄνευ γὰρ 
ἴω ΜΝ) 
τῶν σακίων κατεδύοντο μέχρι τῆς γαστρός. 


The village chief is ill-treated by Chirisophus and escapes. After 
crossing the river Phasis, the natives block the way. 


VI. Ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἡμέρα ἦν ὀγδόη, τὸν μὲν ἡγεμόνα 
(ὃ / ‘4 de 3 Vil , 
25 παραδίδωσι Χειρισόφῳ, τοὺς δὲ οἰκέτας καταλείπει 
ἴω “~ “ ἊΝ » 
τῷ κωμάρχῃ; πλὴν τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀρτι ἡβάσκοντος- 
~ 3 , 
τοῦτον δὲ Ἐπισθένει ᾿Αμφιπολίτῃ παραδίδωσι φυλάτ- 
τειν, ὅπως, εἰ καλῶς ἡγήσοιτο, ἔχων καὶ τοῦτον ἀπίοι. 


ν 


ANABASIS IV. 6. 238. 141 


Ἂ 3 \ ae 3 “ 3 “ ς 29 » 
καὶ εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ εἰσεφόρησαν ὡς ἐδύναντο 
lly i." > 4 > V4 ε ΜΝ 3 
πλεῖστα, καὶ ἀναζεύξαντες ἐπορεύοντο. ἡγεῖτο ὃ 

> ~ € / ᾽ ‘ ld ly. ¥ 

αὐτοῖς ὁ κωμάρχης λελυμένος διὰ χιόνος - καὶ ἤδη 
5 [ων ~ “~ 
τε ἣν ἐν τῷ τρίτῳ σταθμῷ, Kal Χειρίσοφος αὐτῳ 

3 Υ͂ 9 b > Fal ¥ ε > oe 
5 ἐχαλεπάνθη ὅτι οὐκ εἰς κώμας ἤγαγεν. ὁ δ᾽ ἔλεγεν 

bid > > 3 “ "4 “ ε 4 dl 
ὅτι οὐκ εἶεν ἐν τῷ τόπῳ τούτῳ. ὁ δὲ Χειρίσοφος 

"μιν. » , » 3 » 5 x ’ 3 ~ 

αὐτὸν ἔπαισε μέν, ἔδησε δ᾽ ov. ἐκ δὲ τούτου ἐκεῖνος 
τῆς νυκτὸς ἀποδρὰς ᾧχετο καταλιπὼν τὸν υἱόν. 
τοῦτό γε δὴ Χειρισόφῳ καὶ Ἐενοφῶντι μόνον διάφο- 
10 pov ἐν τῇ πορείᾳ ἐγένετο, ἡ τοῦ ἡγεμόνος κάκωσις 
ΝᾺ / > Vd Ν᾿ “ “ in Ι Ν 
καὶ ἀμέλεια. Ἐπισθένης δὲ ἠράσθη τοῦ παιδὸς καὶ 
οἴκαδε κομίσας πιστοτάτῳ ἐχρῆτο. μετὰ τοῦτο ἐπο- 
ρεύθησαν ἑπτὰ σταθμοὺς ἀνὰ πέντε παρασάγγας τῆς 
ἡμέρας παρὰ τὸν Φᾶσιν ποταμόν, εὖρος πλεθριαῖον. 
ιὸ ἐντεῦθεν ἐπορεύθησαν σταθμοὺς δύο παρασάγγας 


ὃ ,) ᾿ » " δὲ ln > ~ δί ε λῃ 3 “ : 
έκα - ἐπὶ O€ TH εἰς τὸ TEOLOV ὑπερβολῃ ἀπήντησαν “{-". 


αὐτοῖς Χάλυβες καὶ Τάοχοι καὶ Φασιανοί. Χειρίσο- 

oil κ᾿ \ oll iy iy. , , ἃ vill wn 

dos δ᾽ ἐπεὶ κατεῖδε τοὺς πολεμίους ἐπὶ TY ὑπερβολῃ: 

ἐπαύσατο πορευόμενος, ἀπέχων εἰς τριάκοντα στα- 

20 δίους, ἵνα μὴ κατὰ κέρας ἄγων πλησιάσῃ τοῖς πολε-. 

μίοις - παρήγγειλε δὲ καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις παράγειν τοὺς 
λόχους, ὅπως ἐπὶ φάλαγγος γένοιτο τὸ στράτευμα. 


Council of officers. Speeches οὗ Chirisophus, Cleanor, and Xenophon. 
Spartan and Athenian views of “ stealing.” 


Ἐπεὶ δὲ ἦλθον οἱ ὀπισθοφύλακες, συνεκάλεσε TOUS 
᾿, ‘ 4 A 50 ε A 

στρατηγοὺς Kal hoxayous, καὶ ἔλεξεν ὧδε. Οἱ μὲν 

25 πολέμιοι, ὡς ὁρᾶτε, κατέχουσι τὰς ὑπερβολὰς τοῦ 
» ν 3 al bd ε “ 3 

ὄρους - wpa δὲ βουλεύεσθαι ὅπως ὡς κάλλιστα ayw- 

νιούμεθα. ἐμοὶ μὲν οὖν δοκεῖ παραγγεῖλαι μὲν ἀρι- 

στοποιεῖσθαι τοῖς στρατιώταις, ἡμᾶς δὲ βουλεύεσθαι 


142 ANABASIS IV. 6. 9-13. 


¥ if ὟΝ ~ 
εἴτε τήμερον εἴτε αὔριον δοκεῖ ὑπερβάλλειν τὸ ὄρος. 
> ‘ ar ¥ il 
Εμοὶ δέ γε, ἔφη ὁ Κλεάνωρ, δοκεῖ, ἐπὰν τάχιστα 9 
b i 
ἀριστήσωμεν, ἐξοπλισαμένους ws τάχιστα ἰέναι ἐπὶ 
Ἂ ¥ 3 Ν 
τοὺς ἄνδρας. εἰ γὰρ διατρίψομεν τὴν τήμερον ἡμέ 
y o~ ~ o~ 
5 pay, οἵ τε νῦν ἡμᾶς ὁρῶντες πολέμιοι θαρραλεώτεροι 
ἊΝ Ἁ ¥ A / / “ 
ἔσονται καὶ ἄλλους εἰκὸς τούτων θαρρούντων πλείους 
προσγενέσθαι. 
᾿ν ~ o~ 
Μετὰ τοῦτον Ξενοφῶν εἶπεν - ᾿Εγὼ δ᾽ οὕτω γιγνώ- 10 
2 \ / a ἴω 
σκω. εἰ μὲν ἀνάγκη ἐστὶ μάχεσθαι, τοῦτο δεῖ παρα- 
ιτοσκευάσασθαι ὅπως ὡς κράτιστα μαχούμεθα " εἰ δὲ 
λό θ € en € ἤ ~ ld ἴω] 
βουλόμεθα ὡς ῥᾷστα ὑπερβάλλειν, τοῦτό μοι δοκεῖ 
σκεπτέον εἶναι. ὅπως ὡς ἐλάχιστα μὲν τραύματα 
“ ε ἴω 
λάβωμεν, ὡς ἐλάχιστα δὲ σώματα ἀνδρῶν ἀποβά- 
λωμεν. τὸ μὲν οὖν ὄρος ἐστὶ τὸ ὁρώμενον πλέον ἢ 11 
3 "ε al ’ » ~ 
15 ἐφ᾽ ἑξήκοντα στάδια, ἄνδρες δ᾽ οὐδαμοῦ φυλάττοντες 
ε ~ / > > > a > nll, A ε , 
ἡμᾶς φανεροί εἰσιν ἀλλ᾽ ἢ κατ᾽ αὐτὴν τὴν ὁδόν - 
᾿ > ~ ἊΜ 5 / Ἂ 4 ’ὔ; 
πολὺ οὖν κρεῖττον τοῦ ἐρήμου Opous καὶ κλέψαι τι 
ἴω. / \ c ᾿ Ν ὔ > 
πειρᾶσθαι λαθόντας καὶ ἁρπάσαι φθάσαντας, εἰ 
ὃ ’ὔ θ αλλ Δ . 3 ‘ ᾽ ‘ Ψ rd 
υναίμεθα, μᾶλλον ἢ πρὸς ἰσχυρὰ χωρία καὶ avOpa- 
20 πους παρεσκευασμένους μάχεσθαι. πολὺ γὰρ ῥᾷον 12 
” > \>7 a ε ‘ ¥ .νΨ Ἷ 
ὄρθιον ἀμαχεὶ ἰέναι ἢ ὁμαλες ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν πολε- 
μίων ὄντων, καὶ νύκτωρ ἀμαχεὶ μᾶλλον ay τὰ πρὸ 
ἴω ε ᾽ al » " Ld cul 
ποδῶν ὁρῴη τις ἢ μεθ᾽ ἡμέραν μαχόμενος, καὶ ἡ 
τραχεῖα τοῖς ποσὶν ἀμαχεὶ ἰοῦσιν εὐμενεστέρα ἢ ἡ 
2 ὁμαλὴ τὰς κεφαλὰς βαλλομένοις. καὶ κλέψαι δ᾽ 
> δύ ᾽ ὃ il M Tap! ᾿ Ν » ἡ 
οὐκ ἀδύνατόν μοι δοκεῖ εἶναι, ἐξὸν μὲν νυκτὸς ἰέναι 
ε ‘ . Δ θ "ΔΝ δ᾽ > A o~ a ε Ἢ 
ὡς μὴ ὁρᾶσθαι, ἐξὸν ἀπελθεῖν τοσοῦτον ὡς μὴ 
αἴσθησιν παρέχειν. δοκοῦμεν δ᾽ ἄν μοι ταύτῃ προσ- 
ποιούμενοι προσβαλεῖν ἐρημοτέρῳ ἄν τῷ ἄλλῳ 


ANABASIS IV. 6. 14-19. 143 
ΜΠ < 
ὄρει χρῆσθαι '" μένοιεν yap αὐτοῦ μᾶλλον ἀθρόοι οἱ | 2 
ρει χρῆ μένοιεν γὰρ͵ αὐτοῦ μ ρ | 
, "ΔΝ “ἄμ Ν A , | 
πολέμιοι. ἀτὰρ Ti ἐγὼ περὶ κλοπῆς συμβάλλομαι ; 14 
εἐ a ‘ ¥ ull. / > 4 hy 
ὑμᾶς yap ἔγωγε, ὦ Χειρίσοφε, ἀκούω τοὺς Λακεδαι- 
ν 3 x lp € ’ὔ > Ἂ 3 “ “ 
μονίους ὅσοι ἐστὲ τῶν ὁμοίων εὐθὺς ἐκ παίδων κλέ. 
~ Ν > > Ἅ Ὃὦ 3 In ‘ 
ὅπτειν μελετᾶν, καὶ οὐκ αἰσχρὸν εἶναι adda καλὸν 
4 ν ᾽ν ’ ,,) 7 in ε Mel 
κλέπτειν ὅσα μὴ κωλύει νόμος. ὅπως δὲ ὡς κράτι- 15 
στα κλέπτητε καὶ πειρᾶσθε λανθάνειν, νόμιμον παρ᾽ 
" “~ 3 ἮΝ ids ,) ἴω 
ὑμῖν ἐστιν, ἐὰν ληφθῆτε κλέπτοντες, μαστιγοῦσθαι. 
κι > , ee 5 , 4 
νῦν οὖν μάλα σοι καιρός ἐστιν ἐπιδείξασθαι THY παι- 
10 δείαν, καὶ φυλάξασθαι μὴ ληφθῶμεν κλέπτοντες τοῦ 
ε ‘ / 
ὄρους, ὡς μὴ πληγὰς λάβωμεν. 
᾿Αλλὰ μέντοι, ἔφη ὁ Χειρίσοφος, κἀγὼ ὑμᾶς τοὺς 16 
3 ’ 3 ,) Ἃ > dl , “ 
Αθηναίους ἀκούω δεινοὺς εἶναι κλέπτειν τὰ δημόσια; 
καὶ μάλα ὄντος δεινοῦ τοῦ κινδύνου τῷ κλέπτοντι; καὶ 
ιὸ τοὺς κρατίστους μέντοι μάλιστα, εἴπερ ὑμῖν οἱ κρά- 
‘ay 9 ν 
τιστοι ἄρχειν ἀξιοῦνται: ὥστε WPA καὶ σοὶ ἐπιδεί- ., 
κνυσθαι τὴν παιδείαν. ᾿Εγὼ μὲν τοίνυν, ἔφη ὁ Ἐενο-17 
~ al Ll > ~ > » » ᾿ς nt 
φῶν, ἕτοιμός εἰμι τοὺς ὀπισθοφύλακας ἔχων, ἐπειδὰν 
, 27 , Wg ¥ \ 
δειπνήσωμεν, ἰέναι καταληψόμενος τὸ ὄρος. ἔχω δὲ 
20 καὶ ἡγεμόνας - οἱ γὰρ γυμνῆτες τῶν ἑπομένων ἡμῖν 
4s ¥ , 5 , , \ 
κλωπὼν ἔλαβόν twas ἐνεδρεύσαντες - τούτων καὶ 
, 9 > ¥ , 9 . , 9 4 , 
πυνθάνομαι ὅτι οὐκ ἀβατόν ἐστι TO ὄρος, ἀλλὰ νέμε- 
ἊΝ \ ν Ν᾿ νν' ν Va dl 
ται αἰξὶ καὶ βουσίν - wore ἐάνπερ ἅπαξ λάβωμεν τι 
~ = ln," ‘ ~ ε “ » 3 ν᾿" 
τοῦ ὄρους, βατὰ καὶ τοῖς ὑποζυγίοις ἔσται. ἐλπίζω 18 
com Ὁ.» "ΣΝ ‘ , a > Ν 
25 δὲ οὐδὲ τοὺς πολεμίους μενεῖν ἔτι, ἐπειδὰν ἴδωσιν 
~ ~ “ » ἴω 
ἡμᾶς ἐν τῷ ὁμοίῳ ἐπὶ τῶν ἄκρων - οὐδὲ γὰρ νῦν 
9 » / 3 μ᾿." tp 
ἐθέλουσι καταβαίνειν εἰς TO LOY HL. 
Volunteers offer to capture the heights. Victory of the Greeks. 
~ ‘ 
Ὁ δὲ Χειρίσοφος εἶπε, Kal ri δεῖ σὲ ἰέναι καὶ 19 
~ ¥ 
λιπεῖν τὴν ὀπισθοφυλακίαν ; ἀλλὰ ἄλλους πέμψον, 


ef. 16 


144 ANABASIS IV. 6. 20-27. 


«A / " al > , “ > ,ὔ 
ἂν μή τινες ἐθέλοντες ἀγαθοὶ φαίνωνται. ἐκ τούτου 20 
3 ἢ ᾿ » ε ‘ol ¥ ‘ 
Αριστώνυμος Μεθυδριεὺς ἔρχεται ὁπλίτας ἔχων Kal 
3 Ld ~ »Ὁ»ἭἍ ‘ / > ~ 
Αριστέας Χῖος γυμνῆτας καὶ Νικόμαχος Otratos 
γυμνῆτας - καὶ σύνθημα ἐποιήσαντο, ὁπότε ἔχοιεν 
δτὰ ἄκρα, πυρὰ κάειν πολλά. ταῦτα συνθέμενοι ἠρί- 
στων ἐκ δὲ τοῦ ἀρίστου προήγαγεν ὁ Χειρίσοφος 21 
τὸ στράτευμα πᾶν ὡς δέκα σταδίους πρὸς τοὺς πολε- 
μίους, ὅπως ὡς μάλιστα δοκοίη ταύτῃ προσάξειν. 
Ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἐδείπνησαν καὶ νὺξ ἐγένετο, οἱ μὲν 22 
ιοταχθέντες ᾧχοντο, καὶ καταλαμβάνουσι τὸ ὄρος, οἱ 
‘ ¥ > ~ > i c I ὔ > Ἂ 
δὲ ἄλλοι αὐτοῦ ἀνεπαύοντο. οἱ δὲ πολέμιοι ἐπεὶ 
ἤσθοντο τὸ ὄρος ἐχόμενον, ἐγρηγόρεσαν καὶ ἔκαον 
i," ‘ ‘A / > \ Ἂ € ᾽ > - 
πυρὰ πολλὰ διὰ νυκτός. ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἡμέρα ἐγένετο 23 
Χειρίσοφος μὲν θυσάμενος ἦγε κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν, οἱ δὲ 
. ¥ , Ν “"» > A a 
1570 ὄρος καταλαβόντες κατὰ TA ἄκρα ἔπῃσαν. τῶν 2A 
δ᾽ αὖ πολεμίων τὸ μὲν πολὺ ἔμενεν ἐπὶ τῇ ὑπερβολῇ 
αὖ πολεμίων τὸ μὲν πολὺ ἔμενεν ἐπὶ TH ὑπερβολῃ 
ἴω > “ἣν / “A 
τοῦ ὄρους, μέρος δ᾽ αὐτῶν ἀπήντα τοῖς κατὰ τὰ 
ἄκρα. πρὶν δὲ ὁμοῦ εἶναι τοὺς πολλοὺς ἀλλήλων, 
Ν A ν 
συμμιγνύασιν οἱ κατὰ τὰ ἄκρα, καὶ νικῶσιν οἱ Ἐλ- 
hi \ , > 4 \ ‘ . Σ A 
20Anves καὶ διώκουσιν. ἐν τούτῳ δὲ Kal οἱ ἐκ τοῦ 35 
πεδίου οἱ μὲν πελτασταὶ τῶν Ἑλλήνων δρόμῳ ἔθεον 
ip. I - / Ἂ , 
πρὸς τοὺς παρατεταγμένους, Χειρίσοφος δὲ βάδην 
Ν > iv Ἅ ἊἍ c ᾽ ε yn" a c 
ταχὺ ἐφείπετο σὺν τοῖς ὁπλίταις. οἱ δὲ πολέμιοι 0126 
»" κι εΕ dla 3 ly. ~~ ¥ el ε i ol 
ἐπὶ TH ὁδῷ, ἐπειδὴ τὸ ἄνω ἑώρων ἡττώμενον, φεύγου- 
ν A Ν > Ν ΝᾺ ,΄᾽ δὲ 
201° καὶ ἀπέθανον μὲν οὐ πολλοὶ αὐτῶν, γέρρα OE 
a ν ἴω 
πάμπολλα ἐλήφθη - a οἱ Ἕλληνες Tats μαχαίραις 
κόπτοντες ἀχρεῖα ἐποίουν. ὡς δ᾽ ἀνέβησαν, θύσαν- 27 
τες καὶ τρόπαιον στησάμενοι κατέβησαν εἰς τὸ πε- 
’ wo A. ἢ» “ bd “ 4 Ὃ A 
Siov, καὶ εἰς κώμας πολλῶν κἀγαθῶν γεμούσας ἦλθον. 


ANABASIS IV. 7. 1-6. 145 


March into the Taochian country. Attack on a fortress. Stratagem 
of Xenophon. 


VII. Ἐκ δὲ τούτων ἐπορεύθησαν εἰς Taoxous στα- 
θμοὺς πέντε παρασάγγας τριάκοντα: καὶ τὰ ἐπιτή- 
δεια ἐπέλιπε: χωρία γὰρ ᾧκουν ἰσχυρὰ οἱ Τάοχοι, 
ἐν οἷς καὶ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια πάντα εἶχον ἀνακεκομισμένοι. 
3 ‘ AA Al Ν ‘sf ἃ Ἃ μ᾿ 3 i 

5 ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἀφίκοντο πρὸς χωρίον ὃ πόλιν μὲν οὐκ εἶχεν 
5? > 2 , > > ,» \ 
οὐδ᾽ οἰκίας, (συνεληλυθότες δ᾽ ἦσαν αὐτόσε καὶ 


i , 
ἄνδρες καὶ γυναῖκες kal κτήνη πολλά), Χειρίσοφος 


Ν Ἂν ~ ~ ᾽ > ly ν 3 δὴ 
μὲν οὖν πρὸς τοῦτο προσέβαλλεν εὐθὺς ἥκων - ἐπειδὴ 
δὲ ἡ πρώτη τάξις ἀπέκαμνεν, ἄλλη προσήει καὶ 

ἡ πρώτη μνεν, ἄλλη προσῇ 
_ ¥ . “a ~ 
ιὸ αὖθις ἄλλη - ov yap ἦν ἀθρόοις περιστῆναι, ἀλλὰ 
ποταμὸς ἦν κύκλῳ ἐπειδὴ δὲ Ξενοφῶν ἦλθε σὺν 

a > Ἢ ᾽ν. ~ xX ᾿ , > 
τοῖς ὀπισθοφύλαξι καὶ πελτασταῖς Kal ὁπλίταις, ἐν- 
ταῦθα δὴ λέγει Χειρίσοφος, Εἰς καλὸν ἥκετε: τὸ γὰρ 
χωρίον αἱρετέον - τῇ γὰρ στρατιᾷ οὐκ ἔστι τὰ ἐπιτή- 

> x ld Ν / > li A “ 
15 Seva, εἰ μὴ ληψόμεθα τὸ χωρίον. ἐνταῦθα dy κοινῇ 
> “ \ “ " ™ > ΨᾺ ’ Ν 
ἐβουλεύοντο - καὶ τοῦ Ξενοφῶντος ἐρωτῶντος τί τὸ 
κωλῦον εἴη εἰσελθεῖν, εἶπεν 6 Χειρίσοφος, Μία αὕτη 
πάροδός ἐστιν ἣν pas: ὅταν δέ τις ταύτῃ πειρᾶται 
παριέναι, κυλινδοῦσι λίθους ὑπὲρ ταύτης τῆς ὑπερε- 
ne ol al a > a ΜΝ ν , 
20 χούσης πέτρας" ὃς δ᾽ ay καταληφθῇ. οὕτω διατί 
Ψ ᾽ es , 3 θ , 
Berar. ἅμα δ᾽ ἔδέιξε συντετριμμένους ἀνθρώπους 
καὶ σκέλη καὶ πλευράς. 

Ἢν δὲ τοὺς λίθους ἀναλώσωσιν, ἔφη ὃ ᾿Ἐενοφῶν, 
maf a 2Q\ / , . > Ἀ  » “ 
ἄλλο τι ἢ οὐδὲν κωλύει παριέναι ; οὐ γὰρ δὴ ἐκ τοῦ 

25 ἐναντίου ὁρῶμεν εἰ μὴ ὀλίγους τούτους ἀνθρώπους, 

4 , δύ a a e Xr , ‘ δὲ » 
καὶ τούτων δύο ἢ τρεῖς ὡπλισμένους. τὸ OE χωρίον, 
ε ‘ 0 MINT Ay de ‘al Nie λ θ AMM ὃ ὃ Ἂ 
ὡς καὶ σὺ ὁρᾷς. σχεδὸν τρία ἡμίπλεθρα ἐστιν ὃ OEt 
βαλλομένους διελθεῖν - τούτου δὲ ὅσον πλέθρον δασὺ 


146 ANABASIS IV. 7. 7-11. ANABASIS IV. 7.1216 © 147 


- » > A 
στώνυμον πλησίον ὄντα παρακαλέσας οὔτε Εὐρύλο- 


, ὃ ‘a , > > 4 ε , 
πίτυσι διαλειπούσαις μεγάλαις, ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ἑστηκότες ἀπο» apo 
/ » i 
χον τὸν Λουσιέα ἑταίρους οντας οὔτε ἄλλον οὐδένα 


¥ 5 “ “ἃ ᾽ nm Oe i, Δ ἤ ral 
αν pes TL ἂν πασχοιεν 1%) ὕπο TWV φερομένων λίθων 


χωρεῖ αὐτός; καὶ παρέρχεται πάντας. ὃ δὲ Καλλί1 % 


an) es ἴω , " ‘ Ὗ > Ν , 

ἢ ὑπὸ τῶν κυλινδουμένων ; TO λοιπὸν οὖν non γίγνεται , ἣ 

ε ‘an / ᾿ τι 

μαχος ὡς ὁρᾷ αὐτὸν παριόντα, ἐπιλαμβάνεται avTov 

κ᾿ al ‘ 3 "Al 

5 THs irvos: ἐν δὲ τούτῳ παραθεῖ αὐτοὺς ᾿Αριστώνυμος 
al A 

Μεθυδριεύς, καὶ μετὰ τοῦτον Εὐρύλοχος Λουσιεὺς " 

ἴω “ x > 

πάντες γὰρ οὗτοι AVTETOLOVYTO ἀρετῆς καὶ ἀντηγω- 
, μ᾿ 9 / Ν hil I ᾿ an 

νίζοντο πρὸς adAnAouS* καὶ OUTWS ἐρίζοντες αἱρουσι 

ἰ \ ,ὕ 
τὸ χωρίον. ὡς γὰρ ἅπαξ εἰσεδραμον, οὐδεὶς πέτρος 


ὡς ἡμίπλεθρον, ὃ δεῖ ὅταν λωφήσωσιν οἱ λίθοι πα- 
spadpapev. ᾿Αλλὰ εὐθύς, ἔφη ὁ Χειρίσοφος, ἐπειδὰν 
ἀρξώμεθα εἰς τὸ δασὺ προσιέναι, φέρονται οἱ λίθοι 
πολλοί. Αὐτὸ ἄν, ἔφη, τὸ δέον ein: θᾶττον γὰρ 
ἀναλώσουσι τοὺς λίθους. ἀλλὰ πορευώμεθα ἔνθεν 
ἡμῖν μικρόν τι παραδραμεῖν ἔσται; ἣν δυνώμεθα, 
10 ἄνωθεν ἠνέχθη. 
Capture of the fortress. Women throw their children over the cliffs ' Ἐνταῦθα δὴ δεινὸν ἦν θέαμα. αἱ γὰρ γυναῖκες 18 
᾿ a ; sau in! — ΌΜΝΝ, AHN ὶ ἵ ῥίπτουσαι τὰ παιδία εἶτα ἑαυτὰς ἐπικατερρίπτουν, 
Εντεῦθεν ἐπορεύοντο Χειρίσοφος καὶ Ἐενοφῶν καὶ ᾿ καὶ οἱ ἄνδρες ὡσαύτως. ἐνταῦθα δὴ καὶ Αἰνείας 
Καλλίμ i ip ibd λοχαγός᾽ rovrov γὰρ " 1 Στυμφάλιος λοχαγός; ἰδών τινα θέοντα ὡς ῥίψοντα 
bss aij ὀνισθυγνλόνω ἢ pene iil ih | ιὸ ἑαυτὸν στολὴν ἔχοντα καλήν, ἐπιλαμβάνεται ὡς κω- 
ἡμέρᾳ. οἱ δὲ ἄλλοι λοχαγοὶ ἐμενον ἐν τῷ ἀσφαλει. q λύσων- 6 δὲ αὐτὸν ἐπισπᾶται, καὶ ἀμφότεροι ᾧχοντο 4 
15 μετὰ τοῦτο οὖν ἀπῆλθον ὑπὸ τὰ δένδρα ἄνθρωποι ὡς | κατὰ τῶν πετρῶν φερόμενοι Kal ἀπέθανον. ἐντεῦθεν 
: / x | ἑβδομήκοντα, οὐκ ἀθρόοι ἀλλὰ καθ᾽ ἕνα, ἕκαστος 4 ἄνθρωποι μὲν πάνυ ὀλίγοι ἐλήφθησαν, βόες δὲ καὶ 
φυλαττόμενος ὡς ἐδύνατο. ᾿Αγασίας δὲ ὁ Στυμφά- | ὄνοι πολλοὶ καὶ πρόβατα. 
< il , ! λιος καὶ ᾿Αριστώνυμος͵ Μεθυδριεύς, καὶ οὗτοι τῶν | March through the Chalybes. Passage of the Harpasus. At Gymnias 
“ἢ ὀπισθοφυλάκων λοχαγοὶ ὄντες, καὶ ἄλλοι δέ, ἐφέ > they take a guide to lead them to the Euxine. 
φῬοστασαν ἔξω τῶν δένδρων ov yap ἦν ἀσφαλὲς ἐν 4 0 Ἐντεῦθεν ἐπορεύθησαν διὰ Χαλύβων σταθμοὺς 15 
τοῖς δένδροις ἑστάναι πλέον ἢ τὸν ἕνα λόχον. ἔνθα το | ἑπτὰ παρασάγγας πεντήκοντα. οὗτοι ἦσαν ὧν διῆλ- Ι 
δὴ Καλλίμαχος μηχανᾶταί Te ° προύτρεχεν ἀπὸ τοῦ ἢ θον ἀλκιμώτατοιῷ καὶ εἰς χεῖρας ἦσαν. εἶχον δὲ δ᾽ 
δένδρου ὑφ᾽ ᾧ ἦν αὐτὸς δύο ἢ τρία βήματα. ἐπεὶ δὲ | θώρακας λινοῦς μέχρι τοῦ ἤτρου, ἀντὶ δὲ τῶν πτερύ- 
οἱ λίθοι φέροιντο, ἀνέχαζεν εὐπετῶς - ἐφ᾽ ἑκάστης ἢ γων σπάρτα πυκνὰ ἐστραμμένα. εἶχον δὲ καὶ κνη-18 
95 δὲ προδρομῆς πλέον ἡ δέκα ἅμαξαι πετρῶν ἀνηλί . 25 μῖδας καὶ κράνη καὶ παρὰ τὴν ζώνην μαχαίριον 
σκοντο. ὁ δὲ ᾿Αγασίας ὡς ὁρᾷ τὸν Καλλίμαχον all ἢ ὅσον ξυήλην Λακωνικήν; ᾧ ἔσφαττον ὧν κρατεῖν 
ἐποίει, καὶ τὸ στράτευμα πᾶν θεώμενον, δείσας μὴ ‘a δύναιντο, Kal ἀποτέμνοντες ἂν TAS κεφαλὰς ἔχοντες 
οὐ πρῶτος παραδράμῃ εἰς τὸ χωρίον, οὔτε τὸν ᾿Αρι- ἢ ἐπορεύοντο; καὶ ἦδον καὶ ἐχόρευον ὁπότε οἱ πολέμιοι 


10 καὶ ἀπελθεῖν ῥᾷδιον, ἢν βουλώμεθα. 


148 ANABASIS IV. 7. 17-22. 


αὐτοὺς ὄψεσθαι ἔμελλον. εἶχον δὲ καὶ δόρυ ws πεν- 
τεκαίδεκα πήχεων μίαν λόγχην ἔχον. οὗτοι ἐνέμενον 
“ ν. 
ἐν τοῖς πολίσμασιν - ἐπεὶ δὲ παρέλθοιεν οἱ Ἕλληνες, 17 
ν Ὑ 4 ¥ ‘ > ~ b “Ἢ. 
εἵποντο ἀεὶ μαχούμενοι. ᾧκουν δὲ ἐν τοῖς ὀχυροῖς, 
δ καὶ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια ἐν τούτοις ἀνακεκομισμένοι ἦσαν" 
ν vy 
ὥστε μηδὲν λαμβάνειν αὐτόθεν τοὺς Ἕλληνας, ἀλλὰ 
/ ~ , “Δ ἋΣ ~ ᾽ » 
διετράφησαν τοῖς κτήνεσιν ἃ ἐκ τῶν Ταόχων ἔλαβον. 
ν 
ἐκ τούτου οἱ Ἕλληνες ἀφίκοντο ἐπὶ τὸν ἍΛρπασον 18 
Ψ κι 
ποταμόν, εὖρος τεττάρων πλέθρων. ἐντεῦθεν ἐπορεύ- 
ιΙοθησαν διὰ Σκυθηνῶν σταθμοὺς τέτταρας παρασαγ- 
γας εἴκοσι διὰ πεδίου εἰς κώμας, ἐν αἷς ἔμειναν 
ε Ἃ ‘ili ‘ > al > ~ iy 
ἡμέρας τρεῖς Kal ἐπεσιτίσαντο. ἐντεῦθεν διῆλθον 19 
σταθμοὺς τέτταρας παρασάγγας εἴκοσι πρὸς πόλιν 
μεγάλην καὶ εὐδαίμονα καὶ οἰκουμένην ἣ ἐκαλεῖτο 
᾿ν , > , κι , a a ¢ 
ιὸ Γυμνιάς. ἐκ ταύτης τῆς χώρας ὁ ἄρχων τοῖς Βλλη- 
ow ἡγεμόνα πέμπει, ὅπως διὰ τῆς ἑαυτῶν πολεμίας 
ἢ iv > / 3 ᾽. »" "ν᾿ / ν ¥ 
χώρας ayo. αὐτούς. ἐλθὼν δ᾽ ἐκεῖνος λέγει ὅτι ἄξει 20 
> \ , ε κι > , Ψ »” , 
αὐτοὺς πέντε ἡμερῶν εἰς χωρίον ὅθεν ὄψονται θάλατ- 
ταν " εἰ δὲ μή, τεθνάναι ἐπηγγείλατο. καὶ ἡγούμε- 
3 ‘ > f > ‘ ε “~ al 
20 vos ἐπειδὴ ἐνέβαλλεν εἰς THY ἑαυτοῦ πολεμίαν, παρε- 
κελεύετο αἴθειν καὶ φθείρειν τὴν χώραν - ᾧ καὶ δῆλον 
per THY χῶρ μ 
μι" 9 , Ψ ¥ > κι "Ἅ ςεὉ , 
ἐγένετο ὅτι τούτου ἕνεκα ἔλθοι, οὐ τῆς τῶν Ἑλλήνων 
εὐνοίας. 


In five days they come to a mountain, and a great shout ‘‘ The Sea! 
The Sea!’’ is heard from the van. The guide is dismissed with 
presents. 


K ‘ ib “ + hy ‘ ¥ i το ε ἊΜ , 
αἱ ἀφικνοῦνται ἐπὶ τὸ ὄρος τῇ πέμπτῃ ἡμέρᾳ 21 
| Ν δὲ »-ὡ.ν»νν > my > ‘ δὲ ε ΝΜ > , 
25 ὄνομα δὲ τῷ Oper ἦν ΘήχηςΨψ ἐπεὶ δὲ οἱ πρῶτοι ἐγέ 
VOVTO ἐπὶ τοῦ ὄρους, κραυγὴ πολλὴ ἐγένετο. ἀκού- 2 
δὲ ε -- -~ ᾿» ε > i MM il 
gas δὲ ὁ Ξενοφῶν καὶ οἱ ὀπισθοφύλακες ὠφήθησαν 


ANABASIS IV. 7. 23-27. 149 


ἔμπροσθεν ἄλλους ἐπιτίθεσθαι πολεμίους ' εἵποντο 
γὰρ ὄπισθεν οἵ ἐκ τῆς καομένης χώρας, καὶ αὐτῶν 
οἵ ὀπισθοφύλακες ἀπέκτεινάν τέ τινας καὶ ἐξώγρησαν 
ἐνέδραν ποιησάμενοι, καὶ γέρρα ἔλαβον δασειῶν 

δ βοῶν ὠμοβόεια ἀμφὶ τὰ εἴκοσιν. ἐπειδὴ δ᾽ ἡ βοὴ 23 
πλείων τε ἐγίγνετο καὶ ἐγγύτερον καὶ οἱ ἀεὶ ἐπιόντες 
ἔθεον δρόμῳ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀεὶ βοῶντας καὶ πολλῷ μείζων 
ἐγίγνετο ἢ Boy ὅσῳ δὴ πλείους ἐγύγνοντα, ἐδόκει δὴ 
μεῖζόν τι εἶναι τῷ Ἐἰενοφώντι, καὶ ἀναβὰς ἐφ᾽ ἵππον 24 

10 καὶ Λύκιον καὶ τοὺς ἱππέας ἀναλαβὼν παρεβοήθει" 
καὶ τάχα δὴ ἀκούουσι βοώντων τῶν στρατιωτῶν 
Θάλαττα θάλαττα καὶ παρεγγυώντων. ἔνθα 
δὴ ἔθεον πάντες καὶ οἱ ὀπισθοφύλακες, καὶ τὰ ὑπο- 
ζύγια ἠλαύνετο καὶ οἱ ἵπποι. 

ι Ἐπεὶ δὲ ἀφίκοντο πάντες ἐπὶ τὸ ἄκρον, ἐνταῦθα 25 
δὴ περιέβαλλον ἀλλήλους καὶ στρατηγοὺς καὶ NEE 
yous δακρύοντες. καὶ ἐξαπίνης ὅτου δὴ παρεγγυής- 
σαντος οἱ στρατιῶται φέρουσι λίθους καὶ ποιοῦσι 
κολωνὸν μέγαν. ἐνταῦθα ἀνετίθεσαν δερμάτων πλῆ-38 


Ν χ 3 , " 
90 θος ὠμοβοείων καὶ βακτηρίας καὶ τὰ αἰχμάλωτα *» 


dl ha "4 
γέρρα. καὶ ὁ ἡγεμὼν αὐτός TE κατέτεμνε τὰ γέρρα 


- \ κι \ ε ’ P 
Kat Tots ἄλλοις διεκελεύετο. μετὰ ταῦτα TOV ἡγεμόνα 21] *- 


a | νΝ a 

i Ἕλληνες ἀποπέμπουσι δῶρα δόντες ἀπὸ κοινοῦ 

ν ᾿ 3 “a ἃ Ν TI i." Ν 

ἵππον καὶ φιάλην ἀργυρᾶν καὶ σκευὴν ἸἹΪερσικὴν kat 
‘ 4 

25 δαρεικοὺς δέκα - re δὲ μάλιστα τοὺς δακτυλίους, 
an) i“ ld 

kat ἔλαβε πολλοὺς Tapa τῶν στρατιωτῶν. κώμην 

Ν Md > iy "Ἢ / Ν " δδὲ ἃ 

δὲ δείξας αὐτοῖς οὗ σκηνήσουσι καὶ τὴν ὁδὸν ἣν πο- 
δ κ᾿ ἤ > lA ¥ 

ρεύσονται εἰς Μάκρωνας, ἐπεὶ ἑσπέρα ἐγένετο, ᾧχετο 


ἊΜ > / 
τῆς νυκτὸς ἀπιών. 


150 ANABASIS IV. 8. 1-7. ANABASIS IV. 8. 8-12. 151 


The Macrones oppose the march of the Greeks. Through a former " ᾿ a ὼ, ci, Ro : : 
slave terms are made and pledges are given. δοῦναι και λαβεῖν ἐθέ λειν. ἐντεῦθεν διδόασιν οι 


VIII. Ἐντεῦθεν δ᾽ ἐπορεύθησαν οἱ Ἕλληνες διὰ 1 Μάκρωνες βαρβαρικὴν λόγχην τοῖς Ἕλλησιν, ot δὲ 


; ς Αι , δέ ~ Ἕλληνες ἐκείνοις Ἑλληνικήν - ταῦτα yap ἔφασαν 
Μακρώνων σταθμοὺς τρεῖς παρασάγγας θέεκα. τῇ ΠΣ ςς δ᾽ ἐ ; i Γ 

ο ν Η ᾿ 
πρώτῃ δὲ ἡμέρᾳ ἀφίκοντο ἐπὶ τὸν ποταμὸν ὃς ὠριζε πιστὰ evar θεοὺς δ᾽ ἐπεμαρτύραντο ἀμφότεροι. 


ἴω ‘ ων ἴω 5 > 
τὴν TOV Μακρώνων Kat τὴν TOV Σκυθηνῶν. εἶχον ὃ The Colchians next oppose the march. Xenophon’s plan of attack. 
ἴω Ἃ 
δ ὑπὲρ δεξιῶν χωρίον οἷον χαλεπώτατον Kat ἐξ ἀριστε- He encourages the troops. 
ἴω Γ᾿. ~ Ν ‘ ~ , 
pas ἄλλον ποταμόν, εἰς ὃν ἐνέβαλλεν ὁ ὁρίζων, δι᾽ ς Μετὰ δὲ τὰ πιστὰ εὐθὺς οἱ Μάκρωνες τὰ δένδρα 8 
* ~ ” dl , ε A ε ͵ ε ~ 
ov ἔδει διαβῆναι. HV δὲ οὗτος δασὺς δένδρεσι παχέσι συνεξέκοπτον τὴν τε ὁδὸν ὡδοποίουν ὡς διαβιβῶντες 
\ ¥ o~ 5 / ae \ 2λθ εν dr 3 Υ͂ > / A "RX A > A 
μὲν ov, πυκνοῖς δέ. ταῦτ᾽ ἐπεὶ προσηλῦον οἱ Ελλη- ς- ἐν μέσοις ἀναμεμιγμένοι τοις NOL, καὶ ἀγορᾶν — 
κι ν 90. “ A Q , . τ 2 
νες ἔκοπτον, σπεύδοντες ἐκ τοῦ χωρίου ὡς τάχιστα olay ἐδύναντο παρεῖχον; καὶ παρήγαγον ἐν τρισὶν τ“ εὖ 
A -ο. γ᾽ 7 AND. ‘ 4 9 , , ee ΥΣ 
10 ἐξελθεῖν. οἱ δὲ Μάκρωνες ἔχοντες γέρρα καὶ λόγχας ἡμέραις ἕως ἐπὶ τὰ Κόλχων ὅρια κατέστησαν TOUS proms 
\ , κι " » ,ὕ κι ὃ ,ὕ ἡ "EXX 3 DO > md 4 ν" "»"" , A Penwts 
καὶ Tpixivous χιτῶνας κατ ἀντιπέραν TNS ιαβάσεως ιΟ Ἕλληνας. ἐνταῦθα ἦν ὄρος μέγα καὶ ἐπὶ τούτου 9p... 
νοι ἢ t ἀλλήλοις διεκελεύ ὶ οἱ Κόλγοι παρατεταγμένοι ἦσαν. καὶ τὸ μὲν πρῶτον ~~ 
παρατεταγμένοι ἦσαν καὶ ἀλλήλοις διεκελεύοντο καὶ ἱ χοι παρατεταγμένοι ἦσαν. μὲν πρῶτον “᾿ς 
| ih κ᾿ εν 3 , Vj ξ ν 
a+ 3.4,vs λίθους εἰς τὸν ποταμὸν ἔρριπτον - ἐξικνοῦντο γὰρ οἱ Ἕλληνες ἀντιπαρετάξαντο φάλαγγα, ὡς οὕτως 
ee) ὺυ 2 2 "δέ χξ ὃ 00 Ι ἔπτε δὲ ἔδοξ po 
ov, οὐδ᾽ ἔβλαπτον οὐδέν. ἄξοντες πρὸς τὸ ὄρος - ἔπειτα OE ἐδοξε τοὺς στρατη- 
mt - ~ a , A Ψ ε , 
ι "EvOa δὴ προσέρχεται Ἐενοφῶντι τῶν πελταστῶν γοῖς βουλεύσασθαι συλλεγεῖσιν πὼς ὡς κάλλιστα 
᾽ “~ 
ἀνὴρ ᾿Αθήνησι φάσκων δεδουλευκέναι, λέγων ὅτι 15 ἀγωνιοῦνται. 
mt 5 »” > κ᾿ 7 ’ , N 
γιγνώσκοι THY φωνὴν τῶν ἀνθρώπων. καὶ οἶμαι: Ελεξεν οὖν Ξενοφῶν ὅτι δοκοίη παύσαντας τὴν 10 
¥ Ih. / ὃ i \ 3 / hv Xx λό > Ai ino M ε Ν \ φά- 
ἔφη. ἐμὴν ταύτην πατρίδα εἶναι - καὶ εἰ μὴ τι κωλύει φάλαγγα λόχους ὀρθίους ποιῆσαι" ἡ μὲν γὰρ Pa 
“ i id > 4 “ A ἊΝ ¥ ‘din 
ἐθέλω αὐτοῖς διαλεχθῆναι. ᾿Αλλ᾽ οὐδὲν κωλύει, ἔφη. λαγξ διασπασθήσεται εὐθύς - TH μὲν γὰρ ἄνοδον τῇ 
" Ν i .,ὈἉἍ ν ‘ "ἡ al 9 
90 ἀλλὰ διαλέγου καὶ μάθε πρῶτον τίνες εἰσίν. οἱ δ᾽ δὲ εὔοδον εὑρήσομεν τὸ ὄρος - καὶ εὐθὺς τοῦτο ἀθυ- 
~ “ , , Ψ , 3 , , 
εἶπον ἐρωτήσαντος ὅτι Μάκρωνες. ᾿Ερώτα τοίνυν, 90 μίαν ποιήσει ὅταν τεταγμένοι εἰς φάλαγγα ταύτην 
o~ ὔ ε ΜᾺ ¥ “ἡ A ν ν - 
ἔφη, αὐτοὺς Ti ἀντιτετάχαται καὶ χρήζουσιν ἡμῖν διεσπασμένην ὁρῶσιν. ἔπειτα ἣν μὲν ἐπι πολλῶν 11 
,“ ἴω al f 4 ε ΜΝ ε 
| πολέμιοι εἶναι. οἱ δ᾽ ἀπεκρίναντο; Ὅτι καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐπὶ τεταγμένοι προσάγωμεν, περιττεύσουσιν ἡμῶν οι 
, ᾽ν. “Ὁ “a rd ν “ἡ , 
4.2.) τὴν ἡμετέραν χώραν ἔρχεσθε. λέγειν͵ ἐκέλευον οἱ πολέμιοι καὶ τοῖς περιττοις χρήσονται ὁ τι ἂν βού- 
' ip " . Ψν > ἴω ’ DOV, X i + δὲ ν » aXe ld » "δὲ 
ME οῃ στρατηγοὶ ὅτι οὐ κακῶς γε ποιήσοντες, AANA βασι- ὠνται ἐὰν δὲ ἐπ᾽ ὀλίγων τεταγμένοι ἰωμεν, οὐδεν 
Bl wh FY ¥ ‘ > FAN Wg REI , ες" 
λεῖ πολεμήσαντες ἀπερχόμεθα εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα, καὶ 25 ἂν εἴη θαυμαστὸν εἰ διακοπείη ἡμῶν ἡ φάλαγξ ὑπὸ 
| - »" < 45 4 A | > io > ἢ > ν᾽ 
᾿ ζ΄ {οὐν) ἐπὶ θάλατταν βουλόμεθα ἀφικέσθαι. ἠρώτων ἐκεῖ- [ἃ ἀθρόων καὶ βελὼν καὶ ἀνθρώπων ἐμπεσόντων " εἰ δέ 
᾿ " ᾿ ͵ pn ν a ¢ ’ \ ¥ 9 / 
mee νοι εἰ δοῖεν ἂν τούτων τὰ πιστά. οἱ δ᾽ ἔφασαν καὶ πῃ τοῦτο ἔσται, τῇ ὅλῃ φάλαγγι κακὸν ἔσται. adda 12 


i γι 


ῶ NY NTC r ' 
2 ANABASIS IV. 8. 13-16. | ANABASIS IV. 8. 17-22. 153 


οι δοκεῖ ὀρθίο οὺς λό Le D Gg 
ΒΞ Γ ρθίους ἰδ ᾿ gpa iii ing vey ial b | ἔξω γενόμενοι ἐπορεύοντο " οἱ δὲ πολέμιοι ὡς εἶδον 11 
τον χωρίον κατασχε 
2 ee iy i isha ag ‘alge iui αὐτούς, ἀντιπαραθέοντες οἱ μὲν ἐπὶ τὸ δεξιὸν οἱ δὲ 
ἔξω τοὺς ἐσχάτο ὄχο ῶ | ii 3 
lial a wa ἤγῃς, ' ἣν ἐν ων pia sii ἐπὶ τὸ εὐώνυμον διεσπάσθησαν, καὶ πολὺ τῆς αὑτῶν 
κεράτων - καὶ οὕτως ἐ . ‘ a 
a aig lai Ags il ig pu icin ae ΒΝ φάλαγγος ἐν τῷ μέσῳ κενὸν ἐποίησαν. ot δὲ κατὰ 18 
ὃ φαλαγγος εξω οἱ ἐσ O ) APnk. ΝΣ Ξ 
φ' ς ἐξ Ε- aa hintaan Pash! ἐμ si! ee mip δτὸ ᾿Αρκαδικὸν πελτασταί, ὧν ἦρχεν Αἰσχίνης ὃ 
οἱ κράτιστοι ἡμῶν πρῶτο mid. 2y ai 
Ρ μον eee ρθε," τὰ re ΟΝ ᾿Ακαρνάν, νομίσαντες͵ φεύγειν ἀνακραγόντες ἔθεον " ζ: ζοὐτοὺςν 
ἦ ταύτῃ ἕκαστος ἄξει ὃ λόχος. καὶ εἴς τε τὸ διαλεῖπον 13 og i 7 
. a A Ν᾿ 9 , , mn 
ep “ ᾽ sia rity et ἌΡ iain 4 καὶ οὗτοι πρῶτοι ἐπὶ τὸ ὄρος ἀναβαίνουσι: συνεφε: ““" 
οὐ ῥάδιον ἔσται τοῖς πολεμίοις εἰ i a > 
9 P \é = ᾿ welll iii a ee ᾿ wail ' πετο δὲ αὐτοῖς καὶ τὸ ᾿Αρκαδικὸν ὁπλιτικόν, ὧν ἦρχε 
εν λόχων ὄντων, διακό y 
29) X iia nn me τ err tg | Κλεάνωρ ὁ Ὀρχομένιος. of δὲ πολέμιοι; ws ἤρξαντο 19 
10 ὄρθιον προσιόντα. ἐάν τέ τις πιέζηται τῶ {i ν “Ἂν y 
il i gl sl 3 ζηται lai ae a i 10 θεῖν, οὐκέτι ἔστησαν, ἀλλὰ φυγῇ ἄλλος ἄλλῃ ἐτρά- 
ὁ πλησίον βοηθήσει. ἣν τε εἷς πῃ δυνηθῃ τῶν λόχων ; a 
> & Ν » > ~ > Ν , ’ὔ »Ὁ 1" τ 
ἔπι TO AKPOV ἀναβῆναι. O det ὦ - is : 
Ρ τ Bn it il " vias ti ’ Οἱ δὲ Ἕλληνες ἀναβάντες ἐστρατοπεδεύοντο ἐν 
ἰων. ταυτα EOOCE, Και ἐποιουν Lo ᾿ ᾿ α ᾿ 
a hgh ξε; καὶ ἃ ἣν ὄρθιους τοὺς. se 14 ; πολλαῖς κώμαις καὶ τἀπιτήδεια πολλὰ ἐχούσαις. 
ενοῴφων ὃε ATLWY ἐπὶ TO EV® a ‘ 
ὅλ Φ I il ha 5 hal a dl ἐξιοῦ } καὶ τὰ μὲν ἄλλα οὐδὲν 6 τι Kal ἐθαύμασαν - τὰ δὲ20 
15 ἔλεγε τοῖς στρατιώταις, Ανὸρε Ἷ > n 
Y il it ” Sail nd glial toi | Is σμήνη πολλὰ Hv αὐτόθι, καὶ τῶν κηρίων ὅσοι ἔφαγον 
ὁρᾶτε μόνοι ἔτι ἡμῖν ἐμποδὼν τὸ μὴ ἤδη εἶναι ἔνθα δ a - , y , 2 7 ν 
Ἂ ‘5 Ἴ Πρ} R τῶν στρατιωτῶν πάντες appoves TE ἐγίγνοντο καὶ 
πάλαι OTEVOOMEV * τοῦτο T υνω ᾿ ‘ 
5 ode Sep jel a aac llc al | ἤμουν Kal κάτω διεχώρει αὐτοῖς καὶ ὀρθὸς οὐδεὶς 
ὠμουῦς O€L καταφαγειν. 
iil poy : ἐδύνατο ἵστασθαι, ἀλλ᾽ οἱ μὲν ὀλίγον ἐδηδοκότες 


The Colchians are defeated. The Greeks occupy villages, where ἢ 4 τ 3.6 ἱ δὲ λὺ 
Ἢ ιν EWKET AV, OL OE πολὺ μαινομε 
they are poisoned by the honey. y σφόδρ wil εθύουσιν ; ‘ esti. sh 


90 οἱ δὲ καὶ ἀποθνήσκουσιν. ἔκειντο δὲ οὕτω πολλοὶ 21 
a ‘ 
ὥσπερ τροπῆς γεγενημένης, καὶ πολλὴ ἦν ἀθυμία. 
~ > ε ᾽ > Λ be > al > XN A ᾿ς 
τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ ἀπέθανε μὲν οὐδείς, ἀμφὶ δὲ τὴν 
αὐτήν πως ὦραν ἀνεφρόνουν - τρίτῃ δὲ καὶ τετάρτῃ 
ἀνίσταντο ὦσπερ ἐκ φαρμακοποσίας. 


9: Ἁ δ᾽ > “ ᾿ ν 3 Vd ‘ ~ 
Επεὶ δ᾽ ἐν ταῖς χώραις ἕκαστοι ἐγένοντο Kal τοὺς 15 
20 λόχους ὀρθίους ἐποιήσαντο, ἐγένοντο μὲν λόχοι τῶν 
ie ~ 2 x ᾿ > Cl € \ sl ν 
ὁπλιτῶν ἀμφὶ τοὺς ὀγδοήκοντα, ὁ δὲ λόχος ἕκαστος 
δὸ > » ε ἢ Ἃ be i” Ἀ ‘ 
σχεδὸν εἰς τοὺς ἑκατόν - τοὺς δὲ πελταστὰς Kal τοὺς 
τοξότας τριχῇ ἐποιήσαντο, τοὺς μὲν τοῦ εὐωνύμου 
» Ν Ἀ ~ ἊΝ hy | Ἂ Ν “ ᾽ν 
ἔξω, τοὺς δὲ τοῦ δεξιοῦ, τοὺς δὲ κατὰ μέσον, σχεδὸν 
25 ἑξακοσίους ἑκάστους. ἐκ τούτου παρηγγύησαν 0116 
,Ἄν 
στρατηγοὶ εὔχεσθαι - εὐξάμενοι δὲ καὶ παιανίσαντες 


In two days the Greeks arrive at Trapezus on the Euxine. They 
make the sacrifice which they had vowed and celebrate games. 


25 Ἐντεῦθεν δ᾽ ἐπορεύθησαν δύο σταθμοὺς Tapacdy-22 +. 
ε , 4 25% , 9 mm frernft « 
yas ἑπτά, καὶ ἦλθον ἔπι θάλατταν εἰς Τραπεζοῦντα, 
πόλιν Ἑλληνίδα οἰκουμένην ἐν τῷ Εὐξείνῳ Πόντῳ 


.. 

ἐπορεύοντο. καὶ Χειρίσοφος μὲν καὶ Ἐενοφῶν καὶ 
e ‘ > “ ‘ ~ “ , , 

οἱ σὺν αὐτοῖς πελτασταὶ τῆς τῶν πολεμίων φάλαγγος 


~~ f 
tee wt Het Lowitnern > of S.7 


154 ANABASIS IV. 8. 23-28. Ἷ ANABASIS IV. 8. 


Σινωπέων ἀποικίαν ἐν τῇ Κόλχων χώρᾳ. ἐνταῦθα , δὰ "τοὺ ὰ τοῦ Ds ἐλάσαντας ἐν τῇ 
νώπεων απ ν ἢ χὼν χώρᾳ. καὶ ἔδει αὐτοὺς κατὰ του Tpavous CAAT n 
~ al » 
ἔμειναν ἡμέρας ἀμφὶ τὰς τριάκοντα ἐν ταῖς τῶν Κόλ- θαλάττῃ ἀναστρέψαντας πάλιν ἄνω πρὸς τὸν βωμὸν 
t 

“ “ »¥ 

χων κώμαις: κἀντεῦθεν ὁρμώμενοι ἐλήζοντο τὴν 23 ἄγειν. καὶ κάτω μὲν οἱ πολλοὶ ἐκαλιυδοῦννο: | aaa 
ir » Ἀ I. ~ ἴω , Mi 

Κολχίδα. ἀγορὰν δὲ παρεῖχον τῷ στρατοπέδῳ Tpa- “a δὲ πρὸς τὸ ἰσχυρῶς ὄρθιον μόλις βάδην ἐπορεύοντο 
ζ , ‘ 25 $a , x "PAX ‘ Eg [1 ων ν Ν . Ν ἔλ, Ν n 
5 1T€ OUVTLOL, Kat €OECAVYTO TE TOVS νας Kal CEVLA ; 5 OL ἵπποι: ἔνθα πολλὴ κραυγὴ και γε ως και παρα 
ἔδοσαν βοῦς καὶ ἄλφιτα καὶ οἶνον. συνδιεπράττοντο 24 


κέλευσις ἐγίγνετο. 
4 " A, κ᾿ ,᾿, »» κι > “ , 
δὲ καὶ ὑπὲρ τῶν πλησίον Κόλχων τῶν ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ 


μάλιστα οἰκούντων, καὶ ξένια καὶ παρ᾽ ἐκείνων ἦλθον 
βόες. 

Μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο τὴν θυσίαν ἣν ἐὔξαντο παρεσκευά- 95 
ζοντο: ἦλθον δ᾽ αὐτοῖς ἱκανοὶ βόες ἀποθῦσαι τῷ 
Au τῷ σωτῆρι καὶ τῷ Ἡρακλεῖ ἡγεμόσυνα καὶ τοῖς 


¥ A a |» 3 ’ \ TE AI 
ἄλλοις θεοῖς ἃ evEavTo. ἐποίησαν δὲ καὶ ἀγῶνα 
N > il ¥ > / 7 bh 
γυμνικὸν ἐν τῷ ὄρει ἔνθαπερ ἐσκήνουν. εἵλοντο δὲ 
/ / ἃ ¥ “ΜᾺ “Δ ¥ 
τὸ Δρακόντιον Σπαρτιάτην, ὃς ἔφυγε παῖς ὦν οἴκοθεν, 
o ¥ ‘ ral “ / > 
παῖδα ἄκων κατακανὼν ἕνήλῃ πατάξας, δρόμου τ 
ἐπιμεληθῆναι καὶ τοῦ ἀγῶνος προστατῆσαι. ἐπειδὴ 26 
S| , AE Ν » / “ 
δὲ ἡ θυσία ἐγένετο, τὰ δέρματα παρέδοσαν τῷ Apa- 
κοντίῳ, καὶ ἡγεῖσθαι ἐκέλευον ὅπου τὸν δρόμον πε- 
᾿ ¥ ε \ / hi € / SE 
20 ποιηκὼς εἴη. ὁ δὲ δείξας οὗπερ ἑστηκότες ἐτύγχανον, 
Οὗτος ὁ λόφος, ἔφη, κάλλιστος τρέχειν ὅπου ἄν τις 
βούληται. Πῶς οὖν, ἔφασαν, δυνήσονται παλαΐειν 
~ ~ ν ἴω, 
ἐν σκληρῷ καὶ δασεῖ οὕτως ; ὁ δ᾽ εἶπε, Μᾶλλόν τι 
ἀνιάσεται ὁ καταπεσών. ἠγωνίζοντο δὲ παῖδες μὲν 27 
/ ων 3 ἢ ¢ ~ / X 
g50TdoLov τῶν αἰχμαλώτων οἱ πλεῖστοι, δόλιχον δὲ 
Κρῆτες πλείους ἢ ἑξήκοντα ἔθεον, πάλην δὲ καὶ πυγ- 
Ἁ 
μὴν καὶ παγκράτιον (ἕτεροι - Kal) καλὴ θέα ἐγένετο - 
‘ ‘ / ἂν ’ a ε ’ὔ 
πολλοὶ γὰρ κατέβησαν, καὶ ἅτε θεωμένων τῶν ἕταί- 


€ “ 
Ee cue env Mt. & 


ρων πολλὴ φιλονικία ἐγίγνετο. ἔθεον δὲ καὶ ἵπποι, 28 


N.B. — In the notes, G. refers to the latest edition of Goodwin’s Greek 
- Grammar (1892), and H. to Hadley’s Greek Grammar, revised by Allen 


(1884). A few references are made to Goodwin’s Syntax of the Greek 


Moods and Tenses (edition of 1890), for the benefit of teachers and more 


advanced pupils. 

Most references to the Greek text of this edition are made to pages 
and lines (e.g. p. 91, 7). When references are made by a simple number 
without mentioning a page (e.g. 14), the line of the same page is meant. 
When a reference is made to a section without mentioning the book and 
chapter (e.g. § 16), the section of the same chapter is meant. 


NOT HB. 


BOOK FIRST. 


Tue Levyinc or AN Army.— THE MARCH TO THE NEIGHBORHOOD OF 
BaBYLon. — THE BatrLeE AT CuNAXA AND THE DEATH OF CYRUS. 


CHAPTER I. 


Page 1.1 81. 1. Aapelov καὶ Παρυσάτιδος : see the Introd., ὃ 15. 
For the case, a gen. of source, see G. 1130, 2; H. 750. — γίγνονται, 
were born. We should naturally render the clause, ‘Darius and Parysatis 
had two sons.’ For the historic pres., see G. 1252; H. 828. —8vo: for 
its agreement with παῖδες, see G. 922; H. 290b. There were other sons 
(thirteen children in all), but these are the two now prominently in the 
mind of the writer. —2. πρεσβύτερος... Kipos, Artaxerxes, (who was) 
the older, and Cyrus, the younger. ᾿Αρταξέρξης and Κῦρος are in appos. (ἃ. 
911; H. 623) with παῖδες. ---- 8. ἠσθένει, was ill, lay sick. The impf. denotes 
the continuance of the state (G. 1250, 2; H. 829). The aor. ἠσθένησε would 
mean fell ill (G. 1260 ; H. 841). ---- ὑπώπτενε : peculiar in augment (G. 543 ; 


H. 362 a).—reXevthv τοῦ βίου : in such expressions in Greek the two 15)... 


substs. are closely connected, expressing a single compound idea (cf, = 
‘Lebensende’ in German, ‘life-time’ in Eng., efc.), and only the subst. 
in the gen. has the art. For the force of the art., see G. 949; H. 658. 
—4. τὼ παῖδε: the dual, but above in 1 the pl. (G. 155). For the case, 
see G. 895, 1; H. 939. --- ἀμφοτέρω : for its position, see G. 976; H. 678.4, 
--- παρεῖναι, to be by (him), i. 6. at Thamneria. See Introd. § 19. 

§2. 4. ὁ: for the separation of art. and subst., see G. 964; H. 666c. 
—pév... δέ: used to correlate the twosentences. See the Dict., and c/. 
the case in 2. μέν is not to be translated. -—5. οὖν, now, is here continu- 
ative, not inferential. Cf. igitur in Lat.—qwapov ἐτύγχανε, was, as it 
happened, (already) there (G. 1586; H. 984). — μεταπέμπεται, summoned. 
For the tense, cf. γίγνονται 'ἰπ 1. This use of the pres. is common. — 
6. ἀρχῆς : see the Introd., 8 17. --- σατράπην : pred. acc. (G. 1077 ; H. 726). 
See also the Introd., § 11. — ἐποίησε, had made. The Greek was content 
simply to refer the action to the past, without specifying the time as 
exactly as we do by the plpf.—7. nal... δὲ ... ἀπέδειξε, and (δέ) he 
had also (καί) appointed him, etc., a transition from a rel. to an independ- 
eut clause, not uncommon in Greek, by which special attention is called’ 


158 ANABASIS L x. 2-3. 


Page 1.] to the second statement. καί adds the new particular of 
the investment of Cyrus with military authority (the office of satrap was 
at first chiefly a civil one); δέ is the conjunctive word, and the word 
between the two is emphatic. —wavrev: accent (ἃ. 128; H. 239). —8eon, 
who, lit. (as many) as, the rel. of quantity or number ((. 429; H. 282). 
—els... ἀθροίζονται, muster in the plain of Castolus, lit. gather them- 
selves into, etc. aOpoitovra is not the historic pres., but pres. to denote a 
standing fact. The review was annual. Where was the plain of Cas- 
tolus, and for what purpose was it especially used ? See the Dict. —8, 
ἀναβαίνει, ἀνέβη (10): this change of tense from the historic pres. to the 
aor. iscommon. The repetition of the verb in chiastic order emphasizes 
the importance of the act: ‘So Cyrus went up, taking with him Tissa- 
phernes as his friend, and (he was) accompanied on his journey (ἀνέβη) 
by a Greek escort.’— ὁ Κῦρος : prop. name with the art. (G. 945 ; H. 663), 
— 9. λαβών : the partic. denotes the attendant circumstance (G. 1563, 7; 
H. 968). So ἔχων ἰπ 10. See also G, 1565; H. 968). — ὡς φίλον : Tissa- 
phernes was in fact his enemy. See the Introd., § 201, — τῶν Ἑλλήνων 
ὁπλίτας τριακοσίους : ἃ body-guard selected from the Greeks then in his 
service. Cyrus knew well the superiority of the Greeks over the Persians 
as soldiers. What was the armor of the hoplite ?— 10. ἄρχοντα : in 
appos. (ἃ. 916, 1080; H. 726) with Ξενίαν, which is the second obj. of 
ἔχων. Where was Parrhasia ὃ 

$3. 12. ἐτελεύτησε, had ended (his life), had died. The aor. is 
generally used with ἐπεί or ἐπειδή, after, after that, the aor. with the 
temporal conj. being equivalent to our plpf. See note on ἐποίησε in 6, 
and ¢f. the Lat. historic (aoristic) pf. with postquam. — καὶ κατέστη... 
᾿Αρταξέρξης, and Artaxerxes had been established in the kingdom, lit. had 
been settled into, and so εἰς with the acc. —13 διαβάλλει, falsely accused. 
The current story, that Cyrus had planned to kill Artaxerxes at the time 
of his coronation (see the Introd., § 202), Xenophon evidently believed 
to be false. —14. ὡς ἐπιβουλεύοι : opt. by quot. after the idea of saying 
in διαβάλλει (G. 1487; H. 932, 2). The historic pres. is a secondary 
tense (ἃ. 1268). Give the direct form of ἐπιβουλεύοι. --- αὐτῷ : after the 
compound verb (G. 1179; H. 775). —6 δέ, but he (G. 981, 985; H. 654), 
i. e. Artaxerxes. ὁ δέ in the nom. in Attic almost always refers to a 
different subj. from that of the preceding sent. — 15. συλλαμβάνει, ‘had 
him arrested.’ — as ἀποκτενῶν, with the avowed object of putting him to 
death (G. 1563, 4; 1574; H. 969c¢; 978). ὡς shows that the purpose 
expressed by the partic. was that avowed by A. —16, ἐξαιτησαμένη. ... 
πάλιν : observe the difference between the Greek and Eng. idioms. In 
Eng., wade intercession for him and effected his return (again) ; but in 


> 


--- ee ς΄ —— = 


ANABASIS I. 1. 3-5. 159 


Page 1.] Greek, having made intercession for him, effected his return, etc. 
The use of the partic. is much commoner in Greek than in Eng., a fact 
to be kept constantly in mind in translating. For the voice of ἐξαιτησα- 
μένη, see G. 1242, 2; H. 815. Xenophon’s choice of the word ἀποπέμπει 
(lit. sent him back) shows his recognition of the imperious nature of 
Parysatis and of her influence over Artaxerxes. 

Page 2.] 84. 1. Ὁ δέ: i.e. Cyrus. Οὐ. the note on ὁ δέ, p. 1, 14. — 
ws, as, when, temporal conj. —dmfAGe: accent (G. 153, 1; H. 3916). — 
βουλεύεται... ἐκείνου, planned that he might never (G. 1610; H. 1021) 
again be (G. 1572 ; H. 885) in the power of his brother, but, if possible, 
might be king in his stead. For the mood of δύνηται, see G. 1503, end, 
and 1403; H. 997, 898; and for its accent, G. 729; Η. 417a.—3. μέν : 
correlative to δέ ἴῃ 5. His mother’s support is contrasted with the steps 
taken by Cyrus himself to bring about the desired end.—4. Κύρῳ : for 
the case, see (. 1159; H. 764, 2.—5, βασιλεύοντα : the simple attrib. 
partic. (G. 1559 ; H. 965), used as an adj. 

ὃ δ, 5. ὅστις ἀφικνεῖτο : acond. rel. sent. expressing a general supposi- 
tion in past time, with the indic. where we should expect the opt. (G. 
1452 ; H. 918, 894c).—6. παρὰ βασιλέως, from the presence of the king, 
is used with τῶν as an attrib. adj., a subst. being omitted (G. 952, 1, 2; H. 
666 a, 621a). The expression is brief, and would read in full, ὅστις δὲ 
τῶν παρὰ βασιλεῖ (dat.) ἀφικνεῖτο παρὰ βασιλέως (gen.) κτλ. - Note that the 
art. is omitted with βασιλέως (G. 957 ; H. 000 ο). --- πάντας : pl. because of 
the distributive force of ὅστις (G. 1021; H. 629b).—7. aire: with 
φίλους (ἃ. 1174; H. 765). So αὐτῷ in 10. --- εἶναι : after ὥστε (G. 1449; 
1450 ; H. 953). The Persians whose support Cyrus thus won were prob. 
high officials at court, sent out to inspect the province. See Introd. 11}, 
end. —8. nal... δέ: the position of δέ, so far from the beginning of the 
sent., is rare. For καὶ... δέ cf. p. 1, 7, and note. —réav βαρβάρων : to 
give a subst. a more emphatic position, it is often transferred, generally 
with change of case, from the dependent to the principal clause. So also 
in Eng., as “ See the learned Bellario, how he writes.’? Here we should 
normally have ἐπεμελεῖτο ὡς of wap ἑαυτῷ βάρβαροι πολεμεῖν κτλ. For the 
case οὗ βαρβάρων as it stands, see G. 1102; Η. 742.—9 ὡς εἴησαν, ἔχοιεν : 
object clause expressed by ws and the opt. where we should expect ὅπως 
and the fut. indic. (cf. ὅπως ἔσται in 2, and G. 1372; H. 885), or at least 
ὅπως with the pres. opt. (G. 1374, 1; H. 880 ὃ). In thus using ὡς (in the 
sense of ὅπως), Xenophon distinctly violates Attic usage. In general, he 
stands apart from other writers of Attic prose in his use of ὡς in final 
and object clauses. See G. Moods and Tenses, 351, and Appendix IV. 
The instances of his peculiar usage will be noted as they occur. — 


160 ANABASIS I. 1. 5, 6. 


Page 2.] πολεμεῖν : with ἱκανοί (G. 1526; H. 952). —ebvoixds ἔχοιεν : 
how are such phrases best rendered into Eng.? See the Dict., 8.0. 
ἔχω. ' 
$6. 1]. τὴν δὲ... βασιλέα, his Greek force (the position of the words 
is emphatic) he collected with the utmost secrecy (lit. concealing his act, 
G. 1242, 1; H. 812, as most he was able), that he might take (G. 1365; 
H. 881) the king as unprepared as possible. δέ introduces the third and 
most important particular. His mother was his first resource, then native 
Persians, then Greek mercenaries. Cyrus knew that an army of Greeks 
was his chief hope for wresting the throne from his brother, who had all 
the resources of the empire at his command. Cf. i. 7. 3. — 12. ὅτι ἀπαρα- 
σκενότατον : ὅτι or ws is very often prefixed to the sup. to strengthen it. 
Cf. quam mazime in Lat. In these constructions there is an ellipsis of 
some form of δίναμαι. Sometimes in the case of the sup. with ws the 
verb is expressed, as in 11, ws μάλιστα ἐδύνατο κρυπτόμενος, as secretly as 
possible, and p. 111, 13, ὡς ἐδύνατο τάχιστα ἐπορεύετο. Cf. with the latter 
the simple ws τάχιστα, p. 14, 21. Cf. also with ὅτι πλείστους, as many as 
possible, in 16, ws ἂν δύνηται πλείστους, p. 27, 3.—13. ὧδε, in the following 
manner ; covering all that follows to the end of the chapter. First he 
strengthened his garrisons (§ 6), which were already manned by Greeks; 
then he himself collected troops for the siege of Miletus (§ 7); then he 
got together other Greek contingents under Clearchus (§ 9), Aristippus 
(§ 10), Proxenus, Sophaenetus, and Socrates (§ 11). — ἐποιεῖτο : mid. Cf. 
ἐξαιτησαμένη, p. 1, 16. —14. φυλακάς : antec. attracted into the rel. 
clause (G. 1037 ; H. 995). Normally we should have τῶν φυλακῶν ὁπόσων 
(G. 1031; H. 994) εἶχε κτλ. The accent shows that φυλακάς is from 
φυλακή and not from φύλαξ (G. 121, 1; H. 128). State the difference in 
meaning of the two substs.— 15. ἑκάστοις : pred. position (G. 976; 
H. 673 a). — 16. as... πόλεσι, on the plea that Tissaphernes was plot- 
ting against their cities (G. 1568, 1574 ; H. 970, 978). Cf. ὡς ἀποκτενῶν, 
Ρ. 1, 15.—17. καὶ yap... τὸ ἀρχαῖον, and (the reason was plausible), for 
the cities of Ionia had originally (G. 1060 ; H. 719) belonged to Tissa- 
phernes (G. 1094, 1; H. 732 α). The impf. ἦσαν is used with τὸ ἀρχαῖον 
of a time prior to the main action. —18. ἐκ βασιλέως δεδομέναι, having 
been given him by the king, or being a present to him from the king. ἐξ 
(for the form ἐκ, see G. 63; H. 88c) is used with the gen. of the agent 
viewed as the source. — 19. ἀφειστήκεσαν : for the form, see G. 528; 
H. 359a. For the revolt of the Greek cities of Ionia to Cyrus, see the 
Introd. ,§ 17 end.— 20. πλὴν Μιλήτου : Tissaphernes had built a castle in 
Miletus which overawed the town. Situation of Miletus ? See the Dict. 
and map. 


ANABASIS I. 1. 7,8 161 


Page 2.] §7. 21. προαισθόμενος, having become aware (or in Eng. more 
commonly, becoming aware) beforehand. — τὰ αὐτά : distinguish this care- 
fully from the following ταῦτα (ἃ. 399; H. 679). In the pl., because the 
Greeks looked at the action of revolting with reference to its parts ; but 
in Eng., were forming this same plan (cognate acc., G. 1054 ; H. 7166, — 
βουλενομένους : sc. τινάς. The partic. is in indirect discourse (G. 1588 ; 
H. 982).— ἀποστῆναι : in appos. with τὰ αὐτὰ ταῦτα (G. 1517), —22. τοὺς 
piv... τοὺς δέ : relic of the original demonstrative meaning of the art. 
(G. 981; H. 654).— 23. ὑπολαβὼν τοὺς φεύγοντας : subordinated to συλλέξας 
ἐπολιόρκει, when he had taken the fugitives under his protection, he collected 
an army and laid siege, etc. ὑπολαβὼν καὶ (observe the conj.) συλλέξας 
ἐπολιόρκει Would mean, when he had taken ,and had collected, he laid siege, 
etc.— 24. ἐπολιόρκει : continued action. —25. κατάγειν : observe the dis- 
tinction of the following terms : ἐκβάλλω, eject, banish ; φεύγω, flee, be in 
banishment ; κατάγω, lead back, restore from banishment ; ἐκπίπτω, fall out, 
be banished. — 26. καὶ αὕτη... στράτευμα, and in this again he had 
(G. 1173; H. 768) another pretext for collecting (G. 1547; H. 959) an 
army. αὕτη is in agreement with the subst. in the pred. ; otherwise it 
would be τοῦτο. 

Page 3.] §8. 1. ἠξίου. .. αὐτοῦ, he asked, on the ground that he was 
(G. 1563, 2; H. 969b) his brother. —2. δοθῆναι : obj. of ἠξίου (ἃ. 1518 ; 
H. 948), with πόλεις for its subj. — ot: the indir. reflex. (G. 987 ; H. 685), 
accented because it is in antithesis to Τισσαφέρνην and emphatic (ἃ. 144, 1; 
H. 263). —3. dpxew: parallel in const. to δοθῆναι, i.e. he thought it right 
(ἠξίου) rather that the cities should be given to him (placed under his 
authority) than (he thought it right) that Tissaphernes should control 
them. — αὐτῶν : for the case, see G. 1109; H. 74]. --- συνέπραττεν... 
αὐτῷ : coiperated with him in this, lit. did this with (συν-) him. Why is 
ταῦτα in the pl. ? See note on τὰ αὐτά, p. 2, 21.— 4. ὥστε οὐκ ἠσθάνετο : 
actual result (G. 1449; 1450; H. 927). Cf. ὥστε εἶναι, p. 2, 1. --- πρὸς 
ἑαυτόν : used as adj. (G. 952, 1; H. 000 α). πρός : here of hostile personal 
relation. —5. Τισσαφέρνει... δαπανᾶν, but thought that he (αὐτόν, i.e, 
Cyrus) was incurring expense (G. 1522, 1; H. 946) about his forces because he 
was at war with Tissaphernes (G. 1177 ; H. 772). —6. ὥστε . . . πολεμούν- 
των, consequently he was not at all (οὐδέν, G. 1060; H. 719) displeased at 
their being at war (G. 1568 ; H. 970). — 7. καὶ yap, and (the more) because, 
involving an ellipsis, as always. C/. p. 2, 17.—9. dv... ἔχων, which he 
(Cyrus) happened to have that belonged to Tissaphernes. 'Ῥισσαφέρνους is a 
gen. of possession (G. 1085, 1; H. 729 α), limiting ὧν in the rel. clause, 
It would stand normally in the antec. clause with τῶν πόλεων. --- wv: 
assimilation in case (G. 1031 ; H. 994). — Note throughout this section the 
use of the impf. to express continuance or repetition. 


160 ANABASIS I. 1. 5, 6. 


Page 2.] πολεμεῖν : with ἱκανοί (G. 1526; H. 9652). --- εὐνοϊκῶς ἔχοιεν : 
how are such phrases best rendered into Eng.? See the Dict., 3.v. 
ἔχω. 

8 6, 11. τὴν δὲ... βασιλέα, his Greek force (the position of the words 
is emphatic) he collected with the utmost secrecy (lit. concealing his act, 
G. 1242, 1; H. 812, as most he was able), that he might take (G. 1365; 
H. 881) the king as unprepared as possible. δέ introduces the third and 
most important particular. His mother was his first resource, then native 
Persians, then Greek mercenaries. Cyrus knew that an army of Greeks 
was his chief hope for wresting the throne from his brother, who had all 
the resources of the empire at his command. Cf. i. 7.3.—12. ὅτι ἀπαρα- 
σκενότατον : ὅτι or ws is very often prefixed to the sup. to strengthen it. 
Cf. quam mazime in Lat. In these constructions there is an ellipsis of 
some form of δίναμαι. Sometimes in the case of the sup. with ws the 
verb is expressed, as in 11, ὡς μάλιστα ἐδύνατο κρυπτόμενος, as secretly as 
possible, and p. 111, 15, ws ἐδύνατο τάχιστα ἐπορεύετο. Cf. with the latter 
the simple ws τάχιστα, p. 14, 21. Cf. also with ὅτε πλείστους, as many as 
possible, in 16, ws ἂν δύνηται πλείστους, p. 27, 3.—13. ὧδε, in the following 
manner ; covering all that follows to the end of the chapter. First he 
strengthened his garrisons (δ 6), which were already manned by Greeks ; 
then he himself collected troops for the siege of Miletus (§ 7); then he 
got together other Greek contingents under Clearchus (§ 9), Aristippus 
(§ 10), Proxenus, Sophaenetus, and Socrates (δ 11). — ἐποιεῖτο : mid. Cf. 
ἐξαιτησαμένη, Ὁ. 1, 16. —14. φυλακάς : antec. attracted into the rel. 
clause (G. 1037 ; H. 995). Normally we should have τῶν φυλακῶν ὁπόσων 
(G. 1031; H. 994) εἶχε κτλ. The accent shows that φυλακάς is from 
φυλακή and not from φύλαξ (G. 121, 1; H. 128). State the difference in 
meaning of the two substs.— 15. ἑκάστοις : pred. position (G. 976; 
H. 673 a). — 16. as... πόλεσι, on the plea that Tissaphernes was plot- 
ting against their cities (G. 1568, 1574 ; H. 970, 978). Cf. ὡς ἀποκτενῶν, 
p. 1, 15.—17. καὶ yap... τὸ ἀρχαῖον, and (the reason was plausible), for 
the cities of Ionia had originally (G. 1060 ; H. 719) belonged to Tissa- 
phernes (G. 1094, 1; H. 732a). The impf. ἦσαν is used with τὸ ἀρχαῖον 
of a time prior to the main action. —18. ἐκ βασιλέως δεδομέναι, having 
been given him by the king, or being a present to him from the king. ἐξ 
(for the form ἐκ, see G. 63; H. 88c) is used with the gen. of the agent 
viewed as the source. —19. ἀφειστήκεσαν : for the form, see G. 528; 
H. 359a. For the revolt of the Greek cities of Ionia to Cyrus, see the 
Introd. ,§ 17 end.— 20. πλὴν Μιλήτου : Tissaphernes had built a castle in 
Miletus which overawed the town. Situation of Miletus ? See the Dict. 
and map. 


ANABASIS I. x. 7,8. 161 


Page 2.] §7. 21. προαισθόμενος, having become aware (or in Eng. more 
commonly, becoming aware) befurehand. — τὰ αὐτά : distinguish this care- 
fully from the following ταῦτα (ἃ. 399; H. 679). In the pl., because the 
Freeks looked at the action of revolting with reference to its parts ; but 
in Eng., were forming this same plan (cognate acc., G. 1054 ; H. 7166. — 
BovAcvopévous : sc. τινάς. The partic. is in indirect discourse (ἃ. 1588 ; 
H. 982).— ἀποστῆναι : in appos. with τὰ αὐτὰ ταῦτα (G. 1517). — 22. τοὺς 
pev... Tous δέ : relic of the original demonstrative meaning of the art. 
(G. 981; H. 654).— 23. ὑπολαβὼν τοὺς φεύγοντας : subordinated to συλλέξας 
érodidpxer, when he had taken the fugitives under his protection, he collected 
an army and laid siege, etc. ὑπολαβὼν καὶ (observe the conj.) συλλέξας 
ἐπολιόρκει Would mean, when he had taken ,and had collected, he laid siege, 
etc,— 24. ἔπολιόρκει : continued action. —25. κατάγειν : observe the dis- 
tinction of the following terms : ἐκβάλλω, eject, banish ; φεύγω, flee, be in 
banishment ; κατάγω, lead back, restore from banishment ; ἐκπίπτω, fall out, 
be banished. — 26. καὶ αὕτη... στράτευμα, and in this again he had 
(G. 1173; H. 768) another pretext for collecting (G. 1547; H. 959) an 
army. αὕτη is in agreement with the subst. in the pred. ; otherwise it 
would be τοῦτο. 

Page 3.] §8. 1. ἠξίου... αὐτοῦ, he asked, on the ground that he was 
(6. 1563, 2; H. 969b) his brother. —2. ϑοθῆναι : obj. of ἠξίου (G. 1518 ; 
H. 948), with πόλεις for its subj. — ot: the indir. reflex. (G. 987 ; H. 685), 
accented because it is in antithesis to Τισσαφέρνην and emphatic (G. 144, 1; 
H. 263). —3. dpxew: parallel in const. to δοθῆναι, i.e. he thought it right 
(ἠξίου) rather that the cities should be given to him (placed under his 
authority) than (he thought it right) that Tissaphernes should control 
them. — αὐτῶν : for the case, see G. 1109; H. 74]. --- συνέπραττεν. .. 
αὐτῷ : coiperated with him in this, lit. did this with (συν-) him. Why is 
ταῦτα in the pl. ? See note on τὰ αὐτά, p. 2,21. —4. ὥστε οὐκ ῃσϑάνετο : 
actual result (G. 1449; 1450; H. 927). Cf. ὥστε εἶναι, p. 2, 1. --- πρὸς 
ἑαντόν : used as adj. (G. 952, 1; H. 666a), πρός : here of hostile personal 
relation. —5. Τισσαφέρνει... δαπανᾶν, but thought that he (αὐτόν, i.e. 
Cyrus) was incurring expense (G. 1522, 1; H. 946) about his forces because he 
was at war with Tissaphernes (G. 1177 ; H. 772). —6. ὥστε . . . πολεμούν- 
των, consequently he was not at all (οὐδέν, G. 1060; H. 719) displeased at 
their being at war (G. 1568 ; H. 970). — 7. καὶ yap, and (the more) because, 
involving an ellipsis, as always. ΟΝ p. 2, 17.—9. av... ἔχων, which he 
(Cyrus) happened to have that belonged to Tissaphernes. Τισσαφέρνους is a 
gen. of possession (G. 1085, 1; H. 729 α), limiting ὧν in the rel. clause. 
It would stand normally in the antec. clause with τῶν πόλεων. --- ov: 
assimilation in case (G. 1031 ; H. 994). — Note throughout this section the 
use of the impf. to express continuance or repetition. 


109 ANABASIS I. r. 9, 10. 


Page 3. 89. 10. Χερρονήσῳ: What was the Chersonese, and where 
was it?—11. κατ᾽ ἀντιπέρας : an adv. phrase like ‘ over against’ in Eng., 
in which ἀντιπέρας was originally felt to be an acc.; sometimes written as 
one word, καταντιπέρας. --᾿Αβύδου : for the case, see G. 1148; H. 757. 
Where was Abydus, and for what was it famous ? — τόνδε τὸν τρόπον: ii 
the following (ἃ. 1005 ; H. 696) manner, adv. acc. equal to ὧδε, p. 2, 13. — 
12. Κλέαρχος : see Introd., ὃ 23. — 13. ἠγάσϑη, came to admire (G. 1260 ; 
Η. 841). --- δίδωσιν : change to the historic pres. Cf. ἀναβαίνει, ἀνέβη, 
p. 1, 8, 10, and the note. —14. μυρίους δαρεικούς : this was a large sum 
(354,000), but Cyrus did not lack means and was determined to have 
men. — 15. συνέλεξεν, ἐπολέμει : note the difference in tense. —16. ἐκ 
«Ὁ ὁρμώμενος : i.e. the Chersonese was his military base. — τοῖς Θρᾳξὶ 
τοῖς... οἰκοῦσι : note the position of the attrib. adj. phrase (G. 959, 2; 
952, 1; H. 668; 666a). Cf. ἐν Χερρονήσῳ τῇ κτλ. above in 10. --- 17. 
Ἑλλήσποντον : the acc. with reference to a preceding state of motion, as 
in the phrase εἰς τόπον οἰκῶ, (go into and) dwell in a place. What is the 
modern name of the Hellespont ?— 20. ἑκοῦσαι : to be translated by an 
adv. (G. 926; H. 619a). —rotro ... στράτευμα, in this way again this 
armament was secretly maintained (G. 1586; H. 984) for him. 

$10. 22. Θετταλός : Where was Thessaly? What famous mountain 
was there on its northern boundary ? — ξένος : What is the difference 
between the meaning of the word here and that below in 25 ?—23. οἴκοι: 
used as adj. (G. 952, 1; H. 666a). For its accent, see G. 113; H. 102b.— 
24. αἰτεῖ... μισϑόν, asked him for pay (αὐτόν and μισθόν being obj. aces. 
with aire?) for (eis) 2000 mercenaries (and) for three months, i.e. for three 
months’ pay (G. 1085, 5; H. 729 d) for 2000 mercenaries. This is some- 
times rendered, asked him for about (els, See note on eis, p. 5, 5) 2000 
mercenaries etc.; but it seems incredible that Cyrus should have been 
willing to send off 4000 Greeks (he gave Aristippus double the sum for 
which he asked) on so distant an expedition, when his whole aim was 
to gather Greek troops about him as rapidly as possible. On the other 
hand, it was an easy matter for. him to furnish Aristippus the means 
for collecting this number. —25. a... ἀντιστασιωτῶν, on the ground 
that (cf. the use of ws with ἐπιβουλεύοντος, p. 2, 16) in this way he should 
get the better of his opponents. περιγενόμενος ἄν (G. 1563, 2; Π, 969 δ) 
would be περιγένοιτο ἄν (G. 1308 ; H. 987 a), if expressed by a finite 
mood. The prot. to this apod. is implied in ovrws (G. 1413; EH. 902). — 
26. ἀντιστασιωτῶν : for the case, see G. 1120 ; H. 749. 

Page 4.] 2. αὐτοῦ : gen. obj. of δεῖται (G. 1114; H.743a). The obj. 
inf. καταλῦσαι is, in this case, the acc. --μή: with the inf. (G. 1611; 
H. 1023). —3. πρὶν dv αὐτῷ συμβουλεύσηται, until he had consulted with 


ANABASIS I. 1. 10 anv 2. 1. 163 


Page 4.] him. For πρίν (strengthened by preceding πρόσθεν) signifying 
until, with the subjv. after a neg., see G. 1469; 1470; H. 924. Since the 
clause depends on an historic tense,rpiv συμβουλεύσαιτο (ἃ. 1502, 3; Η, 


957 a) might have been used. 

δ 11, 6. Πρόξενον : the particular friend of Xenophon, at whose invi- 
tation the latter took part in the expedition. — 7. ὡς βουλόμενος, ὡς παρε- 
χόντων : the first ws shows that βουλόμενος κτλ. gives the cause for the 
command to Proxenus, as assigned by Cyrus; the second ws shows that 
παρεχόντων gives the cause, as assigned by Cyrus, for his desire (βουλόμε- 
vos) to expel the Pisidians ; while ws before πολεμήσων in 12 shows that 
this partic. gives the purpose declared by Cyrus for his command to the 
other two generals (ἐκέλευσεν). The further idea implied in the first and 
third cases, that the cause and the purpose were not the true grounds of 
his action, is derived from the context and is not implied by this use of ws 
(G. 1574 ; H. 978). Neither is there any conditional force in the partic. 
with ws. C/. with these three cases of ws with the partic. the cases where 
it occurs above, p. 1, 15, p. 2,16, p. 3, 25.— els Πισίδας : point out the 
situation of Pisidia on the map. —9. χώρᾳ: equiv. to ἀρχῇ. Cf. p. 1, 17. 
—10. Where were Stymphalus and Achaia? Over one half of the Ten 
Thousand came from Arcadia and Achaia. See Introd. ὃ 242, —11., 
ξένους... τούτους, these also being quest-friends (G. 907 ; H. 614) of his. 
—12. σὺν τοῖς φυγάσι, with the aid of the exiles. Cf. with this the simple 
dat. Τισσαφέρνει that precedes. For this cf. p. 3,5. —13. τοῖς Μιλησίων: 
for the repetition of the art., cf. rots Θρᾳξὶ xrd., p. 3, 16, and the note. — 
For the reasons that made it comparatively easy for Cyrus to collect his 
large force of Greek mercenaries, see the Introd., § 241. 


CHAPTER II. 


$1. 14. “Emel... ἄνω, but when it now seemed good to him to proceed 
(note the tense, G. 1271, 1272, 1; H. 851) into the interior. The time is 
early in 401 ».c. Cyrus had begun his secret preparations against his 
brother immediately on his return to the court, after the death of his 
father, in 404 B. ο. --- τὴν μὲν... βουλόμενος, he made his pretence as if 
he wished, etc. Note the voice of ἐποιεῖτο. μέν implies a clause with δέ, 
which if expressed might be, τῇ δ᾽ ἀληθείᾳ ἐπὶ βασιλέα ἐπορεύετο. The 
antithesis is in fact expressed below in § 4, where μέν is repeated from ἃ 
new point of view. For ws βουλόμενος, see the note on ws βουλόμενος, p. 4, 7. 
— Knowing the dread with which the Greeks regarded the vast distances 
of the Persian empire, Cyrus did not deem it wise ‘to announce his real 
purpose publicly, But it should be observed that his alleged purpose 


164 ANABASIS I. 2. 1-3. 


Page 4.] carried him and his troops eastward toward Babylon. See the 
map. —15. ἐκβαλεῖν ἐκ : the prep. repeated, as often. —16. ὡς ἐπὶ τού- 
τους, avowedly against these. —17. ἐνταῦθα ἥκειν, to come there, i.e. to 
Sardis. Cf. p. 5, 18.—18. καί, also. Clearchus and Aristippus were at 
a distance (cf. i. τ. 9 and 10), and their troops are not regarded as part of 
the Greek force (rd ᾿Ἑλληνικόν) just mentioned. —AaBdvn, with. Cy. 
λαβών, p. 1, 9, and the note. —19. ὅσον... στράτευμα, whatever troops 
he had. Cf. ὀπόσας εἶχε φυλακάς, p. 2, 14, and the note, and ὃ εἶχε orpd- 
τευμα in the next line. This attraction of the antec. is a common const. 
in Eng. also. —’Aptotirr : Aristippus did not come in person, but sent 
Menon. See i. 2. 6 and ii. 6. 28.—20. τοὺς οἴκοι : cf. p. 3, 23. —21. 
Ἐενίᾳ : What mark of confidence, as already narrated, had Cyrus shown 
Xenias ὃ —22. τοῦ ξενικοῦ : for the case, see G. 1109; H. 741. —23. 
λαβόντα : so far removed from Zevig, with which we should expect it to 
agree (cf. λαβόντι in 18 and συναλλαγέντι in 19), that it takes the case of 
the (unexpressed) subj. of ἥκειν (G. 928,1; H. 941). —24. φυλάττειν : 
cf. the const. of πολεμεῖν, p. 2, 9. 

8. 2, 25. ἐκέλευσε, urged. Note the chiastic arrangement, ἐκάλεσε τοὺς 
πολιορκοῦντας καὶ τοὺς φυγάδας ἐκέλευσε. --- 30. ὑποσχόμενος... οἴκαδε, 
promising them that, if he should successfully accomplish the object for 
which he was taking the field (G. 1026; 1027; H. 996), he would not 
(G. 1496 ; H. 1024) stop until he had restored them to their homes. Verbs 
of promising regularly take the fut. inf. of indir. discourse, but the pres. 
and aor. are allowed (ἃ. 1286; H. 948a). (The fut. παύσεσθαι here has 
the authority only of a correction in one MS.) For the dependent verbs, 
which, except ἐστρατεύετο, are indirectly quoted, see G. 1497, 2; H. 932, 2. 
We might have had ἐὰν καταπράξῃ and πρὶν ἂν καταγάγῃ representing ἐὰν 
καταπράξω and πρὶν ἂν καταγάγω of the direct form. ἐστρατεύετο, for 
which, on the principles of indir. discourse, we might have had either 
στρατεύοιτο ΟΥ στρατεύεται (representing στρατεύομαι of the dir. form), is 
not included in the indir. discourse, but is in the tense demanded by the 
narrative. See G. 1501; H. 936. This is also the Eng. usage. — 27. 
πρόσθεν πρίν : ε΄. p. 4, 2 and 3. 

Page 5.] 2. airw: dat. of indir. obj. —3. παρῆσαν els Σάρδεις : 
previous motion is implied (G. 1225, 1; H. 788). The army was en- 
camped probably outside the city, so that εἰς means simply to. Sardis 
was the capital of Lydia and at this time the residence of Cyrus. See the 
Dict. and map. 

§ 3. Read the Introd. §§ 21, 22, 23.—4. τοὺς ἐκ τῶν πόλεων : cf. τῶν παρὰ 
βασιλέως, p. 2, 6, and note. —5. els, to the number of, with a numeral. 
This word and ἀμφί, about, when thus used, are still prepositions and take 


ANABASIS I. 2. 3-5. 165 


Page 5.] the numeral inthe acc. Cf. πελτασταὶ ἀμφὶ τοὺς δισχιλίους, about 
two thousand (acc.) peltasts (nom.) below, p. 7,4, where ἀμφὶ τοὺς δισχιλίους 
is an adj. phrase. ws and ὅσον, on the other hand, are in this sense advs. 
and do not affect the case of the numeral that follows. —7. γυμνῆτας : 
the accent determines the declension to which the subst. belongs, the 
termination -as being long in the first dec. and short in the third (G. 112 ; 
Η. 101 ε). For the comprehensive application of the term γυμνής, see the 
Dict. —9. ὡς, about. See note on εἰς above in 5. — Πασίων ὁ Μεγαρεύς : 
not before mentioned. Where was Megara ?— πελταστάς : describe the 
equipment of the peltast.—11. ἦν : in agreement with the nearer subj. (G. 
901 ; HI. 607). —12. τῶν στρατευομένων, of those who had been campaigning. 
The pres. here represents the impf. (G. 1289; H. 856a). For the case, 
see G. 1094, 7; H. 732; 7296. 

84, 18. Οὗτοι μέν : in contrast with those who came from a greater 
distance and joined him later (ὃ 6 and §9). For μέν, see the note, p. 4, 
14. —In connected discourse, every Greek sent. has, in general, a con- 
junction to connect it with the preceding sent. The exceptions to this 
principle in Xenophon are mainly such sents. as begin with demonstra- 
tives or advs. of place. Cf. οὗτοι μὲν κτλ. here, τούτου τὸ edpos κτλ. in 23, 
τοῦτον διαβὰς κτλ. in 24, ἐνταῦθα ἔμεινεν in 26. Cf. also τούτῳ συγγενόμενος 
κτλ., p. 8, 12, and ἐνταῦθα καὶ παραγγέλλει, p. 4,17. The lack of con- 
nection is called asyndeton (ἀ-σύν-δετον, δέω, bind) and is commonest in 
explanatory sents.— αὐτῷ: dat. of advantage (G. 1165 ; H. 767). —Twea- 
φέρνης πορεύεται κτλ. he declares this himself in ii. 3. 19. — 14. μείζονα ἢ 
ὡς, too extensive to he, lit. greater than as (it would be, if), etc. —15, εἶναι : 
quoted inf. Cf. δαπανᾶν, p. 3, 6, and the note. —16. ὡς βασιλέα, to the 
king. ὡς is used as a prep. only with the acc. of a person. See also note 
on βασιλέως, p. 2, 6.— qq... τάχιστα, as quickly as possible, lit. in what 
way (sc. ὁδῷ, G. 1181; H. 776) he could most quickly. 

$5. 17. ἤκουσε: with double obj. (G. 1103; H. 742c).—20. οὕς : 
antec. omitted. Cf. p. 4,27. With how many Greek troops did Cyrus 
set out from Sardis? — ὡρμᾶτο : the march probably began March 6, 
401 n.c. See the Introd. § 42%. Follow carefully on the map the route 
now to be described, and determine the situation of the countries, towns, 
and rivers mentioned. Read at the same time the corresponding articles 
in the Dict. —éwé : not ἐξ, out of, because the army was not encamped 
within the city. —21. σταθμοὺς τρεῖς, three days’ journey, an acc. of 
extent of time (G. 1062; H. 720). Cf. παρασάγγας, an acc. of extent of 
space, immediately following. On the ‘stage’ and parasang, see the 
Introd., § 41. —22. εἴκοσι καὶ δύο : note the conj. (G. 382, 1; H. 2915). 
— Μαίανδρον : note the position of the word (ἃ. 970; H. 624a). Give its 


166 ANABASIS I. 2. 5-9. 


Page 5.1] Eng. derivative. —23. πλέθρα: what was the length of the 
πλέθρον ? — yépupa .... πλοίοις, und there was « pontoun-bridge over (it) 
made of seven boats (G. 1181; H. 776): ef. γεφύρας ζευγνύων, Hat. i. 205. 

$6. 24. διαβάς : relatively past (G. 1288; H. 856). Still we render 
loosely, crossing this, ete. — 26. οἰκουμένην, inhabited, many of the cities 
of Asia being then, as now, deserted, ἔρημοι. --- 27. ἡμέρας : for the case, 
ef. σταθμούς in 21. — Μένων : the general sent by Aristippus. He had 
been delayed in some manner in getting to Sardis, and Cyrus waited for 
him at Colossae. An unfavorable account of Menon is given in ii. 6. 
21-29. See also the Introd., § 291. 

Page 6.] 87. 6. ᾿Ἐνταῦθα. .. ἦν, there Cyrus had a palace. Dis- 
tinguish βασίλεια from βασιλεία, p. 1, 13.— Hv: cf. ἣν, p. ὅ, 11, and note 
(G. 899, 2 ; H. 604). — 7. θηρίων : limiting πλήρης (G. 1139; 1140; 1112 ; 
Η. 753c). — ἀπὸ ἵππου, on horseback, lit. from a horse, because in hunting 
the attack upon the animal hunted proceeds from the horse. When this 
relation is not to be expressed the phrase is ἐφ᾽ ἵππου, as ἐπὶ τοῦ ἵππου 
ἦγεν, he led them on horseback, p. 111, 20.—8, ὁπότε βούλοιτο : a cond. 
rel. sent. expressing general supposition in past time (G. 1431, 2; H. 914, 
2).— 9. διὰ... παραδείσου, through the middle (G. 978, 1; H. 671) of 
the park. —10. αὐτοῦ : in the pred. position (G. 977, 1; H. 673b). —é& 
τῶν βασιλείων : the more precise statement would be ἐν τοῖς βασιλείοις, but 
the subsequent flowing of the water out from (under) the palace is implied. 
Cf. παρῆσαν eis Σάρδεις, p. 5, 3, and note. 

88, 11. ἔστι: for the accent, se@~G. 144, 5; H. 480, 2. Note the 
tense. Above in 6 we have ἣν, because, although the palace was doubt- 
less in existence at the time of the composition of the narration, Cyrus 
himself was then dead. —12. μεγάλου βασιλέως : note the omission of 
the art., and cf. βασιλέως, p. 2, 6, and the note. —14. καὶ οὗτος, this 
also, i.e. the Marsyas as well as the Maeander. — 16. ποδῶν : pred. gen. 
of measure (G. 1094, 5; H. 732, 720d). —Adyeras .. . ἐκδεῖραι, Apollo is 
said to have flayed, etc., the pers. const. for the impers., λέγεται ᾿Απόλλωνα 
ἐκδεῖραι (G. 1522, 2; H. 944). The dir. form of the anecdote would be 
ἐνταῦθα ᾿Απόλλων ἐξέδειρε... ἐκρέμασε. --- 17. Μαρσύαν : see the Dict. — 
--Ἴρίζοντα : in a contest (G. 1563, 3; H. 969 α). ---- οἱ as indir. reflex. 
refers to Apollo. Here without accent. Cf. of, p. 3, 2, and note. — 18. 
περὶ σοφίας, about musical skill.— δέρμα : from stem of dépw.— 19. ὅϑεν αἱ 
πηγαί, whence (= ἐξ οὗ) the fountains spring: see 13 above. —Mapeiéas : 
pred. nom. (G. 907; H. 614 

$9. 20. ElépEns: see the Introd., §13.—21. τῇ μάχῃ, in the well-known 
(τῇ) battle (G. 1181; H. 176). --- λέγεται οἰκοδομῆσαι : cf. λέγεται ἐκδεῖραι 
above in 16, and the note. —23. ἔμεινε ἡμέρας τριάκοντα : waiting for 


ANABASIS I. 2. 9-11. 167 


Page 6.] the reinforcements immediately named. This is the longest 
halt that the Greek troops made anywhere, but the time was utilized. 
See the Introd., § 42!.— 25. τοξότας Κρῆτας : the Cretan bowmen were 
celebrated in antiquity. —26. Σῶσις : not previously mentioned and not 
again referred to in the Anabasis. What became of him and what dis- 
position was made of his troops are matters of conjecture. — 27. Σοφαί- ᾿ 
vetos : we should probably read ’Ayias. See the Inurod., § 22, note. 

Page 7.] 3. ἐγένοντο of σύμπαντες, all together amounted to. — ὁπλῖ- 
ται, πελτασταί : pred. nom. with ἐγένοντο. (G. 907 ; H. 706b). The words 
distribute οἱ σύμπαντες (note pév... δέ). πελτασταί is here used generic- 
ally for light armed troops in general, and includes the 500 γυμνῆτες and 
200 bowmen mentioned above, p. 5, 7, and p. 6, 25, See the Dict., s.v. 
πελταστής. Above, p. 6, 24, the word has its specific sense. —4. ἀμφὶ 
τοὺς δισχιλίους : see the note on εἰς, p. 5, 5. For the force of the art., 
see G. 948); H. 664c. — When Xenophon here says 11,000 hoplites and 
2000 light armed troops, he is speaking in round numbers. The exact 
totals according to the preceding enumerations are respectively 10,600 
and 2,300. The hoplite force was subsequently increased to the number 
of 1,100. See the Introd., § 22. 

§ 10. Up to this time the march has been south-east. Cyrus now turns 
back and marches north-west as far as Κεράμων ἀγορά, probably with the 
double object of increasing his supplies and getting on the main high-road 
to the east. —7. τὰ Λύκαια ἔθυσε, celebrated the Lycaea with sacrifice. 
τὰ Λύκαια is a cognate acc. (G. 1051 ; 1052 ; H. 715; 716 α). Cf. the phrase 
πέμπειν Βοηδρόμια, to celebrate the Boedromia by a procession. Why should 
Xenias have felt special interest in the Lycaea? —8. ἦσαν : in agreement 
with the pred. nom. (ἃ. 904; H. 610).—11. Κεράμων ἀγοράν : cf. Eng. 
Newmarket, —toyarynvy πρός : the last bordering on, or the last on the 
road to. δε , 

δ 11, 13. σταθμοὺς... τριάκοντα : these are the longest marches — 
recorded in the Anabasis. Cyrus’s object probably was to meet Epyaxa 
before his troops became clamorous for their pay.— 14. Kavorpov πεδίον : 
What parallels in Eng.? Cf. the compound Κεράμων ἀγορά above. —16. 
πλέον : used for πλεόνος : cf. iv. 7,9and 10.—17. 6 δὲ... διῆγε, kept (διῆγε) 
expressing (or continued to express) his hope (of paying them). For this 
use of the supplementary partic., see G. 1580; H. 981.— 18. ἀνιώμενος : 
quoted after δῆλος ἣν (G. 1589; H. 981). --- τοῦ Κ ύρον τρόπου : the art. 
limits τρόπου. Cf. ἡ Σνεννέσιος γυνὴ and τοῦ Κιλίκων βασιλέως just below. 
--- 179. ἔχοντα : when able, limiting the omitted subj. of ἀποδιδόναι (G. 928, 
2; H. 941). — ἀποδιδόναι, to pay: note the force of the prep. : corres- 
pondingly in 17 ἀπήτουν. But below in 21 simply δοῦναι, because Cyrus 
had in fact no claims on Epyaxa. 


108 ANABASIS I. 2. 12-16. 


Page 7. §12. 20. TheSyennesis here named (see the Dict. and cf. the 
modern use of Pharaoh) is said to have pursued a double policy and to 
have endeavored to propitiate both Cyrus and Artaxerxes, determined to 
keep his throne, whichever of the two prevailed. The kings of Cilicia were 
at this time tributary to Persia. On the Ionic gen. Συεννέσιος, see α΄. 255; 
H. 201 D. — τοῦ βασιλέως : note the art. — 21. ἐλέγετο δοῦναι : the pers. 
const., but below in 24 the impers, 

p. 6, 16, and the note. — 29. 


gold money of the 
U.S. ? See the Dict. s.v. μισθός and δαοεικός, and i. 3, 21, below. — 24. 
᾿Ασπενδίους : where was Aspendus ? / 

Page 8.} §13. 3. παρά: with the ace., because of the course of the 
water after it left the κρήνη, along the road. Cf. πηγαὶ ἐκ τῶν βασιλείων, 
Ρ. 6, 10. --- κρήνη... καλουμένη, the so-called (G. 1559 ; H. 965) spring 
of Midas, lit. the spring called (that) of Midas. Who was Midas, and for 
what two things was he especially celebrated ? — 4. τὸν Σάτυρον : What 
particular satyr is here meant ? — 5, olve ... αὐτήν, by mixing wine in 
it, lit. by mixing it with wine (the means). 

$14. 8. Κύρου ἐπιδεῖξαι : cf. αὐτοῦ μὴ καταλῦσαι, Ὁ. 4, 2, and the note. 
— 9. βουλόμενος : Cyrus was the more willing to gratify her, since he saw 
the advantage of giving her husband a vivid impression of the strength of 
his army. — 10. τῶν Ἑλλήνων καὶ τῶν βαρβάρων : the art. repeated, 
because the Greeks and barbarians are not viewed as a single army, but 
as separate forces. 

$15. 11. as... μάχην, as their custom (was) for battile.— 12. στῆναι, 
to take their places, not to stand. — ἕκαστον : sc. στρατηγόν. --- 12). ἐπὶ 
τεττάρων : this made the front of the army very extended. See the 
Introd., § 322, note. — εἶχε : in agreement with the nearer subj. Cf. ἢν, 
p. 6, 6, and the note. —ré μὲν δεξιὸν κτλ. : the positions are here named in 
the order of danger and honor. See the Introd. , ὃ 322, end. — 14, οἱ σὺν 
αὐτῷ : the subst. is omitted. Cf. τῶν παρὰ βασιλέως, p. 2. 6, and the note. 
Cf. also rods ἑαυτοῦ in 12, and οἱ ἐκείνου in 15. ---π΄ἰώνυμον : What is meant 
when it is said that the Greeks used the word εὐώνυμος euphemistically 
for ἀριστερός ? See the words in the Dict, and also δεξιός. 

$16. 16. πρῶτον μέν : correlated by εἶτα δέ two lines below— 17. ἴλας, 
τάξεις : cavalry and infantry respectively. See the Introd., § 141, — 
18. τοὺς Ἕλληνας : governed by ἐθεώρει above. — παρελαύνων : the Greeks 
drawn up in line of battle doubtless presented a more imposing appear- 
ance than if they had marched by in column. —19. ἁρμαμάξης : 


ANABASIS I. 2. 16-19, 169 


Page 8.] distinguish the ἀρμάμαξα from the ἅρμα and the ἅμαξα respec- 
tively. — 20. πάντες : i.e. the Greeks. So πάντας below in 22. — κράνη 
χαλκᾶ ... ἐκκεκαλυμμένας : Cyrus was aiming to impress the Cilician 
queen with the splendor of his Greek troops, through the mingled 
effect produced by the brilliant color of their χιτῶνες and by the gleam of 
their metal armor. The cuirass worn by the common soldier was doubt- 
less generally the leathern σπολάς (see the word in the Dict.). This was 
now temporarily laid aside, leaving the dark-red tunic uncovered. See 
the Introd., $311, note. For the effect of this brilliant display upon 
Epyaxa, cf. ἰδοῦσα τὴν λαμπρότητα ἐθαίμασε, p. 9, 7. — 21. ἐκκεκαλυμμένας, 
uncovered, a circumstantial partic. of manner (G. 1563, 3; H. 969 a). 
How was the shield protected when not in use 2? — 

§17. 22. wapfAace: see the note on ἐτελεύτησε, p. 1, 2. — στήσας: 
first aor. and trans. For its relation to πέμψας, see the note on ὑπολαβών, 
p. 2, 23. — 23. φάλαγγος : see the word in the Dict. — μέσης : cf. μέσου, 
p. 6, 9, and the note. — 25. προβαλέσθαι ra ὅπλα : i.e. shields forward 
and spears in rest, as if for attack. See the Introd., § 483, --- ὅλην τὴν 
φάλαγγα, the phalanx in a body (G. 979 ; H. 672 c). — 26, ot δέ, and they. 
Cf. ὁ δέ, p. 1, 14, and the note. —27. ἐσάλπιγξε : subj. nom. omitted 
(ἢ. 897, 4; H. 602c). 

Page 9.] 1. ἐκ δὲ... σκηνάς, and they (sc. αὐτῶν) now advancing 
(gen. abs.) more and more rapidly, of their own accord the soldiers (G. 1173 ; 
H. 768) began with a shout to run toward the camp. ‘They wished to give 
the barbarians the impression that they intended an attack. In the next 
section we are told that the Greeks ἐπὶ ras σκηνὰς ἦλθον, dispersed to their 
own tents. See the Introd., § 402. 

$18. 3. βαρβάρων : subjective gen. (G. 1094, 2; H. 729 δ). With φόβος 
SC. “hy. -- καὶ... τε... καί: the first καί connects the statement that 
precedes with the double (re... καί, both... and) statement that follows. 
—4. ἔφυγεν, ἔφυγον : the repetition of the word delineates the act vividly 
with comic effect. — οἱ ἐκ τῆς ἀγορᾶς ἔφυγον : i.e. of ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ ἐκ τῆς 
ἀγορᾶς ἔφυγον. Cf. τοὺς ἐκ τῶν πόλεων, p. 5, 4, and τῶν παρὰ βασιλέως, 


-p. 2,6. For the marches here referred to, see the Introd., § 261. —6. 
σὺν γέλωτι : these Greeks had a keen sense of humor. Se® the Introd., 


$281. —7. τὴν τάξιν : the Greek phalanx had not broken rank in its 


charge. — τοῦ στρατεύματος : the gen. in this position (6. 965 end ; 


H. 6666) doubtless because it modifies λαμπρότητα as well as τάξιν. — 8. 
tov... ἰδών, seeing the terror with which the Greeks inspired the barba- 
rians. Note the prep. phrases used adjectively. 

$19. 14. ταύτην... Ἕλλησιν, this country he gave over to the Greeks 
to plunder (G. 1532 ; H. 951). At this point Cyrus first leaves his own 


170 ANABASIS I. 2. 19-23. 


Page 9.1 satrapy.— 15. ws... οὖσαν, on the ground that it was. Cf. 
ws βουλόμενος, p. 4, 7, and the note. See also Introd., § 261, end. 

$20. 16. ἀποπέμπει, συνέπεμψεν : of. ἀναβαίνει, ἀνέβη, p. 1, 8, and the 
note. — τὴν ταχίστην ὁδόν : adv. acc. — 18, αὐτόν : himself, i.e. Menon. 
— Κῦρος δὲ κτλ. : see the map for the two routes into Cilicia that are 
here mentioned. — 22. ἐν @: sc. χρόνῳ, and cf. ἐν als, p. 7, 7. — 23. 
ἕτερον... δυνάστην, a certain other powerful man of his subordinates. — 
24. ἐπιβουλεύειν αὐτῷ: Cyrus’s charge was, ἐπιβουλεύουσιν ἐμοί (G. 1522, 1; 
H. 946). 

$21. 27. ἡ εἰσβολή : the so-called Πύλαι τῆς Κιλικίας. 

Page 10.] 1. ἀμήχανος... στρατεύματι, impracticable for an army 
(G. 1165 ; H. 767) to enter (G. 1526; H. 902). --- εἴ τις pe if there 
was scplods lo oppose (lit. trying to prevent G. 1255 ; H. 832) it. — 2. 
εἶναι ἐπὶ τῶν ἄκρων κτλ. : he was there not with the intention of real 
opposition, but to give color to his asserted allegiance to the king. εἶναι 
is quoted. Cf. ἐκδεῖραι, p. 6, 17. —4. τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ : for the case, see 
G. 1192; H. 782. —én λελοιπὼς εἴη κτλ. : the messenger’s announce- 
ment continues to the end of the section. He said, λέλοιπε (for the com- 
pound form in the opt. act., see G. 733) Συέννεσις xrd., Sz yennesis has left 
the height since (ἐπεί) he le it elc., and because (καὶ ὅτι) he heard, etc. 
ἤσθετο and ἤκουε were secondary tenses in the original statement and 
remain unchanged when quoted (G. 1499, 1482 ; H. 9356c). The clause 
beginning ὅτι τὸ Μένωνος is quoted after ἤσθετο, ἣν occurring where εἴη or 
ἐστί would be regular (G. 1489; H. 936). Cf. ἐστρατεύετο, p. 4, 27. 
Similarly the clause beginning th Ότα περιπλεούσας is quoted after ἤκουε 
(G. 1588 ; H. 982). — 8. τὰς Λακεδαιμονίων : with τριήρεις (G. 959, 2 ; 960; 
H. 668 a). For the aid rendered Cyrus by the Lacedaemonians, see 
i. 4. 2 and 3. 

§ 22. 9. οὖν, at any rate, i.e. whatever the reason for which Syennesis 
left the heights. Cf. p. 7, 22. — οὐδενὸς κωλύοντος, without hindrance, 
gen. abs. expressing manner. — 10. τὰς σκηνάς, the camp, the place. — 
ov : rel. adv. — ἐφύλαττον : expressing continuance, but with plpf. force. 
Cf. ἦσαν, p. 2, 17. —11. κατέβαινεν : mark the change of tense from 
ἀνέβη in 9. —"12. δένδρων, ἀμπέλων : with σύμπλεων. Cf. θηρίων, p. 6, 7, 
and the note. — σύμπλεων : Attic second dec. (G. 305, 306 ; H. 227). — 
13. πολύ : for its agreement, see G. 923: H. 620a. —14. πυροὺς καὶ 
κριθάς : note the pl. number. — φέρει : not the historic pres. Cf. ἀθροί- 
ζονται, p. 1, 8, and note. — ὄρος δ᾽ αὐτὸ περιέχει κτλ. : Mt. Taurus. The 
plain (αὐτό) is of great extent. See the map. 

$23. 18. Taprots, Tarsi or Tarsus, the birth-place of St. Paul, — 19. 
μέσον : neut. of μέσος used subst., as in the phrase μέσον ἡμέρας, midday 


ANABASIS I. 2. 23-26. 171 


Page 10.] (6. 932, 1; H. 621 δ). The following gen. is partitive (G. 


ays 1088 ; H. 729 6). 90, ὄνομα, evpos: accs. of epecttinadson (6. 1058 ;* Sie A 
718).-— 21, πλέθρων : limits ποταμός (ἃ. 1085, 5 ; H. 729d), not εὖρος. “ Hea, ἃ 


rr 22. οἱ ἐνοικοῦντες : subst. G. 1560, 1; H. 966). — 23. πλὴν οἱ 
«+» ἔχοντες : 86. οὐκ ἐξέλιπον. Cf. the use of πλήν, p. 2, 20, where it is a 
prep. —24. ot wapa... οἰκοῦντες : cf. τοῖς ὑπὲρ Ἑλλήσποντον οἰκοῦσι, Ὁ. 3, 
16, and the note. Those who remained did so for the purposes of trade 
with the army and fleet respectively. 


$25. 26. “mporépa - ++ ἀφίκετο, reached Tarsus five days (G. 1184 . 


H. 781) before (ἃ. 926 ; Η. 619 α) Cyrus (G. 1153 ; H. 755). 

Page 11.} 1. εἰς τὸ πεδίον : used adj. (G. 959, 1, 2, 960 ; H. 666 a). Cf. 
kar ἀντιπέρας ᾿Αβύδου, p. 3, 11. — 2. of μὲν... οἱ δέ, some... others. Cf. 
τοὺς μὲν... τοὺς δέ, p. 2, 22, and the note. A case of asyndeton in an 
explanatory sent. Cf. otra μέν, p. 5, 13, and the note, — ἁρπάζοντάς τι 
κατακοπῆναι, they had been cut to pieces (G. 1523, 1 ; Ἢ. 946 b) while com- 
mitting some act of plunder (G. 1054; H. 7166). —4. καὶ od, and not, 
καί connecting οὐ δυναμένους κτλ. With an affirmative expression, ὑπολει- 
φθέντας, but at the end of the line οὐδέ, nor, continuing the negation. — 
τὸ ἄλλο, the rest of (G. 966, 1). — 5. εἶτα, then, resuming the two pre- 
ceding partics.— ἦσαν... ὁπλῖται ; in explanation of δύο λόχοι in 1. 
The normal strength of the λόχος was 100 men (see the Introd., ὃ 322 2.) 
If these two companies numbered each only 50 men, the iatsie is 
isolated ; some commentators believe that Xenophon here expresses 
himself ἰδονεῖν, but means these were each 100 hoplites. Elsewhere he is 
more exact. Cf. p. 106, 22, ἐξ λόχους ἀνὰ ἑκατὸν ἄνδρας, six companies 
each of 100 men, and p. 152, 21, ὁ δὲ λόχος ἕκαστος σχεδὸν εἰς τοὺς ἑκατόν. 
— 6. οὖν, however that was. f cee 10, 9. 

ὃ 26. 6. οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι : i.e. of Menon’s army. Emphatic position (not 
ἐπεὶ δ᾽ οἱ ἄλλοι) as also in 9, Κῦρος δὲ ἐπεὶ κτλ. --- 7. wig mark the 
force of the prep. See also the Introd., § 261, 
ἑαυτόν, summoned repeatedly to hie rie (G. 1253, 2; H. 830). 
—10. ὁ δ᾽ οὔτε... οὔτε... ἤθελε, but he both declared that he had never 
before, etc., and was then unwilling, etc. The Greek often Says οὐκ ἔφη 
ἐλθεῖν, where we say, he said that he did not go, οὔ φημι having the sense 
I'deny. Here οὔτε... ἔφη οὔτε... ἤθελε, lit. he neither declared (i.e. he 
denied) nor wished, is ΡΟΣ ΘΟ regular, although. a lit. translation of 
it is not good English. In οὔτε... ἔφη the direct discourse had ἦλθον 
(ἃ. 1494 ; Η. 854) ; in οὔτε... ἤθελε there is no indirect discourse. —11. 
οὐδενί : for the neg., see G. 1619; H. 103 The dat. follows eis χεῖρας 
ἐλθεῖν, Which implies union or hiebieaaek (G. 1175; H. 772a). So Κύρῳ 
in the next line. —12. ἱέναι : sc. εἰς χεῖρας. - πρὶν ἔπεισε, ἔλαβε : for πρίν 


Sh tine 


ANABASIS I. 2. 26 anp 3. 2, 


Page 11.] with the indic., see G. 1469; 1470; 1464; H. 924. Mark 
the change of subj. in ἔλαβε. 

§27. 13. pera δὲ ταῦτα : for its position, cf. οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι in 6. --- 14. 
ἔδωκε... πολλά : so likewise had Epyaxa. Cf. p. 7, 20.—15. Κῦρος 
δέ: sc. ἔδωκε. --- 10, παρὰ βασιλεῖ, at court, i.e. at the great king’s court, 
the art. being omitted. Cyrus, in thus bestowing royal gifts, was assum- 
ing the kingly prerogative. See the Introd., § 19. --- στρεπτόν, ψέλια, 
ἀκινάκην : for illustrations of these Persian articles, see the Dict. For 
representations of the bridle (χαλινός) and στολή, see the Dict. 5.0. mpoue- 
τωπίδιον and κάνδυς. ---- 18, μηκέτι : as had already happened at Tarsus. — 
ἀφαρπάζεσθαι : one of the objs. of ἔδωκε supplied above (G. 1518 ; H. 948). 
So ἀπολαμβάνειν in 20.—19. τὰ δὲ... ἀπολαμβάνειν, and (the privilege 
of) taking back the slaves that had been seized, if they (i.e. Syennesis and 
the Cilicians) should fall in with them (i.e. the slaves) anywhere (G. 1403 ; 
H. 898). The apod. is the inf., which expresses future time. In place 
of ἤν που évrvyxdvwow we might have had ef που ἐντυγχάνοιεν (G. 1502, 1; 
H. 937). 


CHAPTER III. 


$1. 21. ἔμεινε : cf. ἦν, p. 5, 11, and the note. —rpépas εἴκοσιν : this 
enforced delay was long. See the Introd., 8 421, 22. οὐκ ἔφασαν ἰέναι, 
refused to go, said they would not go. Cf. above 10, and the note, and 
μισθωθῆναι οὐκ ἔφασαν in 23. ἰέναι has a future sense (G. 1257; H. 828 at), 
and this is the regular force of this inf. in indir. discourse. So in p. 13, 
17. Soin the next line, suspected that they were to go. See G. Moods 
and Tenses, 30 and 31.— τοῦ πρόσω, forward, a prose use of the gen. of 
place (G. 1158; H. 760a), like the advs. in -ov, as ποῦ, where, ὁμοῦ, in the 
same place, together, etc. —23. ὑπώπτενον : cf. p. 1, 3, and the note. — 
24. ἐπὶ τούτῳ, for ἐλιῖ8. ---- πρῶτος : he was the first to do it; πρῶτον would 
mean, he did this first and something else afterwards. πρῶτον μέν, on the 
other hand, p. 12, 3, means in the first place; its correlative is εἶτα δέ, p. 
12, 5. Cf. p. 8, 16 and 18. (See G. 926; H. 619b.) —25. ἐβιάζετο : 
attempted action (G. 1255; H. 832). Clearchus was a man of stern will, 
but he found in this instance that force was not the best means for 
complishing his purpose See the Introd., ὃ 272.—27. dptawro: for the 
mood, cf. βούλοιτο, p. 6, 8, and the note. 

$2. 27. μικρόν, by a little, narrowly, adv. acc. 

Page 12.] 1. μή: added to the inf. to strengthen the neg. idea con- 
tained in ἐξέφυγε (G. 1615 ; 1549; H. 1029). --- ἔγνω, perceived. —2. ὅτι 
οὐ δυνήσεται : quoted (G. 1591; 1487; H. 932, 1, 2).—3. édxpve.. . 
ἑστώς, stood (G. 507 ; 508; H. 336) and wept a long time, acc. of extent 
of time. —5. τοιάδε : with reference to what follows (G. 1005; H. 696). 


ANABASIS I. 3. 3-6. 118 


Page 12. 8. 8. 0. ἄνδρες στρατιῶται, fellow-soldiers. ἄνδρες is prefixed 
to στρατιῶται as a term of respect, as in the formula of the courts, siti 
δικασταί. Clearchus deals with the situation with great skill.—py 
θαυμάζετε : pres. imy. in prohibition (G. 1346 ; H. 874).—7. πράγμασιν : 
dat. of cause.— ξένος : cf. p. 3, 22, and the note. —8. ἐγένετο, became, not 
was. For the facts, cf. i. τ. 9. --- τά Te... καί, both honored me in other 
ways (ace. of specification), and in particular, etc. —9. ots... οὐκ .. . 
ἐδαπάνων, which I, when I had received them, did not lay up for myself 
(ἐμοί used reflex.) for private use (or, more freely, did not devote to my 
own personal use) nor squander in pleasure, but I expended (impf.) them 
on you. 

$4. 13. ἐτιμωρούμην : sc. αὐτούς, i.e. the Thracians. —15. ἀφαιρεῖσθαι: 
with double obj. (G. 1069; H. 724).—17. twa... ἐκείνου, that, in case 
he should have any (G. 1114; H. 743.) need (of me), I might aid him in 
return for the benefits I had received from him. For εἴ τι δέοιτο, we might 
have had ἐάν τι δέηται (G. 1503 ; H. 937). For the assimilation of ὧν, see 
G. 1032; H. 996a; and for the pass. force of εἰ πάσχω, see α. 1241; 
H. 820. 

ξ 5, 19. ὑμεῖς : emphatic (G. 985; H. 677). 80 ἐγώ in 24. Cf. also 
the beginning of ὃ 0. --- ἀνάγκη : sc. éori. —20. προδόντα : cf. λαβόντα, 
p. 4, 23, and the note. —quAlq: a dat. of means (ἃ. 1183; H. 777).— 
21. et, whether (G. 1605; H. 1010). --- 22. οὖν: ef. p. 7, 22, and the note. 
- 23. 6 τι dv δέῃ : sc. πάσχειν. The rel. sent. is cond.(G. 1434; H. 916). 
— οὔποτε οὐδείς : emphatic negation. Cf. p. 11, 11, and the note. — 24. 
ὡς εἱλόμην : quoted without change of mood. Give the form of the vers 
in dir. discourse. — ἀγαγών, προδούς : for the relation of the two partics. 
to one another, cf. ὑπολαβών, συλλέξας, p. 2, 23, and the note, and στήσας, 
πέμψας, Ὁ. 8, 22. 

86. 26. ἐμοί: dat. of indir. obj. (G. 1159, 1160; H. 764, 2). 

Page 13. 1. 671... πείσομαι : for the use of the moods, cf. p. 12, 
23, and the note. —2. καὶ. .. καὶ... καί, equally...and... and. — 
3. σὺν ὑμῖν : 1.6. if I should remain with you, is the prot. (G. 1413; Η, 
902) to the following ἂν εἶναι, which stands by quot. (G. 1494 ; H. 964 a) 
for ἂν εἴην. In the alternative sent. that follows, the prot. to ἄν εἶναι lies 
in dv (4) ---εἰ εἴην. The cond. rel. clause ὅπου ἂν w, ubicunque ero, 
presents the supposed future case more vividly than the more regular 
ὅπου εἴην would have presented it, — wherever I may be, for wherever I 
might be (G. 1437, 1421, 2; H. 918, 901] α). See also G. Moods and 
Tenses, 556. This inf. with ἄν, it should be remembered, represents the 
potential opt. (G. 1327-1329 ; H. 872).—4. ὑμῶν : gen. with an adj. of want 
(G. 1140; H. 788 ο). --- οὐκ ἂν ἱκανὸς εἶναι : by quot. for οὐκ dv... εἴην, 


174 ANABASIS I. 3. 6-10, 


Page 13.] ἄν is repeated after οὔτε before each of the dependent infs 
but still belongs to εἶναι (G. 1512; H. 864).—5. ὠφελῆσαι δλδονδει. 
infs. limiting ἑκανός. Cf. p. 2, 9, and the note. —6. ὡς... yi be of 
this opinion, therefore, that I shall go, etc., or more lit. (in order he show 
the force of the gen. abs. with Ws) assuming, therefore, that I shall go 
etc., be of this mind. Note that τὴν γνώμην ἔχετε is practically euuty. is 
γιγνώσκετε, and see G. 1593, 2. See also G. Moods and Tenses 918. — 
ὅπῃ ἂν καὶ ὑμεῖς : sc. Lyre. | 
$7. 8. Tatra: with reference to what precedes. Cf. τοιάδε, p. 12, 5 
and the note.—ot re: the art. receives the accent from the Patlowtngs 
enclitic. —9. παρὰ δὲ... Κλέαρχον : as to the difficulty of maintaining 
military discipline among the Ten Thousand; see the Intr d., § 271, il 
§ 8, 12. τούτοις : dat. of cause. —14. στρατιωτών : gen, with adv. 
(G. 1150; H. 757). —aitre : indir. obj. —15. ἔλεγε θαρρεῖν, bade him 
not to be discouraged (ἃ. 1519; H. 948). λέγω in this use is equiv. to 
κελείω ; 80 generally εἶπον with the inf. See G. Moods and Tenses. 99 
For the const. with these verbs when used in quoting, see G. 1523 - Η. 
946. -- ὧς... δέον, since this matter would be settled (gen. abs.) i the 
right way. δέον is used subst, (ἃ. 932, 1; H. 6210). ds shows that the 
participial sent. gives the ground on which Clearchus bade Cyrus be 
encouraged.—16. μεταπέμπεσθαι, to keep on sending for (him).—adrds ine 
ἱέναι, but for himself (αὐτός modifies the subj. of ἱέναι, G. 927; H. 940), he 
said he would not go. αὐτός marks the opposition of the two νων 
‘You keep sending for me, but still 101] not go.’ | 
$9. 18. θ᾽: i.e. re (6. 92; H. 82).—19. raw... βουλόμενον, any one 
of the rest (partitive gen., G. 1088 ; H. 729e) who wished. — 21. ra Κύρου: 
πράγματα omitted (G. 953; H. 6216). —8fAov: sc. ἐστί. - οὕτως... Ἶ 
ἐκεῖνον : i.e. his relations to us are in just the same position as ours to him. 
— 23. ἐπεί γε, since (with emphasis). — 24. ἡμῖν; with the following 
subst. (G. 1174; H. 765 a). i 
$10. 24. μέντοι : used in a sinister sense : ‘although our relations are 
at an end, he may, however, not be done with us.’ —25, καὶ μεταπεμπο- 
μένον, although he keeps sending, etc. (G. 1573; H. 979). —26. τὸ μὲν 
μέγιστον, chiefly, adv. acc. The correlative follows in ἔπειτα καί. —27. 
αἰσχυνόμενος, from shame. — ἐψευσμένος : quoted after σίνοιδα (G. 1590 ; 
H. 982 a). | 
Page 14. 1. δεδιὼς μὴ ἐπιθῇ (G. 1378: H. 887). ---δίκην ov... 
ἠδικῆσθαι, punishment for that in which (ὧν for &, cognate ace.) he thinks 
he has been wronged by me, —i.e. punishment Jor the wrongs he thinks he 
has suffered from me. For ὦν, cf. p. 12, 17, and the note. 


inion 


ANABASIS I, 3. 11-14. 175 


Page 14.] ὃ 11, 2. ἐμοὶ... καθεύδειν, it therefore seems to me not to be 
a time for us to sleep (G. 1521; H. 952). δοκεῖ in the sense of it seems 
takes the inf. in indir. discourse (G. 1523, 1, end; H. 946a). In the 
sense it seems good or best, as in the phrase δοκεῖ ἀπιέναι in 6, the accom- 
panying inf, is not in indir. discourse. In either case the inf, is the subj. 
(not obj.) of δοκεῖ ; although with δοκέω, seem, there may be a shift to the 
pers, const. (ἃ. 1522, 2; H. 944a), as in this place, where ὥρα is the 
subj. of δοκεῖ. Cf. the uses of videor in Lat. For the neg., see G. 1611; 
H. 1024. — 3. ἡμῶν αὐτῶν, ourselves (ἃ. 1102; H. 742).—4. ὅ τι χρή: 
an indir. question (G. 1600 ; H. 1011). —& τούτων, next, expressing time 
(sequence) with an implied idea of consequence, in consideration of, in 
consequence of, the present circumstances. —5, ἕως μένομεν αὐτοῦ, as long 
as, while, we are staying here (αὐτοῦ, adv.). ἕως with the pres. indic. 
never means until. —oxemréov εἶναι : in the dir. form, σκεπτέον ἐστί (G. 
1597 ; H. 990). —émws... μένωμεν : an obj. clause after a verb of caring 
Jor with the subjv. (G. 1374; H. 8855). But in the alternative sent. (7) 
we have the regular const. (G. 1372; H. 885) ὅπως... ἄπιμεν (G. 1257; 
H. 828 α), ὅπως... ἕξομεν. ---- ὃ, οὔτε... οὐδέν, neither general nor private 
is of any use. 
$12. 10. ὁ δ᾽ ἀνήρ... φίλος q, but the man (i.e. Cyrus) is a valuable 
friend to whomsoever he is a friend (G. 1431, 1; H. 914, B. 1). For the 
case of πολλοῦ, see G. 1135; H. 753f.—11. ἐχθρός, πολέμιος : i.e. whom- 
soever he is at war with he comes to hate as a personal enemy. — 13. 
ὁμοίως : with πάντες, we all alike. —14. δοκοῦμέν μοι καθῆσθαι : cf. δοκεῖ 
in 2 and the note. —avrod: construe with πόρρω, at a distance from him 
(G. 1149; H. 757). — 15. ὥρα : sc. ἐστί, and for the following inf. ¢f. 
καθεύδειν in 3 and the note (on 2). 
$13, 17. ἐκ τοῦ αὐτομάτου : cf. ἀπὸ τοῦ αὐτομάτου, p. 9, 1. —18. λέξον- 

tes, to say (ἃ. 1563, 4; H. 909 ε). In the next line ἐπιδεικνύντες, showing, 
where the pres. partic. expresses both purpose and attendant circum- 
stance (ἃ. 1563, 4 and 7; H. 969c, 968). See G. Moods and Tenses, 840, 
end, — ἐκείνου : i.e. Clearchus.—19, ofa εἴη : indir. question (G. 1487 ; 
H. 932, 2 In the dir, form, ποία ἐστί; --- 30. μένειν, ἀπιέναι : with 


ἀπορία (G. 1530; H. 952). 

$14, 20. els δὲ δὴ εἶπε, but one in particular proposed. Both this man 
and the one who answers him in ὃ 16 doubtless spoke at the instigation 
of Clearchus. — 22. ἑλέσθαι : the intimation is that the soldiers would 
choose their own commanders. See the Introd., § 272. ἑλέσθαι depends 
on εἶπε, proposed or urged. Cf. ἔλεγε θαρρεῖν, p. 13, 15, and the note. 
The six following infs., beginning with ἀγοράζεσθαι (24), have the same 
const, with ἑλέσθαι, The cond, sents, dependent on these infs., with 


" 


ANABASIS I. 3. 14-15. 


Page 14.] ἐὰν μὴ διδῷ (bis), being dependent clauses in indir. discourse 
might each have had the opt. (α. 1502, 1; H. 937); but εἰ βούλοιτο for εἰ 
βούλεται (23) would have been ambiguous (G. 1499). So ὅπως μὴ μέν; 
ae sr shinning the opt., bike ws sree δόμεν, p. 14, 26 (G. 1503 
wet Se) κα ἢ ἢ ἀγορά... στρατεύματι : thrown in parenthetically by 
ΜΝ historian to: show the absurdity of the proposal. See the Introd. 261 
Sacgecan gy rai eer sna sgrstscap upon the same important fact. 
με ve, — 2d. : limits the unexpressed subj. of αἰτεῖν. 
rhe subj. of each of the infs. dependent on εἶπε is an unexpressed pron 
referring to the Greeks. —26. alretv: with two aces. (G. 1069; H 724), 
-- ἐὰν μὴ διδῷ : the verb of the apod. is αἰτεῖν, which after εἶπε, ,»ὡὐμνα, 
nae a future force. Cf. ἀπολαμβάνειν, p. 11, 20, and the note, — 27. sin 
ἀπάξει : purpose (G. 1442; H. 91 1). — φιλίας : pred. adj. (sc. ovens). 
Page 15.] 1. μηδέ, not even. —2. τὴν ταχίστην : adv. acc, — προκα- 
ταληψομένους : sc. ἄνδρας. The partic. expresses purpose. Cf. λέξοντες 
p. 14, 18, and the note. —3. ra ἄκρα : i.e. of Mt. Taurus the li ὯΝ 
which they had entered Cilicia. — ὅπως φθάσωσι: ῥὰ πιο (G 1309. 
H. 881). Note the three ways in which purpose has been eccareuned in 
this section. — ὅπως - ++ Καταλαβόντες, might not seize them first (G. 1586 ; 
H. 984). —4. dv: its antec. is οἱ Κίλιχες. With mod dois, ὧν is a partitive 
gen., with χρήματα a gen. of possession (G. 1085, 1 and 7: H. 129 α and e) | 
- πολλοὺς καὶ πολλὰ χρήματα, many men (as captives) and much property, 
—d. ἔχομεν ἀνηρπακότες : equiv. tO ἀνηρπάκαμεν καὶ ἔχομεν (G. 1262 - 
H. 981 α). For the facts, cf. i. 2. 26, 27. Observe the sudden change to 
dir. discourse. — 6. τοσοῦτον, 80 much only, with reference to lat 
follows, irregularly (G. 1005; H. 696). His refusal to take the bai 
would embarrass his men still more. Nig 
$15. 7. ‘Os piv... λεγέτω, let nobody speak of me as the one who is to 
be general, the partic. with ws after λεγέτω on the analogy of the cieias 
explained in G. 1593, 1; H. 982. See also G. Moods and Tenses 919 i 
στρατηγίαν : cognate acc, —8, μηδεὶς λεγέτω : prohibition, Cf. a 19. 6 
and the note. —évope, see in the undertaking. — 9, ποιητέον : 80. ie 
(ἃ. 1594; H. 988). Since τοῦτο is in the neut. sing., the const. may be 
either pers. or impers, — ds ... πείσομαι : 86. οὕτω ἜΡΡΕΙ from ἔνι ta 
ceding μηδεὶς λεγέτω. ---- ὃν ἂν ἕλησθε, quemcumque elegeritis, a cond. rel 
clause. Cf. p. 12, 23, and the note. We might have had ¢ ἄν (G 1031 ' 
H. 994), for which there is slight MS. authority.— 10. 4 δυνατὸν μδλώνα, 
to the best of my ability (sc. ἐστί with δυνατόν). Cf. the phrases i 
μάλιστα, ws τάχιστα, and the note on ὅτι ἀπαρασκευότατον, p. 2, 12. --- ὅτι 
καὶ... ἀνθρώπων, that I know how also to submit to authority as snail ω any 
other man that lives,—11. μάλιστα ἀνθρώπων, in the highest degree (best of 


ANABASIS I. 3. 15-18. 177 


Page 15.] all men, partitive gen.) belongs to ἄρχεσθαι ἐπίσταμαι, and 
is really superfluous to the sense after ws τις καὶ ἄλλος, (as well) as any 
other man whatsoever (καί being emphatic). For the latter, ef τις καὶ ἄλλος 
is more common. 

816, 14. ὥσπερ... ποιουμένου, just as if Cyrus were going home 
again (G. 1576; H. 9784), i.e. were minded to renounce the expedition. 
—16. ὡς εὔηθες εἴη, that it was silly (for the mood, ¢f. p. 14, 19), corres- 
ponding to τὴν εὐήθειαν in the clause with μέν. In the dependent clause 
ᾧ λυμαινόμεθα there is a change to dir. discourse (otherwise we should 
have λυμαίνονται Or λυμαίνοιντο, G. 1497, 2; H. 932, 2), which continues to 
the close of the speech in καὶ 19.—-aapa τούτου : in place of the simple 
τοῦτον. Cf. the const. with αἰτεῖν in p. 14, 20. --- ᾧ : dat. of disadvantage. 
—17. el πιστεύσομεν, if we are going to trust (ἃ. 1391; H. 893c), not 
equiv. to ἐὰν πιστεύσωμεν, if we shall trust. —18. τί κωλύει. .. προκατα- 
λαμβάνειν : the order of the words is, τί κωλύει (SC. ἡμᾶς) καὶ κελεύειν Κῦρον 
προκαταλαμβάνειν τὰ ἄκρα ἡμῖν ; the question is ironical. If they are going 
to trust Cyrus’s guide, why not order Cyrus at once to occupy the pass 
in their behalf ? 

$17. 19. ἐγώ : emphatic. —ydp: the section states the grounds for 
the distrust of Cyrus which the speaker would entertain under the con- 
ditions supposed. —20. ἃ δοίη : cond. rel. clause (G. 1436; H. 917), as 
also ᾧ δοίη in 22. ---μὴ καταδύσῃ: after ὀκνοίην as a verb of fearing 
(G. 13878; H. 887). ὀκνοίην ἄν takes at the same time the obj. inf. éuBal- 
νειν. So below φοβοίμην δ᾽ av. . . ἕπεσθαι, wh... ἀγάγῃ. --- 31. ταῖς τριή- 
ρεσι, with his triremes, dat. of instrument (G. 1181 ; H. 776). — φοβοίμην : 
a stronger word than éxvéw, used to indicate a climax of feeling. — 22. 
ᾧ : cf. dv, p. 3,9, and the note. —otx ἔσται, it will not be possible. The 
neg. shows that the antec. of ὅθεν is definite (ἃ. 1427; H. 909). If the 
speaker had wished to express himself less vividly, he would have said, 
ὅθεν οὐκ ἂν εἴη. --- 3, ἄκοντος Κύρου : sc. ὄντος. The adj. ἄκοντος appears 
to be used itself like a partic. (G. 1571; H. 972 }). --- ἀπίων : equiv. to εἰ 
ἀπίοιμι (ἃ. 1563, 5; 1413; H. 969d; 902). —24. λαθεῖν. .. ἀπελθών, to 
get off without his knowing it. Cf. p. 3, 20, and the note. 

$18. 26. ἄνδρας : subj. of ἐρωτᾶν. All of the sent. from ἄνδρας to the 
end of § 19 (except the parenthesis οὕτω... ἀπίοιμεν, p. 16, 7, 8) is the 
subj. of δοκεῖ. --- οἵτινες, such as are (sc. εἰσί). ----Ὡ7. tl... χρῆσθαι, what 
use he wishes to make of us (G. 1183; Η. 777a). A similar use of the 
cases in οἵᾳπερ (for οἵανπερ by assimilation) . . . τοῖς ξένοις, p. 16, 2. 

Page 16.] 2. πρόσϑεν : for the time referred to, cf. i. 1. 2. — rer Oa, 
εἶναι : these infs., which with δοκεῖ have a future sense, serve as apods. to 


178 ANABASIS I. 4. 18-21. 


Page 16.] the preceding cond. Cf. ἐὰν μὴ διδῷ, αἰτεῖν, p. 14, 26, and 
the note. Cf. also ἀξιοῦν in 5, and ἀπαγγεῖλαι in 9, ial 

§ 19. 4. τῆς πρόσθεν, than the former (one), 86. πράξεως (G. 1153: 
H. 105). — 5. ἀξιοῦν, that they demand, i.e. the deputies (ἄνδρα) ΝΕ, 
vioned p. 15, 26. ἀπαγγεῖλαι in 9 has the same subj., θὰ βουλεύεσθαι in 
10 has ἡμᾶς expressed as its subj.— 6. πείσαντα : the means of “persuasion ’ 
would be money. Cf. ὃ 21, and see the Introd., § 271, —7. ἑἕπό | νοι 
ἀπιόντες : these might be respectively εἰ ἑποίμεθα, ef ἀπίοιμεν. Cf. uy 
23, and the note. — φίλοι, πρόθυμοι : pred. adjs. ce 

ὃ 20. 11. ἔδοξε ταῦτα, this was approved. The ordinary beginning of 
an Athenian decree was ἔδοξεν τῇ βουλῇ καὶ τῷ δήμῳ, be it ρος in 
the Senate and the People. — 12. ἠρώτων τὰ δόξαντα, made the sg 
agreed upon (i.e. a ἔδοξεν). δοκέω in this sense, seem good or best wr 
the dat. of the indir. obj.—13. ὅτι ἀκούει : he said ἀκόδω I have ine 
etc. The Greek, like other languages, often uses the iy of bial τὰ δε 
as I hear, I learn, I say, even when their action is strictly finished ‘a 
G. Moods and Tenses, 28. — ἐχθρὸν ἄνδρα : cf. ἐχθρός, p. 14 11 ΣΝ the 
note. — 14. εἶναι, was, infin. in indir. discourse after pane hei ὄντα 
would be more common (G. 1592,1; H. 986). See G. Moods and tUiias 
514,1. — ἀπέχοντα “6. σταθμούς, twelve stages off or distant. era 
qualifies ABpoxéyav.—17. ἢν φεύγῃ, if he is (shall be) off in flight, mark 
the tense. — ἡμεῖς ἐκεῖ κτλ. : the quot. here becomes direct, Observe with 
what ease the Greek, contrary to the Eng, idiom, allows this betel 
from the indir. to the dir. form. Cf. p. 15, 4 and 16. i) 

$21. 19. τοῖς δὲ... ἦν, but they had. Cf. ὁ δέ, p. 1, 14, and αὐτῷ 
Ρ..2, 26, and the ποίεβ. --- ὅτι dye: quoted after τοῖς δὰ ὑποψία δον 
ὑπώπτευον δέ, without change of mood. But after ἤκουσεν in 24, ὅτι ἄγοι 
— 20. ἐδόκει : why ἐδόκει here, but ἔδοξε (aor.) in 11 ? — 22. bles : sete 
the tense, and cf. παύσασθαι, p. 5, 1,"and the note on we Oe ae ie sil 
that which, for 8 by assimilation. Cf. av, p. 3,9; and for the ibaa 
omitted, as here, οἵᾳ περ above in 2. The gen, rt ἡμιόλιον "μα Ἐπ᾿ 
the force of a comp., a half more (G. 1154; H. 755). — 38. in a 
each month (6. 1136; H. 759). On the pay of the Greek troops, ay tke 
oo § wil — 24. ἐν τῷ havepe : equiv. to φανερῶς. This implies that 
tere was a real understanding of the facts on the part of some. The 
soldiers accuse the generals of this in i. 4. 12. — By the expedient howe 
described Cyrus led the Greeks nineteen stages farther inland instead 
of twelve as proposed in § 20, before he announced publicly: his real 
purpose, 


ANABASIS I. 4. 1+. 


CHAPTER IV. 


Page 16.] $1. 25. It is now the last of June, and the army has been 
on the march four months. The distance from Sardis thus far covered is 
222 parasangs. Retrace on the map the route from Sardis to Tarsus. 
Page 17.] 2. στάδιον : the common Greek standard of length, equal 
(according to Dérpfeld) to 600 Greek or 582} Eng. feet. See tables in 
Smith’s Dict. of Antiquities, vol. II. (end), third ed. στάδιον is heterogen- 
eous (G. 288; H. 214). Cf. στάδιοι in 24.—3. ἐσχάτην : without the art., 
where we should use it. Cf. p. 7, 11.—4. ἐπὶ... οἰκουμένην, situated 
(lit. being inhabited ) close upon the sea. 

§2. 5. Κύρῳ: for the case cf. αὐτῷ, p. 5, 18, and the note. —The 
fleet which here effects a junction with the land forces of Cyrus is the one 
already mentioned in i. 2. 21.—7. ἐπ᾽ αὐταῖς, over them, but below in 11 
ἐπὶ τῶν νεῶν, on board the ships. —8. ἡγεῖτο δ᾽ αὐταῖς, conducted them, = 
ἡγεμὼν ἦν αὐταῖς (dat. of advantage). — 10. ἐπολιόρκει, he had been 
besieging. For the tense, cf. ἐφύλαττον, p. 10, 10, and the note. 

§3. 11. μετάπεμπτος, sent for, equal to μεταπεμφθείς, and so followed 
by ὑπὸ Κύρου (G. 1234; Η. 818 α). Chirisophus was sent with these troops 
from Sparta in response to the request of Cyrus, who had rendered the 
Lacedaemonians substantial aid in bringing the Peloponnesian War to a 
close. See the Introd., δὲ 18, 201. On the retreat, Chirisophus became 
senior commander. —12. av... Κύρῳ, the command of whom he (now) 
held under Cyrus. —13. ὥρμουν, lay at anchor. The quarters of Cyrus, 
it would appear, were pitched close upon the sea.—14. ot παρὰ “ABpoxépa : 
the case is due to the influence of ἀποστάντες. Cf. τῶν παρὰ βασιλέως, 
p. 2, 6, and the note. For the gen. ᾿Αβροκόμα, see G. 188, 3; H. 146D. 
This Doric gen. is found in Attic chiefly in foreign proper names. —'The 
700 hoplites under Chirisophus and the 400 deserters from Abrocomas 
complete the Greek force of Cyrus. See the Introd., § 22. 

δ 4, 18. πύλας : the art. is omitted, since the word is used almost as a 
proper name. ἦσαν δὲ ταῦτα, and these (the “gates’’) consisted of.- For 
ταῦτα, where we should expect αὗται, cf. αὕτη, p. 2, 26, and the note. 

3ut ἦσαν remains in the pi., as if αὗται were the subj., although the form 
ταῦτα would strictly require ἣν (G. 899, 2 ; H. 604). — 19. τὸ μὲν ἔσωθεν : 
80. τεῖχος. --- πρὸ τῆς Κιλικίας : explanatory of ἔσωθεν, as in 21 πρὸ τῆς 
Συρίας of Zw. —20. εἶχε : not, of-course, in person. For its agreement, 
cf. ἣν, p. 5, 11, and the note. —23. ἅπαν τὸ μέσον, the entire distance 
between. —24. ἦσαν : in agreement with στάδιοι. Cf. p. 7, 8, and the 
note. —26. καθήκοντα : to be connected with ἣν, ἦν καθήκοντα being 
equiv. to καθῆκε. --- ὕπερθεν : i.e. overhanging the pass. — 27. ἐφειστήκεσαν 


180 ANABASIS I. 4. 4.8, 


Page 17.] πύλαι, a gate had been set in each wall. Here rida has its 
proper meaning of gate, large and double like that in a city wall. Above 
in 18 the word refers to the pass. 

Page 18. ὁ δ. 1. μετεπέμψατο : from Ephesus probably. Cyrus must 
have long foreseen that the pass would bar his way. — low Kal ἔξω 
within and without the pass, i.e. between the two walls and beyond the 
wall on the Syrian side. The object of Cyrus was to attack Abrocomas 
both in front and rear. The distance between the two walls was a third 
of a mile (three stades). — 2, βιασομένους : the partic. expresses purpose. 
—el φυλάττοιεν : the mood is due to quot. (ἃ. 1503 ; H. 937). —3. ὅπερ: 
just the thing which, referring to the clause that precedes. — 4. ἔχοντα, 
since he had.—6. ὄντα : quoted. Cf. εἶναι, p, 16, 14, and the note.— 7. ὡς 
ἐλέγετο : probably pers., as he was said (to have). Cf. p. 6, 16, and the 
note. — τριάκοντα μυριάδας : see the Introd., § 141 

$6. 11. qv: we might have had ἐστί. Cf. ἀθροίζονται, p. 1, 8, and the 
note. —1d χωρίον : the subj. ; the pred. subst. (here ἐμπόριον) seldom has 
the art. (G. 956 ; H. 669). 

$7. 14. ta... ἐνθέμενοι, putting on board (G. 1242, 3; H. 815) their 
most valuable effects. —15. ὡς μὲν κτλ. : the correl. clause with δέ is 
omitted ; but μέν implies that there was another opinion in the camp. — 
ἐδόκουν : pers. const. (G. 1522, 2; H. 944 a). —16. φιλοτιμηθέντες, since 
they were jealous. ὅτι εἴα Kipos is also causal (ἃ. 1505; H. 925). —orpa- 
τιώτας : Obj. of ἔχειν in 19. —17. ἀπελθόντας : see i. 3. 7. — ὡς ἀπιόντας: 
purpose. Cf. ws ἀποκτενῶν, p. 1, 15, and the note. For the fut. force of 
εἶμι, see G. 1257; H. 828a.—18. καὶ οὐ: sc. iévras from the preceding 
ἀπιόντας. --- 19. διῆλθε λόγος, a report went abroad. —érr διώκοι “ἢ juoted. 
— 20. τριήρεσι: cf. p. 15, 21, and the note. — ὡς δειλοὺς... ληφθῆναι, 
that they might be captured, because they were cowards. ὡς shows that the 
reason assigned is that of the subj. of ηὔχοντο. ---91. ᾧκτειρον εἰ ἁλώ- 
σοιντο, pitied them if they were to be captured. The original thought was, 
we pity them if they are to be captured. For the mood, see G. 1502, 2: 
H. 987. For εἰ ἁλώσονται of the direct form, ¢f. εἰ πιστεύσομεν, Ὁ. 15, 17, 
and the note. Cyrus had already shown how severe he could be. Cf, 
i, 2. 20. A striking general remark on this is found in i. g. 138. ) 

$8. 24. GAN... ἐπιστάσθων, but nevertheless, let them well (em- 

phasized by γέ) know. —25. ἀποδεδράκασιν, ἀποπεφεύγασιν : the first 
means escape by stealth, like a runaway slave ; the second, escape by rapid 
jlight, so as not to be caught. The clauses that follow make this distinc- 
tion clear. —26. ὅπῃ οἴχονται, in what direction they are gone. — 27. 
ὥστε ἑλεῖν : result. Cf. ὥστε εἶναι. p. 2, 7, and the note. — μὰ τοὺς θεούς : 
note that the oath is neg. (G. 1066; 1067 ; H. 723). 


ANABASIS I. 4. 8-12. 181 


Page 19.] 1. οὐδ... οὐδείς : emphatic neg. Cf. p. 12,23.—2. ἕως 
av παρῇ τις, 80 long as any one stays by me, general suppos. in pres. time 
(G. 1431, 1; H. 914, B. 1). So ἐπειδὰν βούληται following. —3. αὐτούς : 
pl. though referring to ris. Cf. πάντας, p. 2, 6, and the note. — 5. περί, 
in respect to, to. —7. povpotpeva, guarded, i.e. under the protection of 
the resident garrison. φρουρούμενα is neut., although it limits both τέκνα 
and γυναῖκας, since these are regarded as articles of property. Tralles 
was in Lydia. See the map. — τούτων στερήσονται : the pass. of the 
const. explained in G. 1118; H. 748 α. στερήσομαι is a fut. mid. used as a 
pass. — By this unlooked-for clemency Cyrus got the good-will of the 
Greeks and lost little ; for though the generals deserted, their troops 
remained, How many men had Xenias and Pasion under their command ? 

8 9, 9. εἴ τις καί, if anybody indeed, i.e. even he who, even those who. — 
10. ἀθυμότερος, ‘a bit out of heart.’ The comp. often gives the force of 
rather or somewhat to the meaning of the adj. — 18, μετὰ ταῦτα : mark 
the asyndeton. —14. ὄντα : which was, attrib. partic.— 15. πλέθρου : 
pred. gen. of measure (G. 1094, 5; H. 732a) after ὄντα, τὸ edpos being an 
ace. of spec. ; but below in 20 τὸ εὖρος is the subj. of ἣν understood, 
πλέθρου having the same const. that it has here. See i. 2. 23, and the note. 
For still another const., cf. p. 5, 25. —16. πραέων, tame (G. 348 ; H. 247 a). 
--: ἐνόμιζον, εἴων : cf. ἦν, p. 18, 11, and the note. For the two aces. after 
ἐνόμιζον, see G. 1077 ; H. 726. — ἀδικεῖν : sc. τινά as subj. —18. Παρυσά- 
τιδος.. . . δεδομέναι, belonyed to Parysatis, having been given her for girdle- 
money (cf. our “pin-money’’). For the gen., cf. Τισσαφέρνους, p. 2, 18. 

§10. 20. AdpSaros: the Dardas. See the map. Cyrus now gets into 
the valley of the Euphrates, but does not cross this river until eight days 
later at Thapsacus.— 21. ἦσαν : for the number, see G. 899, 2; H. 604); 
and cf. p. 10, 19. —22. ἄρξαντος : note the tense. — Belesys had probably 
fled on the approach of Cyrus, who in consequence treated the country 
as that of an enemy. —24. αὐτόν : i.e. the park. Pronouns of reference 
generally take the gender of the subst. to which they refer. 

Page 20.] §11. 1. Cyrus now openly declares the real object of the 
expedition, which must have been apparent to the Greeks for some time. 
Cf. i. 3. 31, They had kept on, however, intending at the Euphrates to 
demand money (ὃ 12), which Cyrus now agrees (ὃ 13) to give them. —2. 
ὅτι ἔσοιτο : note the tense and give the dir. form. —3. els Βαβυλῶνα: 
not ai Babylon, but to be connected with ἡ ὁδὸς ἔσοιτο directly. 

ὃ 12, 5. ποιήσαντες ἐκκλησίαν : cf. συνήγαγεν ἐκκλησίαν, p. 12, 2, and 
see the Introd., § 271. ---Ο, ἐχαλέπαινον : the anger of the soldiers was 
doubtless more or less feigned, to force from Cyrns the larger sum. — 
στρατηγοῖς : dat. of indir. obj. (G. 1160; H. 764, 2).—7. αὐτοὺς . .. 


ANABASIS I. 4. 12-15. 


Page 20.] .. κρύπτειν : quoted. What they said was, πάλαι ταῦτ᾽ εἰδότες 
κρύπτετε, although you have known (G. 1563, 6; H. 969e) this for a long 
time (G. 1258; H. 826), you have been keeping it secret. —otx ξδασὰν 
ἱέναι : cf. the same, p. 11, 22, and the note. —8, ἐὰν... &5e: equiv. 
to unless money were given them. — χρήματα : not an increase. of their 
regular pay (μισθός), but a largess, —9. ὥσπερ, as (it had been given) 
— προτέροις : pred. to ἀναβᾶσι (G. 926; H.619a). Cf. προτέρα, Ὁ. 10 26. 
The reference is to the 300 Greeks who accompanied Cyrus to Babvlon 
at the time of his father’s death. — καὶ ταῦτα, and that too. —10, | νων: 
86. ἐκείνων, referring to οἱ ἀναβάντες. The part. ἰόντων is oonibeabee, 
like εἰδότας in 7, but καλοῦντος is causal. The latter is opposed to ἐπὶ 
μάχην, not to ἐόντων. | i 
$13. 12. ὑπέσχετο δώσειν: Xenophon might have used δοῦναι or διδόναι. 
Cf. δώσειν, p. 16, 22, and the note. — πέντε μνᾶς : these were probably 
Persian minas, about one fourth heavier than the Attic. — 13. ἀργυρίου : 
gen. of material (G. 1085, 4; H. 1729S). --- ἐπὴν ἥκωσι : cond, rel, clause, 
quoted without change of mood, So μέχρι ἂν καταστήσῃ (G. 1465 | H 921), 
— τὸν μισθόν : a daric and a half a month (i. 3. 21). ih 14, rai ig 
adj. The fulfilment of these splendid promises of Cyrus was savienid 
by his premature death. See the Introd., § 252, — 15. τὸ πολύ, the greater 
pare (G. 967 ; H. 665).— 17. πρὶν εἶναι, before it was (G. 1470 ; H. 955) 
This const, occurs again in 25 (in exactly the words used here) and p. 21 8, 
—18. πότερον. . . ἤ: double indir. quest. (G. 1606; H. 1017) ae 
accented at the end of the sentence (G. 138, 1; H. 112a).— 19. τῶν Dien: 
gen. with the adv. Cf. αὐτοῦ, p. 14, 14, and the note. —Give the dir. 
form of all the quoted sentences in this and the preceding section. 
$14. 20. πεισθῆτε: the aor. mid. of this verb is not used, but the aor 
pass. has the sense of the mid,, obey. —otre... Tovar avres swithont 
either toil or danger, partics. of manner. —21. τῶν ἄλλων : isl i a- 
τιωτῶν, Which is in double const., first with πλέον (G. 1153 ; H. 756) ‘ad 
then with προ-τιμήσεσθε (G. 1132; H. 751). The object " ἴο emphasise 
the great advantage over the rest to be gained by following his iting! Τὰ 
25. τοὺς Ἕλληνας : subj. of ἕπεσθαι. i | 
$15. 27. ὑμῶς... διαβαίνειν, vou (emphatic) will have credit of heing 
the cause of it, by having begun the passage (of the river). For rod δι » 
βαίνειν, see G. 1547 ; 1099 ; H. 959; 738, | i 
Page 21.] 2. ἐπίσταται : sc. χάριν ἀποδιδόναι. --- εἴ τις καὶ ἄλλος : cf. 
Ρ. 15, 11, and the note, — 4, τοὔμπαλιν : i.e. τὸ ἔμπαλιν (by crasis). hie 
+++ πειθομένοις, because (as he will feel) you alone carried out his wishes. 
τ΄ πιστοτάτοις : as most trustworthy, pred. —6. G@ddov. . . δέησθε what- 
ever else you may want. ἄλλου for ἄλλο by inverted assimilation (G. 1035 ; 
H. 1003); or as gen. with τεύξεσθε. ΠΝ 


ANABASIS I. 4. 16 anp 5. 3. 183 


Page 21.] ὃ 16, 8. ἐπείθοντο .. . διέβησαν : note the difference in tense. 
—10. διαβεβηκότας, that they hud crossed, partic. in indir. discourse. — 
11. TAots, Glus, son of Cyrus’s admiral. —’Eyo μὲν... μελήσει : note 
the contrast of persons marked by the expression of the nom. of the pers. 
prons. (G. 896 ; H. 602 a).—12. ὅπως ἐπαινέσετε : this obj. clause is in 


fact here a gen. (G. 1105; H. 742). 

$17. 15. ἐλέγετο πέμψαι, he was said to have sent, pers. const. — 16. 
τὸ ἄλλο στράτευμα ἅπαν : the order of crossing was, Menon’s force, Cyrus 
and the barbarians, and then the rest of the Greek army. —18. τῶν 
μαστῶν : μαστός is one of the breasts, στέρνον (p. 38, 11) the breast, chest. 

$18. 19. of 8... πλοίοις : what the inhabitants of Thapsacus said, 
supplying the ellipses necessary to the const., was οὐπώποθ᾽ οὗτος ὁ ποταμὸς 
διαβατὸς ἐγένετο πεζῇ εἰ μὴ νῦν (except now, emphasizing οὐπώποτε), ἀλλὰ 
(διαβατὸς ἣν μόνον) πλοίοις. Note the change of νῦν to τότε in passing from 
dir. to indir. discourse. In the same way the pers. of the quoted verbs 
is often changed. —21. a τότε... διαβῇ : a statement added by the his- 
torian. — κατέκαυσεν : plup. in force.— 22. ἵνα... διαβῇ : note the mood. 
— ἐδόκει δὴ . . . βασιλεύσοντι, if appeared accordingly that it (i. e. the low- 
ness of the river) was a divine intervention, and that the river had plainly 
retired before Cyrus, because (he was) about to be king: the sentiment 
of the truckling Thapsacenes. 

$19. 28. ἐπεσιτίσαντο : because they were about to cross the desert 


of Arabia. See the map. 
CHAPTER V. 


Page 22.] §1. 1. τῆς ᾿Αραβίας : occupied by roving tribes of Arabs 
called by Strabo (16, p. 748)” ApaBes Σκηνῖται.---2. ἔχων, with. Cf. p. 1, 10. 
—4, ἦν piv... θάλαττα, the ground was wholly a level plain, just like the 
sea. ἅπαν with πεδίον, where we should expect ἅπασα limiting γῆ Cf. 
p. 131, 2. —6. ἅπαντα : pl., although the preceding τὶ is sing., lit. if there 
was anything else, etc., they were all, etc. Cf. πάντας, p. 2,6, and the note. 

§2. 7. Sévpov... ἐνῆν, but there was no tree (emphatic position) in it. 
- πλεῖστοι, very many. —9. ot ἱππεῖς : these were the horse with Cle- 
archus. Of. rods ἱππέας, p. 25, 16, and the note. —10. ἐπεὶ διώκοι, ἕστα- 
σαν : for the opt. cf. p. 6, 8, and the note. So ἐπεὶ πλησιάζοιεν, ἐποίουν 
in 12. —13. ταὐτόν : for τὸ αὐτό (G. 400; H. 265).— καὶ οὐκ ... διαδε- 
χόμενοι, and it was impossible to catch them, unless the horsemen, posting 
themselves at intervals, hunted them in relays. — 14. θηρῴεν : general sup- 
position in past time (G. 1593, 2; H. 894, 2). 

8 3, 17. πολὺ yap... χρωμένη, for it withdrew to a great distance in 
its flight, plying (χρωμένη) its feet in running, and raising and using 


182 ANABASIS I. 4. 12-15. 


Page 20.] ... κρύπτειν : quoted. What they said was, πάλαι ταῦτ᾽ εἰδότες 
κρύπτετε, although you have known (G. 1563, 6; H. 909 6) this for a long 
yin (G. 1258; H. 826), you have been keeping it secret. —otx hiscias 
ἱέναι : cf. the same, p. 11, 22, and the note. —8. dav... διδώ: εἰ uiv 
to unless money were given them. —xphpara: not an increase. rom 
regular pay (μισθός), but a largess. —9. ὥσπερ, as (it had been given) 
~~ mporipess : pred. to ἀναβᾶσι (G. 926; H. 6194). Cf. προτέρα, p. 10 26. 
The reference is to the 300 Greeks who accompanied Cyrus ω aisle 
at the time of his father’s death. — καὶ ταῦτα, and that too. —10 ts i 
wt si referring to ol ἀναβάντες. The part. ata ne 

" ᾿ * ~ » ᾽ = oT ᾿ 
ra Ape ar καλοῦντος is causal. The latter is opposed to ἐπὶ 


d δοῦναι or διδόναι. 
| these were probably 
r than the Attic. —13, 4 
gen. of material (G. 1085, 4; H. 729 J). a νον 
quoted without change of mood. So μέχρι ἂν καταστήσῃ (α. 1465 ; H. any 
— Tov μισθόν : a daric and a half a month (i. 3. 21). — 14, ἐντελῇ i i ἥ 
adj. The fulfilment of these splendid promises of Cyrus was a 
by his premature death. See the Introd., ὃ 252, — 15, τὸ ΠΡῚΝ the , oa 
Bart (G. 967 ; H. 665). — 17. πρὶν εἶναι, before it was (G. 1470: 4 pet 
This const. occurs again in 25 (in exactly the words used here) κοὐ ey 21 ἢ 
—18. πότερον... ἤ: double indir. quest. (ἃ. 1606 ; H. 1017) lin 
accented at the end of the sentence (G. 138, 1; H, 119.0).— 19. τῶν ἄλλ i 
gen. with the adv. Cf. αὐτοῦ, p. 14, 14, and the note. ye the ar 
form of all the quoted sentences in this and the preceding section ἢ] 
$14. 20. πεισθῆτε: the aor. mid. of this verb is not need but ihe aor 
pass. has the sense of the mid., obey. — οὔτε... esl 7 , ! 
either toil or danger, partics. of manner. —21. τῶν ἄλλων: ty pa 
ξιωτῶν, which is in double const., first with πλέον (G. 1153 ; I I 756), and 
then with προ-τιμήσεσθε (G. 1132; H. 751). The object ν" ἴο ὯΝ cot 
the great advantage over the rest to be gained by following his é ne ᾿ ᾿ ἣν 
23. τοὺς Ἕλληνας : subj. of ἕπεσθαι. | i si 
‘i a ων — + διαβαίνειν, you (emphatic) will have credit of heing 
80 » OY having begun the passage (of the river). For rod δια- 
βαίνειν, see G. 1547 ; 1099 ἢ H. 959; 738. | i 
Page 21.) 2. ἐπίσταται : sc. χάριν ἀποδιδόναι. -- εἴ τις καὶ ἄλλος : cf. 
Ρ. 15, 11, and the note, — 4, τοὔμπαλιν : i.e. τὸ ἔμπαλιν (by crasis) ci ὡς 
- ++ πειθομένοις, because (as he will feel) you alone carried out his fe Pr, 
— πιστοτάτοις : as most trustworthy, pred. —6. ἄλλου... δέ σϑε sahil 
ever else you may want. ἄλλου for ἄλλο by inverted saa On, (G. 1035 ’ 
H. 1003); or as gen. with τεύξεσθε. Hii 


ANABASIS I. 4. 16 anp 5. 3. 183 


Page 21.] §16. 8. ἐπείθοντο... διέβησαν : note the difference in tense. 
—10. διαβεβηκότας, that they had crossed, partic. in indir. discourse. — 
11. Γλοῦς, Glus, son of Cyrus’s admiral. —’Eyo μὲν ... μελήσει : note 
the contrast of persons marked by the expression of the nom. of the pers. 
prons. (G. 896 ; H. 602a).—12. ὅπως ἐπαινέσετε : this obj. clause is in 
fact here a gen. (G. 1105; H. 742). 

8 17. 15. ἐλέγετο πέμψαι, he was said to have sent, pers. const. —16. 
τὸ ἄλλο στράτευμα ἅπαν : the order of crossing was, Menon’s force, Cyrus 
and the barbarians, and then the rest of the Greek army. —18. τῶν 
μαστῶν : μαστός is one of the breasts, στέρνον (p. 38, 11) the breast, chest. 

8 18. 19. of δὲ... πλοίοις : what the inhabitants of Thapsacus said, 
supplying the ellipses necessary to the const., was οὐπώποθ᾽ οὗτος ὁ ποταμὸς 
διαβατὸς ἐγένετο πεζῇ εἰ μὴ νῦν (except now, emphasizing οὐπώποτε), ἀλλὰ 
(διαβατὸς ἣν μόνον) πλοίοις. Note the change of νῦν to τότε in passing from 
dir. to indir. discourse. In the same way the pers. of the quoted verbs 
is often changed. —21. ἃ τότε... διαβῇ : a statement added by the his- 


torian. — κατέκαυσεν : plup. in force.— 22. tva... διαβῇ : note the mood. 


— ἐδόκει δὴ . . . βασιλεύσοντι, it appeared accordingly that it (i.e. the low- 
ness of the river) was a divine intervention, and that the river had plainly 
retired before Cyrus, because (he was) about to be king: the sentiment 
of the truckling Thapsacenes. 

819, 28. ἐπεσιτίσαντο : because they were about to cross the desert 
of Arabia. See the map. 


CHAPTER V. 


Page 22.] §1. 1. τῆς ᾿Αραβίας : occupied by roving tribes of Arabs 
called by Strabo (16, p. 748)” ApaBes-Zxnvira.—2. ἔχων, with. Cf. p. 1, 10. 
—4. ἦν piv... θάλαττα, the ground was wholly a level plain, just like the 
sea. ἅπαν with πεδίον, where we should expect ἅπασα limiting γῆ. Cf. 
p. 131, 2. —6. ἅπαντα : pl., although the preceding τὶ is sing., lit. if there 
was anything else, etc., they were all, etc. Cf. πάντας, p. 2,6, and the note. 

$2. 7. δένδρον. .. ἐνῆν, but there was no tree (emphatic position) in i. 
-- πλεῖστοι, very many. —9. ot ἱππεῖς : these were the horse with Cle- 
archus. Cf. rods ἱππέας, p. 25, 16, and the note. —10. ἐπεὶ διώκοι, ἕστα- 
σαν : for the opt. cf. p. 6, 8, and the note. So ἐπεὶ πλησιάζοιεν, ἐποίουν 
in 12. —13. ταὐτόν : for τὸ αὐτό (G. 400; H. 265). — καὶ odk ... διαδε- 
χόμενοι, and it was impossible to catch them, unless the horsemen, posting 
themselves at intervals, hunted them in relays. — 14. θηρῴεν : general sup- 
position in past time (G. 1398, 2; H. 894, 2). 

§3, 17. πολὺ yap... χρωμένη, for it withdrew to a great distance in 
its flight, plying (χρωμένη) its feet in running, and raising and using 


184 ANABASIS I. 5. 3-7. 


Page 22.] (χρωμένη) its wings like a sail. δρόμῳ and alpovea express 
the manner. —19. dv ἀνιστῇ, ἔστι : general supposition in present time 
(G. 1393, 1; H. 894, 1). For the accent of ἔστι, see G. 144, 5; H. 480, 1. 
— 22. tv: the narrative style is resumed. 

$4. 24. πλεθριαῖον : we might have had πλέθρου, Cf. p. 10, 21; p. 19, 15. 
— 25. ἐρήμη : prob. in the desert, solitary. Cf. the use of the word in 2. 
The meaning cannot be uninhabited, since the troops here take in three 
days’ supplies ; nor deserted, in the sense of temporarily abandoned by 
its inhabitants on the approach of the army, for such a fact would require 
a more explicit statement, such as the historian makes when he describes 
the flight of the people of Tarsus (i. 2. 24).---ὄνομα § αὐτῇ : sc. ἦν. The 
phrase is equiv. to ὠνομάζετο δέ and has Κορσωτή as pred. nom. For 
a different const. used to express the same thought, cf. p. 19, 28. —26. 
Μάσκα:: Doric gen. Cf. ᾿Αβροκόμα, p. 17, 14, and the note. — 27. ἐπεσιτί. 
σαντο : Corsote thus appears to have been a depot of supplies in the 
middle of the desert. 

Page 23.] ὁ δ. 8. Πύλας: see the Dict. and the map.—®5. ἄλλο : see 
G. 966, 2 ; H. 705. — οὐδὲ οὐδέν : cf. p. 11, 11, and the note. —7. ὄνους 
ἀλέτας, mill-stones. See the Dict., 8.v. ἀλέτης. From the ass, as a beast 
of burden, the term ὄνος came to have various derived meanings, as wind- 
lass in Herod. vii. 36 (ὅνοισι ξυλένοισι), and here the upper mill-stone. 

$6. 10. πρίασθαι : sc. σῖτον. --- Λυδίᾳ: Cyrus the Great, after sub- 
duing the Lydians, forbade them, at the suggestion of Croesus himself 
(Herod. i. 155), the use of arms, and required them to teach their sons the 
arts of music and selling at retail. So they became a race of hucksters. 
—1l. ἐν τῷ βαρβαρικῴ: the native troops of Cyrus encamped apart from 
the Greeks. Cf. i. 2. 16.— ἀλεύρων : gen. of material (G. 1085, 4 ; H. 729 f). 
—12. τεττάρων σίγλων : gen. of price. The σέγλος was the Persian drachma 
(scuo Persian talent). —8évara., is worth, trans. — 13. ᾿Αττικούς : agrees 
With ὀβολούς, limiting also ἡμιωβόλιον.--- 14. ἐχώρει, held. The choeniz 
was about a quart, and this amount of meal or flour cost about 45 cents 
in the desert, or fifty or sixty times as much as it cost at Athens about 
this time. —xpéa.. διεγίγνοντο, so the soldiers subsisted by eating (or 
simply on) flesh. In this climate this was accounted a hardship. See the 
Introd., § 261. 

§7. 15. Ww... ots, some of these marches, ἣν οὖς being a past form of 
the common ἔστιν of (G.1029; H. 998). In such irregular phrases the 
verb keeps a fixed form, without regard to the unexpressed subject. — 
16. οὕς : cogn. acc. with ἤλαυνεν. -- μακρούς : pred. adj. — ὁπότε βούλοιτο : 
cf. ἐπεὶ διώκοι, p. 22, 10, and the note. —18. καὶ δή : adding a special 
fact, and.once in particular. — φανέντος : in agreement with the nearer 


ANABASIS I. 5. 7-9. 185 


Page 23.] subj. C/. πολύ, p. 10, 13, and the note. —19. rats ἁμάξαις 
δυσπορεύτου, hard for the wagons to get through. —21. στρατοῦ : part. 
gen. with a verb (G. 1097, 1; H. 736). Ἴ" 

88, 23. ὥσπερ ὀργῇ, just as (if) in anger. Cf. the use οὗ ὥσπερ with 
the partic., p. 15, 14, and the note.— 25. θεάσασθαι : prop. look upon, be- 
hold, with interest or wonder, while ἰδεῖν is see in general. —26. κάνδυς : 
see the Dict. —27. ἔτυχεν ἑστηκώς : see G. 1586 ; H. 984. ---- ἵεντο, rushed. 
—womep... νίκης; just as one would run (i.e. in a foot-race at the public 
games) to get the victory. περὶ νίκης implies the prot. (G. 1413; H. 902) 
if he should be running for (περί, about, concerning, expressing the aim) 
victory. —28. kal... γηλόφου, even (modifying the entire phrase that 
follows) down a very (μάλα) steep hill. —€xovres ... ἀναξυρίδας, having 
on both their costly tunics and colored trousers. 

Page 24. 4. εἰσπηδήσαντες els: cf. ἐκβαλεῖν ἐκ, p. 4, 15, and the note. 
---θᾶττον 7... wero, more quickly than (omit ws, as, in Eng.) one would 
have thought. For ἂν ᾧετο, a potential indic. with ἄν, see G. 1335, 1336, 
and 1337. —5. μετεώρους ἐξεκόμισαν : i.e. lifted and carried out. 

§9. 6. τὸ σύμπαν, upon the whole, in general, adv. acc. —8fAos... 
σπεύδων, Cyrus showed that he was in haste (ἃ. 1589; 1593; H. 981). ws 
implies that the idea of haste is expressed as the thought of Cyrus. —7. 
ὁδόν : acc. of extent of space. —éaov ph, where not, i.e. except where. — 
8. dow... τοσούτῳ, quanto... tanto, the... the (G. 1184; H. 781 a). — 
dow... μαχεῖσθαι : the thought of Cyrus was, in the dir. form, ὅσῳ ἂν 
θᾶττον ἔλθω, τοσούτῳ ... μαχοῦμαι (G. 1497; H. 932). —9. ἀπαρασκενο- 
τέρῳ : pred, adj.— 11. συναγείρεσθαι : in the dir. form, ὅσῳ ἂν σχολαίτερον 
ἔλθω, τοσούτῳ πλέον συναγείρεται βασιλεῖ στράτευμα, the greater (will be the) 
army (that) is now collecting for the-King, where συναγείρεται expresses an 
action in progress, but implies the future size of the army which is now 
collecting, and is, therefore, a natural apod. to ὅσῳ av ἔλθῃ. --- καὶ συνιδεῖν 
... οὖσα, but, further (καί) the attentive observer could see at a glance 
(συνιδεῖν) that the King’s empire was strong in its extent of territory and 
number of inhabitants, etc. συνιδεῖν is first introduced as subj. of ἦν, it was 
possible to see, and the natural const. would have been τὴν ἀρχὴν ἰσχυρὰν 
οὖσαν. But after τὸν νοῦν the writer’s point of view seems to change, 
and the rest of the sentence is framed as if for συνιδεῖν ἣν the nearly 
equivalent δήλη ἣν had been used. For the const. with δῆλός ἐστι, cf. 6, 
and the note.—12. πλήθει : with χώρας, extent, but with ἀνθρώπων, number. 
—14. διεσπάσθαι : perf. For the const. of the inf., the subject of which 
is δυνάμεις, see G. 1547 ; He 959. — 15. διὰ ταχέων, with speed, lit. through 
quick (measures). —el... ἐποιεῖτο, i.e. in case of asudden attack. For the 
mood of ἐποιεῖτο, where we might have had ποιοῖτο (for which there is 


inferior MS. authority), see G, 1895; H. 894c. 


186 ANABASIS I. 5. 10-14, 


ape 24.] 810. 16. πέραν τοῦ ποταμοῦ, across the river (G. 1148; 
. 167), te its sc mm bank 7 é : 
ba 4 : € γῇ its southern bank. —17, ὄνομα δὲ Xappadvby : cf. p. 22, 
5, - the note.—18. ἠγόραζον ra ἐπιτήδεια : see the Introd., § 261, end 
Li , fo ta 
—19. διφθέρας, xdprov: double obj. (ἃ. 1118; H. 743). — 20 oreya 
opara, as tent-covers. Cf. ἄρχοντα, p. 1, 10, and the note. —21. συνῆγον, 
brought or drew them together at the edges. — ὡς ph ἅπτεσθαι : result 
Observe that the consecutive particle is ws (G. 1456; H. 1054. 1 J) 

Ἴ ' ,᾿ 9 9 ann 
κάρφης : for the case see G. 1099 ; H. 738. —23. ἐκ, ἀπό : the one out of. 
the other off of. —2 ῦ ῖ ts we hendent 
a off of 24. τοῦτο... πλεῖστον, for this was very abundant 
tn the country, i.e. millet was the common staple of the country, τοῦτο 
neuter, although referring to μελίνης. 

ΤῊ » hy 

8. 11, 26. ἀμφιλεξάντων τι, having had some dispute. 

Page 25.] 1. ἀδικεῖν... Μένωνος, that Menon’s soldier (probably two 
soldiers, one of Menon, the other of Clearchus, had begun the quarrel) was 
in the wrong. ἀδικεῖν by quot. after κρίνας. ---- ἐνέβαλεν : probably on the 
spot, with his own staff, after the Spartan fashion. Clearchus was a severe 
disciplinarian. Cf. ii. 3. 11, ii. 6.9. —2. τὸ ἑαυτοῦ στράτευμα: cf. 6 and 7. 
The different divisions of the Greek troops encamped apart from one 
another. See the Introd., § 402, —3. ἐχαλέπαινον Κλεάρχῳ, took it 

raat as ‘ oy ρ ; vs) Ὶ i sti oi 7 a 
hard, and were exceedingly angry at Clearchus. Cf. στρατηγοῖς, p. 20. 6 
and the note. ἢ} 

᾿ « , “Ὁ ἢ hdl ἢ 

$12. 4. ἡμέρᾳ: cf. τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ, p. 10, 4, and the note.—6. ἀφιππεύει : 
the general was mounted. See the Introd , $322,—7. eby αὐτό ' 

| ciara . vil ll itt www IN. ll. UTOV, 
with few (pred. adj.) about him, lit. with those about him (being) few. —10 
διελαύνοντα : not the partic. in indir. discourse (G. 1582 : 1583). —tyor τῇ 

: Ι ] Ι ily 4 ii 
ἀξίνῃ, hurled his axe at him, lit. sends (at him, sc. αὐτοῦ, G. 1099 ; H 739) 
j i 7 “ve ) . Pe 
with his axe.—11. αὐτοῦ : for the case, see G. 1099; H. 748. —rOw- 
86, ἴησι. | ἢ 
*“ wl ᾿ hy Mm * Md 

$13, 13. καταφεύγει : difference in meaning from ἀποφεύγω, p. 18, 26 ἢ 
sh i a i ᾿ . . ἢ" ὦ 

15. αὐτοῦ, there, i.e. where they were.—rds ἀσπίδας... θέντας : the left 
knee was slightly advanced, the shield set firmly in rest upon it, and the 
Ἂ Ἢ", *! j ia ἣν ρος ὦ ρ ll, : ‘ih 
ὙΠ vy in readiness for defence. Clearchus saw that he might be 
repulsed and obligec all be 20n his heavy ᾿ 
' I , | ge 1 to fall back upon his heavy-armed troops.— 16, τοὺς 
ππέας: not mentioned in i. 2.9. These were the only Greek cavalry 
with Cyrus. See the Introd., § 22.—17. of ἦσαν αὐτῷ : equiv. to of 
εἶχεν. ----18, οἱ πλεῖστοι: sc { ἤν Aiea 

ΤΟΝ ὦ - ἦσαν. — 19. ἐκπεπλῆχθαι, were thoroughly 
Se 6 ν - 1218). ---20, οἱ δέ, but others, as if τοὺς μέν stood with 
τρέχειν. --- ἔστασαν, ‘stood riveted to the s ͵ > ) 
stoc sted to the spot.’—21. τῷ apg : dé 
bal Ὁ πράγματι : dat. 
ῶ Ν LA , 

νὰ 14. 21. ἔτυχε... προσιών, happened to be coming on later. For the 

partic., cf. παρών, p. 1, 5, and the note. ἑπομένη is in the same const 


ANABASIS I. 5. 14 ann 6. 2. 


see the Introd., § 302.— attra: with ἑπομένη 
(G. 1175 ; H. 772). — 23. οὖν : ἔτυχε. .. ὁπλιτῶν is parenthetic, and οὖν 


resumes the narration. —d@yov: sc. τὴν τάξιν. --- 24. ἔθετο τὰ ὅπλα, halted 
under arms, ordered arms. For the phrase τίθεσθαι τὰ ὅπλα see the Dict., 
s.v. τίθημι. It never means stack or pile arms. —Kyedpyov μὴ ποιεῖν : cf. 
αὐτοῦ μὴ καταλῦσαι, p. 4, 2, and the note: —25. αὐτοῦ... καταλευσθῆναι, 
when he (i.e. Clearchus) had barely escaped being stoned to death. See the 
Dict., 8.0. δέω. and G. 1112 ; H. 7436. —26. λέγοι : opt. in a causal sent. 
(G. 1506 ; H. 928 δ). ---- αὐτοῦ refers to Clearchus. 

Page 26.] §15. 1. ἐν τούτῳ, meanwhile (sc. τῷ χρόνῳ). --- καὶ Kipos, 
Cyrus also. —2. τὰ παλτά : see the Introd., § 14. What word is used to 
designate the Greek hoplite’s spear ?— 3. τῶν πιστῶν : partitive gen. 
The trusty counsellors or attendants of a Persian prince were called oi 
πιστοί. In the Persians of Aeschylus, the twelve elders who form the 
chorus say of themselves (vs. 1) τάδε... Πιστὰ καλεῖται (for καλούμεθα 
Πιστοῖ). 

δ 10, 4. Πρόξενε: Proxenus now seemed more prominent than Menon. 
—5. el... συνάψετε : for this form of the prot. to express fut. cond., 
see G. 1405; H. 899.—7. κατακεκόψεσθαι, shall be instantly cut to pieces 
(G. 1266 ; H. 855b).— 8. κακῶς . .. ἐχόντων : equiv. to ἐὰν τὰ ἡμέτερα 
κακῶς ἔχῃ. ---10. τῶν παρὰ βασιλεῖ ὄντων : i.e. ἢ of mapa βασιλεῖ ὄντες, not 
ἢ τοῖς παρὰ βασιλεῖ οὖσι. See G. 1155; Η. 0493. 

$17. 11. ἐν ἑαυτῴ ἐγένετο, came to himself, recovered his senses, Lat. ad 
se rediit. —mwavodpevor: 8c. τῆς μάχης. ---12. κατὰ χώραν ἔθεντο τὰ ὅπλα : 
see the Dict., s.v. τέθημι, and note on 25, 24. 


CHAPTER VI. 


δ 1, 13. ἐντεῦθεν : from the camp opposite Charmande. See the Map. 
-- προϊόντων, as they advanced (sc. αὐτῶν), but in 15 προϊόντες, keeping 
ahead (of the army). —édatvero, there kept appearing, impf. For its 
agreement with the neuter plur., see G. 899, 2; 901; H. 604,607.—14. ὡς 
.. . ἵππων, of about 2000 horse, poss. pred. gen. —15. οὗτοι : referring to 
the ἱππεῖς implied in ἵππων. ---εἴ τι ἄλλο, i.e. whatever else (cf. Ὁ. 22, 5). 
—16. γένει : dat. of respect (G. 1182; H. 780). —17. τὰ πολέμια λεγόμε- 
vos, reckoned, in matters pertaining to war, acc. of spec. —18. Περσῶν : ᾿ 
part. gen. — καὶ πρόσϑεν, previously also. 

§2. 19. εἰ αὐτῷ δοίη κτλ. : Orontas said, εἰ ἐμοὶ δοίης, ἢ κατακάνοιμι ἂν 
ἢ ἂν ἕλοιμι κτλ. (G. 1481, 2).—20. ὅτι : in unusual position ; we should 
expect ὅτι εἰ αὐτῷ xr. —21. dv: twice expressed, belongs also with the 
two following opts. (G. 1314). —22. τοῦ κάειν ἐπιόντας, from attacking 
(ἐπιόντας limiting the subj. of κάειν) and burning (G. 1549 ; H, 963). — 


188 ANABASIS I. 6. 2.8. 


Page 26.] 23. ποιήσειεν... δύνασθαι, would make it so that they should 
never be able, etc. ; ef. p. 27,27. ὥστε is generally omitted in this const. ; 
cf. p- 30, 12; p. 78, 7. —25. ταῦτα: subj. of ἐδόκει. ---- 36. τῶν ἡγεμόνων : 
the commanders of Cyrus’s native cavalry. 


Page 27.] ὃ 8. 2. ἥξοι, δύνηται : partial change of mood (G. 1498). 


—3. ὡς ἂν δύνηταί πλείστους : a-cond. rel. clause. We might have had 
simply ὡς πλείστους. See note on p. 2, 12, —5. ἐνῆν ἐν : cf. εἰς repeated in 
p. 24, 4. --- τῆς πρόσθεν: cf. p. 16, 4, and p. 19, 8.—7. 6 δε, but he. Cf. 
p. 1, 14, and the note. 

ὃ 4, 10. ἑπτά, seven of them, added to restrict τοὺς ἀρίστους. --- 12. 
θέσθαι τὰ ὅπλα, to station themselves under arms, Cf. ἔθετο τὰ ὅπλα, p. 
25, 24, and the note. — 13. τρισχιλίους : the great number of men (one 
quarter of the entire Greek force) would seem to show apprehension on 
the part of Cyrus. Orontas was a man of influence, and doubtless had 
many friends among the barbarians. It should be noticed, however, that 
some of the seven Persians summoned to judge Orontas were his own 
relatives. Cf. οἱ συγγενεῖς, p. 29, 3. 

$5. 15. καὶ αὐτῷ καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις, nol only to him (i.e. Cyrus) but also 
to the rest (i.e. of the Persians), that is, it was generally known to the 
Persians that Clearchus was the most prominent man among the Greeks. 
See the Introd., ὃ 231. —16. τῶν Ἑλλήνων : part. gen. with μάλιστα, the 
thought being strengthened by προ- in προτιμηθῆναι, was honored above (the 
rest). Cf. the similar expression τῶν ἄλλων πλέον προτιμήσεσθε στρατιωτῶν, 
p. 20, 21.—17. τὴν κρίσιν ὡς ἐγένετο : for ws ἡ κρίσις ἐγένετο, how the trial 
was conducted. Cf. note on τῶν βαρβάρων, p. 2,8. —18. οὐ γὰρ ἀπόρρητον 
ἦν: ἰ.6. ὡς ἡ κρίσις ἐγένετο.--- 19. ἄρχειν : he said ἦρχεν (G. 1285, as Re, 
853 a). — rot λόγον, the debate. _ For the case, cf. τοῦ διαβαίνειν, p. 20, 27. 

δ 6, 20. σὺν ὑμῖν βουλενόμενος, taking counsel with ψοιι. -- 21. 6m... 
ἀνθρώπων, whatever is just, etc., rel. clause, summed up emphatically in 
otro, —22. πράξω : aor. subjy., not fut. ind., since the clause is final 
(G. 1366 ; H. 881c).—-rovrovi: with an emphatic gesture (G. 412; H. 
274). — 23. ἐμός : with the art. (G. 946, 1; H. 675). —24. εἶναι : for this 
inf. expressing purpose, cf. διαρπάσαι, Ρ. 9, 14. --- ἐμοί : with ὑπήκοον 
(G. 1114 ; H. 765). —ds ἔφη αὐτός, as he himself said (G. 989, 1; H. 680, 2). 
The nominative of αὐτός is always adj. (= ipse), never subst., although 
in English we must always (as here) supply the omitted he. Cyrus dis- 
credits the statement. Cyrus, in his capacity of military commander 
(xdpavos) of western Asia Minor, had probably put Orontas in charge of 
Sardis. When, therefore, Artaxerxes became king and Orontas renounced 
the authority of Cyrus, it was easy for him to take forcible and absolute 
possession of the city. —26. καὶ ἐγὼ ἐποίησα, and 1 brought it about, 


ANABASIS I. 6. 6-9. 189 


Page 27.] dependent on ἐπεί, above. The principal clause begins with 
μετὰ ταῦτα, p. 28, 1. ----.᾽αὐτόν : not the obj. of προσπολεμῶν, which takes 
the dat. Cyrus began to say, ἐγὼ αὐτὸν (him, emphatic) προσπολεμῶν 
(manner) ἐποίησα τοῦ πρὸς ἐμὲ πολέμου παύσασθαι (αὐτόν being subj. of 
παύσασθαι), but after ἐποίησα changed the const. of the sent., so that 
αὐτόν seems to stand loosely with ἐποίησα (made him so that he thought it 
best, etc.). For wore δόξαι. cf. p. 26, 23, and the note. 

Page 28.] 1. δεξιὰν... ἔδωκα : among the Persians a pledge of 
especial solemnity. 

ἃ ἢ. pera ταῦτα, since that, i.e. the pledge given and received. There 
is an abrupt change of address from the council to Orontas, which is 
helped by the insertion of ἔφη, said he.—2. ἔστιν... ἠδίκησα, is there 
any wrong which I have done you? For the accent of ἔστιν, which here 
denotes existence, cf. p. 22, 20, and the note. ὅ τι is a cognate acc. (G. 
1054; 1076 ; H. 7160; 725a).—3. οὔ : 86. ἔστι or εἴη, or we may consider 
ov as a dir. quot., “No,” like οὐδ᾽... δόξαιμι in 18, below. For its 
accent, cf. p. 20, 18, and the note. — ἠρώτα, went on asking, but the aor. 
ἠρώτησεν in 13, in the case of the single question, asked. — Οὐκοῦν : 
implying an affirmative answer (ἃ. 1605; H. 1015). What is the differ- 
ence in meaning between οὐκοῦν and οὔκουν ὃ --- 4, οὐδὲν... ἀδικούμενος : 
the partic. is concessive. οὐδέν is a cognate acc., οὐδὲν ἀδικούμενος being 
the pass. of the const. occurring in 2, above (ἃ. 1239; H. 725c). Cf. 11 
and 13, below. —5. κακῶς ἐποίεις : for this phrase, see ἃ. 1074; H. 712. 
— 6. ὅ τι ἐδύνω, in what (acc. of specification) you were able. — én, said 
“ Yes.’ —7. ἔγνως, came to know, had ascertained, understood. — τὴν 
σαυτοῦ δύναμιν : i.e. how weak it was.—8. μεταμέλειν σοι : in the dir. 
form μεταμέλει μοι, dat. of the indir. obj. 

§8, 11. ἀδικηθείς : causal partic. —12. ἐπιβουλεύων : cf. δῆλος ἣν ἀνιώ- 
μενος, Ὁ. 7, 18, and the note. —13. οὐδὲν ἀδικηθείς : sc. ἐπιβουλεύων αὐτῷ 
φανερὸς γέγονε. --- 14. περὶ ἐμέ: cf. περὶ ἡμᾶς, περὶ ἐκείνους, Ὁ. 19, 5.— 
γεγενῆσθαι : quoted after ὁμολογεῖς. --- 1ῦ. Ἦ γάρ, (I confess), for in 
truth, etc. —16. ἂν γένοιο : potential opt. (G. 1327 ; 1828; 1329; H. 872). 
—18. ὅτι : introducing the dir. quot. (G. 1477) and not to be translated. 

§9. 19. πρὸς ταῦτα, in view of this, thereupon. —21. πρῶτος, the first. 
What would πρῶτον mean ὃ --- ἀπόφηναι.: what is the voice? Distinguish 
from ἀποφῆναι and ἀποφήναι. --- 22. ὅ τι σοι δοκεῖ : indir. quest. depending 
on the idea of declare in ἀπόφηναι γνώμην. ---34. τοῦτον : expressed three 
times, contemptuously. — 25. ἡμῖν : i.e. to you and me, said with a touch 
of arrogance. Why in the dat. ?—-26. τὸ κατὰ τοῦτον εἶναι, so far as 
this fellow is concerned, absolute inf. in a parenthetical phrase (G. 1534, 
1535; H. 956a).—@edovrds: subst., not the partic. (éédovras). —ed 
ποιεῖν : cf. κακῶς ἐποίεις in 5, above. 


190 ANABASIS I. 6. 10 ap 7. 4, 


᾿ pw il | μ ma 1 ἔφη : ne Clearchus, when the trial was over. 
prey ir βόνταν, took Orontas by the girdle (G. 1100; H. 738 a). — 
ai μὴ ila asa si that rll condemned to death, but below in 6, 
arovy, With a verb of motion, to execution. —Kat, even. —4. ol 
προσετάχθη, to whom it was appointed, sc. ἐξάγειν. ----ὅ. π , niiat rg 
νιν: why does the tense change ? saiceokie Ati ‘ig 
Orientals means prostrate one’s self. —6. καίπερ εἰδότε pai : ἮΝ μ 
knew (α. 1573; H. 979).— 7. ἄγοιτο : why opt. ? ete aattee 
δ 11, 9. οὔτε οὐδείς : emphatic neg. So οὐδὲ οὐδείς following. — 10 
ὅπως ἀπέθανεν : perhaps he was buried alive. ᾧ 7 
a historian wate that this was a Persian custom. - εἰδώς, from positive 
nowledge.—11. ἄλλοι ἄλλως, some in one way, others in another. 


— 


See Hat. vii. 114, where 


CHAPTER VII. 


$1. 13. ἐντεῦθεν : probably from near Pylae (p. 23, 3). Cf. p. 26, 13, and 
the note. See also the Introd., § 421, — 17. ἐδόκει, he i ii i a 
ac og (G. ἬΝ; a. 151). — 18. μαχούμενον : fut. partic. Cf. p. 14, 
: 9. κέρως : for the case, see G. 1109 ; H. 741. —rod εὐωνύμου : i 
of the Greeks, who were next to the river, Cyrus drew up (δ Η ; ) Ἰ is 
barbarian force (τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ) on the left of the entire ie aga ῃ 
$2, 21. ἡμέρᾳ : for the case, see G. 1176 ; H: 772¢, — 25 hl av 
meen noe (G. 1600; H. 1011) he should fight the battle, potential 4 + 
Cf. p. 28, 16, and the note. — Wapyve ... τοιάδε, exhorted and ᾿ | 
aged them as follows. : ἼΠ 
algal μὲ ἱ ip rr βαρβάρων, not from dearth of barbarians. 
, gen., cf. p. 18, 4. Cyrus adds ἀνθρώπων contemptuously to f 
βάρων, but calls the Greeks ἄνδρες. Cf. p. 30, 10, and the « ong 
ἀμείνους kal κρείττους, braver and stronger. i ἽΠΠΠ 
ofall = ial sional νομίζων, because I thought, etc., on 
τῷ uw. —2. ὅπως ἔσεσθε : ὅπως with the fut. ind. in a command 
(G. 1352 ; H. 886). —3. ys... ἧς, which (G. 1031: H 994) sie 5 
(pf. Of κτάομαι) and on account of which (G. 1126 - Η. hy ΠΝ 
ἑλοίμην av: what use of the opt. is this — 65, ry il shy ap 
preference to all that (G. 1038 ; H. 995) Ihave. The Dorian bavi bi 
gaa all absolute despotism, and regarded all who were in Hace niet 
ν ΤῊΝ his slaves. Cyrus is called the δοῦλος of Artaxerxes, p in on 
Lee ὅπως mnie εἰδῆτε : a final clause. —6. εἰς οἷον... ἀγῶνα, indo 
na rt of a struggle you are going, indir. quest. (G. 1600; H. 1011¢ 
Cf. in 9 below, οἵους γνώσεσθε. ---.-Ἴ. τὸ πλῆθος : sc. ἐστί. --- 8 ἐ ι = 
fut.— ταῦτα : i.e. their numbers and outcry.—ra ἄλλα Ἢ os vp se ιν 
to all else, I feel (lit. seem to myself) even ashamed (to think) what i of 


ANABASIS I. 7. 4-7. 191 


Page 30.] men (ἀνθρώπους with emphasized contempt at the end of the 
sent.) you will discover those in our country to be (partic. in indir. dis- 
course). The dir. form of the quest. would be, ποίους ἡμῖν γνώσονται τοὺς 
ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ ὄντας ἀνθρώπους ; —9. ἡμῖν : ethical dat. (G. 1171; H. 770).— 
10. ὑμῶν δὲ . . . γενομένων : gen. abs., the partics. expressing cond., if 
only you be men (emphatic) and my affairs turn out well. With ἀνθρώπους 
and ἀνδρῶν in this line cf. what Herodotus (vii. 210) says of the Medes at 
Thermopylae, ὅτι πολλοὶ μὲν ἄνθρωποι elev, ὀλίγοι δὲ dvdpes. — 11: ὑμῶν τὸν 
βουλόμενον, whoever of you (part. gen.) shall wish. —12. τοῖς οἴκοι, to his 
friends at home (masc.). —14. τῶν οἴκοι, things at home (neut.). Cf. ra 
wap ἐμοί in the preceding line. 

$5. 15. πιστὸς Κύρῳ, in the confidence of Cyrus. Gaulites probably 
spoke by direction of Cyrus. —17. a... προσιόντος, because you are 
(lit. on account of your being, G. 1546 ; H. 959) at such (a critical point) 
of the danger that is approaching, κινδύνου limiting τοιούτῳ (G. 1088 ; H. 
728a). Most Mss. have τοῦ προσιόντος. But without rod the gen. may be 
absolute, when the danger is approaching. —18. τι: the reference to his 
present undertaking is purposely vague.—pepvqoer Oar : fut. pf. serving as 
a simple fut. to μέμνημαι, which has the force of a pres. (G. 1263 ; H. 849). 
- 10. ἔνιοι δέ: sc. φασί. --- οὐδ el... δύνασθαι ἄν, not even if you should 
remember, etc., would you be able (G. 1494; 1500; H. 946, 964a). — 
μεμνῇο : for the form, see G. 734, 1; H. 4654. 

§6. 21. ἔστι πρὸς μεσημβρίαν, is (i.e. extends) toward the south. For 
the accent of ἔστι, see G. 144, 5; H. 480, 2. --- ἡμῖν, dat. of advantage. — 
22. μέχρι ov, to the point where, lit. to what (point), neut. of the rel. with 
a prep. —24. ra... πάντα, all between these (limits). Cf. τὸ μέσον τῶν 
τειχῶν, p. 17, 29. 

8. 27. τούτων : with ἐγκρατεῖς (α. 1140; H. 7530). — τοῦτο : intro- 
duces the clause with μή.---- 28. μὴ οὐκ ἔχω ὅ τι δῶ, that I shall not (G.1364 ; 
H. 1033) know (lit. shall not have) what to give. The dir. form of the 
indir. quest. (G. 1490 ; H. 932) ὅ τι δῶ would be ri δῶ; what shall I give? 
(G. 1358 ; H. 866, 8). So οὐκ ἔχω ὅ τι εἴπω (or τί εἴπω), non habeo quod 
(or quid) dicam. Here οὐκ ἔχω is nearly equivalent to ἀπορῶ, be at a loss, 
and the indir. quest. in 8 τι δῶ, etc., is plain. But the analogy of the 
familiar expression οὐκ ἔχω ὅ τι δῶ, I have nothing to give (in which the 
interr. and rel. consts. are sometimes hard to distinguish), gave rise 
occasionally to the corresponding expression ἔχω ὅ τι δῶ, I have some- 
thing to give, in which the rel. character greatly preponderates ; and here 
we have (p. 31,1) μὴ οὐκ ἔχω ἱκανοὺς ols 50, that I may not have enough to 
give to, where the const, is purely rel. (see G. 1443). See G, Moods and 
Tenses, § 677 and § 572. — ἂν εὖ γένηται : 86. τὰ πράγματα. 


ANABASIS I. 7. 7-15. 


Page 31.] 2. στέφανον : not, of course, as a badge of sovereignty. 


See the Dict. See also the Introd., § 252, 

§8. 8. of δέ: i.e. the generals and captains present at the council 
Cf. p. 29, 23 ff. —6. σφίσιν: indir. reflexive (G. 987; H. 685) mi 
ἐμπιπλάς (G. 795; H. 534, 7 a). if | 

$9. 8. παρεκελεύοντο... τάττεσθαι : had Cyrus followed this advice 
the whole course of Persian history might have been changed ἌΚΡΑ 
μάχεσθαι: i.e. in ῬΘΥΒΟΗ. ---αυτῶν : with ὄπισθεν, an adv. of οἷον ὡς 1. 
γάρ: with reference to some unexpressed intimation of Cyrus, What! 
do you think, etc. We should say, Do you then think, ete. — 12, N t Ala. 
Yes, by Zeus: acc. in an oath (G. 1066 ; 1067 ; H. 723).—13. ἐμὸς ἀδιλφό 
α brother of mine. ὁ ἐμὸς ἀδελῴός would be my brother. ( oe iy 
23, and the note. —14. ταῦτα : with a gesture. | ΠΠ 

ὃ 10. ' 15. ἐγένετο, was found to be.—16. ἀσπὶς... τετρακοσία, lit. 70400 
shield, just as we say “a thousand horse.’?— 'The sum total of the Greeks 
here given does not tally with the numbers previously given seneaatedy 
The reason for the discrepancy is uncertain. Cf. the Introd., § 22. i 

$11. 20. ἑκατὸν Kal εἴκοσι μυριάδες : the number is probably over- 
stated. Ctesias, the king’s private physician (mentioned p. 38 12), gave 
it as 400,000. —21. ἄλλοι, besides. — 22. av, moreover. iii 

$12. 23. rod: with στρατεύματος. --- 24. ἄρχοντες... ἡγεμόνες : note 
καί before both of the last two titles, while the proper names holow have 
no connection. Both are common forms of expression in Greek: in 
English we generally use and only. before the last subst. in such a sevice 
Page 32.] 2. μάχης : after ὑστέρησε implying comparison (G 1190: 
H. 1749). --- ἡμέραις : for the case, see G. 1184 : H. 781. 
$13. 6. τῶν πολεμίων : a part. gen. limiting οἵ, ---- ταὐτά : distinguish 
from ταῦτα in 3 above. —The number of prepositional phrases Ἂς this 
short section is worthy of note. 
$14. 8. συντεταγμένῳ τῷ στρατεύματι : the subst. is a dat. of accom- 
paniment (G. 1189, 1190 ; H. 774), and the partic. expresses the attendant 
circumstance. This force of the partic. will be easily seen, if the idea of 
accompaniment is dropped and the gen. abs. is substituted, συννοξογμδον 
τοῦ στρατεύματος. For the order of march, see the Introd., § 352. — 10 
μέσον : cf. p. 6, 9, and the note.—11. τάφρος : the word in itself signifies 
an artificial trench, but this idea is emphasized by ὀρυκτή. --- 12. heat: 
In appos. to τάφρος, where we should expect rather ὀργυιῶν (G. 1085 δ᾽; 
129 αὐ. Cf. ποδῶν in 21 below, and the use of the adj. in 16. Ti 
$15. 13. ἐπί, to the extent of.—14. τοῦ τείχους : cf. p. 64, 20, and 
the note. The trench was dug northward, obliquely (not at a right gle, 
like the wall) to the Euphrates, whi “enigey 
8, Which here runs about S. E. —15. διώ- 


ANABASIS I. 7. 15-20. 193 


Page 32.] puxes: 86. elol. — ῥέουσαι, πλεῖ : for the forms, see G. 495, 1; 
H. 411. —20. ποταμοῦ, τάφρου : the genitives follow the adv. of place. 
Why the trench had not been completed to the river is not stated. 
The most reasonable of the many conjectures that have been made is 
that Cyrus had surprised the king by his rapid marching, and that the 
latter in consequence had abandoned the work in alarm when it was 
almost completed. The genuineness of the bracketed words is suspected. 

$16. 23. προσελαύνοντα : partic. in indir. disc. —24. παρῆλθε καὶ 
ἐγένοντο : the point of view shifts. Cyrus is prominent in the writer’s 
mind when he says παρῆλθε (sing.), the whole army when he says ἐγένοντο. 

$17. 25. pév: cf. τῇ δὲ τρίτῃ, p. 33, 12. —26. ὑποχωρούντων : in em- 
phatic position, opp. to ἐμαχέσατο. --- 27. ἦσαν : plur., although the subj. 
is in the neut. plur. This occurs frequently in Xenophon (G. 899, 2; H. 
604d). 

Page 33.] §18. 2. δαρεικούς : the daric was a gold coin and would 
now be worth about $5.40 or £1.2.0 in gold. See the Dict. Cyrus here 
pays a bet of 10 talents (60,000 drachmas) with 3000 darics, which shows 
that the daric was worth 20 drachmas, or $3.60 in silver. The difference 
in these two results ($5.40 and $3.60) comes from the change in the 
proportional values of gold and silver. In antiquity the proportion was 
about 10:1; now, by the United States law, it is about 16:1, but 
actually very much higher. See the Dict., s.v. μνᾶ. As the daric was a 
gold coin, of course its gold value is the correct one. —ot... εἶπεν : a 
causal sentence. Cf. p. 18, 16, and the note.—3. aa ἐκείνης : i.e. before 
that (day). —4. ἡμερῶν : for the case, see G. 1136; H. 759. Cf. ἡμέρᾳ in 
3 above (G. 1192; H. 782), and σταθμόν, p. 32, 7 (G. 1062; H. 720). — 
ὃ. Οὐκ. .. μαχεῖται, he will not fight then at all.— εἰ ob: rather than εἰ μὴ 
μαχεῖται (G. 1383 ; H. 1021), because Cyrus is consciously repeating the 
statement of Silanus. For εἰ μαχεῖται, see G. 1405; H. 899. —6. ἀληθεύ- 
ays, shall prove to be speaking the truth. The fut. apod. is in δώσειν 
understood with ὑπισχνοῦμαι. --- ὃ. παρῆλθον : with plup. force. Cf. p. 1, 
12, and the note. 

§19. 9. ἐκώλνε: attempted action. —10. ἔδοξε : personal const. (G. 
1522, 2; H. 944a).—11. ἀπεγνωκέναι τοῦ μάχεσθαι, to have abandoned 
the idea of fighting. For the gen. of the inf., see G. 1547; H. 959. -- τῇ 
ὑστεραίᾳ : sc. ἡμέρᾳ. ---12. ἠμελημέλως : adv. formed from perf. pass. 
participle. ᾿ . 

§ 20. 13. καθήμενος, ἔχων : partics. of manner. —14, αὐτῷ : dat. of 
disadvantage, but στρατιώταις, in the next line, dat. of advantage. For 
the loose discipline here manifest, see the Introd., § 35}, 


ANABASIS I. 8. 1-6, 


CHAPTER VIII. 


Page 33.] §1. For the Battle at Cunaxa, described in this and tl 
ny chapters, see the Introd., §§ 44, 45. —17. ἦν : the subj. is indefinite 
(G. 897, $; H. 602 d).—@yopav πλήθουσαν : four parts of the da ων 
distinguished, πρῴ (p. 53, 7), ἀγορὰ πλήθουσα, μέσον matt (p. 34 2 5 ‘ : 
δείλη (p. 34, 22). See the Dict. —18. σταθμός : here See 
nach : te. Cyrus. For ἔμελλε καταλύειν, expressing past intention ai G 
1254; H. 84θα. -- καταλύειν, to halt, for breakfast. See the aaa’ 
§ 401. ini προφαίνεται +++ Κράτος, comes in sight, ridi ng at full dale 
— ἱδροῦντι τῴ ἵππῳ, with his horse in a sweat. For the dat., ef. si 
ταγμένῳ Τῷ στῤῥατεύματι, p. 82, 8, and the note. The form ᾿ιδ cra is 
exceptional for ἱδρῶντι (G. 497). sain 

iy 2. 24. αὐτίκα : in emphatic position. Construe with ἐπιπεσεῖσθαι. ---- 
25. καὶ πάντες δέ, and all alike, i.e. Persians as well as Greeks. Cf. ᾿ 1 
7, and the note.—e¢dlew: cf. p. 31, 6.— ἐπυπεσάσθαι : bs the kine, 
Note the tense of the inf., which is in indir. discourse. ΠΝ i 

§ 3. Note in the first two lines the repeated use of the art. like a poss 
pron. — 27. τὰ παλτά : each Persian horseman carried two javelins int 
battle. See the Introd., § 142, and cf. p. 26, 2. | mi 
Wino iF τω sha .» καθίσταντο : see the Introd., § 351, and 

ua alg Tov κέρατος : the right (sc. μέρη, parts) of the wing. 
κέρας here refers to the whole Greek force (τὸ Ἑλληνικόν), which was the 
right wing of the entire force of Cyrus, as opposed to the left wing a Aa 
most of the barbarians stood (δ 5). This distinction is plain in ἐν τῷ bet 5 
and ἐν τῷ εὐωνύμῳ (10 and 11). But τὸ εὐώνυμον κέρας τοῦ esi in 7 
means the left wing of this same Greek division (or xépas). —6. ἐχό 
86. Κλεάρχου, and see G. 1246; 1099 ; H. 816, 9: 73 Cf. ) 35 : cs 
also the genitives are to be understood. i act 
$5. 8. | τοῦ βαρβαρικοῦ : part. gen. with ἱππεῖς. Note τὸ ἄλλο BapBa- 
ρικόν in 12. —9. els: cf. p. 5, δ, and the note. —10. ἔστησαν, took their 
position (second aor.). The Paphlagonian cavalry and Gisek alg 
were stationed here to support the hoplites under Clearchus and fallow 
up the advantage in case these slower troops should put the enemy to rout 
νὴ ms 12. Κῦρος ae ἑξακόσιοι : 86. ἔστησαν. ---18, ὅσον, about. See the 
es on p. 5, cil iil μὲν αὐτοὶ "" . Κύρου, (the men) themselves on 

r part (μέν) with breastplates, thigh-pieces, and helmets, —all except 
Cyrus. | The exception extends only to κράνεσι, AS appears from the fol- 
remind mepos δὲ κτλ. of δ᾽ ἵπποι (in 17) is the antithesis to θώραξι μὲν 
sic {|| ψιλὴν +++ κεφαλήν, with his head unprotected (G. 919; H. 
τ, ΠΝ" Plutarch, Artaz. 11) says that Cyrus wore a tiara in 


ANABASIS I. 8. 7-13. 195 


Page 34.] §7. 19. paxalpas: what was the difference between the 
μάχαιρα and the ξίφος ὃ 

58, Cf. the beginning of this section with that of § 1.—22. qvika... 
ἐγίγνετο, but when it began to be (lit. was becoming) afternoon. See the 
note on ἀγορὰν πλήθουσαν, p. 33,17. The battle was fought between this 
time and dark. — ἐφάνη, there was seen. —23. χρόνῳ... .. πολύ, some time 
(for the dat., ef. p. 32, 2) later (the cloud of dust appeared) just like a sort 
of blackness in the plain for a great distance (ἐπὶ πολύ). --- 2δ. χαλκός τις 
ἤστραπτε, here and there (ris) their bronze armor began to flash. —m 

Page 35.] $9. 2. ἐχόμενοι : cf. p. 34, 6, and the note. 45. κατὰ 
ἔθνη, nation by nation. —6. ἕκαστον τὸ ἔθνος : in app. with οὗτοι, but 
attracting ἐπορεύετο into agreement with it, — but these were all proceeding 
(normally ἐπορεύοντο) in national divisions, each nation in the form of a 
solid square. 

810, 7. ἅρματα: sc. ἣν or ἦσαν (fpr the number cf. εἶχον in 8 and 
ἐντυγχάνοιεν in 10). —8. καλούμενα : cf. καλουμένη, Ῥ. 8, 3, and the note. 
- 10. ὡς διακόπτειν, cf. ὡς μὴ ἅπτεσθαι, p. 24, 21, and the note. --σᾷὀὅτῳ : 
i.e. ᾧτινι (G. 425; H. 280). --- ἐντυγχάνοιεν : opt. by quot. (G. 1502 ; 
H. 937) after the idea of purpose in ὡς διακόπτειν (cf. G. 1503), the original 
thought being ὅτῳ ἂν évrvyxdvwor (ἃ. 1494 ; H. 916). —11. ἡ δὲ γνώμη 
ἦν ὡς... ἐλῶντα καὶ διακόψοντα, they were intended to drive, etc. (for 
‘the form ἐλῶν see édavvw). The partics. are in the nom., as if γνώμην 
εἶχεν (sc. τὰ ἅρματα) had preceded ; and ws is used (G. 1574; H. 978) as 
if the chariots themselves had the intention. 

811, 12. 6 μέντοι, what, however, repeated in τοῦτο in 14 (G. 1030). — 
13. καλέσας... Ἕλλησι: we might have had (cf. p. 33, 1, 2) καλέσας τοὺς 
Ἕλληνας παρεκελεύετο αὐτοῖς, but in Greek the obj. is regularly expressed 
but once. —14. ἐψεύσθη τοῦτο, in this (acc. of specification) he was mis- 
taken.—15. κραυγῇ : dat. of manner. Cf. σιγῇ, ἡσυχῇ, following.—oryq ὡς 
ἀνυστόν, with as little noise as possible, in full ὡς ἀνυστὸν ἣν προσιέναι σιγῇ. 
Cf. ἣ δυνατὸν μάλιστα, p. 15, 10, and the note.— ἐν ἴσῳ : cf. ὁμαλῶς, p. 36, 2. 

5 12, 17. αὐτός : i.e. attended only by Pigres and the few others men- 
tioned. —19. ἄγειν : obj. inf. not in indir. discourse, following ἐβόα as a 
verb of commanding (G. 1519 ; H. 948). —20. Ore. . εἴη : opt. in a causal 
sent. (G. 1506 ; H. 925b). — κἂν νικῶμεν : the apod. πεποίηται, although 
a pf. in form, still refers vividly to the future (G. 1264 ; H. 848), our 

whole work is (will have been) done. —21. ἡμῖν : dat. of agent (G. 1238, 
1; H. 769). 

$13. 21. ὁρῶν. .. τὸ μέσον στῖφος, although he saw the compact body 
ut the centre, i.e. the 6000 cavalry mentioned p. 31, 21 ff.—22. ἀκούων is also 


concessive (G. 1563, 6; H. 969¢e). — Κύρου : gen. of source (G, 1103; 


το τ «ὦ Ὡς τῳ — pe Re 


ANABASIS I. 8. 13-17. 


Page 35.] H.742c). The clause ἔξω ὄντα (partic. in indir, discourse) 
. » » βασιλέα constitutes the obj. acc. — rod εὐωνύμου : with ἔξω, an ady. of 
place. — 23. τοσοῦτον, . . ἔξω mv: parenthetic. — πλήθει, in numbers. 
For the case οὐ yéve, p. 26, 16. — 25. GAX' ὅμως, bul still, resuming the 
statement after the parenthesis, with emphatic repetition of ὁ Κλέαρχος. 
— 27. μὴ κυκλωθείη ἑκατέρωθεν, that he might be turned on both flanks. 
Why opt. ?— 28. én aire... ἔχοι : he said ἐμοὶ μέλει (G. 1161; H. 764, 2, 
the clause that follows being the obj. gen.) ὅπως καλῶς ἔχῃ (G. 1374 ci. 
885). — If Clearchus had been less cautious and obeyed the wise orders 
of Cyrus, the result of the battle might have been very different. 
(Artaz. 8) says of Clearchus, ὁ δ᾽ αὐτῷ μέλειν εἰπὼν ὅπως ἕ 
πᾶν διέφθειρεν. This is Grote’s view. 


Plutarch 
fer κάλλιστα, τὸ 


Page 86. §14. 1. τὸ βαρβαρικὸν στράτευμα : the king's army. —3. 
συνετάττετο... προσιόντων, wis Jorming its line Jrom those 
up. —4, ob πάνυ πρός, not very near, at some distance from. - πρὸς αὐτῴ 
τῷ στρατεύματι : near the army itself, αὐτῷ strengthening the ide 
nearness. —. κατεθεᾶτο, took a survey. Distinguish ὁράω, see in general ; 
βλέπω, turn the eyes, look : θεάομαι, gaze at, — ἑκατέρωσε : with ἀποβλέπων. 

$15. 7. Ἐξενοφῶν : the first mention of Xenophon in the Anabasis, — 
τ ὡς συναντῆσαι : of. p. 35, 10, and the note. — 8, 
whether (ἃ. 1605 ; H. 1016) he had any commands 


still coming 


a of 


εἴ τι παραγγέλλοι, 
(opt. in an indir. quest. ). 


— ἐπιστήσας, pulling up (sc. τὸν rmov). —9. τὰ ἱερά : what was the 


difference*between τὰ ἱερά and τὰ σφάγια ὃ 
tioned, see the Introd., § 43 2, 

$16. 10. λέγων, while saying (G. 1563, 1; H. 96 
partic. is not in indir. discourse (ἃ. 1582 ; ef. 1583).—-is... εἴη, what the 
noise was (opt. in indir, quest.). Here ris, but in 14 8 τι (G. 1012 ; 
1013 ; H. 700). —12. 6 Κλέαρχος : Clearchus had ridden up in the mean 
time. Some Mss. have Ξενοφῶν. ---- σύνθημα : see the Introd., ὃ 432, — 
παρέρχεται : what might the mood have been? Cf. παραγγέλλει and εἴη 
in the next two lines. — δεύτερον : the watch-word was passing back, up 
the ranks. — 13. καὶ ὅς, and he, i.e. ( yrus (G. 1023,2; H. 655 a). —tls 
παραγγέλλει : 1.6. who was giving it out, without his approval. 

Bar Τῷ “AANA... ἔστω, well, I accept it (the password) ; 80 let it be. 
ἀλλά marks the opposition between his present concession and previous 
Surprise. —18. καὶ οὐκέτι... ἀλλήλων: i.e. the two lines were now less 
than three or four stades (less than half a mile) apart. —Seaxérnv τὼ 
φάλαγγε : note the dual, which is uncommon in A ttic prose, and the fem. 
form τώ (G. 388 ; H. 272 @).—19. ἐπαιάνιζον, began to sing the paean, as 
an omen of victory. See the Introd., § 432, —20. ἀντίοι : for the case; 
see G. 927 ; H. 940. τ- πολεμίοις : see G. 1174 ἡ ἢ 7726. 


For the sacrifice here men- 


8).—11. ἰόντος : the 


ANABASIS I. 8. 18-22. 197 


Page 36.] 818, 20. ὡς δὲ... φάλαγγος, when, as they ἐν ἐρετῶν 
proceeded, a part (sc. μέρος with τι) of the phalane surged gt ἣν μὴ ἮΝ 
the rest), lit. billowed out, etc. — 22. δρόμῳ θεῖν, to go ΗΝ et Bashi 
quick (dat. of manner). —28. οἷον... ἐλελίζουσι, μ μα Lappe a 
cry to Enyalius (Ares). For the battle-cry ane the i ὁ tp 

k, see the Introd., § 432. — καὶ πάντες δέ : cf. p. 33, 25, an . 
oa φόβον. .. ἵπποις, thereby frightening (lit. causing fright among) the 
pe i Bar gabe so lit. before an arrow reached δον, 
ἐς ΘΗ the a were within iain Ν them. Cf. πρὶν εἶναι, Ὁ. 20, 17. 

27 ὰ κρά : cf. ἀνὰ κράτος, p. 33, 20. 
pes ue yr the phrase involves bp idea of con- 
fusion and disorder. Cf. p. 36, 22. See the Introd., § 43 ἢ Εἰ μι 

$20. 2. τὰ δ᾽ ἅρματα : i.e. of the enemy. We a = ceri 
δ᾽ ἁρμάτων, but the subst. takes the case οἵ ὌΝ bi 5 - " S85 
denoting its parts (G. 914; H. 624d).—4. ἡνιόχων : Kay ἌΝ 
15, 4, and the note. — ἐπεὶ προΐδοιεν, δον τοῖς» Ὁ ᾿ Ai riba 
they saw them coming on. Why τ προΐδοιεν ” t ΠΕ Ἶ Hs haste 
ὅστις : we should expect jv δέ τις ὅς. Cf. P. 23, ἢ ge oe ei 
κατελήφθη ἐκπλαγείς, was caught of i ΓΝ νὰ μὰ oe ne tenes 

“hariot) in his consternation. —6. nal... ᾿ ye 
recede said that not ahs shigiiigd i ὑγία εέξων Ae 

17, expression corresponding to καὶ... δέ, «he 
oa Hemeigartral ani tial Cf. p.. 11, 11, and the note. So just 

2fore οὐ ἡδέ. —9. Tis, a Single man. uit : 
a γ᾿ 5 a iy he saw. i nee ϑιόπεντοι oe ἐν 
indirect discourse (G. 1589). --- τὸ veal αὑτούς : 86. τη ραν ri ee ; 
although he was pleased. —12. οὐδ᾽ ὥς, not even then ἡ us, yey 
circumstances). —13. συνεσπειραμένην : cf. ἐκκεκαλυμμ igi peli μουν 
the note. —15. ποιήσει, would do. On what pepsi spy ep ὥρη 
been ποιήσοι ὃ --- ἤδει αὐτὸν ὅτι ἔχοι : lit. re him tha sere ei ἃ sate 

that he had. . Cf. p. 2, 8, and the note. H The ΕΝ any ot ee 
been expressed by ἤδει αὐτὸν guy (G. 1588; H. 982), bu g 

δὼ" ‘ ποῦ >. F nh 

" a sare ai yh: = they always command their own centre. 
es parciigg sha repeats the thought of μέσον ἔχοντες τὸ μή μων: = 
itself further defined by ἣν ἢ... ἑκατέρωθεν, thus, Pig vig nape! 
troops on either side of them. The force of ovrw oo 8 me ᾿ me pi 
but also to av αἰσθάνεσθαι: note καὶ - + καί. τ άνει: in Ν μὲ ρώμην 
course, apod. to the general supposition ἣν ἢ. on 19. ane os 
the position of the pron. (G. 977,1; H. 673 b).—e χρῇ 


198 ANABASIS I, 8. 22-28. 


Page 37.] ἂν αἰσθάνεσθαι : in the dir. form, εἴ τι χρήζοιμεν, ἡμίσει ἂν 
χρόνῳ αἰσθάνοιτο κτλ. See G. 1500; 1494; H. 964 a; 946. — 20. ἡμίσει 
Χρόνῳ : more commonly ἐν ἡμίσει χρόνῳ (G. 1194; H. 782 a). 
~~ $23. 21. δὴ τότε... ὅμως, the king accordingly (δή) on this occasion 
held (G. 1563, 6; H. 969e) the centre, but still, etc. —24. αὐτοῦ : with 
ἔμπροσθεν. --- éréxapmrrev .. . κύκλωσιν, wheeled round (lit. against), as if 
to encircle (the enemy). By this movement the king’s troops, who had 
been at right angles to the river, began to take a position in which they 
would have faced it. 

$24, 26. μὴ... κατακόψῃ : subjy. in clause with μή (G. 1378 ; H. 887) 
after a secondary tense (ἐλαύνει, G. 1268 ; H. 828). —27. ἐλαύνει ἀντίος, 
charged to meet (him). Note the adv. force of the pred. adj. (G. 926; 
H. 619). 

Page 38.] 2. τοὺς ἑξακισχιλίους : identical with τοὺς πρὸ βασιλέως 
τεταγμένους, but expressed to emphasize the contrast between the two 
forces, 600 on one side, 6,000 on the other. —3. αὐτὸς τῇ ἑαντοῦ χειρί, 
himself with his own hand (G. 997 ; H. 688). 

$25. 5. εἰς τὸ διώκειν, in pursuit. For the use of the inf., cf. dua τὸ 
εἶναι, p. 30, 17. —6. πλήν : here a conj. Cf. its use as a prep., p. 34, 14. 
—7. σχεδὸν... καλούμενοι, chiefly those called his table-com panions. 

$26. 8. τὸ ἀμφ᾽ ἐκεῖνον στῖφος : the king’s ὁμοτράπεζοι probably, who, 
now that the 6000 had fled, rallied about him in a compact body (στῖφος) 
for his protection. —9. ἠνέσχετο : double augment (ἃ. 544; H. 361 a).— 
12. καὶ ἰᾶσθαι... φησι, and he says that he himself healed (G. 1285 ; 
H. 855 α) the wound. The pres. inf. can never thus be used for the impf., 
unless the context makes it certain that it represents an impf. and not a 
pres. See the examples in Moods and Tenses, § 119. Here the well- 
known time of the event makes the meaning plain. For καὶ ἰᾶσθαι κτλ. 
we should expect a rel. sent., and it has been con jectured that Xenophon 
wrote, ὃς καὶ ἰᾶσθαι xrr., who says also, etc. 

$27. 13. αὐτόν : i.e. Cyrus. — ὑπὸ τὸν ὀφθαλμόν, under the eye (imply- 
ing motion towards the eye). —14. μαχόμενοι... ἑκατέρου : the const. 
begun by these subjs. is not finished (except so far as it is partially 
resumed in Κῦρος δέ), but passes suddenly into the indir. quest., ὁπόσοι 

. - ἀπέθνῃσκον. ---ἸΘ. ἀπέθνῃσκον : impf., since the reference is to differ- 
ent persons killed at different times, but in 17 the aor. ἀπέθανε, referring 
to the death of Cyrus alone. — Κτησίας λέγει : we should say, this I leave 
for Ctesias to tell. —18. ἔκειντο, lay dead, iacebant. 

$28. 20. πεπτωκότα : quoted after ede. — 21. περιπεσεῖν αὐτῴ, to 


have thrown his arms about him. For the case of αὐτῷ, see G. 1179; 
H. 775. 


ANABASIS 1. 8. 29aNv9.7 6Όῦ 199 


Page 38.}] 8 29. 21. καὶ... Κύρῳ : note that the onder οὲ imag words 
is the same in Greek and English. — 22. ἐπισφάξαι αὐτὸν Κύρῳ, to 
slay him (Artapates) over Cyrus, i.e. as a victim. For the case of wie 
cf. αὐτῷ in 21. —23. ἑαυτὸν ἐπισφάξασθαι : strongly reflex., slew himse if 
with his own hand, ἑαυτόν being added to the verb already in the mid. 


Note also the’voice of σπασάμενον. 


CHAPTER IX. 


Page 39.] 81. 1. μὲν οὖν, so then. — οὕτως : what would i meant 
- ἀνὴρ av, a man who was, etc- —2. Περσῶν .. . γενομένων : the Persians 
meant are those of the royal line born (γενομένων) after the time of ili 
the Great. —3. παρά : with the gen. of the agent in place of ὑπό (ἃ. 1297; 
H. 818 a). —4. τῶν δοκούντων .. . γενέσθαι, those who are ΡΩΝ to have 
known Cyrus intimately. —5. γενέσθαι : with δοκούντων. Cf. ἀπεγνωκέναι, 
p. 33, 11. ut ᾿ ; 

$2. 6. πρῶτον μέν : correl. to ἐπεὶ δέ in 21, which marks t e sii 
period in his life, and to ἐπεὶ δέ, p. 40, 1, which marks the third. —é€tt 

is wv, while still a boy. 
ee 10. καταμάθοι av: potential opt. Cf. p. 28, 16. i 1, αἰσχρὸν 
...tont: for the const., cf. οὐκ ἣν λαβεῖν, p. 22, 13. — οὐδὲν οὔτε. .. οὔτε: 
ν᾿ 
“a i 12. ciel νον καὶ ἀκούουσι, 866 some (sc. τινάς) honored and tig 
of them.—14. εὐθὺς παῖδες ὄντες, from earliest boyhood : see G. 1572 ; 
H. 976. — μανθάνουσιν ἄρχειν, learn how to rule (G. 1591, 2; H. 986). 

§5. 15. αἰδημονέστατος : put first for emphasis, displacing μέν ; other- 
wise the order would be πρῶτον μὲν αἰδημονέστατος. —16. ἐδόκει εἶναι, had 
the reputation of being. — τοῖς te. . « πείθεσθαι, and of being more obedient 
to his elders than (were) even those inferior to himself in aii φιλιτ- 
πότατος with ἐδόκει εἶναι, but χρῆσθαι with ἐδόκει alone. — 19. ἔκρινον : 
they (i.e. men in general) judged him, etc. —épyev: with the two super- 
latives in 20 and 21 (G. 1142; H. .754a). ἱ 

8.6. 21. ἡλικίᾳ : dat. of indir. obj. (G. 1159; H. 764, 2). -- 33, ai 
epicene (G. 158 ; H. 127). --- ἐπιφερομένην, that rushed upon him. ξν 25. τὰ 
μέν : cognate acc., suffered somewhat, received wounds. Oftena amavis 
word takes the place of the article in one part of the correlation ὁ μὲν 
... 6 δέ, as here τέλος δέ (G. 1060, H. 719). —27. πολλοῖς μακαριστόν : 
cf. rots οἴκοι ζηλωτόν, p. 30, 12. 

Page 40.] §7. 1. κατεπέμφθη : why κατά ὃ --- σατράπης, as —— 
For the facts here mentioned, see the Introd., § 17. —3. στρατηγὸς δὲ 
καί: cf. with reference to position, καὶ στρατηγὸν δέ, p. 1, 7. — ols: dat. 
of indir. obj. after καθήκει. -- 4, πρῶτον μέν : weakly correlated by δέ in 18, 


200 ANABASIS I. 9. 7-13. 


Page 40.) 5. ἐπέδειξεν αὐτὸν ὅτι κτλ. : cf. τῶν βαρβάρων, p. 2, 8, and the 
note. The dir. form of the sent. quoted after πε ὅτι wd ) 
πλείστου ποιοῦμαι, ἐάν τῳ σπείσωμαι καὶ... συνθῶμαι καὶ ὑπόσ j hi 
μηδαμὼς ψεύδεσθαι. What use of the subj. is this Sill nha ως: 
form was possible? See G. 416,1: H. 277. Ἶ; ΠῚ 


$8. 7. kal γάρ, and (proof is at hand) for.—10. μηδὲν ἂν παθεῖν: i 
the dir. form οὐδὲν ἂν πάθοιμι. For the change of neg see G 148 ᾽ 
1496; Η. 1024. i erin 

$9. 12. ἑκοῦσαι: cf. p. 3, 20, and the note.— 13. Mr σίων: Ww 
should expect Μιλήτου. See the Introd., § 17. --- οὗτοι δὲ Γ αὐ ό : 4 
proof, drawn from an enemy, that Cyrus was to be bail iti μὲ ᾿ 
γοντας : i.e. refugees.— 14. προέσθαι : see προίημι. iii er 

$10. 14. καὶ yap... ἔλεγεν, for he both (καὶ... καί in correlation) 
Showed repeatedly by what he did, and declared repeatedly, or, more 
freely, showed repeatedly both by word and deed. — 15. ζω πράξε ἐμ 
in dir. form οὐκ ἄν ποτε προοίμην, ἐπεὶ... ἐγενόμην, οὐδ᾽ εἰ. pel Ἴ 
πράξειαν (6. 1499; 1500 ; H. 938 ὁ). ---- προοῖτο : for the orm wee G 810 2: 
H. 476. — 16. ἅπαξ, once for all; but ποτέ, once on a bhieg (p. 39 93), 
some time, ever. -- οὐδ᾽ εἰ... γένοιντο, not even if they should onli still 
Sewer, i.e. should be cut down in numbers by their misfortunes —17 
κάκιον πράξειαν (G. 1075 ; H. 810). Lahti 
val νὴ im age δ᾽ ἦν καὶ πειρώμενος, but it was obvious also that he 
- Cf. δῆλος ἣν ἀνιώμενος, p. 7, 18, and the note. —el ποιήσειεν : 
prot. to πειρώμενος, past general supposition. For the two accs uhter 
ποιήσειεν, see G. 1073; H. 725a. For the parallel const in 21 nee 
G. 1074; H. 712, and ef. 17. — 20. ἐξέφερον, reported ai uP li " 
quoted after εὐχὴν ἐξέφερον, which involves the ἴδε of bait They said, 
εὔχεται (i.e. he sometimes prays) ζῆν ἔστ᾽ av νικᾷ (G. 1465 - 1434. Η ‘aan 
the fut. apod. to ἔστ᾽ ἂν νικᾷ is ζῆν. For the change by ia of ite ay 
νικᾷ to the opt., see G. 1497, 2; H. 932, 2, —21, νικῴη ἀλεξό | 
should outdo in returning like for like. Ui nyt 
di 22. καὶ γὰρ οὖν : «ἡ 7. --- πλεῖστοι δή : similar to μέγιστος δή 
means the very greatest number. The phrase évi ye ἀνδρί (ἀνδρί in ap Mi 
αὐτῷ) logically modifies the superlative, i.e. the number oo tii ἀν 
greatest in view, at least (γέ), of the fact that a single man (ἐνὲ ἀνδρί) is 
ἣν question, — 23. τῶν ἐφ᾽ ἡμῶν, of the men of our time, part. gen with 
τιμία affected also by the sup. πλεῖστοι, as if it had been said Ἢ was 
a vd π᾿ Υ͂ all the men of our day. — 24. προέσθαι, intrust. Cf. the 
$13, 27. rv etv, it was possible to see, you might see. 


ANABASIS I. 9. 13-19. 201 


Page 41.] 1. ποδῶν, χειρῶν, ὀφθαλμῶν : why gen.?—3. μηδὲν ἀδι- 
κοῦντι, if in no respect (cognate acc.) a wrong-doer (G. 1563, 5; H, 969-¢). 
__4. & τι προχωροίη, whatever it was to his advantage (G. 1431, 2; H. 
914 B, 2) to have (sc. ἔχειν). For ἤθελεν (which might have been ἐθέλοι), 
see G. 1432; H. 918 ; 894c. 

$14. 5. ὡμολόγητο, he had been (and so was) acknowledged, pers. const. 
—6. ἦν αὐτῷ πόλεμος : principal sent. where we should expect a depend- 
ent one, such as ὄντος ποτὲ αὐτῷ πολέμου ; for πρῶτον μέν, notwithstanding 
its position, goes with ἄρχοντας ἐποίει and is correlated by ἔπειτα δέ in 10. 
- 8, καὶ αὐτός, even in person. —éépa: for the mood, cf. ἤθελεν in 4 and 
the note. — ἐθέλοντας : partic. in indir. discourse. Cf. p. 37, 10. —9. 4s 
κατεστρέφετο χώρας : attraction and assimilation. Cf. p. 30, 5. 

$15. 11. dere... εἶναι, so that (in his dominions) the good appeared 
(G. 1449 ; 1450; H. 953) most prosperous, and the bad were deemed fit to 
be their slaves. φαίνεσθαι would regularly either stand within the clause 
with μέν or else belong to both subjects. — 14. οἴοιτο : for the mood cf. 
προχωροίη in 4. --- αἰσθήσεσθαι : quoted. Note the turn. 

816, 15. γὲ μὴν, a case in the general testimony to the high character 
of Cyrus that could not be controverted. — els δικαιοσύνην : with ἐπιδεί- 
κνυσθαι, to distinguish himself in uprightness. —e γένοιτο, ἐποιεῖτο : past 
general supposition. Cf. p. 22, 13. —16. βουλόμενος : quoted. Cf. pave- 
pds ἣν πειρώμενος, p. 40, 18. --- περὶ παντὸς ἐποιεῖτο : ο΄. περὶ πλείστου ποιοῖτο, 
p. 40, ὅ. --- τούτους : pl. because of the distributive force of rls to which 
it refers. —17. ἐκ τοῦ ἀδίκου, by injustice. 

$17. 19. δικαίως, with fidelity. —20. kal... ἐχρήσατο, and he secured 
the services of (G. 1260; H. 841) an army worthy of the name, justo 
exercitu. —22. ἔπλευσαν : coming as mercenaries across the sea. — 
ἔγνωσαν, judged. —23. τὸ κατὰ μῆνα κέρδος : the second subj. of εἶναι, 
being in the same const. as πειθαρχεῖν, which might have been τὸ πειθαρχεῖν 
(G. 1517; 1542; H. 949 ; 959). 

$18. 24. εἴ τίς γέ τι : one proclitic, three enclitics. The proclitic takes 
the accent of τὶς ; for the accent of the enclitics, see G. 145; H. 117. — 
τίς ye, any one (emphatically), no matter how insignificant. —t: with 
ὑπηρετήσειεν, did him (G. 1160; H. 764, 2) any good service. With ὑπηρε- 
τήσειεν cf. yévotro in 15 and also ὁρῴη in 27.—25. οὐδενὶ... προθυμίαν, he 
never let his (lit. any one’s, G. 1165; H. 767) zeal go unrewarded. —26. 
κράτιστοι δή: cf. πλεῖστοι δή, p. 40, 22, and the note. — ὑπηρέται, sup- 
porters. —Kipo... γενέσθαι, Cyrus was said to have had, lit. were said 


to have been (become) to Cyrus. 
8.19, 27. τινα ὄντα, that any one was, in indir. discourse. So the two 


participles that follow. 


202 ANABASIS I. 9. 19-23. 


Page 42.] 1. ἐκ τοῦ δικαίου, according to justice, or we may freely 
translate δεινὸν... δικαίου, a skilful and just manager. — ἧς ἄρχοι : part 
of the cond. rel. sent. (ef rivos ἄρχοι) and following the const. of ὁρῴη. 
See G. 1439; H. 919a.—2. χώρας : antec. attrac. Cf. p. 2, 14. — οὐδένα 
dv... ἀφείλετο, he would never deprive (ἃ. 1296 ; H. 830 α) him (lit. any 
one) of (his territory, sc. χώραν, and see G. 1069 ; H. 724). ἄν belongs 
equally to προσεδίδου (G. 1314). This iterative form with dy, expressing 
customary action, is a natural apod. to εἰ ὁρῴη. ----ὅ. ἐπέπατο : cf. the use 
of the perf. and plup. of κτάομαι. — Κῦρον : second obj. (G. 1069 ; H. 724). 
— οὐ φθονῶν ἐφαίνετο ἀλλὰ πειρώμενος, if was clear that he did not envy, 
etc., but strove, etc. 

§20. 8. φίλους : emphasized by its position and by the following 
particles ; obj. of θεραπεύειν. ---- ὅσους ποιήσαιτο : the apod. is θεραπεύειν 
(not γενέσθαι). This cond. rel. const. with the opt., as also its corre- 
sponding use in simple cond. clauses, occurs repeatedly in this chapter.— 
9. ὄντας : cf. ὄντα, p. 41, 27. — ἱκανοὺς συνεργοὺς 6 τι τυγχάνοι, competent 
co-workers in whatever he chanced, etc. —6 τι τυγχάνοι - --- εἴ τι τυγχάνοι. 
See note on ἧς ἄρχοι in 1. --- 10. βουλόμενος : cf. παρών, p. 1, 5, and the 
note. —11. κράτιστος δή : cf. p. 40, 22, and p. 41, 26. — γενέσθαι : in the 
dir. form ἐγένετο. --- θεραπεύειν : past frequentative after γενέσθαι. 

$21. 12. αὐτὸ τοῦτο οὗπερ ἕνεκα κτλ. » (he tried to secure for his friends) 
that very object for which he thought that he needed Sriends himself, — 
namely, that he might have co-workers, —he tried (1 say) also on his own 
part to be a most vigorous co-worker with his friends to secure that, etc. 
αὐτὸ τοῦτο would naturally have been the obj. of some verb like πράττειν 
after ἐπειρᾶτο, but for this simple αὐτὸ τοῦτο πράττειν the amplified expres- 
sion συνεργὸς... εἶναι... ἐπιθυμοῦντα was substituted, to express the 
same idea more fully. Cf. a... xdovow, p. 112, 17.—14. τούτου: 
emphatic. Otherwise it would be omitted (ἃ. 1026; H. 996). —érov: 
i.€. ovriwos: gen. not by assimilat ion, but independently (G. 1102 ; 
H. 742). —15. ἐπιθυμοῦντα : quoted after αἰσθάνοιτο. 

$22. 15. οἶμαι : parenthetic, like our 1 think. — εἷς γε ἀνήρ : cf. ἑνί γε 
ἀνδρί, p. 40, 22, and the note. — 10. διὰ πολλά, for many reasons. — 18. 
kal ὅτον : sc. πρός and the indef. antec. of ὅτου. --- 19. δεόμενον : how is 
the partic. to be construed ? 

$23. 20. ἢ... 4%, either... or. —de els πόλεμον : ws marks the pur- 
pose for which the objects were sent (eis πόλεμον) as subjectively conceived 
by the sender. Cf. ὡς eis μάχην, p 33, 23, and ws els κύκλωσιν, p. 37, 25. 
— 21. καί, moreover, with the following sent. as a whole. —29. λέγειν: 
an impf. inf. with ἔφασαν. Cf. Ρ. 38, 12, and the note. They said ἔλεγε, 
he used to 8αγ. --- σῶμα : ace. of specification referring to σώματι in 20. — 
οὐκ ἂν δύναιτο, νομίζοι : Cyrus said οὐκ ἂν δυναίμην... φίλους δὲ... νομίζω. 


ANABASIS I. 9. 24-31. 


Page 42.] §24. 24. καὶ τὸ piv... ποιοῦντα, and his surp 
(G. 1542 ; H. 959) his friends in conferring great (with emphasis) 


etc. τὰ μεγάλα is cognate acc. with εὖ ποιοῦντα, benefiting. 


Page 43.] 1. ἐπιμελείᾳ : dat. of respect.—T@ προθυμεῖσθαι : parallel 
in const. with τῇ ἐπιμελείᾳ (G. 1547; H. 959). —2. ταῦτα : resumes τὸ 


περιεῖναι κτλ. 


§ 25. 5. οὔπω δὴ πολλοῦ χρόνου, not for a long time (G. 1186 ; H. 759), 
lit. not as yet now within a long time. — ἔπιτύχοι : represents ἐπέτυχον in 
the words of Cyrus; but the next sent. gives the actual warts of say 
messenger, who in delivering the gift would say : Κῦρος: ew δὴ irooaies 
“""» ἐπέτυχεν . τοῦτον οὖν σοι ἔπεμψε tr. Cf. 9, τούτοις ἥσθη Κῦρος - βούλεται 
κτλ. --- ἢ. σὺν οἷς : cf. ἀνθ᾽. ὧν, p. 12, 17, and the note. 

§ 26. 9. ἐπιλέγειν, to say in addition (to presenting the gifts), to add. 
—10. τούτων γεύσασθαι, to take a taste of (note the force of the inceptive 
aor.) these. 

§ 27. 13. διαπέμπων : force of διά ?—14. ἑαυτῶν refers to φίλους, hut 
ἑαυτοῦ in 16 to Cyrus. —15. τοῦτον τὸν χιλόν : i.e. what Cyrus sent. — ὡς 
μὴ ἄγωσιν : subjv. of purpose after a secondary tense. ‘Note that a clause 
of negative purpose can be introduced either by the simple μή, or by μή 
preceded by ἕνα, ws, or ὅπως, the meaning in both cases being simply that 
not, lest. Cf. the examples under G. 1365; H. 881. See G. Moods and 

Tenses, §§ 307-310. 

§ 28, 17. πλεῖστοι, very many. — μέλλοιεν ὄψεσθαι : cf. p. 33, 18, and 
the note. —18. ὡς δηλοίη οὖς τιμᾷ, that he might show whom he honored 
(τιμᾷ is in the indic.). Instead of τιμᾷ we might have TIM? (Ὁ. 1605 end ; 
H. 937) ; ς΄ G. 14992. The purpose in Cyrus’s own mind was, ws δηλώ 
(subjv.) ods τιμῷ (indic.).—19. ἐξ ὧν ἀκούω, from what I hear. —20. 


Ἑλλήνων, βαρβάρων : with οὐδένα. : | 
§ 29. 21. τούτου, rode: difference of use ? — 22. δούλον ὄντος, though 
he was a slave. Cf. p. 80, 4 ff. — πλήν : conj. — 23. καὶ οὗτος jain ἑαυτῷ : 
cf. p. 27, 6ff. For οἱ, cf. p. 3, 2. —27. ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ: the king. — ἀγαπώ- 
μενοι : ἀγαπάω is properly to show regard by outward signs ᾿ φιλέω (20), 
on the other hand, is used of the love of friends; but the distinction is 
not always observed. Il 
Page 44.] 1. av τυγχάνειν : quoted after νομίζοντες. The prot. lies in 


ὄντες = εἰ εἴησαν. ' 
§ 30. 2. τὸ αὐτῷ γενόμενον, what happened to him, sc. ἐστί. τεκμήριον 
is pred. —4. rots... βεβαίους : the art. is expressed but once, because 
the writer is speaking of a single class of persons possessing all of the 
qualities mentioned, those who were faithful, well-disposed, and constant. 
§31. 7. τεταγμένος : what use of the partic. ? Explain also the use of 


πεπτωκότα in 9, 


ANABASIS IL. 10. 1-5. 


CHAPTER X. 


Page ive i 
" ge 441] 81. The narrative is resumed from Chap. viii. —11. ἀπὸ 
ν νων ν ἢ Deny ἢ « Ν Οὐ Δ M4 i Ἷ 
io a δεξιά : ἃ Persian custom. It is stated later (p. 84, 22) that 
dl vA | si - \ * . > a © 
ne i ar hand of Cyrus were exposed to view fixed on a stake 
ἀποτέμνεται, διώ : note | μὴν μων, 
asi μὴν ἣν ιώκων, εἰσπίπτει : note and explain the number and agree- 
! ne r ἊΝ - a 
7 eee a words. — 13. στρατόπεδον : see the plan, Introd. § 44. — 
a : atu Ariaeus and those with him, the troops of Ariaeus, like the 
rase οἱ ἀ ισ oR > μων vA 
AP DOM μρὶ ial p. 111,26. μετὰ ᾿Αριαίου implies participation 
σὺν αὐτῷ in 12 implies accompaniment.—15. ἔνϑεν ᾧ 
oR cavuaar wy enl.— 1d, evWev ὥρμηντο : i.e. on the 
sing attie, It will be remembered that the battle was foucht 
n ΜΝ aiternoon of the third day (p. 33, 12) after the midnight τος 
men od p. 29. 15. ; Ἵν. ἴω ; , 1} 
ey ‘ys p. 29, 15, and that this review was held on the nicht after the 
a ἰ, ay’s march from Pylae. Cf. the note on ἐντεῦθεν, p 29, 13 
), τέττ «+ « 6800 listance of fi i: i tne 
: rapes . ὁδοῦ, a distance of four parasangs, it was said: lit. there 
were said to be four parasangs of the road. | 
Led 
de 17. πολλά: pred., to a great amount. —18. τὴν Φωκαΐδα 
ναι, the Phocaean woman, the concubine of Cyrus, who was said (τὴν iy 
i : πὰ Ι : Ἴ ase ἠϊ 4 wl AG Ve? « ld -Ὦ»ν 
ey μένην ἥ. - + ἐλέγετο, G. 1560 ; H. 966) to be, etc. —19. λα βάνει : 
with βασιλεύς in 17. | Fant 
on MJ | 
ἃ. 20. ἣ νεωτέρα, the younger (of the two). —21. τῶν  λλήνων : sc 
τινάς (a rare Omissi -- i 5 as, 
με Zi a Omission). ἐν τοῖς σκευοφόροις, among the baggage (neut.). 
; - ὅπλα ἔχοντες, 0 be under arms, to be standing guard. Cf p. 24, 25 
and the ποίθ. --- καὶ ἀντιταχθέντες : sc. οὗτοι. -- 93. of δὲ καὶ αὐτῷ “but 
some also of them. oi δέ is cor , ' fae a 
oh of . ot δέ Is correl. to πολλοὺς név.— 25. ἐντὸς αὐτῶν. u ithin 
he oy a" a i 
με lines. —26. ἐγένοντο : pl. from the influence of ἄνθρωποι ᾿ 
a e + * ᾿ COC ; 
Wh g i § 4, For the account of the second battle, described in 
16 remainder of this chapter, see the Introd., § 452, —1 ἀλλήλων: wl 
ren. ?——2. of . νοίωννιννν aE λ Ι Ι ila 
g . οἱ pév: referring chiastically (see note on ἀναβαίνει ἱνέβ 
Ρ. 1, 8) to οἱ Ἕλληνες. ---- 3, ὡς πά i inki tae 
send : nl ws πᾶντας νικῶντες, thinking that they were 
μι torvous over all, but in the next line, ws... νικῶντες, thinking that now 
ore he victorious. — οἱ δ᾽ : sc. βασιλεὺς καὶ of σὺν αὐτῷ (see p 44, 12) 
" Σ ganctinr re shat] " i iy 
Msi am section consists of four clauses arranged chiastically 1) 
" PAT iy cr ahi » i. orice «)’ ΗΝ i ᾿ οἷν 
"ip 1g h hiefly to the Greeks, 2) chiefly to the King, 3) to the King 
and 4) again to the Greeks. —6. εἴη : why opt ? — Τισσαφέρνους hog 
tioned at the kine’s extre 35 3 Piel 
ra ΠΝ 8 extreme left (p. 35, 1), he had charged through the 
μερὶ i #reeks and joined the king in the camp of Cyrus in the rear 
20 ff.). —7. νικῴεν, of : 2 verb ch: on | 
~r hes anpi μὴ - wait : one verb changed to the opt. by quot., 
i ot. For this constr., see Moods and Tenses, § 670. — 10. πλη- 
σιαίτατος : comp. how formed ? (G, 352; H. 250).—11. πέμποιεν, to 
J). » ἴοιεν: 


ANABASIS I. το. 5-11. 205 


Page 45.] in the dir. questions, πέμπωμεν, ἴωμεν ; (G. 1358 ; 1490 ; H. 
32,2). Fore’... 7, introducing the double indir. question, see 


$66, 5; 952, 
G. 1606 ; H. 1017; and ef. p. 20, 18. 

$6. 13. δῆλος ἦν προσιών : cf. δῆλος ἦν ἀνιώμενος, Ῥ. 7, 18, and the 
note. — ὡς ἐδόκει ὄπισθεν, as it seemed, from the rear. —14. στραφέντες, 
counter-marching. See the Introd., ὃ 53, note. It will be remembered 
that the two forces were somewhat more than three miles apart (1 above). 
- παρεσκευάζοντο... . δεξόμενοι, got ready with a view to his advancing in 
this way (i.e. ὄπισθεν) and to their receiving (his attack), ws belongs not 
only to δεξόμενοι (partic. of purpose), but also to προσιόντος (partic. of 
cause). προσιόντος (sc. αὐτοῦ) is in the gen. abs. ; δεξόμενοι modifies of 
"EdAnves. See, further, Moods and Tenses, ὃ 876. —16. ἡ δὲ παρῆλθεν 


κτλ.. cf. p. 37,24. The aor. is ἃ plpf.in force. Cf. ". 1, 6. —17. ἀπῆγεν, 


marched back. 
$7 21. διήλασε. .. πελταστάς, charged along (παρά) the river into 


(κατά) the Greek peltasts and through them. —22. διελαύνων δέ, as he 
drove through them. For the force stationed at the extreme right of 
Cyrus when the battle began, see p. 34, 5 ff. —23. ἔπαιον : probably 
with their swords. — 24. αὐτούς : the cavalry of Tissaphernes. — 25. 
ἐλέγετο... . γενέσθαι, was said to have proved himself sagacious (showed 
himself a sensible man, it was said) by pursuing this course of tactics. 
On the light-armed troops of Cyrus, see the Introd., § 30. 

8.8, 25. οὖν, at any rate. Cf. p. 7,22. —26. ws... ἀπηλλάγη, after he 
had come off (note the force of the tense) with the worst of it, lit. having less. 

Page 46.] 2. τὸ τῶν Ἑλλήνων : cf. p. 11, 1. 

89, 4. τὸ εὐώνυμον : the historian has the position of the Greeks when 
the battle began in mind, their right then resting on the river. They had 
now faced about (στραφέντες, p. 45, 14). —5. μὴ προσάγοιεν, κατακόψειαν : 
why opt. ?—7. ἀναπτύσσειν τὸ κέρας : for the contemplated mancuvre, 
see the Introd. ὃ 344, and the notes. For the const. of ἐδόκει ἀναπτύσσειν, 
cf. p. 14, 2, and the note. 

$10. 9. ἐβουλεύοντο : see the Introd., ὃ 45%, and the note. --- καὶ δὴ 
... συνήει, the King in truth also, changing his line of battle to the same 
form (i.e. τοῖς "EXAnow), stationed tt opposite, just as at first he had met 
them for battle. See the Introd., § 45, end.— 12. ὄντας, παρατεταγμέ- 
yous: what use of the partics. ?—13. αὖθις : see the description of the 
first charge of the Greeks, p. 36, 19 ff. —14. τὸ πρόσθεν : adv. acc. Cf. 
τὸ πρῶτον in 11. 

$11. 15. ἐκ πλείονος, when at a greater distance from them.— 16. κώμης 
τινός : possibly Cunaxa (Kovvata), the village near which, as Plutarch 


says, the battle was fought. 


206 ANABASIS I. 10. 12-18. 


Page 461] §12. 17. ἀνεστράφησαν, rallied.— 18. πεζοί : pred. (with- 
out the art.), sc. ὄντες. The const. changes at τῶν δὲ ἱππέων, where we 
should expect ἱππεῖς δέ, ὧν ὁ λόφος κτλ. --- τῶν... ἐνεπλήσθη : the pass. of 
the const. explained in G. 1113; H. 743. ---- 10. τὸ ποιούμενον : τὸ γιγνό- 
μενον is more common in this sense. —ph γιγνώσκειν : sc. τοὺς “Ἑλληνας. 
—21. ἀετόν... dvarerapévov, a kind of (τινά) golden eagle, with wings 
extended, perched on a bar of wood (and raised) upon α lance. πέλτη, 
which commonly means a shield or target, is also used for δόρυ or λόγχη 
(see the Dict., 8,0. πέλτη, end) ; and ἐπὶ ξύλου may refer to a horizontal 
piece of wood on which the eagle was perched. So ἐπὶ ξύλου καθεύδεις, 
roost like a fowl, Aristoph. Nub. 1431. The ξύλον with the eagle was then 
raised on the point of a lance (émi wé\ry). In the Cyrop. vii. 1. 4, the 
Persian standard is called ἀετὸς χρυσοῦς ἐπὶ δόρατος μακροῦ ἀνατεταμένος. 
Curtius, iii. 3. 16, calls it awream aquilam pinnas extendenti similem. 

$13. 22. ἐνταῦθα : as we use here or there in the sense of hither or 
thither. —24. ἄλλοι ἄλλοθεν, some from one part (of the hill), others from 
another, or, as we should say, some in one direction, others in another. — 
τῶν ἱππέων : with ἐψιλοῦτο, was cleared of the horsemen. Cf. τῶν ἱππέων 
ἐνεπλήσθη in 18. --- 25. τέλος : cf. p. 39, 26. 

$14, 26. ὑπ᾽ αὐτόν, at the foot of it. 

Page 47. 1. τί ἐστιν: in what other mood might the verb have been? 
What case of the same sort is there in the next section ? 

$16. 4. σχεδὸν. .. ἦν, about this time. —5. θέμενοι τὰ ὅπλα : see the 
Dict., 8.0. τίθημι. ----Ἴ. φαίνοιτο, παρείη : opt. in a causal sent. Cf. p. 35, 
20, and the note. — 8. τεθνηκότα : c/. πεπτωκότα, Ὁ. 38, 20. --- διώκοντα 
οἴχεσθαι, had gone off in pursuit (G. 1587 ; H. 981).—9. καταληψόμενόν τι 
προεληλακέναι, had pushed on (give the direct form) to occupy some point. 

$17. 10. εἰ ἄγοιντο ἢ ἀπίοιεν : cf. εἰ πέμποιεν ἢ ἴοιεν, p. 45, 11, and the 
note. — 12. δορπηστόν, supper-time. In the primitive Homeric times 
there were two regular meals, ἄριστον, an early meal, breakfast, and δόρπον, 
a late meal, supper. Either could be called δεῖπνον, Which in Attic Greek 
meant the chief meal of the day, and as this came late in the afternoon, 
δεῖπνον took the place of the older name δόρπον. Cf. ἄδειπνοι in 20. The 
Attic ἄριστον was a midday meal, luncheon. j 

$18. 15. Sinpracpéva: supplementary partic. not in indir. discourse 
(ἃ. 1582; H. 981). Cf. p. 25, 10. --- εἴ mm... ἦν, whatever there was to 
eat or drink. The clause is the second obj. of καταλαμβάνουσι. --- 10, ἁμά- 
fas: obj. οὗ διήρπασαν in 20, but repeated in καὶ ταύτας, these also, in 19, 
after the intervening clauses. —perrds : pred. adj. 86. οὔσας (that had 
been) full (G. 1289; H. 856 a). —18. λάβοι : why opt.  --- 19. ἅμαξαι : 
pred. to ἦσαν, αὗται being the subj. — 20, τότε: cf. p. 44, 17. 


ANABASIS I. ro. 19 anp II. 1. 1-3. 207 


Page 47.] §19. 20. ἄδειπνοι ἦσαν" ἦσαν avapirro.: what is such 
an arrangement of the parts of a sent. called? Note also the case that 
follows, καταλῦσαι τὸ στράτευμα, βασιλεὺς ἐφάνη. Cf. concerning the fact 
stated in πρὶν γὰρ... ἐφάνη, p. 33, 18, and the note. — 24, μέν : correl. 
to δέ, p. 48, 7. 


BOOK SECOND. 


NEGOTIATIONS WITH THE Kine. —ConcLusion oF A TREATY. — BEGIN- 
NING OF THE Marcu Homewarp. — TREACHEROUS SEIZURE OF THE 
Five GENERALS. — THEIR CHARACTERS. 


CHAPTER I. 


Page 48.] 81. The first section of Book II., and the similar intro- 
ductions prefixed to most of the following books, are generally supposed 
to be the work of an editor who divided the Anabasis into books. — 1. 
ws... ἐστρατεύετο : the first of five indir. questions, subjs. of δεδήλωται. 
—ovv : to introduce the recapitulation. — Κύρῳ: dat. of advantage, not 
of the agent. —5. τὰ πάντα, at all points, altogether. —vwxav: their 
thought was, νικῶμεν, we have conquered (are victorious), a pres. with an 
approach to the signification of the pf. (Moods and Tenses, § 27). —6. 
λόγῳ : narrative, i.e. in Book I. 

$2. 6. ἅμα δὲ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ: cf. p. 29, 21. For δέ, see the note on μέν, 
p. 47, 24. The editor above-mentioned (see the note on ὃ 1) probably 
used the μέν in 1 above without noticing the preceding sent.—7. ὅτι 
πέμποι, φαίνοιτο : cf. the opt., p. 47,7, and the note. — 8. σημανοῦντα : 
what does the partic. express ?—11. εἰς τὸ πρόσθεν : cf. p. 45, 7.— 
ἕως συμμίξειαν : opt. in a dependent clause by quotation (G. 1502, 3; 
H. 937a): ef. G. 1467; H. 921, Rem. What other mood might we 
have had, and why? What would then be added to @ws? Cf. p. 4, 3. 

§3. 11. ἐν ὁρμῇ ὄντων, when they (sc. αὐτῶν and cf. p. 9, 1) were on 
the point of starting. —12. ἡλίῳ : the names of the heavenly bodies, like 
proper names, may omit the art. Cf. ἥλιος, p. 47, 4.—13. γεγονώς, 
descended from. — Aapaparov, Damaratus. See the Dict. —14. Trois: 
mentioned p. 21, 11. He had now gone over to Artaxerxes. For Tamos 
see p. 17, 8. —15. τέθνηκεν : this might be τεθνηκὼς εἴη ; cf. the following 
πεφευγὼς εἴη, λέγοι, φαίη. But τεθνήκεν contains the most important 
part of the message, and is kept in the original mood. —ora@po : cf. 
p. 44, 15. —16. ὅθεν : = ἐξ o}. —18. περιμενοῖεν . . . μέλλοιεν : in the dir. 
form περιμενῶ αὐτούς, εἰ μέλλουσιν ἥκειν. ---- τῇ ἄλλῃ, on the next day, — 


208 ANABASIS II. 1. 3-10. 


Page 48.) 19. ἀπιέναι pain: cf. λέγοι ὅτι κτλ. in 17. For the future 
force of ἀπιέναι, cf. ἄπιμεν, p. 14, 1. ----ἐπὶ "Iwvias, in the direction of Ionia. 
$4. 20. ἀκούσαντες οἱ στρατηγοὶ καὶ of ἄλλοι Ἕλληνες πυνθανόμενοι : 
chiastic. —22. ὥφελε. . . ζῆν, would that Cyrus were living (G. 1512; H. 
871a). How else might the thought have been expressed ? See G. 151 1; 
Η. 871. —23. νικῶμεν : cf. νικᾶν in 5 and the note, and also-p. 49, 3 and 
25, and p. 50,3 and 17.—25. εἰ ph ἤλθετε, ἐπορενόμεθα av: the prot. 
referring to the past, the apod. to the present (G. 1397 ; H. 895). 

Page 49.] 2. τῶν νικώντων : pred. gen. of possession. —3. τὸ ἄρχειν : 
subj. inf. with the art. ‘Cf. p. 42, 25. 

$5. 3. ταῦτα : why did the Greeks use the pl., and why do we trans- 
late by the sing.?—4. τοὺς ἀγγέλους : Procles and Glus. —5. καὶ γάρ : 
cf. p. 2, 17, and the note. 

$6. 7. οἱ μέν : asyndeton. ΟἿ p. 5, 13, and the note, and also p. 11, 2. 
—8. ὅπως : as, = ws. —9. ξύλοις, for fuel. Cf. ἄρχοντα, nik. ae, and 
the note. —10. μικρὸν... ov, going forward a short distance from the 
line, where, etc. —12. ἠνάγκαζον : had compelled. Cf. ἐποίησε, Ὁ. 1, 6, and 
the note, and ἐπολιόρκει, p. 17, 10. See also the Introd., § 282. — τοὺς 
αὐτομολοῦντας : cf. p. 45, 18. —15. φέρεσθαι ἔρημοι, left to be carried 
away: the Greeks used these for fuel. For the inf., see G. 1532 ; H. 951 : 
and Moods and Tenses, § 772c. —16. κρέα : with both partic. and verb. 
See the Introd., ὃ 261. 

$7. 18. καὶ ἤδη... ἀγοράν: cf p. 33, 17.—19. of μὲν ἄλλοι : in 
appos. with κήρυκες. We should expect εἷς δ᾽ αὐτῶν Φαλῖνος Ἕλλην to 
follow. —20. βάρβαροι : pred. to ὄντες to be supplied. —21. ἐντίμως ἔχων, 
to be in honor. Cf. note on εὐνοϊκῶς ἔχοιεν, p. 2, 9. —22. τῶν ἀμφὶ τάξεις : 
Ξε- τῶν τακτικῶν. For the case, see G. 1142; H. 754a. 

$8. 25. ὅτι... ἀγαθόν : what changes of mood are possible in this 
sent. ? λέγουσιν has the force of an historical tense. Cf. p. 37, 27, and 
the note. —vxév : what use of the partic.? Cf. also the note on νικᾶν, 
p. 48, 5. — 26. παραδόντας : for the relation of this partic. to the follow- 
ing ἰόντας εὑρίσκεσθαι, cf. the note on ὑπολαβών, p. 2,23. —27. εὑρίσκεσθαι 
..« ἀγαθόν, to seek to get whatever (lit. if any) favor they could. 

Page 50.] §9. 2. βαρέως, with anger. —dpws: Clearchus, although 
himself angry, nevertheless, etc. —3. εἴη : why opt.? —4. ἔφη, continued 
he.—5. 6 τι : cogn. acc. to ἀποκρίνασθαι to be supplied with ἔχετε, are able. 
— 6. ἥξω, will return: cf. ἐλθόντες, p. 48, 4. —8. θυόμενος : why mid.? 
See the Introd., ὃ 291, 

$10. 9. πρόσθεν ἢ παραδοῖεν, before they would give up. See G. 1474, 
and Moods and Tenses, § 654. There is no change of mood in quoting 
what Cleanor said. Οὐ, εἰ αὐτῷ δοίη xrd., p. 26, 19. — 11. θαυμάζω, should 


ANABASIS II. 1x. 10-17. 209 


Page 50.] like to know. —worepa... ἤ : double indir. question. Cf. 
p. 20, 18, and the note. — 12. ὡς κρατῶν : force of ὡς ὃ —7 ὡς... δῶρα, 
or as gifts on the alleged (ws) ground of friendship, as if he had said ὡς 
φίλος ὦν. -- 14. πείσας, by persuasion, opposed to ὡς κρατῶν. ---1δ, τί 
ἔσται... χαρίσωνται : cf. p. 31, 6. 

$11. 16. πρὸς ταῦτα, in reply to this. —18. αὐτῷ : with ἀντιποιεῖται 
(G. 1177; H. 772}. ---- ἔστιν : why accented ? — ἀρχῆς : causal gen. (G. 
1128 ; H. 739a).—19. ἑαυτοῦ εἶναι : pred. gen. of poss. —péoq TH χώρᾳ : 
cf. μέσου τοῦ παραδείσου, p. 6, 9, and the note. —21. οὐδ᾽ el, not even afi: 
ov negatives δύναισθε dv. — παρέχοι : 86. αὐτούς. 

812, 25. εἰ μή, except, after a neg. Cf. p. 21, 20, and p. 23, 10. — 
ἔχοντες : = εἰ xomer. —26. dv: with χρῆσθαι. Cf. p. 37. 20. So ἄν 
that follows belongs to στερηθῆναι, and παραδόντες --- εἰ wapadoipev. — 27. 
μή : the neg. with the imv. is always μή (G. 1610; H. 1019). 

Page 51.] 1. παραδώσειν : sc. ἡμᾶς as subj., which would have been 
expressed if ἡμῖν had not preceded. 

813, 4. ᾿Αλλὰ... ἀχάριστα : ironical, When Phalinus calls Theo- 
pompus a “ philosopher,’’ he means to stigmatize his remarks about ἀρετή 
and ἀγαθά as unpractical. —5. dv, that you are. —6. περιγενέσθαι ἄν, 
could (under any circumstances) prove superior, inf. with ἄν representing 
the potential opt. — 7. ϑυνάμεως : for the case, cf. p. 3, 26. 

814, 7. ἔφασαν: Xenophon writes as if he had not himself been 
present. — λέγειν : cf. λέγειν, p. 42, 22, and the note.— 10. ἄλλο τι : cf. 
ri, p. 15, 27, and the note. —11. συγκαταστρέψαιντ᾽ ἄν (sc. Αἴγυπτον) : 
serves only loosely as an apod. to the first prot., εἴτε θέλοι, since it 
expresses a thought adapted to the second. 

8 15, 12. εἰ, whether.—13. ἀποκεκριμένοι elev: why perf. opt.? —14. 
Οὗτοι : in partitive appos. with the phrase ἄλλος ἄλλα. Cf. p. 37, 2, and 
the note.— ἄλλος ἄλλα, some one thing, others another, lit. another other 
things. Cf. ἄλλοι ἄλλως, p. 29, 11, and ἄλλοι ἄλλοθεν, p. 46, 24, and the 
notes. — 15. λέγεις, mean, intend. 

$16. 10. οἶμαι... πάντες, as all the rest also, I think. otyat is paren- 
thetic and does not affect the const. —17. ἡμεῖς : sc. Ἑλληνές éouev. — 18. 
πράγμασι : cf. p. 4, 8. 

$17. 20. συμβούλευσον ἡμῖν ὅ τι κτλ., give us whatever advice, etc. — 
22. ἔπειτα : to be how construed ὃ -- λεγόμενον, ὅτι Padives κτλ,, when 
reported as follows, “ Phalinus once,”’ etc. For ὅτι, ¢f. p. 28, 18, and the 
note. —24. συμβουλενομένοις συνεβούλευσεν : why a difference in voice ὃ 
— 25. τάδε, the following advice, would be followed by the actual advice, 


if the report should ever be made in Greece. What kind of an acc. is 
τάδε ? — ὅτι ἀνάγκη, that it is inevitable, sc. ἐστί. 


910 ANABASIS IIL. 1.19 anp 2. 3. 


Page 52.] 819, 2. el... ἐστι, if you have one chance in ten thousand. 
— 3. σωθῆναι : limits ἐλπίς, to be supplied with μία τι. ΟΠ p. 14, 20, 
and the note. In 5 below, the subst. σωτηρίας is used with ἐλπίς in the 
Same sense a8 σωθῆναι here. —6. ἄκοντος : used almost like a partic. Cf. 
p. 15, 23, and the note. 

$20. 8. πρὸς ταῦτα: cf. p. 50, 16. — ταῦτα : cf. τάδε in the next line. 
Cf. also 14, where both words occur. — 10. ἡμεῖς : emphatic, opposing 
what the Greeks thought to what the king had demanded (p. 49, 25 ff.). wl 
εἶναι : sc. ἡμᾶς as subj. — πλείονος : for the case, ef. p.. 14, 10. — 11. 
ἔχοντες : a second prot. to ἂν εἶναι, which is quoted. Cf. p. 50, 25 ff. 

$21. 15. om... εἴησαν, that there was to be (not would be) a truce, the 
dir. form being μένουσι (partic., sc. ὑμῖν, = ἣν μένητε) σπονδαί εἰσιν, there is 
a truce for you (i.e. for you to depend on), if you remain. Cf. 18 below, 
σπονδαί εἰσιν after peveire. Cf. also 22 ff. below. — 17. πότερα... ἥ: Cf. 
p. 50, 11, ---͵Ἴ8, ἢ ὡς... ἀγγελῶ, or (whether) I shall take back answer 
from you that there is war ; lit. or, assuming that there is war, I shall 
announce it from you. (G. 1593, 2.) 

$22. 20. ταὐτά: not ταῦτα. --- ἅπερ : 86. δοκεῖ. --- 31. ἀπεκρίνατο : note 
the asyndeton. — 22. σπονδαί : sc. εἰσίν. 

$23. 26. ὅ τι ποιήσοι : indir. question. The fut. opt. is never used 
except in indir. discourse as the representative of the fut. ind. (G. 1287; 
H. 855 a). 


CHAPTER II. 


Page 53.] §1. 2. Mévwv... ἔμενε : Glus also remained. Cf. p. 48, 
12ff., and p. 49, 4f.—3. ἔλεγον, φαίη : the first takes a clause with ὅτι, 
the second the inf. (G. 1523 ; H. 9466). —4. βελτίους, of higher rank. — 
5. ovs οὐκ ἂν ἀνασχέσθαι : for of οὐκ ἂν ἀνάσχοιντο, a rel. clause with the 
inf. by assimilation (ἃ. 1524 ; H. 947). — αὐτοῦ βασιλεύοντος : gen. abs., 
expressing condition. —6. ἀλλ᾽ εἰ κτλ. : a change to the dir. discourse.— 
ἤδη, immediately. —7. εἰ δὲ μή, otherwise, i.e. if you do not come, = ἐὰν 
δὲ μὴ nenre. Cf. 9, and see G. 1417 ; H. 906. 

ὃ 2. 8. χρὴ ποιεῖν : sc. ἡμᾶς, referring to both Greeks and barbarians. 
—9. ὥσπερ λέγετε : understand before this χρὴ ἡμᾶς ἥκειν τῆς νυκτός. --- 
εἰ δὲ μή: c/. 7 and the ποίθ. --- πράττετε : more animated than χρὴ ὑμᾶς 
πράττειν would have ὈΘΘΗ. --- ὁποῖόν tt: τὶ adds to the indefiniteness of 
ὁποῖον, whatsoever. —11. οὐδέ, not even to the friendly barbarians, just as 
before he had sent Phalinus off without satisfying him. Cf. p. 52, 26. 

§3. 14. ἱέναι : the inf. expresses purpose. Const. with οὐκ ἐγίγνετο, 
did not result ( favorably) for going. This phrase is interpreted by καλὰ ἣν 
in 21. See the Introd., ὃ 291.—15. dpa, as it seems. —16. ἐν μέσῳ : οἱ 


ANABASIS II. 2. 3-11. 911 


Page 53.] p. 30, 24, and the note. 19. οὐ μὲν δή, not yet indeed. — 
yé: force  ---οἷόν te: sc. ἐστίν, is it possible (G. 10246; H. 1000). —20. 


ἔστιν : accent? 

$4, 22. δειπνεῖν : explanatory of ὧδε ποιεῖν. The inf. const. changes 
to the imv. in συσκευάζξεσθε κτλ. Cf. πράττετε in 9, and the note. — 23. 
σημήνῃ : ς΄. ἐσάλπιγξε, p. 8, 27, and the ποίρ. --- ὡς ἀναπαύεσθαι : with 
σημήνῃ, shall give the signal for going to rest (G. 1456; H. 1054, 1f.).— 
24. τὸ δεύτερον : cogn. acc. with σημήνῃ to be supplied. —avarlOeoOe : 
note the voice. —25. ἐπὶ τῷ τρίτῳ, at the third signal. —r@ ἡγουμένῳ, the 
van (neut.) = τοῖς ἡγουμένοις. ---20. τὰ ὅπλα = τοὺς ὁπλίτας, Ι Cf. denis, 
p. 31, 16. — For the night march, see the Introd., § 401. 

Page 54.] §5. 1. καὶ τὸ λοιπὸν κτλ. : for the prominence of Clear- 
chus, see the Introd., § 231. 

88. This section is thought by many to be an interpolation. —4. 
ἀριθμὸς τῆς ὁδοῦ, amount of the way, distance. —5. τῆς ᾿Ιωνίας, in Ionia. 
- μάχης, i.e. the scene of the battle, battlefield. So in 8 below. —8. 
ἐλέγοντο εἶναι, there were said to be, it was said that there were. 

$7. 10. ἐπεὶ σκότος ἐγένετο, after it became dark. Cf. ἡμέρα ἐγένετο, 
p. 55, 20; ὀψὲ ἦν, p. 56,7; and p. 33, 17, and the ποίθ. --- Μιλτοκύθης μὲν 
κτλ. : this was the first desertion. See the Introd., ὃ 23%.—11, 12. ds, 
ὡς : cf. p. 5, 5, and the note. 

§8. 13. rots ἄλλοις : dat. of advantage; see p. 17,8. Cf. p. 29, 19. 
- 14. κατὰ τὰ παρηγγελμένα, according to previous instructions. For 
these see p. 53, 22ff.—15. παρ᾽ ᾿Αριαῖον : why acc. ?—17. ἐν... ὅπλα, 
halting under arms in line of battle. θέμενοι limits the following noms., 
the officers being taken as the representatives of the whole body of troops. 
—19. οἱ κράτιστοι, the highest in rank. Cf. βελτίους, p. 53, 4. — 20. μήτε 
... τέ, not only not... but also: the correlatives are merely re. . . τε.--- 
προδώσειν, ἔσεσθαι, ἡγήσεσθαι : quoted. Note the tense. 

89, 23. els ἀσπίδα: i.e. the blood was caught in the hollow of a shield. 

810. 25. ἐπεὶ δὲ τὰ πιστὰ ἐγένετο, when the pledges had been given (aor. 
with force of plpf.). With the pledge here given (an oath and the slaugh- 
ter of victims) cf. p. 62, 9, where the pledge is an oath and the giving 
and taking of the right hand, and p. 151, 2ff., where it is an oath and 
the exchange of spears. See the Introd., §29%.—27. πότερον ... ἤ: 
how used ? 

Page 55.] 1. ἥνπερ: sc. ὁδόν, and for the const. of this acc. with 
ἤλθομεν, cf. p. 9, 16, and the note. 

§ 11, 3. ἀπιόντες : prot. = εἰ ἀπίοιμεν. --- ὑπάρχει : cf. τὰ ὑπάρχοντα, 
resources. —4. οὐδὲν τῶν ἐπιτηδείων, nothing in the way of provisions. — 
ἑπτακαίδεκα γάρ: γάρ is used also in 4, there introducing a ground 


zis ANABASIS II. 2. 11-19. 


Page 55.] for παντελῶς... ἀπολοίμεθα, and here one of the causes of 
ὑπάρχει. .. ἐπιτηδείων. ---- ὃ. σταθμῶν : the σταθμός is here looked upon as 
a period of time. Cf. for the case ἡμερῶν, p. 33, 4. --- ἐγγυτάτω : used as 
adj. —7. viv δ᾽ ἐπινοοῦμεν : i.e. I and those with me. νῦν δέ corresponds 
to ἣν μὲν ἤλθομεν (2), and τῶν δ᾽... ἀπορήσομεν tO μακροτέραν μέν (8). --- 8, 
μακροτέραν : sc. ὁδόν, as above in 1 with ἥνπερ. --- ἐπιτηδείων : why gen. ἢ 

$12. 9. πορευτέον : sc. ἐστί (G. 1597 ; H. 990). — 10. σταθμούς : cog- 
nate acc. with πορευτέον, we must make our Jirst marches, lit. march tl 
Jirst marches. — ds... μακροτάτους, as long as possible. Cf. p. 2, 12, and 

the note, and ws πλεῖστον in the next line. μακροτάτους is pred. —11. 
στρατεύματος : why gen. ? — 12. ἡμερῶν : gen. of measure. — ἀπόσχωμεν : 
why subjv. ?— 13. οὐκέτι μὴ δύνηται : emphatic fut. affirmation (ἃ. 1360 ; 
Η. 1032).— 14. στρατεύματι : dat. of accompaniment, equiv. to ἐὰν Su 
ὀλίγον στράτευμα, corresponding to πολὺν δ᾽ ἔχων (in the next line) = ἐὰν 
ἔχῃ. —1i. ἔγωγε : expressed for emphasis, is further emphasized by its 
position, 

413, 18. Ἦν δυναμένη, amounted to, meant. οὐδὲν ἄλλο δυναμένη stands 
like a pred. adj. after ἣν. --- 19. ἀποδρᾶναι ἢ ἀποφυγεῖν : cf. p. 18, 25 ff.— 
21. τὸν ἥλιον, ἡλίῳ : cf. p. 48, 12, and the note. —22. τοῦτο : οὐ, ἐψεύσθη 
τοῦτο, p. 35, 14, and the note. 

814, 23. ἔτι δέ, but furthermore. — δείλην : cf. p. 33, 17, and the note. 
— 24. τῶν Ἑλλήνων : limits, as a part. gen., the following rel. clause 
(G. 1027).—ot μὴ ἔτυχον : a cond. rel. clause. —25. ἐν ταῖς τάξεσιν : 
they had been marching in line of battle all day, but the discipline was 
not severe. See the Introd., § 352. 

Page 56.] §15. 1. εἶεν, νέμοιτο : why opt. ?—3. ἐστρατοπεδεύετο : 
we should expect στρατοπεδεύεται or oTparomedevoro-(G. 1489 ; H. 936). 

$16. 7. ob... ἀπέκλινε, however, he did not even (οὐδέ) turn aside 
much less retreat. —9. εἰς : with reference to the previous marching 
into the villages. —11. wal... ξύλα, even the very timbers in (from) ike 
houses (G. 1225; H. 788 a). Cf. τοὺς ἐκ τῶν πόλεων, p. 5, 4. 

$17. 13. ὅμως: notwithstanding the villages had been pillaged. — 
τρόπῳ τινί, after a fashion. — 14. σκοταῖοι, in darkness, adj. used adv. 
— ἐτύγχανον : SC. αὐλιζόμενοι. ---10, ὥστε ἀκούειν, ὥστε ἔφυγον : for the 
difference of meaning, see G. 1450; 1451; H. 927. 

$18. 21. καὶ βασιλεύς, even the king, and not only οἱ ἐκ τῶν σκηνω- 
μάτων φεύγοντες. --- 22. ols, by what: assimilation to the case of the 
omitted antec. 

$19. 23. τοῖς Ἕλλησι : after the compound verb. —25. οἷον : masc. 


ace., subj. of γέγνεσθαι, qualem par est fieri.— For the cam i 
: oa at night, se 
the Introd., § 403, Ρ ght, see 


ANABASIS II. 2. 20 anv 3. 6. 213 


Page 56.] ὃ 20. 27. τῶν τότε: sc. κηρύκων. Homer says (Iliad v. 
786) that Stentor (cf. Eng. stentorian), the ‘‘ brazen-voiced,’’ was able to 
shout as loud as fifty other men together. 

Page 57.] 1. ὃς av μηνύσῃ, λήψεται : cond. rel. sent.— 2. τὸν ὄνον: 
i.e. the senseless panic. —tad ὅπλα : in a Greek camp the arms (heavy 
shields and spears) were generally stacked in one place. See the Introd., 
§ 403, ---ὅτι λήψεται : cf. p. 26, 20, and the note. —3. τάλαντον : see the 
Dict.; cf. 35, 2, and the note. 

§21. 5. els τάξιν τὰ ὅπλα τίθεσθαι, to get under arms in (lit. into) 
line of battle. —-6. ἧπερ εἶχον, just as they were (or stood). —7. ἣ μάχῃ : 
the battle of Cunaxa. 


CHAPTER III. 


81, 8. “OO... ἔγραψα: cf. 56, 20 ff. —10. πέμπων : sc. κήρυκας. Οἵ. 
p. 49, 18 ff. 

§2. 12. ἐζήτουν: difference in meaning between this word and airéw 
on the one hand and épwrdw on the other? — 14. τυχών, ἐπισκοπῶν : 
classify these partics. — 15. εἶπε, told. ΟΥ̓. ἔλεγε θαρρεῖν, Ὁ. 13, 15, and 
the note. —16. ἄχρι ἂν σχολάσῃ : on the principle of indir. discourse we 
might have ἄχρι σχολάσειε. Cf. p. 48, 11, and the note. 

§3. 17. adore... πυκνήν, so that it should present from every side 
a fine appearance of a compact battle line. ὁρᾶσθαι with καλῶς (ἃ. 1528 ; 
H. 952). — 18. πυκνήν : see the Introd., ὃ 321, and the note. — μηδένα: 
why not οὐδένα ὃ --- εἶναι : in the same const. with the preceding ἔχειν. --- 
19. τέ, τέ: the first τέ is correlative to the xat before τοῖς ἄλλοις ; the 
second, to the καί before εὐειδεστάτους. --- 21. ταὐτά : i.e. προελθεῖν κτλ. 

§ 4, 23. ἥκοιεν, had come. The dir. form was ἥκομεν ἄνδρες οἵτινες 
ἐσόμεθα. For the partial change of mood, cf. p. 27, 2 ff., and the note. 

ὃ δ, 28. μάχης: gen. of want (G. 1112; H. 743 ὃ). See the Introd., 
§ 262. — 6 τολμήσων, the man that will dare. Sc. ἔστιν. 

Page 58.] 1. ph πορίσας : —édv μὴ roplcy. Note the position of 
ἄριστον twice expressed in this sentence. 

8 6, 3. ᾧ: the antec. is the preceding sent., ἧκον ταχύ. --- ὃ. δοκοῖεν, 
ἥκοιεν : the dir. discourse would show the person of each verb: εἰκότα 
δοκεῖτε. . . καὶ ἥκομεν... ot ἄξουσιν ἔνθεν etere. —6. of... ἐπιτήδεια, who 
would conduct them (the purpose for which the guides were brought), if 
there should be a truce, to a place from which they would get (the result 
aimed at) provisions. For this use of the fut. ind. with rel. words (here 
of and ἔνθεν) to express purpose and result, see G. 1442; 1447; H. 910; 911; 
and with οἱ ἄξουσιν cf. οἵτινες ἱκανοὶ ἔσονται, Ὁ. 57, 24. For the partial 
change of mood-in the quoted sent. ὅτι... ἐπιτήδεια, cf. ὅτι... ἔσονται, 


p. 57, 23. 


ANABASIS II. 3. 7-14, 


Page 58) 6%. & ἃ... ἀπιοῦσιν, whether he was making a truce 
merely (αὐτοῖς) with the men who were coming and going, i.e. with the 
king’s envoys. Clearchus feared treachery. The dir. question was 
σπένδομαι. .. ἢ... ἔσονται. For the dat., see G. 1175; H. 772. —11. 
διαγγελθῇ : why subjv. ? Cf. p. 20, 14, and the note. 

$8, 138. μεταστησάμενος, had them retire, and, etc. 13. ἐδόκει rrovet- 
σθαι : cf. ἐδόκει πορεύεσθαι, p. 4, 14, and the note.— 14, καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν, i.e. 
without being harassed by the enemy.—énl, after, in order to get, involving 
the idea of purpose; but below, in 21, πρός in the sense simply of to. 

$9. 17. ἀποδόξῃ: why subjv. ? For the force of ἀπό, cf. ἀποψηφίσων- 
ται, p. 21, 3. —20. καιρός, proper time, whereas χρόνος is time in general. 

$10. 22. of μέν : correlated by Κλέαρχος μέντοι. ---- 33, τὰς OE was 
τάξει : he had made a truce, but still he kept his troops in line of battle. 
The situation was full of danger. See the Introd., § 352. —25. τάφροις : 
for the case, ef. οἷς, p. 33, 21. — 26. ὡς μὴ δύνασθαι, so that they could not, 
etc., ws with the inf. to express result. Cf. p. 56, 16, and the note. — 
27. ἐποιοῦντο : 86. γεφύρας. --- ἦσαν ἐκπεπτωκότες : periphrastic plpf. act., 
which makes the idea of the trees being on the ground more prominent than 
that of their falling. See Moods and Tenses, ὃ 45.—28. τοὺς δέ, and some. 

Page 59.] §11. 1. Κλέαρχον... ἐπεστάτει : lit. to learn Clearchus 
well, how he commanded; i.e. to learn how ΟἹ. commanded. Cf. τῶν Bap- 
Bdpwr, p. 2, 8.—2. τὸ δόρυ, his spear, but in the next line βακτηρίαν, a 
staff or stick, without the art., because the staff was no part of his regular 
equipment as a soldier. —3. εἰ δοκοίη : why opt. ?—4. τὸν ἐπιτήδειον, 
the right man. —5. ἔπαισεν ἄν: an iterative aor. Cf. p. 42,2, and the 
note. For the use of the stick in Spartan military discipline, cf. p. 24, 
27ff. Clearchus was a severe disciplinarian. See the Introd., § 272,— 
αὐτὸς προσελάμβανεν, took hold himself. —7. ph οὐ : μή negatives the fol- 
lowing inf. regularly ; οὐ (here very irregular) strengthens the neg. idea 
underlying αἰσχύνην εἶναι, were ashamed, were unwilling. See 6. 1617 ; 
H. 1034; and Moods and Tenses, § 817. 

$12. 7. πρὸς αὐτό, to it, the business in hand. —ol . s+ γεγονότες, 
those that were thirty years old and less. —%. σπουδάζοντα, in earnest. — 
προσελάμβανον : cf. 5. 

$13. 11. μή: in the dir. form οὐ. Cf. p. 40, 10, and the note. — 12. 
ἄρδειν : with ofa (G. 1526; H. 1000), it was not the proper season for 
watering, etc. Cf. Moods and Tenses, §759. The summer was the season 
for irrigation, so that the presence of the water late in September was 
suspicious. —13. ἤδη, forthwith, at the very start. τ εἰς, with reference 
to, for. —14. τούτον ἕνεκα : repeats ἕνα προφαίνοιτο. Cf. G. 1363. 

$14, 18. οἶνος φοινίκων, palm wine. Cf. Ρ. 24, 23 ff. — ὄξος... αὐτῶν, 
a sour drink made from the same by boiling. 


ANABASIS II. 3. 15-23. 215 


Page 59.] $15. 19. αὐταὶ ai βάλανοι, the dates themselves, as con- 
trasted with the wine, etc. For the case, cf. τὰ ἅρματα, p. 31, 2, and the 
note. —20. τοῖς οἰκέταις : with ἀπέκειντο, were set apart, which is equiv. 
to the pass. of ἀπετίθεσαν in 24 below. —22. κάλλους : gen. of cause (ἃ. 
1126; H. 744).—23. ἠλέκτρου : abridged for ἠλέκτρου ὄψεως. Cf. the 
similar case explained in G. 1178; H. 1779 ὃ. --- τὰς δέ τινας, but some 
(τινάς) others. — 24. τραγήματα, for sweetmeats, to be eaten at deasert. -- 
καὶ ἦν. .. ἡδὺ μέν, and these (the τραγήματα) were a palatable thing (ς΄. 
G. 925; H. 617) also at a symposium (πότον, not ποτόν). 

Page 60.] §16,. 2. ἐξαιρεθείη : why opt.? A 

8. 17, 4. 6... ἀδελφός : note the position of the genitives. — 5. γυναι- 
kos: by name Statira,—6. αὐτοῖς : for the case, see G. 1175; H. 772. 
Cf. ᾿Βλλάδε in 9. : iin 

ξ 18, 8. γείτων : pred. nom. to οἰκῶ. --- 9... οἰκῶ : cf. Xen. Hellen. δ. 
2. 12, Kapla, ἔνθαπερ ὁ Τισσαφέρνους οἶκος. --- 10. εἰ δυναίμην : we might 
have had ἐὰν δύνωμαι (G. 1502, 2; 1420; H. 937; 907), since the context 
implies, I thought it would be a evpnua. —12. οἶμαι... ἔχειν, for I think 
it would not be a thankless labor for me. — 13. πρὸς ὑμῶν : as if a pass. 

ad preceded in place of ἀχαρίστως ἔχειν. , 

π' 10. A RK quoted after ἤγγειλα (G. 1588; H. 981). 
For the fact mentioned, see p. 5, 15 ff. —17. καὶ μόνος κτλ. : cf. p. 45, 
20 ff. —21. σὺν τοῖσδε : with a gesture. — 22. atrw: the king. 

§ 20. 24. βουλεύσεσθαι : what other tenses might be used ἢ Cf. παύ- 
σασθαι, p. 5, 1, and the note. —27. εὐπρακτότερον : verbal adj. in the 
comp. The subj. of εὐπρακτότερον ἢ is διαπράξασθαι understood, the διαπρά- 
ξασθαι expressed being the obj. of δύνωμαι. 

Page 61.] § 21.2. μεταστάντες : second aorist. Cf. μεέταδεησάμοοη, 
p. 58, 12. —3. Κλέαρχος ὃ ἔλεγεν, Clearchus was spokesman. — 4, ws 
βασιλεῖ πολεμήσοντες, with the intention of warring with the igi When, 
as here, the subj. of the leading verb is also the speaker, ws simply em- 
phasizes the cause or purpose denoted by the partic. For the case of 
βασιλεῖ, cf. p. 3, 5. 

§ 22. The speaker is referring in this section, probably, to the agree- 
ment entered into at Thapsacus, p. 20, 1 ff. —9. θεούς, ἀνθρώπους : ΟΠ]. 
οὗ ἠσχύνθημεν (G. 1049; H. 712). The inf. προδοῦναι is a second obj. of 
the same verb (G. 1519 ; H. 948). — 10. παρέχοντες, when we had offered 
(sc. αὐτῷ). . For the tense of the partic., ¢f. p. 5, 12. — εὖ ποιεῖν : purpose. 

. p. 9, 14. 
ge 3, 10. ἐπεί: here, since; above, in 7, when. —11. βασιλεῖ. .. 
ἀρχῆς : cf. p. 50, 18. —12. τὴν χώραν κακῶς ποιεῖν : cf. p. 19, 3, and the 
note; and 16 below, ἡμᾶς εὖ rodv.—15. ἀδικοῦντα : sc. τινά, and cf. 


210 ANABASIS IT. 3. 23 anp 4. 3, 


Page 61.] βουλευομένους, p. 2, 21. —17. ὑπάρχῃ, shall take the first step, 
begin. For the const. of ποιῶν, see G. 1580; H. 981; but for ποιοῦντες 
in 18, see G. 1563, 3; H. 969 a. 

ὃ 24. 21. ἥκω: mood? Cy. ἄχρι ἂν σχολάσῃ, p. 57, 16.—ai... 
μενόντων, let the truce continue. — 22, ἀγορὰν παρέξομεν, will provide you 
a market, i.e. an opportunity for buying provisions. ᾿ 

$25, 22. εἰς: of. εἰς ἕω, p. 29, 17, and the note. — 95. δοθῆναι aire : 
cf. the corresponding act. δοῦναι éuol, p. 60, 11. — 26. καίπερ : with the 
following concessive partic. Cf. p. 29, 6.— ἄξιον βασιλεῖ, befitting the 
king. 

Page 62.] $26. 1. παρέξειν : sc. ἡμᾶς. The inf. is quoted after the 
idea of promising in πιστά. So ἀπάξειν. ---- 3, ὅπον δ᾽ ἂν μή: why not ob? 
— For the Greek commissariat, see the Introd., § 26, and for the con- 
ditions here imposed, see particularly § 262, 

ὁ 27. 5. πορεύεσθαι after dudca (G. 1286; H. 948 a). Cf. the two 
fut. infs. in 1 and 2. — ὡς διὰ φιλίας, as (you would go) through a Friendly 
(country). —8. ἕξειν : depends on the general idea of promising. 

$28. 8. ταῦτα ἔδοξε: cf. p. 16, 11. --- 9, Gporav... ἔδοσαν: cf. the 
note on πιστά, p. 54, 25. 

§29. 15. ὡς βασιλέα: cf. p. 5, 16, — διαπράξωμαι, shall have accom- 
plished, with fut. pf. force (Moods and Tenses, § 90). — ὦ δέομαι : sc. 
διαπράξασθαι. ---- 14. ὡς ἀπάξων καὶ ἀπιών : cf. the note on ὡς πολεμήσοντες, 
p. 61, 4. 


CHAPTER IV. 


$1. 22. ph... αὐτοῖς, that the king would bear them no ill-will. The 
inf. is quoted after δεξιάς. Cf. παρέξειν in 1 above, —23. ἐπιστρατείας : 
gen. of cause. C/. the second 7s, p. 30, 8, and the note. — τῶν παροιχο- 
μένων, of what was past. 

$2. 24. &inro.. . νοῦν, evidently paid less regard to the Greeks. For 
προσέχοντες, Cf. ἀνιώμενος, p. 7, 18, and the note. —27. ἀλλὰ προσιόντες 
κτλ. : for the freedom of relation which this implies between commanders 
and men, see the Introd., δ. 271, Note that Clearchus answers the remon- 
Strants (p. 63, 12 ff.). 

$3. 28. 4: may introduce the second part of an alternative question 
(G. 1606 ; H. 1017), even when the first part is only implied (here πότερον 
ἄλλως ἔχει). Cf. the use of an in Lat. 

Page 63.] 1. ἂν περὶ παντὸς ποιήσαιτο: potential optative. —3. εἴη : 
we should expect 7 after ἕνα, since the verb on which the clause depends 
(ἂν ποιήσαιτο) is not past (G. 1270, 2); but εἴη is (irregularly) assimilated 
to the mood of the verb on which it depends. See Moods and Tenses, 


ANABASIS II. 4. 3-9. 217 


Page 63.] ὃ 180 ὃ. --- στρατεύειν : dependent on φόβος (G. 1531 ; H. 952), 
We might have had οἱ ἄλλοι Ἕλληνες φοβοῖντο. .. shinies — 4. st 
σπάρθαι: cf. p. 30, 17.— 5. ἁλισθῇ : fut. pf. force ; of. διαπράξωμαι, Ρ. θ2,, 
13, and the note. —6. otk... ἡμῖν, it is not possible that he will not 
attack us, lit. there is not how (introducing the indir. question) he will not, 
etc. (G. 1618; H. 1081). | | 

84, 7. ἢ... ἀποτειχίζει, is either trenching or walling off some point. 
Cf. the use of ri, p. 47, 9. —9. τοσοίδε, so few. 
τ 5, 14. ἐπὶ πολέμῳ : = πολεμήσοντε-. --- ἀπιέναι : the future Bene of 
εἶμι and its compounds almost always extends to the inf. in indir. discourse. 
Cf. p. 11, 22; p. 13,17; p. 20, 8; p. 48, 19; but here the inf. irregutarly 
has the present sense. See Moods and Tenses, § 30.— 15. shi moreover, 
introducing πρῶτον μέν, αὖθις δέ, etc. —16. ὅθεν ἐπισνιδάμιδα: cf. ἔνθεν 
ἕξουσι τὰ ἐπιτήδεια, p. 58, 7, and the ποίθ. ---17. ἅμα, εὐθύς : for _—— 
of these advs., see G. 1572; Ἢ. 9706. --- 18. ἀφεστήξει : fut. pf. (G. 705; 
H. 467). For the force of the tense here, see G. 1266; H. 850 a, and 
cf. λελείψεται below in 19.— 20. ὄντες : sc. φίλοι. . 
8.6. 20. ποταμός : emphatic, as if he had said, but as to rivers, I don’t 
know whether (εἰ), etc. — 21. διαβατέος : the verbal in -τέος used personally 
(G. 1595; H. 989). — 23. ἄν : i.e. ἐάν. ---οὐ.... εἰσιν : implying also nor 
will there be. For the fact, see p. 54, 10 ff., and the Introd., ὃ 30 1, 
24. τῶν δὲ... ἄξιοι, whereas the enemy’s horse are very numerous (lit. the 
most, compared with those of other nations) and very efficient. — 26. νι- 
κῶντες : -- εἰ νικῷμεν (opt.); but ἡττωμένων, to which σωθῆναι is apod., 
—= ἐὰν ἡττώμεθα (subjv.). — 26. οἷόν te: sc. ἐστίν. 

Page 64.] §7. 1. ὅ τι, on what account, adv. acc., pashan the 
indir. questibn. — αὐτόν : repeating βασιλέα. ---- 2. θεούς : cf. θεούς, p. 61, 9, 
“al pata ἀπιών, as if going. Here the writer and the sy of the 
leading verb are not the same person (cf. ὡς πολεμήσοντες, Ρ. 61, 4, and 
the note, and p. 62, 14), so that ἀπιών export the intention professed 
by Tissaphernes. There is nothing in the use of ws to πα ϊοαῦθ the histo- 
rian’s opinion as to the honesty of this profession. Cf. sal βοηθήσων, 
p. 67, 16, and the note. — εἰς οἶκον : --- οἴκαδε. See note on οἰκῶ, Ῥ. 60, 9. 
Besides Caria T. now had the satrapy of Cyrus. —7. ἦγε: i.e. Orontas. 

. p. 105, 6. 

ἡ a. [ἢ ωυδδεντω : the march began perhaps early in Oct., 401 B.c. ; 
three days later the Greeks reached the Median wall (20 below). On the 
morning of the day after the battle (Sept. 4) the Greeks were at the 
Cyreian camp (p. 48, 6 ff.); the next day they set out northward with 
Ariaeus (p. 55, 20 ff.); the next day (p. 57, 10 ff.), after concluding a 


218 ANABASIS II. 4. 9.17. 


Ρ , "" 
sli pies, truce with the king’s heralds, they proceeded to the Baky 
« ᾿ row AC 4 M | ; 

ν sa hi ages (p. 59, 16), where they remained three days (Sept. 7-9) 

ἡ oa ssaphernes arrived (p. 60, 3 ff.). Xenophon says (p. 62, 16 ff ) 

- : 1ey here waited for Tissaphernes ἡμέρας πλείους ἢ εἴκοσιν. This 

ga rsp introduces an element of doubt into the calculation 

snl nied 1ad remained just twenty days, their march northward with 

Tissap eres would have begun on Sept. 30, which is the usually accepted 

date. See the Introd., § 423, iil 

δ 10 [] » / 
> ” ae γί 

ie 13. αὐτοὶ... ἐχώρουν, proceeded by themselves. —14. ἐστρατο- 

πεδεύοντο : the Greeks and barbarians. 

$B. 17. τοῦ αὐτοῦ: 5 

‘ ° οὗ : 86, τόπου, and cf. p. 36, 2 18 ἃς € 
ὶ i ν κ᾿ | ree mT πλ é μ᾿ 

Vaal ' ἕ γᾶς ἐνέτεινον: 

$12. 20. txes: menti ¢ 
iin rh = τεῖχος: mentioned p. 32,14. If we suppose that the south- 

, P art of this wall, which extended from the Ticris to the Euphrates 

was it “4 Ἢ ἴω oor ΔΩ Ὶ r ἡ : ᾿ 4 
a oe 10 Is easy to account, first, for Xenophon’s not describing it 
é μ μη but here ; and, secondly, for the King’s digging the trench pa 
᾿ pt 1 ff.) for the purpose of completing the line of defence furnished 
Pl μι sii part of the wall. In the retreat Tissaphernes led the 

ἐμ 8 westward, south of the trench (p. 32, 20), in order that they should 
no Γ Θ δι. uh M " Mh e 7 « we - 

: i the rich plain of Babylonia, and so brought them outside of the 
ba again, an they now pass within (παρῆλθον) on their way to the 
igris. — 22. ) νον : = WK 2: ' , 
a ape μὲ @Kodopunpévov : --- ὠκοδόμητο. ---- 23. κειμέναις, lying; we 

1d, - ὦ " γ ) ῶ 6) » 

( οδῶν : why gen. ?— 24. μῆκος ὃ ἐλέγετο, but in length, it 
was said, etc. intl | 

ὃ 13. 27. τὴν δ᾽ ἑπτά, ( 

Nebel dy ἮΝ ων ἑπτά, and the other (by its having been) bridged 
er (partic. of means) with seven boats. Cf. p. 67, 2, and the note 

ΤΩΝ 65.] 4. ὥσπερ: sc. κατατέμνονται. | 

§ 38 10. δένδρων: With παραδείσου (G. 1085, 4; H. 7297). Τῇ it were 
construed with δασέος it would be δένδροις (cf. πίτυσι, p. 146 1). --- οἱ δὲ 
βάρβαροι : sc. ἐσκήνησαν. al 

δ 15, 13. ἔτυχον é ὄ 
“ “x i ν περιπάτῳ ὄντες, happened to be walking. — πρὸ τῶν 
ape * J. p. of, 2, and the note. — 15, προφύλακας : see the Introd 

ΠῚ ' , i . αι, / J Ψ ᾿ 

i 16. οὐκ ἐζήτει, did not ask Sor, ask to 866. ---- καὶ ταῦτα ὦν: of, 
p. 20, 9, and the note. i 

Lidl * * . * 

π ort: introducing direct discourse. Cf. p. 28, 18, and the note 
— 19. Ewen we: for its -eme , ἢ | ad 
aie pry εχ its agreement, cf. p. 5, 11, and the note. —21. μὴ 

@vrat: why subjv. ἢ 

§ 17. 2: Ν t ine Ὶ } 

Mat * ὡς διανοεῖται, since Tissaphernes intends, etc.: but in the 
si μ μη in sige that. — 27. τῆς διώρυχος : the second of the two 
, p. 64, 27; over this there was onl i i 

y ἃ pontoon bridge 
could be destroyed easily. faba 


ANABASIS II. 4. 19-26. 219 


Page 66.] 819. 3. νεανίσκος tis: conjectured to have been Xeno- 
phon himself. — 5. τό τε ἐπιθήσεσθαι καὶ λύσειν : {.6. the two stories of an 
intention to attack, and at the same time to destyoy the bridge. We should 
expect τὸ also before λύσειν. For the unusual fut. inf., see G. 1277; 
H. 855 a, and Moods and Tenses, ὃ 113. —6. νικᾶν : 86. αὐτούς as subj. — 
7, τί Set... γέφυραν : why need they destroy the bridge? implying what 
good will it do them, etc.? It is thus a proper apod. to the fut. prot. ἐὰν 
... νικῶσι. --- 8. ἂν ὦσιν, ἔχοιμεν Gv: a subjy. in the prot. with an opt. 
with ἄν in the apod. See ἃ. 1421,2; H. 901a; and Moods and Tenses, 
§ 505; and cf. p. 13, 3f. The οὐ in οὐδέ, not even, modifies ἔχοιμεν ἄν, 
the meaning being, even if there are (shall be) many bridges, we should not 
know, etc. Cf. for this meaning of οὐκ ἔχω, p. 30, 28, and the note ; cf. 
also οὐχ ἕξουσιν in 10 below. —9. σωθῶμεν : why subjv.? So φύγωσιν in 
the next line. 

δ 22. 17. ὑποπέμψαιεν, had sent the man with a false message. The 
dir. form was ὑπέπεμψαν. --- 19. ἔνθεν μέν, ἔνθεν δέ, on this side, on that. — 
21. wodAfis... ἐνόντων, since it was extensive and fertile, and since there 
were men in it to cultivate it. —22. εἶτα δὲ καί, and moreover also. — 
23. γένοιτο : with μή. --- εἴ τις βούλοιτο, in case any one should wish, 


mt de 


might have been ἐάν τις βούληται. Cf. p. 18, 2, and the note. 

§ 23. 25. ἐπὶ μέντοι... ὅμως, yet they nevertheless, etc., i.e. notwith- 
standing that they now knew the man’s statements were false. 

Page 67.] 1. ἀπήγγελλον : i.e. the next morning. 

§ 24, 2. ἐζευγμένην : the Greeks said ζευγνύναι γέφυραν (cognate acc.), 
to build (join) a bridge, or ζευγνύναι ποταμόν (διώρυχα) to bridge a river (or 
trench). For the latter, cf. p. 65, 1.—3. as... πεφυλαγμένως, as guardedly 
as possible, with the utmost precaution: cf. p. 89,14. οἷόν re (= δυνατόν), sc. 
iv. —4. τῶν παρὰ Τισσαφέρνους Ἑλλήνων : cf. τῶν παρὰ βασιλέως, p. 2, 6, 
and the note. —5. διαβαινόντων : sc. αὐτῶν. We should expect the dat. 
after ἐπιθήσεσθαι, rather than the gen. abs. Similarly διαβαινόντων occurs 
in the next line, notwithstanding the following αὐτοῖς. --- 8. σκοπῶν : 
partic. — διαβαίνοιεν : in the dir. form diaBalvover, to see whether they were 
crossing. —9. ᾧχετο ἀπελαύνων, went riding off. Cf. p. 47, 8, and the 
note. 

§ 25, 12. πλέθρου: cf. πλέθρων, p. 10, 21.—13. πρὸς qv: why ace. ὃ 
— 16. ὡς βοηθήσων : ws shows only that the partic. gives the purpose 
which is professed by the subj. (ὁ ἀδελφός). Cf. ws ἀπιών, p. 64, 6, and 
the note, and ὡς πολεμήσοντες, p. 61, 4. Cf. also p. 4, lines 7, 8, and 12, 
and the note on 7. 

§ 26. 18. els δύο, two abreast. They marched by in column. See the 
Introd., § 351, — 19. GAAore.. . ἐφιστάμενος, halting now and then. — 


220 ANABASIS II. 4. 26 ann 5. 9. 


Page 67.] 20. τὸ ἡγούμενον : obj. Cf. p. 53, 25, and the note. — 
ἐπιστήσειε: why opt. ? — 24. ἐκπεπλῆχθαι : cf. p. 25, 19, and the note. 
$27. 28. Κύρῳ: for the case, see G. 1159; 1160; H. 764, 2. The 
simple verb ἐγγελάω takes the same case. — διαρπάσαι... ἐπέτρεψε : cf. 
p. 9, 14, and the note. See also the Introd., § 261. 
Page 68.] 1. πλὴν ἀνδραπόδων : i.e. the slaves were not to be part 
of the plunder. 


CHAPTER V.. 


$2 13. Τισσαφέρνει; cf. τούτῳ, p. 3, 12. --- 14. εἴ πως δύναιτο, if 
possible. For the mood, see G. 1502, 1; H. 937, and cf. p. 11, 19, and 
p. 14, 23. The clause depends on παῦσαι, which is the second subj. of 
ἔδοξεν. --- πρὶν γενέσθαι : cf. p. 20, 17, and the note. — 15. ἐροῦντα : what 
does the fut. partic. express ? 

$3. 19. Τισσαφέρνη : a rare form of voc., found in a few foreign 
names in ys.—20. ἀδικήσειν : cf. μνησικακήσειν, p. 62, 22, and the note, 
—21. φυλαττόμενον ἡμᾶς, are on your guard against us. What two 
other participles in this section are quoted ? 

δ 4. 23. οὐ δύναμαι οὔτε: we should expect οὔτε δύναμαι to correspond 
to ἐγώ re οἶδα. See note on pire... τε, p. 54, 20. — 24. ὅτι... οὐδέν, 
that we on our part do not even think of any such thing. —26. εἰς λόγους 
σοι ἐλθεῖν, to have an interview with you (G. 1177; H. 772 a). —el δυναί- 
μεθα : cf. p. 12, 17, and the note. 

Page 69.] §5. 1. of... ἐποίησαν : we should expect in place of the 
rel. clause φοβηθέντας... βουλομένους. . ποιήσαντας (partic. in indir. dis- 
course), but such an accumulation of partics. would be harsh. — 3. μέλ- 
λοντας, intending, trans. —4. αὖ, what is more. 

$7. 8. πρῶτον.... μέγιστον: cf. p. 13, 26. The correlative of μέν, 
which is repeated in 16, is δέ in 18, — θεῶν, oaths (sworn) by the Gods 
(G. 1085, 8; H. 729c). Cf. the phrase ὀμνύναι rods θεούς. For the im- 
portance attached by the Greeks to the oath, see the Introd., § 292, — 
9. τούτων : i.e. τῶν θεῶν ὅρκων. For the case, cf. p. 14, 3, and the note, 
— 10. παρημεληκώς : cf. ἐψευσμένος, p. 13, 27, and the note, —12. φεύγων, 
Jlying, but ἀποφύγοι ἄν, could make his escape. Cf. p. 18, 26.—13. ἂν 
ἀποσταίη : what use of the opt.? What other instances of the same 
usage in this section are there ?— 14. πάντῃ πάντα: cf. πάντων πάντα, 
p. 39,7, and πανταχῇ πάντων below in the next line. — θεοῖς : for the case, 
cf. p. 27, 24, and the note. With this section compare Psalm cxxxix. 
7-12. 

$9. 20. πᾶσα ὁδός, every road; but following (22), πᾶσα ἡ ὁδός, all our 
way.— 22, αὐτῆς : with odd¢v.—24, φοβερώτατον: cf. p. 59, 24, and the note. 


ANABASIS II. 5. 10-18. 221 


Page 69.] §10. 26. ἄλλο τι ἂν ἤ : ἄλλο τι 7 Or the simple ἄλλο τι is 
equivalent in asking a question to od or dpa οὐ, Lat. nonne (G. 1604 ; 
H. 1015 b). — dv: sc. ποιοῖμεν. ---- 27. ἔφεδρον, fresh opponent: see Dict. 

Page 70.] 3. ταῦτα : repeats the indirect question. 

811, 4. τῶν τότε: cf. p. 56, 21. --- τῶν τότε... βούλοιτο : give the 
sent. in its dir. form before quotation. —6. ἔχοντα, σῴζοντα, οὖσαν: 
what use of the partics.? —7. 4... ἐχρῆτο, which Cyrus found hostile. 
—8. ταύτην : repeating rhy.. . δύναμιν with emphasis. 

8 12, 9. ὅστις οὐ βούλεται : result (G. 1445; H. 910). --- 10. ἀλλὰ μήν: 
begins the sent. as if the parenthesis ἐρῶ... εἶναι were to be followed by 
a sent. like καὶ ἡμεῖς ὑμᾶς πολλὰ ὠφελεῖν δυνησόμεθα (Kriiger). This is really 
said in other words in the two following sections. 

$13. 13. οὖς νομίζω ἂν παρασχεῖν, whom I think I could render (παρά- 
σχοιμι ἄν). Cf. p. 13, 3ff. So παῦσαι ἄν in 16.—17. ἐνοχλοῦντα : supple- 
mentary partic. not in indir. discourse (ἃ. 1580; H. 981). —18. οἷς : with 
τεθυμωμένους, dat. of indir. obj. — 20. ἂν κολάσεσθε: a rare const. in 
Attic Greek (G. 1303; H. 845). See Moods and Tenses, § 197. — tis... 
οὔσης : = ἢ τῇ... οὔσῃ. 

8 14, 22. ὡς μέγιστος, the very greatest. Cf. ὅτι ἀπαρασκευότατον, p. 2, 
12, and the note. — 23. ἀναστρέφοιο : for the omission of ἄν, ef, p. 26, 21, 
and the note. — ἔχων ὑπηρέτας : = εἰ ἔχοις κτλ., additional prot. to both 
ἂν εἴης and ἂν dvacrpépow. —24. μισθοῦ : Clearchus recognizes the fact 
that the Greeks were mercenaries. See the Introd., § 241. —25. τῆς 
χάριτος : with ἕνεκα. 

815, 27. τὸ... ἀπιστεῖν : cf. p. 42, 20. ---ττὸ ὄνομα ris: a mingling 
of two constrs., ἡδιστ᾽ ἂν ἀκούσαιμι τίς κτλ., and τούτου τὸ ὄνομα ὅστις κτλ. 

Page 71. ὃ 16. 4. ἥδομαι ἀκούων : cf. ἥσθη ἰδών, p. 9, 8. --- ἀκούων 
σον λόγους : cf. p. 5, 18. —5. γιγνώσκων : the partic. is causal. —6. μοι 
δοκεῖς : to be translated into English impers., it seems to me.—7. ὡς ἂν 
μάθῃς : for ἄν in a final clause see G. 1367; II. 882. In Attic prose, ὡς 
ἄν with the subj. is confined, with a single exception, to Xenophon. See 
Moods and Tenses, § 326, 2. 

§17. 8. el ἐβουλόμεθα, if it was our real wish, i.e. when we made the 
treaty (G. 1390; H. 893). To this the apod. is ἀπορεῖν ( = ἀποροῦμεν) 
quoted (10) after δοκοῦμεν. ---- 10. ἐν 7, by means of which. — 11. ἀντιπά- 
oxev: with κίνδυνος (cf. p. 14, 20, and the note), with which supply εἴη 
ἄν from the preceding εἴημεν ἄν. 

818, 13. ἐπιτίθεσθαι : with ἐπιτηδείων. --- ἀπορεῖν ἄν : = ἀποροῖμεν ἄν. 
Cf. above ἄν εἶναι in 6, and ἀπορεῖν in 10. ----τοσαῦτα : with a gesture. — 
14. ὄντα, although they are. —15. ὑμῖν ὄντα wopevréa, must be crossed by 
you, quoted after ὁρᾶτε ; in the dir. form, ὑμῖν πορευτέα ἐστίν. Cf. p. 63, 21. 


222 ANABASIS II. 5. 18-28. 


Page 71.] With the active of this const., ὄρη πορεύεσθαι, cf. p. 55, 10 

and the note. 
$19. 21. ἀλλά, still (G. 1422). —23. οὐδ᾽ εἰ, not even if: the negative 

goes with ἂν δύναισθε. i 

§ 20, 25. ἔχοντες : cond. (note in the next line μηδένα), -- εἰ ἔχομεν. 
For εἰ ἔχομεν, ... ἂν ἐξελοίμεθα, see G. 1421, 1; H. 901. 

Page 72.] 1. ἔπειτα: cf. εἶτα in p. 11, ὅ, and the ποίορ. --- πῶς ἂν... 
ἂν ἐξελοίμεθα : for the repetition of ἄν in the apod., cf. p. 13, 4, and the 
note. 

$21, 3. παντάπασι... ἐστί, it is characteristic of (belongs to, pred. 
gen. of possession) those altogether without resources. —4. καὶ τούτων, and 
that to0, and besides. —5. οἵτινες ἐθέλουσι : used as if ἄποροί εἰσιν κτλ. 
preceded ; we should expect simply ἐθέλειν, to be willing. ΟΥ̓ p. 76, 23 ff. 

§ 22. 8. ἐξόν, when it was possible, acc. abs. (G. 1569; H. 973). —9. 
οὐκ... ἤλθομεν ; did we not proceed to do it ?— ἔρως : sc. ἐστί. --- τούτου 
refers to οὐκ... ἤλθομεν. ---10. τὸ... ἰσχυρόν : the inf. clause stands as 
an obj. acc. after the verbal idea in ἔρως. Translate: my desire to prove 
myself faithful to the Greeks, and with that mercenary force with which 
Cyrus made his expedition . . . with this (τούτῳ) to return to the coast, etc. 
μισθοδοσίας and εὐεργεσίας are accs. See Moods and Tenses, § 795. Many 
Mss. have τοῦ for τό in 10. 

§ 23. 12. ὅσα: with χρήσιμοι, acc. of specification. —13. ἐστέ, are, by 
anticipation, for ἔσεσθε. --- τὰ μὲν... εἶπας, some you also have mentioned. 
—15. τὴν δ᾽... ἔχοι : 86. ὑρθήν. As it was the outward sign of royalty 
to wear the tiara upright on the head, so wearing it upright upon the 
heart means aspiring to royal dignity. Tissaphernes thus intimates his 
intention to revolt from the king by the aid of the Greeks, in order to 
blind Clearchus to his real plans. 

ἢ 24. 19. εἶπεν: i.e. Clearchus. εἶπεν is repeated in ἔφη. ---- τοιούτων 
ὑπαρχόντων, when such grounds exist. —21. παθεῖν : dependent on ἄξιοι. 

ἢ 25. 22. oi... λοχαγοί : in appos. with the subj. of βούλεσθε. ---- 23. 
ἐν τῴ ἐμφανεῖ : cf. ἐν τῷ φανερῷ, p. 16, 24. 

Page 73.) §27. 4. δῆλός τ᾽ ἦν οἰόμενος : cf. p. 7, 18. --- πάνυ φιλικῶς 
διακεῖσθαι, that he was on very friendly terms with. —7. ot ἂν ἐλεγχθῶσι : 
the verb might have been in what other mood ? Could ἐκέλευσε have been 
80 changed ? See G. 1497, 2; 1499; H. 932, 2; 935c. — SaPdddovres : 
partic. in indir. discourse. —8. τῶν “EAAfvev: with οἵ. --- αὐτούς : cf. 
αὐτόν, p. 43, 24. The pron. in each instance summarily repeats the rel. 
sentence. 

§ 28. 12. aire: i.e, Clearchus. —émws... ἢ: in what other mood 
might the verb have been ? 


ANABASIS II. 5. 29 ἂν 6. 2 223 


Page 73.] §29. 15. mpds... γνώμην, should be devoted to him. —17. 
ἀντέλεγον : open remonstrance. See the Introd., § 277. —pn ἱέναι, μηδὲ 
πιστεύειν : the infs. are not in indir. discourse. Cf. ἔλεγε θαρρεῖν, p. 13, 15. 

$30. 19. ἔστε διεπράξατο : cf. πρὶν ἔπεισε, p. 11, 12, and the note. — 
21. ὡς els ἀγοράν : i.e. without arms. 

§ 31. 25. ᾿Αγίας : see the Introd., § 22, and the note. 

Page 74.] §32. 1. οἱ ἔνδον, οἱ ἔξω : used subst. C/. τῶν τότε, p. 56, 
; πάντας, p. 2, 5, and the note. 


3. ᾧτινι... πάντας : cf. doris... 
ὁ. ἠμφεγνόουν : double augment. Cf. ἠνέσχετο, p. 38, 9, and the 
note. —7. εἰς τὴν γαστέρα : the acc. with reference to the motion of the 


weapon. 

§ 34, 10. τὰ ὅπλα : cf. p. 57, 2, and the note. 

§36. 18. εἴ ris... λοχαγός, whatever general or captain there was (G. 
1502, 1; H. 937), suggests the subj. of προσελθεῖν. What might we have 
instead of εἴη ?—19. ἀπαγγείλωσι : why subjv. ὃ 

§ 37. 21. τῶν Ἑλλήνων : part. gen.—orparnyol μέν, σὺν αὐτοῖς δέ : 
the first two are contrasted, as generals, with Xenophon, who as yet had 
no official relation to the army. Cf. p. 82, 3ff.—23. τὰ περί, the fate of. 

§ 38. 26. ἔστησαν els ἐπήκοον, got within hearing distance. —27. ἔπι- 
ορκῶν, λύων : partics. in indir. discourse. 

Page 75.] 1. ἔχει τὴν δίκην, has received his deserts. —4. ἀπαιτεῖ : 
with two accs. Cf. p. 14, 26, and the note. —éavrod: pred. gen. of pos- 
session. —5. εἶναι : 86. τὰ ὅπλα. ---Ο. δούλον : cf. p. 30, 8, and the note. 

8.39, 6. ἔλεγε δὲ Κλεάνωρ : cf. Ρ. 61, 3.—8. οἱ ἄλλοι : in app. with 
ὑμεῖς understood, you others. —9. θεούς, ἀνθρώπους : cf. p. 61, 9, and the 
note. —olrives ἀπολωλέκατε, ἔρχεσθε : causal (G. 1461; H. 910).—10. 
ἡμῖν : with ὀμόσαντες. Cf. οἷς in 12. --- φίλους καὶ ἐχθρούς, as friends and 
enemies. Cf. p. 1, 10. —18. τοὺς ἄλλους ἡμᾶς, the rest of us. 

§ 40. 15. γάρ, (you are wrong) for. —émBovdetov: cf. p. 28, 12. 

$41. 20. Πρόξενος, Μένων : in emphatic position before ἐπείπερ. We 
should render, but as to Proxenus and Menon, since indeed they are, etc. 


"». 


CHAPTER VI. 
$1. 27. οὕτω, 80, as above described. —28. ἀποτμηθέντες τὰς κεφαλάς : 


the corresponding act. const. is αὐτοῖς ἀποτέμνουσι τὰς κεφαλάς. See G. 1239. 
Page 76.] 1. pév: correlative to δέ, p. 78, 18. — Κλέαρχος : see the 
Introd., ὃ 231.—épodoyoupéves ἐκ πάντων, Us was agreed by (cf. ἐκ, p. 2, 18) 
all. —2. αὐτοῦ : with ἐμπείρως (G. 1147 ; H. 756). —86fas = ὅς ἔδοξεν, who 
was reputed. With this section, ¢f. p. 39, 1 ff. 
$2. 4. πόλεμος : the Peloponnesian War (431-404 n.c.). — 7. ἀδι- 


kotor, had wronged. Cf. p. 25,1, and the note. — τοὺς “EAAnvas : the 


ANABASIS II. 6. 2-17, 


Page 76.] Greek colonists in the Thracian Chersonese. —8. ws πολεμή- 
cov: cf. p. 4, 12, and the note on p. 4, 1. 

; 3. 11. ᾿Ισϑμοῦ: of Corinth, where he stopped on his way.—12. ῴχετο 
iis of. Xero ἀπελαύνων, p. 67, 9, and the note. See Diod. Sic. xiy 12 

ὃ hi 35. ἄλλῃ : ΠΟ such arguments (λόγοις) are given in the Anabasis. 
ἡ p. 3, 10 ff., and p. 12, 6 ff. — 16, δαρεικούς : cf. note on p. 33, 2 

' Ι : i Ι i Ι ve 9 we 
a ἡ LG. oT ; i: eas : Gf. p. 3, 15 ff. —19. ἀπὸ τούτου, from this 

meé On. —2U. πολεμῶν διεγένετο, went on warring. ΟΥ̓́. λέ ἢ 7 

17, and the note. i Sipaiabraiaeata 
ε ry “wr . - "ν 

§ 6. 24. ὅστις αἱρεῖται : cf. οἵτινες ἐθέλουσι, p. 72, 5, and the note, — 
ἐξόν : τ. p. (2, 8, and the note. —26. ὥστε πολεμεῖν, i.e. provided it be 
the toil of war. The inf. expresses a cond. (G. 1453). 

Minaya ὙΠ.) $7, 3. ἡμέρας καὶ νυκτός, by day or night, indifferently. 
1y are the substs. in the gen. ὃ --- ἄγων : like the two adjs., with ἣν 
' , 5 oy! Ud Ι 

oo to lead. — ὃ, πανταχοῦ πάντες : cf. p. 69, 14, and the note. 

§ 8. 6. ds δυνατὸν... εἶχεν, 80 far as was possible with (i.e. for a man 
af) such a temper as he certainly (καί) had. —7. ὥς... ἄλλος : cf. νυ. 15 
δὶ and the note. —8. ὅπως ἔχοι : for the opt. in the obj. clause, of. p. 86, 
28, and the note. —atre : why dat. ?—10. ὡς πειστέον ely : ans δέοι 
αὐτοὺς πείθεσθαι, that they must obey. 
an 3. 11, ἐκ τοῦ --. εἶναι, by being severe. Cf. Ρ. 30, 17, and the note. 

om Is χαλεπός in the nom. ? —dpav : limiting στυγνός (G. 1528 ; H. 952) 
Mth. bala vw oY PPL aig tpt ay 

19, ὡς μεταμέλειν : result. —éor0" ὅτε, sometimes. Cf. ἐνίοτε, just pre- 
ceding, and the note on ἣν... ous, p. 23, 15. 
i § 10. i. ἀκολάστου... ὄφελος εἶναι : cf Ρ. 14, 8. ---Ἰῦ, λέγειν αὐτὸν 
=e : Xenophon states the facts not on his own authority. Cf. p. 42 
a it M4 ‘ 3 A . fe we my 
22. i 17. εἰ μέλλοι, if he was either to, etc. The dir. form would be δεῖ 
φοβεῖσθαι - + + εἰ μέλλει κτλ. ---18, φυλακάς : why δοο. ἢ -- φίλων ἀφέξεσθαι : 
ῖ.6. not to plunder friends. j 

ἢ 11, 22. φαιδρόν : pred. to φαίνεσθαι. --- ἐν τοῖς ἄλλοις προσώποις 
reflected in the faces of those about him. 

$12. 25. ὅτε γένοιντο : why opt. ὃ --- 90. ἀρξομένους ἀπιέναι, i.e. to go 
off to another commander to be subject to him. 

P r Ld * “ 

age 78.] $13. 5. σφόδρα... ἐχρῆτο : ice. they yielded him implicit 
obedience. 

$15. 11. οὐ μάλα ἐθέλειν, did not much like. 

§ 16. 13. εὐθύς : cf. p. 39, 14, and the note. — 15. ἀργύριον : Gorgias’s 
fee was 100 minae (about $1800). Ἷ 

§ 17. 16. ἐπεὶ συνεγένετο αὐτῴ, after he had been his pupil.—17. φίλος 
+++ πρώτοις, when associated with the first men of his day. —18. εὐεργετῶν: 
Gf. ἀλεξόμενος, p. 40, 22. -- 19, ᾧετο κτήσεσθαι, expected to get. —20. χρή- 
para πολλά : see the Introd., § 241, 


ANABASIS II. 6. 18-30. 925 


Page 78.] 818, 21. ἐπιθυμῶν : concessive partic. —évbndov . . . εἶχεν, 
he moreover made this also evident, i.e. it was none the less evident. — 
24. μή: why do we have μή and not οὐ ὃ 

819, 26. αἰδῶ ἑαυτοῦ, respect for himself. 

Page 79.] 1. στρατιώτας: cf. θεούς, p. 75, 9. — φοβούμενος : what use 
of the part.? Cf. δῆλος ἣν ἐπιθυμῶν in 10, and στέργων φανερὸς ἣν and 
ἔνδηλος ἐγίγνετο ἐπιβουλεύων in 18 and 19. Cf. also p. 7, 18, and the note. 

§ 20. 4. πρὸς rd... δοκεῖν, for being, and having the reputation of 
being, fit to govern. This const. occurs several times below. ἀρχικόν 
limits τινά understood, the subj. of the infs. — 5. ἐπαινεῖν : subj. of ἀρκεῖν. 
— 9. ἐτῶν: pred. gen. of measure. 

8.21, 13. μέγιστα : adv. with δυναμένοις, the most powerful. —14. ἀδικῶν: 
cf. for the tense the note on ἀδικεῖν, p. 25,1. So ἀδικοῦντα in ὅ. --- μὴ 
διδοίη δίκην, might not pay the penalty. 

§ 22. See the Introd., ὃ 291. --- 17. τὸ αὐτὸ τῴ ἠλιθίῳ, the same as 
folly, synonyms of folly. For the dat., see G. 1175; H. 773. 

§ 23. 19. τούτῳ : repeats the rel. clause, and depends on ἐπιβουλεύων. 
— ἔνδηλος ἐγίγνετο : how different from ἔνδηλος ἦν and ἔνδηλος ἐγένετο ? 
- 90, οὐδενός : depends on the prep. included in the compound verb. — 
τῶν συνόντων : connect with καταγελῶν. διελέγετο would require the dat. 

§ 24, 24. pévos... dv, he thought that he alone understood that tt was 
an easy task. 

Page 80.] §26. 1. ἀγάλλεται ἐπί : in the next line with ἠγάλλετο we 
have the simple dat. of cause, τῷ δύνασθαι κτλ. --- 3. ψευδῆ : from ψευδής, 
not ψεῦδος. --- 4. τῶν ἀπαιδεύτων : pred. part. gen. —6. διαβάλλων τοὺς 
πρώτους, by slandering those who were already first (in their friendship). 
-- τοῦτο : repeats the thought of πρωτεύειν φιλίᾳ. 

8 δ, 1. ro... παρέχεσθαι : obj. of ἐμηχανᾶτο. --- 9θ. ἠξίου, expected. 
- 10. ὅτι δύναιτο καὶ ἐθέλοι Gv: in the dir. form δύναμαι καὶ ἐθέλοιμι ἄν. 
- εὐεργεσίαν δὲ κατέλεγεν, he set it down as an act of kindness. —11. ὁπότε 
ἀφίστατο : cf. ὅστις ἀφικνεῖτο, p. 2, 5, and the note. See also Moods and 
Tenses, § 535. — ὅτι οὐκ ἀπώλεσεν αὐτόν, that he had not destroyed him. 

§ 28. 14. παρὰ ᾿Αριστίππου : for the facts stated, cf. p. 3, 22 ff., and 
p. 5, 27 ff. —16. ἥδετο: i.e. Ariaeus. 

§ 29. 21. οὐκ ἀπέθανε : to be connected with the gen. abs. in 19, which 
expresses time. — 24. κεφαλάς : cf. p. 75, 28, and the note. — 25. fav... 
ἐνιαυτόν, after being tortured alive for a year. 

§30. Note the interchange of the dual and pl. in this section. — 
27. καὶ τούτω : emphatic repetition of the subj. 

Page 81.] 1. αὐτούς : with ἐμέμφετο, as this verb cannot govern the 
gen. τούτων, which by its position would naturally. be the obj. of both the 
clauses with ovre. — 8, ἔτη ἀπὸ γενεᾶς, years from birth, years of age. 


a el --. - α “ὠᾷλωρ. 


+ a ὦ 


ANABASIS III. σ᾿ 1-4, 


BOOK THIRD. 


ΗΟΒΤΙΠΙΤΙΕΒ BETWEEN THE GREEKS AND THE PERSIANS AFTER THE 
SEIZURE OF THE GENERALS, — Marcu FROM THE River ZApatas Τὸ 
THE MOUNTAINS OF THE CARDUCHI. 


CHAPTER I. 


rege 811] 41, 4 Ὅσα... δεδήλωται : see first note on ii. τ. 1. --- 
ἀπιόντων : temporal partic., present to ἐγένετο. ---ἐν ταῖς σπονδαῖς, during 
the truce, belongs to ἐγένετο : see p. 115, 5. 
$2. 8. ἐπεί, after that, here has the pluperfect : it generally takes the 
aorist (G. 1261); cf. ἐπεὶ ἐτελεύτησαν in 5 (above), and see note on p. 1, 12. 
— 9. οἱ συνεπόμενοι : see ii, 5. 30-32. — 11. évvootpevor μέν with the eight 
dependent clauses introduced by ὅτι is summed up in ταῦτα ἐννοούμενοι (21), 
and there is no corresponding clause with δέ. The succession of gloomy 
thoughts and forebodings gives a graphic picture of the miserable condi- 
tion of the betrayed Greeks. —ém.. . θύραις, at the king’s gates: a mere 
form of words ; the Greeks were now more than 200 miles from Babylon. 
—12. ἦσαν: εἶεν or εἰσί would be more regular (G. 1489; H. 936). — 
κύκλῳ : like the English a-round. —wodd&: with both ἔθνη and πόλεις 
(G. 923; H. 620 a). — 13. παρέξειν ἔμελλεν, was to furnish (G. 1254; 
H. 846 a): cf. Lat. partic. in -rus with sum or eram. — 14. μύρια στάδια: 
ἃ round number; we should Say not less than a thousand miles, —16. ἐν 
μέσῳ τῆς οἴκαδε ὁδοῦ, between (them and) the road home. — προὐδεδώκεσαν 
(G. 541; Η. 360 a). —17. of... βάρβαροι : the Persians of Cyrus’s army, 
100,000 in number, under the command of Ariaeus (cf, p. 31, 18), — 
19. ἱππέα οὐδένα: see Introd. § 301, — 90. νικῶντες, if they should be 
victorious, = εἰ νικῷεν : so ἡττηθέντων (= νικηθέντων), = εἰ ἡττηθεῖεν. ---- 
21. αὐτῶν is partitive genitive after οὐδείς. 
$3. 22. els τὴν ἑσπέραν, at eveni ng (properly on coming to the evening): 
of. eis τὴν ἕω, p. 29, 17. — 23. πῦρ: see Introd. § 403, τὰ ὅπλα, i.e. the 
place where their arms were, a general term for their quarters: see 
Introd. § 402. — 24. dveratovro... ἕκαστος, they lay down where each 
chanced to be (sc. ὧν) : observe the imperfects. 
Page 82.] 1. οὔποτ᾽: to be translated with ὄψεσθαι (fut. inf. in or. 
obl.). 
$4. 3. Ἐξνοφῶν: ‘The inspiration now fell, happily for the army, on 
one in whom a full measure of soldierly strength and courage was com- 
bined with the education of an Athenian, a democrat, and a philosopher, 


ANABASIS IIL 1. 48 227 


Page 82.] It isin true Homeric vein, and in ponies so ἐμοῤῳμιν 
language, that Xenophon describes ‘his dream, oil t Hl ge τ mil 
Oneiros, sent by Zeus, from which this renovating impa i ΠΤ 
Grote. Notice the modest reference to —e τς wa ἢ pr 
i , iv: i.e. he went neither as general nor, ete. — 5. pig i sy 
for the change from the relative Ra NE pyres : pil Se 
>. EE ri : note on ἢ. 3, 22. — see 
ee ee βοὴ ι; 048 a): the direct discourse would be ἐὰν ἔλθῃς, 
a | ht ἐὰν ἔλθῃ might be used here, like ἐπειδὰν λήξῃ in p. 83, 4.— 
ins ar Gos whom he (Proxenus) himself (G. 989, 1 ; H. 680, 2) 
adi he tole io be worth more to him than his fatherland (Boeotia) : 
ἑαυτῷ see G. 993; 997; H. 683.a. 
Ἵ δ. 9. panes me (as a friend): cf. the act. en pig 
cuenta with (i.e. τῷ θεᾷ). — Σωκράπαι: the philosop ier, - 
dhs master and friend. — 11. ὑποπτεύσας μή. ᾿ μϑκι Ἡιη eS 
some charge of friendship with Cyrus igi be brough ao ΠΣ 
by the state (Athens): τι is adverbial. The gion bel ἦν ᾽ iyo 
γενέσθαι, Which expresses the substance of the possible ' " ῳ 54 ᾧ a 
évos σίνασθαι, Hdt. v. 27. —18. τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις (α. ᾿ : Sunes 
The Spartans were greatly aided by money ap by ain oe 
the last four years of the Peloponnesian War alors ᾿ - Psosbieiestes 
§§ 18, 20. — 14. ἐλθόντα : agreeing with the omitted is ject ce ee 
where ἐλθόντι might have been used (G. 928, 1).— 15. τῷ θεῷ : , 
the God of Delphi, the seat of the most famous oracle. Bea) ee 
$6. 16. ἐπήρετο: the aor. ἠρόμην (from ἔρομαι) is chante - - Ἢ es 
used in Attic Greek for the forms of the present stem. sia δ en - 
by sacrifice and prayer to which of the Gams: the diners st te ae 
τίνι θύων. . . κάλλιστα ἔλθοιμι ἂν THY oP ἣν Pai a ph pi pei 
— 6 G. 1057; H. 7156).—18. καλῶς mpagas : : 
NE γμολρη gave va oracle, responded, is ἘΠ a ae τὴ su | 
manding. —19. θεοῖς ots ols θεοῖς, to oa God; μή μα ἐπῆρ δος 
for accus. by inverse assimilation (G. 1035), a rare an 
on. 
pe τοῦτο : referring to the question lui ᾿ ΠῚ μὴ bee 
εἶναι, that he was bound to go, in direct form iréov Ἴ pais = Ἴ te ει 
- ὅπως ἂν πορευθείη : indirect question (G. 1493) : the 


1398 ; H. 872). 
ds ἃ θείην; how can I go? (G. ; ᾿ 
ey i naviols θύσασθαι ; the antecedent, if expressed, would be 


τοῖς θεοῖς. 


Page 83.] 1. ὁρμᾶν, fo set out: for ὁδόν, cf. ἔλθοι τὴν ὁδόν ᾿ p. 82,17: | 
for ἄνω see 6, 952, 1; H. 600.—2. συνεστάλθη, was presented. \ 


228 ANABASIS III. x. 9-17. 


Page 83.] 89, 3. συμπροὐθυμεῖτο, joined in urging. —4. ἐπειδὰν 
τάχιστα... λήξῃ... ἀποπέμψει (G. 1497 - H. 933). The English idiom 
does not allow us to follow the Greek and say he said that he will dismiss 
him ; so also we must translate ἐπειδὰν λήξῃ as if it were ἐπειδὴ λήξειεν, 
which would be more common after the past tense εἶπε (see p. 82, 6). 

$10. 6. ἐστρατεύετο οὕτως, in this way he came to 59 on the expedition. 
—ovx, not, however. — 10. φοβούμενοι... καὶ ἄκοντες (sc. ὄντες), though 
fearing, etc. (G. 1563, 6; H. 969e).—11. of wodXol (G. 967 ; H. 665) : 
see p. 59, 26. — 12, ἀλλήλων, Κύρου: obj. genitives after αἰσχύνην : cf. 
αἰσχύνεσθαι τινα, to feel shame before any one. 

ὃ 11, 15. μικρὸν ὕπνου λαχών (6. 1098 ; Η. 737).—16. σκηπτὸς πεσεῖν 
(G. 1522, 2; H. 944 a): the dream was σκηπτὸς ἔπεσεν. --- 18, πᾶσα; sc. 
οἰκία, subj. οὗ ἔδοξεν. See Introd. § 291, 


ὃ 12, 18. περίφοβος ἀνηγέρθη, he awoke (was roused) in great fear. — 
19. τῇ piv... τῇ δέ, in some respects. ..in others.—21. 8m... τὸ 
πῦρ is causal, and μὴ οὐ δύναιτο. εν ἀλλ᾽ εἴργοιτο depends on ἐφοβεῖτο. ---- 
23. βασιλέως : the king of Persia corresponds to King Zeus in his dream 
(21). — 24, εἴργοιτο was suggested by his being encircled (κύκλῳ) on all 
sides by the fire in his dream. 

$13. 25. ὁποῖόν... ἐστί, but what it signifies. —26. ἐκ τῶν συμβάντων, 
from what happened. — 27. πρῶτον pév: the only correlative is éx τούτου, 
p. 84, 11. 


Page 84.] 1. εἰκός (sc. ἐστί), it is likely. — et γενησόμεθα ἐπὶ βασιλεῖ, 


if we shall fall into the king’s hands. —2, χί ἐμποδὼν μὴ οὐχὶ... ἀποθα. 


νεῖν > (G. 1617; 1550; H. 1034 b), what is there to prevent, etc.? —3. ἐπι. 
δόντας, having experienced (come to see). —4. ὅπως ἀμυνούμεθα, to defend 
ourselves, object clause. —6. ὥσπερ ἐξόν, as if it were possible (G. 1576 ; 
H.*978 a). 
4Φ14, 8. ἐγὸ... πράξειν, from what state then am I expecting the gen- 
eral to come who is to do this ? τὸν... στρατηγόν --- (lit.) the general JSrom 
what state. Xenophon’s reflection was somewhat as follows: my own 
state (Athens) must supply the man; and if I am not old enough now to 
undertake the work, I never shall be. 
$15. 11. ἐκ τούτου, upon this.—13, ὥσπερ οὐδ᾽ ὑμεῖς (86. δύνασθε) : 
οἶμαι is parenthetical. — 14, ἐν οἵοις, in what straits, 
$16. 15. δῆλον (sc. ἐστίν) ὅτι, evidently (parenthetical). — οὐ πρό- 
Tepov... πρίν, not until (6. 1471, 2: H. 924): πρότερον is here merely 
emphatic, anticipating the idea of πρίν. Cf. uh πρόσθεν... πρίν in p. 4, 3, 
and note. — 16. ἐξέφηναν, declared. — 17, οὐδεὶς οὐδέν (G. 1619; H. 1030), 
S27. ἢ ὑφησόμεϑα, yield ourselves. — 20. ὅς : causal relative, since 
he. —21. wal... ἤδη, even when already dead. See note on p. 44, 11, — 


9 
ANABASIS III. 1. 17-21. 229 


Page 84.] 22. ἀνεσταύρωσεν, impaled, refers to vagal peo ἡ 
Cyrus on a pole. — ἡμᾶς : subject of παθεῖν (25). — 23. “ ne : ν ῳ 
protector, to intercede for us (as e.g. Cyrus had his mot ner). Ἴ 
δὲ ἐ j ν is omitted to avoid repeating the relative in & new ca 
a “1041; H. 1005) — 24. as ποιήσοντες, intending to make hima Here 
gee of a bea be ἄν with παθεῖν = πάθοιμεν ἄν (ἃ. 1308 i απ 
18, 26. dp’ otk... ἔλθοι, would he not make euery effort μα 
maa ?— τὰ ἔσχατα : cognate acounative, ἐπ sag pts : iy ta 
both ignominy and torture. —27. τοῦ στρατεῦσαι (ἃ. 1547; H. 
γγ ὁνανιάπημ ΜΙΆ : ὶ pentose PH the object clause keeps its con- 
3 its ¢ ject πάντα. 
Brae! eae pie peAagncRs — 4. οἰκτείρων, μακαρίζων 
“ ce HL. 981). — 5. αὐτῶν depends on the four aoa ee 
questions (ὅσην... ὅσα δέ) as if they were aq we Ph 1 ἡμμρθύνμῃ 
ταῦτα αὐτῶν after διαθεώμενος (cf. τὰ τῶν στρατιωτῶν in ia — 8. ira, 
clothing, in general. ὅσον is omitted with: χρυσόν and panies We 
δ 20. 8. τὰ τῶν στρατιωτῶν is explained by ὅτι. εν πη βηιδαι μῇ i 
and ταῦτ᾽ οὖν λογιζόμενος (15) sums up μι ΤᾺ ae t : is 4 fi 
ὑπό v, whenever I considered (G. 1431, 2; H. 2), 
Bt sr wren (14), were it not repeated in λογιζόμενος aa i govrars 
ἡμῖν (G. 1161; H. 754) μετείη εἰ μὴ πριαίμεθα : in direct ae a 5 
ἡμῖν μέτεστιν ἐὰν μὴ πριώμεθα (G.1431, 1; H. 894, 1).—10. zi ἤν ! ἐν Ν 
wherewith to buy (G. 1135; 1442; H. 746; 911); the anteceden shed ρ 
understood) follows ἔχοντας, I knew that few had, yeletinesta soot 
woupévous, from getting ink ipa cee ete 7 2 a py i 
ing κὶ τας, restraining. See Introd. é ii 
ie fas allie (ἃ. 1588; H. 982), by μαι papers 
takes the place of the construction begun by: ὅτι τῶν μέν (9) : Ν ae 
expect ὀλίγοι ἔχοιεν, etc., after Ἵ eit ‘ob and ὠνήσονται 
ich fc πριαίμεθαλ. 
pers ἼΣ se mgt eae (G. 1522, 2 "ἢ, μι ΜΝ et 
dorian: uncertainty, acc. to Hug, the original reading ο A Ἧι pes 
other Mss. have ὑποψία. ----δν μέσῳ κεῖται... adda, pies ets page 
to competition as prizes (as in the games) : cf. és ᾿ ad ae 
ponere), to offer as a prize, and ἐν μέσῳ (in another ee an 
Demosthenes (Phil. i. 5) calls certain exposed tit a λα εἰμ ἣν 
aS BIAS νῆδ oh ate: eae wagilib 4 being omitted.— 
i s rove to be the ’ 
aca καρ ὑαααι οι (in the games), keeping up the figure begun with 


ἐν μέσῳ. 


ANABASIS III. 1. 22-29, 


Page 85. 2 ὑτούς, i 
Mi g : ] ὃ 22. 20. αὐτούς, i.e. the Gods, by whom the Persians 
€ sworn falsely, ἐπιωρκήκασιν (G. 1049; H 712).— 22. θεῶν 6 
see p. 69, 8, and note 2: ean to gga i 
iy » 8, δὰ ote. —23. πολύ; in emphatic position, belongs to 
μ : vy Higa : in same construction as ἡμῖν understood after ἐξεῖναι 
» 24. ina ὑ | 
Mintel νώτερα τούτων ... φέρειν, more capable than theirs (lit. 
n they) of bearing (G. 1526; H. 952). —24. i θάλπη : plur. tc 
denote various occasions. —25, σὺ i i We eri Bake 
i us occasions. —25. σὺν τοῖς θεοῖς, by the blessing of the Gods, 
“. wl ἡ " 4 j 
a pic is precaution against the effects of proud language. σύν rarely 
occurs in Attic prose, except in Xe δ, 1917 ay 
~ sin pes : : 4 oe in Xenophon: see G. 1217. — 26. οἱ δὲ 
: 1é. the enemy. —27. qv... διδῶ > Gods 
nett Rea endl gig ,τ μμευῳὑα ἣν. διδῶσιν, if the Gods grant us, ete. 
ap a apodosis is implied in τρωτοί etc., more liable to be wounded 
a μ rhe Greeks took a just pride in their superior vigor of body 
nind. Ever since the Persian w i 
n aver since the Persian wars they had felt profound contempt 
or the effeminate Asiatics. i 
Page 86.] § ἀλλ᾽ ὴ ἦ 
" pi ane hi τ 3 ἀλλ᾽ ἴσως yap... ἀναμένωμεν, but let us not wait, 
τ μι 1 iil ny uers too, etc. ἀλλά and γάρ belong to different clauses ; 
ge vi a 7 ἀλλὰ γάρ is an emphatic but, with only one verb expressed : oa 
μῇ , . | . : : Ι ἵν wil * A 
I , 9, and note. —3. παρακαλοῦντας : future. —4. τοῦ ἐξορμῆ : 
gen. after ἄρξωμεν. --- 6. τῶν ὧν ἃ geoph 
bsg art ἡμεημι d στρατηγὼν aftorrparnydrepor, more fit to be 
rp 8 than the generals themselves : he is addressing only λοχαγοί 
» Oa : Xenoy ; ᾿ ! 
ΤῸ, ea : rs epee speaks as a young man ; and this passage 
avor: > jater date (about 430 B.c.) assigne is bi νὰν 
' : .C.) assignec 3 ic 
authorities place as early as 440 7 “ar τ εὴν re epee gied 
, i : or eve B.C. —axpafayv, that J 
at the heigh Sétas\ » dot . “al sg ra 
height (of my ability) ; ἐρύκειν (a poetic word) depending on the ide; 
of ability in ἀκμάζειν. weve 
ὃ 26. 12. ἡγεῖ > 8C. av 3 
Pagal ἐμ ΤΠ oe ΠΤ 13. βοιωτιάζων τῇ φωνῇ, with a Boeo- 
ccent : the Boeotians spoke Aeolic. — Av δ 
; | olic. apoin ὅστις λέ ; 
λυαρεῖ & . some 3s. ἢ sl μα 
ψ pe “re λέγει) : some Mss. have λέγοι, corresponding to ¢dvapoly 
one ἢ πείσας, otherwise than by persuading. 
" 6. 4 « , My . * * 
ys } “μεταξὺ ὑπολαβών, interrupting him in the midst (of his talk). — 
diy ὁρῶν... μέμνησαι: cf. [Dem.] 25, 89, τὸ τῆς παροιμίας alas 
} ὃ ~ " » " ἢ i? » / { a 
‘tl pay καὶ axovovras μὴ ἀκούειν, and Matth. xiii. 13.—18, ἐν ταὐτώ 
ih i | | ih ) | * nl ry .Ν»»Ψ 
7 1.6. you were present with these captains (G. 1175 ; H. 773 a): ef. 
εἰς ταὐτὸν ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς. Ὁ. 87. 6 ii ln 
ne ae Ρ. 87, 6. — 19. Compare ἐπεὶ K. ἀπέθανε, after Οὐ. was 
ane with bre ἐκέλευε, (Simply) when he commanded. — 20 ἐπὶ ἘΠῚ | 
Sor this (on this occurrence). ih 
§ 28. 22. 06 br w 
Moise VES.» GUTw, We came and encamped with him. —23 
οὐκ ἐποίησε ; what did he leave undone ἢ 
ν ῶ ῃ » »- | * rm 
29. 26. αὐτοῖς : dat. of union. — 27. οὐ νῦν οὐδὲ δύ 
' it : ᾿ "! ἢ Ἵ Ϊ Ἷ 7". @ νυν vvavrTra; 
(the οὐ is interrogative) are they not unable even to die? This does not 
come under the principle of G. 1619 ; H. 1030 


ANABASIS III. 1. 29-38. 931 


(sc. ἡμᾶς), that we should again go and try persuasion. 

$30. 4,5. mol... δοκεῖ, 1 think it best. See note on p. 14, 2. — 
ἢ. pare... Te: see note on p. 54, 20. —6. ἀφελομένους (SC. Huds)... 
χρῆσθαι : to deprive him of his command, lay packs upon him, and treat 
him as such (i.e. as a pack-bearer, σκευοφόρῳ). --- ὃ. πατρίδα, i.c. Boeotia. 

531. 11. τούτῳ... Βοιωτίας (G. 1161; H. 734). — 15. ὥσπερ Λυδόν: 
the Greeks considered it effeminate for men to wear ear-rings (see Smith’s 
Dict. of Antiq. 8.0. inauris) ; bored ears, therefore, marked a man as a 
barbarian. The Lydians were proverbially effeminate. Cf. note on 
p. 23, 10. -- ἀμφότερα... . τετρυπημένον, with both his ears bored ; ὦτα, 
ete., presupposes an active construction τρυπᾶν τὰ ὦτα αὐτῷ, to bore his 
ears for him (G. 1239). 

$32. 15. wapa... ἰόντες : see Introd. § 403 and § 30%. —émov.. . εἴη: 
gen. rel. cond. — 16. ὁπόθεν οἴχοιτο, ἵἴ.6. from whatever division the general 
had been lost (was gone, G. 1256; H. 827). —17. ὅπου δ᾽ αὖ λοχαγὸς σῶς 
εἴη implies that the two higher officers were lost. 

§ 33, 18. els... ὅπλων, at the front of the encampment (G. 1225, 1; 
H. 788): see Introd. ὃ 40% Cf. p. 81, 24. —19. éyévovro, amounted to 
(in number), not were. — 20. τοὺς ἑκατόν (G. 948 ; H. 004 ὁ). --- 21. μέσαι 


Page 87. 2. τούτου : i.e, τοῦ ἀποθανεῖν. ---. πείθειν πάλιν ἰόντας 


νύκτες, midnight: cf. p. 29, 16. 

$34, 24. αὐτοῖς is intensive (G. 990; H. 680, 3), referring to ἡμῖν : it 
seemed best to us, when we saw, .. . ourselves to meet, etc. — 26. dr... 
ἀγαθόν : we might have ὅ τι δυναίμεθα : cf. ἄν τι δύνωνται, p. 49, 27. — 
27. πρὸς ἡμᾶς : 86. ἔλεξας. 

Page 88.] § 35. 8. ἡμῶν : partitive after οὕς. --- 4. δῆλον ὅτι : see 
p. 84, 15. —5. fptv... ποιητέα (α. 1595; H. 989) : ἡμῖν δέ is correlated 
in form to ταῦτα μέν in 1, but in sense to βασιλεὺς καὶ T. in 2. — WB oes 
γενώμεθα (G. 1374, 2): Xenophon’s unattic use of ws in an obj. clause; 
see note on p. 2, 9, and cf. ws (final) in 4 (G. 1368). 

§36. 8. μέγιστον καιρόν, the grandest opportunity. — 11. αὐτοί τε; 
both on your own part (cf. αὐτοῖς, p. 87, 24), opposed to καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους in 
12. - παρασκεναζόμενοι, preparing (not prepared), with φανεροὶ ἦτε (G. 
1589; H. 981). 

$37. 15. τι, somewhat. —16. ταξίαρχοι : see Introd. ὃ 30%. —17. χρή- 
μασι, i.e. pay: see Introd. § 251.—19. ἀξιοῦν δεῖ (sc. τινά), we have a 
right to expect. — 20. τούτων : with πρό in comp. 

§ 38. 22. av... ὠφελῆσαι = ὠφελήσαιτε dv. — 25. ἀντικατασταθῶσιν : 


od hed ὁ 
* 


subjunct. in obj. clause. —26. as... εἰπεῖν, in a ward (G. 1534; 1172, 2; 
II. 956 ; 771b), limits the absolute force of οὐδαμοῦ.--- 21. παντάπασιν (sc. 
οὐδὲν ἂν γένοιτο): i.e, it is absolutely true in military matters. 


ANABASIS III. 1. 38 anp 2. 1, 


Page 89.] 2. ἀπολώλεκεν : gnomic perf. (G. 1295). 
$39. 2. dpxovras: see δὲ 46, 47 (below), and Introd. § 272, 


—4. ἂν 
ποιῆσαι : see p. 88, 22; 


we should expect ποιήσειν, to agree with the pre- 
ceding subjunctives. — πάνυ ἐν καιρῴ, quite seasonably. 

$40, 6. ὡς ἀθύμως, how without spirit, See Ρ. 81, 24.— 7. φυλακάς : 
see Introd. § 403, —otrw γ᾽ ἐχόντων (sc. αὐτῶν), at least while they are so 
(i.e. ἀθύμωο.. ---- ὅ τι, for what service (G. 1183; H. 777 a). —8. νυκτός : 
gen. of time. — δέοι : sc. χρῆσθαι. 

$41. 9. ds... ἐννοῶνται : final clause with ὡς (G. 1368) ; cf. p. 88, 4. 

$42. This section expresses what the battle of Cunaxa taught the 
Greeks, confirming the lesson of the old Persian wars. —12. #... 
ποιοῦσα, which causes, etc., subj. of ἐστίν, takes the gender of ἰσχύς, where 
we might have τὸ ποιοῦν. --- 13. ὁπότεροι ἂν ἴωσιν: gen. rel. condition. — 
14. ἐρρωμενέστεροι : compar. of perf. pass. partic. of ῥώννυμι, more vigor- 
ously. — 15. τούτους refers with emphasis to the omitted antecedent of 


ὁπότεροι (G. 1030): cf. οὗτοι in 18, and τούτους in 22.— ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολύ, 


generally, for the most part. — οὐ δέχονται, do not abide. 
$43. 17. ἐκ παντὸς τρόπου, in any way they can.—22. μᾶλλον... ἀφι- 
kvoupévous, are more apt to live to old age: partic. in indir. discourse, like 
23. ἕως ἂν ζῶσιν, while they live: gen. rel. condition. 
$44, 24. ἐν τοιούτῳ... ἐσμεν is parenthetical.—25. αὐτούς (sc. ἡμᾶς), 


διάγοντας in 23, — 


ourselves. — 26. παρακαλεῖν ; sc. ἀγαθοὺς εἶναι. 
ὃ 456, 28, Χειρί-σοφος : for the composition see G. 872; H. 575c. 
Page 90.] 1. τοσοῦτον... ἤκονον, I knew only so much of you as 
(that) I heard, etc. —2. ἐφ᾽ οἷς (G. 1082; H. 996 a). —3. βουλοίμην ἄν 
(G. 1327 end ; H. 903). — ὅτι πλείστους (like quam plurimos), as many as 
possible. See note on p. 2, 12. 
$46. 6. αἱρεῖσθε, etc.: imperat. — οἱ δεόμενοι, you who need them. — 
8. συγκαλοῦμεν : future (cf. p. 86, 3) 
$47. 9. ὁ κῆρυξ: the herald was to be ready to summon the soldiers. 
— 10. ἅμα. ... εἰπών, i.e. as he said this (ἃ. 1572; Η. 976). — 12. 
vebs, of Dardanus in the Troad. See Introd. § 231. 


Δαρδα- 


CHAPTER II. 


$1. 16. qpnvro: for the plupf. with ἐπεί, see note on p. $1, 8 — 
ὑπέφαινε, was glimmering: a common force of ὑπό in compos. is slightly 
(ἃ. 1219 end; H. 808 end). — 18, προφυλακάς (note the accent), pickets 
or sentinels; see Introd. § 405. -καταστήσαντας : for the case see 
G. 928, 1; H. 941. — 19, συνῆλθον : this assembly of soldiers is a demo- 
cratic body, to which the plans of the officers were submitted for ratifica- 


ANABASIS III. 2. 1-8. 


Page 90.] tion: see p. 99, 1, and Introd. § 273. --- 20, πρῶτος μέν cor- 
i τού 91, 4. 
»sponds only to ἐπὶ τούτῳ, p. 91], 
7 62 22. ὁπότε (causal), since. — 23. πρός (as adverb), besides, enforced 
by ἔτι (6. 1222, 1; H. 786). ---- 234. οἱ ἀμφὶ ᾿Αριαῖον, Ariaeus and his men 
IV € . Lhhhy 3 ° 
G. 952, 2; H. 791 end). | | i 
§ 3 25 ἐκ τῶν παρόντων, from these straits. See τὰ παρόντα in 22. 
26 ἄνδρας τελέθειν (8c. ἡμᾶς), we must come out brave men: τελέθειν " 
20, eve : | 
a poetic word = yiyverbat. — 27. ὅπως... σῳζώμεθα: ii cage on 1 
subj. for fut. indic. — 28. εἰ δὲ μή, otherwise: see note on p. 9», /. Ἷ 
ἀλλά “a yet at least (G. 1422). --- ἀποθνήσκωμεν and γενώμεθα (p. 91, 1) 
» ye 
depend on ὅπως (27), like σῳζώμεθα. 
aap 91. 1. ὑποχείριοι : see ἃ. 884; H. 588. — 2. inl ἐν 
ποιήσειαν, such things as I pray the Gods may do to our enemies (opt. ὁ 
? 
vish) : see 20. | 
: Η 4. ἐπὶ τούτῳ, upon this. —7. ὅστις λέγων, i.e. (a man) who, “sh 
he said, etc. ‘The speech of Tissaphernes is in ii. 3. 18-20. — 8. eas δ 
ἂν ποιήσαιτο, would hold it of the utmost consequence: the direct att 
ί πος ὑ upon a 
ί ὶ πλείστου ἂν ποιησαίμην. ---- 9. ἐπὶ τούτοις, 
was γείτων εἰμὶ καὶ περὶ π ᾿ ; ' ne 
this (in confirmation of it).— αὐτός : repeated with tragic rei a 
notice also the asyndeton. —11. Δία ξένιον : Ζεύς as the God Oe ae : y 
i th ib. 3.3 1. § 291. —12. av- 
and the protector of its rights. See li. 3. 28, and Introd. § 291, nike 
τοῖς τούτοις, by that very means, i.e. by being on intimate terms (ὁμοτρ 
" il " »» (Ὑ 4 
πεῖος) With Clearchus: see p. 10, 4. i HN 
eh 14. βασιλέα καθιστάναι : see ii. 1. 4. — ἐδώκαμεν καὶ pie 
(G. 1041; H. 1005): if pronouns had been expressed here, they wen ( 
μῶν μόλῃ αὐτῳ and παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ, not relatives (G. 1040). --- 1ῦ. a uni : 
cf. παρέξειν in p. 62, 1,.and note. —Kal οὗτος, even he. —18. ἡμᾶς κακῶς 
οιεῖν (G. 1074; H. 712). ie Mt 
i § 6 20. ρον ότὸ, requite (G. 1507; H. 870) : ἀπο- ΕΑΝ wai ren 
dering what is due. —21. ἔτι, any longer. — 22. ὡς ἂν δυνήμεθα pak 
as vigorously as we shall be able: by an ellipsis of ay δυνώμεθα We 8 oe 
have the common expression ws κράτιστα, etc., as vigorously as possible, 
etc. 
§7. 24. érradpévos, arrayed: this was Xenophon’s first appearance 
before the army as general. — 26. κόσμον, ornament, refers to his dress. 
27. τῶν καλλίστων τυγχάνειν, that, as he had thought himself 
wml A Ie Ὃ»ν»ν Ἶ 
worthy of (wearing) the most beautiful equipments, so he should meet death 
in these. 
γὼ 92.] § 8. 5. αὐτοῖς διὰ φιλίας ἱέναι, fo enter into Friendship 
with them, like διὰ δίκης ἐλθεῖν τινι, to go to law with one, and (in gn 
παντὸς πολέμου αὐτοῖς ἱέναι, to go to war with them in every way (α. 1 


234 ANABASIS III. 2. 8-12. 


Page 92.] H.772a).—6. ὁρῶντας... πεπόνθασιν, i.e. seeing what the 
generals have suffered ; see note on p. 2,8. — 8. ὧν : its antecedent would 
be gen. after δίκην, punishment for what they have done: the antecedent 
is (as in the English what) implied in the relative. — 9. τὸ λοιπόν, 
adverbial, for the future (G. 1060; H. 719 b). 

$9. 14. τὸν θεόν, i.e. Δία Σωτῆρα (see 16). — 15, περὶ σωτηρίας ἡμῶν 
λεγόντων : the sneeze, thought to be an omen sent by Ζεὺς Σωτήρ, came 
just when they were talking of σωτηρία (11). — 16. οἰωνός, omen: see 
Aristoph. Birds, 720, πταρμόν τ᾽ ὄρνιθα καλεῖτε, you call a sneeze a bird (i.e. 
an omen). Sneezing is still regarded as ominous in many countries. See 
Introd. § 291, — εὔξασθαι, to vow, depends on δοκεῖ, it seems good. — 
17. θύσειν σωτήρια, to make thank-offerings for safety (ἃ. 1052; H. 716). 
This vow was performed at Trapezus: see iy. 8. 25. — 18, συνεπεύξασθαι, 
at the same time (συν-) to make further (ex-) vows. —19. θύσειν : depends 
ON συνεπεύξασθαι. --- 20. dvaravarw: an appeal to the citizen soldiers. 
In the Athenian Assembly most questions were decided by a show of 
hands (χειροτονία). 

$10. 24. ἐμπεδοῦμεν, hold firm (ἔμπεδος, from ἐν and médov). —26. οὕτω 
δ᾽ ἐχόντων (sc. τῶν πραγμάτων), quae cum ita sint. — 28. οἵπερ : causal 
rel. (G. 1461; H. 910). 

Page 93.] $11. 3. Ἔπειτα δέ: see πρῶτον μέν, p. 92,24. A long 
parenthesis, ἀναμνήσω... ἀγαθοί, follows, after which the construction 
is resumed in ἐλθόντων μὲν γάρ in 6, without reference to ἔπειτα. — ἀνα- 
μνήσω in 3 takes two accusatives (G. 1069; H. 724); for the accus. and 
gen. see G. 1106; H. 742 ὃ. --- 4. ἀγαθοῖς (G. 928,1; H. 941). --- 8, ὡς 
ἀφανιούντων, to blot Athens out of existence (G. 1574; H. 978). — αὐτοί 
implies that the Athenians took upon themselves the responsibility of 
meeting the Persians, with no help from others. — 9. ἐνίκησαν : i.e. at 
Marathon (490 n.c.). 

$12. 9. εὐξάμενοι : nom. as if a personal verb meaning they resolved 
were to follow, in place of ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς. --- 10. ὁπόσους κατακάνοιεν : 
representing ὁπόσους ἂν κατακάνωμεν of the direct form. —11. χιμαίρας : 
trace the origin of the English word chimaera. — 13. ἀποθύουσιν, they are 
still (after ninety years) fulfilling that sacrifice. According to Herodotus 
(vi. 117), the number of Persians slain at Marathon was about 6400. 
The Athenians had vowed to sacrifice to Artemis ‘Ayporépa as many 
goats as they should slay of the Persians ; they afterwards voted to sub- 
stitute for a single sacrifice of this large number of goats an annual one 
of five hundred. The essay on the Malignity of ITerodotus, included in 
Plutarch’s Morals, 26, describes this sacrifice as still kept up more than 
five centuries after Xenophon’s time. 


ANABASIS III. 2. 13-20. 235 


Page 93.] ὃ 13. 13. ἔπειτα corresponds to ἐλθόντων “se ἣν ey 
14. ἀναρίθμητον : Herodotus (vii. 185) makes the ner mp ἠνυμιμωνη 
ing men (μάχιμοι) in the armament of ae 2,641,610 ie et ere: 
the number of camp-followers (vii. 186) as even greater than = rl 
numbers are, of course, immensely exaggerated Mig ene fe tren i 
15. καὶ τότε, then too (as well as at Marathon), referring 10 asa 
Salamis (480 n.c.), and at Plataea and Mycale (479 B.c., mat ere 
day). —17. ἔστι ὁρᾶν, we may see (G. 1517 - H. ea ps tai εἰ - 
(G. 916; H. 726). — 20. ἀλλὰ τοὺς ret, but (only) the .— 21. 
yer “21, eae “δὴ nay pone " I have no idea of telling you that 
you heorone them (your ancestors). —23. ἀφ᾽ ov, since. — 24. ἐκείνων: the 

Ι tine Seger 
Bete a oe ely Ἴ ω belongs to the two compar. in 2; ¢f. 21 

5 —2. ἀμείνονας : see iii. 1. 22. 
ae 5. sw (sc. dv): indir. dincoure:. ie els, ace pep 
stronger than the more common ἐπί. --- 7. ὅτι οὐ eg seine 
idea of knowing implied in πεῖραν ἔχετε. --- καὶ ὄντες : spain re) one ya 
(G. 1573; H. 979). — 8. δέχεσθαι ὑμᾶς, to abide your attack. — ὑμῖν : 
might have had ὑμᾶς as subj. of φοβεῖσθαι : 888 line 1. so ΛΝ ΔΝ μι 

8 17. 9. μήδε. .. εἰ, nor suppose (G. 1346; Η. oF diy shape 
worse for this, that, etc. (G. 1423; H. 026).'— 30s) st geil : pane: 
barian troops of Cyrus. — 12. ἐκείνους refers to τῶν ἡττημένων : : os 
to them for refuge implied (Xen. means) that the refugees Pa Phi 
greater cowards. —14. ταττομένους (ἃ. 1582; H. 982); not indir. ; 

x RQ Ml 

ἡ" κῃ i 17. ἐνθυμήθητε : plural, as if ὑμεῖς had preceded in ithe pte 

ris. — οἱ μύριοι ἱππεῖς : the article here implies ᾿ς δ» Πρ i 

familiar one; 680 in English, your ten thousand iain (Cros a ὄν 

argument against cavalry, like some other wenn in this speech, 
piece of humor, intended to amuse the Gichonevenes army. cde! 

819, 21. ἱππέων : gen. of compar. after πολὺ yeaa iva 

κότες, on our feet. — 26. τευξόμεθα, shall hit. —27. ἡμᾶς : προέχειν y 

akes the itive ; here the accusative. 
pes an iod ph 1. εἰ belongs to both clauses, ras ag "»» wi 
and ὅτι δὲ... ἄχθεσθε. --- μάχας (G. 1049; H. 112). — ὅτι ua ae Hi 
summed up in τοῦτο (3). — 2. ἡμῖν ἡγήσεται, ἫΝ be our ite gir 

sense ἡγοῦμαι takes the dative of advantage. — 9. Φανερόε wi : Ὁ 

(6. 1689 ; H. 981). -- οὗς . .. ἄνδρας for ἄνδρας ovs. —ovs ἂν .. de ae 

. .«- κελεύωμεν, i.e. any men whom we may capture (on the rt eine 

to act as guides. —6. ἤν tr... ἁμαρτάνωσι, if they commu any 


ANABASIS III. 2. 20-24. 


Page 95.] against us.—7. τὰς Wuxds καὶ σώματα, their own lives and 
bodies: the meaning is that such guides will fear death or a beating 
enough to make them faithful. See an instance in point in iv. 1.23, and 
Introd. ὃ 282. With nouns of different genders the article is usually 
repeated. 

ὃ 21, 8. πότερον κρεῖττον (sc, éorl) is part of the indirect question 
depending on σκέψασθε in 3. — 10. μηδὲ... ἔχοντας, when we no longer 
have even this (i.e. ἀργύριον), i.e. being now without pay. —11. αὐτούς 
(sc. ἡμᾶς), ourselves. — 12. ὁπόσῳ... βούληται, i.e. using whatever meas- 
ures we please. See Introd. § 262. 

§ 22. 12. et δέ introduces three verbs. — 13. κρείττονα, for our advan- 
tage. — ἄπορον, perplexing (a perplexing thing). — 14. peyddws... ϑια- 
βάντες, suppose yourselves to have been greatly deceived by having crossed 
them, as when they crossed the Tigris (ii. 4. 24). — 15. σκέψασθε el, we 
should say, whether they have not, etc. —pwperarov (sc. bv), predicate 
adj. (G. 971; H. 670): he implies rather obscurely that the Persians will 
compel the Greeks to stay longer in their country by obliging them to 
ascend to the source of each river in order to cross it. —17. πηγῶν 
(ἃ. 1149; Η. 757). — προιοῦσι (sc. τισί), t.e. if we proceed. — 18. οὐδέ, 
without even. 

$23. 19. διήσουσιν (from διίημι), let us pass (G. 1405; H. 899). — 
20. οὐδ᾽ ὥς (ὡς --- οὕτως), not even then (80) : see G. 138, 3; H. 284. — 
ἀθυμητέον (sc. doriv) = δεῖ ἀθυμεῖν. ---- 21. Μυσούς, the Mysians, of N. W. 
Asia Minor, rebellious subjects of the king, and only half subdued. The 
Pisidians and Lycaonians (mentioned below) inhabited the rugged south- 
erly part of Asia Minor. — 24. καὶ αὐτοὶ εἴδομεν, we even saw for our- 
selves, i.e. when we marched through their country (see i. 2. 19). — 
26. τούτων : meaning the Persians. —kaprotvra, reap for themselves: 
the nouns which would naturally be the subjects of this verb are attracted 
into the preceding clauses, and made the Objects of ἐπιστάμεθα and εἴδομεν 
(see p. 92, 6). 

Page 96.] ὃ 24. 1. καὶ ἡμᾶς : emphatic. — ἂν ἔφην, I should say 
(i.e. if I were not afraid): see ἀλλὰ δέδοικα in 9, —2. ὡρμημένους : after 
φανερούς (G. 1589; H. 981), i.e. we ought not yet to let it be seen that we 
have set out for home. -- κατασκευάζεσθαι depends on χρῆναι. --- 3. ds... 

οἰκήσοντας, as if we intended to settle hereabouts, i.e. declaring by our acts 
that this is our purpose. —4. Mugots... ἂν δοίη : i.e. if they would take 
them. — 5. ἄν before ὁμήρους belongs to δοίη understood (G. 1313; 863). 
— rot... ἐκπέμψειν : gen. depending on ὁμήρους (G. 1547; H. 959), hos- 
tages for his sending; the fut. infin. in all constructions with the article 
_ is exceptional (G. 1277), the present or aorist being far more common. 


ANABASIS IIL 2. 2431. 237 


Page 96.] (See Moods and Tenses, §§ 111-113.) — 7. ἂν és ey he 
would be thrice-glad to do this. — οἶδ᾽ ὅτι is parenthetical, i” usual. — 
8, μένειν κατασκευαζομένους, preparing (not prepared) to remain. | 

§ 25. 9. ἀλλὰ γάρ, but (I do not say this, ¢f. ἔφην ἄν in 1) ns ay 
p. 86, 1. — 10. ἀργοί (G. 927; H. 940). — ζῆν : for the form see G. 
Hl. 412. —11. καλαῖς καὶ μεγάλαις, fair and tall, the — neg : 
female beauty. ‘‘Small people,’’ says Aristotle (Eth. iv. 3: si may e@ 
pretty and well proportioned, but not beautiful.”’ ii 12. μή be ee grsiel 
is merely a repetition of μή after δέδοικα. --- λωτοφάγοι, lotus-eaters ; a 
tasting of the sweet tropical lotus flower, the companions of Ulysses los 


all care for home. See Odyss. ix. 94, 95:— 


τῶν δ᾽ ὃς Tis λωτοῖο φάγοι μελιηδέα καρπόν, 
οὐκέτ᾽ ἀπαγγεῖλαι πάλιν ἤθελεν οὐδὲ νέεσθαι. 


§ 26. 16. ἐξόν, since it is in their power (G. 1569; H. 973), si ~ 
cause of ἑκόντες πένονται. --- τοὺς . . . πολιτεύοντας, tose whe now eee 
at home: object of ὁρᾶν. --- 17. κομισαμένους πλουσίους ὁρᾶν, ay to od 
them here and see them rich. κομισαμένους might have ΤΠ 
of αὐτοῖς (G. 928, 1; H. 941). —19. τῶν κρατούντων (ἃ. 1094, 1; H. 732 a): 


possessive. | 
§ 27. 20. ὅπως av belongs to both πορευοίμεθα and μαχοίμεθα, which are 


potential optatives in an indirect question (G. 1327 ; H. 872). — 24. ἡμῶν 


follows στρατηγῇ, that our campaign may not be directed by ihe inno 
(G. 1109; H. 741). —25. συμφέρῃ : 80. πορεύεσθαι. --- συγκατακαῦσαι : SC. 
yo 97. 1. ὄχλον παρέχουσιν ἄγειν (G. 1530 H. 952), ον wissen 
to carry, i.e. are troublesome to carry. —2. εἰς i μάχεσθαι (G. 1546 ; 
H. 959). — οὐδὲν. .. οὔτε. .. οὔτ᾽ (G. 1619; H. 1030). Beatie 
ξ 28. 4. ἀπαλλάξωμεν, let us abandon. See iii. 3. 1, and ἡμήγμν liye 
—T7. κρατουμένων πάντα, all that belongs to οὐπρμεγοά — ce 
11. 966): he avoids saying ἣν μὲν κρατώμεθα. -- ἀλλότρια, forfeit (anoth ‘ 
¢ : with two accus. 
Be gecpinis (λείπω), it remains (sc. ἐστίν). — 11. ov πρόσθεν " ᾿ 
πρίν, not... until (G. 1471, 2; Η. 924): the preceding ἀν eR 
sizes πρίν. --- 18, ὄντων . . « πειθομένων, while we had our officers and obey 
them. — 16. ἀπολέσθαι ἄν, that we should be ruined (ἀπόλοιντο ἄν). ae 
§ 30. 17. τοὺς viv... τῶν πρόσθεν (G. 952, 2; H. 666 a). ene 
emphatic position of rods viv. — 19. ar ON μᾶλλον; more 0 : 
ac ative corresponding to εὐτακτοτέρους. 
7 eee ‘eae (sc. δεῖ), we must vote. — τὸν del —_— 
(subj. of κολάζειν), whoever of you may be at hand at the time. — 22. ε 


238 ANABASIS III. 2. 31-39. 


Page 97.] σμένοι ἔσονται (G. 706 ; H. 467 a), will find themselves deceived 
(will have been deceived). —23. rots... εἶναι, men who will suffer no 
man to be a coward. — 24. κακῷ (G. 928, 1; H. 941). 

$32. 24. περαίνειν dpa (G. 1521; H. 952), time for action, —28. βέλτιον 
ἢ ταύτῃ, better than doing as I propose. —xal ὁ ἰδιώτης : see Introd. 
§ 272. 

Page 98.] ὃ 34. 6. ὧν προσδοκεῖ μοι (sc. ποιεῖν), i.e. what I have 
Surther (rpoc-) to propose. 

$35. 11. τοὺς παριόντας, those who pass by (without attacking them), 
opposed to τοὺς διώκοντας. ---- 12, εἰ καὶ αὐτοί, if they themselves likewise 
(xai), resumes the construction begun by εἰ of πολέμιοι (10), and broken by 
the parenthesis. For εἰ καί we should expect ovrws, referring to ὥσπερ (10). 
— 13. ἡμῖν (G. 1179; H. 775). 

δ. 86, 14. πλαίσιον, a hollow Square or rectangle with a front (ra 
πρόσθεν), two sides or flanks (πλευραί), and a rear (ra ὄπισθεν) : within 
this the baggage and the camp-followers (ὄχλος) were to be placed. — 
τῶν ὅπλων, i.e. of the ὁπλῖται, or heavy infantry. —16. εἰ... πλαισίου, 
if then it should be settled at once who is to lead the square: ἀποδείκνυμι, 
show forth or manifest, hence appoint. —19. ὁπότε ἔλθοιεν (G. 1346 : ᾿. 
917).—20. χρῴμεθ᾽ Gv... τεταγμένοις, i.e. we should find them at once in 
their places ready for action. For the hollow square and its formation, 
see Introd. § 37 and Figure 8, 

8. 87. 22. εἰ δέ, otherwise, sometimes used like εἰ dé μή (G. 1417; 
H. 906 δ), which is the common reading here, corrected by Hug from 
Cod. C. See Greek Moods and Tenses, ἃ 4782. — ἡγοῖτο and the two fol- 
lowing optatives express an exhortation in the form of a wish: this is 
rather a poetic usage (G. 1510; H. 870). — 23. Λακεδαιμόνιος : as the 
Lacedaemonians were now (after the Peloponnesian War) the first power 
in Greece. — 26. τὸ viv εἶναι, for the present (G. 1535; H. 956 a). Xeno- 
phon and Chirisophus are now the most important leaders. See Introd. 
§ 231, 

$38. 27. ὅ τι ἂν ἀεὶ δοκῇ, whatever may seem in each case (del): cond. 
relative clause, not indirect question. — 28, et... ὁρᾷ, if any one (now) 
Sees, present condition like ὅτῳ δοκεῖ, p. 99, 1: cf. p. 99, 3 and 8. 

Page 99.] 2. ἔδοξε ταῦτα, they voted this: see note on p. 16, 11. 

$39. 3. τὰ δεδογμένα, what has been voted.—éons... ἐπιθυμεῖ : like 
εἴ τις ἐπιθυμεῖ (8). —4. μεμνήσϑω εἶναι, let him be mindful to be: μεμνήσθω 
ὧν would mean let him be mindful that he is (G. 1592, 2; H. 986). — 
6. τῶν νικώντων : possessive. —8. καὶ εἴ τις δέ: see note on p. 1, 7.— 
10. σῴζειν, λαμβάνειν : cf. the two infinitives with τό in 7 (G. 1541), 


ANABASIS III. 3. 1-7. 


CHAPTER III. 


Page 99.] § 1. 12. κατέκαον, proceeded to burn.—13, ὅτου : gov- 


erned by δέοιτο and limited by περιττῶν (cf. iii. 2. 28), cgi of the 
spare articles : its antecedent is the object of peredidocay. —17. els ἐπήκοον, 


vithi ring (ἀκούω). inh 
j re ey ee i χρόνον), tarrying. — 22. καὶ ὦ» ἔχων, ἐκ. ae 
with me (having also). — 23. ὡς φίλον τε καὶ εὔνουν (se. ὄντα) ἅ} βον ὅ- 
μενον, as (assuming me to be) a Friend, etc. (G. 1574; H. shi wit : rag 
$3. 24. Bovdevdpevors ἔδοξεν, i.e. they voted in council. — 26. ε “an 
τις ἐᾷ, if we are allowed, i.e. if there is μ one to prevent μαι a sin 
supposition (cf. 1).— 27. ὡς ἂν δυνώμεθα ἀσινέστατα : full form o fi 
more common ws ἀσινέστατα, i.e. doing as little harm as may be possible. 
— 28. ἣν δέ τις. . . ἀποκωλύῃ, but if any one (for instance, Tissaphernes) 
shall try to hinder us (future cond.) : ¢f. εἰ μέν τις in 26. See p. 20, 8. 

Page 100.] 1. διαπολεμεῖν, to fight it out ee), 

§ 4, 3. βασιλέως ἄκοντος (sc. dvros). —4. ὑπόπεμπτος fonser ys the 
force of ὑπό in compos.), sent in an underhand way 3 866 note on ὑπέφαινε, 
p. 90, 16. —5. πίστεως ἕνεκα, fo secure good faith, i.e. on the part of 
Br ip sane πόλεμον ἀκήρυκτον εἶναι, that the war should be nuove 
heralds (i.e. one in which no messengers were to be received from the enemy): 
ἀκήρυκτος with πόλεμος generally means implacable, truceless. — ἔστ. μ" 
εἶεν, 80 long as they should be in the enemy’s country, the direct pi oO 
the resolution (δόγμα) being ἔστ᾽ ἂν ὠμεν (G. 1434; H. 916). =e διέφθει- 
pov, they (the Persians) kept trying to corrupt: τ. διέφθειραν in 9.—10. 
ῴχετο ἀπιών, he was off (G. 1587: see Introd. § 23). | 
86, 12. Ζαπάταν, the river Zab (see the map). They had arrived at 
the left bank of this river before the massacre of the generals (see ii. 5: 1). 
Near by is the field of Arbela, where Alexander finally defeated Darius 
in 330 B.c. We see by ἀριστήσαντες (12) that the march did not begin 
until the afternoon. — 14. ἐν μέσῳ : sc. τῷ πλαισίῳ. See Introd. § 37. 

8 7. 21. ἐτίτρωσκον belongs to both of μέν and οἱ δέ. --- 22. ἔπασχον 
κακῶς : as passive οὗ ἐποίουν κακῶς (G. 1074; Η. 820). — 23. Κρῆτες : 200 
Cretan bowmen are mentioned in i. 2. 9. — 24. κατεκέκλειντο : this does 
not mean that the Cretans shot from within the square over the a of 
the hoplites; but it adds to βραχύτερα ἐτόξευον a second reason for ἀντε- 
ποίουν οὐδέν in 22, that the bowmen were unable to come out from the 
hollow square. — 25. βραχύτερα. .. σφενδονητῶν, shot too short to reach 
the (Persian) slingers: the ἀκοντισταί were outside of the square. See 


Introd. ὃ 37 end. 


240 ANABASIS III. 3. 8-18, 


Page 100.] §8. 26. διωκτέον elvar: the direct form is ἡμῖν (or ἡμᾶς) 
διωκτέον ἐστίν. ---- 27, The subj. of ἐδίωκον is the omitted antec. of of (28), 
on which depend the partitives ὁπλιτῶν and πελταστῶν. ---- 28. ὀπισθοφυ- 
λακοῦντες : see Introd. § 374, 

Page 101.} ὃ 9. 3. ἐκ πολλοῦ, with a long start: ef. p. 124, 16. — 
4. οὐχ οἷόν τε, not possible (G. 1024 ὃ; H. 1000). 

$10. 6. καὶ φεύγοντες ἅμα, even while they were in flight (G. 1572; 
H. 976 a).—els τοὔπισθεν (rd ὄπισθεν), behind them, in the proverbial 
** Parthian”? style. —7. διώξειαν (6. 1431, 2; H. 914 B). —8. érravay wpeiv 
μαχομένους : because the Persian cavalry turned upon them when they 
began to retire. —9. ἔδει, they were obliged. 

δ 11, 9. τῆς ἡμέρας ὅλης, during the whole day, time ‘‘ within which” 
(ἃ. 1136; H. 759): so δείλης (10), at some time in the evening. —10. ets 
τὰς κώμας : see iii. 2. 34. —13. καὶ αὐτός, even in person. —14. οὐδὲν 
μᾶλλον : he could no more harm them (than if he had not pursued them). 

$12. 16. ἡτιῶντο, .. μαρτυροίη : he said ὀρθῶς ἡτιᾶσθε (G. 1482; 
H. 935) καὶ... μαρτυρεῖ. Translate, he said that they had blamed him 
rightly, and that the result itself bore witness to them. —19. ἀντιποιεῖν : 
see p. 100, 22. 

$13. 20. ἀληθῆ λέγετε, i.e. you are right as to what then took place. 

$14. 28. χάρις: sc. ἔστω. --- 24. ὥστε βλάψαι (G. 1450; H. 953). — 
μεγάλα (G. 1054; H. 716d). 

$15. 26. ὅσον (sc. τοσοῦτον), through such a distance as (G. 1062; 
H. 720), i.e. so far that. —27. of ἐκ χειρὸς βάλλοντες, i.e. hurlers of the 


javelin. 


Page 102.] 3. ἐκ τόξου piparos, i.e. if he had a bow-shot the start of 
him: cf. ἐκ πολλοῦ, p. 101, 3. 

$16. 3. ἡμεῖς with μέλλοιμεν, instead of ἡμῖν with δεῖ (6). --- εἰ μέλ- 
λοιμεν, if we should propose, would naturally have an opt. with dv in the 
apodosis: here de? has a future sense. See Moods and Tenses, § 500. — 
5. τὴν ταχίστην (G. 1060; H. 719 a). —8. διπλάσιον φέρεσθαι, flies (is 
carried) twice as far.—9. σφενδονῶν (G. 1154 ; H. 755 a): see Dict. 

$17. 9. χειροπληθέσι : pred. adj., the idea being because the stones 
they use in slinging are of hand-size (i.e. so large). — 11. μολυβϑδίσιν, 
leaden slugs: see Introd. § 314. 

$18. 12. αὐτῶν: depends on the indir. question rives. . . σφενδόνας ; 
see note on αὐτῶν, p. 85, 5. But αὐτῶν here may depend on rives. (See 
Rehdantz’s note on iii. 1. 19.) — πέπανται (see fut. πάσομαι), have; cf. 
κέκτηνται. --- 13, τούτῳ, to such a one, as if τίνες (12) had been rls. — 
αὐτῶν : i.e. for the slings. - ἀργύριον, money: this may have come from 
private supplies of the officers, — 15. Te... ἐθέλοντι, to any one who is 


2, 
ANABASIS IIL 3. 18 anp 4. 5. 241 


Page 102.] willing to act as slinger where he may be ret ὙΠ 
τεταγμένῳ). --- 106. ἄλλην τινὰ ἀτέλειαν, some exemption besides (perhaps 
ym severer Cé duty). ih 
pee isgeraaes el i.e. a few. —19. τῶν Κλεάρχου : anit 
see Introd. § 301. — καταλελειμμένους, i.e. not ounied away by nit 
cavalry who deserted (see ii. 2. 7). ---20. αἰχμ-αλώτους : rea 
21. σκενοφόρα, i.e. mules, in place of (ἀντῇ iat age : ke 

ἱππέας, for (the proposed) cavalry. —23. τοὺς φεύγοντας : such as 


mentioned in §§ 9 and 10. 
$20. 24. σφενδονῆται : these were the first slingers in the Greek 


army: see Introd. § 30! and ὃ 374, —26. ἐγένοντο, eet ee 
ἐδοκιμάσθησαν, were accepted (tested): this implies tha 16 RK ps 
were approved after some test, δοκιμασία being the piri i 
officers of state at Athens must pass before taking office. ᾿ uli : 
also a δοκιμασία εἰς ἄνδρας, to test the qualifications of eee : — 
the Senate had charge of a δοκιμασία of those who isha . en ine 
cavalry service and of their horses. — 26. σπολάδες : the leat μα τ 
was unusual for a horseman, the metal θώραξ si spi y 
See ἱππεύς in Dict., and Introd. ὃ 31%, Cf. p. 111, 15, — 27.- ἵτπαρχος : 
see Introd. § 50°. 
CHAPTER IV. 


Page 103.] 81. 1. τῇ ἄλλῃ, the next day, for τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ. yet μα 
Spav: the bed of a mountain stream, generally dry 5 such pnt ὃ 
now often. used as roads in Greece. —3. ἐπιθοῖντο (G. 741; Η. 5 ) ; 

8.2, 4. ϑιαβεβηκόσι, after they had oer ; tomponnt partic. : il 
διαβαίνουσιν in 4.—7. ὑποσχόμενος --. - i Cl his promise sare 
λάβω, παραδώσω : we might os = εἰ \dBo. —9. καταφρονήσας, 
᾿ pise (G. 1260; H. 841 α). 
ee magpie about K lit. (as much) as. 16, παρήγγελτο, ee had 
been given.—14. ots: subject of διώκειν. —15. θαρροῦσι a " 8 
to pursue boldly, as a sufficient force was to follow (G. 1574; Π. ‘ 
Se d. § 37 end. 

7 “age soho sc. αὐτούς. --- 18. ἐσήμηνε : 86. 0 PEI pi 
897, 4; H. 602c). See Introd. ὃ 432, —19. ols εἴρητο, those w αἱ" ᾿ 
received orders, as subject of ἔθεον : see a and εἴρητο in ὃ ὁ. 

i δέ 983 a: H. 654 e), and they, i.e. the enemy. 

ii a ae atm i.e. on the part of the barbarians ee pease 
24. αὐτο-κέλευστοι, i.e. without orders ; cf. αὐτό-ματος, Ρ. 9, 2, and sot 
μολος, p. 29, 21. ---ὅτι φοβερώτατον ὁρᾶν (G. _ ; ‘ai 952), as frig 

as possible to behold (sc. τὸ ὅραμα). See Introd. ὃ 28%. 


49 
242 ANABASIS III. 4. 7.10. 


Page 104 
Ai ne 11 $7. 4, Λάρισσα : this name was given to many ancient 
“μι ' Ἂ among others to the citadel of Argos: the word is sometimes 
our r © τε nite . ᾿ bill . | 
at to mean “citadel” or “fortress.”” The Larissa here mentioned 
8 1e site Ἰ Ἴ Nim? 3 
ihn Ἴ called “Nimrud,”? where stood the “ great city’’ called 
¢ a 1 3) ον ὦ ἐν ζ " ᾿ | 
7 a in ΤῊ (x. 11, 12), about eighteen miles south of Nineveh 
tween Nineveh and Calah stood νὴ 
valah stood another “great city,’’ Res i i 
egeleogndi aa : g y; esen (Genesis 
Ὶ | cane hame possibly suggested Xenophon’s name Larissa See 
note on Μέσπιλα in 19. —5 rently height 
Ὁ. —5. τὸ πάλαιον, ancientl 9. τὸν Ὶ 
lie » anciently. —9. τὸ ὕψος, in height 
iF 77 ; H. Τ18) : so τὸ εὖρος and τὸ ὕψος in 14 and 15 ᾿ 7 
" 5 9. βασιλεύς, i.e. Cyrus the Great: see note on 10. --- 19 veer 
| | wil hi . Ze : 
e cloud hiding the sun”’ was an eclipse. — ἐξέλιπον : sc. τὴν πόλ ‘ 
eclipse being considered an evil omen. i 7 
$10. 19 »pposite 
Wd i : π᾿ (opposite Mosul): the ruins here seen were the 
shler part of the S. W. side of the ci r Ni . i 
» S. W. side 16 Clty of Nineveh, the splendi i 
of the Assyrian empire. T " “a li ie 
ere syrian empire. The city on this side, towards the Ticris was 
i.e Γ Η oy ὃ ἡ ' i 
ir and a half miles long, and the whole circuit of the it was 
about eight miles. Diodorus Si ii | ein 
ο 1168. odorus Siculus (ii. 3) describe ineve ) 
agli vite scribes Nineveh as 15 
Cc ) : as 150 
sage ir ninety broad, with a circuit of 480 stadia or about fifty 
six miles. This must have i | a 
Ξ > included Calah, now Ni 5 i 
1 Cz imrud (ἢ 7), with Res 
and other adjacent towns i nace 
“r adjacent towns, which could never have bese ithi 
‘ x ver have been within tl 
wall with Nineveh itse iN i : gue 
Ἢ itself. The distance of Ni 
st of Nimrud from Mespi 
borat chau ig | espila, about 
: teen miles, agrees with the length of 150 stadia given by Diodoies 
Ww 10 or} 4g ‘v2 . ᾿ * Py i i 
ce 8 ves to Nineveh the same circuit, 480 stadia, which Heroddine 
᾿ (8) gives to Babylon. Aristotle (Pol. iii. 3. 5) says it was report i 
8 ͵ “Ἱ tf rig ron wae pt ip μὴ 
μ at sae was captured, the news had not reached all parts of 
ne city afte D day : cg 
τ od 4 two days. — Μῆδοι... ᾧκουν : the Assyrian empire was 
* =a by the Medes, with the help of the Babylonians, before 600 
(See Rawlinson’s Ancient Monarchies, Vol. II. p. 391.) Nineveh 
howeve as not destroye ᾿ i me 
gf r, was not destroyed, but remained a part of the Median empire 
l 8 yo ᾿ ᾿ νζ΄ γ᾽ r | | 
: iis yr overthrown by Cyrus the Great in 549 πιὸ when the city 
disappears ἔτι istc Thi adi ἴω 
1 este ten history. This Median occupation is mentioned here and 
, and this seems to be all that X 
Xenophon knew or 1 
a donne i ilgili cared to tell of 
ae I : of this famous place. This is almost as bad as if a medieval 
πῷ | : . AVE 
ΤΊ : ad called Athens “a place which the Romans once occupied ’’; 
μιῇ a y unm as pardonable as the remark of a distinguished micdenn 
grapher, that “Greece o ies ) 
occupies the southern } 

. art of the Turkish 
eninsula’’?! The sli i i a ao 
. ie ν ! re slight notice of the ruins taken by Xenophon shows 

e the completeness of the dk i i 
‘ destruction of Nine 
‘vth and th ] 

ness of eve ive x ΔΝ 
ph n cultivated Greek about the former glory of “ Barbarians.’? 

Ξ Ἷ : : F I € « Se 
cap pea “ent Larissa monuments and sculptures have been 

oug é Britis useu i ! adidas 
oie ad, Gee m, especially by Layard. —20. κογχυλιάτου 

: iterous stone is still used for building in this place 


ANABASIS III. 4. 11-19. 243 


Page 104.] §11. 21. ἐπί: repeated in ἐπῳκοδόμητο. --- 32. πλίνθινον : 
a wall of sun-baked bricks, a hundred feet high, was built on the top of 
the stone wall, which was fifty feet high. This style of wall, though with 
a much lower foundation of stone, was common in Greece (as at Athens), 
and it is found in the walls of Troy on Hissarlik. —24. Μήδεια, Medéa, a 
name (perhaps simply the Median) given to one of the wives of Astyages, 
the last king of Media. —25. ἀπώλλυσαν, lost: the imperf. refers to the 
duration of the conquest of Media (G. 1259). —26. ὑπὸ Περσῶν : ὑπό 
with the gen. marks the Persians as the agents by whom the Medes were 
deprived of (ἀπὠλλυσαν) their power (ἃ. 1234 ; H. 818 a). 

$12. 27. χρόνῳ, i.e. by length of siege. — ἑλεῖν : compare the time with 
that of καταφυγεῖν in 26. 

Page 105.] §13. 4. els refers to the coming of T. upon the course 
of their day’s march. —5. οὕς Te... ἔχων, not only the cavalry which he 
himself brought with him (cf. ἔχων ἀνέβη in 7): another ἔχων is understood 
(or perhaps omitted to avoid repetition), governing the antec. of ovs. — 
6. rod... ἔχοντος, who had (in marriage), explaining ’Opévra. 

$14. 11. τὰς piv... τὰς δέ: Tissaphernes threatened the Greek 
square on both sides and in the rear, at long range. —12. ἐμβαλεῖν, to 
make a direct attack. —13. παρήγγειλεν, i.e. passed the order along. 

8. 15, 14. διαταχϑθέντες : see note on p. 107, 19.—15. Σκύθαι τοξόται : the 
name Scythian was given to all archers of ἃ certain class, whether they were 
native Scythians or not. At Athens policemen were called τοξόται or Σκύθαι, 
because the state sometimes imported Scythian slaves (who were archers) to 
serve as a City police. —16. ἀνδρός, his man. — οὐδὲ . . . ῥᾷδιον ἦν, i.e. he 
could not well miss if he tried, on account of the dense throng of the enemy. 

$16. 20. ἐσίνοντο : in active sense, harmed. —21. μακρότερον . . - 
ἐτόξενον, i.e. the Rhodians carried further with their slings than the Per- 
sians, and the Cretans with their bows. The words οἱ Κρῆτες ἐτόξευον are 
merely a conjecture of Cobet for τῶν τοξοτῶν or τῶν πλείστων τοξοτῶν οἵ 
the Mss., the text being corrupt or defective. 

$17. 24. ὁπόσα ἁλίσκοιτο : depending on the frequentative χρήσιμα ἢν. 
-- Κρησί : depends on χρήσιμα. ---28. διατέλουν χρώμενοι, they used con- 
stantly (G. 1587 ; H. 981). — 26. ἄνω ἱέντες, shooting upwards, so as to 
recover the arrows. —paxpav: sc. ὁδόν. --- 28, ὥστε χρῆσθαι, fo be used 
(lit. so as to use them). 

Page 106.] ὃ 18. 2. κώμαις : see Introd. § 402. —3. μεῖον ἔχοντες, 
having the worst of it. — ἀκρο-βολίσει (G. 886 ; H. 5850): ef. ἀκροβολιζό- 
μενος in 7. 

ξ 19, 8. ἔγνωσαν, found out. —mhalovov : see iii. 2. 86 and 37. For 
the changes in the hollow square, see Introd. § 38. —9. ἢν συγκύπτῃ τὰ 


ῶ, 
244 ANABASIS III. 4. 19-29, 


Page 106.] κέρατα, if the wings are ever drawn in ( 


¢ " il 6 * 
14, and ὁπότε συγκύπτοι in 24. —10. J. ὅταν διάσχῃ in 


ὁδοῦ στενωτέρας οὔ ec 

a NN ons, because the 

road is narrower than usual. —11. ἐκθλίβεσθαι τοὺς ϑιλίνοι that th 
? { ἐδ 


heavy-armed should he squeezed out of their ranks (Sc. τῆς τάξεως), subject 
80. ξεως), subjec 
of ἀνάγκη ἐστίν. ---.13͵ πιεζομένους, crowded together 
620, 16. τὸ μέ , i sila 
. 40, τὸ μέσον, the space between. — 20. 
πολεμίοις, easy for the enem y to attack. 
§ 21, ‘ » » ‘ 4 " ν mu 
22. ἄνα ἑκατὸν ἄνδρας, of a hundred men each. —23 ἄλλ 
besides: see G. θ0θ0, 3- H. 705. F iy i 
scgallcg qth ay At 00, For an account of these arrangements 
e od. ἡ 387, —26 ῆ ball cd 
; 3 20. παρῆγον... κεράτων, led (their compani 
of the way of (i.e. behind i ? panies) out 
syed 1Y OF (t.€. behind) the wings, to give the others more room 
Mn ὁπότε διάσχοιεν : i.e. when the width of the road allowed 
the square to be re-formed, — 
Jill the open space : 


εὐεπίθετον (ἐπι-τίθημι) τοῖς 


ie OR 4 " 2 id 
ΤΠ: a, τὸ μέσον av ἐξεπίμπλασαν, they would 
P 10 or the iterative indic. with ἄν, see G. 1296: H. 8354 
f ; al ¢ " " ede. a" 
age 107.] 1. τὸ διέχον : the same as τὸ μέσον. --- κατὰ λό 
πεντηκοστῦς͵ οἶς. See Introd. § 382. 
Κκ ~ " 
a 5. ἐν τῷ μέρει, each in turn. —6. 
Hscagibbe! rp τι : some royal building or estate on the distant 
sy M+ Set, ODER. — γιγνομένην, passing (said of the road) 
, μα 16. εἰς τὸ πρανές, down hill. 
. 17. ὑπὸ 7 
Misa . μαστίγων, under the lash: see the account of the P 
μα ' at Lhermopylae scourged to the attack like 
oa K ° 7 Ὕ » i «© cht 
ράτησαν : notice the change from the four imperfects to the aorist 
9. γυμνήτων:: see note on p. 5, 7. — κατέκλεισαν ὅπλων : this 
; spn that the light-armed skirmishers were outside the ΓΝ 
ee διαταχθέντε 5, 14, ¢ : 
myo j : Ρ. 105, 14, and the note on p. 100, 25. See Introd 
of/*,—21. ἐν "ἢ ri wil 
τῷ ὄχλῳ: i.e. with the great mass of camp-followers 
. slab | 


“9 0 ᾿ ] ᾿ . 


χους, κατὰ 


τῆς φάλαγγος : depends on που. 


er- 
slaves, Hdt. vii. 223 


square at first. 


ὁ 28. 25. ὁπότε ἀ : 6. δι Ὶ 
pill ” ri vlan t.€. each time when they returned to the main 
δ. τ 21. ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς, they decided. — 28. πρὶν ἀνή ; 
they had brought up (G. 1470). ΜΗ ΠΤ 
Page 108.] 1. πρὸς τὸ i 
‘1 4. πρὸς τὸ ὄρος: i.e. the higher hill (sc 
; ᾿ 3 see § 2 
which the smaller hills descended (καθῆκον). il hate 
ἐμὰ im 2. ἐγένοντο ὑπέρ, got above: the e 
saa πὰ , 
a μεν νὴ the higher hill (ὄρος), attacking the Greeks below them as 
cr Ha sn ed from each of the lower spurs (γήλοφοι) ; and the peltasts 
nwedneatal hy Ἵ a part of the ὄρος which was above the enemy, that they 
2 arch along the slope and threaten the enemy below them if they 


contin : 
tid ae to attack the Greeks. — πολεμίων in 2 and πολέμιοι in 3 refer 
ersians ; πολέμιοι in 5 refers to the Greeks | 


nemy were marching along 


ANABASIS III. 4. 30-39. 245 


Page 108.] §30. 6. οἱ μέν : the main body of the Greeks, who were 
crossing the hillocks ; οἱ δέ: the peltasts on the height above the Persians. 
—T7. xara... ἐπιπαριόντες, i.e. marching to the same point (ém-) along 
the mountain slope (κατὰ τὸ ὄρος), parallel to (rap-) the main body. — τὰς 
κώμας : see ὃ 24, and Introd. § 402. --- 8. ἰατρούς, nurses, selected from 
the soldiers. —9. οἱ τετρωμένοι : see Introd. ὃ 28%, and 18 ff. below. 

§ 31. 10. ἡμέρας τρεῖς : for the halts on the retreat to Trapezus, see 
Introd. $422, —11. καὶ dpa... εἶχον : we should expect ἔχοντες (causal), 
corresponding to ἕνεκα. ----συμβεβλημένας, collected : cf. συνενηνεγμένα in 18. 
—13. τῷ σατραπεύοντι, by the acting satrap, or royal governor: dat. of 
agent with perf. pass. (G. 1186; H. 769). 

§ 32, 18. ἀπόμαχοι, non-combatants, of three classes. 

§ 33. 22. πολὺ διέφερον, they found it very different, i.e. much easier : 
the more common impers. constr. (which many Mss. and editions have 
here) would be πολὺ διέφερεν... ὁρμῶντας. .. πορευομένους. ---- 33). ἐκ χώρας, 
from a position ; opposed to πορευομένοι, on the march. 

§ 35. 28. πονηρόν, a troublesome (wretched) thing. 

Page 109.] 2. αὐτοῖς : G. 1170; H. 767.— πεποδισμένοι, hobbled 
(praepediti), their feet being tied together by a short cord. — 3. τοῦ μὴ 
φεύγειν ἕνεκα (G. 1546; Η. 989). --- 4. Set... ἀνδρί: the dative for the 
accusative is very rare with the infin. after δεῖ, and it is better here (with 
Rehdantz) to supply τινά (i.e. a servant) as subj. of ἐπισάξαι and χαλινῶσαι, 
and αὐτόν (i.e. the horseman himself) as subj. of ἀναβῆναι. Notice the 
asyndeton after χαλινῶσαι. The idea is: a Persian horseman must wait 
to have his horse bridled, and to put on his own armor, before he can 
mount. — ἐπισάξαι, to put on the cloth (ἐφίππιον) : the Greeks had no 
saddles, and rode either bareback (ἐπὲ ψιλοῦ) or on a cloth. See Morgan’s 
note (No. 42) on Xenophon’s Art of Horsemanship, 7, 5.—7. θορύβου 
ὄντος : temporal, connected by καί to νύκτωρ. 

$36. 9. διαγγελλομένους, passing the word of command : see p. 105, 13. | 
-- ἐκήρνξε : sc. ὁ κῆρυξ (G. 897, 4; H. 602 c): see p. 8, 27.— 10. ἀκουόντων, 
i.e. within hearing of the enemy. — 18. λύειν is used in a rare (chiefly 
poetic) sense = λυσιτελεῖν, to profit, to be expedient: as in English, they 
thought it did not pay. —atrovs and νυκτός belong to both of the follow- 
ing infinitives. 

§ 37. 15. ἀπιόντας (G. 1582; H. 982). —16. καὶ αὐτοί, themselves too 
(G. 989, 1; H. 680, 23). ---- ἀναζεύξαντες, breaking camp, absol., as in p. 141, 
2.—22. ἀκρ-ονυχίαν, spur (nail-tip). — ὑφ᾽ ἥν, along the base of which. — 
κατάβασις, descent: cf. ἀνάβασις. 

Page 110.] $39. 2. ὁ δὲ λέγει (G. 983; H. 654): see 5. —3. ἡμῖν: 
dat. of agent. See note on p. 108, 18. ---4. οὐκ ἔστι παρελθεῖν, there is 


no getting by. 


240 ANABASIS III, 4. 40 anp 5. 1. 


Page 110.] $40. 6. ὅτι οὐκ ἐδόκει : the direct form would be οὐκ 
ἐδόκει μοι, I did not think it good. —épnpa, exposed. — 8. πῶς τις ἀπελᾷ, 
how we (lit. one) shall drive, etc., indirect question. 

$41, 11. ὑπὲρ... στρατεύματος, close above their own (the Greek) 
army, αὐτοῦ being intensive. —16. ἐγὼ δ᾽ ἐθέλω, and I volunteer: ἐγὼ δέ 
is more emphatic, as σὺ μέν is omitted with μένε. So ἐγὼ δέ in 17. 

ὃ 42, 20. κελεύει δέ of: of as indirect reflexive (G. 987; Η. 685) refers 
to Xenophon and depends on συμπέμψαι. --- 21. ἀπὸ τοῦ στόματος, from 
the front of the square (cf. οὐρᾶς in 22): see Introd. § 372. - μακρόν, α 
long way. 

$43. 23. τοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ στόματος : see note on p. 2, 6. ---ἔλαβε τοὺς 
κατὰ μέσον: i.e. to replace the peltasts which he sent from the front, who 
were probably outside the square, he took those belonging to one of the 
flanks, who were within the square. See Introd. ὃ 378 and Figure 8. — 
25. αὐτῷ : Xenophon ; cf. note on of in 20, and notice the difference of 
the two pronouns. —-tovs τριακοσίους : probably three of the six com- 
panies of § 21; these had been moved to the front when the attacks came 
from a new quarter. —ovs τῶν ἐπιλέκτων (partitive) : by attraction ; the 
simple form would be τοὺς τριακοσίους τῶν ἐπιλέκτων ovs εἶχε. 

Page 111.] ὁ 44. 1. καὶ αὐτοί : see note on p. 109, 16. — ὥρμησαν 
ἁμιλλᾶσθαι, they set out to race or on a race. 

$45. 3. διακελευομένων : agreeing with the plural implied in στρατεύ- 
ματος. ---4. τῶν ἀμφὶ Τισσαφέρνην, Tissaphernes and his men. Notice 
the chiasmos in διακελευομένων τοῖς ἑαυτῶν in 3 and τοῖς ἑαυτῶν διακελευο- 
μένων in 4. 

$46. 7. ἁμιλλᾶσθαι : see note on 1.—8. τὴν λοιπήν : sc. ὁδόν. 

$48. 11. καὶ ὅς (G. 1023, 2; H. 655a).—14. ἔχων ἐπορεύετο, marched 
on with it (the shield). —15. θώρακα ἵππικον : the horseman carried no 
shield (Introd. ὃ 31%), and wore a heavy metal cuirass : see note on p. 
102, 26.—16. ὑπάγειν, to advance slowly. —17. παριέναι, i.e. to pass 
along, leaving Xenophon to follow slowly with his burden. 

$49. 20. ἀναβάς, mounting his horse (again). —Bdéowa... ἄβατα (sc. 
τὰ χωρία), passable . . . impassable (i.e. for a horseman): Kriiger makes 
the construction impersonal, like ἀδύνατά ἐστιν, it is impossible, for ἀδύ- 
νατόν ἐστιν, comparing Bard, p. 143, 24. —22. φθάνουσιν γενόμενοι (G. 
1586 ; H. 984) : φθάνουσιν in its sense of anticipate governs τοὺς πολεμίους 
in 23. 


CHAPTER V. 


$1. 26. dworpamdpevor ... ᾧχοντο, they turned off by another road 
and were gone (G. 1587 ; H. 827). —27. ἄλλην ὁδόν (G. 1060; H. 719a): 
adverbial. 


ANABASIS III. 5. 1-11. 247 


Page 112.] 2. ἀγαθῶν, supplies. 

§2. 7. νομαὶ βοσκημάτων, pasturing herds (lit. pastures of herds). — 
διαβιβαζόμεναι, i.e. in course of transportation. 

§ 3. 11. μὴ οὐκ ἔχοιεν depends on the idea of apprehension in évvoov- 
μενοι. ---- ἐπιτήδεια : Obj. of λαμβάνοιεν. --- εἰ κάοιεν : 86. οἱ πολέμιοι (ἃ. 1503 ; 
H. 937). ---19. ὁπόθεν λαμβάνοιεν : indir. question after οὐκ ἔχοιεν (G. 1490 ; 
H. 932, 2 end) representing πόθεν λαμβάνωμεν ; ἔχω is used like habeo in 
non habeo quid dicam, non habebam quid dicerem. 

§4, 13. ἀπῇσαν ἐκ τῆς βοηθείας, had returned from giving help (evi- 
dently to the plunderers of § 2).—14. κατέβη : i.e. from the height 
(p. 111, 25). 

§5. 15. Ὁρᾶτε. .. εἶναι; don’t you see that they admit the country is 
now ours? —17. ἃ yap... ἀλλοτρίαν, for what they stipulated against 
our doing, when they made the treaty (cf. ii. 3. 27), viz., burning the king’s 
territory, (this) they are now themselves (doing, by) burning (it) as if it were 
another’s: ph κάειν... χώραν (sc. ἡμᾶς) is in apposition with the antecedent 
of & See p. 42, 12, and note; in both cases a more definite expression 
(here κάουσι) is substituted by anacoluthon for a more general one like 
ποιοῦσι. 

8.6, 23. Οὔκουν ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ, I don’t think so, now. The reply is mere 
jest, like the preceding remark of Xenophon. 

$7. 25. σκηνάς, encampment (in the village). — 27. ἔνθεν pev... ἔνθεν 
δέ, on the one hand. . . on the other. 

Page 113.] 2. ὡς μηδέ... βάθους (sc. τισί), i.e. 30 as not even to let 
their spears project when they tried the depth ; their spears found no bot- 
tom (G. 1172; H. 771). Cf. p. 95, 17. 

$8. 5. κατὰ τετρακισχιλίους, four thousand at a time. — ὧν δέομαι, 
what I require. —rédavrov: see Dict. Rhodes at this time used the 
Attic talent. 

$9. 7. ᾿Ασκῶν : bags of inflated hides are still used in crossing these 
rivers. —9. ἀποδαρέντα : from ἀποδέρω. --- φυσηθέντα refers to δέρματα, 
hides, implied in ἀποδαρέντα, i.e. flayed and (the hides) blown up. It 
appears that there were at least 2000 animals in the train. See Introd. 
§ 39. 

810. 11. δεσμῶν, girths. —12. ὁρμίσας, mooring. —13. ἀφείς, by letting 
them down (1563, 3; H. 969a): this and ἀρτήσας are subordinate to 
ὁρμίσας. --- 14. διαγαγών, carrying (the line of floats) across the stream. — 
ἀμφοτέρωθεν δήσας, fastening them to the two banks, to serve as pontoons, 
or supports to a floating bridge. 

811, 17. ἕξει τοῦ μὴ καταδῦναι, will keep from sinking (G. 1549 ; 1615; 
H. 963): we might have τοῦ καταδῦναι, μὴ καταδῦναι, OF (less frequently) 


248 ANABASIS III. 5. 11-18. 


Page 113.] simply καταδῦνα. An equivalent (though different) con- 
struction follows, wore μὴ ὀλισθάνειν σχήσει, will keep you from slipping, 
lit. will keep you so that you may not slip (G. 1450; H. 953). 

$12. 19. τὸ ἔργον, the execution of the plan (ἐνθύμημα). ---- 20. οἱ kwAv- 
σοντες, men ready to prevent it: cf. note on p. 57, 28.—21. πολλοὶ 
ἱππεῖς : apposition. — ot... ἂν ἐπέτρεπον : 86. εἰ ἐπεχείρησαν. 

$13. 22. ἐπανεχώρουν εἰς τοὔμπαλιν, efc., i.e. they made ἃ day’s march 

backward to some villages which had not been burnt by the enemy (see 
ὃ 3).— 24. ἔνθεν --- ἐξ ἧς (8c. τὴν κώμην), the village from which (see ὃ 1). 
— 25. ὅμοιοι ἦσαν θαυμάζειν, were like to wonder, i.e. seemed amazed, like 
ἐῴκεσαν θαυμάζειν : the text, however, is very doubtful. — 26. τρέψονται 
+++ ἔχοιεν (α. 1487; H. 932, 2): we might have had two indicatives or 
two optatives. 

Page 114.) § 14. 3. ἤλεγχον... χώραν, they enquired (of the cap- 
tives) about the whole surrounding country. See Introd. § 591, 

$15. 5. τῆς ἐπὶ Βαβυλῶνα (poss. gen.): i.e. it lay on the road towards 

Babylon. —6. ἥκοιεν (G. 1497, 2; H. 932, 2). — θερίζειν : the king spent 
the winter at Babylon, the spring at Susa, and the summer at Ecbatana 
(see Xen. Cyr. viii. 6. 22), Many Mss. here have θερίζειν καὶ ἐαρίζειν. ---- 
8. διαβάντι... πρὸς ἑσπέραν, to the west after crossing the river (sc. τινῇ) : 
this is used like the other adjective phrases with 7.— 10. ὅτι is repeated 
for emphasis in the last clause, — Καρδούχους : the people called Kurds, 
Armenian Kordukh ; the region is Kurdistan. 

$16. 12. ἀκούειν, listen to or obey. - ἐμβαλεῖν ποτε els αὐτούς, once 
invaded them. —15. ὁπότε... σπείσαιντο, kal ἐπιμιγνύναι (depending on 
ἔφασαν) : in the direct form, ὁπόταν... σπείσωνται, καὶ ἐπιμιγνύασι, when- 
ever they (the Kurds) make a treaty, etc., some of them also mingle, etc.— 
16. σφῶν, ἐκείνων : sc. τινάς (G. 1091; H. 734). 

$17. 18. ἑκασταχόσε εἰδέναι, that they knew the way in each direction. — 
21. τούτους : governed by διελθόντας. --- 92. ἔφασαν ἥξειν, they (the captives) 
said that they (the Greeks) would come. — 24. εὔπορον... πορεύεσθαι : in 
the direct form, εὔπορόν ἐστιν ὅποι ἄν τις ἐθέλῃ πορεύεσθαι, it is easy to go 
whithersoever you wish, the apodosis being general in sense. 

$18. 25. ἐπὶ τούτοις, thereupon. —26. ὥρας : part. gen. after ἡνίκα, 
at whatever time. — τὴν ὑπερβολήν, the pass: acc. by anticipation ; regu- 
larly it would be, they feared that the mountain-pass might be seized 
beforehand. 

Page 115.] 2. ἡνίκ᾽ dv τις παραγγέλλῃ, i.e. when the order should be 
given ; cf. εἴ τις... λυποίη in p. 61, 14: this subjunctive might have been 
changed to the optative (omitting ἄν), as ἐπειδὴ δειπνήσειαν (in 1) is changed 
from ἐπειδὰν δειπνήσητε. 


ANABASIS IV. 1. 1-8. 


BOOK FOURTH. 


Harp Ficntinc ΙΝ THe Mountains. — ENTRANCE INTO ARMENIA. — 
Great SuFFERING FROM CoLp AND Famine. — To Mount TRECHEs, 
FROM WHICH THE SEA IS SEEN. — ARRIVAL AT TRAPEZUS. 


CHAPTER I. 


Page 115.] §1. See note onii. 1,1. Here it is probable that Bec- 
tions 1-4 are interpolated. —7. ὅσα ἐπολεμήθη : passive of an active 
constr. ὅσα ἐπολέμησαν (G. 1054; H. 716): to what extent war was made 
upon the Greeks. | 

§2. 11. ἔνϑα (sc. ἐκεῖσε), (to the place) where. — 12. πάροδος, way along 
the river. —15. πορευτέον εἶναι (dir. πορευτέον ἐστίν : impers.). Much of 
this section repeats what has been stated in iii. 5. 

8.3, 16. τῶν ἁλισκομένων, the captives taken along the way. iis διέλ- 
θοιεν has for its apodosis the sentence ἐν τῇ ‘Apuevig . . . περιίασι, including 
two subordinate protases; it represents ἐὰν διέλθωμεν of the direct dis- 
course, and the four following verbs might also have noe emit to 
the opt. (see G. 1498). —19. περιίασι, will pass algun (G. 1961: Η. gayi 
—20. ἐλέγετο : the subject is ras πηγὰς εἶναι. --- ἔστιν οὕτως ἐχον, it is jus 

o (G. 144, 5; H. 480). 
τ er in nia ... karadaPeiv: see p. 118, 25, and note. 

Page 116.] ὃ 5. 1. τὴν τελευταίαν φυλακήν : che tat watch began at 
early dawn. See Introd. ὃ 40%. —2. dcov... διελθεῖν, enough for ὙΠ 
ing the plain in the dark ; ὅσον (sc. τοσοῦτον) takes the infinitive from the 
idea of sufficiency which it implies. —3. παραγγέλσεως, ive. the word of 
command passed round (¢f. p. 115, 2). —4. τὸ ὅρος : cf. ili. 5: 7 and 17. 

$6. 6. τὸ ἀμφ᾽ αὑτόν, his own special command: cf. τὸ ὁπλιτικόν, κῃ 
153, 8. So τὸ ἱππικόν, the cavalry, and τὸ Ἑλληνικόν for οἱ ᾿λληνες, the 
Greeks (p. 117, 4). --- γυμνῆτας : for the use of light-armed troops see 
Introd. § 35. —7. ὁπλίταις : apposition. —9. μή, that (lest), after gown 
- πορευομένων (sc. αὐτῶν), as they went, gen. abs. (G. 1568 end ; H. 9724). 
— : see ἐφέπομαι. 

; gee age ie ba sae crossing the hill and descending : Φ. Ast a 
12. del, regularly, qualifies ἐφείπετο, affecting also the se ee 
the idea being that each detachment in succession followed, as 
the height. ; ; 

16. ἦν λαμβάνειν, there was an opportunity to take. 
nade ant C. should be willing to let them pass, i.e. with a view 


19. εἴ πως 


| ng 
50 ANABASIS IV. x. 8-16. 


eg 116.] to this result (G. 1420; H. 907): the implied apod. is 
at then they might do this, or the like. — 20. ὡς χώρας ὃ ‘al 
: | Ἴ Ἴ Υ oo τος ia TS 
a Ws φιλίας (sc. ovens), i.e. to let them go through their country as 
ΤΥ a friendly one: cf. p. 14, 27, and p. 62, 5, and the notes 
on | ΒΒ, > notes, 
! . 22. ὅπου, wherever, is Cobet’s emendation for ὅτου (one Ms.) or 
τι Lapa Mss.) : the common reading ὅτῳ is also a conjecture. —davdyxn 
see Introd. § 262. —23. καλούντ has | oiled» ) 
267, — 23. wv (sc. αὐτῶν), when they ce > see 5 
ee a ); vey called: see note 
$10. 26. διὰ rd 3%. 15 ; 
. 26. » ++ εἶναι (G. 1546 ; H. 959). — 27) ὅ 7 
; ash . JOU). —27. ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν 
ὙΠ went on through the whole day: the aor. looks at the iy i 
: rer as a single event, without regard to its duration : cf. ἐβασίλευσε 
᾿ . hd Ι ἷ 
re he had a reign of ten years. See Moods and Tenses, §§ 56, 57 
n the other hand, ἐπετίθεντο in p. 117, 1, looks at the attack in its das 
tion or repetition. Ἴ 
Pa « » LA ᾿ κα 
si ge ὙΠ 3. ἐξ ἀπροσδοκήτου, ex ἀπ ρΥουΐϑο : the suddenness of the 
; ig με ms irene 1s given as the reason for their fewness (ὀλίγοι 
vres). — For the length of the line of march 
g arch through the mc i 3 
Introd. § 35 and § 384, piping ahi 3. 
1 " 5 * by ~ 
\ i ᾿. ἐκινδύνευσεν ἂν διαφθαρῆναι, would have risked perishing. — 
wo v, a great part: cf. τὸ πολύ, the greater part, p. 20, 15. —8. συνεώ 
1.6. watched each other’s signals. | ii 
§12. 9. ῦ ἔ Ὶ 
ΟἿ , συνϑοῦσι .... ἔδοξε, i.e. they came together and resolved : ef. 
sav in 18. See Introd. ὃ 27%.—11. ἔχοντας, καταλιπόντας : accus 
where dat. would be allowed (G. 928, 1; see H 941). —12. αἰχμάλ i 
il | ol awa ,ῳ»" ωτα 
captives (αἰχμή, spear, and ἁλίσκομαι).. See Introd. § 282 i 
My i 14. ἐποίουν : with subj. ὑποζύγια etc. : see note on D, 32, 37, =~ 
- ml, in charge of. —For the baggage trains see Introd. § 39 —18 
όξαν ταῦτα, when they had resolved on this (G. 1569; H. 974 a); com- 
ἡ i n ᾽ » & ν , ΠΤ 
cna pena as accus. absol. corresponding to ἔδοξε ταῦτα (cf. 10) 
Ἂ m ΜΝ »ν» 7 Ἷ 
͵ θ fin also δόξαντα ταῦτα, δοξάντων τούτων, δόξαντος τούτου, and δόξαν 
é τ bg * is perhaps more natural to supply πράττειν with ταῦτα 
ie ; 9. oui gig (56. τινας), i.e. causing any to halt whom they 
se a9 — 20. εἴ τι : translated whatever. — τῶν εἰρημένων (Sc. ἀφεῖναι) 
" 6 “ik ordered (to be abandoned). See § 12.—21. οἱ δέ, and a 
ne soldiers). — whi ἔ Ἶ 
na diers). --- πλὴν... ἔκλεψεν, unless one smuggled something. — 22 
ΤΠ “Ὁ ιν. i we should expect οἷον ( for example) ἢ παῖδα ἐπιθυμήσας 
μ" +7 cag (Kruger). — 23. τῶν εὐπρεπῶν is partitive genitive. —24 
rye «++ τὰ δέ, sometimes. . . sometimes. | 
» 26 : 
6. Els τὴν ὑστεραίαν : see note on εἰς τὴν & 29 
Page 118.] 816, 2 asian ta dines ee τὰ 
saat een si Χωρίων : diminutive in form, thought not in 
: ; H. 558, 1). —4, δ, ἀναχάζοντες and θαμινά are both poetic 


ANABASIS IV. 1. 16-25. 251 


Page 118.] words. —5. παρήγγελλεν ὑπομένειν, sent word (for those in 
front) to wait. —6. ἐπικέοιντο : cf. ἐπικεῖσθαι, press upon, With ἐπιτίθεσθαι, 


fall upon. 


$17. 7. ἄλλοτε piv... τότε δέ: i.e. though on other occasions he 
halted, on this he did not. —6re παρεγγνῴῷτο, whenever the word was passed. 
- 9, πρᾶγμά τι, some trouble ahead. — 10. παρελθόντι (sc. τινί). 

ξ 18, 13. διὰ τῆς ἀσπίδος : for the effectiveness of the Greek armor, 
see Introd. § 314. —14. διαμπερὲς τὴν κεφαλήν (sc. τοξευθείς), shot directly 
through the head, lit. shot in the head directly through (G. 1058 ; H. 718). 

$19. 16. ὥσπερ εἶχεν, just as he was (sicut erat). — 18. φεύγοντες ἅμα 
(α. 1572 ; Η. 976). -- καλώ τε καὶ ἀγαθώ : see Dict. and p. 78, 26. --- 19. 
ἀνελέσϑαι, to take up for burial, a most sacred duty with the Greeks. See 
Introd. § 291. The last sentence is in the direct discourse. 

§20, 21. pla αὕτη dSds... ὀρθία, there is one way right there (αὕτη) 
which you see, a steep one: αὕτη implies a gesture pointing to the road ; 
in such cases the article may be omitted with a demonstrative, as in vijes 
ἐκεῖναι ἐπιπλέουσι, ships are sailing up there! Thuc. i. 515; 80 γυναικῶν 
τουτέων, Hdt. v. 20; ἵππους ταύτας, and χώρης τῆσθε, Hat. iv. 9. See also 
ula αἴτη πάροδος, p. 145, 17. --- 29. ὄχλον οἵ (α. 10210; H. 629). — 24. 
ἔκβασιν, way out. See Remarks on pp. li. and lii. 

§21, 24, ταῦτ᾽ ἔσπευδον (G. 1054; H. 716). —25. εἴ πως δυναίμην, in 
case I should be able ; see note on εἴ πως ἐθελήσειαν in p. 116, 19; here an 
apod. is implied like ἕνα φθάσαιμι. --- φθάσαι ( = πρότερος γενέσθαι) empha- 


sizes the following πρίν, the idea being to get to the pass before the enemy 


should have captured it: cf. p. 115, 23. See Greek Moods and Tenses, 


§ 660, with the examples. —27. ot... ὁδόν, say there is no other way. 
For οὔ φημι, cf. note on p. 11, 10. 

§ 22. 29. ὅπερ refers to the action of ἐνηδρεύσαμεν. 

Page 119.] 1. ἀναπνεῦσαι, to take breath: Kriiger quotes Jl. xv. 235, 
ὥς xe καὶ αὖτις "Axawl ἀναπνεύσωσι πόνοιο. --- 2. αὐτοῦ τούτου ἕνεκα 
(G. 1368). ---- 8. ἡγεμόσιν : sc. αὐτοῖς (G. 916). 

ξ 23, 6. εἰ εἰδεῖεν : indir. question representing lore ; —7. οὐκ ἔφη (sc. 
εἰδέναι) : ef. p. 118, 27, and 10 (below). —9. ὁρῶντος τοῦ ἑτέρου, before 
the other’s eyes. See Introd. § 283. 

$24. 11. ἐτύγχανε. . . ἐκδεδομένη, i.e. he happened to have a married 
daughter there. — αὐτός emphasizes the omitted subject of ἡγήσεσθαι: he 
said he would himself lead (G. 927). --- 12. δυνατὴν . .. ὁδόν, by a way 
which even beasts of burden could pass over: personal constr. of δυνατός 
(G. 1527). For ὁδόν see G. 1057 ; H. 7150. 

§ 25. 13. δυσ-πάρ-ιτον (εἶμι) : cf. ἁμαξ-ιτός, p. 9, 27, and see (ἃ. 886; 
H. 5856). —14. 6: object of προκαταλήψοιτο : and unless they (ris) should 


ANABASIS IV. 1. 25 anp 2. 6. 


Pa , 
ge ate.) Jirst (πρό) occupy this ; the direct discourse was εἰ μή 
προκαταλήψεται, ἀδύνατον ἔσται. ἀμ δή 

§ 26, εὖ δὼ ἃ — "" " 
min Hi i corners 1S IN apposition with λοχαγούς, which τῶν ὁπλιτῶν 
gl ὰ em “7. εἴ τις... ἔστιν, whether there was any one (ἔστιν 
ait fend yong psig i ian γενέσθαι, to show himself: ef. 
To (end of 28). —19. ὑποστὰς ἐθελοντ Er ae 
i s, stand 1 
teer: cf. iptorara in 19. fs, ing forth as a volun- 
$28. 26. i 
Hip r ἐρωτῶσιν εἴ τις vee ἐθέλοι : here ἐθέλει of the direct question 
; , rei after an historic present (G. 1268 ; H. 828). 26. τῶν y 
νήτων ταξιάρχων, light-armed taziarc f "Ogu ui 
axriarchs : cf. ) : """ 
see Introd. § 303. J. λοχαγοὺς πελτάστας in 16, and 


CHAPTER II.* 


Pa . ' ᾿ 
ΤΥ i § 1, 8 οἱ δέ, i.e. Xenophon and Chirisophus. — ἐμφα- 
Y " 5,4 cg eating. — 3. συντίθενται, agree with them (i.e. the volunteers) 
, - τὸ ἄκρον: (ἡ ἄκρον in p. 119, 14. — δ. τοὺς μὲν αὐτοὶ δέ the 
volunteers ¢ 2 Officer ἄ δ. ἢ ΤῊΝ ily 
tee ni i the ΠῚ πτ- ἄνω ὄντας, i.e. from their position on the 
as ' , ἱ ναι (fut.) and συμβοηθήσειν denote later actions than 
᾿ inci and σημαίνειν ; hence perhaps the change in tense (G. 1286: 
) ty a). See note on p. 144, ὅ. --- ἔκβασιν : see p. 118, 24 Nii 
: 0. " * ANN un i " ᾿ Vy . 
Pitti ὕδωρ, rain. —11. ὅπως... τὸν νοῦν, that the enemy might have 
teir attention turned to that road. — 12. (ὅπως) ὡς μάλιστα λάθοιεν, ἐϊ 
i) ] 4 
they might be, as far as possible, unseen. ἼΠ, 
§3. 14. qv é i ] 
Hell iiy 9 i “* ἐκβαίνειν, i.e. which they must cross before getting 
ee =e ὁλοιτρόχους : a poetic word, compounded of εἴλω 
ney : oll (cf. Sdyos), and τρέχω ; probably meaning rounded by rolling 
6. Ἴ the water). See Liddell and Scott; and Theocr. xx. 49 there 
ΤΠ vay ὁλοοίτροχοι, οὗστε κυλίνδων χειμάρρους ποταμὸς μεγάλαις τόξων 
᾿ vats. The χαράδρα which they were crossing was the dry bed of a winter 
orrent (χειμάρρους), down which the stones were hurled. See note a 
αράδ a ἢ | 7 ‘Git ἂν 
ons ραν, ce 2. ‘Ti. διεσφενδονῶντο, flew in pieces (lit. were flung 
: » a8 1 from slings): “' diffundebantur : Cf. σφενδόνη = fi ud Ι] 
Rehdantz. it 
ὃ 4, 19. ἢ δύ . ἢ 
Page 19. εἰ μὴ δύναιντο (sc. διαβῆναι): gen. cond. with frequentative 
ὥντο. --- , bo ᾿ co” o< » CA Ι 
Ἂν ρ fig “φαύνῃ ... ἄλλῃ, 86, ὁδῷ. ---- 22. ἀνάριστοι, breakfastless, — 
- Κυλινδοῦντες : with ἐπαύσαντο (G. 1580; H. 981) 
Page 121.] §5. 2. ὁ Ἵ | } 
5 . + 4. MS... κατέχοντες, Supposing tI : 
summit: see note on p. 1, 15. i niche Syne 
$6. 2. οἱ δ᾽ οὐ i i : 
Mineo 2 ot ὃ ov κατεῖχον, i.e. they were wrong in so thinking : οἱ δέ is 
μὲ a ar in referring to the subj. of the preceding verb (see also G 983 ; 
. 654 e), —3. μαστός, a round hill. —4, αὕτη : οὗτος may stand between 
* See Remarks on §§ 1-22 on pp. li. and lii 


ANABASIS IV. 2. 6-15. 958 


Page 121.] the article and its noun, provided some qualifying word 
separates it from the article (G. 975; H. 673 c). —5. αὐτόθεν, from that 
spot (where they were). 

$7. 8. ὑπέφαινεν : cf. note on p. 90, 16. — 10. προσελθόντες (G. 1586 ; 
H. 984).—11. ἀλαλάξαντες :, see Introd. § 432.— 13. εὔζωνοι, nimble 
(well-girt): γάρ introduces the reason why only a few (ὀλίγοι) were killed. 

ξ 8. 17. ὡς ἐδύναντο, as well as they could, with ἀναβάντες. —18. ἀν- 
μων, drew up (like buckets from a well): cf. ἱμάω, to draw ; ἱμάς, a thong 
or strap. 

89. 21. ἥπερ, by the way by which (sc. ἐπορεύθησαν). —22. ὄπισθεν τῶν 
ὑποζυγίων, i.e. in the rear of the baggage train: see Introd. § 39 (end). 

810. 25. ἢ διεζεῦχθαι (sc. αὐτούς), or else be (themselves) entirely sepa- 
rated: the perfect infinitive here denotes that the action is decisive ; cf. 
ἐκπεπλῆχθαι in p. 25,19, and the note. — 26. ἐπορεύθησαν av: the implied 
protasis is seen in the following clause (G. 1340). — 27. ὑποζύγια : subject 
of ἐκβῆναι, i.e. there was no other way for the beasts to get through. 

$11. 29. ὀρθίοις τοῖς λόχοις, with the companies in parallel columns : 


see Introd. § 36, with Figure 7. 

Page 122.] 1. οὐ κύκλῳ, i.e. not so as to cut the enemy off. —2. et 
βούλοιντο : the apod. is in ἄφοδον, i.e. a way by which they might retreat 
if they wished to. 

8 12, 2. τέως μέν, for some time. — 3, ἕκαστος : in appos. to the omitted 
subject of ἐδύναντο. --- 4. οὐ προσίεντο, i.e. they did not let the Greeks get 
near them, but fled. —5. καὶ τοῦτόν re... καί (see note on p. 9, 3): the 
thought is, no sooner had the Greeks passed this, than they saw, etc. 

$13. 9. ᾿Εννοήσας ph, becoming anxious lest, ἐννοῶ with the μή clause 
having the idea of fear. —10. καὶ πάλιν, yet again. —11. ἐπιθοῖντο, for 
ἐπιθεῖντο (G. 741; Η. 4450): such forms follow the analogy of verbs in w. 
-- παριοῦσιν, as they passed. —ém\ πολὺ ἦν, stretched out a long way: cf. 
p. 34, 24, and note. —12. Gre... πορενόμενα (G. 1575; H. 977): of. the 
Latin constr. of guippe with a relative. — διὰ στενῆς τῆς ὁδοῦ (G. 971; 
H. 670 a). 

$14. 19. ὁ ὑπέρ... ἐθελοντῶν (see § 5): of the three expressions which 
qualify the attributive partic. καταληφθείσης (ἃ. 1559; H. 965), only one 
stands between τῆς and the partic., the others being placed outside of 
ris... φυλακῆς to avoid complicating that construction (G. 969 ; H. 667 a). 

815. 23. δείσαντας : causal partic. —adrots: the barbarians. — πο- 
λιορκοῖντο : from πόλις (πολι-) and Epyw (Epxos) ; often used, as here, where 
the force of πόλις is forgotten. —24. ἀπολιπεῖν : indir. quot. after ὑπώ- 
πτευον. --- ἄρα, in fact ; as it proved. — 25. ἐπὶ τοὺς ὀπισθοφύλακας, ἱ.6. 
they went to attack the part of the Greek rear-guard which had been left 


9 
254 ANABASIS IV. 2. 15-27. 


ΤΥ 122.] to guard the first hill ($13). The Carduchians had seen 
ay their height what was going on in their rear (ὄπισθεν), i.e. on the 
gute eee ὃ 13), and they hastened to recover that position. 
ps ᾿ ae ἀνάβαινιν: the impf. expresses the process of mounting ; 
νι he ollowing aorists. — 28. ὑπάγειν, advance slowly. — Poy 
ΠΤ come up. — 29. θέσθαι τὰ ὅπλα : cf. p. 25, 24, and the note 
age 123.] $17. 5. ὀπισθοφύλακας : probably the half of the-rear- 
guard which followed the baggage train (§ 9) 
8.18, 7. ἀντίπορον, opposi " a j 
By pov, opposite, perhaps the hill captured in the night 
§ 19, 9. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, on condition that, with κάειν (G. 1460; H. 999 a). — 
τὴ ἐν ᾧ, while, introducing both clauses τὸ μὲν... of δέ. ---- 19, of ra 
cf. notes on τῶν παρὰ βασιλέ 2, 6 | stadia | 
ibe pa βασιλέως, p. 2, 6, and p. 9, 4. — συνερρύησαν :. from 
ἐμ 13. ἵσταντο, proceeded to form.—ptavro: i.e. the Greeks. — 
͵ + ἔνα... ἕκαντο, where the armed force was stationed (see ὃ 16): κεῖσθαι 
ere is like a passive of θέσθαι (used as in § 16). — 19. ἀπέλιπεν, i.e. got 
separated from him, left him (without his shield). Ἴ 
. ἮΝ ἀμ! "1" of Lusi (Λουσοί, Bath) in Arcadia. — προβεβλημένος 
. τὴν ἀσπίδα), i.e. with his shield held out in front ¢ a. 1245 
H. 813). See Introd. § 283, τ ΠῚ 
§ 22. | 24. αὐτοῦ, there. — tv.olxiats : see Introd. 8 402, —25. ἐν λάκκοις 
ieee m plastered (or cemented) cisterns. Suidas (s.v. λάκκος) Says: 
The sprain and other Greeks used to make large excavations luiniien: 
ground, round or square, cement them, and ke ine il in | 
@ ce 1 j ; : 
Socmentutus , p wine and oil in them: 
εἰ 23. 26. διεπράξατο ὥστε, 80 managed or bargained that, εἰς. 
sig 124.) 1. ἡγεμόνα : see iv. 1. 22-24. —&& τῶν δυνατῶν, i.e. as 
well as they could. — 2. νομίζεται : the word νόμος ‘includes all that-is 
enjoined by law, custom, or the general sentiment, and all that is volun- 
tarily accepted in reliance on these.’’ J. S. Mill, Diss., Vol. IV p. 302 
sre ib the sacred duty of burying the dead, see Introd. § 291, 
A iin eH μὲ, εἴη... προκαταλαμβάνοντες, seizing positions in advance 
he e road (place) was narrow. — 5. ἐκώλυον : conative (G. 1255 ; 
᾿ nig of. κωλύοιεν (pres.) in 6 with ἐπιθοῖντο (aor.) in 9. 
Mi ᾿ 6. ὄπισθεν, from the rear (cf. § 9).— 7. ἀπό-φραξιν : from ἀπό 
a Φρ a (dpay-); a rare word. — 8. rots πρώτοις : dat. οὗ advantage 
ts vl in 12. — ἀνωτέρω γίγνεσθαι, to get above, 
i : fi ἣν ὁπότε, sometimes (see G. 1020; H. 998 δ): cf. p. 139, 19 
ΜΠ» , ἐμ ts τοῖς ἀναβᾶσι, even to those who had gone up: ef. ὃ 25 
-— 16. καταβαίνουσιν ; temporal. — 16, ἐγγύθεν φεύγοντες : the 


ANABASIS IV. 2. 27 anv 3. 5. 255 


Page 124.] opposite of ἐκ πολλοῦ φεύγοντας, p. 101, 3. Note the dis- 
tinction of φεύγειν, to flee, and ἀποφεύγειν, to escape. 

§ 28. 20. πρὸς τὸ κάτω... . προσβαίνοντες, i.e. pressing (stepping) with 
the left foot against the lower end of the bow, i.e. to steady the long bow 
The bow was held perpendicularly, with one end 


while drawing it. 
See Diod. Sic. iii. 8, where it is said of the 


brought to the ground. 


Ethiopians : ἐνίοτε δὲ (καθοπλίζονται) ξυλένοις τόξοις τετραπήχεσιν, οἷς τοξεύουσι 


μὲν τῷ ποδὶ προσβαίνοντες. The reading προσβαίνοντες has, however, very 
little authority in this passage of the Anabasis, nearly all (and all the 
best) Mss. having προβαίνοντες, which would mean advancing the left foot 
towards the lower end of the bow, ἵ.6. steadying themselves in this way. 
Strabo (p. 772) tells of Aethiopian elephant-hunts, in which three men 
used one bow, τῶν μὲν κατεχόντων τὸ τόξον καὶ προβεβηκότων τοῖς ποσί, τοῦ δ᾽ 
ἕλκοντος τὴν νευράν, two of them holding the bow, with their feet advanced 
(i.e. each with one foot advanced to steady himself), and the third draw- 
ing the string. Arrian (Ind. 16) speaks of bows which the Indians drew 
by bringing them to the ground and bracing themselves (ἀντιβάντες) with 
the left foot. —21. Bia... θωράκων : see Introd. ὃ 314. — 23. ἀκοντίοις : 
in appos. with αὐτοῖς. --- ἐναγκυλῶντες : the arrows, a yard long, were 
picked up and used as darts, being fitted with an ἀγκύλη, a loop or strap, 
fastened at the middle, as a guide in grasping and help in hurling. See 
διηγκυλωμένους, p. 129, 27. — 2. ἦρχε : see Introd. § 30%. 


CHAPTER III. 


§1. 26. αὖ expresses the contrast between the day’s fighting and the 
comfortable quarters. — ηὐλίσθησαν, were quartered: αὐλίζομαι originally 
means to pass the night (or live) in an open court (αὐλή): as in Od. xii. 265: 
μυκηθμοῦ τ᾽ ἤκουσα βοῶν αὐλιζομενάων οἰῶν τε βληχήν. 

Page 125.] 1. ὡς, about: cf. notes on p. 5, 5 and 9.—4. τῶν Kap- 
δούχων : depends on ὀρέων. 

§ 2. 6. πολλά: as adv. with μνημονεύοντες, recounting. —7. ἑπτὰ 
ἡμέρας : the day just ended appears to be the fifth since they entered 
the Carduchian country. Unless two days were occupied in negotiation 
(see chap. 2, § 23), we must include the two following days spent in 
Carduchia. The seven days, as usually reckoned, are Nov. 12-18, 401 B.c. 
—8. μαχόμενοι διετέλεσαν (G. 1580 ; H. 981).—9. κακὰ... σύμπαντα, 
i.e. more evils than all which they had suffered taken together. —6o0a: 86. 
ἔπασχον. --- 10. ὡς ἀπηλλαγμένοι, i.e. feeling free. 

§4, 18. ὅπλα : appositive. —19. γέρρα : see Introd. ὃ 14%. 

$5. 21. ὁδὸς... ἄνω, i.e. the only road which was visible was (one) 


leading up, etc.: the construction is ἡ ὁρωμένη pla ὁδὸς ἣν ἄγουσα ἄνω. 


ANABASIS IV. 3. 5-12. 


Page 125. ] See p. 118, 22, ἣν ὁρᾷς, and note.— 22. ὥσπερ χειροποί 
(se. οὖσα), (looking) as if it had been built. -- ταύτῃ, here, i gis ei 
this road. I ΠΤ Ἶ 
" Ἷ cy PI aan (95. τισίν), on trial. — 26. οὔτ᾽ corresponds to τέ 
ie ee efers napectally to the shield, which, if held on the side, 
| e under water. — εἰ δὲ μή, otherwise, i.e. if any of them did attempt 
to carry their arms through the river: cf. note on p. 53, 7. —27. ἐπὶ ; 
κεφαλῆς : i.e. holding them up above their heads. — 28, i μι ὧν 
plur. since τις is collective. "),Ἶ. ἡνμνι νη: ""}. 
| Page 126.) § 7. 1. "EvOa, where. —4. ὁρῶσι piv... ὁρῶσι δὲ 
ὁρῶσι δέ: notice the emphatic repetition. —6. ἐπικεισο i ἃ Ἰὼ 
fall upon (G. 1582): not or. obl. ΠΝ 
ὃ 8, 10. αὐτόμαται : cf. ἀπὸ τοῦ αὐτομάτου, spontaneously, p. 9, 1.— 
Ἰπριφρυῆναι, fell off (sc. ἔδοξαν), with αὐτῷ as dat. of uivantes ul tie 
νειν ὁπόσον ἐβούλετο, took as long steps as he pleased ὦ δεδέσθ : 
διαβαίνειν in this sense was a good omen for crossing the river (διαβαί si ! 
see § 12, § 14, and § 15. —13. τὸ ὄναρ : see Introd. § 291 me 
" ne ast τάχιστα, αϑ s00n αϑ.--- 15, ἐπὶ τοῦ πρώτου (sc. iepelov), with 
519, 19. ἀριστῶντι, while eating his lunch: cf. ἀριστοποιεῖσθαι (17), to 
prepare breakfust (or lunch). See also note on δορπηστόν p. 47 12, 
7 aly κτλ. : the direct discourse would be ἔξεστιν... lier ji 
ἐὰν καθεύδῃ... εἰπεῖν, ἐὰν... ἔχῃ. ---- αὐτῷ : with προσελθεῖν. --- 29 i el 
ραντα εἰπεῖν, to wake him and tell. —éyou: sc. εἰπεῖν. | ἡ] 
| $11. 25. καὶ τότε, and this time.—én τυγχάνοιεν... κατίδοιεν : 
imperf. and aor. opt., the direct discourse being ἐτυγχάνομεν ἣ 
κατείδομεν : this true imperf. opt. (G. 1488; H. 935 b) is ity 94. é 
ἐπὶ πῦρ : Bee Introd. § 403, -ἐν τῷ πέραν, across the river. — 26. pH a 
diminutive (G. 844; H. 558, 3): ef. νεανίσκω in 20, which is a dinheasive 
in form only.—domep... κατατιθεμένους (G. 924 a: H 615) 
putting away bags of clothes. rare eeereate 
ὃ 12, 28. δόξαι: the oratio obliqua here changes from the opt. to the 
weeeaar’ as if ἔφασαν had already been introduced. — οὐδὲ yap... ᾿ aie 
τὸν εἶναι κατὰ τοῦτο (sc. ἔφασαν δόξαι), for (they said it appeared i them 
that) neither could the enemy’s cavalry come down to the river at this otal ; 
οὐδέ (also. . . not, or neither) implies that this ground of safety a vi i 
in addition to other obvious advantages. ἼΠ 
Page 127.] 1. ἐκδύντες. .. διαβαίνειν : in the direct form, ἐκδύντες 
Ae διεβαίνομεν (see G. 927): distinguish the various cpunistitenes of the 
crossing expressed by the three participles and γυμνοί (sc. Svres). —2. ὡς 
vevo'dpevor, i.€, with the expectation of swimming if it should be meoneanty. 


ANABASIS IV. 3. 12-20. 257 


Page 127.] --διαβαίνειν : imperf. representing διεβαίνομεν, we proceeded 
to cross; ο΄. this with διαβῆναι (in 3) for διέβημεν, we crossed (effected the 
crossing). —8. πρόσθεν . .. πρίν, before wetting (G. 1469 ; 1470 ; H. 9244): 
for the use of πρόσθεν, see Moods and Tenses, § 658. Cf. p. 4, ὃ, and note ; 
also p. 84, 15. — διαβάντες : past to both λαβόντες and ἥκειν. 

$13. 5. rots νεανίσκοις ἐγχεῖν (86. οἶνον), to pour wine for the young 
men. —6. ἐκέλευε : 86. τοὺς παρόντας : cf. p. 86, 12. --- ὀνείρατα (see § 8): 
the plural seems to indicate the several points of the dream. —7. καὶ τὰ 
λοιπὰ ἀγαθά, also the other blessings (not portended in the dream). — 8. 
ἐπιτελέσαι : depending on εὔχεσθαι. See Introd. § 291, 

514, 13. ὅπως av... πάσχοιεν : obj. clauses after ἐβουλεύοντο, in 
which the best Attic usage allowed only the simple ὅπως, generally with 
the fut. indic. or opt. The meaning is, they took counsel (i.e. planned) to 
cross in the best way, etc. For Xenophon’s still greater violation of Attic 
usage by using ws in these and in final clauses, see note on p. 2, 9, and 
the references. 

$15. 18. ἐν μέσῳ τούτων, i.e. between the two divisions : see Introd. 
§ 392. 

ξ 17. 23. ἀντιπαρῆσαν, went along opposite to them, i.e. the enemy 
on the other bank. —24. xara... ὄχθας, at the ford and where the (oppo- 
site) high banks were (cf. § 11). --- 26. στεφανωσάμενος, pulling on a 
wreath, probably one made on the spot. It was one of the institutions 
of Lycurgus that the Spartans should go into battle wearing wreaths (see 
Plutarch’s Lycurg. 22).—26. ἀποδύς, throwing off (probably) his outer 
garment : ἐκδύντες (in 1), acc. to Rehdantz, means stripping themselves 
entirely. — 27. παρήγγελλε, gave the word (sc. ἀποδῦσι λαμβάνειν τὰ ὅπλα). 
—28. ὀρθίους : see p. 121, 29, and the note. 

Page 128.] §18. 2. els τὸν ποταμόν, ἴ.6. SO that the blood ran into 
the river. For the ceremonies etc. preceding the passage of the river, 
see Introd. ὃ 291 and § 432. 

819, 5. ἀνηλάλαζον, raised the war-cry, properly shouted aaa : the 
ὀλολυγή was a loud cry or chant, generally a joyous one raised by women 
in invoking the Gods. 

$20. 10. ἐπὶ τὸν πόρον : i.e. the regular ford ; see $3 and ὃ 5. —11. 
ἔκβασιν, passage out (from the river). —12. προσποιούμενος, feigning : he 
“ made a feint of hastening back to the original ford, as if he were about 
to attempt a passage there. This attracted the attention of the enemy’s 
horse [on the opposite bank], who became afraid of being attacked on 
both sides, galloped off to guard the passage at the other point, and 
opposed no serious resistance to Chirisophus.’? Grote. —SvaBds : belongs 


to omitted subj. of ἀποκλείσειν, 


258 ANABASIS IV. 3. 21-28, 


Page 128.] §21. 13. οἱ πολέμιοι : i.e. the cavalry mentioned in 81]. 
--17. ὡς... ἔκβασιν, i.e. hastening to the road which led up from the 
river: ἔκβασιν, as a verbal noun, takes ἄνω and the gen. as if it were 
ἐκβαίνω. Cf. κατὰ τὴν ἔκβασιν in 11, ἐκβαίνειν in p. 125, 15, and ἐξέβαινεν 
in 25 (below). — 18. ἔτεινον, they pushed on. 


ὃ 22. 19. ἱππέων: see Introd. § 30. —20. πελταστῶν : see Introd. § 30 


and § 431,—21. φεύγοντας : see 16 and 17, —29. στρατιῶται : the main 
body of the soldiers who were crossing with Chirisophus. — ἐβόων μὴ 
ἀπολείπεσθαι, called out (protesting) that they should not be left behind, 
but should follow in the pursuit. — συνεκβαίνειν ἐπὶ τὸ ὅρος, i.e. should 
follow the road leading up from the river (τὴν ἔκβασιν, 11) with Lucius 
and Aeschines. 

§ 23. 23. αὖ, on the contrary, as Ch. declined to follow the retreating 
cavalry, but took a more direct course to attack the enemy on the heights. 
— 24. κατὰ... ποταμόν, by (over) the bluffs which reached to the river 
(δ 11) : see G. 969; H. 667 a.—27. ὁπλίτας : the troops of Chirisophus 
who had not followed the retreating cavalry, the στρατιῶται of 22. 

Page 129.] §24. 2. ἀπεχώρει: the same movement mentioned in 


Page 129.] his men. — tvayrious : 
σφῶν, on both sides of them. — 27. 


259 
ANABASIS IV. 3. 28 ann 4. 4. 


i.e. to meet them. — ἔνθεν. kal ἔνϑεν 
διηγκυλωμένους, with hand on the thong 


ἀγκύλη). — L rr ri ec. .£& 
jdn). — ἐπιβεβλημένους (middle), with arrow on the string (8 
(a KU. . ι 


8. πρόσω τοῦ ποταμοῦ, far into the river cee dp HAE yh) 
28. μι] a a ith the thump oO Ϊ 
29, 2. ψοφῇ, ring wi cigar 
gl uid = 15 io 5. σημήνῃ τὸ πολεμικόν, μι ναῷ the tp 
αντας : ᾧ. 1 τ ΤΊ . ὶ υ 
πα μυνΝδα the enemy). See ὃ il aprotic OD eg as is 
ἼΠΙΙ ; slongs to the subjects of bo ἱ 
γιὲ to the right, belongs 7 he spear being 
ye by its position : with ἐπὶ δόρυ; atalie eg Pat pa ᾿ γένηται: 
Sno " Ἴ" " ς Ψ,.». ἃ. oo. 
᾿ ' . omida, Ὁ. 12d, 12. 
-arried in the right hand), cf. rap 4 rev (1). The 
ΠΣ obliqua, a if εἶπεν had preceded instead of reyes ἈΠ ait vi 
direct form would be ἄριστος ἔσται, os av... della al 
direct 1c 1. § 33. 
execution of this manceuvre, see taro’. ἢ igs trod. ὃ 432. —17. as..- 
§ 31. 15. παιανίσαντες . - - REE *) SOR, SPS 


ς . é 


ῦ : is cognate 
§ 32. 19. σημαίνει (sc. τὸ πολεμικόν): cf. 5. — 21. τἀναντία is Cog 


accus. With στρέψαντες. 
§ 33. 22. αἰσθόμενοι, 
24. nal... Ἑλλήνων, 1.6. even 
24. 
25. of ὑπαντήσαντες, those w ' d 
ἐπι iy airy 9. 25. —26. “προσωτέρω τοῦ καιροῦ, 
§ 28): cf. ἐναντίους, Ῥ. 129, 25. — 26. “προ 


29. 2 
than they should have gone: cf. p. 129, 28. 


$$ 20 and 21. —4. καταβαίνοντες : with pavepol ἦσαν (G. 1589; H. 981). 

ὃ 25. 6. τῶν σκενοφόρων (neut.), the baggage train (of the enemy). 

$26. 9. ἀκμὴν διέβαινε, were Just (at the point of) crossing: with the 
adverbial accus. ἀκμήν, just at the point, cf. τέλος in p. 46, 25, and the 
common use of ἀρχήν, at first.—10. ἀντία, . ἔθετο, formed his line 
JSacing them: cf. note on p. 25, 24.—11. nar’ évoporias, by enomoties, 
i.e. With the four ἐνωμοτίαι arranged in line, probably in eight ranks 
(Introd. § 322). The troops had formed in λόχοι ὄρθιοι, company columns 
(Introd. § 36): see p. 127, 28. They are now brought into line of battle 
(ἐπὲ φάλαγγος) by moving παρ᾽ ἀσπίδα, to the left, lit. by the shield. For 
the process see Introd. § 362 and § 33. —13. παραγαγόντας : might have 
been dative with λοχαγοῖς in 11 (G. 928, 1).— 14. τοὺς piv... τοῦ ποτα. 
μοῦ, (he ordered) the captains and enomotarchs to (go to) face the Car- 
duchians and to let the rear-leaders stand (in the rear) nezt the river. 
The ovpayol were thus ready to become the leaders of the companies 
when the order came to “right about face” (see $$ 29 and 32), — 


͵ Euphrates. Ne 
16. ἱέναι : 8c. παρήγγειλε, which may have either the dative (11) or the . ua which can be identifi 
accus. as here (see p. 57, 6). -- καταστήσασθαι, transitive, to cause to Nor have we any means even of dete 
stand or to station (see Dict.). 


apart from specific places, which they f 

$27. 18. τοῦ ὄχλου Ψιλουμένους, left by the crowd (of camp-followers, to Trebizond.”? ποτε. 

etc.) : see 8 and 9 (above). §4, 14. "Appevia ἣ πρὸς ἑσπέραν, 
$28. 23. tSav... διαβαίνοντας, when X. saw them (on the point of) 


: sui Armenia). —17. ἀνέβαλλεν = ἀνεβίβαζεν, 
crossing (to aid him). — 25, αὐτοί, (they) themselves, i.e. Xenophon and eqn aay 


perceiving that the Greeks were crossing. — 
after the Greeks had crossed the river. 


; ἃ 
! me to the relief (see ὃ 27 an 
sect i.e. further 


CHAPTER IV. 


A ι, i.e. in battle array: 
pe ts Oy ee ἔμ ὦ συνταξάμενοι, πρὶν 
§ bs 2 pi ἅπαν, over entirely level country (G. 1057) 
a. me 
in 3: cf. p. 142, 21. all i 
§2. 5. els ἦν κώμην, for ἡ κώμη εἰς ἣν 
ὑ . cf. Lat. turris, Eng. turret, tower. ᾿ 
ἯΙ pee ie it κτλ. : here they shee ail aa : 
ape Tigri d the Euphr ; 
ich i shed between the Tigris an ; 
hich is the watershed be id psd ἴτον 
nF > : ( enerally supposed to be the present Kara-su) Sith ΜΝ 
Pi οι After the river Teleboas, there seems no one po ἣν 
ed with anything approaching to certainty. 
rmining the general line of route, 
ollowed from the river Teleboas 


see Introd. 
SO γηλόφους 


(G. 1037, end; H. 995a).—T. 


Armenia to. the West (Western 
helped to mount: the Greeks 


ANABASIS IV. 4. 5-15. 


Page 131.] §5. 21. εἰς ἐπήκοον : see p. 99, 17. 
$6. 22. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ: expressing condition (G. 1460; H. 999 a).—phre... 
μήτε... Te: see μήτε... re in p. 54, 20. The correlatives are re ": 


discourse (see G. 1503 > H. 9374) : 
δέησθε. ---- 5, ἐπὶ τούτοις, on these conditions - cf. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ (22). 

Page 132.] 88, 4. Χιὼν πολλή :* this was in lat. 39°, at an elevation 
of four thousand feet ; it was near the first of December, —5. ἕωθεν, in 
the morning ; lit. from daybreak : the opposite point of view is found in 


εἰς ἕω, p. 29, 17, and eis ἑσπέραν, p. 81, 22. -- τάξεις : see συνταξάμενοι, p. 
131, 1, and Introd. § 30. 


$9. 9. ἱερεῖα, cattle Sor slaughter (orig. for sacrifice, here Sor food), — 
10. τῶν ἀποσκεδαννυμένων τινές, certain of the stragglers. —11. κατίδοιεν 
φαίνοιτο : in direct discourse, κατείδομεν and Φαίνεται. 
$10. 14. συναγαγεῖν : subj. of ἀσφαλὲς εἶναι (without οὐκ), i.e. they 
thought that safety required them to collect the army again. —15. ἐδόκει 
διαιθριάζειν, it seemed to be clearing up (G. 897, 5 ; H. 602): originally 
τὸν Ala was understood. See Aristoph. Birds, 1501 : τὶ γὰρ ὁ Ζεὺς ποιεῖ; 
ἀπαιθριάζει τὰς νεφέλας ἢ ξυννέφει; Well, what is Zeus about ? Is he clearing 
off the clouds or clouding up ? 
$11. 16. ἄπλετος : a poetic word. — 19, κατακειμένων : gen. abs. (6. 
1568 end). — 20. ἀλεεινόν, warming: see Dict. (G. 925). Cf. triste lupus 
stabulis. —érw μὴ παραρρνείη (see rapappéw), i.e. the snow kept all warm 
Srom whom it did not Jall off. 
$12, 21. ἐτόλμησε, undertook, had the courage. —yupvés, i.e. without 
his mantle (ἱμάτιον) : of. p. 44, 21, 93. ἀφελόμενος (sc. τὰ ξύλα), 1.6. 
taking the wood away from Xenophon. 


$13. 26. ἀμυγδάλινον ἐκ τῶν πικρῶν (sc. xpiua): for ἐκ τῶν πικρῶν 
ἀμυγδαλῶν, i.e. ointment of bitter almonds. — 27. τερεβίνθινον, of the 
terebinth or turpentine-tree. — 28. μύρον, fragrant oil, probably used as a 
perfume ; while the various kinds of χρῆμα were applied to increase the 
suppleness of the limbs and as protection against cold. 

Page 133.] 814, 92. els στέγας, under shelter (from the weather), is 
not a repetition of εἰς ras κώμας, Which implies that they returned to the 
same villages which they had left ($$ 7-10). —5. ὑπὸ ἀτασθαλίας, through 
wantonness, with ἐνέπρησαν, acc. to the better Mss. Others have ὑπὸ τῆς 
αἰθρίας, sub dio, sub Tove, with σκηνοῦντες. 

oan, ἢ Thpvirny (a doubtful name): probably a man from Temnus 
(in Aeolis). —8. ra πυρά : see ὃ 9.—10. ra μὴ ὄντα, i.e. whatever were 
not facts, equivalent to a relative clause with indefinite antecedent, ἃ μὴ 


᾽ 


. Te 
. τε, the first two clauses being negative, the third positive. — 24. ὅσων 
δέοιντο: depending on the clause with ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, and so a part of the indirect 


the direct form would be ὅσων ἂν 


ANABASIS IV. 4. 15 anv 5. 4 261 


ὑς οὐ i.e. 
Page 133.] ἢν or εἴ τινα μὴ ἣν (G. 1613; H. 1025a). — ὡς gredielstey 
he reported such things as not being facts, and a si = αἰμμ νίαν 
816. 11. πορευθείς, i.e. on his return. — οὐκ ἔφη ἰδεῖν, Sat a ob 
. —13. σάγαριν (a Persian word), - 
en: cf. note on p. 11, 10.—1 av ( | 
δι i, See Introd. § 142, —’Apaféves: i.e. in pictures and statues, with 
: 5 en ey. 
yhic Greeks were familiar. ANN 
i ro ἡ" τὸ στράτευμα : i.e. the στρατόπεδον of 15, which is dened 
the ne ate of p. 132, 12. στράτευμα is by anticipation object of ἠρώτων 
instead of being subject of εἴη. | 
1: 20 sities: - why perfect ?— ὡς belongs to re 
Jenatialia cf. ὑπερέβαλλον in 27. — 21. μοναχῇ, atone, ΒΕ in : ᾿ re 
a ᾿ Μ ἜΝ in two ways. —évrat0a: repeating ἐπὶ ry ὑπερβολῃ $ 
way: ¢f. ἢ; 


ῦ . 95, 8. Ι ei 
τ 20. 21. eaniat see Introd. p. 431. —28. τὸ στρατόπεδον : 0 


md eae §21. 6. of ἀρτοκόποι. .. εἶναι, i.e. men who said a 
a : » 6, ep 
were his bakers and his cup-bearers: if the oi before yes ΩΣ 
ΜῊΝ this construction, οἱ ἀρτοκόποι (SC. 
which is doubtful, we have TaD he 
Ἴ t The magnificent furn 
t L of οἰνοχόοι φάσκοντες εἶναι. ts 
ae τ Ἰὼ Mardonius after the battle of Plataea, esau d ae 
sae ΠΝ ead by Xerxes himself, is described by Herodotus, ix. 


and 82. ‘aM i " 
"»Ἶ 22. 9. ἐπίθεσις, i.e. some attack from Tiribazus, — 10. ἀνακαλεσ' 


μένοι : for the recall, see Introd. § 43%. 


CHAPTER V. 


81, 13. ὅπῃ δύναιντο : the direct φρο would be πορευτέον ἐστὶν ὅπῃ 
"¢ ees aie agree ates bees branch, now called ‘* Murad- 
a 23. Sia... πεδίου : we should say, over a plain a0 grey eg 

ow. — 24. παρασάγγας δέκα (most Mss. have πεντεκα a thc 
Ἴ πολ κυδ, of 15 parasangs (about 50 miles) seems incredible u a 
<tscicjlaanetle most editors omit wevrexa:-, leaving δέκα. geet “ ἡ 

| on Grote’s view of the parasang (see Introd. : : 
eer His the same distance given for three days’ journey throug 
pra ae pats for three days of unobstructed marching (20). — tplros 
γῇ, Poa 26 ἜΕΟ ΒΕ blasting (here with cold): cf. Latin uro. 
": Se eg σφαγιάσωνθαι, bade them sacrifice; ἔφη poe 
sith δὴ he said that he had sacrificed (see G. 1628 ; Ἡ, 940 δ): 


su 


ANABASIS IV. 5. 4-12. 


Page 134.] with the infinitive generally has the force of a verb of 
commanding. —28. σφαγιάζεται (middle): sc. ὁ μάντις ; or the verb may 
be passive and impersonal, sacrifice is made. 

Page 135.] 1. ἀνεῖναι, to abate. Boreas was gratefully worshipped 
by the Athenians. His wife was Oreithyia, daughter of their king 
Erechtheus; and they invoked the aid of their “ brother-in-law” (by 
order of an oracle) with great effect against the fleet of Xerxes in 480 n.c. 
See Hdt. vii. 189. 

$5. 4. διεγένοντο... κάοντες, i.e. they got through the night by keeping 
up a fire (cf. ταύτην... διεγένοντο, p. 47, 23). — 8. πυρούς : the genitive 
commonly follows μεταδίδωμι, denoting the whole of which a part is given ; 
the rare accusative denotes the part which is given. Hence a noun like 
μέρος after such verbs can be only in the accusative. —&AXo τι εἴ τι: 
ἄλλο τι being one of the objects of μεταδοῖεν, the common expression εἴ τι 
ἄλλο (cf. p. 22, 5) would have been ambiguous here after εἰ μὴ μεταδοῖεν. 
---9. ἔχοιεν, like μεταδοῖεν (8), expresses a past gen. supposition: we 
might have had ὅ τι ἔχοιεν. On the contrary, εἶχον in 10 (below) is not 
conditional at all, 

8 6, 9. ἔνϑα δή, thereupon; but (10) ἔνθα δέ, and where. —11. ἔστε 
ἐπί, clear down to: so ἄχρι and μέχρι Can be used to emphasize εἰς or ἐπί. 
— 12. παρῆν, there was an opportunity. 

$7. 15. ἐβουλιμίασαν : from Bov-iula (βοῦς and λιμός), ox-hunger, 
bulimy, which was a disease in which the patient suffered from ravenous 
hunger, hunger-faintness ; βοῦς, like ἵππος, in composition sometimes 
expresses magnitude: see Liddell and Scott, under fov-. Cf. ἱππο-σέλινον, 
horse-parsley, and our horse-mackerel, horse-radish, etc. —16. καταλαμ- 
βάνων τοὺς πίπτοντας, coming upon those who fell by the way (i.e. in con- 
sequence of hunger-faintness). 

$8. 21. διδόντας, as givers, i.e. to distribute the food: we might have 
δώσοντας to express the purpose. — παρατρέχειν, to run along (the lines), 
to look for the patients. — 22. τοῖς βουλιμιῶσιν : depends on διδόντας. 

$9. 20. ὑδροφορούσας ἐκ τῆς κώμης, i.e. who came from the village to 
fetch water ; the village-fountain being outside the wall. — 27. ἐρύματος, 
fortification (ἐρύομαι, to defend). 

Page 136. ὁ 10. 2. πορεύονται, and εἴη and ἀπέχει in 3, might all 
be optative or all indicative, and there is good Ms. authority for πορεύοιντο 
and ἀπέχοι. --- 3, ὅσον, about. 

8. 11, 6. ἐδυνήθησαν, were (still) able-bodied: see τὰ μὴ δυνάμενα in 12. 

$12. 14. διεφθαρμένοι... τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς, with their eyes blinded by 
the snow ; the acc. is retained from the (possible) active constr. διαφθείρειν 
τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῖς, to blind their eyes for them (G. 1239): τοὺς δακτύλους 


ANABASIS IV. 5. 12-19. 2638 


Page 136.] is in the same construction after ἀποσεσηπότες, Which 15 
passive in sense, having lost their toes by mortification. 


Cf. note on 


75, 28. 
gees 16. τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ἐπικούρημα τῆς Χιόνος, help (or agi pad 
the eyes against the snow: χιόνος is dace genitive, as we picts saa 
ἐπικουρεῖν τινι χιόνα, like εἴ τῳ χειμῶνα ἐπεκούρησα, vlad ἀρ ta με ih 
one against the winter, Anab. Vv. ὃ. 25. Cf. Lat. ποιὰ εἶμι Η cage 
So we can say φάρμακον νόσου, ὦ medicine for a disease, an μῦν π ρμ Πα 
ὑγιείας, a medicine to cause health. On the other hand, oT puceoaag 
ἐπικούρημα) in 18 gives the more common ee of the pe i a ᾿ ἐμ 
help to the feet. —18. ἐπορεύετο (ἃ. 1396 ; H. 894c) ji) nai a : 
authority for the more regular πορεύοιτο (like the shige Puig od 
and ὑπολύοιτο). --- 19. εἰς THY νύκτα ὑπολύοιτο, took off ἡ yg = ine: 
night ; opposed to ὑποδεδεμένοι ἐκοιμῶντο (20), slept with vii sho ; 
δέω and λύω refer to tying and untying the leather straps (ἱμάντες). 

$14, 90. ὅσοι : the antecedent would be ἃ genitive dependent on 
πόδας. --- 31. περιεπήγνυντο, froze on (their feet), —22. Pil dy ted 
τιναι, (their shoes) were brogues : Hesychius calls them ἀγροικικὸν ὑπόδημα 


μονόδερμον. ---- 29). νεοδάρτων (νέος and δέρω). --- βοῶν, ox-hides: cf. ἐλέφας, 


both elephant and ivory. i 
ξ 15. 26. ἐκλελοιπέναι, was wanting. —27. ἀτμίζουσα ἐν νάπῃ, sleam 


ing in a ἀοϊϊ. ---- 38. οὐκ ἔφασαν πορεύεσθαι, i.e. said they pater nbie 
further ; see note on p. 11,10. We learn from Anab. v. 8. ee 4 ait 
Xenophon flogged a mule-driver at this time for attempting to bury a νὴ 
a, sick soldier whom he had been ordered to carry. The man afterwards 
complained of his flogging; but when the facts were known, the — 
cried out that he had received less than he deserved. See Introd. § 28%. 
Page 137.] 816. 1. ὀπισθοφύλακας (without τούς) » some of the edie 
guard. —2. πάσῃ τέχνῃ καὶ μηχανῇ, by cuery art and device. —4. peingly 
finally. —odarrew : sc. τινά (as subj.), te. Xenophon or anybody else. — 
5. δύ av: 86. ἔφασαν. 
pres pl αβ μη if they (one) could: cf. εἴ τις μὴ λυποίη, Ῥ. 61, 
14.—9. ἀμφὶ. . . διαφερόμενοι, quarrelling about what they had, 1.6. 


> 


eee ὅσον ἐδύναντο μέγιστον, i.e. as loud as, they could (G. 1054 ; 
HI. 716b).— 13. ἧκαν ἑαυτούς, threw themselves: they rushed down into 
the dell over the snow-banks. —14. οὐδεὶς . . . ἐφθέγξατο, i.¢.. not a sound 
) rd from them afterwards. 

“Te ἐπ᾽ i i.e. to get them. — 19. ἐγκεκαλυμμένοις, ——— 
up. —20. φυλακὴ οὐδεμία : this implies that sentinels were os 
posted ; see in 26, φυλακὰς καταστησάμενοι. -- ἀνίστασαν, tried to make 


264 ANABASIS IV. 5. 19-27. 


Page 137.] them 
A get up. —21. ὅτι ὑποχωροῖ 
9 ""» tev, that 
eet the road) did not make way for them a or eee 
. 24. ἃ i 
ms cotcna Pith it i.e. What seemed to be the whole army ; 
with the van was alread OF 
. y quartered illage 
($$ 9-11). —ovrws, i.e. like those in § 19 agi | 
$21. 29. ἀναστήσαντα i h 
. 5) rousing (the ei i i 
St μι. μη ἐημριμῆ , g (them), agreeing with the omitted 
Page 138. ῶ ns 
Bhs ci = " ali 1. τῶν ἐκ τῆς κώμης (G. 1091; 1097 ; H. 736): see 
; . 3, δ. ---ξΞ. σκεψομένους agrees with τινάς implied with τῶ 
- κομίζειν : infin. of purpose. Hi 
§ 23. 10. τοὺς ἑαυτῶν 
). : the troops were organized i 
a : in 
§ Ἴ 2), each under its own commanders ij wpe 3 
9A, 5 4 ᾿ ᾿ | 
Mishel 15. πώλους: cf. Lat. pullus; Eng. foal. — ἑπτακαίδεκα : this 
᾿ oe too — (see $35), but correcting numerals by conjecture 
νμῇ sti — 16. ἐνάτην ἡμέραν, eight days before (G. 1063 ; H. 721) 
: ae ba 4 μον γεῖοι, underground: Mr. H. F. Tozer (Turkish Armenia 
᾿ fe us describes one of the modern dwellings in this region iad 
sl ani gy into a mound or a sloping hill-side. “After ie =a 
ΜΉΝ ‘a da low door, you find a considerable area, divided up ἰπΐο a 
om mt ri hn ΤΣ . . » These pens are almost entirely stables for 
; ne inner compartment, which, fort 
roiajeidlant pact a tages typ , fortunately for the occupants 
| , the roof, is devoted to human bei 
ae | ll Ἢ beings. ... The low 
a bai soe for inion of large stones piled together, ad these support 
Oplars laid at intervals, with 
ΗΝ als, numerous branches across and 
raise a hai the whole is covered by a thick layer of clay which 
ny the roof. The ‘*window in the roof” is a relic of the silt 
“- μα, and now men and beasts both use the front door. — τὸ pev onl 
ὦσπε i sven , 
μὰ sy stay (se. i i.e. the mouth (or entrance) being like that of a vie 
μη Moy eg (opposed to εὐρεῖα!) : στόμα is in partitive apposition 
ah H. ig i with οἰκέαι ; but in the clause with δέ the construction 
-hanges, and we have xd Z ” εὐρεῖ 
me \ κάτω (below) δ᾽ εὐρεῖαι for τὰ δὲ κάτω εὐρέα (80. 
§ 26. 24. οἶνος x } 
i ρίθινος, barley-wine, i.e. ὃ ἢ 
ul ῳερὶ νος 2, ἴν 6. beer. — 25. κρα l 
ae ig? the Greek mixing-vessels. — 26. ἰσοχειλεῖς, 2, pi 
. ON ¢ ἱ ῖ ie } 
id ν᾿ evel with the brim (xetdos). — κάλαμοι, straws, without pies 
ΤΙ" with γόνυ cf. Lat. genu, Eng. knee. 
bi bs ἔδει Pater, he had to suck: ἔδει has here none of its common 
᾿ it lal force (ἃ. 1400; H. 897), but is merely a past tense of δεῖ The 
: ΤΊ necessary to avoid the floating barley. 
Η i : —e 
shire oe, 1, Gxparos, strong, lit. unmixed (a priv. and κεράννυμι) 
- συμμαθόντι, fo one used to it (G. 1172, 2; H. 771 b) Νὴ 


ANABASIS IV. 5. 28 anv 6. 1. 265 


οὔτε στερήσοιτο . . . ἀπίασιν : the direct dis- 
τήν τε οἰκίαν σου ἀντεμπλήσαντες . . . 


ΜΚ 


Page 139.] ὃ 28, ὅ. 


course would be οὔτε στερήσει . . - 
στερήσοιτο is middle, with passive meaning. —6. ἀντεμπλήσαντες, 


filling in recompense (for information). — ἢν ἀγαθόν τι... . φαίνηται, 
if he should appear to have given them good guidance (G. 1054; H. 716 δ). 
᾿ς 8. ἔστ᾽ ἄν, until: γένωνται and φαίνηται (7) might be opt. 

§ 29, 11. ἐν πᾶσιν ἀφθόνοις, amid an abundance of everything : ἄτφθονος 
_ without stint. —13. ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς, in sight, 1.6. keeping an eye on them, 


explaining ἐν φυλακῇ (12). 

8 30, 18. ἀφίεσαν, i.e. ihe 
them go until, etc. —mapadetvas : 
weight of Ms. authority here is for the infin. ; 
seems not to occur (see Moods and Tenses, § 646). 


§31. 19. οὐκ. .. οὐ, and everywhere. 
§ 32. 23. προπιεῖν, to drink (his) health. — εἷλκεν, he would draw him. 


- ἔνθεν... βοῦν, whence he had to drink stooping, sucking like an 0x: 
we should expect βοῦς (sc. πίνει). 

Page 140.] §33. 4. βαρβαρικαῖς, foreign, outlandish. — 5. ὥσπερ 
ἐνεοῖς, as if deaf and dumb ; i.e. by signs, as they could not understand 


Greek. 
§ 34. 9. οἱ ἵπποι: 


—10. δασμός (sc. τρέφοιντο) : 866 G. 91 
the country have the same name : cf. Δελφοί. --- ἡ εἴη: 


ἄπιμεν. 


soldiers quartered in the villages never let 
the ordinary infin. with πρίν. The 
the generic opt. with πρίν 


the breed of horses in this region is still celebrated. 
6. —11. XéAvBas: the people and 
indirect question, 


for πῇ ἐστιν ἡ ὁδός ; 
8.35, 12. πρὸς. . . οἰκέτας, to his family (i.e. the chief's), who were 


in their own village, where Xen. was quartered (δ 24 and § 28): οἰκέτης 
has its primitive meaning here (cf. 25, below). The reflexive ἑαυτοῦ here 
refers to the object (not the subj.) of the sentence, αὐτόν being in a 
prominent position (G. 994; H. 683 b). — 13. εἰλήφει, probably at the 
time mentioned in iii. 3.19; but cf. iv. 4. 21. — παλαίτερον (86. ὄντα); 
when he was rather old, belongs to εἰλήφει. --- 14. ἀναθρέψαντι καταθῦσαι, 
i.e. to fat him up and sacrifice him. —15. δεδιώς : giving the reason of 
δίδωσι in 14.16. τῶν πώλων- (86. τινά). --- 18. ἑκάστῳ : perhaps this 


means each general and captain in his own division : see § 24. 


CHAPTER VI. 


$1. 24. ἡμέρα ὀγδόη : the delay of a week was caused by the exhaus- 


after the severe trials of the past 32 days, from Nov. 7 
ἡγεμόνα παραδίδωσι, he gives 


tion of the troops 
to Dec. 8. See Introd. § 423. --- τὸν μὲν ἢ 


him (i.e. τὸν κωμάρχην) as a guide (cf ἡγεῖτο in p. 141, 2). There is a 


266 ANABASIS IV. 6. 1-11. 


Tinie sil ; : : 
oe ᾿ ae difficulty in this pronominal use of τόν, with κωμάρχῃ imme- 
ie Ὁ tip id and it is harder to take τὸν ἡγεμόνα as the guide 

16 15 called the κωμάρχης in the x 
1ext clause. Perhaps ; 
ΤΠ, , . ps we should 
. . μέν μὲν ἡγεμένα παραδίδωσι, he gives the κωμάρχης himself, as opposed 
ἐμ} οἰκέτας. We should expect τὸν μὲν κωμάρχην τοὺς δὲ οἱ é | 
καταλείπει aire. — 25 i i ἊΝ ea 
iran bi mi si i “* κωμάρχῃ, i.e. he leaves the chief's Samily 
ΤΠ Ϊ age. — 38. ὅπως... ἀπίοι : i.e. intending to let him 
Ν son home with him; the thought of Xen. was 8 Ὶ 8 
ἡγήσεται (80. ὁ κωμάρχηϑ), ... ἀπίῃ. | a anes 
Pa α “ » ~ i 
“ ge Hulu $2. 3. αὐτοῖς : see note on ἄλλοις, Ρ. 54, 13, -- λελν 
μῇ iy not δεδεμένοε : see τὸν ἡγεμόνα δήσαντες, p. 120, 2 6. οὐκ elev 
C. κὠμαι). -- 7, € ᾿οὔ: this is nip 
. ἀρ 7. ἔδησε δ᾽ ot: this is added to account for the guide’s 
. Kei not to show the kindness of Chirisophus ii 
. 8. ἀποδρὰς wero (G. 1587 | re 
n α, 1587).—11. ἀμέλεια, neglect, i.e. i i 
Malic hee : glect, i.e. in letting 
a μην escape. — 12. ἐχρῆτο : cf. note on p. 70, 7, rae 
Hie ! ϑάσιν: the famous Colchian river Phasis, for which the Greeks 
an a ae mistook this stream, flows into the Euxine from the East This 
rr ' Ἔ ᾿ Ἢ | | AC DMast. 5 
. ὰ gery Ἴ upper part of the Araxes, flowing into the Caspian 
; ? Ι δ ᾿ “ mt δν, c ᾿ 
byl πὶ τῇ . . . ὑπερβολῇ, on the pass leading over to the plain: 
note on p. 133, 20. ΤΠ 
$6. 20. aL adi Ὶ 
ων Ι ae “_ rely leading (his men) in column (partic. of 
ap Ἴ aif 7 gps § 35 : —21. παράγειν, to lead along, to bring into 
f bat πὶ @adayyos). For the movement by whi i 
effected, see Introd. § 342 ‘j ia | νὰ ken cat 
od, 9 4“ and Fig. 4. Note that Ch. halted : 
sri aa g. 4. Not at Ch. halted 30 stadie 
i 34 miles) from the enemy (19) to execute this manceuvre 7 
te : : J ἦν « " ." 

"1 ᾿ 23. ὀπισθοφύλακες : see Introd. § 861, ---90, ὅπως ἀγωνιούμεθ 

pee this object clause with the final clause ὅπως γένοιτο in 22 at 
i Ι Ι i hal 

Hi ge ae ὃ 9. ' 2. ἐπὰν τάχιστα : cf. p. 83, 4. -- 7. προσγενέσϑ 
Ὁ “Abin εἰκός, will join them (G. 1286; H. 948a): in Cyrop ie 0) 

we have οὐδένα εἰκὸς βουλή ; ἥν μὰ ioas 

ἥἤσεσθαι. See M 36, wi 
cae s oods and Tenses, § 136, with the 
§10. 10. 6 b is i i 

isa 0 ὅν μαχούμεθα is In appos. with τοῦτο (G. 1363), and is the 
gular form of the object clause ; but ὅπως λάβωμεν ἀποβάλ γὴν 

Haan ΣΕ ΠΗ eet wpev (in 

+ with rere ttt 11) is the less common form (G. 1374; H 8855) ; 

Ἴ ΤΠ ἀνδρῶν : we should say human lives bill {0} 
- 14. x ὁ Opa | 

Mikes πο ανν ° i ἣν ὁρώμενον, that part of the mountain which is 
sible ; é emphatic position of τὸ dpa 5. ἐφ᾽ : ἐ 

denotes extent. —o% A atc ρώμενον. ----Τῦ, ἐφ᾽ : ἐπί here 

μμαρῆμα extent. | ovSapod... ἀλλ᾽ ἤ, nowhere else than: ἀλλ᾽ ἤ for ἄλλο ἤ 

ra a μη has but one accent, so that ἀλλ᾽ looks like the elided 
orm of ἀ — mm ig , aa 

τ κι ά. 17. ὄρους τι, some part of the mountain. — κλέψαι Aabdv- 

. urprise by stealth : here thé idea of κλέψαι, to take (like a thief) 
᾽ 


ANABASIS IV. 6. 11-17. 267 


Page 142.] is more prominent than it would be in the more common 
and nearly equivalent idiom κλέψαντας λαθεῖν (G. 1586; H. 984). The 
same is true of ἁρπάσαι φθάσαντας (18), to seize in advance, compared 
with ἁρπάσαντας φθάσαι, to be beforehand in seizing. See Moods and 
Tenses, § 893. —18. et δυναίμεθα : opt. as if πολὺ κρεῖττον ἂν εἴη, and not 
πολὺ κρεῖττον (sc. ἐστί), preceded. 

812, 21. ὄρϑιον ἱέναι, to march up hill ; ὁμαλὲς (ἰέναι), to march over 
level ground : see note on πεδίον, p. 131, 2. - ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν, on both sides 
of us. —22. τὰ πρὸ ποδῶν, i.e. what is immediately before him. —23. μεθ᾿ 
ἡμέραν, by day ; lit. after (the coming of) day.—24. τοῖς ποσίν : to be taken 
with τραχεῖα (sc. γῆ). --- ἰοῦσιν and βαλλομένοις (G. 1172, 1; H. 771): ef. 
προϊοῦσι, p. 95, 17, and πειρωμένοις, Ῥ. 125, 23. —25. τὰς κεφαλὰς Baddo- 
pévors, with their heads pelted, representing an active constr. Tas κεφαλὰς 
αὐτοῖς βάλλουσιν (G. 1239). See note on p. 75, 28. 

§13. 26. ἐξόν : causal. —28. αἴσθησιν παρέχειν, i.e. betray ourselves. 
—Soxotpev δ᾽ Gv... dv... χρῆσθαι, if seems tome that we should find, 
etc. : ἄν belongs to χρῆσθαι (= χρῴμεθα ἄν), and is repeated to give a 
potential force to the whole apodosis (G. 1312 ; H. 864). We translate 
δοκοῦμεν impersonally merely that we may render the infin. by a finite 
verb, and so give the force of ἄν. See note on p. 71, 6. The protasis is 


(= ef προσποιοίμεθα), if we should make a feint. —29. 


in προσποιούμενοι 


ἐρημοτέρῳ, with fewer defenders. 
Page 143.] 1. μένοιεν : ἄν is understood from the preceding sentence, 


as if χρῷμεθα ἄν had really stood there. See Moods and Tenses, § 226 
(last example cited). — αὐτοῦ, here, as opposed to τῷ ἄλλῳ ὄρει. 

$14. 2. συμβάλλομαι (sc. λόγους), i.e. give my ideas. —4. τῶν ὁμοίων, 
equal citizens or peers, a name given to the Dorian aristocracy of Sparta. 
- ἐκ παίδων : as we say, from a child. —6. ὅσα μὴ κωλύει : conditional 
(α. 1428, 1; 1430; H. 913; 914 A). 

$15. 9. μάλα qualifies καιρός ἐστιν : a very fit time. —10. τοῦ ὄρους : 
gen. of part: cf. ὄρους κλέψαι τι, P. 142, 17. —11. ds: see G. 1368. 

816. 12. ἀλλὰ μέντοι (more emphatic than ἀλλά), but really. —14. 
δεινοῦ Tod κινδύνου : the penalty of embezzlement might be death : δεινοῦ, 
formidable, refers back to δεινούς in 13. —al μέντοι, and in truth. —16. 
ὑμῖν ἄρχειν, (0 be your rulers (lit. to rule for you), distinct from ὑμῶν 
ἄρχειν, to rule over you. 

ξ 17. 21. κλωπῶν : referring to the preceding jokes on κλοπή. --- 
τούτων Kal πυνθάνομαι, I learn from them also, i.e. besides other things. 
—22. νέμεται αἰξὶ καὶ βουσίν, if is grazed by goats and cattle (instrum. 
dat.): this corresponds to an act. constr. νέμουσι τὸ ὄρος αἰξί, the herdsmen 
(οἱ νέμοντες) being the subj. Cf. Verg. Aen. xi. 319: exercent colles, - 


268 ANABASIS IV, 6.17 anp 7. 5. 


Page 143.] atque horum asperrima pascunt. See Cyr. iii, 2. 20. — 


24. Bard (sc. τὰ χωρία), passable ᾿ 
p. 111, 20 and 21. 
$18, 24. ἐλπίζω μενεῖν: see note on p. 142, 7. — 26. 
a level with them, with an allusion to the obvious meanir 
them. —27. ἡμῖν... ἴσον, to the same level with us. 
§ 19. 28, 29. Kal, ἀλλά : observe the spirit of the 
29. ἀλλὰ ἄλλους πέμψον : the idea is don 
Page 144] § 20. 4. σύνθημα ἐποι 
λάγτειν... συμβοηθήσειν, p. 120, 3..7. 
§ 21, 6. ἐκ τοῦ ἀρίστου, after breakfast.—8. ὡς μάλιστα belongs to δοκοίη. 
§ 22. 0. οἱ ταχθέντες, those appointed to go (see § 20). 
$23. 14. θυσάμενος : cf. p. 114, 25. See Introd. § 291.—15. κατὰ τὰ 
ἄκρα ἐπῇσαν, advanced along the heights ; cf. τοῖς κατὰ τὰ ἄκρα in 17. 
$24. 16. τὸ πολύ, the main part.—18. τοὺς πολλούς, i.e. the two 
main bodies. — ἀλλήλων : following ὁμοῦ (G. 1149; H. 757), which gen- 
erally takes the dative. 


$26. 24. τὸ ἄνω (sc. μέρος), for rods ἄνω. See § 24,927. 
p. 149, 21. 


but see note on Bdowa and ἄβατα, 


ἐν τῷ ὁμοίῳ, on 
1g On a par with 


se abrupt connectives.— 
*t go yourself, but send others, etc. 
ἥσαντο κάειν : Cf. συντίθενται φυ- 


$27. 27. θύσαντες καὶ τρόπαιον στησάμενοι : see Introd. 432 (end). 
— 29. γεμούσας, full, lit. loaded (said of ships). 


CHAPTER VII. 


Page 145.] §1. 1. Taéxovs: a tribe of mountaineers, still known 
among their kindred by the name of Tao. —4. ἐν ols... ἀνακεκομισμένοι, 
where they also carried and kept all their provisions (i.e. besides using the 
strongholds for defence). 

$2. 6. συνεληλυθότες ἦσαν αὐτόσε, there were collected there (thither) : 
the partic. and ἦσαν come very near to a periphrastic pluperfect. — 8, 
εὐθὺς ἥκων, as soon as he came (to it) : see G. 1572; H. 976. —9. τάξις : 
see Introd. p. 80, 2. 

§3. 12. πελτασταῖς καὶ ὁπλίταις : in appos. to ὀπισθοφύλαξι ; see p. 
116, 7, and p. 146, 13. —13. Ets καλόν, in the nick of time. —14. οὐκ 
ἔστι implies a future, as apod. to εἰ uh ληψόμεθα. 

$4. 17. εἰσελθεῖν ; we might have had μὴ εἰσελθεῖν and other forms: 
see G. 1549; H. 963.— Mla... ἐστιν, there is that one passage there: 
see note on p. 118, 21. — 20. οὕτω διατίθεται, is served thus, —22 
πλευράς : after the passive συντετριμμένους (G. 1 

§5. 23. ἀναλώσωσιν, use up. 


. σκέλη, 
239) ; see note on p. 75, 28, 
—24. BAon HR... παριέναι, is there 
anything to prevent us from passing by? literally, is anything else (the 


ANABASIS IV. 7. 5-16. 


} 4; H. 
Page 145.] case) than (this, that) nothing prevents, etc.? (G. ry Ἢ μὴ 
10150) : ἄλλο τι (without 7) is the more common form ; see p. 09, 
28 ἡ, nisi, except (sc. ὁρῶμεν). | 
Ἴ : oT cath ἡμίπλεθρα : i.e. 150 feet. —28. βαλλομένους, under fire 
Ml 
of stones). HI nel 
ἡ τοῦ <i 7 1. διαλειπούσαις, scattered. —&v0" wv, behind which 
φερομένων, flying (through the air) : ef. hasuigaras a oad anes 
1. me i.), 1 t numbers. — av 3 
$7. 7. πολλοί (pred.), in grea i vane 
Bath ἔνθεν, (to the point) from which. —9. μικρόν τι 
ifty feet called τὸ λοιπόν in 3. oa 
eae ἡγεμονία : the company which led the column sh pie 
λων. see Introd. 8 401. --- λοχαγῶν : appos. ; see p. 148, 12. ae 
᾿ ’ 
5 i λοχαγοί. ! 
gig gt acc. of extent (or cognate geneity φέροιντο, 
. mde . 4 ἡμὴ τὸ 
shenever the stones began to fly. —25. ἅμαξαι, (here) cart 0c ae 
Ἷ 27, μὴ οὐ πρῶτος παραδράμῃ, i.e. that he might not ge y first. 
Be 167] 819, 4. αὐτοῦ τῆς trvos, the rim of his shield: ἴτυς 18 a 
age » . " 148 6 
tic word. — 10. ἠνέχθη : cf. φέρονται, Ῥ. 5 Khe LU 
ie μὴ ty δεινόν ae seeiod: § 282, —13. ὡσαύτως : adverb of 6 sa 
‘a Σ rel of Stymphalus in Arcadia, famous in paps “ ἡ 
= ee a ὡς ῥίψοντα: ws refers to τινά as the person whose intention 
ercules. — : 
is expressed. 
814, 16. ᾧχοντο φερόμενοι : see G. 1587, “αι 
815. 21. παρασάγγας πεντήκοντα : see Introd. § 41.— 2: ; eb a 
flaps generally of leather covered with metal) at the bottom 0 ραξ. 
a ‘andes ἐστραμμένα, plaited cords forming pele ul eal 
§ 16 25. μαχαίριον, diminutive of ant nisi πὶ ἐπῆρε 
ἘΝ : ξυήλην is accus, by a peculiar ¢ ᾿ 
as long as a Spartan dagger: ξυή ! dase brit 2 
aa ll should expect ξυήλη (sc. ἐστί) : of. G. 1036. : 27 a ate 
ἐπορεύοντο, i.e. they used to cut off their heads (i.e. ὧν κρατ ats 
My T * . x Ι j ie 
ind pets sadn ike on their march: ἄν belongs gsiemens O oe Ἴ 
Bh (G. 1296; H. 835), but the iterative force of the whole iy 
we 15 to Pat SST ; we might have had ἀπέτεμνον dy καὶ ἐπορεύοντο. 
με pe ; ἔμελλον, i.e. whenever they were to be seen by the enemy. 
"een eles 2 sins λόγχην ἔχον, i.e. with a sharp point at only re 
" ae ὶ ν᾽ 
end ee Greek spears had also a point (στύραξ) at SC butt, al ᾿" mi a 
in th i ly the metal point of a spear, 
I ound. λόγχη is proper 
saree the whole weapon. δόρυ is the more common ei ee s 
is i he wooden shaft, δόρυ and δρῦς 
), though this is properly t 
: Siege our al tree. —3. πολίσμασιν : derived from πολίζω, to build 
rela 


(prop. a city, πόλις) ; see G. 887; H. 553, 1. 


ANABASIS IV. 7. 17-27. 


Page 148.] $17. 4. μαχούμενοι (fut.), ready to fight. —5. ἐν τούτοις 
makes the storing of provisions in the strongholds more prominent than 
the carrying them into these. Kriiger (Spr. § 68, 12, A. 2) remarks that 
this use of ἐν is confined, in Attic Greek, to the perfect and pluperfect 
(which mark the action as completed) and to verbs like τίθημι. Cf. ἐν 
οἷς - + εἶχον ἀνακεκομισμένοι in p. 145, 4.—7. διετράφησαν : a return to the 
independent sentence, as if ὥστε had not preceded: cf. ὑπώπτευον in 
p. 122, 22 τοῖς κτήνεσιν ἅ : the assimilation is here omitted. 

$18. 8. “Apwacov: the Greeks do not cross this river. —19. ἐπεσιτί- 
σαντο: see Introd. § 42, 

$19. 16. Sa... χώρας, through the country of their own enemies - 
πολέμιος Sometimes (as here) governs the genitive, chiefly (and original ) 
when it has the force of a substantive : cf. πρὸς τοὺς dustin Pee MES| 
p. 91,18. See G. 1144,1; H. 754 d. — ἑαντῶν refers to the people of 


ὁ ἄρχων (the subject): cf. 20.—17. ὅπως ἄγοι : optative after an historic - 


present. 
{ » m ᾿ " >_> = » 
hag 10. εἰ δὲ μή: cf. note on p. 53, 7. - ἐπηγγείλατο, agreed, offered. 
fi . THY εαυτοῦ πολεμίαν (sc. χώραν): cf. note on 16. 
a nx ὑμοβό 
ge 148 ὃ a. 4. δασειῶν.... ὠμοβόεια, covered with raw hides 
of shaggy oxen: Body is gen. of material. 

" § 23. 6. πλείων τε καὶ ἐγγύτερον : adj. and adv. together with ἐγίγνετο 

A alt i , i ur hf ι 

te shout was becominy louder and getting nearer. —ot ἀεὶ ἐπιόντες, those 
“we |, On ᾿ " isi " ω o~ » ~ Ι ι ᾿ 

who Aa tapD Sti came up ; 80 (7) τοὺς ἀεὶ βοῶντας, those who successively 

raised the shout. —9. μεῖζόν τι, somethi re i 

-— 9. » Something more important (the > hac 
rear p (than he had 

Hy or 10. παρεβοήθει, came up to the rescue, thinking it was an attack 
of th aN eOTY δ ..10 Ἱ 

, oe ΘΗ (δ 22). --- 12. παρεγγνώντων, passing the word along : παρεγ- 
γυᾶν Is properly to hand over something as a pledge (ἐγγύη) 
ΜΚ » ᾽ | ° * * ‘ 

§ 25. 16. ἀφίκοντο πάντες : the description in the last sections shows 
that the Greek column was very long: see Introd. § 351. —17. ὅτου δὴ 
παρεγγνήσαντος, some one (whoever he may have been) giving the word: 
ὅστις always has this indefinite sense when it is joined with -ουν (ὁστισοῦν) 

are it , 
rarely with δή (as here). In v. 2. 24, we have ὅτου δὴ ἐνάψαντος, some one 
or other setting it on fire. 

$26. 21. κατέτεμνε: i i 
ν pve: ἐ.6. that the natives might not re 
move : 
cf. p. 144, 27. sich 
9» » ~ 
Ἴ 23. ἀπὸ κοινοῦ, from the common stock: see Introd. § 26 (end) 
— 25. δαρεικοὺς δέκα : about $54.00. See note on Ῥ. 33, 2. — robs δακτυ 
λίους, their rings (chiefly seal rings). ‘*The free Greek, if not of the 
hap poorest class, wore a ring, not only as an ornament, but as a signet 
Ὁ attest his signature, or for making secure his property.’’ Becker’s 


ANABASIS IV. 7. 27- anv 8. 11. 


Page 149.] Charicles. —27. οὗ σκηνήσουσι : rel. clause of purpose (G. 
1442; H. 911). So ἣν πορεύσονται, These clauses are very rarely changed 
to the fut. opt. after past tenses. — 28. ὥχετο ἀπιών: ἃ. 1587. 


CHAPTER VIII. 


Page 150.] 8.2. 5. ὑπὲρ δεξιῶν (neut.), over the right (on the right, 
above) : we have also ἐν δεξιᾷ (sc. χειρί), on the right; cf. ἐξ ἀριστερᾶς, 
on the left hand (in 5). See δέξιος and ἀρίστερος in Dict. — οἷον χαλεπώ- 
τατον: like ὡς (or ὅτι) χαλεπώτατον. --- 6. ὁ ὁρίζων, the frontier stream: 
cf. Eng. horizon. —7. ἔδει διαβῆναι, they had to γαϑ88. --- δένδρεσι : more 
common than the reg. dat. δένδροις. ---- 9. ἔκοπτον : i.e. to clear the banks 
of the river so that the army could pass over. (See p. 151, 6.) 

§3. 13. εἰς τὸν ποταμὸν ἔρριπτον : i.e. the stones all fell into the 
river ; see the following clause with ydp. 

§ 4, 16. δεδουλευκέναι : distinguish δουλεύω, to be a slave, from δουλόω, 
to enslave (see G. 867; H. 572). —18. εἰ ph τι κωλύει, if there is nothing 
to hinder (a present supposition) : see the answer, οὐδὲν κωλύει, in 19. 

$5. 21. ἐρωτήσαντος (sc. αὐτοῦ). ---- 22. ἀντιτετάχαται : Ionic perfect 
(G. 701; H. 464 a). 

$7. 28. et δοῖεν ἄν (indir. question), whether they would give; they 
asked δοίητε dv; 

Page 151.] 4. πιστὰ εἶναι : see Introd. § 29%. 

$8. 6. συνεξέκοπτον : i.e. helped the Greeks cut down the trees. — ὁδὸν 


ὡδοποίουν (G. 546), they worked on the road, to help the Greeks reach the 
river. — διαβιβῶντες : see G. 665, 2; H. 424. —7. μέσοις τοῖς : see p. 6, 9, 
and note. 

89, 12. φάλαγγα: i.e. they at first thought of attacking the height 
in line of battle. The arguments against this are given in δὲ 10-13.— 
14. βουλεύσασθαι συλλεγεῖσιν, i.e. to come together and consult (ἃ. 928, 1), 
as if it had been συλλεγῆναι καὶ βουλεύσασθαι. 

810. 16. παύσαντας. .. ποιῆσαι, that they should give up the phalanx, 
and should form the companies in columns, — 18. διασπασθήσεται, will 
be broken up (torn asunder) : i.e. the line will ποῖ be able to march all at 
the same pace (see next clause). —18. τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, here, there. 

811, 21. ἐπὶ πολλῶν, many (men) in depth, opposed to ἐπ᾽ ὀλίγων (in 
24), few in depth. See Introd. ὃ 823, with Fig. 2, in which the depth of 
the line is 8. With a depth of only 4, the line would be doubled in 
length, but greatly weakened. On the other hand, the deeper and shorter 
line could be more easily outflanked. In 21, πολλῶν is a conjectural 
emendation for πολλούς, which it is hard to explain, especially with ἐπ᾽ 


ANABASIS IV. 8. 11-21. 


Page 151.] ὀλέγων (24) following. —22. περιττεύσουσιν ἡμῶν, will outflank 
us (G. 1120). — 23. τοῖς περιττοῖς, i.e. those by whom they will outflank us. 
--Ο- χρήσονται... βούλωνται, i.e. we shall be at their mercy. —24. οὐδὲν av 
εἴη has two protases, both future, but of different forms: see Moods and 
Tenses, § 510. — 26. ἀθρόων, in a mass: predicate with ἐμπεσόντων. 

Page 152.] δ 12. 1. τοσοῦτον. .. λόχοις, to cover sufficient ground 
with the companies by leaving spaces between them. — τοσοῦτον ὅσον, 80 
much as, sufficient, takes the infinitive as an ad jective (Moods and Tenses, 
ὃ 759): the idea is, to cover ground enough to have the outer companies get 
beyond the enemy’s wings. See note on ὀρθίοις τοῖς λόχοις, in p. 121, 29, — 
6. ot κράτιστοι ἡμῶν, i.e. the best of our captains (sc. λοχαγοῖ). ---- πρῶτον : 
for πρῶτοι, which is perhaps necessary here ; see p. 153, 7. 

$13. 7. τὸ διαλεῖπον, the interval between the columns : cf. τὸ διέχον, 
Ρ. 107, 1.—12. οὐδεὶς μηκέτι μείνῃ, not a man will stand his ground for 
a moment (G. 1360; H. 1052) ; the compounds of οὐ and μή (as here) can 
be used in these emphatic future expressions. 

$14. 16. ἐμποδὼν τὸ ph εἶναι, in the way of our being (G. 1551, ef. 
1549 ; H. 901 α). --- 18, ὠμοὺς καταφαγεῖν, devour (them) raw, a common 
expression, rather stronger than our cut them in pieces or gobble them up: 
Gf. Il. iv. 35, ὠμὸν βεβρώθοις Πρίαμον Πριάμοιό τε παῖδας ἄλλους τε Tpdas. 

$15. 22. εἰς τοὺς ἑκατόν : 100 was the full number of a company 
(λόχος). See Introd. § 322. The 80 companies make 8000 hoplites. For 
these compared with the original numbers, see Introd. ὃ 232.—24. τοῦ 
δεξιοῦ : 86. ἔξω. See Introd. § 431, 

$16, 26. εὐξάμενοι καὶ παιανίσαντες : see Introd. § 432. 

Page 153.] 1. ἔξω γενόμενοι : i.e. with a view to outflanking the 
enemy. 

$17. 2. ἀντιπαραθέοντες, i.e. hastening along (their own line), to con- 
front the Greeks and so save themselves from being outflanked, by 
extending their line. —4. κενόν, empty, i.e. without men enough. 

$18. 5. κατὰ τὸ ᾿Αρκαδικόν, i.e. belonging to the Arcadian division. — 
—6. φεύγειν : sc. τοὺς πολεμίους. 

δ 19. 9. ὡς ἤρξαντο θεῖν : see 6. 

8. 20, 14. τὰ μὲν ἄλλα, in other matters, opposed to τὰ δὲ σμήνη 
(= ἑσμοῖ), swarms of ὅ668. --- ἐθαύμασαν, found strange, is emphasized by 
καί, which has no exact English equivalent.—17. κάτω διεχώρει αὐτοῖς, 
i.e. they had a diarrhea: διεχώρει is impersonal. —20. ἀποθνήσκουσιν : 
in same construction as μεθύουσιν and μαινομένοις. 

$21. 21. ὥσπερ τροπῆς γεγενημένης, as if they had suffered a defeat 
(see note on p. 15, 14), referring to the disheartened condition of a 
defeated army. —23, πὼς makes τὴν αὐτήν less definite. — ἀνεφρόνουν, 


ANABASIS IV. 8. 21-26. Zio 


Page 153.] began to come to their senses. — 24. ἀνίσταντο: ll to 
ἔκειντο (20). — φαρμακοποσίας (φάρμακον, drug, and πίνω, drink), being 
drugged. ‘The idea is, the men recovered from the effects of cane - 
honey, as they would have done from the effects of drugging or poisoning. 
ες Most modern travellers attest the existence, in these regions, of honey 
intoxicating and poisonous, such as Xenophon describes. They point 
out the Azalea Pontica as the flower from which the bees imbibe this 
peculiar quality. Professor Koch, however, states that after careful 
inquiries he could find no trace of any such.’? Grore. 

§ 22. 26. Τραπεζοῦντα : the modern Trebizond on the Black Sea. 

Page 154.] 1. Σινωπέων, the people of Sinope, a Greek city on the 
sxoast of Paphlagonia. 
He Rigg ιν, (sc. rots Ἕλλησιν), they negotiated win the 
Greeks. —7. ὑπέρ, in behalf of. —8. ξένια : see G. 916; H. 726; and 

Ag sus.) In 5. 
Bs 9 τ, see iii, 2. 9.—11. ἱκανοὶ sag cf. ἱκανώ- 
τερα φέρειν, 85, 24. —12. Διὶ τῷ σωτῆρι (see Dict. 8.0. Ζεύς) : we should 
expect σωτήρια, thank offerings for safe deliverance, after σωτῆρι; this is 
found in iii. 2. 9. ---- ἡγεμόσυνα (found only here), thank offerings for safe 
guidance, made to Ἡρακλῆς Ἡγεμών ; the wanderings of Hercules sai 
believed to give him special sympathy with wanderers. — 15. ἔφυγε 
οἴκοθεν, was banished from home. —16. ἄκων (Hom. ἀέκων, from a- and 
ἑκών), accidentally. The Greeks looked upon a person who wi caused 
the death of another, even by accident, as a polluted person, and he was 
obliged to leave the country, at least fora time. The law of Athens — 
a relic of the Draconic legislation, usually famous for its severity —pro- 
vided that a person who had committed involuntary homicide should 
leave the country within an appointed time and by a prescribed road, 
and should remain in exile until he should become reconciled with the 
family of the person whom he had killed ; but the law protected him in 
his departure and during his absence, so far as it could, and his property 
was not confiscated like that of persons condemned to perpetual banish- 
ment. Even inanimate objects which had caused the death of a person 
through no human agency, or when the agent was unknown, pip: 
according to the Draconic law, solemnly tried before the court at t 
Prytaneum, and on conviction formally cast out of the country as ᾿ - 
luted. —17. ἐπιμεληθῆναι, προστατῆσαι : infinitives of purpose alter 
εἵλοντο (14). 

§ 26. 18. τὰ δέρματα, the hides of the victims (ὃ 25), which were to 
be offered as prizes in the games. — 19. ὅπον . . . ely: the direct ~~ 
of the command would have been ὅπου πεποίηκας. ---- δρόμον, race-course : 


274 ANABASIS IV. 8. 26-28, 


Page 154.] cf. ἱππόδρομος, hippodrome. — 21. τρέχειν, for running. — 
ὅπον ἄν τις βούληται, wherever any one shall please: the future apod. 
is found in τρέχειν. ---- 23. οὕτως, like this: placed emphatically after the 
adjectives which it qualifies. —MGAAév τι ἀνιάσεται, will hurt himself 
rather more, and so they will try harder to keep on their feet; as if this 
were a recommendation of the spot for a race-course. 

$27. 25. στάδιον : cognate accus. with ἠγωνίζοντο ; like δόλιχον with 
ἔθεον, and πάλην etc. with ἠγωνίζοντο understood (G. 1052; H. 715 b). — 
τῶν αἰχμαλώτων of πλεῖστοι, the greater part (being) of the number of the 
captives, appos. to παῖδες. --- δόλιχον (noun), the long race, variously esti- 
mated from 6 to 24 stadia in length, probably variable. The adj. δολιχός 
(oxytone), long, appears in the Homeric δολιχόσκιον ἔγχος. The δολιχο- 
δρόμος ran several times round the ordinary στάδιον : for the stadium, see 
note on p. 17, 2.27. παγκράτιον, double (lit. complete) contest, one which 
combined both πάλη and πυγμή. There is a lacuna in the Mss. between 
παγκράτιον and καλή, and the words ἕτεροι" καί usually inserted here have 
little or no authority. — 28. κατέβησαν, entered (the contest): cf. Lat. 
descendere in certamen. 

Page 155.] ὃ 28. 1. «αὐτούς, i.e. the horses: object of ἄγειν, bring. 
— ἐλάσαντας and ἀναστρέψαντας agree with τοὺς ἱππέας understood, the 
subject of ἄγειν. --- 2. τὸν βωμόν, the stand, probably ἃ mound of turf, to 
mark the starting-place in the race, 


According to Koch’s chronology (see L. Dindorf’s Oxford 
edition, p. xxxvii), the march of Cyrus from Sardis took 
place March 6, 401 B.c., the battle of Cunaxa was fought 
September 3, the Greeks crossed the river Zapatas and began 
their retreat October 23, and the army arrived at Trapezus 
February 8, 400 B.c. | 

For a brief account of the further fortunes of the “Ten 


Thousand,” see the Introduction, § 4, 


MARCH OF THE Try THOUSAND GREEKS. 


myn 


\ oe 


: ) nat a aM ye 7 
4 m_ — \, | τ | ἡ 
ae Me bas ἣν a : % 


ἡ ἃ 


μὰ 
, Sal 
Sang a A on 2 ἡ 3! ] 


Maronia Neonteichoge 


AS liad hi ps " 


. SAN’ 

AW sea TAN a 

mae ΗΚ ΜΡ 'Gangra 
Ve 


Pie ‘a pe 


ΝΟ a 


Gordie m 


Μή, nus 


ay 


‘Sa. as Mh,” 
Syn [ϑ a ΄ iy 
LNT hymbrium 


Erltae K ™ yriaeum 


Ἢ 


ee τ n 
“| \ 
‘ = \Bambyce 
“ΝΥ ll, , 
% bt 


ἕ oe “αἱ Ὀηιαΐῖ rN 


nt, i 7 
oon ω“ 


nmin Route of the Ten Thousand. 
to + Boundary of the Satrapy of Cyrus. = | 
Persian Parasangs of 30 Stadia each. { Mm 
0 10 20 30 40 Sidon,’ 
English Miles [ Sy 
50 100 150 μ 


ara 


{Damascus 
- 


Longitude bu from Greenwich 


iii Ad ili 


ILLUSTRATED DICTIONARY 


XENOPHON’S ANABASIS, 


WITH 


GROUPS OF WORDS ETYMOLOGICALLY RELATED. 


BY 


JOHN WILLIAMS WHITE, Pu.D. (Harv.), 


PROFESSOR OF GREEK, 


AND 


MORRIS H. MORGAN, Px.D. (Harv.), 


ASSISTANT PROFESSOR OF GREEK AND LATIN, 


IN HARVARD UNIVERSITY. 


kal δὴ καὶ τὸ περὶ τῶν ὀνομάτων οὐ 
σμικρὸν τυγχάνει ὃν μάθημα. Prat. Crat. 384 ὃ. 


BOSTON, U.S.A.: 
PUBLISHED BY GINN & COMPANY. 


1894. 


ΟΟΡΥΕΒΙΘΗΤΥ, 1891, 


By JOHN WILLIAMS WHITE anp MORRIS H. MORGAN. 


ALL RKieats RESERVED 


TypoeRraPHy BY J. 8. Cusuine & Co., Baston, U.S.A. 


PRESSWORK BY GINN & Co., Boston, U.S.A. 


PREFACE. 


Tus Dictionary has not been compiled from other vocabularies 
and lexicons, but has been made from the Anabasis itself, on ‘the 
basis of an independent collection and examination of all the 
places where each word occurs. The editors have aimed to give 
all words found in the principal editions of the Anabasis now in 
use, including Dindorf’s fourth edition and Hug’s recension of 
the Teubner text, as well as the editions of Kriiger, Vollbrecht, 
Rehdantz and Cobet, and Goodwin and White’s edition of the first 
four books. 

In the definitions, they have intended to give all the meanings 
that each word has in the Anabasis, beginning, when possible, with 
the etymological meaning, and passing through the simpler varia- 
tions to the more remote. Each meaning or group of meanings is 
supported by at least one citation. The number of citations given, 
except in the case of conjunctions, particles, pronouns, and prepo- 
sitions, is determined by the importance of the word as shown by 
the frequency of its occurrence in the Anabasis. When a word 
is of common occurrence in all the books (as Ἕλλην and ἔρχο- 
pat), this is indicated by a row of one or more citations from 
each book. But a few words, like xaraxaivw, though not common, 
are cited at length because their treatment in lexicons has been 
defective. Under each word the first passage in which it occurs is 
always cited. When but one citation is made for a word, that 
word is found only once in the Anabasis. 

In treating of the derivation of words, special attention has been 
given to their connexion with one another and with related words 
in Latin and English. Because of the importance of this subject, 
etymological explanations have for the most part been removed 
from the body of the Dictionary, and added at the end in the form 


ili 


ἂν 


of one hundred and twenty-four groups of related Greek, Latin, 
and English words. These groups include the greater number 
of the words in the Anabasis, presented in the natural order of 
their development from a common element. The groups are not 
complete for the entire language, since they contain in the main 
only words found in the Anabasis and selected Latin and English 
words. For a fuller treatment, Vanitek’s Griechisch-Lateinisches 
Etymologisches Warterbuch may be consulted, as well as the books 
named on page 247. These groups should be specially and sepa- 
rately studied. Too little attention is given to the manner in 
which pupils acquire their Greek vocabulary. The result is often 
a confused half-knowledge of the meaning of words. The acquisi- 
tion of a vocabulary becomes both easy and interesting, if the 
method is used which recognizes the great advantage of grouping 
words that are related. 

At the end of many articles are placed phrases or idioms of 
special difficulty or interest in which the given word appears. In 
selecting English equivalents for these phrases, as for the words 
themselves, the editors have been governed by a desire to keep 
the Greek ideas alive, and to avoid that strange dialect which 
seems to have been devised by the Adversary for the express 
use of schools, and which has done much to make Greek (and 
Latin also) a dead language indeed. Further, at the suggestion of 
a well-known teacher, Latin equivalents have been given for many 
Greek words and phrases, in the hope of encouraging the compara- 
tive study of the two languages in schools. Latin words, unless 
included within square brackets, are of course not necessarily ety- 
mological equivalents. 

Simple constructions that follow a given verb, such as the 
‘direct’ or ‘indirect object,’ are not indicated unless some other 
construction also is found in the Anabasis with this verb. When 
more than one construction is found, at least one citation is given 
for each. It may be thought that some articles are swelled beyond 
their due limits by the statement of constructions at length, but 
the editors have preferred to risk this criticism rather than to be 
too brief. They believe, too, that the fulness with which such 
words are treated will be found of real assistance by many teach- 
ers, especially by those who teach Greek composition by means of 
exercises based on the Anabasis. 


Vv 


Among the ‘principal parts’ of verbs, only those tenses have 


been admitted of which forms are actually found in Attic prose or 


etry before Aristotle. To ascertain the facts has been a task of 
110 little difficulty, since, except for the ‘ irregular verbs,’ the pronent 
attempt has not before been made in a Greek dictionary. Veitch 8 
well-known work has been of great assistance, and so have various 
‘ndexes to the most important authors. But there must still be 
many Attic forms not yet catalogued. No tense, however, is here 
viven which is not represented by a form in some Attic author. 

ὶ Under geographical words, the modern name, when iG differs 
from the ancient, is generally added in parenthesis (see 6... Αλυς). 
As many of these names are Turkish, the nib vocabulary 
may be of service. It is taken from Dr. Sterrett’s preface to his 
Epigraphical Journey in Asia Minor, in Vol. IT. of the Papers of 
the American School of Classical Studies at Athens. 


Ak, white. Kieui, village. 

Boyiik, large. Kilisse, church. 
Dagh, mountain. Kizil, red. | 
Hissar, castle. Su, water, large river. 
Irmak, large river. Tchai, small river. 
Kara, black. 


The Greek vowels a, t, and v, when long, and all long vowels in 
Latin words, are marked with the usual sign wherever they occur 
in the Dictionary. The same mark is placed on the penult of 
English transliterations of Greek and Latin proper substantives 
and adjectives in all cases where the pupil is im danger of giving 
the English word the wrong accent. ' 

The editors hope that the illustrations and the articles on man- 
ners and customs, on military organization and equipment, and on 
other topics relating to the objective side of old = life, may 
help to arouse the pupil’s interest as he reads Xenophon’s graphic 
account of the achievements of the Ten Thousand. As works of 
art, some of the illustrations leave much to be desired, but they 
may nevertheless serve to make Xenophon’s narrative | more 
real to the youthful reader. The sources of the illustrations are 

age 243 ff. 
ie cal ae of this book discharges an obligation which 
Mr. White rashly assumed many years ago. He would not be able 


γι 


to meet it now if his colleague, Mr. Morgan, had not come to his 
aid. Mr. White begs to acknowledge his obligations for assist- 
ance when the book was in the early stages of making, to Gardiner 
M. Lane, Esq., of Cambridge, to Dr. F. B. Goddard, of Columbia 
College, and to Professor F. L. Van Cleef, of the University of 
Wisconsin. Both editors would acknowledge their more recent 


indebtedness for valuable help to Mr. Charles B. Gulick and to 
Miss Lucy A. Paton. 


CAMBRIDGE, Dec. 1, 1891. 


DIRECTIONS AND EXPLANATIONS. 


WHEN a verb is ‘regular’ and all the six ‘principal parts’ are 
found in Attic Greek, only the present and future tenses are given, 
followed by ete. The parts of ‘irregular verbs’ are given in full, so 
far as they occur in the authors, as well as all the existing parts of 
those ‘regular’ verbs of which some parts are not found in Attic. 
The theme is inserted among the ‘principal parts,’ just after the 
present tense, unless the verb is of the First or Variable-vowel 
class. A hyphen prefixed to a tense signifies that the tense occurs 
only in compounds. The parts of a compound verb are not given 
if the simple verb occurs in its proper place in this Dictionary. 

The form of the genitive is given for substantives of the A- 
declension, the gender is indicated in the O-declension, and both 
genitive and gender are given in the Consonant-declension. 

The derivation of the word is indicated in square brackets just 
before the definition. When the root or word given in these 
brackets is in heavy-face letter, refer to the Groups of Related 
Words alphabetically arranged (p. 247 ff.). If a word is given in 
light-face type in these brackets, without further statement, refer 
to that word in its proper alphabetical place in the body of the 
Dictionary. If no square brackets occur, the derivation of the 
word is unknown or its etymological connexion is doubtful. Eng- 
lish cognate words are printed in small capitals, English borrowed 
words in heavy-face letter. (See p. 247.) 

For information in regard to the illustrations, see p. 248 ff. 

The following Abbreviations are used : — 


abs. = absolute, absolutely. adv. = adverb, adverbial, adverbi- 
acc. = accusative. ally. 

acc, to = according to. antec. = antecedent. 

act. = active, actively. aor. = aorist. 

adj. = adjective, adjectively. apod. = apodosis. 


Vili 


appos. = apposition, appositive. 
art. = article. 

attrib. = attributive. 

cf. = confer, compare. 

comp. = comparative. 

cond. = condition, conditional. 
conj. = conjunction. 

contr. = contraction, contracted. 
dat. = dative. 

def. = definite. 

dem. = demonstrative. 

dep. = deponent. 

dim. = diminutive. 


intr. = intransitive, intransitively. 

Lat. = Latin. 

masc. = masculine. 

mid. = middle. 

Ms., Mss. = manuscript, manu- 
scripts. 

neg. = negative. 

neut. = neuter. 

nom, = nominative. 

obj. = object. 

opp. to = opposed to. 

opt. = optative. 


DICTIONARY TO 


ἀ-, an inseparable particle, (1) 


THE ANABASIS. 


"Αβῦδος, ἡ, Abydus, a city of 


p., pp. = page, pages. 

part. gen. = partitive genitive. 
partic. = participle. 

pass. = passive, passively. 
pers. = person, personal. 
Pers, = Persian. 

pf. = perfect. 


negative, orig. dva-, afterwards ἀν- Troas, mentioned by Homer, but 
(which is its usual form before | later colonized by the Milesians, 
vowels, whereas ἀ- is used before|on the Asiatic side of the Helles- 
consonants), gives the word to| pont at the point where the strait is 
which it is prefixed a negative | narrowest,i.1.9. It was here that 
meaning, Lat. in-, Eng. un-; (2) | Xerxes built his famous bridge, 


dir. = direct. 

disc. = discourse. 

Dor. = Doric. 

edit. = edition, editor. 
editt. = editions, editors. 
e.g. = for example. 


encl, = enclitic. 

Eng. = English. 

esp. = especial, especially. 

etc. = and so forth. 

f., ff. = following (after numerical 
statements). 

fem. = feminine. 

Jin. = sub fine. 

freq. = frequently. 

fut. = future. 

gen. = genitive. 

ibid. = in the same place. 

i.e. = that is. 

impers. = impersonal, imperson- 
ally. 

impf. = imperfect. 

imv. = imperative. 

indef. = indefinite. 

ind., indic. = indicative. 

indir. = indirect. 

inf. = infinitive. 

interr. = interrogative, interroga- 
tively. 


pl. = plural. 

plpf. = pluperfect. 

poet. = poetic. 

pred. = predicate. 

prep. = preposition. 

pres. = present. 

pron, = pronoun. 

prop. = proper, properly. 

prot. = protasis. 

q.v. = which see. 

refi. = reflexive, reflexively. 

rel. = relative, relatively. 

R. = root. 

80. = scilicet. 

sing. = singular. 

subj. = subject. 

subjv. = subjunctive. 

subst. = substantive, substantively. 
sup. = superlative. : 
8.0. == sub voce. 

trans. = transitive, transitively. 
voc. = vocative. 


union, Eng. together; (3) euphonic 


consonants, but also before simple 


- ἄβατος, ov R-Ba}, not to be 


d-rat, ἅ-πᾶς, ἀ-πλόος, g.v.) signifies 


or prothetic, a phonetic element 
occurring especially before two 


liquids, nasals, and εν merely facili- 
tates pronunciation. 
a, see ὅς. 


trodden. Of mountains or a coun- 
try, impassable, for men or horses, 
iii. 4. 49, iv. 1.20, 6. 17; of a river, 
not to be crossed, except by boats, 
not fordahle, v. 6. 9. 

᾿Αβροζέλμης, ov, Abrozelmes, a 
Thracian, interpreter to Seuthes, 
vii. 6. 43. 

᾿Αβροκόμᾶς, ἃ (Dor. gen.), Abro- 
comas, satrap of Phoenicia and 
Syria, and commander of one- 
fourth of the king’s army, 300,000 
men, i. 7. 12. From cowardice or 
treachery he abandoned the Cili- 
cian Pass at the approach of Cy- 
rus, i. 4. 5, though he afterwards 
burned the boats used for crossing 
the Euphrates in order to impede 
his advance, i. 4. 18, cf. i. 3. 20. 
At Issi his Greek mercenaries, 400 
in number, deserted to Cyrus, i. 4. 
3. He did not reach Cunaxa until 


ἄγω 


five days after the battle, i. 7. 12. 


copulative (older form a-, in ἀ-θρόος, and from here Leander swam the 
Hellespont to Hero in Sestus. 


ἀγαγεῖν, ἀγάγῃ, ἀγαγών, see 


ἀγαθός, ή, dv, good, in the broad- 


est sense, as opposed to κακός. 
Hence, of persons, good (in war), 
brave, valiant, i. 9. 14, iii. 2. 3, v. 
8. 25, upright, virtuous, i. 9. 80; of 
things, serviceable, useful, profita- 
ble, excellent, ii. 1. 12, iv. 4. 9, 
favourable, advantageous, iii. 1. 
38, v. 7. 10, fertile (of land), ii. 4. 
22, auspicious (of a dream), iii. 1. 


12. As subst., ἀγαθόν, τὸ ἀγαθόν, 


good, good thing, benefit, service, 
resource, advantage, blessing, il. 5+ 
8, iii. 1. 45, vi. 1. 20, vii. 7. 52; in 


the plur., good things, blessings, 
means of living, advantages, wealth, 
products, iii. 1. 20, 22, 2. 11, iv. 
6.2. 264 4S VE ee 
Phrases: ἀγαθόν τι ποιεῖν τινα, do 
one some service, i. 9. 11, v. 7. 10; 
ἀγαθόν τι βουλεύεσθαι, take good 
counsel, iii. 1. 34; ἀγαθόν τι ἐξηγεῖ- 
σθαι, give good guidance, iv. 5. 28 ; 
ἀγαθὰ πάσχειν, receive benefits, Vii. 
3. 20; καλὸς καὶ ἀγαθός, καλὸς κᾶγα- 
θός, noble and good, possessing the 
virtues of a noble man, ‘gentle- 
man,’ ii. 6. 19, 20; ἐπ᾽ ἀγαθῷ, for 
one’s good, v. 8.18. Comp. ἀμείνων, 


1 


ἀγάλλω-ἀγνωμοσύνη 


βελτίων, κρείττων, sup. ἄριστος, βέλ- 
Τιστος, κράτιστος, ἢ.Ὁ. 

ἀγάλλω (ἀγαλ-), ἀγαλῶ, ἤγηλα, 
glorify ; mid., glory in, take delight 
in, either with ἐπί and the dat., or 
with the simple dat. of the cause, 
ii. 6. 26. 

ἄγαμαι, ἠγασάμην, ἠγάσθην, ad- 
mire, 1. 1. 9, 

ayav, adv. [R. ay], very, exceed- 
inglu, Vii. 6. 39. 

ἀγαπάω, ἀγαπήσω, etc., treat with 
affection, love, with acc., i. 9. 29; 
be well content, be thankful, with 
a clause with ὅτι, v. 5. 13. 

*Ayaclas, ov, Agasias, a Stym- 
phalian Arcadian, iv. 1. 27, one of 
the captains in the Greek army, iv. 
7. 9, and the fast friend of Xeno- 
phon, vi. 6.11. He was one of the 
volunteers through whose brave 
efforts a mountain fastness of the 
Taochi was stormed, and a sup- 
ply of provisions obtained for the 
army, iv. 7. 11; was foremost in 
storming the stronghold of the 
Drilae, v. 2. 15; advocated Xeno- 
phon’s election as commander-in- 
chief, vi. 1.30; was one of three 
envoys to demand money from 
Heracléa, vi. 2. 7; and was deliv- 
ered to Cleander, governor of By- 
zantium, for punishment for res- 
cuing one of his own company 
whom Dexippus was carrying off, 
but was set free at the request of 
an embassy from the army, vi. 6. 
7 sqq. 

ἀγαστός, 4, dv [verbal of ἄγαμαι], 
admirable, praiseworthy, i. 9. 24. 

ἀγγεῖον, τό [dim. of ἄγγος, τό, 
vessel], vessel, wine-jar, vi. 4. 23, 
vii. 4. 3. 

ἀγγελία, as [ἀγγέλλω, message, 
announcement, ii. 3. 19. 

ἀγγέλλω (ἀγγελ-), ἀγγελῶ, 7γ- 
γειλα, ἤγγελκα, ἤγγελμαι, ἠγγέλθην, 
bring news, announce, report, with 
πρὸς and the acc. of the person and 
the simple acc. of the thing, i. 7. 


> 


13, or with the dat. of the person 


ἄγγελος, ὁ [ἀγγέλλω, cf. Eng. an- 
gel, ev-angelist |, messenger, scout, 
envoy, herald, τ. 2.'21, 3. 8, ii. 1. 5, 
3. 3, Vii. 6, 12. 

ἀγείρω (ἀγερ-), ἤγειρα [ἀγείρω], 
collect, iii. 2. 13. 

ἀγένειος, ov [yévus], beardless, 
ii. 6. 28. 

᾿Αγησίλᾶος, ὁ, Agesilaus, king 
of Sparta from ΒΟ. 398 to 361-360, 
He obtained the throne on the 
death of his brother Agis, whose 
son Leotychides was declared ille- 
gitimate. Although unattractive 
in person, and lame, he was always 
famous as patriot, warrior, and 
| general. In command of the ex- 
| pedition against Persia in 396, he 
was victorious in Asia Minor until 
594, when he was recalled on the 
news of the alliance of Athens, 
Thebes, and other-states against 
Sparta. Xenophon accompanied 
him on his return, v. 3. 6, and is 
said to have been with him at his 
| victory at Coronéa. He twice saved 
the city of Sparta from the attacks 
of Epaminondas, and died during 
a campaign in Egypt at the age of 
80. An encomium on Agesilaus is 
attributed to Xenophon. 

᾿Αγίᾶς, ov, Agias, an Arcadian 
in the Greek army, one of the five 
generals entrapped and put to 
death by Tissaphernes after the 
battle of Cunaxa, ii. 5.31 sg. Αἱ 
this time he was about 35 years of 
age. He was a man free from the 
charge of cowardice or unfaithful- 
ness, ii. 6.30. Cleinor was chosen 
general in his place, iii. 1. 47. 

ἄγκος, ovs, τό [R. ayx], bend. 
Hence mountain-glen, valley, iv. 
.. 1. 

ἄγκῦρα, as [R. ayx], anchor, iii. 
5. 10. 
ἀγνοέω, ἀγνοήσω, etc. [R. yvo], 
not know or recognize, iv. 5. 7, vil. 
3. 38; be in doubt, vi. 5. 12. 
ἀγνωμοσύνη, ns [R. yvw], want 
of knowledge, ignorance. Hence 


and a partic. clause, ii. 3. 19. 


in plur., misunderstandings, ii. 5. 6. 


3 


ἀγνώμων, ov, gen. ovos [R. γνω], 
without knowledge, senseless, in- 
considerate, devoid of judgment, 
vii. ὃ. 23, 38. 

ἀγορά, ἂς [dyelpw], assembly, 
meeting, V. 7. 3, place of assembly, 
Lat. forum, esp. market-place, mar- 
ket, i. 3. 14, v. 1. 6, vii. 1.19, in 
Greek cities commonly situated in 
the middle of the city. So on the 
march the market was set up near 
the general’s tent in the middle of 
the camp.. Hence, market in the 
sense of provisions for sale, V. 5. 
19, vi. 2.8. Phrases: ἀμφὶ ἀγορὰν 
πλήθουσαν, περὶ πλήθουσαν ἀγοράν, 
about the time of full market, fore- 
noon, When the market was full of 
people and ordinary business was 
going on, i. 8. 1, il. 1. 7; ἀγορᾶν 
παρέχειν τινί, ἀγορὰν ἄγειν, furnish 
a market, offer provisions for sale, 
ii. 4. 5, iv. 8. 23, v. 7.33; ἀπὸ τῆς 
ἀγορᾶς ζῆν, subsist by purchasing 
provisions (as distinguished from 
living by plunder), vi. 1.1; ἀγορᾷ 
χρῆσθαι, purchase provisions, Vil. 
6. 24. 

ἀγοράζω (ἀγοραδ-), ἀγοράσω, elec. 
[ἀγείρω], frequent the market. 
Hence, buy, purchase, i. 5. 10, v. 7. 
13, vii. 3.5; mid., buy for oneself, 
i. 3. 14. 

ἀγορᾶνόμος, ὁ [ἀγείρω + R. νεμ], 
market-master, market-inspector, 
commissary, V. 7. 2, 23 sq., 29. 

ἀγορεύω, ἀγορεύσω, etc. [ἀγείρω], 
speak in the assembly, harangue, 
speak, say, V. 6. 27. 

ἀγρεύω, ἀγρεύσω, etc. [R. ay], take 
in the chase, catch; pass. ἀγρευό- 
μενα θηρία, beasts of the chase, V. 
3: 8. * « * 

ἄγριος, a, ov [R. ay], living in 
the fields, wild, i. 2. 7, 5. 2, V. 7. 24. 

ἀγρός, ὁ [R. ay], Jield, land, τὰ 
ἐκ τοῦ ἀγροῦ ὡραῖα, the products of 
the land, v. 3. 9; the country, as 
opposed to the town, vi. 2. 8. 

ἀγρυπνέω, ἀγρυπνήσω [R. ay+ 


ἀγνώμων-ἀγωνίζομαι 


ἄγω, ἄξω, ἤγαγον, xa, ἦγμαι, 
ἤχθην [R. ay], set going, drive, 
lead. Hence, lead, bring, as per- 
sons, horses, or beasts of burden, 
ii. 4. 18, iv. 3. 13, 5. 36, 7. 19, 8. 28, 
vi. 6.6; lead, as a general does, i. 
3. 5, 8. 12, v. 7. 1, 27; carry, as 
freight, arms, mill-stones, or men, 
i. 5. 5, 7. 20, 9. 27, v. 1. 4, 8. 6; 
direct, guide in a given way, VI. 3. 
18; apprehend, carry off, vi. 6. 21, 
24, 28; sometimes apparently in- 
trans., with the object to be sup- 
plied from the context, lead the 
way, lead on, march, i. 3. 21, 10. 6, 
ii. 2. 16, vii. 2. 2, and then actually 
so (of troops), march, go, iv. 8. 9; 
so of a road, lead, go, ili. 5. 15, iv. 
3. 5. Phrases: dye δή, ἄγετε δή, 
come now! well then! ii. 2. 10, ν. 
4. 9, Vii. 6. 88; ἄγειν ἐπὶ γάμῳ, take 
home as one’s wife, ii. 4. 8; φέρειν 
καὶ ἄγειν, Lat. ferre et agere, plun- 
der, despoil, where φέρειν strictly 
refers to the plunder that is car- 
ried off, ἄγειν to men and cattle, 
ii. 6. 5, Vv. 5. 138; ἡσυχίαν ἄγειν, 
keep quiet, be at peace, iii. 1. 14; 
ἄγων, ἄγοντες, the partic. often 
where we should use with, ii. 4. 25, 
iv. 4. 16, v. 4. 11; ἐπὶ θάνατον ἄγε- 
σθαι, ἄγεσθαι ἐπὶ θανάτῳ, see under 
θάνατος, i. 6. 10, ν. 7. 84; ἀγορὰν 
ἄγειν, bring, furnish provisions for 
sale, V. 7. 33. 

ἀγώγιμος, ον [R. ay], capable of 
being carried; τὰ ἀγώγιμα; things 
portable, freight, cargo, V. 1. 16. 

ἀγών, Gvos, ὁ [R. ay], gathering, 
assembly, assembly at the great 
national games. Hence, coniest, 
struggle, games, i. 7. 4, iii. 2. 15, as 
in the phrase ἀγῶνα τιθέναι OF ποι- 
εἶν, hold games, i. 2. 10, iv. 8. 25, Vv. 

. 5. 
᾿ ἀγωνίζομαι (ἀγωνιδ-), ἀγωνιοῦμαι, 
etc. [R. ay], contend, fight, engage, 
of an army, iii. 1. 16, iv. 8. 9, v. 
2. 11, with πρός and the acc., 1]. 
5. 10; contend in games, with 
cognate ace. of the contest, 1V. 


ὕπνος, lie awake, be watchful, vii. 
6. 36. 


8. 27. 


ἀγωνοθέτης --᾿Αθηναία 


ἀγωνοθέτης, ov [R. ay+ R. θε], 
judge of a contest, president in the 
games, iii. 1. 21. 

ἄδειπνος, ον [R. δα], without 
supper, supperless (see 8.v. δεῖπνον), 
i. 10. 19, iv. 5. 21. 

ἀδελφός, ὁ, Voc. ἄδελφε [ d- copula- 
tive and δελφύς, uterus], brother, i. 
1. 3, li, 3. 28, vi. 3. 24, vii. 2. 25. 

ἀδεῶς, adv. ξδείδω3, without fear, 
Jearlessly, confidently, i. 9. 13, vi. 6.1. 

ἄδηλος, ov [δῆλος], doubtful, un- 
certain, V. 1. 10, vi. 1.21; οὐκ ἄδη- 
λον (litotes), indisputable, abso- 
lutely certain, vii. 7. 32. 

ἀδιάβατος, ov [R. Ba], not to be 
crossed except by boats, not forda- 
ae Eat gE ad 

ἀδικέω, ἀδικήσω, etc. [R. 1 Sax], 
be unjust, be in the wrong. Hence, 
do wrong, abs., ii. 6. 20, vi. 1. 2, 
14, wrong, injure, harm, with the 
acc. of the pers., ii. 5. 3, vii. 6. 41, 
and the cognate acc. of the thing, 
i. 9. 13, vii. 6. 14, sometimes with 
both accs. in the same sentence, i. 
6. 7, v. 4. 6, the cognate acc. re- 
maining unchanged in the pass., v. 
7.34. The pres. is often used in 
the sense of the perf., have done 
wrong, be in the wrong, i. 5. 11, ii. 
6. 21, v. 7. 26, and so in the pass., 
be wronged, have suffered wrong, i. 
6. 7, vii. 7. 31. 

ἀδικία, as [R. 1 Sax], injustice, 
wrongdoing, li. 6. 18. 

ἄδικος, ov [R. 1 Sax], unjust, 
unprincipled, 1. 6. 8, ii. 6. 25. As 
subst., ὁ ἄδικος, the wrong-doer, τὸ 
ἄδικον, injustice, i. 9. 13, 16. Sup. 
ἀδικώτατος, aS ἀδικώτατα πάσχειν, 
be treated most unjustly, vii. 1. 16. 

ἀδίκως, adv. [R. 1 Sax], unjustly, 
V. 7. 3D. 

ἀδόλως, adv. [δόλος], without de- 
ceit or treachery, faithful, ii. 2. 8, 
iii. 2. 24. 

᾿Αδραμύττιον, see ᾿Ατραμύτειον. 

ἀδύνατος, ον [δύναμαι], unable, 
powerless, impossible, impractica- 
ble, ii. 4. 6, iii. 5. 12, iv. 1. 265, v. 


+ 


Gd, ἄσομαι, ἦσα, ἤσθην, Att. for 
ἀείδω, sing, iv. 7. 16, v. 4. 14, 17. 
Sometimes with cognate acc., iv. 
3- 27, vi. 1. 6. 

adel, adv. [older form αἰεί, cf. αἰών, 
an age, Lat. aewum, Eng. ever, 
AYE], always, ever, in each case, 
regularly, constantly, successively, 
at the time, from time to time, i. 9. 
19, iii. 2. 31, 38, iv. 1, 7, 7. 23, v. 4. 
15. 

Gerés, ὁ [R. 2 aF], eagle. The 
bird consecrated by the Greeks to 
Zeus, which, as his messenger, 
foretold men their affairs. On this 
account the seers carefully gave 
heed to its flight and cry, vi. 1. 23, 
5. 2. The standard of the Per- 
sian king was a golden eagle, i. 
10. 12, 

ἄθεος, ov [θεός], godless, impi- 
ous, li. 5. 39. 

᾿Αθῆναι, dv [Epic ᾿Αθήνη, ᾿Αθη- 
ναίη, Att. "A@nva, ᾿Αθηναίᾷ, Athe- 
na}, Athens, the chief city of At- 
tica, famous for its splendid build- 
ings and its political history. It 
was situated somewhat south of 
the centre of the plain of the Ce- 
phisus, four miles distant from the 
sea. Its harbour, called Piraeus, 
was distant from Athens towards 
the south-west about five miles, 
ana was connected with it by ‘the 
long walls.’ The most extensive 
and noblest buildings of the city 
were on the Acropolis, the chief 
ornament of which was the Par- 
thenon, the temple of Athéna. At 
the time of its greatest prosperity 
Athens had between 180,000 and 
200,000 inhabitants. iii. 1.5, 2. 11. 

"AOnvala, as [ο΄ ᾿Αθῆναι], Athé- 
na, the watchword agreed upon by 
Seuthes and the Greeks because 
of their relationship, vii. 3. 39, ef. 
vii. 2. 31. In Greek mythology 
Athéna is the goddess of warlike 
prowess and wisdom, and the pro- 
tectress of Athens. According to 
the myth she sprang into being 


6. 10, vii. 7. 24. 


full-armed from the head of Zeus. 


5 


᾿Αθηναῖος, a, ov [᾿Αθῆναι], Athe- 
nian. Used in the Anab, as a 
subst., Αθηναῖος, ὃ, an Athenian, i. 
8. 15, ii. 5. 37, 6. 2, iii. 1. 5, iv. 6. 
16, vi. 2. 10. tte 
᾿Αθήνησι, locative adv. [Αθῆ- 
ναι, at Athens, iv. 8. 4, vil. 7. 57. 
ἄϑλον, τό [cf. αθλος, 0, contest, 
Eng. athlete], prize of contest, 
prize, i. 2. 10, iii. τ. 21. 
ἀθροίζω (ἀθροιδ-), ἀθροίσω, etc. 
[ἀθρόος], press close together, col- 
lect, as troops, Lat. cogd, i. τ. 6, 
10.5; mid., muster, intrans., i. 1.2, 
9. 7, Vi. 3. 4. 
ἀθρόος, a, ov [ἀ- copulative and 
θρόος, noise, older form ἀθρόος], in 
a noisy crowd, close together, in a 
body, all together, of living men, 
dead bodies, and villages, i. 10. 13, 
iv. 6. 18, 7. 8, vi. 5. 6, vii. 3. 9, 41; 
strengthened by πολύς, in ἃ mass, 
used of men and missiles, iv. 8. 11. 
ἀθυμέω, ἀθυμήσω [R. 1 Ov], be 
ἄθυμος, be despondent, lose cour- 
age, be disheartened, iii. 2. 18, 4. 
20, 5. 3, Vv. 4. 19, vi. 2. 14, 6. 36, 
vii. 1. 9. 
ἀθυμητέος, a, ον, verbal [R. 1 
θυ, must lose courage, iii. 2. 23. 
ἀθυμία, as [R. 1 bv], faintheart- 
edness, discouragement, dejection, 
despondency, iii. 2. 8, 3. 11, iv. 3. 
7, 8. 10, 21. 
ἄθῦμος, ov [R. 1 Ov], without 
heart or courage, dispirited, de- 
pressed, fainthearted, i. 4. 9, iii. 1. 
36, vii. 8. 16. : 
ἀθύμως, adv. [R. 1 θυ], faint- 
heartedly, dejectedly, iii. τ. 40; ἀθύ- 
pws ἔχειν, be disheartened or de- 
spondent, iii. 1. 3, vi. 4. 26. 
ai, αἵ, see ὁ, ds. 
αἰγιαλός, ὁ, seashore, beach, Vi. 
4. 8g 1. 
Αἰγύπτιος, a, ov [Αἴγυπτος], 
Egyptian, ii. 1. 6. As subst., Aé 
γύπτιος, 6, an Egyptian, i. 4. 2, 8. 
9, ii. 5. 15. 
Atyvrros, ἡ, Egypt, the land of 
the Nile. For over a century before 


᾿Αθηναῖος- Αἰνιάν 


been under Persian rule, but had 
been liberated by Amyrtaeus in the 
time of Darius II., 414 p.c. The 
Persians attempted to subjugate 
the land again, and the Ten Thou- 
sand Greeks after the death of Cy- 
rus offered their assistance, but 
Egypt remained independent until 
350 s.c. In 382 B.c. it was sub- 
dued by Alexander the Great. ii. 
1. 14, 
αἰδέομαι, αἰδέσομαι, ἠδεσάμην, 
ἤδεσμαι, ἠδέσθην [αἰδέομαι], respect 
with fear, reverence, respect the 
memory of, revere, iii. 2. 4, 5. 
αἰδήμων, ov, gen. ovos, Sup. αἰδη- 
μονέστατος [αἰδέομαι], respectful, 
modest, i. 9. 5. 
αἰδοῖον, τό, comm. pl. [αἰδέομαι], 
the private parts, Lat. pudenda, iv. 
. 12. 
i αἰδώς, ots, ἡ [alBéopar], respect, 
1.6.19, 

αἰεί, see Gel. 

Αἰήτης; ov, Aecétes, king of Pha- 
sis in Colchis, v. 6.37, and not to be 
confused with the mythical owner 
of the golden fleece. But the king 
of Phasis doubtless claimed de- 
scent from the other. , 

al@pia, as [atOw], clear sky, iv. 


᾿ αἴθω [αἴθω], set on sire, kindle, 
burn, iv. 7.20; mid. intrans., be on 
fire, burn, Vi. 3. 19. 

αἰκίζω (aixd-), comm. dep., aixi- 
fouar, αἰκιοῦμαι, etc. [ἔοικα], out- 
rage, torture, maltreat, mutilate, 
ii. 6.29. Phrase: τὰ ἔσχατα aixe- 
σάμενος, torturing most cruelly, Lat. 
ultimis cruciatibus adficere, il. 1. 
18. 

αἷμα, aros, τό, blood, Vv. 8. 15. 

Alvéas or Αἰνείας, ov, Aenéas, a 
Stymphalian captain in the Greek 
army, iv. 7. 13. he 

Αἰνιάν, dvos, ὁ, an Aenianian. 
The Aenianians were an ancient 
Hellenic race and settled finally in 
the upper valley of the Sperchéus 
in southwestern Thessaly. i. 2. 6, 


the time of the Anabasis Egypt had 


γι... 


αἴξ-αἵτιος 


αἴξ, αἰγός, ὁ, ἡ, goat, iii. 5. 9, iv. 
Sao We ἃ 2 E. 

AloXis, ἰδος, ἡ, Aeolis, v. 6. 24, a 
district on the coast of northern 
Lydia, between the rivers Hermus 
and Caicus, colonized by Aeolians. 
The chief city was Cyme. In a 
wider sense the name included all 
the Aeolic colonies as far north as 
the Troad. 

aiperéos, a, ov, verbal [aipéw], 
must be taken, iv. 7. 3. 

αἱρετός, ἡ, dv [aipéw], that may 
be taken or chosen, chosen ; oi aipe- 
Toi, the men chosen, the deputies, i. 
ch je 

aipéw (ἐλ-), αἱρήσω, εἷλον, ἤρηκα, 


ἥρημαι, ἠρέθην [αἱρέω], take, seize, | 


capture, of persons or things, i. 4. 
8, 6. 2, v. 2. 9, 4. 26, vii. 3.26; mid., 
take for oneself, choose, prefer, 
elect, side with, i. 3. 5, 7.3, 4, 9. 9, ii. 
6. 6, iii. 4. 42, iv. 8. 25, v. 6.3, 7. 28, 
vi. 1. 25, vii. 3. 5, 6. 15; correspond- 
, ingly, in the pass., be elected, chosen, 
a, ¥. 40, 47,°2:'1, v.'S 1, vi. 3. 23, 
6. 22. Phrase : ὅτι ἄρχων ἤρητο, ex 
officio, vi. 2. 6. 
, αἴρω (ap-), ἀρῶ, ἦρα, ἦρκα, ἧρμαι, 
nponv, Att. for ἀείρω (dep-), ete. 
[ἀείρω], raise, i. 5. 3, V. 6, 33, Vii. 
3. 6. 

als, see ὅς. 
_ αἰσθάνομαι (αἰσθ-), αἰσθήσομαι, 
ἡσθόμην, ἤσθημαι [R. 1 «ΕἸ, per- 
ceive, learn, see, observe, become 
aware of, with the simple acc., i. 1. 
8, iv. 1. 7, which is often to be 
supplied from the context, i. 8, 22, 
iv. 3. 33, with a partic. clause, i. 9. 
21, iv. 6. 22, or with a clause with 
Sri, ws, Or Sor, i. 2. 21, 10. 5, iii. 1. 
40, v. 7. 19; with gen., hear, hear 
of, vi. 3. 10, vii. 2. 18. 

αἴσθησις, ews, ἡ [R. 1 aF], per- 
ception; αἴσθησιν παρέχειν, afford 
perception, i.e. be perceived, iv. 6. 13. 

αἴσιος, ov [aica, fate, fortune], 
boding well, auspicious, vi. 5. 2, 21. 

Αἰσχίνης, ov, Aeschines, an Acar- 
nanian, in command of peltasts, iv. 


6 


αἰσχρός, a, dv [αἰδέομαι7, shame- 
Sul, base, infamous, disgraceful, i. 
9. 3, ii. 5. 20, iv. 6. 14, vi. 2. 10, vii. 
ἡ. 22; comp. αἰσχίων, sup. aloyxe- 
gros, V. 7. 12, vii. 6, 21. 

αἰσχρῶς, adv. [αἰδέομαι], shame- 
fully, disgracefully, ignominiously, 
| "1. 1. 43, vii. 1. 29. 

αἰσχύνη, ys [alSéopar], shame, 
dishonour, disgrace, il. 6. 6, vii. 7 
11, Phrases: 6¢ αἰσχύνην ἀλλή- 
λων, rom a sense of shame before 
one another, iii. 1.10; ὥστε πᾶσιν 
αἰσχύνην εἶναι, so that all were 
ashamed, ii. 3. 11. 
_ αἰσχύνω (αἰσχυν-), αἰσχυνῶ, 
ἤσχῦνα, noxvvOnv [αἰδέομαι}, dis- 
honour, shame ; mid. as pass. dep., 
be or feel ashamed, feel shame be- 


3. 22, ἃ, 18, 


fore, stand in awe of, i. 3. 10, 7. 4, 
li. 3. 22, 5. 39, vi. 5. 4, vii. 6. 21, 
7.9. 

alréw, αἰτήσω, etc. [alréw], ask 
for, beg, demand, with the simple 
acc. of the thing, iii. 1.28, two accs., 
one of person, the other of thing, 
κὰκ Be A, V8. 
2. 4, or with acc. of thing and 
παρά with gen. of pers., i. 3. 16. 
Mid., entreat, beseech, beg for, ob- 
tain by entreaty, with acc. of pers., 
ii. 3. 19, the acc. of thing and παρά 
with gen. of pers., v. 1. 11, with 
ace. of pers. and inf., vi. 6.31, or the 
infin. and παρά with gen. of pers., 
li. 3. 18. 

alria, as [airéw], @ charge, im- 
putation, blame, censure, vi. 6. 15, 
16 ; airlav (airlas) ἔχειν, be blamed, 
censured, held responsible, vii. 1. 
8, 7. 56, with ὑπό and gen. of pers., 
and either ἐν with dat. or περί with 
gen. of thing, vii. 6. 11, 15. 

alridopat, αἰτιάσομαι, etc. [ alréw |, 
blame, jind fault with, reproach, 
iii. 3, 12, vi. 6. 16, 20, 26; accuse, 
charge, with inf., i. 2. 20, v. 5. 19, 
vi. 2. 9, or with acc. of pers. and 
ὅτι with a clause, iii. 1. 7, iv. 1. 19, 
vii. 1. 8. 

αἴτιος, a, ov [alréw], causing, to 
blame, culpable, responsible, i. 4. 


7 


15, v. 5.19; of persons or things, 
cause of, reason for, to blame for, 
with gen. of thing, ii. 5. 22, v. 5. 19, 
vi. 1. 20, 6.15; with acc. and inf., 
vi. 6. 8. As subst., τὸ afriov, the 
cause, iv. 1. 17; τούτου ὁ αἴτιος, the 
author of this, vii. 7.48; αἴτιος ov- 
δέν, guiltless, vii. 1. 25. 
αἰχμάλωτος, ov [R. ax + aipéw |, 
captured by the spear, captured, of 
persons or things, iii. 3. 19, iv. I. 
12, 7.26. As subst., οἱ αἰχμάλωτοι, 
prisoners of war, captives, iv. 8. 
27, vii. 4. ὃ; τὰ αἰχμάλωτα, booty, 
both persons and things, iv. 1. 13, 
v. 3. 4. 
᾿Ακαρνάν, dvos, ὁ, an Acarnanian. 
The Acarnanians inhabited the 
province of Acarnania in the west 
of Greece, bounded on the south 
and west by the Ionian Sea, on the 
north by the Ambracian Gulf, and 
on the east.by the river Achelous 
and Aetolia. iv. 8. 18. 
ἄκαυστος, ov [καίω], unburnt, 
lil. 5. 15. 
ἀκέραιος, ov [R. 2 xpa], wndi- 
luted, undiminished, i.e. complete, 
perfect ; of troops, in Jine condi- 
tion, fresh, Vi. 5. 9. 
ἀκήρῦκτος, ov [R. kad], wnpro- 
claimed; of a war in which no 
overtures from the enemy are re- 
ceived, truceless, iii. 3. 5. 
ἀκινάκης, ov [Persian word], a 
short, straight sword or poniard, i, 
8. 29,the general form 
of which was identi- 
cal with that of the 
scabbard represented 
in the accompanying 
cut. The acinaces 
was worn on the right 
side, and hung from 
a leathern belt over 
the hip. In the illus- 
tration, from a bas- 
relief found at Per- 
sepolis, the single lines at the right 
and left represent the outline of 
the front and back of the dress 


αἰχμάλωτος -- ἀκόντιον 


peculiar to the Persians, Medes, 
and Scythians. A golden acinaces 
was often given by the kings of 
Persia as a mark of honor, i. 2. 27. 
An acinaces taken from Mardo- 
nius was preserved in the Acropo- 
lis at Athens, and was worth, De- 
mosthenes says, not less than 300 
darics. 

ἀκίνδῦνος, ov [κίνδυνος , without 
danger ; sup. ἀκινδυνότατος, safest, 
vi. 5. 29. 

ἀκινδύνως, adv. [κίνδῦνος, with- 
out danger, in security, ii. 6. 6. 

ἄκληρος, ov [κλῆρος, ὁ, lot, por- 
tion, cf. Eng. clergy, clerk), with- 
out portion, in poverty, iii. 2. 26. 

ἀκμάζω (ἀκμαδ-), dxudow [R. ax], 
be at highest point, in full bloom, 
at the height of one’s ability, with 
inf., iii. 1. 25. 

ἀκμή, 7s [R. ax], point; acc. as 
adv., at the point, just, iv. 3. 26. 

ἀκόλαστος, ov [κολάζω], wnpun- 
ished; of soldiers, undisciplined, 
ii. 6. 10. 

ἀκολουθέω, ἀκολουθήσω, etc. [R. 
Ke], accompany, follow, with σύν 
and dat., vil. 5. 3. 

ἀκόλουθος, ον [R. xed], going 
the same way, consistent, of things, 
ii, 4. 19. 

ἀκοντίζω (ἀκοντιδ-), ἀκοντιῶ [R. 
ax], hurl the javelin, iii. 3. 7, V. 2. 
12; throw a javelin at, hit with a 
javelin, hit, with acc. of pers., i. 
10.7; with acc. of pers. and dat. of 
the weapon, i. 8. 27. 

ἀκόντιον, τό [R. ax], javelin, 
dart, the weapon of the ἀκοντιστής 
(q.v.), shorter and lighter than the 
δόρυ, q.v. The javelin had a leather 
thong permanently attached to it 
at its centre of gravity (iv. 2. 28, ef. 
iv. 3. 28), through the end of which 
the finger was put when it was 
hurled (see s.v. διαγκυλόομαι). This’ 
thong was wrapped round the shaft 
and gave the javelin when hurled a 
rotary motion, similar to that of 
the ball shot from a rifled gun. In 


of the wearer. This weapon was 


the heroic age this weapon was 


ἀκόντισις-ἀκτή 8 


used chiefly in hunting, but later 
throwing the javelin was one of 
the regular exercises in the Greek 
gymnasium, and became one of 
the five events in the pentathlon. 
Here the object was either to hit 
a mark or throw a long distance, 


and the javelin was light and short | 


with a long, thin point, 

ἀκόντισις, ews, ἡ [R. ax], javelin- 
throwing, i. 9. 5. 

ἀκοντιστής, οὔ [R. ax], javelin- 
thrower, iii. 3. 7, iv. 3. 28. The 
javelin-throwers, doubtless, carried 
each several javelins (see s.v. ἀκόν- 
τιον). They had no defensive ar- 
mour (helmet, breast-plate, efc.), 
since they were to fight at a dis- 
tance, and with the bowmen and 
slingers constituted the light-armed 
troops. See s.v. γυμνής and πελτα- 
oT hs. 

ἀκούω, ἀκούσομαι, ἥκουσα, ἀκήκοα, 
ἠκούσθην [R. wor], hear, learn, 
listen to. Used either abs., iii. 
1. 27, v. 5. 8, or as follows: with | 
the simple . or acc. of the thing, 
Ba Ah a ee | 7. mat 


| oneself, hence with ὑπό and gen. of 
| pers., be in good repute among men, 
| Lat. bene audire, vii. 7. 23; ἀκουόν- 
'τὼν τῶν πολεμίων, within hearing 
| of the enemy, iii. 4. 36; ὅτι πλεί- 
| oTwy ἀκουόντων, within the hearing 
| of every possible man, vii. 3. 7. 
ἄκρα, as [R. ax], summit, height ; 
then the fortified stronghold there- 
on, citadel, v. 2. 17, vii. 1. 20, 
axparos, ov [R.2 κρα], unmixed, 
of wine, v. 4. 29, hence strong, iv. 
5. 27. It was the custom among 
the Greeks to mix water with their 
wine. The usual proportion was 
three to one or two to one, some- 
times three to two, the amount of 
water always exceeding that of 
wine. The mixture was made in 
large bowls (see 8.0. xpar#p), and 
was dipped from these by means 
of a ladle or wine-pitcher (see s.v. 
οἰνοχόος). -- 
ἄκριτος, ov [κρίνω], unjudged, 
without a trial, v. 7. 28, 29. 
ἀκροβολίζομαι (ἀκροβολιδ-), ἠκρο- 
βολισάμην (R. ax+ βάλλω], throw 
from a distance or height, as op- 


with the gen. of source, vii. 3. 8; 
with the gen. of the pers. and acc, 
of the thing, i. 2. 5, ii. 5.16; with 
the acc. and partic., i. 2. 21, v. 5s. 
7, or a clause introduced by ὅτι or 
ws, i. 3. 21, vi. 6. 3, 23, either con- 
struction being sometimes accom- 
panied by the gen. of the person, i. 
8. 13, 10. 5, vi. 2.13; with the ace. 
and inf., i. 3. 20, iii. 1. 45, iv. 6. 14, 
16; with περί and gen., ii. 5. 26, 
accompanied by the acc. of the 
thing and a ws clause, vi. 6. 34, or 
by the acc. of the thing and gen. 
of the source, vii. 7. 30; followed 
by a rel. clause, v. 7. 12, vii. 3. 5, 
4. 21. Also, hear of, with acc., i. 
4. 9, 9. 4; hearken to, give heed 
to, obey, with gen., ii. 6. 11, iii. 5- 
16. The pres. is sometimes used 
in a sense that strictly requires the 
perf., have heard, am told, under- 
stand, i. 9. 28, v. 1. 13, 5. 23, 8. 23. 


posed to fighting a pitched battle, 
skirmish, abs., iii. 4. 18, v. 2. 10, or 
with dat., iii. 4. 33. 

ἀκροβόλισις, ews, ἡ [R. ax+ 
βάλλω], throwing from a distance, 
skirmishing, skirmish, iii. 4. 16, 18. 

ἀκρόπολις, ews, ἡ [R. ax+ R. 
wha], upper city, acropolis, citadel, 
iS. Bee wil, es. 20. 

ἄκρος, ἃ, ov [R. ax], pointed, at 
the point, highest, topmost. As 
subst., τὸ ἄκρον, heiyht, summit, 
eminence, of a hill or mountain, 
iii. 4. 27, 44, iv. 7. 25, v. 4. 26; ra 
ἄκρα, the heights, i. 2. 21, v. 2. 16, 
vii. 3. 44; τὸ ἀκρότατον, the highest 
peak, the chief stronghold, v. 4. 15; 
κατὰ τὰ ἄκρα, along the heights, 
iv. 6. 23, 24, vi. 3. 19. 

ἀκρωνυχίᾶ, as [R. ax + ὄνυξ, 
nail|, tip of the nail, spur, crest, 
of a mountain, iii. 4. 37, 38. 

ἀκτή, Hs; foreland, promontory, 


Phrases: εὖ ἀκούειν, hear good of 


coast, beach, vi. 2. 1. 


9 


ἄκῦυρος-ἁλιευτικός 


ἄκυ ῦ is i ‘m of an hour-glass 
ἄκῦρος, ov [κῦρος, τό, power, | dd is in the form ὁ glass, 
authority], of no force, null and|the lower half revolving closely 


vogd, vi. 1. 28. 


upon c. The ὄνος is closed at its 


ἄκων, ova, ov [for ἀέκων by | narrowest part by b 
contr., see ἑκών], unwilling, reluc- | a thick iron plate 


tant, used as partic. without ὦν, 


ὃ in No. 3) in 


iii. 1. 10, vii. 3. 30; as adv. with a which there are 

partic., unintentionally, accident-| five holes. The = 
ally, iv. 8. 25; ἄκοντός τινος, sc. ὄν- ᾿ peg in the upper No. 3. 

τος, against a man’s will, without | part of ὁ (α in 

his consent, i. 3. 17, ii. 1. 19, vii. | No.3) passes through the hole at 
6. 40. the centre of this plate; through 


ἀλαλάζω (ἀλαλαγ-), ἀλαλάξομαι, 
ἠλάλαξα [ἀλαλαγή, shouting, ἀλα- 
λή, battle-cry], raise the battle-cry 
of ἀλαλή, shout the war-cry, lV. 2. 
7, vi. 5. 26, 27. Poetic, except in 
Xen. and late prose. 

ἀλεεινός, 7, dv [ἀλέα, εἵλη, prop. 
warmth of the sun, σέλας, bright- 
ness, cf. Lat. sol, sun, Eng. su- 
TRY], warm; as subst., τὸ ἀλεεινόν, 
source of warmth, iv. 4. 11. 

ἀλέξω (ἀλεκ-), ἀλέξομαι, ἠλεξάμην 
[R. apx], ward off, only in mid., 
ward off from oneself, defend one- 
self from, repulse, obj. in acc. or 
implied, i. 3. 6, ili. 4. 38, v. 5. 21, 
vii. 7. 3; return like for like, re- 
quite, i. g. 11. 

ἀλέτης, ov [ἀλέω, grind], lit. 
grinder. Used only as an adj. in 
the phrase ὄνος ἀλέτης, i. 5. 5, the 
upper mill-stone, marked dd in the 
annexed cut, which represents a 
mill found at 
Pompéi. At 
the right, not 
quite one- 
half of the 
outside of 
the mill is 
shown; at 
the left, a 
vertical sec- 
tion. The 
stone base is 
marked a, and terminates above in 
the cone-shaped lower mill-stone 
(μύλος) c, in the top of which is 
set solidly a heavy iron peg (@ in 


the others, arranged round it, the 
grain, which was put into the up- 
per half of dd, or the hopper, passed 
downward. When the upper stone 
was turned by means of the bar 
f the grain gradually worked its 
way downward, and was ground 
into flour in the groove e by the 
friction of the two rough sur- 
faces, and fell into the rill ὃ be- 
low. 
ἄλευρον, τό [ἀλέω, grind], flour, 
wheaten flour, always in the plur., 
ji. 10. 18, iii. 4. 31; as distinguished 
from barley meal, i. 5. 6. 

ἀλήθεια, as [R. Aa}, truth, truth- 
telling, candour, sincerity, ii. 6. 25, 
26, vii. 7.24. Phrase: τῇ ἀληθείᾳ; 
Lat. γ uéra, in fact, in reality, 
vi. 2. 10. 

ἀληθεύω, ἀληθεύσω, ἠλήθευσα [R. 
λαθΊ, speak the truth, 1. 7. 18, Vii. 
7. 25; report correctly, iv. 4. 15; 
with acc., tell the truth about, v. 6. 
18. 

ἀληθής, és [R. λαθ], wunconcealed, 
and so true, of things, v. 5. 24, vil. 
2.25; as subst., τὸ ἀληθές, the truth, 
truth, Lat. uérum, ii. 6. 22; ἀληθῆ 
λέγειν, speak the truth, ii. 5. 24, iil. 
3. 13, v. 8. 10. 

ἀληθινός, ἡ, dv [R. λαθ], agree- 
able to truth, real and true, genu- 
ine; στράτευμα ἀληθινόν, an army 
worthy of the name, i. 9. 17. 

ἁλιευτικός, 7, dv [adiedw, fish, 
dds, 6, salt, dds, 7, sea, cf. Lat. 
sal, sea, salt, Eng. sar], of or 
belonging to a fisherman; with 


No. 3). The upper stone (ὄνος) 


πλοῖον, fishing boat, vii. 1. 20. 


ἀλίζω. ἄλλος 10 


ἁλίζω (ἀλιδ-), ἥλισα, ἡλίσθην 
[aus], gather, collect, assemble, 
li. 4. 3; in mid. intrans., assemble, 
meet, Vi. 3. 3. 
ἄλιθος, ov [λίθος], without stones, 
Sree Jrom stones, of land, vi. 4. 5. 
ἅλις, adv., in heaps or crowds, in 
plenty, enough, with gen., v. 7. 12. 
Αλισάρνη, ns, ἡ, Halisarne, a 
city in Mysia, south of Pergamus 
vii. 8. 17. ii 
ἁλίσκομαι (ἀλ-, ἐλο-), ἁλώσομαι, 
ἑάλων Or ἥλων, ἑάλωκα ΟΥ ἥλωκα 
[aipéw], pass. to αἱρέω, be captured, 
taken, caught, of persons, animals 
places, and things, i. 4. 7, iii. 4. 8, 
17, 5. 14, v. 3. 10, vii. 3. 10. The 
pres. sometimes approaches the 
signification of the perf., as oi 
αλισκόμενοι, the captives, iv. 1. 3, cf. 
I, δ. 2. : 
κιμος, ov [R. ap], stout, brave, 
warlike, iv. 3. 4, 7. 15, 
ἀλλά, adversative conj. [ἄλλος], 
otherwise, in another way, on the 
other hand, still, but. It intro- 
duces something different from 
what has been said before, or Op- 
posed to it, and occurs frequently 
after negatives, i. 1. 4, 4. 18, ii. 4. 
2, 6. 10, vi. 4. 2, vii. 1.31. It often 
introduces an antithesis, which em- 
phasises the thought, i. 8. 11, iii. 2. 
3, 13, v. 7. 32. At the beginning 
of a speech, by way of an abrupt 
transition, or to break off discus- 
Sion, well, well but, however, Jor 
my part, i. 7.6, 8. 17, ii. 1. 10, 5. 16. 
In conditional sentences, the apod- 
Osis may be opposed to the prot- 
asis by ἀλλά, yet, still, at least, ii. 
5. 19, vii. 7. 43. An objection in 
the form of a question is intro- 
duced by ἀλλά, v. 8.4. At the be- 
ginning of a second question ἀλλά 
is best translated or, ii. 5.18. After 
questions containing a negative 
idea, or one to be refuted, rather 
on the contrary, iv. 6. 19, v. 1. 7. 
7-30. ἀλλά is joined with various 
particles, as follows: ἀλλὰ γάρ, 


vil. 7. 48; ἀλλά γε, but at any rate, 
lli. 2.3; ἀλλά γέ τοι, yet at least, ii. 
Β. 19 ; ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον, but rather, iii, 
1. 35 ; ἀλλὰ μέντοι, yet truly, iv. 6. 
16; ἀλλὰ μήν, but, but then, used 
when the speaker resumes an in- 
terrupted thought, ii. 5. 12, 14; 
ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως, but nevertheless, i. 8, 13, 
v. 8. 19, 

GAN’ 4, i.e. ἀλλὰ ἤ, other than, 
with the accent of the first word 
lost 5 after a negative, except, iv. 6. 
11, vii. 7. 53. 

ἄλλῃ, as adv. [ἄλλος], in another 
way, 1V. 2. 4, 10; elsewhere, some- 
where else, ii. 6. 4, v. 6. 7, vi. r Wy it 
elsewhere, in another direction, only 
in phrases, as ἄλλος ἄλλῃ ἐτράπετο, 
one one way, another another, dif- 
Jerent ways, iv. 8.19; ἄλλος ἄλλῃ 
διώκων, Vil. 3. 47. 

ἀλλήλων, reciprocal pron. [ἄλ- 
λος], of one another, each other, i. 
10. 4, ili. 1. 10; ἀλλήλοις, i. 2. 27, 


ill, 3. 1, v. 2.11; ἀλλήλους, iii, 2. 5, 
Iv. 3. 29, vii. 1. 39. 

ἄλλοθεν, adv. [ἄλλος], from an- 
other place; ἄλλοι ἄλλοθεν, some 
Jrom one point,. others from an- 
other, i. 10, 13. 

ἅλλομαι (ἀλ-), ἁλοῦμαι, ἡλάμην 
or ἡλόμην [ε΄ Lat. salio, leap], 
leap, jump, hop, iv. 2. 17, vi. 1. 5. 

ἄλλος, ἢ, ὁ [ἄλλος], other, an- 
other, i. τ. 7, 9, 3. 16, ii. 1. 20, iv. 5- 
28. When preceded by the art., 
the other, the remaining, the rest, 
the rest of, i. 2. 15, iv. 3.6; οἱ ἄλλοι 
EdAnves, the rest of the Greeks, ii. 
1.4; τὸ ἄλλο στράτευμα, the rest of 
the army, i. 2. 25, 4. 17; οἱ ἄλλοι 
πάντες, all the rest, ii. 1. 16. ra 
ἄλλα is used adverbially, as for the 
rest, i. 3. 3, 7. 4, iv. 8. 20. “When 
joined with one of its own cases or 
an adv. derived from the same 
stem, it is used distributively, like 
Lat. alius, as ἄλλος καὶ ἄλλος, one 
and another, another and another, 
1, 5. 12, vii. 3. 27, 6. 10; ἄλλοι... 
ἄλλοι, some . . . others, i. 8. 9, vii. 


but really, iii. 2. 25, 26, v. es I 


I. 17; ἄλλος ἄλλα λέγει, One says 


11 ἄλλοσε-ἅμα 


this, another that, ii. τ. 15; ἄλλος | ἄλλοτε, if ever in the world, Vi. 4. 


ἄλλῃ, One in one place, another in | 12. 


another, vi. 3. 7, or one tn one di- 
rection, others in another, iv. 8. 19, 
vii. 3. 47; ἄλλοι ἄλλοθεν, Lat. alit 
aliunde, some from one quarter, 
others from another, i. 10.13 ; ἄλλοι 
ἄλλως, Lat. alii aliter, some one 
way, others another, i. 6. 11. τῇ 
ἄλλῃ, With ἡμέρᾳ understood, means 
next day, ii. 1. 3, iii. 4. 1, vi. 1. 15; 
ἄλλος ἄλλον εἷλκε, one pulled up the 
other, V.2.15. Used with numerals 
ἄλλος may be best translated be- 
sides, further, ἄλλοι δὲ ἦσαν ἑξακισ- 
χίλιοι ἱππεῖς, and there were fur- 
ther six thousand horsemen, i. 7. 
11, ef. vii. 3. 48, 8.15; so also in 
enumerating several objects, as οὐ 
γὰρ ἣν χόρτος οὐδὲ ἄλλο δένδρον, for 
there was no grass, and besides not 
a single tree, i. 5. 5, ef. ili. 3. 18, ν. 4. 
25. Resembling this is the phrase 
οἱ μὲν ἄλλοι Κρῆτες, V. 2. 31, where 
ἄλλοι distinguishes the Cretans 
from their leader and does not 
mark a class of Cretans; English 
has not this idiom, but cf. French 
nous autres Francais. Phrases: 
ἄλλος Tis, any other, some other, il. 1. 
14; οὐδεὶς ἄλλος, nobody else, i. 10. 
16, iv. 4. 4, vii. 6. 39; εἴ τις ἄλλος 
or εἴ τις καὶ ἄλλος, if any other, tf. 
anybody, whatever other, i. 4. 15, 5. 
1, 6. 1, iv. 1.23; ws τὰν καὶ ἄλλον, 
as (well as) any other man whoso- 
ever, i. 3. 15, ii. 6. 8; οὐδὲν ἄλλο 7, 
nothing else than, only, ii. 2. 13, 11], 
2. 18, iv. 2. 27, vii. 4. 8; οὐδὲν ἄλλο 
εἰ μή, nothing else except, ii. 1. 12; 
ἄλλο τι 0; is anything else true 
than? equivalent to οὐ or ap οὐ, 
Lat. ndnne, ii. 5. 10, iv. 7. 5. 
ἄλλοσε, adv. [ἄλλος], to another 
place, in the phrase τινὲς οἰχόμενοι 
ἄλλοσε, some having gone one way, 


others another, vi. 6. 5 (where some 


read ἄλλοι ἄλλῃ). 


ἀλλότριος, a, ov [ἄλλος], anoth- 
er’s, strange, foreign, Lat. alienus, 
iii, 5. 5, vii. 2.33; hence, lost, for- 
Feit, iii, 2. 28. 
ἄλλως, adv. [ἄλλος], otherwise, 
in another way, iii. 2. 39, v. 2. 20, 
vii. 5. 5; in a different way than is 
fitting, at random, rashly, Lat. 
temere, v. 1. 7. Phrases: ἄλλοι 
ἄλλως, some in one way, others in 
another (see under ἄλλος), i. 6. 11; 
ἄλλως ἔχειν or γίγνεσθαι, be differ- 
ent, be otherwise, iii. 2. 37, vi. 6. 10; 
ἄλλως πως, in any other way, ili. 1. 
20, 26, vi. 4. 2; ἄλλως τε καί, on 
other grounds and particularly, 
hence especially, v. 6. 9, vii. 7. 40. 
ἀλόγιστος, ov [R. Aey], wnreas- 
oning, foolish, ii. 5. 21. 
ἄλσος, ous, τό, grove, esp. about 
a temple or shrine, ὦ sacred grove, 
v. 3. 12. 
“Avs, vos, ὁ, the Halys (Kizil- 
Irmak), the principal river in Asia 
Minor, rising in Pontus, and flow- 
ing southwesterly into Cappadocia, 
then northwesterly through Gala- 
tia, and, finally, between Paphla- 
gonia and Pontus into the Euxine. 
It was two stadia wide near its 
mouth and impassable except by 
boats, v. 6. 9, cf. Hdt. i. 75. The 
Greeks sailed by its mouth, vi. 2. 1. 

ἄλφιτον, τό, in Attic always pl. 
barley meal, i. 5. 6, iv. 8. 23. 

ἀλωπεκῆ, Hs [ἀλώπηξ, fox, cf. Lat. 
uolpés, fox], fox-skin cap, worn 
over the head and ears by the 
Thracians, vii. 4. 4. Observe the 
form of the cap worn by Paris, 8.0. 
τέθριππον, and by the Amazon, 8.v. 
φαρέτρα. 

ἁλώσιμος, ον [aipéw ], easy to cap- 
ture, of places, V. 2. 3. 
ἁλώσοιντο, see ἀλίσκομαι. 
ἅμα, adv. [apa], at the same time 


ἄλλοτε, adv. [ἄλλος], at another | or moment, at the same time with, 
time, at other times, iv. 1. 17; ἄλ- | together, i. 2. 9, 8. 18, Ml. 4. 3], Vv. 


hore καὶ ἄλλοτε, every now and 


4. 17; together with, with dat. of 


then, ii. 4. 26, v. 2. 29; εἴ wore xal|pers., ii. 4. 9. 


Phrases: ἅμα τῇ 


᾿Αμαζών-᾿Αμβρακιώτης 19 


ἡμέρᾳ, at daybreak, ii. 1. 2, iii. 1. | her struggle with Theseus. She is 


13, Vi. 5.1; dua τῇ ἐπιούσῃ ἡμέρᾳ, 
as the next day was breaking, i. γ 
2; ἅμα ἡλίῳ ἀνατέλλοντι, ἀνίσχοντι 
(or ἀνέχοντι), δύνοντι, at sunrise, 
at sunset, ii. 1. 8, 2.138, 3.1. ἅμα 
μὲν... dua δέ, emphatic expression 
of the idea, where in Eng. we should 
naturally translate the adverb with 
the second clause only, iii. 4. 19, 
iv. 1.4, vi.2.14. ἅμα is sometimes 
joined to the first of two verbs 
where we should expect it with the 
second, v. 5. 13, vii.6.20. It often 
appears to be closely connected in 
Sense with the partic., but gram- 
matically modifies the verb, as dua 
ταῦτ᾽ εἰπὼν ἀνέστη, as soon as he 
had said this, he rose, iii. 1. 47, of. 
li. 4. 5, iv. 1. 19, vi. 3. δ. 

᾿Αμαζών, dvos,,an Amazon. The 
Amazons were a mythical, warlike 


armed simply with bow and quiver, 
and wears upon her head the so- 
called uirpa, a cap of wool or leather 
not unlike a helmet, In the accom- 
panying cut, from a sarcophagus 
in the Museum of the Capitol at 
Rome, the Amazon is armed with 
quiver (see 8.0. papérpa), shield 
(see 8.0. πέλτη), helmet (see 8.0. 
κράνος), and battle-axe (see s.v. 
odyaps). iv. 4. 16. 

ἅμαξα, ns [ἅμα + R. ay], a heavy 
wagon, originally and generally 
with four wheels (and therefore 
with two united axles, as the name 
signifies), designed especially for 
baggage, used also for carrying 
arms, provisions, and wounded 
men, i. 5. 7, 7. 20, τὸ 18, ii. 2 
14. See 8.0. ἅρμα and ἁρμάμαξα. 
Phrases : ἅμαξα πετρῶν, wagon-load 


race of women, the ideal of female 
bravery and strength. They have 
& prominent place in Greek mythol- 
ogy, and are frequently represented 
in Greek works of art. They lived 
about the river Thermddon, and 
their chief city was Themiscfra. 
From here they invaded at differ- 
ent times the greater part of the 
known world. There was a cele- 
brated representation of the battle 
of the Amazons with the Athenians 
in the Stoa Poecile at Athens. ‘The 
cut given 8.0, papérpa represents an 


Amazon, as pictured on a Greek 


of stones, iv. 7.10; Bods ὑφ᾽ ἁμάξης, 
draught-ox, vi. 4. 22, 25. 
ἁμαξιαῖος, a, ov [ἅμα τ Π. ay], 
Jit for a wagon, large enough to 
load a wagon, iv. 2. 3. 

ἁμαξιτός, dv [ἅμα - ἢ. ay], pas- 
sable by wagons; ὁδὸς dpagirds, 
wagon-road, 1. 2. 21. 

_ ἁμαρτάνω (duapr-), ἁμαρτήσομαι, 
ἥμαρτον, ἡμάρτηκα, ἡμάρτημαι, ἡμαρ- 
τήθην, fail of one’s aim, miss the 
mark, miss, with the gen. of the 
person, i. 5. 12, iii. 4. 15, or of the 
thing, vii. 4. 17; hence fail (in 
conduct), do wrong, sin against, 
with cognate acc. and περί with 
ace. of the pers. wronged, iii. 2. 20; 


μικρὰ ἁμαρτηθέντα, small blunders, 
v. 8. 20. 


Gpaxel, adv. [R. pax], without 


Jighting or.resistance, without a 
struggle, i. 7. 9, iii. 4. 46, iv. 6. 12. 


ἀμαχητί, adv. [R. pax], with- 


out fighting, iv. 2. 15. 


᾿Αμβρακιώτης or ᾿Αμπρακιώτης, 
ov, an Ambraciot, a citizen of Am- 
bracia (Arta), which was a colony 
of the Corinthians in Epirus, 80 
stadia north of the Ambracian 


vase, attendant on Hippolyte in 


Gulf, i. 7. 18, v. 6. 16, vi. 4. 13. 


13 ἀμείνων-ἀμφορεύς 


ἀμείνων, ov, gen. ovos, comp. of 
Pas, 9.0. better, braver; ee 
iii. x. 21, 23, 2. 15, Vv. 6. 28, vil. 6. 
44, 7. 54; joined with κρείττων, 
braver and mightier, 1. 7-3; neut. 
as adv., better, ii. 1. 20, Vil. 3. 17. 

ἀμέλεια, as [R. ped}, rarer 
ness, neglect in guarding, lv. 

ἀμελέω, ἀμελήσω, ec. [Β. pe 1 
be careless, be heedless, neglect, 
slight, with gen. of the person or 
thing, i. 3. 11, v. 1. 16, 4. 20, vil. 


i duckies adv, ΕΝ ped], heedlessly, 
ogligently, V. 1. Ὁ, 
ἜΣ : ον [μέτρον]; without 
measure, countless, iii. 2. 16. : 
ἀμήχανος, ov [R. pax], without 
means, destitute of means (of sr 
sons), fi. 5. 21; impossible hss 
things), impracticable, 1. 2. 21; 
πολλὰ κἀμήχανα, many difficulties, 
ii. 3. 18. 
Ἵ pal ey ἀμιλλήσομαι, etc., th ἢ 
pass. [ἅμιλλα, contest], contend, 
struggle ; with ἐπί or πρός and et 
race for, struggle for, 11}. 4. 44, 40, 


of the object affected, ἀμφὶ στρά- 
τευμα δαπανᾶν, spend money on an 
army, i. 1. 8; of time, about, at, 
ἀμφὶ δορπηστόν, about supper-time, 
i. 10. 17; cf. ii. 2. 8, iv. 5.9, Vi. 
4. 26; with numerals preceded by 
the art., about, Lat. circiter, 1. 2. 
9, 7. 10, iii. 1. 33. Phrases: oi 
ἀμφί with an acc. of a pers. may 
denote either the followers of that 
pers., or that pers. and his follow- 
ers, as οἱ ἀμφὶ βασιλέα, the king 8 
attendants, i. το. 3, ef. 1. 8. LH 21, 
but of ἀμφὶ Χειρίσοφον, Chirisophus 
and his men, iv. 3. 21, ef: lil. 2. 2, 
5.1; τὰ ἀμφὶ τάξεις, tactics, 11,1. 4} 
ἀμφὶ ταῦτα ἔχειν, be busy about. 
this, occupied, Vv. 2. 26, Vil. 2. eid 
ἀμφὶ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια εἶναι, be busieo 
about the provisions, iii. 5. 14. In 
composition ἀμφί signifies on both 
sides, about. _ 
ἀμφιγνοέω, imp. ἠμφεγνόουν, ἦμ- 
φεγνόησα, ἠμφεγνοήθην [R. γνω], 
think on both i be in doubt or 
puzzled, ii. 5. 33. : 

' ap prs oat ὁ, Amphidémus, fa- 


ἄμπελος, ἡ, vine, i. 2. 22, vi. 4. 6. 
᾿Αμπρακιώτης, see ge FH 
ἀμυγδάλινος, 7, ον [ἀμυγ 7 
almond, cf. gl almond), of al- 
onds, iv. 4. 15. ". 
7" pet Caaee ¥, ἀμυνῶ, ἡμῦνα [root 
pu, shut, fasten, a- prothetic, 9.v., 
cf. Lat. moenia, ramparts, va 
fortify), ward off. Mid., war off 
from oneself, defend oneself, tr 
oneself upon, “' 3 23, iii. 1. 14, 29, 
. 25, vii. 3. 30. 
if deat, ie [akin to ἄμφω, ef. 
Lat. ambi-, amb- in composition, 
round about], orig. on both ΠΝ 
of, hence about, followed by the 
acc, and very rarely by the gen. 
Used of persons, places, and things, 
sometimes of time and number. 
With gen., about, concerning, of 
things; ἀμφ᾽ ὧν εἶχον διαφέρεσθαι, 
quarrel over what they had, ἵν. 5. 
17. With acc., of place, round, 
about, of persons, countries, ΟἹ 


ther of Amphicrates (see the next 
rd), iv. 2. 13. 
yr eg eta ous, 6, Amphicrates, 
an Athenian, son of the preceding, 
one of the captains of the Greek 
army, and killed by the Cardtchi 
in the retreat, iv. 2. 13, 17. 
ἀμφιλέγω [R. λεγ]; speak on 
both sides, have a dispute, quarrel, 
i. 5. 11. ae 
Apdurodtrys, ov, an Amphipoli- 
tan, a native of Amphipolis, 1. 10. 
7, iv. 6. 1, a colony of Athens 
founded in 437 B.c. in eastern 
Macedonia, on the left bank of 
the river Strymon, just below its 
egress from lake Cercinitis and 25 
stadia from the sea. The Stry- 
mon flowed almost round the 
town. The ruins of Amphipolis 
can be seen near Neochorio at 
resent day. 
ge ri ὁ [in Epic ἀμφι- 
φορεύς, R. hep], Lat. amphora, a 


things, i. 2. 8, v. 2. 17, vil. 8. 2; 


jar primarily intended for liquids, 


ἀμφότερος-ἄν 


as wine or oil, but used variously, 


as for pickled dolphin, v. 4. 28. 


14 


ἀμφοτέρωθεν, adv. [duddrepos], 


had two handles, and was so large | 29. 


as to need two persons to carry it. 
As a liquid measure it contained 
39.39 liters, 41.6+ quarts U. S. 
liquid measure, having one and 
one-half times the capacity of the 
Roman amphora. In form it was 
more or less bulky, had a neck 
and mouth which were generally 
of moderate size in comparison 
with the body of the vessel, and 


ZION 


ae 


ἄμφω [akin to ἀμφί, cf. Lat. 
ambo, both, Eng. noru], gen. and 
dat. ἀμφοῖν, both, ii. 6. 30, vi. 2. 6. 

av, a post-positive particle with- 
out an exact equivalent in Eng- 
lish, but having force according 
to the construction in which it is 
employed. Three uses of ἄν are 
to be distinguished: I. In condi- 
tional, relative, and temporal prot- 
ases and in final clauses; II. In 
apodosis; III. In iterative sen- 
tences. I, With subjv. in protases 
with εἰ, when εἰ and ἄν combine to 
form ἐάν, ay, or ἤν, or with rel. 
advs, like ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, ὅτε, etc., com- 
bining to form ἐπάν, ἐπειδάν, ὅταν, 
etc. (for this use see under the dif- 
ferent words); with a rel., as ὅς, 
ὅστις, ὁπόσος, etc., i. 3.5, 4. 15, ii. 
5. 18, or a temporal conj., as ἕως, 
πρίν, μέχρι, ἔστε, i. τ. 10, 4. 8, 13, 
ii. 3. 9, 24; in a final clause with 
ws and subjv., ii. 5. 16, vi. 3. 18. 
II. In apodosis, where ἄν belongs 
to the verb and is used with sec- 
ondary tenses of the ind. in condi- 
tions contrary to fact, ii. 1. 4, iii. 
2. 24, vii. 5. 5, 6. 9; with the opt. 
in less vivid fut. conditions, i. 3. 
19, ii. 3. 28, vi. 1. 28, vii. 1. 21; in 
Mss. it is sometimes found with 
the fut. ind., which in editt. is cor- 
rected to the opt., ii. 5. 13, v. 6. 32; 
with the inf. or partic. in indir, 
disc. representing the ind. or opt., 


either rested on a foot, as in the 
illustration, or was pointed at the 
lowerend. The ἀμφορεύς was some- 
times highly ornamented. 
ἀμφότερος, a, ov [ἄμφω], both, 
from its signification generally 
plural (in Anab. only dual or pl.) ; 


when used with the art., put in the 9. 3, ii. 5. 20, iii. 1. 7, 2. 24, iv. 6 


pred. position, i. 1. 1, 4. 4, iii. 1. 31, 
vii. 6.17. Sometimes used subst., 


1 1. 10, 3. 6, 7. 5, 9. 8, 29, ii. 1. 
ee Oy ae ae δ. νὰ 4. 
7, vii. 7. 30, 40; the protasis may 
be implied in the context, iii, 5. 12, 
iv. 2. 10, vii. 6. 23, or be altogether 
lacking with an independent po- 
tential ind. or opt. with ἄν, i. 5. 8, 
12, 7. 7, v. 6. 15, 7. 10, vi. 5. 17, vii. 
7. 27; ἄν is sometimes repeated 


both parties, i. 5. 17, ii. 5. 41, v. | for emphasis or in a long sentence, 
3. 8. i, 3. 6, 6. 2, ii. 5. 20, iv. ὁ 13, 


on both sides, from both sides, i. 10, 
As the name implies, the ἀμφορεύς | 9, iii. 5. 10; with the gen., iii, 4. 


ball » Ι 
15 ἄἂν-ἀνάγω 


vii. 7. 38; the verb to which ἄν be- 
longs may be omitted when it can 
easily be supplied from the con- 
text, i. 3. 6, ili. 2. 24, v. 4. 54, or ἄν 
itself may be omitted for the same 
reason, i. 6.2, iv. 6.13. ΠῚ. In the 
iterative construction, with impf. 
and aor. ind., i. 9. 19, ii. 3. 11, ii. 
. 22, iv. 7. 16. 
i ἄν, πὰ παρὰ conj., contracted 
form of ἐάν, q.v. 

av-, see a-. 

ἀνά, prep. [cf. Eng. on], up (op- 
posed to κατά), followed by the 
ace, It is used of place (in the 
Anab. not of time), up, up along, 
upon, over, throughout, iii. 5. 16, 
vii. 4.2; with numerals to signify 
distribution, ἀνὰ πέντε παρασάγγας 
τῆς ἡμέρᾶς, at the rate of Jive para- 
sangs α day, iv. 6. 4; ava ἑκατόν, 
by hundreds, a hundred each, iii. 
4. 21, v. 4. 12, vi. 5. 11; and to ex- 
press mode and manner, ἀνὰ κρά- 
ros, from weakness up to the full 


measure of strength, at full speed, 
i. &. 1, 36. 16, IV. ἃ. 20, ν. 2. 80. In 
composition ἀνά signifies up, back, 
again, and is sometimes simply 
intensive. 

ἀναβαίνω [R. Ba], go up, as- 
cend, climb up, a mountain or 
stronghold, either with the obj. 
omitted, iv. 2: 8, 12, 8. 19, v. 2. 1, 
or with érf and acc., i. 2. 22, lil. 4. 
25, iv. 8. 18, v. 2. 22; march up 
(from the coast to the interior, 
Lat. éscendd), i. τ. 2, 4. 12, 1], 5. 
22, iii, 1.2; mount (a horse), with 
ἐπί and acc., i. 8. 3, iii. 4. 35, vil. 6. 
42; embark (sc. ἐπὶ τὰ πλοῖα), Vi. 
1. 14, 

ἀναβάλλω [βάλλω], throw up, 
v. 2. 5; help to mount, with ἐπί 
and acc., iv. 4. 4. 

ἀνάβασις, ews, ἡ [R. Ba], going 
up, ascent, march upward, of a 
hill, iv. 1.10. Esp. applied to the 
expedition from the coast to Baby- 
lon, made by Cyrus the Younger 
against his brother, King Arta- 
xerxes, and used as the title of 


Xenophon’s history, i. 4.-9, iii. 1.1, 
vii. 8. 26. 
ἀναβιβάζω (βιβάζω, βιβαδὃ-, -βι- 
βάσω or βιβῶ, -εβίβασα [R. Bal, 
make go, causative to βαίνων, make 
go up, lead up, i. το. 14. 
ἀναβοάω [R. BoF], let up a 
shout, cry out, ν. 4. 51. 
ἀναβολή, ἢς [βάλλω], that which 
is thrown up, mound, earth-work, 
Lat. wa@ilum, v. 2. ὃ. 
ἀναγγέλλω [ἀγγέλλω]Ί, bring 
back word, report, Lat. renuntto, 1. 
3. 19, 21 (some read ἀπαγγέλλω). 
ἀναγιγνώσκω [R. γνω], know 
again what has been seen before, 
recognize, V. 8.6; hence of written 
characters, read, i. 6. 4, iil. 1. 5. 
ἀναγκάζω (ἀναγκαδ-), ἀναγκάσω, 
etc. [ἀνάγκη 1. force, compel, oblige, 
generally with ace. and inf., fis: 6, 
iii. 4. 49, v. 8. 8, vii. 2.6; in pass. 
with inf, iii. 3. 12, iv. 1. 16, 19, vil. 
6. 28: abs., iii. 4. 19. 
ἀναγκαῖος. ©, ov [ἀνάγκη]; forced, 
necessary, wndispensable, inevita- 
ble, m. .. 43, 5. 17, iv. I. 12, 18; 
ἀναγκαιόν TL, SOME necessity, i. 5. 9. 
As subst., οἱ ἀναγκαῖοι, one’s rela- 
tives, Lat. necessarit, 11. 4. Ἰ, 
ἀνάγκη, 7s, force, necessity, stress, 
iii. 4. 32; pl., pressure, distress, iv. 
5. 15; ἀνάγκη ἐστέ (more often 
without ἐστί), it is necessary, ONE 
must, i. 6. 8, iv. 1.9; with inf., Iv. 
6. 10, v. 5- 17, vii. 6. 24, or with acc. 
and inf., ii. 1. 17, 4. 26, lil. 2. 8, 4. 
19, vii. 2. 15, or with dat. and inf., i. 
3. 5, v. 5.12. Phrases: ἀνάγκῃ, ὃν 
or of necessity, necessarily, v. 5. 16, 
vii. 7. 29; ἡ ἀνάγκῃ ἔχεσθαι, be 
constrained by necessity, be com- 
pelled, ii. 5.21; ἀνάγκῃ κατέχεσθαι, 
be mastered by necessity, 11. 6. 13; 
ἐν ἀνάγκῃ εἶναι, be in straits, in @ 
tight place, vii. 6. 27. 
ἀναγνούς, See ἀναγιγνώσκω. 
ἀνάγω [R. ay], lead up, take up, 
from the coast to the interior, or 
from a lower to a higher place, ii. 
3. 21 (some read the simple verb), 


6.1, iii. 4.28; with ἐκ and the gen., 


ἀναζεύγνῦμι-’ Αναξίβιος 16 


lead up out of, extricate, vii. 6. 24; 
withdraw, v. 2. 8 (some read ἀπα- 
γαγεῖν); mid., put to sea, set sail, 
ν 7. Vi. 2. Gay -2. 1. 

ἀναζεύγνυμι [R. fvy], yoke up 
beasts of burden, hence transferred 
to an army, break camp, iii. 4. 37, 
ἢ} 

ἀναθαρρέω [θρασύς], regain cour- 
age, pluck up courage again, Vi. 4. 

» 
Call 

ἀναθεῖναι, dvabels, see ἀνατίθημι. 

ἀνάθημα, aros, τό [R. Oe], a 
thing set up, esp. in a temple, hence 
votive offering, Vv. 3. 5. 

GvabopuBéw (θορυβέω, θορυβήσω, 
etc. [θόρυβος}, make an uproar), 
send up ἃ shout, cry out, applaud, 
μιν 

ἀναθρέψαντι, see ἀνατρέφω. 

ἀναιρέω [αἱρέω], take up, pick 
up, of things, mid., v. 7. 21, vii. 3 
22; also mid., take up one’s dead 
for burial, carry off the dead, iv. 1. 
19, v. 7. 30; in this sense rare in 
act., vi.4. 9. Of an oracle or deity, 
take up the subject, answer, direct, 
act., lii. 1. 6, 8, v. 3. 7, vii. 6. 44. 
Phrase: ἀνελέσθαι πόλεμον, begin a 
war, Opp. to καταλῦσαι, v. 7. 27. 

ἀνακαίω [καίω], light up, kin- 
dle, iii. 1. 3. 


ἀναλαλάζω [ἀλαλάξω], raise the 
war-cry, cry ἀλαλή, iv. 3. 19. 

ἀναλαμβάνω [λαμβάνω], take or 
pick up, of persons or things, v. 2. 
32, Vi. 5. 1, vii. 1. 41; take along 
with, of soldiers, i. 10. 6, iv. 7. 24, 
Vii. 3. 36. 

ἀναλάμπω [Adurw], burst into 
flames, flame out, v. 2. 24. 

ἀναλίσκω (dvad-, dvado-), dva- 
λώσω, ἀνήλωσα, ἀνήλωκα, ἀνήλωμαι, 
ἀνηλώθην, use up, expend, exhaust, 
iv. 7. 5, 7, 10, vii. 7. 34. 

ἀνάλωτος, ov [aipéw], not to be 
taken, invincible, impregnable, v. 
2. 20. 

ἀναμένω [R. μα], wait for, await, 
Lat. exspectd, with acc. and inf., 
iii. 1. 14, 24, or the simple acc., Υ. 
8. 14; abs., stay where one is, re- 
main, wait, v. 1.5, vi. 4. 19, vii. 3 
36. 

ἀναμέγνῦμι (μέγνῦμι, μιγ-, μέξω, 
Evita, μέμϊγμαι, ἐμέχθην and ἐμίγην 
[R. μιγ], mix), mix up, pass., min- 
gle, with év and dat. of the person, 
iv. 8. 8. 

ἀναμιμνήσκω [R. μα], remind 
of, with two aces., iii. 2.11; recall, 
make mention of, v. 8. 26; pass., 


‘recall to mind, remember, Lat. re- 


miniscor, with the acc., vii. 1. 26, 


ἀνακαλέω [R. kad], call again 
and again, vi. 6.7; mid., summon at 
σάλπιγγι ἀνακαλεῖσθαι, Lat. receptui 
canere, sound the retreat, iv. 4. 22. | 

ἀνακεῖον, τό, equal to dvwyewy, | 
qv. | 

ἀνακοινόω [κοινόω], communi. | 
cate, consult a god, iii. 1. 5, vi. 1 
22, mid., confer with a friend, com- 
municate, iii. 1. 5, v. 6. 36, in both | 
voices with dat. of the person. 

ἀνακομίζω [κομίζω], carry up ᾿ 
mid., lay up for oneself, store away, 
ἢ, 27. 

ἀνακράζω [R. Kad], lift up the 
voice, raise a shout, shout, iv. 4. 20, 
5. 18, v. 1. 14, vi. 1. 6, 4.22; with 
an obj. by prolepsis, v. 8. 12. 
Phrase: dvéxpaye πολεμικόν, gave a 
war-shout, vii. 3. 33. 


” | 


the ace. and a partic., vi. 1. 23, or 
with a rel. clause, vi. 5. 23, vii. 6. 
24, 7. 25, 27. 

ἄνανδρος, ον [ἀνήρ], unmanly, 
cowardly, ii. 6. 25. 
᾿Αναξίβιος, ὁ, Anaxibius, a Spar- 


_ tan admiral in command at Byzan- 
tium, and a friend of Chirisophus, 


Vii 0.4, vi 6. 18, vib SB After 
promising to take the Greeks into 
his service and enticing them to 
Byzantium, he treated them with 
cruelty and faithlessness in order 
to curry favor with Pharnabazus, 
who had promised to reward him, 
vii. 1. 3-39, 2.4. Succeeded in office 
by Polus, he found himself snubbed 
by Pharnabazus, and laid schemes 
for revenge with Xenophon, but 
unsuccessfully, vii. 2. 5-15. In 


yl ἀναξυρίδες-ἀνατίθημι 


290.8 Βα. he was defeated and 


ἀναρίθμητος, ov [R. ap], not to 


' A. os 
slain by the Athenian Iphicrates | be counted, innumerable, il. 2. 13. 


at Abydus. 


ἀνάριστος, ov [ἄριστον], without 


ἀναξυρίδες, ίδων, αἱ [Persian | breakfast, not having had breakfast, 
word], érousers, worn by the Per- Lat. imprdnsus, i. το. 19, iv. 2. 4, 
sians in Cyrus’s suite, i. 5. 8. vi. 5. 21. 


These trousers were close-fitting, 


ἀναρπάζω [R. dpm], snatch up, 


; i 4 a a 
and were in vogue among nations | carry off as booty, i. 3. 14, vil. 1. 16. 


of the East. They are often worn 


dvapxia, as [apxw], lack of 


: » (NU i » 
also by the Amazons, as depicted | leaders, anarchy, ili. 2. 29. 


on the monuments. See 8.0. ga- 
pérpa. 

ἀναπαύω [παύω], make to cease, 
mid., rest oneself, go to rest, pass 


ἀνασκενάζω [R. σκυ], pack up, 
get ready; hence, remove, Vi. 2. ὃ. 
ἀναστάς, 566 ἀνίστημι. 

ἀνασταυρόω (σταυρόω, ἐσταύρωσα, 


the night, i. 10. 16, ii. 4. 23, ili, 1. |-eoravpwpar, ἐσταυρώθην [R. ora], 


8, iv. 5. 19, 20, vi. 5. 30, vil. 3. 39, 


Jence with pales), set up on a stake, 


41; repose, refresh oneself, vi. 5. | tmpate, iii. 1. 17. 


30. 

ἀναπείθω [R. m8], bring over to 
another opinion, persuade, 1. 4. 11, 
v. 7.1; with a clause with ws, il. 
6. 2. 
ἀναπετάννῦμι (πετάννῦμι, mera-, 
πετῶ, ἐπέτασα, πέπταμαι, ἐπετάσθην 
[cf. Lat. pated, lie open, pando, 
spread out, Eng. FATHOM ], spread 
out), unfold, throw wide, of gates, 
vii. 1. 17. 

ἀναπηδάω (πηδάω, πηδήσω, ἐπή- 
δησα, -πεπήδηκα [ R. wed], leap), leap 
up, spring to one’s horse, Vii. 2. 20. 

ἀναπνέω [rvéw], breathe again, 
catch one’s breath, iv. 1. 22, 3. 1. 

ἀναπράττω [πράττω], exact, col- 
lect, of dues, with acc. of the thing 
and παρά with gen. of the pers., 
vii. 6. 40, 7. 31. 

ἀναπτύσσο (πτύσσω, πτυΎ;; 
πτύξω, ἔπτυξα; ἔπτυγμαι, -επτύχθην, 
fold), unfold, fold back, as a mili- 
tary phrase, ἀναπτύσσειν τὸ κέρας, 
‘fold back’ the wing, an intended 
movement by which the Greek 
force in i. 10.9 would have been 
brought to face to the right, but 
still in line, with their rear resting 
on thé river Euphrates. 

ἀναπυνθάνομαι [πυνθάνομαι], in- 
quire again and again, ask care- 
Sully, V. 5. 25; learn by question- 


ἀναστέλλω [στέλλω], send back, 
keep back, repulse, v. 4. 23. 
ἀναστῆναι, ἀναστήσας, See ἀν- 
ἰστημι. ; 
ἀναστρέφω [στρέφω], intrans., 
turn back, retreat, wheel round, 
face about, i. 4. 5, το. 8, iv. 3. 
29; turn about, of horses, into the 
home stretch, iv. 8. 28; mid., con- 
duct oneself, proceed, Lat. uersor, 
as ws δεσπότης ἀναστρέφεσθαι, be- 
have like a Czar, ii. 5.14; pass., be 
turned back, face about, rally, 1. 
10. 12, 

ἀνασχέσθαι, ἀνάσχωμαι, See ἀν- 
éxw. 

ἀναταράττω [ταράττω], stir up; 
perf. pass., be in confusion or dis- 
order, i. 7. 20. 

ἀνατείνω [τείνω], stretch up, hold 
up; of a show of hands in voting, 
χειροτονία, iii. 2. 9, 33, v. 6. 33; 
perf. partic. dvarerapévos, of the 
royal standard, an eagle with ex- 
tended wings, with wings displayed, 
i, 10, 12. 

ἀνατέλλω (τέλλω, TED-, ἔτειλα, 
-τέταλμαι [R. rad], make to arise), 
intr., rise ; ἅμα ἡλίῳ ἀνατέλλοντι, at 
sunrise, ii. 3. 1. 

ἀνατίθημι [R. Oe], put or lay 
upon, of things, esp. baggage, iii. 
1. 30, iv. 7.26; mid., with ἐπέ and 
acc., li. 2.4; set up as a votive of- 


ing, inform oneself, with acc. and 
a partic., Vv. 7. 1. 


fering, dedicate, V. 3. 5, Ὁ. 


ἀνατρέφω- ἀνήρ 18 


ἀνατρέφω [τρέφω], bring up, 
Jatten, οὗ a horse for sacrifice, iv. 
5. 90. 
ἀναφεύγω [R. dvy], flee up, with 
ἐπί and acc. of the place, vi. 4. 24. 
ἀναφρονέω [φρήν], come back to 
one’s senses, recover one’s senses, 
iv. 8, 21. 
» " , 
ἀναχάζω (the simple χάζω, make 
retire, is Epic only), cause to re- 
tire ; hence mid., retreat, draw back, 
iv. 7. 10, and so once the act. used 
intrans. in the same sense, iv. 1. 16. 
avaxwpéw [χωρέω], move back, 
retire, of troops, iii. 3. 13, iv. 3. 6, 
vi. 4. 10; ἐπὲ πόδα ἀναχωρεῖν, Lat. 
pedem referre, retreat with one’s 
face to the foe, v. 2. 32. 
_avaxwpile [xwplfw], make re- 
tire, draw off, of troops, v. 2. 10. 
ἄνδρα, see ἀνήρ. 
ἀνδραγαθίᾳ, as [ἀνήρ + ἀγαθός], 
ἘΜ virtue, bravery, valour, Υ. 2. 
ἀνδράποδον, τό, attendant on a 
Sreeman, slave, esp. a captive taken 
in war, who became the slave of 
his conqueror, i. 2. 27, ii. 4. 27, iv. 
1. 12, v. 6. 13, vi. 6. 38, vii. 8. 12. 
ἀνδρεῖος, a, ον [ἀνήρ], manly, 
valorous, Vi. 5. 24. 
_Gvbpedrys, nros, ἡ [ἀνήρ], man- 
liness, valour, Lat. uirtiis, vi. 5. 14. 
ἀνδρίζω, dvipicw [ἀνήρ], make a 
man of; mid., play a man’s part, 
act bravely, iv. 3. 34, v. 8. 15. 
ἀνέβην, see ἀναβαίνω. 
ἀνεγείρω [éyeipw], wake up, 
arouse ; pass., be aroused, awake, 
URE ADD ae eS 
ἀνεῖλον, see ἀναιρέω. 
ἀνεῖναι, See ἀνΐημι. 
ἀνεῖπον [εἶπον], proclaim, of ἃ 
herald, with inf., or with ὅτι and a 
clause, ii. 2. 20, v. 2. 18. 
ἀνεκπίμπλημι [R. πλα], jill out 
Or up again, ill. 4. 22. 
ἀνελέσθαι, 866 ἀναιρέω. 
ἄνεμος, ὁ [ef. Lat. anima, breath, 
wind, animus, soul], wind, iv. 5.4; 


ἀνεπιλήπτως, adv. [ληπτός, verbal 
Of λαμβάνω], not to be attacked, 
without blame, in security, vii. 6. 
Ole 

ἀνερεθίζω (ἐρεθίζω, ἐρεθιδ-, ἐρε- 
θίσω or ἐρεθιῶ, etc., excite), pro- 
voke; pass., be instigated, egged 
on, Vi. 6. 9. 1 

ἀνερωτάω [dpwrdw], ask with 
authority, demand, ii. 3. 4, iv. 5. 34. 

ἀνέστην, see dvicrnm. 

ἀνεστράφην, see ἀναστρέφω. 

ἄνευ, improper prep. [akin to 
negative prefix d-], without, fol- 
lowed by the gen., i. 3. 11, 13, ii. 2. 
3, 3. 10, 6. 6, 18. 

ἀνευρίσκω [εὑρίσκω], jind out, 
discover, Vii. 4. 14. 

ἀνέχω, impf. and aor. mid. with 
double aug., v. 6. 34, i. 8. 26 [R. 
vex], hold up; mid., control one- 
self, i. 8. 26; stand firm against, 
tolerate, endure, abs., v. 6. 34, with 
the simple acc., i. 7. 4, 8. 11, with 
ace. and a partic., vii. 7.47, or with 
the gen. and a partic., ii. 2. 1. 

ἀνεψιός, ὁ [ cf. Lat. nepds, grand- 
son], Jirst cousin, Lat. consobrinus, 
vil. 3. 9. 

ἀνήγαγον, see ἀνάγω. 

ἀνηγέρθϑη, see ἀνεγείρω. 

ἀνηγμένος, See ἀνάγω. 

ἀνήκεστος, ον [ἀκέομαι, heal, ἄκος, 
τό, remedy, cf. Eng. ραη- ασθα], not 
to be healed, irreparable, ii. 5. 5, 
vii. 1. 18. 
ἀνήκω [nxw], have come up toa 
point, extend, reach, of land, with 
εἰς and acc. of limit, vi. 4. 3, 5. 
ἀνήρ, ἀνδρός, ὁ [ἀνήρ], man, Lat. 
uir, as Opposed to woman, youth, 
or child, in contrast with the gene- 
ric ἄνθρωπος, human being, iv. 7. 
2, Vv. 3. 10, 4.34, 7.19; hence, hus- 
band, iv. 5. 24; soldier, i. 1. 11, iii. 
4. 21, ν. 6.12; the enemy, iii. 1. 23, 
vi. 5.16. As a title of honour, a 
true man, a man indeed, i. 7. 3, 9. 
23, vii. 1. 21. Often used with an 
adj. of nationality and not to be 


ἄνεμος βορρᾶς ἐναντίος, a north wind 
full in the face, iv. 5. 3. 


translated, i. 2. 20, iii. 4. 35, v. 4. 
5, vi. 1. 26, vii. 6. 40, ¢f. vii. 7. 23. 


19 ἀνηρώτα-"Αντανδρος 


Sometimes used in respectful allu- 
sion, or as a special designation 
when the person is not named, ὁ 
ἀνήρ, i. 3. 12, meaning Cyrus; τὸν 
ἄνδρα ὁρῶ, i. 8. 26, of the Persian 
king. Without much force, person, 
individual, i. 3. 18, iii. 2. 20, iv. 8. 
4, vii. 6. 39. As a form of address 
(but not always to be translated), 
often in connexion with other 
nouns, with or without ὦ, as ἄν- 
δρες, gentlemen, soldiers, my men, 
i. 4. 16, iii. 1. 43, 4. 46 5 ἄνδρες φίλοι, 
comrades, friends, i. 6. 6; ἄνδρες 
στρατιῶται, στρατηγοί, λοχᾶγοί, “EX- 
Anves, fellow soldiers, etc., i. 3. 3, 7. 
3, ii, 1. 9, iii, 1. 15, 84, vi. 3. 12. 
See ἄνθρωπος. 

ἀνηρώτα, See dvepwrdw. 

ἀνήχθησαν, see ἀνάγω. 

ἀνθ᾽, by elision and euphony for 
ἀντί before an aspirate. 

ἀνθϑέμιον, τό [ἄνθος, τό, flower), 
flower ; pl., flower patterns, V. 4. 32. 

ἀνθίστημι [R. στα], match 
against; mid., stand against, re- 
sist, vii. 3. 11. 

ἀνθρώπινος, 7, ov [ἀνήρ + R. or], 
human ; neut., pl. as subst., human 
things, things fallible, ii. 5. 8. 

ἄνθρωπος, ὁ, ἡ [ἀνήρ + R. on], 
man, human being, Lat. homo, one 
of the human race as opposed to a 
higher or lower order of beings, ii. 
4. 16, iii, 2. 13, v. 8. 9, vii. 6. 11; 
sometimes used instead of ἀνήρ as 
a general term for soldier, i. 8.9, ii. 
1. 11, iv. 7. 4, vi. 4. 23. With an 
adj. of nationality and not to be 
translated (see ἀνήρ), Vi. 4.23. ΑΒ 
a contemptuous expression, fellow, 
person, i. 7. 3, iii. 1. 27, v. 8. AE i 
the pl., men, human beings, per- 
sons, people, inhabitants, i. 5. 9, 6. 
6, ii. 5. 21, iv. 8. 4, ν. 2. 2, 7. 32; 
with implied meaning, the enemy, 
iv. 2. 7, Vii. 3. 43. See ἀνήρ. 

Qvidw, dvidow, ἠνίᾶσα, ἠντάθην 
[dvta, grief], grieve, harass, trou- 
ble, iii. 3. 19; mid., hurt oneself, 
be distressed, iv. 8. 26. 


let go, let go free, Lat. remitto, 
vii. 6. 30; intrans., of the wind, 
slacken, go down, abate, iv. 5. 4, 
ἀνιμάω, impf. ἀνίμων [ἱμάς], 
draw up with a strap, draw up, iv. 
2. 8. 

ἀνίστημι [R. στα], make stand 
up, rouse up, Οὗ persons or ani- 
mals, i. 5. 3, iv. 5. 19, 21; mid., with 
pf. and 2 aor. act., stand up, rise, i. 
6. 10, iii. 3. 1, esp. in order to 
speak, i. 3. 13, iii. 2. 1, v. 6. 27, vi. 
I. 25, vii. 3. 8, or to act, iv. I. 5, 
vi. 1. 5, vii. 3.82; get up (from the 
ground, or after sleep or an ill- 
ness), iii. 1. 15, 4. 1, Iv. 5. 8, 8. 21, 
vi. 5. 2, Vii. 4. 6. 

ἀνίσχω [R. vex], hold up ; in- 
trans., rise, of the sun, ii. I. 3. 

ἄνοδος, ἡ [ὁδός], way up, the 
march up from the coast to the 
interior, ii. 1.1. See ἀνάβασις. 

ἄνοδος, ov [ὁδός], having no 
way, impassable, of a mountain, 
opposed to evodos, iv. 8. 10. 

ἀνόητος, ov [R. yvw], not under- 
standing, foolish, ii. 1. 18. 

ἀνοίγω, ἀνοίξω, dvéwta, ἀνέῳγα Or 
ἀνέῳχα, ἀνέῳγμαι, ἀνεῴχθην [᾿οἴγω, 
οἴγνυμι, open], open up, open, of 
gates, v. 5. 20, vil. 1. 16. 

ἀνομία, as [R. ven], lack of law, 
lawlessness, V. 7. 33, 34. 

ἀνομοίως, adv. [apa], differ- 
ently ; ἀνομοίως ἔχειν, be held in @ 
different light, vii. 7. 49. 

ἄνομος, ov [R. ven], without law, 
lawless, vi. 6. 13. 

ἀντ᾽, by elision for ἀντί. 

ἀνταγοράζω [ἀγείρω], buy in ex- 
change, i. 5. 5. 

ἀνταγωνίζομαι [R. ay], struggle 
against, rival, with πρός and the 
acc., iv. 7. 12. 

ἀντακούω [R. KoF], listen in 
one’s turn, ii. 5. 16. 

“AvravSpos, ἡ, Antandrus (An- 
tandro), an ancient city on the 
southern slope of Mt. Ida, vii. 8. 7, 
in the Troad, and near the head of 
the gulf of Adramyttium. It was 
founded by the Pelasgians, and 


ἀνέημι [ἴημι], send up or back, 


ἀντεμπίμπλημι-ἀντιτ᾽μάω 20 


later colonized by the Aeolians, but 
the Persians took it, and during 
the Peloponnesian war engaged in 
various struggles with the Athe- 
nians for its possession. Accord- 
ing to Vergil, Aenéas built his 
fleet there. 

ἀντεμπίμπλημι [R. πλα], jill in 
recompense, With acc, and gen., iv. 
5. 28. 

ἀντεπιμελέομαι [ R. ped], take care 
in return, take measures against, 
iii, 1. 16. 

ἀντί, prep. with the gen. [ἀντί], 
orig. over against, against, hence, 
instead of, for, in place of, i. 1. 4, 
7. 16, iii. 1.17, 47; ἀνϑ' ὧν, i.e. ἀντὶ 
τούτων ἅ, in return for, i. 3. 4, v. 
5- 14, vii. 7. 8; αἱρεῖσθαί τι ἀντί 
Tivos, prefer one thing to another, 
i. 7. 3, 9. 9; ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ἑστηκότες. 
standing with which in front (of 
pine trees), behind which, iv. 7. 
6. As adv., in recompense, in re- 
turn, V.5.21. In composition ἀντί 
signifies against, in opposition, in 
return, in turn, instead. 

ἀντιδίδωμι [R. 80], give in re- 
turn, put in place of, iii. 3. 19. 

ἀντικαθίστημι [R. στα], estab- 
lish, appoint instead, iii. 1. 38. 

ἀντιλέγω [R. Aey], say or speak 
against, oppose, object, iii. 2. 38, vi. 
5. 22, vii. 3.14; say in opposition, 
with the dat. and inf., ii. 5.29; with 
ws and a clause, ii. 3. 25. 

᾿Αντιλέων, ovros, ὁ, Antileon, a 
Greek soldier from Thurii (see 
Θούριος). V. 1. 2. 

ἀντίος, a, ov [ἀντί], set against, 
opposite, face to face. In the pred. 
where we should use an adv., 
against, with the dat. of the pers. 
expressed or understood, i. το. 10, 
iv. 3. 26; so ἀντίοι ἱέναι, go to meet, 
. 5 AT; of. ΒΒ 24, vi αὶ 96. Ap 
subst., οἱ ἀντίοι, the enemy, iii. 1. 42 ; 
ἐκ τοῦ dvriov, from the opposite 
side, i. 8.23. Phrase: (rare, only 
in Xen. in Att. prose, cf. ἐναντίος) 
λόγοι ἀντίοι ἣ ovs ἤκουον, words just 
the reverse of what I heard, vi. 6. 34. 


ἀντιπαραθέω [0éw], run along 
one’s own line to meet, iv. 8. 17. 

ἀντιπαρασκενάζομαι [R. σκυ], 
prepare oneself in turn, 1, 2. 5. 

ἀντιπαρατάττομαι [R. tax], «r- 
ray oneself against, with κατὰ φά- 
Aayya, iv. 8 9 (where some read 
simply φάλαγγα). 

ἀντιπάρειμι [εἶμι], march along 
over against, on the opposite side 
of a stream, iv. 3. 17. 

ἀντιπάσχω [R. ora], suffer in 
return, ii. 5. 17. 

ἀντιπέρᾶν Or ἀντιπέρᾶς, adv. [R. 
περ], preceded by κατά (κατ᾽), over 
against, on the opposite side of, 
with the gen., i. 1. 9, iv. 8. 3. See 
καταντιπέρᾶν, καταντιπέρᾷς. 

ἀντιποιέω [ποιέω], do in return, 
retaliate, iil. 3.7, 12; mid., lay claim 
to, contend for, dispute about, with 
the gen. of the cause and dat. of 
the pers., ii. 1. 11, 3. 23; vie with, 
be rivals in, with the gen. of the 
thing, iv. 7. 12, or with the dat. of 
the pers. and περί with gen. of the 
thing, v. 2. 11. 

ἀντίπορος, ov [R. wep], on the 
opposite coast, over against, oppo- 
site, with the dat., iv. 2.18. Poetic 
word, except here. 

ἀντιστασιάζω [R. στα], form a 
party against, contend with, with 
the dat., iv. 1. 27. 

ἀντιστασιώτης, ov [R. στα], one 
of the opposite faction, party foe 
or opponent, i. 1. 10. 

ἀντιστοιχέω (στοιχέω, στοιχήσω 
[στοῖχος, 6, row], be in a row), 
stand in rows opposite, with the 
dat., v. 4. 12. 

ἀντιστρατοπεδεύομαι [R. orpa + 
R. wed], encamp against, vii. 7. 33. 

ἀντιτάττω [R. trax], set against, 
set in battle against, with the acc. 
and the dat., ii. 5. 19; mid., set 
oneself in array, marshal oneself 
against, set the battle in array, with 
the dat., iii. 2. 14, iv. 8. 5, v. 4. 23, 
vi. 1.9; so the pass., i. το. 3. 

dvriripae [R. τι], honour in re- 
turn, Vv. 5. 14. 


91 ἀντιτοξεύω-ἀπαγγέλλω 


ἀντιτοξεύω [R. τακ], shoot in re- 
turn, shoot back, iii. 3. 15. 

ἀντιφυλάττω [φυλάττω], guard 
in turn; mid., guard oneself in 
turn, ii. 5. 3. 

ἄντρον, τό [Lat. antrum is a 
borrowed word ], cave, i. 2. 8. 

ἀντρώδης, es [dvtpov+ R. Frid], 
cave-like, cavernous, iv. 3. 11. 

avuorés, dv [verbal of dviw], to be 
accomplished, possible ; σιγῇ ws ἀνυ- 
στόν, as silently as possible, i. 8. 11. 

ἀνύω, Att. regularly avira, ἀνύσω, 
ἤνυσα, ἤνυκα, ἤνυσμαι, achieve, ac- 
complish, bring to pass; mid., for 
oneself, Vii. 7. 24. 

ἄνω, adv. [dvd], above, up, on 
higher ground, upwards, iv. 1. 6, 
2. 8, 3. 5, 8. 28, v. 4. 24, 25; up, 
into the air, ili. 4.17; up country 
(from the coast to the interior), i. 
2. 1, vii. 3. 16, 5. 9. Comp. drw- 
τέρω, higher, with the gen., i. 4.17, 
iv. 2. 25. Sup. ἡ ἀνωτάτω κώμη, 
the village highest up, vii. 4. 11. 
With the art., τὸ ἄνω (sc. μέρος): 
the part above, iv. 6. 26; τὰ ἄνω; 
the heights, iv. 3. 25; οἱ ἄνω πολέ- 
puot, the foe above, iv. 3.23; ἡ ἄνω 
ὁδός, the journey inland, iii. 1. 8; 
ἡ ἄνω xwpa, the up-country, V. 2.3; 
ὁ ἄνω βασιλεύς, the up-country king, 
vii. 1. 28, 7.3. As adv. of place, 
with gen., iv. 3.3; cf. 3. 21. 

ἀνώγεων, τό [dvw+ γῆ], what is 
raised above the ground, upper 
Jloor, loft, v. 4. 29. 

ἄνωθεν, adv. [ἄνω], from above, 
iv. 7. 12, v. 2.23; from up-country, 
vii. 7. 2. 

ἀξία, as [R. ay], worth, value ; 
τὴν ἀξίᾶν τινὶ νεῖμαι, give one his 
deserts, vi. 6. 33. 

ἀξίνη, ns [ cf. Lat. ascia, are, Eng. 
AXE, ADZE], axe, Lat. bipennis, 


ἢ No. 6. 


with double head. The ἀξίνη was 


in Homer as a battle-axe, i. 5. 12, 
vii. 1. 17. 
ἄξιος, a, ov [R. ay], weighing as 
much as, worthy of, deserving, of 
persons, with or without the gen., 
i 9. 8, vi. 6. 16, vil. 3. 10,9. βῆ; 
with the inf., i. 9. 1, ii. 5. 24; of 
things, valuable, befitting, worth, 
sometimes with the gen. of value, 
i. 9. 29, vii. 3. 27, 7.25; neut. ἄξιον 
(sc. ἐστίν). be worth while, befitting, 
becoming, due, Lat. operae pretium 
est, decet, aequum est, V. 7. 5, 8. 7, 
with dat. and inf., ii. 3. 25, vii. 3. 
19, with the simple inf., vi. 5. 18, 
or with the gen., vi.5. 13. Phrases: 
πολλοῦ ἄξιος. worth much, valuable, 
of great service, i. 3. 12, ii. 1. 14, 
iv. 1.28; πλείονος ἄξιος, more valu- 
able, ii. 1.20; πλείστου ἄξιος, most 
valuable, ii. 4.65; παντὸς ἄξιος, very 
valuable, vii. 3. 18, 

ἀξιοστράτηγος, ον [R. ay+R. 
στρα], worthy of being general, il. 
I. 24. 

ἀξιόω, ἀξιώσω, etc. [R. ay], think 
jit, worthy or proper, expect, with 
the inf., ii. 6. 27, iii. 1. 37, ν. 5. 9, 
vii. 3. 19, or with the gen., iii. 2. 7; 
so mid. (acc. to some), i. 9. 15, and 
pass., iv. 6.16. Hence, claim, ask, 
demand, with the inf., i. 1. 8, 3. 19, 
v. 5. 20, vi. 6. 25. 

ἀξίωμα, aros, τό [R. ay], worth, 
authority, dignity, Vi. 1. 28. 

ἄξω, see ἄγω. 

ἄξων, ovos, ὁ [R. ay], ale, i. 8. 
10. 
ἄοπλος, ον [R. oer], without 
arms, unarmed, ii. 3. 3. 

ἀπ᾽, by elision for ἀπό. 

ἀπαγγέλλω [ἀγγέλλω], bring or 
carry back word, bring tidings (from 
a person or place, of envoys, mes- 
sengers, scouts, efc.), announce, 
report, with the simple dat. or 
πρός with the acc. of the person to 
whom the message is sent, and the 
gen. with παρά of the person from 
whom it comes, i. 4. 13, 7. 2, ii. 1. 
20, 3. 24, 5. 36, vi. 3. 22; the pur- 


used for chopping and digging, and 


port of the messdge is expressed 


ἀπαγορεύω-ἄπειμι 99 


by the acc., i. 4. 12, ii. 1. 21, 3. 2, 
vi. 4. 25, or a clause with ὅτε or ws, 
i. το. 15, ii. 1. 4, 22, 4. 4, iv. 5. 20, 
vi. 1. 16, or an indir. quest., i. ro. 
14, ii. 5. 27, or with ws and the 
gen. abs., ii. 1. 21. 
ἀπαγορεύω, pf. ἀπείρηκα, cf. ἀπεῖ- 
πον [ἀγείρω and R. 1 Εερ], forbid ; 
intr., renounce, give up or out, be- 
— “emcee ye of men or ani- 
mals, 1. 5. 3, ii. 2. 16, v. 1. 2, vi. «. 
80. 8.8. ͵ iii 
ἀπάγω [R. ay], lead off or back, 
march back, esp. of troops, i. 3. 14, 
i, 3. 26, 29, vii. 6. 9, 7. 10, 57; 
carry away, remove, Vv. 8, 7, Vi. I. 
8, 5. 20, 6. 1. 
ἀπαγωγή, js [R. ay], leading 
off, removal, vii. 6. 5. 
ἀπαθής, ἐς [R. oma], without 
experience of, free from, with the 
gen., vii. 7. 33. 
ἀπαίδευτος, ov [παῖς], unedu- 
cated, ignorant, ii. 6. 26. 
ἀπαίρω [delpw], lift off; hence, 
of a ship, set sail, depart, vii. 6. 
33. 
ἀπαιτέω [alréw], demand or ask 
Jrom, demand (as a right or debt), 
Lat. posco, i. 2. 11, iv. 2. 18, vii. 
AP 7: 20; sometimes with two 
accs., li. 5. 38, v. 8. 4, vii. 6. 2; one 
of the accs. may be represented by 
a rel. clause, vii. 7. 21, 39. 
͵ ἀπαλλάττω (ἀλλάττω, dddqy-, 
ἀλλάξω, ἤλλαξα, -ἤλλαχα, ἤλλαγ- 
μαι, -γλλάχθην OF ἠλλάγην [ἄλλος], 
change), change off, abandon, de- 
part, ili. 2. 28, v. 6. 32; so mid., 
but with ἀπό or ἐκ and the gen., 
vii. 1.4, 6.2; pass., be freed from, 
be rid of, with the gen., iv. 3. 2, 
v. 1.13, vi. 2.15. Phrase: ὡς μεῖον 
ἔχων ἀπηλλάγη, when he had come 
of with the worst of it, i. 10. 8. 
ἁπαλός, h, ὁν, tender, delicate, 
soft, 1. 5. 2, V. 4. 32. 
, ἀπαμείβομαι (ἀμείβω, ἀμείψω, 
nueva, -ημείφθην, change), dep. 
mid. and pass., make return, a@n- 
swer, reply, ii. 5. 15. Poetic verb, 


ἀπαντάω, ἀπαντήσομαι, ἀπήν. 
τησα, ἀπήντηκα [ἀντί], meet, go to 
meet, Lat. obuiam ed, with the dat., 
li. 3. 17, 4. 25, vii. 8. 1; in a hostile 
a" encounter, iv. 6. 5, 24, vi. 
1. 8. 

ἅπαξ, numeral adv. [R. way], 
once; used in Anab. after ἐπεί, 
ἐάν, ἐάνπερ, or ws, without the ex- 
act idea of number, Lat. ut semel, 
st semel, etc., i. 9. 10, ii. 2. 12, iii. 2, 
25, iv. 6, 17, 7. 12. 

ἀπαράσκενος, ov [R. oxv], un- 
prepared, i. 1. 6, 5. 9, ii. 3. 21. 

amas, doa, ἂν [was], all together, 
all, whole, of persons or of things, 
when with the art., it has pred. posi- 
tion, 1. 4. 4, 5. 1, 5, 6. 10, 7. 8, ii. 
3. 7, 5. 28, 29, iii. 2. 9, iv. 3. 19, 
v. 6. 8, 7. 28, vi. 4. 20, vii. 1. 27. 
Phrases: ἅπᾶν τὸ μέσον, the entire 
space between, i. 4.4; ἅπᾶν ὁμαλές, 
entirely level, i. 5.1; πεδίον ἅπᾶν, 
all a plain, iv. 4. 1. 

ἀπανθημερίζω (αὐθημερίζω, αὐθη- 
μεριδ- [αὐτός - ἡμέρα, return on 
the same day), return on the same 
day, V. 2. 1. 


perhaps only here in Attic prose. 


τέκν MR see ἀπογιγνώσκω. 
ἀπεδόμην, See ἀποδίδωμι. 

ἀπέδρα, ἀποδράς, etc., see ἀπο- 
διδράσκω. 

ἀπέδωκα, 566 ἀποδίδωμι. 

ἀπέθανον, see ἀποθνήσκω. 

ἀπειθέω, ἀπειθήσω [R. m0], dis- 
obey, be disobedient, ii. 6. 4, iii. 2. 

ἀπειλέω, ἀπειλήσω, etc. [ἀπειλή], 
threaten, with a cognate acc. and a 
clause with ws, or with the dat. of 
the pers. and a clause with ὅτι, v. 
5. 22, 6. 34. 

ἀπειλή, Fs, boastful promise, 
threat, generally pl. (always pl. in 
Anab.), vii. 7. 24, 54. 

ἄπειμι [R. ex], be away, stay 
away, li. 5. 37, vi. 6. 20. 

ἄπειμι [εἶμι], go off or away, 
depart, retreat, desert, return, go 
along, disappear (often with fut. 
meaning in the pres., like εἶμι), i. 3. 
11, ii. 1. 21, 2. 1, 10, 3. 7, iii. 3. 5, 


23 ἀπεῖπον- ἁπλόος 


4. 84, iv. 5. 24, 6. 1, V. 2. 8, vi. 3. 25, | or εἰς with acc., iii. 5. 7, iv. 8. 6, 
vii, 2. 16. The person to whom is | Vii. 5. 8, or by the advs. οἴκαδε and 
expressed by πρός, παρά or ws, With | χωρίς, v. 6. 20, vi. 6.2; so ἔξω with 


the acc., i. 9. 29, ii. 3. 29, vil. 2.16 


en., Vii. 1.35; from which by ἀπό 


37; from whom by ἀπό with the | with gen., v. 2. 27, or by the adv. 
ven., Vi. 5. 17; the place or thing ἐνθένδε, V. 7. 5. 


to which by els or ἐπί with the acc., 
i. 4. 7, 10. 17, ii. 3. 29, 4. 8, iv. 8. 
14, vi. 3. 4; towards which, by ἐπί 
with the gen. or by an adv., i. 7. 4, 
ii. 1. 3, Vii. 8.2; for which by ἐπί 
with dat., ii. 4.5; within which by 
εἴσω with gen., vii. 1. 40; from 
which by ἀπό or ἐκ with gen., iii. 5. 
4, iv. 3. 9, vii. 6. 42. A cognate 
ace. follows the verb in v. 3. 6. 
Phrase: κατὰ χώρᾶν ἀπιέναι, move 
back to its former position, of an 
army, vi. 4. 11. 
ἀπεῖπον [εἶπον], renounce, Vil. 
1.41; forbid, with the dat. and 
the inf. with μή, vii. 2. 12. 
ἀπειρηκότας, See ἀπαγορεύω. 
ἄπειρος, ον [R. wep], without ex- 
perience, unskilled, unacquainted 
with, Lat. imperitus, abs. or with 
the gen., ii. 2. 5, iii. 2. 16, v. 1. 8, 
6. 29. Ι 
ἀπεῖχον, 566 ἀπέχω. 
ἀπέκτονε, See ἀποκτείνω. 
ἀπελαύνω [ἐλαύνω], drive away, 
expel, iii. 1. 32, vi. 6. 6; with ἀπό 
and gen. of the place, iii. 4. 40; 
intr., march, ride, or go away, ii. 3. 
6, 4. 24, vii. 3.1, 7.12; with παρά 
and acc. of the person, or εἰς and 
acc. of the place, i. 4. 5, 8. 17, vii. 
6. 42. 
ἀπελθόντας, see ἀπέρχομαι. 
ἅπερ, see ὅσπερ. 
ἀπερύκω [R.2 Fep], ward off, v. 
8. 25. 
ἀπέρχομαι [ἔρχομαι], the verb 
ἄπειμι serving as fut., come or go 
away, go forward, depart, retreat, 
desert, return, abs., i. 1. 4, 3. 17, 1, 
2. 5, 6. 5, iii. 4. 18, iv. 7. 7, Vv. .2. 7, 
vi. 3. 25, vii. 2. 15. The person to 
whom is expressed by πρός or παρά 
with acc., i. 4. 7, iv. 2. 21, vii. 6. 34; 
rom whom by παρά and gen., i. 9. 


Grex Odvopar, ἀπεχθήσομαι, ἀπη- 
χθόμην, ἀπήχθημαι [ἔχθος, τό, ha- 
tred|, be hateful to, incur one’s 
hatred, with the dat., ii. 6. 19, v. 
8. 25, vii. 6. 34, 35, 7. 10. 
ἀπέχω [R. oex], keep off or 
away (not so in Anab.); intr., be 
away from or distant, Lat. disto, 
with the acc. of extent, i. 3. 20, iii. 
2. 34, vi. 3. 20, vii. 3.2; the person 
or place from which is expressed 
by the gen., ii. 4. 10, 12, vi. 5. 8, 
vii. 3. 9; also the place from which 
by ἀπό with gen., iv. 3. 5, v. 4. 31; 
mid., hold oneself off from, abstain 
from injuring, keep away from, 
with the gen., ii. 6. 10, iii. 1. 22, νυ. 
5. 14, vi. 1. 31, 6. 14. 
ἀπήγαγεν, See ἀπάγω. 
ἀπῇει, see ἄπειμι (εἶμι). 

ἀπήλασα, ἀπήλαυνον, see ar- 
ελαύνω. 

ἀπῆλθον, 566 ἀπέρχομαι. 

ἀπηλλάγη, See ἀπαλλάττω. 

ἀπῆρα, see ἀπαίρω. 

ἀπιστέω, ἀπιστήσω, etc. [R. m0], 
distrust, suspect, disobey, with the 
dat., ii. 5. 6, 16, 6. 19, vi. 6. 13, vii. 
2. Si. 

ἀπιστία, as [R. m0], distrust, 
suspicion, treachery, ii. 5. 4, iii. 2. 
4, 8; with πρός and the acc. of the 
person, ii. 5. 21. 

ἄπιστος, ον [R. m0], not to be 
trusted, untrustworthy, faithless, 
vii. 7. 28, 24; with the dat., ii. 4. 7. 

ἀπιτέον [iréov, verbal of εἶμι], 
with ἐστί, one must go, must de- 
part, Vv. 3. 1. 

ἄπλετος, ov [R. πλα], not to be 
jilled or measured, great, tremen- 
dous, iv. 4. 11. ὕει 1,14. 

ἁπλόος, 67, dov, contr. ods, ἢ; ody 
[R. wa], simple, frank, straight- 
forward, Lat. simplex, v. 8. 18; τὸ 


29; place or thing to which by ἐπί 


ἁπλοῦν, sincerity, li. 6. 22. 


ἀπό- ἀποθνήσκω 24 


ἀπό, by elision and euphony, ἀπ᾽ 
or ἀφ᾽, prep. with gen. [Lat. ab, 
Eng. orr, oF], from, off, away 
Jrom. Used of place, including 
persons and things; of time; and 
of source in its broadest sense, 
including cause and means. Of 
place, including separation and 
distance, from, away from, i. 1. 2. 
8. 15, 28, 9. 6, iii. 4. 24, iv. 3. 5, v. 
4. 31, Vi. 3. 8, vii. 3. 12. Of time, 
from, after, starting from, i. 7. 18, 
li. 6. 30, v. 6. 23, vii, 5. 6,8; dard 
rovrov, from this time on, ii. 6. 5; 
ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since, iii. 2.14. Of source, 
including origin, i. 5. 10, ii. 3. 14, 
4..138, iii. 1. 12, vi. 1. 22, vii. 2. 37; 
descent, ii. 1. 3, vii. 8. 17; cause, 
on, upon, li. 5. 32, iv. 1.5; means, 
by, out of, by the aid of, i. τ. 9, ii. 
6. 5, ν. 3. 4, 5. 1, vii. 7.9. In the 
constructiO praegnans, ol ἀπὸ τῶν 
οἰκιῶν, the people in the houses, v. 
2. 24, 25, cf. ii. 2. 16, iii. 4. 48. 
Phrases: ἀπὸ ἵππου, on horseback, 
i. 2.7; of. iii. 3.10; ἀπὸ τῶν θεῶν 
ἄρχεσθαι, start out from the gods, 
supplicate them before beginning 
an undertaking, vi. 3. 18, ef. ii. 5.7 ; 
εὐθὺς ἀφ᾽ ἑσπέρας, just after night- 
fall, vi. 3. 23. In composition ἀπό 
signifies from, away, off, in return, 
back, but is sometimes simply in- 
tensive, and sometimes almost neg. 
(arising from the sense of off Me 

ἀποβαίνω [R. Ba], step off, esp. 
from a ship, disembark, Lat. egre- 
dior, with eis or éri and the acc. of 
place, v. 7. 9, vi. 2. 17, 19, 3. ἃ: 
issue, result, come true, vii. 8. 22. 


ἀποβάλλω [Bardo], cast off or 


| with longing eye, of a dependant, 
Vii. 2. 33. 
ἀπογιγνώσκω [R. γνω], give up 
the intention of, with the gen., i. a 
19. 
ἀποδεδράκᾶσιν, see ἀποδιδράσκω. 
ἀποδείκνυμι [R. 1 Sax], point out, 
make known, v. 8.7, 11; show to, 
direct, with the-inf., ii. 3. 14; ap- 
point, i. 1. 2, 9.7; mid., set-forth 
one’s views, declare, with or with- 
out γνώμην, and with a clause with 
ὅτι or with inf., v. 2. 9, 5. 3, 6. 37; 
pass., be declared, vii. 1. 26. 
ἀποδέρω (δέρω, δερῶ, ἔδειρα, δέ. 
δαρμαι, ἐδάρην [R. Sap], flay), take 
the hide off, flay, skin, iii. 5. 9. 
ἀποδέχομαι [R. 2 Sax], receive 
at the hands of, accept, vi. 1. 24. 
ἀποδημέω, ἀποδημήσω [R. δα], 
be from home, go abroad, vii. 8. 4. 
ἀποδιδράσκω (-διδράσκω, δρα-, 
-δράσομαι, -ἐδρᾶν, -dédpaxa [root 
Spa, run, cf. Eng. TREAD], run), 
run away, desert, escape by stealth, 
i. 4. 8, ii. 2. 13, iv. 6. 3, v. 6.34, vii. 
6. 36; abandon, with acc., vi. 4. 8; 
withdraw, hide oneself, with eis and 
the acc. of the place, ii. 5. 7. 
ἀποδίδωμι [R. $0], give back or 
up, restore, deliver, iv. 2. 19, 23, 
V. 3. 6, 7, vii. 5.5, 6. 2, 3, 8. 6; re- 
turn what is due, pay, with or 
without μισθόν, i. 2. 11, 12, 4. 15, 
vii. 5.4, 7.34; fulfil a promise, i. 
ἡ. 5, vii. 6. 22; mid., sell, vii. 2. 3, 
6, 8. 2, 6. 
ἀποδοκεῖ [R. Sox], it displeases, 
with dat. and inf., ii. 3. 9. 
ἀποδοῦναι, see ἀποδίδωμι. 
ἀποδραίη, ἀποδρᾶναι, see ἀπο- 


away, lose, iv. 6. 10, vi. 1. 21, vii. | διδράσκω. 


6. 31. 
ἀποβιβάζω (βιβάζω, βιβαδ-, -βι- 


ἀποδραμοῦμαι, 566 ἀποτρέχω. 
ἀποδύω [δύω], strip off, spoil the 


βάσω or βιβῶ, -εβίβασα [R. Ba], | slain, v. 8. 23; mid. with 2 aor. 
make go, causative to βαίνων, cause | act., throw off (a garment), iv. 3. 
to go off, disembark, i. 4. 5. 17. 


ἀποβλέπω [βλέπω], look away 
from all other objects at one, 
look steadily, with εἰς and the acc. 


ἀποδώσει, see ἀποδίδωμι. 
ἀποθανεῖν, see ἀποθνήσκω. 
ἀποθνήσκω [θνήσκω], die off, die, 


of the thing, i. 8. 14; as a dog | be killed, fall in battle, i. 6. 11, 
towards his master’s table, look | 9. 31, ii. 6. 20, iv. 1. 18, v, 1. 17; 


95 ἀποθύω-᾿ Απόλλων 


e death, ii. 1. 10, iii. 1. 13, 
i ar vii. ict . with ὑπό and gen., 
by. at the hands of, ii. 6. 29, ν. ᾿ 
15, vii. 5. 13; the manner of deat 
is expressed by the dat. or by a 
partic., iii. 1. 13, 2. 18, v. 7. 19, vil. 
2. 32. οἱ ἀποθανόντες, the dead, the 
fallen, iii. 4. 5, iv. 2. 23. # 
“ ἀποθύω [R. 2 Ov], sacrifice as 
due, offer up, pay a vow, Lat. wotum 
solud, with cognate acc., lll. 2. 12, 
iv. 8. 25. 
ἀποικία, as [R. Fux], colony, 
settlement, Lat. colonia, iv. 8. 22. 
ἄποικος, ov [R. Fux], away from 
home ; πόλις ἄποικος, a colony, V. 3. 
2, vi. 2.1; a8 subst., ἄποικοι; colo- 
nists, Lat. col6ni, v. 5.10, vi. I. 15. 
ἀποκαίω, Att. ἀποκάω [Kalo], 
burn off; of a blizzard, freeze off, 
Lat. adurd, iv. 5. 3, vii. 4. 3. 
ἀποκαλέω [R. kad], call off, call 
aside, Lat. seuocd, vii. 3. 35. 
ἀποκάμνω Ladue), grow weary, 
ail, flag, iv. 7. 2. 
ἡ κρέα ti fasta], be laid away, 
be laid up in store, ii. 3. 15, Vil. 7. 
40, 
ἀποκλείω [κλείω7, shut off, cut 
off, exclude, iv. 3.20; with the gen., 
vi. 6.13; shut, vii. 6. 24. | 
ἀποκλίνω (κλίνω, κλιν-, κλινῶ, 
ἔκλινα, κέκλιμαι, ἐκλίθην ΟΥ̓ -εκλίνην 
[root κλι, lean, ef. κλῖμαξ, Lat. in- 
clind, bend, clinus, declivity, libra, 
balance, Eng. LEAN, LID], bend), 
intr., turn aside, turn off the road, 
ii. 2. 16. 
ἀποκόπτω [κόπτω], cut off, strike 
off, vii. 4.15; beat off from, of an 
enemy, iii. 4.39, iv. 2.10; with ἀπ 
and gen. of the place, iv. 2. 17. 
ἀποκρίνομαι [κρένω], give a de- 
cision, answer, Lat. responded, abs., 
i. 4. 16, ii. 3. 20, vii. 2. 26, or with 
cognate acc., ii. 5. 42, iii. 3. 3, or with 
a rel, clause, ii. 1.9; the person to 
whom is expressed by the dat., i. 4. 
14, vi. 6. 34, vii. 7. 4, the thing to 
which by πρός and acc., 1]. 5. 39, 
v. 4. 8; the answer itself may be 


ὅτι, i. 6. 8, 8. 16, ii. τ. 22, 4. 5, iv. 


8. 6, vii. 1. 22, or indirect with ὅτι, ° 
i. 3. 20, 8. 18, iv. 5. 10, v. 4. 8, vil. 
. 10. 
i ἀποκρύπτω [κρύπτω], hide from, 
conceal, i. 9. 19, iv. 4. 11. ἱ 
ἀποκτείνω [κτείνω], With ἀποθνή- 
σκω (q.v.) serving as passive, kill 
off, put to death, slay, 1. I. 3, 7, 2. 
20, ii. 1. 8, 3. 23, iv. 7. 22, v. 7. 16, 
vi. 4. 24, vii. 1. 28. 
ἀποκτίννῦμι [κτέννῦμι, not Attic, 
collateral form of κτείνω], only 
pres. and impf., ‘ill, vi. 3. 5, 5. 
28. 
ἀποκωλύω [κωλύω], hinder from, 
prevent, with the acc. and the gen., 
iii. 3. 3; with the acc. and μή with 
inf., vi. 4. 24. 
Sahin Ole [λαμβάνω], take 
from, take back, receive back, re- 
cover, regain, i. 2. 27, 4. 8, vil. 3. 
31, 7. 25, 8.6; pass., be cut off, as a 
military phrase, ii. 4.17; of. lv. 3. 
20 (where editions differ). 
ἀπολείπω [λείπω], leave behind, 
forsake, desert, abandon, 1. 4. 8, 
ii. 6. 12, iv. 2. 15, vi. 2. 12; leave 
open, leave a space, V1. 5. 11; mid. 
and pass., fall behind, be parted 
from, iv. 3. 22, v. 8. 16; with the 
gen., V. 4. 20, vi. 3. 26. 

ἀπόλεκτος, ov [R. Aey], selected, 
picked, ii. 3. 15. 

ἀποληφθῆτε, ἀπολήψονται, see 
ἀπολαμβάνω. i 

ἀπόλλυμι (SAA, ὀλ-, GAD, 
ὥλεσα, ὠλόμην, -ολώλεκα, OF ὅλωλα 
[root oA, destroy, cf. Lat. ab-oleo, 
| destroy], destroy), destroy utterly, 
kill, lose, ii. 4. 3, 5. 39, iii. 2. 4, 
vi. 6.23; with ὑπό and the gen. of 
agent, iii. 4. 11, vii. 2. 225 mid. 
with 2 pf. and _plpf. act. perish, 
die, be Yeah be ruined, 1. 2. 25, ii. 
5. 41, iii, 1. 2, 38, vii. 1. 19, 4. 12; 
with ὑπό and the gen. of cause or 
the dat. of manner, i. 5. 5, v. 3. 3, 
8. 2, vii. 4. 5. 

᾿Απόλλων, wos, acc. wa and ὦ, 
voc. "Ἄπολλον, Apollo, one of the 


a direct quotation, with or without 


greatest of the divinities of the 


᾿Απολλωνία-ἀποσήπω 26 


Greeks, son of Zeus and Leto, twin 
brother of Artemis. His birthplace 


was Delos. He was the god of 


prophecy, his most famous oracle 
being at Delphi, iii. 1. 6, of music 
(cf. i. 2. 8), and of poetry. As 
god of archery and preserver of 
health, the Greeks made thank- 
offerings to him for their safe re- 
turn, v. 3. 4, cf. vii. 8. 3. 
᾿Απολλωνίᾷ, as, Apollonia, a 
town in the district of Teuthrania 
in Mysia, east of Pergamus. The 
exact site of it is not known. vii, 
8. 15. 
᾿Απολλωνίδης, ov, Apollonides, a 
pretended Boeotian among the 
captains of Proxenus. Having 
given cowardly advice, he was dis- 
covered to be a Lydian, and was 
driven off, iii, 1. 26-82. 
ἀπολογέομαι, ἀπολογήσομαι, etc. 
[R. Aey], say in defence, offer a 
defence, with περί and the gen., v. 
6. 3. 
ἀπολύω [tw], loose from, ac- 
quit, with gen. of the charge, Lat. 
absolud culpae, vi. 6. 15, 16. 
ἀπολωλέκατε, see ἀπόλλῦμι. 
ἀπομάχομαι [R. pax], fight off, 
resist, Lat. repugnd, vi. 2. 6. 
ἀπόμαχος, ov | R. pax], not Jight- 


ἀποπλέω [R. wheF], sail off, 
away, or back, hence, sail home, 
i. 3. 14, v. 4. 12, vi. 6. 9, vii. 1. 4; 
with ἐκ and the gen. of the place, 
vii. 1. 38, 2. 5. 

ἀπόπλοος, Att. ἀπόπλους, ὁ [R. 
πλεε], ἃ sailing back, homeward 
voyage, Vv. 6. 90, 

ἀποπορεύομαι [R. περ], journey 
away, depart, vii. 6. 33, 7. 8. 

ἀπορέω, ἀπορήσω, etc. [R. περ], 
be without ways and means, be in 
| doubt, perplexed, at a loss, act. and 
mid., ili. 5. 8, v. 6. 30, vi. 1. 21, vii. 
3. 20; with the dat. of cause, i. 3. 
8, 5. 13; with an indir. question, 
vii. 3.29; with the inf., vi. 1. 22 ; 
ibe in want of, lack, with the gen., 


Ψ 


γν 1... 

ἀπορία, as [R. wep], lack of ways 
and means, difficulty, perplexity, 
embarrassment, i. 3. 13, ii. 5. 9, 
γί, 6.11 lack, want, with the gen., 
li. 5. 9; pl., difficulties, straits, iii. 
1. 12, 26. 

ἄπορος, ov [R. περ], without 
ways and means, without resources, 
of persons, Lat. inops, ii. 5. 21; 
with the inf., v. 6. 20; of roads, 
mountains, or rivers, impassable, 
unfordable, Lat. inuius, ii. 4. 4, 5. 
18, iii. 2. 22; neut., ἄπορόν ἐστι, tt 


ing; hence, disabled or non-com- 
batant, iii. 4. 32, iv. 1. 13. 

ἀπονοστέω (vorréw, νοστήσω [ νό- 
oTos, 6, a return home}, go home), 
return home, iii. 5. 16. 

ἀποπέμπω [πέμπω], send off or 
back, despatch, send what is due, 
remit, i. 1.8, 7. 8, iii. 1. 9, vii. 7.51; 
with πρός and the acc. of the per- 
son, or eis or éri with the acc. of 
the place, i. 1. 3, 2. 1, 20, or with 
the acc. and the inf., vii. 4. 2 ; mid., 
send from oneself, dismiss, i. 1. 5, 
vii. 7. 8, 23. 

ἀποπήγνυμι [R. way], freeze ᾿ 
mid., of blood, Jreeze, curdle, Lat. 
concresco, v. 8, 15. 

ἀποπηδάω (πηδάω, πηδήσομαι, 
ἐπήδησα, -πεπήδηκα [Εἰ wed), leap), 
spring away, iii. 4. 27. 


is impracticable, iii. 3. 4, vi. 6. 23 ; 
Subst., ἄπορον, obstacle, Lat. im- 
pedimentum, iii. 2. 22. Phrase, év 
ἀπόροις εἶναι, be at a loss, in straits, 
vii. 6. 11, 38. 

ἀπόρρητος, ον [R. 1 Fep], not to 
be told, secret, Lat. sécrétus (for 
infandus and nefandus mean un- 
utterahle, abominable ; so ἀπόρρη- 
τος, but not in Anab.), i. 6. 5; ἐν 
ἀπορρήτῳ, Lat. sécrétd, under seal 
of secrecy, vii. 6. 43. 

ἀπορρώξ, ὥγος, ὁ, ἡ [root Ερακ, 
break, cf. ῥήγνῦμι, break, Lat. fran- 
go, break, Eng. preax, BREACH], 
broken off ; with πέτρα, sheer, Lat. 
abruptus, vi. 4. 3. 

ἀποσήπω (σήπω, σαπ-, σήψω, 
σέσηπα, ἐσάπην, make rot), make 
rot off; pass., with perf. act., rot 


27 


off, lose by rotting, iv. 5. 12, v. 8. 
15. i 

ἀποσκάπτω 
σκάψω, ἔσκαψα, ἔσκαφα, ἔσκαμμαι, 


ἀποσκάπτω- ἀπρόθῦμος 


ἀποτείνω [τείνω], reach out, ex- 
end; pass. with ἐκ and the gen. 


(σκάπτω, σκαφ- | and εἰς and the acc., i. 8. 10. 


ἀποτειχίζω [rexifw], wall off, 


ἐσκάφην, dig), dig off; with ri, cut | build an intercepting wall, ii. 4. 4. 


off by a trench, Lat. transuersam 
fossam obduco, ii. 4. 4. 


ἀποτέμνω [τέμνω], cut off, sever, 


of heads, iii. 1. 17, iv. 7. 16; in 


υ v . the part cut off may be 
ἀποσκεδάννῦμι [σκεδάννυμι], scat-| the pass. 
toe Ga ne τα rd and pass., be | retained in the acc., Or Fags " 
dispersed, straggle, iv. 4. 9, 15,vi. 1.1. the nom., ae 6. ; val 
᾿᾿ἀποσκηνόω R. σκα], encamp | military phrase, cut off, intercept, 


4" " 
apart from, iii. 4. 88. 


Lat. intercipid, intercludd, in the 


ἀποσπάω [R. oa]. draw off, | pass., iii. 4. 29. 


withdraw, trans., i. 8 133 intr., 


ἀποτίθημι [R. Ge], put away, 


separate from, withdraw, i. 5. 3| store away, ii, 3. 15. 


(some read mid.), vii. 2.11; pass., 


£ y= 
ἀποτίνω (τίνω, τίσω, erica, τέ- 


͵' i i έτισμαι, ἐτίσθην [R. te], 
be separated from, with the gen. Or | τῖκα, τ ty 
i ἀπό and the gen., ii. 2. 12| pay), pay back, pay what is due, 


(some read act.), vii. 3. 41. 


vii. 6. 16; mid., exact payment, 


ἀποσταυρόω (σταυρόω, ἐσταύρωσα, | punish, requite, iil. 2. 6. 


-ἐσταύρωμαι, ἐσταυρώθην [R. στα], 
fence with pales), stake off, i.e. by 
driving in — along the top of 
a rampart, Vi. 5. 1. 
! Pam κου εἶμε Perdue), send back, 
ii, 1. 5. 
ἀποστερέω [ocrepéw], defraud, 
rob, despoil, with two accs. or abs., 
vi. 6. 23, vii. 6. 9, 7. 48. 
ἀποστῆναι, see ἀφίστημι. 
ἀποστρατοπεδεύομαι [R. στρα 
R. wed], encamp away from, Vil. 7. 
1; with the gen., iii. 4. 34. | 
ἀποστρέφω [στρέφω], turn back, 
induce to return, ii. 6. 3. 
ἀποστροφή, js [ἀποστρέφω], a 
turning back, retreat, place of ref- 
uge, Lat. perfugium, ll. 4. 22, vii. 
ἀποσύλάω (σύλάω, σύλήσω, etc. 
[R. σκν], strip, spoil, Lat. spolid), 
strip off, plunder, i. 4. 8. 
ἀποσχεῖν, ἀπόσχωμεν, See ἀπέχω. 
ἀποσῳΐζω [R. caF], lead back 
in safety, with eis and the acc. of 
the place, ii. 3. 18. ; 
ἀποταφρεύω (ταφρεύω, ταφρεύσω, 
ἐτάφρευσα, -τετάφρευμαι [τάφρος], 
make a trench), trench off, draw a 
trench (the Lat. uallo fossaque mi- 
nid includes both this word and 


ἀποτμηθέντες, See ἀποτέμνω. 
ἀπότομος, ον [τέμνω], cut off, 
steep, sheer, iv. 1. 2. 

ἀποτρέπω [τρέπω], turn off; 
mid., turn aside or back, return, 
iii. 5. 1, vii. 6. 11. 
ἀποτρέχω [τρέχω], run away ΟΥ̓ 
back, escape, Vv. 2. 6, vii. 6. 5. 
ἀποφαίνω [R. da], show forth ; 
mid., show oneself or something of 
one’s own, appear, declare, i. 6. 9, 
Vv. 9. 12. 

ἀποφεύγω [R. φυγ], flee away, 
flee too far to be caught, escape, 1. 
4. 8, ii. 2. 13, iii. 4. 9, vii. 1. 20; οἱ 
ἀποφυγόντες, the fugitives, v. 7. 19. 

ἀπόφραξις, ews, ἡ [φράττω, fence 
in, root pax, shut in, cf. Lat. 
farcid, cram, frequéns, repeated, 
full, Eng. BoroueH, BORROW], a 
fencing off, blockade, iv. 2. 25, 26. 

ἀποχωρέω [χωρέω], go away 
from, retreat, withdraw, i. 10. 13, 
iv. 2 Bl, Vi. 2; 2B, We. ἃ. 26 ; with 
ἐκ or ἔξω and the gen., or with πρός 
or εἰς and the ang δῦ "»" 
15, iv. 3. 24, v. 7. 16. 

li il [ψηφίξζω], vote 
away from, vote against, reject by 
vote, i. 4. 15. 

rid toa ov [R. 1 Ov], not 


ἀποσταυρόω, g.v.), Vi. 5. 1. 


eager, unwilling, Vi. 2. 7. 


ἀπροσδόκητος-᾿ Αργώ 28 


ἀπροσδόκητος, ον [προσδοκάωΊ], 
unexpected ; ἐξ ἀπροσδοκήτου, unex- 
pectedly, Lat. ex improuisé, iv. 1. 10. 
ἀπροφασίστως, adv. [R. oa], 
without offering excuses, without 
evasion, ii. 6. 10. 
ἅπτω (ἀφ-), aye, ἦψα, ἦμμαι, 
ἥφθην (cf. Lat. aptus, fit, Eng. apse}, 
lay hold of; mid., touch, under- 
take, engage in, with the gen., i. 5. 
10, v. 6. 28. 
ἀπώλετο, see ἀπόλλῦμι. 
ἄρα, post-positive particle of in- 
ference, therefore, accordingly, in- 
deed, then, it seems, certainly. ἄρα 
denotes a connexion of events, and 
adds something new to what has 
already been said, or is used by 
way of oblique reference ; i. 7. 18, 
ii. 2. 3, iv. 2. 15, v. 6. 29, 7. 5, vii. 
4-13, 6.11. It often follows εἰ or 
ἐάν, and in this connexion means 
perhaps, ii. 4. 6, iii. 2. 22, v. 1. 18. 
dpa, interrogative particle de- 
noting anxiety on the part of the 
questioner, surely? indeed?, but 
often its meaning can be best ex- 
pressed in Eng. by the intonation. 
When it is followed by οὐ, an af- 
firmative answer is expected, Lat. 
nonne, by μή, a negative, Lat. num, 
ΜΠ. 1. 18, vi. 5. 18, vii. 6. 5, 7. 54. 
᾿Αραβία, as, Arabia, a large pen- 
insula in the southwestern part of 
Asia, lying between the Red Sea 
and the Persian Gulf, bounded 
on the north by Syria, and sepa- 
rated from Mesopotamia by the 
Euphrates. It included Arabia 
Petraea, ἡ Werpaia, Arabia Déserta, 
ἡ ἔρημος, and Arabia Félix, ἡ εὐδαί- 
μων. The ancients used the word 
in a wider sense than we do, in- 
cluding the neighbouring tracts in- 
habited by nomadic tribes; soi. s. 
1, of a district still called Irak- ᾿ 
Arabi. The greater part of Arabia 
is a desert; on the western coast 
is a strip of fertile land. 
᾿Αράξης, ov, the Araxes, an afflu- 
ent of the Euphrates, above the 


Χαβώρας and * ABdppas, now Chabfir, 
i. 4.19. The name Araxes is ap- 
plied by other writers to the Phasis 
of Xenophon. 

ἄράτω, see αἴρω. 

᾿Αρβάκᾶς, ov, Arbacas, ruler of 
Media at the time of the retreat 
of the Ten Thousand, vii. 8. 25. 

᾿Αρβάκης, ov, Arbaces, one of 
the four generals of the king’s 
army, commanding 300,000 men, 
i. 7. 12. 

᾿Αργεῖος, a, ov [“Apyos, τό, Ar- 
gos], of Argos or Argolis, as subst. 
|masc., an Argive, iv. 2. 13, 17. 
Argos, the capital of Argolis or 
Argeia, was situated in a level 
plain a little to the west of the Ina- 
chus, and was, according to Greek 
tradition, the oldest city in Pelo- 
ponnésus. Said to have been built 
by Inachus, it was in mythological 
times the capital city of Danaus, 
Acrisius, and Orestes. In Homer 
Argos is subordinate to Mycénae. 
On its first appearance in history, 
about 750 B.c., it was the most 
important city in the peninsula. 
Owing to destructive wars with 
Sparta, its power declined, and. it 
took no part in the Persian wars, 
but, having partially recovered, 
sided with the Athenians in the 
Peloponnesian war. It was fa- 
mous for its worship of Hera. 
apydés, dv [R. Fepy], without la- 
bour, idle, lazy, iii. 2. 25. 
ἀργύρεος, a, ov, contr. ἀργυροῦς, 
ἃ, οῦν [ἄργυρος, ὁ, silver, ἀργός, 
shining, bright, root apy, bright, 
cf. Lat. argud, make clear, argen- 
tum, silver), of silver, silver, iv. 7. 
27, vii. 3. 27. 
ἀργύριον, τό [cf. ἀργύρεος, sil- 
ver, esp. coined, money, i. 4. 13, 
ii. 6. 16, v. 3. 9, vii. 7. 53. 
ἀργυρόπους, οδος, ὁ, ἡ [cf. ἀργύ- 
peos + R. wed], with silver foot, 811- 
ver footed, iv. 4. 21. 
᾿Αργώ, ois, ἡ, the Argo, the ship 
in which Jason and the Argonauts 


Tigris, called by other authors 


sailed from Iolcos to Colchis to 


fetch the golden fleece for King 
Pelias. She was built of pine from 
Mt. Pelion, and at her stern was a 
piece of the talking oak of Dodona. 
vi. 2. 1. 
ἄρδην, adv. [delpw], raised up, 
i.e. from the ground up, wholly, 
quite ; apinv πάντες, all together, 
vii. 1. 12. 
ἄρδω, impf. ἥρδον, water, of land, 
irrigate, Lat. inrigo, 11. 3- 13. 5 
ἀρέσκω (dpe-), ἀρέσω, ἤρεσα, ἠρέ- 
σθην [R. ap], please, suit, ii. 4. 2. 
ἀρετή, fis [R. ap], jitness, esp. in 
war, bravery, valour, magnanim- 
ity, Lat. uirtus, i. 4. 9, 11. I. 12, 
iv. 7. 12, vi. 4. 8; good service 
towards one, with περέ and the 
acc., i. 4. 8. ; 
ἀρήγω, ἀρήξω, ἤρηξα [R. apx], 
help, esp. in war, succour, save, 1. 
10. 5. 
᾿Αρηξίων, wvos, ὁ, Arexion, of 
Parrhasia in Arcadia, soothsayer 
to the Greek army after the deser- 
tion of Silanus, vi. 4. 13, 5. 2, 8. 
᾿Αριαῖος, ὁ, Ariaeus, the lieuten- 
ant-general of Cyrus, and com- 
mander of his barbarian force. 
He held the left wing at Cunaxa, 
and was the only one of the friends 
of Cyrus who escaped alive, 1. 8. 
5, 9. 31. After exchanging oaths 
of fidelity and alliance with the 
Greeks, he deserted _them, and 
joined Tissaphernes, ii. τ. AE ἢ, 
8, 4. 9, 5. 39, 6. 28, iii. 5. 1. 
ἀριθμός, ὁ [R. ap], number, Lat. 
numerus, numbering, enumeration, 
i. 7. 10, v. 3. 3, Vii. 7. 36; ἀριθμῳ, 
in number, Lat. numero, v. 6. 12. 
Phrases: ἀριθμὸν ποιεῖν, hold a 
count, census, i. 2. 9, Vii. 1. 7; ἀρι- 
θμὸς τῆς ὁδοῦ, extent of the march, 
ii. 2. 6, vii. 8. 26. 
᾿Αρίσταρχος, 6, Aristarchus, the 
successor of Cleander as Spartan 
harmost at Byzantium, vii. 2. 5. 
He was corrupted by Pharnabazus, 
and acted in hostility to the Greeks 
under Xenophon, vii. 2. 7, 12, 3. 


ἄρδην-᾿Αριστώνυμος 


ἀριστάω, ἀριστήσω, etc. [apurrov], 
take breakfast, breakfast, Lat. pran- 
deo, iii. 3. 6, iv. 3. 10, vi. 3. 24, 5. 
21, vii. 3. 9. 
᾿Αριστέᾶς, ov, Aristeas, a Chian, 
a brave commander of a company 
of light-armed troops, and espe- 
cially useful in volunteer service, 
iv. 1. 28, 6. 20. re 
ἀριστερός, a, dv, left, Lat. sinister, 
ii. 3. 11, iv. 2. 28; esp. in fem. 
without χείρ, as ἐν ἀριστερᾷ; ἐξ 
ἀριστερᾶς, on the left, ii. 4. 28, ἵν. 
δ 2. vi. 2. 24. 
᾿Αρίστιππος, ὁ, Aristippus, of 
the noble family of the Aleuadae 
in Larissa, Thessaly. He received 
money from Cyrus with which he 
raised an army against a hostile 
faction in Thessaly, and afterwards 
sent the army under Menon to 
join Cyrus, i. 1. 10, 2. 1, il. 6. 28. 
ἄριστον, τό [cf. ἦρι, early), an 
early meal, Lat. prandium, gener- 
ally translated breakfast, although 
corresponding more nearly in time 
and nature to the English lunch- 
eon, French déjeuner ἃ la four- 
chette, i. το. 19, ii. 3. 5, vi. 5. 1; 
ἐκ τοῦ ἀρίστου, after breakfast, iv. 
6. 21. 
ἀριστοποιέομαι, ᾿ἀριστοποιήσομαι, 
ἠριστοποιησάμην [ἄριστον + ποιέω], 
get one’s breakfast ready, iii. 3. 1, 
iv. 6. 8. : 
ἄριστος, 7, ov [R. ap], Jittest in 
any sense, serving as sup. of dya- 
66s; hence, bravest, noblest, most 
eminent in rank, i. 5. 7, 6. 1, 8. 27, 
9. 3, ii. 2. 20, iii. 1. 24, iv. 2. 28; of 
things, best, most advantageous, 1. 
. 12, v. 6.28. Neut. pl. ἄριστα as 
adv., in the best ite most success- 
ully, i. 9. 5, iii. 1. 6. 
ay ὁ θη wvos, ὃ, Ariston, an 
Athenian, chosen as one of the en- 
voys to the Sinopeans, Υ. 6. 14. 
᾿Αριστώνυμος, ὁ, Aristonymus, ἃ 
captain of heavy-armed troops, 
conspicuous for his bravery. He 
came from Methydrium in Arca- 


2 ff. 


dia. iv. 1. 27, 6. 20, 7. 9, 11, 12. 


᾿Αρκαδικός- ἅρμα 


90 


18. 
᾿Αρκάς, άδος, 6, an Arcadian, i. 
5, i. I. 10, vi. 1. 11, vii. 3. 23. 
Arcadia was the country in the 
centre of Peloponnésus, mountain- 
ous and surrounded by mountains 
and watered by many streams, esp. 
the Alphéus. The Arcadians were 
a strong, brave, and active race 
of a simplicity of life which has 
been exaggerated by poets into an 
ideal excellence. They were de- 
voted to hunting and pastoral pur- 
suits. ‘They worshipped especially 
Pan and Artemis. They were fine 
soldiers, and, with the Achaeans 
formed more than half of the 
Greek force of Cyrus, vi. 2. 10. 
ἀρκέω, ἀρκέσω, ἤρκεσα [R. ap] 
suffice, be sufficient or enough, with 
or without the dat. of the person 
also with inf., v. 1. 13, 7. 11, 8. 13, 
Vii. 5. 3 ; with πρός and the acc, of 
the thing, ii. 6. 20; partic. ἀρκῶν 
as adj., enough, v. 6. 1, vi. 4. 6. 
ἄρκτος, ἡ (cf. Lat. ursus, bear), 


Ἀρκαδικόν, the Arcadian force, iv.8.| war-chariot the δίφρος was large 
i © 


enough, as the name implies, to 
accommodate both the warrior and 
his driver (see 8.0. ἡνίοχος). It 
consisted of the floor, and of en- 
closing sides that protected the oc- 
cupants. At the top of this bar- 
rier in front was a curved rim (ἄν- 
τυξ), which could be grasped by 
the hand or serve as a place to 
which to attach the reins. There 
were generally curved rims also at 
each side of the chariot behind, to 


bear, she-bear, i. 9.6; the constel- 
lation Ursa Maior, the North: so 
in the phrase πρὸς ἄρκτον, towards 
the North, i. 7. 6, iii. 5. 15. 

appa, aros, τό [R. ap], chariot, 
Lat. currus, either the war-chariot 
(the only sort mentioned in the 
Anab., i. 2. 17, 8. 20, and only of 
the Persians), or for racing. The 
two sorts were essen- 
tially the same, but 
among the Greeks 
the war-chariot be- 
longs to the Heroic 
Age. The Persian 
war-chariots were 
sometimes fitted with 
scythes, ἅρματα δρε- 
πανηφόρα, i. 7. 10 ἢ, 
8.10. See 8.0. δρεπανηφόρος. The 


assist in mounting. The chariot 


Ξ ΕΝ 


ἅρμα was low and broad, to pre-| had a single axle and two wheels. 


vent its upsetting, and was open 
behind. It consisted of the δέῴρος 


The latter were of small diameter, 
and in the vase paintings have 


31 ἁρμάμαξα-᾿ Αρτάοζος 


cenerally four spokes. For an ad- 
ditional representation of the ἅρμα, 
see 8ῦ. τέθριππον. Phrases: ἐφ᾽ 
ἅρματος ΟΥ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἅρματος, in a 
chariot, i. 2. 16, 7.20; ἀπὸ τοῦ ap- 
ματος, With a verb of motion, out 
of the chariot, i. 8. 3. 

dppdpata, ys [R. ap+dpa+ R. 
ay], closed carriage, luxurious, 
and used in travelling, esp. by 
women and children, i. 2. 16, 18. 

"Appevia, ds, Armenia, a lofty 
table-land of Western Asia, part 
of the plateau of Irén. Of vol- 
canic nature, it had many moun- 
tains, including Ararat, and nu- 
merous rivers, with the sources of 
the Tigris and the Euphrates, iii. 
5. 17, iv. 3. 1, 4. 1, 4. 4,5. 34. No 
exact boundaries can be given, as 
the country has greatly varied in 
extent at different periods. The 
climate was severe in winter, but 
the valleys were fertile and pro- 
duced a famous breed of horses. 
The people were hospitable, al- 
though rude, and still live in the 
manner described by Xen., iv. 5. 
25 ff. The Armenians were per- 
haps the first nation to adopt 
Christianity. 

᾿Αρμένιος, a, ov [ Apyeria], of or 
belonging to Armenia, Armenian, 
iv. 3. 4, 5. 33. 

‘Appfhvn, vs, Harméne (Ak 
Liman), a port town of the Sino- 
peans, about 50 stadia west of 
Sindpe, vi. 1. 15, 17.~-4o See, Aw 

ἁρμοστής, of [R. ap], one who 
sets in order, organizer, adminis- 
trator, harmost, a Spartan officer 
in charge of a district of the Peri- 
oeci, but also and generally one 
sent out by Sparta to govern a 
subject state, vi. 2. 18, vii. 2. 5. 
Xen. applies the title to the Sino- 
pean governor of Cotyora, V. 5. 
19, 20. 

ἄρνειος, a, ov [ἀρνός, of a lamb, 
gen. without nom. in use], of lamb, 


ἁρπαγή, 7s [R. apr], @ seizing, 
plundering, pillage, v. 4. 16, vii. 1. 
18; καθ᾽ ἁρπαγήν, after plunder, 
iii. 5. 2. 
ἁρπάζω (ἁρπαδ-), ἁρπάσω, np- 
πασα, ἥρπακα, ἥρπασμαι, ἡρπάσθην 
[R. ἀρπ], snatch, snatch up, seize, 
capture, iv. 6. 11, v. 2. 15, vi. 1. 8, 
5. 18; sweep away, of a river, iv. 3. 
6; plunder, pillage, rob, i. 2. 25, iv. 
5. 12, vii. 5. 13; of ἁρπάζοντες, the 
pillagers, i. 10. 3; perf. pass. par- 
tic., carried off, stolen, i. 2. 27. 
“Apragos, 6, the Harpasus, a 
river separating the Chalybes from 
the Scythini, probably emptying 
into the Pontus and identical with 
the Acampsis (Charuk), iv. 7. 18. 

᾿Αρταγέρσης, ov, Artagerses, in 
command of the king’s body-guard 
of cavalry at Cunaxa, and said to 
have been slain by Cyrus there, i. 
7. 11, 8. 24. 

᾿Αρτακάμᾶς, ἃ (Dor. gen.), Arta- 
camas, satrap of Phrygia, vii. 8. 28. 

᾿Αρταξέρξης, ov [Pers. Arta- 
Khshatra, Lord of the Times], in 
the Anab. Artaxerxes IT. (called 
Mnemon from his good memory), 
eldest'son of Darius II. and Pary- 
satis, and king of Persia from 405 
to 361 or 359 B.c., i. 1. 1, 3, 4. 
Against him Cyrus, his younger 
brother, made the expedition re- 
corded inthe Anab. His reign was 
a succession of wars, carried on 
with rebellious satraps and tribu- 
tary princes. Of a weak and mild 
character, he left too much to the 
government of his slaves. Towards 
the end of his reign his eldest son, 
Darius, formed an unsuccessful 
conspiracy to assassinate him. He 
was succeeded by his son Ochus 
(under the style of Artaxerxes 
III.), who gained the throne by 
causing the death of his two 
brothers. 

᾿Αρτάοζος, ὁ, Artaozus, a trusted 
friend of Cyrus, but after the bat- 
tle of Cunaxa one of the king’s 


with xpéa, lamb’s meat, lamb, iv. 
5. ὃ], 


party, ii. 4. 16, 5- 35, 


᾿Αρταπάτης- ἀσέβεια 32 


᾿Αρταπάτης, ov, Artapates, the 
confidential attendant of Cyrus, 


ἀρχή, As [ἄρχω], beginning, ori- 
| gin; 80 adv. ἀρχήν, from the Jirst, 


slain upon his master’s bc at | ii of 
é pon his master’s body αἱ at first, often followed by a neg. in 


Cunaxa, i. 6. 11, 8. 28. 

Gptae, aprijcw, etc. [ἀείρω], hang 
on to, fasten one thing to another 
lii. ἣ 10. Ι 

Ἴ ρτεμις, ἐδος, 7, Artemis, daugh- 
ter of Zeus and Leto, and twin- 
sister of Apollo. Like her brother 
she spread pestilence and sudden 
death with her arrows, but pro- 
tected those who loved her. She 


was the especial patroness of hunt- | 


ing, and as such was worshipped 
at Agrae in Attica, where also there 
was a yearly sacrifice in her hon- 
our to commemorate the victory 
over the Persians, iii. 2. 12. The 
Artemis of the renowned temple at 
Ephesus was an Asiatic divinity 
the Anaitis-Aphrodite of the Per- 
sians, having originally nothing in 
common with the Greek goddess. 
v. 3. 4, 6 fff. 

Κ 
_ ἄρτι, adv. [R.ap], just, just now, 
iv. 6. 1, vii. 4. 7. 

᾿Αρτίμᾶς, a (Dor. gen.), Artimas, 
satrap of Lydia, vii. 8. 25. 

ἀρτοκόπος, ὁ [ἄρτος + root Kor, 
cook, ef. Lat. coqud, cook], baker, 
Iv. 4. 21. 

" (, 

ἄρτος, ὁ, loaf of bread, gener- 
ally of wheat, but sometimes of 
barley, i. 9. 26, ii. 4. 28, iv. 5. 31, 
V. 3. 9; ἄρτοι fvpira:, leavened or 
raised bread, vii. 3.21; τριχοίνικος 
ἄρτος, three-quart loaf, vii. 3. 23. 

Aprotxas, ἃ (Dor. gen.), Arti- 
chas, a general in the king’s army 
iv. 3. 4. 

᾿Αρύστας, ἃ or ov, Arystas, an 
Arcadian, described as a great 
eater, vii. 3. 23 f. | 

᾿Αρχαγόρᾶς, ἃ or ov, Archago- 
ras, captain in the Greek army 
exiled from Argos, iv. 2. 13, 17. 

ἀρχαῖος, d, ov [ἄρχω], from of 
old, old, ancient, iii. 1. 4, iv. 5. 14, 
Vil. 1. 28, 3. 28; Κῦρος ὁ ἀρχαῖος, 
Cyrus the Elder, i.9.1; τὸ ἀρχαῖον 
ady., formerly, i. 1. 6. | 


| 


the sense of not at all, vii. 7. 28; 
A Jirst place, sovereignty, rule, 
| power, command, ii. 1. 11, 3. 23, 
ll. 4. 8, vi. 1. 19, 2. 12; govern- 
ment, province, empire, realm, i. 1. 
2, 5. Y, ll. 3. 29, vii. 2. 32, 5. 1. 

ἀρχικός, 7, dv [ἄρχω], jit to com- 
mand, ii. 6. 8, 2U. 

,ἄρχω, ἄρξω, ἦρξα, ἦργμαι, ἤρχθην 
[ἄρχω], begin, be first, with the 
inf. or with the gen., i. 3.1, 4. 15 
lil. 1, 24, v. 7. 34, vii. 7.17; be the 
Joremost, hence rule, command, 
lead, reign over, abs., or with the 
gen. of persons, countries, or cities, 
1. I. Gy ἢ ἢ 2, ἢ 10-7, Eo. 
5, 6, 21, v. 7. 10, vi. 6.9; as subst., 
ἄρχων, leader, chief, general, gov- 
ernor, 1. 1. 2, 8. 22, ii. 1. 3, iii. 1. 
38, iv. 5. 28, v. 6. 8; a higher title 
than στρατηγός, Vi. 1. 18, 2. 6; 
ὁ ἄρξᾶς, the former ruler, i. 4. 10, 
V. 7. 34; τὸ ἄρχειν, the government, 


|. 1.4; mid., begin, abs., with the 


Bl . : ‘ 
| gen., or with the inf., i. 8. 18, ii. 


I 14, iii. 2. 7, 9, v. 7. 13, vii. 2. 
[34; οἵ the extent of a country, 
| begin with, with ἀπό and the gen., 
Vi. 4- 1; of a place, begin from, 
| Start Jrom, with ἐκ and the gen., 
Vi. 2. 18; pass., be begun, be ruled, 
with or without ὑπό and the gen., 
“tg ', 3. 15, 9. 4, ii. 6. 15, v. 7. 
12; οἱ ἀρχόμενοι, subjects, soldiers, 
= 6. 19, ll. 2. 30. Phrases: πρὸς 

λλον ἀρχομένους ἀπιέναι (others 
io ἄλλους ἄρχοντας, or ἀρξομένους, 

ut. pass.), go into another's ser- 
vice, transfer one’s allegiance, ii. 
6. 12 ; ἄρχεσθαι ἀπὸ τῶν θεῶν, begin 
with the gods, consult the gods first, 
Vi. 3. 18, 

ἄρχων, see ἄρχω. 
ἄρωμα, ατος, τό [cf. Eng. aroma}, 
spice, Sragrant herbs, i. 5. 1. 

ἀσάφεια, ἃς [σαφής], obscurity, 
uncertainty, ili. 1. 21. 

ἀσέβεια, ἃς [ἀσεβής], irrever- 
ence, impiety, iii. 2. 4. 


38 ἀσεβής-ἀσπίς 


ἀσεβής, ἐς [σέβομαι, worship, of.|in transporting wine, wine-skin. 
Lat. seuerus, severe], irreverent, | The raw side of the skin was kept 
impious, sacrilegious, Lat. impius, inward, the 
v. 7. 82; with πρός and gen., li. 5. 1 seams were 
20. tightly sewed 

ἀσθενέω, ἀσθενήσω [ἀσθενής], be| and pitched, 
weak, feeble, ill, i. 1. 1, v. 8. 25, | and the neck 


vi. 2. 18; of ἀσθενοῦντες, the sick, 
the men on the sick-list, iv. 5. 19, 
¥.\ 3/0 
ἀσθενής, és [σθένος, τό, strength], 
without strength, weak, i. 5. 9. 
"Agia, as, Asia, the continent 
separated from Europe, acc. to 
some of the ancient geographers, 
py the Tanais and the Cimmerian 
Bosphorus, ace. to others by the 
Phasis, or even the Araxes and 
the Caspian sea, and from Libya 
at the Isthmus of Suez. It was 
sometimes divided into Lower and 
Upper Asia, τὰ κάτω ᾿Ασίᾶς or ἡ 
κάτω ᾿Ασίᾷ, and τὰ ἄνω ᾿Ασίᾶς, or 
ἡ ἄνω ᾿Ασία, being the parts to the 
west and east of the Halys respec- 
tively. In the Anab. no such 
division is mentioned. v. 3. 6, vi. 
4. 1, vii. 1. 2, 6. 32. 
᾿Ασιδάτης, ov, Asidates, a noble 
and wealthy Persian, captured by 
Xen., vii. 8. 9 ff. 
*Acivatos, a, ov [ Aclvn, Asine], 
of or belonging to Asine; subst., 
an Asinaean, V. 3. 4, 6. 36. Asine 
was a seaboard town of Laconia, 
between Gythium and Taenarum. 
Hence Neon the Asinaean is called 
Laconian, vii. 2. 29. 
ἀσινῶς, adv. [otvoua], harm- 
lessly, without doing harm, ii. 3. 
27; ὡς ἂν δυνώμεθα ἀσινέστατα, do- 
ing as little damage as possible, iii. 
3 os 
ἄσῖϊτος, ov [σῖτος], without food, 
in want of food, ii. 2. 16, Iv. 5. 
11. 
ἀσκέω, ἀσκήσω [ cf. Eng. ascetic], 
practise, cultivate, Lat. exerced, of 
a virtue, ii. 6. 25, vii. 7. 24. 
ἀσκός, ὁ, skin forming a bag, 
leathern bag, but esp. goat-skin bag, 


closed by 
binding with 
acord. doxol 
were 
for  carry- 
ing other 
commodities 
than wine, 
vi. 4. 28, and 
when inflated with air might be 
used as a float for a temporary 
pontoon bridge, iii. 5. 9 ff. 
ἄσμενος, 7, ον [R. ad], well 
pleased ; always with a verb, where 
in Eng. an adv. is used, with joy, 
with pleasure, gladly, ii. 1. 16, v. 6. 
22, vii. 2. 9, 6. 6. 
ἀσπάζομαι (ἀσπαδ-), ἀσπάσομαι 
[R. oma], draw to oneself, em- 
brace, either at meeting or parting, 
greet or take leave, Vi. 3. 24, vii. 1. 
8, 40, 2. 28 ; ἀσπάζεσθαι τὸν θεόν, 
bring one’s parting greeting to the 
god (i.e. by an offering), vii. 8. 23. 
᾿Ασπένδιος, 6 [Ασπενδος, Aspen- 
dus], native of Aspendus, an As- 
pendian, i. 2, 12. Aspendus was 
an Argive colony in Pamphylia, 
about sixty stadia from the mouth 
of the Eurymedon. It early fell 
into the hands of the barbarians. 
Thrasybilus was surprised and 
slain here, B.c. 389. 
ἀσπίς, 50s, ἡ, shield, in shape 
either oval or round. The large 
oval shield was an important part 
of the defensive armour of the hop- 
lite, i. 2. 16, 5. 13, iii. 4. 47, vii. 4. 
16, and covered him from the neck 
to the knees. It was convex on 
the outer side, so that it could on 
occasion be used in sacrifices to 
catch the blood of the victims, ii. 
2.9. About the outer edge ran a 


used particularly for storing and 


continuous rim of metal, fastened 


᾿Ασσυρίᾳ-ἀσφαλής 84 


with nails (frvs, qg.v.). See s.v. 
érhirns. The oval shield was often 


No. 10. 


emblazoned with a device, either 
that of an individual or the com- 
mon symbol of an entire state, as 
A on the shields of the Lacaedae- 
monians. A peculiar form of the 
oval shield, called Boeotian, had 
apertures at the sides. See s.v. 
κνημίς, where the illustration also 
shows the manner in which the 
shield was held. See further s.v. 
ὅπλον, where Hephaestus is fitting 
the metal ‘handle’ to the inside 
of the shield. The round or Ar- 
golic shield was similar to the oval 
shield in most respects except its 


shape, but was held differently. 
A bar ran across the centre, under 
which the left arm was slipped, 


succession of leathern loops that 
ran about the outer circle. Since 
the round shield was too small to 
cover in action the lower part of 
the body, a flap, generally of 
leather, was often attached to it. 
This might be ornamented. See 
8.0. ξίφος and σάλπιγξ. In histori- 
cal times shields were made chiefly 
of bronze. Shields made of other 
materials, however, are mentioned; 
those carried by the Egyptians 
in the army of Cyrus were of 
wood, i. 8. 9, ii. 1. 6. When not 
in use the shield was protected by 
a leathern case, hence the expres- 
sion ἀσπίδες ἐκκεκαλυμμέναι, i.’ 2. 
16. Phrases: rap ἀσπίδα, to the 
left, since the shield was carried 
on the left arm, iv. 3. 26; ἀσπὶς 
Mupla καὶ rerpaxocia, 10,400 shield 
(i.e. men), i. 7. 10. 
᾿Ασσυρία, as, Assyria, properly 
the long narrow territory on the 
Tigris, chiefly to the east, and ex- 
tending as far as Media; in a later 
|and wider sense, the great Assy- 
rian empire, which extended to the 
Mediterranean and to Pontus, and 
which was destroyed towards the 
end of the seventh century B.c. by 
the Medes and Babylonians. To 
the Greeks with Cyrus Assyria 
meant the former district, as a 
province of the king, vii. 8. 25. In 
it were Arbéla and Gaugaméla. 
᾿Ασσύριος, a, ov [’Accupla], As- 
syrian, vii. 8. 15. 
ἀσταφίς, (dos, ἡ, collective subst., 
dried grapes, raisins, iv. 4. 9. 
ἀστράπτω (ἀστραπ-), ἤστραψα, 
Jlash, glitter, i. 8. 8. 
| ἀσφάλεια, as [R. edad], secur- 
ity, personal safety, Lat. incolumt- 
tas, v. 7. 10, vii. 6. 30. 
ἀσφαλέστατα, see ἀσφαλῶς. 
ἀσφαλέστερος, see ἀσφαλής. 
ἀσφαλής, ἐς [R. epad], not lia- 
ble to be tripped up, hence sure, 
safe, secure, Lat. incolumis or ti- 
tus, iv. 3. 12, v. 2. 20, vi. 4. 27, vii. 


the hand grasping any one of a 


3. 3; comp. ἀσφαλέστερος, safer, 


35 ἄσφαλτος-αὖθις 


surer, iii, 2. 19, 36; vi. 2. 13. 
Phrases: ἐν ἀσφαλεῖ, ἐν τῷ ἀσφαλεῖ, 
in security, in α safe place, Iv. 7. 
8, v. 6. 33; ἐν ἀσφαλεστέρῳ, in 
greater security, iii. 2. 36 ; ἐν ἀσφα- 
λεστάτῳ, in the safest place, i. 8. 22. 

ἄσφαλτος, ἡ (cf. Eng. asphalt], 
asphalt, a mineral pitch, soft and 
combustible, used as a cement or 
as mortar, ii. 4. 12. 

ἀσφαλῶς, adv. [R. oad], 
firmly, safely, without danger, 1. 
3. 19, iii. 4. 6, Vi. 3.7; Sup. ἀσφα- 
hécrara, i. 3. 11, ili. 2. 27. 

ἀσχολία, as [R. vex], lack of 
leisure, business, Lat. negotium ; 
pl., engagements, Vii. 5. 16. 

ἀτακτέω [R. trax], be disorderly, 
be undisciplined, v. 8. 21. 

ἄτακτος, ov [R. trax], in disor- 
der, not in battle array, undisci- 
plined, i. 8. 2, iii. 4. 19, v. 4. 21. 

ἀταξία, as [R. trax], disorder, 
insubordination, lack of discipline, 
opp. to εὐταξία, iii. 1. 38, 2. 29, v. 
§. 13. 

ἀτάρ, adversative conj., but, but 
yet, Lat. at, always standing first 
in its sentence, and introducing an 
objection or a self-correction in the 
form of a question, iv. 6. 14, vii. 
7. 10. 

᾿Αταρνεύς, éws, ὁ, Atarneus (near 
Dikeli Koi), acorn-producing coun- 
try with a city of the same name 
in the southwestern part of Mysia 
(or acc. to others in Aeolis), oppo- 
site to Lesbos, vii. 8. 8. 

ἀτασθαλία, as [ἀτάσθαλος, pre- 
sumptuous], mostly poetic, blind 
folly, presumption, wantonness, lv. 


ἄταφος, ov [θάπτω], unburied, 
vi. 5. 6. 
are, adv. of manner [acc. pl. neut. 
of ὅς + τέ], as, just as ; often empha- 
sising a causal partic., inasmuch as, 
because, iv. 2. 13, 8. 27, vi. 3. 3, 5. 28. 
ἀτέλεια, as [R. rad], freedom 
from a public tax, hence exemption 
from any service, Lat. immunitas, 


Gripdtw (driuad-), driudow, etc. 
[R. τι], dishonour, affront, dis- 
grace, i. 1. 4, 9. 4. 
ἄτιμος, ον [R. τι], without hon- 
our, in dishonour, disregarded, Vii. 
7. 24, 46; comp. drivorepos, Vil. 7. 
50. 
ἀτμίζω (ἀτμιδ-), ἀτμίσω [R. 2 
aF], steam, iv. 5. 15. 
᾿Ατραμύτειον or Adpapirriov, τό, 
Adramyttium (Edremit), a city in 
the western part of Mysia, on a 
bay of the same name, founded by 
the Lydians and afterwards colon- 
ized by the Athenians, vii. 8. 8. 
ἀτριβής, és [τριβή], wntrodden, 
unused, of roads, iv. 2. 8, Vil. 3. 
42. 
᾿Αττικός, ἡ, dv, of or belonging 
to Attica, Attic, i. 5.6. Attica was 
a country in the southeastern part 
of Northern Greece, forming a tri- 
angular peninsula, of which two 
sides were washed by the sea and 
the third was separated from Boe- 
otia and Megaris by mountains. 
Its area, Salamis included, was 
748 sq. miles, and its population in 
the fifth century B.c., excluding its 
capital, Athens, was about 350,000 
(see ᾿Αθῆναι). A poor country for 
agricultural and pastoral pursuits, 
it was rich in marble quarries and 
silver mines. 
αὖ, adv., post-positive, of rela- 
tions of time, often adversative 
and preceded by δέ, again, back 
again, in turn, on the other hand, 
moreover, i. 1. 7, 9, 10. 5, ii. 6. 5, 
18, iii. 1. 32. ‘ 
αὐαίνω (avav-), αὐανῶ, nuyva, 
αὐάνθην [αὔω, dry], dry; mid., dry 
up, wither, impf. without aug., 11. 
. 16. 
i αὐθαίρετος, ov [αὐτός + aipéw], 
self-appointed, v. 7. 29. δ μη] 
αὐθημερόν, adv. [αὐτός + ἡμόρα], 
on the same day, iv. 4. 22, 5. 1. 
αὖθις, adv. [ad], again, once 
more, a second time, i. το. 10, Iv. 7. 
2, v.8.9; in turn, afterwards, next, 


iii. 3. 18. 


iv. 2. 12, vii. 2. 25, 5. 3. 


αὐλέω-αὐτός 36 


αὐλέω, αὐλήσω [R.2 aF], play the 
Jlute, play on any wind instrument, 
κέρᾶσι καὶ σάλπιγξιν, vii. 3. 32; 
mid., have the flute played for one, 
" accompanied on the flute, vi. 1. 

αὐλίζομαι (αὐλιδ-), ηὐλισάμην 
and ηὐλίσθην [R.2 aF], lie in the 
open air, pass the night, bivouac, 
encamp, li. 2. 17, iv. 1. 11, 3. 1, vi. 
4. 1,, el. 4. 11. 

αὐλός, ὁ [R. 2 aF], a wind- 
instrument, usually rendered flute, 


although more like our clarinet. 
The αὐλός had a mouth-piece, and 
consisted of two connected tubes. 
The manner of playing it is illus- 
trated in the accompanying school- 
room scene. See also s.v. κλένη. 
Phrases: πρὸς τὸν αὐλόν, to the 
sound of the flute, vi. 1.8, 10; πρὸς 
αὐλὸν ὀρχεῖσθαι, dance to the flute, 
wh. 2. :6, 

αὐλών, dvos, ὁ, hollow between 
hills or banks ; canal, drain, Lat. 
candalis, ii. 3. 10. 

αὔριον, adv., to-morrow, Lat. 
cras, ii. 2. 1, iv. 6. 8, vi. 5. 21; 
ἡ αὔριον (sc. ἡμέραν, the morrow, 
vi. 4. 15; αὔριον πρῴ, Lat. cras 
mane, early to-morrow morning, 
vil. 6.6. νυ! 

αὐστηρότης, ros, ἡ [αὐστηρός, 
dry, rough, αὔω, dry, ef. avalyw |, 
harshness, bitterness, acidity, Lat. 
austeritas, of wine, v. 4. 29. 

αὐτίκα, adv., at this very moment, 


1. 9, 5. 34; strengthened by a fol- 
lowing μάλα, instantly, in a twink- 
ling, ili. 5. 11, vii. 6. 17. 

αὐτόθεν, adv. [αὐτός], from this 
or that very spot, hence, thence, iv. 
2. G, 9. 17, v..2. 10. 

αὐτόθι, adv. [αὐτός], in this or 
that very place, Lat. ibi, ibidem, i. 
4. 6, ἐών 1d, vii. 1. 13. 

αὐτοκέλευστος, ov [αὐτός + R. 
KeA], self-directed, of one’s own 
accord, Lat. sua sponte, iii. 4. 5. 

αὐτοκράτωρ, opos, ὁ, ἡ [αὐτός + 
R. 1 xpa], being one’s own master, 
as adj. with ἄρχων, absolute, Lat. 
cum potestate imperidque uersari, 
vi. 1, 21. 

αὐτόματος, 7, ov [αὐτός - R. μα], 
self-impelled, of one’s own accord, 
spontaneously, of persons or of 
things, iv. 3. 8, v. 7. 3; ἀπὸ or ἐκ 
τοῦ αὐτομάτον, unbidden, by chance, 
voluntarily, i. 3. 13, 2. 17, vi. 4. 18. 

αὐτομολέω, αὐτομολήσω, ηὐτομό- 
λησα [αὐτόμολος], desert, abs., with 
πρός and acc., or with παρά and 
gen., ii. 1. 6, 2. 7; of αὐτομολήσαν- 
res, the deserters, ἷ. ἡ. 13, 10. 6. 

αὐτόμολος, ὁ [αὐτός + root pod, 
move, cf. βλώσκω], deserter, Lat. 
transfuga, with παρά and gen., i. 

ῶ 
αὐτόνομος, ον [αὐτός -ἰ R. νεμ], 
under one’s own laws, independent, 
Lat. sui iiiris esse, vii. 8. 25. 
αὐτός, ἡ, ὁ (neut. with the art. 
often ταὐτόν, iii. 1. 30, vi. 3. 17) 
[αὐτός], intensive pron., self, when 
preceded by the art., same. Not 
preceded by the art.:—in the 
oblique cases it may serve as the 
common pron. of the third pers., 
him, her, it, etc., Lat. is, i. 1. 2, 8, 
ii. 1. 5, 3. 8, iii. 1. 4, 4. 7, v. 3. 6, 4. 
26; in all its cases it may be used 
as an intensive adj. pron., Lat. 
ipse, self, myself, himself, etc., or 
very, exactly, either with or without 
a personal or a dem. pron. in agree- 
ment, i. 6. 7, 9. 21, 10. 17, iii. 1. 
4, 44, 6.94. iv. 4. 6,| 7. 7,10, v. 6. 


immediately, on the spot, i. 8. 2, ii. 


24, vii. 3. 3, 7. 13; with a subst. 


oo % Ν what Ἂν Ἴ 
i ν᾿ 


᾿ tach, vi. 5.11; mid., take away for 


37 αὐτόσε-ἀφίημι 


always in the pred. position, the 
art. never being omitted unless the 
subst. is a prop. name or denotes 
an individual, i. 7. 11, 8. 14, il. 1. 
5+ as a refl., either alone or joined 
with an oblique case of a pers. 
pron., i. 1. 5, ii. 3. 22, 5. 28, iii. 
1. 37, 2. 14; with possessives, as 
τοῖς ἡμετέροις αὐτῶν φίλοις, our OWN 
friends; often more than sim- 
ply emphatic, admitting of such 
translations as by oneself, in one’s 
own person, of one’s own accord, 
alone, ii. 3. 7, iii. 2. 11, iv. 7. 11, vl. | 
6.9; sometimes when followed by! 
the art. and a subst. it may be 
rendered by just, right, as ὑπὲρ 
αὐτοῦ τοῦ στρατεύματος, just over 
the army, iii. 4. 41, Cf. iv. 3. 11, 
vi. 4. 4; the gen. αὐτοῦ or αὐτῶν. 
serves aS a possessive pron., Lat. | 
éius, eorum, i. 1. 7, 9. 23, lil. 4. | 
44. Preceded by the art., the 
same, Lat. idem, i. τ. 7, IV. 5- 31, 
v. 8. 22; neut. often denoting 
place, as ἐκ τοῦ a’rod, from the 
same place, ii. 4. 11; so also with 
els or ἐν, with or without a follow- 
ing dat. of resemblance, 1. 8. 14, 
ii. 6. 22, iii. 1. 27, 30, vi. 3. 17, 24. 

αὐτόσε, adv. [αὐτός], to the place 
itself, thither, iv. 7. 2. 

αὐτοῦ, adv. [αὐτός], in the very 
place, here, there, Lat. alicd, 1. ἃ. 
11, 5. 13, ii. 1. 21, Iv. 3. 28; often 
the place is still further noted, αὐ- 
τοῦ παρὰ ᾿Αριαίῳ, there with Ari- 
aeus, ii, 2. 1; αὐτοῦ που, hereabouts, 
iii. 2. 24. 

αὑτοῦ, see ἑαυτοῦ. 

αὔτως, adv. [αὐτός], in the very 
manner; only in the phrase ws 6 
αὕτως, just so, even so, V. 6. 9; see 
ὡσαύτως. 

αὐχήν, évos, ὁ, the neck, Lat. cer- 
uix; hence, of a neck of land, 
isthmus, vi. 4. 3 bis. 

ἀφ᾽, by elision and euphony for 
ἀπό 


ἀφαιρέω [atpéw], take away, de- 


acc. of the thing, or the acc. or 
gen. of the person, with two accs., 
or with the object omitted, i. 3. 4, 
9. 19, iii. 1. 30, iv. 1. 14, 4. 12, vi. 
6. 7, and in the pass. either with 
the thing omitted or in the acc., 
vi. 6. 5, vii. 2. 22; take away to 
oneself, rescue, with acc. or with 
ace. and gen., vi. 6. 10, 21, 23; in 
the pass., vi. 6.19.2. 

ἀφανής, ἐς [R. ha], invisible, 
out of sight, unobserved, and so 
hidden, doubtful, i. 4. 7, ii. 6. 28, 
iv. 2. 4. ᾿ 

ἀφανίζω (ἀφανιδ-), ἀφανιῶ, ἠφά- 
νισα, ἠφάνικα [R. pa], make hid- 
den, hide, blot out, annihilate, 11. 
2. 11, 4. 8. 

ἀφαρπάζω [R. dpm], snatch away, 
plunder, pillage, 1. 2. 27. 

ἀφειδῶς, adv. [ἀφειδής, wnspar- 
ing, cf. ὑποφείδομαι, without spar- 
ing, mercilessly, Vii. 4. 6; sup. 
ἀφειδέστατα, i. 9. 13. 

ἀφειστήκεσαν, see ἀφίστημι. 

ἀφέξεσθαι, see ἀπέχω. 

ἀφεστήξει, see ἀφίστημι. — 

ἀφηγέομαι, [R. ay], explain, tell, 
vii. 2. 26. 

ἀφήσετε, See ἀφέἔημι. 

ἀφθονία, ἃς [ἄφθονος], freedom 
from envy, liberality 1) hence 
plenty, abundance, of men or 
things, i. 9. 15, vi. 6. 3; els ἀφθο- 
viav, in plenty, Vii. 1. 33. 

ἄφθονος, ov [ cf. φθονέω], ungrudg- 
ing, plenteous, abundant, of sup- 
plies, iii. 1. 19, vii. 6. 26, 28; of a 
country, fertile, v. 6. 25; of water, 
copious, vi. 4. 4. Phrases: ἐν 
ἀφθόνοις βιοτεύειν, live in clover, ili. 
2. 25; ἐν πᾶσιν ἀφθόνοις, in all 
sorts of comforts, iv. 5.29; ἐν ἀφθο- 
νωτέροις, in greater supply, V. 1. 
10. 

ἀφίημι [ἴημι], send away, let go, 
let depart, iv. 5. 24, 30; let escape, 
set free, give up, ii. 3. 25, iv. 1. 12, 
14, vi. 6. 30; of water, let flow, of 
animals, let loose, ii. 2. 20, 3- 13, 
γ. 8. 24; send back, cast off, reject, 


oneself, deprive, rob, either with 


dismiss, sometimes with acc. and 


ἀφικνέομαι- ἀχρεῖος 38 


inf., v. 4.7, vii. 3.44; of an anchor, 
er ed 5- 10. Phrase: πρὸς 
“λίαν ἀἁ . ν᾽ 
ΤῊΝ piévar, let depart in peace, 
: ἀφικνέομαι (ἱκνέομαι, ix-, ἵξομαι, 
ἱκόμην, ἴγμαι [R. Fue], come), ar- 
rive, abs., ii. 3. 19, v. 4. 4; arrive 
at, come to, reach, with παρά or 
πρός and acc. of pers., or with els, 
ἐπί, πρός, or κατά and acc. of place, 
Lk, i M, 2. 4, 12, 25, 4. 19, δ. 4, ii. 
- 8, iii. 1. 43, 4. 30, iv. 1. 5, 7. 
8, 8. 1, vii. 2. 28, 7. 49; with ἐκ 
or ἔξω and gen., vi. 1. 16, 6.3; re- 
turn, with πρός and acc. of pers., 
els or ἐπί and acc. of place, or an 
adv., i. 10. Rey eee 3c DD, WE. 2. 3%, 
6. 38, vii. 8. 23. Phrase: εἰς τὸ 
γῆρας ἀφικνεῖσθαι, live to be old, iii. 
ἀφιππεύω (ἱππεύω, ἱππεύσω [R. 
— ride), ride back or off, i. 5. 
ἀφίστημι [R. στα], set off from, 
separate, trans., lead to revolt, with 
ἀπό and gen., vi. 6. 34; intr. in 
pass. and in 2 aor., pf., and fut. pf. 
act., stand away from, revolt, go 
over to, withdraw, Lat. déficio, i, 
4. 3, li. 4. 5, ili. 2.17; with εἰς and 
ace. of place, and els or πρός and 
a of agape 1 3.6, 6. 7, fi. καὶ 7; 
with gen. of person fror 
ia Ρ n whom, 
ἄφοδος, ἡ [ὁδός], a going « 
ing away, 
vec place for retreat, Lat. iy 
ceptus, iv. 2. 11, v. 2. 7, vi 3 
vii. 8, 16. ΠΝ τη] 
ἀφροσύνη, ns [φρήν], thought- 
es folly, v. τ. +i ' 
ἄφρων, ov, gen. ovos v 
without sense, foolish, ght keel 
out of one’s head, iv. 8. 20, vii. 1. 


᾿Αχαιός, οὔ, 6, an Achaean, i. τ. 
11, ii. 6. 30, vi. 2. 7. Achaia was 
the country lying along the north- 
ern coast of Peloponnésus, and 
contained a confederacy of twelve 
cities. ‘The Achaeans enjoyed in- 
ternal prosperity, but had but little 
influence outside and held aloof 
from Hellenic affairs until after 
the death of Alexander, when they 
formed the Achaean League. In 
the Heroic Age they were the 
ruling nation in Peloponnésus 
and accordingly Homer calls the 
Greeks collectively Achaeans. They 
cg μεν the Arcadians over 
one-half of the Ten The i 
a th en Thousand, vi. 
ἀχάριστος, ov [R. xap], ungra- 
cious, vane 4 i Hn te 
λέγειν, ironical, speak prettily 
enough, il, 1. 13 (some read ἀχά- 
pita); of persons, act., ungrateful, 
pass., unrewarded, i. 9. 18, vii. 6. 23. 
ἀχαρίστως, adv. [R. xap], ungra- 
ciously, without gratitude, thank- 
lessly, ii. 3. 18, vii. 7. 23. 
ἀχάριτα, 866 ἀχάριστος. 
Ἀχερουσιάς, dios, ἡ [᾿Αχέρων 
Acheron], Acherusian; with Xep- 
ρόὄνησος, the promontory or penin- 
sula of Acheron (Baba-Burun) 
near Heracléa in Bithynia, where 
nasa according to the myth, 
lescended to fe TUS 
ae fetch up Cerberus, 
ἄχθομαι, ἀχθέσομαι, ἠχθέσθην 
[ef. ἄχος, τό, pain, distress, Lat. 
anger, anguish, Eng. awk, UGLY] 
be weighed down, distressed, trou- 
bled, displeased, vexed, angry at, 
abs., vii. 5. 5, 6; with ὅτι and a 
clause, sometimes accompanied by 


28. 

ἀφυλακτέω [φυλάττω], be wi 

, be with- 

out ὦ watch, off one’s guard, vii. 
8. 20. | 

ἀφύλακτος, ov [φυλάττ - 
ot toe Me ii. 6. of ry rl 

ἀφυλάκτως, adv. [φυλάττω], un- 


τοῦτο, iii. 2. 20, v. 4. 18, vi. 6. 9; 
with the gen. abs., i. 1. 8; with the 
dat. of the person, vi. 1. 29, vii. 5. 
: fF with the dat. of the cause 
sometimes governed by ἐπί 
20, vii. 6. 10. olin tain 
ἀχρεῖος, ον [χράομαι], useless, 
unfit for service, of persons or 


guardedly, rashly, v. 1. 6. 


things, iv. 6. 26, v. 2. 21. 


unserviceable, iii. 4. 26. 


with els, up to, V. 5.43 as temporal 
conj., With ἄν and the subjv., until, 


39 


ἄχρηστος; oY [xpdouar], useless, 


ἄχρι, adv., utterly, Lat. usque, 


li, 3. 2. 


) 
ἀψίνθιον, τό, wormwood, i. 5. 1. 


ἄχρηστος- βακτηρία 


the Nabopolassar dynasty) have 
been in part excavated, and nu- 
merous inscriptions have been 
found, from which and from As- 
syrian inscriptions its history has 
been to some extent recovered. 


Βαβυλωνία, as [Βαβυλώνιος]. Ba- 


bylonia, the district in which Baby- 
lon was situated, i. 7.1. It was a 
plain, watered by the Tigris and 


B. Euphrates and bounded on the 


Βαβυλών, vos, ἡ (Babel, the 


gate of God], Babylon, i. 4. 11, | south. 
was intended as a barrier against 


foes from the north. The natural 
fertility of the plain was increased 
by means of canals from the 


-, 5, ii. 2. 6, 4. 12, iii. 5. 15, cne of 
the oldest and most famous cities 
of antiquity. Its origin is un- 
known. It was the capital of the 


north by Mesopotamia, and ex- 
tending to the Persian gulf on the 


The famous Median wall 


province of the same name as early | rivers. 


as the Elamite conquest, B.c. 2300. 
After the 13th century, when As- 
syria became the controlling power 
in the Tigris-Euphrates region, the 
city was conquered at various 
times by Assyrian kings and fin- 
ally by Sennacherib (first part of 
the 7th century), who dealt its 


prosperity a heavy blow. With| p 


the fall of Nineveh and the rise 
of the new Babylonian empire 
(z.c. 606), it entered on a career 
of unprecedented splendour. It 
was rebuilt and beautified by Nabo- 
polassar, his son Nebuchadnezzar, 
and their successors down to the 
last native king, Nabonidas. It 
survived the conquests of Cyrus 
the Great (539 8.0.) and of Alex- 
ander (331 B.c.) ; its last king was 
the Seleucid Antiochus the Great 
(224-187 5.0.). In Pliny’s time 
it was a ruin, and has so contin- 
ued until to-day. Herodotus (who 
probably and rightly included Ba- 
sippa in his measurement) de- 
scribes it as a square, each side of 
which was 120 stadia long. Its 
hanging-garden, built by Nebu- 
chadnezzar for his Median queen, 
was reckoned one of the wonders 
of the world. The ruins of Baby- 


Βαβυλώνιος, a, ον [Βαβυλών], of 
Babylon, with χώρᾶ, ii. 2. 18. 
βάδην, adv. [R. Ba}, at a walk, 
with slow pace, of men or horses, 
iv. 8. 28, V. 4. 23, Vi. 5. 25. Phrase: 
βάδην ταχύ, of suidiers, at a quick- 
step, of an advance in which the 
ranks were still preserved, as Op- 
osed to δρόμῳ, iv. 6. 25. 

βαδίζω (βαδιδ-), βαδιοῦμαι, ἐβά- 
Sica, βεβάδικα [R. Ba], go on foot, 
walk, march, Lat. incedo, of sol- 
diers, v. 1. 2, vi. 3. 19. 

βάθος, ous, τό [βαθύς, cf. Eng. 
bathos], depth or height, acc. to 
the point of view of the speaker, 
Lat. altitudd, i. 7. 14, 11. 5. 7, iv. 


βήσομαι, Bé- 
walk ; pert., 


iii. 2. 19. 

βακτηρία, as [R. Ba], staff, walk- 
ing-stick, Lat. baculum. Staves 
and walking-sticks were very gen- 
erally carried by the Greeks, not 
only by the old for support (see 
the representation of Pelias, 8.0. 
ἀμφορεύς), but also by young men, 
and even in the army, ii. 3. 11, iv. 


lon (which represent the city of 


7. 26. 


βάλανος-βελτίων 40 


i βάλανος, ἡ [cf Lat. glans, acorn, 
oad legaahoy hence any acorn- 
shaped fruit, as a date, i ), ii 
: + ult, as a date, i. 5. 10, ii. 
' βάλλω (βαλ.-, βλα-), βαλῶ, ἔβα- 
ον, βέβληκα, βέβλημαι, ἐβλήθην 
[βάλλω], throw, throw at, hit, abs. 
or with the acc. of the person, the 
word for the missile being omitted 


ll. 1. 4; neut. as subst. and gener- 
ally pl., palace, ef. Lat. regia (fem ) 
i. 2.7, 9, 4. 10, iii. 4. 24, iv. 4.2.” 

βασιλεύς, éws, ὁ [ ef. Eng. basilica 
basilisk}, king, Lat. réx, esp. the 
King of Persia, when the art. is 
regularly omitted as the word is 
used as ἃ proper name, i. 1. 5, ii. 
nr. 4, ih. 1, 2, v. δ, 17; so μέγας: 


or in the dat., i +i] On 3 
12, v. 4 Pa Si vii « on. 2. | βασιλεύς Or βασιλεὺς μέγας, i. 2. 8 
exposed to be a 1. 4.10; pass., | 4.11; of other kings with the art.., 
exposed to, missiles, under fire, iv.|i. 2. 12, v. 4.26, vii. 1.28; of Zeus, 

: Phrase: οἱ ἐκ χειρὸς | iii. 1. 12, vi. 1. 22. τραρβοννα ταν 


βάλλοντες = ἀκοντισταί, iii. 3. 15. 


βασιλεύς, the king of the up-country, 


βάπτω (βαῴφ-), βάψω, ἔβαψα, βέ- applied even to the king of Persia 


βαμμαι, ἐβάφην [ε΄. Eng ! 
dip, dip in, ii. 1 9. >° baptize | 


βαρβαρικός, ἡ, dv [βάρβαρος], not 


ea a . ὃ 
Greek, foreign, barbaric, i. 3. 14 


»| Vil. 1. 28, 7. 3; παρὰ ῖ 
court, i. 2. δ" ΤΠ" 
βασιλεύω, βασιλεύσω [βασιλεύς], 


| be king, be sovereign, i. 1. 4, ii. 2. 


8. 14, iv. 5. 33, v. 7.13; τὸ βαρβαρι- 11; with gen., v. 6. 37. 


κόν (86. στράτευμα), the Persian 


force of Cyrus, i. 2. 1, 8. 5. 


; βασιλικός, h, dv [βασιλεύς], fit to 
be king, i. 9. 1; belonging to a 


αρικῶς, : i : ii 
βαρβαρικῶς, adv. [BapBapixés], in | king, royal, ii. 2. 12, iii. 5. 16. 


0 " Ma bal " 
a foreiyn tongue, eg. in Persian, 


1. ἈΝ. 1, 


βάσιμος, ον [R. Ba], passable, f 
animals ; ἕως ἜΣ ἐπ Τὰ" a 


rl 
BapBapos, ov [ef Eng. barbar Υ 
eae ke . pa ous), |immw), as long 7 ais 
not Greek, foreign, barbarian, un-| iii, τ ae ening 


civilized, a word applied by the 


Bards, 4, dv [R. Ba], passable, for 


Greeks tc er Ii i 
} s to all other races, their animals, with dat., iv. 6. 17 


possessions, and defects; as adj, 


l. 7. 3, li. 5. 32, v. 5. 16, vii. 1. 29, 


3. μη sup. BapBapwraros, most un- 
civilized, Vv. 4. 34; as subst., for- 


eigner, barbarian, in the An 
4 Anab. 
applied esp. to Persians, i. 1. 5, 9. 
13, ii. I. 7, 6. 28, iii. 1. 35, iv. 2. 3 
Vv. 4. 16, vii. 1. 28. if 
: βαρέως, adv. [βαρύς, heavy, ef. 
sat. grauis, heavy, Eng. bary-tone}, 
heavily, grievously ; in the phrases 
Bapéws φέρειν, take to heart, Lat. 
grauiter Jerre, ii. τὶ 4, and βαρέως 
ἀκούειν, hear with anger, ii. 1. 9. 
eo ov, Basias, an Arcadian, 
ye ΡΥ the Cardiichi, iv. 1. 18, 
agias, ov, Basias, of Elis 
soothsayer, vii. 8. 10.” ita 
Pit acyphorese as [βασιλεύς], king- 
dom, royalty, royal dignity, i. 1. : 
iii. 2. 15, vii. 7. 36. ΤΠ" 
: βασίλειος, ον [βασιλεύς], belong- 
ing to a king, royal, i. 2. 20, το. 12, 


βέβαιος, a, ον [R. Ba], abiding 
Jast, trusty, constant, i. 9. 30. : 
| βεβαιόω, βεβαιώσω [R. Ba], make 
ge tate fulfil, with acc. of 
160 thing and dat. of 
bsg Τὰ the person, 
βηκότες, see Balvw. 
ἔλεσις, see Βέλεσυς. 
an vos, Or Βέλεσις, wos, ὁ, 
Belesys, satrap of Syria and As- 
syria, 1. 4. 10, vii. 8. 25. 
" βέλος, ous, τό [βάλλω], thing 
“ese ayp of any sort, missile, iii. 3. 
6, iv. 3. 6, v. 2. 14; ἔξω τῶν βελῶν, 
out of range, iii. 4. 15, γ. 2. 26. 
βέλτιστος, n, ov [R. BoA], used 
as sup. of ἀγαθός, best in any re- 
spect, noblest, bravest, of meas- 
ures, most advantageous, i. 1. 6, 
li. §. 41, v. 1. 8, 6. 2, vii. 6. 12. 
3 Artwv, ον [R. Bod], used as 
| comp. of ἀγαθός, better in any re- 
| Spect, braver, nobler, of measures, 


41 


more advantageous, ii. 2. eA 
23, 32, 3. 5, Vi. 1. 31, Vii. 6. 38. 

βῆμα, aros, τό [ἢ. Ba], step, stride, 
iv. 7. 10. 

Bia, as, physical strength, force, 
violence, Lat.-wis, vi. 6. 25, vii. 7. 
24; freq. as adv., Big, by force, by 
storm, i. 4. 4, iii. 4. 42, Vil. 3. 3; 
βίᾳ τῆς μητρός, Lat. inuita mdatre, 
against his mother’s will, vii. 8. 17. 

βιάζομαι (βιαδ-), βιάσομαι, etc. 
[pia], employ force, compel, with 
acc. and inf., i. 3. 1, v- 7. 8, 8. 14; |i 
overpower, With acc., i. 4. 5; abs., 
force oneself upon, obtrude oneself, 
vii. 8. 11. 


a ™ a ill is 


βημα-Βισάνθη 


As the ‘ book’ was read it was un- 
rolled at one side, which was, in 


ts turn, rolled up as the reader 


proceeded. A tag with a title was 
attached to the roll, and several 
rolls might be kept together in a 


βίαιος, a, ov [Bia], forcible, vio- single case. Books in the modern 
lent, V. 5. 20; neut. as subst., vio- | form belong to a later age. For an 


lence, act of violence, Vi. 6. 15. 
βιαίως, adv. [Blass], with vio- 
lence, hard, i. 8. 27. 


additional illustration of the βίβλος 


(Lat. liber), see 8.0. ἱμάτιον (No. 27), 


where is a case containing seven 


βίβλος, ἡ [cf. Eng. Bible, biblio- rolls, representing the seven extant 
graphy], properly the cellular sub- | plays of the poet Sophocles. 


stance of the stem (not the inner 
layers of bark, as it is often erro- 
neously stated) of the Egyptian 
βύβλος, OY papyrus (an endogenous 
plant), from which the papyrus- 
paper was made on which Greek 
and Latin ‘books’ were written. 
Hence βίβλοι γεγραμμέναι, MaNnU- 
scripts, books, vii. 5.14. The pith 
of the papyrus was cut into thin 
strips, which were placed one by 
the side of the other on a wetted 
board. A second layer was placed 
on these crosswise, and the whole 
was submitted to pressure, and 
afterwards smoothed. The gluti- 
nous nature of the pith was gener- 
ally sufficient to make the two 
layers adhere. The pages thus 
manufactured were pasted together 
at the longer edges, so as to form 
a continuous strip. The writing 
was in columns, one column to 
each page, with a space between 
the pages. Only one side of the 
strip was written on, and the strip 
was formed into a roll with the 


Bidives, 7, 6», Bithynian, Vi. 5. 
30; as subst., of Biduvol, the Bithy- 
nians, Vi. 2. 17, 4. 24, 6. 37. Bi- 
thynia was a province in the north- 
western part of Asia Minor, on the 
Pontus. It was separated by the 
Bosphorus from Thrace from which 
the Bithynians had migrated, hence 
they are called Thracian, and the 
province Thrace in Asia, vi. 4. 1, 
2. The principal cities were Hera- 
οἶδα and Chalcédon. Pliny the 
Younger was governor of Bithynia 
under Trajan. 

Bios, ὁ, a large jar or vessel of 
earthenware, used for storing oil, 
figs, salt meat, and esp. wine, i, 9.25. 

βίος, ὁ [ cf. Lat. uiuus, alive, Eng. 
quick, bio-logy, bio-graphy], life, 
Lat. wita, i. 1. 1, 9.30; living, sub- 
sistence, support, Vi. 4.8; with ἀπό 
and gen. of the trade or pursuit, 
v. 5. 1, vii. 7. 9. 

te βιοτεύσω [Blos], live, iii. 
2. 25. 

Βισάνθη, ns, Bisanthe (Rodosto), 
a Thracian city on the Propontis, 
with a fortress and harbour, be- 


written side inward. These rolls 
were sometimes of great length. 


longing to Seuthes, vii. 2. 38, 5- 8. 


βουλή-Βυζάντιον 


Βίτων- βουλεύω : β 43 


ii ᾽; i ῦ ds, 6, ἢ [R. BoF], ox, 
acc. and dat., ii. 5. 6; usually in| Bots, Bods, ὁ, ΕἼ, 
aid advise with oneself, plan, | steer, bullock, Lat. V4 ; Pls 
ponder, consider, deliberate, a ge rs ὩΣ " νη pe " ὴ 5- 

ite, abs., ii. 3. 8, iii. 2. 36, Vi. 2.85 | 25, VI. 1. 4, Vil. 7. ; ae 
in subject Teaser consideration | hide, iv. 5. 14, 7. 22, v. 4. 12 


Βίτων, see Βίων. Βοΐσκος, ὁ, Boiscus, a Thessa- 
Βίων or Βίτων, wyos, ὁ, Bion, ἃ lian pugilist, a shirk and a plun- 
messenger from Thibron, bringing | derer, v. 8. 23. 
money to the Greeks, vii. 8. 6. Βοιωτίᾳ, ἃς [Βοιώτιος], Boeotia, 
βλάβη, ns, hurt, damage, injury, | iii. 1. 31, a country in northern 


ii. 6. 6, 
βλάβος, ous, τό [βλάβη], hurt, 
damage, injury, vii. 7. 28. 
βλᾶκεύω [βλάξ, slack], be slack 
or idle, shirk, ii. 3. 11, v. 8. 15. 
βλάπτω (βλαβ.), βλάψω, ἔβλαγα, 
βέβλαφα, βέβλαμμαι, ἐβλάφθην or 
ἐβλάβην [βλάβη], hurt, damage, 
harm, ii. 5.17, iii. 3. 11, 14, iv. αὶ 3. 
βλέπω, βλέψω, ἔβλεψα, look, turn 
one’s eyes, look to one for aid, 
Lat. spectd, With πρὸς and the acc., 
lii. 1. 36, iv. 1. 20; of things, face, 
point, with εἰς and acc., i. 8, 10. 
βλώσκω (μολ-, μλο-, βλο-), μολοῦ- 
μαι, ἔμολον, μέμβλωκα [root pod, cf. 
αὐτόμολος and Lat. remulcum, tow- 
rope], go, arrive, vii. 1. 99 ; per- 
haps only here in Att. prose, and 
here in the mouth of a Theban. 
Bodw, βοήσομαι, ἐβόησα [R. Bor], 
shout, call out, cry aloud, abs., with 
dat. and a clause with ὅτι, or with 
dat. and inf., i. 8. 1, 12, iy. 3. 22, 
7. 24, v. 6. 34. 
βοεικός or Boikds, ἡ, dv [Β΄ Bor], 
belonging to an ox; ζεύγη βοεικά, 
ox-teams, Vii. 5. 2, 4. 
βοϊκός, see βοεικός. 
βοή, ἢς [R. Bor], shout, call, cry, 
iv, 7. 23 bis. 
βοήθεια, as [R. Bor + θέω], suc- 
cour, help, esp. in the form of troops, 
Lat. aucilia, rescuing party, ii. 3. 
19, iii. 5. 4. 
βοηθέω, βοηθήσω, ἐβοήθησα, βε- 
βοήθηκα, βεβοήθημαι [R. BoF + θέω], 
run to rescue at a cry for help, come 
to the rescue, help, abs., i. 9. 6, iv. 
8. 13, v. 1. 8, vii. 7- 19, with dat., 
li. 4. 20, 25, iii. 4. 13, vii. 4. 7. OF 
With ἐπί and acc. of the enemy and 
ὑπέρ with gen. of the side helped, 
iii. 5. 6. 
βόθρος, ὁ [cf. Lat. Jodid, dig), 


Greece, bounded on the north by 
the territory of the Opuntian Lo- 
| crians, east by the Euboean sea, 
| South by Attica, Megaris, and the 
Corinthian gulf, and west by Pho- 
cis. Its position, between seas and 
mountains, and its numerous lakes 
and marshes, rendered the cli- 
mate damp and subject to frequent 
changes, and its cloudy skies made 
the air thick and heavy. To this 
and to the fact that the Boeotians 
were great eaters may be ascribed 
the natural dullness attributed to 
them, especially by the lively Athe- 
nians, which passed into a prov- 
erb. Yet Boeotia furnished not 
only good soldiers, athletes, and 
flute-players, but also several great 
generals, poets, and _ historians. 
Under Eyaminondas it became for 
a short time the mistress of Hellas. 
Boeotia was settled» by Aeolians 
from Thessaly after the Trojan 
war. 

βοιωτιάζω [Βοιώτιος], act the 
Boeotian; βοιωτιάζειν τῇ φωνῇ, 
speak with a Boeotian accent, that 
is, broadly, coarsely, as if from a 
full mouth, iii. 1. 26. 

Βοιώτιος, a, ov [ Βοιωτός], Boeo- 
tian ; only as subst., ii. 5. 31, 6. 16, 
v. 6. 19. 

Βοιωτός, ὁ, a Boeotian, v. 3. 6. 
Bopéas, ov, or contr., Boppas, ἃ, 
Boreas, the North wind, Lat. 
aquilo, with or without ἄνεμος, iv. 
5. 3, Vv. 7. 7. Strictly speaking, 
this was to the Greek a north-east 
wind, blowing over the Thracian 
mountains, and bringing purer and 
cooler air. 

βόσκημα, aros, τό [βόσκω, Seed), 
fed or fatled beast; pl., cattle in 
pasture, iii. 5. 2. 

βουλεύω, βουλεύσω, etc. [R. Bod], 


pit, hole, hollow, iv. 5. 6, of a grave, 
v. 8. 9. 


plan, think up, rare in act., with 


may be expressed by the acc., i. 1.| Phrase: βοῦς ὑφ᾽ ἁμάξης, draught- 


ty 


relative clause, i. 3. 11, 6. 6, ili. 2. 


7, 10. 10, vi. 1. 33, 2. 4, or by a] ox, vi. 4. 22, 25. 


βραδέως, adv. [βραδύς], slowly, 


38, or by a clause introduced by | leisurely, i. 8. 11. 


ὅπως With the fut. ind. or the opt. 


βραδύς, εἴα, ¥, slow; only in the 


with ἄν, i. 1. 4, iv. 6. 7, v. 7. 20, or | phrase τὸ βραδύτατον (sc. τοῦ orpa- 


by an indirect question, single or 


τεύματος), the slowest division of 


double, i. 10. 5, iv. 6. 8, vi. 2. 4, vii. | the army, Vii. 3. 37. 


5. 9, or by περί with gen. of the 
person or the thing, or πρός with 


βραχύς, εἴα, ¥ [cf. Lat. breuis, 


short], short, of space and time ; 


ace. of the thing, i. 3. 19, ii. 3. 20,| only in phrases: πέτεσθαι βραχύ, 


21, v. 1. 2, vi. 6. 28; the person on h 
whose behalf the plan is made is| τ 
expressed by ὑπέρ or πρό with gen., | 7 


ave @ short flight, i. 5. 3; βραχύ- 
epa τοξεύειν, shoot less far, ill. 3. 
; ἐπὶ βραχὺ ἐξικνεῖσθαι, have a 


ii 27 - il, 2 Ed. 
v. 7. 12, vii. 6. 27; resolve on, set- | short range, ill. 3 


tle on, Lat. cdnsilium capio, with 
ace. of the thing, or with the inf., 
iii. 1. 34, 2. 8, 3. 2. 
βουλή, 7s [R. Bod], consultation, 
reflexion, deliberation, Vi. 5. 13. 


βρέχω, ἔβρεξα, βέβρεγμαι, ἐβρέχθην 


cf. Lat. γἱρο, wet), wet, pass., get 
ΝΑ i. 4. 17, iii. 2. 22, iv. 3. 12, 5. 2. 


βροντή, ἢς [root Bpep, roar, cf. 


Lat. fremd, roar, Eng. Brim], thun- 


BovAtpidw, ἐβουλιμίᾶσα, [R. BoF | der, clap of thunder, iii. 1. 11. 


+ λιμός], have bulimy, iv. 5. 7, 8. 


βρωτός, 7, dv (cf. βιβρώσκω, eat, 


Bulimy, or ‘ox-famine’ (i.e. great Lat. uoro, reign pocggablso't 
hunger), was a disease brought on | cious], that is to be eaten, ’ 


by exposure to intense cold and|i 
hunger. It developed suddenly, 


v. 5. 5, 8. 
thenine, τό [Βυζάντιος], By- 


[ i i Ὶ Constantinople), a city in 
the symptoms being a burning and zantium ( 
priate fi the pit of the stomach, | Thrace on the Bosporus, founded 


until faintness and collapse en-| by the Megarians (led, acc. to the 


sued. ΤῊ ie ickl ov-| story, by Byzas) in 667 B.c. 
oe ypilipsodl wy Ain τόκα ah le situation rapidly gave 


ered on receiving nourishment. 


Its 


j it i d it became the 
OX ουλήσομαι, βεβούλη-  ἴῦ importance, an 
Pag vs oe: R. Bod J, will, wish, | key to the Pontus. Abandoned by 


desire, be inclined, Lat. wold, used 
abs. or with acc., ii. 1. 5, 3. 4, iii. 4. 


its inhabitants in the Persian wars, 
it afterwards fell into the hands of 


᾿ κι ii i ii, 1. 27, and after 

1, iv. 1. 3, v. 4. 6, 8, vi. 1. 20, vii. | the Athenians, vil. 1. 27, i 

: 3, wake Peach iting inf. or ace. Aegos Potami passed 4 bg ig 

and inf. i. 1. 1, 11, ii. 1. 10, 5. 12, | tams, in whose contro hap lt 
iii. 1 25 45, iv. 2. 11, v. 6. 17, vi. | the time of the retreat of the 


2. 13, 5. 18, vii. 1.4; prefer, choose, 
ii. 6.6; ὁ βουλόμενος, he that wishes, 
whoever likes, i. 3. 9, V. 3. 10, 7. 27, 
vi. 4. 15. 

βουπόρος, ov [R. BoF + R. περ], 
ox-piercing ; only in phrase Bov- 
πόρος ὀβελίσκος, a spit big enough 
for a whole ox, ox-spit, vii. 8. 14. 


Thousand, vi. 2. 13, 4. 2, vii. 1. 2, 
2.5. Later it became an ally of 
Athens and enjoyed independence 
until it fell into the power of the 
Romans. The Emperor Constan- 
tine founded the modern city in 
330 a.p. (Turkish Istamboul or 


Stamboul). 


Βυϊζάντιος- γελάω 44 


Βυϊάντιος, a, ov, belonging to 
Byzantium, Byzantine; only as 
subst. in pl., the Byzantines, Vii. 1. 
19, 39. 

βωμός, ὁ [R. Ba], any raised 
place, but. esp. altar, Lat. dra, 
i. 6. 7, V. 3. 9; in the stadium (see 
8.0. στάδιον) it was usual to have 
the start made from near an altar, 
iv.8.28. For an illustration of one 
form of the altar used in bloody 
sacrifice, vii. 1. 40, see 8.0. σφάττω. 


r. 


γαλήνη, 7s, stillness, calm, of 
wind or sea, Υ. 7. 8. 

γαμέω (γαμ-), γαμῶ, ἔγημα, γε- 
γάμηκα, γεγάμημαι [γάμος], marry, 
wed, act. of the man, Lat. ἀποῦ; 
mid. and pass. of the woman, Lat. 
nUubO, ἐνάτην ἡμέρᾶν γεγαμημένη, an 
eight days’ bride, iv. 5. 24. 

γάμος, ὁ [ε΄]. Eng. bi-gamy, crypto- 
gam], wedding, marriage; ἄγειν 
ἐπὶ γάμῳ, take home as one’s wife, 
ii. 4. 8. 

Γάνος or Γᾶνος, ἡ, Ganus (Ga- 
nos), a Thracian city on the Pro- 
pontis, southwest of Bisanthe, vii. 
5. 8. 

γάρ, post-positive causal conj. [γέ 
ἄρα], for, commonly giving the 
cause, reason, explanation, or con- 
firmation of some fact, which may 
either follow or precede the clause 
with γάρ, or be supplied from the 
context, i. 2. 2, 3. 17, 6. 8, ii. 3. 138, 
5. 40, v.6.4; γάρ cannot always be 
translated for, but because, indeed, 
certainly, then, now, for example, 
namely, may be used when it ex- 
presses specification, confirmation, 
or explanation, i. 7. 4, 9. 25, ii. 5. 
il, i a 2, v. 1. 8, νὰ» ὃ: 
in questions ydp refers to a cir- 
cumstance not expressed, though 
giving rise to the question, and 
may be translated then, or left un- 


In elliptical phrases: καὶ γάρ, Lat. 
etenim, and to be sure, and really, 
where there is an ellipsis between 
καί and γάρ, and (this was so) be- 
cause, i. 1. 6, 8, iii. 3. 4, v. 6. 11, 8. 
11; καὶ γὰρ οὖν, and therefore, and 
consequently, in full, and (this is) 
then (80), for, i. 9. 8, 12, 17, ii. 6. 
13, vii. 6. 37; ἀλλὰ γάρ, Lat. at 
enim, but, but to be sure, in full, 
but (enough of this), for, iii. 1. 24, 
2. 25, 32. 

γαστήρ, τρός, ἡ [cf. Lat. wenter, 
belly, Eng. gastric}, belly, of men 
or animals, li. 5. 33, iv. 5. 36. 

γαυλικός Or γαυλιτικός, 4, dv [γαυ- 
Ads, 6, merchant-vessel], belonging 
to a merchant-vessel ; γαυλικὰ χρή- 
ματα, merchantmen’s cargoes, V. 
hi 
Γανλίτης, ov, Gaulites, a Samian 
exile, in the confidence of Cyrus, 
i. 7. 5. 

γαυλιτικός, see γαυλικός. 

γέ, intensive particle, enclitic 
and post-positive, serving to em- 
phasise a preceding word, or the 
clause which the word introduces ; 
often it can be translated only by 
emphasis, at other times yet, at 
least, nevertheless, indeed, cer- 
tainly, even, can be used, i. 3. 9, 
6, 5, 9. 18, ἢ. 2, 12, ili. 1. 27, 2. 24, 
iv. 8, 6, vii. 2. 58, 7.47, 51; in addi- 
tion to its emphasising force it often 
has a limiting or restricting sense, 
like Lat. quidem, i. 3. 21, 10. 3; it 
is also used to introduce and con- 
trast something new with the fore- 
going, i. 9. 14, 24, ii. 5. 19, iii. 3. 5; 
with other particles, ye 54, indeed, 
iv. 6.3; ye μήν, γε μέντοι, at least, 
at any rate, certainly, i. 9. 14, 16, 
20, ii. 3. 9, iii. 1. 27, vii. 7. 32. 
γεγενῆσθαι, γέγονα, see γίγνομαι. 
γείτων, ovos, ὁ [yh], neighbour, 
Lat. uicinus, with gen. or dat., ii. 
3. 18, iii. 2. 4, vii. 3. 17. 
γελάω, γελάσομαι, ἐγέλασα, ἐγε- 
λάσθην, laugh, Lat. rided, abs. or 
with ἐπί and dat., ii. 1. 13, v. 4. 34, 


translated, i. 7. 9, v. 7. 10, vii. 2. 28. 


vii. 4. 11, 7. 54. 


45 yedotos—ylyvopar 


γελοῖος, a, ov [γελάω], laughable, 
farcical, ridiculous, with inf. or 
with ef and a clause, v. 6. 25, vi. 1. 
30. 

γέλως, wros, ὁ [yeAdw], laughter, 
roar of laughter, ige. 18, iv. 8. 28, 
vii. 3.25. ιν" 

γελωτοποιός, ὁ [γέλως + ποιέω], 
one who makes laughter, jester, a 
professional who was employed 
chiefly at dinner-parties, vii. 3. 33. 

γέμω, only in pres. and impf., be 
full of, stuffed with, with gen., lv. 
6. 27. 

γενεά, as [R. γεν], time .of birth, 
birth ; ἀπὸ γενεᾶς, from one’s birth- 
day, of age, ii. 6. 30. 

γενειάω [yévus], grow a beard, be 
bearded, ii. 6. 28. 

γενναιότης, ητος, ἡ [ R. γεν], emi- 
nence of race or character (cf. Lat. 
generdsus), hence, nobility, mag- 
nanimity, generosity, vii. 7. 41. 

γένος, ous, τό [R. γεν], family, 
race, Lat. genus, 1. 6. 1. ᾿ 

γεραιός, ά, dv [γέρων], old, with 
the additional idea of reverence or 
dignity ; comp. ol γεραίτεροι, digni- 
taries, elders, Υ. 7. 17. 

γερόντιον, τό [γέρων], poor or 
weak old man, Vi. 3. 22. 

γέρρον, τό, shield of wicker-work 
covered with ox-hide, iv. 7. 22, ν. 
4. 12, wicker-shield, carried by the 
Persians and by other Eastern 
tribes, ii. 1. 6, iv. 3. 4, 6. 26, 7. 26, 
8. 3, v. 2,22. Cf. i. 8.9, where the 
γέρρα are contrasted with the long 
wooden shields of the Egyptian 
heavy-armed troops in the king’s 
army. The γέρρα of the Mossy- 
noeci are said to have resembled 
an ivy-leaf in shape, v. 4. 12. 

γερροφόρος, ὁ [γέρρον + R. dep], 
one who carries a wicker-shield ; 
pl., light-armed troops with wicker- 
shields, i. 8. 9. 

γέρων, ovros, ὁ [root yep, old, cf. 
Eng. cray], old man, Lat. senex, 
iv. 3. 11, vii. 4. 24. 

γεύω, γεύσω, eyevoa, γέγευμαι 
[ς΄ Lat. gustd, taste, Eng. cHoose], 


give a taste of; mid., taste, Lat. 
gust6, abs. or with gen., i. 9. 26, 
iii. 1. 3, vil. 3. 22. 
γέφυρα, as, bridge, i. 7. 15, ii. 3. 
10, 4.17, iii. 4.19; γέφυρα ἐζευγμένη 
πλοίοις, bridge of boats, pontoon 
bridge, i. 2. 5, ii. 4. 24; also raised 
way, dam, embankment, Vi. 5. 22. 
γεώδης, es [γῆ + R. Fd], of earth, 
earthy, deep-soiled, vi. 4. 5. 
γῆ, γῆς [γῆ], earth, ground, 
country, Lat. terra, i. 3. 4, 5. 1, 8. 
10, iii, 2.19, 5. 10, v. 5. 16. vi. 4. 
6, vii. 7.11; land, as opp. to sea, 
v. 4. 1, 6. 5, vi. 4.3, 6. 18. Phrases: 
καὶ κατὰ γῆν καὶ κατὰ θάλατταν, by 
land and sea, Let. terra marique, i. 
1. 7, iii. 2. 13, vii. 6. 37; χαρὰ γῆν, 
along the coast, vi. 2. 1. 

γήινος, 7, ov [γῆ], of earth; 
πλίνθοι γήιναι, sun-burnt earthen 
bricks, vii. 8. 14. See ὀπτός. 

γήλοφος, ὁ [γῆ - λόφος], mound 
of earth, hill, hillock, i. 5. 8, το. 
12, iii. 4. 24, iv. 4. 1. 

γῆρας, γήρως, τό [γέρων], old age, 
iii. 1. 48. 

γίγνομαι (yer-), γενήσομαι, ἐγε- 
νόμην, γέγονα ΟΥ̓ γεγένημαι [R. γεν], 
become, be, used of men and things. 
Of men, be born, be descended from, 
with gen. or with ἀπό and gen., i. 
1. 1, ii. 1. 3, iti, 2. 18, vii. 6. 34 
Phrases: οἱ τριάκοντα ἔτη γεγονότες, 
men thirty years old ; τῶν μετὰ Κῦ- 
pov γενομένων, men born after Cy- 
rus, i.9.1. Of things, be, become, 
happen, take place, occur, but the 
translation of the verb varies 
greatly according to its subject. 
Used with words signifying the 
time of day (ἡμέρᾶ, σκότος, ἕως, δεί- 
An), dawn, break, come, draw on,1. 8. 
8, ii. 2. 13, 4. 24, iv. 2.4; with words 
signifying time of year or weather 
(χειμών, χιών, ὁμίχλη). arrive, fall, 
iv. 1. 15, 2. 7, 4. 8; with πόλεμος, 
τάραχος, θόρυβος, and μάχη, arise, 
take place, break out, i. 8. 2, ll. 1. 
6, iii. 4. 35; with words meaning 
pledge, oath, or treaty (ὅρκοι, σπον- 


dal), be taken or given, concluded, 


γιγνώσκω-Γοργίων 46 


ii. 2. 10, 3. 6, 5.3; used of money 
or taxes, be paid, accrue, come in, 
i, 1. 8, v. 3. 4, vil. 6 41, ἡ 27; of 
sacrifices or victims, be favourable, 
sometimes with the inf., ii. 2. 3, vi. 
4. 9, 6. 36; of numbers, amount 
to, i. 2. 9, 7. 10, v. 2. 4; of shout- 
ing and other noises (κραυγή, βοή, 
βροντή), arise, resound, iii. 1. 11, 
iv. 7. 23, 8.28. When followed by 
the simple inf., be possible, i. 9. 13; 
when by an adj. or adv., be, prove 
oneself to be, i. 6. 8, 10. 7, ii. 2. 18, 
lii. 4. 36, iv. 1. 26, 2. 15, 3. 24, vii. 
8. 11. Often with dat., as δρόμος 
ἐγένετο τοῖς στρατιώταις, the sol- 
diers started to run, i. 2. 17. 
Phrases: ἐν ἑαυτῷ γίγνεσθαι, come 
to himself, recover himself, i. 5. 17; 
for many others, see the various 
prepositions; τὸ γενόμενον or τὸ 
γεγενημένον, the occurrence, the 
fact, i. 9. 30, vi. 3. 23; τὰ yeyern- 
μένα, the circumstances, ii. 5. 33, v. 
4. 19. 

γιγνώσκω (yvo-), γνώσομαι, ἔγνων, 
ἔγνωκα, ἔγνωσμαι, ἐγνώσθην [Ἢ.. γνω], 
know, perceive, feel, experience, un- 
derstand, recognise, learn, think, be 
convinced, with the simple acc., i. 
3. 13, ii. 3. 19, 5. 35, iii, 1. 45, iv. 
8. 4, v. 1. 14, vii. 5. 11; with ὅτι 
and a clause, i. 3. 2, ii. 2. 15, iii. 
3. 4, v. 6. 13, vi. 1. 31; with the 
acc. and a partic., i. 7. 4, ii. 5. 13, 
iii. 4. 36, vii. 7. 24; with the ace. 
and inf., i. 3. 12, 9. 18; with περί 
and gen., ii. 5. 8; abs., iii. 1. 27; 
the source is expressed by ἐκ and 
gen., vii. 7. 43. 

Trois, ὁ, Glus, a noble Egyp- 
tian, son of Tamos, on the staff of 
Cyrus. After the death of Cyrus, 
he joined the king’s party, i. 4. 16, 
5- 7, ii. 1. 3, 4. 24. He was hon- 
oured by Artaxerxes and placed 
in command of a fleet, but on en- 
gaging in another revolt he was 
put to death. 

Γνήσιππος, ὁ, Gnesippus, a cap- 
tain from Athens, vii. 3. 28. 


γνώμη, ns [R. γνω], opinion, in- 
tention, purpose, plan, judgment, 
advice, Lat. sententia, i. 6. 9, 10, 
8. 10, ii. 2. 10, 12, iii. 1. 41, vi. 1. 
31, 3. 17, vii. 6. 20. Joined with 
certain verbs, it forms a phrase 
which is treated like a single verb 
and which may be followed by the 
inf. or by ὅτι and a clause, v. 5. 3, 
6. 37, or by ws with the gen. or acc. 
abs., i. 3. 6, 8. 10. Phrases: ἄνευ 
γνώμης τινός, against one’s will, i. 
3.13; ἐμπιμπλὰς τὴν γνώμην, satisfy 
one’s heart’s desire, i. ἡ. 8; πρός 
τινα τὴν γνώμην ἔχειν, be on one’s 
side, be devoted to one, ii. 5. 29; 
γνώμῃ κολάζειν, punish on princi- 
ple, ii. 6. 9. 

te γνώσεσθε, see γιγνώσκω. 

ογγύλος, 6, Gongylus, 1) a Greek 

living at Pergamus, vii. 8. 8; 2) his 
son, vii. 8. 8, 17. Their common 
ancestor, Gongylus of Eretria in 
Euboea, had been the go-between 
of Pausanias and Xerxes, and was 
rewarded by the king with four 
cities in the Troad. 

γοητεύω, γεγοήτευμαι, ἐγοητεύθην, 
[γόης, nros, sorcerer], ensorcel, be- 
wich, v. 7. 9. 

γονεύς, éws, ὁ [R. γεν], begetter, 
father ; pl., parents, iii. 1. 3, v. 8. 
18. 

γόνυ, γόνατος, τό [cf. Lat. gent, 
knee, Eng. KNEE], knee, of men, 
i. 5. 13, iii. 2. 22, vii. 3. 23; joint, 
knot, of reeds or canes, iv. 5. 26. 
Topylas, ov, Gorgias, of Leon- 
tini in Sicily, a famous rhetorician, 
who lived about 485-380 n.c. He 
first came to Athens in 427 B.c. on 
an embassy from his native city, 
and won literally golden opinions 
by the brilliancy of his oratory. 
Later he revisited Athens, and 
travelled through Greece, getting 
pupils everywhere. Among these 
was Proxenus, ii. 6. 16, but his 
most celebrated pupil was Isocra- 
tes. 
Γοργίων, wvos, ὁ, Gorgion, son 


γνοίη, see γιγνώσκω. 


of Gongylus the elder, g.v., vii. 8. 8. 


41 γοῦν-δάκτυλος 


γοῦν, postpositive intensive par- 
ticle [γέ + οὖν], stronger than γέ, 
used to bring forward the proof 
of a foregoing assertion, or a rea- 
son for it, at least, at any rate, 
anyhow, at all events, iii. 2. 17, V. 
8. 23, vi. 5. 17, vii. 1. 30. i 

γρᾷδιον, τό [γέρων, cf. γραῦς, 
ypads, old woman], poor or feeble 
old woman, Vi. 3. 22. 

γράμμα, aros, τό [γράφω], letter 
of the alphabet, Lat. littera; pl., 
inscription, V. 3. 18. 

γράφω, γράψω, ἔγραψα, γέγραφα, 
γέγραμμαι, ἐγράφην (of. Lat. scribo, 
write, Eng. SHARP, GRAVE, graphic, 
bio-graphy, dia-gram, grammar, 
etc.], make α mark, draw, paint, 
write, ii. 3. 1, 6. 4, Vil. 5. 4. αὶ 1; 
the person to whom is expressed 
by παρά and acc., i. 6. 3. | 

γυμνάζω (γυμναδ-), γυμνάσω, etc. 
[γυμνός], train naked, exercise, 1. 
> aie 

γυμνής, ros, OF γυμνήτης, ov, ὁ 
[γυμνός]. a generic term signifying 
light-armed foot-soldier, in contra- 
distinction to the heavy-armed 
hoplite, i. 2. 8, iv. 6. 20, and appli- 
cable properly to javelin-men, bow- 
men, and slingers, who wore no 
defensive armour, iii. 4. 26 (σφεν- 
δονῆται and τοξόται are immedi- 
ately mentioned), v. 2. 12 (proba- 
bly slingers). The word ψιλός, 
q.v., has, as a military term, the 
same application. But γυμνής is 
sometimes used so broadly as to 
include peltasts, who were light- 
armed troops, although they car- 
ried a shield for defence, iv. 1. 6, 
28 (equal to πελτασταί in 26), vi. 
3. 15 (equal to πελτασταί in 19). 
Conversely πελταστής, g.v., 15 Some- 
times used to designate all the 
light-armed troops. The Greek 
light-armed troops in the army of 
Cyrus amounted, just before the 
battle of Cunaxa, to 2500, i. 7. 10. 
These were principally peltasts. 
The javelin-men, bowmen, and 


less importance. See 8.0. ἀκοντι- 
orhs, τοξότης, σφενδονήτης. 

μνήτης, See γυμνής. ! 
| Seana dos, or Γυμνίας, ados, 7), 
Gymnias, a flourishing city of the 
Scythini, in Armenia, but its exact 
site is now unknown. 
γυμνικός, 7, dv [γυμνός], belong- 
ing to physical exercise (practised 
naked), gymnastic, athletic, iv. 8. 
25, V. 5+ 5+ 
γυμνός, 4, dv [of Eng. gymnast), 
naked, stripped, Lat. nudus, lv. 3. 
12; lightly clad, i.e. without the 
ἱμάτιον, in one’s shirt or shift (see 
5.0. χιτών), i. το. 3, iv. 4. 12; of 
soldiers without armour, exposed, 
defenceless, With πρός and acc., iv. 

. 6. 

ὃ γυνή, γυναικός, 7 [R. γεν], woman, 
wife, i. 2. 12, 4. 8, ill. 2. 25, iv. I. 
14, 3.11, 5. 9; chief wife, consort 
of a Persian king as distinguished 
from the rest of his Harem, 1]. 3. 
17, ἡ. TL 

Γωβρύας, ov or a, Gobryas, one 
of the four field marshals of Arta- 
xerxes, in command of 300,000 
men, i. 7. 12. 


A. 


δ᾽, by elision for δέ. 

δάκνω (δακ-), δήξομαι, ἔδακον, 
δέδηγμαι, ἐδήχθην, bite, Lat. mor- 
ded, iii. 2. 18, 35. 

δακρύω, δακρύσω, ἐδάκρῦσα, δεδά- 
κρῦμαι [δάκρυ, tear, cf. Lat. lacrima, 
tear, Eng. TEAR], shed tears, weep, 
Lat. lacrimd, i. 3. 2, iv. 7. 25. 

δακτύλιος, ὁ [R. 2 Sax], jinger- 
ring, ring, Lat. dnulus. Rings 
were much affected by the Greeks 
of the historical period, esp. by 
men, and were used either as an 
ornament or as a seal. Cf. iv. 7. 
27, where they are worn by sol- 
diers in the rank and file. 

δάκτυλος, ὁ [R. 2 Sax], Jinger, 
Lat. digitus ; with τῶν ποδῶν, toe, 


slingers were relatively of much 


iv. 5. 12, v. 8. 15. 


Δαμάρᾶτος--Δαφναγόρᾶς 48 


Aapaparos or Δημάρᾶτος, ὁ, De- 
maratus, son of Ariston and king 


of Sparta, deposed by his colleague 
and rival, Cleomenes L., s.c. 491. 


He fled to Darius, and was by him | 


presented with the cities and dis- 
tricts of Halisarne and Teuthrania. 
He accompanied Xerxes in the in- 
vasion of Greece, but his advice 
and counsel were neglected. ii. 1. 
3, Vii. 8. 17. 

Δάνα, τά, Dana, called also Ty- 
ana (Kilisse-Hissar), a city of 
Cappadocia north of Tarsus and 
at the foot of Mt. Taurus. Its 
position on the highway to Cilicia 
and Syria rendered it important, 
i, 2. 20. 

Saravaw, δαπανήσω, etc. [R. δα], 
spend, expend, of money, with εἰς 
or ἀμφί and the acc. of person or 
thing, i. 1. 8, 3. 3, ii. 6.6; τὰ éav- 
τῶν δαπανᾶν, live at their own ex- 
pense, V. 5. 20; of property or 
provisions, use up, consume, Vii. 6. 
31, 7. 2. 

δάπεδον, τό [R. wed], solid earth, 
ground, iv. 5. 6. 

Δαραδάξ, see Δάρδας. 

Δαρδανεύς, dws, ὁ [Δάρδανος, ἡ, 
Dardanus)|, a Dardanian, an in- 
habitant of Dardanus, which was 
an Aeolic city in the Troad on the 
Hellespont. Near by was Cape 
Dardanis, noted for a naval battle 
in the Peloponnesian war. iii, 1. 
47, v. 6. 21, vi. 1. 32. 

Δάρδας, aros, or Δαραδάξ, dxos, 
6, Dardas, a little river in Syria 
whose exact position is unknown. 
It was probably west of Thapsa- 
cus, i. 4. 10. 

Sapexds, ὁ, daric, the name of 
a gold coin of great purity, said to 
have been coined first by Darius 
Hystaspes and to have derived its 
name from him (compare Napo- 


size of the original. The daric con. 
| tained about 125.5 grains of gold, 
and would therefore 
now be worth about , 
$5.40 in American αὶ 
gold ($1.00 contain- 
ing 23.22 grains). 
The daric was worth 
20 silver drachmas, 
i. 7. 18, where Cyrus 
pays a bet of 10 talents, or 60,000 
drachmas with 3,000 darics. The 
silver drachma was of greater 
value, relatively to gold, then than 
now. See 8.0. μνᾶ, The weight of 
the daric was about equal to that 
of two Attic drachmas. i. 1. 9, 
3. 21, ii. 6. 4, iv. 7. 27, vii. 6. 1, 8. 6. 
Aapetos, ὁ [Persian dara, king], 
Darius, a name of many of the 
Persian kings. In the Anab., Da- 
rius II., called ὁ Νόθος as being the 
natural son of Artaxerxes I.; his 
real name was Ὦχος. He over- 
threw and murdered his brother 
Sogdiinus, and reigned from 425 
to 405 B.c. His sons were Arta- 
xerxes ΠῚ, who succeeded him, and 
Cyrus the Younger, i. 1. 1, 7. 9. 
δάσμευσις, ews, ἡ [R. δα], distri- 
bution, vii. 1. 37. 
δασμός, ὁ [R. δα], division, par- 
tition; hence tribute, tax, as laid 
in equal parts on all subjects. A 
yearly tribute was imposed on all 
the provinces of the Persian em- 
pire ; this was paid either in money 
or in kind, as horses, cattle, slaves, 
and fruits of the field, i. 1. 8, iv. 
5. 24. 
δασύς, εἴα, ὁ [of. Lat. dénsus, 
thick], thick, thickly grown, esp. 
with trees and shrubs, which may 
be expressed in the gen. or dat., ii. 
4. 14, iv. 7. 6, 8. 2, 26, vi. 4.27; τὸ 
δασύ, thicket, coppice, copse, iv. 7. 
7; also of ox-hide with the hair 


léon, Louis d’ or, as names of coins), 
but both statements are in doubt. 
The device on the obverse of the 
daric is a crowned archer kneeling, 


on, used for shields, shaggy, rough, 
iv. 7: 33, ¥- 4:12. 

Δαφναγόρᾶς, ov, Daphnagoras, 
a favourite of Hellas, the wife of 


as shown in the cut, which is of the 


Gongylus, vii. 8. 9, 


49 δαψιλής-δειπνοποιέω 


δαψιλής, ἐς [R. Sa], liberal, am-| μ 


ple, of provisions, plentiful, abun- 
dant, iv. 2. 22, 4: 7 ' ' 
δέ, post-positive conjunction, but, 
strictly, but often weakly, adversa- 
tive, standing midway in force be- 
tween ἀλλά and καί, and introducing 
something new, which the lively 
Greek felt to be of the nature of 
opposition. In English this oppo- 
sition is not so apparent, and there- 
fore δέ is often to be rendered by 
and, however, yet, to be sure, Surther, 
by the way, while, now, or even 
omitted in the translation, i. 3. 5, 
ii. 3. 10, 4. 24, iii. 1. 13, iv. I. 3; 6. 
10, v. 2. 22, 5. 13, 6. 10, vi. 3. 7, 4. 
12, vii. 5. 1, 6.1. In the preceding 
clause μέν is often found, to call 
attention to the fact that δέ is to 
follow in the second, μὲν... δέ 
being equivalent to while... yet, 
on the one hand...on the other, 
or weaker, are "» ry ae 
2, 8, 3. 16, 5. 2, 10. Ὁ. 11. 3. 10, 
ii, 7. 40, ν᾿ & 13, vi. 6 18. The 
μέν is often omitted in the first 
clause, i. 7. 5, 9, iii. I. 23, 4. 7, 
especially in questions, V. 7. 33. 
An apodosis is sometimes intro- 
duced by δέ, which marks a sur- 
vival of the paratactic construction, 
v. 6. 20, 8. 25. Phrases : Kal... δέ, 
and also, but further, i. 1. 5, 8. 2, 
iii. 1. 25, iv. 1. 3, Vi. 1. 15; οὐδὲ... 
δέ, and not indeed, and not even, 1. 
8. 20. 
«δε, a suffix joined to names of 
places, generally in the acc., to de- 
note motion towards; to demon- 


strative pronouns to give them 


greater force. 
δεδιώς, see δείδω. 
δεδογμένα, 566 δοκέω. 
δέδοικα, 566 δείδω. 
δεδομέναι, 566 δίδωμι. 
δέῃ, δεηθῆναι, δεῖ, see δέω, lack. 


ἡ and a clause, or with a combi- 
nation of the two, or abs., i. 3. 10, 
7.7, 8. 24, iii. ay iv. 2. 15, 5. 18, 
Vv. 7. 22, vii. 3. 26. 
see fae δείξω, ἔδειξα, δέ- 
δειχα, δέδειγμαι, ἐδείχθην [R. 1 δακΊ, 
point out, indicate, show, make 
signs to, Lat. ostendo, the thing 
shown being expressed by an acc. 
or a rel. clause with or without the 
dat. of the person, iv. 5. 33, 7. 4, 
27, v. 6. 7, Vi. 2. 2, Vil. 4. 12. 
Se(An, ys, afternoon, whether 
early, i. 8. 8, vii. 3. 10, or late, 
sometimes evening, iii. 3. 11, 4. 34, 
5. 2, iv. 2. 1, vil. 2. 16; ἀμφὶ δεί- 
λην, towards i ii. 2. 14 (ef. 
ii. 2. 16, ὀψὲ Fv). 
δαλόν, ἡ, ἀν [δείδω], fearful, cow- 
ardly, skulking, vile, i. 4. 7, Ml. 2. 
35, vi. 6. 24. tl 
δεινός, 7, dv [δείδω], frightful, 
terrible, awful, horrible, outra- 
geous, severe, iii. I. 13, iv. 6. 16, 
7.13, Υ- 5. 8, 6. 27, Vil. 1. 25; as 
subst., τὸ δεινόν, terror, danger, 
misfortune, ii. 3. 13, 22, 6. 7, 12; 
with the added idea of power, 
marvellous, skilful, clever, 1. 9. 19; 
sometimes with an inf., ii. 5. 15, 
iv. 6. 16, v. 5. 7, Vii. 3.25. Phrases: 
δεινὰ ὑβρίζειν, treat with outrageous 
insolence, Vi. 4.2; δεινότατα ποιεῖν, 
foully maltreat, V. 7. 23; δεινὰ 
ποιεῖσθαι, think prodigious, Vi. 1. 
11. 

δεινῶς, adv. [δείδω], terribly ; 
ἔχειν δεινῶς, be in a dreadful situa- 
tion, vi. 4. 23. 

δειπνέω, δειπνήσω, ἐδείπνησα, δε- 
δείπνηκα [R. δα], take the chief 
meal, dine, ii. 2. 4, iii. 5. 18, iv. 3. 
10, vi. 1. 4, vii. 3. 23. 

δεῖπνον, τό [R. Sa], the chief 
meal of the day, generally eaten 
towards evening, evening meal, 
dinner, Lat. céna, ii. 4. 15, iv. 2. 4, 


δείδω (δι-, δει-), δείσομαι, ἔδεισα, vii. 3. 15, 21, 4. 3. 


δέδοικα and δέδια (the present is 
found only in Homer, in Attic the 


perf. has a present force) [δείδω], be 


δειπνοποιέω [R. δα + ποιέω], get 


dinner, entertain at dinner Ὶ mid., 
get dinner for oneself, dine, V1. 3. 


afraid, fear, dread, with acc., with 14, 4. 26. 


δείσᾶς-- Δέξιππος 50 


δείσᾶς, 566 δείδω, 

δείσει, see δείδω. 

δεῖσθαι, see δέω, lack. 

δέκα, indecl. [δέκα], ten, Lat. 
decem, i. 2. 10, iv. 4. 3, v. 2. 29, vii. 
3. 2. 

δεκαπέντε, indecl. [δέκα + πέντε], 
Jifteen, Lat. quindecim, vii. 8. 20, 

δεκατεύω [δέκα], exact the tenth 
pare or tithe, take the tithe of, v. 
Δ. 9, 

δέκατος, 7, ον [δέκα], tenth, Lat. 
decimus, Vii. 7. 35; as subst., ἡ 
δεκάτη (sc. μοῖρα), the tithe. The 
tenth part of the spoil taken in 
war was dedicated to the gods, v. 
3. 4, either in the form of offerings 
in the temples, as to Apollo at 
Delphi, v. 3. 5, or in lands, which 
were bought and dedicated to the 
god, as in the celebrated instance 
when Xenophon bought an estate 
at Scyllus near Olympia and dedi- 
cated it in perpetuity to Ephesian 
Artemis, v. 3. 7-15. 

Δέλτα, τό, indecl. [ef. Eng. de/ta, 
delt-oid), the Delta, a peninsula of 
Thrace, lying between the Pontus, 
Bosporus, and Propontis, named 
from its triangular shape, resemb- 
ling the letter A, vii. 1. 33, 5. 1. 

δελφίς, ivos, ὁ, dolphin, the small- 
est species of the whale family, 
still killed for its fat, v. 4. 28. 

Δελφοί, οἱ, Delphi (Castri), a 
city in Phocis, on the southern 
slope of Parnassus and renowned 
for its oracle of Apollo, for the 
Pythian games, and for its temple 
filled with the richest treasures of 
art and wealth, iii. 1. 5, v. 3. 5, vi. 1. 
22. It was regarded by the Greeks 
as the centre of Hellenic Civiliza- 
tion, and even called the navel of 
the whole earth. The city itself 
lay in a deep valley between Mt. 
Parnassus and Mt. Cirphis, and ex- 
tended like an amphitheatre to the 
river Pleistus. The great temple 
was situated on the rock above; 
in its sanctuary was the chasm in 


vapour which was thought to in- 
spire the oracles; over the chasm 
was placed the colossal tripod on 
which sat the priestess, called the 
Pythia. On the road to the tem- 
ple was the Castalian spring. The 
existence of a modern town on the 
site has hitherto prevented exca- 
vations to any extent. The ora- 
cle was abolished by Theodosius, 
A.D. 390. 

δένδρον, τό [cf. Eng. rhodo- 
dendron), tree, Lat. arbor, i. 2. 22, 
ii. 4. 14, iv. 7. 8, v. 3. 11; dat. pl. 
δένδροις and δένδρεσι, iv. 7. 9, 8. 2. 

δέξασθαι, see δέχομαι. 

δεξιόομαι, δεξιώσομαι, ἐδεξιωσάμην 
{R-2-Sane}, take or give the right 
hand, welcome, Vii. 4. 19. 

δεξιός, d, dv [R. 2 Sax], right, 
right-hand side, Lat. dexter, i. 7. 1, 
δ τ κ᾿ i. (4. 38, Vi ἃ 36. 
Phrases: the word xelp is often 
omitted, and we have ἐν τῇ δεξιᾷ, 
in the right hand, ii. 3. 11, v. 4: 12; 
ἐν δεξιᾷ, on the right, i. 5. 1, ii. 2. 
13, iv. 3. 17, v. 2. 24, vii. 5. 12; ὑπὲρ 
δεξιῶν, above on the right, iv. 8.2; 
δεξιὰν δοῦναι, give the right hand 
in confirmation, promise, ii. 3. 28, 
re Ol a ἢ. δεξιὰς δοῦναι καὶ λαβεῖν, 
exchange hand-grasps, shake hands, 
in token of friendship, in conclud- 
ing a treaty, etc., i. 6. 6, vil. 3.1; 
δεξιὰς φέρειν, bring assurances, 
pledged by the person who brought 
them with his right hand, ii. 4. 1. 
In military language κέρας may be 
omitted, as τὸ δεξιόν, the right wing, 
the right, i. 2. 15, 8. 5, iv. 8. 14, vi. 
5. 28; but τὰ δεξιὰ (sc. μέρη) τοῦ 
κέρατος, the right of the wing, i. 8. 
4, cf. ἐπὶ δεξιά, to the right, vi. 4. 1. 
In Greek divination the right was 
the propitious side, because the 
Greek soothsayer faced the North, 
and therefore the lucky omens from 
the East, the side of light, were on 
his right ; so ἀετὸς δεξιός, vi. 1. 23. 
Δέξιππος, ὁ, Dexippus, a Laco- 
nian Perioecus (see s.v. repio.xos). 


the earth from which issued the 


He deserted the Greeks while in 


51 δέοι- δή 


command of a ship, v. 1. 15, slan- 
dered Xenophon before Anaxibius, 
vi. 1. 82, and tried to prejudice 
Cleander against the army, but in 
vain, vi. 6. 5 ff. He was finally 
killed in Thrace for meddling in 
the affairs of that country, v. 1. 18. 
δέοι, δέομαι, δέον, see δέω, lack. 

Δερκυλίδας, ov, Dercylidas, a fa- 
mous Spartan general, harmost of 
Abydus in 411 B.c., v. 6. 24. 

δέρμα, aros, τό {R-Sap}, hide of 
animals, rarely of the skin of a 
man flayed off, i. 2. 8, iv. 7. 26, 8. 
26. 

Δέρνης, ov OF ovs, ὁ, Dernes, 8a- 
trap of Phoenicia and Arabia, Vil. 
8, 25. 

δεσμός, ὁ [R. δε], band, halter, 
strap, yoke-strap, ill. 5. 10. 

δεσπότης, ov (cf. Eng. despot], 
master, lord, owner, Lat. dominus, 
ii. 3. 15, 5. 14, iii. 2, 18, vii. 4. 14. 

δεῦρο, adv., hither, here, 1. 3. 19, 
ii. 2. 11, v. 4. 10, vi. 3. 26, vii. 6, 9. 


δεύτερος, a, ov [δύο], second in 
time or order, iii. 4. 28, iv. 2. 18, νυ. 
6. 9; adv. δεύτερον or τὸ δεύτερον, 
for the second time, over again, 
Lat. iterum, i. 8. 16, ii. 2. 4. 

δέχομαι, δέξομαι; ἐδεξάμην, δέδεγ- 
μαι, ἐδέχθην [R. 2 Sax], recerve, 
used of persons or things. Of 
things, receive, accept, allow, take, 
i. 8. 17, iii. 4. 32, iv. 5. 32, v. 4. 8, 
vi, 6. 37, vii. 3. 29. Of persons the 
word may have either of two mean- 
ings: —1) receive as guests, hos- 
pitably, or in a friendly manner, 
abs. or with acc., iv. 8. 23, v. 5. 6, 
24, vi. 6. 9; with εἰς and acc. or 
with οἰκέᾳ, vii. 2. 6, 37; ἐπὶ ξένια 
δέχεσθαι, see ξένιος ; 2) receive as 
an enemy, await the charge of; 
meet the attack, abs. or with acc., 
i. το. 6, iii. 1. 42, 2. 16, iv. 2. 7, V. 
4. 24, vi. 5. 27; eis χεῖρας δέχεσθαί 
τινα, come to close quarters, Lat. in 
manis uenire, iv. 3. 31. 

δέω, δήσω, ἔδησα, δέδεκα, δέδεμαι, 
ἐδέθην [R. Se], bind, tre, Setter, 
shackle, iii. 4. 35, 5. 10, iv. 2. 1: 


with ἐν and dat., iv. 3.8; τω χεῖρε 
δεδέσθαι, have both hands tied, vi. 
1, 8. 

δέω, δεήσω, ἐδέησα, δεδέηκα, de- 
δέημαι, ἐδεήθην [R. δε], lack, used 
personally and impersonally. As 
a personal verb it is rare in the 
active, being confined to phrases 
like ὀλίγου δεῖν, want little, 1.6. al- 
most, and πολλοῦ δεῖν, be far from, 
both followed by inf., i. 5. 14, v. 
4. 32, vii. 6, 18; commonly in 
mid., want, need, lack, abs. or with 
gen., i. 9. 21, ii. 6. 18, iii. 1. 46, 5. 
9, iv. 4. 6, v. 1. 11, Vi. 4. LT, Wiehe 
9; wish, desire, seek for, with gen., 
i. 4. 15, iii. 2. 82, v. 7. 27, vii. 6. 1, 
with acc. of a pron., i. 3. 4, ll. 3. 
29, vii. 2. 84, 7.24, or with acc. and 
inf., i. 4.14; ask, request, beg, with 
gen. of the person expressed or 
understood and inf. of the thing; 
i. 1. 10, 9. 25, iv. 5. 16, v. 7. 30, vi. 
6. 10, vii. 1. 2, 7. 14, 19. Imper- 
sonally it occurs in the forms δεῖ, 
δέῃ, δέοι, δεῖν, δέον, etc., there is 
need of or that, it is necessary OF 
proper, or when translated person- 
ally must, ought, etc. ΑΒ an Im- 
personal it is followed by the simple 
inf., which may also be understood, 
i. 3. δ, 6. 9, ii. τ. 20, iii, 1. 6, 37, iv. 
1. 13, v. 1. 6, 2. 12, vi. 1. 18, Vil. 1. 
14, by the acc. and inf.,i. 7. 7, 11. 
1. 10, iii. 4. 1, iv. 6. 19, v. 4. 21, vi. 
1. 30, vii. τ. 80, and very rarely by 
dat. and inf., iii. 4. 35; the gen. of 
the thing needed is also rare, ii. 3. 
δ, iii. 2. 88, 3. 16, v. 1. 10, vii. 3. 45. 
Phrases: τὰ δέοντα, the needful 
business, iii. 1.47; αὐτὸ τὸ δέον, the 
very thing wanted, iv. 7.7; εἰς τὸ 
δέον καθίστασθαι, be settled in the 
right way, i. 3. 8. ; 

δή, post-positive intensive parti- 
cle, serving chiefly to emphasise the 
idea or word to which it belongs, 
and which it generally immediately 
follows. Among its various ren- 
derings are now, just now, in par- 
ticular, indeed, surely, truly, ex- 


actly, quite, accordingly, but often 


δῆλος-διαβαίνω 52 


its foree can be given only by 
emphasis of tone; such phrases as 
you see, you know, I assure you, 
that’s clear, may sometimes be use- 
ful, i. 2. 3, 3. 5, 8.10, 10. 10, ii. 1, 
20, 3. 29, iii. 1. 3, iv. 1. 2, 2, ᾿. ἡ. 
10, v. 4. 25, 8. 13, 26, vi. 1. 22, vii. 
I. 26, 3. 47, 4. 24. With imper- 
atives it adds urgency, dye δή, 
come now, Lat. age uér9d, ii. 2. 19, 
V. 4. 9; ὁρᾶτε δή. pray consider, vi. 
5. 16; cf. vii. 6. 23, 7.27. It adds 
force to superlatives, as κράτιστοι 
δή, the very best, i. 9. 18; ef. i. 9. 
12. It is common in the =podosis 
of temporal clauses, i. το. 13, iii. 1. 
2, iv. 2. 20, 7.23. Phrases: ri δή; 
what now? Lat. quid tandem? ii. 
5. 22, vii. 6. 20; ὥσπερ δή, just 
as, exactly as, iii. 1. 29; ἔνθα δή, 
then, I assure you, i. 5. 8, iv. 5. 
4; viv δή, now at once, Lat. nunc 
iam, ii. 3.29; οὕτω δή, just so, vi. 
I, 24, » 
δῆλος, 7, ov, plain, clear, evident, 
certain, manifest, ii. 2. 18, 3. 1, vii. 
2. 16, 6. 16; δῆλον εἶναι, be clear, 
be manifest, with a clause with ὅτι, 
m3. 9, M 2. 34, iv, 1. 17, vi. 1. 
25, vii. 6.17, or with ri, 8 ri, or οὗ 
ἕνεκα, 1. 4. 13, 14, vii. 4. 4; δῆλον 
ὅτι is often used parenthetically, 
evidently, i. 3. 9, iii. 1. 16, 35, vi. 4. 
12, The personal construction with 
a participle is often used instead 
of the impersonal, as δῆλος ἣν ἀντώ- 
μενος, it was evident that he was 
troubled, i. 2. 11, ef. ii. 5. 27, 6. 21, 
Υ. : 24; rarely ὡς with the parti- 
ciple or ὅτι and a clause, i. 5. 9, 
Vv. 2. 26. 
δηλόω, δηλώσω, etc. [δῆλος], make 
clear, make known, explain, show, 
with acc., i. 9. 28, ii. 1. 1, 2. 18, iii, 
3. 14; the person to whom is ex- 
pressed by dat. or πρός and acc., 
the thing shown by ὅτι or ὅθεν and 
a Ὄπ" li. 5. 26, v. 4.21, vii. 1.31, 
7. 30. 
δημαγωγέω, δημαγωγήσω [Ἐ-- δα 
be a leader of the people, 
generally with the idea of unwor- 


thy means, play the demagogue, 
win by currying favour, vii. 6. 4. 

Anpdparos, see Adudparos. 

Δημοκράτης, ovs or ov, Democra- 
tes, of Temnus or Temenium (see 
Τημνέτης), ἃ scout, iv. 4. 15. 

δημόσιος, a, ov [ἢ -δα7, belong- 
ing to the community, public, Lat, 
publicus, vi. 6. 2, 6, 37; τὰ δημό- 
gia, the public money, the treasury, 
iv. 6. 16. 

δῃόω, δῃώσω, ἐδήωσα [Epic δήιος, 
hostile, destructive], destroy, lay 
waste, ravage, V. 5. 7. 

δήπου, intensive particle [δή + 
ποῦ), surely, I s’pose, of course, 
ili, 2. 15, v. 7. 6, vii. 6. 13. 

δῆσαι, see δέω, bind. 

5nx Gels, see δάκνω. 

διά, by elision δ, prep. with 
gen. or acc. [δύο], through. With 
gen., used of place, time, or means, 
through, during, throughout, by 
means of, Lat. per, i. 4. 6, 5. 12, ii. 
3. 17, 6. 22, iii. 5. 15, iv. 2. 4, 6, 22, 
v. 4. 14, vii. 7. 49. Phrases: διὰ 
ταχέων, rapidly, i.5.9; διὰ σκότους, 
in darkness, ii. 5. 9; διὰ πίστεως, 
trustingly, iii. 2. 8; διὰ φιλίᾶς ἱέναι 
τινί, enter into friendship with one, 
iii, 2. 8; διὰ παντὸς πολέμου ἱέναι 
τινί, wage every kind of war with 
one, iii. 2. 8; διὰ τέλους, from be- 
ginning to end, vi. 6. 11, cf. vii. 8. 
11, With acc., through, by means 
or aid of, on account of, for the 
sake of, Lat. ob or propter, i. 7. 6, 
lii. 5. 16, v. 8. 12, vii. 6. 33, 7. 7; 
because of, with τό and inf. where 
we use a causal clause, i. 7. 5, iv. 
5. 15, v. 5.17. Phrases: διὰ τοῦτο, 
Jor this reason, i. 7.3; διὰ πολλά, 
Jor many reasons, i. 9. 22; διὰ 
φιλίᾶν, out of friendship, v. 5. 15. 
In composition διά signifies through 
or over ; sometimes it adds an idea 
of continuance or of fulfilment, or 
it may signify apart, Lat. di-, dis-. 

Ala, Ait, Aids, etc., see Ζεύς. 


διαβαίνω [Ἐ--βα}. go with long 
strides, stride, walk freely, iv. 3. 8; 


but mostly trans., go over, cross, 


58 


Lat. traénsed, abs. or with acc., i. 2. 
G, 4. 15, ii. 2. 3, 3. 10, iil. 3. 6, 4.5, 


διαβάλλω-διαιθριάζει 


διαγκυλόομαι, μὲ. διηγκύλωμαι 


(R. ay], hold by the thong, insert 


3. 7, Υ. 2. 4, vi. 5.3, Vil. 1. the finger through the javelin-thong, 
ΠΩ͂. 


iv. 1.3, | al 
®. the means may be expresset 


4)» 


by dat. or by ἐπί and gen., i. 5. 10. 
᾿διαβάλλω [βάλλω], throw over 


or across; in Anab. always throw 
at with words, slander, traduce, 
accuse falsely, Lat. maledico, abs. 
or with acc., ii. 5. 27, 6. 26, v. 7. 5, 
vi. 6. 11; the person to whom is 
expressed by πρός and acc., 1. 1. 3, 
v. 6. 29, Vii. 5.6, the slander by the 
ace. or by ws and a clause, V. 7. 5, 
vii. 5. Pi al 

διαβάς, see διαβαένω. ' 

διάβασις, ews, ἡ ἘΒ -βα7, a going 
over, a crossing, hence place or 
means of crossing, ford, bridge, 
i. 5. 12, iii. 4. 20, 5. 9, ἵν. 8. 3, vi. 
3. ἢ, 
διαβατέος, a, ov, verbal [R. Ba], 
that must be crossed or apie wher 
Lat. trdnseundus, ii. 4. 6, vi. 5. 12. 

διαβατός, ἡ, dv, verbal {R-feF, 
that can be crossed, fordable, pas- 
sable, i. 4. 18, ii. 5. 9, iii. 2. 22. 

διαβεβηκότας, see διαβαίνω. 

διαβιβάζω (βιβάζω, βιβαδ-, -βι- 
βάσω or βιβῶ, -εβίβασα [R. Ba], 
make go), make go across, lead 
across, drive across, transport, Lat. 
tradiicé, iii. 5. 2, iv. 8. 8, v. 2. 10, 
Vii. 1. 2. 

διαβολή, ἢς βάλλω, slander, 
false charges, ii. 5. 5. 

διαγγέλλω [ἀγγέλλω], carry word 
through, where διά suggests inter- 
vening space, cf. Lat. internun- 
tius, bring word, report, with dat. 
or εἰς and acc. of the person to 
whom, and παρά with gen. of the 
person from whom, i. 6. 2, ii. 3. 7, 
vii. 1. 14; mid., carry word along, 
pass the word, iii. 4. 36. 

διαγελάω [γελάω], 
scorn, ridicule, ii,6.26. 

διαγίγνομαι Ε΄. γεν}, of time, get 
through, pass through, continue, 
exist, remain, i. 10. 19, Vil. 3. 13, 
often with partic., i. 5. 6, ii. 6. 5, 


laugh to 


No, 15. 


only in pf. partic., iv. 3. 28, v. 2. 12. 
See the account of the manner in 
which a rotary motion was given 
to the javelin, 8.0. ἀκόντιον. 
διάγω £R.-ay}, carry through or 
across, used esp. of ships, trans- 
port, ii. 4. 28, iii. 5. 10, vii. 2. 12; 
of time, pass, spend, live, tarry, 
Lat. dégd, with or without acc., 
iii, 1. 43, 3. 2, iv. 2.7, vi. 5.1; with 
partic., continue, i. 2.11. _ 
διαγωνίζομαι, -R- ay}, strive con- 
tinually or earnestly, With πρός and 
acc., iv. 7. 12. : 
διαδέχομαι [R.2Baxe}, receive at 
intervals or along a line; Onpwev 
διαδεχόμενοι, relieved one another 
in the chase, i. 5. 2. 
διαδίδωμι [R.—Se}, give from 
hand to hand, distribute, Lat. dis- 
tribud, abs., or with acc. of thing 
and dat. of pers., or with dat. alone, 
or with inf. of the thing, i. 9. 22, 
10. 18, iv. 5. 8, v. 8. 7, Vil. 7. 56. 
διάδοχος, ὁ {R-2 Sate}, reliever, 
successor, Lat. successor, with dat., 
Vii. 2. 5. Ta 
διαζεύγνυμι fR-fey}, disjoin, Lat. 
diiungd, separate, with ἀπό and 
gen., iv. 2. 10. 


διαθεάομαι θέα}, ook through 
and through, observe closely, 111. 1. 


19. 


away, said of breaking weather, 


iv. 5. 5. 


Lat. disserénascit, iv. 4. 10. 


M 4 
διαιθριάζει fale], be clearing acter δας 


me wre ~ 


διαιρέω-διαπράττω δά 


διαιρέω [αἱρέω], sunder, tear 
apart or away, destroy, ii. 4. 22, v. 
2. 21. 
διάκειμαι [ketpar], be set in or- 
der, be disposed, generally of a 
state of mind, feel, with dat. or 
πρός and acc., ii. 5. 27, 6. 12, iii. 1. 
3, Vii. 7.38; ἄμεινον ὑμῖν διακείσεται, 
it will be better for you, vii. 3. 17. 
διακελεύομαι [ R. xed], give direc- 
tions lo, urge, encourage, with dat. 
of pers., iii. 4. 45, iv. 7. 26. 
διακινδυνεύω [κίνδυνος], run all 
risks, risk a battle, iii. 4. 14, vi. 3. 17. 
διακλάω (κλάω, ἔκλασα, κέκλα- 
σμαι, ἐκλάσθην [cf. Eng. icono- 
clast}, break), break in two; κατὰ 
μικρὸν διακλᾶν, break into bits, vii. 
3. 22. 
διᾷκονέω, διᾶκονήσω, δεδιᾷᾶ κόνημαι, 
ἐδιᾶκονήθην [διάκονος, servant, cf. 
Eng. deacon], serve, esp. wait αἱ 
table, Lat. ministrd, iv. 5. 33. 
διακόπτω [κόπτω], cut in pieces, 
cut through, i. 8. 10, iv. 8. 11, 13, 
Ws Se OTs 
διάκόσιοι, ai, a [δύο + ἑκατόν], 
two hundred, Lat. ducenti, i. 2. 9, 
li. 5. 30, vi. 5. 11. 
διακρίνω [κρένω], separate from 
one another, decide, settle, Lat. 
décidé, abs., vi. 1. 22. 
διαλαγχάνω [λαγχάνω], part or 
assign by lot, iv. 5. 23. 
διαλαμβάνω [λαμβάνω], take sep- 
arately or apart, iv. 1.23; divide, 
V. 43. 4. 
διαλέγομαι, διαλέξομαι, διείλεγμαι, 
διελέχθην [R. λεγ], talk or con- 
verse with, abs. or with acc., or with 
περί and gen. of the thing spoken 
of, i. 7. 9, li. 6. 23, iv. 2. 19, vi. 3. 9, 
vii. 1. 15; the pers. spoken to is ex- 
pressed by dat. or by πρός and acc., 
li. 5. 42, iv. 2. 18, v. 5. 25. 
διαλείπω [λείπω], leave a space 
or gap between, stand apart or at 
intervals, be distant, Lat. distd, 
abs. or with acc., i. 7. 15, 8. 10, iv. 
7-6, 8.12; τὸ διαλεῖπον (86. χωρίον), 
Lat. interudllum, gap, space be- 


διαμάχομαι [R. pax], fight to a 
Jinish, Jight it out, struggle ear- 
nestly, with περί and gen. or with 
μή and inf., v. 8. 23, vii. 4. 10. 

διαμένω [R. μα], stay through, 
stay, vii. 1. 6. 

διαμετρέω [μετρέω], divide by 
measure, measure out, of food, vii. 
1.40; mid., serve out rations, vii. 
1. 41. 

διαμπερές, adv. [R. wep], through 
and through, right through, with 
acc., iv. 1. 18, vii. 8. 14. - 

διανμω [R. νεμ], divide up 
among, with acc. of thing and dat. 
of pers., vii. 5. 2. 

διανοέομαι [R. γνω], think out, 
purpose, plan, intend, mean, with 
ace. or with inf., ii. 4. 17, iii. 2. 8, 
v. 7. 15, vi. 1. 19, vii. 7. 48. 

διάνοια, as [R. γνω], way of 
thinking, purpose, intention, v. 6. 
91. 

διαπαντός, properly διὰ παντός, 
see πᾶς. 

διαπέμπω [πέμπω], send in dif- 
erent directions, send round, abs. 
or with acc., i. 9. 27, iv. 5. 8. 

διαπεράω [R. wep], cross through 
or over, iv. 3. 21. 
διαπλέω [R. πλεξΕ], sail over or 
across, abs. or with εἰς and acc., 
vii. 2. 9, 6. 18, 8. 1. 
διαπολεμέω [πολεμέω], carry a 
war through, fight it out, Lat. dé- 
bell6, with dat., iii. 3. 3. 
διαπορεύω [R. περ], carry across, 
set over, ii. 5. 18; pass. and fut. 
mid., pass over, march through, 
abs. or with acc., ii. 2. 11, iii. 3. 3, 
vi. 5. 19. 
διαπορέω [R. wep], be utterly at 
ἃ loss, vi. 1. 22. 
διαπράττω [πράττω], work out, 
bring about, accomplish, Lat. effi- 
cid, with acc. or with ὅπως and a 
clause, v. 7. 29, vii. 1. 38, 2. 37; 
generally in mid., which has much 
the same meaning as the act., carry 
one’s point, bring to pass, effect, 
secure one’s object, arrange, obtain 


tween, iv. 8. 13. 


one’s wish or request, make an 


55 διαρπάζω-διαφαίνω 


agreement, stipulate, used abs. or 
with acc. of the object, for which 
the inf. or ace. with inf. or a clause 
with ὥστε or a relative clause may 
stand; the person benefited is ex- 
pressed by dat., and the person 
from whom by παρά and gen., il. 
3. 20, 25, 29, 5. 30, 6. 2, iii, 5. 5, 
iv. 2. 23, γ. 7- 80, vi. 6. 12, vil. 1. 
39, 7. 24. Phrases: πρὸς τὸν Σεύ- 
θην περὶ σπονδῶν διεπρᾶττοντο, they 
tried to arrange a@ truce with Seu- 
thes, vii. 4. 12, ef. vii. 2. 7; φιλίαν 
διαπρᾶξάμενοι πρὸς Μήδοκον, having 
concluded an alliance with Medo- 
cus, Vii. 3. 16. Riss 
διαρπάζω [R. dp], tearin pieces, 
lay waste, plunder, sack, spoil, Lat. 
diripio, i. 2. 19, το. 2, 18, ii. 2. 16, 
v. 2. 19, vii. 1. 25. 
Stappéw [péw], flow through, run 
through, with διά and gen., v. 3. 8. 
Siapptrrw and Siappimréw [ῥέ- 
πτω], throw round, scatter, Lat. 
disicid, divide among, V. 8. 6, Vil. 
. 23. 
διάρρῖψις, ews, ἡ [διαρρίπτω], α 
tossing about, scattering round, V. 
8. 7. 
διασημαίνω [σημαίνω], point out 
clearly, announce publicly, ii. 1. 23. 
διασκηνέω, διεσκήνησα [R. σκα], 
in aor., take up one’s quarters 
apart, go into quarters separately, 
sometimes with εἰς and acc. of 
place, iv. 4. 8, 5. 29. 
διασκηνητέον, verbal [R. σκα], 
must encamp apart, iv. 4. 14. 
διασκηνόω [R. coxa], encamp 
apart ; be quartered apart, iv. 4. 10. 
διασπάω [R. ora], draw apart ; 
in Anab. always pass. and gener- 
ally of soldiers, be separated, scat- 
tered, dispersed, i. 5. 9, iii. 4. 20, iv. 
8. 10, 17, v. 6. 32, vii. 3. 38. 
διασπείρω [σπείρω], scatter about, 
prop. of seed; in Anab. used only 
in the pass. of soldiers, be scat- 
tered, be routed, disperse, Lat. dis- 
pergor, i. 8. 25, ii. 4. 3, vi. 5. 28, vil. 
2. 8. 


in all directions ; pass., fly in pieces 
as if from a sling, iv. 2. 3. 
διασῴζω [R.caF], bring through, 
save, save up, keep, v. 6. 18, vi. 6. 
5, 28; pass., be brought through 
safe, come out safe and sound, with 
πρός and acc., v. 4. 5, vii. 8. 19; 
mid., save for oneself, preserve, V. 
. 13. 
διατάττω [R. trax draw up in 
array , Lat. dispond, of soldiers, i. 
7. 1; pass. of skirmishers, posted 
at intervals, iii. 4. 18. 
διατείνω [τείνω], stretch out; 
mid., let oneself out, in the phrase 
πᾶν πρὸς ὑὉμᾶς διατεινάμενον, doing 
my very utmost against you, vii. 6. 
36. 

διατελέω [τέλος], bring quite to 
an end, complete, finish, as a jour- 
ney or road, iv. 5. 11; sometimes 
ὁδὸν is understood, complete the 
march, finish the distance, with 
πρός and acc. of the end in view, 1. 
5.7; with partic., continue to do or 
do constantly, the partic. containing 
the leading idea, iii. 4. 17, iv. 3. 2. 

διατήκω [τήκω], melt up; Pass., 
melt away, iv. 5. 6. 

διατίθημι [R. Oe], set out in 
place, arrange, order, dispose of, 
treat, Lat. dispond, i. τ. 5, ἵν. 7. 4; 
| mid., set out for oneself, esp. In the 
market, sell, Lat. wenale propono, 
vi. 6. 37, vii. 3. 10. 

διατρέφω [τρέφω], feed thor- 
oughly, sustain, support, iv. 7. 47. 

διατριβή, ἢς [διατρίβω], a wast- 
ing away, esp. of time, waste of 
time, delay, vi. 1. 1. 

διατρίβω (τρίβω, τριβ-, τρίψω, 
ἔτριψα, τέτριφα, τέτριμμαι, ἐτρίβην 
(ef. τριβή], rub), rub through, 
waste away, consume, spend, of 
time, Lat. tempus terd, with the 
acc., iv. 6.9, or in pass., vii. 2. 3, 
4. 12; abs., waste time, delay, 
wait, i..5. 9, ii. 3. 9, vii. 3. 18, 

διαφαίνω [R. ha], make show 
through; pass., be visible through, 
shine through, v. 2. 29, impers., 


διασφενδονάω [σφενδονάω], sling 


light shows through, vii. 8. 14. 


διαφανῶς -δίδωμι 


« 


διαφανῶς, adv. [R. ha], distinctly, 
clearly, Lat. perspicué, vi. 1. 24. 

διαφερόντως, adv. [R. dep], dif- 
Serently from others, i.e. peculiarly, 
surpassingly, i. 9. 14. 

διαφέρω [R. hep], carry different 
ways, bear apart, hence be different 
Jrom, Lat. differd, with gen., ii. 3. 
15; be better than, surpass, with 
gen., iii. 1. 87; mid., differ from, 
quarrel, with ἀμφί and gen. of the 
thing, or with πρός and ace. of the 
person and περί with gen. of the 
thing, iv. 5. 17, vii. 6.15. Phrase: 
πολὺ διέφερον, they found it very 
different, t.e. they found it easier, 
iii. 4. 33 (where most editt. have 
the impers. πολὺ διέφερεν, it was a 
very different thing). 

διαφεύγω [R. φυγ], flee away, 


escape, Lat. effugid, abs. or with | 


ace., V. 2. 3, Vi. 3. 4, vii. 3. 43. 

διαφθείρω [φθείρω], destroy alto- 
gether, spoil, ruin, corrupt, bribe, 
Lat. corrumpd, iii. 3. 5, vi. 2. 9; 
pass., be destroyed, break up, or in 
a moral sense, lose credit, iv. 1.11, 
vii. 2. 4, 7. 37. Phrase: διεῴθαρ- 
μένοι τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς, with their 
eyes blinded, iv. 5. 12. 

διάφορος, ov [R. dep], different, 
unlike, at variance, sup., Vii. 6. 15; 
subst., τὸ διάφορον, difference of 
opinion, disagreement, Lat. dissén- 
sid, iv. 6. 3. 

διαφυή, fs [φύω], a natural 
growth between, division, in some 
nuts, v. 4. 29. 

διαφυλάττω [φυλάττω], watch 
closely ; mid., be on one’s guard, 
vii. 6, 22. 

διαχάζω, διεχασάμην (the simple 
xafw, make retire, is Epic only), 
i give ground, fall back, iv. 8. 
1 


διαχειμάζω (χειμάζω, χειμαδ-, χει- 
μάσω, ἐχειμάσθην [ χεῖμα, winter, cf. 
χιών], pass the winter, Lat. hiema), 
winter, spend the winter, vii. 6. 31. 
διαχειρίζω (-χειρέζω, χειριδ-, -χει- 
ριοῦμαι, etc. [R. xep], handle), have 


‘ida 


διαχωρέω [xwpéw], go through, 
pass through; impers., κάτω διε- 
χώρει αὐτοῖς, they had diarrhoea, 
iv. 8. 20. 

διδάσκαλος, ὁ [R.1 Sax], teacher, 
Lat. magister. ‘The Athenian boy 
was under the instruction of teach- 
ers continuously for twelve years, 
from the beginning of his seventh 
year, and the discipline was severe, 
li. 6, 12, v. 8. 18, where note that 
the speaker is Xenophon, an 
Athenian. The boy received in- 
struction in reading, writing, and 
arithmetic, in music (singing and 
the use of the αὐλός and λύρα), 
and in gymnastics. See the school- 
scene, s.v. αὐλός, where instruction 
in the αὐλός is represented at the 
left (a lyre is suspended at the 
centre above) and in writing at 
the right (on the wax-tablet with 
the stylus). 

διδάσκο (διδαχ-), διδάξω, ἐδίδαξα, 
δεδίδαχα, δεδίδαγμαι, ἐδιδάχθην 
[R. 1 Sak], teach, inform, prove, 
show, Lat. doced, abs. or with acc. 
of the pers., with inf. of the thing, 
or with a clause with ws, i. 7. 4, ii. 
506, iii. 2. 32, iv. 5. 36, vii. 7. 47; 
pass., be taught, learn, with ἀπό 
and gen, and a clause with ὅτι, vi. 
5. 18. 

δίδημι [R. Se], bind, tie up, v. 
8.24. (Epic, except here, see δέω, 
bind.) 

δίδωμι (δο-), δώσω, ἔδωκα, δέ- 
δωκα, δέδομαι, ἐδόθην [R. δο], give, 
present, give over, allow, permit, 
pay, give to wife, Lat. dd, with the 
acc. or the dat. alone, or with dat: 
of the pers. and acc. of the thing, 
i. 1. 9, 6. 3, ii. 3. 28, 6. 4, iii. 2. 4, 
3. 18, iv. 4. 14, 5. 8, v. 2. 24, vi. 1. 
12, vii. 1. 7, 2. 38, 3.24; with the 
inf., or with dat. of pers. and inf., 
i. 6. 6, ii. 3. 18, iv. 5. 32, vii. 3. 18; 
with εἰς and acc. of the thing for 
which, i. 2. 27, 4. 9; the agent is 
expressed by ὑπό and gen., vii. 7. 
1; by ἐκ and gen., i. 1. 6; often 


in hand, manage, i. 9. 17. 


in pres, and impf., offer, iii. 4. 42; 


δ᾽ 


when used of gods, bestow, or- | 
dain, grant, with acc., OF with dat. 
and acc., or with inf., iii. I. 23, 2. 
7, vi. 1. 26; δέδοται, U ts ordained, 
vi. 6. 36. 


διείργω -δίκη 


δίκαιον, the right, justice, pl., one’s 
rights, so with ἔχειν and λαμβάνειν, 
have or get one’s rights, Vil. 7. 14, 
17, and in such phrases as ἐκ τοῦ 
δικαίου, and σὺν τῷ δικαίῳ, right- 


διείργω [elpyw], keep asunder, cut | eously, justly, i. 9. 19, ii. 6. 18, παρὰ 


off, with ace, understood, iii. τ. 2. 

διελαύνω [ἐλαύνω], drive through, 
ride through, charge through, abs., 
i. 5. 12, 10. 7, li. 3. 19. 

διελόντες, See διαιρέω. 

διεξέρχομαι [ἔρχομαι, pass out 

rough, Vi. 6. ὅδ. 
" ἀφ καρόμει [ἔρχομαι], go through, 
march through, pass through, com- 
plete, travel, of distance, countries, 
or peoples, abs., with acc., OF with 
διά and gen,, ii. 4. 12, iil. 5. 17, iv. 
1. 5, 5. 19, v. 4. 14, 6, 14 Whe & 5, 
19; with εἰς and acc. of place, vi. 
3.16; of a rumour, spread abroad, 
with ὅτι and a clause, i. 4. 7. 

διερωτάω [ἐρωτάω], ask in turn, 
ask publicly, iv. 1. 26. 

διεσπάρθαι, see διασπείρω. 

διέχω [R. vex], hold apart, sep- 
arate, Lat. sépar6 ; subst., τὸ διέ- 
xov, the separating space, interval, 


τὸ δίκαιον, unjustly, Vv. 8.175; δίκαια 
ἔπαθε, he met his deserts, v. 1. 15. 


δικαιοσύνη, ns [R. 1 Sax], jus- 


tice, Lat. iustitia, i. 9. 16, vil. 


q: 41 
δικαιότης, ros, ἡ [ἢ. 1 ax], 
justice, equal to δικαιοσύνη; ll. 6. 26. 

δικαίως, adv. [R. 1 Sax], with 
justice, rightly, properly, fitly, Lat. 
jure and récté, i. 9. 17, ii. 3. 19, v. 
1. 9, vii. 1. 29. 

δικαστής, οὔ [R. 1 Sax], one who 
awards or decides what is just, a 
dicast, resembling a juryman rather 
than a judge, Lat. iudex, v. 7. 34. 

δίκη, ns [R. 1 Sax], custom, 
usage, right, judgment, justice. The 
meaning of a phrase in which this 
word appears can often be deter- 
mined only from the context, as 
δίκη may signify satisfaction re- 
ceived or punishment inflicted by 
the sufferer of a wrong, as well as 
the atonement made by the crimi- 


Lat. interudllum, iii. 4. 22; intr., 
be separated, be apart, abs., with 
gen., or With ἀπό and gen., i. 8. 17, 
10. 4, iii. 4. 20, 22. 

Sinyéopar [R. ay], lead out in 
detail, set forth, tell, Lat. narro, 
iv. 3. 8, 13, vii. 4. 8. 

διήλασε, see διελαύνω. 

διίημι [Tyne], let go through, let 
passthrough, allow a passage, abs., 
or with acc., and with διά and gen., 
iii, 2. 23, iv. 1. 8, Vv. 4. 2. 

διίστημι [R. στα], sed apart, 
mid. and 2 aor. act., intr., separate, 
open ranks, stand at intervals, 1. 5. 
2, 8. 20, 10. 7. 

δίκαιος, ἃ, ov [R. 1 Sax], right, 
lawful, just, fit, proper, Lat. tus- 
tus, i, 6. 6, vii. 6. 22; Impers., 
δίκαιόν ἐστι, with acc. and inf., il. 


nal or the penalty which he pays; 
‘thus ἱκανὴν δίκην ἔχω, I am abun- 
| dantly satisfied, vii. 4. 24, but τὴν 
δίκην ἔχει, he has his deserts, 1.6. 
his punishment, ii. 5. 38; ¢/- also 
δίκη ἐσχάτη, Lat. ultimum suppli- 
cium, extreme penalty, 1.6. death, 
vi. 6. 15; δίκην ἐπιτιθέναι OF λαμ- 
βάνειν, inflict punishment, Lat. sup- 
plicium stimere, i. 3. 10, iii. 2. 8, 
v. 6. 34, 8. 17; δίκην διδόναι, pay 
the penalty, be punished, Lat. poe- 
nas dare, soluere, ii. 6. 21, ἷν. 4. 14, 
γ. 4. 20, vii. 6. 10; δίκην ὑπέχειν, 
suffer or undergo the penalty, Vi. 6. 
15; τῆς δίκης τυχεῖν, meet the pen- 
alty, vi. 6. 25. The word some- 
times means a reckoning, account, 
trial, investigation, v. 7.34; ¢f. the 


iii . - ίκην ὑπέχειν and διδόναι, 
_1. 37, v. 8. 26; pers., 6i-| phrases ὃ 
igh with inf. I deserve to, it | render account, V. 8. i 18 : peg 
is right that I, so δικαιοτάτους (sc. | πάντας or ring 
παρακαλεῖσθαι), Vi. 1.3; subst., τὸ trial, Υ. 7. 34. 


διμοιρία-δοκέω 58 


Sipoipla, as [δύο - μοῖρα, por- 
tion, cf. μέρος, double portion or 
share, Vii. 2. 36, 6. 1. 

Sivéw, ἐδένησα, ἐδινήθην [δένη, 
whirlpool), whirl round ; mid. in- 
trans., of a dance, vi. 1. 9. 

διό, for 5: 8, on account of which, 
wherefore, therefore, i. 2. 21, v. 5. 
10, vii. 6. 39. 

δίοδος, ἡ [ὁδός], passage, v. 


διοράω [R. 2 Fep], see through, 
discover, v. 2. 30. 

διορύττω [ὀρύττω], dig through, 
make a breach in, of a wall, vii. 8. 
13, 14. 

διότι, for δ ὅτι, on account of 
which, because, since, ii. 2. 14. 

δίπηχυς, υ [δύο + πῆχυς], of two 
cubits, two cubits long, iv. 2. 28. 

διπλάσιος, a, ov [δύο + R. tha], 
twofold, double, of numbers or of 
bulk, Lat. duplus, iv. 1. 13, vi. 5- 
17; διπλάσιον, adv., twice as far, 
with gen., iii. 3. 16. 

δίπλεθρος, ov [δύο + R. wha], of 
two plethra, iv. 3. 1. 

διπλόος, ἡ, ον, contr. ods, ἢ, ody 
[δύο + R. πλα], twofold, double, of 
amount, Lat. duplex, vii. 6. 7. 

Sis, numeral adv. [δύο], twice, 
Lat. bis ; in Anab. only in compo- 
sition, δισ- or δι-. 

δισχίλιοι, αἱ, a [δύο + χίλιοι, 
two thousand, i. 1. 10, iv. 2. 2, vil. 
3. 48. 

διφθέρα, as [cf dépw, soften by 
working, Eng. diphtheria], softened 
or prepared hide of an animal, 
made ready for use, tanned skin, 
leathern bag, i. 5. 10, v. 2. 12. 

διφθέρινος, 7, ov [διφθέρᾷ ], made 
of hide, leathern, ii. 4. 28. 

δίφρος, ὁ [δύο + R. hep], holding 
two, the body of the war-chariot 
(see s.v. ἅρμα), on. the floor of 
which stood the driver and the war- 
rior, i. 8.10. Then, the word los- 
ing its etymological signification, a 
seat, large enough to accommodate 
only one person, stool. The δίφρος 


seat was square and rested on four 
legs, which were either perpendic- 
ular and solidly attached to it (see 
8.0. αὐλός), Or crossed one another 
and were bolted at the centre, so 
that the δίφρος could be closed like 
a camp-stool (see s.v. ἀμφορεύς). 
In this form the legs often curved 
inward below (cf. the Roman sella 
curulis). 

δίχα, adv. [δύο], in two parts; 
δίχα ποιεῖν, divide, vi. 4. 11. 

διχάζω (διχάδ-) [δύο], divide in 
ig 3 intrans., divide, separate, iv. 

διψαω, διψήσω, ἐδίψησα [δίψα, 
thirst, cf. Eng. dipso-mania}, be 
thirsty, Lat. sitid, iv. 5. 27. 

διωκτέον, verbal [διώκω], must 
pursue, iii. 3. 8. 

διώκω, διώξω, ἐδίωξα, δεδίωχα, 
ἐδιώχθην, pursue, chase, hunt, of 
an enemy or of game, Lat. perse- 
quor, i. 4. 7, 8, 5. 2, το. 4, ii. 3. 19, 
iii. 2. 35, iv. 1. 8; abs., give chase, 
follow up a victory, pursue, i. 5. 
3, 8. 19, iii. 3. 8, iv. 6. 24, v. 4. 16, 
vii. 3. 26; intrans., run quickly, 
make haste, vi. 5. 25, vii. 2. 20. 
Phrase: τὸ διώκειν, the pursuit, i. 
8. 25. 
δίωξις, ews, ἡ [διώκω], a pursu- 
ing, pursuit, iii. 4. δ. 

διῶρυξ, vxos, ἡ [ς΄ διορύττωΊ, 
ditch, trench, canal, Lat. fossa, i. 
7. 16, ii. 4. 13, 21, 22. 

δόγμα, aros, τό [R. Sox], that 
which seems to one, principle, 
maxim, Lat. placitum; public de- 
cree, ordinance, standing order, 
Lat. décrétum, iii, 3. 5, vi. 4. 11, 6. 
8, 27. 
δοθῆναι, see δίδωμι. 
δοκέω (δοκ-), δόξω, ἔδοξα, δέδογμαι, 
ἐδόχθην (rare) [R. 80x], 1) con- 
sider, suppose, think, trans., with 
two accs., with inf. or with acc. 
and inf., i. 7. 1, 8. 2, ii. 2. 10, 14, 
ii, 2. 17, v. 7, 26, vi. 1. 8, 17: 2) in- 
trans. and both pers. and impers., 
seem, appear, seem right, best, or 


had neither back nor arms. The 


good, be determined or resolved, 


59 


Lat. widétur, used with the dat., i. | 


δοκιμάζω-δοράτιον 


δόλιος, a, ov [δόλος], treacherous, 


4. 7, ii. 1. 22, 111. 5. 6, iv. 4. 6, V. 5. | traitorous, 1. 4. 7. 


22, vi. 3. 25, vii. 3. 22; with inf., i. 
iv. 1, 26, v. 3. 1, Vi. 1. 25, Vil. 1. 20; 
with dat. and inf., i. 2. 1, 3. 11, il. 
1. 2, 17, iii. 1. 10, 11, iv. 1. 2, ν. 2. 
3, vi. 1. 14, vii. 2. 17; abs., 1. 10. 
6, iii. 5. 18, ν. 2.15, vi. 1. 25, 2. 12, 
see ταῦτα ἔδοξε below; sometimes 
the inf. or the dat. is to be supplied 
from the context, i. 6. 8, vi. 5. 10, 
vii. 1. 6, 2. 16; when impers., with 
dat. and acc. and inf., i. 3. 18, iii. 
1. 30, iv. 3. 15, v. 8. 1, vi. 5: 4, Vii. 
1.31; sometimes a combination of 
the pers. and impers. constructions 
is found, i. 3. 12, iv. 6. 13, v. 6. 32, 
vii. 5. 5, and in this case the phrase 
δοκῶ μοι, like Lat. uideor mihi, 
moderates the statement which fol- 
lows, and gives an air of civility 
and courtesy, like the old English 
methinks, i. 7. 4, vii. 6. 10, 11, 
18. Phrases: at the end of busi- 
ness meetings we find often ἔδοξε 
ταῦτα or ταῦτα ἔδοξε, this was re- 
solved, decided, voted, Lat. placuit 
or uisum est, i. 3. 20, ii. 3. 28, ili. 3. 
38, iv. 8. 14, v. 1. 7, vi. 2. 11, Vil. 1. 
32; δόξαν ταῦτα, having resolved on 
this course, iv. 1.13; τὸ δόξαν, the 
resolution, vi. 1.18; τὰ δόξαντα TH 
στρατιᾷ, the decision of the army, 
i. 3. 20; τὰ δεδογμένα, the conclu- 
sions, Lat. quod uisum est, iii. 2. 39, 
vi. 2. 7; ἐκπλεῖν δεδογμένον εἴη, tb 
had been decided to sail out, v. 6. 
35; ὅτῳ δοκεῖ ταῦτα, ἀνατεινάτω τὴν 
χεῖρα, all in favour of this motion 
will raise their hands, iii. 2. 9, cf. v. 
6.33 ; δοξάτω ὑμῖν, let it be approved, 
let it be sanctioned publicly, Vv. 7.31. 
In the phrase δοκοῦσί μοι ἀπῆλθον, V. 
7.13, δοκοῦσί μοι is used parentheti- 
cally without influencing the con- 
struction (but some read ἀπελθεῖν). 
δοκιμάζω (δοκιμαδ-), δοκιμάσω, 
δεδοκίμασμαι, ἐδοκιμάσθην [R. δοκ], 
test, examine; pass., be accepted 
after examination, of cavalry, iil. 


δόλιχος, ὁ, long race, varying, 


2 11 . 15, ii. 6. 1, 29, iii 1. 38, | acc. to circumstances, from six 
Ἦν 25, , | to twenty-four tinres the length of 


the stadium, g.v., iv. 8.27. Com- 
pare the second set of runners 
in the accompanying illustration, 
where the pace shows that the race 
was a long one. 
δόλος, ὁ [οἷ Lat. dolus, device, 
deceit], craft, fraud, stratagem, V. 
6. 29. 
Addo, οπος, ὁ, a Dolopian (only 
in plur.), i. 2.6. Dolopia, a coun- 
try between Mt. Pindus and Aeto- 
lia, was inhabited by a brave tribe 
which long kept its independence. 
They were perhaps not of Greek 
origin. 

δόξα, ns [R. 80x], opinion, esti- 
mation, in one’s own mind, παρὰ 
τὴν δόξαν, contrary to one’s expec- ἡ 
tation, Lat. contra sespectationem, ὙΜ] 
ii. 1.18; of others about one, rep-/ 
utation, fame, glory, Lat. fama, V1. 
1.21; with εἰς and acc., vi. 5. 14. 

δοράτιον, τό [δόρυ], prop. small 
spear, but in the Anab., Vi. 4. 23, 


rather the pole of the spear, used 
for carrying booty. See 8.0. dopv- 


3. 20. 


φόρος. 


ty i ‘ 


δορκάς- δρεπανηφόρος 60 


δορκάς, dios, ἡ [ef δέρκομαι, see 


clearly, see], a sort of deer, gazelle, 


δορυφόρος, ὁ [δόρυ + R. hep], one 
who carries a spear, spearman, 


with large bright eyes, i. 5.2, v.3.10.| pikeman. But in the Anab. said 


δορπηστός, ὁ [δόρπον, in Hom., 


of those who went out with δορά- 


evening meal], time of the evening | Tia, g.v., to carry the captured 


meal, tea-time, i. 10. 17. 

δόρυ, aros, τό [cf. δρῦς, tree, 
the oak, Eng. tree], prop. stem 
of a young tree, then pole or 
shaft of a spear, and hence, 
spear. The spear and the 
sword (ξίφος, g.v.) consti- 
tuted the weapons of attack 
carried by the Greek hop- 
lite, i. 8. 18, iv. 5.18. The 
spear consisted of a smooth 
shaft, a double-edged iron 
head, technically called λόγ- 
x, Vii. 4. 15, and, properly, 
a spike at the butt end. The 
δόρυ was of great length, iii. 
5. 7, iv. 2. 8. See also s.v. 
ἅρμα (No. 8) and 8.v. ὁπλέτης. 
Xenophon relates that the 
δόρατα of the Mossynoeci 


booty to camp, v. 2. 4. 

SovAcla, as [δουλεύω], slavery, 
Lat. seruitiis, vii. 7. 32. 

δουλεύω, ἐδούλευσα, δεδούλευκα 
[δοῦλος}, be a slave, Lat. seruid, 
iv. 8. 4. 

δοῦλος, ὁ, slave, Lat. seruus, li. 3. 
17, 5. 32, iii. 1. 17, vii. 4. 24; ap- 
plied to all subjects of the Persian 
king, i. 9. 29, ii. 5. 38. 

δοῦναι, see δίδωμι. 

δουπέω, ἐδούπησα [δοῦπος], poetic 
verb, sound heavily, make a din, 
strike heavily, with πρός and ace., 
i, 8. 18. 
δοῦπος, ὁ, poetic word, any heavy 
sound, din, uproar, ii. 2. 19. 
Δρακόντιος, ὁ, Dracontius, an 
exile from Sparta in the Greek 
army, in charge of the games at 


were long and thick, almost 
too heavy for a man to carry, 
V. 4. 25, and that those of 
the Chalybes measured fif- 
teen cubits, which seems to 
be almost incredible, iy, 7 
16. The hoplite carried two 
spears (806 s.v. κνημίς and s.v, 
χλαμύς), One to be hurled, 
the other to be used in the 
charge and in the hand to 
hand fight. The spear was 
carried in the right hand. 
See s.v. ἀσπίς (No. 10) and 
8.U. πελταστής. So arose 
in military movements the 
phrase ἐπὶ δόρυ, to the right, 
iv. 3. 29. See ἀσπίς, where 
note the phrase παρ᾽ ἀσπίδα, 
to the left, iv. 3.26. Other 
phrases: τὰ δόρατα ἐπὶ τὸν 
No. 17, δεξιὸν ὦμον ἔχειν, to keep their 

spears at rest on the right 
Shoulder, vi. 5. 25; τὰ δόρατα els 
προβολὴν καθέντας, lowering or 
couching their spears for the charge, 


Trapezus, iv. 8. 25; sent to Clean- 
der, vi. 6. 30. 

δράμοι, δραμοῦνται, see τρέχω. 
δρεπανηφόρος, ον [δρέπανον + R. 
dep}, scythe-bearing, of chariots, 
Lat. faledtae quadrigae, i. 7. 10, 11, 
12, 8.10. Such chariots were much 
in use among the Persians. Those 
described in the Anab. had, as rep- 
resented in the accompanying cut, 


a stationary scythe inserted in 
each end of the axle, the chariot be- 
ing two-wheeled, and other scythes 
fastened in the axle underneath, 


Vi. 5. 25, οἱ 27. 


with the points downward and the 


61 δρέπανον-δυσμή 


ades turned toward the horses. 
ἜΝ are other representations of 
Persian scythe-bearing chariots In 
which blades are fastened to the 
outside of the felly of the wheel, 
with iron spikes on the inside of 
the felly and between the spokes. 
In these the pole also of the wagon 
ends in an iron spike, and spikes 
and scythes are attached to the 
yokes of the horses. For the gen- 
eral form of the chariot, see 8.0. 
ἅρμα. 
‘thane τό [dpérw, pluck], 
reaping hook, scythe, Lat. falx, 
used on chariots, 1. 8. 10. ' 

Δρίλαι, Gv, the Drilae, a tribe of 
mountaineers living southwest of 
Trapezus, called the most warlike 
people of the Pontus, v. 2. 1, 2, 3. 

δρόμος, ὁ [root Spa, Spap, cf. ἀπο- 
διδρᾶσκω, Eng. dromedary |, a run- 
ning, run, Lat. cursus, 1. 2. 17, ἢν, 
8. 25, v. 2. 31; the dat. δρόμῳ, 
when used of infantry, means on 
the run, double quick, of cavalry, αἱ 
a gallop, and is frequently joined 
with θεῖν and found also with ὁρμᾶν, 
διώκειν, and φεύγειν, 1. 8. 18, iv. 3. 
31, 6. 25, v. 7. 25, vi. 5. 25, Vil. I. 


2. 18. Phrases: of μέγιστον δυνά- 
μενοι, the most powerful, of. Lat. . 
plurimum posse, li. 6. 21, vii. 6. 37 ; 
τὸ ἐξαπατᾶν ae ing the power of 
ception, ii. 6. 26. “ἢ 

ΗΝ 5 ϑὐθου ews, ἡ [δύναμαι], ability, 
means, Lat. facultds, vil. 7. 36; 
generally in a military sense, force, 
troops, ἷ. τ. 6, 3. 12, ii. 1. 13, iii. 4. 
8, iv. 4. 7, vii. 4. 21, so also in pl., 
like Lat. cOpiae, i. 5.9; power, re- 
sources, Lat. opés, i. 6. 7, il. 5. 11; 
influence, position, Lat. auctoritas, 
ii, 6.17, v. 6. 17. Phrases: eés or 
κατὰ δύναμιν, according to one’s 
ability, Lat. pro uiribus, ii. 3. 29, 
iii. 2. 9. 
δυνάστης, ov [δύναμαι], @.mighty 
man, nobleman, i. 2. 20. 
δυνατός, 4, dv [Sivapar], able, in 
both active and passive sense; act., 
powerful, influential, capable, 1. 
9. 24, iv. 1. 12, vii. 7.2; with inf. 
ii. 6. 19, vii. 2. 33, 4. 24; pass., 
possible, practicable, with inf. or 
abs., i. 3. 17, ii. 1. 19, iv. 1. 24, Vv. 
5. 13, or with a rel. and sup. of an 
adv., πείσομαι ἣ δυνατὸν μάλιστα, I 
shall obey to the best of my ability, 
where ἐστί is understood with dv- 


15; running track, race-Course, 
Lat. spatium, iv. 8. 26, see 8.0. 
ἱππόδρομος. : 
δύναμαι, δυνήσομαι, δεδύνημαι, 
ἐδυνήθην [δύναμαι], be able, capa- 
ble, strong enough, can, with inf. 
or abs. with inf. understood, i. 1. 
4, 2. 25, 3. 2, 6. 7, ii. 2. 3, 111. τ, 35, 
iv. 1. 19, v. 2. 16, Vi. 3. 8, vii. I. 28 ; 
often with relatives ws, 7, ὅπῃ, 
ὅσον, ὅποι, ὁποῖα and the sup. of an 
ady., aS μαχόμενοι ws ἂν δυνώμεθα 
κράτιστα, fighting with all our 
might and main, iii. 2. 6, cf. i. 1. 6, 
2. 4, iii, 4, 48, iv. 5. 1, 18, vi. 6. 1, 
vii. 7. 15; less often with ws Or 
ὅσον and sup. of an adj., as ἔχων 
ἱππέᾶς ὡς ἂν δύνηται πλείστους, with 
the largest possible number of cav- 
alry, i. 6. 8, cf. ii. 2. 12, vii. 1. 37, 
2.8; of things, be worth, amount 


var6v and ἡἣ means as, i. 3. 15. 
Phrases: ὡς δυνατόν, (so far) as 
was possible, ii. 6. 8; ἐκ τῶν δυνα- 
τῶν, as well as they could, iv. 
2. 23. ᾿ 

δύνω, see δύω. 

δύο, ‘ote, [δύο], two, Lat. duo, 
generally not declined, i. 1. 1, 2. 
23, ii. 2. 12, iii. 2. 37, iv. 1. 19, γ. 4. 
11, vi. 1.9; but the gen. occurs in 
v. 6. 9, vi. 6. 14, vii. 5. 9 (with 
which cf. vii. 6. 1). Phrase: εἰς 
δύο, two abreast, ii. 4. 26. ἡ" 

δυσ- [φ΄ Eng. dys-peptic |, msep- 
arable prefix signifying hard, ill, 
with difficulty. 

feces, ov [R. Ba], hard io 
travel, of country, V. 2. 2. 

δυσδιάβατος, ov [ἢ. Ba], hard to 
march through, Vi. 5. 19. 

δυσμή, 7s [δύω], α going under, 


to, Lat. ualed, with acc., i. 5. 6, ii. 


of the sun, in Anab. always pl., 


δυσπάριτος- ἑβδομήκοντα θ 


ἡλίου δυσμαί, sunset, Lat. 50118 
occasus, Vi. 4. 26, 5..32, vii. 3. 
34. 
δυσπάριτος, ov [εἶμι], hard to 
get by, hard to pass, of a fortress, 
lv. 1. 25. 
δυσπόρεντος, ov [R. περ], hard to 
get through, of heavy ground, with 
ant... t's. 7. 
δυσπορίᾶ, as [R. περ], difi- 
culty of passing, of a river, iy. 
3.1. 
δύσπορος, ον [R. περ], hard to 
travel, hard to cross, of rivers, ra- 
vines, and roads, if. 5.9, v. 1. 13, 
vi. 5. 12. 
δύσχρηστος, ov [χρηστός, useful, 
verbal of xpdoua:], hard to use or 
manage, of little service, of troops 
in disorder, iii. 4. 19. 
δυσχωρία, as [χῶρος], roughness 
of country, hard or rough country, 
iii. 5. 16. 


9 


E. 


ἐᾷ, see édw. 

ἑάλω, see ἁλίσκομαι. , 

ἐάν, contr. ἄν or ἤν, in crasis κἄν 
for καὶ ἐάν, conditional conj., [εἰ + 
ἄν], if, if haply, used with subjy. 
in the prot. of cond. sentences of 
the vivid future and present gen- 
eral classes, i. 1. 4, 3. 14, iii. 1. 36, 
2. 20, 4. 19, 35, iv. 8. 11, v. 1. 9, 5. 
22; ἐὰν μή, unless, i. 4. 12; ἐάν τε 
εν ἐάν re, with verb to be sup- 
plied, whether ... or, v. 5. 16, vii. 
3. 37. 

ἐάνπερ, conj. [ἐάν], if at least, 
if only, iv. 6. 17. 

ἐαρίζω (dapd-) [Zap, spring, ef. 
Lat. uér, spring], spend the spring, 
ili. 5. 15. 

ἑαυτοῦ, js, of, contr. αὑτοῦ, etc., 


refl. pron. [pronominal stem é (see 


63 ἕβδομος-ἐδηδοκότες 


ἕβδομος, 7, ov [ἑπτά], seventh, 
Lat. septimus, Vi. 2. 12. 

éy-, by assimilation for ἐν- before 
a palatal mute. 

ἐγγίγνομαι [ R. γεν], be born in, be 
innate, be in, Lat. inndscor, Υ. 8. 3. 

ἐγγνάω, ἠγγύησα, ἠγγύηκα, ἔγγε- 
γύημαι, ἠγγυήθην [ἐγγύη, pledge}, 
pledge; mid., pledge oneself, en- 
gage, promise, Lat. sponded, with 
acc. and inf., vii. 4. 13. 

ἐγγύθεν, adv. [ἐγγύς], from close 
by, iv. 2. 27. 

ἐγγύς, adv., near, close by, nigh, 
nearly, comp. ἐγγύτερον, Sup. ἐγγυ- 
τάτω or ἐγγύτατα, of place, abs. or 
with gen., i. 8.8, 10. 10, ii. 2. 15, 
4.1, χὰ TB, 1, ἡ, 23, 
Vi he BOG WE EL Aes sup. with the 
art., nearest, Lat. proximus, il. 2. 
16, v. 7. 13; of time, sup. with 
the art., last, ii. 2.11; of relation, 
nigh on to, very nearly, Lat. fere, 


of power, holding fast, master or 
lord of, with gen., L. 7. 7, v. 4. 16. 
ἐγρηγόρεσαν, see ἐγείρω. 
ἐγχαλινόω [χαλϊνόω], put on a 
bridle ; esp. in perf. pass. éyxexa- 
λινωμένοι, ready bridled, vii. 2. 21, 
. 6. 
i ἐγχειρέω, ἐγχειρήσω, ἐνεχείρησα 
[R. xep], Jay one’s hand on, make 
an attempt, abs., 
Ws tak 
ἐγχειρίδιος, ov 
[R. xep], in the 
hand ; subst., 7d 
ἐγχειρίδιον, dag- 
ger, dirk, as eas- 
ily held in the 
hand, Lat. pi- 
git, We 3 
The ἐγχειρίδιον 
was two-edged, 
and often had 
an ornamented 
handle. In the 


δύω (δυ-), δύσω, ἔδῦσα or ἔδυν, | ob) + αὐτός], of himself, herself, 
δέδυκα, δέδυμαι, ἐδύθην, enter ; in| itself, used both directly and in- 
Anab. always of the sun, enter the directly, i. 1. 5, 2. 7, 14, 7-9, ii. 5. 


iv. 2. 28, v. 4. 13; with gen., Vv. 7. 9: 
éyelpw (éyep-), ἐγερῶ, ἤγειρα ΟΥ̓ 
ἠγρόμην, ἔγρήγορα, ἐγήγερμαι, ἠγέρ- 


second of the 
accompanying 
cuts the handle 


sea, set, Lat. occidd, and in act. | 29, 38, iv. 5. 24, v. 3. 6, 6. 16, 8, 


only in the collateral pres. δύνω, ii. 
2. 3, 13; elsewhere in pres. and 
impf. mid., i. το. 15, ii. 2. 16, v. 


7. 6. 
δῶ, see δίδωμι. 


δώδεκα, indecl. [δύο + δέκα], 


twelve, Lat. duodecim, i. 2. 10, iii. 


5. 16, v. 6. 9, vii. 3. 16. 
δωρέομαι, δωρήσομαι, etc. [R. δο], 


give @ present, present, abs. or 


with acc., vii. 3. 18, 20, 26, 27, 

δωροδοκέω, δωροδοκήσω, ete. [Β. 
δο +R. 2 Sax], accept ἃ present, 
take a bribe, vii. 6. 17. 

δῶρον, τό [R. δο], present, gift, 
Lat. ddnum. It was the universal 
custom among the Persians that 
those who approached the king or 
ἃ satrap should bring him gifts, 
and in general among them gifts 
were freely bestowed. i. 2. 27, 
Ἐκ ἢ fy, 7.\Zi5 Ve G 11, vil. 
3. 16. 

δώσω, see δίδωμι. 


14, vi. 1. 32, vii. 1. 18. The gen. 
with the article takes the place of 
the possessive pron., Lat. suus, as 
ἀφιππεύει ἐπὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ σκηνήν, he 


rode off to his own tent, i. 5. 12, 
of. it. 4. 7, iv. 3. 26, v. 6. 37; in 
this case the substantive may be 
omitted, as rods ἑαυτοῦ, his own 
men, i. 2. 15, cf. iii. 1. 16, 4. 45, iv. 
5. 23, vii. 7. 44. 

ἐάω, ἐάσω, elaca, εἴᾶ κα, εἴᾶμαι, 
εἰάθην, let, allow, permit, with inf., 
or with acc. and inf., i. 4. 7, 9. 13, 
li, 3. 26, iii. 3. 3, v. 8. 22, vii. 4. 
20; οὐκ ἐᾶν, not allow, i.e. refuse, 
Sorbid, prohibit, abs. or with inf., 
i, 4. 9, v. 2. 10, 7. 3, vii. 4. 10; let 
go, neglect, give up, with acc., i. 
9. 18, vii. 3. 2. Phrases: ἐᾶν yal- 
pev, Vii. 3. 23, see χαίρω; ταῦτα 
ela, he let the matter drop, vii. 4. 
11. 

ἑβδομήκοντα, indecl. [ἑπτά + 
εἴκοσι], seventy, Lat. septudginta, 


iv. 7. ἃ. 


θην, rouse; pass. and 2 perf., be 
awakened, wake up, lie awake, keep 
vigil, Lat. uigild, iv. 6. 22, γ.7. 10. 
ἐγκαλέω [R. καλΊ, call in, claim, 
of a debt, vii. 7.33; bring a charge 
against, reproach, blame, of per- 
sons, with dat. and sometimes ἃ 
clause with ws or ὅτι, Vii. 5. 7, 7. 
44, 47. 
ἐγκαλύπτω (καλύπτω, καλυβ-, κα- 
λύψω, ἐκάλυψα, κεκάλυμμαι, ἐκαλύ- 
φθην, cover), cover closely; mid., 
wrap oneself up, iv. 5. 19. 
ἔγκειμαι [κεῖμαι], lie in, be in, 
iv. 5. 26. Mp te 
ἐγκέλευστος, ov [R. keh], insti- 
gated, of persons, with ὑπό and 
gen., i. 3. 13. Le 
ἐγκέφαλος, ov [κεφαλή], within 
the head ; as subst., 6 ἐγκέφαλος (se. 
μυελός, marrow), the brain; of the 
palm tree, the crown, a cabbage- 
like growth at the top, edible and 
of a peculiar flavour, but causing 
headache, ii. 3. 16. 


was faced with 
plates of wood, 
united by rivets. 

ἐγχειρίζω (-χειρίζω, χειριδ-,) -χει- 
αὐ ΩΣ etc. [R. χερ], handle), com- 
mit to the hands of, entrust, Lat. 
mando, iii. 2. 8. : 

ἐγχέω (χέω, χυ-; -χέω, Exea, -κέ- 
xuKa, κέχυμαι, ἐχύθην [root XY cf. 
Lat. fundo, pf. fudi, pour, Eng. 
GUSH, GUT], pour), pour in (se. 
οἶνον), fill a cup, esp. for a libs- 
tion, iv. 3. 18. 

ἐγώ, ἐμοῦ or μοῦ, pers. pron. [ef 
Lat. ego, Eng. I, Lat. mé, Eng. 
ME], J, in the nom. used only when 
emphatic, i. 3. 3, 10, 6. 8, 7. ἢ, ii. 
2. 3, iii. 1. 25, iv. 8. 12, Vv. 1. 7, Vi 
1. 29, vii. 2. 25. 

ἔγωγε [ἐγώ + γέ], 1 for my part, 
Lat. equidem, i. 4. 8, vi. 1. 32. 

ἐδεδοίκεσαν, see δείδω. 

ἔδει, see δέω, lack. 

ἔδεισαν, 566 δείδω. 


No. 19. 


ἐγκρατής, és [R. 1 κρα], possessed 


ἐδηδοκότες, see ἐσθίω, 


ἔδραμον-εἰλήχειν 64 


ἔδραμον, see τρέχω. 

ἔδωκα, see δίδωμι. 

ἔζη, ἔζων, see ζάω, 

ἐθελοντής, οὔ [ἐθέλω], volunteer, 
Lat. uoluntdrius, in a imilitary 
sense, iv. 1. 26, 2. 14; as adj., οἱ 
ἐθελονταὶ φίλοι, friends of their 
own free will, i. 6. 9. 

ἐθελούσιος, a, ov [ἐθέλω], volun- 
tary, of one’s own accord, Lat. 
sud sponte, iv. 6. 19, vi. 5. 14, 

ἐθέλω or θέλω (see below), ἐθε- 
λήσω, ἠθέλησα, ἠθέληκα, wish, be 
willing, be ready, be glad to do 
anything, desire, voluntcer, with 
the inf., which may be understood, 
i, 2. 26, 3. 6, 9. 13, 14, ii. 3. 23, iii. 
I, 20, 4. 41, iv. 1-28, v. 4. 26, vi. 5. 
21, 6. 20, vii. 4.9; with ace. τί, Iv. 
4. 5; with acc. and inf., vi. 1. 32 
(some read συνεθελῆσαι); the par- 
tic. is used as adj., vi. 2.6. Forms 
from θέλω occur rarely, and chiefly 
in the third pers., ii. 1. 14, 6. 18, 
ἯΙ, 2, 16, v. 7. 27, vi. 6. 18; ἣν 
θεὸς θέλῃ, God willing, vii. 3. 49: 
cf. 3. 31. 


| words, εἰ καί, although, or καὶ ei, 
even UY, Ul, 2. 24, vi. 6. 27; εἰ μή, 
Y not, lv. 2. 4, after a negative, 
except, unless, Lat. nisi, i. 4. 18, 5. 
6, ii, 1. 12, iv. 7.5; εἰ δὲ μή, other- 
wise, ii. 2. 1, ili. 2. 3, vii. 1. 8; ef 
τις and εἴ τι, if anybody, whoever, 
whatever, many, some, i. Si: Ry 1, 
| V. 3. 3, vi. 2. 12, vii. 3. 21, 6. 32, 

ela, elace, see ἐάω. 

εἰδέναι, εἰδῆτε, see οἶδα. 

εἶδον, 2 aor. (ἰδ-), used as aor, 
Of dpdw [R. Fi8), see, behold, look, 
observe, perceive, remark, abs. or 
with acc., i. 2. 18, 22, το. 15, ii. 1. 9, 
lii. 1. 11, 4. 24, iv. 2. 7, 3- 12, vi. 5. 
10, vii. 3.7; with ace. (which may 
be omitted) and partic., i. 8. 28, Io. 
10, ii, 3. 18, iii. 1. 31, v. 7. 25, 8. 
15, vi. 6.17; rarely with ὅτε and a 


| clause, iii. 2,23; with a rel. clause, 


iv. 1. 20. 

εἶδος, ovs, τό [R. id]; look, 
shape, ii. 3. 16. 

εἰδότες, see οἶδα, 

εἰκάζω (εἰκαδ-), εἰκάσω, εἴκασα, 
εἴκασμαι, εἰκάσθην [ἔοικα], make 
like; perf. pass., resemble, with 
dat., v. 3. 12, 4. 12; compare and 


| 
} 


"νυ 


infer something, conjecture, JSancy, 
suppose, like the Yankee guess, 
Lat. conicio, abs., with inf., or acc. 
and inf., i. 6. 1, 11, το. 16, iv. 5. 15, 
Vil. 1. 26. 

εἰκός, dros, neut. partic. of ἔοικα, 
q.v., natural, reasonable, likely, 
probable, with or without ἐστί, fol- 
lowed by inf. or ace. and intf., ii. 2. 
19, ili, 1. 13, 2. 10, iv. 6.9, v. 1. 12; 
εἰκὸς καὶ δίκαιον, Lat. aequum et 
tustum, iii. 2. 26; εἰκότα λέγειν, say 
what is reasonable, ii. 3.6. Phrases: 
ws εἰκός and ws τὸ εἰκός, as is (or 
was) likely, reasonable, natural, 
lil. 1. 21, 4. 24; cf. vii. 6. 13. 

εἴκοσι, indecl. [εἴκοσι], twenty, 
Lat. wiginti, i. 2. 5, iii. 4. 7, v. , 
11. 

εἰκότως, adv. [ἔοικα], naturally, 
with good reason, ii. 2. 8, vi. 4. 18, 

εἴληφε, εἰλήφει, see λαμβάνω, 


3: 7, v. 6. 28; 5) joined with other 


εἰλήχειν, see λαγχάνω, 


65 εἷλκον-εἶπον 


εἴλκον, see ἕλκω. 

εἱλόμην, εἶλον, 566 αἱρέω. 

εἰμί (ἐσ-), ἔσομαι [R. eo], be, in 
its widest sense, be in existence, 
exist, take place, happen, used both 
as the copula and as the substantive 
verb, i. 1. 4, 4.4, 10. 15, ii. 2, 3, 21, 
6. 16, til. 1.9, §. 7, Iv. 2 13. 3 Vi 
4. 25, 6. 9, Vi. 2. 2, Vil. 1. 25, 28, 3. 
43. The predicate, when a sub- 
stantive, may be nom., gen., or 
dat. The gen. is either partitive 
or possessive, or of measure or 
material, while the dat. is posses- 
sive. With the possessive gen. or 
dat. the verb is translated belong, 
have, possess, aS τῶν νικώντων τὸ 
ἄρχειν ἐστί, to the victors belongs the 
right to command, ii. 1. 4, cf. 1. 1.6, 
ii, 1. 11, iii. 2. 39, iv. 3. 4, vii. 3.19; 
ὄνομα δὲ ἣν τῇ πόλει Μέσπιλα, the 
city had the name of Mespila, 
iii. 4. 10, of. i. 5. 4, ii. 4.18; λεγέτω 
τί ἔσται τοῖς στρατιώταις, let him 
state what the soldiers are to have, 
ii. 1. Woe L Ἄχ ἃ 20540 
δεῖπνον ἣν καθημένοις, they had their 
dinner sitting, vii. 3. 21. Exam- 
ples of other gens. and dats. will 
be found in i. 2. 3, 4. 9, ii. 6. 20, 26, 
iii. 4. 7, 10, iv. 6.14, vi.2.3. Joined 
with a partic. a periphrastic ex- 
pression is formed, as ἣν δυναμένη 
for ἐδύνατο, ii. 2. 13, cf. Vv. 2. 23, 3. 
8, vii. 6.36. Used impers., ἔστι, it is 
possible, one can, with inf., i. 4. 4, 
ii. 3. 15, iii. 2. 13, iv. 7. 2, v. 6. 10, 
vi. 3.17. In conjunction with rel- 
ative words, as ἔστι δ᾽ ὅστις, some- 
body, i. 8. 20; ἔστιν 6 τι σε ἠδίκησα, 
have I done you any wrong? i. 6. 
7, cf. v. 7. 63 ἣν δὲ τῶν σταθμῶν 
os μακροὺς ἤλαυνεν, some of the 
marches he made were long, i. 5. 
7, ef. ii. 5. 18; ἔστιν of and ἦσαν 
of, some, Vv. 2. 14, vi. 2. 6; &o@’ 
ὅτε and ἣν ὁπότε, sometimes, ii. 6. 
9, iv. 2. 27; οὐκ ἔστιν ὅπως οὐκ ἐπι- 
θήσεται ἡμῖν, it is impossible that 
he will not attack us, ii. 4. 3, cf. v. 
7.73; οὐκ ἣν ὅπου οὐ, everywhere, iv. 


τὸ νῦν εἶναι, for the present, iii. 2. 
37; τὰ ὄντα, facts, possessions, iv. 
4. 15, vii. 8.22; τῷ ὅντιν in fact, v. 
4.20; τὸ κατὰ τοῦτον εἶναι, as far 
as this fellow is concerned, i. 6. 9. 
εἶμι (i-), impf. pe or na [root ι, 
cf. Lat. οὖ, ire, go], go (but the 
pres. ind. always has a fut. sense, 
and so sometimes the inf. and par- 
tic. when in indir, disc., i. 3. 1, 6, 
4. 12, ii. 2. 3, 6.10), come, proceed, 
march, abs., or with the preps. 
eis, él, παρά, and πρὸς, i. 2. 11, 
4. 8, ii. 1. 8, 5. 27, iii. 1. 22, 42, 
2. 16, iv. 2. 4 4. 14, v. 1. 8, 7. 19, 
vi. 5. 15, vii. 2. 17; for phrases 
with διά, iii. 2. 8, see διά ; imv. ἔθι, 
come now, Lat. age, vii. 2. 26, 7. 
27. Phrase: eis χεῖρας ἱέναι, come 
to close quarters, Lat. pugna in 
manis uenit, iv. 7. 15. Verbal 
iréov, q.v. 

εἶπας, εἴπατε, see εἶπον. 

εἴπερ [εἰ], if in fact, if really, 
sometimes strengthened by γέ, i. 7. 
9, ii. 4. 7, iv. 6. 16, vii. 3. 37, 6. 16; 
with causal force, inasmuch as, Vi. 
1. 26, 

εἵπετο, See ἕπομαι. 

εἶπον, 2 aor. (of the 1 aor. are 
ind, εἶχαν, ii. 5. 23, v. 8. 10, and 
imv. εἴπατε, ii. 1.21) [root Fer, cf. 
Lat. woecd, call, udx, voice], say, 
speak, talk, tell, allege, relate, often 
of speeches in an assembly and of 
messages through an interpreter or 
other person, abs. or with acc., i. 3. 
7, 14, 8. 15, ii. 1. 4, 5. 24, iii. 1. 58, 45, 
iv. 3. 10, v. 1. 8, 6. 27, vi. 1. 30, vii. 
3. 25, 39; with a clause in dir. disc. 
with or without ὅτι i. 4. 8, 16, ii. 
1. 21, iii. 1. 45, iv. 6. 10, v. 4. 10, 
vi. 1. 32, vii. 3. 39; with a clause 
in indir. disc. with ὅτι or ws, i. 6. 2, 
9. 18, fi. 1. 21, iL 1. Oy iv. 4. δ 
5. 24, vi. 1. 30, vii. 6. 16; with a 
rel. or interr. clause, ii. 1. 15, 21, 
2. 2, 10, v. 8.2; with dat. of pers., 
either alone or with acc. ora clause, 
£'6.:3, ἢν αν 16,2 2, iv, ν᾿» 
16, 19, 7. 14, vii. 1. 31, 3. 7; with 


5. 31, of. vi. 2. 4. Other phrases: 


acc. and εἰς with acc., v. 6. 37; 


εἴργω-εἰσβολή 66 


with περί and gen., ii. 1.21; with 
advs., aS ὧδε, οὕτως, ev, ii. 3. 24, vi. 
1. 30, vii. 2. 32. Often the word 
may be rendered reply, retort, 
when πρός with acc. of the thing, 
with or without dat. of pers., is 
wes ἢ δ χα 2), vi ἃ 38 
With inf., or acc. and inf., the 
word means command, order, move 


(in an assembly), propose, i. 3. 14, | 


il, 3. 2, iv. 5. 4. : : 
εἴργω (εἰργ-), εἴρξω, elpta, elpyuat, 
εἴρχθην, shut out, keep off, Lat. ex- 


thing, vi. 3. 8, 6. 16 (fut. mid. as 
pass.) ; prevent, hinder, Lat. pro- 
hibed, with ὥστε μή and inf., iii. 3. 
16; shut in, hem in, Lat. inclidd 
(in this sense usually written with 
rough breathing, but not so in edd, 
of Anab.), iii. 1. 12. 

εἴρηκα, εἴρημαι, see εἴρω. 

εἰρήνη, ns [R. 1. Εερ], agreement, 
result of an agreement, t.e. peace, 
Lat. paz, ii. 6. 2, iii. 1. 37, v. 7. 27, 
vii. 7. 33. 

εἴρητο, see εἴρω. 

εἴρω (ép-), pres. Only in Epic, the 
Attic forms being fut. ἐρῶ, pf. εἴρη- 
ka, elpnuat, aor. ἐρρήθην [R. 1 Fep], 
say, mention, tell, with acc. or a 
clause in indir. disc. with ws or ὅτι, 
i. 2. 5, 3. 5, ii. 5. 2, 12, iii, 2, 33, νυ. 
1. 5, vi. 3.1; tell, order, in pass. 
with dat. of pers. and inf., iii. 4. 3, 


4. Phrase: τὰ εἰρημένα, what has | 


been said, the foregoing, v. 5. 24, 
ἡ. bE 

els, prep. with acc. [év], in, into, 
to, used of place after verbs of 


motion, i. 2. 20, 22, 3. 14; often | 


with a personal object, among, 
against, into the country of, i. 1. 
Ui, iv. 5.. 18,7. 1, v.32. δε ΨΥ 6. 
27, 28, 37; with verbs of rest, but 


implying previous motion, where |_ 


Eng. uses in, i. 1. 3, 2. 2, 3, ii. 5. 
33, Vii. 1. 11, 4.6; of time, up to, 
during, in, at, i. 7. 1, ii. 3. 25, iii. 1. 
3, iv. 1. 15, v. 3. 10, vii. 1. 35; εἰς 
τὴν νύκτα brodver Ia, take off one’s 
shoes for the night, iv. 5. 13; of 


| measure and limit, with numerals, 
up to, at most, to the number of, 
i. 2. 8, &. 6, il. 2, 7, iv. 8. 15, ¥. 2. 
|4; els τρίς, even to three times, vi. 
4. 16, 19; els δύο, two abreast, ii. 4. 
26; els ὀκτώ, eight deep, Vii. 1. 23 ; 
of the end, object, object of refer- 
ence, in regard to, for, in respect 
to, with verbs or adjectives, i. 1. 9, 
10, 2. 27, 8.1, 9. 14, 23, ii. 3. 28, 6. 
6, 30, iii. 3. 19, vi.5.14. Phrases: 
els καλὸν ἥκειν, come in the nick of 


xOnY, 8 | time, iv. 7.3; els πλάγιον, obliquely, 
cludo, with ἐκ or ἀπό and gen. of 


i. 8. 10; els ἀφθονίαν, in abundance, 
vii. 1. 88, In composition εἰς sig- 
nifies into, on, in. 

els, ula, ἕν, gen. ἑνός, μιᾶς, ἑνός, 
numeral adj., one, Lat. ἄπιιβ, i. 2. 
Gas. μι fv...4.. 30, vi. 2. 

» Vi. 3. 16, vii. 2. 29; as pron. 
Stronger than tis, i. 3. 14, but 
sometimes modified by it, ii. 1. 19, 
vi. 6. 20; els ἕκαστος, each indi- 
vidual, Lat. tinusquisque, vi. 6. 12; 
ἕνα μή, not a single man, stronger 
than μηδένα, Υ. 6.12. Phrase: δῶρα 
πλεῖστα els ye ὧν ἀνὴρ ἐλάμβανε, he 
received, for one man, the very 
greatest number of presents, i.e. he 
received more than any other indi- 
vidual, Lat. tinus omnium mdaz- 
imé, i. 9. 22, ef. 12. 

εἰσάγω [R. ay], lead into or in, 
with εἰς and acc. of place or πρός 
and acc. of pers., i. 6. 11, vii. 3. 27, 
5.9; in theatrical sense, bring on, 
Lat. indticé, vi. τ. 12. 

εἰσακοντίζω [R. ax], throw in a 
javelin, vii. 4. 15. 

εἰσβαίνω [R. Ba], go on board, 
embark, with εἰς πλοῖον, v. 7. 15. 

εἰσβάλλω [βάλλω], throw into; 
intr., throw oneself into, invade, 
with εἰς and acc. of place, i. 2. 21, 
v. 4. 10; of rivers, empty, i. 7. 15. 

εἰσβιβάζω (βιβάζω, βιβαδ-,-βιβάσω 
or βιβῶ, -eBiBaca [R. Ba], make 
go), make go on, of persons, put on 
board, embark, Lat. impond, v. 3. 1. 

ele Bodh, 7s [βάλλω], inroad, in- 
vasion, Vv. 6.7; place of entrance, 


pass, i, 2. 21. 


67 εἰσδύομαι-ἑκατόν 


εἰσϑδύομαι [δύω], go down into, 
sink into, With εἰς and acc., iv. 5. 
14, 

εἴσειμι [εἶμι], go in, enter, of 
places, abs. or with εἰς and acc., 
vii. 1. 15, 39, 2. 30; of persons, 
into the presence of, with παρά and 
ace., i. 7. 8; of thoughts, occur to, 
with ace. of pers. and ὅπως ἄν with 
subjv., vi. 1. 17. 

εἰσελαύνω [ἐλαύνω], drive into; 
intr., march into, i. 2. 26. 

εἰσέρχομαι [Epxoua], come in, 
enter, abs. or with els, ἐπί, or πρός 
and acc., i. 2. 21, iv. 7. 4, v. 5. 20, 
vii. 1. 38, 3. 21; of an actor’s en- 
trance, vi. 1. 9. 

εἴσεται, see οἶδα. 

εἴσοδος, ἡ [ὁδός], way into, en- 


trance, of a house, ravine, ory 


stronghold, sometimes with εἰς and 
acc., iv. 2.3, 5. 25, vi. 5. 1. 

εἰσπηδάω (πηδάω, πηδήσομαι, 
ἐπήδησα, -πεπήδηκα [R. wed], leap), 
spring into, with εἰς and acc., i. 

. 8. 
; εἰσπίπτω [R. wer], tumble in, 
rush in or into, abs. or with eds 
and acc., i. 10. 1, vii. 1. 17, 19. 

εἰσπλέω [R. πλεΕ], sail into ; els 
τὸν Πόντον εἰσπλέοντι, as one enters 
the Pontus, vi. 4. 1. 

εἱστήκει, see ἵστημι. 

εἰστρέχω [τρέχω], run in, rush 
in, abs., iv. 7. 12, v. 2. 16. 

εἰσφέρω [R. hep], carry into or 
in, Vil. 3. 21. 

εἰσφορέω [R. hep], bring or carry 
into, with εἰς and acc., iv. 6. 1. 

εἴσω, adv. [ἐν], inside, within, 
inside of, inwards, Lat. intus and 
intra, with verbs of rest or of mo- 
tion, sometimes with gen. or eis 
and acc., i. 2. 21, 6. 5, ii. 4. 12, ili. 
3 Ty ¥, eA, 7 Ty Wh. 2. By Fie. 
18. 


εἰσωθέω [ὠθέω], thrust in; mid., 
Sorce one’s way in, V. 2. 18. 

εἶτα, adv., of time, then, there- 
upon, afterwards, thereafter, i. 5. 
10, 12, vii. 8.7; πρῶτον μὲν... εἶτα 


dé, i. 2. 16, 3. 2, of. 6. 10, ii. 4. 22; 


with a partic., which may be trans- 
lated as a finite verb, i. 2. 25, iv. 7. 
13. 

εἴτε, disjunctive conj. [εἰ + τέ], 
doubled, whether ...or, if... or, 
Lat. stwe ... stwe, ii. 1, 14, ili. 1, 40, 
2. 7, vi. 6. 20; in indir. questions, 
iv. 6. 8, vii. 7. 18. 

εἶχε; see ἔχω. 

εἴωθα, 2 pf. as pres., εἰώθειν, 2 
plpf. as impf., of Epic ἔθω, be ac- 
customed [cf. ἔθος, τό, custom, ἦθος, 
76, custom, character, Eng. ethic}, 
be accustomed, be used, with int., 
vii. 8. 4, 

εἴων, see édw. 

ἐκ, see ἐξ, 

ἑκασταχόσε, adv. [ἕκαστος], in 
every direction, all round, Iii. 5. 
17, 

ἕκαστος, 7, ov [superlative form, 
cf. ἑκάτερος], each, each one, every, 
every one, used of more than two, 
Lat. quisque, i. 1. 6, 7. 7, iii. 1. 
3, iv. 3. 29, 7. 10, v. 2. 16, vi. 4. 
9, vii. 2. 17; when used .with a 
subst. it is generally in the pred. 
position, i. 8. 9, iv. 8. 12, 15, vi. 3. 
2, vii. 4.14; the sing. is often used 
in appos. to a pl., i. 7. 15, iv. 2. 12, 
vi. 6. 12. 

ἑκάστοτε, adv. [ἕκαστος], every 
time, always, ii. 4. 10. 

ἑκάτερος, a, ov [comparative 
form, cf. ἕκαστος], each of two, Lat. 
uterque, When used with a subst. 
it is in the pred. position, i. 8. 27, 
vi. 1. 9, vii. 1. 28; pl. both, both 
parties, Lat. utrique, iii. 2. 36, v. 
5.25. Phrase: τῆς ὁδοῦ καθ᾽ éxd- 
τερα, on both sides of the road, Vv. 
ἢ. 

ἑκατέρωθεν, adv. [ἑκάτερος], from 
both directions, on both sides, Lat. 
utrimque, i. 8. 18, 22, vi. 4. ὃ, 5. 
25. 

ἑκατέρωσε, adv. [éxdrepos], in 
both directions or ways, Lat. in 
utramque partem, i. 8. 14. 

ἑκατόν, indecl. [ἑκατόν], one 
hundred, Lat. centum, i. 2. 25, ii. 
4. 12, iii. 1. 33, vi. 2. 3. ' 


᾿Ἑκατώνυμος-ἐκκλησιάζω 68 


*“Exarévupos, ὁ, Hecatonymus, a 
Sinopean envoy, v. 5. 7, 24, 6. 3. 

ἐκβαίνω [R. Ba], step out, esp. 
from a boat, disembark, Lat. égre- 
dior, Vv. 4.11; go forth, march out, 
esp. from lower to higher ground, 
abs. or with πρός, ἐπί, or εἰς and 
acc., iv. 2.1, 3, 3. 3, 23, vi. 3. 20, 

ἐκβάλλω [βάλλω], throw away, 
Lat. éicid, ii. 1.6; cast out, expel, 
banish, drive out, sometimes with 
ἐκ and gen., i. 1. 7, 2.1; pass., éx- 
βαλλόμενοι εἰς rods πολεμίους, thrust 
out among or abandoned to the foe, 
Vii. 1. 16; ἐκ τῆς φιλίᾶς ἐκβάλλε- 
σθαι, be deprived of one’s favour, 
Vii. 5. 6. 

ἔκβασις, ews, ἡ [R. Ba], a going 
out, esp. place of going out, out- 
let, pass, of mountains or ravines, 
sometimes with εἰς and acc., iv. 1, 
20, 2.1, 3. 20; ἡ τοῦ ποταμοῦ ἄνω 
ἔκβασις, the up-country road Jrom 
the river, iv. 3. 21. 

᾿Εκβάτανα, τά [old Pers. Hag- 
matana], Ecbatana, an ancient 
city and capital of Media, about 
12 stadia from Mt. Orontes. It 
was greatly improved by the Per- 
sians and became the summer resi- 
dence of the king, ii. 4. 25, iii. δι 
15. The city and palace were 
famous in antiquity for their mag- 
nificence. Only insignificant ruins 
remain, near the modern Hamadan. 

ἐκβοηθέω [R. BoF + θέω], come 
out to the rescue, with ἐκ and gen., 
vii. 8. 15. 

ἔκγονος, ov [R. γεν], born of, de- 
scended from; subst., of ἔκγονοι, 
descendants, iii. 2. 14; of animals, 
τὰ ἔκγονα, the young, iv. 5. 25. 

ἐκδέρω (δέρω, δερῶ, Zdeipa, δέδαρ- 
μαι, ἐδάρην [R. Sap], flay), strip 
off ἣν skin, flay, with acc. of pers., 
1,28. 

ἐκδίδωμι [R. $0], give away or 
up, deliver up, Lat. dédé, vi. 6. 10, 
18; give away from one’s house, 
of marrying off a daughter, Lat. 
nuptum do, in pass. with παρά and 


ἐκδύω [δύω], put off, strip off: 
mid. and 2 aor. act., strip oneself, 
iv. 3. 12. 

ἐκεῖ, adv., there, in that place, 
with verbs of rest, i. 3. 20, 8. 12, 
vi. 3. 16, vii. 2. 15; with verbs of 
motion, thither, iii. 1. 46, v. 6. 20. 

ἐκεῖθεν, adv. [ἐκεῖ], thence, from 
there, Lat. illinc, v. 6. 24. 

ἐκεῖνος, ἡ, 0, dem. pron. [ἐκεῖ], 
that, that man there, Lat. ille, used 
prop. of a person or thing remote 
in thought or actual distance from 
the speaker or subject in hand, 
but sometimes refers to one near 
at hand or lately mentioned, and 
even to the subject itself; in agree- 
ment with a subst. it has the 
pred. position ; it is often used as 
a strong form of the pers. pron., 
he, she, it; i. 1. 4, 2.7, 15, Ἄν. Ὁ. 
li. 5. 88, 6. 8, 14, 19, iii, 1. 29, 2. 5, 
iv. 3. 20, v. 6. 31, vii. 3.4. Phrase: 
ἐκ τοῦ ἐπ᾽ ἐκεῖνα, see ἐπέκεινα. 

ἐκεῖσε, adv. [ἐκεῖ], to that place, 
thither, Lat. illic, vi. 1. 33, 6. 36. 

ἐκέκτησο, see κτάομαι. 

ἐκήρυξε, ἐκηρύχθη, see κηρύττω. 

ἐκθλίβω (θλέβω, θλιβ-, θλέψω, 
ἔθλιψα, ἐθλέφθην, press), squeeze 
out, crowd out, of soldiers crowded 
out of their ranks, iii. 4. 19, 20. 

ἐκκαθαίρω [καθαίρω], cleanse 
thoroughly, of shields, burnish, i. 
2. 16, an inferior reading for the 
following word. 

ἐκκαλύπτω (καλύπτω, καλυβ-, κα- 
λύψω, ἐκάλυψα, κεκάλυμμαι, ἐκαλύ- 
Pony, cover), uncover, said of 
shields, when carried without the 
usual leathern case (σάγμαλ), i. 2. 
10. 

ἐκκλησία, ἃς [R. kad], assem- 
bly, the regular word for town 
meeting, the people being called 
out by proclamation of the herald ; 
in Anab. meeting or assembly of 
soldiers, with συνάγειν or ποιεῖν, i. 
3, 2, 4. 12. 
ἐκκλησιάζω, ἐκκλησιάσω, ἐξεκλη- 


dat., iv. 1. 24, 


σίασα or ἠκκλησίασα [R. wad], hold 
an assembly, abs., v. 6. 37. 


69 ἐκκλίνω-ἐκτάττω 


“Δ,χ,.͵χινΨν mn 
ἐκκλίνω (κλένω, κλιν-, κλινῶ, ἔκλινα, 


κέκλιμαι, ἐκλίθην or -εκλίνην [ Οἵ. ἀπο- | 4 


κλένω], bend), of soldiers, bend out 
of line of battle, give ground, Lat. 
inclino, abs., i. 8. 19. 

ἐκκομίζω [κομίζω], carry out, 
draw out, as wagons from the mud, 
i. 5. 8; bring off, lead off, of sol- 
diers, vi. 6. 36; mid., carry off for 
one’s own use, V. 2. 19. 

ἐκκόπτω [κόπτω], cut away from 
what surrounds, of trees from a 
wood, or of an entire wood, where 
we say cut down (cf. ἐκπίπτω), 1. 4. 
10, ii. 3. 10. 

ἐκκυβιστάω (κυβιστάω, -εκυβί- 
στησα [κύπτω, stoop], tumble head 
foremost), turn heels over head, 
throw a somersault, of a dancer, 
vi. 1. 9. 

ἐκκυμαίνω (κυμαίνω, κυμαν- [κῦμα, 
billow, cf. Lat. cumulus, heap, pile}, 
surge), billow out, surge forward, 
of part of a line of battle, i. 8. 18. 

ἐκλέγω (-λέγω, -ἔέλεξα, -είλοχα, 
«εἰλεγμαι. -ελέγην [ R. Aey], gather), 
pick out, Lat. déligo, iii. 3. 19; 
mid., select for oneself, choose, ii. 
3. 11, v. 6. 20. 

ἐκλείπω [λείπω], leave out, aban- 
don, of cities, houses, θέ.) with 
acc., Which may be understood, ili. 
4. 8, iv. 1. 8, vil. 4. 2; THY woduw 
ἐκλιπεῖν els χωρίον ὀχυρὸν ἐπὶ τὰ ὄρη, 
leave the city and flee to a fortress 
in the mountains, i. 2. 24; intr., 
give out, of snow, melt away, lV. 5. 
15. 

ἐκμηρύομαι (μηρύομαι, ἐμηρῦσά- 
μην, draw, intr., wind), intr., wind 
out, of an army, dejfile, vi. 5. 22. 

ἐκπέμπω [πέμπω], send off or 
away, abs., iii. 2. 24; mid., send 
from oneself, let go, dismiss, V. 2.21. 

ἐκπεπληγμένος, ἐκπεπλῆχθαι, see 
ἐκπλήττω. 

ἐκπεραίνω [R. περ], bring to an 
end, fulfil, accomplish, with wore 
and inf., v. 1. 13. 

ἐκπηδάω (rnidw, πηδήσομαι, ἐπή- 


ἐκπίμπλημι [R. πλα], jill up, iii. 
. 22. 

ἐκπίνω [R. πο], drink off or up, 
i, 9. 25, 

ἐκπΐπτω [R. wer], fall out, of 
trees from their place in a wood, 
where we say fall down (cf. ἐκ- 
κόπτω), ii. 3. 10; from one’s house 
or country, be driven out, be exiled, 
with gen. or ἐκ and gen., v. 2. 1, 
vii. 2.32; of ἐκπεπτωκότες, the ex- 
iles, Lat. exsulés, 1. 1. 7; ἐκ γῇ: 
ὁδοῦ ἐκπίπτειν, drop out of the road, 
v. 2. 81; used also abs., esp. of 
voyagers, be shipwrecked, vi. 4. 2, 
vii. 5. 12, and of hasty movement, 
tumble out, hurry out, v. 2. 17, 18. 
ἐκπλαγείς, See ἐκπλήττω. 

ἐκπλέω [R. πλεξΕ], sail of or 
away, ii. 6. 2, iii. 1. 8, Vv. 6.21, vi. 4. 
8, vii. 6. 1. 

ἔκπλεως, wy, gen. w [R. πλα], 
jilled up, complete, full, ofa square 
of men, and also of pay, ili. 4. 22, 
vii. 5. 9. : 
ἐκπλήττω, aor. pass. ἐξεπλάγην 


᾿[πλήττω], strike out of, esp. out 


of one’s senses, amaze; pass., be 
astounded, surprised, frightened 
out of one’s wits, sometimes with 
dat. of cause or ἐπί and dat., i. 5. 
13, 8. 20, ii. 2. 18, v. 6. 36, vi. 1. 12, 
vii. 6, 42. 

ἐκποδών, adv. [R. wed], out of 
one’s way, of removing an obsta- 
cle, ii. 5.29; ἐκποδων ποιεῖσθαι with 
acc., put one out of the way, i. 6.9. 

ἐκπορεύομαι [R. περ], go out, 
march forth, v. 1. 8, 6. 33, vi. 6. 
37. 

ἐκπορίζω [R. περ], bring to light, 
provide, supply, Υ. 6. 19, vi. 2. 4. 

ἔκπωμα, ατος, τό [R. πο], drink- 
ing cup, goblet, iv. 3. 25, 4. 21, vil. 
3. 18. 

ἐκταθείς, see ἐκτείνω. , 

ἑκταῖος, a, ον [ξξ], on the sixth 
day, Vi. 6. 38. 

ἐκτάττω [R. tax], draw out in 
line of battle; mid., form line of 
battle, Lat. explicd aciem, Υ. 4. 12, 


δησα, -πεπήδηκα [R. wed], leap), 
spring out, vii. 4. 16. 


vii, 1. 24. 


ἐκτείνω.--ἐλεῖν 


ἐκτείνω [τεἰνω], 


70 


stretch out,|comp. of μικρός, of size, number, 


t * t h f ] re 8 l 4 ᾿ "" 
5 ] ἢ ὴ I] ] 3 M4 3 3 | . hf ν 
8, man i. Ῥ, st € a Si 4. 9 ᾿ . 9 . 2. Vil, 2 6, 


length, Υ. 1. 2. 


Phrase: ἔλαττόν ἐστι with inf., it 


ἐκτοξεύω [R. rax], shoot arrows | is easier, vii. 7. 35. 


from a place, vii. 8. 14. 


| ἐλαύνω (ἐλα-), ἐλῶ or ἐλάσω, 


ἐκτός, adv. [ἐξ], outside of, with | ἤλασα, ἐλήλακα, ἐλήλαμαι, ἠλάθην 


gen., ii. 3. 3. 


| . Ἂ »" " 
| lef. Eng. elastic], drive, set in mo- 


ἕκτος, ἡ, ov [ξξ], sixth, Lat. sex- | tion, of animals and men, iv 7. 24 
᾿ Ψν ἂν 4 


tus, vi. 2. 12. 

ἐκτρέπω [τρέπω], turn out, di- 

vert ; pass. and 2 aor. mid. intrans., 

turn aside or out of the way, iv. 5. 

15. 
ἐκτρέφω [τρέφω], bring τ 

ΐ ὦ}, bring up, rear 

of a child, Lat. énutrid, vii. 2. 32. 

ἐκτρέχω [τρέχω], rush out, esp. 

7 attack, make a sally, v. 2. 17, 4. 


ἐκτῶντο, see κτάομαι. 
ἐκφαίνω [R. φα], bring to light; 
phrase : πόλεμον ἐκφαίνειν, open hos- 
tilities, with πρός and acc., iii. 1. 16. 
ἐκφέρω [R. hep], carry out a per- 
son as dead, Lat. efferd, vi. 1. 6: 
bring to accomplishment, in the 
phrase ἐκφέρειν πόλεμον πρός τινα, 
open hostilities against one, Lat. 
bellum inferre alicui, iii. 2. 29 ; 
carry forth to people, announce, 
report, sometimes with εἰς and acc. 
i. 9. 11, v. 6. 17, 29. 
ἐκφεύγω [R. φυγ], flee out of, es- 
cape, abs., with πρός, or with μή 
and inf., i. 3. 2, 10. 3, vii. 4. 6. 
ἑκών, ofca, dy, willing, of one’s 
own choice, in pred. position when 
with art., and then generally best 
translated as adv., willingly, vol- 
untarily, 1. 1. 9, ii. 4. 4, iii. 2. 26 
γι vib. 2. 26. 
ἔλαβον, see λαμβάνω. 
ἐλάα or ἐλαία, as [ε΄. Eng. o/ive}, 
olive tree, Lat. oliua, vi. 4. 6; the 
fruit of the tree, olive, vii. 1. 37. 
ἔλαιον, τό [Γ΄ édda, Eng. οἱ, 
olive oil, oil, Lat. oleum, oliuom, 
used especially after the bath, iv. 
4. 13, v. 4. 28, vi. 6. 1. 
TTr@v, ov, gen. ovos [ἐλαχύ 
small, little, root Xax, ef. Ae fonts 


v. 8. 5, 15, vi. 1. 8, vii. 7. 55; but 
the obj. is generally omitted and 
the word used intrans., ride a horse 
drive in a chariot, abs., with εἰς or 
πρός and acc., or διά and gen., i. 5. 
16, li. 5. 32, iii. 4. 4, iv. 8. 28, vi. 5. 
13, vii. 3. 42, 44; in the phrase 
ἐλαύνων ἱδροῦντι τῷ ἵππῳ, i. 8. 1 
the original obj. becomes dat. : in 
(τὰ ἅρματα) ἐλῶντα εἰς τὰς τάξεις, 
1. 8. 10, it becomes subj.; with 
στράτευμα omitted; march, abs., 
with cognate acc., with acc. of 
space, or εἰς or ἐπί and acc., i. 2.23 
5. 7, 18, 7.12, 8. 24. 

ἐλάφειος, ον [ἔλαφος], of or be- 
longing to deer ; κρέα ἐλάφεια, veni- 
80N, 1. 5. 2. 

ἔλαφος, ὁ, ἡ, deer, stag, hind, 
Lat. ceruus, v. 3. 10, 7. 24. 

ἐλαφρός, d, dv, light in weight or 
motion; esp. of light-armed sol- 
diers, who were active, nimble 
Lat. expeditus, iii. 3. 6, iv. 2. 27. 
ἐλαφρῶς, adv. [ἐλαφρός], lightly, 
nimbly, swiftly, vi. 1. 12, vii. 3. 33. 
λάχιστος, ἡ, ov [ο΄ ἐλάττων], 
used as sup. οὗ μικρός, of number, 
distance, and space, fewest, least, 
shortest, lowest, iii. 2. 28, iv. 6. 10, 
vi. 3. 16, 4.3; used adv., τοὐλάχι- 
στον, at the least, v. 7. 8. 
ἐλέγχω, ἐλέγξω, ἤλεγξα, ἐλήλεγ- 
μαι, ἠλέγχθην, investigate, examine, 
cross-question, with δὴ ἰπύίριτσ. 
clause, lil. 5. 14, iv. 1.23; convict, 
mt Fy in pass. with a partic., ii. 
ἐλεεινός, ἡ, dv [ἔλεος, ὁ, pity, of.” 
Eng. alms, eleemosynary], finding 
My sige ng pity, piteous, Lat. miser, 

Ay τι. 


light, Eng. Licut, Lone], used as 


ἑλεῖν, see alpéw, 


71 ἐλελίζω- ἐλπίς 


ἐλελίζω, ἠλέλιξα [ἐλελεῦ, ἃ War 
cry], cry ἐλελεῦ, raise the war-cry, 
always with τῷ ᾿Ενναλίῳ, i. 8. 18, 
vy. 2. 14. This cry followed the 
singing of the paean and the sound 
of the trumpet, and was raised 
during the charge. 

ἑλέσθαι, see aipéw. 

ἐλευθερία, as [ἐλεύθερος], liberty, 
freedom, Lat. libértas, i. 7. 3, iil. 2. 
13, vii. 7. 32. 

ἐλεύθερος, a, ov, Sree, indepen- 
dent, of persons or nations, Lat. 
liber, ii. 5. 32, iv. 3. 4, vii. 4. 24, 
7, 29. 

ἐλέχθησαν, see λέγω. 

ἐλήφθην, see λαμβάνω. 

ἐλθεῖν, 566 ἔρχομαι. 

ἕλκω, ἕλξω, εἵλκυσα, εἵλκυκα, εἵλ- 
κυσμαι, εἱλκύσθην, drag, draw, pull 
up, of persons and of the bow- 
string, iv. 2. 28, 5. 32, v. 2. 18. 

Ἕλλάς, άδος, ἡ [ο΄ Ἕλλην], Hel- 
las, in Homer a city in Phthiotis 
in Thessaly, said to have been 
founded by Hellen, also the dis- 
trict in its neighbourhood, and 
even the whole tract between the 
Enipeus and the Asdpus; later it 
denoted the mainland of Greece as 
distinguished from Peloponnésus ; 
in the historical period, it included 
the whole Greek world, Lat. Grae- 
cia, i. 2. 9, ii. 1. 17, iii. 1. 2, iv. 8.6, 
v. 4. 5, vi. 1. 17, vii. 1. 30. 

‘EAAds, άδος, ἡ, Hellas, the wife 
of Gongylus, hostess of Xenophon 
én Mysia, vii. 8. 8. 

Ἕλλην, nvos, ὁ [ο΄ Eng. Hel- 
lenic|, an inhabitant of Greece, a 
Greek, Lat. Graecus. According 
to the myth Hellen was the son 
of Deucalion and chieftain of the 
tribe from which the Greeks were 
descended. In the Anab. the word 
generally is applied to the Greek 
soldiers in the army of Cyrus, be- 
ing sometimes used as an adj., i. I. 
2, 10. 7, ii. 1. 7, iii. 1. 30, iv. 2. 28, 
v. 4. 16, vi. 3. 7, vii. 6. 36. 

ἑλληνίζω (ἑλληνιδ-), aor. pass. 


talk in Greek, Lat. Graece loquor, 
Vii. 3. 25. 

“Ἑλληνικός, ἡ, 6v [Ἕλλην], Hel- 
lenic, Greek, Lat. Graecus, 1. 1. 6, 
iii. 4. 45, iv. 8. 7, Vv. 4. 34, vi. 3. 10, 
vii. 3.41; τὸ “Ἑλληνικόν, the Greek 
army, i. 2. 1, iii. 4. 34, iv. 1. 10. 
ἑλληνικῶς, adv. [Ἑλληνικός}, in 
the Hellenic language, in Greek, 
Lat. Graecé, i. 8. 1. 

Ἑλληνίς, (50s, ἡ [Ἑλλην], Greek, 
Grecian, fem adj. used with γῆ 
and πόλις, iv. 8. 22, v. 5. 16, vi. 6. 
12, vii. 1. 29. 

ἑλληνιστί, adv. [ἑλληνίζω], in the 
language of Hellas, in Greek, vii. 


Ἑλλησποντιακός, 4, dv [Ἑλλή- 
orovros|, Hellespontine, of cities, 
lying on the Hellespont, i. 1. 9. 
Ἑλλήσποντος, ὁ [“EAAn + πόν- 
τος], the Hellespont, i.e. Helle’s 
sea, named, according to the myth, 
from Helle, who was drowned in 
it while riding with her brother 
Phrixus on the ram with the golden 
fleece to escape their stepmother 
Ino. It is the strait (Dardanelles) 
separating Europe from Asia and 
connecting the Propontis with the 
Aegéan. The ancients called it 400 
stadia long and 7 stadia wide at 
its narrowest part. Here Leander 
swam across to visit Hero, and here 
Xerxes built his famous bridge. 
The possession of this strait was 
of the utmost importance to Ath- 
ens, as it was the key to the coun- 
tries on which she depended for 
grain; hence it was the scene of 
several important naval battles. 
The name is also extended to the 
neighbouring coast, which was full 
of Greek cities, i. 1. 9, ii. 6. 3, vii. 
2. 5. 

ἐλπίζω (ἐλπιδ-), ἤλπισα, ἠλπίσθην 
[ἐλπίς], hope, trust, expect, Lat. 
spero, with fut. inf., iv. 6. 18, Vi. 5. 
17, vii. 6. 34. 

ἐλπίς, (dos, ἡ [root Εελπ, wish, cf. 
Lat. uoluptas, satisfaction, pleas- 


ἡλληνίσθην [ EdAnv], speak Greek, 


ure], hope, Lat. spés, ii. 5. 10; with 


ἐμ---ἐμποδ 72 73 ἐμπόδιος-ἐνάπτω 
μ--ἐμποδίζω ᾿ 


_ 


veJOr Ls. 6; 5/62 
ἐμπόδιος; ov [R. wed], in the way, before, on, at, by, i. 1. 6, 5. 1, 
ee a 
hindering, Vil. ὃ. : 
the hindrance, Vi. 8. 3. 
ἐμποδών, ἃ ᾿ bey 
δ πα in the way; éurodwy εἶναι, 


sen., or aor. or fut. inf. of the thing | nominal stem pe (see ἐγώ), cf. Lat, 
hoped for, ii. 1. 19, iii, 2. 8, iv. 3.| meus, my, Eng. MINE, My], my, 
8. Phrases: ἐλπίδας λέγων διῆγε, | mine, with or without the art., as 
he continually put them Of with|6 ἐμὸς πατήρ, my father, i. 6. 6, ef. 
hope, i. 2. 11; ἐν ἐλπίσι μεγάλαις | ii. 5. 22, but ἐμὸς ἀδελφός, a brother 
εἶναι, be full of confidence, i. 4. 17; | of mine, i. 7.9; τὰ ἐμά, my situa- 
ἐξ ὧν ἔχω ἐλπίδας, on what grounds | tion, vii. 6. 33. 
I hope, ii. 5. 12. ἔμπαλιν, adv., in Anab. always 
éu-, by assimilation for ἐν. in with the art. and by crasis τοῦμ- 
composition before a labial mute, | παλιν [πάλιν], back, back again, so 
ἔμαθεν, see μανθάνω. also the phrase εἰς τοὔμπαλιν, i, 4. 
ἐμαντοῦ, js, refl. pron. [pronomi- | 15, iii. 5. 13, iv. 3. 21, v. 7. 6, vi. 6. 38. 


oe * ζ 6 
A , 22, ii. 2, 14, iv. 7.9, 8. 22, v. 6. 
8. 4; τὸ ἐμπόδιον, “i 7. 10: thi ἐπε ἡδδοὰ δαψιλέσι; 
‘stons in abi iv. 2. 
ne with provisions in abundance, 1\ 
dv. [Β. aed |, before 22. vt Sar hots, under arms, ner 
Ν . ‘al Md 4 
in the way, hinder, with dat. of | 28. Of time, gegen ig 
be see 10: with τὸ μή and inf. | at, in the course of, Mies 
pers., V. 7. 10; Linf., of. Lat. | with χρόνῳ understood, mean son 
c. anc 4 Of. Lia i. 5. 15, iii. 1. 44, iv. 2. 11, 5. 22; 
so also ἐν ᾧ and ἐν "i (sc. gar 
iv. 8. 14. ἴῃ. cause. | during this time, while, 1. 2. 10, δ, 
2 tw [rrovéw], make in, cause, dhe 5, iv. 2. 19. Often 
notte ware with acc. and dat., | το. 10, ii. 2. 16, Iv 


ὴ od and ac 
or μὴ οὐ ane 3. ail ey 
quid impedit quominus, 111. I. 13, 


nal stem pe (see ἐγώ) + αὐτός], of 
myself, i. 3. 10, ii. 3. 29, iii, x, 14, 


Vv. 8. 15, vii. 6. 35. 

ἐμβαίνω [R. Ba], go into, enter, 
abs. or with εἰς and acc., ii. 3. 11, 
iv. 3. 28; esp. embark, Lat. οὔη- 
scendo, abs. or with εἰς and δου. i. 
3 17, v. 7. 7, vil. 3. 8. 

ἐμβάλλω [βάλλω], cast in, put 
in, thrust in, of a bar into its place 
in the doorposts, vii. 1. 12, 15; in- 
trans., throw oneself into, of rivers, 
empty, and of soldiers and armies, 
make an invasion, attack, abs. or 
with εἰς and acc., i. 2. 8, 8. 24, 
lii. 4. 14, 5. 16, iv. 8, 2, vi. 2. 18. 


ἐμπεδόω, impf. ἠμπέδουν, ἐμπε.- 
δώσω [R. wed], make jirm, hold 
JSast, hold sacred, of oaths, iii. 2. 10. 
ἔμπειρος, ov [R. wep], acyuainted 
with, skilled in, experienced, of 
countries and diseases, abs. or with 
gen., iv. 5. 8, v. 6. 1, vii. 3. 39. 
ἐμπείρως, adv. [R. περ], by expe- 
rience; ἐμπείρως αὐτοῦ ἔχειν, be 
personally acquainted with him, ii. 
6. 1. 
ἐμπίμπλημι [R. πλα], ΠῚ] Suil, 
satisfy, pass. with gen., be Full of, 
i. 7. 8, το. 12; mid. with partic., 
ὑπισχνούμενος οὐκ ἐνεπίμπλασο, you 


Phrases: πληγὰς ἐμβάλλειν, inflict 
blows, i. 5.11; τοῖς ἵπποις ἐμβάλλειν 
τὸν χῖλόν, throw in, i.e., give fodder 
to the horses, i. 9. 27. 

ἐμβιβάζω (βιβάζω, βιβαδ.. -βιβάσω 
Or βιβῶ, -εβίβασα [R. Ba], make go, 
causative to Balvw), make go in, 
esp. make embark, put on board, 
Lat. in nauem impond, abs. or with 
εἰς and acc., v. 3. 1, 7. 8. 

ἐμβολή, ἢς [βάλλω], invasion, in- 
road, with eis and acc., iv. 1. 4. 

ἐμβρόντητος, ov [βροντάω, thun- 
der, icf. βροντή), thunderstruck, 
stunned, terrified, Lat. attonitus, 
Be 4.12, 

ἔμεινε, See μένω. 


couldn’t make promises enough to 
satisfy yourself, vii. 7-46. In ἐμ. 
πιπλάς, i. 7. 8, uw is dropped in the 
present stem because of the pre- 
ceding μ. 

ἐμπίμπρημι (πίμπρημι, πρα-, πρή- 
σω, ἔπρησα, πέπρημαι, ἐπρήσθην, 
burn), set on fire, burn, the com- 
pound being used in prose for the 
poetic simple verb, iv. 4. 14, v. 2. 
3, Vil. 4.15. In the Anab. the mis 
never lost in the pres. stem of this 
word. 

ἐμπίπτω [R. wer], fall upon, 
seize, occur to, of panic, disease, 
or thought, abs. or with dat., ii. 2. 
19, iii, 1. 13, v. 7. 26; of men, 


tumble into, meet with, attack, abs. 


ἐμέω, ἐμοῦμαι, ἤμεσα [root Fen, | or with εἰς and acc., iv. 8. 11, v. 7. 
cf. Lat. uomd, vomit, Eng. emetic}, | 25, vi. 5. 9. 


vomit, be sick, iv. 8. 20. 

ἐμέμνητο, see μιμνήσκω. 

ἐμμένω [R. μα], stay in, live in, 
With ἐν and dat., iv. 7. 17. 


ἔμπλεως, wy, gen. w [R. πλα], full 


of, quite full of, with gen., i. 2, 22. 


ἐμποδίζω [R. πεδ], put in bonds, 


hinder, be in the way of, Lat. im- 


ἐμός, 4, ὀν, possessive pron. [pro- | pedio, iv. 3. 29. 


or with dat. and clause with ws, 
ii 19, vi. 5. 17. 
π ones ieeenden, hes es 
ἠμπόληκα, -ημπόλημαι, front ἣν 
[ἐμπολή, tra, De}, get by traffic, earn, 
yealize, Vil. 5. 4. 
fap sh ἦν [R. wep], trading- 
place, mart, emporium, where Peps 
chants (ἔμποροι) brought goods by 
sea to sell to retail dealers (κάπη- 
i, 4. 6. 
mae rt ὁ [R. wep], hart 
venerally by sea, hence, mer ri | 
wholesale dealer, Lat. mercator a 
negotiator, engaged in a yn 
import as well as in home trading, 
. 6. 19, 21. 
i ἔμπροσθεν, adv. [πρόσθεν], Hr 
place, before, in front of, iV. 2. Ἂν 
γ. 4. 12, vii. η. 86; with gen., 1. 8. 
23, iv. 5. 9. Phrases: οἱ ἔμπρο- 
σθεν, those in front, the van, τὸν 4. 
48, iv. 3. 14, 5. 19; τὰ ngs 
of men, foreparts, as opp. to the 
back, v. 4. 32; of country, what is 
ahead, vi. 3. 14; ὁ ἔμπροσθεν λόγος, 
see λόγος. Of time, τὸν je 
χρόνον, hitherto, Vi. 1. 18; ἐν ~ ni 
προσθεν χρόνῳ, in past days, V1. 0. : : 
ἐμφάγοιεν, ἐμφαγόντας, 566 ἐν 
ἡ ον ἐς [R. ba] visible, mant- 
fest. Phrase: “ayaa oa Tw éupavel, 
Co ublicly, ii. 5. 29. x; 
" Meek ri R. oa], visibly, 
jer [ἐν], with dat., in, ra 
Lat. in with abl., used of place a" 
time, and in other relations. O 


i . adj. 
used with the art. and neut. a 
instead of an adv., aS ἐν τῷ ὌΝ 
νερῷ, openly, i. 3. 21, ο΄. 1. a 5. 
Phrases: ἐν πείρᾳ Κύρου γενέσ εν 
be intimately acquainted with : y- 
rus, i. 9. 1; ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἔχειν, keep 
in sight, iv. 5.29; ἄδοντες ἐν ῥυθμῷ, 
singing in time, V. 4. 14; εἴ τι ν᾿ 
τούτῳ etn, if haply there were δὰ y 
thing important in this, Vi. 4. = 
In composition ἐν- becomes éy- - 
fore a palatal (x, y, x) and na re 
fore a labial (7, B, @) or be ο 
μ, and signifies in, at, on, upon, 
— , 
v, see els. is 
ἐναγκυλάω [Β.. αγκ], jit ἀρετήν: 
with a thong, for the purpose 0 
hurling them, iv. 2. 28. 
ἐναντιόομαι, ἐναντιώσομαι, ἦναν 
τίωμαι, ἠναντιώθην [ἀντί], set one- 
self against, withstand, oppose, 
with dat. and gen., vii. 6. 5. 
ἐναντίος, ἃ, ov [ἀντί], opposite, 
in the opposite direction, before, 
in one’s face, Lat. aduersus, 1V. a 
28, 5. 3, vii. 3. 42; Tavavrla, nM 
opposite, the reverse, V. 6. 4, 8. τὴν 
opposed to, hostile, abs. phy 4 
dat., iii. 2. 10, vii. 6. 25; with 7, 
γ. 8.24; of ἐναντίοι, the enemy, hi 
5. 10. Phrases : τἀναντία στρέ- 
ψαντες, having faced about, iv. 3 
32; ἐκ τοῦ ἐναντίου, on the ΝΗ 
side, iv. 7. 5, vi. 5. 7; τούτου τ 
τίον, in this en ὁ presence, " 
O 06. Vii. 6. 20. . 
ὩΣ [arr], Jasten to, hag 
set on fire, Lat. incendo, abs. 0 


, 7 
place, in, among, in one’s presence, 


with acc., v. 2. 24, 25, 26. 


ἔνατος- ἔνθα 74 


ἔνατος, ἡ, ov [ἐννέα], nin 

5 ‘aj, ninth, Lat. | ambush, ambuscade. Lat. insijin- 
ae ήσαν ἡμέρᾶν γεγαμημένην, | iv, 7. 22, v. 2. 30. a aren 
ἘΝ eight days before, iv. 5. ἐνεδρεύω, ἐνεδρεύσομαι (as pass.) 
‘ νήδρευσα, ἐνηδρεύθην [R. oS). 11. 
Reg [R. 2 aF], pass the|in ambush, set an peat “eg 
: g 1, OWwoudc, encamp, vii. 7.| lay, Lat. insidior, abs., i. 6. 2, iy 
eas τ δ end toad eee a 

eta, ‘Li. δὲ], want, need, évetSov [R. FiS], see, r 
palo at τ Temark 
pr of provisions or money, | observe I ato any og 
¥, 1. 10, 18, vi. 4. 23, vii, hii with acc. and dat., vii 7 
ve, δ. τὴ 
᾿ gp me [R. 1 Sax], show forth,| ἔνειμι [R. ἐσ], be in or on, abs 
. tndico , mid., show what is| or with ἐν and dat., i. 6.3 ii. 4 22, 
“orl own, express, declare, vi. 1. | iv. 5. 26, v. 3. 8; be there, abs., i 
as 5. 1, 2, ii, 3. 14. ἢ 
ὭΣ 5, ", ov [els + δέκα], elev- ἕνεκα or ἕνεκεν (see below), adv. 
ran hn es 1. 7. 18, and improper prep. with gen., on 
Px gl oft €], lack; lmpers., | account of, by reason of, generally 
pil teed Or want, with dat. | post-positive like the Lat. causa, i 
μή - ᾿ gen. of thing, and were | 9. 21, ii. 3-13, 5. 14, v. 6. 11; stand- 
pe αν Vil. 1.415 ἑώρᾷ πλείονος ing before a vowel, i. 5.9 iii. 4 
pioged Ea re that more reasons | 35, iv. i. 22; preceding its subst., 
“ae oo ips yt jl, Υ. 4. 19; between the adj. and 
Ee ag on hi [δ ἣ νι guense τὰ subst., i. 4. 5, 8; separated from 

ous, 1 manifest, generally | the subst.. i 21; 2 : 
with partic. like an adverb. ἔ ) thks ea 

, » ἔνδηλος | ally used before a vowel. ii 
ἐγίγνετο ἐπιβουλεύων, he was clearly | iii, 2. 28, v. 4.16; before a it 


plotting, ii. 6.23, cf. 4.2. Phrase: | nant [ re a 
Ὁ "" mi . ἣν " la Vv. 7. 1. " . ὼ 
ἔνδηλον αὖ καὶ τοῦτ εἶχεν ὅτι, he stantive, wy J aia its sub 


ΗΝ this also obvious that, ii. 6. ἐνενήκοντα, indecl, [ἐννέα + εἴκο- 
. σι], ninety, Lat. ndnaginta. i 
Pee = ae dwelling in| 7. 1 ii. τς ἾἤὈ,,,), ἍἍ 
é, native, athome ; τὰ ἔνδημα ἐνεός, d, ὁ ; i 
sae internal revenues as con- deaf and ese coo. “nig 
ee m _— a iy Vii. 1, 27. éverds, 4, dv [érds, verbal of tinue], 
ν ριος, ον [ vo+ R dep], on a| sent in, suborned, instigated, with 
Met with one, on the same seat, ὑπό and gen., vii. 6. 41. 
8 =a 4 one δι seat, Vii. 2. 33, 38. ἐνέφαγον [ἔφαγον], eat quickly or 
Noa οθεν, adv. [ἐν], Jrom the in-| hastily, iv. 2. 1, 5. 9. 
. é, from within, v. 2. 22, vii. 8. ἐνεχείρισαν, see ἐγχειρίζω. 
; ἐνέχυρον, τό [ἢ 
ἔνδον, adv. [ἐν], inside, withi sige oe eng 
, , de, mM, | pawn, securit i 
. a — or other place, ii. Β, 32, potty vil 6 38 π" 
5. 24, v. 2. 17, vil. 1. 17. ἐνέχω [R. σεχ 
3 , χω [R. σε hold or ¢ 
one ov [R. 80x], in renown, Jast in, patie in nals pen 
glorious, famous ἡ act. of a bird of | dat., vii, rag yp : , 
ΗΝ or presaging| ἔνθα, adv. of place or time [ἐν]; 
rat ome Vl. 1. 23. of place, rel., where, wherein iv. 
att ἢ ! ἐπ J) ἔμ ἣν pig ~~ 5. 6, v. 1. 1, attached to a subst , i. 
> Lat. indud, i. 8.3; pf. and| 8.1, iii. 4. 41, iv. 2.90. with verte 
ily have put on, wear, Υ. 4. 13. [οὗ motion, whither, iv. 8.14 ce 
pa, as [R. σεδ], @ sitting in, 14; rarely as dem., there, γ. 7. 6, 


19 ἐνθάδε- ἐντέλλομαι 


vii. 5.12. Of time, then, thereupon, 
i. 5.8, iv. 1.17, 5.6. Phrase: ἔνθα 
δή, see δή. 
ἐνθάδε, adv. of place [év], here, 
iii. 3. 2, V. 1. 10, vii. 3. 4, 5; with 
verbs of motion, hither, here, ii. 1. 
4, 3. 21, iii. 2. 26, v. 7. 18. 
ἔνθαπερ, adv. of place [ἐν], rel., 
there where, just where, iv. 8. 26, 
vi. 4. 9. 
ἔνθεν, adv. of place [ἐν] ; dem., 
from there, thence, in the phrases 
ἔνθεν μὲν... ἔνθεν δέ, Lat. hinc... 
illinc, on this side... and on that, 
ii. 4. 22, iii. 5.7; ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν, on 
both sides, Lat. ab utraque parte, 
iv. 6. 12, 8. 18, with gen., iv. 3. 28; 
rel., whence, from which, i. το. 1, 
ii. 3. 6. 
ἐνθένδε, adv. of place [ἐν], from 
hence, from this spot, v. 6. 10, 7. 5, 
vi. 3. 16; of persons, in the phrase 
ἐνθένδε ἀρξόμεθα τὰ δίκαια λαμβά- 
νειν, we Shall begin by doing justice 
on you (for ἀφ᾽ ὑμῶν), vii. 7. 17. 
ἐνθυμέομαι, ἐνθυμήσομαι, ἐντεθύμη- 
μαι, ἐνεθυμήθην [R. 1 θυ], bear in 
mind, lay to heart, reflect, con- 
sider, with acc., to which may be 
added a clause with ὅτι, or with 
a rel. clause, or with ὅτι and a 
clause, ii. 4. 5, 5. 15, iii. 1. 20, 2. 
18, v. 8. 19, vi. 1. 21, vii. 1.25; pf., 
I have observed, iii. 1. 438. 
ἐνθύμημα, aros, τό [R. 1 θυ], 
thought, idea, fancy, iil. 5. 12, vi. 
1. 21. 
ἐνθωρᾶκίζω [θωρᾶ κίζω], put on 
the breastplate; ἐντεθωρᾶκισμένος, 
equipped in mail, vii. 4. 16. 
ἕνι, for ἔνεστι, Υ. 3. 11. 
ἑνί, see els. 
ἐνιαυτός, ὁ, year, Lat. annus, ii. 
6.29; κατ᾽ ἐνιαυτόν, annually, Lat. 
quotannis, iii. 2. 12, vii. 1. 27. 
ἔνιοι, at, a, some, i. 7. 5, Vv. 5. 11, 
vi. 4. 9, vii. 6. 19. 
ἐνίοτε, adv. [cf. ἔνιοι, sometimes, 
Lat. interdum, i. 5. 2, ii. 6. 9, iii. 1. 
20, vi. 1. 8. 
ἐννέα, indecl. [ἐννέα], nine, Lat. 


ἐννοέω [R. yvw], have in one’s 
mind, think, reflect, consider, de- 
vise, ponder, abs., with acc., with 
ὅτι or ef and a clause, ii. 2. 10, 4. - 
5, 19, v. 1. 9, 12, vi. 1. 29; évvod 
μή, I fear that, iv. 2. 13, vi. 1. 28; 
mid., consider, iii. 1. 2, 41; with 
μὴ οὐ, fear that not, iii. 5. 3. 
ἔννοια, as [R. yvw], thought, in- 
spiration, iii. τ. 19, 
*EvoSlas, see Εὐοδεύς. 
ἐνοικέω [R. Fux], live in, inhabit, 
Lat. incolo, v. 6. 25; οἱ ἐνοικοῦντες, 
the inhabitants, i. 2.24, 5. 5, iii. 4.12. 
ἐνόπλιος, ον [R. oer], in or 
with arms ; ἐνόπλιος ῥυθμός, martial 
rhythm, vi. 1. 11. 
ἐνοράω [R. 2 Fep], see, remark, 
observe something in anybody or 
anything. Phrase: πολλὰ ἐνορῶ δι 
a, I see many reasons in (the un- 
dertaking) why, i. 3. 15. 
ἑνός, see els. 
ἐνοχλέω, ἐνοχλήσω, ἠνώχλησα, 
ἠνώχληκα, ἠνώχλημαι, ἠνωχλήθην 
[R. Fex], trouble with numbers, 
crowd upon, harass, annoy, with 
dat., ii. 5. 13, iii. 4. 21. 

ἐνσκευάζω [R. oxv], get ready, 
dress up, Vi. 1. 12. 

ἐντάττω [R. trax], enroll, regis- 
ter; pass., évreraypévos σφενδονᾶν, 
enrolled or posted among the sling- 
ers, iii. 3. 18. 

ἐνταῦθα, adv. of place and time 
[év]; of place, therein, there, i. 4. 
19, 5. 4, iv. 1.18, 4.18; with verbs 
of motion, thither, i. 2. 1, 10. 13, 
17, iii. 4. 11; of time, thereupon, 
thén, i. 10. 1, iii. 4. 45, iv. 3. 7, Vi. 
1.30; μέχρι ἐνταῦθα, Lat. hic us- 
que, thus far, V. 5. 4. | 

ἐντείνω [relyw], stretch or strain 
tight. Phrase: πληγὰς ἐντείνειν, 
with dat., Lat. plagads intendere, 
inflict blows on, ii. 4. 11. 

ἐντελής, és [τέλος], at the end, 
complete, of pay, in full, i. 4. 18. 

ἐντέλλομαι, ἐντελοῦμαι, ἐνετειλά- 
μὴν, ἐντέταλμαι [R. rad], enjoin 
upon, direct, command, with dat. 


nouem, i. 4. 19. 


and inf., v. 1. 18. 


EE 


lh ty Me 


—— es 


ἔντερον-ἐξαγγέλλω 10 


ἔντερον, τό [ἐν], intestine, gut, 
Lat. intestinum, il. 5. 33. 
_ ἐντεῦθεν, adv. of place, time, and 
cause [ἐν] ; of place, thence, from 
there, i. 2. 7, 10, v. 4. 26; of time, 
then, thereafter, afterwards, ii. 2. 
ἡ. ¥. St, tv. 4 16, vi. 6 13 of 
cause, therefore, in consequence, 
vi. 4. 15, vii. 1. 25, 

ἐντίθημι [R. θε7, put or place in; 
of fear, instil in, inspire in, with 
acc. and dat., vii. 4. 1; mid., put 
aboard ship, i. 4. 7, v. 7. 10. 

évripos, ov [R. τι], in honour, in 
credit, esteemed, of persons, Υ, 6. 
32, Vi. 3. 18, vii. 7. 52. 

ἐντίμως, adv. [R. te]; ἐντέμως 
ἔχειν, be held in honour, ii. 1. 7. 

ἐντοίχιος, ov [τοῖχος], on the 
wall; τὰ évrolxia, wall paintings, 
vii. ἃ 1. 

ἐντόνως, adv. [€vrovos, eager, cf. 
ἐντείνω), urgently, earnestly, vii. 


ἐντός, adv. of place or time, with 
gen. [ἐν]; of place, within, inside 
of, 1. 10.8, ti. 1.11, vi 4. ἃ 5. 7; 
of time, ἐντὸς ὀλίγων ἡμερῶν, within 
a few days, Vii. 5. 9. 

ἐντυγχάνω [R. trax], chance or 
light upon, fall in with, meet, find, 
abs. or with dat., i. 2. 27, 8. 1, ii. 
3- 10, iii. 2. 31, iv. 5. 19, vi. 5. 5. 

᾿Εννάλιος, ὁ [ Evid, Enyo, god- 
dess of war], Lnyalius, a name 
applied to Ares as the furious god 
of war and companion of ’Evid. 
After the singing of the paean the 
war cry was raised to him, i. 8. 18, 
v. 2. 14. 

ἐνύπνιον, τό [ὕπνος], vision in 
sleep, dream, whether prophetic or 
not, whereas ὄνειρον is always a 
prophetic dream; τὰ ἐνύπνια, dream- 
pictures, vii. 8. 1 (where some read 
évrolxia). 

ἐνωμοτάρχης, ov [cf. ἐνωμοτίᾷ + 
apxw], commander of an enomoty, 
iil. 4. 21, iv. 3. 26. 

évwporla, as [ἐνώμοτος, bound by 
oath, cf. ὄμνυμι), any sworn band, 
esp. the enomoty, which formed a 


quarter of the λόχος and one half 
of the πεντηκοστύς, or division of 
fifty, and therefore consisted nor- 
mally of twenty-five men, iii. 4. 22, 
iv. 3. 26. 

ἐξ, or, before a consonant, ἐκ, by 
loss of s, prep. with gen. denoting 
separation or distance from a 
point [ε΄] Lat. ex, 8]. Used of 
place, from, away from, out of, 
i. 2,1, 7, 7. 18, ii. 4. 28, iii. 4. 25, 
iv. 7.17, vi.1.4; often Greek used 
the terminus ex qud where the 
English has the terminus in quod, 
as εἶχον ἐξ ἀριστερᾶς ποταμόν, they 
kept the river on the left, iv. 8. 2; 
cf.i. 2. 3, iv. 2. 19, v. 3. 9, 7.15. Of 
time, succeeding, after, as ἐκ τοῦ 
ἀρίστου, after breakfast, iv. 6. 21; 
ἐκ τούτου, after this, thereupon, i. 2. 
17, 6. 8, li. 5. 84; ἐκ παίδων, from 
boyhood, Lat. ἃ pueris, iv. 6, 14. 
Of source or origin, from, as a re- 
sult of, in consequence of, as ἐκ 
βασιλέως δεδομέναι, a present from 
the king, i. 1.6; of. i. 9. 16, 19, 28, 
li, 5. 5, iii, 1. 12, vii. 7. 48; τὸν ἐξ 
Ἑλλήνων φόβον, the fear inspired 
by the Greeks, i. 2. 18; ἐκ τούτου, 
as @ result of this, in consequence 
of this, therefore, ii. 6. 4, iii. 3. 8; 
cf. 1. 3.11; vi. 6.11; ἐκ τῶν παρόν- 
των ΟΥ ὑπαρχόντων, in the present 
state of things, iii. 2. 3, vi. 4.9; ἐκ 
τῆς νϊκώσης (86. γνώμης), in conform- 
ity to a majority vote, vi. 1.18; ἐκ 
τῆς ψυχῆς φίλος, a friend in heart, 
Lat. ex animé, vii. 7. 43. Adver- 
bial phrases: ἐκ παντὸς τρόπου, in 
every way, iii. 1. 43; ἐξ ἴσου εἶναι, 
be on an equality, iii. 4.475; ἐκ τῶν 
δυνατῶν, as well as possible, iv. 2. 
23; ἐξ ἐπιβουλῆς, by a stratagem, in- 
sidiously, Lat. ex insidiis, vi. 4. 7. 
In composition ἐξ signifies from, 
away, out, often implying resolu- 
tion, strong intention, fulfilment, 
or completion. 

ἕξ, indecl. [ξξ], six, Lat. sex, i. 1. 
10, ii. 4. 27, iii. 4. 21. 

ἐξαγγέλλω [ἀγγέλλω], tell out, 


report, make known, bring word, 


TT ἐξάγω-ἐξελαύνω 


with ace., dat., and ὡς with a 
clause, with dat. with or without 
ὅτι and a clause, or with Ws and a 
clause, i. 6. 5, 7. 8, ii. 4. 24, vii. 2. 
14. 
tayo [R. ay], lead out, bring 
out, march out, esp. of generals, 
Lat. δα μοῦ, abs. or with acc., and 
with εἰς, ἐπί, or πρός and acc., i. 6. 
10, v. 1. 17, 2. 1, vi. 4. 9, 19, 6. 34, 
vii. 5. 2; pass., οὐδ᾽ ἐξήχθη διώκειν, 
he was not induced to pursue, i. 8. 
21. 

ἐξαίρετος, ov [aipéw], selected, 
picked, choice, like Lat. eximius, 
cf. eximd, Vii. 8. 23. 
᾿ ἐξαιρέω [aipéw], take out, remove, 
with acc. and gen., ii. 1. 9, 3. 16, 5. 
4; of a cargo, unload, discharge, Vv. 
1.16; of tithes, take out, dedicate, 
with dat. of the god, v. 3. 4; mid., 
pick out, choose for oneself, with 
ace, and ἐκ with gen., ii. 5. 20. 

ἐξαιτέω [αἰτέω], require of one, 
demand, esp. the surrender of a 
person, vi. 6. 11; mid., beg off, 
make intercession for another for 
one’s own sake, Lat. exdrd, i. 1. 3. 

ἐξαίφνης, adv. [ἄφνω, adv., of a 
sudden], suddenly, all of a sudden, 
unexpectedly, Lat. improuiso, v. 6. 
19, 7. 21, vi. 2. 17, 3. 3. See éa- 
πίνης. 

ἑξακισχίλιοι, a, a [ἕξ + χίλιοι], 
siz thousand, i. 7. 11, ii. 2. 6, vii. 

. 23. 
: ἐξακοντίζω [R. ax], dart or hurl 
forth the javelin, hurl, with dat. 
τοῖς παλτοῖς, V. 4. 25. 

ἑξακόσιοι, a, a [ξξ - ἑκατόν], six 
hundred, Lat. séscenti, i. 8. 6, iv. 8. 
15, v. 3. 3. 

ἐξαλαπάζω (ἀλαπόζω, ddaray-, 
ἀλαπάξω, ἀλάπαξα, Epic verb, plun- 
der), sack, pillage, of a-city, vii. 1. 
29, used only here in Attic. 

ἐξάλλομαι [ἅλλομαι7, jump out 
of the way, spring aside, Vii. 3. 33. 

ἐξαμαρτάνω [ἁμαρτάνω], go astray, 
err, do wrong, with περί and acc. 


up from one’s place; mid. and 2 
aor. act., stand up, rise from one’s 
seat, start up, iv. 5. 18, v. 2. 30, vi. 
1. 10, 30. 
ἐξαπατάω (drardw, ἀπατήσω, etc, 
[ἀπάτη, deceit], deceive), deceive 
thoroughly, take in, cheat, Lat. 
décipio, abs., with acc., with acc. 
of the person and of the thing, or 
with acc. and ws with a clause, ii. 
6. 22, iii. 1. 10, 2. 4, v. 7. 1, 6, 1, 
vii. 1. 25; fut. mid. as pass., vil. 
. 3. 
i ἐξαπάτη, ns [ἀπάτη, deceit], gross 
deceit, imposition, Lat. fallacia, 
vii. 1. 25. 
ἑξάπηχυς or ἕξπηχυς, v [+ πῆ- 
xus], of six cubits, v. 4. 12. 

ἐξαπίνης, adv., equal to ἐξαίφνης, 
q.v., rare in Attic, all of a sudden, 
unexpectedly, iii. 3. 7, 5. 2, iv. 7. 25, 
v. 2. 24, vi. 4. 26. 

ἐξάρχω [apxw], make a begin- 
ning of, begin, with gen., vi. 6. 15; 
lead off, in singing, v. 4. 14. 

ἐξαυλίζομαι [ R.2 «ΕἼ. leave one’s 
quarters, break camp, to go else- 
where, with εἰς and acc., vii. 8. 21. 

ἔξειμι [R. eo], used only im- 
pers., ἐξ is allowed, it is possible 
or permitted, it is in one’s power, 
one may, Lat. licet, with inf. or 
ace. and inf., ii. 6. 12, 28, iii. 1. 18, 
iv. 3. 10, v. 7. 34, vi. 6.2; with the 
dat. of the pers. and inf., when a 
predicate subst. or partic. may be 
in the dat. or acc., ii. 3. 26, 5. 18, 
iii, 2. 26, iv. 1. 20, 3. 10, v. 6. 3, Vi. 
1. 30, vii. 1. 21, 6. 16, 17; the par- 
tic. ἐξόν is often used abs., ii. 5. 22, 
iii. 1. 14, 2. 26, iv. 6. 13, v. 6. 3. 

ἔξειμι [elu], go out, make one’s 
exit, Lat. exed, esp. of soldiers, 
march out, abs., with ἐκ and gen. 
or with ἔνθεν, the purpose of going 
being expressed by ἐπί and acc., 
iii. 5. 13, v. 1. 8, 17, vi. 1. 6, 4. 19, 
5. 3, Vii. 1.1, 3. 35, 

ἐξελαύνω [ἐλαύνω], drive out, ex- 
pel from a place, Lat. expelld, with 
acc. or with acc. and ἐκ with gen., 


of the thing, v. 7. 33. 
ἐξανίστημι [R. στα], make stand 


i. 3. 4, vii. 7. 7, 11; intr. (See 


ἐξελέγχω--ἔοικα 78 


ἐλαύνω), march forth, out, or on, 
proceed, with the acc. σταθμόν, 
often followed by the preps. eis, 
ἐπί, and διά with their cases, i. 2. 
5, 6, 7, 14, 10;4..1,4, 5.6: 
ἐξελέγχω [ἐλέγχω], convict, ii. 5. | 


ἐξενεγκεῖν, see ἐκφέρω, 
ἐξέρπω (ἕρπω, -ἔρψω, εἵρπυσα [ε΄ 
Lat. serpo, creep], creep), creep 
out; among the Dorians = ἐξέρχο- 
μαι, move out, of an army, vii. 1. 8. 
ἐξέρχομαι [Zpxoua], yo or come 
out, get out, escape, esp. of sol- 
diers, march out, take the field, 
abs. or with ἐκ and gen., i, 3. 17, 6. 
5, ii. 5. 37, iii. 1. 12, iv. 8. 2, v. 4. 
18, vi. 4. 23, vii. 1.10; of time, run 
out, clapse, Vii. 5. 4. 
ἐξέτασις, ews, ἡ [R. ἐσ], exami- 
nation, inspection, esp. of an army, 
review, V. 3. 3, vii. 1. 11; ἐξέτασιν 
ποιεῖν OF ποιεῖσθαι, hold a review, i. 
2.9, 34, 7.1. 
ἐξευπορίζω [R. περ], supply or 
provide in plenty, v. 6. 19. 
ἐξηγέομαι [R. ay], lead out or 
forth, with εἰς and acc., vi. 6. 34; 
be leader, in the phrase ἀγαθόν τι 
τῷ στρατεύματι ἐξηγήσασθαι, give 
good guidance to the army, iv. 5. 38. 
ἑξήκοντα, indecl. [+ εἴκοσι], 
sixty, Lat. sexdgintd, ii. 2. 6, iii. 4. 
34, iv. 6. 11, vii. 2. 17. 
 ἐξήκω [ἥκω], have come out; of 
time, have run out, expired, Lat. 
exe, Vi. 3. 26. 
ἐξήνεγκε, see ἐκφέρω. 
4 ἐξικνέομαι (ἱκνέομαι, ἱκ-, ἵξομαι, 
ἱκόμην, ἵγμαι [R. Fux], come), reach 
a place from somewhere, attain to, 
esp. of missiles, reach the mark 
hit, do execution, abs. or with gen.. 
i. 8. 19, iii. 3. 7, 4. 4, iv. 3. 18; ἐπὶ 
βραχὺ ἐξικνεῖσθαι, have short range, 
lll. 3. 17; of the value of property, 
amount to, with eis and acc., vii. 7. 
54. 
ἐξίστημι [R. στα], make stand 
out of ; mid., stand aside, retire, in 
the phrase ἐκ τοῦ μέσου ἐξίστασθαι, 


ν ᾿ 
ἔξοδος, ἡ [ὁδός], way out, march 
out, departure, Lat. exitus, v. 2. 26. 


tion, sally, march, Υ. 2. 9, Vi. 4. 9, 
ιν. 

ἕξομεν, See ἔχω. 

ἐξοπλίζω [R. wer], arm fully, 
accoutre ; mid., arm oneself, i. 8.3, 
li, 1.2, ili, 1. 28, vi. 1. 115; pass., 
ἐξωπλισμένοι, armed cap-a-pé, ἵν. 
3. 5. 

ἐξοπλισία, as [R. σεπΊ, state of 
being fully armed. Phrase: ἐν τῇ 
ἐξοπλισίᾳ, under arms, Lat. in pro- 
cinctu, i. 7. 10. 

ἐξορμάω [ὁρμάωἼ, urge on, cheer 
on, tneite, ii. 1. 24; used also intr. 
in act., like mid., set out, rush 
Jorth, abs. or with ἐπί and acc., iii. 
1, 26, v. 2. 4, 7. 17. 

ἐξουσία, as [R. ex], possibility, 
power, licence, Lat. potestds, with 
inf., v. 8. 22. 

ἕξπηχυς, see ἐξάπηχυς. 

ἔξω, adv. [ἐξ, of. Eng. exoteric, 
exotic], used with verbs of rest or 
of motion, Lat. forés or fords, out, 
outside, out of doors, out and away, 
abroad, ii. 2. 4, 5. 32, 6. 3, v. 2. 16, 
5. 19, vi. 6. 5, vii. 1.12, 19, 4. 12: 
τὸ ἔξω, the outer, i. 4.4. With the 
gen., Lat. extra, without, outside 
of, beyond, outflanking, i. 4. 5, 8. 
13, 23, iv. 7. 9, v. 1. 15, vi. 5. 7, Vii. 
1.35; of a file of light-armed sol- 
diers posted on the flank of heavy 
infantry to support it, iv. 8.15; ἔξω 
βελῶν, out of bowshot, out of range, 
Ill, 4. 15, Vv. 2. 26; ἔξω τοῦ δεινοῦ, 
out of danger, ii. 6.12; ἔξω τούτων, 
a this, Lat. praetered, vii. 3. 

ἔξωθεν, adv. [ἐξ], from outside ; 
with gen., like ἔξω, outside of, iii. 
4. 21, v. 7. 21. 
_ ἔοικα, pf. as pres., ἐῴκειν, plpf. as 
impf. (from supposed pres. εἴκω, 
yielding in Attic the rare fut. effw) 
[ἔοικα], be like, look like, resemble, 
with dat., to which may be added 
the acc. ri, ii, 1. 13, iv. 8. 20, v. 3. 


get out of the way, i. 5. 14. 


12, vii. 3.35; neut. partic. εἰκός, ᾳ.υ. 


vil. 4. 17; esp. of soldiers, expedi- 


79 ἑορακότες- ἐπειδή 


Phrases: οὐδενὶ καλῷ ἔοικε, it doesn’t 
look at all honourable, vi. 5.17; ws 
ἔοικε, used parenthetically, as τὲ 
appears, naturally, likely enough, 
ii, 2. 18, vi. 1. 80, 4. 12, 6. 36. 
éopaxdres, 866 ὁράω. 
ἑορτή, 7s, festival, celebration, Υ. 
ms | 
ἐπ᾽, by elision for ἐπί. 
ἐπαγγέλλω [ἀγγέλλω], give no- 
tice, proclaim; mid., declare one- 
self, propose or offer oneself, prom- 
ise, abs. or with inf., or with dat. 
of the pers. and inf., ii. 1. 4, iv. 7. 
20, vii. 1. 33. 
ἐπάγω [R. ay], bring on, urge 
on, bring forward, of a vote or 
motion, in the phrase οὐ γάρ πω 
ψῆφος αὐτῷ ἐπῆκτο περὶ φυγῆς, no 
decree of exile had yet been pro- 
posed against him, vii. 7. 57. 
ἔπαθον, see πάσχω. 
ἐπαινέω (αἰνέω, αἰνέσω, ἤνεσα, 
-ἥνεκα, - ἤἥνημαι, -ῃνέθην [ αἶνος, tale, 
praise], praise), praise, Lat. Ἰατιαῦ, 
commend, approve, compliment on, 
abs., with acc., with acc. and ἐπί 
with dat., or with ὅτι and a clause, 
i. 3. 7, 4. 16, ii. 6. 20, iii. 1. 45, Vv. 
5. 8, 7. 33, Vi. 6. 35, vii. 3.41; asa 
polite formula in declining an of- 
fer, in the phrase τὴν μὲν σὴν πρό- 
νοιαν ἐπαινῶ, thank you very much 


indeed for your thoughtfulness, Vii. 
iy) 


7. OL. 


ἔπαινος, ὁ [alvos, tale, praise], 
praise, approval, commendation, 
v. 7. 33, vi. 6. 16, vii. 6. 33. 
ἐπαίρω [delpw], raise up, rouse 
up, excite, induce, with acc. of 
pers. and a following inf., vi. 1. 21, 
vii. 7. 25. 
ἐπαίτιος, ov [alréw], blamed for, 
blameworthy ; subst., ἐπαίτιόν τι, 
a cause for blame, with dat. of 
pers. blamed, and πρός and gen. of 
blamer, iii. 1. 5. 
ἐπακολουθέω [R. xed], follow 
closely upon or up, pursue, abs. or 
with dat., iii. 2. 35, iv. 1. 1. 
éraxotw [R. xoF], give ear to, 


ἐπάν or ἐπήν, temporal conj. [ἐπεί 
+ ἄν], when, whenever, with τάχι- 
στα, as soon as, the moment that, 
Lat. cum primum, with the subjv., 
the aor. often being rendered by 
our fut. perf., i. 4. 18, ii. 4. 3, iv. 
6. 9. 
éravatelvw [τείνω]., stretch out 
and hold up, vii. 4. 9. 
ἐπαναχωρέω [ xwpéw ], move back, 
retreat, retire, with πάλιν or els 
τοὔμπαλιν, iii. 3. 10, 5. 13. 
ἐπανέρχομαι [Zpxouac], go back 
to, return, with εἰς and acc., or 
ἔνθα and a clause, Vi. 5. 32, vil. 3. 
4, 5. 
ἐπάνω, adv. [ἄνω], above. Phrase: 
ἐν τοῖς ἐπάνω εἴρηται, it has been 
stated above, Lat. supra dictum 
est, Vi. 3. 1. 

ἐπαπειλέω [ἀπειλέω], threaten in 
addition, add threats, Vi. 2. 7. 

ἐπεγγελάω [γελάω], laugh at, in- 
sult, with dative, Lat. inrided, ii. 
4. 27. 

éreyelpw [éyelpw], wake up, 
arouse, iv. 3. 10. 

ἐπεί, temporal and causal conj., 
Lat. cum; of time, when, after, 
with indic., i. 1. 1, iv. 7. 2, v. 8. 9, 
vi. 1. 30, vii. 3. 47; with opt. in 
indir. disc., vii. 2.27, or in a sup- 
position, i. 3.1, 5. 2, 8. 20, v. 6. 30; 
with inf. by assimilation in indir. 
disc., v. 7. 18; ἐπεὶ τάχιστα, as 
soon as, Lat. cum primum, with 
indic., vi. 3.21; of cause, since, be- 
cause, as, With indic., i. 3. 5, 8. 23, 
ii. 1. 4, iii. 1. 31, vii. 3.45; after a 
full stop, for, Lat. nam, vi. 1. 30, 
vii. 6. 22; éwel ye, since at any 
rate, i. 3. 9. 

ἐπειδάν, temporal conj. [ἐπειδή + 
dv], when, after, as soon as, when- 
ever, in protases with subjv., esp. 
the aor., when it may often be ren- 
dered by the fut.-perf., i. 4. 8, ii. 2. 
4, 3. 29, v. 6. 19, vii. 1. 6, 2. 34, 5. 
8; with rdxicra, Lat. cum primum, 
iii. 1. 9. 

ἐπειδή, temporal and causal con). 


overhear, Vil. 1. 14. 


[érel+5y], of time, when, after, 


| 


ἐπεῖδον-ἐπί 80 


with indic., i. 2. 17, 7. 16, 8, 28, 9. 
29, lii. 1. 13, 4. 38, 5. 18, iv. 5. 8; 
with opt. in indir. disc., iii, 5. 18; 
of cause, since, because, with indic., 
vil. 7. 18; ἐπειδή γε, since at least, 
i. 9. 24, 

ἐπεῖδον [R. Εἰδ], have one’s eyes 
on, behold, see, with acc. and par- 
tic., vii. 6. 31; live to see, experi- 
ence, with acc., or ace. and partic., 
iii. 1. 13, vii. 1. 30. 

ἔπειμι [R. eo], be over or on top 
of, of a bridge or tower, abs. or 
with ἐπί and dat., i. 2. 5, li, 4. 25, 
iv. 4. 2. 

ἔπειμι [elu], go on, come up, 
make progress, of persons or things, 
abs., 1. 5. 15, v. 7. 12; esp. of sol- 
diers, advance, attack, abs. or with 
dat., i. 2. 17, 7. 4, 10. 10, iii. 4. 33, 
iv. 3 28, ς. 17, vi 3 7, 5. 163. of 
orators or actors, come Sorward, 
enter, Lat. in scaenam prided, vi. 
1.11; of time, ἡ ἐπιοῦσα ἡμέρα, the 


| offer the sacrifice before marching, 
Vi. &, Ὁ. 
ἐπέπᾶτο, see πάομαι. 
ἐπεπράκει, See πιπράσκω. 
ἐπέπρᾶκτο, see πράττω. 
ἐπέρομαι, only in 2 aor. ἐπηρόμην 
[ἔρομαι}), ask again or besides. 
| question about, inquire, ask, with 
a clause in dir. disc. or with ace. of 
the pers. and a clause with εἰ, ὅτι, 
or an interr., iii. 1. 6, v. 8. 5, vii, 2. 
25, 31, 3. 12. 
ἐπέρχομαι [ἔρχομαι7, come upon, 
visit, Lat. obed, of a country, with 
acc., Vil. 8. 25, 
ἔπεσον, see πίπτω. 
ἐπεύχομαι Γεὔχομαι], make a 
prayer to. Phrase: ἐπευξάμενος 
εἶπε, he spoke, calling the gods to 
witness, Vv. 6. 3. 
ἐπεφεύγεσαν, 566 φεύγω. 
ἐπέχω [R. σεχ], hold upon, hold 
in or back, Lat. inhibed ; intr., hold 


next day, the following day, so 


With νύξ and ἕως, i. 7. 1, iii. 4. 18, 
iv. 5. 80, v. 2. 28, vii. 4. 14. 
ἐπείπερ, causal conj. [ἐπεί], with 
indic., since in fact, seeing that, ii. 
2. 10, 5. 38, iv. 1. 8, vii. 4. 19. 
ἔπεισα, ἐπείσθησαν, see πείθω. 


ἔπειτα, adv. [εἶτα], thereupon, | 


then, Lat. deinde, ii. 4. 5, 5. 20, iii. 


Ἀν Τ 2 21,9, 8, ἢ νὴ. s, | 


4; esp. in enumerating, then, next, 
Surther, besides, i. 3. 10, 9. δ, iv. 
8. 11, v. 5. 8; often in narrative, 
πρῶτον μὲν... ἔπειτα dé, v. 4. 20, 
6. 8, cf. ii. 4. 13. Phrase: εἰς τὸν 
nig χρόνον, in after times, ii. 
x. 17. 

ἐπέκεινα, adv., for ἐπ᾽ ἐκεῖνα, on 
the further side, beyond, Lat. ultra. 
Phrase: of ἐκ τοῦ ἐπέκεινα, those 
who dwelt beyond, v. 4. 3. 

ἐπεκθέω [θέω], run out against, 
make a sdily, abs., v. 2. 22. 

ἐπεξέρχομαι [ἔρχομαι], come out 
against, make a sally, v. 2. 7. 

ἐπεξόδιος, ov [ὁδός], belonging 
to @ march out or expedition ; 
subst., τὰ ἐπεξόδια (80. ἱερά) θύειν, 


in, hold back, delay, with gen., iii. 
4. 36. 


or be heard ; eis ἐπήκοον with verbs 
of rest or motion, or ἐν ἐπηκόῳ 
| with verbs of rest, within hearing 
| distance, within earshot, ii. 5. 38, 
iii. 3. 1, iv. 4. 5, vii. 6. 8. 

ἐπῆκτο, see ἐπάγω. 

ἐπήν, 566 ἐπάν. 

ἐπτῇρεν, See éxalpw. 

ἐπήρετο, see ἐπέρομαι. 

ἐπί, prep. with gen., dat., or ace., 
before a vowel ἐπ᾽ or ἐφ᾽, upon. 

With gen., of place, on, upon, i. 
4. 3, 5. 10, 7. 20, iv. 3. 6, 5. 26, v. 
2. 5, vii. 4. 11, ἐφ᾽ ἵππων, on horse- 
back, iii. 2. 19, ἐπὶ τοῦ ποταμοῦ, on 
the river bank, iv. 3. 28, ef. ii. 5. 18, 
ἐπὶ Θράκης, on the coast of Thrace, 
Vii. 6. 25, ἐπὶ τοῦ εὐωνύμου, on the 
left, i. 8. 9, ef. iii. 2. 36, with verbs 
of motion, towards, in the direction 
of, li. 1. 3, vi. 3.24; of time, in the 
time of, at, i. 9. 12, iv. 7. 10, ἐπὶ 
τοῦ πρώτου (ἱερείου), with the first 
victim, iv. 3. 9, vi. 5.2, 8; of man- 
ner, esp. denoting distribution, ἐπὶ 


ἐπήκοος, ov [R. KoF], giving ear 
|to; of a place, where one can hear 


91 ἐπιβάλλω- πιθαλάττιος 


τεττάρων, Jour deep, i: 15, of. iv. 
8. 11, vii. 8. 14, ἐφ ἑνός, in single 
file, Υ. 2. 6, ἐφ ἑαυτῶν, by them- 
selves, ii. 4. 10, ἐπὶ φάλαγγος, in 
the form of a phalanx, in battle 
array, iv. 3. 26, 6. 6, vi. 5. 7, 
“ὃ, 
With dat., of place, upon, on, at, 
by, near, i. 2. 8, 4. 4, 8. 27, 9. 3, iv. 
4. 2,V. 2. 16, vii. 3. 44, ἐπὶ θαλάττῃ, 
on the sea, i. 4. 1, ef. 1. 3. 20, 7. 19, 
iv. 1. 20, v. 4. 2, él rp εὐωνύμῳ, on 
the left, i. 9.31; of time, ἡλίος ἣν ἐπὶ 
δυσμαῖς, the sun was just setting, 
vii. 3. 34, ἐπὶ τῷ τρίτῳ, at the third 
(signal), ii. 2.4, ἐπὶ τούτῳ or τούτοις, 
at or upon this, thereupon, next, iii. 
2. 4, vi. 1. 11, vii. 3. 14; of cause, 
aim, or reason, for, i. 3. 1, 6. 10, il. 
4. 5, 8, iii. 2. 4, v. 4. 11, 8. 18, vi. 4. 
13, vii. 7. 39; of possession, in the 
power of, i. 1. 4, ill. I. 13, v. 5. 20, 
over, in command of, i. 4. 2, τὸ ἐπὶ 
τούτῳ, as far as in him lay, vi. 6. 
23; of condition, ἐφ᾽ ¢ or ᾧτε, on 
condition that, with inf., iv. 2. 19, 
4. 6, vi. 6. 22. 

With acc., of place, to, on, upon, 
i. 1. 3, 5. 13, iii. 4. 25, iv. 4. 4, 15, v. 
2. 19, 22, vi. 2. 19, vii. 3. 23, éxl 
δόρυ (q.v.), to the right, iv. 3. 29, 
ἐπὶ δεξιά, to the right, vi. 4. 1, ἐπὶ 
moda, see dvaxwpéw, V. 2. 32, dva- 
Bas ἐπὶ τὸν ἵππον, mounting one’s 
horse, i. 8. 3, iii. 4. 35, in a hos- 
tile sense, against, i. 3. 1, il. 1. 4, 
3. 21, iv. 4. 20, v. 7. 24; of ex- 
tent of space, extending over, over, 
along, i. 7. 15, iv. 6. 11, ἐπὶ πολύ, 
for a great distance, i. 8. 8, jv. 2. 
13, cf. vii. 5. 12, ἐπὶ βραχύ, see 
ἐξικνέομαι, iii. 3. 17, ἐπὶ πᾶν ἐλθεῖν, 
make every effort, iii. 1. 18; of 
extent of time, for, during, vi. 6. 
36, ws ἐπὶ τὸ πολύ, generally, for 
the most part, iii. 1. 42, 43; of the 
purpose or object of an act or mo- 
tion, to, for, i. 2. 2, 6. 10, iil. 1. 22, 
iv. 3. 11, v. 1. 8, vii. 4. 3; rarely 
distributive, ἐπὶ πολλοὺς τεταγμέ- 
νοι, arranged many deep (but some 
read gen.), iv. 8. 11. 


In composition ἐπί signifies over, 
in, upon, against, in addition, but 
often gives merely intensity and 
force to the simple word without 
otherwise affecting its meaning. — 

ἐπιβάλλω [βάλλω], throw on, iii. 
5. 10; pf. mid., ἐπιβεβλημένοι τοξό- 
ra, archers with their arrows on 
the string, with or without ἐπὲ ταῖς 
veupais, iv. 3. 28, v. 2. 12. 

ἐπιβοηθέω [R. BoF + θέω], come 
to the rescue or aid of, with dat., 
Vi. 5.9. 

ἐπιβουλεύω [R. Bod], plan or 
plot against, conspire or intrigue 
against, lay snares against, with 
dat., i. 1. 3, iL. 5. 16, i. 4. 39, Vv. 
1. 9; with inf., purpose, design, 
scheme, v. 6. 29. 

ἐπιβουλή, js [R. Bod], a planning 
against, plot, scheme, design, in- 
trigue, li. 5. 1, 38, vii. 2. 16; with 
dat. or πρός and acc. of the pers., 
i. 1. 8, v. 6. 29; ἐξ ἐπιβουλῆς, by 
artifice, vi. 4. 7. 

émylyvopar [R. γεν], be upon, 
come upon, esp. in a hostile sense, 

fall upon, attack, Lat. superuento, 
abs. or with dat., iii. 4. 25, vi. 4. 
26. 

ἐπιγράφω [γράφω], write upon, 
inscribe, Lat. inscribd, v. 3. 5. 

ἐπιδείκνῦμι [R. 1 Sax], show to, 
point out, display, abs., with acc. 
and dat., or with dat. and a clause, 
i. 2. 14, til. ‘2. 26, κ᾿ 4.17; show 
in words or deeds, make clear, dis- 
close, i. 3. 18, 16, 9. 7, Vv. 5. 24, Vil. 
4. 23; mid., show oneself or for 
oneself, distinguish oneself, bring 
to light, show, abs., with acc., or 
with a clause, i. 9. 10, 16, ii. 6. 27, 
iv. 6. 15, v. 4. 34. 

ἐπιδιώκω [διώκω], pursue after, 
follow up, chase, of enemies, abs., 
1 coh, ars) a. 96, BEB 

ἐπιδόντας, see ἐπεῖδον. 

ἐπιέζετο, 566 πιέζω. 

ἐπιθαλάττιος, a, ov, Or os, ον [θά- 
Narra], on the sea, lying on the 
sea, Lat. maritimus, of places, Υ. 
5. 23. 


ἐπίθεσις-ἐπιμελής 89 


ἐπίθεσις, ews, ἡ [R. Oe], a setting 
on, attack, Lat. impetus, vii. 4. 23 ; 
with dat., iv. 4. 22. 
ἐπιθυμέω, ἐπιθυμήσω, ἐπεθύμησα 
[R. 1 θυ], have one’s heart on, de- 
sire, wish for, long for, covet, Lat. 
cupio, with inf., acc. with inf., or 
with gen., i. 9. 12, 21, ii. 5. 1l, 6. 
16, iii. 2. 39, v. 1. 2, vi. 1.21; lust 
after, be in love with, iv. 1. 14. 
ἐπιθυμία, as [R. 1 θυ], desire, 
longing, Lat. cupiditds, ii. 6. 16. 
ἔπικαίριος, ov [καιρός], in season, 
suitable, appropriate, Lat. oppor- 
tunus ; οἱ ἐπικαίριοι, the important 
or chief men, Vii. 1. 6. 
ἐπικάμπτω (κάμπτω,καμπη-, κάμψω, 
ἔκαμψα, -κέκαμμαι, ἐκάμφθην, bend), 
bend towards, of an army, wheel, 
i, 8. 23. 
ἐπικαταρρϊπτέω [ῥίπτέω], throw 
down after, iv. 7. 18. 
ἐπίκειμαι [κεῖμαι], Jie upon, press 
upon, of an enemy, attack, Lat. in- 
tO, abs. or with dat., iv. 1. 16, 3 
7, V. 2. 5, vi. 5. 29, vii. 8. 17. 
ἐπικίνδυνος, ov [κίνδῦνος], dan- 
gerous, Lat. periculdsus, with dat. 
of pers., i. 3. 19, ii. 5. 20, vii. 7. 84. 
ἐπικουρέω, ἐπικουρήσω, ἐπεκούρησα 
[ἐπίκουρος, 6, ally], be a helper, aid, 
assist, with dat., v. 8.21; also with 
dat. of pers. and acc. of thing, εἰ δέ 
τῷ χειμῶνα ἐπεκούρησα, if I pro- 
tected any one from the cold, v. 8. 
25. 
ἐπικούρημα, aros, τό [ἐπικουρέω], 
help, protection, defence, with gen. 
χιόνος and dat. ὀφθαλμοῖς, iv. 5. 13. 
ἐπικράτεια, ἃς [R. 1 κρα], mas- 
tery, power, command, Lat. impe- 
rium, Vi. 4.4; of a country, realm, 
dominion, vii. 6. 42. 
ἔπικρύπτω [κρύπτω], conceal 
thoroughly, hide; mid., conceal 
oneself or one’s acts, do secretly, i. 
1. 6. 
ἐπικύπτω (κύπτω, κῦφ-, «κύψω, 
ἔκυψα, κέκῦφα, stoop), stoop towards 
or over, iv. 5. 82, 
ἐπικυρόω (Kipdw, κυρώσω, extpwoa, 


Ἂν» i σὰν Ν 


if ww Ν 


power], make valid), confirm, rat- 
ify, vote, iii. 2. 32, 

ἐπικωλύω [κωλύω], prevent, hin- 
der, with acc. of pers. and gen, of 
thing, iii. 3. 3. 

ἐπιλαμβάνω [λαμβάνω], take to 
oneself, fasten to, take in, include, 
vi. 5. 5, 6; mid., take hold of, 
catch, abs. or with gen., iv. 7. 12, 
18, 

ἔπιλανθάνομαι [R. λαθ], let es- 
cape one; forget, Lat. obliuiscor, 
with gen., iii. 2. 25. 

ἐπιλέγω [R. dey], say besides, 
add, with dir. disc., i. 9. 26. 

ἐπιλείπω [λείπω], leave behind, 
Lat. relinguo ; in pass., τὸ ἐπιλειπό. 
μενον, the part (of the army) which 
was left behind, i. 8.18; of things, 
Jail, give out, fall short, Lat. dé- 
Jicio, abs. or with acc. of pers., i, 5. 
6, iv. 5. 14, v. 8. 3, vi. 4. 20. 

ἐπίλεκτος, ov [R. dey], selected, 
picked out, Lat. élécti; subst., ol 
ἐπίλεκτοι, picked men, a band of 
soldiers reserved for difficult or 
dangerous service, the flower of the 
army, ili. 4. 43, vii. 4. 11. 

ἐπιμαρτύρομαι (μαρτύρομαι, éuap- 
Tupdunyv [μάρτυς], call to witness), 
appeal to, invoke, Lat. obtestor, of 
gods, iv. 8. 7. 
ἐπίμαχος, ov [R. pax,] that may 
be easily attacked, assailable, of a 
place, v. 4. 14. 
ἐπιμέλεια, ds [R. ped], care for a 
person or thing, solicitude, pains, 
attention, i. 9. 24, 27. 
ἐπιμελέομαι and ἐπιμέλομαι (iv. 2. 
26, v. 7. 10), ἐπιμελήσομαι, ἐπιμεμέ- 
λημαι, ἐπεμελήθην [R. μελ], take 
care of, look out for, watch out 
Jor, Lat. cird, with gen. or περί 
and gen., with ὅτι and a clause, or 
a clause with ὡς or ὅπως, i. 1. 5, 8. 
21, iii. 1. 14, 38, iv. 2. 26, v. 1. 7, 7. 
10; take charge of, attend to, with 
gen. of pers. or thing, iii. 2. 37, iv. 
8. 25, v. 3. 1. 
ἐπιμελής, és [R. μελ], careful, 
anxious, watchful, Lat. diligéns, of 


κεκύρωμαι, ἐκυρώθην [κῦρος,τό, might, 


persons, iii. 2. 30, 


83 ἐπιμέλομαι-ἐπιστέλλω 


Ι Ἷ 5 horse, Lat. equum 
αι, see ἐπιμελέομαι. housings on one’s ἢ ; 
reir μα], stay by, stay on | sternere (the ancients having no 
with, with ἐπὶ and dat., vii. 2. 1; saddles), ili. 4. 35. eae aii 
tay ‘on wait for, wait, with ἔστε Εἰπισθένης, ous, ὁ, Epi : 
no a clause V. 5. 2. Amphipolis, captain of great 
” alee (μίγνυμι, μιγ-, μέξω, | Cunaxa, where he fought skilfully, 
ἔμιξα, μέμτγμαι, ἐμέχθην and ἐμέγην | i. το. 7, iv. 6.1, 3. + ia 
rR. pry] mix), mix with; mid. Emo Gévys, ous, ὁ, Episthenes, 
intr., mix with others, have inter- Sey nas a lover of boys, Vii. 4. 
‘ourse or dealings with, Lat. im- | 7-10. ᾿ di 
al ‘of i ἐδῇ 5. 16. ἐπισττίζομαι (σιτίζομαι; σττιοῦ- 
i ἐπινοέω [R. γνω], have on one’s | μαι, -εσϊτισάμην [σῖτος], eat), Sur- 
mind, purpose, intend, Lat. in| nish oneself with provisions, ve 
imo habed, ii. 2. 11, iii. 1. 6, vi. | food or provender, collect or pr a 
“Ὁ ͵ cure supplies, forage, abs., or witl 
᾿ ἐπιορκέω, ἐπιορκήσω, ἐπιώρκησα, | εἰς τὴν πορείᾶν, 1. 4. 19, ii. 5. 57, ill. 
ἐπιώρκηκα [ érlopxos], swear falsely, | 4. 18, iv. 7. 18, vil. ᾿ κω αν 
commit perjury, be a perjurer, Lat. ἐπισϊτισμός, 6 [ πισ μαι], ; 
peiérd, abs., ii. 5. 38, iii. 2. 10, vii. | supplying oneself with bia i 
Ap gas ἐπιορκεῖν, perjury, ii. 6.| procuring supplies, foraging, τ ᾿ 
29 ᾿ swear falsely by, with θεούς, ii. dogs i. 5.9; food supplies, 
» ty Whe Ee Bae vil. 1. 9. 
! ἀμ, ds’ [ἐπίορκος, false| ἐπισκέπτομαι [σκέπτομαι], wee 
swearing, perjury, Lat. periurium, | to, see to, examine, lat 
abs. or With πρὸς θεούς, ii. 5. 21, iii. | indir. question, iii. 3. 18. ; 
2.4, 8 ἐπισκευάζω [R. oxv], jit out, 
2. ἐπίορκος, ον [ὅρκος], forsworn, make ready, ot a pie | restore, 
perjured, Lat. peritrus, ii. 6. 28. repair, Lat. if ee δὲ mes PMN 
ἐπιπάρειμι [R. eo], be there be-| ἐπισκοπέω [oxor ω]; to, 
sides, iii. 4. 23 to, of a general, i review, 
ppp ele cheat - t. recénsed, li. 3. 2. 
ἐπιπάρειμι [elu], march on be- | Lat. . 
side or poate of another body, ἐπισπάω a ΜΝ με =o 
with κατά and acc., iii. 4. 30, Me 3. | to με οὐρα " ke A 
9: rch al up to one’s place, | pull along, lv. 7. 14. 
a "Ἢ, Ἦ “iy τ ᾿ ἐπίσποιτο, 566 ἐφέπομαι. ἱ , 
ἐπιπέπτω [R. wer], fall upon,esp.| ἐπίσταμαι, vig γόνου Marge F 
in a hostile sense, attack, mre θην, cite padgpmergeiiye Ai οἱ baal 
abs. or with dat., i. 8. 2, iv. 1. 10, | Knowle actic 
7 20, Vi. 3. 3, vii. 3. 48 : of snow, | experience, ΤῊΝ “fp ag ὌΝ = 
all, abs., iv 15, iii. 3. 16, vil. 3. 20; - 
all, abs., iv. 4. 11. 3. 1, 1 
ἡ ἐπίπονος, ov [R. σπα], painful, stand, be gp of, τῇ ἜΡΟΝ 
toilsome, laborious, Lat. labodrid-| with, know, abs., W Mss Mi 
sus, i. 3. 19; of a bird of omen, | ὅτι and a clause, " wi . ὮΝ 
portending suffering, Vi. = 23. aie" pi 3: pr 4. ig | ΓΝ 
Ἴ τπτέω᾽ Γῥιπτέω], throw a » 3. 2, v. I. 10, vi. 6. 
eine ao wr” J ἐπίστασις, ews, ἡ [R. Meg | a 
ἐπίρρυτος, ον [ῥέω], flowed upon, stopping, of yi eg 4 ἐρηῇ 
watered, well watered, of a plain,| ἐπιστατέω [R. ora |, ἜΝ 
Lat. inriguus i. 2. 22, mander, exercise command, : ἅ ra 
᾿ ἐπισάττω (σάττω, σακ-, toata,| ἐπιστέλλω [στέλλω], sen " 


σέσαγμαι, load), put a load on; 


send word, give notice either by 


phrase, ἐπισάξαι τὸν ἵππον, put the 


letter or message, with acc. of the 


ἐπιστήμων- ἐπιχωρέω 8 


thing, dat. of pers., and ws with a 
clause in indir. disc., vii. 6. 44 ; di- 
rect, command, enjoin, with dat. of 
pers. and inf., v. 3. 6, vii. 2. 6. 
ἐπιστήμων, ov, gen. oves [ἐπίστα- 
μαι], acquainted with, expert in, 
with gen., ii. 1. 7. 
ἐπιστολή, ns [ἐπιστέλλω], letter, 
missive, either public or private, 
and therefore representing both 
litterae and epistula in Lat., 1.6. 3, 
lil, 1. 5, vii. 2. 8. 
ἐπιστρατεία, ἃς [R. στρα], march 
or campaign against, ii. 4. 1. 
ἐπιστρατεύω [R. στρα], march | 
or take the field against, make war 
on, with dat., ii. 3. 19. 
ἐπισφάττω [σφάττω], slay upon, 
properly of sacrifices at a grave ; 
of one man upon another’s body, 
i, 8. 29; mid., slay oneself upon 
with ἑαυτόν or abs., i. 8. 29. 
_émratre [R. trax], draw up be- 
sides or behind, draw up as a re- 
serve force, with acc. and dat., vi. 
5.9; lay orders on, command, with 
dat. of pers. and inf., ii. 3.6, vii. 6. 
14. 
émrehéw [τέλος], bring to an 
end, fulfil, perform, of oracles, 
dreams, eéc., iv. 3. 13. 
ἐπιτήδειος, a, ov [ἐπιτηδές, ady., 
of set purpose], made on purpose 
Jor an end or object, suited to, 
apt, fitted, proper, adapted to, con- 


+ 


20, iii 2. 8, v. 6. 84: mid., fai 
upon, attack, assault, abs.or with 
dat., ii. 4. 3, 19, iii. 4.29, iv. 1. 10 
vii. 4. 14. 

ἐπιτρέπω [τρέπω], turn anybody 
towards, with ἐπὶ δεξιόν, vi, 5: 11: 
turn anything over to another, give 
over to, grant, entrust, Lat. con- 
cedo, with dat. of pers. and some- 
times with inf. added, i. 2. 19, ij, 
4.27, vi. 1.31; allow, permit, leave 
free, with dat. of pers. and inf.. 
ili, 2, 31, 5. 12, vi. 2. 14, vii. 7. 3; 
leave a question to another, refer 
to, with dat. of pers. and an interr, 
clause, vii. 7. 18; mid., give one- 
self up for protection, of cities and 
persons, i. 9. 8. 

ἐπιτρέχω [τρέχω], run upon or 
_ assault or attack rapidly, iv. 3. 

ἐπιτυγχάνω [R. trax}, chance 
upon, come upon, meet with, find, 
with dat., i. 9. 25, iii. 4. 18, vii. 2. 18. 

ἐπιφαίνομαι [R. da], show one- 
self, come in sight, appear, ii. 4. 
24, ili. 3. 6, 4. 39. 

ἐπιφέρω [R. dep], bring upon, 
lay upon ; mid., bring oneself upon, 
rush upon, attack, abs., i. 9. 6; of 
the sea, rage, run high, v. 8. 20. 

ἐπιφθέγγομαι [φϑέγγομαι, sound 
besides or against; of a trumpet, 
sound the charge, iv. 2. 7. 
ἐπιφορέω [R. hep], put upon, of 


venient, Lat. idjneus, abs. or with earth, cast loads of upon, iii. 5. 10 


inf., or a8 pass. with acc. and inf., 
1, 3. 18, ii. 5. 18, v. 2. 12, vi. 6. 30, 


ἐπίχαρις, ει, gen. cros [R. yap], 
pleasing, gracious, suave ; subst., 


J ns x, ir 7. 13; Tov ἐπιτήδειον τὸ ἐπίχαρι, pleasantness of manner, 
awev, he struck the man who de- | suavity, Lat. suduitas, ii. 6, 12 


served it (i.e. to be struck), ii. 3. 11; 


ἐπιχειρέω, ἐπιχειρήσω, ἐπεχείρησα, 


οἱ ἐπιτήδειοι, Friends, Lat. necessa-  ἐπικεχείρηκα, ἐπεχειρήθην [R. xep] 
rit, vii. 7. 57 5 very freq. is ra éwi-| put one’s hand to, set to iti a 
τήδεια, provisions, Lat. commedatus, attempt, try, Lat. conor, abs or 
i. 3. 11, ii, 2. 3, iii. 1. 19, iv. 1. 8, | with inf, i. 9. 29, ii. 5. 10, iv. 3, 26, 


V. Fie. Fes 3. WH. 2. 13. 
ἐπιτίθημι [R. Ge], set up, lay 


vi. 6, 6, vii. 7. 29. 


ἐπιχέω (xéw, xu-, -χέω, ἔχεα, -κέ- 


upon, put on, Vi. 4.9; δίκην ἐπι- ἰ χυκα, κέ 

tt ὁ é » Κέχυμαι, ἐχύθην (cf. ἐγχέ 
τιθέναι, inflict punishment or pen- pour), pour on or in, aN αν ν᾽ 
alty, make pay for, Lat. supplicium | iy, 5. 27. 


sumere, abs., or with dat. of pers. 


ἐπιχωρέω [χωρέω], move against, 


and gen, of cause or crime, i. 3. 10, | advance as for attack, i. 2. 17, 


85 ἐπιψηφίζω-ἔρομαι 


ἐπιψηφίζω [ψηφίζω], put to vote, 
put the question, Lat. in suffra- 
gium mitt, abs. or with acc., v. I. 
14, 6. 35, vi. 1. 25, vii. 3. 14. 
ἔπλευσαν, see πλέω. 
ἐπλήγη; 866 πλήττω. 
ἐποικοδομέω [R. Εἰκ + δέμω, build, 
cf, Lat. domus, house], build on or 
upon, With ἐπί and dat., iii. 4. 11. 
ἕπομαι (cem-), ἕψομαι, ἑσπόμην, 
impf. εἱπόμην [R. ver], follow, go 
with, attend, accompany, Lat. se- 
quor, abs., with dat., or with σύν 
and dat., i. 3.6, 4. 11, ii. 2. 4, iii. 
1. 25, iv. 1. 6, v. 4. 16, vi. 5. 1, vii. 
1.37; follow as an enemy, pursue, 
abs., i. 8. 19, iii. 4. 19, v. 4. 24. 
ἐπόμνυμι [ὄμνυμι], swear to a 
thing ; abs. in aor., εἶπεν ἐπομόσᾶς, 
he said with an oath, vii. 5. 5, 8. 2. 
ἑπτά, indecl. [érra], seven, Lat. 
septem, i. 2. 5, ii. 4. 13, vii. 4. 19. 
ἑπτακαίδεκα, indecl. [ἑπτά + δέ- 
κα], seventeen, Lat. septemdecim, 
ii. 2. 11, iv. 5. 24. 
ἑπτακόσιοι, ai, a [ἑπτά + ἑκατόν], 
seven hundred, Lat. septingenti, 1. 
4. 3, vi. 2. 16. 
᾿Επύαξα, ns, Epyaxa, the wife 
of king Syennesis of Cilicia; she 
visited Cyrus, i. 2. 12 sqq., 25. 
ἐπύθετο, 566 πυνθάνομαι. 
ἔραμαι, ἐρασθήσομαι; ἠράσθην, 
love, of sexual passion, fall in love 
with, with gen., Lat. amd, iv. 6. 3. 
(Poetic, except in aorist.) 
épdw, only pres. and impf. in 
Attic [ἔραμαι], love, desire ardently, 
long for, Lat. amd, as death, with 
gen., iii. 1. 29. 
ἐργάζομαι, ἐργάσομαι, εἰργασάμην, 
εἴργασμαι, -εἰργάσθην [R. Fepy], do 
work, labour, esp. of farmers, with 
γῆν understood, Lat. cold, ii. 4. 
22; do, accomplish, with acc., Vi. 3. 


exercises, i. 9.5; ἔργῳ ἐπεδείκνυτο 
καὶ ἔλεγεν, he showed both in word 
and deed, i. 9. 10, ef. iii. 2.82; xpd- 
τιστοι ὑπηρέται παντὸς ἔργου, the 
best supporters of every undertak- 
ing, i. 9. 18. 
ἐρεῖ, see elpw. 
= αβνεν see ἔρομαι. 
᾿Ἐρετριεύς, dws, ὁ ['Epérpia, Ετε- 
tria], a native of Eretria, an Ere- 
trian, vii. 8. 8. Eretria was an 
ancient city on the western coast of 
Euboea. It joined the Athenians 
against the Persians in 500 B.c., 
and was destroyed by the latter in 
490 n.c., but was afterwards rebuilt 
in a new position. 
ἐρημία, as [ἔρημος], loneliness, 
solitude, privacy, Lat. sdlitudd, ii. 
5. 9, V. 4. 34. 
ἔρημος, ἡ; ov, and os, ov (cf. Eng. 
hermit], lonely ; of places, things, 
and conditions, deserted, without 
inhabitants, empty, unprotected, 
abandoned by, without, abs. or with 
gen., i. 5.4, ii. 1. 6, iii, 4. 10, iv. 
2. 18, vii. 1.24, 2.18; σταθμοὶ ἔρη- 
μοι, marches through desert, i. 5.1, 
iv. 5. 2; of men, alone, without ; 
phrases: ὕὉμῶν ἔρημος, without you, 
i, 3.6; ἱππεῖς ἔρημοι, cavalry with- 
out infantry, Vii. 3. 47 ; ἔρημα κατα- 
λιπεῖν τὰ ὄπισθεν, leave the rear 
exposed, iii. 4. 40. 
ἐρίζω (ἐριδ-), ἤρισα [ἔρις, strife], 
strive, contend, rival, vie with, 
abs. or with dat. of pers. and περί 
with gen., i. 2. 8, iv. 7. 12. 
ἐρίφειος, ον [ἔριφος, ὁ, kid], of a 
kid, Lat. haedinus, iv. 5. 31. 
ἑρμηνεύς, dws, ὁ [Ἑρμῆς, Hermes, 
the messenger of Zeus], interpreter 
of foreign tongues, Lat. interpres, 
i. 2.17, iv. 5. 10, 34, vii. 2. 19. 
ἑρμηνεύω, ἡρμήνευσα [épunveds, cf. 


17, vii. 3. 47; do to any one, inflict | Eng: hermeneutic}, be an inter- 


on, with two accs., v. 6. 11. 
ἔργον, τό [R. Fepy], work, action, 
deed, result of an action, operation, 


preter, interpret, Lat. interpretor, 


v. 4. 4. 
ἔρομαι, Attic only in fut. ἐρήσομαι 


execution, ii. 6. 6, iii, 1. 24, 5. 12, | and 2 aor. ἠρόμην [ef épwrdw], ask 
v. 7. 32, vi. 3.17, vii.8.17. Phrases: |a question, inquire, Lat. quaero, 


τὰ els τὸν πόλεμον ἔργα, military|abs. or with acc., the question 


ἐροῦντα-ἐσταλμένος 86 


following in dir. disc., or in in- 


dir. disc. introduced by an interr. 
word, i. 7. 9, 8. 15, 16, ii. 3. 20, iii. 
Bt, w & OG, wh og. 13, vi 2 26, 
3. 45. 

ἐροῦντα, see εἴρω. 

ἐρρωμένος, ἡ, ov, properly pf. 
partic. of ῥώννῦμι, g.v., strong, 
stout, vigorous, aS comp., éppwye- 
νέστεροι, iii. 1.42; as subst., éppw- 
μένον, τό, resolution, vigour, ii. 6. 
11. 

ἐρρωμένως, adv. [ἐρρωμένος], vig- 
orously, manfully, vi. 3. 6. 

épixw, ἤρυξα [R. 2 Fep], hold 
back, keep off, with acc. and ἀπό 
with gen. of pers., iii. 1. 25. (Po- 
etic, except in Xen.) 

ἔρυμα, aros, τό [R. 2 Fep], safe- 
guard, protection, wall, i. 7. 16, 
iv. 5. 9. 

ἐρυμνός, ἡ, dv [R. 2 Fep], de- 
Jended, fortified, strong by nature, 
of fortresses, i. 2. 8, v. δι 2, vi. 4. 
21; τὰ ἐρυμνά, strong positions, 
strongholds, iii. 2. 23, 

ἔρχομαι (ἐρχ-, ἐλυθ-, €dO-), ἐλεύ- 
σομαι, ἦλθον, ἐλήλυθα, come, go, ar- 
rive, Lat. uenid; of the present 
stem only the indic. is used, the 
other moods of the pres. and the 
impf. being represented by forms 
of εἶμι; used abs., i. 1. 11, ii. 1. 3, 


| of pers., come into close relations 
with, i. 2. 26; εἰς λόγους σοι ἐλθεῖν, 
have an interview with you, Lat. in 
conloquium uenire, ii. 5. 4, ef. iii. 1. 
29; ἐπὶ wav ἐλθεῖν, make every ef- 
Sort, iii. 1. 18, 

ἐρῶ, see εἴρω. 

ἐρῶντες, 566 ἐράω. 

ἔρως, wros, ὁ [ἔραμαι, cf. Eng. 
erotic], love, desire, wish, Lat. 
amor, With an inf. clause as obj. 
acc., ii. 5. 22. 

épwrdw, ἐρωτήσω, etc. [cf ἔρομαι, 
ask ἃ question, inquire, Lat. quaero, 
abs., with or without an interr 
clause in dir. or indir. disc., i. 6. 7, 
ii. 1. 15, iii. 4. 39, iv. 8. 5, vi. 6. 4. 
vii. 6. 4; with acc. of pers and a 
clause in dir. or indir. disc., i. 3, 
18, 6, 8, ii. 4. 15, v. 5. 15, vii. 3. 25; 
with two aces. of pers. and thing, 
sometimes with a clause in indir. 


disc., i. 3. 20, iv. 4. 17. 

ἐσέσω(σ᾽ το, see σῴζω. 

ἔσθ᾽, by elision and euphony for 
ἐστί. 

ἐσθής, ἦτος, ἡ [R. Fer], dress, 
clothes, raiment, collectively, Lat. 
uestis, ili. 1. 19, iv. 3. 25, vii. 4. 18. 

ἐσθίω (ἐδ-, ἐδεσ-), ἔδομαι, ἐδήδοκα. 
-δήδεσμαι, ἠδέσθην [root εδ, cf. Lat. 
edd, eat, Eng. Eat], eat, have tw 


lii. 1. 4, iv. 2. 17, v. 1. 4, vi. 2. 7, vii. 
1. 39; with πρός, παρά, and ἐπί 
with acc. of the pers., i. 1.10, 4. 3, 
ii. 5. 39, iii. 1. 24, iv. 1. 19, vii. 7 
19; with πρός, εἰς, and ἐπί with acc. 
of place, i. 2. 18, 7. 4, ii. 4. 23, iii. 1. 
3, iv. 6. 27, 8. 6, v. S. 26, Vi. 3. 17, 
vii. 2. 12; with an adv. of place, ii. 
1. 4, ili. 1. 7, v. 5. 16, vi. 1. 16, 33; 
With παρά and gen. of pers. or ἐκ 
and gen. of place, ii. 1. 8, iv. 8. 24, 
V. 5. 7, Vii. 4. 14; with the fut. par- 
tic. to denote purpose, with or 
without ws, iii. 2. 11, vii. 1. 28, η. 
17 ; with cognate acc. ὁδόν, ii. 2. 6, 
iii. 1. 6, cf. waxpordrny, vii. 8. 20; 
with the dat. of pers. in the sense 
of for, to the aid of, iii. 1. 14. 


Phrases: els χεῖρας ἐλθεῖν with dat. 


eat, live on, abs. or with acc., i. ς. 
6, ii. 1. 6 (for 2 aor. ἔφαγον, see the 
word). 

ἐσκεδασμένων, see σκεδάννῦμι. 

ἐσκέψατο, see σκέπτομαι. 

ἔσοιτο, see εἰμί. 

ἐσπείσαντο, see σπένδω. \ 

ἑσπέρα, as [R. Fer], evening, Lat. 
uesper and uespera, iii. 1. 3, iv. 
7-27; with xwpa understood, the 
west, Lat. occidéns, so πρὸς ἑσπέρᾶν, 
westward, to the west, iii. 5. 15, v. 
7-6. Phrase: εὐθὺς ἀφ᾽ ἑσπέρας, 
directly after nightfall, Lat. primo 
uespere, Vi. 3. 23. 

Ἑσπερῖται, dv, the Hesperitae, 
vii. 8. 25, a people in northwestern 
Armenia, about the head of the 
Acampsis river (cf. iv. 4. 4). 
ἐσταλμένος, see στέλλω. 


87 


ἔστε, adv., even to, all the way 


δον, clear down to the ground, iv. 5: 
6; as temporal conj., up to, until, 
Lat. dum, with indic., il. 5. 30, iii. 1. 
28, 4.49; with ἄν and subjv., ll. 3. 


ἔστε-εὐδαιμονίζω 


τὰ ἕτερα), over on the other side, v. 
to, Lat. usque, as in ἔστε ἐπὶ δάπε- | 4 


ἐτετέμητο, see τἱμάω. 
ἐτέτρωτο, See τιτρώσκω. 
ἔτι, adv. of time and degree. Of 


time, present, past, or future, yet, 


26, vii ὃ9; ' nger, any more, after- 
9, iv. 5. 28, V. I. 4, 6. 26, vii. 1. 33; | as yet, still, longer, any , af 


with opt., i. 9. 11, V. 5. 2; wondhe, as 
long as, With indic., lil, 1. 19; with 
opt., iii. 3. 5. Ἷ 
ἑστηκώς, ἔστησαν, see ἵστημι. 
ἐστιγμένους, see στίζω. 
ἐστραμμένα, see στρέφω. 
ἑστώς, 566 ἵστημι. 
ai ἡ, ον [ἐξ], farthest, out- 
ermost, extreme, Lat. extremus ; of 
situation, πόλις ἐσχάτη, frontier or 
border city, i.2. 10, 4.1; metaphor- 
ically, extreme, uttermost, worst, of 
punishments, In phrases: ἐσχάτη 
δίκη, capital punishment, Lat. ulti- 
mum supplicium, vi. 6. 10; τὰ 
ἔσχατα παθεῖν, suffer death, ii. 5. 
24; τὰ ἔσχατα αἰκισάμενος, tortur- 
ing most eruelly, Lat. ultimis cru- 
ciatibus adficere, iii. 1. 18. 
ἐσχάτως, adv. [ἔσχατος], in the 
highest degree, extremely, li. 6. 1. 
ἔσχε, 566 ἔχω. 3 
ἔσωϑεν, adv. [ἐν], from inside ; 
τὸ ἔσωθεν, the inner, i. 4. 4. 
éralpa, as [cf. ἑταῖρος], female 
companion, courtesan, Lat. paelex, 
iv. 3. 19, v. 4. 35. Ι 
ἑταῖρος, ὁ [ο΄ ἑταίρα], compan- 
ion, friend, comrade, chum, Lat. 
comes, iv. 3. 30, 7. 11, vii. 3. 30. 
ἐτάχθησαν, see τάττω. 
᾿Ετεόνϊῖκος, ὁ, Eteonicus, a Spar- 
tan officer under Anaxibius in By- 
zantium, vii. 1. 12, 15, 20. 
ἕτερος, a, ov [ς΄ Eng. hetero-dox, 
hetero-geneous |, the other, one of 
two, the one, Lat. alter, with art., 
iii. 4. 25, iv. 1. 23, vi. 1. 5, 6, SO 
without art., other ships, of a sec- 


wards, again, Lat. adhuc, i. 5. 12, 


6. 8, ii. 1. 4, 2. 14, iil. 1. 3, iv. 3. 33, 
v. 2. 26, vi. 2. 15; with negs., no 
longer, no more, not in future, not 
at all, i. 1. 4, 6. 8, 7. 18, 1 ie BR 
ἔτι δέ, πρὸς δ᾽ ἔτι, and ἔτι τοίνυν, 
besides, Lat. praetered, iii. 1. 23, 2. 
2,v.1.9. Of degree, with comps., 
still, even, i. 9. 10, ill. 2. 17, iv. 3. 
32, vi. 6.35; So ἔτι ἄνω, yet higher, 
still further inland, Vil. 5. 9. 
ἕτοιμος, 7, ov, or os, ον [R. ev], 
real, ready, prepared, Lat. paratus, 
with dat. of pers. or with inf., i. 6. 
3, iv. 6. 17, ve. 1. 2, vii. 1.33; of the 
future, sure to come or to be real- 
ised, certain, vii. 8. 11. 
ἑτοίμως, adv. [R. eo], readily, at 
once, willingly, Lat. prompte, ll. 5. 
2, v. 7. 4. 
ἔτος, ous, τό [cf. Lat. wetus, old, 
Eng. WETHER ], year, Lat. annus, 11. 
6. 15, v. 3. 1, Vi. 4. 25; of τριάκοντα 
ἔτη γεγονότες, men of thirty, li. 3. 
12; ἣν ἐτῶν τριάκοντα, he was thirty 
years old, ii. 6. 20; ἑκάστου ἔτους, 
annually, Lat. quotannis, v. 3. 18. 

ἐτράπετο, see τρέπω. 

ἐτράφητε, see τρέφω. 

ἔτυχον, See τυγχάνω. ' 

εὖ, adv. [R. eo], well, in its wid- 
est sense, Lat. bene, fortunately, 
prosperously, easily, luckily, i. 4. 8, 
7. 5, ii. 3. 21, iii. 1. 36, v. 6. 4, Vil 
1, 22; esp. with the verbs πράττειν, 
ποιεῖν, εἰδέναι, and πάσχειν, Q.v.; 
with an adv., εὖ μάλα, repeatedly, 
thoroughly, vi. 1. 1. 

nc at as [εὐδαίμων], fortu- 


ond fleet, i. 4. 2; without art. and | nate circumstances, prosperity, 11. 
et, i. 4. 


loosely, like ἄλλος, Lat. alius, an-| 5. 13. 


other, a second, others, i. 2. 20, 1]. 
. 23, iv. 8. 27, so τούτων ἕτεροι, 
others besides, others still, vi. 4. 


εὐδαιμονίζω, εὐδαιμονιῶ, ηὐδαιμό- 
νισα [εὐδαίμων], count happy, 11. 5. 
7; congratulate, with acc. of pers. 


8. Phrase: ἐκ τοῦ ἐπὶ θάτερα (for | and gen. of cause, i. 7. 3. 


εὐδαιμόνως-εὔκλεια 8 8 


εὐδαιμόνως, adv. [εὐδαίμων, hap- 
pily, prosperously, in comp., iii. 1. 
43 


εὐδαίμων, ov [Saluwy, divinity, cf. 
Eng. demon], with a good genius, 
hence, happy in its widest sense, 
Jortunate, prosperous, wealthy, 
Jlourishing, of men and very freq. 
of cities and countries, i. 2. 6, 5. 
7, 9. 15, ii. 4. 28, iv. 7. 19, v. 4. 32, 
6. 25. 
εὔδηλος, ov [δῆλος], quite clear, 
in neut. with ὅτε and a clause, iii. 
x. 2, v. 6. 18. 
εὐδία, as, fair weather, a calm, v. 
8. 19. 
εὐειδής, ἐς [ἢ FS], good looking, 
well shaped, handsome, in sup., ii. 
2. 
εὔελπις, ει, gen. δος [ἐλπίς], full 
of good hope, hopeful, ii. 1. 18. 
εὐεπίθετος, ov [R. θε], easily as- 
sailable ; phrase: εὐεπίθετον ἣν τοῖς 
πολεμίοις, it was easy for the enemy 
to attack, iii. 4. 20. 
εὐεργεσία, ἃς [R. Fepy], well do- 
ing, good conduct, kindness, ii. δ. 
22, 6. 27, vii. 7. 47. 
evepyeréw, εὐεργετήσω, εὐεργέτησα 
or εὐηργέτησα, εὐεργέτηκα or εὐηργέ- 
τηκα, εὐεργέτημαι Or εὐηργέτημαι, 
εὐεργετήθην [R. Fepy], do well, do 
good, do a kindness, Lat. bene fa- 
cio, ii. 6. 17. 
εὐεργέτης, ov [R. Fepy], well doer, 
benefactor, ii. 5. 10, vii. 7. 11. 
εὔζωνος, ov ζώνη], well-girdled, 
an epithet of women, because the 
girdle just above the hips (not to 
be confused with the girdle worn 
just under the breast) made the 
garment set well. See s.v. ξώνη. 
Sometimes the garment was drawn 
up over the girdle, so that the limbs 
might be free to move, as in pic- 
tures of Artemis. Men on journeys 
and in war followed this fashion, 
hence the word means with clothes 
tucked up, and therefore active, 
agile, of soldiers, applied to bar- 
barians, iii. 3. 6, iv. 2. 5, Vola th 


15, to Greek heavy-armed troops, 
iv. 3. 20, vii. 3.46. The word does 


not mean light-armed, but is ap- 
plied to any sort of troops capable 
of active movement. The hoplites 
mentioned in vii. 3. 46 as εὔζωνοι 
were under thirty years of age. 
εὐήθεια, as [εὐήθης], guilelessness, 
simplicity, silliness, i. 3. 16. 
εὐήθης, es [ς΄ εἴωθα], simple- 
minded, silly, foolish, i. 3. 16. 
εὐθυμέομαι, εὐθυμήσομαι [R. 1 θυ], 
be cheerful, enjoy oneself, iv. 5. 30. 
εὔθυμος, ον [R. 1 θυ], of good 
heart, cheerful, in comp., iii. 1. 41. 
εὐθύς, adv. of time, straightway, 
immediately, at once, directly, Lat. 
statim, i. 5. 8, 8. 1, ii. 2. 15, iii, 1, 
O, iv. 3. 9, 7. 3, v. 4. 14, vi. I. 28, 
vil. 3. 14. Phrases: εὐθὺς παῖδες 
ὄντες, even from childhood, Lat. ἃ 
pueris, i. 9. 4, cf. ii. 6. 11; εὐθὺς ἐκ 
παίδων, even from boyhood, Lat. ἃ 
pueris, iv. 6. 14; εὐθὺς ἐπειδάν, as 
soon as, iii. 1. 13, iv. 7.7; πρῶτον 
μὲν οἶδα εὐθύς, in the jfirst place to 
state the facts at once, etc., Vv. 6. 
7; εὐθὺς ἀφ᾽ ἑσπέρας, directly after 
nightfall, vi. 3. 23. 

εὐθύωρος, ov [εὐθύς], in a straight 
direction; only in neut, as adv., 
straight on, ii. 2. 16. 

εὔκλεια, as [xdéos, τό, fame, ef. 
Lat. clued, be spoken of, and laus, 
praise, Eng. Loup], fair fame, 


to Greek light-armed troops, vi. 3. 


glory, vii. 6. 32, 33. 


89 Εὐκλείδης -εὐρύς 


; Tides, ἃ Phiia- 
Ἐϊὐκλείδης; ov, Euclic , ἃ Ph 
sian soothsayer, friend of Xeno- 

phon, vii. 8. 1 ff. ' | 
εὐκλεῶς, adv. [εὐκλεής, famous, 
cf, εὔκλεια], gloriously, Vi. 3. 17. 
᾿ εὐμενής, és [R. μα], well disposed, 
of gods and men ; of places, actions, 
etl. favourable, kindly, comfort- 
able, iv. 6. 12. 
εὐμεταχείριστος, ον [R. xep], easy 
to handle or deal with, of a person, 
ii. 6. 20. 
εὔνοια, as [R. γνω], good er 
kindness, affection, 1. 8. 29, ii. 6. 19, 
vii. 7.46; with objective gen., Iv. 
. 20. 
f εὐνοϊκῶς, adv. [R. yvo], with 


or facility of obtaining what one 
can use, means in the Sense of 
money, V. 1. 6; πολλὴ ὕμῖν εὐπορία 
φαίνεται, you appear to have excel- 
lent prospects, Vii. 6. 37. 

εὔπορος, ov [R. περ], easy to 
travel through or pass, iii. 5. 17, 
vi. 5. 18; of a road, ii. 5. 9, Vv. 1. 
nadie ov [πρᾶκτός, verbal of 
πράττω], easy to be a practica- 

le, in comp., il. 3. 20. 

' εὐπρεπής, ἐς [πρέπω], good look- 
ing, handsome, of persons, iv. I. 14. 
εὐπρόσοδος, ov [ὁδός], easy to 
approach, accessible, ἴῃ sup., V. 
4. 30. 


good will or affection ; with ἔχειν, 
be well disposed, with dat. of pers., 
i ahve ov, contr. εὔνους, ουν [R. 
γνω], well or kindly disposed, vl 
tached, of persons, abs. or with 
dat. of pers., i. 9. 20, ii. 6. 20, v. 6. 
2, vii. hoy eal 
εὔξασθαι, 566 εὐχομαι. ' 
a sh ov [ξένος], kind to 
strangers, hospitable; ὃ Εὔξεινος 
Πόντος, the Black Sea, the Euxine, 
iv. 8. 22, which was at first called 
by Ionic sailors in old times “ Aget- 
vos, inhospitable, because of its 
stormy character. The name was 
changed by euphemism (of. Cape 
of Good Hope, originally Stormy 
Cape) after the colonization of its 
shores by the Milesians in the sev- 
nth century B.C. ὶ ' 
i Εἰὐοδεύς, Se or Evodias, ov, ὁ, 
either a proper name of a elie 
captain, Huodeus, or a corrupte 
gentile adj., vii. 4. 18. 
εὔοδος, ov [ὁδός], easy to travel, 
practicable, passable for men _ 
animals, abs. or with dat., iv. 2. 9, 
8. 10, 12. 
εὔοπλος, ον [R. oer |, — armed 
or equipped, in sup., 11.3.6. 
decay ‘adv. [R. wer], easily, 
with little difficulty, ii. 5. 23, iv. 3. 
21. 


εὕρημα, aros, τό [εὑρίσκω], what 
is Fouad, "esp. unexpectedly, α Jind, 
windfall, vii. 3. 18; εὑρημα ἐποιη- 
σάμην, I thought it a piece of good 
luck, ii. 3. 18. : 
εὑρίσκω (ebp-), εὑρήσω, ηὗρον, 
ηὕρηκα, ηὕρημαι, ηὑρέθην, find, dis- 
cover, Lat. γερεγῖο, i. 2. 25, Ml. 2. 
12, iv. 8. 10, v. 4. 27, Vil. 5. 14; 
Jind out, discover, devise, 1. 3. 18, 
with acc. of pers., and inf. or partic., 
i. 9. 29, vi. 1. 29; mid., find for 
oneself, procure, obtain, ll. 1. 8, 
with παρά and gen. of pers., vil. 1. 
31. (The late forms evpoy, evpyka, 
etc., are printed in some editt. of 
the Anab. 
εὖρος, a τό [εὐρύς, breadth, 
width, Lat. latitidd, used with or 
without the art., and generally in 
ace, of specification, i. 2. 5, 23, 7. 
15, ii. 4. 12, iii. 4. 7, ἵν. 3. a οἱ 
9, vi. 4. 8, vii. 8. 18; with gen. of 
measure, i. 2. 8, il. 4. 25, ill. 4. 9; 
with adj. πλεθριαῖος, i. 5. 4, iv. 6. 4, 
Εὐρύλοχος, ὁ, Hurylochus, a μαὶ δ 
lite from Lusi in Arcadia, wel 
known for his bravery, iv. 2. 21, 
7. 11, 12, vii. 1. 32, 6. 40. : 
Hipipaxos, ὁ; Eurymachus, ὁ 
Dardanus; he aided in thwarting 
Xenophon’s plan to found a city 


on the Pontus, v. 6. 21. 
εὐρύς, εἴα, ὐ, broad, wide, Lat. 


εὐπορία, as [R. περ], easy means 


latus, iv. 5. 25, ν. 2. 5. 


Εἰὐρώπη- Ἔφεσος 00 


Εὐρώπη, ης, Europe, the north- 
west division of the Old World, 
Vii. 1. 27, 6. 32. 

εὔτακτος, ov [R. trax], well ar- 
ranged, of soldiers, orderly, well 
disciplined, ii. 6. 14, iii. 2. 30. 

εὐτάκτως, adv. [R. Tax}, in a 
disciplined manner, with good dis- 
cipline, vi. 6. 85. 

εὐταξία, ἃς [R. rax], good ar- 
rangement, esp. in a military sense, 
discipline, subordination, Lat. dis- 
ciplina, i. 5. 8, iii. 1. 38. 

εὔτολμος, ov [R. rad], of brave 
spirit, courageous, i. 7. 4. 

εὐτυχέω, εὐτυχήσω, etc. [R. trax], 
be well off, fortunate, or successful, 
abs. or with cognate acc., i. mh Ἰ. 
vi. 3. 6. 

εὐτύχημα, aros, τό [R. Tax], piece 
of good fortune, success ; τοῦτο τὸ 
εὐτύχημα εὐτυχεῖν, gain this advan- 
tage, vi. 3. 6. 

Εἰὐφράτης, ov, the Euphrates, the 
great river of Western Asia, i, 3. 
20, 4.11, ii. 4.6, iv.1.3. It rises in 
Armenia, where it consists of two 
branches, the modern West Phrat 
or Turkish Kara Su (Black River), 
and the East Phrat or Murad Su. 
The latter was crossed by the 
Greeks, iv. 5. 2, and the main 

river at the usual ford at Thapsa- 
cus, i. 4. 17. It flowed through 
Mesopotamia and Babylon to its 
junction with the Tigris, thence to 
the Persian gulf. 
ae js [εὔχομαι], prayer, i. 9. 

εὔχομαι, εὔξομαι, εὐξάμην or ηὐξά- 
μην, pray, offer prayers, wish Jor, 
abs. or with inf. or with acc. and 
int, ἢ 4.7, 17, 9. ll, iv. ἃ 16, 
vii. 1. 30, 7. 27; pray or pay one’s 
vows to the gods, offer vows, Lat. 
udta facid or suscipio, with acc. of 
the thing vowed, iv. 8. 25; abs. 
with dat. of the god, iii, 1. 6, to 
which may be added the inf. ex- 
pressing what one will do or what 
the god is asked to do, iii, 2. 9, iv. 


εὐώδης, es (Siw, smell, cf. Lat. 
odor, smell], sweet-smelling, fra- 
grant, Lat. oddrdtus, of plants and 
wine, i. 5. 1, iv. 4. 9, V. 4. 29. 

εὐώνυμος, ov [R. γνω], of good 
name or omen; euphemistic for 
ἀριστερός, left, in order to avoid 
the mention of this word, which 
was considered unlucky from its 
use in soothsaying; as a military 
phrase, τὸ εὐώνυμον, with or with- 
Out κέρας, the left wing of an army, 
the left, i. 2. 15, 8. 4, το. 6, iv. 8. 
14, v. 4. 22, vi. 5. 11. 

εὐωχέω, εὐωχήσομαι, εὐώχημαι., 
εὐωχήθην [R. σεχ], entertain ; mid, 
and pass., fare sumptuously, feast, 
have one’s fill, of men and ani. 
mals, iv. 5. 30, v. 3. 11. 

ebwx la, as [R. vex], feast, ban- 
quet, vi. 1. 4. 

ἐφ᾽, by elision and euphony for 
ἐπί. 

ἔφαγον (φαγ-), 2 aor. with no 
pres. in use, inf. φαγεῖν [cf. Eng. 
oeso-phagus], eat, taste of, abs., 
with acc., or gen., ii. 3. 16, iv. 8. 20, 
Vii. 3.28. (See ἐσθίω.) 

ἐφάνη, see φαίνω. 

ἔφασαν, ἔφατε, 566 φημί. 

ἔφεδρος, ον [R. oS], seated by ; 
subst., ὁ ἔφεδρος, a contestant in 
the games who has drawn a bye 
and therefore waits for the second 
round in the contest, Lat, supposi- 
ticius, hence, fresh opponent, re- 
serve force, ii. 5. 10. 

ἐφέπομαι [R. cer], follow after, 
Jollow, pursue, esp. of an enemy, 
abs. or with dat., ii. 2. 12, lii. 4. 3, 
v. 8. 8, vi. 5. 17, vii. 6. 29; 2 aor. 
opt. ἐπίσποιτο, iv. 1. 6. 
᾿Εφέσιος, a, ov [“Egeoos], of 
Ephesus, Ephesian, v. 3. 4, 6. 
Ἔφεσος, ἡ, Ephesus, the oldest 
of the twelve ancient cities of Ionia, 
settled by colonists of the Attic 
deme Euonomeus, i. 4. 2, ii. 2. 6. 
It lay on the Selinus, v. 3. 8, near 
the mouth of the Cayster, in the 
Asian Plain, from which the chief 


3- 13, vi. 1. 26. 


highways led into the interior. 


91 


This plain is believed by many to 
have given its name to the conti- 


nent. . 
venient landing place for siya 
and Romans coming to Asia, ant 
from here Xenophon started to 


ἐφη-ἔχω 


ἐφορμέω [dpuéw], lie at anchor 


opposite or against, blockade, abs., 
ΤῊ Ω 
Ephesus was the most con- | vil. 6, 28. 


ἔφορος, ὁ [R. 2 Fep], overseer ; 


esp. a Spartan officer, ephor. The 
board of ephors at Sparta num- 


ioin Cyrus, vi. 1. 23. It was not, | bered five, elected annually from 
}! S, Vi. iE. 


however, of great commercial im- 


all of the citizens. They possessed 


bef im Al-| authority not only over the com- 
ortance before the time of 1 t 

a nor did it take a promi-|monwealth in general, but also 
CAC shy 


nent part in wars. — 
nowned as a sacred city, contain- 
ing the famous temple of the 
Ephesian Artemis, the largest of 
Greek temples and one of the won- 
ders of the world, v. 3.12. ‘This, 
however, was the second temple, 
the first having been burned on 
the very night, it was said, when 
Alexander was born. The present 
ruins at Ajasluk are those of the 
suburb of the city, for Ephesus it- 
self lay on the hill Prion or Pyon. 
The remains of the temple lie be- 
tween Ajasluk and this hill. 
ἔφη, ἔφησϑα, see φημί. 
ἑφθός, ἡ, dv [ef. ἔψω], boiled, Υ. 
. o2. 
ἐφίημι [ἴημι, send or let go to; 
id teas to allow one to do a 
thing, with dat. of pers. and inf., 
vi. 6. 31. : 
ἐφίστημι [R. στα], set beside or 
on, make stop at, make halt, bring 
to a stop, i. 8. 15 (se. τὸν ἵππον), 
li. 4. 28 ; set over, set in command, 
Lat. praeficid, abs. or with dat., 11], 
3. 20, 4. 21, v. 1. 15; intr. in mid. 
and 2 aor., pf. and plpf. act., be set 
on, stop, halt, sometimes with ἐπί 
and dat., i. 4. 4, 5. 7, ii. 4. 26, Υ. 4. 
34; be set in command of, com- 
mand, with dat., vi. 5. 11. 
ἐφόδιον, τό [ὁδός], provision for 
a journey, travelling expenses, Lat. 
uidticum, Vii. 3. 20, 8. 2. 


ἔφοδος, ἡ [ὁδός], way to, ap- 


proach, with ἐπί and acc., iii. 4. 41, 


iv. 2.6; of an army, advance, at- 


tack, ii. 2. 18, 3. 1. 


It was re- | over the kings. Two of them regu- 


larly accompanied the kings on 
their campaigns. But at the end 
of their year of office, they were 
liable to be called to account by 
their successors. ‘The year was 
dated by the name of the first 
ephor, as at Athens by that of the 
first archon. ii. 6. 2, 3. 

ἔφυγε, 566 φεύγω. 

sore, as ἔξχδος, τό, hate}, en- 
mity, ill will, Lat. inimicitia, 11. 4. 
he ; 

ἐχθρός, a, dv [Ex os, τό, hate), 
hated or hating, hostile, Lat. int- 
micus, i. 3.20; subst., enemy, Lat. 
hostis, i. 3. 6, ii. 5. 39, vii. ῃ ἢ; 
sup., οἱ ἐκείνου ἔχθιστοι, his bitterest 
0es, iii. 2. 5. 

7 ἐχυρός, d, dv [R. vex], tenable, 
jirm, strong, with χωρίον, ii. 5. 7, 
vii. 4. 12. ν᾽ 

ἔχω (cex-), ἔξω and σχήσω, ἔσχον, 
ἔσχηκα, -έσχημαι [R. σεχ], have, 
in its widest sense, Lat. habeo, 
hold, possess, occupy, keep with 
one, include, i. 1. 6, 2. 11; 8. 10, 
21, iii. 1. 19, 5. 1, Υ͂. 4. 15, vi. I. 
17, of ἔχοντες, the rich, vil. 3. 28 ; 
have to wife, iii. 4. 13; obtain, re- 
ceive, i. 3. 11, ii. 4. 22, Ail. 2. 20; 
keep, hold fast, carry, wear, 1. 5. 8, 
9. 6, ii. 3. 11, iii. 2. 28, iv. 4. 16, vi. 
1.9; pass., be held, captured, iv. 
6. 22, vii. 3. 47, ἐν ἀνάγκῃ ἔχεσθαι; 
see ἀνάγκη, ii. 5.21; ἔχων, having, 
is generally best rendered by with, 
Lind 28m. 13, vii. 3. 47 ; 
with inf., be able, can, ii. 2. 11, 1}. 
2. 12, vii. 6. 39; hold off, keep off, 
with acc. or with acc. and gen., ill. 


ae ’ 
ἐφοράω [R. 2 Fep], have one’s 5. 11, vii. 1. 20; used intr. and 


eyes on, keep in sight, vi. 3. 14. 


ἑψητόΞ- ζεῦγος 9 98 ee thre 


generally with adv., when the 
phrase is best rendered like εἶναι Ζ. 
with an adj., as εὐνοϊκῶς ἔχειν, be 


middle and ends, and tied under | envy, cf. Eng. zeal, jealous], to be 


i reast.| deemed happy, envied; rots οἴκοι 
the animal’s neck across the b nage πω th oy ln ae 


well disposed, i. 1. 5, εἶχεν οὕτως, 
it was 80, iii. 1. 31, So with κακῶς, 
καλῶς, ἐντίμως,: ἥπερ, ἄλλως, ὅπῃ, 
etc., 1. 5. 10, 8,18, ἢ, 1. ἣν 3S, 
iii. 2.37, vi. 1.21; without an adv., 
κῶμαι ὑπὸ τὸ πόλισμα ἔχουσαι, vil- 
lages extending along under. the 
citadel, vii. 8. 21, with ἀμφί and 
acc., be busy at or about, v. 2. 26, 
vi. 6. 1, vii. 2. 16. Mid., hold on 
to, come next to, be next, abs. or 
with gen., i. 8. 4,9; cling to, strive 
Jor, Vi. 3.17. Phrases: μεῖον ἔχειν, 


have the worst of it, i, το. 8, iii. 4> 


18; εἰρήνην ἔχειν, live in peace, ii. 
6.6; ἔνδηλον τοῦτο εἶχεν, he made 
this clear, ii. 6. 18; ἡσυχίᾶν ἔχειν, 
keep still, iv. 5.13; with a partic, 
ἔχω retains its own force, as ἔχομειν 
ἀνηρπακότες, we have carried of 
and we keep, i. 3. 14, cf. iv. 7. 1, vii. 
et Plog 

ἑψητός, ἡ, by (verbal- of &pw), 
boiled, made by boiling, with ἀπό 
and gen. of source, ii. 3. 14. 

ἕψομαι, see ἕπομαι. 

ἕψω, ἐψήσω, ἥψησα, boil, ii. 1. 0, 
Vv. 4. 29. 

ἕωθεν, adv. [ἕως], from dawn, at 


Ζάβατος, see Zardras. 

Zawdras, ov, or Ζάβατος, ὁ, the 
Zapatas river, in Syrian called 
Zaba, Wolf, and hence by later 
Greeks Λύκος. It emptied into the 
Tigris just below Nineveh, ii. δι}. 
iii. 3.6. (Great Zab.) 

{aw, Show, live, be alive, abs. or 
with ace. of time, i. 6. 2, R11, i. 
6. 29, iii. 1. 43, v. 8.10; the means 
by which one lives may be ex- 
pressed by partic. or by ἀπό and 
gen., i. 5. 5, vi. 1. 1, vii. 2. 33. 

fea, ἂς, used only in pl., spelt, 
Lat. far, a sort of wheat-like grain 
used for cattle and by the poor 
for food (triticum spelta), V. 4. 
27. 

ζειρά, ds, mantle or cloak reach- 
ing to the feet, worn by Thracian 
horsemen, vii. 4. 4. 
ζευγηλατέω [R. ἴυγ + ἐλαύνωΊ], 
drive a yoke of oxen, abs., vi. 
1. 8. 

ζευγηλάτης, ov [R. ζυγ + ἐλαύνω], 
one who drives a yoke of oxen, 
teamster, vi. 1. 8. 
ζεύγνυμι (ivy-), ξεύξω, ἔζευξα, 
ἔζευγμαι, ἐζεύχθην, or ἐζύγην [R. 


daybreak, Lat. prima lice, iv. 4. 8, 
vi. 3. 23. 

ἐῴκεσαν, see ἔοικα. 

ἐῶντες, see ἐάω. 

ἑώρα, ἑώρᾶκα, ἑώρων, see ὁράω. 

ἕως, ἕω, ἡ [cf. Lat. aurora, Eng. 
EAST], the rosy light of dawn, Lat. 
aurora, dawn, daybreak, Lat. dila- 
culum, i. 7. 1, ii. 4. 24, iv. 3, ἢ; 
πρὸς ἕω, to the east, eastward, Lat. 
ad orientem or ad sdlis ortum, iii. 


fvy], yoke, attach, bind, join, 
Jasten, Lat. iungd, with πρός or 
παρά and acc., iii, 5. 10, vi. 1. 8; 
esp. of bridges, γέφυρα ἐζευγμένη 
πλοίοις, bridge made of boats, i. 2. 
5, ii. 4.24; διῶρυξ ἐζευγμένη πλοίοις, 
canal with a pontoon bridge, ii. 4. 
13. 

ζεῦγος, ous, τό [R. ζνγ], a yoke 
or pair of oxen, horses, or mules, 
Lat. iugum, pl., cattle, iii. 2. 27, 


5. 15, v. 7. 6. 

ἕως, temporal conj., as long as, 
while, Lat. dum, with indic., i. 3 
11, ii. 6. 2, iii. 4. 49; with ἄν and 
subjv., i. 4. 8, iii. 1. 43, vi. 3. 14; 
up to, until, Lat. dum or donec, 
With indic., iv. 8.8; with ἄν and 
subjy., v. 1. 11; with opt., ii. 1. 2, 
Vi. 5. 25. 


vi. 1. 8, vii. 5. 2, 8.23. The name 
arose from the use of the yoke, 
ζυγόν, in harnessing horses, mules, 
or cattle to the chariot, wagon, 
or plough, instead of the modern 
collar with its attached traces. The 
yoke was commonly curved where 
it rested on the neck of the animal. 
Straps were fastened to it at the 


neighbours, i. 7. 4. 


ζημιόω, ζημιώσω, etc. [ ζημία, loss], 


cause une loss, fine, punish, with 
dat. of the penalty, vi. 4. 11. 


ζητέω, ζητήσω, etc., seek for, ask 


or a person, ii. 3. 2, 4.16; seek to 
᾿ a thing, desire, with inf., v. 4. 33. 


By means of other straps the yoke 
was securely lashed to the pole. 

Ζεύς, Διός, ὁ, Zeus, son of Cronus 
and Rhea, king and father of gods 
and men, god of the heavens and 
director of the powers of nature, 
esp. thunder and lightning, iil. I. 
12, 4.12. The destiny of all man- 
kind was believed to lie in his 
hands, and from him came both 
good and evil. Justice and the 
laws were under his protection. 
He was worshipped everywhere, 
but at Olympia stood his most 
splendid temple, with the famous 
statue by Phidias, v. 3. 11. Of 
the many titles applied to him, the 
Anab. contains the following: ξέ- 
vos, as defender of strangers and 
upholder of the laws of hospitality, 
iii. 2.4; σωτήρ, as preserver from 
troubles and dangers, i. 8. 16, iii. 
2.9, Vi. 5. 25; βασιλεύς, as king of 
gods and men, iii. 1. 12, vi. I. 22, 
vii. 6. 44 : μειλέχιος, the gracious, 
merciful, whose favour was to be 
won by propitiatory sacrifices, vii. 
8. 4. His name occurs freq. in 
oaths, i. 7. 9, v. 8. 6, vii. 6. 11. 

ἣν, see ζάω. 

ον ὁ, Zelarchus, market- 
master or commissary in the Greek 
army; attacked by the soldiers, 
but escapes, v. 7. 24, 29. 

ζηλωτός, 4, dy [verbal of ζηλόω, 


ζυμίτης, ov [ζύμη, leaven, of. Eng. 


zymotic]}, in the phrase ἄρτοι ζυμῖ- 


ται, leavened bread, Lat. panis fer- 
mentatus, Vii. 3. 21. 

ζωγρέω, ἐζώγρησα, ἐζώγρημαι; ἐζω- 
γρήθην  ζωός + R. ay], take or save 
alive, give quarter to, iv. 7. 22. 

av, see (dw. 

‘ei ΠΝ Eng. zone], belt, 
girdle, zone, Lat. zona, worn both 
by men and by women just above 
the hips, to be distinguished from 
the second girdle worn by women 
just under the breast (see the cut 
8.0. evfwvos). The 
ζώνη kept the χιτών 
(q.v.), which was a 
loose garment, in 
place,and furnished 
the means for regu- 
lating its length, 
since it could be 
drawn up under the 
girdle so as_ to 
leave the feet un- 
impeded. The gir- 
dles of women were 
often simple cords, 
but they might be 
elaborate and handsomely orna- 
mented. See 8.0. φιάλη. The sol- 
dier’s girdle, iv. 7. 16 (in Homer 


commonly called {worjp), was ἃ 


emulate, envy, ζῆλος, 6, emulation, 


substantial belt of metal, or of 


ζωός- ἡγέομαι 94 


leather plated with metal, worn 


Lat. qua (se. uid), i. το. 6, iii, 4, 


about the loins to secure the lower | : i 
eI | 37, 5. 1, iv. 2. 8, 5. 34, 8. 12, v. 3. 


part of the cuirass and fastened by 
hooks, See 8.0. κνημΐς. Phrases: 2\a- 
Bov τῆς ζώνης τὸν ’Opdvrav, grasped 
Orontas by the girdle, the sign 
among the Persians that one had 
been condemned to death, i. 6. 10: 
εἰς ζώνην δεδομέναι, given Jor gir- 
dle money (as we should say, pin 
money), Of Persian queens who 
had cities given them for their 
small expenses, i. 4. 9. 
ζωός, ἡ, dv [ζάω, cf. Eng. zodiac 

Zo0-logy], living, alive, iii. 4. 5. 


H. 


[11, 6. 7, vi. 5. 
| what way, how, as, Lat. qua (sc 
| ratione), esp. with sup. of adv., : 
ἐδύνατο τάχιστα, as quickly as pos- 
| sible, i. 2. 4, vi. 3.21, so ἢ τάχιστα 
VI. 5. 153; ἢ δυνατὸν μάλιστα with 
all one’s power, i. 3. 15. i 
» 866 εἰμί. 

ἡβάσκω (Bn, youth), begin to 
be in the flower of youth, Lat 
pubesco, iv. 6. 1, vii. 4. 7. | 

ἤγαγον, see ἄγω. 

ἡγάσθη, see ἄγαμαι. 

ἤγγειλα, see ἀγγέλλω. 

γγνατο, see ἐγγυάω. 

ἡγεμονία, as [R. ay], leadership, 


we "Ὁ ᾿ * 

ἥ, disjunctive conj., or, used like 
both Lat. wel and aut, i. 4. 16, 8. 
12, Iv. 7.5, 10, V.2.4,6.9; ἢ... 7, | 
“eae “22 OF, 1. 3. 5, Vii. 6. 40, 7.| 
4; In indir. double questions, the 
first member introduced by wére- | 
es πότερα, or εἰ, whether... or, | 
at. wirum...an, i δ 
ΤᾺΝ gba νην ., “. 13, 10. 5, 
> H. 1. 10, 21, 5. 17; in a dir. 
question, having no first member 

expressed, ii. 4. 3. 


᾿ ' 
Ὦ, Comp. 60Π]., than, Lat. quam, 


chief command, precedence, iv. 7.8. 

Ἠγεμόσυνα, τά (sc. ἱερά) [R. ay |, 
offerings for safe-conduct, esp. to 
Heracles ἡγεμών, iv. 8. 25, 

ἡγεμών, dvos, ὁ [R. ay], one who 
leads, ἃ guide on a journey, Lat. 
dux, i. 3. 14, ii. 3. 6, iii. 2. 23, iv. 
I. 22, YY. 2. 1, vi. 3. 11, vii. 3. 40; 
With τῆς ὁδοῦ, iii. 1.2 ; leader, com- 
mander, esp. of large bodies of 
troops, jield marshal, i. 6. 2. ¥; 12 
Vi. 6. 35; of the state standing at 
the head of Greece, said to hold 


used , i é é 
Ma pyri Mirah I. 4, 2. 4, 11, | the hegemony, vi. 1. 27: as a title 
"50 IV. 7. 5; With a following | applied to Heracles as protector of 


inf., vi. 2.13; after words of comp. 
meaning, as ἀντίος, ἐναντίος, ἄλλως 
οὐδὲν ἄλλο, διαφέρειν, ii. 2. 13, iii, 
I. 20, v. 8. 24, vi. 6. 34; ἄλλο τι 7; 


᾿ 


wanderers and warriors, vi. 2. 15, 


5. 24, 25 (ef. ἡγεμόσυνα). 


, ἡγέομαι, ἡγήσομαι, ΄ ἡγησάμην, 


Ἴγημαι, -ηγήθην [R. ay], go be- 


See ἄλλος ; omitted after μεῖον With? fore, lead the way, guide, conduct 
δ He ᾽ 


a numeral, vi. 4. 24.. 

ἢ, Prepositive intensive particle, 
really, truly, certainly, Lat. uéra, 
1. 6. 8; esp. in an Oath, ἢ μήν, in 
very truth, upon my sacred honour, 


Lat. ducd, abs. or with dat. of 
pers., ll. 3. 10, iii. 2. 20, iv. 6. 2, v. 
4. 20, vi. 3. 15, vii. 3. 8; with ἐπί, 
πρός, or εἰς and acc., ii. 3. 9, iv. 2. 
2, Vi. 5.1, vii. 1. 33; with ἐκ and 


i. 3. 26, vi. 1. 31, 6. 17, vii. 7. 35, | gen., 1. 4.2; with ὁδόν, iv. 1. 24, 


& 2. 
ἦ, interr. particle, implying noth- 


“Ne, V. 8. 6, vii. 4. 9, 6. 4, 27. 
» See ὁ. 

, dat. sing. fem. of rel. ὅς, used | } 

adv. (sc. ὁδῷ), of place, in what | ¢ 


place, where, by the way in which, | 2 


V. 4. 10; καλῶς ἡγεῖσθαι, be a good 


ing as to the answer expected, Lat. wt Dein “9: arama 


γούμενοι, the van, Lat. primum 


agmen, li. 2. 4, vi. 5. 12, vii. ch 
lead, take command of, command, 


6 general, abs., or with gen. or 


lat., i. 7.1, 8. 22, ii. 2. 8, iii. 1, 25, 


. 36, iv. 1. 27, v. 2. 6, vi. 6. 32, 


22; of manner, ip 


95 Ἡγήσανδρος-ἠλίθιος 


vii. 1.40; think, believe, consider, 
after a survey of the facts, like 
Lat. ducd, with inf., acc. and inf., 
or with two accs., i. 2. 4, ii. 1. 11, 
vi. 1. 18, vii. 7. 27. 

Ἡγήσανδρος, ὁ, Hegesander, a 
Greek captain, chosen as one of 
their generals by the Arcadians 
and Achaeans, Vi. 3. 5. 

ἤδει, ἤδεσαν, see οἶδα. 

ἡδέως, adv. [R. ad], with pleas- 
ure, gladly, contentedly, Lat. liben- 
ter, 1, 2. 2, iv. 3. 2; comp. ηδῖον, 
i. 4. 9; Sup. ἥδιστα, ii. 5.15. 

ἤδη, adv., referring to time Just 
past or just about to come, some- 
times of present time, Lat. iam, 
already, by this time, ere now, now, 
at once, straightway, i. 2.1, 3. 11, 
4. 16, ii. 1. 3, 6. 4, ili, 1. 46, iv. 3. 
24, v. 5. 22, vi. κ᾿ 29, vil. I. 4, 1 
24. 

ἥδομαι, ἡσθήσομαι, ἥσθην [R. 65], 
be glad, take pleasure in, delight 
in, enjoy, abs., with partic., or with 
dat., i. 2. 18, 4. 16, 9. 26, ii. 5. 16, 
iv. 3.9, v. 1. 4, vii. 8. 6. 

ἡδονή, 7s | R. ad], pleasure, de- 
light, Lat. uoluptas, ii. 6. 6, iv. 4. 
14; of fruit, flavour, taste, Lat. sa- 
por, li. 3. 16. 

ἡδύοινος, ov [R. a+ οἶνος7, pro- 
ducing sweet wine, of a vine, Vi. 
4. 6. 

ἡδύς, εἴα, ύὑ [R. ad], sweet to the 
taste or the feelings, Lat. suduis, 
dulcis; of food and drink, sweet, 
delicious, ii. 3. 15, v. 4. 29, Vi. 4. 4; 
comp. ἡδίων, i. 9. 25; of a brave 
action, pleasant, jine, vi. 5. 24; 
sup. ἥδιστος, i. 5. 3. 

ἤθελε, see ἐθέλω. 

Ὠκᾶν, 566 ἕημι, 

ἥκιστα, See ἥττων. 

ἥκω, ἥξω, in pres. indic. with 
meaning of the pf., be come, have 
come, be present or there, have ar- 
rived, Lat. wenid or adsum (the 
other moods of the pres., and the 
impf., having generally an aor. 
force, but the impf. sometimes 


perf.); used abs., i. 2. 1, 5. 12, 6.3, 
». 2, it. 2. 16, lil, 3. 18, iv.) 5. 67%. 
2. 11, vi. 5. 1, 6. 36, with eis or ἐπέ 
and acc. of place, i. 4. 13, ii. 5. 34, 
iv. 2. 18, vi. 2. 13, with él, χαρά, 
or πρός and acc. of pers., iv. 5. 19, 
vii. 3. 24, 36, with παρά or διά and 
gen., ii. 3. 17, iii. 5. 15; with πάλιν 
iv. 3. 12, vi. 4. 8; with pres. par- 
tic., as ἧκεν ἐλαύνων, he came rid- 
ing, i. 5. 15, ef. i. 2. 6, iv. 4. 16, v. 
1. 10, or with aor. partic., ii. 3. 29, 
vi. 5. 10, vii. 1. 39; of things, as 
presents, or a story, V. 5. 2, Vi. 6. 
13. 
ἤλασε, see ἐλαύνω. 
ἤλεγχον, See ἐλέγχω. 
᾿Ἢλεϊος, a, ον [ Hrs, Elis], a 
dweller in Elis, an Eléan, ii. 2. 20, 
vi. 4. 10, vii. 8. 10. Elis was the 
name of a state in the western 
part of Peloponnésus, bounded 
by Achaea, Arcadia, Messenia, 
and the sea. Its western shore 
was low and sandy, through its 
middle ran the large river Al- 
phéus, and the mountains on the 
eastern border were comparatively 
low. Its independence was, there- 
fore, not due to natural causes, but 
to the fact that it contained Olym- 
pia (q.v.), and therefore generally 
enjoyed exemption from war. It 
produced flax and timber, and was 
noted for its horses. 

ἤλεκτρον, τό [cf. Eng. electric], 
lustre, radiance, a name applied 
to amber and to a compound of 
4 gold and } silver, used in coin- 
age. In the Anab., ii. 3. 15, the 
color of certain dates is compared 
to that of ἤλεκτρον, which proba- 
bly means the compound electrum, 
as the same dates are called by 
Galen χρυσοβάλανοι, gold-dates. 

ἦλθον, See ἔρχομαι. , 

ἠλίβατος, ov, Ionic and poetic 
adj., high, steep, precipitous, of 
rocks, i. 4. 4. 

ἠλίθιος, a, ov, idle, foolish, silly, 


Lat. ineptus, ii. 5. 21, v. 7. 10; 


serves as plpf. and the fut. as fut. 


subst., τὸ ἠλίθιον, folly, ii. 6. 22. 


fea Mang 
mee 


‘ 


ἡλικία -ἥ μισυς 96 


4 - - 
ἡλικίᾷ, ἂς [ἡλίκος, as old vii 
; » 68 old as], | vii. 2. 21, 6. 9 nuépa 
eh M - 2.2 . 9, 80 + 
age, time of life, Lat. aetas, esp.| 6.7, vi. 1. 18; τῆς ἡμερᾶς, ed 
Ν ᾿ i i " ᾽ [ 
pel μὰς of life, man’s estate, | as we say per diem (but it ily de 
Py as Tg to 45 years, cf. | Latin), iv. 6. 4; τῆς ἡμέρας a. 
ὭΣ : igh ταν ll. I. 14, 25. | in a@ whole day, iii. 3.11; ὅλην ie 
Pay ijn Ly ἐκ a], an equal | ἡμέρᾶν, all day long, iv. I. 10; dxd. 
τι ὌΝ Ἢ ce νηί, στῆς ἡμέρᾶς, every day, vi. 6 i 
mre th ᾿ oy 1, . Ὁ. ᾿ é = , i ᾽ ᾿ ᾽ ; 
ἥλιος, ὁ a ' , ἡμέρα γίγνεται, day breaks, it is 
Fay hort Lelien' Pay 1 day, Lat. liicéscit, iv. 6. 23 ri 
mn ! 5 - Ὶ id sun, wat. 3 4] - or ds e é pull " ὦ Ue * 
Ψ » ΔῪν δ, * ἢ α ne i 
ci δ sine Without art.; of its daybreak, ins, 21 ug a wea 
‘ . i . , ᾿ i" ἮΝ , , ᾽ . ὦ , 
rete : verbs ἀνίσχειν and ava- | after daybreak, by Mg iv ie ΕΝ 
are used, of its setting δύ. πρὸ ἡμέρᾶς, before dauhrenk ὙΠ 
vey ΟΥ δύεσθαι, i. το. 15. ii $1: ee ee δαψόγοας, Lat 
3. 1, iii. 4. 8 : 7 6. vii i. ry » 13, | ante liicem, vii. 3. 1. | 
, * ᾿ " "4 . 3. . " ἥμερος oO 
ς P ᾿ v, tam 
Ἥλιος, ὁ [ef ἥλιος], Helios, the Ha nit ey em wid tamed, Lat. 
sun-god, son of Hyperion and Theia oe vg ga Np prants 
ei 7 i »| Cultivated, as opr i at. 
a out of the ocean in the! satiuus. ν᾿ 3. 12 vic long 
΄ lt mul " , 4 . . . 
i τς, in his chariot, and sink-| ἡμέτερος, a, ov [ucts] 
lana — the evening. | longing to us Lat, nasien, ἢ el 
‘mong the Greeks he was exten-| 41. y ih sit. 4 Sh ante Wes 
sively worshipped but mor ᾿ ¥ . δ. will | ἯΙ, 3. Oo 5 subst., τὰ 
ashanti ine ἀν μον more par- ἡμέτερα, our affairs, circumstances 
Se anty by eastern nations, esp. | relations. i. 2 ἐπ 
Persia. Horses were raised j F ae ἐδ κα 
Poesia ana in p pty Mo patiently ἥμι-, found only in composition 
We to him, iv. 5. 35. it hey “at. semi-, half-, Eng. hemi-], 
wkéTa, see dd pe 
q ’ ἰσκομαι. ι ἡμίβρωτος, ον [βρωτός, half- 
eaten, Lat. sémésus, i. 9. 26. 4 
ἡμιδαρεικόν, τό [δᾶρεικός], half a 


ἡμεῖς, elc., see ἐγώ. 
Wl gy yy adv. from pf. pass. 
ΓΟ, OL ἀμελέω [R. ped], care-| daric, i. 3. 21, see δᾶρεικός. 


lessly, heedlessly, i. 7.19. 
nev, impf. from εἰμί } "" : , 
Sudan ae ΓΩΡ τ Ι lal, half full, i. 9. 25. 
Pel νν mae ephemeral), ἡμιοβόλιον, 866 ἡμιωβόλιον 
as including the : “hs and also] ἡμιόλιος, a, ον [ὅλος], containing 
Lat. dis lle ba é 24 hours, | the whole and half, half as eo 
art., i. 2.6 25 ay without the | again, of pay, with gen. of con 
" a 5, ες 7. 14, 18, ii. | parison, i. 3. 21 ly ἡ 
Π , ᾽ ae ¢ +)» « i r 
Ὡς Ἐν a i" ai oe 8. 22, _ ἡμιονικός, 4, dv [ἡμίονος], belong- 
Phrasas: «2 chen 1% 4 14.) ing to mules, with ted 7 
ἸΓΆΒΘΒ : τῇ αὐτῇ ἡμέ | ere ζεῦγος, mule 
same day, i Phi PE OF 1Δ9 team, pair of mules, vii. 5. 2. 
ἡμέρᾳ next zs I ’ ΤΏ ἐπιούσῃ ἡμίονος, ὁ [ὄνος] half-ass . 
Mee, ga Ἂ — postridié, i. 7.| mule, Lat. miulus, v. 8. “TN il 
Lat. meridiés “8.8 2 er ni πὴ Saal ha] ney ὅς 
" ΠΤ ιν δ: éethron, i.e. 50 G “ἃ 
“ye grag within ten days, i. 7. ὃ, see movida hint 7: 
of. iv. 7. 20: ἅ o 4 «“ : 
ἅμα ἡμέρᾳ ᾿ ae α Τῇ ἡμέρᾳ OF! ἥμισυς, ea, v [ἡμι-], half, i. 8 
lice, ΠΤ 2, ἵν oe prima 22; subst., ἥμισυ or ἡμίσεα, with 
sng 4? We I. 9, Vi. 3. 6; rg | or without ar half. half Τα 
πρόσθ μ ut art., the hal 
ΤᾺ “4 na reo day before, | dimidium, with gen. γᾷ i doa 
ἡμέραν during the dl ἡμέρᾶν and | 15, vi. 2. 10; often assimilated to 
opp. to niche Lat if by day, as | gender and number of the depend- 
" » luce, Ὑ. 8. 24, | ent subst., sometimes even when 


ἡμιδεής, és [R. δε], wanting a 


97 


the subst. is omitted, iv. 2. 9, vi. 5. 
17, vii. 8. 18. 
ἡμιωβόλιον or ἡμιοβόλιον, τό 
[ὀβολός], half an obol, i. 5. 6, see 
ὀβολός. 
ἤμουν, see ἐμέω. 
ἠμφεγνόουν, see ἀμφιγνοέω. 
ἤν, contr. for ἐάν, Ὁ. 
ἣν, impf. οὗ εἰμέ. 
ἥνπερ, See ὅσπερ. 
ἠνέχθη, See φέρω. 
ἡνίκα, temporal conj., at which 
time, when, with indic., i. 8. 1, iii. 
4. 24, 5. 4, vii. 3. 40; with ἄν and 
subjv., and with opt., ili, 5. 18; 
ἡνίκα τῆς wpas, at whatever time, 
iii. 5. 18. 
ἡνίοχος, ὁ [ἡνία, τά, reins + Ἐ. 
vex], one who holds the reins, 
driver, charioteer, Lat. auriga, i. 
8, 20. 
ἥξειν, See ἥκω. 
ἧπερ, dat. fem. οὗ ὅσπερ, as adv., 
in the manner in which, Lat. qua 
(sc. ratiOne), ἧπερ εἶχον, just as 
they were, ii. 2. 21; in the place in 
which, where, just where, Lat. qua 
(sc. uid), iv. 2. 9, 4. 18. 
ἠπιστάμεθα, see ἐπίσταμαι. 
Ἡράκλεια, ἃς [Ἡρακλῆς], Hera- 
cléa, a Greek city in Bithynia on 
the Pontus, in the country of the 
Mariandyni, colonized by the Me- 
garians, v. 6. 10, vi. 2. 1, 4. 2. 
Ἡρακλείδης, ov [Ἡρακλῆς], He- 
raclides, of Maronéa in Thrace, in 
the service of Seuthes, vii. 3. 16, 
Ὁ: 5.5..." 
Ἡρακλεώτης, ov [Ἡράκλεια], an 
inhabitant of Heracléa, a Hera- 
cléan, v. 6. 19, vi. 4. 29. 
Ἡρακλεῶτις, sos, ἡ (86. γῆ) 


ἡμιωβόλιον-ἥττων 


greatest of which was the bringing 
of Cerberus from Hades. Accord- 
ing to one legend he descended 
through a chasm in the peninsula 
called Acherusia, near Heracléa in 


Bithynia, vi. 2. 2. In the Anab. 


he figures in his character of guide 


to travellers and warriors, vi. 2. 15, 
5. 24, 25, and as such offerings 
were made to him, iv. 8. 26. 
ἠράσθη, see ἔραμαι. 

ἠρέθησαν, ἥρηντο, see αἱρέω. 
ἠρόμην, See ἔρομαι. 

ἥσθη, 566 ἥδομαι. 

ἡσυχάζω (ἡσυχαδ-), ἡσυχάσω, 
ἡσύχασα [ἥσυχος], be at rest, keep 
quiet, Vv. 4. 16. 

ἡσυχῇ, adv. [ἥσυχος], stilly, 
quietly, in silence, i. 8. 11. 

ἡσυχία, as [ἥσυχος], stillness, 
quiet, rest, repose, Lat. quiés, in 
the phrases, καθ᾽ jovxlav, at one’s 
ease (i.e. Without being attacked), 
Lat. sine molestid, ii. 3.8; ἡσυχίαν 
ἄγειν, take one’s ease, repose, Lat. 
dtium agere or quiétem capere, iii. 
1. 14; ἡσυχίαν ἔχειν, keep still, 
stand still, iv. 5. 13, v. 8. 15. 
ἥσυχος, ov, still, quiet, Lat. quie- 
tus; without speaking, in silence, 
Lat. silentio, vi. 5. 11. 

ἡτησάμεθα, see αἰτέω. 

ἦτρον, τό, the part below the 
navel, belly, abdomen, iv. 7. 15. 
ἡττάομαι, ἡττήσομαι, etc. [7τ- 
των], be less or inferior, be sur- 
passed, with partic., as ἡττᾶσθαι 
εὐεργετῶν, be surpassed in well- 
doing, ii. 6. 17, ef. ii. 3. 28, where 
gen. of comparison τούτου Occurs ; 
be worsted, beaten, in battle, abs. 
or with dat., i. 2. 9, ii. 5. 19, iil. 1. 


[Ἡράκλεια], the district of Hera- | 2, iv. 6. 26. 


cléa, vi. 2. 19. 


ἥττων, ον, gen. ovos, inferior, 


Ἡρακλῆς, ous, ὁ, Heracles, called | meaner, weaker, used as comp. of 
by the Romans Hercules, son of | κακός, abs. or with gen., Vv. 6. 13, 
Zeus and Aleméne of Thebes, the | 32, vii. 3. 5; neut. as adv., ἧττον, 
greatest hero of antiquity and after | less, ii. 4. 2, v. 4. 20, 5. 2, Vi. I. 18 ; 


his death received among the gods 


οὐδὲν ἧττον, not a whit less, not less 


In the service of Eurystheus, king | effectively, vii. 5. 9; sup. ἥκιστα, 


of Argos, he performed his twelve | least of all, by no means, 1. 9. 19, 
celebrated labours, the last and! vii. 3. 38. 


ηὔχοντο-- θεά 


ηὔχοντο, 566 εὔχομαι. 
Ἦνρε, See εὑρίσκω. 
ηὐτύχησαν, 566 εὐτυχέω. 
ἤχθησαν, see ἄγω, 


Θ. 


θ᾽, by elision and euphony for ré. 


ἄλαττα, ys, sea, Lat. mare, i. 2. 


22, lv. 7. 24, V. 1. 2, vi. 2. 18, vii, δ. 
12; θάλαττα μεγάλη, a heavy sea, 
v. 8.20. Phrase: καὶ κατὰ γῆν καὶ 
κατὰ θάλατταν, by land and sea 
Lat. terra marique, i. 1. 7, v. 6. 1. 
θάλπος, ous, τό [θάλπω, soften by 
heat], warmth, heat, esp..of sum- 
mer, in pl., Lat. caldrés, iii, 1, 23. 
θαμινά, adv. [θαμά, often], fre- 
quently, often, Lat. saepe, iv. 1. 10. 
άνατος, ὁ [θνήσκω], death, form 
or kind of death, Lat. mors, i, 6 
10, ii. 6. 29, iii. 1. 43, Vi. 4. 11. 
Phrases: ἐπὶ θάνατον ἄγεσθαι, be 
led to execution, i. 6. 10; ἐπὶ θανάτῳ 
ἄγεσθαι, be prosecuted on a capital 
charge, v. 7. 84. 
θανατόω, θανατώσω, ἐθανάτωσα, 
ἐθανατώθην [θάνατος], condemn to 
death, Lat. damné capitis, ii. 6. 4, 
θάπτω (ταῴφ- for θαφ-), θάψω, 
ἔθαψα, τέθαμμαι, ἐτάφην, perforin 
the funeral rites for a dead body, 
either by burning or burying, like 
Lat. sepelid ; but in Anab. burial is 
always meant, hence, bury, abs. or 
ete acc., iv. 1. 19, v. 7. 20, 30, vi. 
4. ue 
θαρραλέος, ἃ, ov [θρασύς], full ὁ 
confidence, bold, Vee πον val 
sup., abs. or with πρός and acc, 
lll. 2. 16, iv. 6. 9. 
θαρραλέως, adv. [θρασύς], with 
confidence, boldly, Lat. Sortiter, 
abs. or with πρός and ace. of pers., 


98 


5. 30; partic. as adv., confidently, 
with courage, iii. 4. 3, v. ἡ 
θάρρος, ους, τό [θρασύς], δοη 
dence, courage, vi. 5. 17. 
θαρρύνω [θρασύς], make conji- 
dent, cueer, encourage, i. 7. 2. 
Θαρύπας, ov, Tharypas, Menon’s 
favourite, ii. 6. 28. 
θάτερον, see ἕτερος. 
θᾶττον, see ταχύς. 
θαῦμα, aros, τό [θέα], α wonder, 
marvel, cause of wonder, with an 
interr. clause, vi. 3. 23. 
θαυμάζω (θαυμαδ-), θαυμάσομαι, 
ἐθαύμασα, τεθαύμακα, ἐθαυμάσθην 
[θέα], wonder at, admire, be sur- 
prised or amazed, abs. or with acc., 
| Lat. miror, i. 2. 18, 3. 2, ii. 3. 16, 
lili. 2. 35, Iv. 8. 20, vii. 6.19; with 
| ἃ clause with ὅτι or εἰ, i. 3. ὃ, v. 8 
| OF γῇ 5 i 
| 25, Vi. 5. 19; wonder, in the sense 
of desiring to know, with interr. 
clause, i. 8. 16, iii. 5. 13, v. 7. 18 
, - Ἃ 2- ᾿ 
θαυμάσιος, ἃ, ον [θέα], wondrous, 
marvellous, remarkable, Lat. miré- 
bilis or singuladris, abs. or with 
gen. of cause, ii. 3. 15, iii, τ΄ 27. 
θαυμαστός, 7, ὁν [θέα], wondrous, 
wonderful, remarkable, strange, 
Lat. mirabilis, i. 9. 24, ii, 5. 15, iv 
oe ’ i 
8. 11, vii. 7. 10. 
; Θαψακηνοί, οἱ [Θάψακος], inhab- 
tlants of Thapsacus, Thapsacenes, 
1, 4. 18. 
’ « ut ahd 
Θάψακος, ἡ, Thapsacus, a flour- 
ishing commercial city in Syria on 
the west bank of the Euphrates, i. 
4. 11, the usual place for: fording 
the river, which is here only about 
a metre deep. The statement of 
the Thapsacenes to Cyrus, i. 4. 18, 
was therefore mere flattery. Here 
Darius crossed before and after 
Issus. Thapsacus was the Jewish 
Tiphsah, the eastern boundary of 


« 


1. 9. 19, ii. 6. 14, vii. 3. 29, 

θαρρέω, θαρρήσω, ἐθάρρησα, τεθάρ- 
ρηκα (older Attic θαρσέω, etc., not 
m Anab.) [θρασύς], be of conji- 
dence, be of good cheer or courage, 
be without fear, abs. or with acc., 


on kingdom, 1 Kings 4, 24. 
ts ruins are near the mode 
Rakka. ΠΉΝ 
θέα, as [ θέα], sight, spectacle, 
show, Lat. spectaculum, iv. 8, 27. 
θεά, ἃς [θεός], goddess, Lat. dea, 


1. 3. 8, iii. 2. 20, v. 8. 19, vi, 3. 12, 


in pl., vi. 6. 17, 


99 θέαμα- Θηβαῖος 


θέαμα, aros, τό [θέα], sight, iv. | 


7, 13. 

θεάομαι, θεάσομαι, etc. [θέα], gaze 
at, look on, watch, see, behold, 
Lat. intueor, abs., with acc., or 
with a rel. clause, i. 5. 8, iii. 5. 13, 
iv. 7. 11, v. 7. 26, vi. 5. 16. 

θεῖος, a, ov [θεός], divine, Lat. 
diuinus ; subst., θεῖον, τό, divine in- 
tervention, portent, Lat. prodigium, 
i. 4. 18. 

θέλω, see ἐθέλω. 

«θεν, suffix denoting the place 
whence. 

Θεογένης, ovs, ὁ, Theogenes, a 
Greek captain from Locris, vii. 
4. 18. 

Θεόπομπος, ὁ, Theopompus, an 
Athenian, ii. 1. 12 (believed by 
some to be a pseudonym for 
Xenophon). 

θεός, ὁ, ἡ [θεός], divinity, god, 
goddess, Lat. deus, i. 4. 8, il. 1. 17, 
iii. 1.21, ive 3. TR, Vu 2. 28, ES. 
22, 31, vii. 6. 18; with the sing. 
the art. is used only when a par- 
ticular divinity is meant, iii. 1. 


pliw, Eng. thermal, thermo-meter], 
warmth, warming, v. 8. 16. 
Θερμώδων, ovros, ὁ, the Therms- 
don, a river in Cappadocia empty- 
ing into the Pontus, v. 6. 9, vi. 2. 
1. About it lived the Amazons, 
(Termeh Tchai.) 

θέσϑαι, see τίθημι. 

Θετταλία, as [Θετταλός], Thes- 
saly, the most northern state of 
Greece, i. 1. 10, consisting origi- 
nally of the valley of the Penéus, 
with the district of Thessalidtis on 
the west and that of PelasgiOtis on 
the east. In these were the most 
important cities comprising the 
Thessalian state. To these were 
added, by constant conquests, Hes- 
tiaedtis and Phthidtis on the north 
and south. Magnesia and some 
other outlying districts were not 
part of Thessaly before the Mace- 
donian period. On the northern 
boundary of Thessaly was Mt. 
Olympus, the fabled home of the 
gods, with the vale of Tempe be- 
low it. The plain of Thessaly was 


5, 2. 12, v. 3. 7, vi. 1. 22, vii. 8. 23. | very fertile, producing much grain 
Phrases.: πρὸς θεῶν, in the presence | and supporting cattle and horses, 


of, before, or by the gods, ii. 5. 20, v. 
7.5; σὺν Tots θεοῖς, Or σὺν θεοῖς, with 
the aid of the gods, under Provi- 
dence, ii. 3. 23, iii. 1. 42, vi. 5. 23; 
ἐν ταῖς πρὸς τοὺς θεοὺς προσόδοις, in 
processions to the temples, vi. 1. 11. 
θεοσέβεια, as [θεός + σέβομαι, wor- 
ship, cf. ἀσεβής}, reverence for the 
gods, religion, piety, ii. 6. 26. 
θεραπεύω, θεραπεύσω, etc. [θερά- 
πων, of. Eng. therapeutic], serve, 
attend to, wait upon, pay attention 
to, Lat. seruid, i. 9. 20, ii. 6. 27, 
vii. 2. 6. 
θεράπων, ovros, ὁ, servant, attend- 
ant, follower, of freeborn persons, 
i, 8, 28, iii. 1. 19, 3. 2. 
θερίζω (θεριδ-), ἐθέρισα, τεθέρισμαι, 
ἐθερίσθην [θέρος, τό, summer, cf. 
θέρω, heat, Lat. furnus, oven], do 
summer work ; intr., pass the sum- 
mer, ili. 5. 15. 


the Thessalian cavalry being noted 
for its efficiency. The government 
was oligarchicdl, and the country 
was divided into the four political 
divisions mentioned above, all be- 
ing nominally under a chief magis- 
trate called raves. 

Θετταλός, ὁ, α Thessalian, i. τ. 
10, ii. 5. 31, v. 8. 23. 

θέω (θυ-), θεύσομαι, run, race, 
charge, abs. or with δρόμῳ, i. 8. 18, 
iii. 4. 4, iv. 6. 25, 8. 28, vii. 1. 18; 
with εἰς, ἐπί, or πρός and acc., ii. 2. 
14, iv. 3. 20, vii. 1. 15. 

θεωρέω, θεωρήσω, ἐθεώρησα, TePew- 
ρηκα [θέα], gaze, view, look on, be 
a spectator, Lat. spectd, i. 2. 10, ii. 
4. 25, v. 3. 7, Vi. 2. 1; of troops, 
review, i. 2. 16. 

Θηβαῖος, ὁ [Θῆβαι, Thebes], a 
Theban, inhabitant of Thebes, ii. 
1. 10, vii. 1. 33, the oldest and most 


θερμασία, as [Pepuds, hot, cf. θε- 


powerful city of Boeotia, on the 


Θήβη-Θράκιος 100 


Isménus. Thebes was said to have 
been built by Cadmus and en- 
larged by Amphion. It was pre- 
eminent in the mythical age among 
all the cities of Greece, among its 
most important legends being those 
connected with Heracles, Dionysus, 
and the family of Oedipus. In the 
historical period, Thebes was al- 
ways the bitter enemy of Athens, 
supporting Xerxes and later the 
Spartans. After the Peloponnesian 
war, she took sides against Sparta 
from jealousy, and under Epami- 
nondas rose to be the head of 
Greece. Having resisted the Mace- 
donians, the city was destroyed 
by Alexander in 335 z.c. Twenty 
years later it was rebuilt, but never 
regained its former standing. 
Θήβη, ns, Thebe, a city and dis- 
trict in either Mysia or the Troad, 
vii. 8. 7, at the foot of Mt. Pla- 
cus, and hence called Ὑποπλακίη. 
Here Achilles took captive Chry- 
séis, having sacked the city. 
θήρᾶ, as [θήρ, wild beast, cf. Lat. 


-6, a suffix denoting the place 
where. 

Θίβρων, wos, ὁ, Thibron, a gen- 
eral sent out by the Spartans 
against Tissaphernes in 400 xc. 
He took the Greeks into his pay, 
vii. 6. 1, 43, 7. 57, 8. 24, and met 
with some success, but was super- 
seded for allowing his troops to 
plunder allied nations, 

θνήσκω (Gar-, Ova-), θανοῦμαι, 
| ἔθανον, τέθνηκα, die; in Anab. ἃ]. 
| Ways In composition, except in pt., 
be dead, be slain, have Jallen in 
battle, the following forms occur. 
ring: τέθνηκε, ii. 1. 3, τέθνατον, iv. 
1. 19, τεθνᾶσι, iv. 2. 17, τεθνάναι, iv. 
I. 20, τεθνηκότος, iii, 1. 17, τεθνη- 
κότα, i. 6. 11, τεθνεῶτας, vii, 4. 19. 

θνητός, ἡ, dv [verbal of θνήσκωΊ], 
subject to death, mortal, Lat. mor- 
talis, iii. 1. 23. 

Odava, τά, Tyana, see Adva. 

θόρυβος, ὁ [θρόος, ὁ, noise, cf. 
ἀθρόος, turmoil, disturbance, noise, 
confusion, of the noise a crowd 
makes, Lat. turba, i. 8. 16, ii. 2. 19, 


Jerus, wild, Eng. DEER], α hunting, 
chase, hunt, Lat. uénatid, of wild 
animals, v. 3. 8, 10. 

Onpdw, Onpdow, ἐθήρᾶσα, τεθή- 
ρᾶκα, ἐθηράθην [θήρα], hunt, chase, 
pursue, Lat. uenor, of animals or 
men, abs. or with acc., i. 5. 2, iv. 5. 
24, v. 1. 9. 

θηρεύω, θηρεύσω, etc. [θήρα], hunt, 
chase, catch, Lat. uénor, i. 2. 7 , 13, 
. 2". 

θηρίον, τό [Ojpa], beast, animal, 
esp. of beasts of the chase, Lat, 
Sera, i. 2. 7, 9. 6, Vv. 3. 8. 

θησαυρός, ὁ [R. Oe], something 
put away, treasure, Vv. 4. 27; store- 
house, treasury, like those estab- 
lished by different states at Delphi 
and Olympia, to contain their pub- 
lic offerings to the gods, v. 3. 5. 

Θήχης, ov, Theches, the mountain 
in Pontus, south of Trapezus, from 
which the retreating Greeks first be- 
held the sea, iv.7.21. Its identity 


ili. 4. 35, vii. 2. 18. 

Θούριος, ὁ, a Thurian, inhabitant 
of Thurii, v. 1. 2, a city in Luca- 
nia in Magna Graecia, on the gulf 
of Tarentum. It was colonized by 
Athenians sent out by Pericles, 
among them Herodotus and Lysias. 
Its ruins are near Terra Nuova. 

Θράκη, ns [Opt], Thrace, either 

) in Europe, a country formed 
by the southeastern part of the 
Balkan peninsula, without definite 
borders on the west, but reaching 
as far north as the Danube, now 
Roumelia, v. 1. 15, vii. 1. 14; or 
2) in Asia, called also Bithynian 
Thrace, the coast extending from 
the mouth of the Pontus to Hera- 
cléa, vi. 2. 17, 4. 1. 

Θράκιον, τό [Θράκιος], the Thra- 
cium, ἃ public square in Byzan- 
tium, vii. 1. 24. 

Θράκιος, a, ov [Θρᾷξ], Thracian, 
belonging to Thrace, vii. 1. 13, 2. 


cannot be certainly established. 


23. 


101 Θρᾷξ-θύω 


Θρᾷξ, κός, ὁ, ἃ Thracian, native 
of Thrace, whether in Europe or in 
Asia, i. 1. 9, ii. 2.7, vi. 1.5, 3. 4, vii. 
1. 5, 4. 4; the latter were called 
also Bithynian Thracians, vi. 4. 2. 

θρασέως, adv. [θρασύς], with 
confidence, boldly, iv. 3. 30. 

θρασύς, εἴα, ύ [θρασύς], confident, 

bold, daring, Lat. audax, in comp., 
v. 4. 18, i Vii. ri 
εΨόμεθα, See τρέφω. 

nari ὁ (ef. Eng. throne}, seat, 
chair, chair of state, throne. The 
word would suggest to a Greek 
the large chair with straight back 


᾿-- 


ic 


and legs and low arms (Lat. so- 
lium), which in a private house 
would be the seat of honour of the 
master and of his guests, and in 
temples the throne of the god. The 
former were commonly made of 
heavy wood, although sometimes 
in part of metal, the latter were 
wrought in marble. The θρόνος 
might be provided with a cushion 
and coverings ; and, since the seat 
was lofty, a footstool might be 
added. Of the throne of the king 
of Persia, θρόνος ὁ ἐγ σθαι ii, 1. 4. 

θυγάτηρ, τρός, ἡ (cf. Eng. pauGH- 
Loa take. Lat. filia, ii. 4. 8, 
iv. 1. 24, vii. 2. 38. 

θύλακος, ὁ, bag, sack, generally 
of leather, vi. 4. 23. 

θῦμα, aros, τό [R. 2 Ov], that 
which is offered, victim, sacrifice, 
animal for sacrifice, Lat. hostia, vi. 
4. 20, vii. 8. 19. 


in the southern part of Phrygia, i. 
2. 13. Its site cannot be exactly 
determined. 
θυμοειδής, ἐς [R. 1 Ov+ R. Fd], 
high-spirited, Lat. animosus, of 
horses, in comp., iv. 5. 36. 
θυμόομαι, θυμώσομαι, etc. [R. 
1 θυ], be angry, incensed, with dat. 
of pers., ii. 5. 13. aes 
θυμός, ὁ [R. 1 Ov], the animating 
principle in man, both of physical 
and mental feelings, Lat. anima 
and animus, used in a wide sense, 
like English heart; as the seat 
of passion, anger, wrath, Vii. I. 25. 
Owvol, οἱ, the Thyni, a tribe of 
Thracian stock, which originally 
lived on the Black Sea in the neigh- 
bourhood of Salmydessus, but af- 
terwards crossed into Asia and 
lived in the Bithynian coast dis- 
trict, vii. 2. 22, 4. 2, 14, 18. 
θύρα, as (cf. Lat. foris, door, Eng. 
poor ], door, of a room or build- 
ing, generally pl., as the doors were 
usually double, Lat. forés, ii. 5. 31, 
vii. 3. 16, 4.15. Phrases: ἐπὶ ταῖς 
Ἑλλάδος θύραις, at the door, or as 
we might say, on the very threshold 
of Greece, Vi. 5. 23; 80 ἐπὲ ταῖς 
βασιλέως θύραις may denote neigh- 
bourhood, at the very gates of the 
king, ii. 4. 4, iii. 1. 2, but it also 
denotes his residence, as we say, 
at the king’s court, Lat. in auld, 
i. 9. 3, ii 1. 8; 80 θύραι denotes a 
general’s residence, headquarters, 
i. 2.11, ii. 5.31. 

θύρετρα, τά [θύραἼ, door, gate, 
of a town, Lat. porta, Υ. 2. 17. 

θυσία, as [R. 2 Ov], offering to 
the gods, sacrifice, Lat. sacrificium, 
iv. 8. 25, 26, v. 3. 9, vi. 4. 15. 

θύω, θύσω, ἔθυσα, τέθυκα, τέθυμαι, 
ἐτύθην [R. 2 θυ], sacrifice, offer 
sacrifice, Lat. sacrifico, abs. or with 
acc. of the victim offered, iii. 2. 12, 
iv, ἃ χη ει MILB ee with 
dat. of the god, iii. 1. 6, ν. 5. ὃ; 
mid., have a sacrifice offered for 
oneself, esp. with the idea of learn- 


Θύμβριον, τό, Thymbrium, a city 


ing something about the future, 


θωρακίζω- Ἴδη 


102 


have a victim offered, make an (ἱππεύς, g.v.), iii, 4. 48, cf. 1. 8.6 


offering, offer sacrifice, abs., i. 7.| ili. 3. 20 


The θώραξ consisted 


18, ii. 1.9, iv. 3. 9, vi. 1. 94. vii Ww 
asl - 3. . I. 24, vil.| of two metal plates, m 
8. 10; with the dat. when a priest | the person (see cut 8.0 tehon) WP 
r ? 


offers for a person, v. 6. 18, vii. 8. 


4; with dat. of the god, vi, 1. 22 


which one protected the breast 


;| and abdomen, the other the back 


with ἐπί and dat. of the end for! ΤΊ i 

lat. of fo! 1050 were hinged side 
ey Hyp sacrifice is offered, il. | and buckled on ‘the ee a 
5. 15, v. 6. 22, vi. 4. 9, 6.35; with| were further kept in place “sl 


περί and gen., v. 6. 28, vi. 4.17 
With ὑπέρ and gen., in the sense of 
Sor, in the interest of, v. 6. 27, 28; 
with ἐπέ and ace. of the pers. 
against whom the gods are con- 


sulted, vii. 8. 21: 


; in inquiries by 
sacrifice, with an interr. clause 
with εἰ or πότερα, vi. 1. 31, vii. 6. 
44. Phrases: τὰ Λύκαια ἔθυσε, he 
celebrated the Lycaea with sacri- 
Jices, i. 2.10; θύσειν σωτήρια, offer 


leathern straps passing over the 
shoulders from behind and fas- 
tened in front, and by the belt (see 
8.0. ζώνη and 5.0. ἀσπίς, No. 10). 
About the lower part of the cui- 
Tass was a series of flaps (rrépv- 
yes, 7.v.) of leather or felt, covered 
with metal, which protected the 
hips and groin of the wearer, while 
not in the least interfering with his 
freedom of movement. A lighter 


103 ἴδιος-᾿ Ικόνιον 


was Gargarus (Kara Dagh), over 
5000 feet above the sea. Its slopes 
formed the plain of Troy. Ida was 
the scene of the judgment of Paris. 

ἴδιος, ἃ, ov [cf. Eng. idiom, idio- 
syncrasy], one’s own, belonging to 
an individual, personal, private, 
Lat. proprius, peculiaris, subst. in 
the phrase εἰς τὸ ἴδιον, for one’s 
personal use, i. 3. 8, Vii. 7. 89; adv., 
ἰδίᾳ, in a private capacity, pri- 
vately, Lat. proprié, v. 6. 27, 7. 31, 
vi. 2. 18. Phrase: ἐκεῖνον ἰδίᾳ πε- 
πλούτικεν, he has enriched him per- 
sonally, vii. 6. 9. 

ἰδιότης, nTos, ἡ [ἴδιος], peculiar 
nature, peculiarity, ii. 3. 16. 

ἰδιώτης, ov [ἴδιος, cf. Eng. idiot], 
one in a private station, aS Opp. 
to an officeholder, Lat. priwatus ; 


τὰ ἱερά, sacred rites, sacrifices, sa- 
cred things, esp. the vitals of the 
victim, or the omens from inspect- 
ing the vitals (see σφάγια), li. 1. 
9, iv. 3. 9, v. 2. 9, 6. 29, vi. 1. 31, 
vii. 8. 22. Phrases: τὰ ἱερὰ καλά 
ἐστι or γίγνεται, the omens are fa- 
vourable or result favourably, i. 
8. 15, ii. 2. 3, iv. 3.9, Vi. 4.9; ἡ ἱερὰ 
συμβουλὴ λεγομένη εἶναι, the advice 
termed holy (with allusion to the 
proverb ἱερὸν ἡ συμβουλή), Υ. 6. 4. 
Ἱερώνυμος, 6, Hieronymus, a 
Greek captain, from Elis, iii. 1. 34, 
vi. 4. 10, vii. 1. 32, 4. 18. 

ἴημι (é-), NOW, Ka, -εἴκα, -εῖμαι, 
«εἰθην, make go, send, throw, hurl, 
with ἄνω or with dat. of thing 
thrown, i. 5. 12, iii. 4. 17; ἧκαν 
ἑαυτοὺς els τὴν νάπην, they threw 


i , 4 ἊΨ yl c 
; « Ss In 


τὰ θυόμενα, the victims, v. 3. 9 


θωρᾶκίζω (θωρᾶκιδ.γ, ἐθωράκισα, 
τεθωράκισμαι, ἐθωρακίσθην [θώραξ], 
arm with α breastplate; mid., put 
on one’s breastplate or corselet, ii. 
3. 14; Pass., τεθωρᾶκισμένοι and 
θωρᾶκισθείς, armed with the breast- 


plate, ii. 5. 35, iii. 4. 35, vii. 3. 40. 
θώραξ, ἄκος, ὁ, breastplate, corse- 
let, cuirass [ef. Eng. thorax}, i. 8, 3, 


26, iv. 2. 28, worn not onl 
’ Υ by the 
heavy-armed footsoldier re ay 


troduced at an early period, and was 
called σπολάς, g.v. The Chalybes 
further, wore corselets of linen, iy. 
7-15. See also 8.0. λευκοθώρᾶξ. For 
additional representations of the 
culrass, see 8.0. ἅρμα (No. 8, the 
original of the accompanying cut) 
κνημές, ξίφος, ὁπλίτης, and σάλπιγξ. 
Θώραξ, ἄκος, ὁ, Thorax, a Boeo- 
— A opposed Xenophon’s plan of 
unding a city in P ᾷ 
21, 36, Ἐ' y in Pontus, v. 6. 19, 


I. 


ἰάομαι, ἰάσομαι, ἰάσάμην, ἰάθην, 
heal, cure, of a wound, i. 8.26. _ 
Tavovia ἀκτή, ἡ, Jason’s Cape, 
ἃ promontory in Pontus between 
Cotyora and Sindpe where, acc. to 
the myth, the Argonauts landed, 


vi. 2. 1. (Yasin Burun. ) 

ni ei ot tye one who heals, 
soe a ysician, 1. 8. 26, iii. 4. 
ἰδέ, ἰδεῖν, 566 εἶδον, 

Ίδη, ns, Ida, ἃ high and precipi- 
tous range of mountains beginning 
in Phrygia and extending through 
the Troad and Mysia, the modern 


q-.), but also by the cavalryman 


Kas Dagh, vii. 8.7. Its highest peak 


hence, as opp. to a king, subject, 
private citizen, Vii. 7.28; as Opp. 
to a general, private soldier, pri- 
vate, i. 3. 11, iii. 2. 32, v. 7. 28; as 
opp. to one of special knowledge 
in any subject or profession, lay- 
man, amateur, Vi. 1. 31. 
ἰδιωτικός, 4, ov [ἰδιώτης], per- 
taining to one in private station, 
ordinary, common, Vi. τ. 23. 
ἴδοι, ἰδοῦσα, see εἶδον. 
ἱδρόω, ἵδρωσα [cf. ἱδρώς, sweat, 
Lat. stidor, sweat, Eng. sweat], 
sweat, reek with sweat, Lat. sudo, 
of a horse, i. 8. 1. 
ἰδών, see εἶδον. 
ἵεντο, see Tut. 
ἱερεῖον, τό [lepds], animal for 
sacrifice, victim, Lat. hostia, Vi. 5. 
2 (cf. iv. 3. 9); pl., cattle, as a part 
of every animal slain was offered to 
a god, iv. 4. 9, v. 7. 13, vi. 1.4, 4. 25. 
Ἱερὸν ὄρος, τό, the Sacred Mount, 
in Thrace, on the northern coast 
of the Propontis, near Ganus, Vili. 
1.14, 3.3. (Tekir Dagh.) 
ἱερός, d, dv [cf. Eng. Aver-archy, 
hiero-glyphic], holy, consecrated to 
a god, sacred, Lat. sacer, Υ. 3. 9, 
vii. 1. 14, with gen. of the god, iv. 
5. 35, V. 3. 18; as subst., τὸ ἱερόν, 


démisérunt in uallem, iv. 5. 18; 
mid., send oneself, rush, charge, 
abs., with ἄνω or κατά with gen., or 
ἐπί with acc. of place or pers., i. 5. 
8, 8. 26, iii. 4. 41, iv. 2. 8, 20, v. 7. 24. 
ἴθι, see εἶμι. 
ἱκανός, ή, 6v [R. Fux], sufficient, 
whether in number, size, strength, 
or character, of persons and things, 
Lat. iddneus; in number or size, 
enough, adequate, in plenty, abs. 
or with inf., i. 2.1, 7. 7, iii. 3. 18, 
iv. 1. 15, v. 6. 1, vi. 4. 3, vil. 4. 24; 
in strength or character, sufficient, 
able, fit, capable, competent, abs. or 
with inf., i. 1. 5, 3. 6, 9. 20, ii. 3. 4, 
iii, 1.23, 2. 10, v. 1.6, 4. 10, vii. 3. 17. 
ἱκανῶς, adv. [R. Fux], sufficiently, 
well enough, Lat. satis bene, iv. 3. 31. 

ἱκετεύω, ἱκετεύσω, ἱκέτευσα [K. 
Fux], implore, beg, beseech, Lat. 
supplicd, with inf., vii. 4.7, 10, 22. 

ἱκέτης, ov [R. Fux], petitioner, 
suppliant, Lat. supplex, with inf., 
vii. 2. 33. 

Ἰκόνιον, τό, Zconium, an old, 
but in antiquity an unimportant 
city, placed by Xenophon on the 
southeastern border of Phrygia, i. 
2.19. It was afterwards in Lyca- 


temple, Lat. sacrum, Vv. 3. 11; pl., 


onia. (Konia.) 


ἵλεως- ἵνα 104 


ἕλεως, ὧν, gen. w, gracious, pro- 
pttious, Lat. secundus, of gods, vi. 
6. 32, vii. 6. 36. 

ἴλη, ns [εἴλω, " press, hem in), 
crowd, band ; of soldiers, esp. cay- 
alry, troop, Lat. turma, i. 2. 16. 

ἱμάς, ἄντος, ὁ, thong, strap of 
leather, esp. in pl. of the shoe or 
sandal straps, Lat. dmentum, iv. 
5-14. See s.v. καρβάτιναι. 

ἱμάτιον, τό [R. Feo], outer gar- 
ment resembling the mantle, hima- 


12. The himation was worn both 
by men and by women, Vii. 3. 27, 
5. 5, and its shape was the same 
for both sexes. It was a rectap. 
gular piece of drapery, one end 
of which was gathered about the 
left arm and shoulder, and there 
held in place by the left hand. ‘The 
other end was then carried across 
the back to the right, brought either 
under or over the right shoulder, 
and thrown across the front of the 
body over the left shoulder, But in 
the house it was 

either thrown off 


105 ἵππαρχος- ἱππόδρομος 


ὁ : + ἄρχω], 
ἵππαρχος, ὁ [R. an+ apxe) 
cavalry commander, hipparch, i. 
3. * 7" 
3: acta, ἃς (R. ax], @ riding, 
riding about, ii. 5. 33. 
ἌΝ is [R. ax], cavalry, Lat. 


equitatus, V. 6. 8 


ἱππεύς, éws, ὁ [R. ax], horseman, 


rider, cavalryman, Lat. apy 
erally in pl., cavalry. “ sg 
cavalryman was isin ae 
metal helmet, and a meta cui : 
which was heavy (ill. 4. 48), ~ 
wore cavalry-boots. He carried ἢ 


shield, since his left arm controlled = 


h 
esignated the place for races, bot 
of a i. 8. 20, and of single 
liorses, which formed a part of their 
national games. The ee 
ing cut represents the suppose 


altogether, or his horse. His offensive armour 
else it dropped 
loosely about 
the person. See 
the illustrations 
8.0. κλίνη and 
τρίπους, which 
also show that 
in the case of 
men the χιτών 
q.v.), Or un- 
lergarment, was 
sometimes en- 
tirely lacking. 
The himation 
was a part of 
thedress even of 
boys at Athens. 
See the illustra- 
tion 8.0. αὐλός. The garment fre- 
quently had a border, and might be 
otherwise ornamented. See the two 
figures at the left s.v. φιάλη. The 
prevailing colour of the himation 
was white, but it is a mistake to 
suppose that other colours, brown, 
saffron, red, were not common. 
The ordinary material of the gar- 
ment was wool, the weight vary- 
ing according to the season of the 
year. 

tva, final particle, that, in order 
that, with subjv. after a primary or 


ight two- 
was the spear and the straigh Ξ 
edged tt Persian horsemen 
wore also thigh-pieces (see 8.0. πα- IN 
ραμηρίδια), and their horses were 
protected by frontlet and breast- 


d 
late, see s.v. προμετωπίδιον an 
sti δεν τῆν For the bridle of the 


horse, see further 8.0. χαλινόω. The 

are ‘had no saddle, but at most 

a blanket confined by a girth. 1. 2. 

4, 5. 13, ii. 4. 6, 5. 17, il. I. _ ee 

20, iv. 3.3, v. 6. 9, vi. 3.7, Vil. 3. 40. 

ἱππικός, ἡ, dv [R. ox], of ae 

} or to ca ’ ἊΣ 

ton ce ΤΥ 12, iii. 4. 48; _ dasa Lage" ia agente 

mpg gh ΜΡ ΤΠ of ὩΣ hill, bounding one side, 
Ya ee a which the spectators sat, B a co 


Ξ peeeee oe 
Sc aca achat | 


No, 30. 


tion, corresponding in use to the 
Roman toga ; pl., clothes, iv. 3 38, 


secondary tense, i. 3. 15, 4. 18, ii. 
2. 12, 5. 36, iii. 2. 27, vii, 3. 28; 
with opt. after a secondary tense, 
i. 3. 4, ii. 3. 18, 21, vi. 6. 28, 


ἱππόδρομος, ὁ [R. ax + δρόμος], 
sn νος Ἂς hippodrome, Lat. cir- 
cus. By this name the Greeks 


: nate ὶ si 
responding artificial elevation 0 
rane side, provided with seats. 


ἵλεως-ἵνα 1 


ἵλεως, wr, gen. ὦ, gracious, pro- 
pitious, Lat. secundus, of gods, vi. 
6. 32, vii. 6. 36. 

ἴλη, ns [εἴλω, “press, hem in], 
crowd, band ; of soldiers, esp, cay- 
alry, troop, Lat. turma, i. 2. 16. 

ἱμάς, dvros, ὁ, thong, strap of 


leather, esp. in pl. of the shoe or| 


sandal straps, Lat. dmentum, iv. 

5.14. See s.v. καρβάτιναι. 
ἱμάτιον, τό [R. Feo], outer gar- 

ment resembling the mantle, hima- 


tion, corresponding in use to the 


tirely lacking. 


04 


12. The himation was worn bo: 
by men and by women, vii, 3. 27 
5. 5, and its shape was the san 
for both sexes. It was a recta) 
gular piece of drapery, one en 
of which was gathered about t) 
left arm and shoulder, and ther 
held in place by the left hand. 7} 
other end was then carried acros« 


under or over the right shoulder. 
and thrown across the front of tl) 
body over the left shoulder. But iy 
the house it was 
either thrown off 
altogether, or 
else it dropped 
loosely about 
the person. See 
the illustrations 
8.0. κλίνη and 
τρίπους, which 
‘also show that 
|in the case of 
-Inen the χιτών 
(q.v.), or un- 
| dergarment, was 
Sometimes en- | 


The himation 
Was a part of 
_ thedress even of 


| boys at Athens. 
See the illustra- 
tion s.v. αὐλός, The garment fre- 
| quently had a border, and might be 
_ otherwise ornamented. See the two 
| figures at the left s.v. φιάλη. The 


prevailing colour of the himation 
was white, but it is a mistake to 
suppose that other colours, brown, 
Saffron, red, were not common. 
The ordinary material of the gar- 
ment was wool, the weight vary- 
ing according to the season of the 
year. 


tva, final particle, that, in order 
that, with subjy. after a primary or 
secondary tense, i. 3. 15, 4. 18, ii. 
2. 12, 5. 36, iii. 2. 27, vii, 3. 28; 
with opt. after a secondary tense, 


Roman toga ; pl., clothes, iv. ΨΦ Ti, 11 3. 4, ἢ χ 18, 21. vi. 6. 58. 


a ints 
viding about, 11. 5. 99. 


the back to the right, brought either 


105 


w 
ἵππαρχος, ὁ [R. ax + ἄρχω]; 
valry commander, hipparch, M1. 


πέσει χε ἐς [R. ax], a riding, nati 
ἱππασία, ας | 1v. Ϊ ing 


ἱππεία, as πε ax], cavalry, Lat. 
uitatus, V. 6. 8. 

sn éws, ὁ [R. ax], horseman, 
vider, cavalryman, Lat. eques, BE ri 
erally in pl., cavalry. ‘The Gree! 
cavalryman was protected by a 
metal helmet, and a metal ae : 
which was heavy (111. 4. 48), ant 
wore cavalry-boots. He carried sa 
shield, since his left arm controlled ΞΞ 


his horse. His offensive armour = 


was the spear and the straight two- 
edged sword. 
wore also thigh-pieces (see 8.v. πα- 
ραμηρίδια), and their horses ry 
protected by frontlet and gor 
plate, see s.v. προμετωπίδιον μὴ 
προστερνίδιον. For the bridle of ναὸ 
horse, see further 5.0. χαλινόω. The 
rider had no saddle, but at most 
a blanket confined by a girth. ' 1 2, 
4, 5. 18, ii. 4. 6, 5. 17, iii. 1. 2, 2, 
20, iv. 3.3, v. 6.9, vi. 3.7, Vii. 3. 40. 
ἱππικός, 7, dv [R. ax], of or be- 
longing to a horse or vere 
Lat. equester, i. 3. 12, Ml. 4. τῇ 
subst., τὸ ἱππικόν, cavalry, i. 9. 31, 
vi. 2. 16, 5. 29, vii. 3. 37. 
ἱππόδρομος, ὁ [R. ax + δρόμος], 
race-course, hippodrome, Lat. cir- 
cus. By this name the Greeks 


Persian horsemen Ss 


ἵππαρχος- ἱππόδρομος 


designated the place for races, er 
of chariots, i. 8. 20, and of yess 
liorses, which formed a part of their 


onal games. ‘The accompany- 
cut represents the supposed 


nln nil | 


No. 30. 


! lan of the hippodrome at 
haa A is the natural slope 
of the hill, bounding one side, on 
which the spectators sat, B a cor- 
responding artificial elevation 
the other side, provided with seats. 


ἵππος- Ἰσσοί 106 


Ε΄ is an entrance. F is the goal 
farthest from the starting-point, ¢ 
the ‘finish.’ Over against G at H 
is the judges’ stand. D is a por- 
tico facing the course, C is a tri- 
angular space bounded on two 
sides by the stations, a, ὃ, 6, etc., 
from which the chariots started, on 
the right, and to which they might 
return, on the left, in case they 
did not leave the hippodrome al- 
together. HK is an altar, J the 
‘scratch.’ On the former was a 
bronze eagle with extended wings, 
at the latter a dolphin. The ele- 
vation of the eagle and the fall 
of the dolphin, managed by some 
sort of machinery, marked the be- 
ginning of the race. The chariot 
at α was the first to be sent off, 
the chariot at ὃ started when the 
first came in line, and so for the 
others. They were all in line at ./, 
but those on the outside had the 
advantage of a ‘flying-start’ over 
those placed nearer the ‘ pole,’ 
and thus the conditions of the 
race were equalised. The distance 
between the goals was probably 
two stadia (1200 Greek feet). The 
race varied in length according to 
the number of times the com- 
plete circuit was covered. Sin- 
gle horses were also run at the 


national games, and precisely the 
same arrangements were made for 
the start. See the description of 
the race in the improvised δρόμος 
in iv. 8. 28. 

ἵππος, ὁ [R. ax], horse, steed, 
Lat. eguus, i. 2. 27, 5. 2, 8. 1, iii. 


2.18, tv. 4. 4, Vv. 3. 11, vii. 2 3: 


pl., of ἵπποι, cavalry, the horse, vii. 
3. 39, 41, 48. Phrases: ἐφ᾽ ἵππου 
ὀχεῖ, you ride on horseback, iii. 4. 
47, cf. 4. 49, vii. 4. 4; ἐθήρευεν ἀπὸ 
ἵππου, he used to hunt on horse- 
buck, i. 2. 7. 

Ἶρις, acc. Ἶριν, ὁ, the Iris, a river 
in Pontus, between the Halys and 
Thermddon, now called in the in- 
terior Tosanlu, but at the mouth 
Jeschil Irmak, 1.6. Green River, v. 
6. 9. 

ἴσθι, see οἶδα. 

ἰσθμός, ὁ [ο΄ Eng. isthmus], nar- 
row passage, isthmus, esp. ᾿Ισθμός 
as ἃ proper name, the Isthmus of 
Corinth by which Peloponnésus 
and the mainland were connected, 
ii. 6. 3. 

ἴσμεν, see οἶδα. 

ἰσόπλευρος, ον [ἴσος - πλευρά], 
with equal sides, equilateral, οἱ a 
square, iii. 4. 19. 

ἴσος, 7, ov [cf. Eng. /so-sceles, 
iso-thermal], equal in number, size, 
quality, strength, rank, etc., Lat. 
aequus. Phrases: ἐν ἴσῳ (sc. βή- 
ματι), in equal step, in step, i. 8. 
11; οὐκ ἐξ ἴσου ἐσμέν, we are not on 
an equality, Lat. ndn aequdli con- 
diciOne uitimur, iii. 4. 47; ἡμῖν els 
τὸ ἴσον, to the same level with us, 
iv. 6. 18; ἴσους τὸ μῆκος καὶ τὸ πλά- 
ros, as thick as long, Υ.4.82. Adv. 


ἴσον, equally, alike, Lat. aequé, 
pariter, ii. 5. 7. 

ἰσοχειλής, és [ἴσος + χεῖλος, τό, 
lip), level with the lips, up to the 
brim, iv. 5. 26. 

Ἰσσοί, οἱ, Issus, a large city 
near the southeastern border of 
Cilicia, on the Pinarus, and not 


107 ἴστε-καθέζομαι 


far from the head of the gulf of 
Issus, i. 2. 24, 4. 1. Near it oc- 
curred the famous battle between 
Alexander and Darius, 333 B.c. 

ἴστε, see οἶδα. 

ἵστημι (στα-), στήσω, ἔστησα, 
ἔστην, ἕστηκα, -ἔσταμαι, ἐστάθην, 
2 pf. inf. ἑστάναι [R. στα], make 
stand, stop, make halt, station, 
place, Lat. sist0, i. 2. 17, το. 14, iv. 
6. 27, vi. 5. 832; intr. in mid. (ex- 
cept 1 aor.), and in 2 aor., both 
pfs., and both plpfs. act., take 
one’s stand, stand, stop, halt, be 
stationed, Lat. st0, i. 3. 2, 5.-8, 8. 
5, 10. 1, ii. 5. 38, iv. 2. 20, 7. 9, v. 
3. 13, vi. 5. 8, vii. 1. 12. 

ἱστίον, τό [R. στα], web, cloth, 
sail, Lat. uélum, i. 5.3. For illus- 
trations, see 8.0. ναῦς, πεντηκόντο- 
pos, and τριήρης. 

ἰσχῦρός, a, dv [ἰσχύς], strong, 
powerful, mighty, Lat. walidus, of 
persons and places, i. 5. 9, ii. 5. 
22, iv. 5. 20, 6. 11, v. 2. 7, 16; of 
cold, severe, v. 8. 14. 

lox upas, adv. [lox upéds], strongly, 
jirmly, strictly, harshly, violently, 
zealously, extremely, i. 2. 21, 5.11, 
ii. 5. 30, 6. 9, iii. 2. 19, iv. 1. 16, 2. 
26, vi. 3. 11. 

ἰσχύς, vos, ἡ [root Fu, cf. Lat. wis, 
strength], strength, might, force, 
iii. 1.42; esp. of an army, @ force, 
i. 8. 22, v. 7. 30. 

tox, collateral form of ἔχω, 
only in pres. and impf. [R. vex], 
hold, hold fast, hinder. Phrases: 
ἐν τούτῳ taxero, in this particu- 
lar there was a hitch, vi. 3. 9; τὸ 
ἴσχον, the hindrance, with acc., vi. 
. 13. 
i tows, adv. [toos], equally, in like 
manner, perhaps, probably, often 
used where the speaker has. no 
doubt, but desires to soften the 
assertion, possibly, I suppose, ii. 2. 
12, 4. 4, 5. 23, iii. 1. 37, v. 1. 11, vi. 
4. 18, vii. 3. 19. | 

*Irapévns, ov, Itamenes, a Per- 
sian officer, vii. 8. 15. 

ἱτέον [verbal of εἶμι, one must 


go, Lat. eundum est, iii. 1. 7, vi. 5. 
30. 

Urus, vos, 7, outer edge, rim, of 
something round, esp. of a shield, 
iv. 7.12. See s.v. ἀσπίς. 

ἰχθύς, vos, ὁ [φ΄ Eng. ichthyo- 
logy], fish, Lat. piscis, i. 4. 9, V. 
3. 8. 
ἴχνος, ous, τό, trace, track, foot- 
step, Lat. uestigium, of men or 
animals, i. 6. 1, 7. 17, vil. 3. 
42. 

᾿Ιωνία, as [Ἴων, Jon], Ionia, the 
coast district and islands of Asia 
Minor between Aeolis and Caria, 
or Phocaea and Milétus, i. 2. 21, 
4. 15, ii. 1. 3, Mik. 5. 16. “Bere 
lived the ancestors of the Ionic, 
esp. of the Attic race, and on 
these shores Greek literature was 
born. 

᾿Ιωνικός, ἡ, dv [cf. Iwvla], belong- 
ing to Ionia, Ionian, i. 1. 6. 


K. 


κἄγαθά, for καὶ ἀγαθά. 

Kayo, for καὶ ἐγώ. 

καθ᾽, by elision and euphony for 
κατά. 

καθά, adv. for καθ᾽ ἅ, according 
as, just as, exactly as, vii. 8. 4. 

καθαίρω (καθαρ-), καθαρῶ, éxd- 
θηρα, κεκάθαρμαι, ἐκαθάρθην [καθα- 
pos, pure, cf. Lat. castus, chaste, 
Eng. cathartic |, make pure or clean, 
purify by a religious rite, Lat. lus- 
tro, Vv. 7. 35. 

καθάπερ, adv. for καθ᾽ ἅπερ, just 
as, exactly as, V. 4. 28, 6. 26. 

καθαρμός, ὁ [καθαίρω], a cleans- 
ing from guilt, purification, puriji- 
catory rites, Lat. lustratio, v. 7. 
35, 

καθέζομαι (ξζομαι, €5-, sit, rare), 
καθεδοῦμαι, impf. ἐκαθεζόμην [R. 
oed |, sit down, take one’s seat, Lat. 
considd, iii. 1. 33, v. 8. 14, vii. 2. 
33; of a general, make a halt, en- 
camp, i. 5. 9. 


καθέλκω-καί 108 


καθέλκω [ἕλκω], draw down, esp. 
of ships, launch, Lat. deduco, vii. 
1. 19. 

καθέντας, see καθίημι. 

καθεύδω (evdw, εὑδήσω, sleep), 
impf. ἐκάθευδον, lie down to sleep, 
sleep, lie or be asleep, lie idle or 
lazy, Lat. dormid, i, 3. 11, ili. 1. 3, 
iv. 3. 10, vi. 3. 21. 

καθηγέομαι [ R. ay], lead or show 
the way, with raira, direct this 
enterprise, vii. 8. 9. 

καθηδυπαθέω (ἡδυπαθέω, -ηδυπά- 
θησα [R. ἀδ- R. oa), δὲ luxuri- 
ous), waste in luxury or in riotous 
living, i. 3. 3. 

καθήκω [ἥκω], come down, reach 
or extend down, esp. from higher 
ground to the sea, of walls and 
hills, with εἰς or ἐπί with acc. or 
ἀπὸ with gen., i. 4. 4, iii. 4. 24, iv. 
3. 11, vi. 4.3; impers., i¢ falls to, 
it belongs to, ols καθήκει ἀθροίζεσθαι, 
whose duty it is to muster, Lat. de- 
cet, 1. 9. 7. 

κάθημαι, impf. ἐκαθήμην [ἦμαι, 
sit, Epic and tragic], sit, be seated, 
Lat. seded, abs. or with éri and 
gen., ἐν with dat., or ἀμφί and acc., 
i, 7. 20, iv. 2. 5, v. 8. 15, vi. 1. 23, 
vii. 3. 29; of public meetings or at 
table, abs., vi. 2. 5, vii. 3..21; of 
soldiers, be encamped, i. 3. 12, iv. 
2. 6. 

καθῆραι, see καθαίρω. 

καθίζω, καθιῶ, ἐκάθισα (ἴζω, seat, 
rare) [R. σεδ], make sit down, 
seat. Phrases: εἰς τὸν θρόνον καθι- 
εἶν, set on the throne, make king, 
Lat. réegnum déferre, ii. 1.4; ἐκά- 
θισαν χωρίς, they seated apart, iii. 
aS 

καθίημι [fy], send down. 
Phrase: τὰ δόρατα els προβολὴν 
καθέντας, lowering or couching 
their spears for attack, vi, 5. 25, 
27. Hf 

καθίστημι [R. ora], set down or 
in order, settle, station, i. το, 10, 
Bes: So iy She Hd Ay! Vas Be RO WE 2, AD, 
vii. 3. 34; bring down to a place, 
bring, with εἰς or ἐπί and acc., i. 4. 


13, iv. 8. 8, v. 7. 34; set in office, 
establish, appoint, iii. 2. 5, 4. 30, 
vii. 7. 56; intr. in 2 aor. and plipf., 
be stationed, abs., iv. 5. 19, of a 
king, with εἰς and acc, βασιλείᾶν, 
succeed, begin his reign, i. 1. 3; 
mid, 1 aor., station, appoint, iii, 1. 
39, iv. 5. 21; intr. in pres. and 
impf., take one’s place, abs. or 
with εἰς and acc., i. 8. 3, 6, Vi. 1. 
22. Phrase: ws καταστησομένων 
τούτων eis τὸ δέον, since this matter 
will be settled in the right way, i. 
3. 8. 
καθοράω [R. 2 Fep], look down 
on from above, Lat. despicid, iv. 2. 
15, vi. 3. 15; observe, discern, i. 8. 
26. 
καί, copulative conj., used to 
connect words or sentences, and 
almost adverbially with influence 
on particular words or expressions. 
Copulatively, and, Lat. et, in al- 
most every section of the Anab., 
as i. 1. 1, 10. 6, ii. 5. 22, iii. 2. 5, iv. 2. 
21, 4. 14, v. 5. 22, 7. 1, vi. 1. 7, 2. 8, 
vii. 1. 27, 8. 21; where more than 
two words or ideas are joined the 
Greek uses καί before each, where 
we should use it only before the 
last, i. 2. 27, 3. 12, ii. 6. 17, v. 7. 2, 
vi. 2. 8, vii. 8.22. Influencing par- 
ticular words or expressions, also, 
too, even, further, Lat. etiam, i. 3. 
13, ii. 2. 17, iii. 4. 44, iv. 7. 20, v. 2. 
25, vii. 4.4; esp. with a sup. or a 
rel., iii. 2. 22, 5. 18, v. 4. 29; super- 
fluous in English after πολύς, iv. 6. 
27, vii. 1. 33; with words of same- 
ness and likeness, as, Lat. ac, as 
6 αὐτὸς ὕὉμῖν στόλος ἐστὶ καὶ ἡμῖν, 
your march is the same as ours, 
li. 2. 10, cf. ii. 1. 22, but after a 
rel, it is not translated, i. 3. 6, iii. 
1,34; ἐπίσταται ef τις καὶ ἄλλος, he 
knows as well as any other man, 
i. 4. 15, of. 3. 15, ii. 6.8; strength- 
ening concessive partics., i. 9. 31, 
iii. 1. 29, vii. 3. 41; re... Καὶ or 
καὶ... καὶ, both... and, not only 
..- but also, Lat. et... et, cum... 
tum, i. 2. 18, 8. 1, ii. 3. 7, 4. 22, 


109 Κάϊκος-κάλαμος 


iv. 6. 2, v. 6. 32, vi. 3. 20; for xa 
γάρ and ἄλλως τε καί, see γάρ and 
ἄλλως. 

Κάϊκος, ὁ, the Caicus, a river in 
Mysia near the Lydian border, 
emptying into the sea opposite 
Lesbos (Bakir Tchai). Its plain 
was the most fertile in Mysia. vii. 
8, 8. 

Καιναί, dv, Caenae, a large city 
in Mesopotamia on the Tigris, 
south of the mouth of the Zapatas, 
ii. 4. 28. This was probably the 
Canneh of the Old Testament 
(Ezek. 27, 23). (Kala Scherkat, 
where there are ruins of a brick 
acropolis.) 

καίπερ, concessive conj. [καί], 
although, with partic., i. 6. 10, i. 
3. 25. 

καιρός, ὁ, the Jitting time, the 
right time or moment, occasion, 
opportunity, Lat. occasid, abs. or 
with inf., i. 7. 9, ii. 3. 9, iv. 6. 
15, v. 1. 5, vil. 3. 36. Phrases: ἐν 
καιρῷ, in season, opportunely, Lat. 
in tempore, ili. 1. 39; ἐν τοιούτῳ 
καιρῷ, in such a condition or crisis, 
iii, 1. 44, v. 8. 8; μέγιστον ἔχετε 
καιρόν, you have your grandest op- 
portunity, Lat. maximum momen- 
tum habétis, iii. 1. 36; προσωτέρω 
τοῦ καιροῦ προϊόντες, going forward 
Surther than they should have gone, 
iv. 3. 34, 

καίτοι, con}. [xal+ τοί], and yet, 
stil, i. 4. 8, v. 7. 10, vii. 7. 30, 
41. 

καίω Or Kaw (καυ-), καύσω, Exavoa, 
«κέκαυκα. κέκαυμαι, ἐκαύθην [καίω], 
burn, burn up, set fire to, consume, 
Lat. incendd, combird, abs. or with 
acc., i. 6. 1, 2, iii. 5. 3, v. 2. 25, vi. 
3. 15; wip @xaov, they kept a fire 
going, iv..1. 11, 4. 12, 6. 22, vi. 3. 
20, vii. 2.18; of surgeons, cauter- 
ize, Lat. aduro, v. 8.18; pass., be on 
Jire, be burning, Lat. arded, iv. 5. 
6, 7. 22, vii. 4. 18. 

Kaxketvos, for καὶ ἐκεῖνος. 

κακόνοια, as [κακός -ἰ R. yvo], 
ill will, aversion, Vii. 7. 45. 


κακόνους, ovy [κακός - R. γνω], 
ill-disposed, hostile, ii. 5. 16, 27. 

κακοποιέω [κακός + trovéw |, do ill 
to, injure, ii. 5. 4. 

κακός, 7, ov, bad in its widest 
sense, signifying what a person, 
thing, or act ought not to be, Lat. 
malus; hence of persons, bad, 
wicked, insolent, base, abs. or with 
περί and acc. of pers., i. 4. 8, ii. 5. 
39, v. 8. 22, vii. 6. 4; esp. of sol- 
diers, cowardly, timorous, i. 3. 18, 
iii. 1. 36, v. 7. 12, vi. 5. 17, with 
ἐν πολέμῳ, ii. 6. 30; of things and 
acts, bad, weak, hurtful, injurious, 
abs. or with dat. of thing, iv. 8. 
11, v. 4. 19; comp. κακίων i. 3. 
18, sup. κάκιστος, ii. 5. 39; subst., 
τὸ κακόν, hurtful thing, harm, in- 
jury, loss, misfortune, ii. 5. 16, iii. 
1, 25, iv. 3. 14, v. 8. 26. Phrases: 
κακὸν OF κακὰ ποιεῖν Or ἐργάζεσθαι, 
abs, or with acc., do harm to, in- 
jure, hurt, i. 9. 11, ii. 5. 5, v. 6. 11, 
Vii. 3. 47, 4. 24. 

κακουργέω [κακός -ἰ R. Fepy], do 
harm to, injure, maltreat, vi. 1. 1. 

κακοῦργος, ὁ [κακός + R. Fepy], 
wrongdoer, criminal, Lat. malefi- 
cus, i. 9. 13. 

κακόω, κακώσω, €xdKwoa, κεκάκω- 
μαι, ἐκακώθην [κακός], hurt, injure, 
iv. 5. 35. 

κακῶς, adv. [κακός], badly, in a 
wide sense (see xaxos), Lat. male, 
ill, erroneously, wrongly, wretch- 
edly, miserably, iii. 1. 43, iv. 4. 14, 
v. 6. 4, vii. 6.27. Phrases: κακῶς 
ποιεῖν, injure, harm, nvaltreat, abs. 
or with acc., i. 4. 8, 9. 11, ii. 3. 23, 
iii. 2. 5, v. 5.21; κακῶς ἔχειν, be 
badly off, be in a bad way, i. 5. 16, 
vii. 7. 40; κάκιον rparreyv, be still 
worse off, i. 9.10; κακῶς πάσχειν, 
be ill treated, be damaged, iii. 3. 7, 
Vv. 2. 2, vil. 7. 16. 

κάκωσις, ews, ἡ [Kaxdw], ill 
usage, bad treatment, iv. 6. 3. 

καλάμη, 7s, straw, Lat. stipula, 
v. 4. 27. 

κάλαμος, ὁ, reed, Lat. harindd, i. 
5-1; stalk of grain, straw, iv. 5. 26. 


καλέω--κάνδυς 110 


καλέω (καλε-, κλη-), καλῶ, ἐκά- 
λεσα, κέκληκα, κέκλημαι, ἐκλήθην 
[R. kad], call, summon, Lat. uocd, 
abs. or with acc., i. 2. 2, 3. 4, ii. 1. 
a 4. oe, a0. 2.9, V..6. 8, Vil. 3. 
2; invite, with ἐπί and acc., vii. 3. 
15, 6. 3; call to see whether, de- 
mand, with ef and interr. clause, 
v. 4. 3; call, name, Lat. appelld, 
with two accs., vii. 6. 38; pass., be 
called, be named, i. 2. 8, iv. 4. 4, 
vi. 4. 1; ἡ καλουμένη, the so-called, 
Ls ΧΙ ἃ 1G, i. ἃ. 19s mik., 
call to oneself, iii. 3. 1, Vii. 2. 
30. 

καλινδέομαι [cf. κυλινδέω], roll, 
v. 2. 31. 

καλλιερέω, καλλιερήσω, ἑκαλλιέ- 
pnoa, κεκαλλιέρηκα, κεκαλλιέρημαι 
[καλός + ἱερός}, have favourable 
signs in a sacrifice, obtain good 
omens, Lat. εἰ. v. 4. 22, vii. 1. 40, 
8. 5. 

Καλλίμαχος, ὁ, Callimachus, a 
brave captain .of hoplites, from 
Parrhasia in Arcadia, often dis- 
tinguishing himself, iv. 1. 27, 7. 8, 
10, v. 6. 14, vi. 2. 7, 9. 

KGAXiov, κάλλιστος, 566 καλός. 

κάλλος, ovs, τό [καλός], beauty, 
Lat. pulchritudd, ii. 3. 16. 

καλλωπισμός, ὁ [καλός - R. on], 
adornment, embellishment, i. 9. 
23. 

καλός, ἡ, dv [cf. Eng. HALE, 
WHOLE, ca/li-graphy|, comp. καλ- 
Mwy, sup. κάλλιστος, beautiful, 
handsome, of outward beauty in 
persons — things, Lat. pulcher, i. 
2. 22, 20. 3, "ἡ. Uy, iii. 2. 7, 25, iv. 
8. 26, vi. 1. "9, vii. 1. 24; of ideas, 
acts and things in i a to use, 
Jair, fe favourable, “ἢ 
- ἢ χὰ 14; of sacrifices and 
omens, ὩΣ propitious cca 
able, i. 8. 15, iv. 3. 9, vii. 2. 17; 

a@ moral sense, fair, noble, ali Mi 
able, it. 1. 24, iv. 6. 14, v. 6. 15, 
vii. 7. 41; subst., τὸ walde, honour, 
ii. 6. 18. Phrases : καλοὶ κἀγαθοί, 
or καὶ ἀγαθοί, noble and good men, 
i.e. gentlemen, Lat. optimatés, ii. 6. 


19, iv. 1. 19; els καλὸν ἥκετε, you 
are come at the right moment, iv. 
7.3; κάλλιστον γεγένηται, it is the 
luckiest incident, Lat. rés optimé 
éueénit, vii. 6. 2. 

Κάλπη, 7s, only in the phrase 
Κάλπης λιμήν, Calpe Harbour, vi. 
2. 15, 3. 16, 4. 1. This place was 
on the coast of Asiatic Thrace, 
midway between Heracléa and the 
Bosporus (Kerpeh). 

Καλχηδονία, as [Καλχηδών], 
Chalcedonia, the country about 
Chalcédon, vi. 6. 38. 

Καλχηδών, dvos, ἡ, Chalcédon, a 
city in Bithynia, founded by Me- 
garians, 682 z.c., at the southern 
entrance of the Bosporus and op- 
posite Byzantium, vii. 1. 20, 2. 
24, 26. Here was held the Coun- 
cil of the Church, 451 a.p. (Kadi- 
kGi). 

καλῶς, adv. [καλός], beautifully, 
well, fairly, finely, favourably, suc- 
cessfully, honourably, nobly, of out- 
ward beauty, in a moral sense 7 Or 
of good fortune, i. 9. 17, 23, iii. 1. 
16, 48, iv. 3. 8, V. ὁ. 2, vii. 3. 43; 
comp. κάλλϊον, ii. 2. 18, vii. 3. 87: 
sup. κάλλισγα. iii. 1. 6, iv. 3. 14, 
vi. 1. 11, Phrases: καλῶς κατα- 
πράττειν or ylyvecOa, result in sic- 
cess, turn out well, i. 2. 2, iv. 3. 
24; καλῶς ἔχειν, be well, be all 
right, i. 8. 18, vii. 7. 44; τὰ τῶν 
θεῶν καλῶς εἶχεν, the rites of the 
gods were duly performed, iii. 2. 9 ; 
καλῶς ἔχειν ὁρᾶσθαι, be finely dis- 
posed to view, ii. 3.3; καλῶς ποιεῖν, 
do well, benefit, abs. or with acc., 
ii. 6, 20, v. 8. 25. 

κάμνω (Kau-), καμοῦμαι, ἔκαμον, 
κέκμηκα, work, labour, hence, be 
weary, tired, v. 8.25; with partic., 
iii, 4. 47; of κάμνοντες, the ex- 
hausted, the sick, invalids, iv. 5. 
17, v. 5. 20, vii. 2. 6. 

κἀμοί, for καὶ ἐμοί. 

kav, for καὶ ἐν. 

κᾶν, for καὶ ἐάν. 

κάνδυς, vos, ὁ, a Median and 
Persian long outer garment, caftan. 


111 κἀντεῦθεν- καρπόομαι 


It had wide sleeves, and was made 
of woollen cloth, which was either 


~ 


of purple or of some other splendid 
colour, i. 5. 8. 

καντεῦθεν, for καὶ ἐντεῦθεν. 

κἄπειτα, for καὶ ἔ ἔπειτα. 

καπηλεῖον, τό [κάπηλος, ὁ, retail 
dealer, cf. Lat. οατρῦ, tradesman), 
retail shop or general store for the 
sale of all kinds of provisions, but 
esp. tavern, restaurant, bar-room, 
Lat. caupona, i. 2. 24. 

καπίθη, ys, capithe, a Persian 
dry measure, equal to two choi- 
nixes, i. 5.6. See s.v. χοῖνιξ. 

καπνός, ὁ [ cf. Lat. wapor, steam], 
smoke, Lat. fumus, ii. 2. 15, 18. 

Καππαδοκία, as, Cappadocia, a 
country in central Asia Minor, 
bounded on the east by the Eu- 
phrates, on the south by Taurus, i. 
2. 20, 9.7. Under the Persians it 
was divided into two satrapies, the 


southern, or Cappadocia proper, 
and the northern, which included 
Paphlagonia and part of Pontus. 
κάπρος, ὁ [cf. Lat. caper, goat], 
wild boar, Lat. aper, ii. 2. 9 
καρβάτιναι, Gv, shoes of un- 
dressed hide, brogues, made of a 
single piece of oxhide, so that sole 


and upper leather were all in one, 
and tied on with thongs. These 
shoes were so simple that they could 
be made easily, and so we find the 
Greeks in the Anab. resorting to 
them in an emergency, iv. 5. 14. 

καρδία, as [cf. Lat. cor, heart, 
Eng. HEART], heart, as the seat of 
feelings, ii. 5. 23. 

Καρδούχειος or Καρδούχιος, ἃ, 
ον [Καρδοῦχοι], of the Cardichi, 
Carduchian, iv. 1. 2, 3. 

ΚΚαρδοῦχοι, οἱ, the ’Cardiichi, Car- 
duchians, a wild and warlike race 
living among mountains on the 
left bank of the Tigris, and sepa- 
rated from Armenia by the Cen- 
trites river. They owned no alle- 
giance to the king of Persia, v. 5. 
17. The Greeks passed through 
them under great hardship and 
difficulty, with constant fighting, 
Hii, 5.°16, iv. 1.4, 8, 3.1, 34545 3 
The modern Kurds of Kurdistan 
now represent this people. 

Κάρκασος, ὁ, Carcasus, a river 
in Mysia, vii. 8. 18. 

καρπαία, as, the carpaea, a Thes- 
salian pantomimic dance or ballet, 
fully described vi. 1. 7, sq. 

καρπόομαι, καρπώσομαι, éxaprw- 
σάμην, κεκάρπωμαι [καρπός], reap 
crops from, enjoy the fruit of, hence 
ὁ καρπούμενος, the possessor of an 
estate, usufructuary, Vv. 3. 13; of 
one aad plunder, devastate, iii. 
2. 23. 


καρπός-καταγγέλλω 11 


καρπός, ὁ [cf. Lat. carpd, pluck, 
Eng. narvest], fruit, both of the 
earth and of trees; hence of grain, 
crop, Lat. seges, ii. 5. 19. 

Κάρσος or Κέρσος, ὁ, the Carstis 
or Cersus, a small river emptying 
into the gulf of Issus, between 
‘Cilicia and Syria, i. 4. 4 (Merkez). 

κάρνον, τό, nut, Lat. nux ; κάρνα 
πλατέα οὐκ ἔχοντα διαφυήν, flat 
nuts without divisions such as the 
walnut has, v. 4. 29, 32, by which 
description Xen. probably means 
chestnuts, τὰ κασταναϊκὰ xdpva OF 
καστάνια, then unfamiliar to the 
Greeks ; but others think hazelnuts 
are intended. 

κάρφη, ης [cf κάρφω, dry up], 
any dried stalks, hay, straw, i. 5. 
10. 

Kacrwiés, 7, Castdlus, a place 
probably near Sardis, where there 
was a plain which served as a 
muster field for that part of the 
Persian army which was recruited 
from Lydia, Great Phrygia, and 
Cappadocia, i. 1. 2, 9. 7. 

κατά, by elision and euphony 
κατ᾽ or καθ᾽, prep. with gen. and 
acc., down, downwards, Lat. sub. 

With gen., denoting motion from 
above, down, down along, rare in 
Anab,, i. 5. 8, iv. 2. 17, 5. 18, 7. 14, 
8. 28; down under, below, Vii. 1. 
30, 7. 11. 

With acc., of place or position, 
said of motion, on, over, down 
along, by, throughout a space, iii. 
4. 30, iv. 6. 28, vi. 5. 7, 22, 80 καὶ 
κατὰ γῆν καὶ κατὰ θάλατταν, by 
land and sea, Lat. terra marique, 
i. 1. 7, iii. 2. 18, of. ν. 4.15; denot- 
ing the place of a blow, on, i. 8. 
26; of the object of motion, for, 
after, iii. 5. 2; with verbs of rest 
or of motion, over against, oppo- 
site, opposed to, against, i. 5. 10, 8. 
21, 10. 4, 7, ii. 3. 19, iv. 3. 20, vi. 5. 
28, vii. 3. 22; with verbs of rest, 
near, at, by, Vv. 2. 16, vii. 2. 1, so 
κατὰ ταῦτα, on this side, vii. 5. 


13; of fitness, in conformity to, 


9 


“αὶ 


according to, in relation to, con- 
cerning, ii. 2. 8, Vii. 2. 23, 3. 39. 
Phrases: τὸ κατὰ τοῦτον εἶναι; as 
far as he is concerned, i. 6.9; καθ᾽ 
ἡσυχίαν, see ἡσυχία; κατὰ σπου- 
δήν, in haste, Vii. 6. 28 ; κατὰ ταὐτά, 
in the same way, V. 4. 22, Vil. 3. 23; 
κατὰ κράτος, with all one’s might, 
i. 8.19, but in vii. 7. 7 it means 
by right of strength; distribu- 
tively, of a divided whole: xara 
ἔθνη, by races, i. 8. 9, cf. i. 2. 16, 
iii. 4. 22, 5. 8, v. 6. 32, vii. 3. 22; 
καθ᾽ ἕνα, one by one, iv. 7.8; av- 
τὸν καθ᾽ αὑτόν, all by himself, Vi. 2. 
13, cf. 11; of time, κατὰ μῆνα, by 
the month, i. 9.17; κατ᾽ ἐνιαυτόν, 
annually, iii. 2. 12. 

In composition κατά givesthe idea 
of motion from above down, along, 
or against, but freq. it strengthens 
the simple idea in the sense of 
utterly, completely, or it makes an 
intr. verb transitive; cf. the Lat. 
dé- in composition. 

καταβαίνω [R. Ba], step down, 
go or come down, descend, dis- 
mount, as from higher ground, 
from a chariot or a horse, Lat. 
déscendd, abs. or with ἀπό and gen., 
ii. 2. 14, iii. 4. 25, iv. 2. 20, 5. 25, 
vy. 2. 30, vii. 3. 45; with εἰς and 
acc. of place or πρός and acc. of 
pers., i. 2. 22, iv. 1. 10, vii. 4. 12; 
with ἐπί, for, vi. 2. 2; descend 
from the interior to the sea, li. 5. 
22, vii. 4. 21, 7. 2; go down into 
the arena, enter a contest, Lat. in 
harénam déscendd, iv. 8. 27. 

κατάβασις, ews, ἡ [R. Ba], a go- 
ing down, descent, march down, 
abs. or with εἰς and acc., iv. 1. 
10; esp. from the interior to the 
coast, V. 5. 4, vii. 8. 26; concretely, 
place of descent, descent, abs. or 
with εἰς and acc., iii. 4. 37, 39, v. 
2. 6. 

καταβλᾶκεύω [βλᾶκεύω], treat 
neglectfully, mismanage, Vii. 
22. 

καταγγέλλω [ςἀγγέλλω]ρ an- 
nounce, denounce, ii. 5. 38. 


113 κατάγειος-καταλαμβάνω 


κατάγειος, ον [γῆ], under the 
earth, subterranean, of dwellings, 
iv. 5. 20. 

καταγελάω [γελάω], laugh at, 
ridicule, mock, deride, Lat. derided, 
abs. or with gen., i. 9. 13, ii. 4. 4, 
6, 23, 30. 

κατάγνῦμι (ἀἄγνῦμι, ἀγ-, -άξω, 
-ἔαξα,; -ἐαγα, -edynv, break), shatter, 
break, of a leg, iv. 2. 20. 

καταγοητεύω [γοητεύω], bewitch 
utterly, V. 7. 9. 

κατάγω [R. ay], lead down, Lat. 
déeduco ; esp. in nautical language, 
bring down a ship to land from the 
high seas, bring to port, land, put 
in, Lat. applicd ndwem, abs., v. 1. 
11, 16, vi. 6. 3; of exiles, bring 
down, restore, bring back, abs. or 
with οἴκαδε, i. 1. 7, 2. 2, vii. 3. 18; 
mid., arrive at, with ἐπί and acc., 
iii. 4. 36. 

καταδαπανάω [R. δα], spend 
completely, use up, Lat. consumo, 
eh 2h 

καταδειλιάω, κατεδειλίασα [Sel- 
δω], flinch from for fear, avoid 
JSrom cowardice, Vii. 6. 22. 

καταδικάζω (δικάζω, δικαδ-, δι- 
κάσω, ἐδίκασα, δεδίκασμαι, ἐδικάσθην 
[R. 1 Sax], give judgment), decide 
judicially against, condemn, with 
gen. of pers. and inf., vi. 6. 15; 
give a distinct opinion, with ὅτι 
and a clause, v. 8. 21. 

καταδιώκω [διώκω], pursue 
closely or hard, chase off, iv. 2. 5. 

καταδοξάζω (δοξάζω, dotad-, do- 
ξάσω, ἐδόξασα [R. δοκ], believe), 
hold an opinion to one’s discredit, 
with acc. and inf., vii. 7. 30. 

καταδύω [δύω], make yo down, 
sink, of ships, Lat. mergd, i. 3. 17, 
vii. 2. 13; mid. intr., sink down, 
sink, of persons, abs. or with μέχρι 
or κατά and gen., iii. 5. 11, iv. 5. 
36, vii. 7. 11. 

καταθεάομαι [θέα], look down 
on, i. 8. 14, vi. 5. 30. 

καταθέω [θέω], run down, charge 
down, of soldiers, abs. or with eis 


καταθήσεσθαι, see κατατίθημι. 

καταθύω [R.2 θυ], sacrifice, of- 
fer, of victims, abs. or with acc., 
lii. 2. 12, iv. 5.35, v.5. ὃ; dedicate, 
Vv. 3. 138. 

καταισχύνω [αἰδέομαι], cover 
with shame, put to shame, disgrace, 
ili. 1. 30, 2. 14. 

κατακαίνω (καίνω, kav-, kav, éxa- 
νον, kéxova [ cf, κτείνω], kill, poetic), 
kill, slay, cut down, in prose only 
in Xen., in pres., 2 aor., and 2 pf., 
1. 6. 2, 9. 6, 10. 7, lil. 1. 2, 2. 12, 39, 
iv. 2. 5, 8. 25, v. 7. 27, 28, 30, 32, 
vi. 4. 26, 6. 31, vii. 4. 10, 6. 37, vii. 
6. 36. 

κατακαίω or κατακάω | καίω], 
burn down or completely, burn up, 
destroy, i. 4. 10, ii- 5. 19, iii. 3. 1, 
v. 2. 27, vii. 4. 5, 15. 

κατάκειμαι [κεῖμαι}, lie down, 
lie sleeping, iil. 1. 15, iv. 4. 11; 
esp., recline at table, where the 
Greeks rested on the left arm and 
had the right free, Lat. accumbd, 
with ἐν and dat., vi. 1.4; lie idle, 
iii. 1, 18, 14. 

κατακηρύττω [R. Kad], proclaim 
or command by herald or crier, ii. 
2. 20. 

κατακλείω [κλείω], srut down or 
in, enclose, hem in, with eis and 
acc. or εἴσω and gen., iii. 3. 7, 4. 
26, v. 2. 18, vii. 2. 15. 

κατακοντίζω [R.ax], shoot down 
with the javelin, vii. 4. 6. 

κατακόπτω [κόπτω], cut down, 
slay, i. 2. 25, 5. 16, 10. 9, ii. 5. 32, 
iii. 5. 2. 

κατακτάομαι [xrTdoua], gain 
completely, get full possession of, 
Vii. 3. 31. 

κατακτείνω͵ [κτείνω], slay, mur- 
der, ii, 5. 10. 

κατακωλύω [κωλύω], hinder from 
doing, hold back, keep back, abs. 
or with ἔξω, v. 2. 16, vi. 6. 8. 

καταλαμβάνω [λαμβάνω], seize 
upon, capture, take, catch, Lat. ca- 
pid, i. 8. 20, iii. 5. 2, vii. 6. 26, os av 
καταληφθῇ, whoever gets caught, ἴ.0. 


or ἐπί and acc., vi. 3. 10, vii. 3. 44. 


hit, iv. ἡ. 4; esp. occupy, seize a 


καταλέγω--καταράομαι 114 


town or stronghold, Lat. occupd, i. 
3. 14, το. 16, iv. 1. 20, 21, v. 4. 15, 
vii. 3. 48; catch up to, overtake, 
Lat. adsequor, of persons, ii. 2. 12, 
iii. 3. 8, iv. 5.7; of a town, reach, 
arrive at, Lat. peruenid, vii. 8. 8; 
discover, find, meet, Lat. incido, 
iii, 1. 8, iv. 2. 14, v. 7. 18, with 
partic., i. 10. 18, iv. 2. 5. 

καταλέγω [R. Aey], recite, enu- 
merate, reckon ; phrase: εὐεργεσίαν 
κατέλεγεν Sri, he counted it as a 
kindness that, ii. 6. 27. 

καταλείπω [λείπω], leave behind, 
leave, Lat. relinquo, iii. 3. 19, 4. 
49, iv. 2. 13, vii. 2. 30, with acc. of 
thing and either dat. or παρά with 
dat. of pers., or inf. of purpose, iv. 
6. 1, v. 2. 1, 3.6; desert, abandon, 
forsake, leave in the lurch, i. 2. 18, 
um. 2. 3 4. 0, iv. ἢ αὶ VL 4/8; 
leave remaining, free, or over, with 
acc. of thing and dat. of pers., iii. 
5. 5, iv. 2. 11, vi. 5. 1, vil. 3. 22; 
pass., stay or remain behind, i. 8. 
25, v. 6. 12. 

καταλεύω (λεύω, -λεύσω, -ἔλευσα, 
ἐλεύσθην [λᾶας, stone, cf. Lat. lau- 
tumiae, quarry], stone, late Lat. 
lapidd), stone to death, i. 5. 14, v. 
7. 19, 30, vii. 6. 10. 

καταλλάττω (ἀλλάττω, ἀλλαγ- 
ἀλλάξω, ἤλλαξα, -ἤλλαχα, ἤλλαγμαι, 
-ηλλάχθην or ἠλλάγην [ἄλλος], 
change), change ; mid. and pass., 
esp. of a change from enmity for 
friendship, become reconciled, i. 
6. 1. 

καταλογίζομαι [ R. Aey], put down 
to one’s account, reckon up, Υ. 6. 10, 

καταλύω [Adv], wnloose, dissolve, 
end, Lat. dissolud, vi. 2.12; with 
πόλεμον, make peace, Lat. bellum 
conjicid, V. 7. 27, without πόλεμον 
and with πρός and acc, of the 
pers., i. 1.10; wnloose, unyoke (80. 
ἵππους), ἴ.6. make a halt, abs. or 
with πρὸς ἄριστον, halt for break- 
fast, i. 8.1, το. 19. 

καταμανθάνω [R. pa], learn 
thoroughly, understand, observe, 
be aware, abs., with acc., or with 


ace. and a clause with ws or ὅτι, i, 
9. 3, ii. 3. 11, iii. 1, 44, V. 7. 14, vii. 
2. 18, 4. 6; discover, with partic., 
v. 8. 14. 

καταμελέω [R. ped], be neglect- 


ful, neglect one’s duty, v. 8. 1. 


καταμένω [R. pa], stay or wait 
behind, Lat. remaneo, abs. or with 
ἐν or παρά and dat., v. 6. 17, vi. 6. 
2, vii. 3. 47, 6. 43. 

καταμερίζω [μερίζω], divide 
among, distribute, Vii. 5. 4. 

Karaptyvupe (μέγνῦμι, μιγ-, μέξω, 
gutta, μέμζγμαι, ἐμέχθην and ἐμίγην 
[R. pry], mix), mix up; pass., 
mingle with, εἰς ras πόλεις κατεμέγ- 
vuvro, they mingled with the citi- 
zens, Vii. 2. 3. 

κατανοέω [R. γνω], mark well, 
vii. 7. 43; observe, perceive, i. 2. 4, 
vii. 7. 45. 

καταντιπέρᾶᾷν Or καταντιπέρᾶς 
adv. [R. περ]; over against, on the 
opposite side of, with gen., 1. 1. 9, 
iv. 8. 3. 

καταπέμπω [πέμπω], send down, 
esp. from the interior to the coast, 
i. o. ἢ, 

καταπετρόω (πετρόω, ΔΟΥ, pass. 
ἐπετρώθην ἱπέτρος], stone, late Lat. 
lapidd), stone to death, in pass., 
"Δ... 

᾿αἴρ ΑΒΕ ΦῊΝ (πηδάω, πηδήσω, ἐπή- 
δησα, -πεπήδηκα [R. wed], leap), 
jump or spring down, with ἀπό 
and gen., i. 8. 3, ili. 4. 48. 

καταπίπτω [R. wer], fall down, 
esp. from a horse, fall off, get a 
fall, iii. 2. 19, iv. 8. 26. 

καταπλήττω [πλήττω], strike 
down, esp. with terror or wonder, 
terrify abjectly, with βροντῇ, iii. 4. 
12. 

καταπολεμέω [πολεμέω], fight 
down, vanquish, reduce, Lat. de- 
belld, vii. 1. 27. 

καταπράττω [πράττω], fuljil, 
bring to an end, accomplish, exe- 
cute, i. 2,2, vii. 7.17; mid., achieve, 
vii. 7. 27. : 

κατᾶράομαι (apdouat, -ἄράσομαι, 
ἠρᾷσάμην, -ἡρᾶμαι [apd, prayer], 


115 κατασβέννυμι-καταφρονέω 


pray, poetic), pray against, impre- 
cate, curse, Lat. détestor, abs. or 
with dat., v. 6. 4, vii. 7. 48. 
κατασβέννυμι (σβέννυμι, σβε-, 
«σβέσω, and -σβήσομαι, ἔσβεσα, 
-έσβην, -έσβηκα, -εσβέσθην (cf. Eng. 
a-sbestos |, quench), put out, Lat. 
exstingud, of fires, vi. 3. 21, 25. 
κατασκεδάννυμι [σκεδάννυμι], 
sprinkle down on, empty on, pour 
out on. Phrase: xarecxeddcaro 
μετὰ τοῦτο (or τῶν μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ) τὸ 
κέρας, next or on his comrades he 
poured out what remained in his 
drinking horn, Vii. 3. 382 (see συγ- 
κατασκεδάννυμι). According to the 
lexicographer Suidas, it was the 
custom among the Thracians for a 
feaster at a carouse, when he had 
drunk all that he could, to scatter 
the rest of the wine in the cup over 
his comrades. The object, prob- 
ably, was to show that practically 
nothing remained, since it was a 
point of honour to drain the cup. 
κατασκέπτομαι [σκέπτομαι], view 
closely, inspect, i. 5. 12. 
κατασκευάζω [R. oxv], jit out 
thoroughly with gear of any kind, 
so of a horse, provide «οὐδ, proper 
trappings, accoutre, iii. 3.19; of a 
house, furnish, iv. 1.8; of a coun- 
try, improve, embellish, i. 9. 19; 
mid., prepare oneself, make one’s 
arrangements, iii. 2. 24. 
κατασκηνέω [R. oka], aor., pitch 
one’s tent, encamp, abs. or with ἐν 
and dat., iii. 4. 32, 33, vii. 4. 11. 
κατασκηνόω [R. oxa], pitch 
one’s tent, encamp, with els and 
acc. of place, ii. 2. 16. 
κατασκοπή, ἧς [cf. κατασκέπτο- 
μαι]. watching, reconnoissance, Vii. 
4. 10, 
κατασπάω [R. ora], draw or 
drag down, with ἀπό and gen., i. 
9. 6. 
κατάστασις, ews, ἡ [R. ora], 
state, condition, Vv. 7. 26. 
καταστρατοπεδεύω [R. orpa+ 
R. wed], put into camp ; mid. intr., 
encamp, iii. 4. 18, iv. 5. 1, vi. 3. 20. 


καταστρέφω [στρέφω], turn up- 
side down, overset; mid., subject 
to oneself, subdue, i. 9. 14, vii. 5. 14, 
yee 

κατασφάττω [σφάττω]Ί, cut 
down, slay, kill, iv. 1. 28. 

κατασχεῖν, see κατέχω. 

κατασχίζω [σχίζω], split down, 
cleave asunder, of gates, break 
through, Lat. perfringo, vii. 1. 16. 

κατατείνω [reivw], stretch hard, 
strain oneself, strive earnestly, in- 
sist, Lat. contend, ii. 5. 30. 

κατατέμνω [τέμνω], cut all up or 
in pieces, iv. 7. 26. Phrase: ἐξ 
αὐτῶν κατετέτμηντο τάφροι ἐπὶ τὴν 
χώρᾶν, from them ditches had been 
cut that ran into the country, ii. 4. 
13. 

κατατίθημι [R. Ge], put down; 
mid., put or lay down or away for 
use, iv. 3. 11, v. 2. 15, vii. 1.37; de- 
posit, lay up, lay by, Lat. depono, 
with special reference to the an- 
cient practice of depositing docu- 
ments or valuable articles with 
some friend or in the keeping of a 
god, hence in phrases: οὐκ els τὸ 
ἴδιον κατεθέμην δαρεικούς, I did not 
lay up the darics for my own use, 
i. 3. 3; θεοί, map ovs τὴν φιλίαν 
κατεθέμεθα, the gods, into whose 
keeping we have given the friend- 
ship, li. 5. 8; ἀποστροφὴν καταθή- 
σεσθαι, to insure a refuge, Vii. 6. 34. 

κατατιτρώσκω | TiTpwWoKw |,wound 
severely, iv. 1. 10. 

κατατρέχω [τρέχω], run down, 
abs. or with ἐπί and acc., v. 4. 23, 
vii. 1. 20. 

καταυλίζομαι [R. 2 aF], encamp, 
vii. 5. 15. 
ees ey see κατέφαγον. 
καταφανής, és [R. da], in sight, 
Lat. in oculis, i. 8. 8, ii. 3. 3, vii. 2. 
18. 

καταφεύγω [R. φνυγ], flee down, 
take refuge, flee for help, Lat. con- 
Sugid, with ἐνταῦθα or with εἰς and 
acc:, ἢ 5. 13, iii. 4. 11, v. 7. 2. 

καταφρονέω [φρήν], look down 
on, despise, Lat. déspicio, iii. 4. 2. 


καταχωρίζω- Κελαιναί 116 


καταχωρίζω [xwpliw], set apart 
in one’s proper place, settle, sta- 
tion, arrange, Vi. 5. 10. 

κατέαξαν, see κατάγνῦμι. 

κατεθέμην, see κατατίθημι. 

κατεῖδον [R. Ft], look down on 
from above, Lat. despicid, 1. 10. 14, 
iv. 4. 9, 7. 21, vii. 3. 44; observe, 
discern, iv. 3. 11, Vi. 5. 8. 

κατειλῆφθαι, κατειληφότες, see 
καταλαμβάνω. 

κάτειμι [εἶμι7, go or come down, 
Lat. déscendo, v. 7. 18. 

κατεργάζομαι [R. Fepy], do thor- 
oughly by work, accomplish, bring 
to pass, achieve, i. 9. 20, ii. 6. 22, 
vi. 2. 10, vii. 7. 25, 26. 

κατέρχομαι [ἔρχομαι], go down, 
esp. to one’s home, return, with 
οἴκαδε, Vii. 2. 2. 

κατετέτμηντο, see κατατέμνω. 

κατέτρωσαν, 866 κατατιτρώσκω. 

κατέφαγον [ἔφαγον], eat up, bolt, 
iv. 8. 14. 

κατέχω [R. vex], hold down or 
firmly, hold fast, Lat. retined, vii. 
7.28; restrain, check, prevent, with 
ace. of the pers. or with inf., iii. 
1. 20, vii. 7. 29; esp. hold in pos- 
session, occupy, Lat. obtineod, τν. 2. 
1. 5 1% ν G& 7, 3: tome, m ἃ 
nautical sense, come down to land, 
put in, Lat. portum capid, abs. 
or with ἐκεῖσε, v. 6. 20, vi. 1. 33. 
Phrases: ἀνάγκῃ κατεχόμενοι, com- 
pelled by necessity, ii. 6.13; τοσοῦ- 
τον χωρίον κατασχεῖν, cover 80 much 
ground, iv. 8. 12. 

κατηγορέω, κατηγορήσω, etc. 
[dyelpw], speak against, accuse, 
charge, with gen. of pers. and ὅτι 
or ws with a clause, v. 7. 4, 8.1, 
vii. 6. 8, 7. 44. 

κατηγορία, as [ayelpw], a speak- 
ing against, accusation, charge, V. 
8. 1, 

κατηρεμίζω (ἠρεμίζω, ἠρεμιδ-, 
«ηρέμισα, -ηρεμίσθϑην [ἠρέμα, adv., 
quietly], make still), make thor- 
oughly quiet, calm down, appease, 
vii. 1. 22, 24. 

κατιδόντας, see κατεῖδον, 


κατοικέω [R. Fux], have one’s res- 
idence, live, with ἐν and dat., v. 3. 7. 

κατοικίζω [R. Fux], make live 
in, settle as a colonist; of a city, 
colonize, settle, found, Lat. condo, 
v. 6. 15, vi. 4. 7. 

κατορύττω [ὀρύττω], sink in the 
ground, bury, hide underground, 
Lat. infodio, iv. 5. 29, v. 8. 9, 11. 

κάτω, adv. [κατά], with verbs of 
motion, down from above, down- 
wards, Lat. deorsus, iv. 8. 20, 28; 
with verbs of rest, underneath, be- 
low, Lat. infra, iv. 5.25. Phrase: 
τὸ κάτω τοῦ τόξου, the lower part of 
the bow, iv. 2. 28. 

καῦμα, aros, τό [καίω], heat, of 
the sun, i. 7. 6. 

καύσιμος, ov [καίω], that can be 
burnt, combustible, vi. 3. 15, 19. 

Καύστρου πεδίον, τό, Cayster 
Plain or Caysterfield (ef. Spring- 
field, Dartmoor), a city in Phrygia, 
where the roads from Byzantium 
and Sardis united on their way to 
Syria, i. 2.11. (Near Bulwudun.) 

κἄω, see καίω. 

κέγχρος, 6, millet, millet grass, a 
hardy grass used as fodder, with a 
grain sometimes ground into meal, 
i, 2. 22 ( pdnicum miliaceum). 

κεῖμαι, κείσομαι [κεῖμαι], be laid 
(used as a pass. of τίθημι), hence 
of persons, lie, lie at one’s length, 
iv. 8. 21, esp. lie dead, i. 8. 27, vi. 
5. 6; of things, be laid, lie, be 
placed, be situated, with év or mpés 
and dat. of place or κατά and acc. 
of pers., iii. 1. 21, 4. 10, vi. 4. 3, vii. 
3. 23; esp. as pass. of the phrase 
θέσθαι τὰ ὅπλα, Cf. ἔνθα τὰ ὅπλα 
ἔκειτο, where the armed force was 
halted or stationed, iv. 2. 20, ef. vii. 
1. 24. 

κεκρᾶγότων, see κράζω. 

κέκτησθε, See κτάομαι. 

Κελαιναί, dv, Celaenae, a flour- 
ishing commercial city of Phrygia, 
at the sources of the Marsyas and 
Maeander, with a citadel and royal 
palace. Here Cyrus had a park. 
i. 2. 7, 8, & (Ruins near Denair. ) 


117 | κελεύω--κέρας 


κελεύω, κελεύσω, ἐκέλευσα, κεκέ- 
λευκα, κεκέλευσμαι, ἐκελεύσθην [Ἐ.. 
κελ], order, command, bid, give 
orders, direct, Lat. twbed, gener- 
ally with acc. of pers. and inf., i. 
1. 11, 2. 15, ii. 1. 8, iii. 4. 38, iv. 2. 
1, v. 2. 8, vi. 6. 5, vii. 1. 22; with 
inf, alone, i. 3. 16, ii. 3. 1, ili. 1. 
26, vi. 3. 15; with acc. of pers. 
alone, vi. 6. 15; with acc. of thing, 
iii. 1. 7, vi. 6. 14; abs., i. 6. 10, vi. 
5. 26, 6. 26; in a weaker sense, 
bid, urge, advise, suggest, abs., 
with inf., or acc. and inf., i. 9. 27, 
iii, 1. 29, iv. 5. 16, vii. 1. 4, 2. 8. 

κενός, 7, dv, emply, vacant, void, 
Lat. indnis, wacuus, abs. or with 
gen., i. 8. 20, iii. 4. 20; empty, 
idle, groundless, of fear, ii. 2. 21. 
Phrases: πολὺ τῆς φάλαγγος κενὸν 
ἐποίησαν, they made a great gap in 
the phalana, iv. 8. 17. 

κενοτάφιον, τό [κενός + τάφος, Cf. 
Eng. cenotaph], empty gravemound 
or tomb, cenotaph, in which there 
were no ashes of the dead, vi. 4. 9. 
These were erected chiefly in hon- 
our of persons lost at sea or of 
those whose bodies were missing 
after a battle. They were often 
handsome artistic structures with 
pillars and inscriptions. 

κεντέω, κεντήσω [ cf. κέντρον, sharp 
point, goad, Eng. centre], prick, 
goad, stab, torment, iii. 1. 29. 

Kevrptrys, ὁ, the Centrites, an 
affluent of the Tigris, separating 
Armenia from the country of the 
Cardiichi, iv. 3. 1 (Butan Tchai). 
The Greeks crossed at the modern 
city Sert, where there is now a 
good ford. 

κεράμιον, τό [R. 2 κρα], earthen 
jar, used for wine, vi. 1. 15, 2. 3. 

κεραμεοῦς, ἃ, οῦν [R. 2 κρα], of 
earth or clay, πλίνθοι κεραμεαῖ, clay 
brick, whether sunburnt or baked 
in a kiln, iii. 4. 7. 

Κεράμων or Κεραμῶν ἀγορά, as, 
the name οὗ ἃ town in Phrygia, 
close to the Mysian boundary, i. 2. 
10. It means either Tilemarket 


or Market of the Ceramians, acc. 
to the accent. It was perhaps the 
later Trajanopolis, modern Uschak. 

κεραννῦμι (Kepa-, Kpa-), ἐκέρασα, 
κἐκρᾶμαι, ἐκεράσθην or ἐκράθην [R. 
2 κρα], mix, mostly of the dilution 
of wine with water, Lat. diluo, v. 
4. 29 (see s.v. dxparos); of mix- 
ing wine into water, with acc. and 
dat., i. 2. 13. 

κέρας, xéparos or κέρως, dat. κέ- 
part, τό [cf. Lat. cornu, horn, Eng. 
HORN, HART, rhino-ceros], horn, 
prop. of an animal, Lat. corni ; 
hence, from the resemblance of 
shape or because horns of animals 
were originally used for these pur- 
poses, bugle horn, horn, used to 
sound ‘taps,’ ii. 2. 4, and among 
the barbarians for other purposes, 
vii. 3. 32, 4.19. The σάλπιγξ, @.v., 
was the instrument employed by 
the Greeks in war for signals of 
every description, and the use of 
the ‘horn’ in ii. 2. 4 in giving a 
military signal cannot be paralleled 
in the writings of any other Greek 
historian than Xenophon. As used 
among the barbarians, the instru- 
ment was probably the actual horn 
of an animal. In vii. 4. 19, it is 
worthy of note that the person who 
blows on the κέρας is called by 


| Xenophon a σαλπικτής, which in- 


dicates that the κέρας was used 
among the barbarians as was the 
σἀλπιγξ among the Greeks. Among 
the Romans the cornu developed 
into a regular instrument, as shown 


No. 34. 


in the accompanying cut. κέρας 
also signifies drinking horn, but 


Κερασούντιοι-κεφαλαλγής 118 


in the Anab. is so used only of the 
Thracians, vii. 2. 23, 3. 24 (ef. vi. 1. 
4). Among the Greeks the drink- 
ing horn received elaborate devel- 
opment, and was technically des- 
ignated by the term ῥυτόν (cf. péw, 
Ποῖον, since it had a small opening 
at the bottom which the drinker 
put into his mouth and thus allowed 
the wine to run in. The rhyton, 
as an artistic development of the 
earlier horn, was made of pottery 
or metal and was modelled into the 
head of an animal, so that the 


No. 35. 


special cup might be called ἵππος, 
ἔλαφος, κάπρος, etc. κέρας is also 
used of a projection or peak of a 
mountain, v. 6. 7. In military 
language, the army in line of bat- 
tle is compared to an animal which 
shows its front to an enemy, but 
whose strength lies in its horns on 
either side; we, however, from the 
Roman comparison to a bird of 
prey, call these wings, Lat. dla, 
iv. 8. 12, vi. 5. 5, vii. 1.23. Phrases : 
τὸ δεξιὸν κέρας, the right wing, i. 7. 
1, 8. 13; τὰ δεξιὰ τοῦ xéparos, the 
right of the wing, i. 8.4; τὸ εὐώνυ- 
pov κέρας, the left wing, i. 8. 4, το. 
9; ἔξω ἐγένετο τοῦ xéparos, he out- 
Jlanked the wing, i. 8. 23; ra xé- 
para τοῦ πλαισίου, the wings (al 


πλευραί) of the square, iii. 4. 19, 
20, 21; κατὰ κέρας, in column, the 
common order of march, with the 
right wing leading, iv. 6. 6; τὴν 
οὐρὰν τοῦ κέρᾶτος, the rear of the 
column, vi. 5.5. See also s.v. dva- 
πτυσσω. 

Κερασούντιοι, οἱ [Kepacois], 
Cerasuntians, inhabitants of Cera- 
sus, V. 5. 10, 7. 18, 17, 31. 

Kepacois, οὔντος, ἡ [cf. Eng. 
cherry], Cerasus, a city in Pon- 
tus west of Trapezus, the mod- 
ern Kiresiin, v. 3. 2, 4. 1, 7. 16, 
30. It was a colony of the Sino- 
peans and was doubtless named 
from the cherry trees (Arme- 
nian keraz, Turkish kires) which 
grew there abundantly. Lucullus 
brought the cherry from here to 
Rome in 73 s.c., hence the Lat. 
cerasus. 

κεράτινος, 7, ov [κέρας], of horn, 
made of horn, vi. 1. 4. 

KépBepos, 6, Cerberus, the hell- 
hound, the watch-dog of the lower 
world. His kennel was on the 
further bank of the Styx, where 
Charon put ashore the shades. 
He let all pass in, but none out. 
Hesiod describes him as having 
fifty heads, later writers and works 
of art generally represent him 
with only three, and with hair 
composed of serpents. Heracles 
brought him up to Eurystheus, vi. 
2. 2. 

κερδαίνω (xepdav-), κερδανῶ, éxép- 
dava, -κεκέρδηκα [κέρδος], gain, ac- 
quire, ii. 6. 21. 

κερδαλέος, a, ov [κέρδος], of things, 
gainful, profitable, i. 9. 17. 

κέρδος, ous, τό, gain, profit, pay, 
Lat. lucrum, i. 9. 17, vi. 2. 10. 

Képoros, see Kdpoos. 

Keprovév, τό, Certdnus, a city 
in Mysia between Adramyttium 
and Atarneus, vii. 8. 8 (some read 
Κυτώνιον). 

κεφαλαλγής, ἐς [κεφαλή - ἄλγος, 
τό, pain], causing headaches, ii. 3. 
15, 16. 


119 κεφαλή-Κιλικία 


κεφαλή, fs [root κεπ, cf. Lat. 
caput, head, Eng. Heap, a-cepha- 
lous|, head, of men, i. 8. 6, li. 5. 
23, ili. 1. 17, iv. 1. 18, v. 4. 13, vil. 
4. 4. 

κηδεμών, dvos, 6 [cf. κήδομαι], one 
who cares for another, guardian, 
protector, iii. 1. 17. 

κήδομαι (xad-), ἐκηδεσάμην, be 
troubled for, care for, with gen., 
vii. 5. 5. 

κηρίον, τό [κηρός, ὁ, beeswax, cf. 
Lat. céra, wax], honeycomb, Lat. 
JSauus, iv. 8. 20. 

κηρύκειον, τό [R. kad], herald’s 
staff, Lat. caduceus, v. 7.30. See 
8.U. κῆρυξ. 

κῆρυξ, ὕκος, ὁ [R. nad], herald, 
crier, who carried messages to the 
enemy, Lat. cddicedtor, feétidlis, 
or made proclamations and gave 
all sorts of public notices to his 
fellow-soldiers, Lat. praecd, ii. 2. 
20, iii. 1.. 46, v. 7. 3, 4. His dis- 
tinctive badge was his herald’s 
staff, κηρύκειον, g.v. When sent 
with a message to a hostile force 
or state, his person was held invio- 
lable, v. 7. 30. The accompany- 
ing illustration represents a herald 


about to go on such a mission. He 
is armed with sword and spear, 
wears the πέτασος or travelling hat, 


slung behind his back, and travel- 
ling boots, and has his χλαμύς; 
q.v., across his leftarm. He stands 
before an altar on which still burns 
the fire of sacrifice. In his right 
hand he holds his staff, a straight 
shaft with two intertwined shoots 
above, which are sometimes repre- 
sented on the staff of Hermes, the 
patron of heralds, as snakes, 

κηρύττω (κηρῦκ-), κηρύξω, ἐκήρῦξα, 
κεκήρυχα, κεκήρυγμαι, ἐκηρύχθην [Ἐ. 
Kad], be a herald, proclaim as her- 
ald, so impers., ἐκήρυξε, the herald 
proclaimed, with dat. of pers. and 
inf., iii. 4.36; announce by a her- 
ald, make proclamation, proclaim, 
Lat. dénuintio, with inf., acc. and 
inf., or ὅτι and a clause, ii. 2. 21, 
iv..2: 18, vi. 4.28, Wik Bs 765803 
with acc., command, ii. 2. 20 (see 
κατακηρὕττω). 

Κηφισόδωρος, ὁ, Cephisodorus, 
an Athenian captain, killed in 
battle by the Cardichi, iv. 2. 13, 
17. 

Κηφισοφῶν, ὥντος, ὁ, Cephiso- 
phon, father οἱ Cephisodorus, iv. 
2. 13. 

κιβώτιον, τό [xiBwrbs, wooden 
box], wooden boz, vii. 5. 14. 

ιλικία, as [Kit], Cilicia, a 
country on the southeastern coast 
of Asia Minor, i. 2. 20, 21, 4. 4, iii. 
1. 10. It lay south of Lycaonia 
and Cappadocia, was separated 
from Pamphylia on the west by 
the Taurus Mts., and was bounded 
on the east by Syria (see πύλη). 
The western part was mountain- 
ous, but in the east lay the Cilician 
plain. ‘Tarsus was the chief city. 
According to the myth the country 
was named from Cilix, son of Agé- 
nor and brother of Phoenix. The 
mountaineers lived the free life of 
the bandit, the rest of the people 
were famous pirates. Pompey sub- 
dued the latter, 67 B.c., and the 
country was organized as a Roman 
province. Cicero was proconsul in 
51-50 B.c. 


Κίλιξ-κλέπτω Ἵ 


Κίλιξ, ικος, ὁ, inhabitant of Cili- 
cia, a Cilician, i. 2. 12, 22, 25, 4. 4. 

Κίλισσα, as [Κίλιξ], Cilician 
woman, i. 2. 12, 18, 20. 

κινδυνεύω, κινδυνεύσω, etc. [κίν- 
δῦνος), encounter danger, expose 
oneself, face danger, run a risk, 
Lat. periclitor, abs., i. 1. 4, 9. 14, 
am 31%, v2 6 vi. 3 1S; with 
inf. the word often means that 
there is a danger, likelihood, or 
possibility of a thing happening, 
as ἐκινδύνευσεν ἂν διαφθαρῆναι πολὺ 
τοῦ στρατεύματος, great part of the 
host would probably have been 
killed, iv. 1. 11, ef. v. 6. 19. 

κίνδῦνος, ὁ [κίνδῦνος), danger, 
hazard, risk, Lat. periculum, i. 7. 
δι Ww. GG) 16,  Pirase: 
κίνδυνός ἐστι (or simply κίνδυνος), 
there is danger, with inf., acc. and 
inf., or μή with subjv. or opt., 
i =. 17, Ww. 1. νι 6, vil. 7. 
31. 

kivéw, κινήσω, etc. [root κι, of. 
Lat. cied, cause to go, Eng. ue}, 
make go, move, iii. 4. 28; pass., be 
put in motion, move, stir, iv. 5. 15, 
v. 8. 15. Phrase: κινεῖν τὸ orpa- 
τόπεδον, break camp, Lat. castra 
mouere, Vi. 4. 27. 

κιττός, ὁ, ivy, Lat. hedera, Υ. 4. 
12. 

Kyseaydpas, ov, Cleagoras, either 
a painter or a writer, acc. to the 
reading in vii. 8. 1 (see ἐνύπνιον and 
ἐντοίχιος), otherwise unknown, 

Κλεαίνετος, ὁ, Cleaenetus, a 
Greek captain, killed with his com- 
pany while on a raid, v. 1. 17. 

Κλέανδρος, ὁ, Cleander, the 
Spartan governor of Byzantium, 
vi. 2. 13, 6. 5, at first set against 
Xenophon and the Greeks by Dex- 
ippus, vi. 6. 9-28, but afterwards 
reconciled to them and friendly to 
Xenophon, vi. 6. 34 ff., vii. 1. 8. 
He took care of the Greek sick at 
Byzantium, vii. 2. 6, until suc- 
ceeded by Anaxibius, vii. 2. 5. 

Κλεάνωρ, opos, ὁ, Clednor, a 
Greek general from Orchomenus 


0 


in Arcadia, ii. 1. 10, 5. 37, elected 
to command the Arcadian hop- 
lites after the death of Agias, iii. 
1. 47, iv. 8. 18, often mentioned 
for valour and wisdom, iii. 2. 4, 
vi. 4. 22, vii. 1. 40, 3. 46, §. 4, 
10. 

Κλεάρετος, ὁ, Clearetus, a Greek 
captain, slain while on a plunder- 
ing expedition, v. 7. 14-16. 

Κλέαρχος, ὁ, Clearchus, a Spar- 
tan general in the Peloponnesian 
war, was at the battle of Cyzicus, 
and was harmost of Byzantium, 
where his cruelty led to its capture 
by Alcibiades, ii. 6. 1, v. 6. 24; 
after the peace, he was guilty of 
disobedience to the ephors and by 
them condemned to death, ii. 6. 
2 ff., but escaping them became 
attached to Cyrus, i. 1. 9, ii. 6. 4, 
was in his most secret counsels, 
iii. 1. 10, and was the most trusted 
of his generals. He commanded 
the right wing at Cunaxa, i. 8. 4, 
12, and after the death of Cyrus 
led the Greek army until he was 
treacherously captured and put to 
death by Tissaphernes, ii. 5. 31-42, 
6.29. An estimate of his charac- 
ter is given by Xen., ii. 6. 1-15; 
see also i. 2. 9, 3. 1 ff., 5. 11 ff., 6. 
5, ii. 1. 4, 15, 3. 11, 4. 15, 5. 3, 27. 
Pl., Κλέαρχοι, men like Clearchus, 
iii. 2. 31. 

κλεῖθρον, τό [κλείω], the fasten- 
ings of a city gate, generally pl. 
like Lat. claustra, vii. 1.17. See 
8.0. pox és. 

κλείω, -κλείσω, ἔκλεισα, κέκλειμαι, 
ἐκλείσθην [root κλεξ, cf. Lat. clauis, 
key, claudd, close, Eng. sior }, shut, 
of doors and gates, v. 5. 19, vi. 2. 
8, vii. 1. 36. 

κλέπτω (κλεπ-), κλέψω, ἔκλεψα, 
κέκλοφα, κέκλεμμαι, ἐκλάπην and 
poet. ἐκλέφθην [ε΄΄. Lat. clepd, steal, 
clipeus, shield, Eng. shop-LirTEr }, 
steal, pilfer, Lat. furor, iv. 6. 14, vil. 
6.41; embezzle, of public money, 
iv. 6. 16; smuggle through, Lat. 
Surtim aufero, iv. 1.14; in military 


121 Κλεώνυμος- κογχυλιάτης 


language, seize or occupy secretly, 
iv. 6. 11, v. 6. 9. 

Κλεώνυμος, ὁ, Cleonymus, a brave 
Spartan soldier, iv. 1. 18. 

κλῖμαξ, axos, ἡ [ο΄ κλένη, Eng. 
climax], ladder (because of its 
leaning aslant), Lat. scalae, iv. 5. 
25. For illustrations of the lad- 
der, as found on board ship, see 
8.0. ναῦς. 

κλίνη, ns [κλίνω, cause to lean, 
cf. Lat. inclind, incline, cliuus, 
slope, Eng. LEAN, climate, clini- 
cal, en-clitic], that on which one 
reclines, bed, couch, Lat. lectus, 
used not only as a bed, but also 


as a couch on which to recline at 
table, iv. 4. 21. It had four legs 
(see cut No. 73), was narrow, and 
might have a headboard. It was 
made of wood or bronze, and was 
often richly adorned. The couches 
in the tent of Tiribazus, which 
the Greeks captured (iv. 4.21), had 
silver feet. It was furnished with 
a mattress, which rested on girths 
stretched across the wooden frame, 
and with pillows and _ bedding. 
Greek bedsteads were exported to 
foreign parts, vii. 5. 14. 

κλοπή, ἢς [κλέπτω], a stealing, 
theft, iv. 6. 14. 

κλωπεύω [κλώψ], steal, rob ; with 
ace. οὗ pers., intercept, waylay, Vi. 
1.1. 

κλώψ, κλωπός, ὁ [κλέπτω], thief; 
in war, marauder, bummer, Lat. 
praedator, iv. 6. 17. 


twilight, Lat. crepusculum, iv. 5. 
9. 

κνημίς, ἴδος, ἡ [κνήμη, leg, ef. 
Lat. nitor, bear upon], greave, Lat. 
ocrea, generally pl., that 

part of the defensive 

armour of the Greek 

hoplite which covered 

his leg from the knee 

to the instep, i. 2. 16, 

iv. 7. 16, v. 2. 22. The 
greaves, which were 

made of flexible metal 

and lined with felt, 

leather, or cloth, were 
‘sprung on’ the leg, and 

then fastened behind by 

straps or buckles. Like 

the cuirass, they were No. 38. 
made to fit the indi- 

vidual person. See s.v. ὅπλον. 
For additional illustrations see s.v. 
ἀσπίς, ξίφος, ὁπλίτης. 


κόγχη, ns [cf. Eng. conch], mus- 
cle, dey a bivalve shellfish, Lat. 
concha, V. 3. ὃ. 

κογχυλιάτης, ov, adj. [κογχύλη = 
κόγχη, shelly, with λίθος, shelly 


κνέφας, ous, τό, darkness, dusk, 


limestone, iii. 4. 10. 


κοῖλος-κονιᾶτός 122 


κοῖλος, 7, ov [root xaF, cf. Lat. 
cauus, hollow, Eng. HoLe, HOL- 
Low], hollow, of a country, lying 
in α valley, v. 4. 31. 

κοιμάω, ἐκοίμησα, ἐκοιμήθην [κεῖ- 
μαι], lay to rest; mid. and pass., 
lie down to sleep, go to bed, iv. 3. 
2, 5. 14, vi. 4. 10. 

kotvy, dat. sing. fem. of κοινός, as 
adv., in common, together, jointly, 
abs. or with μετά and gen. or civ 
and dat., iii. 3. 2, iv. 5. 34, v. 4. 26, 
vi. 2. 13. 

κοινός, 7, dv [cf. Eng. epi-cene}, 
what is shared by all, common, 
general, public, Lat. commiinis, 
abs. or with dat., iii. 1. 43, 45, 2. 
32, v. 4. 15. Phrases: τὸ κοινόν, 
the common stock, the public treas- 
ury, the community, hence ἀπὸ κοι- 
vod, from the common purse, at the 
public expense, Lat. publicé, iv. 7. 
27, V. 1.12, but by public authority, 
Lat. publicd consilid, v. 7. 18; εἰς 
τὸ κοινὸν ἀγορεύειν, say publicly, v. 
6. 27 ; πρὸς τὸ κοινὸν ἐλθεῖν, come to 
the public council, i.e. board of offi- 
cers, V. 7. 17. 

κοινόω, Kowwow, exolywoa, κεκοί- 
γωμαι, ἐκοινώθην [κοινός], make com- 
mon, Lat. comminicd ; mid., im- 
part for purposes of consultation, 
communicate, consult, with dat. of 
pers. and an interr. clause, v. 6. 27, 
vi. 2. 15, 

κοινωνέω, κοινωνήσω, ἐκοινώνησα, 
κεκοινώνηκα, κεκοινώνημαι [κοινωνός], 
have a share of, partake of, with 
gen., Vii. 6. 28. 

κοινωνός, ὁ [κοινός], sharer, part- 
ner, Vii. 2. 38. 

Κοιρατάδᾶς or Κοιρατάδης, ov, 
Coeratadas or Coeratades, a The- 
ban ; commanded the Greeks for a 
day at his own proposal, vii. 1. 33- 
40. He had been under Clearchus 
at Byzantium. 

Κοῖτοι, oi, the Coeti, an inde- 
pendent race living between the 
Mossynoeci and the Tibaréni, vii. 
8. 25, otherwise unknown. 

κολάζω (κολαδ-), κολάσω, éxddaca, 


κεκόλασμαι, ἐκολάσθην, cut short, 
check, punish, Lat. castigd, abs. or 
with acc., ii. 5. 18, 6. 9, iii. 2. 81, v. 
8. 18, vii. 7. 24, 

Κολοσσαί, dv, Colossae, a city 
in the southwestern part of Phry- 
gia, on the Lycus, i. 2. 6, of impor- 
tance in the time of Herodotus and 
Xenophon, but afterwards rarely 
heard of until in connexion with 
St. Paul’s epistle. Its ruins are 
near Khonos. 

Κολχίς, ἰδος, ἡ, Colchis, a coun- 
try in Asia on the eastern coast 
of the Pontus, and west of Iberia, 
and watered by the Phasis, iv. 8. 
22, Vv. 3.2. It was a land of witch- 
craft and sorcery, the home of Me- 
déa, and the scene of the quest of 
the Golden Fleece. (Mingrelia.) 

Κόλχοι, οἱ [ο΄ Korxls], the Col- 
chians, inhabitants of Colchis. 
They were divided into various 
tribes, including the Moschi, iden- 
tified with Meshech of the Bible 
(Ezek. 27, 13). Afterwards the 
Lazi possessed the country, from 
whom are the modern Lazians. In 
the Anab. a tribe of Colchians are 
mentioned in the neighbourhood 
of Trapezus, iv. 8. 8 ff., v. 2. 1, 7.2. 

κολωνός, ὁ [εὖ Lat. celsus, high, 
collis, hill, Eng. n1iw], heap, hill, 
of stones, cairn, iv. 7. 25. 

Kopavia, as, Comania, a place 
in Mysia, near Pergamus, other- 
wise unknown, vii. 8. 15. 

κομιδή, fs [κομίζω], means of 
conveyance by sea, transport, v. 1. 
11. 

κομίζω (κομιδ-), κομιῶ, etc. [κομέω, 
care for], take charge of, carry 
away so as to save, bring, convey, 
conduct, with ἐπί and acc. or with 
οἴκαδε, iv. 5. 22, 6.3; mid., convey, 
fetch one’s own, or for oneself, 
abs. or with ἐνθάδε, iii. 2. 26, v. 5. 
20; pass., travel, v. 4. 1. 

κονιᾶτός, ἡ, dv [verbal of condw, 
plaster, xovla, dust, ashes, plaster, 
cf. κόνις, dust, Lat. cinis, ashes], 
covered with plaster, plastered, 


123 KoviopTés—Kpavos 


cemented, ον underground cisterns 
for wine, iv/ 2. 22. 

κονιορτός, ὁ [κόνις, cf. κονιᾶτός 
and ὄρνυμι, stir up, Lat. orior, rise], 
dust raised, cloud of dust, i. 8. 8. 

κόπος, ὁ [κόπτω], a belabouring, 
hence fatigue, v. 8. 3. : 

κόπρος, ἡ, dung of animals, i. 
6. 1. 

κόπτω (κοπ-), κόψω, ἔκοψα, -κέ- 
κοῴφα, κέκομμαι, ἐκόπην [cf. Eng. 
CHOP, syn-copate], cut, hew, slash, 
of trees, fell, iv. 6. 26, 8.2; of ani- 
mals, slaughter, ii. 1.6; of a door, 
knock at, Lat. pulsd, vii. 1. 16. 

κόρη; 7s, girl, maiden, Lat. pu- 
ella, iv. 5. 9. 

Κορσωτή, 7s, Corsdle, a large 
city in Mesopotamia, said to be 
surrounded by the Mascas river, i. 
5. 4. This was probably a canal 
forming with the Euphrates an 
island on which the city stood. 
Remains have been found on the 
island Werdi, similarly formed. 

Κορύλᾶς, a, Dor. gen., Corylas, 
chief of the Paphlagonians, inde- 
pendent of the king of Persia, v. 5. 
13, 22, 6. 11, vi. 3. 2. 

κορυφή, fs, highest point, top, 
peak, summit of a hill or moun- 
tain, iii. 4. 41, iv. 2. 20. 

kor péw, κοσμήσω, ἐκόσμησα, κεκό- 
σμημαι, ἐκοσμήθην [κόσμος, cf. Eng. 
cosmetic], arrange, array, mar- 
shal, of an army, iii. 2. 36; of 
persons, dress, adorn, i. 9. 23. 

κόσμιος, a, ov [κόσμος], well- 
ordered, under good discipline, vi. 
6, 32. 

κόσμος, ὁ [cf. Eng. cosmic, cosmo- 
logy], order, good order, orna- 
ments, attire, dress, Lat. mundus, 
i. 9. 33, til..2. 7; 

Kortwpa, τά, Cotydra, a com- 
mercial town, a colony of the Sino- 
peans, in the country of the Tiba- 
réni, on the Pontus, v. 5. ὃ (Ordu). 

Korvpirar, ὧν [Koriwpa], the 
people of Cotyora, Cotydrites, v. 5. 


Lat. leuis, vi. 1 12. 


Phrase : 
χόρτος κοῦφος, hay, i. 5. 10. 
κούφως, adv. [κοῦφος], lightly, 
vi. 1. 5. 

κράζω (xpay-), fut. pf. κεκράξομαι, 
ἔκραγον, 2 pi. κἐκρᾶ γα as pres., [R. 
Kad], cry out, call aloud, vii. 8. 15. 
κράνος, ous, τό [cf. Eng. cranium], 
headpiece, helmet, of metal, Lat. 
cassis, i. 2. 16, 8. 6, iv. 7. 16, Vii. 4. 
16, or of leather, Lat. galea, v. 2. 
22, 4.13. The helmet of metal, 
which was developed from the 
simple dogskin cap, consisted of 


No. 40. 


six pieces: the cap, conformed to 
the shape of the head; the φάλος, 
a metal ridge running from the 
front to the back of the cap at the 
centre and designed as a support 
for the crest; the λόφος or crest, 
commonly of horsehair and con- 
stantly ending in the horse’s tail ; 
the visor, the cheekpieces, and 
the neckpiece. The helmet was 
lined on the inside. It might be 
solid, when the visor had openings 
for the eyes and mouth and a pro- 
jecting nose guard, and the helmet 


6, 7, 10, 19, 25. 


was put on by pulling it down from 


κοῦφος, 7, ov, light in weight, above over the face (cf. No. 40, and 


κρατέω- κράτιστος 1 


see also 8.0. κνημΐς and ὅπλον) ; or 


24 


κρᾶτήρ, jjpos, ὁ [R. 2 κρα], miz- 


the visor might be a simple mova-|ing bowl, used like our punch 
ble guard for the forehead (ef. 


No. 41, 


No. 41, and see also s.v. ἀσπίς 
and πυρρίχην), and the cheekpieces 
hinged, so that they could be 
thrown up (see also 8.0. ἅρμα, 
No. 8, where the helmet rests on 
the warrior’s hand on the points 
of the cheekpieces, ξίφος, and 
ὁπλίτης). The φάλος was some- 
times lacking and the crest sup- 
ported, high above the head, by a 
rod that fitted into the centre of 
the cap. See s.v. xvnuts, where 
also the helmet is elaborately or- 
namented, the cap with the figure 
of a griffin and the cheekpieces 
with a ram’s head. 

Kparéw, κρατήσω, ἐκράτησα, κε- 
κράτηκα, ἐκρατήθην [R. 1 xpa), he 
strong, have the power, be lord or 
master, rule, get the upper hand, 
abs. or with the gen. of place, ii. 
5. 7, vii. 2.25, 3.3; esp. be victori- 
ous, conquer, abs., i. 7. 8, iii. 2. 21, 
39, v. 6. 7, hence partic. as subst., 
victor, ii. 1. 10, iii. 2. 26, pass., 
vanquished, iii. 2. 28, vii. 7. 32; 
conquer, worst, subdue, vanquish, 
with acc. or gen. of pers., iii. 4. 26, 


bowls, iv. 5. 26, 32. The κρᾶτήρ, 
as used at Greek symposia, was 
designed to hold a large quantity 
of wine and water mixed (for the 
universal Greek custom of drink- 
ing wine diluted, see s.v. dxparos). 
It was therefore a bulky vessel. 
The liquor was drawn from it by 


No. 42. 


attendants (see s.v. οἰνοχόος), who 
dipped into it their jugs or other 
vessels. The mixer was, therefore, 
broad at the top. Its form is 
shown in the accompanying illus- 
tration. The body of the vessel 
rested on a foot and base. It had 
two handles, which were generally, 
but not always, attached to the 
lower part of the vessel. For an 
additional illustration, see s.v. rpl- 
πους, No, 74. 

κράτιστος, 7, ον [R. 1 κρα], used 
as sup. of ἀγαθός, best, most excel- 
lent, strongest, bravest, Lat. opti- 
mus, i. 9. 2, 18, 21, iv. 8. 12, vii. 6. 
37; most eminent or distinguished, 
noblest, Lat. optimdtés, i. 5. 8, ii. 


iv. 7. 16, v. 6. 9, vii. 6. 32. . 


2. 8, iv. 6. 16, vii. 3. 21. Neut. pl. 


125 κράτος-κρύπτω 


κράτιστα, as adv., in the best way, 
with ws, most excellently, bravely, 
cleverly, suitably, iii. 2. 6, 3. ὃ, 
iv. 6. 10, 15, v. 2. 11, vii. 7. 16. 
Phrase: κράτιστον (sc. ἐστί), it is 
best or most advantageous, abs., 
with inf., or with dat. of pers. and 
inf, iii. 2. 28, 4. 41, iv. 5. 17, v. 6. 
36, vi. 3. 13, vii. 3. 8. 

κράτος, ous, τό [R. 1 κρα], 
strength, force, might, Lat. uis, 
used in Anab. only with ἀνά and 
κατά ; see under those words. 

κραυγή, 7s [R. nad], outcry, cry, 
shout, Lat. clamor, 1. 2. 17, ii. 2. 
17, iii. 4. 45, v. 2.17, vii 4.323. 

κρέας, xpéws, τό [cf. Lat. caro, 
flesh, Eng. creo-sote), Jlesh, pl., 
pieces of flesh, meat of animals, for 
food, i. 5. 2, ii. 1. 6, iv. 5. 31, vil. 
3. 21. 

κρείττων, ov, gen. ovos πὶ, 1 
κρα], used as comp. of ἀγαθός, bet- 
ter, stronger, mightier, superior to, 
more useful, more valuable, Lat. 
melior, i. 2. 26, ii. 2. 10, 5. 19, iil. 
1. 4, 2. 22, v. 6. 8, vii. 7. 6, 31; 
bolder, braver, i. 7. 3, V. 4. 21. 
Phrase: κρεῖττον (sc. ἐστί), tt 18 
better or more advantageous, with 
inf., iii. 2. 17, iv. 6. 11, Vi. 5. 21. 

kpépapat, κρεμήσομαι, Intr., hang, 
be suspended, Lat. pendeo, with 
ἐπί and gen., iii. 2. 19; of moun- 
tains, with ὑπέρ and gen., overhang, 
Lat. impended, iv. 1. 2. ἰ 

κρεμάννῦμι (κρεμα-), κρεμῶ, ἐκρέ- 
paca, ἐκρεμάσθην [κρέμαμαιἾ, trans., 
hang, hang up, suspend, Lat. sus- 
pendd, i. 2. 8, vii. 4. 17. 

κρήνη; 7S, spring, well, fountain, 
Lat. fons, i. 2. 18, iv. 5. 9, 16, Vi. 

. 4. 

i κρηπίς, ἴδος, ἡ, half boot or high 
shoe, Lat. crepida; of a building, 
foundation, iii. 4. 7, 10. 

Κρής, Κρητός, ὁ, α Cretan, a 
man from Crete, the largest of the 
Greek islands in the Mediterra- 
nean, now called Candia, famous 
in mythology as the birthplace of 


The Cretans were swift runners 
and renowned as archers, serving 
in this capacity in the army of 
Cyrus, i. 2. 9, iii. 3. 7, iv. 2. 28, 8. 
27, v. 2. 29, but they were prover- 
bial liars and cheats. 
κριθή, ἧς, always pl. in Anab., 
barleycorns, barley, Lat. hordeum, 
i, 2. 22, iii. 4. 31, iv. 5. 26, vi. 4. 6, 
6. 1, vii. 1. 13. 
κρίθινος, 7, ov [κριθή], of barley, 
made of barley, as bread, iv. 5.31; 
with oivos, barley wine, i.e. beer, 
a favourite beverage among the 
Egyptians, Armenians, Thracians, 
and Germans, iv. 5. 26. 

κρένω (κριν-), κρινῶ, ἔκρινα, κέ- 
κρικα, κέκριμαι, ἐκρίθην [cf. Lat. 
cernd, separate, crimen, judgment, 
Eng. critic, hypo-crisy |, part asun- 
der, divide, distinguish, pick out, 
Lat. cernd, i. 9. 30; decide, deter- 
mine, be of opinion, estimate, ad- 
judge, with two accs., with inf., or 
with acc. and inf., i. 5. 11, 9. 5, 20, 
iii. 1. 7, 12; esp. in judicial lan- 
guage, decide as judge, try, Lat. 
iudicd, vi. 6. 16, 18, 20; pass., be 
brought to trial, be tried, v. 6. 33, 
vi. 6, 25. 

κρῖός, ὁ, ram, Lat. ariés, il. 2. 9. 

κρίσις, ews, ἡ [κρίνω, cf. Eng. 
crisis], a separating, distinguish- 
ing, decision, esp. in court, trial, 
Lat. iudicium, i. 6. 5, vi. 6. 20, 26. 

κρόμμνον, τό, onion, Lat. caepe, 
vii. 1. 37. 

κρότος, ὁ [cf. κρούω], noise made 
by two bodies striking together, 
esp. of the hands, clapping, ap- 
plause, Lat. plausus, V1. 1. 13. 

κρούω, Kpovow, ἔκρουσα, -κέκρουκα, 
«κέκρου(σ) μαι, -εκρούσθην [΄. κρό- 
ros], strike one thing against an- 
other, clash, rattle, vi. 1. 10, with 
πρός and acc., iv. 5. 18. 

κρύπτω (Kpud-), κρύψω, ἔκρυψα, 
κέκρυμμαι, ἐκρύφθην and ἐκρύφην 
(ef. Eng. crypt, crypto-gam, grotto |, 
hide, conceal, keep secret, Lat. tego, 
i. 4. 12, vi. 1. 18, with acc. of pers. 


Zeus and as the kingdom of Minos. 


from whom, i. 9. 19. 


κρωβύλος-- Κύζικος 1 


κρωβύλος, ὁ, the krobulos, a way 
of arranging the hair, a sort of top- 
knot or crest formed by drawing 
all the hair to the crown and there 
confining it in a knot. This was 
old-fashioned for men in the time 
of Xenophon, but the hair was still 
worn so by children. In vy. 4. 13 
the name is applied to a horsehair 
crest or tuft of leather on the hel- 
mets of the Mossynoeci. 

κτάομαι, κτήσομαι, ἐκτησάμην, κέ- 
κτημαι, ἐκτήθην, procure Jor one- 
self, acquire, gain, win, abs. or 
with acc., i. 9. 19, ii. 6. 17, v. 6. 30, 
vi. 4. 8, vii. 2. 38, 3. 31; pertf., pos- 
8688, enjoy, i. 7.3; of persons, in the 
phrase Καρδούχους πολεμίους ἐκτη- 
σάμεθα, we made enemies of the 
Cardiichi, v. 5. 17. 

κτείνω (xrev-), xrevd, ἔκτεινα and 
Exravov, -éxrova, Kill, ii. 5. 32, rare 
as simple verb, see ἀποκτείνω. 

κτῆμα, aros, τό [xrdouac], pos- 
session, Vii. 7.41, pl., property, ii. 
6, 24, 

κτῆνος, ovs, τό [xrdouac], piece 
of property, chattel, then, as the 
ancient races were pastoral, any 
domestic animal, beast, v. 2. 3; 
generally pl., animals, cattle, used 
like our stock, iii. 1. 19, iv. 5. 25, 
7. 2. 

Κτησίᾶς, ov, Ctesias, a famous 
physician of Cnidus, belonging to 
the Asclepiad guild there. He was 
taken prisoner by the Persians 
about 415, and on account of his 


26 


κυβερνήτης, ov [κυβερνάω, steer, 
ef. Eng. govern], one who steers, 
helmsman, v. 8.20. The κυβερνή- 
Τῆς Was the most important officer 
in the Greek ship. He not only 
steered the vessel, a difficult and 
delicate operation in case of the 
man-of-war in action (see s.v. τριή- 
pns), but he also gave the orders 
which were passed on to the rowers. 
He had an assistant, called πρῳρεύς 
(ψ.υ.), who stood at the bow of 
the boat as lookout, and was in 
constant communication with him. 
For the steering gear of the Greek 
ship, see 8.0. πηδάλιον. For illus- 
trations of the κυβερνήτης at the 
rudder, see s.v. ναῦς and WEVTNKO p- 
τορος. 

Κύδνος, ὁ, the Cydnus, a river in 
Cilicia which rose in the Taurus 
range and flowed through the city 
of Tarsus, i. 2. 23 (Tersus Tchai), 

κυζικηνός, ὁ [Κύζικος], a Ογεί- 
cene, a gold coin of Cyzicus of 
about twice the weight of the da- 
ric (see 8.v. dapecxds), but so alloyed 
that in the time of Demosthenes 
it had the value of only 28 Attic 
drachmas (see s.v. μνᾶ), V. 6. 23, vi. 
2. 4, Vii. 2. 36, 3. 10. 

Κύζικος, ἡ, Cyzicus ( Balkiz), vii. 
2. 5, a colony of the Milesians, on 
the southern shore of the island 
Arctonnésus, in the southern part 
of the Propontis. This island is 
now ἃ peninsula, but in antiquity 
two bridges spanned the strait with 


skill was appointed body physician 
to Darius II. and afterwards to 
Artaxerxes. He attended the lat- 
ter at Cunaxa, i. 8.26, 27. He re- 
mained at the court 17 years, when 


ἃ fine harbour on each side of 
them. The position of the city 
made it important, and its posses- 
sion was therefore often hotly con- 
tended for, especially in the battle 


in 398 he was sent home by the 
king on an embassy to Evagoras 
and Conon, and never returned to 
Persia. He wrote a history of 
Persia in 23 books and a descrip- 
tion of India in one book, of both 
of which we have only epitomes, 
made by Photius, and a few frag- 


won there by the Athenians in 
410 8.c. Since it was a station on 
the way to the grain districts, its 
coinage was current among the 
Greeks (see Κυζικηνός). Under the 
Romans the city reached its height 
of prosperity, and the ruins on the 
hills above the peninsula are of 


nents, 


that period. 


127 κύκλος-- dpos 


κύκλος, ὁ [cf. Lat. curuus, bent, | πόλεμον, you pil προ τὴς . og 
circus, circle, Eng. r1nG, eycle, bi- your power to μὰ μου ἢ Υ' Ὥ ὧν 
cycle, en-cyclo-paedia), circle, ring, Κῦρος, 6[P nia τ ash ἢ ἣν μὰς 
esp. in the dat. as adv., κύκλῳ, Pa Poca ᾿ as rewrite δε 
1 cir )' ; 5. Lider, 1.9. 1, U2 ρ " 
di. Hoey ΠΣ νὴ 2. founder of the Persian monarchy. 
21; of a city, ring-wall, encircling | According to Se me ge ὅρη 
wall, iii. 4.7, 11; of persons, group, | was the son of en Laces 
κύκλοι συνίσταντο, groups collected, | sian noble, alee revi ὃ ΕΝ 
v.7.2. Phrases: τὴν κύκλῳ πᾶσαν | of Astyages, king o sr wh 
χώρᾶν, the whole region on every | he overthrew and succee ~ μι 
side, iii. 5. 14, of. Vv. 6.20; κύκλῳ | ing from ton estate onl i 
διὰ μέσης τῆς Θράκης, round through | ern ei hearts τ’ se ty 
the middle of Thrace, vii. 1. 14; Ctesias (see Κτησίας) a pa 
πορευόμενοι κύκλῳ, March in acurve, | stating that Cyrus was n en ὧν 
vii. 8. 18. to Astyages. He was be o y ἡ 
κυκλόω, κυκλώσω, ἐκύκλωσα, xe-| pure Persian stock, the ; age 
κύκλωμαι, ἐκυκλώθην [κύκλος], encir- | ant of Nesp x in. Mie : 
cle, surround, of troops, in pass., i. generation — Ha saga ren ἦν 
8. 13, iv. 2.15; mid., form a circle, ispis, Kurash τ one : (c 
gather round, with wept and acc., | (Cambyses I.), uras iH wll 
vi. 4. 20. rus). His ancestors, of | reve 
κύκλωσις, ews, ἡ [κυκλόω], an | stock like the Medes, one ΓΝ 
encircling ; ὡς εἰς κύκλωσιν, as if | Parsua in the north, rm a al 
to encircle, i. 8. 23. ally moved down towar A Re 
κυλινδέω or κυλίνδω, -εκύλϊῖσα, -Ke- dian empire, and Cyrus, oon ng 
κύλιῖσμαι, ἐκυλέσθην [ ς΄. καλινδέομαι, | kingof Anshan (Anzan) in pat δ 
Eng. cylinder], roll, no on i yp ie oe peer τὸ 
' iv. 2. +2; styages, Θ ’ ? 
i oe en with κάτω, ie 549 B.c. the latter’s army cha 
down, of horses, iv. 8. 28. and Astyages and his capi - ey 
Κυνίσκος, ὁ, Cyniscus, a Spar-| batana, fell into the agers 8 ny 
tan, probably harmost in the Cyrus enlarged the : 3 “ery eel 
Chersonese at the time of the pire by the conquest o - “4 oer 
Greeks’ approach thither, vii. 1.| kingdom of Croesus. oth cath 
13. of Babylon in 538, followed by ‘I 
κυπαρίττινος, 7, ov [κυπάριττος, | extension of his pe a to a 
cypress-tree, cf. Eng. mean encore ge pict το ssi vi 
ΡΥ of cypress, V. 3.12. | m ) ent: vast. 
ἔχ; gptce or Kapton a, bv (ines), was succeeded in 529 by his son 


of or belonging to Cyrus, Cyréan, 
as τὸ Κύρειον στράτευμα, the Cyréan 
army, i.e. the Greek army which 
had accompanied Cyrus, vii. 2. 7, 
but οἱ Κύρειοι, iii. 2. 17, means Cy- 
rus’s barbarian troops, and τὸ Κύ- 
ρειον στρατόπεδον, means Cyrus’s 
camp or quarters, i, το, 1. 

κύριος, a, ov [κῦρος, τό, might, 
power], having power or author- 
ity, Lat. poténs, of persons, with 


inf., as οὐκ ἔσεσθε κύριοι ἀνελέσθαι 


Cambyses II., the invader of 
Egypt. Xenophon’s work called 
the Cyropaedia is not a real his- 
tory, but an historical romance in 
which Cyrus is presented as the 
highest type of a ruler. 

Kipos, ὁ [Persian Kurash], Cyrus 
the Younger, whose ill-fated expe- 
dition is described in thé Anabasis. 
He was the son of Darius Nothus 
and Parysatis, i. 1. 1, and was born 
after his father’s accession (425 B.c.) 


Κιυτώνιον-λαγώς 1 


to the throne of Persia, In 407 5.0. 
he was made by his father satrap 
of Lydia, Phrygia the Greater, and 
Cappadocia, and military comman- 
der of all Asia Minor west of the 
Halys, i. 1.2, 9.7. In this position 
he aided the Lacedaemonians in 
the Peloponnesian war, iii. 1. 5, 
having indeed received special or- 
ders from his father to this effect. 
He became the warm friend of 
Lysander, and on being summoned 
to the deathbed of Darius in 
405 B.c., i. 1.2, he turned over to 
the Spartan admiral the money 
which- he had in hand and his en- 
tire revenue from the satrapy. 
This timely aid to the Spartans 
did much to hasten the end of the 
war. There is little doubt that it 
was rendered by Cyrus with the 
hope of enlisting the sympathy of 
Sparta in his design to obtain the 
throne of Persia. As the son born 
in the purple (Artaxerxes Mnemon 
having been born before his fath- 
er’s accession), he hoped to be ap- 
pointed his father’s successor, but 
on the death of Darius he was 
disappointed, and his elder brother 
succeeded, i. 1. 3. Upon this, 
Tissaphernes, satrap of Caria, who 
had been obliged to follow Cyrus 
to Babylon, i. 1. 2, accused him of 
plotting the murder of Artaxerxes, 
i, 1.3, and it was only the inter- 
vention of Parysatis, i. 1.3, 4, that 
saved Cyrus’s life. He returned 
to his satrapy, vowing vengeance, 
i, 1. 4, and from that time made 
his preparations to dethrone his 
brother. These and the expedition 
which followed are described in 
the first book of the Anabasis. 
Cyrus set out from Sardis in the 
spring of 401 B.c., i. 2. 5, and was 
slain in a hand to hand encounter 
with his brother at the battle of 
Cunaxa some six months later, i. 
8. 26 ff. A sketch of his character 
is given, 1. 9. The royal line of 


28 


minis (Achaemenes), Ksha’ispis 
Ariaramna (brother of Kurash I, 
who was grandfather of Cyrus the 
Great), Arsama, Hystaspes, Ia- 
rius I., Xerxes, Artaxerxes I., Da- 
rius II. (Nothus), Cyrus. (Cf. with 
this the genealogy of Cyrus the 
Great, whose son Cambyses was 
succeeded by Darius I.) 

Κυντώνιον, τό, see Κερτωνόν. 

κύων, κυνός, ὁ, ἡ [«΄. Lat. canis, 
dog, Eng. ποῦν», cynic, ογηοϑβ8- 76} 
dog, bitch, hound, cur, iii. 2. 35 v. 
7. 26, 8. 24, vi. 2 2, vii. 2. 33. 

κωλύω, κωλύσω, etc., hinder, keep 
from, prevent, oppose, check, Lat. 
impedio, abs. or with acc., i. 2, 21 
ii, 4. 6, iii, 5, 12, iv. 2. 24, 25, v. 4. 
δ; with inf., or acc. of pers. and 
inf., i. 3. 16, ii. 5. 7, iv. 3. 3, v. 7. 
10, vii. 3.3; with τοῦ and inf., i. 6. 
2. Phrases: τὸ κωλῦον, the obstacle, 
iv. 5. 20, 7. 4; κωλύοντες μηδαμῇ 
ἡμᾶς πορίζεσθαι, preventing us from 
gore supplies anywhere, vii. 6. 
kopdpxns, ov [Ketpar+ ἄρχω], 
village chief, head man of a vil- 
lage, chief, iv. 5. 10, 24, 29, 6. 1. 
κώμη, ys [κεῖμαι], village, ham- 
let, unfortified, opp. to a walled 
city, Lat. uicus, i. 4. 9, 10. 11, ii. 
2. 15, lil. 2. 34, iv. 4. 2, vi. 4. 6, vii. 
4. 11. 
κωμήτης, ov [κεῖμαι], villager, 
Lat. wicdnus, iv. 5. 24. 
κώπη, 7s, handle, esp. of an 
oar, hence oar, Lat. rémus 5 Kw- 
mas, by rowing, vi. 4. 2, see 8.0. 
τριήρης. 


Δ, 


λαβεῖν, see λαμβάνω, 

λαγχάνω (λαχ-), λήξομαι, ἔλα- 
χον, εἴληχα, εἴληγμαι, ἐλήχθην, get 
by lot, get, obtain, be possessed of, 
hold, with acc. or gen., iii. 1. 11, iv, 
5. 24. 


which he came ran thus: Hakha-| 24. 


λαγώς, ὁ, hare, Lat. lepus, iv. 5- 


129 λαθεῖν-λαμβάνω 


λαθεῖν, see λανθάνω. : 

λάθρᾳ, adv. [R. λαθ1, secretly, 
covertly, stealthily ; with gen., with- 
out the knowledge of, Lat. clam, 
i, 3. 8. 

Λακεδαιμόνιος, ὁ [Λακεδαίμων], 
a Lacedaemonian, inhabitant of 
Lacedaemonia or Laconica, a name 
applicable in its stricter sense only 
to the περίοικοι (q.v.), but generally 
used, as in the Anab., in a wider 
sense to include both the Perioeci 
and the Spartans, i. 1. 9, 2. 21, ii. 
6. 2, iii. 1. 5, 2. 37, iv. 6. 14, Vv. 3. 
7, vi. 1. 26, 6. 9, vii. 1. 28, 7. 12. 

Λακεδαίμων, ovos, ἡ, Lacedaemon, 
Lacedaemonia, Υ. 3. 11, called also 
Laconica and by late Roman and 
by many modern writers Laconia, 
the country in the southeastern 
part of Peloponnésus, especially the 
district between Mt. Taygetus and 
Mt. Parnon with the fertile valley 
of the Eurdtas to the south. The 
Lelegae were the earliest inhabi- 
tants, and to them came immi- 
grants from the north, Aeolians, 
Achaeans, and finally Dorians. 
The sovereignty remained in the 
ancient native families of the Agia- 
dae and Eurypontidae ; hence came 
the two kings ruling together, by a 
later invention called Dorians of 
the family of Aristodémus. These 
two were invested with the supreme 
military command and priestly 
dignity. Next to them were the 

five ephors who gradually became 
a committee of general control 
(see ἔφορος), next to these was 
the Gerousia or council of 28 citi- 
zens over 60 years of age. The 
final decision of all matters of im- 
portance lay with the people, that 
is, the sovereign Dorians, called 

Spartans or, loosely, Lacedaemo- 

nians. They dwelt in and about 

Sparta (q.v.), observing the great- 

est simplicity and severity of life 

in accordance with the institutions 


older Achaeans, called the Perioeci 
(q.v.), who had submitted volun- 
tarily or by treaty, and the Helots, 
or state slaves, destitute of all 
rights, who had been overcome by 
force. Until the Persian wars 
the Spartans were regarded as 
the champions of Greece; then 
followed the period of Athenian 
supremacy until the end of the 
Peloponnesian war. At the time 
of the Anabasis the Spartans were 
again in the ascendant. After 
the battle of Leuctra Sparta never 
regained her old supremacy, al- 
though the Roman conquerors 
were always partial towards her. 
λάκκος, ὁ [cf. Lat. lacus, hollow, 
lake, Eng. Locu], pit, cistern, vat, 
for wine, iv. 2. 22. 

λακτίζω (λακτιδ-), λακτιῶ, ἐλά- 
κτισα, λελάκτικα, ἐλακτίσθην [λάξ, 
adv., with the foot, cf. Lat. calz, 
heel], kick at, kick, of horses, iii, 
7 a tS 

Λάκων, wvos, 6, a Laconian, a 
term properly applicable only to 
the Perioeci, the free inhabitants 
of the towns about Sparta, who 
owed war service to the Spartans, 
but were excluded from the offices. 
But the word is also loosely used 
to include Spartans, ii. 1. 3, 5. 31, 
v. 1. 16, vi. 1. 32, vii. 6. 7, 7. 15, 
8. 23. 

Λακωνικός, ἡ, bv [Λάκων], of 
Laconica, Lacedaemonian, of men 
and things, iv. 1. 18, 7. 16, vii. 2. 
29, 3. 8. 

λαμβάνω (Aaf-), λήψομαι, ἔλαβον, 
εἴληφα, εἴλημμαι, ἐλήφθην [τοοῦ λαβ, 
cf. Lat. labor, toil, Eng. di-/emma, 
epi-lepsy, pro-lepsis], take, Lat. 
capio, also in less vigorous sense, 
take to oneself, receive, Lat. ac- 
cipid. In general, take, Lg. 
ii. 1. 10, 3. 14, iii. 2. 20, 4. 49, iv. 
1. 8, 5. 35, Vv. 1. 17, 5. 19, vi. 4. 24, 
vii. 3. 26; the partic, λαβών is 
often used like ἔχων in the sense 
of with, i. 1. 2, 11, iii. 4. 38, iv. 1. 


of Lycurgus. There were two 
other classes in the state, the 


6, vii. 7. 13; esp., take prisoner, 


λαμπρός-λέγω 180 


capture, take posession of, i. 4. 7, 
7-9, 10. 2, iii. 2. 29, 4. 41, iv. 1. 22, 
v. 2. 5, Vii. 3. 35; with the added 
notion of sudden or unexpected 
action, catch, seize, find, often with 
partic., i. 1. 6, 3. 10, 5. 2, ii. 3. 
ai, iv. 6. 16, v. 6. 9, vi. 2. 17, 
4. 2, vii. 2.13; receive, get, obtain, 
require, i. 1. 9, 6,6, 9. 22, ii. 2. 20, 
6. 21, iii. 4. 2, iv. 2. 23, v. 1. 15, vi. 
6. 2, vii. 3. 1, 6. 19. To the ace. 
with this verb may be added εἰς or 
πρός With acc., or ἀπό, ἐξ, or παρά 
with gen., i. 5. 15, ii. 2. 11, 3. 28, 
iii. 4. 42, iv. 5. 32, v. 6. 18, vii. 3. 
23. The part. gen. occurs, i. s. 75.19. 
5. 35. Phrases: λαμβάνειν ἄνδρας, 
enlist men, i. 1.6; πίστεις or πιστὰ 
λαβεῖν, receive pledges, abs., with 
παρά and gen., and with inf., i. 2. 
26, 6.7, ii. 3. 26, iii. 2. 5, v. 4. 11; 
ἔλαβον τῆς ζώνης τὸν ᾿Ορόντἂν, they 
grasped Orontas by the girdle, i. 6. 
10; εἰ τὸ στράτευμα λάβοι ἔνδεια, if 
need should befall the troops, i. το. 
18; δίκην or τὰ δίκαια λαβεῖν, see 
δίκη and δίκαιος, v. 8. 17, vii. γ. 17; 
πεῖραν λαβεῖν, see πεῖρα, v. 8. 15, 
vi. 6. 33. 

λαμπρός, d, dv [Adurw], bright, 
Shining, brilliant, distinguished, 
noble, Lat. splendidus, in comp., 
vii. 7. 41. 

λαμπρότης, ros, ἡ [λαμπρός], 
“Sie brilliancy, splendour, 
i. 2. 18. 

λάμπω, Aduyw, ἔλαμψα, λέλαμπα 
[ῳ΄. Lat. limpidus, clear, Eng. 
lamp), shine, be bright, glisten, of 
fire, blaze, iii. 1. 11, 12. 

Aappaxyvol, of [Adupaxos], 
Lampsacenians, inhabitants of 
Lampsacus, vii. 8. 3. 

AGppaxos, ἡ, Lampsacus, a very 
early Greek settlement and city in 
the Troad, on the Hellespont, vii, 
8. 1, 6, renowned for its wine. 
(Lapsaki.) 

λανθάνω (λαθ.), λήσω, ἔλαθον, 
λέληθα, λέλησμαι [R. λαθ], lie hid 
or concealed, be unseen, escape the 
notice of, Lat. lated, abs. or with 


ace., iv. 1. 4, 2. 2, v. 2. 29, vi. 3. 14, 
vii, 2.18; partic., λαθών, secretly, iv. 
6.11. A partic. used with λανθάνω 
conveys generally the leading idea 
and is best translated by a finite 
verb, as τὸ στράτευμα τρεφόμενον 
ἐλάνθανε, the army was secretly 
supported, i. 1. 9, of. iv. 2. 7; in 
this construction the acc. of person 
OCCUIS, aS λαθεῖν αὐτὸν ἀπελθών, get 
away without his knowledge, i. 3. 
17, cf. Vi. 3. 22, vii. 3. 38, 43. 

Λάρισσα, ys, Larissa, an As- 
syrian city, eighteen miles south 
of Nineveh (see Μέσπιλα), on the 
left bank of the Tigris, north of 
the mouth of the Great Zab, iii. 4. 
7. By some it is identified with 
Kalach (Calah), by others with 
Resen (Genesis 10, 12). Its ruins 
are called Nimrud. It was first 
excavated by Layard in 1845, when 
remains of four palaces were un- 
covered. Recent excavations have 
shown that the pyramid mentioned 
by Xen., iii. 4.9, was originally a 
Square tower, whose ruins had 
already assumed the pyramidal 
shape in his time. 

λάσιος, a, ov, hairy, shaggy, of 
places, bushy, thickly grown, Lat. 
dénsus, V. 2, 29; subst., τὰ λάσια, 
thickets, vi. 4. 26. 

λαφυροπωλξω [λαφῦροπώλης], 
sell booty or plunder, abs., vi. 6. 38. 

λαφυροπώλης, ov [Addipor, booty 
+ πωλέω], seller of booty, booty 
dealer, Lat. sector. At Sparta the 
λαφῦροπῶλαι were officers attached 
to the kings’ staff who took charge 
of the booty captured in war. So 
the Greeks that had enlisted under 
Cyrus, on their return, appointed 
official vendors of the booty, vii. 
7. 56. 

λάχος, ous, τό [ς΄ λαγχάνω], 
allotted portion, Lat. sors, hence 
share, part, v. 3. 9. 

λαχών, see λαγχάνω. 

λέγω, λέξω, ἔλεξα, λέλεγμαι, ἐλέ- 
χθὴν (for εἴρηκα and εἶπον, used as 
pf. and 2 aor., see εἴρω and εἶπον) 


131 λεία-λήζομαι 


(R. Aey], say, speak, talk, tell, state, 
mention, relate, Lat. dicd, abs. or 
with acc. of thing, i. 3. 2, 6. 9, ii. 
1, 13, 2. 2, ili. 2. 38, iv. 1. 23, Vv. 5. 
7, Vi. 2. 7, vii. 7.4; with acc. of pers., 
ii. 5. 25; with an interr. clause, 
dir. or indir., tell, relate, i. 3. 12, 6. 
11, 8. 27, ii. 1. 10, v. 8. 2,12; with 
the dat. or εἰς or πρός with acc. of 
pers. to whom, i. 4. 11, ii. 3. 5, iii. 
3. 2, Vv. 6. 28, 7. 18, vi. 6, 5, vii. 1. 
8; say in reply to a thing, with 
πρός and acc., i. 3. 19; with ὑπέρ 
and gen. of pers. or περί and gen. 
of thing, i. 9. 23, vi. 6.18; followed 
by dir. disc., ii. 1. 22, 5. 39, iii. 1. 
15, v. 4. 4, vii. 2.138; by ὅτι or ws 
and indir. disc., i. 2. 21, 7. 5, ii. 1. 
14, iii. 2. 4, iv. 5. 34, v. 1. 14, vi. 1. 
13, vii. 6.7; very rarely with inf. 
or partic., i. 3. 15, v. 4. 34, vii. 5. 
13, but after λέγω meaning bid, 
charge, vote, the inf. is regular, i. 
3. 8, iii. 1. 26, v. 7. 34, vi. 1. 26, 
vii. 1.40. In the pass. the personal 
constr, prevails where we use the 
impers., as λέγεται ᾿Απόλλων ἐκδεῖ- 
pa, ᾿(18 said Apollo flayed, i. 2. 8, 
cf. 4. 4, ii. 2. 6, iii. 1. 9, iv. 3. 4, vi. 
2. 2, vii. 2.22, but the impers. constr. 
with acc. and inf., or even with ὅτι 
or ws and a clause, is found, i. 2. 12, 
iv. 1. 3, v. 7. 7, vii. 2.5. Phrases: 
ἐλπίδας λέγων διῆγε, he kept put- 
ting them off with the hepe, i. 2. 
11; ὡς ἐλέγετο or ἐλέγοντο; as ’t was 
said, i. 4. 5, 10. 18; λεγόμενος ἐν 
τοῖς ἀρίστοις, reckoned as among 
the noblest, i. 6.1; πράως λέγοι τὸ 
πάθος, he spoke tamely of his treat- 
ment, i, 5.14; ἡ ἱερὰ συμβουλὴ λε- 
γομένη εἶναι, the advice termed holy, 
v. 6. 4; εὖ or ὀρθῶς λέγετε, your ad- 
vice is good, Vii. 1. 22, 3. 39. 

Aela, as [ο΄ Lat. lucrum, gain, 
latro, freebooter], property taken 
in war, booty, plunder, including 
esp. men and cattle, Lat. praeda, 
v. 1. 8, 17, vi..6. 2, vii..4. 2, 5. 2. 

λειμών; Gvos, ὁ [cf. λιμήν], any 
moist place, green, meadow, Lat. 
pratium, V. 3. 11. 


λεῖος, a, ον [οἱ Lat. léuis, 
smooth], smooth; of a hill, even, 
with gentle slope, iv. 4. 1. 

λείπω (Acr-), λείψω, ἔλιπον, λέ- 
λοιπα, λέλειμμαι, ἐλείφθην [cf. Lat. 
licet, it is lawful, linqud, leave, 
Eng. LEND, LOAN, ec-/ipse, el-lipse], 
leave a place or station, abandon, 
forsake, quit, Lat. relinqud, i. 2. 
21, 10. 13, iv. 2. 7, 6. 19, v. 2. 15; 
leave behind or remaining, leave 
alive, spare, Vi. 3. 5, Vii. 4.1; pass., 
be left, abandoned, vi. 3. 13; be 
left over, remain, be left alive, sur- 
vive, Of persons and things, ii. 4. 
5, ili. 1.2, iv. 1.5; be left behind, 
of persons, iv. 5.12. Phrase: πλή- 
Ger ἡμῶν λειφθέντες, inferior to us 
in numbers, Vii. 7. 31. 

λεκτέος, a, ov, verbal adj. [R. 
Aey], to be said, that must be told, 
Lat. dicendus, v. 6. 6. 

λελείψεται, see λείπω. 

λεξάτω, 566 λέγω. 

Acovtivos, ὁ, a Leontine, man of. 
Leontini, ii. 6. 16, an ancient Greek 
city in the eastern part of Sicily. 
(Lentini.) 

λευκοθώραξ, ἄκος, ὁ, ἡ [λευκός + 
θώραξ], in white cuirass, οἱ οἂν- 
alry, 1.8.9. This white cuirass is 
probably identical with the θώραξ 
λινοῦς mentioned in iv. 7. 15, and 
was made of layers of linen placed 
one over the other and stiffened 
by some artificial process. 

λευκός, ἡ, dv [root Auk, cf. Lat. 
lux, light, luced, shine, Eng. Lieut, 
LEA], white, Lat. albus, i. 8. 8, v. 
4. 12, 32, vii. 3. 26. 

“Λέων, ovros, ὁ, Leon, a Greek 
soldier from Thurii, v. 1. 2. 

λήγω, λήξω, ἔληξα, intr., leave 
off, end, be over, ili. 1. 9, vii. 6. 6; 
of the wind, slacken, abate, iv. 

. 4. 
, λῃηΐζομαι (λῃδ-), ἐλῃσάμην [rela], 
make booty, plunder, pillage, Lat. 
praedor, abs. or with é and gen., 
v. 1. 9, vi. 1. 1, 6.27; with acc. of 
place or person, spoil, plunder, 


rob. iv. 8. 22, vii. 2. 34, 3. 31. 


Afjpos—Aoxpds 132 


λῆρος, ὁ, silliness, nonsense, 
humbug, Lat. ntigae, vii. 7. 41. 

λήσομεν, see λανθάνω. 

λῃστεία, ἂς [λῃστής], getting 
booty, pillaging, plundering, Lat. 
praedatio, vii. 7. 9. 

λῃστής, οὔ [λήζομαι}, plunderer, 
pillager, bummer, Lat. praedator, 
vi. 1. 8, 6. 28. 
sr λήψεσθε, see λαμ- 
νω. Ἵ 

Alay, adv., very, Lat. waldé, with 
adjs., vi. 1. 28, vii. 6. 23. 

λίθινος, 7, ov [λίθος], of stone, 
made of stone, iii. 4. 7, 9. 

λίθος, ὁ [cf. Eng. /itho-graphy, 
06-lite)}, stone, Lat. lapis, iii. 5. 10, 
iv. 7. 25, as a substance, iii. 4. 10, 
as used in attack or defence, i. 5. 
12, iv. 2.4. The use of stones as 
an instrument of warfare was com- 
mon in later times, and engines 
for hurling them (called λιθοβόλοι, 
Lat. ballistae) were invented and 
came, into extensive use in siege 
operations. Such artillery was used 
by Alexander the Great. Earlier, 
in the time of Xenophon, stones 
were thrown either with slings, in 
which also lead bullets were used, 
iii. 3. 17, ef. iv. 1. 10, or by the 
hand, v. 2. 14, ¢f. v. 2.12. In his 
time stone-throwers, in the latter 
sense, had not been developed into 
a distinct branch of the service, 
but their usefulness: was recog- 
nised. See further the illustration 
8.0. ξίφος. 

λιμήν, évos, ὁ [root At, powr, ef. 
Lat. litus, shore, limus, slime, 
Eng. time], harbour, port, Lat. 
portus, vi. 2. 13, 4. 1, 4, 6. 3. 

Lines, ὁ, hunger, famine, dearth, 
Lat. famés, i. 5. 5, ii. 2. 11, 5. 19, 
Vii. 4. 5. 

Alveos, ἃ, ov, contr. ods, ἢ, οὖν 
[Alvov, linen, cf. Lat. linum, flax], 
of flax, flaxen, linen, Lat. lineus, 
v. 4.13; on the cuirasses of linen, 
iv. 7. 15, see λευκοθώρᾷξ. 


take into account, consider, with 
ace. of thing or inf., ii. 2. 13, iii. 1. 
20. 

Adyos, 6 [R. Aey], word, saying, 
statement, speech, discourse, pl. 
words, conversation, Lat. wuerbum, 
ratio, li. 5. 16, 27, 6. 4, v. 7. 27, 
vi. 1. 18, vii. 7. 24; debate, discus- 
sion, i, 6. 5, iii. 2.7; rumour, story, 
i. 4. 7, V.6.17; narrative, ii. 1. 1, 
iv. 1.1. Phrase: els λόγους ἐλθεῖν 
with dat. of pers., have an inter- 
view with one, Lat. in conloquium 
uenire, il. 5. 4, iii. 1. 29. 

λόγχη, 7s, spearhead, metal point 
of the spear or lance (δόρυν, Lat. 
cuspis, i. 8. 8, vil. 4. 15; also the 
spear itself, lance, in Anab. used 
of those employed by barbarians, 
"ΨΥ SS; 7, ' ve ἃ 2G) eat 
not exclusively, v. 2. 14. The 
term was sometimes applied also 
to the metal shoe at the butt end 
of the spear, iv. 7. 16. For the 
manner in which the spearhead 
was supported at the point where 
it joined the shaft, in the case of 
the lances of the Mossynoeci, see 
8.0. σφαιροειδής. 

λοιδορέω, λοιδορήσω, etc. [λοίδο- 
ρος, abusive], revile, abuse, rebuke, 
ili. 4. 49, vii. 5. 11. 

λοιπός, 4, ὁν [λείπω7, what is 
left, remaining, Lat. reliquus, with 
the art., the rest, of persons and 
things, iv. 2. 14, 3. 13, 30, v. 1. 2, 
vi. 4. 26; of time and space, iii. 4. 
6, iv. 7.6; λοιπόν (86. ἐστι), with 
dat. of pers. and inf., it remains 
that, iii. 2.29. Phrases: τὸ λοιπόν, 
of time, from now on or from then 
on, henceforth, thenceforth, for the 
future, Lat. dehinc, posthac, ii. 2. 
5, ili. 2, 8, v. 1. 2, 3. 9; τοῦ Aowrod, 
in future, v. ἡ. 34; ὁ λοιπός, the 
survivor, iv. 1. 24, vi. 3. 12; τὴν 
λοιπὴν (sc. ὁδόν), the rest of the 
way, iii. 4. 46. 

Aoxpés, ὁ, a native of Locris, a 
Locrian, vii. 4. 18. The Locrians 
were divided into three tribes, the 


—— (λογιδ-), λογιοῦμαι, ete. 
[ ey], count on, reckon on, 


Epicnemidian, who occupied a 


188 ΔΛουσιάτης- Λύκειον 


promontory extending into the 
Malian gulf, the Opuntian, who 
lived east of them on the Euboean 
Sea, whose chief town was Opus, 
and the Ozolian, upon the gulf of 
Corinth, east of Aetolia, whose 
chief town was Amphissa. The 
third division was separated from 
the other two by Phocis. 

Λουσιάτης, ov, and Aovoreds, 
ἕως, ὁ [Λουσοί, Lusi], a Lusian, 
a native of Lusi, a small city in the 
northern part of Arcadia, iv. 2. 21, 
7. 11, 12, vii. 6.40. (Sudhena.) 

λόφος, ὁ, ridge or crest of any- 
thing, esp. of rising ground, hill, 
ridge, height, Lat. dorsum, i. το, 
12, iii. 4. 24, iv. 2. 10, 8. 26, vi. 
3. 3. 

Loxayéw [R. Aex +R. ay], be 
captain, Vi. 1. 30. 

Aéxayla, as [R. Aex+R. ay], 
office of captain, captaincy, i. 4. 16, 
iii. 1. 30. 

Aoxayds, ὁ [R. Aex+R. ay], 
commander of αὐ λόχος, captain, 
Lat. centurid, i. 7. 2, ii. 5. 25, iii. 
1. 15, 32, 4. 21, iv. 3. 17, 26, 7. 8, 
v. 2. 18, vi. 4. 10, vii. 4. 18; he re- 
ceived twice the wages of a pri- 
vate, vii. 2. 36. Above him were 
the στρατηγοί and ταξίαρχοι, below 
him the ὑπολόχᾶγοι, πεντηκοντῆρες, 
and ἐνωμοτάρχαι. 

λοχίτης, ov [R. Aex], one of the 
same company, comrade, vi. 6. 7, 
1%, 

λόχος, ὁ [R. Aex], ambush, men 
in ambush, armed men, esp. aS a 
certain part of the army, @ com- 
pany, iv. 2. 16, 7. 9, ν. 1. 17, Vi. 5. 
9, vii. 3. 46; it consisted generally 
of about 100 men, Lat. centuria, 
iii. 4. 21, iv. 8. 15, but might be less, 
i, 2. 25, and was divided into two 
πεντηκοστύες and four ἐνωμοτίαι. 
Two λόχοι formed a τάξις, vi. 5. 11. 
In vi. 3. 2, the word is used of a 
larger number of troops, division. 
Phrases: κατὰ λόχους, by compa- 
nies, i.e. with the forr ἐνωμοτίαι 
in file one behind the other, iii. 4. 


22; ὀρθίοις rots λόχοις, See ὄρθιος, 
iv. 2.11; παράγειν τοὺς λόχους; See 
παράγω, iv. 6. 6. 

Avdta, as [Λυδός], Lydia, i. 2. 5, 
iii. 5. 15, vii. 3. 20, a fertile country 
in the western part of Asia Minor, 
irrigated by the gold-bearing rivers 
Hermus and Pactdlus. Its chief 
city was Sardis. Under Croesus 
it was a powerful and prosperous 
kingdom, but after his defeat by 
Cyrus the Great, in 546 B.c., it was 
made a Persian satrapy, i. 9. 7, 
with the following boundaries, 
which it retained also under the 
Romans: on the north Mysia, 
east Phrygia, south the Maeander, 
separating it from Caria, and west 
Ionia. Under the Persians the 
previous warlike nature of the 
people was softened into that 
effeminacy of life for which Lyd- 
ians were afterwards famous, 

Αύδιος, a, ov [Λυδός], belonging 
to Lydia, Lydian, i. 5. 6. 

Avdé6s, ὁ, a native of Lydia, a 
Lydian, iii. 1, 31. 

Λύκαια, τά, the Lycaea, a festi- 
val in honour of Ζεῦς Avxatos, or 
Λύκαιος, of Mt. Lycaeus, celebrated 
in the spring by the Arcadians, i. 
2. 10. 

Avxdoves, wv, ol, natives of Ly- 
caonia, Lycaonians, iii. 2. 28. 

Avxaovia, as [Auxdoves], Lycao- 
nia, a country in the central part 
of Asia Minor, north of Cilicia, 
hostile to Persia, i, 2. 19, vii. 8. 25. 
The chief city was Iconium. 

Λύκειον, τό [cf. Eng. lyceum], 
the Lyceum, a gymnasium just 
outside the wall of Athens to the 
east, and near a temple of Apollo 
Lycaeus, vii. 8.1. Its foundation 
was ascribed by some to Pisistra- 
tus, by others to Pericles. Lycur- 
gus embellished it with gardens 
and a palaestra. Here the Athen- 
ians exercised under arms before 
a war, and here was the tribunal 
of the Polemarch. Aristotle used 


the gardens for his lectures. 


Αὐκιος-μάγαδις 184 


Αὐκιος, ὁ, Lycius, an Athenian, 
who was appointed to command 
the cavalry, and distinguished him- 
self against the Cardiichi, iii. 3. 20, 
iv. 3. 22, 25, 7. 24. 

Αύκιος, ὁ, Lycius, a Syracusan, 
i. 10. 14, 15, 

Αὐκος, ὁ [λύκος], the Lycus or 
Wolf River, a common name for a 
powerfully flowing stream. The 
Lycus of the Anab. emptied into 
the Pontus near Heracléa, vi. 2. 3. 
(Kelkit Tchai.) 

λύκος, ὁ, [οὐ Lat. lupus, wolf, 
Eng. wo.Fr], wolf, sacrificed by the 
Persians to Ahriman, the prince of 
darkness, ii. 2. 9. 

Αύκων, wos, 6, Lycon, an 
Achaean in the Greek army, v. 6. 
ae, Vi 2. 4, 7,9. 

Avpalvopar (Avuar-), λὺμανοῦμαι, 
ἐλυμηνάμην λελύμασμαι, ἐλύυμάνθην 
[λύμη, insult], outrage, destroy, 
cause ruin, spvil, Lat. noced, with 
ace. of thing and dat. of pers., i. 
3. 16. 

λυπέω, λυπήσω, etc. [λύπη], 
grieve, pain, vex, Lat. dolore adj- 
cid, Vii. 7.12; of an enemy, annoy, 
molest, trouble, Lat. laed@, ii. 3. 
23, 5. 14, v. 2. 26; pass., be pained 
or sad, be sorry, Lat. doled, i. 3. 
Sit κα. 1. 

λύπη, ns, pain of body or mind, 
grief, sorrow, Lat. dolor, iii. 1. 3. 

Avmwnpds, d, dv [λύπη], painful, 
distressing, sad, of things, vil. 7. 
28; of persons, troublesome, an- 
noying, Lat. molestus, with dat., 
ii. 5. 13. 

λυσιτελέω, ἐλῦσιτέλησα [Abw + R. 
Tah], pay expenses, be profitable, 
pay, Lat. présum, with dat. of 
pers., iii. 4. 36. (See Abw, jin.) 

λύττα, ns, madness, Lat. rabiés, 
of dogs, v. 7. 26. 

Ate, λύσω, EXdoa, λέλυκα, λέλυμαι, 
ἐλύθην [cf. Lat. lud, loose, solud, 
loose, Eng. LOSE, LOOSE, LOUSE, 
ana-lyse|, loose, set free, unbind, 
release, Lat. solud, iii. 4. 35, iv. 3. 


of a bridge or obstruction, break 
down, remove, Lat. réscindd, ii. 4. 
17, iv. 2. 26; of a truce or oaths, 
break, Lat. foedera rump, ii. 5. 
38, iii. 2. 10; mid., redeem, ran- 
som, vii. 8.6. Phrase: οὐκ ἐδόκει 
λύειν αὐτοὺς νυκτὸς πορεύεσθαι, they 
thought marching by night didn’t 
pay, ili. 4. 36, where λύειν is used 
as in poetry for λῦσιτελεῖν, which 
some read here. 

λωτοφάγοι, of [Awrds, ὁ, lotus + 
ἔφαγον], lotus-eaters, iii. 2.25. The 
lotus-tree (rhamnus lotus of Lin- 
naeus), growing on the north coast 
of Africa, bears a fruit shaped like 
an olive, and sweet, like a date or 
fig. The lotus-eaters lived along 
the coast of Tunis and Tripoli, 
where the fruit is still used and 
is called jujube. According to the 
story, first appearing in Odyssey 9, 
82 fi., whoever ate the lotus lost 
all recollection of his home. 

λωφάω, λωφήσω, ἐλώφησα, λελώ- 
ona, slacken, rest, cease, of the 
throwing of stones, abs., iv. 7. 6. 

λῳων, λῷον, gen. ovos, preferable, 
/used as comp. of ἀγαϑός, better, in 
the sense of pleasanter, more 
agreeable, in Att. prose generally 


in neut. with ἐστί, followed by inf. 
or dat. and inf., iii. 1. 7, vi. 2. 15, 
vii. 6. 44. 


M. 


pa, intensive particle, surely, 
used in oaths, and foll. by acc., 
always neg. unless preceded by 
val, aS ἀλλὰ μὰ τοὺς θεούς, no, by 
the gods! i. 4. 8, ef. v. 8. 21, vii. 6. 
11; ναὶ μὰ Ala, yea, by Zeus! v. 
8. 6, vii. 6, 21. 

μάγαδις, «δος, ἡ, dat. uayddi, ma- 
gadis, a musical instrument, prob. 
of Lydian origin, said to have been 
one of the most perfect stringed 
instruments in use among the 
Greeks. It comprised two full oc- 


8, 6. 2; dissolve, separate, hence 


taves, tne left hand playing the 


18 


lower notes, the right the upper. 
Hence, οἷον payddt, as on the maga- 
dis, i.e. in the octave, Vii. 3. 32. 
Μάγνητες, wv, οἱ [ε΄ Eng. mag- 
net, magnesia], Magnesians, na- 
tives of Magnesia, vi. 1. 7, a penin- 
sula in Thessaly between the Pe- 
gasaean Gulf and the Aegean. 
᾿ μάθε, μάθῃς, μάθοι, see μανθάνω. 
Μαίανδρος, ὁ [ ς΄. Eng. meander], 
the Maeander, a large river rising 
near Celaenae, i. 2. 7, and flowing 
thence through Phrygia and be- 
tween Lydia and Caria into the 
Aegéan, i. 2. 5, 8. Its winding 
course was proverbial among the 
Greeks and Romans, hence Eng. 
meander. (Béyiik or Mendere 
Tchai.) 
μαίνομαι (uar-), μανοῦμαι, μέμηνα, 
ἐμάνην [R. μα], rage, be raving or 
mad, Lat. furd, ii. 5. 12, iv. 8. 20, 
vii. 1. 29; aor., go mad, ii. 5. 10. 
Μαισάδης, ov, Maesades, father 
of Seuthes, vii. 2. 32, 5. 1. 
μακαρίζω (uaxapid-), ἐμακάρισα, 
ἐμακαρίσθην [R. pax), regard as 
happy, think fortunate, 1. 1. 19. 
μακαριστός, 7, ὁν [R. pax], to be 
thought happy, hence enviable, Lat. 
inuididsus. Phrase: πολλοῖς μακα- 
ριστὸν ἐποίησεν, he made him an 
object of envy to many, i.9.6. | 
ἹΜακίστιος, ὁ [Μάκιστος, Macis- 
tus], a Macistian, a native of Ma- 
cistus, a city in southern Elis, vil. 
4. 16 (Samik6n). 
μακρός, a, dv [R. pax], long, of 
space and time, Lat. longus, 1. 5. 
7, ii. 2. 12, iv. ἃ 4, Vi q 2 
Phrases: μακράν (sc. ὁδόν), a long 
away or distance, iil. 4. 17, ¢f. μακρο- 
répav, ii. 2. 11, μακροτάτην, vii. 8. 
20; μακρὰ πλοῖα, men-of-war, Lat. 
naués longae, Υ. τ. 11 ; μακρὸν ἣν 
with inf., it was too far to, Lat. 
longum erat, iii. 4.42; μακρότερον, 
adv., further, at longer range, il. 
4. 16. " 
Μάκρωνες, ων, οἱ, the Macrones, 
Macronians, a free and warlike 


5 Μάγνητες- Μαντινεῖς 


tus, south of Trapezus, iv. 7. 27, 
8. 1 ff., v. 5. 18. 
μάλα, by elision wad’, adv. [οἷ 
Lat. melior, better], very, exceed- 
ingly, much, Lat. ualde, 1. 5. ὃ, iii. 
3. 6, 4. 15, iv. 1. 28, ν. 4. 18, vi. 4. 
26, vii. 1. 39;. οὐ μάλα, not very 
much, litotes for not at all, ii. 6. 
15; αὐτίκα μάλα, on the spot, in- 
stantly, at once, iii. 5. 11, vi. 2. 5; 
εὖ μάλα, very easily, vi. 1.1; μάλα 
καιρός ἐστιν, it’s just the chance, lV. 
6.15; comp. μᾶλλον, more, rather, 
better, more surely, more highly, 
i, 1. 4, 5, 7. 19, ii. 1. 18, 5. 13, iii. 
1. 35, v. 7. 9, Vi. 1.17; μᾶλλον 7, 
rather than, Lat. potius quam, 1. I. 
8, iv. 6. 11, v. 8. 26; οὐδὲν μᾶλλον, 
not a bit more (than before), il. 
3. 11; μᾶλλόν τι; rather more, 1V. 
8. 26; sup. μάλιστα, most, espe- 
cially, generally, most highly, 1. 6. 
5, 9. 22, ii. 2. 2, iii. 2. 5, Iv. 6. 16, 
vii. 2.4; with numerals, about, Υ. 
12, vi. 4. 8; ὡς μάλιστα with or 
without ἐδύνατο, or ἣ ἐδύνατο μά- 
λιστα, as much as possible, Lat. 
quam maximé potuit, i. 1. 6, 3. 15, 
iv. 2. 2; ws τις καὶ ἄλλος μάλιστα 
ἀνθρώπων, as well as any other man 
alive, i. 3. 15. 

μαλακίζομαι (μαλακιδ-), ἐμαλα- 
κισάμην and ἐμαλακίσθην [μαλακός, 
soft, ef. Eng. amalgam], be soft- 
ened or effeminate, be weakly or 
indolent, v. 8. 14. 

μανέντες, See μαίνομαι. 

μανθάνω (μαθ-), μαθήσομαι, ἔμα- 
θον, μεμάθηκα [R. μα], learn, esp. 
by inquiry, find out, hear of, under- 
stand, with acc. or inf., i. 9. 4, 11. 
5. 87, iii, 2. 25, Vv. 2. 25; with dre 
or an interr. clause, ii. 5. 16, Iv. 
8. 5. 

μαντεία, ds [R. μα], prophetic 
announcement, prediction, oracle, 
Lat. draculum, iii. 1. 7. ' 

μαντευτός, ή, dv [R. μα], directed 
or advised by an oracle, Vi. 1. 22. 

Μαντινεῖς, Sv, ol, Mantinéans, 
natives of Mantinéa, vi. 1. 11, one 


people on the coast of the Pon- 


of the oldest cities of Arcadia, in 


μάντις- μάχαιρα 136 


the eastern part, on the streamlet 
Ophis. Its situation on a low pass 
between Arcadia and Argos made 
it a centre of traffic, and it was an 


important military position. Here 
were fought two great battles, in 


In the latter 
Epaminondas of Thebes conquered 


418 and in 362 s.c. 


the Spartans and Athenians with 
whom the Martinéans were allied. 
Here fell Gryllus, the son of Xeno- 
phon. (Palaeopolis.) 
μάντις, ews, 6[R. μα 7, one in a 
Srenzy or possessed, one inspired, 
who thus declares the will of the 
gods, seer, prophet, diviner, sooth- 
sayer, exercising his art by in- 
specting the vitals of victims, like 
the haruspezx, i. 7. 18, v. 2. 9, 6. 29, 
vi. 4. 13, vii. 8. 10, or by observing 
the flight of birds, like the augur, 
vi. 1. 23, 5.2. Sometimes he slew 
the victims, iv. 3. 18, v. 6. 16, vi. ς. 
8. In v. 7. 35 the μάντεις took 
charge of purifying the army. 
Μάρδοι or Μαρδόνιοι, οἱ, the 
Mardi or Mardonii, a warlike, 
marauding race who probably lived 
in the Masius Mts. in southern 
Armenia, iv. 3. 4. It is thought 
that both words are adjectives 
meaning manly. 
ἀριανδῦνοί, ol, the Mariandyni, 
a race inhabiting the eastern part 


able for the mouthpiece of the 
flute, it emptied into the Maean- 
der, i. 2. 8. 

μαρτυρέω, μαρτυρήσω, etc. [udp- 
tus], be a witness, testify, bear wit- 
ness, Lat. testor, with dat., iii, 3. 
12, vii. 6. 39. 

μαρτύριον, τό [μάρτυς], evidence, 
proof, Lat. argimentum, iii. 2. 13. 

μάρτυς, upos, ὁ [cf. Eng. martyr}, 
witness, Lat. testis, vii. 7. 39. 

Mapwveirns, ov [Μαρώνεια, Maro- 
néa|, @ Maronite, native of Maro- 
nea, Vii. 3. 16, a city in the land of 
the Cicones, east of Abdéra, re- 
nowned even in Homer’s time for 
its wine. (Marogna.) 
Μάσκαᾶς, a (Dor. gen.), ὁ, Mascas, 
called a river by Xen., i. 5.4, but 
really a canal about Κορσωτή, ¢.v. 
μαστεύω [R. pal, seek after, 


1. 43. 
μαστίγόω, uacriydow, ἐμαστίγω- 
σα, ἐμαστιγώθην [μάστιξ], whip, 
chastise, Lat. uerberd, iv. 6. 15. 
μάστιξ, ἴγος, ἡ, whip, lash, Lat. 
Jlagellum ; ὑπὸ μαστίγων, under the 
lash, Lat. flagellis codcti, iii. 4. 25. 
For an illustration of the μάστιξ 
used as riding whip, see s.v. ἱππό- 
dpouos (No. 31). 

μαστός, ὁ, nipple, breast, of men, 


of what the Romans called Bithy- 
nia, vi. 2.1. They were reduced 
by the Heracléans to the condition 
‘of Helots. 
μάρσιπος or μάρσιππος, ὁ [cf 
Eng. marsupial), pouch, bag, Lat. 


Lat. papilla, in pl., i. 4. 17, iv. 3. 
6; hill, hillock, iv. 2. 6, 18. 
μάταιος, a, ov [μάτη, Jolly), 


foolish, vain, idle, Lat. udnus, of 


words and deeds, vii. 6. 17, 7. 24. 
μάχαιρα, ds [R. pax], sword, 


marsuppium, with gen. of con- 
tents,.iv. 3. 11. 

Μαρσύας, ov, Marsyas, 
a satyr of Phrygia, killed __ 


sabre, cutlass, with straight back 


and flayed by Apollo “<== 
after being beaten in a 

musical contest, the flute against 
the lyre, i. 2. 8. From him, acc. 


No. 43. 


search for, abs. or with acc., v. 6. Ν 
25, vii. 3. 11; strive, with inf., iii. οἷ 
Poet. verb, except in Xen. ἥ ἡ 


() 


to the myth, the river Marsyas| and curved edge, a Greek weapon, 


was named ; rising in a small lake 
near Celaenae, called Aulocréne, 
because about it grew reeds suit- 


vii. 2. 30, although worn also by 
the Thracians, vi. 1.5; adapted to 
ripping, iv. 6. 26; and carried by 


13 


ralrymen, cavalry sabre, i. 8. 7; 
pd 4. 16, identified with the 
ξίφος, q.¥. 
soto τό [R. pax], dagger, 
dirk; iv. 7. 16. 

μάχη, vs [R. pax], battle, en- 
gagement, fight, Lat. pugna, proe- 
lium, i. 2. 9, 5. 16, 8. 6, 1, 2. 21, 
vi. 3. 21; place of battle, battle. 
feild, ii. 2. 6, V. 5. 4. Phrase : 
μάχῃ OF μάχην νικᾶν, See νικάω; ll. 
1. 4, 6. 5. ' } 

μάχιμος, ον [R. pax], fit to fight ; 
ἄνδρας μαχίμους, fighting men, Vil. 
8. 13. 

άχομαι, μαχοῦμαι, ἐμαχεσάμην, 
a ron [R. pax], Sight, give 
battle, fight with or against, Lat. 
pugnod, or prvelium committo, abs. 
or with dat. of pers., 1. 5. 9, 7... 
17, 8. 28, ii. 1.4, 4. 6, 1. 4. 33, iv. 
1.19, v. 4. 21, 5. 18, vi. 3. δ᾽; very 
rarely with πρός and acc., vii. 8. 
19, while σύν with dat. means on 
the side of, with the aid of, V1. 3. 
13; in defence of, for or about, 1s 
expressed by ὑπέρ and gen. of pers., 
or περί or πρό and gen. of thing, 1. 
g. 31, ii. 1. 12, vi. 1. 8; wrangle, 
quarrel, iv. 5. 12. ie 
οί, μοῦ, see ἐγώ. 

ee eos, ὁ, Megabyzus, the 
official name of the keeper or sex- 
ton of the temple of Ephesian Ar- 
temis, always a eunuch, V. 3. 6, 7. 

εγάλην, see μέγας. 

ceeshaineiah ἐμεγαληγόρησα rR. 
pax + dyelpw], talk big, boast, 
brag, Lat. glorior, vi. 3. 18. 

μεγαλοπρεπῶς, adv. [R. paw + 
wpérw]|, in magnificent style, mu- 
nificently, splendidly, in @ princely 
manner, Lat. magnificé, i.- 4. 17, 


γι μαχαίριον-μέδιμνος 


Attica and Corinth, and was long 
the commercial rival of the latter, 
founding many colonies, such as 
Chalcédon, Byzantium, and Hera- 
cléa, vi. 2. 1. Its prosperity was 
destroyed when at its greatest 
height with the loss of Salamis, 
598 n.c. It was always the enemy 
of Athens, but was esp. hostile in 
the Peloponnesian war. 

μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα [R. pax], 
great in its widest sense, Lat. 
magnus, comp. μείζων, Sup. μέγι- 
στος; Of size or extent, great, 
large, spacious, tall, 1. 2. 6, 22, 4. 
9, 9. 7, ii. 4. 18, iii. 4. 17, vii. 1. 
37; important, weighty, powerful, 
high, mighty, striking, i. 2, 4, 9. 
80, ii. 5. 8, 14, 38, iv. 7. 23,, Vi. 4s 
20; of a name, renowned, famous, 
ii, 6. 17, vi. 1. 20; of dress, jine, 
i. 9. 23; of sound, loud, iv. 5. 18, 
7. 23; of a hole, deep, iv. 5. 0; of 
the sea, heavy, high, v. 8. 20; used 
also as a title of the king of 
Persia, like ‘Great Mogul,’ i. 2. 
8, ii. 3. 17; meut. as adv., μέγα, 
greatly, iii. 1. 38. Phrases: τὸ 
μέγιστον, what is or was the chief 
point, most of all, chiefly, i. 3. 10, 
v. 6. 29, vii. 7. 23; τὰ μεγάλα 
εὖ ποιοῦντα, conferring great bene- 
fits, i. 9. 24; πρῶτον καὶ μέγιστον, 
first and foremost, 11. 5. 7; μεγάλα 
ἣν τὰ χρησίμους ποιοῦντα, there were 
weighty reasons which made them 
good soldiers, id. 6. 14 ; ol μέγιστον 
δυνάμενοι; cf. Lat. plurimum posse, 
the most powerful, ii. 6. 21, vil. 6. 
37; βλάπτειν μεγάλα, do much 
harm, iii. 3. 14, ¢f. v. 8. 17; μέγα 
φρονεῖν, see φρονέω, lll. 1. 21, We 
6. 8 


vii. 6. 3; sup. μεγαλοπρεπέστατα, 
vii. 3. 19. 

hl adv. [R. pax], greatly, 
exceedingly, grossly, Lat. magno- 
eré, iii. 2. 22. 
Ἶ Μεγαρεύς, éws, ὁ [Μέγαρα, Me- 
σαγα], a Megarian, native of Me- 
garda, i. 2. 3, 4. 7, the capital of 


‘Meya s, ov, Megaphernes, 
a ces» Bl put to death 
by Cyrus, i. 2. 20. , 

y ts ai ous, τό [R. pa], ie 
size, Lat. magnitudd, ii. 3. 15; ὁ 
a river, width, iv. 1. 2. 

μέγιστος, see μέγας. ' 
μέδιμνος, ὁ [ο΄ Lat. modius, corn 


Megaris. This state lay between 


measure], medimnus, the largest 


μεθ᾽ -Μελινοφάγοι 138 


ts Ἢ roma τ γσρέξον 52.53 | small, little [cf. Lat. minuod, dimin- 
» 11. arts, U.S. dry meas- | is ; é ing j 
, U y meas-/| ish, minor, less, Eng. mio-cene}, 


ure, or about a bushel and a half, 
vi. 1. 15, 2,3. See s.v. χοῖνιξ. 


μετά. 
μεθέημι [ἔημι7, let go, give up 
Lat. dimitto, vii. 4. 10. ii ᾿ 
μεθίστημι [R. στα], set in a dif- 
Jerent place, remove; aor. mid., 
make go aside, set apart, ii. 2. 8; 
2 aor. act., go aside, stand apart, 
" 4, 21. 
Μεθυδριεύς, dws, ὁ [Medd 
: ’ eS prov 
Methydrium), a Methydrian, native 
of Methydrium, iv. 1. 27, 6. 20, 7. 
9, a little town in central Arcadia, 
between the rivers Maloetas and 
Mylaon, whence its name. On the 
founding of Megalopolis the inhab- 
itants of Methydrium were trans- 
ferred thither, and it lost all im- 
portance. (Near Nemnitza.) 
μεθύω [μέθυ, wine, of. Eng. 
=a be in wine, be drunk, Lat. 
rt sum, iv. 8. 20, v. 8. 4, vii. 3. 
μείζων, comp. of μέγας, g.v. 
μειλίχιος, a, ον [ς΄ μείλιχος 
soft, gentle}, mild, gracious, mer- 
ciful, an epithet of Ζεύς (q.v.), 
whose favour was to be won with 
propitiatory sacrifices. The great- 


smaller, lesser, weaker, fewer, i. 9 
hd ᾿ “ya ~ 1 
10, iv. 5. 36; μεῖον, adv. less, of 


θ᾽, by elision anc r fc 
μεθ, by and euphony for | force, distance and number, ii. 4, 


10, v. 4: 31; so μεῖον 7, less than 
or without 7 and followed by gen., 
iii. 1. 2, v. 4. 19, vi. 4. 8, vii. 7. 24. 
Phrase : μεῖον ἔχειν, be worse off, 
lll, 2. 17, get the worst of it, in a 
battle, i. 10. 8, iii. 4, 18, 
'Μελανδῖται, av, Melanditae, a 
tribe in European Thrace, men- 
tioned only in Anab., vii. 2. 32. 
"yee as [uédas], blackness, i. 


μέλᾶς, μέλαινα, μέλαν, gen. μέλα- 
vos, etc. [ο΄. Lat. malus, evil, Eng. 
calo-mel,melan-choly], black, dark 
Lat. niger, iv. 5. 18, 15, 

μέλει, μελήσει, ἐμέλησε, μεμέληκε 
[R. μελ], impers., ἐξ is a care, it 
concerns, with dat. of pers. and 
ὅπως with fut. indic. or with opt. 
often best translated personally as 
ἐμοὶ μελήσει, I will take care or 
see to tt, i. 4. 16, ef. 8. 18, vii. 7. 44. 
Phrases: τῇ θεῷ μελήσει, euphem- 
istically, the goddess will punish, 
V. 3. 18; διὰ τὸ μέλειν ἅἄπᾶσιν, as it 
was a matter of general interest, vi. 
4.20. (In poetry the above tenses 
are used personally, as well as 


est of the festivals in honour of 
Ζεὺς Μειλίχιος was the Diasia, cele- 


-μεμέλημαι, ἐμελήθην.) 
μελετάω, μελετήσω, ἐμελέτησα, με- 


brated at Athens by all the people 
in the month of February with 
bloodless offerings. But bloody 
sacrifices, such as swine, might 
also be offered to Zeus under this 
title. These were then burnt whole 
vu. 8. 4, 5. 
" Ler μείναντες, pelverav, μείνῃ, 
μεῖον, as adv., see μείων, 
Py sic gd τό [petpat, lass], lad, 
ou rom 14 to 2 8, ii 
Ἢ Hh it > 0 years, ii. 
pelopa, aros, τό [μειόω, make 
smaller, Helwv], curtailment, defi- 
ciency, shortage, of money, v. 8. 1. 


μελέτηκα [R. ped], attend to, prac- 
tise, Lat. mé exerced in, with inf., 
iii, ye, iv. 6. 14. 

_ BeAernpds, d, dv [R. ped], prac- 
tising diligently, well pe ἐξ ας or 
joan“ Lat. exercitatus, with gen., 
i. 9. 5. 

μελίνη, ns [cf. Lat. milium, mil- 
let}, millet, a kind of grain (see 
ne YXP08)s rie ἢ or pl., i. 2. 22, 5. 10, 
vi. 4. 6, 6.1; also in pl. Ὶ 
fields, ii. 4. 13. ii non 
Μελινοφάγοι, οἱ [μελίνη + ἔφα- 
γον}, Melinophagi, ἃ Thracian 
tribe, living between Byzantium 


and Salmydessus, where the peo- 


μείων, ov, used as comp. of μικρός, 


ple still eat millet, vii. 5. 12. 


189 il ti 


μέλλω, μελλήσω, ἐμέλλησα [R. | 29, iii. 2. 17, vii. 6. 21; yet, still, 
ped], be about to, be on the point of | however, nevertheless, i. 3. 10, 4. 8, 
an action, be going to do anything, | 9. 14, ii. 3. 9, 22, iii. 1. 5, iv. 6. 16. 
be likely, with pres. or fut. inf., μένω, μενῶ, ἔμεινα, μεμένηκα [R. 
serving like the Lat. periphrastic | μα], watt, stay, tarry, abide, Lat. 
conjugation to denote simple fu- | maneo, i. 2. 6, 21, 3. 11, 5. 13, i. 4. 
turity (when the word means shall, | 21, 4. 3, ili, 1. 7, 3. 12, iv. 2.6, v.2, 
will, should, would, etc.) or pur-| 10, vi. 5. 20, vii. 7. 54; be lasting, 
pose or wish, i. 8. 1, 9. 28, ii. I. 3, | last, hold good, of a truce, ii. 3. 24; 


4. 24, iii. 1. 8, iv. 7. 16, ν. 4. 20, Vi. | watt for, with acc., Lat. exspecto, 


4. 18, vii. 7. 40; delay, abs., ili, 1. 
46, 47; intend, purpose, with acc., 
ii, 5. 5. Phrase: τὸ μέλλον, the 
future, vi. 1. 21. 

μεμνῇο, μέμνησαι, μεμνήσεσθαι, 
etc., 866 μιμνήσκω. 

μέμφομαι, μέμψομαι, ἐμεμψάμην 
and ἐμέμφθην, find fault with, blame, 
Lat. reprehendd, of persons and 
things, ii. 6. 30, vii. 6. 39. 

μέν, post-positive particle (never 
used as a conj. to connect words 
or sentences), used to distinguish 
the word or clause with which it 
stands from something that is to 


follow, and commonly answered | g 


by δέ, when it may be rendered by 
on the one hand, indeed, truly, or 
left untranslated, but its presence 
shown by stress of the voice, i. I. 
1, 2. 4, 6. 6, ii. 1. 10, 2. 17, iii. 1. 3, 
19, 43, 2. 2, iv. 4. 3, v. 6. 12, vi. 4. 
20, vii. 1.29; but sometimes other 
words take the place of δέ, as 
ἔπειτα, μέντοι, kal, ἀλλά, i. 2. 1, 3. 
10, ii. 1. 15, iii. 2. 8; frequently 
combined with the art. or other 
words, as ὁ μὲν... ὁ δέ, the one 
... the other, pl., some... others, i. 1. 
7, 2. 25, 8. 20, ii, 2. 5; ἀλλὰ μέν, 
but certainly, for a fact, i. 7. 6, vil. 
1.9; οὐ μὲν δή, nor yet in truth, i. 
9. 13, ii. 2. 3, iii. 2. 14; μὲν δή, in 
fact, certainly, ii. 1. 20, iii. 1. 35; 
with a pers. pron., esp. ἐγὼ μέν, 1 
for my part, or I at least, i. 9. 28, 
li. 5. 25, iii. 1. 19, vii. 6. 10. 

μέντοι, adv. and conj. [wév+ τοί], 
used to strengthen the meaning 
of an assertion or protestation 


iv. 4. 20. 
Μένων, wvos, ὁ, Menon, a Thes- 
salian adventurer, one of the com- 
manders of Cyrus’s Greek force. 
In his youth he was a favourite 
of Aristippus of Larissa, who gave 
him the command of the merce- 
naries whom Menon brought to 
help Cyrus, ii. 6. 28, i. 2.6; he was 
employed by Cyrus to escort home 
the Cilician queen, i. 2. 20 ff., and 
won favour by being the first to 
cross the Euphrates, i. 4. 18 ff; 
he commanded the left wing at 
Cunaxa, i. 8. 4. With the other 
enerals he was seized, ii. 5. 31 ff., 
but not beheaded as they were, 
but tortured to death, ii. 6.29. He 
was probably guilty of treachery 
towards the Greeks with his friend 
Ariaeus, ii. 4. 15, 5. 28. An un- 
favourable account of his charac- 
ter is given in ii. 6. 21 ff. 
μερίζω (μεριδ-), μεριῶ, ἐμέρισα, 
μεμέρισμαι, ἐμερίσθην [ μέρος], divide, 
divide up, V. 1. 9. 

μέρος, ous, τό [cf. Lat. mere, be 
entitled to], division, part, share, 
portion, Lat. pars, i. 6. 2, iv. 6. 24, 
v. 3.4, vi. 6. 28, vii. 7.35. Phrases: 
μέρος τι τῆς εὐταξίας, a bit or an 
instance of their discipline, Lat. 
disciplinae specimen, i. 5.8; ἐν τῷ 
μέρει, each in turn, t.e. according 
to his place in the ranks, Lat. suo 
quisque locd et drdine, iii. 4. 23 ; 
κατὰ μέρος, alternately, in reliefs, 
Lat. per uicés, v. 1.9; κατὰ τὸ Χει- 
ρισόφου μέρος, in the place of Chiri- 
sophus, Vi. 4. 23; ἐν τῷ μέρει καὶ 
παρὰ τὸ μέρος, according to and be- 


or to show opposition, really, cer- 
tainly, in truth, moreover, i. 9. 6, 


yond one’s share, vii. 6. 36. 


μεσημβρία-μεταδίδωμι 140 


μεσημβρία, ds [μέσος -ἰ- ἡμέρα, 
midday, noon, Lat. meridiés ; hence, 
from the place of the sun at that 
hour, the South, i. 7. 6, iii, 5. 15. 

μεσόγαια Or μεσόγεια, as [μέσος 
Ἔ γῆ], the midland or heart of a 
country, the interior, Lat. mediter- 
raneae regionés, vi. 2. 19, 4. 5. 

μέσος, 7, ov [οὖ Lat. medius, 
middle, Eng. mip], what is in the 
middle, middle, mid, central, in 
the middle, generally in the predi- 
cate position before the art. or 
after the subst., i. 2. 7, 17, ii. 1. 11, 
iv. 8. 8, vii. 1. 14; but in attrib. 
position, i. 8. 13, and without art., 
Vii. 6, 24; subst., μέσον, with or 
without τό, the middle, the centre, 
i, 2. 15, 23, 8. 12, iii. 1. 46, 4. 43, v. 
4. 13, the space between, the interval 
between, with gen., as διὰ μέσου τού- 
τῶν, between these, i. 4.4, τὰ ἐν μέσῳ 
τούτων, the parts between these, i. 7. 
6, cf. i. 5. 14, ii. 2. 3, iii. 4. 20, v. 2. 
26, vi. 4.2. Phrases: μέσαι νύκτες, 
midnight, i. 7. 1, iii, 1. 33, vii. 3. 
40; μέσον ἡμέρᾶς, midday, i. 8. 8, 
iv. 4.1; ἐν μέσῳ κεῖται aOda, lie 
a to competition as prizes, iii. 
1. 21. 

μεσόω [μέσος], be in the middle ; 
πέρᾶ μεσούσης τῆς ἡμέρᾶς, when it 
was past noon, Vi. 5. 7. 

Μέσπιλα, as [acc. to some from 
mashpil, desolated, others, compar- 
ing Hebrew hishpil in Isaiah xxv. 
12, take the meaning to be brought 
low ; others again compare μεσοπύ- 
Aa], Mespila, a name applied in 
iii. 4. 10 to the extensive ruins of 
that part of the ancient Assyrian 
capital, Nineveh, which lie over 
against the commercial city of 
Mosul. This was the chief part 
of the southwest side of Nineveh, 
towards the Tigris. This side was 
about two and a half miles long, 
and the whole circuit of the walls 
was about eight miles, After along 
period of power and glory, Nineveh 
was captured and destroyed, short- 


Medes and Babylonians under 
Cyaxares and Nabopolassar. Xen- 
ophon’s statement, iii. 4. 12, that 
the Persians took it from the 
Medes, is explained by the fact 
that it was not utterly destroyed, 
but remained part of the Median 
empire till this was overthrown by 
Cyrus the Great in 549 B.c., when 
the city disappeared from history. 
It is at present represented by the 
ruins of Koyunjik and Nebi-Yunus. 
Excavations on these sites have 
disclosed fine palaces, libraries, 
sculptures, and monuments. 
μεστός, ἡ, dv, filled, full of, 
abounding in, Lat. plénus, with 
gen., i. 4. 19, ii. 5. 9, iii. 5. 1, iv. 4. 
7, V. 3. 11; abs., full, vii. 3. 26. 
μετά, by elision and euphony 
wer and μεθ᾽, prep. with gen. and 
acc. With gen., with, in company 
with, among (for which Xen. usu- 
ally has σύν), Lat. cum, i. 2. 20, 3. 
5, V. 4.34; in conjunction with, to- 
gether with, vii. 3. 13, 6.34; under 
command of, in the army of, i. 7. 
10, 10. 1, il. 2.7; with the aid or 
by means of, ii. 6.18. With acc., 
of place or order, behind, after, 


next, i. 8. 4, vii. 7, 22; of time, 
after, next, Lat. post, i. 3. 16, ii. 1. 
12, iii. 1. 45, iv. 8.8; μετὰ τοῦτο or 
ταῦτα, after this, thereupon, next, 
i. 3. 9, 6. 7, ii. 4. 23, iv. 6. 4, v. 7. 
17; μεθ᾽ ἡμέρᾶν, by day (i.e. after 
daybreak), iv. 6. 12, vii. 3.37. In 
composition μετά may signify par- 
ticipation, with, among, or succes- 
sion in time or place, after, but 
generally it signifies change. 
μεταβάλλω [βάλλω], throw into 
α different place, change quickly 4 
mid., τὰ ὅπλα μεταβαλλομένους, 
shifting our arms, so that the 
Shield should cover and protect 
the back during a retreat, vi. 5. 16, 
μεταγιγνώσκω [R. yyw], change 
oo Lat, sententiam mito, 
ii. 6. 3. 

μεταδίδωμι [R. $0], give among, 


ly before 600 B.c,, by a coalition of 


share, distribute, give a share or 


141 μεταμέλει-μή 


part, Lat. impertid, with dat. of 
pers. and either gen. of the whole 
of which a part is given, or acc. of 
the part given, iii. 3. 1, iv. 5. 5, 6, 
vii. 8. 11. ae 
μεταμέλει [R. ped], ἐξ is a care 
afterwards, it makes one sorry, 
with dat. of pers., best translated 
personally, I am sorry, I repent, 
Lat. paenitet mé, i. 6. 7, ii. 6. 9, V. 
6. 36; with dat. and partic., as 
πειθομένοις αὐτοῖς οὐ μεταμελήσει, 
they will not be sorry for obeying, 
vii. 1. 34, ef. vii. 1. 5. ; 
μεταξύ, adv. [μετά + ξύν = σύν], 
in the midst, in between, in the 
phrases: μεταξὺ ὑπολαβών, tnter- 
rupting him in the midst of his 
talk, iii, τ. 27; οὐ πολλοῦ χρόνου 
μεταξὺ γενομένου, after a short tn- 
terval, Ὑ. 2.17; as prep., between, 
of place, with gen., Lat. inéer, 1. 7. 
15, iii. 4. 37, v. 4. 22. 
μετάπεμπτος, ov [verbal of μετα- 
πέμπω], sent for, summoned, 1. 4. 3. 
μεταπέμπω [πέμπω], send for or 
after ; mid., send for a person or 
thing to come to oneself, summon, 
Lat. arcessd, i. 3. 8, 4. 5, iii. 1. 4, 
vii. 1. 38; with ἀπό or ἐκ and gen. 
of place, and πρός or els with ace. 
of pers. or place, i. 1. 2, 2. 26, Vil. 
1. 3, 20. 
μεταστρέφω [στρέφω], turn a 
thing round; mid., turn oneself 
round, turn round, Lat. sé con- 
uerto, vi. 1. 8. 
μετάσχοι, See μετέχω. 


μεταχωρέω [χωρέω], go to an- 
other place, change one’s position, 


vii. 2. 18. 


μέτειμι [R. eo], be among; in 
prose only impers., μέτεστι, there 
is a share, 850 οὐδενὸς ἡμῖν μετείη, 


we had no share, iii. 1. 20. 


μετέχω [R. vex], have a share of, 


share, take part in, abs. or with 
gen., V. 3.95 Ear algrs 28, 8. 17. 

uetéwpos, ov [ἀείρω], raised up 
fromthe ground, Phrase: μετεώρους 
ἐξεκόμισαν τὰς ἁμάξᾶς, they lifted 


μετρέω, ἐμέτρησα, ἐμετρήθην [μέ. 
τρον]; measure, Lat. metior, lv. 5. 6. 
μετρίως, adv. [uérpios, moderate, 
μέτρον), in due measure, moder- 
ately, Lat. moderate, Ul. 3. 20. 
μέτρον, τό (cf. Lat. métior, meas- 
ure, Eng. metre, dia-meter, thermo- 
meter, sym-metry], measure, dry’ 
and liquid, iii. 2. 21. 
μέχρι; adv., up to a place or time, 
before εἰς and ἐπί, as far as, even 
to, up to, Lat. usque ad, v. 1. 1, Vi. 
4. 26; μέχρι ἐνταῦθα, up to that 
point, v. 5.4; a8 prep., with gen. 
of place or time, up to, as far as, 
until, i. 7.15, το. 11, Iv. 5. 36, 7. 
15, vi. 4. 1, 25; μέχρι ov, down or 
up to where, until the time when, 
i. 7. 6, v. 4. 16; as Con)., until, 
Lat. dum, donec, with indic. or 
ἄν with subjv., i. 4. 18, ii. 3: 7, 24, 
6. 5, iii. 4. 8, iv. 2. 4, 4. 3, Vi. 5. 
29. 

4, adv., not, used both in inde- 
pendent and dependent clauses. 
In independent clauses: In prohi- 
bitions with pres. imv. or aor. 
subjv., ii. 1. 12, vi. 6. 18, vil. 1. 8; 
with subjv. of exhortation, vu. I. 
29; and in the phrase ov μή with 
subjv. for a strong future, ii. 2. 12, 
vi. 2. 4, vii. 3. 26. In dependent 
clauses: after a final conj., as ἕνα, 
ws, ὅπως, i. 4. 18, ii. 4.17, iii. 1. 18, 
47, 2.27; with verbs and partics. 
forming protases, ii. 1. 4, 3. 5, iv. 2. 
17, v. 3.1, vi. 4.9, 19, vii. 2. 33, 8.2; 
with a partic. equivalent to a rel. 
clause, iv. 4.15; with inf, ii. 3. 10, 
iii. 4. 21, 5. 11, iv. 3. 28, vi. 4. 24, 
vii. 6. 22; μὴ οὐ and inf., ii. 3. 11, 
iii. 1. 13; after verbs and expres- 
sions of fear, caution, or danger, 
lest, that, Lat. né, with subjv. or 
opt., i. 3. 10, 17, το. 9, ii. 3. 9, 11. 
1. 5, 2. 25, iv. 1. 6, 2. 18, 15, v. 6. 
17, vi. 1. 28, vii. 7.31, μὴ οὐ, that 
not, i. 7. 7, iii. 1. 12. Phrases: εἰ 
μή, except, ii. 1.12; εἰ δὲ μή, other- 
wise, ii, 2. 1, iv. 7. 20, vii. 1. 31. 
The compounds of μή follow the 


and carried out the wagons, i. 5. 8. 


usage of the simple word. 


μηδαμῇ-μηρός 149 


μηδαμῇ, adv. [μηδαμός, none, 
μηδέ -ἰ duds, an obsolete word — 
ris], in no way, not at all, of place, 
nowhere, Lat. nusquam, vii. 6. 29. 

μηδαμῶς, adv. [εὐ μηδαμῇ}, by 
no means, Lat. néqudquam, i. 9. 7, 
Vil. 7. 23. 

μηδέ, neg. conj. and emphatic 
adv. [uj+ δέ], and not, but not, 
nor, Lat. neque, nec, ii. 4. 1, iii. 2. 
17; not even, Lat. nz... quidem, i. 
3. 14, iii. 2. 21, 5. 7, vii. 6. 18, 7. 40. 

Μήδεια, as, Medéa, wife of the 
last king of the Medes, Astyages ; 
fled to Mespila when Cyrus the 
Elder conquered her husband, iii. 
rng y 

ΜΜηδείᾶς τεῖχος, see Μηδίᾶς τεῖ- 
χος. 
μηδείς, μία, ἐν [μηδέ -ἰ εἷς], not 
one, πὸ one, nobody, no, Lat. némo, 
nullus, 1. 3. 15, ii. 1. 19, νυ. 5. 9, Vi. 
2. 10, 6. 28, vii. 6. 36; μηδέν, neut. 
as acv., not by any means, Vv. 4. 19. 

μηδέποτε, adv. [μηδέ + ποτέ], 
never, Lat. numquam, iii. 2. 8, iv. 
5. 13. 

pndérepos, a, ov [undé+ ἕτερος], 
neither, when two are in question, 
Lat. neuter, vii. 4. 10. 

Μηδία, as [old Persian Mada, in 
the Bible Madai, ef. Μῆδοι], Me- 
dia, prop. a district in Central Asia, 
bounded on the north by the Cas- 
pian sea, on the east by the Parthi- 
ans and Hyrcanians, on the south 
by Susiana and Persis, and on the 
west by Armenia and Assyria. It 
included the modern Irak, Adser- 
beidschan, Ghilian, and a part of 
Manzandaran. Under Cyaxares 
and with the help of Nabopolassar, 
king of Babylon, the Medes over- 
threw the Assyrian empire, 608 or 
606 B.c., and extended their own 
to the Persian gulf and westward. 
They were conquered by Cyrus 
the Elder in 550 n.c. In the Anab. 
the name Media is applied to the 
district prop. called Assyria, ii, 4. 
27, iii. 5. 15. 


τό, the Median Wall, i. 7. 15, ii. 4. 
12, extending from the Tigris to the 
Euphrates and separating Mesopo- 
tamia from Babylonia. It was 
built by the Babylonians as a bul- 
wark against the Medes, perhaps 
at the beginning of the sixth cen- 
tury B.c, 

Μῆδοι, ol, the Medes, natives of 
Media, iii. 2. 25, 4. 7, 10. 

Μήδοκος, ὁ, Medocus, king of 
the Odrysae in Thrace, vii. 2, 32, 
3. 26,.9%.'3, 11. 

Μηδοσάδης, ov, Medosades, min- 
ister and ambassador of Seuthes, 
vii. 1. 5, 2. 10, 23, 7. 1, 11. 

μήθ᾽, by elision and euphony for 
μήτε. 

μηκέτι, adv. [μή + ἔτι, not again, 
no longer, i. 2. 27, 4. 16, 6. 9, v. 7. 
15, 8. 8. 

μῆκος, ous, τό [R. pax], length, 
Lat. longitido, i. 5. 9 (pl.), ii. 4. 
12, v. 4. 32. 

μήν, intensive particle, post-posi- 
tive, in truth, surely, truly, Lat. 
werd, used after other particles, as 
οὐ μήν, to be sure not, yet certainly 
not, i. το. 3, vii. 6. 38; οὐδὲ μήν, 
and certainly not, ii. 4. 20, vii. 6. 
22; καὶ μήν, and in fact, and yet, 
i. 7. 5, iii. 1. 17; ἀλλὰ μήν, but 
surely, but still, i. 9. 18, ii. 5. 12, 
iii. 2.16; ἢ μήν, see ἢ. 
μήν, μηνός, ὁ [ef. Lat. ménsis, 
month, Eng. Moon, MONTH], month, 
iL 3. 10, 3. 31, 9. 17, v. 5. 4, vii. 
5. 4, 9. 
μηνοειδής, ἐς [μήνη, moon, cf. μὴν 
+R. Εἰδ], half-moon shaped, cres- 
cent shaped, Lat. laindtus, v. 2. 13. 
μηνύω, μηνύσω, etc. [R. pal, 
show what is hidden, show up, re- 
veal, inform against, Lat. indico, 
ii. 2. 20. 
μήποτε, adv. [μή - ποτέ], never, 
Lat. nunquam, i. 1. 4, 6. 2, iii. 1. 
35. 
μήπω, adv. [μή -Ἐ πώ], not yet, 
Lat. ndndum, iii. 2. 24. 
μηρός, ὁ, thiyh, Lat. femur, vii. 


Μηδίας or Μηδείᾶς τεῖχος, ous, 


4. 4, 8. 14, 


148 μήτε-μισϑοδοτέω 


μήτε, neg. conj. [μή Ἐ τέ], and 
not, distinguished from οὔτε as μή 
from οὐ, either doubled, neither .. . 
nor, i. 3. 14, iv. 4. 6, or followed 
by ré, not only not... but also, 
Lat. neque... et, il. 2. 8, iil. I. 
ys (ef. Lat. mater 
ητρός, ἡ [ cf. Lat. ἢ " 
iy nl MOTHER], mother, 1. 
1. 4, 8, ii. 4. 27, vi. 4. 8. 
μητρόπολις, ews, ἡ [μήτηρ + R. 
wha}, the mother-city as related to 
her colonies; hence, chief city, 
capital, Lat. caput, v. 2. 3, 4. 16, 
25. 
ανάομαι, μηχανήσομαι, ἐμη- 
ueaed wale μεμηχάνημαι [R. pax], 
contrive, devise, frame, scheme, 
esp. something crafty, Lat. ma- 
chinor, with acc. or inf., ii. 6. 27, 
iv. 7. 10. 
μηχανή, fs [R. pax], machine, 
instrument, Lat. machina ; hence 
contrivance, scheme, device, or, 
more generally, means, iv. 5. 16, v. 
2. 24, vii. 2. 8. 
fa, see els. ' 
(Sas, ov, Midas, a mythologi- 
cal king of Phrygia, son of Gordius 
and Cybele. He entrapped Sile- 
nus, the Satyr, i. 2. 13, but treated 
him well and was rewarded by Dio- 
nysus with the granting of any wish 
he chose to ask. Having foolishly 
requested that all he touched should 
be turned to gold, he died of hun- 
ger. The same Midas, having 
awarded the prize to Pan over 
Apollo in a musical contest, was 
given ass’s ears by the angry god. 
Μιθριδάτης or Μιθραδάτης, ov, 
Mithridates, satrap of Lycaonia 
and Cappadocia, vii. 8. 25, a fol- 
lower of Cyrus, ii. 5. 35, but after- 
wards treacherous to the Greeks, 
π 3 1, 6,.4::2: A 
pixpés, a, dv [cf. Eng. micro- 
scope|, small, little, of size and 
quantity, Lat. parwus, 11. 4. 13, iii. 
2. 21, v. 3. 12, vii. 7. 53; of im- 
portance, of small account, trifling, 


μῖκρόν, τό, a short space or distance, 
a short time, a little, ii. 1. 6, 11. 1. 
11, iv. 7.7, v. 4. 22; neut. as adv., 
pixpdv, hardly, i. 3. 2. Phrase : 
κατὰ μῖκρά Or μῖκρόν, in small 
parts, in bits, v. 6. 32, Vii. 3. 22. 
Μιλήσιος, a, ov [Mi λητος], Μ ile- 
sian, i. 1.11; subst., Μιλήσιοι, Mi- 
lesians, natives of Milétus, i. 9. 9, 
vi. 1.15; ἡ Midnola, the Milesian 
woman, i. 10. 3. 
Μίλητος, 7, Milétus, an ancient 
and famous city in Ionia, south of 
the mouth of the Maeander, i. I. 
6, 2. 2, 4.2, noted for its colonies 
and commerce until its capture by 
the Persians in 494 B.c. It was 
also a centre of art and literature, 
and was the native place of several 
great philosophers and historians. 
(Palatia or Pellatia.) 
Μιλτοκύθης, ov,  Miltocythes, 
commander of Thracian troops; 
deserted to the iat ἮΝ ou ᾿ 
τμέομαι, μιμήσομαι, ἐμιμησάμην, 
ae [μῖμος, ὁ, actor, cf. Eng. 
mimic, panto-mime }, imitate, copy, 
take as example, Lat. imitor, 111. I. 
86; of actors, represent, play a 
part, vi. 1. 9. ἱ 
μιμνήσκω (μνα-), -μνήσω, ἔμνησα, 
μέμνημαι, ἐμνήσθην [R. μα], remind 
(never act. in Anab.); mid. and 
pass., recall to oneself, remember, 
where the pf. has the pres. sense, 
Lat. memini, the fut. pf. μεμνήσομαι 
serves as fut., and the plpf. as 
impf., abs. or with gen., i. 7. 5, ill. 
1. 27, 2. 89, v. 8. 25, 26, vii. 5. 8, 
6. 388; make mention, talk of, sug- 
gest, with inf. or ws and a clause, 
vi. 4. 11, vii. 5. 8. i 
μισέω, μισήσω, etc. [μῖσος, τό, 
hatred, cf. Lat. miser, wretched, 
maestus, sorrowful, Eng. mis-an- 
thrope], hate, Lat. ddi, vi. 2. 14, 
vii. 6. 15. ᾿ 
μισθοδοσία, as Leng +R. So], 
iving of pay, ll. 5. 22. 
tae Sit [μισθός + R. $0], pay 
wages, employ, with dat. of pers., 


trivial, iii. 2. 10, v. 8. 20; subst., 


vii. 1. 13. 


μισθοδότηΞ- μνημεῖον 1 


μισθοδότης, ov [μισθός + R. So], 
one who pays wages, employer, 
with dat. of pers., i. 3. 9. 
μισθός, ὁ [cf. Eng. MEED ], wages, 
pay, esp. of soldiers, Lat. stipen- 
dium, i. 1. 10, 2. 11, v. 6. 31, vii. 5. 
5. Cyrus at first paid his Greek 
troops one daric monthly, but af- 
terwards increased it one-half, i. 2 
21. The usual pay was a daric for 
ἃ private, two for a captain, and 
four for a general, vii, 6. 1. 7. 
From this sum the soldier provided 
not only his arms and clothes, but 
also his daily rations, since among 
the Greeks there was no commissa- 
riat in the modern sense, but each 
soldier bought his own provisions. 
μισθοφορά, as [μισθός + R. dep], 
receipt of wages, wages received, 
pay, of soldiers, v. 6. 23, 35, vi. 1. 
16, vii. 1. 3. 
μισθοφόρος, ov [μισθός + R, φερ], 
receiving pay; subst., οἱ μισθοφό- 
pa, mercenary troops, mercenaries, 
Lat. mercennGrii, i. 4. 3, iv. 3. 4, 
vii. 8. 15. 
μισθόω, μισθώσω, etc. [μισθός], 
let out for hire; mid., cause to let 
out for hire, hire, Lat. conduco, vi. 
4. 13, vii. 7. 34; pass., be hired, be 
paid, i. 3. 1. 
μνᾶ, ds, mina, the next to the 
highest denomination in Greek sil- 
ver money, although never actu- 
ally minted as a coin, the one- 
sixtieth of the talent, or a hundred 
drachmas. (See τάλαντον.) 


The Attic table of money is as 
follows : — 


ὀβολός 


6 | dpax mur 
600| 100 μνᾶ 
36000 6000 | 60 | rdXavrov 


That is, 6 obols equalled 1 drach- 
ma, 100 drachmas equalled 1 mina, 


44 


The Attic drachma had 4.336 
grams or 67.376 grains of pure 
silver. As the U.S. silver dollar 
has 871.25 grains of pure Silver, 
the drachma would be worth about 
18 cents (legal value). The talent 
(6000 drachmas) would be worth 
about $1080, the mina $18.00, and 
the obol 3 cents. 

Many Greek states used the 
Aeginetan (or commercial) stand- 
ard, with silver coins more than 
one-third heavier than the Attic. 
The Persians had a silver talent 
and a mina a little more than one- 
fourth heavier than the Attic, the 
σέγλος (g.v.) representing the drach- 
ma. (See note on i. 5. 6.) 

The ratio of value of silver to 
gold is established by law in the 
U. S. at about 1:16. In Xeno- 
phon’s time it was estimated at 
1:10. On this account the silver 
in an Attic drachma is worth less 
now than it would have been then. 
See ddpeckés. 

Attic currency was silver. The 
highest denomination actually 
coined was the ten-drachma piece. 
The commonest coin was the four- 
drachma piece. The accompanying 


illustration is an enlarged repre- 
sentation of the drachma, the ob- 
verse showing the helmeted head 
of Athena, the reverse the owl and 
olive branch and an inscription 
containing the first three letters of 
the name of Athens, AOENAI. 


μνημεῖον, τό [R. μα], remem- 


brance, memorial, monument, Lat. 


60 minas equalled 1 talent. 


monumentum, iii. 2. 13, 


145 μνήμη-Μῦυσός 


Ι 
Ϊ 


» ns [R. μα], remembrance, 

BB i Lat. memoria, Vi. 5. 24. 

μνημονεύω, μνημονεύσω, ἐμνημό- | 
νευσα, -εμνημόνευκα, ἐμνημονεύθην [R. | 
pa], recall, recollect, Lat. recor- 
dor, iv. 3. 2. ' , 

μνημονικός, ή, όν [R. μα], having 
a good memory, in sup., Vil. 6. 38. 

μνησθῇ, See μιμνήσκω. 

μνησικακέω, μνησικακήσω, ἐμνησι- 
κάκησα [R. μα κακός], remember 
wrongs received, bear a grudge, 
with dat. of pers. and gen. of cause, 
ee εἶ 

μόλις, adv., with di iculty, hardly, 
only just, Lat. wix, iii. 4. 48, ἵν. 8. 
28, v. 2. 27, 4. 25, 8. 14, vii. 8. 18 ; 
μάλα μόλις, with extreme difficulty, 


vii. 1. 39. ᾿ 
μολυβδίς, δος, ἡ [μόλυβδος], 


leaden ball, bullet, Lat. glans plum- | p 


bea, used in slings, tii. 3. 17. 

μόλυβδος, ὁ [φ΄ Lat. plumbum, 
lead], lead, iii. 4. 17. 

μόλωσιν, See Brook. | 

povapx la, as [μόνος + apxw], rule 
of one; of a general, command in 
chief, vi. 1. 31. 

μοναχῇ, adv. [μοναχός, single, 
solitary, μόνος}, in α single way, 
alone, only; ἧπερ povaxyn, where 
alone, iv. 4. 18. Ϊ 

μονή, ἢς [R. μα], atarrying, stay, 
halt, v. 1. 5, 6. 22, 27. 

μονόξυλος, ov [μόνος + ξύλον], 
made of one log, of canoes, V. 4. 
a A 

μόνος, 7, ov (cf. Eng. monk, min- 
ster, monastery, monad, and mono- 
in mono-logue, mono-gram, etc.], 
alone, left alone, by oneself, Lat. 
sdlus, iii. 1. 2, ν. 2. 26, 4. 34; alone, 
only, sole, i. 4. 15, ll. I. 1. Rav 
41, iv. 6. 3, vi. 3. 5, vil. 7.50; alone 
among or of, with gen., ii. 3. 19, v. 
7. 30; neut. as adv., μόνον, alone, 
only, solely, ii. 5. 14, iii. 2. 19, v. 2. 
15, 7. 10 

μόσσῦν, vvos, dat. pl. μοσσύνοις; 
ὁ, wooden tower, Υ. 4.20. _ 

Μοσσύνοικοι, of [μόσσῦν + R. 


wooden towers), a rude and barbar- 
ous but warlike race, living along 
the Euxine west of Trapezus, Vv. 
4. 2, 8, 15, 5. 1. Their manners 
and customs are described in Anab. 
V. 4. 
ie ov [μόσχος, 6, calf}, of 
a calf, Lat. uitulinus ; xpéa μόσχεια, 
veal, iv. 5. 31. 
pox 0éw, μοχθήσω, ἐμόχθησα [μόχ- 
Gos, 6, toil], be burdened, labour, 
toil, Lat. labér6é, with περί and 
acc., vi. Ὁ. 31. 
μοχλός, ὁ, bar of a gate or door, 
Lat. sera. The gates of a Greek 
town were double and opened in- 
ward. When closed they were 
barred on the inside by a timber 
(μοχλός) which crossed them at 
the centre and fitted into the 
osts on each side. A hollow bolt, 
which could be removed only with 
a key, was then shot through a 
hole in the post and in the end of 
the bar. vii. 1. 12, 16. 
btw, suck, abs., iv. 5. 27. 
ΝΜ ὑρίανδος, ἡ, Myriandus, a city 
in Syria on the gulf of Issus, near 
the later Alexandria, i. 4.6. ([5- 
kanderun. ) : 
μῦριάς, ddos, ἡ [μὺρίος, cf. Eng. 
myriad |, the number ten thousand, 
myriad, i. 4. 5, 7. 12, v. 6. 9. 
μύριοι, See μῦρίος. 
puplos, a, ov, countless, unnum- 
bered, vii. 1. 30; pl. μύριοι, a, a, 
as attefinite number, ten thousand, 
being the largest Greek number 
expressed by one word, Lat. decem | 
milia, i. 1. 9, 2. 9, ii. 1. 19, 1}. 2. 
18, v. 7. 9, vii. 3.48; 50 In sing. 
with a collective subst., 1. 7. 10. 
μύρον, τό, sweet-smelling oil, iv. 
. 13. ' 
: Micta, as [Mtows], Mysia, a 
country in the northwestern part 
of Asia Minor, including Greater 
and Lesser Mysia, vii. 8. 7, 8. 
Μύσιος, ἃ, ov [Muods], belong- - 
ing to Mysia, Mysian, i. 2. 10. 
Mics, ὁ, a native of Mysia, a 


Fix], the Mossynoeci (dwellers in 


Mysian. The Mysians as a nation 


μισθοδότης- μνημεῖον 144 


μισθοδότης, ov [μισθός +R. So], 
one who pays wages, employer, 


With dat. of pers., i. 3. 9. 


μισθός, ὁ [ cf. Eng. mee], wages, 


| The Attic drachma had 4.336 
grams or 67.376 grains of pure 
silver. As the U.S. silver dollar 
has 371.25 grains of pure silver, 


pay, esp. of soldiers, Lat. stipen- | the drachma would be Worth about 


dium, i. 1. 10, 2. 11, v. 6. Ol, vii, 5 


| 18 cents (legal value). ‘The talent 


5. Cyrus at first paid his Greek | (6000 drachmas) would be worth 
troops one daric monthly, but af- | about $1080, the mina $18.00, and 


terwards increased it one-half, i. 2. 
21. The usual pay was a daric for 
a private, two for a captain, and 


four for a general, vii. 6. aoa 
From this sum the soldier provided 
not only his arms and clothes, but 


also his daily rations, since among | 


the Greeks there was no commissa- 
riat in the modern sense, but each 
soldier bought his own provisions. 
μισθοφορά, as [μισθός-! R. dep |, 
receipt of wages, wages received, 
pay, of soldiers, v. 6. 23, 35, vi. 1 
16, vii. 1. 3. 
μισϑοφόρος, ov [μισθός + R, dep |, 
receiving pay; subst., of μισθοφό- 
po, mercenary troops, mercenaries, 
Lat. mercenndarii, i. 4 3, lv. ἃ 4, 
vii. 8, 15. 
μισθόω, μισθώσω, ete. [μισθός], 
let out for hire; mid., cause to let 
out for hire, hire, Lat, condiuco, vi. 
4. 15, vii. 7. 34; pass., be hired, be 
pag, t, 3. 1, 
μνᾶ, ἂς, mina, the next to the 
highest denomination in Greek sil- 
ver money, although never actu- 
ally minted as a coin, the one- 
sixtieth of the talent, or a hundred 
drachmas. (See τάλαντον.) 
The Attic table of money is as 
follows : — 


᾿ 


ὀβολός 


| the obol 3 cents. 

| Many Greek states used the 
| Aeginetan (or commercial) stand- 
ard, with silver coins more than 
one-third heavier than the Attic. 
The Persians had a silver talent 
and a mina a little more than one- 
|fourth heavier than the Attic, the 
| σίγλος (q-v.) representing the drach- 
Ima. (See note on i. 5. 6.) 

The ratio of value of silver to 
gold is established by law in the 
U. S. at about 1:16. In Xeno- 
phon’s time it was estimated at 
1:10. On this account the silver 
in an Attic drachma is worth less 
now than it would have been then. 
See dapecxéds. 

Attic currency was silver, The 
highest denomination actually 
coined was the ten-drachma piece. 
The commonest coin was the four- 
drachma piece. The accompanying 


No, 44, 


600 100 | μνᾷ 
36000 6000 60. τάλαντον 


That is, 6 obols equalled 1 drach- 
ma, 100 drachmas equalled 1 mina, 
60 minas equalled 1 talent, 


illustration is an enlarged repre- 
sentation of the drachma, the ob- 


| verse showing the helmeted head 
| of Athena, the reverse the owl and 
olive branch and an inscription 
containing the first three letters of 
the name of Athens, ΑΘΕΝΑΙ. 


μνημεῖον, τό [R. pal, remem- 


brance, memorial, monument, Lat, 
monumentum, iii. 2. 13, 


145 μνήμη- Μῦσός 


μνήμη, ns [R. μα], remembrance, 
memory, Lat. memoria, V1. 
μνημονεύω, 


ἐν 


ἤ rT ‘ » Po 
νευσα, -εμνημόνευκα, ἐμνημονεύθην [1ὰ. 4. 2, 8, 18, 5. hy 


wooden towers), a rude and barbar- 
5.24. | ous but warlike race, living along 
μνημονεύσω, ἐμνημό- the Euxine west of Trapezus, v. 


Their manners 


μα], recall, recollect, Lat. recor- and customs are described in Anab. 
: , 


ῷ) Vy 


dor, iV. 3. 2. 
μνημονικός, 7, ov [R. μα], having | 


r 4. * ‘ell o 
pdo eros, ov [μόσχος, ὁ, calf], of 


ins rl 38. | acalf. . uitulinus ; κρέα μόσχεια 
a good memory, in sup., Vii. 6. 38. | a calf, Lat. uitulinus ; κρέα μόσχεια, 


μνησϑῇ, 566 μιμνήσκω. | 
μνησικακέω, μνησικακήσω, ἐμνησι-. 


| veal, iv. 5. 31. 


pox Pew, μοχθήσω, ἐμόχθησα [μόχ- 


κάκησα [R. μα κακός], remember | Bos, ὃ, toil}, be burdened, dept 
wrongs received, bear a grudge, | toil, Lat. labord, with περί anc 


" ‘or ar τῇ 4 
with dat. of pers. and gen. of cause, | acc., vi. 6. 31. 


ob, Acid 
μόλις, adv., with diffic ulty, hardly, 
only just, Lat. uta, iii. 4. 48, τν. ὃ. 
28, v. 2. 27, 4. 25, 8. 14, vii. 8. 18 ; 
μάλα μόλις, with extreme difficulty, 
vii. 1. 39. ΤΠ 
μολυβδίς, ἰδος, ἡ [μόλυβδος]. 
leaden ball, bullet, Lat. glans plum- 
bea, used in slings, iii, 3, 17. 
μόλυβδος, ὁ [cf Lat. plumbum, 
lead}, lead, lil. 4. 17. 
μόλωσιν, See βλώσκω.. 
μοναρχία, as [μόνος + ἄρχω ], rule 
of one; of a general, command tn 
chief, vi. 1. dl. ' ' 
μοναχῇ, adv. [μοναχός, single, 
solitary, μόνος}, in a single way, 
alone, only; ἧπερ povaxyn, where 
alone, iv. 4. 18. 
μονή, 7s [R. μα], atarrying, stay, 
halt, v. 1. 5, 6. 22, 21. ! 
μονόξυλος, ov [μόνος + ξύλον], 
made of one log, of canoes, V. 4. 
11. 
μόνος, 7, ov (cf. Eng. monk, min- 
ster, monastery, monad, and mono- 
in mono-logue, mono-gram, etc. }, 
alone, left alone, by oneself, Lat. 
solus, iii. 1. 2, V. 2. 26, 4. 34; alone, 
only, sole, i. 4. 16, ii, I. 12, iii. 1. 
41, iv. 6. 3, vi. 3. 5, vii. 7.50; alone 
among or of, with gen., li. 3. 19, ν΄. 
7. 00; neut, as adv., μόνον, alone, 
only, solely, ii. 5. 14, iii. 2. 19, ν. 2. 
15, 7. 10. 
μόσσῦν, vvos, dat. pl. sooo bros, 
6, wooden tower, V. 4. 20. | : 
ΜΜοσσύνοικοι, of [μόσσῦν + KR. 


poxAds, ὁ, bar of a gate or door, 
Lat. sera. The gates of a Greek 
town were double and opened in- 
ward. When closed they were 
barred on the inside by a timber 
(wox 6s) which crossed them at 
the centre and fitted into the 
posts on each side. A hollow bolt, 
which could be removed only with 
a key, was then shot through a 
hole in the post and in the end of 
the bar. vii. 1. 12, 16. ὶ 
μύζω, suck, abs., iv. 5. 27. 
Mupiavbos, ἡ. Myriandus, a city 
in Syria on the gulf of Issus, near 
the later Alexandria, i. 4.6. (Is- 
kanderun. ) ! 133 
μῦριάς, ddos, ἡ [uuplos, cf. Eng. 
myriad], the number ten thousand, 
myriad, i. 4. 5, 7. 12, v. 6. 9. 
μύριοι, See μῦρίος. 
puplos, a, ov, countless, unnum- 
bered, vii. 1. 30; pl. αὔριοι, at, a, 
as athefinite number, ten thousand, 
being the largest Greek number 
expressed by one word, Lat. decem 
milia, i. 1. 9, 2. 9, I. 1. 19, ili. 2. 
18, v. 7. 9, Vii. 3.48; 80 1) Sing. 
with a collective subst., 1. 7. 10. _ 
μύρον, τό, sweet-smelling oil, 1. 
4. ] 4 ' 
Μυσία, as [Miows], Mysia, a 
country in the northwestern part 
of Asia Minor, including Greater 
and Lesser Mysia, vii. 8. 7, 8. 
Μύσιος, a, ov [Mvads], belong- 
ing to Mysia, Mysian, i. 2. 10. 
Micdés, ὁ, a native of Mysia, a 


Fux], the Mossynoeci (dwellers in 


Mysian. The Mysians as a nation 


Μυσός-ναῦς 1 


were noted robbers, and were hos- 
tile to the king, i. 6. 7, 9. 14, ii. 5: 
13, iii. 2, 23. 

_ Mids, ὁ, Mysus, a brave My- 
Sian in the Greek army, v. 2. 
29 ff. 

μυχός, ὁ, innermost part, recess, 
of hy mountain, heart, cranny, iv. 
| thy 

μῶρος, a, ov [cf. Eng. sopho- 
more |, dull, stupid, foolish, Lat. 
stultus, in sup., ili. 2. 22. 

“μώρως, adv. [μῶρος], stupidly 
vu. 6, 21. J wll 


46 


ναῦλον or ναῦσθϑλον, τό [vats], 
money for passage by ship, fare, 
Vi 1. 22, 

ναυπηγήσιμος, 7, ov, Or os, ov [ναῦς 
+ R. way], belonging to or jit for 
shipbuilding, vi. 4. 4. 

vais, νεώς, ἡ [ναῦς], ship, Lat. 
nauis, either the merchant vessel 
vu. 5. 12 ff., or the man-of-war, Ὶ 
4. 2, 3, 5, v. 1. 1ὅ (where vais is 
identified with πεντηκόντορος, g.v.) 
4. 10. The former, as designed for 
transport, was broad and roomy, 
and went mainly under sail; the 


No. 


N. 


ναί, intensive particle [ef. vi, 
Lat. né], strongly affirmative, in 
answers or oaths, certainly, yes, 
with acc. with or without μά (q.v.), 
Vv. 8. 6, vi. 6. 34, vii. 6. 21. 

νᾶός, ὁ, temple, Lat. aedés, v. κ᾿ 
9, 12, 18; Attic acc. νεών from 
vews, 0, V. 3. 8. 

νάπη, 7s, OF νάπος, ous, τό, woody 
ἘΝ valley, ravine, glen, Lat. sal- 
us, lV. 5. 15, Vv. 2 31, vi. 5. 12, 18 
δ δὲν. hina gt 

vavapxéw [vais+apxe], com- 
mand α fleet, be admiral, v. 1. 4, 
Vil. 2. 7. 

ναύαρχος, ὁ [ναῦς + ἄρχω], com- 
mander of a fleet, Lat. praefectus 
Classis, esp. a Spartan officer, ad- 
miral, i. 4. 2, vi. 1. 16, 6. 13, vii. 
2. 5. 
ναύκληρος, ὁ [ναῦς - κλῆρος, ὁ, 
lot], shipowner, who generally was 


latter was long and narrow, and 
was propelled in action by oars. 
As here illustrated each is provided 
with rudders (see s.v. πηδάλιον) 
a ship’s ladder (see 5.0. κλῖμαξ), 
a foredeck, a balustrade running 
along the side of the ship and de- 
signed to serve as a bulwark, a 
single mast supported by two 
Stays, and a sail attached to a 
yard which is secured by braces. 
The hull of the merchantman is 
high above the water, and the bow 
curves upwards and outwards and 
terminates in a point, which is not 
fashioned into a figurehead, but 
has the ‘eye,’ which may have 
been either a hawse hole or of the 
nature of an.amulet. The man-of- 
war has the ram, in which is the 
‘eye,’ and two banks of oars. In 
the historical development of ship- 
building among the Greeks the 


also master, captain, Vii. 2. 12, 5. 14. 


merchantman first appears, then 


147 ναῦσϑλον--νεῶν 


the pirate ship, which was swifter 
but still capable of stowing plun- 
der, and then the man-of-war. The 
latter reached its perfect form in 
the τριήρης, g.v. See also 8.0. revrn- 
xévropos, τριᾶκόντορος, and πλοῖον. 
ναῦσθλον, see ναῦλον. 
Ναυσικλείδης, ov, Nausiclides, 
who brought pay to the Greek 
army from Thibron, vii. 8. 6. 
ναυσίπορος, ov [ναῦς - R. περ], 
that can be traversed in ships, of a 
river, navigable, ii. 2. 3. 
VAUTLKOS, 7), 
ὁν [vats], be- 
longing to 


Sresh, of men, comp. νεώτερος, sup. 
νεώτατος, Lat. iuuenis, iunior, 
minimus nati, i. 1. 1, 10. 3, iii. 2. 
87, iv. ἢ 27, 2, 16, χὰ αὶ Ss ae 
grain, new, fresh, this year’s, Lat. 
nouus, V. 4. 27. 

νεῦμα, aros, τό [vetw, nod, cf. 
Lat. adnud, nod at, nutd, nod], 
nod, sign with the head; νεύματος 
μόνου ἕνεκα, for a mere nod, V. 8.20. 

veupd, ἃς [cf. νεῦρον], sinew, 
string, esp. bowstring, Lat. neruwus, 


a το 


ships, naval, 
with δύναμις, 
naval power, i. 3. 12. 

veaviokos, ὁ, [vearias, young 
man, νέος], youth, young man, 
a term covering the period from 
boyhood up to forty years, Lat. 
iuuenis, ii. 4. 19, iv. 3. 10, vii. 2. 
33, 7.4; used sneeringly, ii. 1. 13. 

νεῖμαι, See νέμω. ‘ 

νεκρός, ὁ [cf. Lat. nex, death, 
necod, slay, Eng. necro-logy, necro- 
mancy], dead body, corpse, Lat. 
cadduer, iv. 2. 18, 23, v. 7. 18, vi. 
4.9. Phrases: ἄνευ πολλῶν νεκρῶν, 
without severe loss, Υ. 2.9; οἱ νε- 
xpol, the dead, Lat. mortut, v. 4. 17. 

νέμω, veud, ἔνειμα, -νενέμηκα, νενέ- 
μημαι, ἐνεμήθην [R. ven], distribute, 
portion out, award, Lat. distribud, 
vi. 6.33; of meat, divide up, carve, 
vii. 3. 21; of herdsmen, drive to 
pasture, Lat. pdscd ; and so mid. 
of animals, graze, feed, ii. 2. 15, 
and in pass., ὅρος νέμεται altl, the 
mountain is pastured with goats, 
iv. 6. 17. 

i δὲ επράμθόν see νέμω. 

νενημένων, see νέω, heap. 

νεόδαρτος, ον [véos+R. Sap], 
freshly flayed, iv. 5. 14. 

Νέον τεῖχος, ovs, τό, New Fort, 
a fortress in Thrace west of Perin- 
thus, vii. 5. 8. 

véos, a, ov [cf. Lat. nouus, new, 


No. 46. 


iv. 2. 28, v. 2. 12. For additional 
illustrations, see s.v. τόξον and 
papérpa. 
νεῦρον, τό [cf. Lat. neruus, sinew, 
muscle, Eng. neur-algia]|, sinew, 
cord, used in slings, iii. 4. 17. See 
8.0. σφενδόνη. 
νευσόμενοι OF νευσούμενοι, See 
véw, SWIM. 

νεφέλη, ns [νέφος, τό, cloud, ef. 
Lat. nubés, cloud, nebula, mist], 
cloud, i. 8. 8, iii. 4. 8. 

véw, ἔνησα, vévnuat, heap, pile 
up, V. 4. 27 

véw (vv), vevoouat OF νευσοῦμαι, 
-évevoa, -vévevxa [vats], swim, Lat. 
nato, iv. 3. 12, v. 7. 25. 

νεωκόρος, ὁ [vads + R. xed], Keeper 
of a temple, sacristan, Lat. aedituus, 
a priestly officer of high rank, who 
had the superintendence of the 
temple and of its treasures, v. 3.6. 

Νέων, wvos, ὁ, Neon, a Spartan 
from Asine, at first lieutenant of 
Chirisophus, v. 3. 4, 6. 36, but af- 
terwards his successor, vi. 4. 11, 
23, and unfriendly to Xenophon, 
v. 7.1, vi. 2. 18, 5. 4, vii. 2. 17, 29. 

νεώριον, τό [vais+ R. 2 Fep], 
place where ships are cared for, 
navy yard, dockyard, vii. 1. 27. 

νεών, see ναός. 


Eng. NEw, neo-phyte], young, 


νεῶν, See vais. 


νεωστί-νῦν 148 


_ vewori, adv. [νέος], freshly, lately, 
BV. 2, 32. 

vf, intensive particle [cf. ναί], 
used in affirmative oaths, with acc., 
as νὴ Ala, yes, by Zeus! i. 7. 9, v. 
7. 22. 

vijes, See vais. 

νῆσος, ἡ [vais], island, Lat. in- 
sula, ii. 4. 22, vii. 1. 27. 

Νίκανδρος, ὁ, Nicander, of La- 
a who killed Dexippus, v. 1. 

5. 

Νίκαρχος, ὁ, Nicarchus, of Ar- 
cadia, who brought the Greeks 
news of the seizure of their gener- 
als, ii. 5. 33; either he or a captain 
of the same name afterwards de- 
serted, iii. 3. 5. 

νϊκάω, νικήσω, etc. [νέἐκὴ], con- 
quer, get the upper hand, prevail 
over, surpass, Lat. uincd, abs. or 
with ace., i. 2. 8, 7. 7, 9. 11, ii. 1. 
a, oy ane 2, 11, ¥. 2. 18 ‘vi, mos 
with cognate acc., vi. 5. 23; with 
dat. μάχῃ, ii. τ. 4, 6. 5; in the 
pres. often with a sense of pf., be 


victorious, be a victor, i. 8. 21, to. | 


πι ἢ ἢ ἃ oe ὶ 4. 
Phrases: τὰ μεγάλα νϊκᾶν, outdo in 
great matters, i. 9. 24; τὰ πάντα 
νἱκᾶν, be completely victorious, ii. 
I. 1; ἐκ τῆς νϊκώσης (80. γνώμης), 
in conformity to a majority vote, 
ἢ. A τ. 

νίκη, ns, victory, Lat. uictoria, 
hh oe ΚΝ Es BR 

tkopaxos, ὁ, Nicomachus, of 

Oeta in Thessaly ; volunteered for 
service with his light-armed troops, 
iv. 6. 20. 

νοέω, νοήσω, etc. [R. yvw], ob- 
serve, perceive, think out, plan, 
lil. 4. 44, v. 6. 28. 

νόθος, 7, ov, OF os, ov, illegitimate, 
bastard, Lat. spurius, ii. 4. 25. 

νομή, ἧς [R. ven], pasture, v. 3. 
9; herd out at pasture, herd, iii. 
5. 2. 

νομίζω (νομιδ-), νομιῶ, etc. [R. 
ven}, regard as a custom; pass., 


) 
be the custom, be usual, Lat. sdled, 


ζεται, the regular gifts, i. 2.27, and 
τὰ νομιζόμενα, the regular wages, Vii. 
3. 10; own, regard, acknowledge, 
consider, believe, think, fancy, Lat. 
puto, with acc. and inf., i. 1. 8, ii. 
I, 11, iii. 2. 7, v. 5. 18; with inf., 
1. 3. 10, ii. 5. 13, iii. 1. 3, vi. 1. 22, 
vii. 3. 8; with two accs., i. 4. 9, 16, 
li. 5. 39, ili. 2. 28; with partic,, vi. 
6. 24, 

νόμιμος, 7, ον [R. ven], custom- 
ae usual, lawful, with inf., iv. 6. 
ὃ. 

νόμος, ὁ [R. ven], custom, way, 
Jashion, practice, Lat. mds, i. 2. 15, 
V. 4. 33, Vii. 2. 38, 3. 37, 8.5; law, 
Lat. lex, iv. 6. 14; as a musical 
ae mode, strain, Lat. modus, v. 
4. 17. 


voréw, ἐνόσησα, νενόσηκα [νόσος], 
be diseased or ill; of a country, be 
disordered or in a bad condition, 
vii. 2. 32, 

véoos, ἡ, disease, illness, Lat. 
morbus, V. 3. 3, Vii. 2. 32. 

vétos, 6, the south wind, Lat. 
auster, ¥. 7. 7. 

voupnvia, as [véos+ μήν], new 
moon, hence first of the month, 
Lat. kalendae, v. 6. 23, 31. 

νοῦς, νοῦ, ὁ [R. yvw], power of 
thought, mind, sense, Lat. méns. 
Phrases: τὸν νοῦν προσέχειν, pay 
attention, abs. or with dat., ii. 4. 2, 
iv. 2. 2, vi. 3. 18, so τῷ προσέχοντι 
τὸν νοῦν, to the attentive observer, 
i. 5.9; ἐν νῷ ἔχειν, purpose, plan, 
intend, ili. 3. 2, 5. 13. 

νυκτερεύω, ἐνυκτέρευσα [ vixrepos, 
by night, νύξ], spend the night, 
bivouac, Lat. pernocto, iv. 4. 11, 5. 
ll, vi. 4, 27. 

νύκτα, νυκτί, νυκτός, see νύξ. 

νυκτοφύλαξ, ακος, ὁ [νύξ + φυ- 
Aarrw], night-watch, picket, Lat. 
excubitor, Vii. 2. 18, 3. 34. 
γύκτωρ, adv. [νύξ]. by night, in 
the night, at night, Lat. nocti, iii. 
4. 35, iv. 4. 9, vii. 3. 37, 8. 20. 
viv, adv. [ef Lat. nunc, now, 


iv. 2. 23, vii. 3. 18; so δῶρα a νομί- 


just, at present, i. 4. 14, ii. 1. 12, 


149 νύν-- Ξενοφῶν 


fii. 1. 20, 2. 33, iv. 1. 19, v. 4. 21, 
vii. 2. 34; strengthened by δή, vii. 
1. 28, 6.37. Phrases: ἔτι viv, even 
to this day, iii. 2.12; τὸ viv εἶναι, 


for the present, iii. 2. 37; τὸν viv 


χρόνον, at the present time, Vi. 6. 13. 

νύν, inferential particle, post- 
positive and enclitic, weaker than 
viv, g.v., With an imv., ἔθει νυν, come 
now, vii. 2. 26. 

vuvt, adv., stronger than νῦν, q.v., 
even now, at this moment, v. 6. 32, 
vii. 3. 3. 

νύξ, νυκτός, ἡ [cf. Lat. nox, night, 
Eng. nicut], night, i. 10. 19, ii. 2. 
1. κ᾿ UB Ve Be By Ws ee 
Phrases: νυκτός, by night, ii. 6. 7, 
iii. 1. 40, iv. 4. 15, vii. 2.22; rijs 
νυκτός, by night, in the night, where 
the context shows that a particular 
night is meant, ii. 2. 1, iii. 4. 34, 
DV: ἡ ἢν ἃ ἢ ἢ 
νυκτός, all night long, iv. 6. 22; 
μέσαι νύκτες, midnight, i. 7. 1, iii. 
1.33; ἡμέρᾶν καὶ νύκτα, a day and 
a night, vi. 1. 14, cf. vi. 6. 88; καὶ 
νύκτα καὶ nuépav, night and day, 
vii. 6. 9. 

νῷ, 566 νοῦς. 

νῶτον, τό, back, Lat. tergum, v. 
4. 32. 


= 


ElavOixAfjs, ous, ὁ, Xanthicles, 
of Achaea, elected general in the 
place of Socrates, iii. 1. 47; fined 
for neglect, v. 8. 1; see also vii. 
2, 3. 

fevia, as [ξένος], tie or bond of 
Sriendship or hospitality, Lat. hos- 
pitium, vi. 6. 35. 

levias, ov, Xenias, of Parrha- 
sia in Arcadia, general in Cyrus’s 
army, i. 1. 2, 2. 1, 3, but after- 
wards a deserter, i. 3. 7, 4. 7, 8. 

ξενίζω (tend-), ἐξένισα, ἐξένισμαι, 
ἐξενίσθην [ξένος], entertain a stran- 
ger or guest-friend, entertain, Lat. 
hospitio acciptd, Vv. 5. 25, vii. 3. 8, 
6, ὃ, 


ξενικός, ή, dv [ξένος], belonging 
to a foreigner; subst., τὸ ξενικόν 
(sc. στράτευμα), mercenary force, 
i 2 1, ἢν κ᾿ Se 

ξένιος, a, ov [ξένος], belonging to 
a stranger or guest, hospitable, Lat. 
hospitalis ; Zevds ξένιος, see Ζεύς, iii. 
2.4; subst., ra ξένια, friendly gifts, 
pledges of guest-friendship, συ β 
typifying friendship, iv. 8, 23, ν. 5. 
2, 14, vi. 1. 15; ἐπὶ ξένια ἐδέχοντο 
αὐτούς, they entertained them at a 
banquet, vi. 1. 3, cf. vii. 6.3, where 
a formal state affair is meant like 
the Lat. lautia. 

ξενόομαι, ξενώσομαι, ἐξένωμαι, ἐξε- 
νώθην [ξένος]. form a tie of guest- 
friendship with one, become a 
guest-friend, be entertained, with 
dat. of pers., vii. 8. 6, 8. 

ξένος, ὁ [ξένος], stranger, for- 
eigner, Lat. hospes, esp. a foreigner 
with whom one has made a bond 
of friendship and mutual hospital- 
ity under the patronage of Ζεὺς 
ξένιος, a connexion usually ex- 
pressed in Eng. by the term guest- 
friend, for want of a similar tie in 
modern times; hence ξένος means 
either party to the compact, guest, 
host, i. 1. 10, 3. 3, ii. 1. 5, 4. 15, iii. 
1.4, v. 3. 6, vii. 3. 22; also of one 
who enters a foreign service for 
pay, mercenary, i. 1. 10, 3. 18, ii. 

. 28. 

Elevohav, ὥντος, ὁ, Xenophon, an 
Athenian, the author of the Anaba- 
sis. He was the son of Gryllus and 
Diodéra, was of equestrian rank 
and of the deme Erchia. His birth 
is usually set in 444 B.c., but it 
may have been as late as 434 B.c. 
He was a pupil of Socrates, iii. 1. 
5; in 401 he joined the army of 
Cyrus, not as a soldier, but as the 
companion of his old friend Proxe- 
nus, iii. 1. 4 ff., and took no active 
part until after Cunaxa. When 
the Greek generals were seized and 
put to death by Tissaphernes, Xen- 
ophon aroused the soldiers from 


their dejection and was elected 


Ἐξέρξης- ξόανον 150 


general in the place οὗ Proxenus, 
i. 5. 37, 41, ili. 1.11, 47. The 
remainder of the Anabasis is the 
story of how his courage and skill 
brought the army to Mysia and 
delivered it into the service of the 
Spartan Thibron in the spring of 
399 B.c., vii. 8.24. He was ban- 
ished from Athens on account of 
his serving against the Persians and 
with Spartans, and in 

904 B.c. left Asia Minor Ke 
with Agesilaus and fol- 

lowed him against The- 

bes and Athens in the battle of 
Coronéa, v. 3.6. The Spartans pre- 
sented him with an estate at Scillus 
in Elis about 387, where he erected 
a little temple to Artemis, v. Δ. 15. 
and where he lived in retirement 
with his wife Philesia, and his sons 
Gryllus and Diodérus. Here were 
written his well-known works. 
After the battle of Leuctra, 371 
B.c., the Eléans drove him out of 
Scillus and he went to Corinth. 
According to some the Athenians 
withdrew their sentence of banish- 
ment against him, and his last 
years were spent in his native city ; 
others state that he died in Cor- 
inth. It is certain that his sons 
were in the service of Athens, and 
that the elder fell at Mantinéa in 
362. Xenophon himself died not 
later than 355. His principal works 
were the Anabasis, Hellenica, 


Enpalve (Enpar-), ξηρανῶ, ἐξή- 
pava, ἐξήρασμαι, ἐξηράνθην [ξηρός], 
parch, dry, Lat. siccd, of fruits, ii, 
3. 15. 

ξηρός, d, dv, dry, Lat. siccus, iv. 
5. 33. 

ξίφος, ovs, τό, sword, Lat. gla- 
dius, ii. 2. 9, v. 8. 21, vii. 4. 16. 
The ξίφος had a straight blade and 


Memorabilia of Socrates, Cyropae- 
dia, Symposium, and (if they be 
genuine works of Xen.) the Lace- 
daemonian State and Agesilaus. 


was double edged, and was there- 
by distinguished from the μάχαιρα, 
q-v. Both were short, as compared 
with modern swords. The cross- 
bar, or guard, of the ξίφος was not 
large; the hilt was often orna- 
mented. The ξίφος was carried in 
a scabbard of metal, or of leather 


No. 47. 


Ἐξέρξης, ov (Pers. Khshyarshan, | with metal mountings, which rested 


of doubtful 
ruler 5], Xerxes, son of Darius 
Hystaspes and Atossa, king of 
Persia from 485 to 465 B.c., chiefly 
famous for his mighty but ill-fated 
expedition against Greece, i. 2. 9, 
iii. 2. 13. 

ξεστός, 7%, dv [verbal of téw, 
scrape, polish], scraped, planed, 


meaning, chief ?| on the left side of the body and was 


supported by a strap that passed 
over the right shoulder. See s.v. 
ὅπλον, ὁπλέτης, and πυρρίχη (where 
note the shape of the edge of the 
blade). 

ξόανον, τό [ξέω, cf. ξεστός, piece 
of carved work, esp. carved image 


polished, Lat. politus, iii. 4. 10. 


of a god placed in a temple, v. 3. 
1 


151 ξυήλη- ὅδε 


νήλη, ns [ξύω, scrape, akin to 
εἰ et sald Sy tool for scraping, 
hence, curved or sickle-shaped dag- 
ger, used by the Spartans, lv. 7. 
16, 8. 25. | 

ξυλίζομαι (ξυλιδ-) [ξύλον], gather 
wood or faggots, Lat. lignor, with 
ἐκ and gen., ii. 4. 11. 

ξύλινος, 7, OV [ξύλον], made of 
wood, wooden, Lat. Tigneus, i. 8. 9, 
i. 2, 6 Wie Oe 

ξύλον, τό [of. Eng. zylonite], 
wood, Lat. lignum, as material, v. 
4. 12, or piece or bar of wood, i. 10. 
12; esp. in pl., wood, beams, logs, 
trees, fuel, 1. 5. 12, ii. I. 6, 2. 16, 
iv. 4. 12, v. 2. 23, 26, vi. 4. 4, 5. 


Ο. 


ὁ, ἡ, τό, def. art., the, originally 
a dem. pron. but retaiming this 
force in Attic chiefly in the ex- 
pressions ὁ μὲν... ὁ δέ in all cases, 
sing. and pl., this... that, the one 
...the other, he... the rest, 1. 1. 
7, 10. 4, ii. 2. 5, ili. 3. 7, 4. 16, iv. 
3. 33, vii. 2.2; sometimes ὁ δέ is 
found without a preceding ὁ μέν, 
and he, but he, i. 1.3, 4, 9, 2. 2, 16, 
3. 21, ii. 3. 4, iv. 5. 10; pl., others, 
the rest, i. 5. 13, το. 3, 1. 3. 10, iv. 
1, 14, v. 4. 31; τὰ μέν Or τὰ μέν τι 
...7a δέ, partly... partly, Iv. 1. 
14, v. 6.24; τὰ μὲν ... τέλος δέ, αἱ 
first ... finally, i. 9. 6; τῇ “μὲν ""» 
τῇ δέ, in this respect ... in that, 
iii. 1. 12, cf. iv.8.10. In its proper 
use as the article, 6, 7, τό, 1t corre- 
sponds in general to the Eng. art., 


restrictively, marking the thing to 
which it refers as well known, 1. 2. 
9, as customary, usual, ΟΥ̓ proper, 
i, 3. 20, ii. 5. 23, ill. 1. 25, v. 6. 26, 
vii. 6. 28, or as belonging to a per- 
son, where we use ἃ poss. pron., 1. 
1.1, 3, iv. 6. 26, v. 6.6; sometimes 
it has a distributive force, as in τοῦ 
μηνὸς τῷ στρατιώτῃ, per month to 
each soldier, i. 3.21. The neuter 
τό or τά is often used before a gen., 
as τὰ Κύρου, Cyrus’s relations, 1. 3. 
9; ra τῶν στρατιωτῶν, the condition 
of the troops, iii. 1.20; τὰ ἐκείνων, 
their property, Vv. 1.9, but οἱ ἐκείνου, 
his men, i. 2. 15. The art. is used 
before a partic., as of φεύγοντες, 
the exiles, i. 1.7, ὁ βουλόμενος, who- 
ever wtshes, i. 3. 9, οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ τολ- 
μήσων, there is not a man that will 
venture, ii. 3. 5, cf. 4. 5; with inf. 
as subst., ii. 4. 3, 6.19; before ad- 
verbs, in phrases like οἱ οἴκοι; those 
at home, i. 2. 1, οἱ ἔνδον, those within, 
ii. 5. 32, οἱ τότε, the men of that 
day, ii. 5. 11, εἰς τὸ πρόσθεν, 70- 
ward, i. το. 5, but τὸ πρόσθεν, be- 
fore, i. 10.10 ; before prepositions, 
in phrases like οἱ παρὰ βασιλέως, 
men from the king, 1. 1. 5, οἱ ἐκ τῆς 
ἀγορᾶς, market men, 1. 2. 18, οἱ σὺν 
αὐτῷ, his men, i. 2. 19, τὰ παρὰ 
βασιλέως, news from the king, ii. 3. 
4, τὰ περὶ IIpotévov, the fate of 
Proxenus, ii. 5. 37, τὸ πρὸς ἑσπέρᾶν, 
westward, Vi. 4. 4, τὰ παρ pty, 
our condition, Vi. 3. 26. 

4, see ὅς. ni (th : 

ὀβελίσκος, ὁ [ὀβελός, ὁ, spit, of. 
Eng. obelisk], little spit, Lat. weru, 


vii. 8. 14. 
ὀβολός, ὁ, obol, an Attic coin, 


although it is sometimes wanting | worth about three cents, i. 5. 6. 


in Greek where we should use it, 1. 
1.1, 4.4, or is used where we omit 
it, as with proper names to mark 
them as well known or before men- 
tioned, i. 1. 2, 2. 5, 4. 7, ii. 3. 8, iil. 
4. 39, vi. 1. 15, vii. 2. 8, oF before 
numerals when they denote an ap- 
proximate number, i. 2. 10, 7. 10, 


See s.v. μνᾶ. tly 
phesarhantnll indecl. [oxre + εἴ- 
κοσι], eighty, Lat. octoginta, lv. 8. 
15, v. 4. 31. 
italy n, ov [ὀκτώ], eighth, Lat. 
octauus, iv. 6. 1. ! 
ὅδε, ἥδε, τόδε, dem. pron. te + 
-5e], this, referring to what 18 close 


ii, 6. 15, iv. 8.15. It may be used 


at hand, but more emphatically 


ὁδεύω-οἰκέω 159 


than οὗτος, accompanied generally 
with a gesture, ii. 3. 19, vii. 3. 47; 
often referring to what is to fol- 
low, while οὗτος regularly refers to 
what precedes, the following, i. 1. 
9, 9. 29, ii. 1.17; λέγει τάδε, he 
spoke as follows, i. 5. 15, ii. 5. 40; 
dat. as adv., τῷδε, in the following 
manner, thus, ii. 3. 1; τῇδε, of 
place, here, vii. 2. 13. 
ὁδεύω, ὠδευσα [ὁδός], go one’s 
way, march, with διά and gen., 
vii. 8. 8. 
ὁδοιπορέω, ὠδοιπόρησα, ddourerd- 
ρηκα [6865+ R. περ], go by land, 
v. 1. 14. 
ὁδοποιέω, ὠδοποίησα, wWdorolnuat 
[ὁδός + ποιέω], make a road, make 
passable, mend a road, abs., with 
ὁδόν, or with dat. of pers., iii. 2. 
24, iv. 8. 8, v. 1. 13, 14, 3. 1. 
ὁδός, ἡ [ὁδός], way, road, path, 
Lat. uia, i. 2. 13, 25, 9. 13, ii. 2. 10, 
4. 4, iii. 1. 2, 4. 24, iv. 1. 10, 2. 8, 
v. 1. 13, 3. 1, vi. 3. 24, vii. 3. 42; 
march, journey, i. 4. 11, 5. 9, ii. 2. 
12, iii. 1. 6, 8, iv. 3. 16, v. 5. 4, vi. | 
3. 16, vii. 3. 2, 16; way, means, ii. 
6. 22. 
᾿Οδρύσης, ov, an Odrysian, vii. | 
1, 7. 11, pl. the Odrysae, a 
Thracian tribe whose power once | 
extended from Abdéra to the Ister | 
and the Pontus, and from Byzan- | 
tium to the Strymon, but it de-| 
clined at the end of the fifth cen- | 
tury, B.c., Vii. 2. 32 (ef. 22), 3. 16, | 
4. 21, 5. 15, 7. 11. 
᾿Οδυσσεύς, dws, ὁ, Odysseus, of | 
Ithaca, son of Laertes and Anti- | 
cléa, husband of Penelope and 
father of Telemachus. He was 
one of the most famous chiefs 
before Troy, and is the hero of 
the Odyssey ; the incident referred 
to in v. 1. 2 is related in Od. xiii. 
79 ff. 
ὅθεν, adv. [8s], from which place, 
whence, from which side or source, 
Lat. unde, i. 2. 8, vii. 3. 5, 6. 12, 7, 
L; in indir. questions, ii. 4. 5, v. 7, 
6; of persons, from whom, ii. 5. 26. 


ὅθενπερ, adv., stronger than ὅθεν, 
q-v., from which very place, ii. 
1, ἢ. 

οἱ, see 6. 

οἵ, see ὅς. 

ol, to him, see οὗ. 

οἶδα, 2 pf. with pres. sense, 
plpf. as impf. ἤδειν, fut. εἴσομαι 
[R. Εἰδ], know, understand; Feel 
sure, have knowledge of, be ac- 
quainted with, abs. or with acc., 
l. 4. 12, 7. 4, 8. 21, iv, 1. 22, 23, v. 
ἡ. 23, vi. 1. 31, vii. 7..7; with acc. 
and ὅτι with a clause, ii, 4. 6, vi.1. 
32; with ὅτε and a clause, i. 3. 15, 
iii. 1. 36, iv. 1. 27, v. 8. 10, vii. 7 
| 38; with a partic. in nom. or acc., 
i. 10, 16, ii. 1. 13, v. 8. 15, vii. 6. 12, 
7. 22; with el, whether, or a rel. 
clause, i. 3. 5, 4. 8, 7. 4, iii. 1. 40, 
v. 7- 6. Phrases: χάριν εἰδέναι, 
abs. or with dat. of pers. and gen. 
of cause, be grateful, feel thank- 
Jul, Lat. gratids habére, i. 4. 15, 
vii. 4. 9, 6.32; ἑκασταχόσε εἰδέναι, 
know the way in every direction, 
lil. 5. 17; οἶδ᾽ ὅτι, parenthetically, 
surely, certainly, v. 7. 33. 

οἴει, see οἴομαι. 

οἴκαδε, adv. [R. Fux], to one’s 
home, homeward, to one’s native 
country, Lat. domum, i. 2. 2, ii. 3. 
23, iii. 2. 24, iv. 6. 3, vii. 8. 2; τῆς 
οἴκαδε ὁδοῦ, the return march, iii, 
oe 4 


οἰκεῖος, a, ov [R. Fix], belonging 
to one’s house, home or family, 
hence familiar, intimate, Lat. Ja- 
miliaris, with dat. of pers., ii. 6. 28. 
As subst., οἱ οἰκεῖοι, one’s Samily, 
kinsmen, relatives, Sriends, iii. 2. 
26, 39, 3. 4, vii. 1. 29. 

οἰκείως, adv. [R. Fux], in a 
friendly way, kindly, vii. 5. 16. 
© οἰκέτης, ov [R. Fux], member of 
one’s household ; pl., household, in- 
cluding slaves, Lat. domestici, iv. 
5. 35, 6.1, but esp. slaves, servants, 
Lat. famuli, ii. 3. 15, vi. 6. 1. 

οἰκέω, οἰκήσω, etc. [R. Fux], have 
α home, dwell, live, Lat. habito, 
colo, abs., with dvd, κατά, ΟΥ παρά 


15 


and acc., ἐν and dat., or ὑπέρ and 
acc., i. 1. 9, 2. 24, 7. 6, Il. 3. 18, 
iii. 2. 24, 5. 16, iv. 7. 11, vi. 1. 15, 
vii. 5.13; dwell in, live in, inhabit, 
with acc., iii. 2. 23, 4. 7, iv. 7. 1: 
of a city, have its place, be situated, 
lie, with παρά and acc., v. I. 19; 
in pass., be inhabited or peopled, 
be situated, i. 2. 14, 4. 11, il. 4. 
25, v. 4. 15, vi. 4. 6. 

eek aros, τό [R. Fux], dwell- 
ing, house, Lat. domicilium, vu. 

. 15. 
" οἴκησις, ews, ἡ [R. Fux], act of 
dwelling, dwelling place, residence, 
Lat. habitatid, vil. 2. 38. 

οἰκία, as [R. Fux], house, Lat. 
domus, ii. 2. 16, iii. 1. 11, iv. 1. 8, 


3 οἴκημα-οἷος 


abs. or with acc., i. 4. 7, iii. 1. 19, 
Vii. 2. 6. 

οἶμαι, See οἴομαι. . 

οἶνος, ὁ [cf. Lat. uinum, wine], 
wine, i. 2. 13, 9. 25, ii. 4. 28. ΠΙ, 
4. 31, iv. 2. 22, Vv. 4. 29, vii. 2. 23; 
οἶνος φοινίκων, palm wine, ii. 3. 14, 
cf. i. 5. 10; οἶνος κρίθινος, barley 
wine, ἴ.6. beer, iv. 5. 26. 

οἰνοχόος; ὁ Sawai χέω, gQ 
éyxéw|, one who pours wine, Cup- 
ἀλλμὲν iv. 4. 21, vii. 3. 24, 29. At 
a Greek symposium the οἰνοχόοι 
were usually young slaves. Their 
duty was to mix the wine, bring 
in the mixers (see 
8.0. κρατήρ), and with 
long-handled ladles 


, 26, v. 2. 1, vii. 2. 6. Ι 
οἰκίζω (οἰκιδ-), οὐ- 

κιῶ, ᾧκισα, PKU pal, 

φκίσθην [R. Fux], 

found, settle, colo- 

nize, of a city, Lat. 

condo, v. 6. 17, vi. 


4.14, 6.3; pass., of 
a person, be settled, v. 3. 7. 
οἰκοδομέω, οἰκοδομήσω, etc. [R. 
Fux + déuw, build, cf. Lat. domus, 
house], build a house, build, .Lat. 
aedificd, i. 2. 9, V. 4. 26 ; of a 
wall, construct, erect, ii. 4. 12, iil. 
Hy ¢ 
Ἶ οἴκοθεν, adv. [R. Fux], from one’s 
house, away from home, Lat. domo, 
iii. 1. 4, iv. 8. 25. | 
οἴκοι, adv. [R. Fux], αὐ home, in 
one’s own country, Lat. domi, vii. 
4.24, 8.4. Phrases: of οἴκοι, one's 
countrymen or family, i. 1. 10, 2. 
1, 7. 4, iii. 2. 26, v. 6. 20; τὰ οἴκοι, 
home life, i. 7.4; τοῖς οἴκοι τέλεσι; 
the home government, Vil. I. 34. 
οἰκονόμος, ὁ [R. Fue+R. vep], 
household superintendent, — house- 
keeper, steward, Lat. dispensator, 
i. 9. 19. 
at ὁ [R. Fur), house regarded 
as a home; so of an Official resi- 
dence, ii. 4. 8. tit 
οἰκτείρω (olxrep-), οἰκτερῶ, wKTeipa 


No. 49. 


or with wine-jugs dip the wine from 
the mixers and fill the drinking 
cups for the guests, who received 
them as they reclined upon the 
couches. 1} 
οἴομαι or οἶμαι, οἰήσομαι, φήθην, 
think, believe, suppose, expect, 
fancy, abs. or parenthetically, like 
‘Lat. opinor, i. 5. 8, 9. 33. ‘ii. 1.,16, 
iii. 1. 15, v. 8. 22, vil. 6. 38; also 
with inf. or acc. and inf. (freq. 
with dy), i. 3. 6, ii. 1. 1, Ml 1. 38, 
iv. 2. 4, 7. 22, V. I. 8, vi. 3. 26, vii. 
6. 17; with fut. inf., i. 4. 5, 7.9, 
9. 15, ii. 1. 12, iii. 1. 17, v. 3. 6. 
οἷος, ἃ, ov, rel. pron., as a rel., 
Lat. qualis, often with the correl- 
ative τοιοῦτος omitted, such as, of 
such a kind as, ii. 3. 15, 6. 8, Υ. 8. 
3; so with inf. as οὐ γὰρ ἣν wpa οἵα 
ἄρδειν, it was not the proper sea- 
son for watering, ii. 3. 13; hence, 
in the phrases οἷός τέ εἰμι with inf., 
I am able, I can, v. 4. 9, and οἷόν 


[olkros, ὁ, pity], pity, Lat. misereor, 


οἷόσπερ-ὁλοίτροχος 154 


τέ ἐστι and inf., it is possible, i. κ᾿ 


ὀκνηρῶς, adv. [ὀκνηρός, shrink. 


“* « θ one ~~ * oe iy 


οἷόν re μάλιστα πεφυλαγμένως, as 


guardedly as possible, ii. 4. 24; 


freq. in indir. questions, of what 


sort or nature, what kind of, i. 3. 
13, 7. 4, ii, 2. 5, 5. 10, iii. 1. 19, vii. 
7: 4; 80 ὁρῶν ἐν οἵοις ἐσμέν, seeing 
in what straits we are, iii. 1. 15. 
With sup. οἷον χαλεπώτατον, Lat. 
quam dificillimum, as strong as 
possible, iv. 8. 2, ef. vii. 1. 24. 
Neut. as adv., οἷον, just as, for ex- 
ample, ἵν. 1. 14, vii. 3. 32. 
οἷόσπερ, ἅπερ, dvrep, a stronger 
form of οἷος, g.v., just exactly as, 
Just such as, i. 3. 18, 8, 18, iv. 4. 
16, v. 4. 13, vii. 7. 47. 
ols, olés,- acc. pl. ols, ἡ [οὐ Lat. 
it ἀῤρ — EWE], sheep, iv. 5. 25, 
οἴσει, see φέρω. 

οἶσϑα, see οἶδα. 

olorés, ὁ, arrow, Lat. sagitta, ii. 
1.6. See 8.0. τόξευμα. 

Olraios, ὁ [Οἴτη, Octa], an Oe- 
taean, one who lives near Mt. Oeta 
in Thessaly, iv. 6. 20. 

οἴου, see οἴομαι. 

οἴχομαι, οἰχήσομαι, pres. with 


ὄκνος, 6, hesitation, reluctance 
with inf., iv. 4. 11. 
οκτακισχίλιοι, αἱ, a [ὀκτώ + yi- 
λιοι], eight thousand, a ἢ, μονῇ 
᾿ og: ἘΠ a [ὀκτώ + ἑκατόν], 
| eight hundred, Lat. octi 2, 1 
δ γῇ. “hia ctingenti, i. 2. 
ὀκτώ, indecl. [ὀκτώ], eight, Lat. 
acto, 1. 2. 6, ii. 4. 13, iii. 4. 3, vi. 3. 5. 
ὀκτωκαίδεκα, indecl. [ὀκτώ + 
iri eighteen, Lat. octddecim, iii. 
| ὄλεθρος, ὁ [ὄλλῦμι, destroy, cf. 
adrérrduu], destruction, killing 
death, i. 2. 26. 
ὀλίγος, ἡ, ov [ς΄ Eng. ofig- 
archy], few, Lat. tl of ol 
ber, iv. 3. 30, 7. 5, v. 5.1, vi. 3. 22, 
esp. as subst. masc. pl., a few men, 
a handful, i. §- 12, 7. 20, iti. 1. 8 
Iv. 1. 10, v. 1. 6, vii. 1. 12; of size, 
time, space, or amount, small, 
little, brief, short, trifling, Lat. 
paruus, ill. 3. 9, 15, v. 6. 15, vii. 1. 
23, 7. 36 ; neut. as adv., ὀλίγον, a 
little, iii. 4. 46, iv. 8. 20, vii. 2. 20. 
Phrases: αὐτοῦ ὀλίγου δεήσαντος 
καταλευσθῆναι, though he had been 


force of pf., be gone, have gone, i. 
4. 8, ii. 1. 6, iv. 3. 30, 5. 24, vi. 1, 
14; be missing, be dead, iii. 1. 32; 
esp. with partic. expressing the 
leading idea, i. 10. 5, 16, ii. 4. 24, 
ill, 3. 5, iv. 6. 3, v. 4. 17. 

οἰωνός, ὁ [R. 2 aF], large bird 
or bird of prey, hence, as auguries 
were taken from the flight of such 
birds, omen, sign, portent, like 
Lat. auis, iii. 2. 9, vi. 1. 23, 5. 21. 

ὁκέλλω, ὥκειλα [R. wed], run 
ashore, strike, of ships, vii. 5. 12. 

ὁκλάζω (ὀκλαδ-), ὥκλασα, crouch 
down, squat, in a dance, sink 
“ὮΝ vi. 1. 10. 

οκνέω, ὀκνήσω, ὥκνησα [ὄκνος 
shrink from an act, ἐράν δι wit 
inf., i. 3. 17; dread, Sear, with μή 


almost stoned to death, i. 5. 14; 
ἐπ᾽ ὀλίγων, few in depth, ἱγ. 8. 11; 
ὀλίγᾶς (sc. πληγάς) παίσειεν, had 
struck too few blows, v. 8.12; παρ᾽ 
ὀλίγον ἐποιοῦντο Κλέανδρον, they 
treated Cleander as a man of no 
account, Lat. parui fécérunt, vi. 6. 
on ap ὀλίγους, in small parties, 
ὀλισϑάνω (ὀλισθ-), 2 aor. ὥλισθον 
slip, iii. 5. 11. 
okie Onpds, d, ov [ὀλισθάνω], slip- 
pery, Lat. lubricus, iv. 3. 6. 

ὁλκάς, ddos, ἡ [ἕλκω], ship of 
burden (named ὁλκάς because orig- 
inally it was towed), merchantman, 
Lat. nauis oneraria, i. 4. 6. See 
$.U. vaus. 

ὁλοίτροχος, ὁ [root FeA, roll, ef. 
Lat. wolud, roll, + τρέχω], rolling 


ΜῊΝ subjv. or opt., ii. 3.9, 4. 22, vi. 


stone, round stone, iv. 2. 3. 


155 ὁλοκαντέω-ὁμόσε 


ὁλοκαυτέω [ὅλος + καίω], bring a 
whole burnt offering, instead of the 
usual portions, offer a holocaust, 
abs. or with acc. of the victim, vil. 
8. 4, 5. 

ὅλος, 7, ov [cf, Lat. saluus, sound, 
safe, solidus, whole], whole, all, 
entire, complete, Lat. totus, i. 2.17, 
ii. 3. 16, iii. 3. 11, iv. 2. 45 in at- 
trib. position, iv. 8. 11. 

᾿Ολυμπίᾶ, as [Ολύμπιος, Olym- 
pian,” Od\vpros, ὁ, Olympus}, Olym- 
pia, situated on the right bank of 
the Alphéus in the district of Pisa- 
tis in Elis. It was never a real 
city, but a sacred precinct with 
temples, public buildings, and a 
few dwelling houses. It was fa- 
mous for its shrines, esp. the tem- 
ple of Zeus, v. 3. 11, containing his 
statue by Phidias, and for the cele- 
bration of the Olympian games, v. 
3. 7, which were held there period- 
ically for over a thousand years. 

᾿Ολύνθιος, ὁ [[Ὄλυνθος, ἡ, Olyn- 


thus], an Olynthian, native of Olyn- 
thus, i. 2. 6, vii. 4. 7, the principal 
city in the Chalcidian peninsula at 
the head of the Toronaic Gulf. In 
spite of the endeavours of Demos- 
thenes, it was destroyed by Philip 
of Macedon, B.c. 347. 

ὁμαλής, és [ἅμα], even, level, 
Lat, aequus, planus, of ground, i. 
5.1; ὁμαλὲς ἐέναι, march over level 
ground, iv. 6. 12. 

ὁμαλός, ἡ, dv [ἅμα], even, level, 
Lat. aequus, planus, of ground, iv. 
6.12; ἐν τῷ ὁμαλῷ, in the plain, 
iv. 2. 16. 

ὁμαλῶς, adv. [ἅμα], evenly, in 
even step or line, i. 8. 14. 

Spnpos, ὁ [ἅμα + R. ap], hostage, 
Lat. obses, vi. 3. 9, vii. 4. 12, 7. 53; 
with gen., iii. 2. 24. 

ὁμϊλέω, ὁμιλήσω, ὠμἔλησα, ὠμέ- 
ληκα [ἅμα - ἴλη], associate with, 
consort with, iii. 2. 28. 

ὁμίχλη, ns (ef. Eng. Mist], va- 
pour, mist, fog, iv. 2. 7. 

ὄμμα, aros, τό [R. or], eye, Lat. 


ὄμνῦμι οΥ ὀμνύω (du-, duo-), ὁμοῦ- 
μαι, ὥμοσα, ὀμώμοκα, ὀμώμο(σ)μαι, 
ὠμό(σγθην, swear, swear to or by, 
take an oath, Lat. turd, abs. or 
with acc. of thing sworn, ii. 2. 9, 
3. 28, 4. 7; with dat. of pers. to 
whom or acc. of gods by whom, ii. 
3. 27, 5. 39, vi. 1. 31, 6. 17, vil. 6. 
18; with inf., vi. 6. 17, vii. 7. 40; 
with fut. inf., ii. 2. 8, 3. 27, 5. 39; 
with ἐπὶ τούτοις, ili. 2. 4. 
ὅμοιος, a, ov [ἅμα], like, similar, 
resembling, of the same kind, Lat. 
similis, of persons and things, V. 4. 
21, 34; with dat., iv. 1. 17, vi. 6. 
16; with inf. (but some read dat.), 
ὅμοιοι ἦσαν θαυμάζειν, they were like 
to wonder, they seemed amazed, iii. 
5.13. Phrases: ἐν τῷ ὁμοίῳ, on a 
level, iv. 6.18; οἱ ὅμοιοι, equal citi- 
zens, peers in its literal sense, a 
name applied to Spartans pos- 
sessed of full civic rights, iv. 6. 
14, 
ὁμοίως, adv. [apa], in like man- 
ner, alike, Lat. similiter, i. 3. 12, vii. 
6.10; ὁμοίως ὥσπερ, like as though, 
just as if, Lat. aequé ac, Vi. 5. 31. 
ὁμολογέω, ὁμολογήσω, etc. ἰ ἅμα + 
R. λεγ], hold the same views about 
anything, agree, admit, confess, 
own, Lat. confiteor, concédd, abs. 
and generaHy parenthetically, also 
with acc. or inf., i. 6. 7, 8, ii. 6. 7, 
vy. 8. 3, vi. 6.17, 26; concede, grant, 
admit, abs., with acc., or with inf., 
vi. 1. 27, 28, 3. 9, vii. 4. 13; in pass. 
used pers. where we use an im- 
pers. const., i. 9. 1, 14, 20. 
ὁμολογουμένως, adv. [ἅμα + R. 
Aey], avowedly, by common con- 
sent ; so With ἐκ πάντων, ii. 6. 1. 
ὁμομήτριος, a, ον [Gpa+ uhryp], 
born of the same mother, iii. 1. 17. 
ὁμοπάτριος, a, ov [ἅμα + πατήρ], 
begot by the same father, iii. 1. 17. 
Opdorar, see ὄμνυμι. 
ὁμόσε, adv. [ἅμα], to the same 
spot; in military phrases, to close 
quarters, hand to hand, Lat. com- 
minus, With θεῖν, χωρεῖν, and ἰέναι, 


oculus ; hence, look, pl., vii. 7. 46. 


iii, 4. 4, V. 4. 26, Vi. 5. 23. 


ὁμοτράπεζος- ὀπισθοφύλαξ 156 


ὁμοτράπεζος, ov [ἅμα + τέτταρες 
+R. wed], at the same table with 
one, @ table companion, Lat. con- 
uictor, a title of honour among 
the Persians, applied to those who 
dined in the same apartment with 
the king, but not at his table, i. 8. 
25, iii. 2. 4, 
ὁμοῦ, adv. [ἅμα], together, at 
once, at the same place or time, 
Lat. simul, ind, of place, time, or 
association, i. το. 8, iv. 2, 22, 5 
29, v. 4. 25; with gen. (some read 
res ὁμοῦ εἶναι, join, meet, iv. 6. 
ὀμφαλός, ὁ [cf. Lat. wmbilicus, 
Μαϑοῖ, Eng. NAVE, NAVEL], navel, 
IV. 5. 2. 
ὅμως, adv. [ἅμα], all the same, 
Jor all that, nevertheless, Lat. ta- 
men, generally followed by δέ or 
preceded by ἀλλά, i. 3. 21, ii. 1. 9, 
lll. 2. 3, iv. 4. 21, v. 8. 19, vi. 5. 30, 
vu. 1. 10; after a concessive par- 
tic., yet, still, however, i. 8. 23, iii. 
1. 10, 2. 16, v. 5.17; so when the 
idea of concession precedes, with- 
out a partic., ii. 2. 17, 4. 23. 
ὄν, see εἰμί. 
ὅν, 566 ὅς. 
ὄναρ, τό, only in nom. and acc., 
dream, vision, Lat. somnium, iii. 
I. 12, 13. Phrase: εἶδεν ὄναρ, he 
had a dream, iii. 1. 11, ef. iv. 3. 8, 
Vi. 1. 22. 
ὀνείρατα, 3d decl., τά [ef ὄναρἼ, 
metaplastic form of ὄνειρος or ὄνει- 
ρον, drcam, vision of the night, Lat. 
.somnium, iv. 3. 13. 
ὀνῆσαι, see ὀνένημι. 
ὀνίνημι (ὀνα-), ὀνήσω, ὥνησα, 
2 aor. mid. ὠνήμην, ὠνήθην, help, 
benefit, aid, assist, iii, 1. 38, v. 6. 
20, vi. 1. 32, vii. 1. 21; pass., de- 
ge benejit, gain advantage, v. 
5. ὦ. 
ὄνομα, aros, τό [R. γνω], name, 
Lat. nomen, i. 5. 4, ii. 5. 15, iv. ἡ. 
21, v. 2. 29; in acc., by name, i. 2. 
23, ii. 4. 28, vi. 2. 3, but in i. 4. 
11 some read dat.; name, fame, 


ὀνομαστί, adv. [R. γνω], by 
name, Lat. nOminadtim, with καλεῖν, 
vi. 5. 24, vii. 4. 15. 

ὄνος, ὁ [cf. Lat. asinus, ass, Eng. 
ASS], ass, il. 1. 6, iii. 5. 9, v. 8. 3: 
ὄνοι ἄγριοι, wild asses, i. 5. 2; ὄνους 
ἀλέτᾶς, see ddérns, i. 5. 5. 

ὄντα, see εἰμί. 
__ ὄξος, ους, τό [R. ax], sour wine, 
ii. 3. 14. 

ὀξύς, εἴα, ὑ [R. ax], sharp, esp. 
to the taste, sour, bitter, of wine, 
Lat. acerbus, v. 4. 29. 

ὅπερ, See ὅσπερ. 

ὅπῃ, relative adv., of place, 
where, Lat. qua, iv. 2. 12, vi. 4. 3; 
of manner, in what way, how, ii. 1, 
19, iv. 5. 1; of direction, whither, 
Vv. 6. 20, vii. 6. 87, In indir. ques- 
tions, i. 4. 8, vi. 1. 21. 

ὁπηνίκα, relative adv., at what 
hour, Lat. quand), iii. 5. 18. 


ὄπισθεν, adv. [ὀπίσω], from be- 
hind, from the rear, behind, at the 
rear, Lat. ἃ tergd, i. το. 6, iii. 4. 14, 
lv. 2. 25, 3. 7, vii. 4. 17; at the 
bottom, v. 4.12. Phrases: ὄπισθεν 
γενόμενος, getting behind, i. 8. 24; 
ποιήσασθαι ὄπισθεν τὸν ποταμόν, put 
the river at one’s back, i. το. 9, ef. 
V1. 5. 18; οἱ ὄπισθεν, the hindermost, 
the rear of an army, Lat. nouissimi, 
Iv, 2. 26, v. 8.16; τὰ ὄπισθεν, the 
rear guard, iii. 4. 40; els τοὔπισθεν 
τοξεύοντες, letting fly behind them, 
Il, 3. 10; ἐκ τοῦ ὄπισθεν ἐπίσποιτο, 
should follow in their rear, iv. 1. 
6. With gen., i. 7. 9, iv. 2. 9, vi. 
5. 16. 
ὀπισθοφυλακέω, ὠπισθοφυλάκησα 
[ὄπισθεν- φυλάττω], guard the rear, 
command or bring up the rear, form 
the rear guard, of generals or sol- 
diers, ii. 3. 10, iii, 2. 36, 3. 8, iv. 2. 
4, vii. 3. 40. 
ὀπισθοφυλακία, ds [ὄπισθεν + 
φυλάττω], office of guarding the 
ΟῚ command of the rear, iv. 6. 
ὀπισθοφύλαξ, axos, ὁ [ὄπισθεν + 
φυλάττω], one guarding the rear ἡ 


renown, ii. 6. 17, v. 6. 17. 


pl., the rear guard, Lat. nouissi- 


157 ὀπίσω-ὅπλον 


mum adgmen, iii. 3. 7, iv. 1. 6, 3. 
20, 7. 8, 8, v. 8. 9. 

ὀπίσω, adv., back, backwards, 
behind one’s back, vi. 1. 8. 

ὁπλίζω (ὁπλιδ-), ὥπλισα, ὦπλι- 
σμαι, ὠὡπλίσθην [R. oer], make 
ready, esp. in arms, arm, equip, 
Lat. armo ; mid., arm oneself, put 
on one’s armour, ii. 2. 15; pass., 
be armed, i. 8. 6, ii. 6. 25, iv. 3. 
91. 

ὅπλισις, ews, ἡ [R. σεπΊ, equip- 
ment, esp. military accoutrements, 
ii. 5. 17. 


ὁπλιτεύω [R. wer], be or serve 
as a hoplite, or heavy-armed sol- 
dier, Vv. 8. 5. 

ὁπλίτης, ov [R. oer], heavy- 
armed soldier, hoplite, 1. τ. 2, 5. 


138, 8. 9, iii. 3. 8, 4. 27, iv. 2. 21, 


γι 2. 8, vi. 5. 27, vii. 3. 45. The 


infantry of a Greek army was 
divided into two classes, the heavy 
infantry and the light infantry. 
For the latter see 8.0. γυμνής, πελ- 
ταστής. The heavy infantry, or 
hoplites, constituted the troops 
of the line, who fought at short 
range and were armed accord- 
ingly. Their defensive armour 
consisted of four pieces: helmet 
(see s.v. κράνος), cuirass (See 8.0. 
Owpat), shield (see 8.0. ἀσπίς), 
and greaves (see 8.0. Kvnpis). 
Their offensive armour consisted 
of two spears (see s.v. δόρυ) and 
a sword (see 8.0. ξίφος). 
These six pieces of armour 

/ are estimated to have 
weighed about 35 kilograms 

(some 75 pounds). The 
hoplite carried them all, 
however, only in action. 

On the march they were 

either conveyed on wagons 

or beasts of burden, or 

were borne by an attend- 

ant. For the hoplite’s or- 
dinary dress, see 8.0. xAa- 


pos. 
étAitikés, 7, dv [R. ver], 
belonging to or composed 
of heavy-armed troops; 
subst., τὸ ὁπλιτικόν, heavy- 
armed corps, heavy infan- 
try, iv. 8. 18, vii. 3. 37, 6. 
26. 
ὁπλομαχία, as [R. cer+ 
R. pax], jighting in heavy 
arms, hence the art of war, 
heavy infantry tactics, ii. 
“Fr 
ὅπλον, τό [R. oer], im- 
plement or tool of any 
sort; pl., gear, esp. arms, 
armour, Lat. arma, ap- 
plied to all sorts of arms, 
both offensive and defen- 
sive, but esp. to the heavy 
armour of the hoplite, i. 
23, ἡ. BO, Ha.) ἢ Re ee 
2, 2, ἵν 3 4, v2 D.” Bee 
8.0. ὁπλίτης and the accompanying 


ὁπόθεν-ὅπου 158 


illustration. By metonymy ὅπλα! ὁπόσος, 7, ov, relative pron., as 


may be used in place of ὁπλῖται, 
heavy infantry, hoplites, ii. 2. 4, iii. 
2. 36, 3. 7, 4. 26, v. 4. 14, vii. 3. 40; 


or to designate the place where the 
arms are piled, place of arms, in 
front of the hoplites’ quarters, ii. 4. 
15, iii. 1. 3, 33, v. 7. 21. Phrases: 
els or ἐπὶ τὰ ὅπλα, to arms, i. 5. 13, 
il. 5. 34, iii. 1. 40; ἐν τοῖς ὅπλοις, 


under arms, Lat. in armis, iv. 3. 
7, Vi. 4.27; τίθεσθαι and προβάλλε- 
σθαι τὰ ὅπλα, see the verbs. 

ὁπόθεν, relative adv., from 
whence, whence, from whatever 
place, Lat. unde, iii. 1. 32, v. 2. 
2, vi. 2.4; in indir. questions, iii. 
5. ὦ, 

ὅποι, relative adv., whither, to 
what place, where, Lat. qué, i. 9. 
13, Υ͂. 5. 16, vii. 7.5; in indir. ques- 
tions, li. 4. 19, iii. 5. 13, vi. 2. 28, 

ὁποῖος, a, ov, relative pron., either 
with dem. preceding or with dem. 
omitted, what kind of, such kind 
ΘΓ... as, such as, Vv. 2. 3, 6. 28; 
with ἄν and subjv., of whatsoever 
sort, whatsoever, Lat. qualiscum- 
que, ll. 2. 2, vii. 7.15; of what sort, 
how constituted, what kind of, Lat. 
qualis, in indir, questions, ii. 6. 4, 
Υ͂. 5. 15. Phrases: ὁποῖόν τί ἐστι, 
what it amounts to, iii. 1. 18; ἡγεῖ- 
Tat τοῦ στρατεύματος ὁποῖον, that 


many as, whatever, as great as, i. 
1. G, 2 1, v. 2. 16, vi. 5.5; with ἄν 
and subjv. or with opt. in prot. or 


in indir. disc., of whatever amount 
or size, a8 many soever as, Lat. 
quantuscum@ue, iii. 2. 21, v. 1. 16, 
Vil. 2.33, 36 ; how much, how large, 
pl., how many, Lat. quantus, in 
indir, questions, i. 8. 27, iv. 4. 17; 
neut. as rel. adv., as far as, iii. 3. 
10. 

ὁπόταν [ὁπότε + ἄν], relative 
adv., whenever, when, Lat. guandd- 
que, with subjv., after a primary 
or secondary tense, ii. 3. 27, v. 2. 
12, 7. 7, vi. 5. 15, vii. 3. 36. 

ὁπότε, relative adv., of time, when, 
at the time when, Lat. cum, quandé, 
with indic., i. 6. 7, iv. 7. 16; with 
Subjv., see ὁπόταν; with opt. in 
indir, disc., by attraction, or in a 
general cond., whenever, i. 2. 7, 5. 
7, li. 6. 27, iii. 2. 36, iv. 6. 20, vii. 
7-17; of cause, since, because, iii. 2. 
2, 15; ὁπότε γε, since at least, see- 
ing that, Lat. quanddquidem, vii. 
Oo. 32. 
ὁπότερος, a, ov, relative pron., 
which of two parties, whichever, 
Lat. uter, iii. 1. 21, 42, 4. 42, vii. 
7. 18. 
ὅπου, relative adv., where, in the 


part of the army which, vii. 3. 37. 


ν 


place where, Lat. ubi, with indic., 
L. 5. ἃ. ili, 1. 2, 2. 34; with ἄν and 


159 ὀπτάω- ὄρθιος 


subjv., wherever, Lat. ubicumque, 
i. 3. 6, iii. 2. 9, iv. 8. 26; with opt. 
in general conditions or in indir. 
disc., i. 9. 15, 27, iii. 1. 32, iv. 5. 
30, 8. 26, vii. 2. 18. 

ὀπτάω, ὀπτήσω, ὥπτησα, ὥπτη- 
μαι, ὠπτήθην [drrés], roast, of 
pread, bake, Lat. coquo, v. 4. 29. 

ὀπτός, 4, 6v, roasted, of bricks, 
baked, burnt, Lat. coctus, ii. 4. 12. 

ὅπως, relative adv., used also as 
final particle. Adv., in what way, 
how, as, ii. 1. 6, vi. 5. 30; so in 
the phrase οὐκ ἔστιν ὅπως οὐκ ἐπιθή- 
σεται, it is not possible that that he 
will not attack, ii. 4. 3; in indir. 
questions, i. 6. 11, iii. 1. 7, v. 7. 7, 
vi. 1.17; in obj. clauses, that, gen. 
with fut. indic., i. 1. 4, 3. 11, iil. 
1. 16, iv. 6. 7, 8. 9, v. 4. 21, with 
subjv., iii. 1. 38, 2. 3, with opt., i. 
8. 13, ii. 6. 8, vii. 1. 38, 2. 12, with 
opt. and ἄν, iv. 3. 14, v. 7. 20, so in 
exhortations with fut. indic., ὅπως 
ἔσεσθε ἄνδρες, see that you be men, 
i. 7.3; after a verb of command- 
ing with fut. indic., instead of 
the infin., vii. 3. 34. In the ellip- 
tical phrase οὐχ ὅπως, not to speak 
of, not only not, vii. 7. 8. As 
final particle (in Anab. used much 
more frequently than iva or ws), 
that, in order that, with subjv. after 
primary tenses, i. 7.4, iv. 6. 15, v. 1. 
12, 5. 20, vi. 3. 13, vii. 3.43; rarely 
after secondary, i. 6. 6, ii. 5. 28, v. 
6. 21, which are generally followed 
by opt., i. 1. 6, 4. 5, ii. 1. 9, ili. 1. 
34, iv. 6. 1, 7.19, v. 1. 16, vii. 2. 18; 
with ἄν and opt., vii. 4. 2. 

ὁράω (dpa-, ὁπ-), ὄψομαι, ébpaxa 
or ἐώρᾶκα, ἑώρᾶμαι OF ὦμμαι, ὥφθην 
(for 2 aor. εἶδον, see the word) [R. 
2 Fep and R. or], see in its widest 
sense, behold, look, observe, per- 
ceive, Lat. uided, abs. (esp. in par- 
enthetical clauses), or with acc., 
i. 3. 2, 12, 9. 28, ii. τ. 4, 16, 3. 3, 
iit, 2..8, 27, iv. 3.6, v. 3. 10; 7.32, 
vi. 5. 10, vii. 2. 18; with acc. and 
partic., i. 5. 12, 8. 21, ii. 3. 12, iii. 


but either of these may be omitted, 
iii, 1. 36, 5. 5, iv. 3. 22, 30, v. 6. 15, 
vi. 1.31; rarely with ὅτι or ws and 
a clause, ii. 2. 5, iii. 2. 29, v. 8. 20, 
vi. 1.27. 4.23; with a rel. or interr. 
clause or with πότερον, whether, 
ii. 5. 18, iii. 1. 15, vi. 5. 16; with 
acc. and inf. (where also a partic. 
has preceded), vii. 7.30 ; dependent 
on an adj., aS ὁρᾶν στυγνὸς ἣν, his 
look was stern, ii. 6. 9, cf. ili. 4. 5. 

ὀργή, as, temperament, temper, 
esp. anger, Lat. ira; as adv., ὀργῇ; 
in a passion, i. 5. 8, ii. 6. 9. 

ὀργίζομαι (ὀργιδ-), ὀργιοῦμαι, etc. 
[ὀργή], be angry, be in α passion, 
be enraged, Lat. irdscor, abs. or 
with dat. of pers., i. 2. 26, 5. 11, 
vii. 1. 25; with ἐάν and subjv., vi. 
1. 30. 

ὀργυιά, as [épéyw], the reach of 
the two arms, as originally a nat- 
ural measure of length, fathom. As 
an exact linear measure the ὀργυιά 
equalled 6 Greek feet, or 1.774 
metres, or about 5 ft., 10 inches. 
See 8.0. πούς. i. 7. 14, iv. 5. 4, Vil. 
1. 30. 

ὀρέγω, ὀρέξω, wpeta, ὠρέχθην (cf. 
Lat. regd, direct, lead, regio, direc- 
tion, tract, Eng. REACH, RIGHT, 
RICH], reach, stretch, reach out, 
vii. 3.29. - 

opeves, 7, bv [ὄρος], consisting 
of mountains, mountainous, hilly, 
Lat. moOntudsus, V. 2. 2. 

ὄρειος, a, ov [ὄρος], belonging to 
mountains, mountainous, Lat. mon- 
tanus, of persons, mountain-dwell- 
ing, vii. 4. 11; subst., τῶν ὀρείων, 
mountaineers, Vii. 4. 21. 

ὄρθιος, a, ov [ὀρθός], straight up, 
steep, Lat. praeceps, of a hill or 
road, i. 2. 21, iv. 1.20, 2.14; subst., 
τὸ ὄρθιον, steep place, ascent, iv. 2. 
3. Phrases: ὄρθιον ἰέναι, march up 
hill, iv. 6. 12 ; ὄρθιοι λόχοι, compa- 
nies in column, a military forma- 
tion that was esp. serviceable in 
attacking a height, iv. 2.11, 3. 17, 
8. 10, 12, 18, 14, 15, v. 4. 22. Tf 


1. 43, iv. 2. 12, v. 1. 11, vii. 2. 16, 


an infantry force were drawn up 


ὀρθός- ὀρυκτός 160 


in line (see s.v, φάλαγξ) with the 
λόχοι (having each a front of 24 
and a depth of 4 men) ranged side 
by side, each company could be 
brought into ‘column’ by advan- 
cing the first enomoty at the right 
(see s.v. évwuoria) a sufficient dis- 
tance before the line and deploy- 
ing the second, third, and fourth 
enomoties to the right to a position 
behind it. The ὄρθιος λόχος thus 
formed would have a front of 6 and 
a depth of 16 men, and spaces 
would be left between the columns. 
But the front and depth of the 
column varied according to circum- 
stances. ‘The essential feature of 
the formation was that the depth 
of the column should be greater 
than the front, and that spaces 
should be left between columns. 
ὄρθός, 4, dv [τ΄ Eng. ortho-dox, 
ortho-graphy], straight, Lat. réct us, 
of a road, direct, vi. 6. 38 ; straight 
up and down, upright, erect, ii. 5. 
23, iv. 8. 20. 
ὄρθρος, ὁ, daybreak, dawn, strict] y 
the twilight just before sunrise, 
Lat. dilticulum, ii. 2. 21, iv: 3. 8. 
ὀρθῶς, adv. [6p06s], in the straight 
or right way, rightly, with reason, 
justly, Lat. récté, i. 9. 30, ii. 5. 6, 
iii. 3. 12, vii. 3. 39. Phrase: ὀρθῶς 
ἔχειν, be proper, iii. 2. 7. 
ὅρια, τά [ef ὁρίζω], limits, of a 
country, boundary, frontier, Lat. 
Sinés, iv. 8. 8, vi. 2. 19. 
ὁρίζω, -οριῶ, ὥρισα, ὥρικα, ὥρισμαι, 
ὡρίσθην [ὅρος, ὁ, boundary, cf. Eng. 
ap-horism, horizon], be aboun dary 
between, as a river, bound, iv. 3. 1, 
8. 1, 2, define, determine, Vii. 7. 36 ; 
mid., set up as one’s boundary, vii. 
5. 15. 
ὅρκος, ὁ, oath, Lat. tusitirandum, 
ii. 5. 3, 41, iii, 1. 20, vii. 3. ἢ: ol 
τῶν θεῶν ὅρκοι, oaths in the name 
of the gods, ii. 5. 7, iii. 1. 22. 
ὁρμάω, ὁρμήσω, ete. Γὁρμή,], start 
quickly, hasten on, rush, start, 
with ἐκ and gen., or ἐπί or κατά 


25; with inf., iii. 4. 44; mid. and 
pass., set out, start, Lat. projicis- 
cor, abs, or with ἐκ or ἀπό and gen., 
L §..9, 2.6, ii. 1.3, δὲ a aay Vi. 1. 
23. Phrases: ὁρμᾶν τὴν ὁδόν, start 
on one’s -march, iii. 1. 8; εἰς τὸ 
διώκειν ὁρμήσαντες, starting in pur- 
suit, i. 8, 25. 

ὁρμέω [ὅρμος, ὁ, anchorage], be 
moored, lie at anchor, Lat. in an- 
coris consistd, i. 4. 6; with παρά, 
off, i. 4. 3. 

ὁρμή, fs, motion, start, ἐν ὁρμῇ 
ὄντων, being on the point of start- 
ing, li. 1.3; in a hostile sense, 
movement, attack, iii. 1. 10; mo- 
tion, impulse, Lat. impetus, iii, 2. 9. 

ὁρμίζω (ὁρμιδ-), ὁρμιοῦμαι, ὥρμισα, 
ὥρμισμαι, ἁὡρμίσθην lef: ὁρμέω], bring 
to anchor, anchor, Lat. deligo ad 
ancoras, iii. 5. 10; mid., come to 
anchor, cast anchor, Lat. in ancoris 
consisto, abs. or with εἰς and acc. 
or παρά and dat., vi. 1. 15, 2. 1, 2. 

ὄρνεον, τό [cf. ὄρνις], bird, Vi. 1. 
23. 
ὀρνίθειος, a, ov [8pvis], belonging 
to @ bird, of bird or fowl; xpéa 
dpvidea, chicken, iv. 5. 3l. 
Spvis, Spvidos, ὁ, ἡ [ef Eng. or- 
nitho-logy), bird, esp. JSowl, hen, 
Lat. gallina, iv. 5. 25. 
"Opévras, ἃ or ov, Orontas, a 
Persian officer of royal blood, con- 
demned and executed by Cyrus 
for treason, i. 6. 1, 5, 6 ff., 9. 29. 
᾿᾽Ορόντᾶς, ἃ (Dor. gen.), Ογουηέαξ, 
a Persian nobleman, son-in-law of 
the king, ii. 4. 8, in command of 
part of the Persian army, ii. 4. 9, 
iii. 4. 13, and satrap of Armenia, 
lii. 5. 17, iv. 3. 4. 
ὄρος, ous, τό, mountain, Lat. 
mons, i. 2. 21, ii. 5. 18, iii. 4. 30, iv. 
3. 7, Κα 3. 11, vi. 6. 5, vii. 4. 22. 
ὄροφος, ὁ [cf. ἐρέφω, cover with a 
roof |, roof of a house, Lat. tectum, 
vii. 4. 16, 
ὀρυκτός, ἡ, by [ὀρύττωἼ, made by 
digging, dug, of a ditch, 1. 7. 14; 
of an entrance to a cave, sunken, 


and acc., iii. 4. 33, iv. 3. 31, v. 7: 


iv. 5. 25, 


161 épitra—soticotv 


ὀρύττω (dpux-), -optiw, wputa, | 22; how great, how much or ic 4 
opwpuxa, ὀρώρνγμαι, ὠρύχθην, dig, |in indir. quest., il. 5. τς πον ne 
Lat. fodid, v. 8.9; of stone, quarry, | neut. as adv., ὅσον, ὁ pa ᾿ 
ΓΟ" ᾿ far as, so far that, iii. 3. 15, vi. 3. 
i. Ede ή, dv [φ΄. Lat. orbus, be- | 14, Migr 9; ig est hi ee 
eft, E orphan, father- | vi. 3. 19; with n als, ὦ Ss 
oO ol ἜΑ vi Ji 8. 6, ili. 4. 3, vii. 3. 7, cf. iv. 5. 10, 

᾿δρχέομαι, ὀρχήσομαι, ὠρχησάμην vii. 3. 20, τ ath je vie bi 
[ef. Eng. orchestra], dance, Lat.|comps., to denote ; paler 
salto, abs. or with acc. of the name ‘arty a Ἢ or : ed warn 
of τ i. 1. 5, 7, | 1. 5. 9, of. Iv. 7. 2d, Vi. 3. 20; 

0 3 ΗΠ ἢ ἡμνν si pet lh ὅσον ἐδύναντο μέγιστον, as 

b χησις ews, ἡ [ὀρχέομαι], dance, | loudly as possible, a nia 
τὰν saltatio, vi. 1. 8, 11. imé poterant, Iv. 5. 18, ef: ¥ ἊΣ 

ὀρχηστρίς, ἰδος, 7 [ὀρχέομαι], 37, 7. 46 ; so hi agiee re τι 5. 16; 
dancing girl, Lat. saltatriz, vi. I. 12, vil. 7. δ᾽ ὅσον ov, a ; ; 

"Opxopévios, ὁ [ Opxopuerds, ἡ, | vii, 2. 5. ! 
Geskaman us], an Orchomenian. γέράῃρν ss "aa te pre: 

ui Orchomenus, ii. 5. 37, iv. | er than ὅσος, q. *, : 
Sig ca y in Arcadia (Kalp&ki). | much, or oot τὸ in Fiparigiart 

Ἷ mA ς j ‘ . > 

bs, ἢ lative ho, | 3. 2, Vi. 5.28; 0 ; Q 
BA a ee 9; with comp., Vii. 7. 28. 
} ur ἢ at-| as, vil. 4.19; with p., 
which, what, Lat. qui, often at ᾽ id pg bs 
Ps 8 

acted to case of antec., which is _ ὅσπερ, ἢ Ps es. δι 
pre omitted or rarely’ attracted | ὅς, g.v., rages «| — ἴα hg 

: e case of rel., i. 1. 2, 2. 2, 5. | sure, 11. 6, 29, 1. 2, 10; 
13 paige 14, iii 1. 6, 17, 2. 20, exactly what, i. 4. 5, iii. 1. 34, 2. 29, 

* 5 “: , . * " . or il 34 
21, 23, v. 1. 8, 5. 20, 7. 38, Vi. 2.| V..4. 04. 
εἰς vit 6. 15; aa rel. clause some- nape ag a sera: ce ΜΕΥ ps 

mes pr i inous plant, Lat. le 5 Diss 

imes precedes the dem., i. 8. 11, minous p » L ‘dene 

ey 26 vi. 4. 9; rarely in indir. legumes, beans, iv. 4. ripe pS ἰὰ 
questions, ii. 4. 18; as dem., Kat ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τ ἀν" cto "ἢ 
ὅς, καὶ of, and he, and they, i, 8. βῆ ase ingyen ras nist’ pice μα 

iii. 4. v. 2. 30, vi. 5. 22, vil. 6. | ὅτων, Tel. n. 

4: Og as advs., saa the words. whichever, whatever, maa τ 

Phrases: ἐν ᾧ, during which time, who, vn hay ἐν τι ‘i Ἐπ i 

meantime, i, 2. 20; ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since, | I. 26, 2. lye rls as Bhs! Bs 

iii. 2. 14; ἐξ οὗ, since when, Vi. 6. in 18, - diate ae “lie 

Py ὗ int where,|to a pl. mt, 1. 1. [ 

ie gona ar 8 ye lg 3.1; in pl. after ἕκαστος, Ἦν 3.03 

ἔχων ᾶ, ov, sanctioned by the} in indir. arr ae δὶ eel rls 

gods’ laws, holy; of persons and ii. 4. 7, V. re cts ts 12, vii 1. 

acts, pious, Lat. religidsus, ii. 6. lowing ovrw, a ἶ ἘΠ Det : 

δε ie 8 26. 28, of. ii. 5. 21, 6.6; intro rye 
eon n ον, relative: pron., as | final clause in niger’ ahs 

correlative to τοσοῦτος OF πᾶς (but 3. 4, ν. 4. 10; ry baba Ut οὐ “i 

these may be omitted), as great as, | whoever tt Aggy ee ρον 

as much as, as many as, Lat. quan- | 7. 25, Vv. 2. " py gener a 

tus, i. 1. 2, 2. 1, ii. 1. 11, 16, 4. 26, | varo, as much a a ᾿ "4 

ae 36 45 v. 8. 18, vii. 3. 20, 4. 32 5 ἐξ ὅτου; ever 8 bores al. 

6 : foll. by inf, the antec. τοσοῦτος Ϊ ὁστισοῦν, ὁτιοῦν 

being expressed or omitted, suffi- 

cient, enough, iv. 1. 5, 8. 12, Vil. 3. 


Phrase: μηδ᾽ ὁντιναοῦν μισθόν, not 
the slightest payment, vii. 6. 27. 


ὀσφραίνομαι.- οὐδείς 162 


ὀσφραίνομαι (ὀσῴραν-., ὀσῴρα-, 
ὀσῴρ-), ὀσφρήσομαι, ὠσφρόμην, ὠσ- 
φράνθην [ὄζω, smell, cf. εὐώδης, + 
R. hep], smell, get a smell of, with 
gen., v. 8. 3. 

ὅταν, relative adv. [ὅτε + ἄν], 
whenever, when, with subjv., iii. 3. 
ey 4. 20, iv. 7. 4, v. 5. 20, vii. 7. 

be 

ὅτε, relative adv., at the time 
when, as, when,- Lat. cum, with 
indic., i. 2. 9, 8. 8, iii. 1. 33, v. 3. 6, 
vii. 7. 10; with subjv., see ὅταν : 
with opt. in a general cond., when- 
ever, as often as, ii. 6. 12, iv. 1. 18. 

ὅτι, conj. [neut. of ὅστις], that, in- 
troducing indfr. disc., with indic., 
after both primary and secondary 
tenses, i. 3. 9, ii. 1. 8, 4. 21, iv. 7. 
20, v. 8. 10, vi. 3.11, vii. 2.16; after 
a secondary tense with opt., i. 6. 
10, iii. 1. 10, vii. 1. 16, or with both 
indic. and opt., i. 2. 21, vi. 3. 11, 
but editt. differ, i. 3.21, 8.13; with- 
out a preceding verb expressed, iy. 
3. 29, v. 8. 8; the infs. found in 
Mss. after ὅτε have been altered 
by editors, iii. 1. 9, v. 6. 34, vi. 1. 
29, vii. 1.5. Introducing dir. disc., 
i. 6. 8, 8. 16, ii. 4.16, v. 4. 10, vii. 
6.7. Causal, because, since, Lat. 
quod, with indic., i. 2. 21, ii. 3. 19, 
iii. 1. 12, iv. 8.6. To strengthen a 
sup., aS ὅτι ἀπαρασκευότατον, as 
unprepared as possible, i. 1. 6, of. 
iii, 1. 45, iv. 3. 29, vii. 3. 7. 

ot, before a vowel οὐκ, before a 
rough vowel οὐχ, neg. adv., not, 
Lat. non, used to deny a fact, i. 2. 
11, 3. 5, ii. 2. 11, 5. 21, iii. 1. 13, 
18, v. 2. 17, vi. 2. 4; accented at 
the end of a clause or sentence, iv. 
8. 3, v. 1. 17; in litotes, as οὐ πάνυ 
πρός, at some distance from, i. 8. 
14, of. ii. 1. 13, 6. 15, vi. τ. 26; in- 
troducing a question expecting the 
answer yes, Lat. ndnne, iii. 1. 29, 
vil. 6.24. Phrases: οὐ φημί, deny, 
Lat. nego, i. 3. 1, iv. 1. 21, vi. 4. 19, 
cf. vii. 7. 19, and see édw; οὐ μή, 
866 μή. 

οὗ, relative adv. [4s], where, Lat, 


quo, i. 2. 22, ii. 1.6, iii. 4. 32, iv. 7. 
27, v. 7. 83; strengthened by δή, 
where in fact, iv. 5. 6; μέχρι οὗ, 
see ὅς. 

ov, dat. of (the only sing. form 
found in Anab.), pers. pron. of the 
third pers., but in Attic Greek al- 
ways refl. and generally indir, refl, 
[pronominal stem é for Fe, cf. Lat. 
sé], of himself, Lat. sui, i. 1. 8, 2. 
8, 9. 29, iii. 4. 42; pl., themselves, 
σφεῖς, V. 7. 18, Vii. 5. 9, σφῶν, iii. 
5. 16, iv. 3. 28, vi. 6. 33, σφίσι, i. 
7. 8, 8. 2, v. 4. 88, σφᾶς, v. 7. 25, 
vii. 2. 16, 

οὐδαμῇ, adv. [ovdauds, none, οὐδέ 
+ duds, an obsolete-word = ris], in 
no way, in no wise, Lat. nulld 
modo, V. 5. 3, vii. 3. 12, 6. 30. 

οὐδαμόθεν, adv. [cf. οὐδαμῇ], 
rom no place, direction, or quar- 
ter, Lat. nulla ex parte, ii. 4. 23, 
ιν, 

οὐδαμοῖ, adv. [ef. οὐδαμῇ], to no 
place, nowhere, vi. 3. 16. 

οὐδαμοῦ, adv. [cf. οὐδαμῇ, in no 
place, nowhere, Lat. nusquam, i. 
10. 16, ii. 2. 18, iv. 5. 18. 

οὐδέ, neg. conj. and emphatic 
adv. [od+ δέ], and not, but not, 
nor yet, nor, connecting a follow- 
ing with a preceding neg. clause, 
Lat. neque, nec, i. 2. 25, 3. 11, 4. 
8, 8. 20, iii. 1.2, 10, iv. 7. 2, Vv. 8. 
25 ; not even, Lat. né... quidem, 
1. 3. 21, 4. 9, ii. 1. 11, iii, 4. 15, 
vii. 6. 35; not at all, by no means, 
1. 3. 12, ii. 5.18; οὐδ᾽ ws, not even 
80, not even in these circumstances, 
i. 8. 21, iii. 2. 235. οὐ μέντοι οὐδέ, 
no by any means however, ii. 2. 

οὐδείς, οὐδεμία, οὐδέν, gen. οὐδε- 
vds, οὐδεμιᾶς (cf. οὐδὲ μιᾶς, Vi, 3. 16) 
[οὐδέ + els], not one, not any, none, 
no, Lat. nullus, ii. 5. 1, iv. 1. 9, vii. 
1. 29; subst., οὐδείς, nobody, Lat. 
nemo, i, 2. 22, 8. 20, iii. 1. 16, iy. 5. 
18; οὐδέν, nothing, Lat. nthil, i. 8. 
20, ii. 2. 11, v. 2. 3, vi. 2. 10; οὐδέν 
Tt, nothing at all, vii. 3. 35; neut. 
as ady., οὐδέν, in no respect, not at 


163 οὐδέποτε-οὕτως 


all, i. 1. 8, 6. 7, vii. 1. 25; with 
comps., οὐδὲν μᾶλλον βλάπτειν, do 
not a bit the more harm, iii. 3. 11, 
of. 13, vii. 5. 9. 
οὐδέποτε, adv. [οὐδέ + ποτέ], 
never, Lat. numquam, ii. 6. 13. 
οὐδέπω, adv. [οὐδέ + πώ], not yet, 
Lat. nondum, Vii. 3.24; separated, 
οὐδὲ viv πω, Vii. 6. 98. 
ov’, see οὔτε. 
ovK, see ov. 
οὐκέτι, adv. [οὐ- ἔτι, no more, 
no longer, no further, 1. 8. 17, to. 
12, iii. 4. 16, vii. 6. 29; οὐκέτι μή 
and subjv., ii. 2. 12, see οὐ μή under 
μή. 
οὔκουν, inferential particle [οὐ + 
οὖν], therefore not, Lat. non igitur ; 
οὔκουν ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ, 1 don’t think 
so then, iii. 5. 6. In old editt. 
sometimes in questions, but see 
οὐκοῦν. 
οὐκοῦν, interr. particle [οὐ + 
οὖν], not therefore? expecting an 
affirmative answer, Lat. ndnne 
igitur, i. 6. 7, ii. 5. 24; as inferen- 
tial conj., therefore, then, so, Lat. 
igitur, iii. 2.19, v. 8. 9, vi. 5. 21, 
vii. 6. 14, 16, 7. 26, 29, 31 (where 
the old editt. have οὔκουν, intro- 
ducing a question). 
οὖν, post-positive particle of in- 
ference, stronger than dpa, there- 
Sore, then, so, in consequence, cer- 
tainly, of course, at any rate, how- 
ever that may be, i. 1. 2, 2. 12, 3. 
5, 5. 6, iii. 1. 20, 2. 30, v. 1. 8, vi. 
6. 15; καὶ γὰρ οὖν, for the fact is, 
i, 9, & 13,17. 
οὗπερ, adv., stronger than oi, 
q.v., just where, iv. 8. 26. 
οὔποτε, adv. [οὐ- ποτέ], never, 
Lat. numquam, i. 3. 5, ii. 5. 7, iii. 
1. 3, 19. 
οὔπω, adv. [ov+7], not yet, 
not before, Lat. nondum, i. 5. 12, 
8. 8, 9. 25, iii. 2. 14; separated, see 
πώ. 
 οὐπώποτε, adv., before a rough 
vowel οὐπώποθ [ov + πώποτε]. never 


οὐρά, ἂς, tail of an animal, Lat. 
cauda; of an army rear, Lat. 
nouissimum dgmen, iii. 4. 38, 42, 
vi. 5. 5. 
ovpayds, ὁ [οὐρά + R.. ay], rear 
leader, i.e. the last man in a file 
who led when the file faced about, 
iv. 3. 26, 29. 
οὐρανός, ὁ, the heavens, the sky, 
Lat. caelum, iv. 2. 2. 
οὖς, ὠτός, τό [R.1 aF], ear, Lat. 
auris, pl., iii. 1. 31, vii. 4. 4. 
οὔτε, neg. conj. [ov+7é], and 
not, Lat. neque, doubled, neither 
, se Ο, 12. 20, ἢ δὶ a me, 
7, 21, v. 3. 1, or followed by ré, 
not only not... but also, Lat. ne- 
que...e, i. 5. 4, iv. 3. 6, va, 
48, : 

οὔτοι, adv. [οὐ - τοί], certainly 
not, Lat. πδη, sané, vii. 6. 11. 

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, dem. pron., 
this, pl., these, freq. as pers. pron., 
he, she, it, pl., they, Lat. hic, gen- 
erally referring to what precedes 
and in pred. positien when used 
with subst., i. 1. 7, 9, 2. 4, 5. 10, ii. 
2. 12, ili. 2. 20, 4. 29, iv. 2. 6, 8. 4, 
v. 8. 15, vi. 4. 5, vil. 1.9, 2. 10, 5.3; 
when the subst. has also an adj., 
οὗτος follows the adj., iv. 2. 6, vii. 3. 
30, cf. i. 1. 7; the art. is sometimes 
omitted, i. 5. 16, esp. with proper 
names, v. 5. 10, vii. 2. 29; rarely 
οὗτος refers to what follows, iii. 1. 
7, 2.17, iv. 6. 3, vit. 3.22. Phrases: 
καὶ οὗτος, he too, even he, iii. 2. 5, 
iv. 1.27, cf.i. 1.11, ii. 6.30, iv. 7.9; 
καὶ ταῦτα, and that too, although, 
with partic., i. 4. 12, ii. 4. 15, of 
ii. 5. 21. 

οὑτοσί, αὑτηΐ, τουτί, strength- 
ened form of οὗτος, applied to a 
person or thing present and imply- 
ing a gesture, this man here, this 
present, without the art., i. 6. 6, 
Vii. 2. 24, 6. 12. 

οὕτως, or, before a consonant, 
οὕτω, adv. [οὗτος], in this way, 80, 
thus, to such an extent or degree, 
under these circumstances, Lat. tta, 


yet, never before, i. 4.18 (see πώ- 
ποτε). 


i. 1.5, 10, 8. 22, ii. 6. 1, 6, iii. 1.31, 


οὐχί-παγκράτιον 164 


2. 10, iv. 1.11, 7. 4, v. 2, 20, 4. 22 


ed 


the army, camp followers, non- 


vil, κι." Ril: potorni 9 ralw 
28, 7. 50; referring rarely to cumbatants, Lat. impedimenta, iii 


what follows, thus, as follows, ii. 
2. 2, iv. 6.10, v.6.12,92.. 
οὐχί, adv., emphatic form of οὐ 
ili, 1. 13, vi. 5. 18, vii. 7. 47. 
ὀφείλω (ὀφελ-), ὀφειλήσω, ὠφεί- 
λησα and ὥφελον, ὠφείληκα, ὥφει- 
λήθην, owe, Lat. débed ; pass., be 
due, of pay, i. 2. 11, vii. 7. 14, 
34; with inf., be bound, ought, 
should, as in wishes, ὥφελε Κῦρος 
ζῆν, would Cyrus were living, Lat. 
utinam uiueret, ii. 1. 4. 
ὄφελος, τό, only in nom. and 
ace. , help, advantage, use, good. 
Phrase: στρατηγοῦ ὄφελος οὐδέν, a 
general is of no use, Lat. ndn pro- 
dest, 1. 3. 11, ef. ii. 6. 10. 
ὀφθαλμός, ὁ [R. or], eye, Lat. 
oculus, i. 8. 27, iv. 5. 12. Phrase: 
ἔχοντες ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς, keeping in 
a cf. Lat. in oculis habére, iv. 
5. 29. 
ὀφλισκάνω (ὀφλ-, ὀφλισκ-., ὀφλή- 
gw, whrov, ὥφληκα, ὥφλημαι [cf 
ὀφείλω], owe or be liable to a money 
fine, be fined, Lat. multor, with ace 
of fine and gen. of cause, v. 8. 1. 
Οφρύνιον, τό, Ophrynium, a city 
on the coast of the Troad, between 
Dardanus and Rhoetéum, vii. 8. δ. 
(Fren Kievi.) 
ὀχετός, ὁ [R. Fex], channel for 
water, ditch, drain, Lat. candlis 
li. 4. 138. 
ὀχέω, ὀχήσω [R. Fex], carry, 


pass., be carried, ride, Lat. uehor, ah 


2. 36, iv. 3. 15, vi. 5. 3; confusion, 
annoyance, in the phrase ὄχλον 
παρέχουσιν, are a bother, iii. 2. 27. 
ὀχυρός, d, dv [R. vex], tenable, 
esp. In a military sense, of a height 
or fortress, strong, secure, fortified 
by nature, i. 2. 22, 24; subst., Ta 
ὀχυρά, holds, strongholds, iv. 7. 17. 
ὀψέ, adv., late, Lat. sérd, ii. 2. 16 
vi. 5. 31. 
ν 
ὄψεσθαι, 566 ὁράω. 
» » / 
ὀψίζω, ὀψίσθην [ὀψέ], do a thing 
late, be or come late, iv. 5. 5. i 
ὄψις, ews, ἡ [R. or |, aspect, look, 
appearance, 11. 3. 15; sight, spec- 
tacle, show, vi. 1. 9. 


IT. 


παγκράτιον, τό [was+R.1 κρα], 
the pancratium, iv. 8. 27, an ath- 
letic contest in which, as the name 


vant 


with ἐπί and gen., iii. 4. 47. ‘as 


ὄχημα, aros, τό [R. Fex], car- 
rier, supporter, in the widest sense, 
as a wagon, ship, or animal, vehi- 
ge ia nie ; of the earth, iii. 
2. 19. 

ὄχθη, ns, height, esp. high bank 
of a stream, bluff, iv. 3. 8, 5, 17, 
23. (Poetic in Attic, except here.) 

ὄχλος, ὁ [R. Fex], mass, throng, 
crowd, company, press, Lat. turba, 
of men, ii. 5. 9, iv. 1. 20, v. 4. 34, 
vil. 1. 18; as a military phrase ap- 
plied to the undisciplined part of 


No, 52. 


signifies, all the powers of the 
fighter were called into action. It 
comprised boxing (see 8.0. πυγμή) 
and wrestling (see s.v. πάλη), but 
in the boxing the hands were not 
bound with thongs, since these 
would have been a hindrance in 


165 παγχάλεπος-πάλη 


wrestling, nor was the blow deliv- 
ered with clenched fist but simply 
with the fingers bent. In the wres- 
tling the object was not the simple 
fall, but the fighting was continued 
on the ground. The struggle was 
maintained until one of the con- 
testants was either disabled or de- 
clared himself defeated. The pan- 
cratium was one of the regular con- 
tests at the Greek national games. 
παγχάλεπος, ov [πᾶς + χαλεπός], 
very difficult, v. 2. 20. 
παγχαλέπως, adv. [mas + xare- 
més], very hardly. Phrase: πρὸς 
Ξενοφῶντα παγχαλέπως εἶχον, they 
were very hard on Xenophon, vii. 
5. 16. 
παθεῖν, see πάσχω. 
πάθημα, ατος, τό [Πὰ. σπα],υογοοῖυ- 
edness, misfortune, Vii. 6. 30. 
πάθος, ous, TO [R. ora], experi- 
ence, accident, mishap, trouble, 
matter, Lat. cdsus, i. 5. 14, iv. 5. 7. 
παιᾶνίζω, ἐπαιάνισα [παιάν, pae- 
an], sing the paean, in honour of 
Apollo or Artemis; as a war song 
the paean followed the prayer and 
immediately preceded the war cry 
and attack, i. 8.17, 10. 10, iv. 3. 19, 
8. 16, v. 2. 14; it was sung in ac- 
knowledgment of any blessing, 6.0.» 
of an omen, iii. 2. 9, at a feast after 
the libation preceding the sympo- 
sium, vi. 1. 5, and in sacred pro- 
cessions, vi. 1. 11. 
παιδεία, as [mats], bringing up, 
education, training, Lat. institutio, 
iv. 6. 15, 16. 
παιδεραστής, of [παῖς + ἔραμαι], 
lover of boys, Vii. 4. 7. 
παιδεύω, παιδεύσω, etc. [παῖς], 
train up a child, educate, Lat. in- 
stitud, pass., i. 9. 2, 3. 
παιδικά, τά [παῖς], beloved youth, 
favourite, Lat. déliciae, ii. 6.6, ν. 
8. 4. 
παιδίον, τό [mais], infant, little 
child, iv. 7. 13. 
παιδίσκη, ns [mais], maiden, 


boy, girl, but in Anab. always 
masc. in sing., boy, son, Lat. puer, 
pl. without article, children, Lat. 
liberi, i. 1. 1, 7. 9, ii. 6. 12, iii, 1. 3, 
iv. 6. 3, v. 3. 10, vii. 8.22. Phrase: 
ἐκ παίδων, from boyhood, iv. 6. 14. 
παίω, παίσω, ἔπαισα, -πέπαικα, 
ἐπαίσθην [root παξ, cf. Lat. pauio, 
strike, paued, be struck with fear, 
Eng. ana-paest], strike, hit, beat, 
strike at, Lat. caedd, abs., with 
acc., or With κατά or πρός and acc., 
i. 8. 26, ii. 3. 11, iii. 1. 29, 2. 19, iv. 
2. 8, 6. 2, V. 7. 21, 8. 16, vi. 6. 27. 
Phrase: ὀλίγας παίσειεν, v. 8. 12, 
see ὀλίγος. 
πάλαι, adv., of old, long ago, 
long, long since, Lat. tamdudum, 
iam pridem, i. 4. 12, iv. 8. 14, vii. 6. 
37,7.48. Phrase: οἱ πάλαι ἥκοντες; 
the early comers, iv. 5. 5. 
παλαιός, ad, dv [πάλαι, cf. Eng. 
palaeo-graphy, palae-ontology |, old 
in years, Lat. wetus, iv. 4.9; comp. 
παλαίτερος, somewhat old, iv. 5. 35. 
Phrase: τὸ παλαιόν, in old times, 
ih, “. 1. 

παλαίω, ἐπάλαισα, ἐπαλαίσθην 
[πάλη, cf. Eng. palaestra], wrestle, 
Lat. luctor, iv. 8. 26. 

πάλη, ns [πάλλω, poise, sway], 
wrestling, Lat. luctatio, iv. 8. 27, 


No. 53. 


practised among the Greeks in two 
forms. In the first, named πάλη 


young girl, Lat. puella, iv. 3. 11. 
παῖς, παιδός, ὁ, ἡ [wats], child, 


ὀρθή or ὀρθίᾶ, the wrestlers stood, 


πάλιν-παρά 1 


and the bout ended when one of 
them had received a fall. Three 
falls meant defeat. In the second 
named ἀλένδησις or κύλισις, lit. roll- 
ing (¢f. κυλίνδω), the struggle con- 
tinued on the ground until one of 
the combatants was disabled or 
declared himself defeated. The 
first was the form practised in the 
πένταθλον, the second that in the 
παγκράτιον, συ. Before all gym- 
nastic and athletic contests among 
the Greeks, the body was well 
rubbed with oil, to make it sup- 
ple; before wrestling, it was al 
sanded, in order to furnish a firmer 
hold. 
πάλιν, adv. [¢f. Eng. palim-psest, 
palin-ode}, of place, back, back- 
wards, Lat. rirsus, i. 3. 16, ii. 3. 
24, i Sa te ts ἃν Χ: of 
time, again, over again, a second 
time, Lat. iterum, i. 1. 3, 6. 7, ii. 1. 
23, iii. 2. 9, vi. 6. 37, vii. 2. 25. 
παλλακίς, ἰδος, ἡ, concubine, kept 
mistress, Lat. paelex, i. 10. 2. 
παλτόν, τό [ cf. πάλη], lance, jave- 
lin, spear, used in the Anab. only 
by Persians and the Mossynoeci, 
not by Greeks. Those of the Mos- 
ομαβραδει which they used for hurl- 
5) were six cubits long. i. 5. 14 
“galore ii 
_ παμπληθής, ἐς [πᾶς + R. wal, 
in full numbers, vast, multitudi- 
nous, iii. 2. 11. 
πάμπολυς, πόλλη, πολυ [πᾶς + R. 
wha], very much, great, or numer- 
ous, very many, Lat. permultus, ii. 
4. 26, iv. 1. 8, vii. 7. 35. Phrase: 
ἐπὶ πάμπολυ, over a great extent 
Jar and wide, with gen., Vii. 5. 12. 
παμπόνηρος, ov [πᾶς + R. oral, 
= bad, utterly depraved, vi. 6. 
πανουργία, as [πᾶς -- R. ᾿ 
knavishness, witty Vii. 5. il 
πανοῦργος, ov [was+R. Fe 
that will do Hash of abla δὴ 
ina bad sense, villainous, rascally, 
knavish, Lat. perditus, ii. 5. 39, 6. 


66 


is 

παντάπασι, «σιν before a vowel, 
adv. [was], altogether, wholly, en- 
tively, Lat. prorsus, i. 2. 1, ii, 5. 91, 
v. 2. 20, vii. 6. 23 ; after a neg., at 
all, Lat. omnind, ii. 5. 18, iii. 1. 38 
IV. 2. 3. 
πανταχῇ, adv. [πᾶς], everywhere, 
Lat. ubique, ii. 5. 7. 
| πανταχοῦ, adv. [πᾶς], every- 
where, Lat. ubique, ii. 6. 7, iv. 5. 30. 

παντελῶς, adv. [πᾶς + τέλος], 
wholly, utterly, Lat. prorsus, ii. 2. 
1l, vii. 4. 1. 

πάντῃ, adv. [πᾶς], in every way, 
throughout, on all sides, i. 2. 22, ii. 
3. 3, πα ἃ 
παντοδαπός, ή, dv [was], of every 
sort, manifold, of all sorts, Lat. 
omne genus, i. 2. 22, iv. 4.9, vi. 4. 5 
᾿ πάντοθεν, adv. [πᾶς], from every 
side or quarter, on every side, Lat. 
undique, iii. 1. 12, vi. 6. 3. 
παντοῖος, a, ov [was], of all sorts 
or kinds, Lat. omne genus, i. 5. 2 
li. 4. 14. 
| πάντοσε, adv. [πᾶς], in every 
direction, everywhere, Lat. passim 
Vil, 2. 23. | 
πάντως, adv. [was], altogether, 
thoroughly, at any rate, anyhow, 
Vi. 5. 21, vii. 7. 43. 
πάνυ, adv. [was], very, altogether, 
Lat. ualde, 1. 4. 10, 9. 27, ii. 2. 3, 
ui. 4. 15, iv. 5.27, v.6.7; very well, 
vi. 1. 31; after a neg., at all, Lat. 
omnino, i, 8. 14, vi. 1.26. Phrases: 
πάνυ ἐν καιρῳ, just at the right time, 
iii. 1. 39; πάνυ μὲν οὖν, to be sure, 
vil. 6. 5. 
πάομαι, ἃ supposed pres., not in 
use, fut. πάσομαι, ἐπᾶσάμην, wéra- 
μαι, acquire, perf. as pres. possess, 
have, i. 9. 19, iii. 3. 18, vi. τ. 12, vii. 
6.41. (Poetic verb, except in Xen.) 
παρά, before a vowel παρ᾽, prep. 
with gen., dat., and acc. [cf. para- 
in composition in Eng. words, as 
para-graph, para-lyse, etc.], be- 
side, generally used with persons. 
With gen., from beside, trom the 


20, 


presence of, from, through, Lat. ἃ, 
1, 1. δ, 3. 16, 6. 7, ii. 1.17, 3. 18, 


167 παραβαίνω- παρακαλέω 


6. 14, iii. 4. 8, v. 2. 25, 6. 18, vi. 6. 
24, vii. 3.7; with a pass. verb, by, 
i. 9. 1. With dat., beside, by the 
side of, at or on the side of, with, 
at, Lat. apud, i. 1. 5, 4. 3, 8. 27, 9. 
29, ii. 6. 26, iv. 1. 24, 3. 29, vi. 2. 
2, vii. 7.47; τὰ wap ἐμοί, my for- 
tunes, my side, i. 7. 4, ef. iv. 3. 27, 
vi. 3. 26. With acc., to the side of, 
to, towards, along to, Lat. ad, 1. 2, 
12, 7. 8, ii. 2. 3, iv. 3. 13, vii. 3. 24, 
cf. i. 6.3; along, near, by, past, i. 
2. 18, 5. 5, 7. 15, 10. 7, il. 4. 14, 
iii, 1. 32, vi. 2. 18, cf. ὥρμουν παρὰ 
τὴν Κύρου σκηνήν, they anchored off 
Cyrus’s tent, i. 4. 3; beside, be- 
yond, against, contrary to, in viola- 
tion of, Lat. contra, ii. 1. 18, 5. 41, 
v. 8. 17, vii. 7. 17; of time, during, 
ii. 3.15. Phrase: παρ᾽ ὀλίγον, see 
ὀλίγος, vi. 6. 11. In composition 
rapé signifies along, alongside, by, 
beside, beyond, amiss. 

παραβαίνω [R. Ba], step beyond, 
transgress, break, of a treaty, iv. 
1. 1. 

παραβοηθέω [R. BoF + θέω], go 
to the aid or rescue, iv. 7. 24. 

παραγγέλλω [ἀγγέλλω], pass 
along α message or esp. an order, 


and acc. of place or ἐν and dat., i. 

2. 3, 7. 12, ili. 4. 38. 

mapayo [R. ay], lead along or 

aside, conduct, lead on, iv. 8. 8, 

vii. 2. ὃ, 6. 3. Phrases: els τὰ 

πλάγια παράγειν, lead into position 

on either flank (said when the ap- 
proach is from the rear, and the 
enemy in front is moving in a 
hollow square), iii. 4. 14; παρῆγον 
ἔξωθεν τῶν κεράτων, led on (their 
companies) out of the way of (7.e. 

behind) the wings, iii. 4.21; wap 

ἀσπίδα παραγαγόντας τὴν ἐνωμο- 
rlav, moving the enomoty (which 
had been in column) to the left (so 
that it became part of the line of 
battle), iv. 3.26; so παράγειν τοὺς 
λόχους, bring the companies (which 
had been marching κατὰ κέρας) into 
the line, iv. 6. 6. 

mapaywyh, fs [R. ay], convey- 
ance, esp. along the coast, trans- 
portation, v. 1. 16. 

παράδεισος, ὁ [Persian word, cf. 
Eng. paradise], park, pleasure 
garden, when used for game, pre- 
serve, Lat. uiudrium, i. 2. 7, 4. 10, 
ii. 4. 14. 

παραδίδωμι [R. 50], give over to 


pass the word, command, ‘give 
order, give out, direct, abs. or with 
acc., i. 8. 15, 16, iii. 5. 18, iv. 3. 27, 
vii. 3.6; with dat. or acc. of pers. 
and inf., i. 1. 6, 8. 3, ii. 2. 21, iii. 
5. 18, iv. 3. 14, 6. 8, φ΄. iv. 3. 29, Vv. 
2. 12; with inf. alone, iii. 4. 14, iv. 
1. 16, vi. 5. 25; with ὅπως and a 
clause, vii. 3. 34. Phrases: παραγ- 
γέλλει els τὰ ὅπλα, he calls to arms, 
i. 5. 13; xara Ta παρηγγελμένα;, 
according to orders, ii. 2. 8, ¢f. Vi. 
3.18; παρήγγελτο, orders had been 
given, iii. 4. 3, Vi. 5. 25. 

παράγγελσις, ews, ) [rapay- 
γέλλω], word of command; ἀπὸ 
παραγγέλσεως, at the word, iv. 1. 5. 

παραγίγνομαι [R. γεν], be by or 
beside, be present or at, be at one’s 
side, come to, arrive, abs. or with 
dat. of pers., i. 1. 11, 2. 3, v. 6. 8, 


a person, give up, deliver over, 
surrender, Lat. trado, ii. 1. 8, 12, 
iii. 1. 27, 4. 2, iv. 2.1, 8. 26, V. 4. 
30, vii. 2. 14; of the watchword, 
give out, vii. 3. 34; of gods, grant, 
allow, vi. 6. 34. 

παραδραμεῖν, see παρατρέχω. 

παραθαρρύνω [θρασύς],  em- 
bolden, encourage, cheer up, il. 4. 
1, iii. 1. 39. 

παραθέω [θέω], run past, out- 
run, iv. 7. 12. 

mapaivéw (αἰνέω, αἰνέσω, ἤνεσα, 
-ἥνεκα, -ἤνημαι, -yvéOnv [ αἶνος, ὁ, tale, 
praise], praise), recommend, ad- 
vise, exhort, Lat. admoneo, 1 ἢ, ψι 
Vv. 7. 35, Vil. 3. 20. 

παραιτέομαι [alréw], intercede 
with a person for another, with 
περί and gen., Vi. 6. 29. 

παρακαλέω [R. Kad], call to 


vi. 6. 33, vii. 2. 34, 7.30; with els one’s side, summon, invite, Lat. 


παρακαταθήκη- παράταξις 108 


arcess0, i. 6. 5, ii. 5. 81, iii. 1. 32, 
iv. 7. 11, v. 6.1, vi. 1. 3, vii. 6. 22: 


iv. 5. 20; with εἰς and acc., vi. κ᾿ 


Ped 
hat tal , 15. 


call on, urge on, exhort, iii. 1. 44, 
vi. 5. 24; with ἐπί and ace., iii. 1. 


24. 


παραπλέω [R. πλεξΕ], sail along 
or past, coast, sail, Lat. praeterue- 
hor, abs. or with εἰς and δύ V. I. 


παρακαταθήκη, 7s [R. θε], what! 11, 6. 10, vi. 2. 1, vii. 2. 7. 


is put down beside one, a deposit 


for safe keeping, Lat. dépositum, 
Δ. 
παράκειμαι [κεῖμαι], lie near, be 
set near, Vii. 3. 22. 
παρακελεύομαι [R. xed], exhort, 
encourage, urge, Lat. adhortor, 
with dat. of pers., to which may 
be added the inf., i. 7.9, 8. 11, iv. 
2. 11, v. 7. 19. 
παρακέλευσις, ews, ἡ [R. xed], 
encouraging, cheering on, iv. 8. 28. 
παρακολουθέω [R. κελ], follow 
beside one, accompany, abs., iii. 3. 
4, iv. 4. 7. 
παραλαμβάνω [λαμβάνω], receive 
from one, take into one’s posses- 
sion, Lat. accipio, vii. 6. 41, 7. 47; 
as a military phrase succeed to the 
command, Lat. succédd, vi. 4. 11, 
vii. 8. 24; take along, v. 6. 36, vii. 
2. 17, 
παραλείπω [λείπω], leave at one 
side, leave out, pass by, Lat. omittd, 
Vi. 3. 19, 6. 18. 
παραλύπέω [λυπέω], give trouble, 
be refractory, abs., ii. 5. 29. 


παραπλήσιος, a, ov, Or os, ον 
[πλησίος], close beside, nearly re- 
sembling, bike, i. 3. 18, ths 

παραρρέω [ῥέω], flow beside, with 
παρά and acc., v. 3.8; of snow, run 
beside, run off (after melting), slip 
off, with dat. of pers., iv. 4. 11. 

παρασάγγης, ov [Persian word], 
parasang, ἃ Persian road measure, 
equal to about 30 stadia (ii. 2. 6, ν. 
5. 4), used not only of distances 
travelled (as below), but also of 
length and distance in general, i. 
7. 15, 10. 1, ii. 4. 10, iii. 4. 7, iv. 5- 
10. The Greeks marched usually 
from 6 to 7 parasangs a day, i. 2. 
ὃ, 7, 4. 10, 5. 1, iii. 4. 10, iv. 7 ἢ: 
once 8 parasangs, i. 2.6; the long- 
est march was ten, i. 2.10, 11; the 
shortest five, i. 2. 10, 14, 4. 1, ii, 4. 
25, iv. 6. 4, except when the pres- 
ence of enemies or other causes 
reduced the distance still more, i, 
7-1, 14, iii. 4. 18, iv. 5. ὃ. 
παρασκευάζω [ R. rv |, get ready, 
prepare, provide, Lat. pard, ii. 6. 8 ; 


παραλύω [iw], loose from the 
side, of a rudder, unship, v. 1. 11. 

παραμείβομαι (ἀμείβω, duel, 
ἤμειψα, -ημείφθην, change), dep. mid. 
and pass., change one’s position ; 
παραμειψάμενος εἰς τὸ αὐτὸ σχῆμα, 
changing to the same formation, i. 
to. 10. 


παραμελέω [R. ped], disregard, 


mid., make one’s preparations, get 
ready, arrange, procure, provide, in 
past tenses, be all ready for, abs. 
or with acc., i. 9. 27, το. 18, iii. 1. 16, 
36, iv. 6. 10, v. 2.21; with fut. par- 
tic., or ὅπως and fut. indic., i. 10. 6, 
πεν 34, 'v. 4. $1, vi. 1. 33; with 
inf. with or without were, iii. 2. 24, 


Vii. 3.35; with els and acc., i. 8.1, vi. 


neglect, abs. or with gen., ii. Βι 7, 
vii. 8. 12. 

παραμένω [R. μα], stay by, stand 
by, remain loyal, ii. 6. a Wh 2. 36. 

παραμηρίδια, τά [ unpds, ὁ, thigh], 
ie pieces, armour for the thighs, 
i. 8. 6. 

παραπέμπω [πέμπω], send along, 
despatch, of troops sent from the 


4.21. Phrases: παρασκευασαμένους 
τὴν γνώμην, with our minds made 
up, Vi. 3.17; οἴκαδε παρασκευαζόμενος, 
getting ready to go home, vii. 7. 57. 
παρασκενή, ἧς [R. σκυ], prepa- 
ration, of an armament, Lat. ap- 
paratus, i. 2. 4. 
παρασκηνέω [R. oxa], aor., en- 
camp beside, iii. 1, 28. 


παράταξις, ews, ἡ [Π. Tax |, order 


main body to the front or flanks, 


of battle, v. 2. 13, 


169 παρασχήσω-παρίημι 


παρασχήσω, see παρέχω. Ἢ 
παρατάττω | I. τακ]; draw vt 
side by side, only in pass. In ye iy 
παρατεταγμένος, drawn up γε σεῦ 
of battle or in battle array, os 
instructus, i. 10, 10, iv. 3. 3, 8.9, 
. 13. 
᾿ beainc tT [τείνω], stretch out, 
extend, with παρά τῇ aCC., Vil. 3. 
- mid, intr., i. 7. lo. 
gyticemer ig Ge], put beside, 
of food, set before, serve, Lat. or 
pond, iv. 5. 30, 31; mid., put — 
of arms, lay at one’s side, Vl. I. 5. 
παρατρέχω [τρέχω]; run along, 
run by, abs. or with παρά and ace., 
iv. 5. 8, vii. 1. 23, 4. 18; run an 
or across, iv. 7.6, 7; with εἰς an 
ec., iv. 7. 11. i | 
" uiaka! adv. [χρῆμα]; Par 
παρὰ τὸ χρῆμα, on the ἜΡΟΝ, of a 
payment, in cash, Vil. 7. 24, “ 
παρεγγνάω [rapeyyin], pass ὦ 
word, esp. of command, give “μὰ 
ders, exhort, suggest, abs., lie 
inf., or with acc. and inf., iv. ade 
7. 24, 25, 8. 16, vi. 5. 12, Vil. 3. 40 ; 
with ταῦτα, vii. 1.22. Phrase: ὅτε 
παρεγγυῷτο, whenever word was 
passed, iv. τ. 17. 


πάρειμι [εἶμι], go or pass by, 


come by, pass, abs. or with acc., iii, 


2. 35, 4. 37, iv. 2. 13, 5. 30, ν. 4. 80, 
vii. 8. 14; go or come along, il. 4. 
48, vi. 5. 12, vii. 3. 46, with παρά 
and acc., vi. 5.23. Phrase: οἱ πα- 
provres, nt who ie forward, 
. of speakers, V. 1.0. 
yet rer [ἐλαύνω], all 4 
h by or past, pass in review, 
roid i ay 16, 8. 12, vi. 5. 26 ; with 
ἐπί and gen., i. 2. 16, 11. 4. 46; with 
acc., ride past, review, 1. 2. 17, iil. 
5. 4. Ι . 
παρέρχομαι [ἔρχομαι]ὕ, pass by, 
Big oases trough, go along, abs. 
or with acc., 1. 4. 4, 7. 16, 8. 16, il. 
4. 26, av. 7. 123 with εἴσω ΟΥ̓ ἔξω 
and gen., i. το. 6, ii. 4.12; come by 
others to the front, come forwa d, 
esp. of speakers, V. 5. 24, vi. I. δὰ 
6. 21, of. vii. 5. 11; of time, go ε 
elapse, pass, 1. 7. pitta idly 8. 1. 
vos, See πα " 
seen (Ἢ ocx] ᾽ hold beside or 
ready, afford, provide, offer, Sur- 
nish, give, supply, Lat. praebeo, i. 
1.11, 3. 22, 24, 4.5, 10, 11, il. 1. 
2, iv. 1. 22, 6. 13, v. 3. 9. ἢ. I, Meg 
6. 22; render, make, 11. 5. 13, 6. 27, 
iii. 5. 9; produce, arouse, cause, 


παρεγγύη, ns (Cf. éyyudw |, Pe 
passed, order, command, Vi. 5. 1». 

παρεδεδραμήκεσαν, See παρα- 
igi ΓΝ. eo], be beside, be at 
hand or near, be there, be present, 
have come, arrive, Lat. adsum, abs. 
or with dat., i. 1. 1, 4. 8, 5. 15, Ἧ, 
4. 19, 6. 14, iii, τ. 17, 46, lV. 3. 9, 
v. 5. 8, 6. 29, vi. 6. 20 ; with els, 
ἐπί, or πρός and acc., previous mo- 
tion being implied, i. 2. 2, vi. 4. 15, 
6. 26, vii. 1. 11, 35, 2.5; gr aie 
possession, with dat., have, ii. 3.9, 
iii. 2, 18; impers., it is possible, “τ 
5. 6, vii. 1. 26, so acc. abs., Υ. "ΝΣ ‘ 
Phrases: τὰ παρόντα with or with- 
out πράγματα, the present state of 
things, circumstances, 1. 3. 3, hig Mh 
34, iv. 1. 26; ἐν τῷ παρόντι, in rata 
present crisis, ii.5.8; ἐκ τῶν — »- 
των, from these straits, 111. 2. ὁ. 


‘inspire, i. 1. 11, iii. 1. 18, 2. 27, V. 
8. 15, vi. 5. 29°; mid., offer for 
self, contribute, display, vi. 2. 10, 
vii. 6.11. Phrase: mpayyara πα- 
ev, 8006 πρᾶγμα. ' 
yp πλεῖ ΩΝ πάρειμι, be beside. 
Παρθένιον, τό, Parthenium, ἃ 
town in Mysia with a citadel, near 
Pergamus, Vii. 8. 15, 21. : 
Παρθένιος, ὁ, the Parthenius, a 
river flowing between Paphlagonia 
and Bithynia into the Pontus, v. 6. 
9, vi. 2.1. (Bartan Tchai.) ns 
παρθένος, ἡ. maiden, virgin, Liat. 
uirgod, iii. 2. 25. 
IIapiavol, οἱ πῃ μηρι ahaa, 
ives of Parium, Vil. 3. 19. 
yypcseer i! [tye], let by, let — 
give way, yield, allow, abs. or Wi 
inf., Lat. concedd, v. 7. 10, vii, 2. 
10, 


Πάριον- πάτριος 1 


Πάριον, τό, Parium, a city on 
the northern coast of the Troad on 
the Propontis, vii. 2. 7, 25, 3. 20. 
(Kamares.) 

παρίστημι [R. στα], set by or 
near; intrans. in pf. and 2 pt., 
stand by or beside, abs. or with 
dat., v. 8. 10, 21; aor. mid. trans., 
set by one’s side, produce, bring 
JSorward, of victims at sacrifice, vi, 
I. 22, of a soothsayer, vii. 8, 3. 

πάροδος, ἡ [686s], way by or 
along, passage, i. 7- 1d, iv. 1. 2; 
pass, i. 4. 4, iv. 2, 24. 

παροινέω, ἐπαρῴνησα, πεπαρῴ- 
ynka, ἐπαρῳνήθην [πάροινος, ad- 
dicted to wine, οἶνος], act or treat 
tnsolently when in wine, Υ. 8. 4. 

παροίχομαι [οἴχομαι}, be gone 
by or past ; subst., τῶν παροιχομέ- 
γων, the past, ii. 4. 1, 

Παρράσιος, ὁ, a Parrhasian, na- 
tive of Parrhasia, i. 1. hy ae ae A 
vi. 5. 2, a district or canton in 
southwestern Arcadia, 

Παρύσατις, «δος, ἡ, Parysatis, 
daughter of Artaxerxes L., and 
half-sister as well as wife of Da- 

rius Nothus, king of Persia, i. 1, hi 
4. 9, mother of Artaxerxes II. and 
of Cyrus the Younger, i. 7. 9, ii. 4. 
27. Of an intriguing and cruel 
character, she had an almost abso- 
lute power during the life of her 
weak husband. She favoured the | 
designs of Cyrus and saved his | 
life, i. 1.4; afterwards, by her in- 
fluence with Artaxerxes, she com- | 
passed the death of all the leaders 
who had opposed her favourite son. 

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, gen. παντός, πά- 
σης, παντός [πᾶς], all, Lat. omnis ; 
with a subst. generally in pred. | 
position, all, the whole, i. 1. 6, 5. | 
9, 9. 9, ii. 1. 16, 5. 38, iii, 1. 13, v. 
2. 11, vii. 2. 11, ‘but in this sense | 
the art. is freq. omitted with plu- 

rals, i. 8. 9, iii, 1. 18, 2. 22, iv. 5. 
20, v. 4. 15, vi. 2. 16; rarely in 
attributive position, ii, 3. 18, v. 6. 
7; without the art., every, Lat. 
quisque, i. 9. 18, ii. 5. 9, iii. 5. 11, 


70 


vi. 1. 21, vii. 2. 8; with numerals, 
in all, altogether, iv. 3.2. Subst., 
πάντες, everybody, all, i. τ. 2, ii. 3. 
ll, v.1.3; πᾶν, πάντα, everything, 
i. 4. 10, iii. 2. 28, vii. 3.138. Neut. as 
ady., πάντα, in all respects, or rela- 
tions, utterly, i. 3. 10, 9.2. Phrases: 
περὶ παντὸς ἐποιεῖτο, with inf., he 
considered it all-important, see περί, 
i. 9. 16, of. ii. 4. 3; οὐκ ἂν ἐπὶ πᾶν 
ἔλθοι; would he not make every 
effort ? cf. Lat. omnia Jacere, iii. 1. 
18; διὰ παντὸς πολέμου ἱέναι, wage 
every kind of war, iii. 2. 8; ἡ τοῦ 
παντὸς ἀρχή, the command in chief, 
Vi. 2,12; διὰ παντός, ever, through- 
out, vii. 8. 11. 

Πασίων, wvos, ὁ, Pasion, of Me- 
gara ; joined Cyrus with a force, i. 
2. 3, but deserted when his troops 
went over to Clearchus, i. 2. AF Ae a 

πάσχω (παθ-, πενθ.), πείσομαι, 

ἔπαθον, πέπονθα, [R. σπα], experi- 
ence, feel, be treated, undergo, 
stand, suffer, Lat. patior, i. 3. 5, 
li. 5. 5, iii. 1. 18, 17, 2. 6, iv. 3. 2, 
Vv. 8. 15, vii. 1. 16; with τὶ, suffer 
hurt, be wounded, i. 8. 20, vi. 1. 6, 
also euphemistically for die, like 
our if anything happens to one, 
Lat. sit quid himdanitus acciderit, 
V. 3. 6, vii. 2. 14. Phrases: εὖ or 
ἀγαθὸν παθεῖν, with ὑπό and gen. of 
pers., receive benefits from one or 
be well treated by one, i, 3. 4, ν. 5. 
9, Vii. 7.8; κακῶς παθεῖν, See κακῶς, 
iii. 3. 7, V. 4 2, vii. 3. 88; δίκαια or 
ἔσχατα παθεῖν, see the adjs., ii. 5. 
24, v. 1. 15. 

πατάσσω, πατάξω, ἐπάταξα, beat, 
strike, iv. 8. 25, vii. 8. 14, 

Πατηγύᾶς, ἃ (Dor. gen.), Pate- 
gyas, ἃ Persian follower of Cyrus, 
he 5 1, 

πατήρ, τρός, ὁ [ef. Lat. pater, 
Sather, Eng. FATHER], father, i. 4. 
12, 9. 7, vi. 4. 8; as a title of love 
to a benefactor, vii. 6. 38. 

πάτριος, a, ov [πατήρ], of or 
belonging to a father, hereditary, 
old established, ancestral, Lat. pa- 
trius, iii, 2, 16, v. 4. 27, vii. 8. δ. 


171 


πατρίς, (dos, ἡ [πατήρ], father- 
land, native land, Lat. patria, 1. 3. 


πατρίς-πεῖρα 


23, iv. 4. 1, v. 6.6, Ζ ἃ γὰ κ᾿. 
11; used with a proper subst. to 


3, iii. 1. 4, iv. 8. 4; pl., iii. 1. 3, vil. | form a city name, like Lat. campus, 
me a ee 


1. 29, 
πατρῷος, a, ov [πατήρ], belong- 
ing to or inherited from one’s 
father, applied to concrete objects, 
ancestral, hereditary, Lat. pater- 
nus, i, 7. 6, iii. 1. 11, vii. 2. 34, 3. 
dl. 
παῦλα, 7s [παύω], stopping point, 
means of stopping, prevention, V. 
7. 2. i 
παύω, παύσω, ἔπαυσα, πέπαυκα, 
πέπαυμαι, ἐπαύθην [root παν, little, 
cf. Lat. paucus, few, pauper, poor, 
Eng. Few], make cease, bring to an 
end, stop, Lat. cohibeo, sist0, il. 5. 
2, with acc. of partic., ll. 5. 13 ; 
mid., cease, leave off, stop, Jinish, 
end, rest, Lat. désisto, abs. or with 
gen., i. 2. 2, 5. 3, 6. 6, iii. 5. 6, Υ͂. 6. 
31, vi. 4. 14;.with nom, of partic., 
iii. 1. 19, iv. 2. 4, vil. 6. 9; be rid 
of, with gen.,v.1.2. Phrase: παύ- 
cavras Thy φάλαγγα, giving up the 
phalanx formation, iv. 8. 10. 
Παφλαγονία, as [Iapdaywr], 
Paphlagonia, v. 5. 6, vi. 1. 1, 14, 
a district in Asia Minor on the 
Pontus. 
ΠΙαφλαγονικός, ἡ, dy [Παφλα- 
γών], Paphlagonian, Vv. 2. 22, 4. 13 ; 
subst., ἡ Παφλαγονική (sc. χώρα), 
Paphlagonia, vi. τ. 18. 
ΠΠαφλαγών, ὄνος, 6, α Paphla- 
gonian, native of Paphlagonia, 1. 
8. 5, v. 5. 12, 22, vi. 1. 1, 14. 
πάχος, ous, τό [ἢ way], thick- 
ness, V. 4. 18. 
παχύς, εἴα, ¥ [R. way], thick, 
large, stout, Lat. Crassus, V. 4. 25; 
thickset, Lat. dénsus, iv. 8. 2. 
πέδη, ns [R. wed], fetter, shackle, 
for the feet, Lat. pedica, but gen- 
erally pl. like Lat. compedés, iv. 3. 8. 
medivds, 7, dv [R. πεδΊ, plane, 
Jlat, level, vii. 1. 24, in comp., v. 
~ 2. 
᾿ πεδίον, τό [R. wed], level ground 


or open country, plain, Lat. plani- 
εἰδῶ, campus, i. 1. 2, ii. 5. 18, iii. 2. 


Eng. -field, i. 2. 11, vii. 8. 7, 8. 
L πεζεύω, ἐπέζευσα [R. wed], travel 
on foot or by land, V. 5. 4. 


πεζῇ, adv. [R. wed], on foot, 


afoot, Lat. pedibus, as opp. to go- 
_ on horseback, ili. 4. 49, or to 
sailing, by land, i. 4. 18, v. 4. 5, Vi. 
4. 12. 


πεῖός, ἡ, dv [R. wed], on foot, 


afoot, walking, as opp. to riding, 
Lat. pedes, pedester, Vil. 3. 45; 
subst., πεζός, foot soldier, pl. in- 
fantry, i. 10. 12, ii. 2. 7, ill. 3. 18, 
v. 6.9. Phrase: δύναμιν πεζήν; in- 
fantry force, i. 3. 12. 


πειθαρχέω, ἐπειθάρχησα [R. m8 + 


ἄρχω], obey a superior, obey, defer 
to, with dat., i. 9. 17. 


» 
πείθω {(πιθ-), πείσω, ἔπεισα, ἔπι- 


Gov, πέπεικα OF πέποιθα, πέπεισμαι, 
ἐπείσθην [R. πιθ], persuade, win 
over, induce, prevail upon, Lat. 
persuaded, abs, or with acc., 1. 2. 
26, 6. 7, ii. 1. 10, 5. 16, iii. 1. 26, v. 
5. 11; with added inf. or ws and a 
clause, ii. 6. 2, v. 1. 14, Vi. I. 19, 4.14; 
in a bad sense, bribe, vii. 2.2; mid. 
and pass., be talked over, be brought 
round, be won over or prevailed 
upon, i. 1.3, 4. 18, vii. 5. 12; hence, 
obey, yield, comply with, Lat. pareo, 
abs. or with dat., i. 2. 2, 3. 15, ii. 
2. 5, iii. 2. 29, 30, v. 1. 18, vii. 3. 39; 
believe, vii. 8. 3. 


πεινάω, πεινήσω, érelvnoa, πεπεί- 


νηκα [R. oa], be hungry, fast, i. 
g. 27. 


πεῖρα, as [R. περ], trial, proof, 


Lat. periculum, so év ἐμαυτῷ πεῖραν 
λαβών, since I have tested it in my 


own person, Lat. qui periculum 
fect, v. 8.15; πεῖραν λαβεῖν Δεξίπ- 
που, put Dexippus to the test, Vi. 6. 
33; πεῖραν ἤδη ἔχετε αὐτῶν, you 
have already put them to the proof, 
i.e. you know all about them, iii. 2. 
16; hence, Κύρου δοκούντων ἐν πείρᾳ 
γενέσθαι, reputed to have had inti- 
mate relations with Cyrus, i. 9. 1. 


πειράομαι-πελταστής 172 


πειράομαι, πειράσομαι, ἐπειρᾶσά- 
μὴν, πεπείρᾶμαι, ἐπειράθην [R. περ], 
try, attempt, endeavour, Lat. οὕ ΠΟΥ, 
generally with inf., i. 1. 7, 9. 19, ii. 
3. 23, 6. 3, ili. 2. 39, iv. 6. 15, v. 4. 25, 
vi. 2. 11, vii. 2. 15; with ὅπως and 
subjv., iii. 2. 3; abs. or with an 
adv., iv. 2. 4, 3. 6, vii. 2.37; make 
a trial of, test, Lat. expldrd, with 
gen., ili. 2. 38, 5. 7. 

πείσᾶς, πεισθῆτε, see πείθω. 

πείσει, πείσομαι, sce πάσχω. 

πειστέον, verbal of πείθω [R. 
m0], one must obey, obedience must 
be rendered, ii. 6. 8, vi. 6. 14. 

πελάζω (πελαδ-), πελάσω Or πελῶ, 
ἐπέλασα, ἐπελάσθην [πέλας, adv., 
near, cf. πλησίος}, draw near, ap- 
proach, with dat., iv. 2.3; abs., i. 
8. 15 (where ὑπελάσᾶς is commonly 
read). (Poetic, except in Xen.) 

Πελληνεύς, dws, ὁ [Πελλήνη, Pel- 
lene], a Pellenian, native of Pel- 
lene, Vv. 2. 15, an ancient city in 
Achaia near the boundary of 
Sicyon. 

Πελοποννήσιος, a, ov [vats], be- 
longing to Peloponnésus, Pelopon- 
nesian, i. 1.6; subst. pl., Pelopon- 
᾿ nesians, vi. 2. 10. 

Πελοπόννησος, ἡ [ναῦς], Pelo- 
ponneésus, i.e. Pelops’s Island (Mo- 
rea), the peninsula constituting the 
southern half of Hellas, i. 4. 2. 

πελτάζω (πελταδ-) [πέλτη], be a 
peltast, serve in the peltasts, v. 8. 5. 

Tira, dv, Peltae, a city in 
Greater Phrygia, on the Maean- 
der, i. 2. 10. 

πελταστής, οὔ [πελτάζω], pel- 
tast, targeteer. The peltasts dif- 
fered from other light-armed 
troops (see 5.0. γυμνής, ἀκοντιστής, 
τοξότης, σφενδονήτης) in carrying ἃ 
Shield (see s.v. πέλτη). There is 
no evidence in the Anab. that they 
had other defensive armour, but 
doubtless they were offensively 
armed with a sword as well as with 
spears. Of the latter they carried 
probably several, which were hurled 
with (v. 2. 12) or without the thong. 


After the expedition of the Ten 
Thousand, they were developed 
by the Athenian Iphicrates into a 


distinct branch of the service, 
combining the peculiar advantages 
both of heavy-armed and light- 
armed troops. Iphicrates added 
to the shield a linen corselet, in- 
creased the length of the spear 
and sword, and invented an im- 
proved sort δὲ boots, which took 
his name. The peltasts among the 
Ten Thousand were largely ‘Thra- 
cians, i. 2. 9, but those of other 
races are specifically named, i. 2. 
6. This sort of troops was of 
Thracian origin, ef. vi. 3. 4, vii. 3. 
40. In contrast with hoplites, the 
peltasts were detailed to service 
that required celerity of move- 
ment, iv. 3. 22, 4. 20, 6. 25, 8. 18, 
cf. vi. 3.4. In the Anab. they are 
sometimes contrasted with bow- 
men, i. 2. 9, iv. 8. 15, with bowmen 
and slingers, iv. 3. 27, v. 6. 15, and 
once with the wirol, 1.6. light-armed 
troops of any sort not armed with 
the shield, v. 2. 16. But they 
probably usurped the place of the 
ἀκοντισταί, v. 6. 15, who are but 
seldom mentioned; and since the 
bowmen and slingers were few in 
number relatively to the peltasts, 
the term πελτασταί is constantly 
used as a designation of the light- 
armed troops in general as con- 
trasted with the heavy-armed. Cf. 
i. 2. 9, where in an enumeration 
of the forces of Cyrus 2000 pel- 
tasts are named as representing 
the total of the light-armed troops 
in contrast with 11,000 hoplites. 


173 πελταστικός- πένης 


These 2000 peltasts included the 
500 γυμνῆτες and 200 τοξόται men- 
tioned in i, 2. 3, 9. The same 
contrast of light-armed troops, 
designated as peltasts, with heavy- 
armed troops is found also in i. 7. 
10, το. 7, equal to τὸ πελταστικόν 
in i. 8. 5, where all the light-armed 
troops of Cyrus are meant, iii. 3. 
8, 4. 5, iv. 1. 26 (cf. iv. 1.28, where 
γυμνῆτες is equivalent to the pre- 
ceding πελτασταί), v. 2. 4, vi. 2. 16, 
vii. 1. 23, 3. 44 (cf. vil. 3.37). Cf. 
also v. 8. ὃ. 

πελταστικός, ἡ, dv [πελταστής], 
of or belonging to peltasts ; subst., 
τὸ πελταστικόν (80. στράτευμα), the 
peltast force, the light-armed 
troops, i. 8. 5, vii. 3. 37, 6. 29. 

πέλτη, ns, shield, target, small 
and light as compared with the 


hoplite’s shield (see s.v. ἀσπίς), 


No. δῦ, 


that part of the armour of the pel- 
tasts (see s.v. πελταστής) which 
distinguished them from other 
light-armed troops. The πέλτη 
consisted of a wooden frame cov- 
ered with leather. Sometimes it 
was covered wholly or in part 
with bronze, v. 2.29. In shape it 
was either elliptical or crescent 
shaped, generally the latter, to 
judge from representations of it in 
works of art. This was the form 
of shield attributed to the Ama- 
zons (see 8.0. ᾿Αμαζών). The πέλτη 


was of Thracian origin, οὗ vii. 4. 
7, 17, but was used by other bar- 
barian tribes, vi.*1. 9. The text 


in ii. 1. 6 is probably corrupt, 
since there is no evidence that any 
of the Persian troops were armed 
with πέλται. In i. το. 12 πέλτη is 
equivalent to δόρυ or λόγχη; 
unless the reading should be 
παλτῷ. ' 
πεμπταῖος, a, ον [πέντε]. On 
the jifth day, of persons ; hence, 
of corpses, ἦσαν πεμπταῖοι, they 
had lain unburied five days, Vi. 
4. 9. 
πέμπτος, η; ov [πέντε], jifth, 
Lat. guintus, iii. 4. 24, iv. 7. 21. 
πέμπω, πέμψω, ἔπεμψα, πέ- 
πομῴα, πέπεμμαι, ἐπέμῳθην, 
send, despatch, send word, send 
a@ message, Lat. mittd, abs. or 
with acc., i. 9. 25, ii, *3. 1, ili. 1. 
OL eRe UE MRL 19, Way 1, 
vii. 3. 1; there may be added the 
dat. of pers., i. 3. 8, vii, 1. SI, 
or πρός, παρά or εἰς and acc. of 
pers., i. 1. 8, iv. 3. 27, v. 4. 2 or él 
or εἰς and acc. of place, i. το. 14, 
vii. 2.24; the purpose is expressed 
by a fut. or pres. partic., i. 3. 14, 
v. 2. 10, vi. 1.2, ὅπως with a clause, 
iv. 7. 19, the inf., v. 2. 12, or πρὸς 
τοῦτο, Vii. 2. 13. 
πένης, ητος, ὁ [R. ora], toiler, 
day-labourer, poor man, Vil. 7. 


28. 


πενία-- Πέργαμος 174 


mevia, as [R. oma], poverty, 
narrow means, Lat. péniiria, vii. 
6. 20. . 

πένομαι [R. oa], toil, work be- 
cause of poverty, be poor, iii. 2. 26. 

πεντακόσιοι, αἱ, a [πέντε + ἑκα- 
τόν], jive hundred, Lat. quingenti, 
ls 2. Gy 1. 2. 12, Wh 3. 16. 

πέντε, indecl. [πέντε], five, Lat. 
quinque, i. 2. 8, ili. 4. 7, vii. 7. 12. 

πεντεκαίδεκα, indecl. [πέντε + 
δέκα], fifteen, Lat. quindecim, i. 4. 
11, iv. 4. 3, vi. 5. 5. 

πεντήκοντα, indecl. [amévre + 
εἴκοσι), ἤν, Lat. quinqgudginta, 
i. 4. 19, ii. 6. 15, iii. 4. 10. 

πεντηκοντήρ, ρος, ὁ [πέντε + εἴ- 
κοσι]ὔ, commander of fifty men, i.e. 
of half a company (see πεντηκοσ- 
Tvs), iii. 4. 21. 

πεντηκόντορος, ἡ [πέντε + εἴκοσι 
+R. ep], sc. vais, jifty-oared ship, 
penteconter, vi. 6. 5, 22, in v. 1. 15 
called simply ναῦς, g.v. The pente- 
conter was a war vessel of the 
pirate type. It had single banks 
of oars, twenty-five on each side, 
and in the development of ship- 
building preceded the bireme. See 


πεπτωκότα, 866 πίπτω. 

πέρ, an intensive and post-posi- 
tive enclitic particle, very, just, 
even, in Attic prose found only 
joined to rels. and particles; see 
ἐάνπερ, εἴπερ, καθάπερ, καίπερ, olds 
wep, ὅσπερ, ὥσπερ, etc. 

πέρα, adv. [R. wep], beyond, fur- 
ther, Lat. ultra; of time, οὐκέτι 
πέρᾶ, no further, vi. 1. 28; with 
gen., wépa μεσούσης τῆς ἡμέρᾶς, in 
the afternoon, Vi. 5. 7. 

περαίνω (περᾶν-), περανῶ, ἐπέ- 
pava, πεπέρασμαι, ἐπεράνθην [R. 
περ], bring to an end, carry out, 
execute, accomplish, Lat. exsequor, 
iii. 1. 47, 2. 32, vi. 1. 18. 

περαιόω, περαιώσω, ἐπεραίωσα, 
πεπεραίωμαι, ἐπεραιώθην [R. wep], 
set over a stream, transport; mid. 
and pass., pass over, cross, Lat. 
transicio, vii. 2. 12. 

mépav, adv. [R. wep], on the 
Jurther side, Lat. trans, ii. 4. 20, 
ili. 5. 12, iv. 3.24; with a verb of 
motion, across, over, over to, iv. 3. 
29, vi. 5. 22, vii. 2.2; τὸ πέρᾶν, the 
Jurther bank, Lat. ilterior ripa, 
lili, 5. 2, iv.3.11; with gen., across, 


on the further bank, i. 5.10, iv. 3. 3. 

περάω, περάσω, érépaca, πε- 

« πέρᾶκα [R. wep], drive right 

through, pass through, cross, 
of water, iv. 3. 21. 


8.0. τριήρης. It was not decked 
throughout, and might, like the tri- 
reme, carryaram. Like the πλοῖον, 
vais, and τριήρης, it was provided 
with masts and sails. 

πεντηκοστύς, vos, ἡ [πέντε + εἴ- 
κοσι], the number fifty, a body of 
Jifty men, i.e. half a company (see 
λόχοι), ili. 4. 22. 

ἄἅνται, πέπᾶται, See mdouat. 

πεπόνθᾶσιν, πεπονθώς, see πά- 
σχω. 

πεπρᾶκέναι, πεπράσεται, 566 πι- 


πράσκω. 


Πέργαμος, ἡ, or Πέργαμον, 
τό, Pergamus or Pergamon (the 
nom. is not found in Anab., and 
both forms are found in the Greek 
and Roman authors, but the word 
occurs earliest probably in Xen. 
Hell. iii. 1,6, where it is fem.), a city 
in Mysia, in the valley of the Caicus 
and district of Teuthrania, settled 
in early times by Aetolians, vii. 8. 
8, 23. After the partition of the 
empire of Alexander, it became the 
capital of a kingdom embracing 
the whole western half of Asia 
Minor, and was adorned with fa- 
mous works of art and with libra- 
ries. Here parchment ( pergaména) 
was first used. Under the Romans 


175 πέρδιξ -πέριξ 


it was the capital of the province 
of Asia. (Bergama.) 

πέρδιξ, ixos, 6, ἡ [cf Eng. par- 
tridge|, partridge, i. 5. 3. 

περί, prep. with gen., dat., and 
acc. [φ΄ peri- in Eng. words, as 
eri-helion, peri-patetic, peri-od], 
on all sides, about, round. With 
gen., not in the literal sense, but 
indicating the subject about which 
some mental act centres, about, 
with respect to, concerning, because 
of, for, Lat. dé, i. 2.8, 7. 2, li. 1. 
12, 5. 8, iii. 2. 15, v. 5. 7, 8.4, Vi. 3. 
9, vii. 6. 85; expressing compara- 
tive value (cf. reprylyvopuat, περίειμι; 
be superior), in the phrases περὶ 
παντὸς ποιεῖσθαι, consider all-impor- 
tant, i. 9. 16, ii. 4. 3, wept πλείονος 
ποιεῖσθαι, consider more important, 
v. 6, 22, vii. 7.44, περὶ πλείστου ποι- 
eto bar, consider most important, i. 9. 
7, iii. 2. 4, of. Lat. maximi, plurimi, 
pliris facere. With dat. rarely, of 
position, round, about, Lat. circa, 
of parts of the body, i. 5. 8, vii. 4. 4. 
With acc., of position, about, all 
round, round, Lat. circd, i. 6. 4, 
iii. 5. 10, iv. 4. 3, 5. 36, v. 2.5; of 
persons, about, attending on, 1. 2. 
12, 5. 7, 6. 4, but sometimes the 
person himself is included, as οἱ 
περὶ "Apiaiov, Ariaeus and his peo- 
ple, ii. 4. 2, cf. iv. 5.21, vi. 3. 25; 
of things, περὶ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια ἦσαν, 
they were busy about the provisions, 
iii. 5. 7; of time, about, i. 7. 1, ii. 
I. 7, Vi. 5.32, vii. 8.12; of relation, 
esp. towards persons, in respect to, 
to, in one’s dealings with, Lat. dé, 
i. 4. 8, 6. 8, iii. 2. 20, vii. 6. 38, 
towards things, v. 7.33. In com- 
position περί signifies round, about, 
(remaining) over, but especially 
superiority, excess, and intensity, 
like per- and super- in Latin. 

περιβάλλω [βάλλω], throw round 
or about, of persons, embrace, Lat. 
amplector, iv. 7. 25; mid., throw 
oneself round, compass, get pos- 
session of, Vi. 3. 8. Phrase: ὄπι- 
σθεν περιβαλλόμενοι τὰς πέλτᾶς, 


shifting their shields to their backs, 
vii. 4. 17. 

περιγίγνομαι [ R., γεν, be superior 
to, get the upper hand, conquer, 
abs. or with gen., Lat. superd, i. τ. 
10, ili. 2.29, vii. 1.28; remain over, 
issue, result, with wore and inf., v. 
8. 26. 

περιεῖδον [R. Ftd], overlook, al- 
low, suffer, permit, Lat. sind, with 
acc. of pers. and partic., vii. 7. 40, 
49, 

περιειλέω (εἰλέω, -εἰλήθην, press), 
press round, put or wrap round, 
with περί and acc., iv. 5. 56. 

περίειμι [R. eo], be superior to, 
excel, be greater, abs. or with gen., 
i. 8. 13, 9. 24, iii. 4. 33. 

περίειμι [εἶμι]. go round or about, 
traverse, abs. or with acc., iv. 1. ὃ, 
2. 2, vii. 1. 33. 

περιέλκω [ἕλκω], drag about, vii. 
6. 10. 

περιεστῶτας, see περιίστημι. ἡ 

περιέχω [R. vex], surround, Lat. 
cingd, i. 2. 22. 

περιίστημι [R. ora], place 
round ; intrans. in 2 aor. and 2 pf. 
act., stand round or about, iv. 7.2 ; 
τοὺς περιεστῶτας, the bystanders, 
Lat. circumstantés, vi. 6. 6. 

περικυκλόομαι [κυκλόω], sur- 
round completely, beset, vi. 3. 11. 

περιλαμβάνω [λαμβάνω], seize 
round, embrace, vii. 4. 10. 

περιμένω [R. pal, wait round, 
abide, remain, abs. or with ἄχρι or 
ἔστ᾽ ἂν and subjv., ii. 1.6, 3. 2, v. 1. 
4, vii. 3. 41; wait for, expect, with 
acc. of pers., ii. 1. 3, 4. 1. 

Περίνθιος, ὁ [Πέρινθος, a Per- 
inthian, a native of Perinthus, vii. 
$8 12, 

Πέρινθος, ἡ, Perinthus, a city in 
European Thrace on the Propontis 
founded by the Samians in 599 B.c., 
and called in the fourth century 
a.p. Heracléa (hence Eregli), ii. 6. 
2, vii. 2. 8, 4. 2, 6. 24. 

πέριξ, adv. [περί], round, about, 
ii. 5. 14, iv. 4. 7; as prep., with 
gen., round, vii. 8. 12. 


περίοδος-περσίζω 170 


περίοδος, ἡ [656s], way round, 
circumference, circuit, iii. 4. 7, 11. 
περιοικέω ri 
or on the shore of, v. 6. 16. 
περίοικος, ov [R. Fix], dwelling 
round ; subst., περίοικος, ὁ, a Perive- 
cus, V.1.15. In Lacedaemonia the 
Perioeci were the free inhabitants 
of the towns, except Sparta itself, 
the provincials, who enjoyed civil 
but not political liberty and were 
eligible to the lower military of- 
fices. They were distinguished on 
the one hand from the Spartans, 
on the other from the Helots. See 
Λακεδαίμων. 
περιοράω [R. 2 Fep], overlook, 
allow, suffer, permit, Lat. sind, 
with acc. of pers. and partic., vii. 
3. 3, 7. 46. 
περίπατος, ὁ [wdros, ὁ, step, path, 
cf. Lat. passus, step, pace, perpe- 
tuus, uninterrupted, Eng. paru, 
foot-rap, peripatetic], a walking 
round, place for walking, walk, ii. 
4. 15. 
περιπέτομαι [R. wer], fly round, 
vi. 1. 23, 
περιπήγνυῦμι [R. παγῇ, make 
Jreeze round; pass., be frozen 
round or on, iv. 5. 14. 
περιπίπτω [R. wer], fall round, 
hence of persons, fall on to pro- 
tect, embrace, i. 8.28; fall foul of, 
fall upon, vii. 3. 38. 
περιπλέω [R. wkeF], sail round, 
coast round, with ἀπό and eis, i. 2. 
21, vii. 1. 20. 
περιποιέω [ποιέω], make remain 
over; mid., save for oneself, ac- 
quire, gain, v. 6. 17. 
περιπτύσσω (πτύσσω, πτυγ-, 
-πτύξω,͵ ἔπτυξα, -ἐπτυγμαι, -επτύχθην, 
Τοϊα), fold round, enfold, outflank, 
i. 10. 9, 
mepippéw [ῥέω], flow round, en- 
circle, i. 5.4; flow round and off, 
Jail of from, of fetters, iv. 3. 8. 
περισταυρόω (σταυρόω, ἐσταύ- 
pwoa, -εσταύρωμαι, ἐσταυρώθην [R. 
στα], fence with pales), surround 


t. Fue], live round 


been enclosed with a stockade, vii. 
4. 14. 

περιστερά, Gs, dove, pigeon, Lat. 
columba, i. 4.9. Acc. to the Syrian 
tradition the mythical queen Semir- 
amis, daughter of the Syrian god- 
dess Astarte, was changed into a 
dove, 

περιτρέχω [τρέχω], run about, 
iv. 5. 8. 

περιττεύω, ἐπερίττευσα [περί], be 
over and above, of number, esp. as 
a military phrase, outnumber, out- 
Jlank, iv. 8. 11. 

περιττός, ἡ, dv [περί], more than 
enough, superfluous, to spare, over 
and above, vii. 6. 31; subst., οἱ 
περιττοί, outflanking troops, iv. 8. 
11; τὸ περιττόν, surplus, v. 3. 13; 
Ta περιττά, superfluous or unnec- 
essary articles, iii. 2. 28, 3. 1. 

περιτυγχάνω [R. trax], happen 
round, fall in with, meet, vi. 6. 7. 

περιφανῶς, adv. [R. ha], visibly 
JSrom every point, manifestly, nota- 
bly, iv. 5. 4. 
περιφέρω [R. hep], carry round, 
pass round, Vii. 3. 24. 
περίφοβος, ov [φόβος], in great 
alarm, much frightened, iii. 1. 12. 
Πέρσης, ov, a Persian, native of 
Persia, and applied to all subjects 
of the king whether real Persians 
or not, i. 2, 20, 5. 8, ii. 3. 17, iii. 2. 
25, iv. 4. 17, vii. 8.9. Persia in its 
restricted sense was Persis (old 
Persian Parsi, now Faris, Fari- 
stan), a district on the northern 
shore of the Persian Gulf. In Per- 
sis was the earliest royal city Pa- 
sargadae, and also the: residence 
of Darius and Xerxes, near which 
grew up Persepolis. The empire 
of the Persians was extended by 
conquest until it included, before 
the time of Alexander the Great, all 
Asia from the Aegéan to northern 
India, as well as Egypt. This vast 
empire was divided into 20 sa- 
trapies. 
περσίζω [Πέρσης], behave like u 


with a paling fence, plpf. pass., had 


Persian, talk Persian, iv. 5. 34. 


177 Περσικός- Πισίδαι 


(Περσικός, 7, 6» [Πέρσης], of 
Persia, Persian, i. 2. 27, iii. 3. 16, 
iv. 4. 16; subst., τὸ ἹΠερσικόν, the 
Persian, name of a dance, de- 
scribed in vi. 1. 10. 

περσιστί, adv. [περσίζω], in Per- 
sian, of speech, iv. 5. 10. 

περυσινός, 7, dv [mépuct, adv. , 
last year], of a@ year ago, last 
year’s, V. 4. 27. ue 

πέταλον, τό [cf. ἀναπετάννῦμι, 
Eng. ρϑέα!, leaf, Lat. folium, v. 
4. 12. 

πέτομαι (weT-, πετε-; πτα-), -πτή- 
σομαι and poet. πετήσομαι; ἐπτόμην 
[R. wer], fly, Lat. wold, i. 5. 3, vi. 
I. 23. 

πέτρα, as [cf. rérpos], rock, liv- 
ing rock, mass of rock, cliff, ledge, 
Lat. saxum, i. 4. 4, iv. 2. 3, 3. 11, 
vi. 4. 3. 

cerpouktat as [wérpos + βάλλω], 
stone throwing, stoning, Lat. lapi- 
datio, vi. 6. 15. 

mérpos, ὁ [ cf. Eng. petral, petri-fy, 
petr-oleum], stone, Lat. lapis, 1V. 7. 

12, vii. 7. 54. 

πεφυλαγμένως, adv. [φυλάττω], 
circumspectly, cautiously, ll. 4. 24. 

πῇ, indef. adv., enclitic, in any 

way, anyhow, somehow, lv. 8: 11, 
13; as a dat. fem. in form πῇ in 
the phrase πῇ μὲν... πῇ δέ, in 
some respects ... im others, lil. I. 
12, but in late editt. τῇ. So πῇ 
pev... dmwore dé, vi. 1. 20. 

πηγή, is, fountain head, spring, 
source, Lat. fons, always pl. in 

Anab., i. 2. 7, iii. 2, 22, iv. 1. 3. 

πήγνῦμι (ray-), παγήσομαι, ἔπηξα. 
πέπηγα, ἐπάγην, and poet. ἐπήχθην 

[R. way], make fast or solid, Sixty 
Freeze, Lat. geld, iv. 5. 3, vii. 4. 3. 

πηδάλιον, τό [R. wed], oar, steer- 
ing oar, paddle, rudder, Lat. gu- 
berndculum. Each boat or ship 
carried two, one on each side of 
the vessel. These were removable, 

v. 1. 11. Originally simply oars, 
they were later developed into 
paddles with broad blades. See 


τορος, τριήρης. See also 8.0. xuBep- 
νήτης. ᾿ 
πηλός, ὁ [ο΄ Lat. palus, swamp], 
clay, mire, mud, Lat. lutum, 1. 5. 
7. π᾿. 
πῆχυς, ews, 6, prop. forearm; 
hence, as a natural measure of 
length, cubit, the distance from 
the elbow to the tip of the middle 
finger, Lat. cubitum, iv. 7. 16. i ΑΒ 
an exact linear measure the πῆχυς 
equalled 1} Greek feet, or .444 me- 
tres, or about 1 foot 54 inches. See 
8.0. πούς. ; 
Πίγρης, ητος, ὁ, Pigres, inter- 
preter to Cyrus, i. 2. 17 » 5: 7, 8. 12. 
πιέζω (πιεδ-), πιέσω, ἐπίεσα, ἐπι- 
ἐσθην, press hard or tight, squeeze 
close, used esp. of the pressure of 
a burden, Lat. premo; in Anab. 
always pass., be weighed down, be 
encumbered, iii. 4.48; be crowded, 
iii. 4.19; be hard pressed, be hard 
put to it, i. 1. 10, iii. 4. 27, iv. 8. 
13, vii. 8. 18. i 
πικρός, a, dv, bitter, Lat. amarus, 
iv. 4. 13. 
πίμπλημι (πλα-), TART, ἔπλησα, 
-πέπληκα, -πεπλη(σλ)μαι, ἐπλήσθην 
[R. waa], jill, Lat.’ impleo, with 
ace. and gen., i. 5. 10. J 
πίνω (πι-, πο-), πίομαι, ἔπιον, 
πέπωκα, -πέπομαι, -επόθην [R. 10 |, 
drink, Lat. bibd, abs., with acc., 
or with ἐκ and gen., iv. 5. 32, v. 8. 
19, vi. 1. 4, 4. 11. 
πιπράσκω, pres. not Attic (zpa-), 
πέπρᾶκα, πέπρᾶμαι, ἐπράἄθην, fut. pf. 
πεπράσομαι [ cf. Lat. pretium, price |, 
sell, Lat. wendo, vii. 1. 36, 2. 6, 8. 
6; with gen. of price, vil. 7. 26. 
πίπτω (wer-, πτο-); πεσοῦμαι, ἔπε- 
σον, πέπτωκα [R. wer], fall, esp. 
in battle, Lat. cado, abs., i. 8. 28, 
9. 31, iv. 5. 7, vi. 1.6; with els and 
ace., iii, 1. 11; fall, be involved, 
with εἰς and acc., ii. 3. 18. 
Πισίδαι, dv, the Pisidians, na- 
tives of Pisidia, i. 1.11, 2.1, 9. 14, 
ii. 5. 13, iii. 2. 238, a country in 
Asia Minor, south of Phrygia and 


the illustrations s.v, vais, πεντηκόν- 


north of Pamphylia, mountainous 


πιστεύω-πλευρα 178 


Ν 


and wild. The people did not ac- 
knowledge the sovereignty of Per- 
sia. 

πιστεύω, πιστεύσω, ἐπίστευσα, 
πεπίστευμαι, ἐπιστεύίθην [R. πιθ], 
put faith in, trust, rely on, have 
confidence in, credit, Lat. crédé, 
with dat. of pers. or thing, i. 2. 2, 
3. 16, ii. 5. 22, iii. 1. 29, v. 2. 9, vii. 
2.17; believe, with inf., i. 9. 8, vii. 
7-47; pass., be trusted or believed, 
vii, 6. 33, ἡ 25, 

πίστις, ews, ἡ [R. m8], trust in 


as a marching order, more exactly 
πλαίσιον ἰσόπλευρον, iii. 4. 19, Lat. 
dgmen quadratum. ‘The square 
might be solid, ἐν πλαισίῳ πλήρει 
ἀνθρώπων, i. 8.9, or hellow, enclos- 
ing the baggage and camp follow- 
ers, lil, 2. 36, vii. 8.16, The front 
was called τὰ πρόσθεν or στόμα, the 
sides πλευραί or κέρατα, iii. 2. 36, 
4. 19, 20, 21, 22, 28, 48, 
πλανάομαι, πλανήσομαι, πεπλάνη- 
μαι, ἐπλανήθην [πλάνη, wandering, 
ef. Eng. planet], wander, stray, 


ἃ person, Or, as ἃ quality, faith, 
confidence, good faith, Lat. jidés, 
i. 6.3. Phrases: πίστεως ἕνεκα, to 
make sure of his loyalty, iii. 3. 4; 
διὰ wlorews, see διά, iii. 2.8; πίστεις 
ἔλαβε, he received assurances of 
ec Lat. jidem accépit, i. 2. 

πιστός, ἡ, dv, [R. m0], that can 
be trusted, trusty, faithful, sincere, 
sure, true, trustworthy, Lat. fidus, 
Jidelis, of persons, abs. or with 
dat., 1. 4. 15, 7. 5, ii. 1. 14, iii. 3. 2, 
lv. 6. 3, vii. 2. 29; of things, vii. 2. 
30 ; subst., πιστοί, a title given to 
Persian royal counsellors, cf. Eng. 
‘trusty and well-beloved,’ i. 5. 15, 8. 
1; πιστά, τά, pledges, guarantees, 
between former enemies, ii. 4. 7, iv. 
8. 7, freq. with διδόναι and λαμβά- 
νειν, 1. 6. 7, ii. 3. 26, iii. 2. 5, v. 4. 11, 


straggle, Lat. uagor, i. 2. 25, v. 1. 
ἽΝ ΙΝ words, be pointless, miss the 
mark, vii. 7. 24. 
| πλάτος, ous, τό [πλατύς], breadth, 
Lat. latitudd, v. 4. 32. 

πλάττω (πλατ-), ἔπλασα, πέπλα- 
σμαι, ἐπλάσθην [cf. Eng. plastic], 
mould, shape ; mid., of falsehoods, 
Sabricate, invent, Lat. fing, ii. 6. 
26, A 
| πλατύς, eta, ύ [ε΄ Lat. latus, 
Jlank, Eng. place, plate, plateau), 
broad, wide, Lat. ldtus, lii. 4. 22, 
v. 4. 29. 
πλεθριαῖος, a, ov [R. πλα], length 
of a plethron, af width, With edpos, 
1. 5. 4, iv. 6. 4. 
πλέθρον, τό [R. πλα], plethron, 


a& measure of length, equal to 100 
Greek feet, or 29.57 metres, or 7 
about 97 ft. 1 inch. See s.v. πούς. 


oan. ν "μ Pagar ι 
il. 4. 22; hence ἐπεὶ τὰ πιστὰ éyé-| i. 2. 5, 4. 1, 4, ii. 4. 25, iii. 4. 9, iv. 


veTo, after the exchange of pledges, 
t.e. after the treaty was made, ii. 2. 
10, cf. iv. 8. 8. 


7. 18, v. 6. 9, vi. 5. 11. 
πλεῖστος, πλείων, 566 πολύς. 
πλέκω, ἔπλεξα, πέπλεγμαι, ἐπλέχ- 


πιστότης, ἡτος, ἡ [R. m8], faith-| θην and -επλάκην [cf. Lat. plico, 


, 


fold, duplex, double, Eng. ¥oxp, 


oe loyalty, Lat. jidélitas, i. 8. 


FLAX], twist, plait, of slings, iii. 3, 


πίτυς, vos, ἡ [cf. Lat. pinus, | 18. 


pine}, pine-tree, iv. 7. 6. 
πλάγιος, ἃ, ov [πλάγος, τό, the 


πλέον, 566 πολύς. 
πλεονεκτέω, πλεονεκτήσω, ἐπλεο- 


side}, sideways, slanting, Lat. obli- | νέκτησα [R. wha+R. cex], have 
quus, transuersus ; subst., τὰ πλά- | more, get a larger share claim too 
για, sides, of an army, flanks, Lat. | large a part, get the better abs, or 
latera, lil. 4. 14, vi. 3. 15, Phrase: | with gen. of pers., to which may 
eis πλάγιον, sideways, on the sides, | be added dat. of thing, iii. 1. 37, v. 


i. 8. 10. 
πλαίσιον, τό, any rectangular 


4. 15, 8. 13. 


πλευρά, ds [ε΄ Eng. pleurisy], 


Jigure, esp. of troops, the square,!rib, side, of man, generally (in 


1T 


9 πλέω--πλούσιος 


Anab. always) pl., Lat. latera, iv.| 4.6; with gen., v. 2. 11, vii, 1. 39; 


1. 18, 7.4; of a square, side, flank, 
iii. 2. 36, 4. 22, 28 (sing.). 


in attrib. position, ἐν τῷ πλησίον 
παραδείσῳ, in the neighbouring 


πλέω (πλυ-), πλεύσομαι Or mhev- | park, il. 4. 16, cf. iii. 4. 9, Vii. 8. 15. 


σοῦμαι, ἔπλευσα, πέπλευκα, πέπλευ- 
σμαι [R. πλεΕ], sail, go by sea, 
take ship, Lat. n@uigd, v. 1. 4, 10, 
6. 10, vii. 6.37 ; with πρός and acc. 
of pers. or εἰς or ἐπί and acc. of 
place, i. 9. 17, ii. 6.3, vii. 2.8; with 
παρά or ἐκ and gen. of pers. or 
place, vi. 2. 17, 4.3; with ἐν and 
dat., v. 7.8; of a ship, i. 7. 15. 
πληγή, 75 [πλήττω], blow, stroke, 
Lat. plaga, always pl. in Anab., 
stripes, i. 5. 11, ii. 4. 11, iv. 6, 10. 


πλῆθος, ovs, τό [R. waa], great | p 


number, multitude, crowd, mass, 
numbers, Lat. multitidd, of men, 
i, 7. 4, ii. τ. 11, iii, 1. 42, iv. 2. 20, 
v. 2. 21, vii. 7. 31; of things, iv. 4. 
8, 7. 26, v. 2.15; with a numeral, 
number, iv. 2. 2; of space and 
time, length, amount, sum, V. 5. 4, 
vii. 8. 26; dat., πλήθει, in number 
or extent, abs. or with gen., i. 5. 9, 
8.13. Phrase: τὸ πλῆθος, the com- 
mon soldiers, iii. 1. 37. 

πλήθω, poet. πέπληθα [R. πλα], in 
Anab. only in pres. partic., be full, 
see ἀγορᾶ, i. 8. 1, ii. 1. 7. 

πλήν, adv., used also freq. as 
conj. [R. πλα], except, except that, 
save that, only that, i. 2. 24, 8. 
20, 25, 9. 29, iii. 1. 26, 2. 28, vii. 3. 
2; as prep. with gen., except, save, 
i. 1. 6, 9. 31, ii. 4. 27, iv. 6. 1, vil. 
2. 29. 

πλήρης; es [R. wha], full, full of, 
abounding in, Lat. plénus, with 
gen., i. 2. 7, 5. 1, 8. 9, ii. 3. 10, iii. 5. 
1; complete, in full, of pay, Vii. 5. 5. 

πλησιάζω (πλησιαδ-), πλησιάσω, 
etc. [πλησίος}, approach, draw near, 
abs. or with dat., i. 5. 2, iv. 6. 6, 
vi. 5. 26. 

πλησίος, a, ov, near, positive 
not found in Attic prose, but sup. 
πλησιαίτατος, nearest, %. το. 5, Vii. 
3. 29; neut. as adv., πλησίον, Lat. 
prope, near, close by, at hand, i. 8. 


πλήττω (πληγ-); πλήξω, -έπληξα, 
πέπληγα, πέπληγμαι, ἐπλήγην, and 
rare poet. -ππλήχθην οἵ. Lat. plango, 
strike, plaga, blow, Eng. FLECK, 
FLAG, FLATTER, PAT, @po-plexy |, 
strike, hit, give a blow, in pass., Vv. 
8. 2, 4, 12; wound, in pf. act., vi. 
1. 5, which may be pass. in sense 
as in late writers. 
πλίνθϑινος, 1, ov [πλίνθος], made 
of brick, brick, iii. 4. 11. 
πλίνθος, ἡ ([cf. Eng. FLINT, 
linth], brick, Lat. later, further 
defined by the adjs. γήινος, κερα- 
μεοῦς, and ὀπτός, g.v., li. 4. 12, ill. 
4. 7, vii. 8. 14. 
πλοῖον, τό [ R. wheF ], vessel, boat, 
in the widest sense, including at 
the extremes the canoe or ‘dug- 
out,’ πλοῖον μονόξυλον, V. 4. 11, 12, 
and the man-of-war, πλοῖον μακρόν, 
Lat. nduis longa, v. 1. 11, ef. i. 3. 
14-17, where πλοῖον is identified 
with τριήρης. In other passages 
the πλοῖον is distinguished from 
the trireme, i. 4.8, v. 1. 4, vi. 4. 18, 
6. 1, 5, vii. 3.3. The term is ap- 
plied to river boats, i. 4. 18, 7. 15; 
including those by which the stream 
was crossed, ii. 2. 3, v. 6.9; such 
boats might be used in the con- 
struction of a pontoon bridge, i. 2. 
5, ii. 4. 18, 24. The πλοῖον was 
sometimes a jishing boat, vii. 1. 20; 
sometimes a ship of burthen, 1. 7. 
15, vi. 5.1; or might be used as a 
transport for troops, v. 1. 4, 5, 10, 
3. 1, 6. 1, 12; like the ναῦς, πεντη- 
κόντορος, and τριήρης, g.v., it was 
fitted with masts and sails, v. 1. 11, 
6. 31, 86, 7. 8, 16, vi. 1. 14. 

πλοῦς, ὁ [R. wkeF], @ sailing, 
voyage, Lat. na@uigatio, vi. 4. 2; 
time for sailing, sailing weather, 
v. 7. 7, Vi. 1. 33. 

πλούσιος, a, ov [R. πλα], rich, 
opulent, Lat. diues, i. 9. 16, iii. 2, 


1, ii. 2. 18, iv. 5. 15, vi. 3. 16, vii. 


26, vii. 7. 28. ᾽ 


πλουσίως-πολεμέω 180 


πλουσίως, adv. [ἢ. πλα], in 
wealth or riches, opulently, iii. 2. 
26; comp. πλουσιωτέρως, i. 9. 16 
(but some read the adj. in both 
passages). 

πλουτέω, πλουτήσω, ἐπλούτησα, 
πεπλούτηκα [R. πλα], be rich, have 
riches, abs. or with gen., i. 9. 19, 
ii. 6. 21, vil. 7. 28, 42. 

πλουτίζω (πλουτιδ-), πεπλούτικα 
[R. πλα], enrich, vil. 6. 9. 

πνεῦμα, ατος, τό [πνέω, cf. Eng. 
pneumatic, pneumonia), wind, 
breeze, Lat. wentus, iv. 5. 4, Vi. 
1. 14. 

πνέω (πνυ-), πνεύσομαι and mvev- 
σοῦμαι, ἔπνευσα, πέπνευκα [cf. Lat. 
pulmo, lung), blow, of the wind, 
Lat. fld, iv. 5. 3, v. 7. 7. 

πνίγω (πνιγ-), -πνίξω, evita, πέ- 
πνίγμαι, -επνίγην, choke, strangle, 
pass., be drowned, v. 7. 25. 

ποδαπός, ἡ, ov, of what country? 
where from? where born? Lat. 
οὐ, iv. 4. 17. 

ποδήρης, ες [R. we +R. ap], 
reaching to the feet, of shields, i. 
8. 9. 

-ποδίζω (ποδιδ-), -ποδιῶ, πεπό- 
δισμαι, ἐποδίσθην [R. wed], tie the 
feet, fetter, hobble, of horses, iii. 4. 
35. 

ποδῶν, 566 πούς. 

πόθεν, interr. adv., whence? where 
Srom? Lat. unde, v. 4. 7. 

ποθέν, indef. adv., enclitic, from 
somewhere or other, vi. 3. 15. 

ποθέω, ποθήσω, ἐπόθησα [πόθος], 
long, yearn, with inf., vi. 4. 8. 


πόθος, ὁ, longing, Lat. déside- | 


rium, with gen., iii. 1. 3. 

mol, indef. adv., enclitic, some- 
whither, somewhere or other, v. 1. 
8, vi. 3. 10, vii. 2. 18. 

ποιέω, ποιήσω, etc. [wow], make, 
produce, create, construct, fashion, 
form, render, Lat. facid, i. 5. 5, 
“ 18, 10, i. 2. 17, i. 1. ἃ. ἃ 


vii. 7.47 ; bring about, effect, cause, 
with inf., ὥστε and inf., or acc. and 
inf., i. 6. 2, 6, 7. 4, ii. 6. 14, iv. 1. 
22, v. 7. 27, vil. 8 14; suppose, 
imagine, Lat. facid, pond, with 
acc. and inf., v. 7.9; do, act, per- 
form, accomplish, injlict, with acc. 
or freq. with an adv., i. 1. 11, 4. 5, 
5. 8, ii. 5. 33, 6. 9, iii. 1. 28, iv. 8. 6, 
vi. 6. 18, vii. 1. 8; with two accs., 
i. g. 11, ii. 5. 5, iii. 2. 3, v. 7. 10, or 
an acc. and an adv., i. 4. 8, 6. 7, ii. 
3. 23, v. 5.9. Mid., in most of the 
above senses but denoting that one 
does a thing in his own interest or 
has it done for him by another, i. 
10. 9, ii. 3. 18, iii. 2. 36, iv. 8. 15, 
v. 3. 5, 6, 5. 12, vi. 3. 21, vii. 8. 16; 
often with an obj. so used that it 
forms one idea with the verb, as 
τὴν wopelav ἐποιεῖτο = ἐπορεύετο, i. 
7. 20, ef. 1. 2, 6,2. 9.5.9, TL 3.6, 
v. 4. 3, 8. 1. Phrases with the 
mid.: see esp. δεινός, εὕρημα, ὀλί- 
γος, περί. 

ποιητέος, a, ov, verbal [ποιέω], 
to be done, or impers., one must 
do, the agent, when expressed, be- 
ing in the dat., i, 3. 15, iii. 1. 18, 
35, Vi. 4. 12. 

ποικίλος, 7, ov [root mu, cf. Lat. 
pingd, paint], variegated, party- 
coloured, of many colours, Lat. 
at i. 5. 8; of tattooing, v. 4. 
o2, 

ποῖος, a, ov, interr. pron., of what 
nature? of what sort? what kind 
| of a? what?, Lat. qualis, used in 
dir. and indir. questions, ii. 5. 7, 
13, iii. 1. 14, vii. 6.24. . 

πολεμέω, πολεμήσω, etc., but -πε- 
πολέμημαι πόλεμος], be at war, make 
| Or wage war, do battle, fight, Lat. 
| bellum gerd, sometimes in aor., go 
|to war, Lat. bellum inferod, abs. or 
| with dat., i. 1. 5, 8, 9. 9, ii, 1. 20, 
3 21, iv. 8. 6, Vv. 5. 22, vi. 1. 27, Vii. 
6.1; with πρός and acc., i. 3. 4, vii. 


24, iv. 1. 13, 5. 14, 8. 26, v. 2. 5,| 8.24, Phrase: ὅσα ἐπολεμήθη πρὸς 
2. ν, Vi. 4. 9; with two accs., one | τοὺς Ἕλληνας, what hostilities were 
of which may be an adj., i. 1. 2, | carried on against the Greeks, iv. 
Fo typ. OG, 1. 6. ἄγ 18,1552. 


181 πολεμικός- πολύς 


πολεμικός, ἡ, dv [πόλεμος, cf. Eng. 
polemic], of or for war, Lat. belli- 
cus; of persons, warlike, martial, 
valorous, ii. 6. 1, iii. 5. 16, v. 2. 2; 
subst., τὸ πολεμικόν, signal for bat- 
tle, the charge, Lat. bellicum, iv. 
3. 29, war ery, Vii. 3. 33; τὰ πολε- 
μικά, military operations, Lat. res 
bellica, iii. 1. 38, 43. 

πολεμικῶς, adv. [πολεμικός], in 
a hostile manner, like enemies ; 
sup., Vi. I. 1. 

πολέμιος, ἃ, ov [rodeos], of OF 
belonging to war, 80 subst., τὰ πο- 
λέμια, military matters, Lat. rés 
militaris, i. 6. 1; generally, the 
enemy’s, hostile, Lat. hostilis, of 
persons and places, i. 2. 19, 5. 16, 
ii, 2. 14, iii. 1. 2, iv. 3. 12, v. 1. 6, 
vi. 3. 22, vii. 1. 28; subst., ἡ πολε- 
pla (sc. xwpa), the enemy’s coun- 
try, hostile territory, iii. 3. 5, vii. 
6. 25; of πολέμιοι, the enemy, Lat. 
hostés, i. 4. 5, ii. 2. 16, iv. 2. 2, vi. 

"ἢ. 
: πόλεμος, 6, war, warfare, Lat. 
bellum, i. 5. 9, ii. 4. 5, 6. 30, iii. 1. 
20, 2. 7, iv. 3. 10, v. 4. 15, vi. 1. 29, 
vii. 1. 26; with gen., ii. 5.7; with 
πρός and acc., i. 6. 6, iv. 4. 1, Vii. 
1.27. Phrases: τῶν els τὸν πόλε- 
pov ἔργων, warlike exercises, i. 9. 
5; see also ἀναιρέω, διά, ἐκφαίνω, 
ἐκφέρω. 

πολίζω (πολιδ-) [R. πλα], build 
or found α οἰΐψ. Phrase: πολίζει τὸ 
χωρίον, he was colonizing the place, 
vi. 6.4. (Elsewhere not Attic.) 

πολιορκέω, πολιορκήσω, ἐπολιόρ- 
κησα, -πεπολιόρκημαι, ἐπολιορκήθην 
[R. πλα + elpyw], hem in a city, be- 
siege, Lat. obsided, i. 1. 7, iii. 4. 8, 
vi. 1. 28; pass., of persons, be 
hemmed in, be beset or blockaded, 
iv. 2. 15, vi. 3. 11, 17, 22. 

πόλις, ews, ἡ [R. waa], city, Lat. 
urbs, i. 1. 6, 2. 6, ii. 4. 21, iil. 4. 9, 
iv. 7. 19, v. 5. 3, vi. 2. 18, vii. 3. 21; 
body of citizens, state, Lat. ciuitas, 
ii. 6. 2, v. 5. 8, Vi. 1. 27; esp. at 
Athens, the upper city as distin- 
guished from Piraeeus, vii, 1. 27, 


πόλισμα, aros, τό [R. πλαΊ], town, 
iv. 7. 16, vi. 4. 7, vii. 8. 21. 
πολιτεύω, πολιτεύσω, πεπολίτευ- 
μαι, ἐπολιτεύθην [R. wha], be a citi- 
zen, live in a city, iii. 2. 26. 

πολίτης, ov [R. waa], citizen, 1.e. 
one who holds the citizenship of a 
free state or city, Lat. ciuis, v. 3. 
9, 10. 

πολλάκις, adv. [R. πλα], often, 
frequently, Lat. saepe, i. 2. 11, ν. 
1.11, vib. 3.38. ~ 

πολλαπλάσιος, a, ov [R. waa], 
many times as many, many times 
more, of number and amount, i. 7. 
8, vii. 7.25; with gen., iii. 2. 14, 
V. 5. 22, Vii. 7. 27. 

πολλαχῇ, adv. [R. πλα], in many 
ways, often, vii. 3. 12. 

πολλαχοῦ, adv. [R. wha], in 
many places, on many occasions, 
iv. 1, 28. 

πολυάνθρωπος, ov [R. πλα + ἀνήρ 
+R. on], thickly populated, ii. 4. 
13. 

πολυαρχία, ds [R. wha + ἄρχω], 
command vested in many, Vi. 1. 18. 

Πολυκράτης, ovs, ὁ, Polycrates, 
an Athenian captain, iv. 5. 24, use- 
ful to the army, v. 1. 16, and 
trusted by Xenophon, vii. 2. 17, 
29, 30, 6.41. . 

ἸΠολύνϊκος, ὁ, Polynicus, a Spar- 
tan, ambassador between Thibron 
and ‘the army, vii. 6. 1, 39, 43, 7. 
13, 56. 

πολυπραγμονέω [R. wha + mpdr- 
rw], be a busybody, be a meddler, 
intrigue, v. 1. 15. 

πολύς, πολλή, πολύ [R. Aa], 
much, many, used in the widest 
sense, of persons and things, Lat. 
multus; of number or amount, 
many, in great numbers, in large 
quantity, i. 3. 14, 5. 2, iii. 1. 22, 5. 
1, iv. 4. 7, 7. 7, Vil. 5. 14, 6. 36; of 
space, great, large, extensive, ii. 4. 
21, iii. 5.17, vi. 4.6; of time, long, 
i. 3. 2, 9.26, v. 2. 17; of value, see 
ἄξιος, i. 3. 12, ii. 1. 14, iv. 1. 28; of 
size, force, intensity, degree, much, 


great, large, strong, mighty, i. 2. 18, 


Πολύστρατος-πορευτέος 180 


i. πο atys iv. τ 20, nga πολυτελής, ἐς [R. wha + R. rad] 
& ¢ -G to another adj. by | requiring o: mnsive, 
Kal, ἃΒ πολλὰ καμήχανα (3.6. οὐ i. 4 8. . 
para), many difficulties, el “". πόμα, see πῶμα 
Ψ Bok ii 5. oe iby μ 8; vil. 1. πομπή, is [πέμπω], escort; esp. 
i gran πολλοί, the many, | procession in honour of a god, Lat 
akg st i deta abs. or with | pompa, v. 5. ὃ 
gen., ii. 3. 16, 4. 2, iii. 3. 16, iv. 1.38.}  wovée, rophox 
2, , 3.38; νέω, πονήσω, etc., but -πονήθ 

rele pou the greater part, | [R. σπα], work hard, toil, ἫΝ 
ΜΌΝ μ᾽ gen, ia τᾷ = lv. | dergo hardship, Lat. labérd, esp. in 
1. 11, 6. 24, of. vil. 7. 36. Neut, as | war, abs., i. 4. 14, ii. 6. 6, iii 46 
“gia τὴν much, Jar, a great way, | vii. 6. 36 . with ὑπέρ and aa, vit 
= 5. Ἐν a 6, 4. 33, freq. with | 3. 81; with acc. xphuara, earn by 
i 18. ᾿ 5. 2, ii. 3. 13, iii. | hard work, vii. 6. 41. Phrase: ἐπὶ 
he γᾷ 2. » Tare with positive, | rots πεπονημένοις, at hardships, vii 

on 34 ; 80 πολλῳ With comp., ii. | 6. 10. ita 
δ Phrases: rh Cee bohe a nerds | go mer Ρόν 4, ἐν [Β΄ σπα], burden- 
2. 2S : - 000s), along | some, troublesome, bad. p i 
journey, Vi. 3. 16; διὰ πολλά for 15, of thi I solasua il 

ἊΝ 16; διὲ \Aa, Jor | gerous, of things, Lat. mulestus, iii 

Se 1.9.22; ὁ πολὺς ὄχλος, 4. 19, vi. 6. 10, vii. 4. 15. ir pin 
ey ὍΝ Ὁ iy followers, iii. 2. | sons, bad, base, worthless, Lat 
é 0 " ' ᾿ ι νων "ee "nn ** a Ι ne ἢ 

: v, with a long start, iii. | prauus, ii. 5. 21, v. 7. 35; hostile, 


3. 9; ἐπὶ πολύ, over a great extent 
i. 8. 8, iv. 2.13, v. 6. δ; οἷς ἐπὶ πολύ, 
as a general rule, ili. 1.42, 4.35; πολ- 
Ao δέω, see δέω, lack ; περὶ πολλοῦ 


with πρός and acc., vii. 1.39; subst. 

πονηρὸς, ὁ, knave, ii. 6. 29; πονηρόν, 

τό, a useless thing, iii. 4. 35. 
πονήρως, adv. [R. ora], with 


ποιεῖσθαι, 560 | | ΥΩ, a 
᾿ περί. Comp. πλείων, | difficulty, Lat. molesté, iii. 4. 19. 


more, greater, with the same mean- πόνος, ὁ [R. era], hard work 
ἮΝ 7 oe ἘΝ ἣν be ” | ΝΟ toil, hardsh ip, Lat. labor, 
"1.11, 6. 9, 7. 23, Vv. 6. 5, vii. 6. ii. 5. 18, iii. 1.12, vi. 2.10. Phras % 
ΔΕ με mines 1. 3. fs 5. 13, vii. 7. | τοὺς ἡμετέρους πόνους ἔχει, he a 
i oe Bes Md ΝΙΝ | gyn of all our toil, vii. 6. 9. 
ore, ghly, in ater de- vros, ὁ, sea; in Anab. ¢ 
. ly pal ae 4. 31, Vi. 3. 18; with | Πόντος, the Black or i al 
g ᾿ or 9, nan, 1. 2. 11, iii. 2. 34, | with or without Εὔξεινος (q.v.) iv. 
3. ll, iv. 2. 28, 6.11. Phrases: ἐκ | 8. 22, v. 1. 15, 7. 7, vi ] ii 
πλείονος Or Ὼ πλέονος ἔφευγον, they | 12. | ihighchailta diuryaegh 
fled when at a greater distance, i. | Πόντος, ὁ, Pontus, v. 6. 15, a 
Ἐν ay πον or πλέονος general term applied in the Anab. 
ene τ; id ~~ Sup. πλεῖστος, | to the countries lying along the 
a ee est number, | often southern coast of the Euxine, esp. 
ἐν ἕ Ῥ : ᾿ ne or rz, i. 1. 6, | to those east of Paphlagonia. This 
κε 4 , lv. 6. 1; subst., οἱ πλεῖστοι | part, with the northern half of Cap- 
M4 gag most, most of them, i. | padocia, after Alexander’s time be- 
5: , 15, v. 2. 14, vil. 4.6; neut. as|came a kingdom, and under the 
ady., πλεῖστον, πλεῖστα, generally, | Romans a province 
id chiefly, lil, 2. 31, vii. 6. 35.| πορεία, as [R. περ] a going, trav- 
hrases ; ws πλεῖστον, as far as| elling, journey, march i. 720 ii 
rey +, iy περὶ πλείστου] 2. 10, iii. 1. 5, iv. 5- 35, pl., vii. 3. 
ΠΩ; Polystratus, fa sil bic apa pas rg gi 
» 9, stratus, fa- πορεντέος, a, ov, verb: 
ther of the Athenian Lycius, iii. 3.20. | that eat be tater vi meas 


183 _ πορεύω- πούς 


ii. 5. 18; impers., πορευτέον, one 
must cross or traverse, Lat. eundum 
est, ii. 2. 12, iv. 1. 2, 5. 1. 

πορεύω, πορεύσω, érdpevoa [R. 
περ], make go, but these act. forms 
are rare in prose, and in Anab. the 
verb is a pass. dep., πορεύομαι, πορεύ- 
σομαι, ἐπορεύθην, go, move, travel, 
march, walk, march on, advance, 
Lat. iter facid, abs. and freq. with 
advs., i. 2. 1, 3. 4, 9. 28, ii. 2. 14, 
iii. 1. 7, iv. 4. 16, v. 3. 1, vi. 3. 26, 
vii. 1. 10; with ws, παρά, ἐπί, or 
πρός and acc. of pers., i. 2. 4, 3. 7, 
ii. 1. 4, vi. 6.19; with eds, ἐπί, παρά, 
or πρός and acc. of. place, iii. 4. 41, 
v. 4. 30, 7. 6, vii. 8.7; with ἀπό, 
ἐκ, διά, Or παρά and gen., i. 5. 4, 
iv. 4. 17, 5. 10, v. 4. 2, vi. 2. 4; 
often with cognate acc., ii. 4. 13, 
iii. 4. 46, iv. 4. 1. 

πορθέω, πορθήσω, etc. ἱπέρθω, 
sack], ravage, waste, plunder, lay 
waste, Lat. dépopulor, v. 7. 14, vii. 
7. 3, 12. 

mopiiw (ποριδ-), ποριῶ, ἐπόρισα; 
πεπόρικα, πεπόρισμαι, ἐπορίσθην [K. 
περ], bring, bring to, bring about, 
provide, supply, Lat. praebed, ii. 3. 
5, iii. 3. 20, 5. 8, v. 6. 5, vii. 3. 10; 
mid., supply oneself with, get, ob- 
tain, Lat. pard, ii. 1. 6, iii. 1. 20, 
v.23. 

πόρος, 6 [R. περ], means of pass- 
ing, of a river, ford, Lat. wadum, iv. 
3. 13, 20; means, way in general, 
hence, πόρους πρὸς τὸ ὑμῖν πολεμεῖν, 
means of waging war on you, il. 5. 
20. 

πόρρω, adv. [πρό], far off, afar ; 
with gen. of pers., far from, Lat. 
procul, i. 3. 12, iii. 4. 35. 

πορφύρεος, ἡ, ov, contr. πορφυ- 
pots, a, οῦν [cf. πορφύρα, purple- 
jish, Eng. porphyry; dark red, 
purple, i. 5. 8. 

ποσί, See πούς. 

πόσος, 7, ov, interr. pron., of size, 
amount, and distance, how large or 
much? how far? Lat. quantus, in 
dir. and indir. questions, ii. 4. 21, 


ποταμός, ὁ [cf. hippo-potamus], 
river, stream, Lat. flumen, i. 2. 23, 
4. 17, ii. 1. 11, iii. 1. 2, iv. 3. 28, v. 
6. 9, vi. 2.1. The name is gener- 
ally in attrib. position, i. 2. 5, 5. 
10, ii. 4. 25, iii. 4. 6, iv. 3. 1, vii. 8. 
18, but, without the art., may fol- 
low or precede ποταμός, V. 3. 8. 
ποτέ, indef. adv., enclitic, at any 
time, once, once on a time, ever, Lat. 
aliquando, dlim, i. 5. 7, 9. 6, ili. 4. 
10, vii. 8. 3; in questions, like Lat. 
tandem, aS ὅποι ποτὲ τρέψονται, 
where in the world they would turn, 
iii. 5. 13. Phrase: εἴ wore καὶ ἄλ- 
Nore, if ever in the world, Lat. st 
umquam alias, vi. 4. 12. 
πότερος, a, ov, interr. pron., which 
of two? Lat. uter; hence πότερον, 
adv., in questions where an alter- 
native generally follows, as πότερον 
.. 4, whether... or, Lat.utrum... 
‘an, in dir. questions, iii. 2. 21, vii. 7. 
45; in indir., i. 4. 13, ii. 2. 10, iil. 
2. 20, v. 2. 8; 80 πότερα... 7, ib 
1. 10, 5. 17, vi. 2. 15, vii. I. 14; 
πότερον Without foll. 7, v. 8. 4. 
ποτέρως, interr. adv. [πότερος], 
in which of the two ways? followed 
by εἰ... ἢ εἰ, vii. 7. 30, 33, 34. 
ποτήριον, τό [R. wo], drinking 
cup, beaker, vi, 1. 4. 
ποτόν, τό [R. πο], drink, i. το. 
18, esp. in the phrase σῖτα καὶ rordy 
eatables and drinkables, food and 
drink, ii. 3. 27, iii. 2. 28, vil. 1. 
πότος, ὁ [R. wo], a drinking, 
drinking party, symposium, ii. 3. 
15, vii. 3. 26. 
ποῦ, interr. adv., where? Lat. ubi, 
ii. 4. 15, v. 8. 2. 
πού, indef. adv., enclitic, any- 
where, somewhere, of place, i. 2. 27, 
ii, 2. 15, iii. 4. 28, iv. 5. 8, v. 6. 
17; to modify an assertion, as ἐπέ- 
στασθέ που, you know, of course, 
Lat. opinor, v. 7. 13. 
πούς, ποδός, ὁ [R. wed], foot, 
Lat. pés, i. 5. 3, iv. 5. 12, v. 8. 15, vii. 
4. 4; as a measure, shorter than 


vi. 5. 20, vii. 3. 12, 8. 1. 


the English foot, equal to .296 


πρᾶγμα-πρεσβύτης 184 


metres, or about 11.65 inches, i. 2 
Sh. ἃ. UR, ii. 4. 7. 


The table of Attic linear meas- 


ure is as follows: 


πούς 
1} ᾿χῆχυς 
θ 4 | dpyud 
100 | 662 | 162 | πλέθρον 


600 [400 [100 | 6 ' στάδιον 


Phrases : Ta πρὸ ποδῶν, Lat. ante 
pedeées, what is right before one, iv. 
6. 12; ἐπὶ πόδα, see ἀναχωρέω, Vv. 
2. 32. 

πρᾶγμα, aros, τό [rpdrrw, cf. 
Eng. pragmatic], thing done, deed, 
action, fact, affair, business, Lat. 
res, negotium, i. 5. 15, v. 6. 28, 7. 
18, vii. 1. 17; in a bad sense, 
troublesome matter, trouble, diff- 
culty, annoyance, i. 3. 3, ii. 1. 16, 


iv. 1. 17, v. 5. 8, vi. 3.6; pl., gov- | 


ernment, state, vii. 2.32. Phrases: 
πράγματα παρέχειν with dat., give 


or cause trouble, Lat. negdtium | 


Jfacessere, i. 1. 11, iv. 1. 22, 2. 27; 
οὐδὲν εἴη πρᾶγμα, nothing was the 
wmatter, vi. 6. 8. 

πραγματεύομαι, ἐπρᾶγματευσά- 
μὴν, πεπρᾶγμάτευμαι, ἐπρᾶγματεύ- 
θην [πρᾶγμα], busy oneself in; 
πραγματευόμενος ἀγαθὸν ὑμῖν, striv- 
ing to compass some benefit for 
you, Vii. 6. 35. 4 

πρᾶνής, és [πρό], bent forward, 
Lat. proénus; of descents, head- 
long, steep, Lat. praeceps, i. 5. 8, 
v. 2. 28. Phrases: εἰς τὸ rpavés, 
straight down hill, iii. 4.25; κατὰ 
τοῦ mpavots, down along the in- 
cline, iv. 8. 28, vi. 5. 31. 

πρᾶξις, ews, ἡ [πράττω], a doing, 
uncertaking, enterprise, business, 
1. 3. 16, 18, ii. ὁ 17, vi. 2.9; in a 
a scheme, collusion, vii. 


, πρᾷος, εἴα, ov, gen. pl. πρᾶέων, 
mild, of fish, tame, i. 4. 9. 

πράττω (πρᾶγ-), πράξω, ἔπρᾶξα, 
πέπρᾶγα or πέπρᾶχα, πέπρᾶαγμαι, 
ἐπράχθην (cf. Eng. practice], bring 
to pass, carry out, perform, accom- 
plish, fuljil, do, act, negotiate, Lat. 
facio, abs. or with acc., ii. 2. 2, 18 
5. 21, iii. τ, 14, v. 4. 20, 6. 28, vi. 1. 
18, vii. 6. 8, 32; with περί and gen. 
of pers. or thing, i. 6. 6, v. 6. 28, vii. 
2. 12; with ὑπέρ and gen. of pers., 
vi. 6. 18; effect, exact from some 
one, with two accs., vii. 6. 17; 
intr., be in a state or condition, do, 
fare, esp. with. advs., as εὖ mpdr- 
τειν, be fortunate or successful, vii. 
6.11, 7.42; καλῶς πράττειν, prosper, 
iii. 1.6, cf. i. 9. 10; οὕτω πράξαντες, 
with this result, iii. 4.6; so with 
adjs., vi. 4. 8, and rels., as ἃ πράτ- 
rot, how he fared, vii. 4. 21, ef. vii. 
6. 31. 
πράως, adv. [πρᾷος], mildly, 
lightly, i. 5. 14. 
| πρέπω, πρέψω, érpeva, be fitting, 
| become, suit, with dat., iii. 2. 7; 
impers., it is fitting or proper, Lat. 
| decet, with inf., iii. 2. 16, so in 
the phrase ἐπεὶ τῇ ἡλικίᾳ ἔπρεπε, 
when he was of suitable age, i. 
g. 6. 

πρεσβεία, as [πρεσβεύω], em- 
bassy, Lat. légatid, vii. 3. 21. 

mper Beta, πρεσβεύσω, ἐπρεσβευ- 
σάμην, πεπρέσβευκα [πρέσβυς], be 
ambassador, go as envoy, Vii. 2. 23, 
7.6; with παρά and gen. of pers. 
fi. 1. 18. 

πρέσβυς, ews, ὁ [ο΄ Eng. presby- 
ter, priest], old, reverend, Lat. 
senex, poetic; as adj. in Anab. only 
in comp. and sup., πρεσβύτερος, 
πρεσβύτατος, i. 1.1, ii. 1. 10, 3. 12, 
ili, 2. 37, vii. 4. 5; as subst., in 
prose always pl., πρέσβεις, ol, am- 
bassadors, envoys, chosen for their 
age and standing in a community, 
Lat. légati, iii. 1. 28, v. 5.7, 6. 13 
vi. 2. 5. 


πρεσβύτης, ov [πρέσβυς], old 


man, Lat. senex, vi. 3. 10. 


185 πρίασϑαι-προεῖπον 


πρίασθαι, 2 aor. mid. inf., from 


προβάλλω [βάλλω], throw be- 


indic. ἐπριάμην, buy, used in Attic | fore ; mid., hold before oneself, 


for aor. of ὠνέομαι, opt. πριαίμην, 
partic. πριάμενος, ii. 3. 26, iii. 1. 20, 
vi. 4. 22; with gen. of price, i. 
. 6. 
ἢ πρίν, temporal conj. [πρό], be- 
fore, ere, until, after affirmative 
sentences with inf., i. 4. 13, 16, 8. 
19, το. 19, ii. 5. 2, 5, iv. 5. 1, Υ.ὔ 
6. 16; after neg. sentences with 
indic., i. 2. 26, ii. 5. 33, iii. 1. 16, 

. 29, vi. 1. 27, with ἄν and subjv., 
i. 1. 10, v. 7. 5, 12, or with opt., i. 
2. 2, vii. 7. 57, and in some Mss. 
and editt. with inf. (where some 
read opt.), iv. 5. 30. 

πρό, prep. with gen. [πρό], of 
place, before, in front of, Lat. 
ante, i. 2. 17, 4. 4, 7. 11, 20, iv. 6. 
12; hence, in defence of, for the 
sake of, for, Lat. pro, Vi. I. 8, vil. 
6. 27, 36, but πρὸ τῶν τοξευμάτων, 
as a defence against arrows, vii. 8. 
18; of time, before, i. 7. 13, vil. 3. 


in the phrase τὰ ὅπλα προβαλέ- 
σθαι, advance one’s arms for at- 
tack, charge Layonets, i. 2. 17, vi. 
5. 16, also for defence, as in the 
phrase πρὸ ἀμφοῖν προβεβλημένος 
(sc. ἀσπίδα), holding out his shield 
in front of both, iv. 2.21; of per- 
sons, bring forward, propose, nomi- 
nate, vi. 1. 25, 2. 6. 

πρόβατον, τό, cattle, Lat. pecus, 
generally plur., ii. 4. 27, ν. 2. 4, 
vi. 3.3; chiefly confined to small 
animals, as sheep and goats, iv. 7. 
14, vii. 3. 48, 7. 53; of sheep only, 
iii. 5. 9. 

προβολή, 7s [βάλλω], a throwing 
forward. Phrase, εἰς προβολήν, see 
καθίημι, Vi. 5. 25. 

προβουλεύω [R. Bod], plan for, 
contrive on behalf of, with gen. of 
pers., iii. 1. 37. 

πρόγονος, ὁ [R. γεν], forefather, 
vii. 2. 22, pl., ancestors, Lat. ma- 
iorés, iii, 2. 11, 13. 


1. In composition πρό signifies 
before, forth, forward, in public, 
for, on behalf of. 

προαγορεύω [ayelpw], give public 
notice, with ὅτι and a clause, ii. 2. 
20. 

προάγω [R. ay], lead forward, 
iv. 6. 21; intr, go forward, ad- 
vance, Vi. 5. 6, 11. 

προαιρέω [αἱρέω], take before 
others; mid., pick out for oneself, 
select, vi. 6. 19. 

προαισθάνομαι [R. 1 aF], Jind 
out or observe beforehand, with 
partic., i. 1. 7. 

προαναλίσκω [ἀνᾶλίσκω], spend 
in advance, Vi. 4. 8. 

προαποτρέπομαι [τρέπω], turn 
away beforehand, leave off previ- 
ously, with partic., vi. 5. 31, 

προάρχομαι [apxw], begin be- 
fore, take the start, with inf., i. 8. 
17. 

προβαίνω [R. Ba], step forward, 
advance, iv. 2. 28, 3. 28; of time, 
νὺξ προβαίνει, the night ts wearing 
on, iii. 1. 13. 


προδίδωμι [R. 80], give over, 
esp. to an enemy, surrender, iii. 1. 
14; hence, betray, abandon, desert, 
Lat. prodd, i. 3. 5, ii. 2. 8, 5. 39, iii. 
1,2, 2. 5, vi. 6. 17. 

προδιώκω [διώκω], pursue on or 
further, iii. 3.10. 

προδότης, ov [R. 50], betrayer, 
traitor, Lat. proditor, ii. 5. 27, Vi. 
6. 7. 

apodpoph, Hs [cf δρόμος], a run- 
ning forth, sally, iv. 7. 10. 

προεῖδον [R. Εἰδ], see before or 
in front of oneself, see before- 
hand, act. and mid., i. 8. 20, Vi. 


1. 8. 

πρόειμι [εἶμι], go on before or 
ahead, i: 3.1, 4. 18, iv. 3. 34; go 
forward, advance, proceed, i. 2. 17, 
8. 14, iv. 5. 21, vi. 5. 12; with εἰς 
or πρός and acc., Or ἀπό and gen., 
ii. 1. 2, 6, ili, 2. 22; of time, as 
προιούσης τῆς νυκτός, in the course 
of the night, ii. 2. 19. 

προεῖπον [εἶπον], tell before, give 
orders, i. 2. 17. 


προελαύνω-προμαχεών 186 


προελαύνω [édavvw], intr. ride 
before, march on before, push on, 
1. 10. 16, vi. 3. 14, 22. 

προεργάζομαι [R. Fepy], work or 
do beforehand. Phrase: the 7 po- 
εἰργασμένην “δόξαν, glory already 
sr Lat. gloriam ante partam, vi. 
1. 21. 

προέρχομαι [ἔρχομαι], go before 
or jirst, advance before another, 
go Sorward, advance, march on, 
proceed, li, 3. 3, iii. 3. 6, 4. 37 ; 
with acc. σταδίους, vii. 3. 7; with 
oe κατά and acc., iv. 2. 16, vii. 
a 1. 

προερῶ, used as fut. of προλέγω 
rR. 1 Fep }, tell beforehand, warn, 
caution, Vii. 7. 13, cf. 3. 

προέχω [ R. σεχ], have the ad- 
vantage of, iii. 2. 19. 

προηγέομαι [R. ay], lead for- 
ward, lead on, with cognate ace. 
vi. 5. 10. 

προηγορέω [ἀγείρω], speak fo. 
be eo v. oT Ὶ si 

προθέω [θέω], run forward 
ahead, v. 8. 13. ή ΠῚ 

προθυμέομαι, προθυμήσομαι and 
προθυμηθήσομαι, προυθυμήθην [R.1 
θυ], be ready, eager, zealous or 
earnest, desire, wish earnestly, Lat. 
studeo, abs. or with inf., i. 9. 24, 
li. 4. 7; ἥν 1. 9, 4. 15, vii. 7. 
47 ; give special attention, v. 4. 
22 (but here probably read προθύ- 
εσθαι). 

προθυμία, ἃς [R. 1 θυ], readi- 
ness, eagerness, zeal, good will, 


18,- vi. 4. 22. 

mpotnpr [ἴημι], send forth ; mid., 
give oneself up, give over, entrust, 
surrender, abs., or with acc., i. 9. 
9, 12, Υ. 8. 14, vii. 3. 81. Phrase: 
Τοὺς σοι προεμένους evepyeciav, those 
who have bestowed kind offices on 
you, Vil. 7. 47. 

προίστημι [R. era], put at the 
head of; intr. in pf., 2 pf., and 
plpf. act., stand at the head of, 
command, be chief of, Lat. prae- 


12, vii. 2. 2, 

προκαίω or -κάω [καίω], burn in 
Jront of, vii. 2. 18. A 

προκαλέω [R. kad], call forth 
mid., call forward to oneself, with 
ἐκ and gen., vii. 7. 2. 

προκαλύπτω (καλύπτω, καλυβ-, 
καλύψω, ἐκάλυψα, κεκάλυμμαι, ἐκα- 
λύφθην, cover], put a cover before, 
cover up, iii. 4. 8. 

προκαταθέω [θέω], run along in 
advance, vi. 3. 10. 
προκατακαίω or -κάω [καίω], 
burn down before one, i. 6. 2. 
προκαταλαμβάνω [λαμβάνω], oc- 
cupy or seize before another, pre- 
occupy, of Strong positions, i. 3. 14, 
ll. 5. 18, iii. 4. 38, iv. 1. 25. 
_ πρόκειμαι [κεῖμαι], lie in front, 
jut out, of a position on a coast, 
with ἐν and dat., vi. 4. 3. 
προκινδυνεύω [κίνδῦνος, bear 
the jirst risk, brave danger for an- 
other, vii. 3. 31. 


Lat. studium, i. 9. 18; with περί 
and acc. of pers., vii. 6. 11 ms 
45. 
πρόθυμος, ον [R. 1 θυ], ready, 
willing, devoted, eager, zealous, 
well wishing, Lat. studiosus, i. 3. 
19, 4. 15, 7. 8, iii. 2. 15, 
προθύμως, adv. [R. 1 Ov], read- 
ily, willingly, eagerly, zealously, 
af 9, iii, Ke, γα αὶ νὰ η. 
προθύω [R. 2 θυ], sacrifice be- 
fore ; mid., offer a sacrifice before 
an event, as a battle or expedition, 


Προκλῆς, dous, ὁ, Procles, gover- 
nor of Teuthrania, a descendant 
of Demaratus of Sparta, friendly 
τ the Greeks, ii. 1. 3, 2. 1, vii. 8. 

προκρίνω [κρένω], choose 
others, va vA ; 26. li 
͵ προλέγω [R. dey], declare pub- 
licly, give public orders or warn- 
ing, With dat. and inf., vii. 7. 3. 
(As fut. προερῶ, aor. προεῖπον, ῃ.υ.) 

προμαχεών, ὥνος, ὁ [R. pay |, 
rampart, battlement, Lat. propug- 
naculum, vii. 8. 13, 


offer a preliminary sacrifice, i. 7, 


sum, with gen., i. 2. 1, vi. 2. 9:6. . 


187 προμετωπίδιον- πρός 


προμετωπίδιον, τό [R. om], front- 
let, armour worn on a horse’s fore- 


head, i. 8. 7. 


No. 58. 


προμνάομαι (μνάομαι, ἐμνησάμην 
[R. pa], court), sue for one, solicit, 


vii. 3. 18. 


προνοέομαι, προνοήσομαι, mpouvon- 
σάμην and προυνοήθην [ R. γνω], take 


thought for, provide for, Vii. 7. 37 
with gen., vii. 7. 33. 


πρόνοια, as [R. γνω], forethought, 


prudent care, vii. 7. 52. 


προνομή, 7s [R. vey], @ foraging, 


foraging party, Vv. 1.7. 


citizen of the state where he per- 
formed his duties. The proxenus 
received many honours and dis- 
tinctions from the state which he 
represented. v. 4. 2, 6. 11. 
Πρόξενος, ὁ, Proxenus, a Theban, 
ii. 1. 10, pupil of Gorgias, ii. 6. 16, 
ξένος of Cyrus, i. 1. 11, to whom he 
brought troops, i. 2. 3, and one of 
whose generals he was, command- 
ing the centre of the Greeks at 
Cunaxa, i. 8. 4. After the death 
of Cyrus, he was entrapped and 
killed with the other generals, ii. 
5. 81 ff. Xenophon, his ξένος, v. 3. 
5, was induced by him to join the 


| expedition, iii. 1. 4 ff., and suc- 
ceeded to his command, iii. 1. 
47; his character, ii. 6. 16 ff. 
See also i. 5. 14, το. 5, ii. 4. 15. 
προπέμπω [πέμπω], send for- 
ward or ahead, send on, de- 
spatch, ii. 2. 15, iv. 4. 5, v. 8. 9; 
with ἐπί and acc., vii. 2. 8; con- 
duct, attend, vi. 1. 23; mid., send 
on before oneself, vii. 2. 14. 
προπίνω [R. wo], drink before 
another, drink a health, pledge, 
the custom being that the person 
pledging should first himself drink, 
and then pass the cup, with dat. 
of pers., iv. 5. 32, vii. 2. 23, 3. 26, 
27. 
προπονέω [R. oma], work before 
or for another, toil for, iii. 1. 37. 
πρός, prep. with gen., dat., and 
ace., confronting, at, by. A sur- 
vival of its original adverbial use 
appears in πρὸς δ᾽ ἔτι, besides, iii. 
2.2. With gen., sometimes with 


mpotevéw, προξενήσω, προυξένησα 
[ξένος], be one’s πρόξενος, hence 
manage anything for one, bring 
about, in a bad sense, put upon, 
vi. 5. 14. 

πρόξενος, ὁ [ξένος], public ξένος, 
the citizen of a state who was 
appointed by a foreign state to 
manage its business in his coun- 
try and to protect such of its cit- 
izens as went thither, somewhat 
resembling our consul, but almost 


pass. verbs much like ὑπό, by, 
Jrom, in the judgment of, i. 9. 20, 
ii. 3. 18, iii, 1. 5, vii. 6. 33, 39, 
with adjs., in the sight of, i. 6. 6, 
ii. 5. 20, v. 7. 12; of place, on the 
side of, towards, Lat. ab, ii. 2. 4, 
iv. 3.26; expressing what is nat- 
ural in some one, where the Greeks 
said from, from the point of view 
of the terminus ἃ quod, illustrated 
in all of the above examples, as οὐκ 


always, it should be observed, a 


ἣν πρὸς τοῦ Κύρου τρόπου, it was not 


προσάγω-προσέχω 188 


in Cyrus’s character, i. 2. 11; in 
oaths, by, Lat. per, ii. 1. 17, iii. 1. 
24, v. 7. 5, vil. 6. 33. With dat., 
Jacing, by, near, beside, at, i. 2.10, 
8. 4, 14, il. 3. 4, iv. 5. 9, 22, v. 4. 25, 
Vii. 2.14, 3.21; besides, in addition 
to, iii. 2. 33, 4. 13, vii. 6.32. With 
acc., with verbs of motion or im- 
plied motion, or of address, etc., to, 
towards, before, at, Lat. in, i. 1. 3, 
6, 2. 1, 5. 7, i. 3. 9, 6. 12, ili. 3, 2, 
4. 28, 5. 15, iv. 2. 26, v. 6. 31, vi. 
4. 4; in a hostile sense, against, 
oom, κα ἢ ἃ ἃ ἃ 10, fy, 
6. 11, 25, v. 4. 14; denoting inter- 
course or relation, with, i, 1. 10, 
lil. 5. 16, vii. 3. 16; with regard to, 
about, touching, i. 4. 9, iv. 3. 10, 
Vii. 1. 9, 7. 30; in comparison to, 
vii. 7.41; of purpose or end, for, 
νι, καὶ BD, fy, ἃ 2: 
of time, about, towards, iv. 5. 21. 
Phrases: πρὸς ταῦτα, in reply to 
this, thereupon, i, 3. 19, 20, ii. 3. 21, 
Vii. 6.23; πρὸς φιλίᾶν, in a friendly 
manner, i. 3.19; πρὸς αὐλόν, to the 
music of the flute, vi.1.5, 8. In com- 
position πρός signifies to, towards, 
against, besides, in addition to. 
προσάγω [R. ay], lead to, lead 
against, iv.6.21; with εἰς and acc., 
vi. 1. 14; make approach, apply to, 
employ, iv. τ. 23; intr., lead on, 
march forward, advance, iv. 8. 11 ; 
with πρός and acc., i. 10. 9, v. 2. 8. 
προσαιτέω [αἰτέω], ask in addi- 
tion, ask for more, i. 3. 21, vii. 6. 
27; with two accs., vii. 3. 31. 
προσαναλίσκω [dvadicxw], spend 
besides, vi. 4. 8. 
προσανεῖπον [εἶπον], announce 
ὌΝΩΝ command further, vii. 1. 
προσβαίνω [R. Ba], step to or 
upon, With πρός and acc., iv. 2. 28. 
προσβάλλω [βάλλω], strike or 
throw against; intr., hurl (one- 
self) against, make an attack, 
charge, storm, abs. or with πρός 
and acc., iv. 2. 11, 6. 13, v. 2. 4, 
21 


can be approached, accessible, iv. 

3. 12, 8. 9. 
προσβολή, js [βάλλω], assault, 

charge, iii. 4. 2. 
 προσγίγνομαι [R. γεν], come to, 
join, attach oneself to, as an ally, 
iv. 6. 9, vii. 1. 28, 6. 29. 

προσδανείζομαι (davelfoua, δα- 
νειδ-, δανείσομαι, ἐδανεισάμην, δεδά- 
γεισμαι [R. 80], borrow), borrow 

besides, Vii. 5. 5. 

προσδεῖ [R. Se], there is need 
besides, there is still need, with 
gen. of thing and dat. of pers., iii. 

2. 34, v. 6. 1. 
προσδέομαι [R. δὲ], need or be 
in want of besides, with gen., vii. 
6.27; want, strive for, with gen., 
vi. 1. 24, 

_ προσδίδωμι [R.50], give besides, 
1. g. 19. 

_mpordoxdw, προσεδόκησα (the 
simple δοκάω does not occur), ex- 
pect, look for, with acc. and inf., 
lil. 1, 14, vi. 1. 16, vii. 6. 11. 

προσδοκεῖ [ R. 50x], ἐξ seems good 

or is approved besides, iii. 2. 34. 

πρόσειμι [elu], come to, come 

up, approach, advance, abs., i. 5 
14, 7. 5, li. 2. 17, iv. t. 16, 8. 12, vii. 
7.57; with dat. or πρός and acc. of 
pers., ii. 4. 2, v. 6. 31, vi. 1. 19; 
with els or πρός and acc. of place, 
ili. 4. 33, iv. 7. 7, vii. 6. 24. 

προσελαύνω [ἐλαύνω], drive 
towards ; intr., ride towards, ride 
against, iii. 4. 39, iv. 4. 5, vi. 3. 7; 
march on, march against, i. 5. 12, 
7. 16, iii, 5. 18. 

προσέρχομαι [ἔρχομαι7ὔ, come to, 
come up, approach, advance, draw 
near, abs., i. 8. 1, ii. 1. 8, iv. 2. 7, 
vi. 1. 8, vii. 1. 88 ; with dat. of pers., 
ili. 5. 8, iv. 3. 10, vii. 1.8; with eis 
and acc., iv. 4. 5; of soldiers, go 
over to, with dat., i. 3. 9. 
προσεύχομαι [εὔχομαι7ὔ, pray to, 
offer up vows to, with dat., vi. 3. 21. 
προσέχω [R. vex], hold to; in 
Anab, always in the phrase προσέ- 
xeww τὸν νοῦν, apply the mind to, 


προσβατός, ἡ, dv [R. Ba], that 


pay attention to, give heed to, be 


189 προσήκω-προστάτης 


intent on (see νοῦς), Lat. antmum 
intendere, abs. or with dat., i. 5. 9, 
ii, 4. 2, iv. 2. 2, vi. 3. 18, vii. 8. 16; 
without νοῦν, v. 6. 22, vii. 6. 5. 
προσήκω [ἥκω], have come to, 
reach, with ἐπί and acc., iv. 3. 23; 
of persons, belong to, be- related 
to, cf. Lat. propinquus, with dat., 
i. 6. 1; impers., it belongs to, it is 
fitting, proper, seemly, Lat. decet, 
with dat. or acc. and inf,, iii, 2. 11, 
15, 16, vii. 7. 18. Phrase: τούτῳ 
τῆς Bowrlas προσήκει οὐδέν, he has 
nothing to do with Boeotia, iii. τ. 
ol. 
προσῇτε; 566 πρόσειμι. 
πρόσϑεν, adv. [πρός], before. Of 
place, before, in front, in the 
phrases: ὑμᾶς τοὺς πρόσθεν, you 
in the van, Vv. 8. 16; εἰς τὸ πρόσθεν, 
forward, to the front, i. 10. 5, ii. I. 
2, vii. 3. 41; τὸ πρόσθεν, the van, 
iii. 2. 36; with gen., els τὸ πρόσθεν 
τῶν ὅπλων, see ὅπλον, iii. 1. 33. Of 
time, before, formerly, previously, 
earlier, i. 3. 18, ii. 4. 5, iii. 1. 45, ν. 
4. 1, vi. 1. 17, vii. 2. 22; in attrib. 
position, former, early, preceding, 
previous, i. 4. 8, 6. 3, ii. 3. 1, 22, iil. 
4. 2, iv. 3. 7, vi. 4. 11; freq. in the 
clause on which a clause intro- 
duced by πρίν depends, when πρό- 
σθεν is superfluous in Eng., i. 1. 
10, iii. 2. 29, iv. 3. 12, vi. 1. 27. 
Phrases: τὸ πρόσθεν, the time be- 
fore, before, i. το. 11, iii. 1. 23 ; 1 po- 
cbev... 7, sooner than, ii. τ. 10. 
προσθέω [θέω], run towards or 
up, run against, charge, abs., V. 7. 
21, vi. 3. 7, Vii. 1. 15, 7. 55. 
προσίᾶσι, See πρόσειμι. 
προσίημι [ἴημι], let come to, let 
approach, with πρός and acc., iv. 5. 
5; mid., let come to oneself, admit, 
receive, iv. 2. 12; allow, permit, V. 
5.3. Phrase: προσΐεσθαι els ταὐτὸ 
ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς, admit to equal standing 
with ourselves, iii. 1. 30. 
προσκαλέω [R. kad], call towards, 
summon, i. 9. 28. 
προσκτάομαι [κτάομαι], gain be- 


προσκυνέω, προσκυνήσω, προσεκύ- 
νῆσα [κυνέω, ἐκύνησα, kiss, poetic], 
do obeisance, bow down to, wor- 
ship, of gods, iii. 2. 9, 18; of the 
oriental salute to potentates, make 
a salaam, do homage, i. 6. 10, 8. 21. 
προσλαμβάνω [λαμβάνω], take 
besides, receive in addition, Vil. 3. 
13, 6. 27, 32; take to one, receive 
to help, abs. or with acc., i. 7. 3, iv. 
1. 27, vii. 7. 53; lay hold on, take 
part in, lend a hand, ii. 3. 11. 
προσμένω [R. μα], wait still 
longer, wait for, vi. 6. 1. 
προσμίγνυμι (μέγνῦμι, μιγ-, μέξω, 
gutta, μέμτγμαι, ἐμέχθην and ἐμίγην 
[R. pry], mix), mingle with, of 
persons, join, unite with, iv. 2. 16. 
πρόσοδος, ἡ [ὁδός], way to, ap- 
proach, Lat. aditus, with πρός and 
acc., V. 2.33; approach for worship, 
procession, in honour of a god, 
Lat. pompa, vi. 1. 115; income, 
revenue, profit, Lat. reditus, i. 9. 
19, vii. 7. 36. 
προσόμνῦμι [ὄμνυμι], swear too, 
i: 2.8. 

προσομολογέω [ἅμα - R. λεγ], 
concede to one, surrender, Vii. 4. 24. 

προσπερονάω (περονάω [R. περ], 
pierce, not Attic), προσπεπερόνημαι, 
Jasten with a pin, skewer to, Vii. 3. 
21. 

προσπίπτω [R. wer], fall upon, 
rush towards, Vii. 1. 21. 

προσποιέομαι [mow], take to 
oneself, assume, profess, with inf., 
ii. 1. 7; pretend, feign, make itt 
appear, Lat. simulo, with int., i. 3. 
14, iv. 3. 20, 6. 13, v. 2. 29. 

προσπολεμέω [πολεμέω], war 
against, carry on war against, i. 
6. 6. 

προσσχόντες, SCE προσέχω. 

προστατεύω [R. στα], be at the 
head, take charge, see to a matter, 
with ὅπως and subjv., v. 6. 21. 

προστατέω, προεστάτησα ([R. 
στα], be in charge of, be manager 
of, with gen., iv. 8. 25. 

προστάτης, ov [R. στα], one who 


sides, acquire in addition, Υ. 6. 19. 


stands before, chief, leader, vii. 7.31. 


προστάττω- πρῴ 190 


προστάττω [R. τακ], assign or 
appoint to a duty, give an order to, 
i. 6. 10, 9. 18. 
προστελέω [τέλος], pay or spend 
besides, vii. 6. 30. 
προστερνίδιον, τό [R. στρα], 
breastplate, for horses, used partly 
as a protection, i. 8. 7, partly as 
an ornament. See the illustration 
8.0. προμετωπίδιον. 
προστίθημι [R. Ge], addto; mid., 
add oneself to another, join, con- 
cur, With dat., i. 6. 10. 
προστρέχω [τρέχω], run towards, 
run up to, with dat., iv. 2.21, 3. 10, 
Vii. 4. 7. 
προσφέρω [R. hep], bring to or 
against, Vv. 2. 14; mid., bear or 
conduct oneself towards, behave, 
Lat. mé gerd, with dat. or πρός and 
acc., V. 5. 19, vii. 1. 6. 
προσχωρέω [χωρέω], go over to, 
surrender, Υ. 4. 30. 
πρόσχωρος, ov [χῶρος], adjacent ; 
subst., of πρόσχωροι, neighbours, v. 
3: 9. 
πρόσω, adv. [πρό], forwards, 
onward, in advance, Vi. 1. 1, vii. 3. 
42, comp. προσωτέρω, vii. 7.1; at 
a distance, Jar, il. 2. 15, iv. 5. 2, 
vii. 3. 17; with gen., far from, iii. 
2. 22, iv. 1.3, but πρόσω τοῦ rora- 
μοῦ, far into the river, iv. 3. 28; 
sup. προσωτάτω, vi.6.1. Phrases: 
ἰέναι τοῦ πρόσω, go forward, i. 3.1; 
προσωτέρω τοῦ καιροῦ, see καιρός, 
iv. 3. 34; εἰς τὸ πρόσω, forward, in 
advance, v. 4. 30. 
πρόσωπον, τό [R. or], visage, 
Jace, look, sing. poet., but plur. 
even of one person, ii. 6. 11.. 
προτάττω [R. rax], place in 
en i.e. in the front rank, v. 2. 
De 
προτελέω [τέλος], pay before- 
hand, vii. 7. 25. 
προτεραῖος, a, ov [πρό], only in 
the phrase τῇ προτεραίᾳ, on the 
day before, Lat. pridié, ii. 1. 3, v. 
4. 23. 
πρότερος, a, ov [πρό], former, 
previous, earlier, preceding, Lat. 


prior, Vv. 4. 26, vii. 8. 22; some- 
times where we use an adv., as 7 
γυνὴ προτέρᾷ Κύρου ἀφίκετο, the 
woman got there sooner than Cy- 
rus, i, 2.25, ef. 4.12; neut. as adv., 
πρότερον, before, previously, ear- 
lier, i. 2. 26, 3. 21, iv. 4. 15, vii. 6. 
33; superfluous in Eng. when in a 
clause followed by a clause with 
πρίν, iii.1.16. Phrase: τὸ πρότερον, 
the time before, iv. 4. 14. 

mpotipaw [R. τι], honour more 
or above, distinguish before, with 
gen., i. 6. 5; fut. mid. as pass., be 
preferred to, be honoured above, 
with gen., i. 4. 14. 

προτρέχω [τρέχω], run forward 
or on, 1. 5.2; with ἀπό and gen., 
iv. 7. 10; run ahead of, outrun, 
with gen., v. 2. 4. 

προφαίνω [R. oa], bring to 
light ; mid., come to light, come in 
sight, appear, of persons and things, 
δι, 

προφασίζομαι (προφασιδ-), προ- 


φασιοῦμαι, προυφασισάμην [R. pa], . 


set up as @ pretext or excuse, iii. 1. 
25. 

πρόφασις, ews, ἡ [R. ha], alle- 
gation, pretext, excuse, with inf. 
or τοῦ and inf., i. 1. 7, vii. 6. 22; 
with ws and a partic., or ἕνα and a 
clause, i. 2. 1, ii. 3. 21. 

προφυλακή, ἢς [φυλάττω], pl., 
advanced posts, outposts, pickets, 
Lat. excubiae, iii. 2. 1. 

προφύλαξ, axos, ὁ [φυλάττω], 
outpost, picket, sentinel, Lat. excu- 
bitor, li. 3. 2, 4. 15, vi. 4. 26. 

προχωρέω [χωρέω], go forward 
or on, continue, of drinking, vii. 
3. 26; make progress, hence, pros- 
per, be favourable, succeed, vi. 4. 
21 ; Impers., ἐξ 18 advantageous, so 
ἔχοντι ὅ τι προχωροίη, with whatever 
was to his advantage, i. 9. 13. 

πρύμνα, ns, stern of a ship, Lat. 
puppis, v. 8. 20. 

πρῷ or πρωΐ, adv. [πρό], early, 
tn the morning, betimes, Lat. mane, 
li. 2. 1, vi. 5. 2, vii. 6.6; comp. 
πρφαίτερον Or πρωιαίτερον, iii. 4. 1. 


191 πρῷρα-πυγμή 


πρῷρα, as [πρό], prow, bow οὗ ἃ 
ship, Lat. prora, Υ. 8. 20. 
πρῳρεύς, dws, ὁ [πρό]; man at 
the prow, lookout, an officer in 
command at the bow of the Greek 
ship, subordinate to the κυβερνή- 
THs, 7.v., V. 8. 20. 
πρωτεύω, πρωτεύσω, ἐπρώτευσα 
[πρό]. be jirst, hold the chief place, 
ii. 6. 26. 
πρῶτος, 7, ov [πρό], jirst, in its 
widest sense, of place, order, de- 
gree, and time, foremost, chief, 
principal, earliest, Lat. primus, 1. 
το, ἢ. Als 2 By Mihi 4. BE, BP. Bids Ve 
8. 2, vi. 5. 5, vii. 1.40; often where 
we use an adv., i. 3. 1, 6.9, ii. 3. 19, 
iii. 4. 20, iv. 2. 9, vi. 2. 17, vii. 1. 
29; of soldiers, οἱ πρῶτοι, the van, 
the advance, ii. 2. 16, iii. 5. 12, iv. 
2. 25; of social position, ii. 6. 17 ; 
as adv. πρῶτον, at first, in the jirst 
place, first, Lat. primum, primd, 1. 
2. 16, ii. 3. 5, iii. 2. 9, v. 1. 6, vii. 
2.23. Phrases: τὸ πρῶτον, the Jjirst 
time, at first, i. 10. 10, iv. 8. 9, vi. 
3. 23, vii. 2.18; ws τὸ πρῶτον, as 
soon as, vii. 8. 14. 
πταίω, πταίσω, ἔπταισα [ R. wer], 
stumble, fall, dash, with πρός and 
acc., iv. 2. 3. 
πτάρνυμαι (rrap-), ἔπταρον [ (ἢ. 
Lat. sternud, sneeze], sneeze, iii. 
2. 9. 
πτέρυξ, υγος, ἡ [R. wer], wing of 
a bird, Lat. ala, i. 5.3; flap of a 
corselet, iv. 7. 15. Round the 
lower part of the θώραξ (q.v.) a 
series of flaps was attached, below 
the ζώνη (q.v.) consisting of leather, 
or felt, covered with metal plates, 
and serving to protect the hips and 
groin, but not interfering with the 
wearer’s freedom of movement. 
For additional illustration, see s.v. 
ἅρμα, ἀσπίς (No. 10), and ὁπλέτης. 
πυγμή, ἢς [πύξ, of. Eng. pygmy], 
jist, Lat. piignus; boxing, boxing 
match, Lat. pugildtus, iv. 8. 27. 
Boxing, as practised at the Greek 
national games, was a severe and 


times resulted fatally, although 
the intentional killing of an antag- 
onist was punished by law. The 
very severity of the exercise, how- 
ever, made it an excellent training 
for soldiers. It was practised 
naked. Boxers used the caestus, 
thongs of leather tied round the 
hands and wrists, and often ex- 
tending to the elbow. In Homeric 
times, and later in the Greek 
wrestling schools, the thongs were 
soft, and, while they increased the 
force of the blow, at the same time 
they mitigated it, since the knuc- 
kles were covered by them. But 
in the severer forms of the contest 
the strips of leather were hard and 
were loaded with metal, so that 


the caestus became a frightful 
weapon, as illustrated in the ac- 
companying cut. Boxers were not 
allowed to clinch, and there were 


dangerous contest, which some- 


no rounds, but only enforced rests 


Πυθαγόρᾶς-πυρρίχη 192 


as were due to the exhaustion οὗ! 


both the fighters. The contest 
continued until one of the combat- 
ants was disabled or acknowledged 
defeat by raising his hand. 

Πυθαγόρᾶς, ov, Pythagoras, ad- 
miral of the Spartan fleet, i. 4. 2. 

πυθόμενος, See πυνθάνομαι. 

πυκνός, ἡ, dv [cf. πύξ], close- 
packed, close, compact, close to- 
gether, thick, Lat. dénsus, ii. 3. 3, 
iv. 7. 15, 8. 2, ν. 2.5; neut. as adv., 
πυκνά, constantly, often, Lat. fre- 
quenter, Vi. 1. 8. 

πύκτης, ov [πύξ], pugilist, boxer, 
Lat. pugil, v. 8. 23. 

Πύλαι, av [πύλη], Pylae, i.e. 
‘ The Gates,’ a fortress on the fron- 
tiers of Mesopotamia and Babylo- 
nia, 1. 5. 5. 

πύλη, ns, gate, of towns and 
forts, pl. because of the two wings 
of which such gates were composed, 
like Lat. forés, i. 4. 4, v. 2. 16, vi. 2. 
8, vii. 1.12, 6.24; opening, entrance, 


pyrean, pyre, pyro-technic], fire, 
Lat. ignis, ii. 5. 19, iii. 1. 3, iv. 5 
ὅ, 21, v. 2.3, 14, vii. 4. 16; pl. ra 
πυρά, dat. πυροῖς, watch fires, camp 
| Jires, iv. 4.9, vii. 2.18; fire signals, 
| beacons, iv. 1. 11, 6. 20. 

| πῦραμίς, ldos, ἡ [cf. Eng. pyra- 
bpd pyramid, iii. 4. 9 (see Ad- 
pico), 

Tlipapos, ὁ, the Pyramus, one 
of the largest rivers in Asia Minor, 
rising in Cappadocia and flowing 
through Cilicia to the sea, i. 4. 1 
| (Djihan). 

πυργομαχέω [πύργος ἰ- R. pay], 
storm or assault a tower, vii. 8. 13. 

πύργος, 6, tower, esp. on the wall 
of a fortress or city, Lat. turris, 
vii. 8. 13. 

πυρέττω (πυρετ-) [πῦρ], have a 
νον, vi. 4. 11. 

πύρινος, 7, ov [πῦρός], of wheat, 
wheaten, Lat. triticeus, iv. 5. 31. 

πυροῖς, See πῦρ. 

πὺρός, 6, wheat, Lat. triticum, 


vi. 5. 1; hence pass, generally 
through mountains, Lat. angustiae ; | 
SO πύλαι THs Κιλικίᾶς καὶ τῆς Zuplas, | 
the Syro-Cilician Pass, i. 4. 4, on | 
the frontiers of Syria and Cilicia, 
ὃ harrow pass between Mt. Ami- 
nus and the Gulf of Issus, while 
ai πύλαι Σύριαι, in i. 4. 5, means 
the pass to the south leading over 
the Amanus ridge inland from the 
coast. 

πυνθάνομαι (πυθ-), πεύσομαι, ἐπυ-᾿ 
θόμην, πέπυσμαι, inquire, ask, with 
acc. and ὅπως with a clause, iii. 1.7 ; 
with gen. of pers. or περέ and gen. 
and an interr. clause, vi. 3. 25, vii. 
1.14; learn by inquiry, ascertain, 
discover, find out, abs. or with acc., 
i. 5. 15, ii. 1. 4, 2. 3, iv. 4. 22, vi. 3. 
26; with acc. and partic. or inf., 
i. 7. 16, vii. 6.11; with gen. of pers. 
and ὅτι, iv. 6. 17, vi. 3. 23. 

πύξ, adv. [root πυγ, thick, close, 
cf. πυκνός, Lat. piignus, fist, Eng. 
FIST], with the fist, v. 8. 16. 

πῦρ, pds, τό [root au, cleanse, cf. 


Lat. purus, clean, Eng. ‘rire, em- 


always pl. in Anab., i. 2. 22, iv. δ. 
5, 26, vi. 4. 6, 6. 1, vii. 1. 18. 

Πυρρίᾶς, ov, Pyrrhias, an Arca- 
dian taxiarch, vi. 5. 11. 

πυρρίχη, ns, the pyrrich, a war 
dance, vi. 1. 12. We have a de- 
scription of it in Plato, who says 
that the pyrrhic dance ‘ imitates 


| the modes of avoiding blows and 


darts by dropping, or giving way, 
or springing aside, or rising up, or 
falling down; also the opposite 
postures, which are those of action, 


ἤν 


No, 60, 


as, for example, the imitation of 
archery and the hurling of javelins, 
and of all sorts of blows.’ It was 


193 πυρσεύω- ῥίπτω 


practised by children at Sparta, 
and exhibitions of pyrrhic dances 
were given at the celebration of 
the great festival of the Pana- 
thenaea at Athens. In the ac- 
companying illustration two hel- 
meted youths dance facing one 
another, striking sword against 
shield; between them dances a 
satyr with ivy-wreath and thyr- 
sus. ' Lif 

πυρσεύω, ἐπύρσευσα [πυρσός, ὁ, 
torch, cf. rip], light up; make sig- 
nals by fire, light beacon Jires, Vu. 
8. 15. 

πώ, indef. adv., enclitic, only 
after a neg., up to this time, yet, 
hitherto, i. 2. 26, vi. 5. 14, Vil. 3, 
35, 5. 16, 6. 35; often in compo- 
sition, Lat. -dum, see οὕπω, μήπω, 
etc. 4 

πωλέω, πωλήσω, ἐπωλήθην [cf 
Eng. mono-poly], sell, Lat. uendo, 
abs. or with acc. of pers. or thing, 
i. 5. 5, Vv. 7. 18, vii. 3. 3, 7. 56. 

πῶλος, ὁ, ἡ [παῖε], foal, colt, 

lly, iv. 5. 24, 3d. 
᾿ cies 6, Polus, admiral of the 
Spartan fleet, succeeding Anaxi- 
bius, vii. 2. 5. 

πῶμα, ατος, τό [R. πο], drink, 
draught, iv.5.27. (The form πόμα, 
found in some old editt., is not 
Attic.) 

πώποτε, indef. adv. [πώ + ποτέ], 
in negative clauses like Lat. um- 
quam, at any time, ever, ever yet, 
i. 6. 11, 9. 18, 19, vii. 7. 48. 

πῶς, interr, adv., of manner, in 
what way? how? Lat. quo modo? 
used in dir. or indir. questions, 
i. 7. 2, iii, 4. 40, v. 7. 9, vi. 5. 19, 
vii. 6. 6. 

πώς, indef. adv., enclitic, of man- 
ner, in any way, somehow, somehow 
or other, by any means, at dil, ii. 3. 
18, 5. 2, 6. 3, iii. 1. 20, 26; often 
modifying or weakening another 
word, as τεχνιχῶς πως, in an artful 
sort of way, Vi. 1.5; ἀμφὶ τὴν αὐ- 
τήν πως wpav, somewhere about 


17; ὧδέ πως, somewhat as follows, 
i. 7.9, of. iii. 1. 43. 


P. 


ῥᾷδιος, a, ov [cf. Epic ῥηίδιος, 
root pa, join, reckon, orig. the same 
as R. ap, cf. Lat. ratus, reckoned, 
χοᾶ, reor, reckon, think], adapt- 
able, easy, Lat. facilis, abs., with 
inf., or with dat. and inf., iii. 4. 15, 
iv. 7. 7, 8. 18, v. 2. 7; comp. ῥᾷον, 
sup. ῥᾷστον, with inf., ii. 6. 24, iv. 
6. 12, vi. 5. 29. 

ῥᾳδίως, adv. [pds], easily, with- 
out difficulty, iii. 5. 9, vii. 2. 34; 
sup. ὡς ῥᾷστα, with the greatest of 
ease, iv. 6. 10. 

ῬῬαθίνης, ov, Rhathines, one of 
the officers of Pharnabazus, vi. 5. 7. 

ῥᾳθυμέω [ῥᾷάθυμος, easy-going, cf. 
ῥᾷδιος + R. 1 θυ], take things easily, 
live in idleness, ii. 6. 6. 

ῥᾳθυμία, as (cf. ῥᾳθυμέω], easy- 
going ways, indifference, laziness, 
ii. 6. 5. 

ῥᾷον, ῥᾷστον, see ῥᾷδιος. iyi 

ῥᾳστώνη, ns [ῥᾷστος, cf. ῥᾷδιος], 
easiness of disposition, indolence, 
indifference, v. 8. 16. 

péw (ῥυ-), ῥεύσομαι ΟΥ ῥνήσομαι, 
poetic ἔρρευσα, ἐρρύηκα, aor. pass. 
as act. ἐρρύην [cf. Eng. cata-rrh, 
rheum], flow, run, of a stream, 
Lat. flud, with ἀπό or διά and gen. 
or ἐνὶ and dat., i. 2. 7, 23, 4. 4, 7. 
15, vi. 4. 4. 

ῥήτρᾶ, as [R. 1 Fep]}, verbal agree- 
ment, compact, ordinance, Vi. 6. 28, 
a word applied in Sparta to the 
laws of Lycurgus. 4 

ῥῖγος, ovs, τό [cf. Lat. frigus, 
cold], cold, frost, v. 8.2. — ἡ 

ῥίπτω or in pres, and impf. ῥῖ- 
πτέω (ῥιφ-), ῥίψω, ἔρριψα, ἔρριφα, ἔρ- 
ρῖμμαι, ἐρρίφθην and ἐρρίφην, throw, 
cast, toss, Lat. iacid, iii. 3. 1, iv. 8. 
8, vii. 3.22; throw off or away, cast 
aside or down, hurl down, i. 5. 8, 


the same hour, iv. 8. 21, cf. vi. 2. 


iv. 7. 13. 


ῥίς- σάλπιγξ 194 


pts, pirds, ἡ [τ΄ Eng. rhino-ceros], 
nose, Vii. 4. 3. 

Ῥόδιος, a, ov [Ῥόδος, Rhodes}, 
Rhodian, iii. 5.8; subst., ὁ ἹΡόδιος, 
a Rhodian, native of Rhodes, an is- 
land in the Aegéan, south of Caria ; 
the people were famous slingers, 
lii. 3. 16, 4. 15. 

ῥοφέω, ῥοφήσομαι, ἐρρόφησα [root 
σορφ, cf. Lat. sorbed, suck up], sup 
up, lap, suck in, iv. 5. 32. 

ῥυθμός, ὁ [ῥέω, of. Eng. rhythm), 
measured movement, musical time, 
rhythm, of singing, playing, and 
dancing, Lat. numerus; ἐν ῥυθμῷ, 
in time, Vv. 4. 14, vi. 1. 8, 10; πρὸς 
Tov ἐνόπλιον ῥυθμόν, in martial 
rhythm, Vi.1.11; ῥυθμούς σαλπίζον- 
τες, keeping time with the trumpet, 
Vii. 3. $2. 

Pipa, aros, τό [cf. ἐρύω, draw), 
thing drawn, with τόξου, bow- 
string. Phrase: ἐκ τόξου ῥύματος, 
with a bowshot’s start, iii. 3. 15. 

ῥώμη, ns [cf. ῥώννυμι], strength, 
μηνὶ military force, Lat. copia, iii. 
3. 14. 

ῥώννῦμι (ῥω-), -έρρωσα, ἔρρωμαι, 
ἐρρώσθην, strengthen, see ἐρρωμέ- 
vos. 

ἹῬωπάρᾶς, a (Dor. gen.), Rhopa- 
ras, satrap of Babylonia, vii. 8. 25. 


=. 


σά, see σός. 

σᾶ, 566 σῶς. 

σάγαρις, ews, ἡ, battle-axe, used 
by Amazons, iv. 4. 16; those of 
the Mossynoeci were of iron, v. 4. 
13. The battle-axe was not used 
by Greeks in historical times, but 
in the Orient it continued in use as 
late as the time of Alexander the 
Great. In the hands of Amazons, 
as depicted on the monuments, it 
is commonly double-edged (see also 
8.0. Ἀμαζών), but sometimes one of 
the sides, instead of being a blade, | 


panying illustration, which repre- 
sents Phrygian battle-axes. 


a 


i, 


No, 61. 


σακίον, τό [dim. of σάκος, ὁ, bag, 
cf. Eng. sack], little bag, pouch, 
for horses’ feet to keep them from 
sinking into snow, iv. 5. 36. 
Σαλμυδησσός, ὁ, Salmydessus, a 
coast town and district of Thrace, 
extending from Cape Thynias to 
the Bosporus, vii. 5. 12. This 
was a dangerous place for ships, 
and the inhabitants were noted 
wreckers. 

σαλπιγκτής, see σαλπικτής. 
σάλπιγξ, yyos, ἡ, trumpet, Lat. 
tuba, used to give the signal for 
battle, iii. 4. 4, iv. 2.1, v. 2. 14, vi. 
5. 27, vii. 4. 16, or to sound the 
recall, iv. 4.22. The σάλπιγξ was 
a long,‘straight bronze tube, which 
gradually increased in diameter and 
terminated in a bell-shaped aper- 
ture. (See s.v. κέρας.) The Roman 
tuba was precisely the same in- 
strument. Xenophon relates the 


is a curved pick, as in the accom- 


curious fact that the trumpets of 


195 σαλπίζω-- Σελινοῦς 


the Thracians, which he calls σάλ- 
mvyyes, were of raw oxhide, and 


that they executed on them airs 
and tunes like the music of the 
μάγαδις (q.v.), Vil. 3. 32. 

σαλπίζω (σαλπιγγ-), ἐσάλπιγξα 
[φ΄ σάλπιγξ], blow the trumpet, see 
ῥυθμός, Vii. 3.32; in ἐπεὶ ἐσάλπιγξε, 
i, 2. 17, the subj. σαλπικτής is under- 
stood, and the phrase means when 
the trumpet sounded the charge, 
cf. Lat. classicum cecinit. 

σαλπικτής ΟΥ̓ σαλπιγκτής, οὔ 
[σαλπίζω], trumpeter, Lat. tubicen, 
iv. 3. 29, 32, vil. 4. 19. 

Σάμιος, a, ov Σάμος, Samos], 
Samian, of Samos, i. 7. 5,.an island 
in the Aegéan, southwest of Lydia. 
It was one of the most important 
Ionic colonies. (Samo.) 

Σαμόλᾶς, ov or a, Samolas, a 
taxiarch from Achaia, v. 6. 14, vi. 

rut 

: Σάρδεις, εων, αἱ, Sardis, a city in 
the central part of Lydia on the 
Pactolus, a tributary of the Her- 
mus. It was the capital of the 
kingdom of Croesus, and under 
the Persians remained the capital 
of the Lydian satrapy. From it 


Cyrus set out on his march, i. 2. 2, 
5, 6. 6, iii, τ. 8. (Its ruins are 
called Sart.) 

σατραπεύω [σατράπης], be satrap, 
govern as satrap, with acc. or gen., 
i. 7. 6, iii. 4. 31. 

σατράπης, ov, satrap, the title of 
the governor of a Persian province, 
Lt, Bes. Ty ΝΥ. ae ae 

Σάτυρος, ὁ, a satyr, but in Anab., 
i. 2.13, Silénus is meant, the jovial 
old attendant of Dionysus. The 
satyrs were wood, mountain, and 
water spirits, who were found 
everywhere, but especially in the 
train of Dionysus. In them the 
animal and sensual nature was 
strongly developed ; this in art was 
indicated by thick lips, flat nose, 
pointed ears, long coarse hair, and 
a horse’s tail, either short or long. 
Sporting with the nymphs, drink- 
ing, dancing, and music were their 
chief employments. 

σαυτόν, etc., see σεαυτοῦ. 

σαφής, ἐς [root cam, taste, cf. 
Lat. sapid, have taste, be wise, 
sapiéns, wise, Eng. sap], prop. 
tasty, of keen taste, hence, applied 
to things, clear, plain, certain, iii. 
1. 10. 

σαφῶς, adv. [σαφής], clearly, 
evidently, Lat. plané, i. 4. 18, iii. 4. 
37, iv. 5. 8; certainly, doubtlessly, 
Lat. certé, ii. 5. 4, v. 1. 10, vii. 6. 
43. 

-ce, ἃ suffix denoting the place 
whither. 

σεαυτοῦ, fs, contr. σαυτοῦ, js, 
refl. pron. [pronominal stem oe 
(see σύ) + αὐτός], of yourself, dat. 
σαυτῷ, Vii. 8. 3, acc. σαυτόν, Vil. 7. 
23. The gen. in attrib. position 
takes the place of the possessive 
pron., Lat. twus, i. 6. 7; here the 
substantive may be omitted, vii. 2. 
37. 

Σελινοῦς, odvros, 6, Selinus, a 
little river near Scillus in Elis, v. 
3. 8 (Kréstena). Also a river of 
the same name near the temple of 
Ephesian Artemis, v. 3. 8. 


σεσω(σ) μένοι-στταγωγός 196 


σεσω(σ) μένοι, σέσω(σ᾽) ται, see 
σῴζω. 

Σεύθης, ov, Seuthes, v. 1. 15, an 
Odrysian prince. His father, Mae- 
sades, had governed several Thra- 
cian tribes, but had been expelled 
from his country and died, vii. 2. 
32. Seuthes was brought up by 
Medocus (g.v.), and on attaining 
manhood was given an indepen- 
dent force with which he carried 
on a guerilla warfare, vii. 2. 33, 
34, until Xenophon and the army 
became his allies and reinstated 
him in his country (for a full ac- 
count of this, see vii. 2-8). 

Σηλυβρία, as, Selybria, a small 
town on the Propontis west of By- 
zantium and subject to that city, 
Vii. 2, 28, 5. 15. (Silivri.) 

σημαίνω (σημαν-), σημανῶ, ἐσή- 
μῆνα, σεσήμασμαι, ἐσημάνθην [ σῆμα, 
sign], give or make a sign, show 
by sign, vii. 2. 18, esp. in military 
phrases, give the signal, Lat. sig- 
num do, iv. 3. 32, vii. 4. 16, freq. 
without subj. (cf. σαλπίζω), σημαί- 
vet, the signal is given, abs., with 
inf., with σάλπιγγι for attack or 
recall, and κέρᾶτι for ‘taps,’ ii. 2. 
4, iii. 4. 4, iv. 2. 1, v. 2. 12, 30, vi. 
5. 25, vii. 3. 52; indicate, make 
known, inform, Lat. ostendd, vi. 
3. 15, vii. 3. 43; instruct, order, 
li, 1. 2; of the will of gods made 
known by signs, signify, declare, 
with dat. of pers. and inf., vi. 1. 
24, 2. 16. 

σημεῖον, τό [σῆμα, sign], sign, 
token, mark, trace, Lat. signum, 
vi. 2. 2; signal to do a thing, ii. 5. 
32; ensign, standard, i. το. 12. 

σησάμινος, 7, ov [σήσαμον], of 
— made of sesame, iv. 4. 

σήσαμον, τό [cf Eng. sesame], 
sesame, pl. sesame seeds, i. 2. 22, 
vi. 4.6. The sesame (sésamum 
orientalis) is an oily plant, native 
of the East, from the seeds of 
which is made an oil that serves 
for food, medicine, and ointment. 


σϊγάζω (σιγαδ-) [στγή], make 
silent, silence, vi. 1. 32. 

σϊγάω, σϊγήσομαι, etc. [στγή], be 
silent, hold one’s peace, v. 6. 27. 

otyh, 9s, silence, Lat. silentium, 
ii. 2.20; dat. as adv., ciy7, in si- 
lence, i, 8. 11, iv. 2. 7. 

σίγλος, ὁ, siglus, a silver coin, 
worth τοῖα of a Persian talent; a 
Persian drachma, worth 7} Attic 
obols, i. 5.6. See ura and ὀβολός. 

ovdypela, as [ cf. σιδηροῦς, work- 
ing in tron, as a trade, Vv. 5. 1. 

σιδήρεος, a, ov, contr. σιδηροῦς, 
a, οῦν [σίδηρος, ὁ, iron], made of 
tron, tron, Lat. ferreus, v. 4. 13. 

Σικνώνιος, ὁ [Σικυών, Sicyon], a 
Sicyonian, native of Sicyon, iii. 4. 
47, a small state with a capital of 
the same name in the northern 
part of Peloponnésus, west of Cor- 
inth, a centre for the art of mould- 
ing bronze and clay from very 
early times, and famous for its 
schools of painting and sculpture. 

Σιλᾶνός, ὁ, Silanus, soothsayer 
to Cyrus, from Ambracia, i. 7. 18, 
an opponent of Xenophon, v. 6. 
16 ff., 29, 34; deserted the army, 
vi. 4. 13. 

Σιλᾶνός, ὁ, Sildnus, a trumpeter 
from Macistus, vii. 4. 16. 

σίνομαι, do harm, hurt, harass, 
iii, 4. 16. (Ionic verb; in Attic 
only in Xen. and Plato.) 

Σινωπεύς, dws, ὁ [Σινώπη], a Si- 
nopean, native of Sindpe, iv. 8. 
22, Vv. 3. 2, §. 8, 6. 12, vi. 1. 15. 

Σινώπη, ns, Sindpe, v. 5. 7, 6. 
10, a city in Paphlagonia on the 
Euxine, colonised by Milesians. 
vi. 1. 15. It was famous for its 
commerce and its colonies. (Si- 
nub.) 

ods, σιῶ, Doric for θεός, god; 
esp. in oaths, as val rw ow, aye, by 
the great twin brethren (Castor 
and Pollux, protectors of the Spar- 
tan state), vi. 6. 34, vii. 6. 39. 

σϊταγωγός, dv [ciros+R. ay], 
corn-carrying ; With πλοῖα, provis- 
ton ships, i. 7. 15. 


197° Σιτάλκᾶαᾶς-σκηνόω 


Σιτάλκᾶς, ov, the Sitaleas, a 
Thracian war song, Vi. 1. 6, appar- 
ently composed in honour of Sital- 
cas, king of the Odrysae in the 
time of Darius Hystaspes. 

σϊτευτός, ἡ, dv [ verbal of σϊτεύω, 
feed, σῖτος], corn-fed, fed up, fat- 
tened, V. 4. 32. 

σϊτηρέσιον, τό [σϊτηρός, of corn, 
σῖτος], provision-money, that part 
of a soldier’s pay (see 8.v. μισθός) 
which was allowed him for daily 
rations, vi. 2. 4. 

σϊτίον, τό [otros], food, i. το. 
18, pl., provisions, vi. 2. 4, vii. 3. 
10 (where some read gira). 

σῖτος, ὁ [cf. Eng. para-site], 
grain, esp. wheat, Lat. frumentum, 
i. 4. 19, ii, 4. 27, iii. 4. 18, V. 4. 27; 
food, provisions, provender, sup- 
plies, ii. 1. 6, iii. 1. 3, Vil. 1. 41 ; so 
esp. in pl., σῖτα, σίτων, ii. 3. 27, ili. 
2. 28, vi. 2. 4, vii. 3. 10. Phrase: 
σῖτος μελίνης, millet-bread or cake, 
i, 5. 10. weria Has 

ιττάκη, ns, Sittace, a city in 
Babylonia, on the west bank of 
the Tigris, ii. 4. 13. 

σιωπάω, σιωπήσομαι, ἐσιώπησα, 
σεσιώπηκα, -εσιωπήθην [σιωπή, si- 
lence], be silent, hold one’s peace, 
i. 3. 2, v. 8. 28. 

σκεδάννῦμι (σκεδα-), σκεδῶ, ἐσκέ- 
daca, ἐσκέδασμαι, ἐσκεδάσθην (cf. 
Eng. scaTrerR], scatter; mid., of 
persons, spread, disperse, iii. 5. 2. 

σκέλος, ous, τό [cf. Eng. iso- 
sceles], leg, Lat. crus, of persons, 
iv. 2. 20, v. 8. 10, 14. 

σκέπασμα, aros, τό [σκεπάζω, 
cover, σκέπη, shelter], covering, i. 
5. 10 (but the better reading is 
στεγάσματα, g.v.). 

σκεπτέον [verbal of σκέπτομαι], 
one must consider or reflect, with 
ὅπως and a clause, i. 3. 11, iv. 6. 10. 

σκέπτομαι (σκεπ-), σκέψομαι, ἐσκε- 
ψάμην, ἔσκεμμαι, pres. rare in Attic 
(never in Anab.), and replaced by 
σκοπέω, .v. [cf. Lat. speciés, sight, 
Eng. spy, sceptic], look round, 
view, spy, search, spy out, Lat. 


speculor, with acc. or an interr. 
clause, iv. 5. 20, 22, vii. 3. 41, 42; 
observe carefully, deliberate, re- 
Jlect, ponder, weigh, consider, with 
an interr. clause, iii. 2. 20, 22, v. 
4. 7, 7. 29, vii. 6. 33. 

σκευάζω (cKxevad-), σκευάσω, 
ἐσκεύασα, ἐσκεύασμαι, -εσκευάσθην 
[R. σκυ], use utensils or any gear, 
make ready ; of persons, dress, at- 
tire, vi. 1. 12. 

σκενή, is [R. xv], attire, dress, 
robe, iv. 7. 27. 

σκεῦος, ovs, τό [R. oxv], gear or 
utensils of any sort, pl. baggage, 
including all the camp equipage 
and the property of the soldiers, 
except arms, Lat. impedimenta, 
sarcinae, iii. 1. 80, iv. 3. 30, Vv. 3. 
1, vi. 5. 1, vii. 4. 18. 

σκευοφορέω, σκευοφορήσω [R. σκν 
+R. dep], carry baggage, of men 
and horses, iii. 2. 28, 3. 19. 

σκευοφόρος, ον [R. σκν + R. dep], 
baggage-carrying, of persons, 
subst., of σκευοφόροι, carriers, por- 
ters, Lat. calonés, iii. 2. 28; τὰ 
σκευοφόρα, the baggage train, i. 3. 
7, iii. 2. 36, iv. 3. 25, vii. 2. 22; 
pack animals, sumpters, Lat. tu- 
menta, iii. 3. 19. 

σκηνέω, σκηνήσω, ἐσκήνησα [R. 
σκα], be in tents, be in quarters or 
in camp, be quartered, abs. or 
with ἐν and dat., or with an adv., 
i. 4. 9, iv. 4. 14, 7. 27, 8. 25, vi. 1. 
1, 4. 7, vii. 4.12; hence, be billeted, 
take one’s meals, feast, iv. 5. 35; 
in the aor. go into camp, encamp, 
with εἰς or παρά and acc., év with 
dat., or with an adv., ii. 4. 14, iv. 
2. 22, vi. 5. 21, vii. 3. 16, 7. 1. 

σκηνή, fs [R. σκα], covered 
place, of soldiers, tent, Lat. tento- 
rium, made of hides (i. 5. 10) 
stretched on a wooden framework, 
i. 2. 17, 4. 3, 6. 4, iii. 2. 27, iv. 4 
21, vi. 4.19; pl., sometimes, camp, 
quarters, bivouac, iii. 5. 7 (the tents 
had been burnt, iii. 2. 27, 3. 1). 

σκηνόω, ἐσκήνωσα, -εσκήνωκα [Β. 


σκα], pitch tents, encamp, go into 


σκήνωμα-Σόλοι 198 


quarters, Lat. castra pond, abs. or 
with ἐν and dat., or κατά and acc., 
iv. 5. 23, v. 7. 31, vii. 4. 11; also 
like cxnvéw, be in camp, be quar- 
tered, with ἐν and dat., v. 5. 11, 
20, 21. 

σκήνωμα, aros, τό [R. oxa], tent, 
ii. 2.17; pl., quarters, houses, vii. 
4. 16. 

σκηπτός, ὁ, thunder-bolt, Lat. 
fulmen, iii. 1. 11. 

σκηπτοῦχος, ὁ [σκῆπτον -- σκῆ- 
πτρον, sceptre, cf. Eng. sceptre, + 
R. oex], sceptre-bearer, wand- 


bearer, a high officer in the Persian 
court, chamberlain, marshal, cf. 
the English Usher of the Black 
Rod, i. 6, 11, 8. 28. Ι 

Σκιλλοῦς, οὔντος, ὁ, Scillus, ἃ town 
in the district of Triphylia in Elis, 
south of Olympia, detached from 
the territory of Elis by the Spar- 
tans in 394 B.c. Here Xenophon 
(q.v.) had an estate, presented to 
him by the Spartans about 387 s.c. 
Ve 3. ty 

σκίμπους, odos, ὁ, a low bed or 
couch, vi. 1. 4. 

σκληρός, a, ov [cf. Eng. scle- 
rotic], hard, rough, Lat. durus. 
Phrase: ἐν σκληρῷ, in a rough 
or uneven place, iv. 8. 26. 

σκληρῶς, adv. [σκληρός], aus- 


σκόλοψ, oros, ὁ, pointed stake, 
palisade, used on ramparts, Lat. 
uallus, Vv. 2. 5. 

σκοπέω, only pres. and impf. (see 
σκέπτομαι) [σκοπός], look at, watch 
out for, keep a lookout, spy, watch, 
Lat. speculor, ii. 4. 24, 5.4, v. 1. 9, 
vi. 3. 14; look to, have an eye to, 
vii. 4. 8, with πρός and acc., i. 9. 
22 ; 866, observe, learn, with ἐκ and 
gen., iii. 1. 138; consider, ponder, 
weigh, v. 6. 30, 7. 32, vii. 8. 16; so 
mid., abs. or with an interr. clause, 
v. 2. 8, 20. 

σκοπός, ὁ [cf. σκέπτομαι, Eng. 
scope, bi-shop, epi-scopal, micro- 
scope], watcher, spy, scout, Lat. 
speculdtor, ii. 2. 15, vi. 3. 11. 

σκόροδον, τό, garlic, Lat. dlium, 
pl., vil. 1. 37. 

σκοταῖος, ἃ, ov [R. oxa], in the 
=" of persons, ii. 2. 17, iv. 1. 5, 

σκότος, ovs, τό [R. coxa], dark- 
ness, of night, Lat. tenebrae, ii. 2. 
τ a5 ἃ &, WE. 2. 38, 4. 13. 

κύθαι, dy, Scythians, a no- 

madic race first met by Greeks on 
the northern coasts of the Pontus. 
The name was afterwards extended 
to the nomadic tribes in the interior 
of Asia. The word is perhaps an 
interpolation in iii. 4. 15. 
᾿ Σκυθιῖνοί, οἱ, the Scythini, a tribe 
living north of the Chalybes, not 
far from the southeastern shore of 
the Euxine, iv. 7. 18, 8. 1. 
σκὐλεύω, ἐσκύλευσα [R. σκυ], 
strip, of a fallen enemy, spoil, de- 
spoil, Lat. spolid, vi.-1. 6. 
σκύταλον, τό, stick, club, vii. 4. 15. 
σκύτινος, 7, ov [R. σκυ], of 
leather, leathern, Υ. 4. 18. 
σμῆνος, ous, τό, swarm of bees, 
iv. 8. 20. 
Zplkpys, ητος; ὁ, Smicres, a gen- 
eral in the Arcadian division of 
the army, vi. 3. 4, 5. 
Σόλοι, of [ef Eng. solecism], 
Soli, an important city on the 
coast of Cilicia, west of the mouth 


terely, in hardship, iii. 2. 26. 


of the Psarus river, i. 2. 24. 


199 σός- σπονδή 


σός, σή, σόν, possessive pron. 
[pronominal stem σὲ (see σύ), ¢f 
Lat. twus, thy, Eng. THINE, THY ], 
thy, thine, your, vil. 7. 29; subst., 
τὰ σά, your interests, vii. 7. 44. 

Σοῦσα, τά [Semitic Shishan, 
New Persian Sis], Susa, capital 
of the province Susiaine (Semitic 
Elam), lying east of the Tigris, 
and used as the winter residence 
of the Persian kings, iii. 5. 18. 
Extensive ruins, including those 
of the palaces of Darius and 
Xerxes, still remain. (Sfis.) 

Σοφαίνετος, ὁ, Sophaenetus, οἵ 
Stymphalus in Arcadia, a friend 
of Cyrus, i. 1. 11, joining him with 
1000 hoplites, i. 2.3. He was the 
oldest general left after Cunaxa, 
vi. 5. 13, v. 3- 1, and was fined for 
neglect of duty, v. 8.1; mentioned 
also in ii. 5. 37, iv. 4.19. A history 
of the expedition .of Cyrus is at- 
tributed to him. 

σοφία, as [σοφός], skill, ability, 
in music, i. 2. 8. 

σοφός, ή, dv [root cam, cf. σαφής, 
Eng. philo-sophy, sophist], skilled, 
wise, clever, accomplished, i. 10. 2. 

σπανίζω (σπανιδ-), σπανιῶ, ἐσπά- 
γισα, ἐσπάνισμαι [R. σπα], lack, 
need, want, with gen., ii. 2. 12, vii. 
7. 42. 

σπάνιος, a, ov [R. ora], rare, 
scanty, but littie, Lat. paucus, i. 9. 
27, vii. 6. 24. 

σπάνις, ews, ἡ [R. oma], scarce- 
ness, scarcity, lack, with gen., Vi. 
4. 8, vii. 2. 15. 

Σπάρτη, ns, Sparta, ii. 6. 4, the 
capital of Lacedaemonia (q.v.), on 
the Eurdtas, founded after the 
Dorian invasion. It was an open, 
unfortified city, scattered like a 
village, and containing no costly 
temples. The ruins are therefore 
scanty and insignificant. 

Σπαρτιάτης, ov [2xdera}, a Spar- 
tan, a name applied only to the 
direct descendants of the Dorian 
invaders of Lacedaemonia (see 
Λακεδαιμόνιος), iv. 8. 25, vi. 6. 30. 


σπάρτον, τό [root σπαρ, (wine, 
cf. σπεῖρα, coil, cable}, rope, cord, 
iv. 7. 15. 

σπάω,͵ -σπάσω, ἔσπασα, -éoraka, 
-«έσπασμαι, ἐσπάσθην [Ὦ -σπα], draw; 
mid., of a sword, Lat. βύγίησο, i. 
8. 29, vii. 4. 16. 

σπείρω (σπερ-), σπερῶ, ἔσπειρα, 
ἔσπαρμαι, ἐσπάρην (cf. Eng. SPARE, 
SPURN, sperm, sporadic], sow, of 
seed, Lat. serd, spargd, abs., vi. 
1.8; mid. and pass., of persons, 
scatter, spread out, be dispersed, 
vi. 3. 19. 

omeloas, σπείσεσθαι, cic., see 
σπένδω. 

σπένδω, -σπείσω, ἔσπεισα, ἔσπει- 
cua. [of. Lat. sponded, promise 
solemnly], pour or offer a liba- 
tion, make a drink-offering, Lat. 
labo, abs., iv. 3. 18, 14; dep. mid., 
of the usual libations made when 
concluding an agreement or treaty, 
hence, make a treaty or alliance, 
make peace or a truce, cf. Lat. foe- 
dus ici, abs., i. 9. 8, ii. 3. 9, ill. 5. 
5, vii. 4. 22, 23; with dat. of pers. 
with or for whom, or πρός and ace.’ 
of pers. with whom, i. 9. 7, ii. 3. 7, 
iii. 5. 16; with ἐφ᾽ ᾧ and inf., or 
ἐπί and dat., iv. 4. 6. 

σπεύδω, σπεύσω, ἔσπευσα, Urge; 
intr., hurry, hasten, press on, Lat. 
properd, abs. or with inf., i. 3. 14, 
5. 9, ii. 3. 13, iii. 4. 20, iv. 8. 2, Vii. 
3.45. Phrase: ταῦτ᾽ ἐγὼ ἔσπευδον, 
this was my haste, iv. τ. 21. 

Σπιθριδάτης, ov, Spithridates, a 
general under Pharnabazus, Vi. 5. 7. 

σπολάς OF στολάς, déos, ἡ 
[στέλλω], prop. equipment, a name 
applied to the leather cuirass (see 
5.0. Odpat), Lat. lorica, iii. 3. 20, 
iv. 1. 18, which was introduced at 
an early period. Its construction 
was similar to that of the metal 
θώρᾶξ, but since it was made of 
leather, it was both lighter and 
less expensive. 

σπονδή, js [cf oxévdw, Eng. 
spondee |, libation, drink-offering, 


Lat. libatid, iv. 3. 14, vi. 1. 5; 


σπουδάζω-στάδιον 200 


agreement, treaty, alliance, truce, 
Lat. foedus, i. 9. 8, ii. 3. 9, iii. 1. 19, 
iv. 2. 18, vi. 3. 9, vii. 4. 12; with 
dat. of pers., ii. 1. 21, 3. 7. 

σπουδάζω (σπουδαδ-), σπουδάσο- 
μαι, ἐσπούδασα, ἐσπούδακα, ἐσπούδα- 
σμαι [σπουδή], work in haste, be in 
earnest, ii. 3. 12. 

σπουδαιολογέω (assumed pres.), 
ἐσπουδαιολόγησα, ἑσπουδαιολογήθην 
σπουδαῖος, serious, σπουδή + R. 

j |Ney], carry on an earnest conversa- 
“-} tion, i. g. 28. 

σπουδή, ἧς [ο΄ σπεύδω], haste, 
speed, hurry, i. 8. 4, iv. 1.17; dat. 
as adv. σπουδῇ, hastily, vi. 5.14; 
κατὰ σπουδήν, in haste, vii. 6. 
28. 

στάδιον, τό, pl. στάδιοι, οἱ, and 
στάδια, τά, equally common [R. 
oma], an extended space, the sta- 
dium, a Greek measure of distance 
equal to 600 Greek ft. (see s.v. 
πούς), or 582 ft. 6 in. English, i. 
4 να G 19, as 38, TK 2. 3, fv. 
=) 2, 3G, ¥. χα & 0 V1 a. 
2, Vii. 5. 15. 

By this term the Greeks also 
designated the place for foot races, 
ἱππόδρομος (qg.v.) being the name 
of the enclosure for horse races. 
The two were similar in shape, but 
the stadium was both shorter and 
narrower than the hippodrome. 
The accompanying cut represents 
the ground plan of the stadium at 
Messéne in Peloponnésus. By aa 
is designated the level space where 
the races were run, through which 
a brook now flows; bb mark the 
seats of the spectators on the nat- 
ural slope of two hills, continued 
at hh by a semicircular range of 
stone seats. Outside the seats ran 
colonnades, cece (projected at ii 
with architectural effect), enclosing 
at the upper end a square space 
ee, and united with one another 
at the extreme upper limit by a 
double colonnade e. This double 
colonnade seems to have been the 


other minor entrances, as at fgd. 
kk mark the city wall. 


ΡΥ τ τ τυ τυ νυ υνσέσν το "8508 
μκ μων αὐϑιὰ pill ων Zip Ais 


TT 


= 


¥ 


No. 64. 


The distance from the starting 
point near an altar (see s.v. βωμός) 
to the finish (these points are not 
marked on the plan) was 600 
Greek feet, or a stadium, equal at 
Athens to 582 ft. 6 in. English. 
But the stadium at Olympia was 
longer, the Olympic foot being 
greater than the Attic. These 
points were each marked by a 
square stone pillar, and halfway 
between these was a third. On 
the first pillar, at the start, was in- 
scribed the word dpicreve, ‘Win!’, 
on the second, σπεῦδε, ‘ Faster!’, 
on the third, at the goal, κάμψον, 
‘Turn!’ The straight-away race, 
from start to finish, was called ord- 
διον or δρόμος (about 200 yards), 
and might be run by boys, iv. 8. 27. 
Double this distance, the runner 
turning at the goal and coming 
back to the starting point, was 
called the δίαυλος. The longest 
race was the δόλιχος, g.v. Other 


main entrance, but there were 


athletic contests took place at the 


201 σταθμός-στέφανος 


upper end of the stadium, in the 
space enclosed by the semicircular 
range of stone seats. See 8.0. 
πάλη, πυγμή, and παγκράτιον. 

σταθμός, ὁ [R. στα], standing- 
place, stopping-place, stall for ani- 
mals, Lat. stabulum ; for nen, 
halting-place, lodging, Lat. man- 
sid, i. 8. 1, 10. 1, ii. 1. 8, iv. 1. 19; 
of the distance between two halts, 
station, stage, day’s march (for the 
actual distance see rapacayyns), 1. 
2. 5, 3. 20, 5. 5, ii. 2.11. iii, 4. 10, 
iv. 4. 3, V. 5. 1. 

ods, see ἵστημι. 

στασιάζω (στασιαδ-), στασιάσω, 
ἐστασίασα, [R. στα], form a fac- 
tion, oppose, rebel, revolt, abs., with 
dat., or πρός and acc. of pers., 1]. 
5. 28, vi. 1. 29, 32; be divided into 
parties, be at odds or at variance, 
vii. 1. 39, 2. 2. 

στάσις, ews, ἡ [R. στα], band, 
party, faction, insurrection, dis- 
cord, Vi. τ. 29. | 

σταυρός, ὁ [R. στα], stake, pali- 
sade, Lat. wallus, v. 2. 21, vil. 4. 
14, 17. 

σταύρωμα, ατος, τό [R. στα], 
palisaded rampart, stockade, Lat. 
uallum, Vv. 2. 15, 19, 27. 

στέαρ, aros, τό [R. ora], fat, 
suet, of the blubber of dolphins, v. 
4. 28. 

στέγασμα, aros, τό [στεγάζω, 
cover, στέγη], covering, of the 
hides used to cover tents, i. 5. 10. 

στέγη, ns (of. στέγω, cover, Lat. 
tego, cover, toga, gown, Eng. DECK, 
THATCH, TIGHT], roof, hence, like 
Lat. téctum, house, iv. 4. 14, V. 5. 
20. 

στεγνός, ἡ, ὄν [ο΄. στέγη], cov- 
ered; subst., τὰ στεγνά, houses, 
vii. 4. 12. 


στείβω (στιβ-), ἔστειψα, ἐστίβη- g 


μαι [ef. Eng. ster, stamp], tread ; 
pass., of roads, στειβόμενος, trodden, 
travelled, beaten, Lat. tritus, 1. 9. 
13. 

στέλλω (στελ-), στελῶ, ἔστειλα, 


order, arrange, of persons, equip, 
dress, iii. 2.7; pass., be set going, 
start, journey, travel, abs. or with 
ἐπί or κατά and acc., v. 1. 5, 6. 5, 
vi. 2. 13. 
στενός, 4, ov [cf. Eng. steno- 
graphy], narrow, strait, Lat. an- 
gustus, i. 4. 4, 7. 15, iv. 1. 10, Υ͂. 2. 
28; comp. στενώτερος (OF στενότε- 
pos), iii. 4. 19, 22; subst., τό στε- 
vov and τὰ στενά, dejile, pass, Lat. 
angustiae, iv. 1. 14, 4. 18, 5. 1. 
στενοχωρία, as [στενός + χῶρος], 
narrow pass, i. 5. 7. K 
στέργω, στέρξω, ἔστερξα, love, i. 
6. 23. 
στέρεσθαι, see στερέω. 
στερέω, στερήσω, etc., but -εστέ- 
ρήκα, rob, deprive of, bereave, with 
gen. or acc. and gen., i. 4. 8, il. 1. 
12, 5. 10, iv. 5. 28; pres. pass. 
στέρομαι, With pf. sense, be de- 
prived of, have lost, be without, 
with gen., i. 9. 18, iii. 2.2, Vil. I. 
30, 6. 16. 

στέρνον, τό [R. στρα], breast, 
Lat. pectus, i. 8. 20, vii. 4. 4. ἱ 

στερρῶς, adv. [oreppds, στερεός, 
hard, jirm, cf. Lat. sterilis, barren, 
Eng. sTaRE, stereo-type], stead- 
fastly, resolutely, iii. 1. 22. 

στέφανος, ὁ [στέφω, put round], 
circlet, crown, chaplet, garland, 
Lat. cordna, of leaves, flowers, or 
metal, worn round the head or 
neck, and used as a festive orna- 
ment at dinner, iv. 5. 33 (see s.v. 
τρίπους), or to adorn the tombs of 
the dead, vi. 4. 9, or bestowed as a 
reward of merit, i. 7.7, where a gold 
crown is promised as a mark of 
distinguished military service, like 
the medals and crosses of to-day. 
It was one of the institutions of 
Lycurgus that the Spartans should 
ὁ into battle wearing wreaths (cf. 
iv. 3.17); and the priest that offici- 
ated at the altar in sacrifice always 
wore a chaplet (cf. vii. 1.40). The 
use of στέφανοι among the Greeks, 
on both private and public occa- 


«ἐσταλκα, ἔσταλμαι, ἐστάλην, put in 


sions, was very common, 


στεφανόω-στρατηγός 292 


στεφανόω, στεφανώσω, ἐστεφά- 
νωσα, ἐστεφάνωμαι, ἐστεφανώθην 
[στέφανος], crown, wreathe, Lat. 
corond, mid., put on a crown or gar- 
land, iv. 3. 1/; pass., be crowned, 
wear a chaplet, iv. 5. 33, vii. 1. 40. 
στήλη, ns [στέλλω], pillar, slab, 
post, of stone, for an inscription, 
v. 3. 13; to mark a boundary, vii. 
5. 19, 
στῆναι, see ἵἴστημι. 
στιβάς, δος, ἡ [στείβω, bed or 
couch of straw or rushes, vi. 1. 4. 
στίβος, ὁ [στείβω], beaten track, 
trail, of men or horses, Lat. westi- 
gia, i. 6. 1, vi. 3. 24, vii. 3. 43. 
στίζω (στιγ-), στίξω, ἔστιγμαι 
[ῳ. Lat. stimulus, goad, Eng. 
STICK, STING, STITCH, stig-ma], 
prick, puncture, Lat. pungo ; hence, 
τὰ ἔμπροσθεν πάντα ἐστιγμένους 
ἀνθέμια, with their fore parts all 
tattooed with flowers, v. 4. 32. 
στῖφος, ous, τό, any close-pressed 
body, esp. of troops, close array, 
mass, throng, i. 8. 13, 26, vi. 5. 26. 
στλεγγίς, δος, 7, scraper, strigil, 
Jlesh-scraper, Lat. strigilis, used by 
bathers to remove impurities from 
the skin, like our flesh-brushes ; 
of gold, given as prizes to athletes, 
i. 2. 10, but some understand that 
a sort of tiara, worn as an orna- 
ment for the head, is here meant. 
στολάς, see σπολάς. 
στολή, ἧς [στέλλω, ε΄. Eng. 
stole], dress, raiment, garment, 
robe, iv. 5. 33, 7.13, vi. 1.2; στολὴ 
Περσική, Persian robe, i. 2. 27, 
probably the same as the κάνδυς, 
q.v. 
στόλος, ὁ [στέλλω], equipment, 
expedition, esp. for hostile pur- 
poses, abs. or with εἰς and ace., i. 
3. 16, ii, 2. 10, iii. 1. 9, 2 ee Oe 
those who go on such an expedi- 
tion, army, force, host, i. 2. 5, ii. 
3 "χα 11. 
στόμα, ατος, τό [cf. Eng. stom- 
ach), mouth, Lat. 0s, of a pers., 
Iv. 5. 27; of a river or sea, Vi. 2. 


of a house underground, iv. 5. 25; 
as a military expression, the fore- 
most, front, van, iii. 4. 42, v. 4. 22. 
Phrase: of κατὰ στόμα, the enemy 
in front, Vv. 2. 26. 

στρατείᾶ, as [R. στρα], expedi- 
tion, campaign, iii. 1. 9, v. 4. 18. 

στράτευμα, aros, τό [R. στρα], 
army, Lat. exercitus, i. 1. 7, ii. 1. 
6, ili. 3. 19, iv. 4. 19, v. 6. 17, vi. 3. 
22, vii. 8. 24; of the parts of an 
army under particular generals, 
force, division, i. 5. 11, 12, 8. 4, 
14; so pl., vii. 3. 38. 

στρατεύω, στρατεύσω, ἐστράτευσα, 
ἐστράτευμαι [R. στρα], make an 
expedition, conduct or carry on a 
campaign, make war, of general 
ofticers, Lat. bellum suscipid, with 
ἐπί and acc., ii. 1. 14, 3. 20, 6. 29, 
ili. 1. 17; dep. mid., of both gen- 
erals and soldiers, serve in a cam- 
paign, take the field, serve, march, 
Lat. militd, abs., with εἰς, ἐπί, or 
ἀμφί and acc., or σύν and dat., i. 
I. 11, 2. 2, 3, 9. 14, v. 4. 34, vi. 2. 
15, vii. 1. 2, 29, 3. 10; of single 
persons, join an army, iii. 1. 10, 
vii. 5.10. Phrases: τὸν δεινόν χει- 
μῶνα στρατευόμενοι, serving in a 
hard winter campaign, vii. 6. 9. 

στρατηγέω, στρατηγήσω, éorpa- 
τήγησα, ἐστρατήγηκα [R. orpa+ 
R. ay], be general, take command, 
command, manage, abs., or with 
gen., i. 4. 3, ii. 2. 13, 6. 28, iii. 2. 
27; with cog. acc. and gen., vii. 6. 
40. Phrase: στρατηγήσοντα ταύ- 
Τὴν τὴν στρατηγίᾶν, to assume this 
command, i. 3. 15. * 

στρατηγία, as [R. orpat R. 
ay], office of general or comman- 
der in Chief, i. 3. 15, v. 6. 25, vii. 1. 
41; generalship, plan of campaign, 
ii. 2. 13. 
στρατηγιάω [R. orpa+R. ay], 
wish to be general, vii. 1. 33. 
στρατηγός, ὁ [R. στρα + R. ay], 
leader of an army, general, Lat. 
ὄπα, imperadtor, in the Anab. ap- 
plied not to the highest in command 


1, 4.1; of the opening or entrance 


(called ἄρχων, vi. 1. 18, 2. 6, 12), 


203 στρατιά-Στυμφάλιος 


but to every chief of a division, 
under whom stood the taxiarchs 
and captains, i. 2. 15, 4. 18, ii. 4. 
9 fi. 2.3, ns. B, Vora. 
. 1, vii. 8. 23. ‘The generals were 
elected by the soldiers, iii. 1.47, and 
conducted the campaign in accord- 
ance with the votes of their own 
number, vi. 1. 18. When serving 
for pay they received four times 
the soldier’s wages, vii. 3. 10, 6. 1, 
7. The title is also applied by 
Xenophon to the Persian com- 
mander in chief of the troops of 
several provinces, who was prop- 
erly called xdépavos, i. 1. 2, 9. 7. 
στρατιά, ds [R. στρα], army, 
Lat. exercitus, the actual effective 
force, the host, i. 2. 12, 7. 16, ii. 4. 
S, i. 2.4, iv. 97. 3, ve GO 1 Wh. a. 
10, vii. 7. 56; the troops, in con- 
trast to the high officers, iv. 3. 9, 
vi. 6. 19, 20, vii. 2. 35; the main 
body, i.e. hoplites, as contrasted 
with cavalry and peltasts, vi. 3. 19. 
στρατιώτης, ov [R. στρα], sol- 
dier, private, pl. troops, men, Lat. 
miles, i. 1. 9, ii. 5. 29, iii. 1. 4, iv. 
4. 14, v. 1. 4, vi. 2. 4, vii. 8. 28. 
Phrase: ἄνδρες στρατιῶται, fellow 
soldiers, i. 3. 3, γ. 4. 19. 
Στρατοκλῆς, éouvs, ὁ, Stratocles, 
in command of the Cretan archers, 
iv. 2. 28. 
στρατοπεδεύω, ἐστρατοπεδευσά- 
μὴν, ἐστρατοπέδευμαι [R. στρα Ὁ 
R. wed], encamp, pitch a camp, 
bivouac, go into camp, rare in act., 
vii. 6. 24, usually mid., abs., or 
with advs., iv. 4. 8, vi. 3. 6, vil. 2. 
1; with ἐγγύς and gen. of pers., 
or with παρά, eis, ἀνά and acc., or 
ἐν and dat. of place, iii. 5. 1, iv. 3. 
6, &. 19, vi. 4. 7, Vi. 4. 3s DE, Ge 
encamped, ii. 4.1. Phrase: παρὰ 
evlov ἐστρατοπεδεύσαντο παρὰ Κλε- 
άρχῳ, they went over from Xenias 
and joined Clearchus, i. 3. 7. 
στρατόπεδον, τό [R. στρα R. 
med], camp ground, camp, encamp- 


9, vi. 4. 10, vii. 6. 42; of an en- 
camped army, iv. 4. 9, Vii. 3. 34, 7. 
57. 

στρατός, ὁ [R. στρα], an en- 
camped army, army, force, i. 5. 7. 
στραφέντες, See στρέφω. 
στρεπτός, ἡ, ὅν [verbal of 
στρέφω], twisted, pliant ; as subst., 
ὁ στρεπτός, necklace, collar, Lat. 
torguis, worn by noble Persians, 


i. 2. 27, 5. 8, 8.29. See the ac- 
companying illustration, from a 
famous mosaic representing the 
battle of Issus. 

στρέφω, στρέψω; ἔστρεψα, ἔστραμ- 
μαι, ἐστρέφθην and ἐστράφην [α΄]. 
Eng. stro-phe, apo-strophe], turn, 
twist, braid, of cords, Lat. torqued, 
iv. 7. 15; intr., and in pass., of 
persons, turn about, face about, 
Lat. mé uertd, i. το. 6, iii. 5. 1, iv. 
3. 26, 32. 

στρουθός, ὁ, ἡ [ο΄ Eng. o-strich], 
a small bird of the sparrow kind ; 
with μέγας, ostrich, i. 5. 2, 3. 

στρωματόδεσμος, ὁ [R. orpat 
R. δε], bedclothes sack, bed-sack, 
of linen, v. 4. 18. 

στυγνός, 4, ὅν [of. στυγέω, hate], 
hateful, of the face, repulsive, 
gloomy, ii.6. 9; subst., τὸ στυγνὸν, 
sternness, ii. 6. 11. 

Στυμφάλιος, ὁ [Στύμφᾶλος, ὃ, 


ment, bivouac, Lat. castra, i. το. 1, 
8, ii. 3. 19, iii. 1. 46, iv. 4. 20, v. 1. 


Stymphalus], a Stymphalian, na- 
tive of Stymphdlus, i. 1.11, il. 5. 37, 


σύ-συμβάλλω 2 


iii. 1. 31, iv. 7. 13, vi. 1. 30, vii. 8. | 
19, a city in the northeastern part 


of Arcadia, on a lake of the same 
name (ruins on Lake Zaraka). 

σύ, cod, pers. pron. [pronominal 
stem te, softened to oe, cf. Lat. 
tu, thou, Eng. THou], thou, you, 
A. 3. 3, iL 2. 12, 16, 17, 5. 38, iil. 1. 
45, vii. 6. 5. 

συγγένεια, as [R. γεν], kinship, 
relationship, Vii. 3. 39. 

συγγενής, és [R. γεν], of the same 
race or family, akin, Lat. cogndatus ; 
subst., οἱ συγγενεῖς, blood relations, 
kinsmen, i i. 6. 10, iv. 5. 32, vii. 2. 
91, 

συγγίγνομαι [R. γεν, be with, 
keep company with, be acquainted 
with, meet, with dat., i. 1. 9, 2. 27, 
li. 5. 2, 28, iv. 5. 238, vii. 2.19; pass 
time with a teacher, ii. 6. 17; of 
sexual intercourse, i. 2. 12, v. 4. 33. 

συγκάθημαι [κάθημαι], sit down 
together, v. 7. 21. 

συγκαλέω [R. cad], call together, 
call a meeting or council, assemble, 
Lat. conuocd, abs. or with acc., i. 
4. 8, ii. 2. 3, iii. 1. 46, vi. 4. 20, Vili. 
1. 24; with εἰς and acc., i. 6. 4. 

συγκάμπτω (κάμπτω, καμπ-, κάμ- 
Yw, ἔκαμψα, -κέκαμμαι, ἐκάμῴφθην, 
bend), bend together, with σκέλος, 
bend one’s knee, v. 8. 10. 

κατακαίω or -καω [καίω], 

burn along with, iii. 2. 27. 

συγκατασκεδάννυμι [σκεδάννυμι], 
join in pouring out, read by some 
in Vii. 3. 32 for κατασκεδάννἑμι, ᾳ.ὺ. 

συγκαταστρέφομαι [στρέφω], 
help in subduing, ii. 1. 14. 

συγκατεργάζομαι [R. Εεργ], help 
one accomplish or win, Vii. 7. 25. 

σύγκειμαι [κεῖμαι], lie together, 
be put together, be arranged or 
agreed upon, Lat. cénstituor. 
Phrases: els τὸ συγκείμενον, to the 
rendezvous, Vi. 3.4; κατὰ τὰ ovy- 
κείμενα, according to the terms of 
the agreement, Vii. 2. 7. 

συγκλείω [κλείω], shut to, vi. 3. 
4, vii. 1. 12. 


συγκομίζω [xoulfw], bring to- 


04 


gether, gather, mid., for oneself, 
vi. 6. 37. 

συγκύπτω (κύπτω, Kud-, -κύψω, 
ἔκῦψα, κέκυφα, stoop), draw to- 
gether, converge, of the wings of 
an army, iii. 4. 19, 21. 

συγχωρέω [xwpéw], go with, give 
way, yield, Lat. concédd, v. 2. 9. 

σύειος, a, ov [cis], of swine, Lat. 
suillus, iv. 4. 13. 

Συέννεσις, cos, ὁ, Syennesis, the 
hereditary title of the monarchs 
of Cilicia who governed under the 
Persian king, perhaps from the 
Semitic schéa nasi, noble chieftain. 
But Xenophon took it for a proper 
name, i. 2. 12, 21, 26, 4. 4, vii. 8. 
25. 

σῦκον, τό [cf. Lat. Sicus, Jig; 
Eng. syco-phant], jig, vi. 4. 6, 6. 1. 

συλλαμβάνω [λαμβάνω], take to- 
gether, seize, arrest, Lat. compre- 
hendd, i. 1. 3, 4. 8, 6. 4, ii. 5. 32, 
iii. 1. 2, 35, vii. 2. 14; capture, iv. 
4. 16. 

συλλέγω (-λέγω, -ἔλεξα, -elhoxa, 
«εἰλεγμαι, -ε«λέγην [R. Aey], gather), 
collect, get together, gather, Lat. 
colligd, of things, ii. 4.11, iv. 3. 11, 
v. 1. 15, vi. 6.22; of persons, esp. 
of troops or an army, bring to- 
gether, collect, levy, raise, assem- 
ble, convoke, i. 1. 7, 4. 13, ii. 6. 5, 
iii. 1. 39, v. 6. 1, vii. 6. 13; mid., 
raise for oneself, vii. 4. 8 ; pass., 
come together, assemble, of troops, 
iv. 1. 10, 3. 7, 8. 9, vi. 2. 4, 3. 6. 

συλλογή, fs [R. Aey], gathering, 
of troops, levy, Lat. diléctus, i. 1 
6. 

σύλλογος, ὁ [R. λων. gathering, 
meeting, not of a regularly called 
assembly, v. 6. 22, 7. 2. 

συμβαίνω [R. Ba] , come to geth er ; 
impers., happen, hence ra σύμ. 
Bavra, events, occurrences, iii. 1. 
13. 

συμβάλλω [βάλλω], throw to- 
gether, collect, gather, iii. 4. 31; 
mid., bring together one’s own, 
contribute, with dat. of pers. and 
els and acc, of thing, i. 1.9; wnite, 


9 


nd 


agree upon, fix on, Vi. 3. 3, hence 
ξενίαν συνεβάλοντο, they contracted 
a friendship, vi. 6. 35; add one’s 
opinion to others’, converse, give 
one’s ideas, With περί and gen., iv. 
6. 14. 

συμβοάω [R. BoF], cry out to- 
gether. Phrase: συνεβόων ἀλλή- 
hous, they called each other together 
by shouting, Vi. 3. 6. 

συμβοηθέω [R. BoF + θέω]., come 
to the rescue with others, join in 
helping, iv. 2. 1, vii. 8. 17. 

συμβολή, ἢς [βάλλω], a hurtling 
together, encounter, battle, vi. 5. 
on. 

συμβουλεύω [R. Bod], advise, 
recommend, counsel, give advice, 
Lat. cOnsuld alicui, abs. or with 
acc., or acc. of thing and dat. of 
pers., ii. 1. 17, 5. 41, v. 6. 2, 3, 12; 
with dat. or acc. of pers. and inf., 
or with simple inf., i. 6. 9, ii. 1. 18, 
3. 20, iii. 1. 5, vi. 6. 29, vii. 1. 30, 
8.4; with a rel. clause, ii. 1. 17, v. 
6. 4; mid., consult with one, ask 
one’s opinion or advice, ask coun- 
sel of, confer with, hold a council, 
Lat. consuld aliquem, abs., with 
dat. of pers. or with a clause or 
with both, i. 1. 10, 7. 2, ii. 1. 16, 
17, v. 6. 2. 

συμβουλή, 7s [R. BoA], advice, 
Lat. cdnsilium, v. 6. 4 (see ἱερός), 
11. 

σύμβουλος, ὁ [R. Bod], adviser, 
counsellor, Lat. auctor, 1. 6. 5. 

cuppavOdve [R. pa], learn thor- 
oughly ; aor. partic., συμμαθών,. hav- 
ing come to know a thing well, hence 
familiar with, used to, with acc., 
lv. 5. 27. 

συμμαχέω, συμμαχήσω, συνεμά- 
χησα [R. pax], be an ally or in 
alliance with, v. 4. 30. 

συμμαχία, as [R. pay ], alliance, 
Lat. foedus, v. 4. 3, 8, vii. 3. 35. 

συμμάχομαι [R. pax], jight on 
one’s side, be an ally, with dat. of 
pers., v. 4. 10, vi. 1. 13. 

σύμμαχος, ov [R. pax], jighting 
with, in alliance with, allied, Lat. 


05 συμβοάω-συμπολεμέω 


socius, ii. 4.6, 5. 11, v. 4. 7; subst., 
ὁ σύμμαχος, ally, i. 3. 6, il. 2. 8, Vv. 
4. 6, vii. 6.3; τὰ σύμμαχα, helps, 
advantages, li. 4. 7. 

συμμετέχω [R. vex], take part 
in with one, with gen., vii. 8. 17. 

συμμίγνυμι (υἐγνῦμι, μιγ-, μΐξω, 
ἔμιξα, μέμτγμαι, ἐμίχθην and ἐμίγην 
[R. pry], mix), mix with, intrans. 
of persons, unite with, join, with 
dat. of pers., ii. 1.2, iv. 2. 9, vi. 3. 
24, vii. 8. 24; in a hostile sense, 
engage, join battle with, with dat., 
iv. 6. 24. 

συμπαρασκευάζω [R. oxv], help 
get ready, help in providing, help 
in preparations, abs. or with acc., 
v. 1.,8, 10. 

συμπαρέχω [R. oex], help in 
producing or causing, join in af- 
fording, with dat. of pers. and 
ace. of thing, vii. 4. 19, 6. 30. 

σύμπας, cea, αν [πᾶ], stronger 
than πᾶς, all together, all taken 
collectively, Lat. uniuersus, entire, 
in pred. position, vii. 8. 26; but oi 
σύμπαντες ὁπλῖται, the hoplites all 
taken together, i. 2. 9. Phrases: 
τὸ σύμπαν, on the whole, in gen- 
eral, i. 5. 9; ὅσα οὐδὲ τὰ σύμ- 
TavTa, more than all put together, 
iv. 3. 2. 

συμπέμπω dual send along 
with, despatch together, sometimes 
bee dat. of pers., i. 2. 20, 4. 

wie hy Ὁ Gey ὙΠ} 

T τα ωβκὰ [R. Cl in a 
hostile sense, fall on together, with 
dat., vii. 8. 22. 

συμπέπτω [R. wer], fall together, 
fall in, collapse, of a house, v. 2. 
24; come together, grapple, close 
with, i. 9. 6. 

σύμπλεως, wy, gen. w [R. waa], 
quite full, with gen., i. 2. 22. 

συμποδίζω [R. wed], shackle to- 
gether, of snow, encumber, impede, 
Lat. impedio, iv. 4. 11. 

συμπολεμέω [πολεμέω], help in 
war, make war with, with dat. of 
pers. and πρός or ἐπί and acc., i. 4. 
2, iii. 1. 5. 


συμπορεύομαι-συνακούω 2 


συμπορεύομαι [R. wep], .ravel 
with, march with, accompany, i. 3. 
&; ἃ. 9, για 28. 

συμποσίαρχος, ὁ [R. πο + ἄρχω], 
president of a drinking-party, sym- 
posiarch, master of the revels, Lat. 
magister bibendi, rex conuiuii, 
whose commands all the company 
had to obey and who regulated the 
whole entertainment, vi. 1. 30. 

συμπράττω [πράττω], help in 
doing, help along with, co-operate, 
help get, abs., vii. 7. 19; with dat. 
of the pers., and acc. or περί and 
gen. of the thing, i. 1. 8, v. 4. 9, 5. 
23, vii. 4. 13; with wore and inf., 
Vii. 8. 23. 

συμπρέσβεις, ew, of [πρέσβυς], 
JSellow-envoys, V. 5. 24. 

συμπροθυμέομαι [R. 1 θυ], be 
equally zealous with, be just as 
earnest, unite earnestly with, add 
one’s efforts, with inf. or acc. and 
inf., iii. 1. 9, vii. 2.24; with acc. 
or ὅπως and a clause, vii. 1. 5. 

συμφέρω [ R. hep], bring together, 
collect, Lat. conferd, iii. 4.31, vi. 4. 
9; endure with one, with acc. and 
dat., vii. 6. 20; contribute to, be of 
use or advantage, profit, benefit, 
often impers., Lat. cénferd, pro- 
sum, abs. or with dat., ii. 2. 2, iii. 
2. 27, vi. 1. 26, vii. 3.7. Phrases: 
πρὸς τὴν xwpav συμφέρῃ, is suitable 
Jor the ground, Vii. 3.37; συνοίσειν 
ἐπὶ τὸ BéXriov, be to his advantage, 
vii. 8. 4. 

σύμφημι [R. ha], assent, agree, 
grant, with τοῦτο or ταῦτα, v. 8. 8, 
Vii. 2. 26. 

σύμφορος, ov [R. dep], useful, 
advantageous, Vii. 7. 21. 

σύν, prep. with dat. [cf. Lat. 
cum, with], with, in company with, 
along with, together with, used 
freq. by Xen. where other Attic 
prose writers generally used μετά, 
1. 3. 5, 8. 26, 9. 2, ii. 3. 19, 5. 9, 
37, ili. 3. 1, 14, iv. 2. 16, v. 4. 20, 
ἡ. 8, vii. 3. 10, 5. 3; esp. in phrases 
like Μένων καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, Menon 


06 


| 5. 3, iv. 3. 20; on the side of, i. τ. 


11, iii. 2.17; with the help or aid 
of, il. 5. 13, vii. 3. 11, so σὺν τοῖς 
θεοῖς, the gods helping, iii. 1. 23, 42, 
2. 11, v. 8. 19, vi. 6. 32; of dress, 
Surnished with, in, iv. 5. 33, so σὺν 
τοῖς ὅπλοις, in arms, armed, iii. 2. 
8, vi. 5. 3, of. ii. 1. 12; of manner 
and instrument, with, in, by, i. 8. 
4, ii. 6. 18, iii. 2. 16, 3.2. In com- 
position σύν becomes συμ- before 
labials and μ, συγ- before palatals, 
συλ- before A, συρ- before p, and 
συ- before σ followed by a conso- 
nant, and signifies with, along 
with, together, jointly, at the same 
time, entirely, at once, expressing 
union or connexion of any sort, 
and completion. 

συναγείρω [dyelpw], collect to- 
gether or closely, assemble, i. 5. 9. 

συνάγω [R. ay], bring together, 
get together, gather, collect, of per- 
sons and things, i. 5. 10, iv. 4. 10, 
vi. 2.8; convoke, assemble, of per- 
sons, i. 3. 2, iii. 5. 14, v. 7. 3, vi. 
4. 10. 

συναδικέω [R. 1 Sax], do wrong 
with another, be an accomplice in 
crime, with dat. of pers., ii. 6. 27. 

συναθροίζω [ἀθροίζω], collect to- 
gether, get together, vil. 2.8; mid. 
intrans., assemble, vi. 5. 30. 

cuvaivéw (αἰνέω, αἰνέσω, ἤνεσα, 
“ἥνεκα, -ἤνημαι, -ηνέθην [αἶνος, ὁ, tale, 
Ῥγαϊβ86}, praise), agree with one in 
a thing, grant, with acc. of thing 
and dat. of pers., vii. 7. 31. 

συναιρέω [aipéw], take together 
or into small compass. Phrase: ws 
συνελόντι εἰπεῖν, to put it briefly, 
Lat. ut breuiter dicam, iii. 1. 38. 

cuvaltios, ov [alréw], jointly 
guilty, accessory in the guilt, vi. 6. 
28. 

συνακολουθέω [R. xed], follow 
along with, accompany, abs. or 
with dat., ii. 5. 30, iii. 1.4, vii. 7. 11. 

συνακούω ΤῊ ΚΟΕ], hear at the 
same time. Phrase: ἀναβοώντων 
ἀλλήλων συνήκουον, they heard each 


and his troops, i. 2. 15, ef. iii. 2. 11, 


other's calls, v. 4. 81. 


207 συναλίζω-συνεπισπέσθαι 


συναλίζω [ane ζω], gather together, 
collect, vii. 3. 48. 
συναλλάττω (ἀλλάττω, ddda7-, 
ἀλλάξω, ἤλλαξα, -ἤλλαχα, ἤλλαγ- 
μαι, -ηλλάχθην or ἠλλάγην [ἄλλος], 
change), change so as to bring to- 
gether, reconcile ; pass., be recon- 
ciled, come to terms with, with πρός 
and acc., i. 2. 1. 
συναναβαίνω [R. Ba], go up 
with, v. 4. 16; march inland with, 
with dat., i. 3. 18. 
συναναπράττω [πράττω], help 
exact, With παρά and gen. Οὗ pers., 
vii. 7. 14. 
συνανίστημι [R. στα], make 
stand up together ; intrans. 2 aor., 
stand up with, rise with, vii. 3. 
35. 
συναντάω, συνήντησα [ἀντί], 
meet with, meet, abs. or with dat., 
i. 8. 15, vii. 2. 5. 
συνάπειμι [εἶμι7, go away with, 
go off together, ii. 2. 1. 
συναπολαμβάνω [λαμβάνω], re- 
ceive in common, or at the same 
time, of what is due, vii. 7. 40. 
συνάπτω [ἅπτω], join together ; 
of battle, with μάχην and dat. of 
pers., engage in battle, Lat. proe- 
lium committo, i. 5. 16. 
συνάρχω [ἄρχω], rule jointly 
with, command with, with dat. of 
pers. and gen. of thing, vi. 1. 32. 
σύνδειπνος, ὁ [R. δα], companion 
at dinner, guest at dinner, Lat. 
conuiua, ii. 5. 27, iv. 5. 28, vi. 1. 30. 
συνδιαβαίνω [R. Ba], cross over 
together, cross with others, vii. 1. 4. 
συνδιαπράττω [πράττω], accom- 
plish with ; mid., negotiate with at 
the same time, with ὑπέρ and gen., 
iv. 8. 24. 
συνδοκέω [R. S0x], seem good 
also, be approved also, with dat. of 
pers., Vi. 5. 9. 
σύνδυο [δύο], two at once, two 
by two, vi. 3. 2. 
συνέδραμον, see συντρέχω. 
συνεθέλω [ἐθέλω], wish with one, 


συνεῖδον [R. Ftd], see at once or 
at a glance, observe, mark, i. 5. 9. 
συνειλεγμένοι, See συλλέγω. 
συνειλημμένοι, συνειλήφαᾶσι, see 
συλλαμβάνω. 
σύνειμι [R. eo], be with ; subst., 
οἱ συνόντες, associates, acquaint- 
ances, ii. 6. 20,28. Phrase: συνῆν 
Ξενοφῶντι φιλικῶς, he was on 
friendly terms with Xenophon, Vi. 
6. 35. 
σύνειμι [εἶμι], go together, as- 
semble, iii. 5. 7; in a hostile sense, 
μαχούμενος συνήει, he advanced to 
the encounter, i. 10. 10. 
συνείποντο, 566 συνέπομαι. 
συνεισέρχομαι [ἔρχομαι), enter 
with, go in together, with πρός and 
ace. of pers. and εἰς and acc. of 
place, iv. 5. 10. 

συνεισπίπτω [R. wer], fall into 
a place together, rush in together, 
plunge in, abs. or with εἴσω and 
gen., v. 7. 25, vii. 1. 18. 

συνεκβαίνω [R. Ba], go out to- 
gether, with ἐπί and acc., iv. 3. 22. 

συνεκβιβάζω (βιβάζω, BiBad-, -βι- 
βάσω or βιβῶ, -εβίβασα [R. Ba], 
make go, causative to βαίνω), help 
draw out, help extricate, i. 5. 7. 

συνεκκόπτω [KorTw], help cut 
down, iv. 8. 8. . 

συνεκπίνω [R. πο], help drink 
up, drain with, Vii. 3. 32. 

συνεκπορίζω [R. wep], help pro- 
cure, join in providing, V. 8. 25. 

συνεληλύθατε, see συνέρχομαι. 

συνελόντι, 566 συναιρέω. 

συνενεγκόντες, συνενηνεγμένα, 566 
συμφέρω. 

συνεξέρχομαι [ἔρχομαι], go out 
with, vii. 8. 11 

συνεπαινέω [ἐπαινέω], join in 
praising or approving, agree to- 
gether, vii. 3. 36. 

συνεπεύχομαι [εὔχομαι], vow to- 
gether besides, with dat. of the god 
to whom and inf., iii. 2. 9. 

συνεπιμελέομαι [R. ped], help 
take charge of, with gen., Vi. I. 
22. 


consent, favour, with dat. of pers. 
and inf., vi. 1. 32. 


συνεπισπέσθαι, see συνεφέπομαι. 


«πστ΄ να re ee 


—— ee a Se. 


\ 


συνεπισπεύδω--συντάττω 2 


συνεπισπεύδω [σπεύδω], help 
hurry on, join in pushing forward, 
i, 5. 8. Ι 

συνεπιτρίβω (τρίβω, τριβ-, τρίψω, 


ἔτριψα, τέτριφα, rérpiuuat, ἐτρίβην 


[ef. τριβή], rub), destroy all αἱ 
once, utterly ruin, v. 8. 20. 
συνέπομαι [R. wer], follow along 
with, accompany, abs. or with dat., 
Boe iy ae Bay Ve eS, WEL, 2, Bo, 
συνεπόμνῦμι [ὄμνυμι], swear be- 
sides at the same time, with inf., 
vii. 6. 19. 
συνεργός, dv [R. Fepy], working 
with; subst., ὁ συνεργός, fellow- 
worker, coadjutor, helper, i. 9. 20, 
21. 
συνερρύησαν, see cuppéw. 
σνυνέρχομαι [ἔρχομαι], come to- 
gether, meet, assemble, ii. 1. 2, 
21, iii. 1. 15, iv. 1. 12, v. 4. 4, vi. 1. 
25, vii. 3. 10; with παρά and acc., 
|e sae 
συνέσπων, see συσπάω. 
συνεφέπομαι [R. cer], follow 
along with, attend closely, abs. or 
with dat., iv. 8. 18, vii. 4. 6. 
συνέχω [R. vex], hold together, 
Vii. 2. 8. 
συνήδομαι [R. a5], be glad with 
‘one, rejoice with, congratulate, 
Lat. grdtulor, abs., with dat. of 
pers., and with ὅτε and a clause, 
We. καὶ ἢ γα 42,5. 1. 
συνθεάομαι [θέᾳ], look at with, 
inspect together, vi. 4. 15. 
σύνθημα, aros, τό [R. Oe], thing 
agreed on, agreement, iv. 6. 20; 
signal, esp. the watchword, the 
word, Lat. signum, tessara, given 
out and passed through the ranks 
before a battle as a means by 
which friends might be distin- 
guished from foes, i. 8. 16, vi. 5. 
25, or used at night as a counter- 
sign, Vii. 3. 34. 
συνθηράω [θηράω], hunt with, 
join in the hunt, v. 3. 10. 
συνθοῖτο, see συντίθημι. 
συνιδεῖν, See συνεῖδον. 
συνέημι [ἴημι7, put together, un- 


08 


συνίστημι [R. στα, make stana 
together, of persons, bring together, 
introduce, with dat., iii. 1. 8, vi. 1. 
23; intr. in mid. and pf. and 2 aor. 
act., stand together, get together, 
gather, combine, form together, esp. 
of troops, v. 7. 2, 16, vi. 2. 9, 5. 28, 
vil. 3. 47. Phrases: ἱππικὸν ἔτι 
συνεστηκός, cavalry with ranks still 
unbroken, Vi. 5. 30, ef. vii. 6. 26. 

σύνοδος, ἡ [ὁδός], meeting, junc- 
tion, vi. 4.9; in a hostile sense, 
encounter, i. 10. 7. 

σύνοιδα [ R. Fb], share in knowl- 
edge, be privy to, Lat. cdnscius 
sum, With dat. of pers., as σύνοιδέ 
μοι εἰ ἐπιορκῶ, he is cognisant if I 
am ἃ perjurer, vii. 6. 18; with-refl. 
pron. and nom. of partic., be con- 
scious of, i. 3. 10, ii. 5. 7,. vii. 6. 11. 

συνοίσειν, see συμφέρω. 

συνολολύζω (ὀλολύζω, ὀλολῦγ-, 
ὀλολύξομαι, ὠλόλυξα [ὀλολυγή, loud 
cry, cf. Lat. ulula, screech-owl, Eng. 
OWL], cry aloud), ery out together, 
of women, raise a shrill cry to- 
gether, iv. 3. 19. 

συνομολογέω [ἅμα -- R. λεγ], 
agree with another or to a thing 
with another, consent, assent to, 
join, agree upon, with dat. of pers., 
vii. 5. 10, acc. of thing, iv. 2. 19, 
vii. 8. 3, or with a combination of 
the two, v. 7. 15. 

συνοράω [R. 2 Fep], see at the 
same time; with ἀλλήλους, watch 
or view one another, iv. 1. 11, v. 2. 
13. 

συνουσία, as [R. ex], a being to- 
gether, mutual intercourse, confer- 
ence, li. 5. 6. 
συντάττω [R. trax], set in order 
together, as a military term, draw 
up in array, marshal, form, i. 2. 
15, Lat. instrud ; mid., form one’s 
own troops, i. 10. 5; intr., of 
troops, form line of battle, fall into 
battle array, form in line, i. 3. 14, 
7. 14, iv. 2. 7, vi. 3. 21. Phrase: 
συνετάττετο ἐκ τῶν ἔτι προσιόντων, 
was forming its line from those 


derstand, Lat. intelligo, vii. 6. 8. 


who were still coming up, i. 8. 14. 


209 συντίθημι-συχνός 


συντίθημι [ R. Ge], place together ; 
mid., put together for oneself, con- 
clude, covenant, contract, agree 
on, make an agreement, with dat. 
of pers., to which may be added 
inf., i. 9. 7, vii. 1. 35; with acc. of 
thing, iv. 2.1, v. 1. 12, cf. ii. 5. 8, 
and see κατατίθημι. 

σύντομος, ov [τέμνω], cut short, 
short, in sup., ii. 6. 22. 

συντράπεζος, ὁ [τέτταρες + R. 
wed |, table-companion, i. 9. 31, see 
ὁμοτράπεζος. 

συντρέχω [τρέχω], run together 
or to one place, assemble quickly, 
v. 7. 4, vii. 6. 6. 

συντρίβω (τρίβω, τριβ-, Tpipw, 
ἔτριψα, τέτριφα, τέτριμμαι, ἐτρίβην 
(cf. τριβή], rub), rub together. 
Phrase: συντετριμμένους ἀνθρώπους 
σκέλη, men with their legs com- 
pletely crushed, iv. 7. 4. 

cuvrvyxave [R. trax], happen 
upon, fall in with, meet, of friend 
or foe, i. τὸ. 8, vii. 8. 22. 

συνωφελέω [ὠφελέω], contribute 
to one’s help, join in aiding, iii. 2.27. 

Συρᾶκόσιος Or Συρακούσιος, ὁ 
ΓΣυρἄκουσαι, Syracuse], a Syracu- 
sian, native of Syracuse, i. 2. 9, το. 
14, a city on the eastern coast of 
Sicily, founded by Corinthians on 
the island Ortygia in 734 5.0. It 
grew rapidly, owing chiefly to its 
fine harbour, and under Gelon, 
480 s.c., and Dionysius I., 400 B.c., 
large suburbs on the mainland of 
Sicily were added to it, making a 
city of 14 miles in circumference. 
Thenceforward it was the largest, 
most populous and brilliant of Hel- 
lenic cities, until the rise of the 
great capitals in the East. 

Συρία, as [Σύριος], Syria, ἃ coun- 
try in Asia, including not only the 
land south of the Euphrates as far 
as Arabia, and bounded on the 
west by Palestine, Phoenicia, and 
the Mediterranean as far as the 
gulf of Issus, i. 4. 4, 6, 10, but also 
the district east of the Euphrates 
which after the Macedonian con- 


iquest was called by the Greeks 


Mesopotamia, i. 4. 19. 

Σύριος, a, ov [Σύρος], of Syria, 
Syrian, i. 4. 5. 

Σύρος, ὁ, a Syrian, native of 
Syria, i. 4. 9. 

cuppéw [péw], flow together, 
stream together, of men, abs., with 
eis and acc., or ἐκ and gen., iv. 2. 
19, v. 2. 3, vi. 3. 6. 

σῦς, συός, ὁ, ἡ [ο΄ ὗς, Lat. sus, 
swine, Eng. HOG, sow], swine, pig, 
hog, boar, v. 3. 10, 11, 7. 24. 

συσκευάζω [R. oxv], get ready 
together, pack up; mid. intr., pack 
one’s own things, pack up one’s 
baggage, of soldiers before a march, 
Lat. udsa colligo, i. 3. 14, ii. 1. 2, 2. 
4, iii. 4. 36, 5. 18, v. 8. 14, vii. 1. 7. 

σύσκηνος, ὁ [R. σκα], tent-com- 
panion, messmate, Lat. contuber- 
nalis, v. 7. 15, 8. 5, 6. 

overdo [R. ora], draw together, 
of skins, sew together, i. 5. 10. 

συσπειράομαι, συνεσπείρᾶμαι, συν- 
εσπειράθην [cf. σπάρτον], be coiled 
up together ; of troops, be formed 
in close order or in a@ solid body, 
i, 8. 21. 

συσπουδάζω [σπουδάζω], haste 
along with, share one’s zeal, li. 3.11. 

συστρατεύομαι, always dep. mid. 
in Anab. [R. orpa], serve in war 
with, take the field with, share or 
joina campaign or expedition, abs., 
with dat., or σύν and dat., v. 6. 24, 
vi. 2. 16, vii. 3. 14, 4 21, ¥. 31; 
with ἐπί and acc., i. 4. 3, vii. 4. 20. 

συστράτηγος, ὁ [R. στρα R. 
ay], fellow-general, ii. 6. 29. 

συστρατιώτης, ὁ [R. στρα], fel- 
low-soldier, Lat. commilito, i. 2. 20. 

συστρατοπεδεύομαι [R. στρα 
R. aed], encamp together, with σύν 
and dat., ii. 4. 9. 

συστρέφω [στρέφω], turn or twist 
together ; 2 aor. pass., συστραφέν- 
res, turning or facing about in a 
body, i. 10.6, where others read the 
simple στραφέντες. See στρέφω. 

συχνός, ἡ, ov, much, considera- 
ble, great; of time, long, i. 8. 8, 


σφαγιάζομαι- σφοδρός 210 


v. 8. 14; of number, many, numer- 
ous, abs. or with gen., v. 4. 16, 18, 
7.16; of space, διαλείποντα συχνόν 
ae χωρίον), at some distance apart, 
i. 8. 10. 

σφαγιάζομαι, ἐσφαγιασάμην [σφά- 
γον}, slay a victim, offer a sacri- 
Jice, Lat. hostias immolo, abs. or 
with dat., iv. 5. 4, vi. 4. 25, 5. 8. 
Phrase: ἐσφαγιάζοντο els τὸν rora- 
pov, they sacrificed so that the blood 
ran into the river, cf. Lat. in mare 
porricere, iv. 3. 18 (see σφάττω). 

σφάγιον, τό [cf. σφάττω], animal 
sacrificed, victim, Lat. hostia; pl. 
τὰ σφάγια καλά (sc. γίγνεται or 
ἐστι), the omens from the sacrifice 
are favourable, referring to the 
acts and movements of the victims 
(external omens as opp. to lepd, 
q.v.), i. 8. 15, iv. 3. 19, vi. 5. 8, 21. 

σφαιροειδής, ἐς [σφαῖρα, ball, cf. 
Eng. sphere+R. F.d], ball-like, 
spherical, round; so σφαιροειδές 
(se. rt), V. 4. 12, of the round ball 
between the λόγχη (q.v.) and the 
shaft of the spears of the Mossy- 
noeci (not at the butt end). 

σφάλλω (σφαλ-), σφαλῶ, ἔσφηλα, 
ἔσφαλμαι, ἐσφάλην [R. oad], trip, 
trip up, make fall; mid. and pass., 
be balked, fall, fail, meet with a 
mischance, Vii. 7. 42. 

σφᾶς, see οὗ. 

σφάττω, or (older but not in 
Anab.) σφάζω (cday-), σφάξω, 


ἔσφαξα, ἔσφαγμαι, ἐσφάγην, slaugh- 
ter, slay, prop. by cutting the 


throat, Lat. iugulé, hence of vic- 
tims, sacrifice, as σφάξαντες ταῦρον 
els ἀσπίδα, sacrificing a bull and 
catching the blood in a shield (see 
σφαγιάζομαιν, ii. 2. 9; of persons, 
kill, slay, iv. 5. 16, 7. 16. 

σφεῖς, see ov. 

σφενδονάω, ἐσφενδόνησα [oder- 
dévn |, use the sling, sling, iii. 3. 7, 
15, 4. 15, iv. 3. 30. 

σφενδόνη, ys, sling, Lat. funda, 
made of leather or of leather and 
cords (see s.v. νεῦρον), iii. 3. 16, 
4. 17, iv. 2. 27; of the stone or 
leaden ball used in the sling, mis- 
sile, iii. 4. 4, v. 2. 14, vii. 8. 18. 
For the form of the sling and the 
manner of using it, see the follow- 
ing illustration. 

σφενδονήτης, ov [σφενδονάω], 
slinger, Lat. funditor, without de- 
fensive armour, and carrying only 
his sling and stones or leaden bul- 
lets. The σφενδονῆται constituted 
one division of the 
Greek light-armed 
troops, iii. 4. 26, iv. 
3. 27, v. 6. 15 (8.2. 
yuurhs), but they 
were relatively un- 
important, and 
were not organised 
until, under the 
pressure of neces- 
sity, the Greeks 
drafted men for the 
purpose, iii. 3. 16- 
20. These were ex- 
pert Rhodians, who 
used leaden bullets, which carried 
twice as far as the big stones used 
by the Persians. The sling was, 
on the contrary, in great use among 
the barbarians, iii. 3. 6, cf. iii. 3. 15, 
iv. 2. 27, 3. 29, 30, vii. 8. 18. 

σφίσι, see ov. 

σφόδρα, adv. [σῴφοδρός}, with 
vehemence, extremely, exceedingly, 
very, ii. 3. 16, 4. 18, 6. 11, iv. 8. 20, 
Vv. 4. 32, vi. 5. 28. 

σφοδρός, a, dv, vehement, violent, 
extreme, i. το. 18. 


911 σχεδία-σῶς 


σχεδία, as, raft, float, Lat. ratis, 
made of skins, i. 5. 10, ii. 4. 28. 
Their construction is described in 
the first passage. 

σχεδόν, adv. [R. vex], near; of 
degree, nearly, closely, about, al- 
most, whostly, chiefly, Lat. feré, i. 
8. 25, esp. with numerals, iv. 7. 6, 
8. 15, vii. 6.1; of time, about, just 
about, iii. 1. 33, 2. 1, vi. 3. 26. 
Phrase: σχεδόν τι πᾶσα ἡ στρατιᾶ, 
pretty nearly all the army, Vi. 4. 20. 

σχεῖν, see ἔχω. 

σχέτλιος, a, ον [R. vex], holding 
out, unflinching, cruel, dreadful, 
vii. 6. 30. 

σχῆμα, aros, τό [R. vex], form, 
shape, of troops, formation, i. 10. 
1G. 

σχίζω, ἔσχισα, ἐσχίσθην [ef 
Lat. scindd, split, Eng. schedule, 
schism], cleave, split, of wood, i. 5. 
12, iv. 4. 12; pass. of troops, be 
divided or separated, Vi. 3. 1. 

σχολάζω (σχολαδ-), ἐσχόλασα, 
ἐσχόλακα [R. σεχ]ὔ, be at leisure, 
have time, Lat. otidsus sum, il. 3. 
2, Vil. 3. 24. 

σχολαῖος, a, ov [R. σεχ], leis- 
urely, hence slow, Lat. lentus, iv. 
1. 13. 

σχολαίως, adv. [R. vex], in α 
leisurely way, slowly, sluggishly, 
Lat. lenté, i. 5.8; comp. σχολαίτε- 
por, i. 5. 9. 

σχολή, is [R. vex], leisure, free 
time for anything, Lat. dtium, with 
dat. of pers. and inf., i. 6. 9, iv. 1. 
17, v. 1. 9; dat. as adv., σχολῇ, 
slowly, iii. 4. 27, iv. 1. 16. 

σῷ, see σῶς. 

σῳΐζω (σῳδ-), σώσω, ἔσωσα, σέ- 
σωκα, σέσω(σ)μαι, ἐσώθην [R. σαξΊ, 
save, preserve, save life, rescue, 
Lat. conserud, of persons, i. 10. 3, 
ii. 3. 25, iii. 2.4, vi. 3.17; of things, 
preserve, keep safe, keep, hold, re- 
tain, i. 10. 3, ii. 5. 11, iii. 2. 39, vii. 
7.56; mid. and pass., save oneself, 
be saved alive, escape, ii. 1. 19, 4. 
6, iii. 2. 3, v. 2. 31, vi. 3. 16, Vil. 1. 
19, 8.1; return safely, arrive safe, 


abs. or with εἰς and acc., iii. 1. 6, 
v. 3. 6, vi. 4.8, 5.20; cerw(o)pévor, 
safe and sound, V. 5. 8. 

Σωκράτης, ovs, 6, Socrates, the 
renowned Athenian philosopher. 
He was the son of Sophroniscus, a 
sculptor, and was himself trained 
in that art, but soon abandoned it 
for the life of a philosopher and 
thinker on social, political, and 
religious problems. About him 
gathered a circle of friends, who 
regarded him as their master, al- 
though he gave no regular instruc- 
tion and propounded no set doc- 
trine, but was rather an eye-opener, 
leading men to accept no statement 
without inquiry and to acknowl- 
edge no guide except reason. His 
method was the dialectic, by ques- 
tion and answer. By the Delphic 
oracle he was pronounced wisest 
of men. In 399 B.c., when over 
70 years old, he was accused of 
disbelief in the gods and of in- 
troducing new divinities, and after 
trial was condemned to death. He 
left no written works, but is known 
to us chiefly through the writings 
of his friends and followers, espe- 
cially Plato and Xenophon, iii. 1. 
5,7. Xenophon’s Memorabilia con- 
tains his recollections of Socrates. 

Σωκράτης, ovs, ὁ, Socrates, an 
Achaean, a friend of Cyrus, i. 1. 
11, whom he joined with troops, 
i. 2.3. He was one of the generals 
treacherously seized by Tissapher- 
nes, ii. 5. 31 ff., and was succeeded 
by Xanthicles, iii. 1. 47. On his 
character, see ii. 6. 30. 

σῶμα, aros, τό, body of a living 
man, Lat. corpus, i. 9. 27, iii. 1. 23, 
2. 20, hence, life, i. 9. 12, ii. 1. 12; 
pl., σώματα ἀνδρῶν, persons, men, 
iv.6.10. Phrase: τῷ σώματι αὑτοῦ 
κόσμον, for his personal adornment, 
i, 9. 23. 

σῶς, σᾶ, σῶν, Or σῶς, σῶν, de- 
fective adj. [R. oaF], safe and 
sound, alive and well, all right, 
Lat. sdnus, saluus, occurring in 


Σῶσις-τάξις 212 


Anab. in the forms σῶς, iii. 1. 32, | 
σῷ or Go, ii. 2. 21, v. 2.32, σᾶ or 
σῶα, neut. pl., v. 1. 16. 

Σῶσις, wos, ὁ, or Σωσίᾶς, ov, Sosis 
or Sosias, of Syracuse ; joined Cy- 
rus with troops, i. 2. 9. 

σωτήρ, jpos, ὁ [R. caf], pre- 
server, saviour, a title given to Ζεύς, 
q.v., i. 8. 16, iii. 2. 9, iv. 8. 25, vi. 5. 25. 

σωτηρία, as [R. caf], safety, 
welfare, preservation, deliverance, 
Lat. saliis, ii. 1. 19, iii. 1. 26, 2 32, 
v.. 2. 20, vi. 1. 29, 3. 12. 

Σωτηρίδᾶς, ov, Soteridas, a hop- 
lite of Sicyon, punished by his 
comrades for impudence to Xeno- 
phon, iii. 4. 47, 49. 

σωτήριος, ov [R. caf], deliver- 
ing, salutary, Lat. salitaris, ii. 6. 
11; pl. subst., τὰ σωτήρια (86. ἱεράν, 
thank offerings for deliverance or 
for a@ safe return, iii. 2. 9, Vv. 1. 1. 
Phrase: σωτήριόν τι βουλευομένους, 
taking salutary measures, iii. 3. 2. 

σωφρονέω, σωφρονήσω, ἐσωφρό- 
νησα, σεσωφρόνηκα, σεσωφρόνημαι 
[R. caF + φρήν], be of sound mind, 
be discreet, temperate, or moderate, 
be wise or prudent, v. 8. 24, vi. 2. 
11, vii. 6. 41. Phrase: σωφρονεῖν 
τὰ πρὸς σέ, be self-controlled in 
their dealings with you, Vii. 7. 30. 

σωφρονίζω, ἐσωφρόνισα, σεσωφρό- 
νικα, σεσωφρόνισμαι, ἐσωφρονίσθην 
[R. σαξ - φρήν], make discreet, 
bring to reason or to one’s senses, 
reform, Vii. 7. 24; pass., come to 
one’s senses, Vi. 1. 28. 

σωφροσύνη, ns [R. caF + φρήν], 
soundness of mind, discretion, mod- 
eration, the highest quality recog- 
nised by the Greeks, denoting that 
avoidance of all extremes expressed 
by our word temperance when used 
in its proper sense, i. 9. 3. 


τ. 


τ᾽, by elision for τέ. 
raya0d, crasis for ra ἀγαθά. 


τάλαντον, τό [R. rad], prop. that 
which supports, hence, balance, pl. 
pair of scales, by transfer the 
weight in the scales, and then any 
weight, and as a definite weight, 
talent. In historical times the tal- 
ent was both a weight and a sum 
of money, although the latter was 
never actually coined. The Attic 
talent in Xenophon’s time weighed 
about 57.75 105. avoirdupois; as a 
sum of money (vii. 1. 27) it had 
the value of this amount of silver 
and was worth 6000 Attic drach- 
mas. See s.v. μνᾶ. See also s.v. 
Sapecxés. ii. 2. 20, iii. 5. 8, vii. 7. 
25, 53. 

τάλλα, τάλλα, crasis for τὰ ἄλλα. 

ταμιεύω, ταμιεύσω, τεταμίευμαι 
[raulas, carver, dispenser, steward, 
cf. réuvw |, be comptroller or treas- 
urer ; mid., administer or measure 
out for oneself, of enemies, parcel 
out or deal with at one’s pleasure, 
ii. 5. 18. 

apes, ὁ, J'amos, an Egyptian 

of Memphis, who at first served 
under Tissaphernes in Ionia, but 
afterwards he joined Cyrus and 
conducted his fleet to Cilicia, i. 2. 
21, 4.2. After the death of Cyrus 
he fled to Egypt, where he was 
killed by Psammetichus for his 
treasures and ships. His son was 
Glus, ii. 1. 3. 

τἀναντία, crasis for τὰ ἐναντία. 

ταξίαρχος, ὁ [R. trax+ ἄρχω], 
commander of a τάξις, taxiarch, ili. 
1. 37, iv. 1. 28. 

τάξις, ews, ἡ [R. tax], arrange- 
ment, Lat. Ordd, esp. in a military 
sense, order, array, formation, 1. 
2. 18, iii. 2. 38, 4.19, v. 2.13; rank 
and file, line, line of battle, Lat. 
aciés, i. 8. 10, 16, ii, 2. 14, 3. 2, iii. 
2.17; of individuals, place in line, 
post, station, iii. 4. 48, iv. 3. 29; 
any body of troops, division, corps, 
battalion, of no fixed number, i. 
5. 14 (ef. i. 2. 3), 8. 3, iii. 1. 32, or 
composed of two λόχοι of hoplites, 
i.e. 200 men, iv. 7. 2, vi. 5.11; of 


213 


peltasts, 100 men, iv. 3. 22; of 
cavalry, iv. 3. 17, 22, consisting 
of 600 men in i. 8 21; of the 
Persians, division, corps, 1. 2. 16, 
8. 8, iii. 4.14. Phrases: ἐν τάξει; 
in line, in order, in the ranks, i. 
7. 20, ii. 2.8, ν. 1.2 ; τὰ ἀμφὶ τάξεις, 
tactics, ii. 1. 7; εἰς τάξιν τὰ ὅπλα 
τίθεσθαι, get under arms in line of 
battle, ii. 2. 21, cf. v. 4. 11. 

Τάοχοι, oi, the Taochi, Taochi- 
ans, a barbarous and warlike tribe 
on the northern frontier of Arme- 
nia, iv. 4. 18, 6. 5, 7. 1, 17, inde- 
pendent of the Persians, v. 5. 17. 

ταπεινός, ἡ, ov, downcast, sub- 
missive, ii. 5. 13. 

ταπεινόω, ἐταπείνωσα, τεταπείνω- 
μαι, ἐταπεινώθην [ταπεινός], lower, 
bring down, humble, vi. 3. 18. 

rams, dos, or ταπίς, ἰδος, ἡ [cf 
Eng. tape, tapestry], carpet, rug, 
Lat., stragulum, Vil. 3. 18, 27. 

ταἀπιτήδεια, crasis for τὰ ἐπιτή- 
δεια. 

ταράττω (ταραχ-), ταράξω, ἐτά- 
pata, τετάραγμαι, ἐταράχθην, trou- 
ble, disturb, agitate, make disorder, 
Lat. perturbd, v. ἡ. 1, vi. 2. 9; of 
persons, disturb, embarrass, ii. 4. 
18; of troops, pass., be thrown into 
confusion or disorder, iii. 4. 19, vi. 

m3 
' τάραχος, ὁ [ταράττω], confusion, 
disorder, i. 8. 2 

ταρϊχεύω, τεταρἔχευμαι, ἐταρϊχεύ- 
θην [rdpixos, ὁ, smoked meat, root 
rapa, parch, cf. Lat. terra, dry 
land, torred, parch, Eng. THIRST], 
preserve, pickle, ν. 4. 28. 

Ταρσοί, dv, Tarsus, the ancient 
capital of Cilicia, founded by the 
Assyrian kings, on the Cydnus. 
It was an important commercial 
city and seat of learning even in 
the Roman period, and was the 
birthplace of St. Paul. The Cyré- 
ans plundered it, i. 2. 29, 25, 26. 
(Tersis.) 

τάττω (Tay-), τάξω, ἔταξα, τέ- 
ταχα, τέταγμαι, ἐτάχθην, and rare 
poetic ἐτάγην [R. ται}, arrange, 


Τάοχοι-ταχύς 


esp. as a military term, form, ar- 
ray, draw up into line of battle, 
marshal, assign to stations, Lat. 
instrud, i. 2. 15, 8, 38, 24, ii. 3. 
1% 19, di. ἃ ET, ita, Be 
mid., draw up for oneself or one’s 
own, V. 4. 22; mid. intr. and pass., 
take one’s post, post oneself, be 
stationed, i. 7. 9, 9. 31, Vi. 3. 6, 
vii. 1.23; act. also assign, order, 
appoint, with acc. and inf., i. 5. 7, 
iii. 1.25, so in pass., ταχθείς, Lat. 
iussus, i. 6.6, iv. 6. 22. Phrases: 
ἐν τῷ τεταγμένῳ, in the appointed 
place, iii. 3. 18 (but some read 
ἐντεταγμένω, see ἐντάττω). 

ταῦρος, ὁ [cf. Lat. taurus, bull, 
Eng. sTEER], Dull, ii. 2. 9. 

ταύτῃ, dat. fem. of οὗτος, as adv. 
[οὗτος], of place, in this direction 
or way, on this side, here, Lat. hac 
(sc. uid), i. τὸ, 6, iv. 2, 4, 3. 4, 
hence, of ταύτῃ ἵπποι, the horses 
in this region, iv. 5. 36, cf. vii. 4. 
24; of manner, in this way, herein, 
in these regards, Lat. hac ratione, 
ii. 6. 7, iii. 2. 32. 

ταφείησαν, see θάπτω. 

τάφος, ὁ [θάπτω, cf. Eng. epi- 
taph], burial, funeral, hence, bur- 
ial place, grave, i. 6. 11. 

τάφρος, ἡ [cf.- θάπτω], ditch, 
trench, Lat. fossa, for irrigation or 
defence, i. 7. 16, ii. 3. 10, 4. 13, v. 
2. 5, Vi. 5.3; its artificial character 
emphasised by ὀρυκτή, i. 7. 14. 

τάχα, adv. [ταχύς], quickly, pres- 
ently, soon, i. 8. 8, iv. 4. 12, Vv. 7. 
21; perhaps, maybe, Υ. 2. 17. 

ταχέως, adv. [ταχύς], quickly, 
swiftly, speedily, ii. 2. 12, iii. 4. 18, 
ivi a) BE. Es & 

τάχιστα, See ταχύς. 

τάχος, ous, τό [ταχύς], swiftness, 
speed, ii. 5. 7. 

ταχύς, εἴα, ύ, quick, swift, speedy, 
Lat. celer, iii. 3. 15, sup. τάχιστος; 
i. 2. 20, ii. 6. 29. Phrases: τὴν 
ταχίστην (sc. ὁδόν), in the quickest 
manner, as soon as possible, i. 3. 
14, iii. 3. 16, vii. 1. 11; διὰ ταχέων, 
with speed, i.5.9. Neut. as adv., 


τέ-τείνω 9 


ταχύ, quickly, swiftly, speedily, 
aoen, κι IL, 3,'6, i. ἃ 27, iv. 
G20, ¥. 230, Vi. 2. 25, vi, αὶ 
42; comp. θᾶττον, more quickly, 
quicker, faster, i. 2. 17, iii. 5. 6, iv. 
3. 32, Vii. 3.45; ἣν θᾶττον... θᾶττον, 
the sooner... the sooner, Lat. si- 
mulatque ... statim, vi. 5.20; sup. 
τάχιστα, Vil. 6. 12, freq. used in 
phrases meaning as quickly as pos- 
sible, as soon as one can, formed 
(with or without the appropriate 
forms of δύναμαι) with the advs. 
ws, i. 3. 14, iii. 4. 44, iv. 2.1, v. 7. 
3, Vii, 3. 44, Sri, iv. 3. 29, vii. 2. 8, 
δ 2.4, vi. 5. 18, deg, iv. 5. 1; 
ἐπειδὰν τάχιστα, As 800N Gs, lii. 1. 


No. 


9, cf. iv. 6. 9, vi. 3. 21, so ws rd- 
χιστα, iv. 3. 9. 

ré, copulative conj., enclitic, and, 
corresponding to καί much as Lat. 
-que to et. It stands either alone, | 
i. 5. 14, 9. 5, iii. 2. 16, vii. 6. 3, or 
doubled, when it generally marks 
the balance or connexion either of 
clauses, on the one hand ...on the 
other, i. 8. 3, iii. 2. 11, 39, 4. 35, or 
rarely of single words, iv. 5. 12 ; re- 
peated three and four times, vi. 5. 
21, iv. 8.13; ré... καὶ or γε και. 
not only ... but also, both... and, 
Lat. cum ...tum, or untranslata- 


14 


ble, i. 1. 5, 2. 1, 9, 3. 1, 8. 5, 9. 1, 
iii. 2. 1, v. 4. 21, 5. 1, 13, vii. 5. 6; 
ovre .. . Té, 866 οὔτε; TE... δέ τ 
generally used where the construc- 
tion is anacoluthic, v. 5. 8, vii. 8. 
11, réis sometimes joined to rela- 
tive words to increase their relative 
force, see dre, οἷος, wore, ᾧτε. 

τεθνᾶσι, τέθνατον͵ τεθνηκότα, see 
θνήσκω. 

τεθραμμένους, see τρέφω. 

τέθριππον, τό [τέτταρες + R. ax], 
team of four horses abreast, char- 
ἰοὺ and four, four-in-hand, Lat. 
quadrigae, iii. 2.24. The two mid- 
dle horses of the team pulled by 


the yoke (see s.v. ζυγόν); those on 


68. 


the outside by means of a single 
trace (not represented in the ac- 
companying cut), attached at one 
end to the horse’s collar and at 
the other to the dvrvé (see s.v. 
ἅρμα) of the chariot. For another 
illustration of the τέθριππον, see 
8.0. ἅρμα (No, 8). 

telvw (Tev-), τενῶ, ἔτεινα, -réraxa, 
rérauat, ἐτάθην [cf. Lat. tenuis, 
drawn out, thin, tendd, stretch, Eng. 
THIN, DANCE, tone, hypo-tenuse], 
stretch, extend ; intrans., exert one- 
self, hasten, rush, Lat. contendé, 
with ἄνω, πρός and acc., iv. 3. 21. 


215 τειχίζω-τετραπλόος 


τειχίζω (τειχιδ-), τειχιῶ, ἐτεί- 
χισα, τετείχικα, τετείχισμαι, ἐτει- 
χίσθην [τεῖχος], build a wall, for- 
tify, Vii. 2. 36. 

τεῖχος, ovs, τό [ο΄ Eng. DIKE, 
DITCH, DIG], wall, for defence, i. 4. 
4, 7. 15, ii, 4. 12, esp. city wall, 
rampart, Lat. muérus, moenia, iii. 
4. 7, Vi. 2. 8, vii. 2.11; of the city 
itself, v. 5. 6, vii. 1. 15; fortress, 
stronghold, iii. 4. 10, vil. 3. 19, 5. 
8; forming the name of a place, 
see Νέον τεῖχος. 

τεκμαίρομαι (Texuap-), τεκμαροῦ- 
μαι, ἐτεκμηράμην [R. ra], settle by 
a mark, form a judgment, infer, iv. 
2. 4. 

τεκμήριον, τό [R. trax], sign, 
token, proof, evidence, Lat. argu- 
mentum, i. 9. 29, 30, iii. 2. 19. 

τέκνον, τό [R. trax], child, pl., of 
children with reference to their 
parents, Lat. liberi, i. 4. 8, iv. 5. 28, 
vi. 4. 8. 

τελέθω [τέλος], come into being, 
come out, become, iii. 2. 3; of sac- 
rifices, be favourable, vi. 6. 36. 
(Elsewhere poetic, and some editt. 
have other readings in both these 
passages.) 

τελευταῖος, a, ov [τέλος 7, last, Lat. 
ultimus, of time, iv. 1.5; of order 
in a military sense, hindmost, at 
the rear, rear, Lat. nouissimus, iv. 
2. 16, vi. 5. 10, vii. 3. 839; subst., of 
τελευταῖοι, the rear guard, iv. 1. 10, 
3. 24. 

τελευτάω, τελεύτησω, ἐτελεύτησα;, 
τετελεύτηκα, ἐτελευτήθην [τέλος], 
bring to an end; intr., jinish, end 
one’s life, die, Lat. finid, i. τ. 3, 
Lr. 4.6) 16.8 γι ων κ. 
11; partic., τελευτῶν, used adv. like 
τέλος, at last, jinally, iv. 5. 16, vi. 
3. 8. 

τελευτή, 7s [τέλος], end, Lat. 71- 
nis, esp. euphemistically for death, 
with or without τοῦ βίου, i. 1.1, 9. 
30, ii. 6. 29, iii. 2. 7. 

τελέω, τελῶ, Tarely -τελέσω, éré- 
λεσα, τετέλεκα, τετέλεσμαι, ἐτελέσθην, 
[τέλος], bring to completion, finish, 


fulfil an obligation, pay, iii. 3. 18, 
vii. 1. 6, 6. 16. 

τέλος, ous, τό [τέλος], comple- 
tion, fulfilment, end, issue, result, 
Lat. exitus, i. 10. 18, v. 2. 9, vi. 1. 
13. Phrases: τέλος, adv., at last, 
Jinally, to close, Lat. tandem, i. 9. 
6, ii. 3. 26, vi. 1.5; διὰ τέλους, from 
beginning to end, constanily, vi. 6. 
11; ἤδη τέλος ἐχόντων τῶν ἱερῶν, as 
the sacrifice was nearing the end, 
vi. 5, 3, 

τέλος, ous, τό [R. trad], what is 
imposed on one, tax, outlay, task, 
office, magistracy, supreme author- 
ity, plur., ra τέλη, the authorities, 
magistrates, of the Spartan ephors, 
ii. 6.4. Phrase: rots οἴκοι τέλεσι; 
the home government, Vii. 1. 34. 

τέμαχος, ous, τό [ cf. Téuvw], slice, 
of fish, v. 4. 28. 

Tepevirns, see Τημενέτης. 

τέμνω (τεμ-, τμε-), τεμῶ, ἔτεμον OF 
ἔταμον, -τέτμηκα, τέτμημαι, ἐτμήθην 
[of. Lat. temnd, slight, ‘cut,’ Eng. 
a-tom, epi-tome], cut, of surgeons, 
perform operations, Υ. 8. 18. 

τέναγος, ous, τό, shoal water, 
shallows, Lat. uadum, Vii. 5. 12. 

τερεβίνθινος or τερμίνθινος, ἡ, ov 
[τερέβινθος or τέρμινθος, ἣ, turpen- 
tine-tree, cf. Eng. terebinth, tur- 
pentine |, of the turpentine-tree, tur- 
pentine, iv. 4. 18. 

τέταρτος, 7, ov [τέτταρες], fourth, 
Lat. quartus, iii. 4. 31, iv. 8. 21. 

τετρακισχίλιοι, ar, a [Trérrapes + 
χίλιοι], four thousand, Lat. quat- 
tuor milia, i. 1. 10, iii. 4. 2, vii. 7. 
53. 

τετρακόσιοι, a, a [τέτταρες + 
ἑκατόν], four hundred, Lat. quad- 
ringenti, i. 4. 3, iii. 3. 6, vi. 2. 16; 
with a collective, in sing., i. 7. 10. 

rerpapo.pla, as [τέτταρες + μοῖρα, 
portion, cf. μέρος], fourfold share, 
four times as much, Vii. 2. 36, 6. 1. 

τετραπλόος, 7, ov, Contr. TeTpa- 
πλοῦς, ἢ, οῦν [rérrapes + R. waa], 
quadruple ; subst., τὸ τετραπλοῦν, 
a fourfold share, Lat. quadruplum, 
vii. 6. 7. 


τέ-τείνω 214 


ταχύ, quickly, swiftly, speedily, 
soon, i. δ aly Mi ace, Waka ALE, AY, 
Oe) eg Ne ee eee Wan Asi ey WEL ἃ, 
4? 
quicker, faster, i. 2. 17, iii. 5. 6, iv. 
3. 32, vii. 3.45; ἣν Oarrov... θᾶττον, 
the sooner ...the suvoner, Lat. si- 


mulatque ... Statim, vi. 5.20; sup. 


τάχιστα, Vil. 6. 12, freq. used in| 


phrases meaning as quickly as pos- 


sible, as soon as one can, formed | 


(with or without the appropriate 
forms of δύναμαι) with the advs., 
ws, 1. 3. 14, ili. 4. 44, iv. 2.1, v. 7. 
3, Vil. 3. 44, dre, iv. 3. 29, vii. 8, 
j, i. 2. 4, vi. 5. 13, dry, iv. i 
ἐπειδὰν τάχιστα, AS 800N as, lili. 1 


“ 
“πὰ 

» 

Ὑ" 


No. 


9, of. iv. 6. 9, vi. 3. 21, 80 ws rd-| 


Xora, IV. 3. 9. | 
] 


ré, copulative conj., enclitic, and, 
corresponding to καί much as Lat, 
-que to et. It stands either alone, 
"δ 14, 9. 6, i. 2. 16, wil. 6, 3, or 
doubled, when it generally marks 
the balance or connexion either of 
clauses, on the one hand ...on the | 
other, i. 8. 3, lil. 2. 11, 39, 4. 35, or 
rarely of single words, iv. 5. 12; re- 
peated three and four times, vi. s. 
21, iv. 8.13; τέ... καί or re καί, 
not only ... but also, boih ... and, 
Lat. cum... tum, or untranslata- 


ble, i. 1. 5, 2. 1, 9, 3.1, 8.5, 9. 1, 
i, 2, I, Vv. 4. 21, §. 1, 13, vil. 5. 6; 


» 


" ,; ᾿ αὶ 
loure . . « 74, Bee οὕτε: Te... 86 i8 
2; comp. θᾶττον, more quickly, 


generally used where the construc- 
tion is anacoluthic, v. 5. 8, vii. 8. 
11, τέ is sometimes joined to rela- 
tive words to increase their relative 
force, see dre, οἷος, wore, ᾧτε. 
| πεθνᾶσι, τέθνατον͵, τεθνηκότα, 566 
᾿θνήσκω. 
τεθραμμένους, sce τρέφω. 
τέθριππον, τό [τέτταρες + R. ax], 
| tectir of four horses abreast, char- 
jot and four, four-in-hand, Lat. 
quadrigae, iil, 2.24. The two mid- 
'dle horses of the team pulled by 


.| the yoke (see s.v. ζυγόν); those on 


68. 


the outside by means of a single 
trace (not represented in the ac- 
companying cut), attached at one 
end to the horse’s collar and at 
the other to the ἄντυξ (see s.v. 
ἅρμα) of the chariot. For another 
illustration of the τέθριππον, see 


| 8.v. ἅρμα (No. 8). 


τείνω (Tev-), τενῶ, ἔτεινα, -τέτακα, 
rérauat, ἐτάθην [cf. Lat. tenuis, 


| drawn out, thin, tendo, stretch, Eng. 
| THIN, DANCE, tone, hiypo-tenuse}, 
| stretch, extend: intrans., exert one- 


self, hasten, rush, Lat. contendd, 
With ἄνω, πρός and acc., iv. 3. 21. 


21 


τειχίζω (τειχιδ-), τειχιῶ, ἐτεί- 
xioa, rerelxika, τετείχισμαι., ετει- 
χίσθην [τεῖχος], build a wall, for- 
tify, Vil. 2. 36. 

τεῖχος, ous, τό [ο΄ Eng. DIKE, 


pircu, biG |, wall, for defence, 1. 4. | 


4, 7. 1d, il, 4. 12, esp. city wall, 
rampart, Lat. murus, moenia, iil. 


4. 7, vi. 2. 8, vii. 2.11; of the city | 


itself, v. 5. 6, vil. 1. 15; fortress, 
stronghold, iii. 4. 10, vii. 3. 19, 5. 
8; forming the name of a place, 
see Νέον τεῖχος. 

τεκμαίρομαι (Texuap-), τεκμαροῦ- 
μαι, ἐτεκμηράμην [R. trax], settle by 
a mark, form a judgment, infer, iv. 
2. 4. 

τεκμήριον, τό [R. trax], sign, 
token, proof, evidence, Lat. argu- 
mentum, i. 9. 29, 30, ili. 2. 13. 

τέκνον, τό [R. trax], child, pl., of 
children with reference to their 
parents, Lat. Iiberi, i. 4. 8, iv. 5. 28, 
vi. 4. 8. 

τελέθω [τέλος], come into being, 
come out, become, iii, 2. 3; of sac- 
rifices, be favourable, vi. 6. ὃν. 
(Elsewhere poctic, and some editt. 
have other readings in both these 
passages.) 

τελευταῖος, a, ov [τέλος 7. last, Lat. 
ultimus, of time, iv. 1.5; of order 
in a military sense, hindimost, at 
the rear, rear, Lat. nouissimus, iv. 
2. 16, vi. 5. 10, vii. 3. 39; subst., of 
τελευταῖοι, the rear guard, iv. 1. 10, 
3. 24. 

τελευτάω, τελεύτησω, ἐτελεύτησα, 
τετελεύτηκα, ἐτελευτήθην [τέλος]. 
bring to an end; intr., Jinish, end 
one’s life, die, Lat. finio, UE Paes 
i. 's.. 4,6. 16. Shy a.) 7g (Se  ἡ. 
11; partic., τελευτῶν, used adv, like 
rédos, at last, finally, iv. 5. 16, vi. 
8, 
τελευτή, ἧς [τέλος]. end, Lat. f- 
nis, esp. euphemistically for death, 
with or without rod βίου, 1. 1. 1, 9. 
30, ii. 6, 29, iii. 2. 7. 

τελέω, τελῶ, Yarely -τελέσω, ἐτέ- 
Nera, τετέλεκα, τετέλεσμαι, ἐτελέσθην, 
[τέλος], bring to completion, Jjinish, 


4 
a" 


τειχίζω-τετραπλόος 


fulfil an obligation, pay, iii. 3. 18, 
vii. 1. 6, 6. 16. 

τέλος, ovs, τό [τέλος], comple- 
tion, fulsilment, end, issue, result, 
Lat. exitus, i. 10. 18, v. 2:9, Vi E. 
13. Phrases: τέλου, adv., at last, 
Jinally, to close, Lat. tandem, i. 9. 
6, li. 3. 26, vi. 1.55; διὰ rédovs, from 
beginning to end, constantly, vi. 6. 
11; ἤδη τέλος ἐχόντων τῶν ἱερῶν, as 
the sacrifice was nearing the end, 
vi. 5. 2. 

τέλος, ous, τό [R. trad], what is 
imposed on one, tax, outlay, task, 
office, magistracy, supreme author- 
ity, plur., τὰ τέλη, the authorities, 
magistrates, of the Spartan ephors, 
ii. 6.4. Phrase: rots οἴκοι τέλεσι, 
the home government, Vii. 1. 54. 

τέμαχος, ous, τό (cf. Téuvw], slice, 
of fish, v. 4. 28. 

Τεμενίτης, see Tnevirns. 

τέμνω {τεμ-; THE-), TEND, ἔτεμον OF 
ἔταμον, -τέτμηκα, τέτμημαι, ἐτμήθην 
[ΩΓ Lat. temnd, slight, ‘cut,’ Eng. 
a-tom, epi-tome], cut, of surgeons, 
perform operations, v. 8. 18. 

τέναγος, ous, τό, shoal water, 
shallows, Lat. wadum, Vil. 5. 12. 

τερεβίνθινος or τερμίνθινος, ἡ, ον 
[τερέβινθος or τέρμινθος, ἣν turpen- 
tine-tree, cf. Kung. terebinth, tur- 
pentine |, of the turpentine-tree, tur- 
pentine, iv. 4. 18. 

τέταρτος, 7, ov [τέτταρες]. fourth, 
Lat. quartus, iii. 4. 31, iv. 8. 21. 

τετρακισχίλιοι, αι, a [τέτταρες + 
χίλιοι], four thousand, Lat. quat- 
tuor milia, i. 1. 10, ili. 4. 2, Vil. 7. 
55. 

τετρακόσιοι, a, a [τέτταρες + 
ἑκατόν]. four hundred, Lat. quad- 
ringenti, i. 4. 3, iii. 3. 6, vi. 2. 16; 
with a collective, in sing., i. 7. 10. 

τετραμοιρία, as [τέτταρες + μοῖρα, 
portion, cf. μέρος}, fourfold share, 
Jour times as much, Vii. 2. 36, 6. 1. 

τετραπλόος, ἡ: ov, Contr. TeTpa- 
πλοῦς, 9, oov [τέτταρες + R. waa], 
quadruple ; subst., τὸ τετραπλοῦν, 
a fourfold share, Lat. quadruplum, 
vii. 6. 7. 


τετταράκοντα- Τίγρης 2 


τετταράκοντα, indecl. [τέτταρες 
+ εἴκοσι], forty, Lat. quadraginta, 
i, 5. 13, il. 2.7, vi. 5. 4. 

τέτταρες, a [τέτταρες], four, Lat. 
quattuor, i. 2. 12, το. 1, ii. 4. 25, 
vil, 7. 12. 

TevOpavia, as, Teuthrania, a dis- 
trict in the southwestern part of 
Mysia about the Caicus, contain- 
ing Pergamus, ii. 1. 3, vii. 8. 17. 

τεύξεσθε, see τυγχάνω. 

τεῦχος, ους, τό [R. tax], tool; 
rarely in prose, receptacle, jar, 
chest, Vv. 4. 28, vii. 5. 14. 

τεχνάζω (rexvad-) [R. rax], use 
art, employ cunning, deal subtly, 
vii. 6. 16. 

τέχνη, ns [R. rax], art, craft, or 
more generally, means, ways, iv. 5. 

16, vii. 2. 8. 

τεχνικῶς, adv. [R. trax], in a 
skilful manner; τεχνικῶς πως, in 
an artful sort of way, vi. 1. 5. 

τέως, adv., the while, so long, 
meanwhile, as τέως μὲν αὐτοὺς dva- 
Balvovras, as long as they were as- 
cending, iv. 2. 12, ef. v. 4. 16, vi. 3. 
5; Sor a time, up to this time, hith- 
erto, Vii. 5. 8, 13, 6. 29, 7. 55. 

τῇ, dat. fem. of the art. as adv., 
here, used in the phrases, τῇ μὲν 

«+7 δέ, on the one hand or 
side ...on the other, in some re- 
specits ...tn others, iii. 1. 12, iv. 8. 
10, sO τῇ μὲν... ὁπότε δέ, Vi. 1. 20 
(see πῃ). 

τῇδε, See ὅδε, fin. 

τήκω (τακ-), -τήξω, -érnta, ré- 
τηκα, ἐτάχθην and ἐτάκην [cf. Lat. 
tabes, decay, Eng. THaw]), melt, 
intr., thaw, melt, of snow, iv. 5. 15. 

Τηλεβόᾶς, ov or a, the Teleboas, 
a branch of the Euphrates, in Ar- 
menia, west of Lake Thospitis, iv. 
4. 3. 

Τημενίτης, ov, a Temenian, a 
native of Temenium, iv. 4. 15, a 
town in Argolis; others read Τεμε- 
virns, of Temenus, part of Syra- 
cuse; others again, Tnuvtrys, of 
Temnus, in Aeolis, on the Her- 


16 


τήμερον, adv. [Epic σήμερον, σ- 
or t-, demonstrative pronominal 
prefix, + ἡμέρα, to-day, Lat. hodié, 
1. 9. 26, iv. 6.8. Phrase: τὴν τή- 
~~ ἡμέρᾶν, the present day, iv. 

Τημνίτης, see Τημενέτης. 
τηνικαῦτα, adv., at that time, 
just then, answering to ἡνίκα and 
ed, δ. 

Τήρης, ovs, ὁ, Teres, founder of 
ihe kingdom of the Odrysae, vii. 2. 

TyplBatos, see Τιρίβαζος. 

τιᾶρᾶ, as [cf. Eng. tiara], tiara, 
a headdress worn by the Persians, 


but especially the upright tiara, 
the peculiar badge of the Great 
King, ii. 5. 23. 

τιᾶροειδής, ἐς [ridpa + R. Fd], 
tiara-shaped, v. 4. 13. 

_ TrBapnvol, οἱ, the Tibaréni, an 
independent tribe in Pontus on the 
Black Sea, extending from the 
Chalybes to CotyOra, v. 5. 2, vii. 8. 
25. 

Τίγρης, nros [old Pers. Tigra, 
the pointed, tigri, arrow, applied to 
the river from its rapid course, 
Syrian Diglat, Diklat, Hebrew 
Chiddekel, the Hiddekel of Daniel 
x. 4], the Tigris, a great river 
formed by streams from Mt. Tau- 


mus, 


rus in Armenia and flowing south- 


Ψ 
Υ͂ 


217 τίθημι-τίς 


easterly to its junction with the 
Euphrates in Babylonia, i. 7. 15, ii. 
2. 3, 4. 13, iii. 4. 6, iv. 1. 2, 4. 3. 

τίθημι (θε-), θήσω, ἔθηκα, τέθεικα, 
τέθειμαι, ἐτέθην, 2 aor. mid. ἐθέμην 
[R. θε7.. ρει, set, place, with κατά 
and acc., vii. 3. 22; get ready, in- 
stitute, i. 2. 10; mid., place for 
oneself, arrange, With ἐπί and acc., 
vii. 3. 23. Esp. in the military 
phrase θέσθαι τὰ ὅπλα, prop. either 
order arms, i.e. stand with one end 
of the shield and spear resting on 
the ground, i. 5. 14 (ef. i. 5. 18), 6. 
4, ii. 2. 8, iv. 2. 16, 3.26, or ground 
arms, i.e. lay shield and spear on 
the ground in front of one, i. Io. 
16, iv. 3. 17, v. 2. 8, 19, vil. 1. 22 
(cf. vii. 1. 24); but sometimes ap- 
pear or get under arms, take up a 
military position, ii. 2. 21, v. 4. 11, 
and in i. 5. 17, κατὰ χώρᾶν ἔθεντο 
τὰ ὅπλα, they moved back to quar- 
ters. 

Τιμᾶσίων, wos, ὁ, Timasion, of 
Dardanus in the Troad, who had 
served with Clearchus and Der- 
cylidas against Pharnabazus, v. 6. 
24. Being in exile, v. 6. 23, he 
joined the army of Cyrus and was 
elected to succeed Clearchus, iii. 1. 
47. With Xenophon he was the 
youngest of the generals, iii. 2. 37. 
He engaged in designs against Xen- 
ophon, v. 6. 21 ff., but cf. vii. 5. 10. 
See also vi. 3. 14, 5. 28, vii. 1. 40, 2. 
2 2S. 

Tipdw, τιμήσω, etc. [R. τι], value, 
esteem, honour, of persons, i. 3. 3, 
9. 14, ii. 6. 21, iii. 2. 5, v. 5. 14, vii. 
3. 29. 

τιμή, fs [R. τι], value, worth, 
price, vii. 5. 2, 8. 6; of persons, 
honour, esteem, i. 9. 29, ii. 1. 17, iii. 
1. 37, vi. 1. 20, vii. 3. 28. 

Τιμησίθεος, ὁ, Timesitheus, of 
Trapezus, πρόξενος of the Mos- 
synoeci, and interpreter between 
them and the Greeks, v. 4. 2 ff. 

τίμιος, ἃ, ον [R. τι], of things, 
valuable, precious, i. 2. 27; οὗ per- 
sons, honoured, esteemed, i. 3. 6. 


Tipwpéo, τιμωρήσω, etc. [R. T+ 
R. 2 Fep], help, avenge, mid., take 
vengeance on, punish, i. 9. 18, ν. 4. 
6, vii. 6. 7, 7. 17; with acc. of pers. 
and gen. of thing, vii. 1. 25, 4. 23; 
with ὑπέρ and gen., for the sake of, 
i. 3.4; pass., be punished, ii. 5. 27, 
6. 29. 

τιμωρία, as [R. + R.°2 Fep], 
help, vengeance, hence, punishment, 
with παρά and gen., ii. 6. 14. 

Τιρίβαζος or TyplBafos, ὁ, Tiri- 
bazus, governor of Western Arme- 
nia in the satrapy of Orontas, iv. 4. 
4, He was a favourite of Arta- 
xerxes (ibid.), and made a treaty 
with the Cyréans, which he broke, 
iv. 4.6, 18,21. Transferred to the 
west of Asia, he was instrumental 
in promoting the Peace of Antal- 
cidas. He was afterwards killed 
while plotting to dethrone his mas- 
ter. | 

τὶς, τὶ, gen. τινός, indef. pron., 
enclitic, a, an, any, some, a sort of, 
a kind of, a certain, Lat. quis, i. 2. 
20, 5. 8, 8. 8, iii. 1. 4, 3. 18, 4. 23, 
iv. 1. 17; subst., somebody, any- 
body, something, anything, pl., 
some, i. 8. 18, 9. 8, ii. 1. 9, iii. 4. 29, 
iv. 1. 14, v. 1. 8, 7. 10, 8. 25; esp. 
denoting a person whom one can 
but does not name, i. 4. 12, iii. 3. 
3, γ. 6. 33; one, pl., they, people, 
men, i. 5. 8, 9. 8, 11, iii. 3. 18, 5. 17, 
vii. 4. 8. With a limiting, modify- 
ing, or restrictive force, as in the 
phrases: οἱ δέ τινες, some few, V. 7. 
16; μία τις, any single one, ii. 1. 
19, cf. vi. 6. 20; σχεδόν τι, pretty 
nearly, Vi. 4. 20; πόση τις, about 
how large, ii. 4. 21, ο΄. vi. 5. 20; 
ὁποῖόν τι, whatsoever, what sort of 
a, fi. 2, 2, iii, 1. 18, of. v.56. 10; 
τοιαύτη tis, something of this sort, 
v. 8. 7; see also iv. 8. 26, v. 1. 6, 8. 
11, vi. 1. 26, vii. 6. 24. 

τίς, τί, gen. τίνος, interr. pron., 
who? which? what? Lat. quis, in 
dir. and indir. questions, i. 4. 13, 

14, ii. 1. 11, 2. 10, iii. 2. 16, 36, iv. 
8. 5, Vi. 3. 23, vii. 2. 26 ; what kind 


Τισσαφέρνης- Τολμίδης 218 


of, vii. 6. 4; neut. as adv., τί, why? 
what for? Lat. quid, ii. 4. 3, 5. 22, 
iii, 4. 39, vi. 3. 25. Phrases: ἐκ 
τίνος, for what reason, on what 
grounds? v. 8.4; ri γάρ, τί οὖν, 
what then? Lat. quid enim? v. 7. 
10, 8. 11. 

Τισσαφέρνης, ovs, ὁ, Tissapher- 
nes, a famous Persian, as satrap 
of Lydia and Caria well known 
in Greece for the double part he 
played during the Peloponnesian 
war, now favouring Sparta and 
now Athens, but always extend- 
ing the Persian power. He be- 
came the jealous enemy of Cyrus 
the Younger on the latter’s ap- 
pointment to the government of 
Lydia in 407 n.c., i. 1. 2, 3, 2. 4. 
He commanded a quarter of the 
Persian army, i. 7. 12, and distin- 
guished himself at Cunaxa, i. 10. 
5 ff. After the death of Cyrus 
he pursued a course of treachery 
towards the Cyréans, ii. 3. 17 ff., 4. 
1, 5. 2 ff., iii. 4. 2, and entrapped 
their generals, ii. 5. 31 ff., iii. 2. 4. 
He succeeded to the posts held by 
Cyrus, ii. 5. 11, but in endeavour- 
ing to take possession of Ionia, 
which had revolted from him to 
Cyrus, i. 1. 6, 7, 9. 9, he was op- 
posed by the Spartans under Thi- 
bron, vii. 6. 1, 7, 8. 24. Several 
campaigns followed, disastrous to 
the Persians, until Tissaphernes, 
through the influence of Parysa- 
tis, mother of Cyrus, was put to 
death. 

τιτρώσκω (τρο-), τρώσω, ἔτρωσα, 
τέτρωμαι, ἐτρώθην [ς΄ τραῦμα], 
wound, inflict wounds, Lat. uol- 
nero, abs. or with acc., ii. 2. 14, iii. 
3. 7,4. 26, iv. 5. 38, v. 2 17, vi, 2. 
8, vii. 8.19; with διά and gen. or 
εἰς and acc., i. 8. 26, ii. 5. 33. 

τλήμων, ov, gen. ovos [R. Tad], 


enduring, suffering, wretched, iii. | 


1. 29. 


rol, intensive particle, post-posi- 


tive and enclitic, in truth, verily, 
surely, of a certainty, often best 


expressed by emphasis in English, 
li. 1. 19, 5. 19, iii. 1. 18, 37, v. 5. 
24, 6. 34. 

τοιγαροῦν, inferential conj. [τοί + 
γάρ + οὖν), therefore, accordingly, 
consequently, i. 9. 9, 15, 18, ii. 6. 
20, v. 8. 22. 

τοίνυν, inferential conj., post- 
positive [τοί- νύν], therefore, ac- 
cordingly, then, further, also, ii. 5. 
41, iii. 2. 30, v. x. 2, vii, 5. ὦ 10 
esp. With imvs., ii. 1. 22, 3. 5, iii. 1. 
36, iv. 8. 5. Phrases: πρῶτον μὲν 
τοίνυν, well then, first, iii. 2.27; μὴ 
τοίνυν μηδέ, nay then not even, vii. 
6. 19. 

τοιόσδε, τοιάδε, τοιόνδε, dem. 
pron. [τοῖος, such, + -δε], such as 
this, of this kind, referring to what 
follows, as follows, v. 4. 31; esp. 
ἔλεξε τοιάδε, he spoke as JSollows, i. 
3. By 9, of. 7. 2. 

τοιοῦτος, τοιαύτη, τοιοῦτον, dem. 
pron., 80 constituted, of such a sort, 
kind, nature, character or position, 
such, Lat. talis, referring to what 
precedes, i. 3. 14, ii. 1. 16, 6. 8, iii. 
1. 44, 2. 13, v. 7. 26, vii. 6. 35. 
Phrases: ἐν τοιούτῳ τοῦ κινδύνου, at 
such a critical point of danger, i. 7. 
5; τοιοῦτον οὐδέν, nothing of the 
sort, li. 5.5; τούτων τοιούτων ὄντων, 
such being the case, ii. 5. 12; τοι- 
οὕτων ἡμῖν eis φιλίαν ὑπαρχόντων, 
when we have such strong grounds 
Jor friendship, ii. 5. 24; εἰς τὰ τοι- 
aira, for services of this sort, iv. 1. 
28; ἐν τῷ τοιούτῳ, at such a junc- 
ture, v. 8. 20. 

τοῖχος, ὁ [ε΄. τεῖχος], wall, of a 
building, vii. 8. 14. 

τολμάω, τολμήσω, etc. [R. Tad], 
have the heart, have the courage, 
undertake, Lat. sustined, iii. 2. 
32, iv. 4. 12; venture, risk, dare, 
Lat. auded, ii. 2. 12, 3. 5, iii. 2. Pi. 


v. 7-19; in a bad sense, have the 
audacity or effrontery, vi. 4. 14, vii. 
7. 46. 

Τολμίδης, ov, Tolmides, herald 
of the Greek army, an Eléan, ii. 2. 
20, iii. 1. 46, v. 2. 18. 


219 τόξευμα-Τρανίψαι 


τόξευμα, ατος, τό [R. rax], arrow, 
Lat. sagitta, i. 8. 19, iii. 4. 17, iv. 
2. 28, v. 2. 14, vir. 8.18. For illus- 
trations, see 8.0. τόξον and gapérpa. 

τοξεύω, érédtevoa, τετόξευμαι, éro- 
ξεύθην [R.-rax], shoot with a bow, 
use one’s bow, shoot arrows, abs., | 
lii, 3. 7, 10, 4. 14, iv. 1. 16, 2. 28; | 
pass., be hit with an arrow, be| 
shot, abs. or with διά and eis, i. 8. | 
20, iv. 1. 18. 

τοξικός, ἡ, dv [R. rax], belong- 
ing to the bow ; subst., ἡ τοξική (80. 
τέχνη), archery, i. 9. 5. 

τόξον, τό [R. rax], bow, Lat. ar- 
cus, lil. 3. 15, 4. 17, iv. 2. 27, 28, 4. 


ete 


ταστής), they were still unimpor- 
tant relatively to the peltasts and 
hoplites (see s.v. γυμνής). The 
bowmen among the barbarians 
whom the Ten Thousand encoun- 
tered were, on the contrary, im- 
portant and formidable, i. 8. 9, iii. 
3. 6, 4. 2 (ef..17), 26. 

τόπος, ὁ [cf. Eng. topic, topo- 
graphy, U-top-ian), place, spot, Lat. 
locus, Υ. 7. 16, vii. 4. 12; region, 
district, quarter, Lat. regio, i. 5. 1, 
iv. 4. 4. 

τοσόσδε, τοσήδε, τοσόνδε, dem. 
pron. [τόσος, so great, + -de], so 
many, 80 numerous, Vi. 5. 19, but 
in ii. 4. 4 the context shows that 
τοσοίδε means so few. 

τοσοῦτος, τοσαύτη, τοσοῦτον, dem. 
pron., so much, of size, number, 
amount, and time, so great or 
large, il. 5. 18, iii. 4. 37, 5. 7, iv. 1. 
20, 8. 12; so long, i. 9. 11; so 
many, li. 1. 16, iii. 1. 386; τοσούτῳ 
with comps., so much, i. 5.9; neut. 
as adv. τοσοῦτον, so far, in so far, 
only so much, i. 8. 13, iii. 1. 45; 
with εἶπε, referring either to what 
precedes or what follows, thus 
much, so much only, i. 3. 15, ii. 1. 
9, 5. 16. 

τότε, adv., at that time, then, i. 1. 
6, 4. 18, 6. 10, ii. 6. 5, iii. 2. 15, iv. 


16. For additional illustrations, 
see 8.v. veupd and dapérpa. 

τοξότης, ov [R. trax], bowman, 
archer, Lat. sagittarius, without 
defensive armour except on special 
occasions (the Cretans mentioned 
in vy. 2.29 were probably bowmen), 
and carrying only his bow and 
quiver. ‘The τοξόται were a divis- 
ion of the light-armed troops, iii. 
4. 26, iv. 3. 27, 28, 8. 15, v. 2. 12, 
4. 22, 6. 15, vi. 3. 7, being chiefly 
Cretans and Scythians, i. 2. 9, iii. 
4.15, and while of greater numbers 
than the σφενδονῆται and than the 
ἀκοντισταί as such (see 8.0. πελ- 


5. 35, v. 6. 19. Phrases: τῇ τότε 
ἀκροβολίσει, the late skirnvish, iii. 4. 
8; τῶν τότε, the (heralds of) that 
time, ii. 2. 20. 
τοτέ, adv., at times, in the phrase 
τοτὲ μέν... τοτὲ δέ, now... then, 
at one time... at another, vi. 1. 9. 
τράγημα, aros, τό [cf. τρωκτός], 
dainties for eating, delicacies, sweet- 
meats, esp. dried fruits, eaten at 
dessert, Lat. belldria, ii. 3. 15, v. 
3.9, 

Τράλλεις, εων, οἱ, Tralles, a city 
in the northern part of Caria, in 
the plain of the Maeander, i. 4. 8. 
(Aidin.) 

Τρανίψαι, οἱ, the .Tranipsae, a 
tribe in the eastern part of Thrace, 
Vii. 2. 32. 


τράπεζα, ns [τέτταρες + R. ed], 
prop. table with four legs, dining- 
table, Lat. ménsa, iv. 5. 31, vii. 2. 
33 (see ἀποβλέπων), 3.22. But the 
τράπεζα might have only three legs, 
two at one end and one at the cen- 
tre of the other (see No. 73). It 
was low, and had a rectangular top. 
See also s.v. κλένη. 

Τραπεζούντιος, ὁ [Tparefois], a 
Trapezuntian, native of Trapezus, 
iv. 8.23, v. 1. 11, 4. 2, 5. 10, vi. 6. 22. 

Τραπεζοῦς, οὖντος, ἡ, Trapezus, 
a Greek city in the northeastern 
part of Pontus, lying on a high 
table-shaped plateau on the coast, 
a colony of Sindpe, iv. 8. 22, and 
paying tribute to it, v. 5. 10. It 
was an important commercial town 
as early as when the Ten Thousand 
Greeks found hospitality there, v. 
1. 1, 2. 28, 5. 14, vi. 6. 5; it was 
favoured by the Romans, who 
made it the capital of Pontus Cap- 
padocius; and finally it became 
the seat of the Empire established 
by the Comnéni. It was indepen- 
dent until its capture by the Turks 
in 1462 a.v. (Trebizond, Tara- 
buzim.) 

τράποιτο, See Tpérw. 

τραῦμα, aros, τό [cf. τιτρώσκωΊ, 
wound, hurt, Lat. uolnus, i. 8. 26, 
iv. 6. 10. 

τράχηλος, ὁ, neck, throat, Lat. 
collum, of men, i. 5. 8, vii. 4. 9. 

Tpaxvs, εἴα, v[cf. Eng. trachea], 
rugged, rcugh, Lat. asper, iv. 3. 
6; of the voice, harsh, ii. 6. 9. 
Phrase: ἡ rpaxeta (sc. γῆ), hard 
ground, uneven country, iv. 6. 
12. 

τρεῖς, τρία, gen. τριῶν [τρεῖς], 
three, Lat. trés, i. 1. 10, 4. 19, 8. 12, 
iv. 4. 3, Vv. 6. 9, Vii. 5. 2. 

τρέπω, τρέψω, ἔτρεψα and érpa- 
πον, τέτροφα and τέτραφα, τέτραμ- 
μαι, ἐτρέφθην and ἐτράπην (cf. Lat. 
torquéo, turn, twist, Eng. THREAD, 
THRONG, THROW], turn, direct, di- 
vert, iii. 1. 41; esp. as a military 
phrase, rout, put to flight, with eis 


τράπεζα-τριβή 220 


φυγήν, Lat. in fugam uertd, i. 8. 
24, cf. v. 4. 23; mid. and pass. in- 
trans., turn, set one’s face towards, 
have recourse to, indulge in, turn 
aside, abs., or with πρός or ἐπί and 
ace., ii. 6. 5, iii. 5. 13, iv. 5. 30, vi. 
1. 19, vii. 1. 18; take flight, abs. or 
with guyz, iv. 8. 19, v. 4. 24; of 
places, be turned towards, look in 
a certain direction, Lat. wergd, with 
πρός and acc., iii. 5. 15; mid. trans., 
turn one’s enemy, rout, put to flight, 
¥.' a. 16, vi. 25:5. 

τρέφω, θρέψω, ἔθρεψα, τέτροφα, 


ιτέθραμμαι, ἐτρέφθην and ἐτράφην, 


nurture, nourish, in their widest 
sense, support, maintain, feed, of 
men and animals, Lat. alo, v. 1. 
12, 3.11, 4.26; pass., be supported 
or maintained, subsist, i. 1. 9, Vi. 5. 
20, vii. 4. 11; be reared or raised, 
of men and animals, iii. 2. 13, iv. 
5. 24; τεθραμμένους, fed up, fat- 
tened, V. 4. 32. 

τρέχω (rpex-, Spau-), δραμοῦμαι, 
ἔδραμον, -dedpdunxa, -dedpdunuat,, 
[ef. δρόμος}, run, Lat. currd, i. 5. 
2, iv. 8. 26, vii. 3. 45; with epi 
and gen., and εἰς or ἐπί and acc., 
i. 5. 8, iv. 3. 33, vi. 4. 27. (Fut. 
-θρέξομαι, aor. -€0peta, poetic and 
rare. ) 

τρέω, ἔτρεσα [ cf. Lat. tremd, shake, 
terred, frighten], tremble, quake, 
with acc., flee from for fear, i. 9. 6. 
(Rare in prose.) 

τρία, see τρεῖς. 

τριάκοντα, indecl. [τρεῖς + εἴ- 
κοσι], thirty, Lat. triginta, i. 2. 9, 
ii. 3. 12, iv. 6. 6, vii. 3. 7. 

τριᾶκόντορος, ἡ [τρεῖς + εἴκοσι 
+R. ερ], sc. vais, thirty-oared ship, 
v. 1, 16, vii, 2. 8. See ἂν. revry- 
κόντορος. 

τριάκόσιοι, αἱ, a [τρεῖς + ἑκα- 
τόν], three hundred, Lat. trecenti, 
κα 2, & αὶ 36, tl. 4. ἢ vi ἃ 
16. 

τριβή, fis [cf. rptBw, rub, τρίβος, 
ἡ, foot-path), a rubbing, of troops, 
constant practice, service, Lat. usus, 
v. 6. 15. 


221 τριήρης-τρίπους 


τριήρης, ovs, ἡ [τρεῖς + R. ep], 
sc. vaus, trireme, galley, man-of- 
war (see 8.0. vais), often distin- 
guished from the πλοῖον (q.v.), i. 
2, 21, 4. 8, v. 1. 4, vi. 4. 18, 6. 1, 
δι vii. 1. 21, 2. 12 (ef. 18), 3 3. 
The trireme had reached its most 
perfect form in the time of Xeno- 
phon. It was distinguished from 
the war vessels that preceded it in 
the development of shipbuilding 
by the number of its banks of 
oars. The πεντηκόντορος (q.v.) had 
a single bank of oars on each side, 
the bireme had two banks on each 
side ranged one above the other, 
the trireme, as the name implies, 
had three. We have unfortunately 
no representations of triremes on 
Greek vases, but from inscriptions 
and from passages in ancient an- 
thors it is established that the tri- 
reme was long and narrow, that 
she was a ram, that she was pro- 
pelled in action by rowers ranged 
obliquely one above another in 
banks, and that she was also pro- 
vided with two masts and with 
sails for voyaging. The position 
of the rowers, of whom it has been 
estimated there were 174 (51 in 
each of the highest banks, 29 in 
each of the middle banks, and 27 
in each of the lowest banks) was 
probably that represented in the 
accompanying cut. According to 
this represen- 
tation each 
rower was al- 
lowed 8 square 
feet of space, 
but the oblique 
arrangement 
of the rowers 
above one an- 
other, the man 
in the highest bank being nearest 


‘the stern, made the perpendicular 


distance occupied by the three 
rowers in any oblique range only 
8 feet. On the stroke the head 
and shoulders of the rower came 


back between the legs of the man 
next above and behind him, on 
the recover he came to an upright 
position. 

The trireme was a wooden ves- 
sel, and when not in commission 
was hauled out of the water and 
housed, vii. 1.19, 27. Some con- 
clusions about the speed of the 
trireme can be gathered from vi. 
4. 2, where it is stated that the 
distance from Byzantium to Hera- 
cléa could be made by a trireme 
under oars (κώπαις) in a day, but 
that it was a very long day’s voy- 
age. This is a distance of about 
150 nautical miles. If the day is 
reckoned at 15 hours, we get a 
pace of 10 knots an hour; but 
there is nothing in the language in 
the passage cited to preclude the 
supposition that the vessel had 
also set her sails. Since the tri- 
reme was ἃ ram, the number of 
mariners or fighting men on board 
was small. In action her mancu- 
vres were performed with great 
skill, the chief responsibility rest- 
ing on the κυβερνήτης (q.v.). The 
total crew, including rowers, ma- 
rines, sailors, and officers, is esti- 
mated at 220. 

tpinptrns, ov [τρεῖς + ἢ. ep], 
man-of-war’s man, vi. 6. 7. 

τρίπηχυς, v, [τρεῖς -- πῆχυς], of 
three cubits, three cubits long, iv. 
2. 28. 

τριπλάσιος, a, ov [tpeis+ R. 
wa], threefold, three times as 
large, Lat. triplus, vii. 4. 21. 

τρίπλεθρος, ov [τρεῖς + R. wAa], 
of three plethra, three plethra wide, 
v. 6. 9. 

τρίπους, ουν, gen. modos [tTpets + 
R. wed], three-footed; as subst., tri- 
pod, any article of furniture sup- 
ported on three feet, as the metal 
frame on which the pot was set 
for boiling (see the illustration s.v. 
ἀμφορεύς), but commonly a table 
with three legs, vii. 3.21 (see s.v. 
τράπεζα). The three-legged table 


τρίς-τρόπαιον 222 


had a round top, and the legs were 
often handsomely carved. The 
material of which 
it was made was 
commonly wood, 
It was used as a 
support for vessels 
or other articles of 
household use, as 
in the accompany- 
ing cut (No. 72) 
where ἃ κρᾶτήρ 
rests upon the tri- 
pod; or like the nage 
τράπεζα (see No. & ry ἊΝ 
73) it might be 

ida at meals, Ἂν τ 
being set in front of the couch of 
the feaster with the articles of food 
upon it. 


τρισχίλιοι, ar, a [τρεῖς - χίλιοι, 
three thousand, i. 6. 4, v. 6. 18, Vi. 
3, ἢ. 
τριταῖος, a, ον [τρεῖς], on the 
third day, of persons, v. 3. 2. 
τρίτος, 7, ov [τρεῖς], third, Lat. 
tertius, i. 7. 1, iil. 4. 28, iv. 2. 14, 
v. 6. 9; adv., τὸ τρίτον, the third 
time, 1. 6. 8. Phrases: τῇ τρίτῃ 
(sc. ἡμέρᾳ), on the third day, i. 7. 
20, iv. 8. 21; ἐπὶ τῷ τρίτῳ, at the 
third signal, ii. 2. 4. 
τρίχα, adv. [τρεῖς], threefold, in 
three divisions, vi. 2. 16. 
τριχῇ, adv. [τρεῖς], threefold, in 
three divisions, iv. 8. 15. 
tplxivos, 7, ov [ Aplé, τριχός, hair, 
ef. Eng. trichina), from or of hair, 
made of hair, iv. 8. 3. 
τριχοίνικος, ov [τρεῖς + χοῖνιξ], 
holding or measur- 
ing three choenices, 
Vii. 3.28. See s.v. 
Hy ™~ ry 
=" χοῖνιξ. 
ci τρόπαιον, τό [τρο- 
m7, cf. Eng. tro- 
phy |, trophy, a me- 
morial of victory 
erected on the field 
of battle where the 
enemy had turned 
(hence the name), 
or, in case of a vic- 


tory gained at sea,’ 


τρίς, adv. [τρεῖς], three times, 
Lat. ter. Phrase: εἰς τρίς, up to 
three times, even thrice, vi. 4. 16, 19. 

τρισάσμενος, ἡ, ov [τρεῖς + R. 
a8], thrice glad, very gladly, iii. 2. 
24. 

τρισκαίδεκα, indecl. [rpets+ 
δέκα], thirteen, Lat. tredecim, i. 
5. 5. 

τρισμύριοι, αι, a [τρεῖς + μύριοι], 
thirty thousand, vii. 8. 26. 


on the nearest land. 
It consisted of the 
arms and spoils of 
the vanquished sus- 
pended on_ the 
lopped trunk of a 
tree or on a post, iv. 6. 27, vi. 5. 32. 
If it commemorated a naval victory, 
it was ornamented with the beak of 
one of the captured ships. Trophies 
were sometimes of more enduring 
form; arms taken in battle, esp. 
shields, were carried home and pre- 


served in the temples of the state- 


as ἃ perpetual memorial, iii. 2. 13. 
Phrase: τρόπαια βαρβάρων, memo- 
rials of victory over barbarians, 
vii. 6. 36. 


223 τροπή-ὑγρότης 


τροπή, ἧς [τρέπω], a turning of 
the enemy, rout, defeat, i. 8. 28, 
iv. 8. 21. 

τρόπος, ὁ [τρέπω, cf. Eng. trope, 
tropic], turn, way, manner, Lat. 
modus ; fashion, sort, kind, with 
gen., Vi. 1.8; freq. adv. in dat. or 
aCC., AS τῷ αὐτῷ τρόπῳ, in the same 
way, iv. 2. 13, acc., vi. 5. 6, cf. i. 1. 
9, ii. 5. 20, iii. 4. 8, 23; τρόπῳ τινὶ, 
somehow, after a fashion, ii. 2. 17; 
of persons, ways, character, man- 
ner, custom, i. 2. 11, 9. 22, ii. 6. 8, 
vil, 4. 8, 17, Phrases: ἐκ παντὸς 
τρόπου, any way one can, at any 
rate, no matter how, iii. 1. 43, vii. 
7. 41; κατὰ πάντα τρόπον, by all 
means, vi. 6. 30. 

τροφή, fs [τρέφω, cf. Eng. a-tro- 
phy |, support, maintenance, means 
of subsistence, i. 1. 9, v. 6. 32, vii. 
3. 8. 

τροχάζω (τροχαδ-) [τροχός, ὁ, 
wheel, cf. τρέχω, Eng. trochee, 
truck |, run along, run quickly, run 
JSorward, vii. 3. 46. 

τρυπάω, τετρύπημαι [τρύπη, 
hole], bore, pierce. Phrase: τὰ 
ὦτα τετρυπημένον, with his ears 
bored, iii. 1. 31. 

Tpwds, δος, ἡ [Tpola, Troy], 
Troas, the Troad, the country in 
the northwestern part of Asia 
Minor between the Hellespont and 
the Gulf of Adramyttium, v. 6. 23, 
24, vil. 8. 7. The chief city was 
Troia or Ilium. 

τρωκτός, 4, dv [verbal of τρώγω, 
gnaw, nibble, cf. Eng. troglo-dyte, 
trout], to be eaten, edible, esp. 
without cooking; hence subst., ra 
τρωκτά, fruits eaten at dessert, v. 
3. 12. 

τρωτός, ἡ, dv [verbal of τιτρώ- 
oxw]|, to be wounded, vulnerable, 
iii. x, 23. 

τυγχάνω (τυχ-, Tevx-), τεύξομαι, 
ἔτυχον, τετύχηκα tak], hit, 
with gen., iii. 2. 19, hence, attain, 
reach, acquire, gain, obtain, Lat. 
cOnsequor, abs. or with gen., i. 4. 
15, 9. 29, ii. 6. 18, iii. 1. 26, v. 7. 


33, vi. 1. 26, vii. 1. 30; rarely with 
acc., V. 6. 28, vi. 6.32; jind, meet, 
of death, with gen., ii. 6. 29, iii. 
2.7; intr. with a partic. containing 
the leading idea, happen, chance, 
as παρὼν ἐτύγχανε, he happened to 
be there, i. 1. 2, cf. 5. 8, 9. 31, ii. 
2. 14, 3. 2, ili. 2. 10, Iv. 1. 24, 8. 26, 
Vv. 3. 8, Vi. 5. 22, vii. 3. 29; some- 
times the partic. is omitted, ii. 2. 
17, iii. 1. 3, v. 4. 34. Phrases: 
ὁποίων τινῶν ἡμῶν ἔτυχον, what sort 
of people they found us to be, v. 
5. 15; τυχόν, acc. abs., perhaps, 
perchance, vi. τ. 20. 

Τυραῖον, Τυριάειον, or Τυριαῖον, 
τό, Tyriaeum, a city in southern 
Phrygia, i. 2. 14 (Iighfin). 

tupés, ὁ [ cf. Eng. but-ter], cheese, 
pl., ii. 4. 28. 

τύρσις, ws, ἡ [cf. Lat. turris, 
tower], tower, turret, iv. 4. 2, v. 2. 
5, vii. 2. 21, 8. 12. 

τύχη, ns [R. tax], luck, fortune, 
Lat. fortuna, ii. 2, 13, v. 2. 25. 

τυχών, See τυγχάνω. 


x. 


, ὑβρίζω (ὑβριδ-), ὑβριῶ, ὕβρισα, 
ὑβρικα, ὕβρισμαι, ὑβρίσθην [ὑπέρ], 
treat with insolence, abuse, out- 
rage, insult, vi. 4. 2; be insolent, 
be wantonly abusive, v. 8.1, 3, 22; 
pass., be abused, maltreated or 
outrageously handled, iii. 1. 13, 29. 
ὕβρις, ews, ἡ [ὑπέρ], insolence, 
arrogance, wantonness, wanton in- 
solence, ili. 1. 21, v. 5. 16, 8. 3, 19. 
ὑβριστότερος, a, ov, comp. of 
ὑβριστής, insolent, sup. ὑβριστότα- 
tos [ὑπέρ], more or most insolent, 
audacious or wanton, v. 8. 3, 22. 
ὑγιαίνω (ὑγιαν-), ὑγίᾶνα [ὑγιής, 
healthy, cf. Eng. hygiene], be in 
health, be well, be sound, iv. 5. 18. 
ὑγρότης, nros, ἡ [ὑγρός, wet, root 
Fvy, cf. Lat. umidus, moist, udus, 
wet, Eng. WAKE (of a ship), wAsH, 
ox ], wetness, pliability, suppleness, 
v. 8. 15. 


ὑδροφορέω- ὑπέρ 


ὑδροφορέω [ὕδωρ + R. hep], carry | 
water, Iv. 5. 9. 

ὑδροφόρος, ov [ὕδωρ +R. dep], 
carrying water; subst., αἱ ὑδρο- 
φόροι, water-carriers, iv. 5. 10. 

ὕδωρ, aros, τό [cf. Lat. unda, 
wave, Eng..WATER, WET, OTTER, 
hydr-aulic, hydro-gen, hydro-pho- | 
bia), water, Lat. aqua, 1. 5. 7, ii. 
4. 10, it. 5. 10, iv. 3.6, VL 4. 4, vil. 
4.3. Phrase: ὕδωρ ἐξ οὐράνου, rain, 
iv. 2. ἢ. | 

ὑιδοῦς, of, ὁ [cf. vids], son's 
son, grandson, Lat. nepos, v. 6. 
37. 

vids, οὔ [root ov, beget, cf. Eng. 
SON |, son, Lat. filius, iv. 6. 1, 3, 
v. 8. 18, vii. 8. 1. 

ὕλη, ns [cf. Lat. silua, wood}, 
wood, woodland, forest, Vv. 2. 31; 
shrubbery, bushes, JSagots, i. 5.1, iii. 
5. 10. 

ὑμεῖς, see ov. 

ὑμέτερος, a, ον [ὑμεῖε], — 
yours, Lat. uester, li. 1. 12, vi. 
31, vii. 3.39 ; subst., οἱ ὑμέτεροι, your 
subjects or countrymen, v. 5. 19, vii. 
3. 19; τὰ ὑμέτερα, your property, 
vii. 6. 16. 

ὑπάγω [R. ay], lead under, abs., 
lead on slowly, advance by degrees, 
iii. 4. 48, iv. 2.16; mid., lead under 
one’s own influence, draw on, sug- 
gest craftily, with acc. or inf., ii. 1. 
18, 4. 3. 

ὑπαίθριος, ον [ςαἴϑθω], undér 
heaven’s vault, in the open air, 
Lat. sub diud, v. 5. 21, vii. 6. 24. 

ὑπαίτιος, ov [alréw], under a 
charge, accountable ; subst., ὑπαί- 
τιόν τι, see ἐπαίτιος, ili. 1. 5. 

ὑπακούω [R. KoF], give ear to, 
listen, heed, with gen,, iv. 1. 9; 
obey, abs., vii. 3. 7. 

Suarrée, ὑπήντησα [ἀντί], go 
to meet, as foes, iv. 3. 84 

ὑπαντιάζω (ἀντιάζω, ἀντιαδ-, ἦν- 
τίασα [ἀντί], meet), go to meet, as 
foes, Vi. 5. 27. 

ὕπαρχος, ὁ [apx@], underofficer, 
lieutenant, lieutenant general, Lat. 


| partic., ii. 
| beginning, be at the start or to 


praefectus, i. 2.20, 8.5; in a prov- 


ince, lieutenant governor, prefect, 
serving under a satrap, iv. 4. 4. 
ὑπάρχω [apxw], begin, be under 
as_a foundation, be the first, with 
3. 23, Vv. 5. 9; be at the 


start with, be ready or in store, be 
on hand, be, ney or with = of 


| pers., ii, 2, 11, χων. vil. . 27, 
| 28, 7. 32 


gt iy or on one’s 

side, support, with dat. of pers., i. 
1. 4, v. 6. 23. Phrases: τοιούτων 
ἡμῖν els pilav ὑπαρχόντων, when 
we have such strong grounds for 
Sriendship, ii. 5. 24; ἐκ τῶν ὑπαρ- 
χόντων, as their means allowed, Vi. 
4. 9. 

ὑπασπιστής, οὔ [ἀσπιστής, one 
armed with a shield, ἀσπίς], shield- 
bearer, squire, Lat. armiger, the 
attendant, among the Spartans, 
attached to the person of gp hop- 
lite as armour bearer, iv. 2. 20. 

ὑπείκω (exw, εἴξω, εἶξα lef Lat. 
uicés, changes, Eng. WEAK, WICK- 
ER], yield), give way to, retire be- 
fore, yield, submit, with dat., vii. 
7. ol. 

ὕπειμι [R. eo], be under, lie un- 
der, iii. 4. 7. 

ὑπελαύνω [ἐλαύνω], ride under, 
ride up to, i. 8. 15. 

ὑπεληλυθέναι, see ὑπέρχομαι. 

ὑπέρ, prep. with gen. and acc. 
[ὑπέρ]. With gen., of place, over, 
above, Lat. super, i. 10. 12, iii. 4. 
29, 39, 41, iv. 2. 6, 10, v. 4. 13, vil. 
5. 15; of people or places on the 
sea, ii. 6.2; over, beyond, 1. το. 
14; rarely with verbs of motion, 
trom over, iv. 7.4; over, for, on 
behalf of, for the sake of, in de- 
fence of, Lat. pro, i. 3. 4, 8. 27, iii. 
5. 6, iv. 8, 24, ἢ. 12, vii. 3. 31; 
instead of, in the name of, Vv. 5. 18, 
vii. 7. 3, 21. With acc., over, of 
places on the sea, i. 1. 9; with 
numerals, above, more than, V. 3-1, 
vi. 5. 4, cf. 2. 10. In composition 
ὑπέρ signifies over, above, beyond, 
exceedingly, for, in behalf of. 


225 ὑπεράλλομαι- ὑπό 


ὑπεράλλομαι [ςἄλλομαι7ὕ, jump 


over, spring over, Vii. 4. 17. 


ὑπερανατείνω [τείνω], stretch out 
over, Vii. 4. 9. 

ὑπερβαίνω [R. Ba], go over, cross, 
pass, scale, vii. 3. 43, 8. 7; with 
els and acc., vii. 1. 17. 

ὑπερβάλλω [βάλλω], strike over, 
pass or cross over, cross, abs. or 
with acc., iv. 4. 20, 6. 8, 10; with 
κατά Or πρός and acc., Vi. 5. ci Vii. 
5. 1. Phrase: τὸ ὑπερβάλλον τοῦ 
στρατεύματος, each detachment as 
it crossed, iv. 1. 7. 

ὑπερβολή, 7s [βάλλω], α striking 
over, act of passing over, crossing, 
il, 2.25; of a mountain, pass, iii. 
5. 18, iv. 1. 21, 4. 18, 6. 6. 

ὑπερδέξιος, a, ov [R. 2 Sax], above 
on the right, of military positions, 
above, on higher ground, iii. 4. 37, 
iv. 8. 2, v. 7. 31. 

ὑπερέρχομαι [ἔρχομαι], go above, 
Cross, pass, iv. 4. 3. 

ὑπερέχω [R. vex], be above, pro- 
ject, iii. 5. 7; overhang, iv. 7. 4. 

ὕπερθεν, adv. [ὑπέρ], from above, 
impending, overhead, i. 4. 4. 

ὑπερκάθημαι [κάθημαι], sit down 
above, take one’s station above, 
with the idea of an ambush, with 
gen., or ἐπὶ and gen., v. 1. 9, 2. 1. 

ὑπερόριος, a, ov OF os, ov [ὅρος, ὃ, 
boundary, cf. ὁρίζω], over the bor- 
der, Lat. externus ; subst., ἡ ὑπερο- 
pla (sc. γῆ), foreign lands, abroad, 
vii. 1, 27. 

re ov [ὑπέρ], exceeding 
high, ili, 5. 7 

ὑπέρχομαι ἔρχομαι], go under, 
withdraw, advance slowly, v. 2. 30. 

ὑπέσχετο, ὑπεσχημένοι, ὑπέσχου, 
see ὑπισχνέομαι. 

ὑπέχω [R. vex], hold under, then 
like Lat. sustined, undergo, be sub- 
ject to, submit to, with δίκην, v. 8. 
18, vi. 6. 15; δίκην ὑποσχεῖν and 
gen., give account for, v. 8. 1. 

ὑπήκοος, ov [R. xoF], listening 
to, obedient, subject to, subst., sub- 
ject, vassal, with gen. or dat., i. 6. 
6, v. 4. 6, 5. 1, 17, vii. 7. 29. 


ὑπηρετέω, ὑπηρετήσω, ὑπηρέτησα, 
ὑπηρέτηκα, ὑπηρέτημαι [R. ep], be 
a servant, serve, do service, help, 
Lat. ministro, with dat. of person, 
sometimes joined to acc. of thing, 
i. 9. 18, ii. 5. 14, vii. 7.46; furnish, 
provide, ill. 5. 8. 

ὑπηρέτης, ov [R. ep], underling, 
assistant of any sort, servant, at- 
tendant, supporter, Lat. minister, 
i. 9. 18, 27, ii. 1. 9, 5. 14. 

᾿ὑπισχνέομαι, ὑποσχήσομαι, ὑπε- 
σχόμην, ὑπέσχημαι [R. vex], hold 
oneself under, bind oneself, engage, 
undertake, promise, Lat. polliceor, 
with acc., often also with dat. of 
pers., i. 7. 5, 18, iv. 5. 29, v. 6. 36, 
vii. 2. 10, 6. 5, 7.21; with fut. inf. 
1, 2 (Se iii. 4. 2, Vi. 1. 16, vii. 1.2; 
with dat. of pers. and fut. inf., ii, 
3. 20, iii, 1. 4, v. 6 28; rarely 
with aor. inf. (here some read 
fut.), i. 2.2; with ὅσα ἔσοιτο, vii. 7. 
46. 

ὕπνος, ὁ [ὕπνος], sleep, Lat. 
somnus, iii. 1. 11. 

ὑπό, by elision ὑπ᾽, by elision 
and euphony, ὑφ᾽, prep. with gen., 
dat., or acc. [ef. Lat. sub, under], 
under. With the genitive, under, 
from under, vi. 4. 22, 25; freq. of 
agency, under the influence of, 
with persons, by, through, from, 
at the hands of, Lat. ab, i. 1. 10, 
3 4, 18, 5. 4, ii. 6, 16, iv. 3. 2, 
γα. 15, 5.9, Vii. . 18, 6. 15, 33, 
7. 23; of things, through, by, by 
reason of, from, θα 24; 
iii. 1. 3, v. 8. 3, vii. 7. 11; ὑπὸ μα- 
στΐγων, under ‘the lash, iii. 4. 26. 
With dat., under, beneath, at the 
foot of, with verbs of rest, i. 2. 8, 
8. 10, iii. 4. 24, iv. 7. 10, vi. 4. 4; 
under the power or sway of, Vii. 2. 

, 7-32. With acc., under, down 
pA with verbs of motion or im- 
plying previous motion, i. 8. 27, ro. 
14, iii. 4. 37, iv. 7. 8, vii. 4. 5, 11, 8. 
21. In composition ὑπό signifies 
under, often with an idea of se- 
crecy or craft (cf. our underhand), 
or has diminutive force, rather, 


ὑποδεέστερος- ὑποπτεύω 220 


somewhat, or it denotes subordi- | 
nation or inferiority. 

ὑποδεέστερος, a, ov [ R. δε], rather | 
deficient, inferior, i. g. 5. | 


ὑποκαταβαίνω [R. Ba], go down 


| gradually, descend a little, vii. 4. 
11. 


ὑποκρύπτω [κρύπτω], hide un- 


ὑποδείκνυμι [R. 1 Sax], show| der; mid., keep secret, hoard, i. 9. 


Pr ivately, rather intimate, indicate, | | 
12. | 
* ὑποδέχομαι [R. 2 Sax], receive | 
under one’s protection, vi. κ 81. 
hence receive with hospitality, wel- | | 
come, i. 6. 3. 
ὑποδέω [ RK. δε], bind or tie under ; | 
mid. and pass., put one’s shoes on; | 
hence ὑποδεδημένοι, in their shoes, 
iv. 5. 14. 
ὑπόδημα, ares, τό [R. δε], that | 
which is bound under the foot, in | 
the pl., sandals, shoes. The word | 
properly signifies sandal, Lat. solea, | 
a sole bound to the foot by straps, 


ἥν ky WES. OS: 


| stay or fall behind, 


19. 
ὑποκύπτω (κύπτω, Kud-, -κύψω, 


txupa, κέκυφα, stoop), stoop down, 


iv. 5. 32. 

ὑπολαμβάνω [λαμβάνω], receive 
|under one’s protection, AD hy oF 
| take up the discourse (sc. λόγον); 
ΠΝ rejoin, answer, ii, 1. 15, 
Phrase: με- 
Pea ἐνολαβών. interrupting him 
in the midst of his talk, iii. 1. 
27. 

ὑπολείπω [λείπω], leave remain- 
|_ ing or behind ; pass., be left behind, 
i, 2. 25, iv. 5. 


15, vii. 2. 6; with gen., v. 4. 22; 
| subst., τὰ ὑπολειπόμενα, the part left 


No. 74. 


as in the accompanying illustra- 
tions (see also s.v. ἱμάτιον, No. 27), 
but it also means shoe or boot, Lat. 
calceus, which had an upper, cov- 
ering the foot wholly or in part, 
and was either laced or fastened 
to the foot and leg by straps. Such 
er were worn by soldiers, 
.14, For an illustration of the 
ni shoe, see s.v. φιάλη, and for 
a peculiar form of boot worn by a 
soldier, see 8.0. χλαμύς. See also 
8.0. καρβάτιναι. 
ὑποζύγιον, τό [R. ἴνγ], beast 
under the yoke, beast of burden, Lat. 
iumentum, ii. 2. 18; pl., draught 
cattle, baggage oa such as 
oxen and asses, ii. 1. 6, carrying 
the arms and camp eli Mu A 8 
20, ii. 2. 4; see also i. 3. 1, iii. 3. 6, 
iv. 3. 30, 5. 36, v. 3. 11, vi. 6. 1. 


| behind, iv. 3. 26. 


ὑπολόχᾶγος, ὁ [R. λεχ + R. ay], 
sub-captain, lieutenant, v. 2. 19, 
probably in command of a πεντη- 
κοστύς, see iii. 4. 21. 

ὑπολύω [iw], loose beneath ; 
mid. take off one’s sandals or shoes, 
iv. 5. 15. 

ὑπομαλακίζομαι [μαλακίζομαι], 
soften down, yield a little, begin to 
lose courage, ii. 1. 14. 

ὑπομένω [R. μα], stay behind, 
wait, stand one’s ground, iv. 3. 15, 
vi. 5. 25, 29; wait a little, halt, 
stop, iii. 4. 21, iv. 1.16; wait for, 
with acc., iv. 1. 21. 

ὑπόμνημα, aros, τό [R. μα], me- 
morial, reminder, i. 6. 3. 

ὑπόπεμπτος, ov [verbal of ὑπο- 
πέμπω], sent secretly, sent as @ 
spy, iii. 3. 4. 

ὑποπέμπω [πέμπω], send secretly 
or insidiously, send as @ spy, ii. 4. 
22. 

ὑποπίνω [R. πο], drink some- 
what or a little, pf. ὑποπεπωκώς, 
euphemistically, pretty drunk, vii. 
3. 29. 

ὑποπτεύω, ὑποπτεύσω, ὑπώπτευσα, 
ὑπωπτεύθην [R. om], suspect, be 


227 ὑποστρατηγέω-ὑφίστημι 


suspicious, mistrust, apprehend, 
surmise, Lat. suspicor, with acc., i. 
2. 1; with int, L 3. ἢ κα 26, 
iv. 2. 15, vii. 8. 6; with wy and 
inf., ii. 3. 13, or wh and opt., iii. 
1. 5. 

ὑποστρατηγέω [R. στρα + R. 
ay], be general under one, be lieu- 
tenant general, with dat., v. 6. 
36. 

ὑποστράτηγος, ὁ [R. στρα + R. 
ay], lieutenant general, Lat. lega- 
tus, iii. 1. 32. 

ὑποστρέφω [στρέφω], turn round 
privately or suddenly, turn right 
round, face right about, vi. 6. 38 ; 
pass., vil. 4.18. Phrase: ὑποστρέ- 
Yas, with an adroit turn, t.e. avoid- 
ing the tr ap, ii. 1. 18. 

ὑποσχεῖν, see ὑπέχω. 

ὑπόσχησθε, ὑπόσχοιτο, ὑποσχό- 
μενος, See ὑπισχνέομαι. 

ὑπουργός, dv [R. Fepy], service- 
able, conducive to, with dat., v. 8. 
15. 

ὑποφαίνω [R. oa], show from 
under ; intr., shine a little, of the 
day, dawn, break, Lat. inlicéscd, 
ad, oe asd, ee 


ὑποφείδομαι (φείδομαι, φιδ-, pel- 
σομαι, ἐφεισάμην [root φιδ, split, cf. 


Lat. jindd, split, finis, end, Eng. 
BITE, BITTER, BIT, BAIT], separate 
oneself from, spare), spare a little, 
spare a while, iv. 1. 8. 

ὑποχείριος, ov [R. yep], under 
the hands of, in the power of, sub- 
ject to, with dat., iii. 2. 3, vii. 6. 
43. 

ὕποχος, ov [R. vex], wnder con- 
trol, subject to, with dat., ii. 5. 7. 


ὑποχωρέω [χωρέω], move under | vi 


another’s influence, make way, 
retire, withdraw, retreat, abs. or 
with dat., i. 4. 18, 7. i7, iv. 5. 
19. 

ὑποψία, as [R. or], suspicion, 
distrust, Lat. suspicid, abs. or with 
ὅτι and a clause, i. 3. 21, ii. 4. 10, 
5.5; apprehension, anxiety, iii. 1. 
1; pl, feelings of distrust, ii. 5. 


1, 


Ὑρκάνιοι, of [old Persian Vir- 
Eine, Wolf’s land], Hyrcanians, 
natives of Hyrcania, vii. 8. 15, a 
district subject to Persia, north- 
west of Parthia and southeast of 
the Caspian Sea. 

us, ὑός, ὁ, ἡ ef. σῦς], swine, boar, 
hog, Lat. sis, v. 2. 3. 

ὑστεραῖος, a, ov [ὕστερος], later, 
following ; of time, Lat. posterus. 
Phrases: τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ (sc. ἡμέρᾳ), 
next day, the day after, Lat. postri- 
dié, i. 2. 21, ii. 2. 18, iii. 3. 20, vi. 
1. 14; τὴν ὑστεραίαν, during neat 
day, ili. 5. 13; els τὴν ὑστεραίαν, on 
the next day, ii. 3. 25, iv. 1. 15, vii. 
I, 30. 

_vorepéw, ὑστέρησα, ὑστέρηκα 
[ὕστερος], be later, come too late 
Jor, with gen., i. 7. 12. 

ὑστερίζω, ὑστεριῶ, ὑστέρισα [ὕστε- 
pos, come later, be behindhand, vi. 
1. 18. 

ὕστερος, a, ov [cf. Eng. out, ut- 
TER], latter, later, following, of 
time, i. 5. 14, ii. 2.17; of place, be- 
hind, iii. 4, 21; neut. as advy., vore- 
pov, later, afterwards, 1. 3: 3, ἢ 2: 
13, v. 1. 15, Vii. 2. 20, with gen., i. 
5. 16, iv. 3. 34. Phrase : ὑστέρα 
ἡμέρᾷ τῆς δυνόδου, the day after the 
junction, vi. 4.9. - 

ὑφεῖτο, see ὑφΐημι. 

ὑφειμένως, adv. aa aes pf. 
pass. partic. of ὑφΐζημι], slackly, 
quietly, submissively, Lat. sub- 
missé, Vii. 7. 16. 

ὑφέξω, see ὑπέχω. 

ὑφηγέομαι [R. ay], lead on 
slowly, lead the way gradually, 
abs. or with ἐπὶ φάλαγγος, iv. 1. 7, 
i. 5. 25. 
ὑφίημι [yu], send down, put 
under, concede, admit, Lat. con- 
cédo, with acc. and inf. i, 5. Gs 
mid., put oneself under, yield, sur- 
render, give in, iii. 1.17, 2. 3, v. 4. 
26; permit, allow, with dat. of 
pers. and inf., vi. 6. 31. 

ὑφίστημι [R. στα], place under, 
station privately; intr., mid. and 
2 aor. act., undertake, engage, 


ὑφοράω- φανερῶς 228 


volunteer, Lat. suscipid, iv. 1. 26, 
27; with acc., vi. 1. 19, 31; stop 
quietly, stand aside, iv.1.14; stand 
under an attack, withstand, resist, 
abs. or with dat., iii. 2. 11, vil. 3. 
44. 

ὑφοράω [R. 2 Fep], look at from 


below, eye with suspicion, Lat. sus- | 
|cavalry and infantry, vi. 5.7, but 


ὑψηλός, 4, dv [ὑπέρ], high, lofty, | 


picor, li. 4. 10. 


raised, Lat. altus, i. 2. 22, v. 4. 31, 


vi. 1. 5, vii. 8. 13; sup., v. 6. 6;/ 
| to join battle with the enemy, i. 8. 


subst., τὸ ὑψηλόν, height, iil. 4. 
25. 


ὕψος, ous, τό [ὑπέρ], height, Lat. | 
i |i. 2. 17, or waiting for orders, ii. 1. 


altitudo, ii. 4. 12, iii. 4. 7, Vi. 


4.3 


Φ͵ 


φαγεῖν, φάγωσιν, 566 ἔφαγον. 

φαιδρός, d, dv [R. ha], bright, 
of the face, beaming with anima- 
tion, ii. 6. 11. 

φαίη, see φημί. 

φαίνω (φαν-), φανῶ, ἔφηνα, -πέ- 
φαγκα and répnva, πέφασμαι, ἐφάν- 
θην and ἐφάνην [R. φα], bring to 
light, make appear, show, Lat. os- 
tendo, iv. 3. 18; intr., give light, 


“ ; ] 
shine, of fire, iv. 4. 9 (where some 


read pass.) ; pass., be shown, ap- 
pear, show oneself, turn out, Lat. 
appared, i. 3. 19, 5.7, 6. 11, ii. 2. 15, 
iii, 1. 24, iv. 3. 6, v. 7. 24, Vi. 5. 5, 
vii. 7. 28; be apparent, seem, look, 
Lat. wideor, with inf., which may be 
omitted, i. 9. 15, iii. 4. 13, iv. 3. 27, 
v. 4. 29, 7. 5, vi. 1.9; with partic., 
as οὐ φθονῶν ἐφαίνετο, it was clear 
that he did not envy, or he evidently 
did not envy, i. 9. 19, ef. ii. 5. 38, 
iv. 5. 28, v. 6. 4. 

φάλαγξ, γγος, ἡ [of. Eng. pha- 
lanx), line of battle, phalanx, that 
order of arrangement of troops in 
which the front was extended and 
the depth was small, as opposed 
to the formation in column, which 


| 


‘was the common order on the 


march. The phalanx was gen- 
erally arranged eight men deep 
(cf. vii. 1. 23), and the order was 
close, ii. 3. 3, but it might be only 
four deep, as in i. 2. 17 (¢f. i. 2. 
15), where the intention was to 
display the line. It included both 


might consist of infantry alone, vi. 
5. 27. The word is applied to 
troops in line either when ready 


17, 10. 10, iv. 8. 10, 11, 12, 16, 17, 
vi. 5. 23, or drawn up for review, 


6, vi. 5.9, or on the march, when 
advancing cautiously through an 
enemy’s country, vi. 5. 7. The 
word φάλαγξ also signifies any 
compact order of troops, the main 
body, iii. 3. 11, 4. 28, where it is 
used of the square (πλαίσιον). 
Phrases: ἐπὶ φάλαγγος, in line of 
battle, iv. 3. 26 (where the troops 
had before been arranged as λόχοι 
ὄρθιοι, cf. the counter movement in 
iv. 8. 10, and see ὄρθιος), iv. 6. 6 
(where the troops had been march- 
ing κατὰ κέρας, see xépas), Vi. 5. 7, 
25; so els φάλαγγα, into line of 
battle, iv. 8. 10. 

Φαλῖνος, ὁ, Phalinus, a Greek 
with a military reputation, serving 
under Tissaphernes, ii. 1. 7, 10, 19, 
21. 

φανεῖται, φανέντος, see φαένω. 

φανερός, a, dv [R. ha], in plain 
sight, visible, clear, evident, open, 
i. 7. 17, ii. 5. 1, iv. 1.28; freq. with 
partic. in personal constr., as pave- 
pol ἦσαν φεύγοντες, it was clear that 
they were in full retreat, or, they 
were evidently retreating, iv. 3. 33, 
ef. i. 6. 8, ii. 5. 40, 111, 2. 24, iv. 3. 
24, vii. 7.24. Phrases: ἐν τῷ φα- 
νερῷ, openly, publicly, i. 3. 21; εἰς 
τὸ φανερόν σε καταστήσαντας, set 
you in a prominent position, Vii. 

22. 

‘ φανερῶς, adv. [R. ha], evidently, 
manifestly, i. 9. 19. 


229 φαρέτρα- φεύγω 


φαρέτρᾶ, as, quiver, ἵν. 4.16. Its 
form is shown in the accompanying 
cut. See also s.v.’ Auatwy and τόξον. 


It was supported by a strap which 
passed over the right shoulder, and 
across the breast and behind the 
back, so that the quiver rested on 
the left hip. The gos (q.v.) was 
carried in the same manner. 

φάρμακον, τό [cf. Eng. phar- 
macy |, drug, noxious drug, poison. 
Phrase: φάρμακον πιών, taking med- 
icine, Vi. 4. 11. 

φαρμακοποσία, as [φάρμακον + R. 
wo |, a taking physic or poison, dose 
or physic or poison, drugging, iv. 8. 
21. 

Φαρνάβαζος, ὁ, Pharnabazus, son 
of Pharnaces, and satrap of Lesser 
Phrygia and Bithynia under Darius 
Nothus and Artaxerxes Mnemon, v. 
6, 24, vii. 1.2. He aided Sparta in 
the Peloponnesian war. His troops 
acted against the Cyréans, vi. 4. 24, 
5. 7, and for fear of the Greeks he 
induced Anaxibius to help them 
out of Asia, vii. 1. 2, 2. 12, 14. 
Later he was at war with Sparta, 


pheasant], the Phasiani, Phasi- 
ans, a tribe living on the banks of 
the Phasis in Colchis, v. 6. 36 ; also 
a different tribe on the Armenian 
Phasis, iv. 6. 5, vii. 8. 25. 
ασίν, see φημί. 
σις, wos or (δος, ὁ, the Phasis, 
a river in Colchis, flowing into 
the Pontus, and considered as the 
boundary between Asia and Eu- 
rope, Υ. 6.36, 7. 1,5, 7 (Rioni); also 
the upper course of the Araxes in 
Armenia, iv. 6. 4 (Pasin Su). 
φάσκω [R. φα], say, assert, al- 
lege, With inf., iil. 5.17, iv. 4. 21, 
8. 4, v. 8. 1. 
ae see φημί. 
αὔλος, 7, ov, mean, trifling, com- 
mon, of things, Lat. wilis, vi. 6.11, 12. 
φέρω (φερ-, οἱ-, évex-, ἐνεγκ-), οἴσω 
ἤνεγκα and ἤνεγκον, ἐνήνοχα, ἐνήνεγ- 
μαι, ἠνέχθην [R. hep], bear, bring, 
carry, Lat. ferd, i. 9. 26, ii. 1. 6, ili. 
4. 32, iv. 3. 6, Vv. 1. 2, 4. 26, Vil. 1. 
37; with πρός and acc., vii. 3. 31; 
bear, produce, yield, of the earth, 
i, 2. 22, vi. 4.6; carry off, receive, 
i. 3. 21, iv. 1. 8, vii. 6.7; bear, en- 
dure, iii. 1.23; bring, cause, ii. 1. 
17, of tribute, pay, v. 5. 7; of a 
road, bring, leud, with πρός, ἐπί, or 
els and acc., iii. 5. 15, v. 2. 19, 22, 
cf.v.7.7. Mid., bring for oneself, 
fetch, bring away, vi. 6. 1, vii. 4. 3. 
Pass., be borne, be hurled or thrown, 
of missiles, iv. 7. 6, 12, v. 2. 14, 
hence, carry, iii. 3. 16; be dashed, 
Sly, rush, with διά or κατά and gen., 
or mpés and acc., i. 8. 20, iv. 2. 3, 
7.14. Phrases: βαρέως or χαλεπῶς 
ἔφερον, they took it ill, were annoyed 
or troubled, Lat. molesté ferébant, 
ii, 1. 4, Vv. 7. 2, vii. 7. 2, with dat., 
i. 3. 3; δεξιὰς ἔφερον, they brought 
assurances, see δεξιός, ii. 4.1; ἄγειν 
καὶ φέρειν, See ἄγω, il. 6. 5, v. 5. 13. 
φεύγω (φυγ-), φεύξομαι and φευξοῦ- 
μαι, ἔφυγον, πέφευγα [R. φνγ], flee, 
take flight, run away, jly, Lat. fu- 
gid, i. 2. 18, 3. 20, ii. 1. 3, iii. 3. 9, 
iv. 2. 27, v. 4. 18, vi. 5. 27, vii. 3. 


Φασιᾶνοί, of [Φᾶσις, cf. Eng. 


11; with διά or ἐκ and gen., or εἰς, 


φημί-φιάλη 280 


πρός, or ἐπί and acc., i. το. 1, iii. 
2. 17, iv. 1. 8, 3. 32, v. 7. 29; rarely 
with acc., flee from, run away from, 
iii. 2. 35, vi. 5. 23; flee from one’s 
country, be an exile, be banished, 
abs. or with οἴκοθεν, iv. 8. 25, ν. 3.7; 
subst., 6 φεύγων, exile, Lat. exsul, i. 
1. 7, 9. 9, with ἐκ and gen., i. 3. 3. 

φημί (φα-), φήσω, ἔφησα [R. pa), 
rare except in pres. and impf. (the 
other tenses being supplied by εἶπον 
and by the forms given under efpw), 
declare, state, affirm, say, Lat. dico, 
with inf., i. 3. 20, ii. 1. 3, iil. 2. 24, 
iv. 2. 19, v. 2. 31, vi. 2. 8, vii. 1. 
16; with nom. and inf., i. 8. 26, 
iii, 1. 4, iv. 1. 24, vi. 2. 18, vii. 2. 
20; with acc. and inf., i. 2. 25, ii. 
G6 31, ii, 1, 90, Ww: 4. 18, v. §. 19, 
vi. 6. 15, vii. 6. 32; abs. or with 
dir, discourse, i. 6. 6, ii. 1. 22, 3. 
24, v. 4. 27, 6. 25, vii. 2. 24, 6. 23; 
very rarely with ὅτι and a clause, 
vii. 1. 5; the form ἔφη (less com- 
monly ἔφασαν) freq. follows one or 
two words of the dir. or indir. dis- 
course, said he, quoth he, Lat. in- 
quit, i. 3. 20, ii. 3. 7, iii. 1. 7, iv. 4. 
17, 8. 4, v. 6. 26, vi. 1. 30, vii. 3. 6. 
In answers ἔφη means, he said yes, 
he assented, i. 6.7, with a neg., he 
said no, he denied, iv. 1. ' 
23, v. 8. 5, cf. vii. 7. 18. 
The neg. is regularly 
attached to φημί as the 
leading verb where we 
attach it to the depen- 
dent, cf. Lat. negd, as 
οὐκ ἔφασαν ἱέναι, they 
said they would not go, 
they refused to go, i. 3. 
1, μισθωθῆναι οὐκ ἔφα- 
σαν, they said they had 
not been hired, ibid., ef. 
i. 2. 26, iv. 5. 15, vi. 6. 10, 
vii. 4. 23, 8. 4. = 

φῇς, φήσῃ, φήσω, see ““ 


ημί. 
φθάνω (φθα-), φθήσομαι and 


with τί or πρῶτος, or with πρίν and 
inf., ii. 5. 5, iii. 4. 20, iv. 1. 4, 6. 
11, vi. 1. 18; with acc. of pers. 
(which may be omitted) and a 
partic. expressing the leading idea, 
as φθάνωσι ἐπὶ τῷ ἄκρῳ γενόμενοι 
τοὺς πολεμίους, they reached the 
height before the enemy, iii. 4. 49; 
ὅπως μὴ φθάσωσι καταλαβόντες, that 
they may not get possession before 
(us), i. 3. 14, of. Vv. 6. 9; adrov 
φθάνει ἡμέρα. γενομένη, the break of 
day surprised him, v. 7. 16. 

φθέγγομαι, φθέγξομαι, ἐφθεγξά- 
μην, ἔφθεγμαι [cf. Eng. apo-thegm, 
di-phthong |, utter, make a sound, 
make oneself heard, iv. 5. 18, vi. 6. 
28; of the war cry, shout, i. 8.18; 
of the eagle, scream, Vi. 1. 23; of 
the trumpet, sound, iv. 2. 7, Vv. 2. 
14, vii. 4. 19. 

φθείρω (Pep), φθερῶ, ἔφθειρα, 
ἔφθαρκα and ἔφθορα, ἔφθαρμαι, ἐφθά- 
ρην, corrupt, of ἃ country, destroy, 
lay waste, iv. 7. 20. 

φθονέω, φθονήσω, ἐφθόνησα, ἐφθο- 
νήθην [φθόνος, ὁ, envy], envy, with 
dat. of pers., i. 9. 19, v. 7. 10. 

φιάλη, ns [cf. Eng. phial, vial], 
a round shallow vessel like a large 


rarely φθάσω, ἔφθην or ἔφθασα, get | saucer, but deeper, Lat. patera, 
before, get the start of, be before-| with neither stem, base, nor han- 
hand, anticipate, outstrip,. abs., | dle, either earthenware or made 


231 φιλαίτερον-φοβερός 


of bronze, gold, or silver, iv. 7. 27, 
vii. 3.27, and used as a drinking 
cup or in pouring libations. 

tAalrepov, see φίλος. 

théw, φιλήσω, ἐφίλησα, πεφίλη- 
μαι, ἐφιλήθην [φίλος], love, of the 
love of family and friends, Lat. 
diigo, i. τ. 4, 9. 25, 28. 

Φιλήσιος, ὁ, Philesius, of Achaea, 
who succeeded Menon, iii. 1.47, and 
was one of the two oldest generals, 
v. 3. 1. He attacked Xenophon at 
CotyGra, v. 6. 27, and was there 
fined for failure in duty, v. 8. 1. 
See also vii. 1. 32. 

φιλία, as [φίλος], affection, lik- 
ing, friendship, attachment, Lat. 
amicitia, i. 6. 3, ii. 1.10, v. 5. 15, 
vii. 4.16; with possessive or ob- 
jective gen., i. 3. 5, v. 6. 11, vil. 5. 
6; τῇ σῇ φιλίᾳ, attachment to you, 
vii. 7. 29. Phrases: πρὸς φιλίᾶν 
ἀφιέναι, let depart in peace, i. 3. 
19; αὐτοῖς διὰ φιλίᾶς ἱέναι, see διά, 
iil. 2, ἢ, 

φιλικός, ἡ, dv [φίλος], of or be- 
jitting a friend, friendly, amicable, 
iv. 1. 9, Vv. 5. 25. 

φιλικῶς, adv. [φίλος], amicably, 
like a friend, ii. 5. 27, vi. 6. 35. 

φίλιος, a, ov [φίλος], Jriendly, 
amicable, at peace, of persons and 
places, abs. or with dat., i. 6. 3, ii. 
5. 18, v. 7. 18, vi. 2. 6, 3. 225 esp. 
of a country, with or without x apa, 
friendly country or power, i. 3. 14, 
li. 3. 27, iii. 2. 9, iv. 1. 8, v. 5. 3, 
vii. 3. 15. 

φίλιππος, ov [φίλος ἰ R. ax], 
fond of horses, sup., i. 9. 5. 

φιλόθηρος, ov [φίλος + θήρα], 
fond of hunting, sup., i. 9. 6. 

φιλοκερδέω [φιλοκερδής, greedy 
of gain, φίλος + κέρδος], be. greedy 
of gain, i. 9. 16. 

φιλοκίνδυνος, ov [φίλος + κίνδυ- 
νος], loving danger, adventurous, 
ii. 6. 7, sup., i. 9. 6. 

φιλομαθής, és [pidos+ R. μα], 
fond of knowledge, eager to learn, 
sup., i. 9. 5. 

φιλονεικία, as [φιλόνεικος, fond 


of strife, φίλος + νεῖκος, τό, strife], 
or of strife, rivalry, iv. 8. 

φιλονικία, as [φίλος + νίκη], 
eagerness to win, rivalry, emula- 
tion, iv. 8. 27. 

Φιλόξενος, ὁ, Philoxenus, an 
Achaean, a brave soldier, v. 2. 15. 

φιλοπόλεμος, ov [φίλος + πόλε- 
pos], fond of war, liking war, ii. 6. 
1, 6. 

φίλος, 7, ov [φίλος], Jriendly, 

dear, attached to, kindly disposed, 
Lat. amicus, abs. or with dat., i. 1. 
ἢ αὶ 39,45 2) ὰ Gabe 
comp., φιλαίτερον (some read φίλ- 
τερον), i. 9. 29; subst., ὃ Φίλος, 
Jriend, favourite, adherent, abs., 
with dat., or gen., i. 1. 2, 3. 6, 7. 6, 
ii. 1. 5, 4. 5, 5. 39, Vv. 4. 32, vi. 6. 4. 

φιλόσοφος, ὁ [φίλος + σοφός], 
~~ of knowledge, philosopher, 11. 
1. 13. 

φιλοστρατιώτης, ov [φίλος -ἰ R. 
ety the soldier’s friend, vii. 6. 

» 99. 

φιλοτιμέομαι, φιλοτίμήσομαι, πε- 
φιλοτίμημαι, ἐφιλοτιμήθην [φίλος Ἡ 
R. τι], love or seek honour, be am- 
bitious, feel piqued, with ὅτι and a 
clause, i. 4. 7. 

φιλοφρονέομαι, ἐφιλοφρονησάμην 
and ἐφιλοφρονήθην [Φίλος + φρήν], 
be well disposed, show kindness or 
favour, act kindly, abs., ii. 5. 27, 
iv. 5. 29, 32; receive with kindness, 
greet with affection, with acc., iv. 
5. 34, 

Φλιάσιος, ὁ [Φλιοῦς, Phlius], Phli- 
asian, native of Phlius, vii. 8. 1, 
the chief city of Phliasia, the small- 
est of the Doric states, between 
Sicyonia and Argolis. 

drvapéw, φλυᾶρήσω [φλύᾶρος, ὁ, 
nonsense |, talk nonsense, talk bosh, 
iii. 1. 26, 29. 

φλναρία, as [φλύᾶρος, ὁ, non- 
sense], babble, nonsense, pl., per- 
fect bosh, Lat. nugae, i. 3. 18. 

φοβερός, a, dv [φόβος], fearful, 
causing fear, alarming, formida- 
ble, Lat. terribilis, ii. 5. 9, v. 2. 23, 


φοβεω-φρόνημα 292 


5.17; with dat. of pers. and inf., 
lii. 4. 5; sup. as subst., φοβερώ- 
τατον, ἃ most awful thing, ii. 5. 9. 
Phrase: φοβεροὶ ἦσαν μή, they felt 
afraid that, v. 7. 2. 

φοβέω, φοβήσω, ἐφόβησα [φόβος], 
Srighten, terrify, frighten away, 
Lat. terred, iv. 5. 17; usually de- 
ponent, φοβέομαι, φοβήσομαι, πεφό- 
βημαι, ἐφοβήθην, be frightened, fear, 
dread, be afraid, Lat. timed, abs., 
with acc., or περέ and gen., i. 9. 9, 
ii. 4. 18, iii. 1. 10, Vv. 5. 7, vii. 8. 20; 
with μή and a clause, i. 8. 13, iii. 
4. 34, vii. 1. 2, or with ὅτι, iii. 1. 12; 
hesitate, be doubtful about, with 
Es EN 

φόβος, ὁ [root eB, tremble, cf. 
Epic φέβομαι, flee, Eng. hydro- 
phobia), fear, dread, terror, fright, 
Lat. timor, i. 8. 18, ii. 3. 9, iii. 1. 
18, vi. 5.29; alarm, panic, ii. 2. 19; 
pl., things causing fear, threats, iv. 
1.23. Phrase: τὸν ἐκ τῶν ᾿Βλλή- 
γων εἰς τοὺς βαρβάρους φόβον, the 
fear inspired in the barbarians by 
the Greeks, i. 2. 18, ef. vii. 2. 37. 

owtkeos, a, ov, contr. φοινϊκοῦς, 
ἢ, οὖν [Φοίνιξ], purple-red, purple 
or dark red, so named because the 
discovery and earliest use of this 
colour were ascribed to the Phoe- 
nicians, i. 2. 16. 

Φοινίκη, ns [Φοίνιξ], Phoenicia, 
the Greek name for the centre of 
the Syrian coast land, strictly ap- 
plied to the region west of Mt. 
Lebanon, and extending from Ara- 
dus to Mt. Carmel, i. 4. 5, 7. 12. 
After the conquests made by Is- 
raelites in the south and Aramae- 
ans in the north, it still remained 
in possession of Canaanite, or, as 
they were called, Sidonian tribes. 
Its most famous cities were Tyre 
and Sidon. The inhabitants were 
noted navigators, traders, and col- 
onizers and were said to have in- 
vented the arts of writing, count- 
ing, and dyeing. The Greek alpha- 
bet is taken from the Phoenician. 

φοινϊκιστής, of [ς΄ powixods], 


wearer of the purple, a title of 
rank at the Persian court; acc. to 
others purple-dyer, the title of the 
officers in charge of the royal pur- 
ple fisheries, dyehouses, and ward- 
robe. i. 2, 20. 

Φοῖνιξ, ἵἴκος, ὁ, a Phoenician, 
native of Phoenicia, i. 4. 6. 

φοῖνιξ, txos, ὁ, palm-tree, the date- 
palm, Lat. palma, ii. 3. 10, 15; οἶνος 
φοινίκων, palm wine, made of the 
sap flowing from the trunk when 
tapped, ii. 3. 14, but in i. 5.10 a 
drink from pressed dates is meant ; 
the crown was edible, ii. 3. 16. 

Φολόη, ns, Pholoe, a mountain 
range on the borders of Arcadia 
and Elis, v. 3.10. (Xiria.) 

φορέω, φορήσω, ἐφόρησα, -πεφό- 
ρηκα, πεφόρημαι, -εφορήθην [R. dep], 
keep bringing, carry habitually, 
wear, i. 8. 29, v. 2. 26, vii. 4. 4. 

φόρος, 6[R. hep], what is brought 
in, tribute, Lat. tribiitum, v. 5. 7. 

φορτίον, τό [R. hep], what is car- 
ried, burden, load, v. 2. 21, vii. 1.37. 

φράζω (φραδ-), φράσω, ἔφρασα, 
wéppaxa, πέφρασμαι, aor. pass. as 
mid. ἐφράσθην [ cf. Lat. inter-pres, ex- 
plainer, Eng. phrase, peri-phrasis], 
say, tell, intimate, declare, abs., 
with rel. clause or ὅτι, ii. 4. 18, iv. 
5. 29, vi. 6. 20, vii. 8. 9; bid, com- 
mand, ii, 3. 3, with dat. and inf., 
i, 6. 3. 

Ppaclas, ov, Phrasias, a taxiarch 
from Athens, vi. 5. 11. 

φρέαρ, aros, τό [root dpeF, swell, 
cf. Lat. ferued, boil, Eng. Brew], 
a well, not a natural one, but dug, 
Lat. puteus, iv. 5. 25. 

φρονέω, φρονήσω, ἐφρόνησα, reppé- 
νηκα [φρήν], have understanding, 
be intelligent, be wise, Lat. sapio, 
ii. 2. 5, vi. 3. 18. Phrases: μέγα 
φρονήσᾶς ἐπὶ τούτῳ (some read 
καταφρονήσας), highly elated at this, 
iii. 1. 275; μεῖζον φρονεῖ, he is too 
proud, v. 6. 8. 

φρόνημα, aros, τό [φρήν], mind, 
spirit, confidence, Lat. animus, iii. 
1. 22, 2. 16, 


233 φρόνιμος-φυτεύω 


Φρόνιμος, ον [φρήν], in one’s 
senses, prudent, wise, intelligent, 
i, 10, 7, li. 5. 16, 6. 7. 

φροντίζω (φροντιδ-), PporTid, 
ἐφρόντισα, πεφρόντικα [φρήν], take 
thought, be sélicitous or anxious, 
ii. 3.25; devise, contrive, with ὅπως 
and opt., ii. 6. 8. 

φρούραρχος, ὁ [πρό + R. 2 Fep+ 
apxo], commander of a watch, or, 
in cities, of a garrison, i. 1. 6. 

φρουρέω, φρουρήσω, ἐφρούρησα, 
-reppovpnuat, ἐφρουρήθην [πρό + R. 
2 Fep], watch, guard, Lat, custodio, 
1, 4. 8, V. 5. 20. 

φρούριον, τό [wpd+R. 2 Fep], 
guarded post, hence, guard, garri- 
son, Lat. praesidium, i. 4. 15. 

φρουρός, ὁ [πρό- ἢ. 2 Fep], 
watcher, guard, pl., garrison, Vii. 
1, 20. 

φρύγανα, τά [φρύγω, roast], dried 
sticks, fagots, kindlings, Lat. cre- 
mia, iv. 3. 11. 


Φρυγία, as [Ppvé], Phrygia, origi- | 12 


nally the whole interior of Asia 
Minor west of the Halys, forming 
one of the oldest kingdoms in Asia. 
Conquered by the Lydian kings 
about 620 B.c., it afterwards be- 
came, with their kingdom, a Per- 
sian province under the name of 
Phrygia the Great or Greater Phry- 
gia, i. 2.6,7,9.7. Afterwards the 
northern and eastern borders were 
conquered by the Bithynians, Ga- 
latians, and Lycaonians, and the 
remainder was annexed to the 
kingdom of Pergamon, and finally 
in 90 B.c. to the Roman province of 
Asia. The name Phrygia Minor 
or Lesser Phrygia was applied by 
the Greeks to the southern coast of 
the Propontis, because they found 
it subject to the Phrygians at their 
first acquaintance with it. It is 
referred to in v. 6. 24, vi. 4. 24. 

Φρυνίσκος, ὁ, Phryniscus of 
Achaea, one of the Greek gen- 
erals, vii. 2. 1, 29, ᾿ 4, 10. 

Φρύξ, vyds, ὁ, a Phrygian, native 
of Phrygia, i. 2. 18. 


φυγάς, ddos, ὁ [Ε΄ hvy], one who 
has jled, esp. exile, refugee, Lat. 
exaul, 1. 5.8; 2h, h/ ἃ ve Ge 
23. 

φυγή, is [R. φυγ], flight, rout, 
Lat. fuga, i. 8. 24, iii, 2. 17, iv. 1. 
17, vii. 8. 16; banishment, exile, 
Lat. exsilium, Vii. 7. 57, 

φυγόντες, See φεύγω. 

φυλακή, ἢς [φυλάττω], a watch- 
ing, watch, guard, Lat. custddia, 
abs. or with πρός and acc., iv. 5. 29, 
v. 8. 1, vii. 6. 22; guard service, 
picket duty, iii. 1. 40; body of 
guards, guard, watch, ii. 4. 17, iv. 
5. 19, v. 1. 9, hence, garrison, i. 1. 
6, 4.4; of divisions of the night, 
watch, Lat. uigilia, iv. 1.5. Phrase: 
φυλακὰς φυλάξειν, do guard duty, 
stand guard, ii. 6. 10, cf. v. 1. 2. 

φύλαξ, axos,é[(vdAarra ],watcher, 
guard, picket, outpost, Lat. excubi- 
tor, iv. 2. 5, 4. 19, v. 1. 16, vi. 4. 
27; pl., lifeguards, bodyguard, i. 2. 


φυλάττω (φυλακ-), φυλάξω, ἐφύ- 
λαξα, -πεφύλαχα, πεφύλαγμαι, ἐφυ- 
λάχθην [φυλάττω], keep watch and 
ward, stand guard, Lat. custodid, 
intr., i. 2. 22, 4. 5, v. 1. 9; guard, 
watch, watch for, defend, with acc, 
of pers. or place, i. 2.1, iv. 1. 20, 
6.3, αὶ Φ ἃ SRS eee 
charge of, keep, v. 3.4; mid., look 
out for oneself, be on one’s guard, 
beware, defend oneself, watch out 
against, Lat. caued, abs. or with 
acc., i. 6. 9, ii. 4. 10, 5. 37, iv. 7. 8, 
vi. 4. 27, Vii. 3. 33, 7. 54; with μή 
and subjv. or opt., ii. 2.16, iv. 6. 15; 
with ὥστε μή and inf., vii. 3. 35; 
with cognate acc. and ws μή and 
inf., vii. 6. 22. Phrase: φυλακὰς 
φυλάξειν, see φυλακή. 

φυσάω, πεφύσημαι, ἐφῦύσήθην 
[φῦσα, bellows], blow, blow up, in- 
Jlate, iii. 5. 9. 

Φύσκος, ὁ, the Physcus, a river 
emptying into the Tigris, on which 
was Opis, ii. 4. 25. 

φυτεύω, φυτεύσω, ἐφύτευσα, πε- 
φύτευμαι, ἐφνυτεύθην [φυτόν, plant, 


φύω- χάλκωμα 284 


φυτός, grown, verbai οὗ φύω], plant, 
of trees, v. 3. 12. 

φύω, φύσω, ἔφῦσα and ἔφῦν, ré- 
φῦκα, ἐφύην [cf. Lat. fui, 1 was, 
Eng. BE, BOOR, BOOTH, By-law, eu- 
phuism, im-p, neo-phyte, physic], 
bring forth, produce, of plants, i. 
4. 10. 

Pwxats, ἴδος, ἡ [Φώκαια, Pho- 
caea |, α Phocaean woman, woman 
of Phocaea, an important Ionian 
city northwest of Smyrna. The 
name of the woman in i. 10. 2 was 
Milto (cf. aidros, red ochre) from 
her red cheeks, but Cyrus called 
her Aspasia. She became the fa- 
vourite of Artaxerxes. 


φωνή, js [R. ha], tone, voice, 


Lat. wox, ii. 6. 9, vii. 3. 25; lan-|5 


guage, dialect, Lat. lingua, iii. 1. 
26, iv. 8. 4. 

φῶς, φωτός, τό [R. ha], light, 
brightness, Lat. liix, iii. 1. 12, vii. 
2. 18. Phrase: ἐπεὶ φῶς ἐγένετο, 
when day broke, vi. 3. 2. 


x. 


χαίρω (xap-), χαιρήσω, κεχάρηκα, 
κεχάρημαι and κέχαρμαι, 2 aor. pass. 
as act. ἐχάρην [R. xap], rejoice, 
be glad, with partic., vii. 2. 4. 
Phrases: οὔτε χαίροντες ἂν ἀπαλλά- 
fare, you wouldn't get off scot-free, 
Vv. 6. 82; ela χαίρειν (from the use 
of imv. χαῖρε, farewell), he let go, 
he gave up, vii. 3. 23. 

Χαλδαῖοι, ol, the Chaldaeans, a 
brave and independent tribe in 
Armenia on the upper courses of 
the Euphrates, identified by Xen. 
with the Chalybes, iv. 3. 4, v. 5.17 
(cf. iv. 4.18). The Chaldaeans of 
Babylonia are thought to have 
come from this region. 

χαλεπαίνω (xareray-), χαλε- 
πανῶ, ἐχαλέπηνα, ἐχαλεπάνθην [χα- 
λεπός]}, be severe, be angry or vio- 
lent, be provoked or offended, abs., 


or with dat., i. 4. 12, 5. 11, iv. 5. 
16, v. 5. 24; with ὅτι and a clause, 
évexa and gen., or gen. of cause, i. 
5. 14, v. 8. 20, vii. 6. 32; pass., be 
provoked, with dat. of pers., iv. 
6, 2. 
χαλεπός, 4, dv, hard to bear, 
grievous, painful, Lat. grauis, iii. 
1.13; hard to deal with, difficult, 
hard, troublesome, Lat. diffcilis, 
abs. or with inf., ii. 6. 24, iii, 2. 2, 
iv. 8. 2, v. 2. 20, vi. 6. 13, vii. 7. 28; 
of persons, severe, stern, harsh, 
Lat. dtrus, ii. 6.9, 12; of an en- 
emy, dangerous, i. 3.12; of dogs, 
savage, fierce, Vv. 8. 24; subst., 
τὸ χαλεπόν, severity, sternness, ii. 
6. 11, of the wind, violence, iv. 
. 4. 

χαλεπῶς, adv. [χαλεπός], hardly, 
with difficulty, painfully, Lat. 
aegré, iii. 3. 13, 4. 47. Phrases: 
χαλεπῶς φέρειν, see φέρω, i. 3. 3; 
pasha ἔχειν, be angry, Vi. 4. 
16. 

χαλϊνόω, ἐχαλένωσα, -κεχαλένω- 
μαι [χαλῖνός, 6, bridle], bridle, put 
on @ bridle, iii. 4. 35. The bridle, 
or xaXivdés, consisted of bit, head- 
stall, and reins. The bit was gen- 
erally a snaffle, the two ends of 
which were joined under the jaw 
by a strap or chain, to which a 
leading rein was sometimes at- 
tached. For the headstall, see the 
illustrations under ἅρμα (No. 8), 
ἱππόδρομος (No. 31), κέρας (No. 35), 
and esp. προμετωπίδιον. The last 
shows the frontlet and cheek- 
pieces designed to protect the head 
of the horse. 

χάλκεος, a, ov, contr. χαλκοῦς, 
ἢ, οῦν [χαλκός], made of bronze, 
bronze, Lat. aéneus, i. 2. 16, v. 2. 
29. 

Χαλκός, ὁ, copper, Lat. aes; also 
bronze, a compound made of cop- 
per and tin, used in the manufac- 
ture of armour, hence χαλκός ris, 
ay armour here and there, i. 

. 8. 
χάλκωμα, ατος, τό [χαλκόω, make 


235 Χάλος- χειροποίητος 


in bronze, χαλκός], copper or bronze 
vessel, iv. 1. 8. 

XéAos, 6, the Chalus, a river in 
the northern part of Syria, flowing 
by Beroe, i. 4. 9. 

Χάλυβες, wv, οἱ (cf. Eng. chalybe- 
ate], the Chalybes, Chalybians, a 
brave and warlike tribe in Pontus 
on the frontier of Armenia, iv. 4. 
18, 5. 34, 6. 5, iv. 7. 15. Others 
nearer the coast were subject to 
the Mossynoeci, and lived by iron 
working, v. 5.1. (See Χαλδαῖοι.) 

χαράδρα, as, bed of a torrent, 
gorge, ravine, iii. 4. 1, iv. 2. 3, Vv. 
2. 3, Vi. 3. 5. 

χαράκωμα, aros, τό [χαρακόω, 
Sence with a palisade, χάραξ, stake, 
pale), palisaded place, stockade, v. 
2. 26. 

χαρίεις, ίεσσα, lev [R. yap], 
graceful, of a plan, pretty, clever, 
lil. 5. 12. 

χαρίζομαι (χαριδ-), χαριοῦμαι, 
ἐχαρισάμην, κεχάρισμαι [R. χαρ], 
show kindness, gratify, favour, 
please, oblige, Lat. gratificor, abs., 
with dat., or with dat. of pers. and 
ace. of thing, i. 9. 24, ii. 1. 10, 3. 
19, v. 3. 6, vil. 6, 2. Phrase: ἣν 
τῷ θυμῷ χαριζώμεθα, if we indulge 
our anger, Vii. 1. 25. 

χάρις, cros, ἡ [R. xap], gracious- 
ness, love, favour felt, thanks, 
gratitude, Lat. gratia. Phrases: 
χάριν εἰδέναι, begrateful, feel thank- 
Sul, Lat. gratiads habére, abs., with 
dat. of pers., and gen. of cause, i. 
4. 15, vii. 4. 9, 6.32; so χάριν ἔχειν, 
ii. 5. 14, vi. 1.26; χάριν ἀποδώσει, 
he will return the favour, Lat. gra- 
tids referet, i. 4.153; rots θεοῖς χάρις 
ὅτι, thank the gods that, iii. 3. 
14, 

Χαρμάνδη, ys, Charmande, a 
large city in the northeastern part 
of Arabia, on the Euphrates, i. 5. 
10. (Hit.) 

Xappivos, 6, Charminus, a Spar- 
tan sent by Thibron to ask the 
Cyréans to join him, vii. 6. 1, 7. 
13, 56, 


χειμών, ὥνος, ὁ (cf. χιών], rain- 
storm, bad weather, storm, iv. 1. 
15, v. 8.20; winter, the cold, Lat. 
hiems, i. 7. 6, v. 8. 14, vii. 6. 9, 
24. 

χείρ, χειρός, ἡ [R. xep], hand, 
Lat. manus, i. 5. 8, 10. 1, ii. 3. 11, 
5. 59, πὴ 1. 17, 2. 33, v. 6. 33, Vi. 
1. 8, vii. 3.5. Phrases: els χεῖρας 
ἐλθεῖν, ἱέναι, δέχεσθαι, see the verbs, 
i. 2. 26, iv. 3.31, 7.15; of && xe- 
pos βάλλοντες, See βάλλω, ili. 3. 15; 
ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν λίθοι, stones thrown 
merely with the hand (i.e. without 
slings), v. 2. 14; ἐκ χειρός, hand 
to hand, Lat. comminus, v. 4. 
25. Ϊ 

Χειρίσοφος, ὁ, Chirisophus, a 
Spartan, sent by the Ephors to 
join Cyrus with 700 troops, i. 4. 3. 
After the death of Cyrus he was 
one of the envoys sent to offer the 
throne of Persia to Ariaeus, ii. 1. 
5, 2.1. On the death of the gen- 
erals he encouraged the troops and 
was chosen to command the van, 
iii. 2. 1, 37, iv. 1.6. Although pre- 
viously unacquainted with Xeno- 
phon, iii. 1. 45, he became very 
friendly .to him, iv. 5. 33, and they 
had but one disagreement during 
the retreat, iv. 6.3. From Trape- 
zus he went to ask Anaxibius for 
ships for the army, v. 1. 3, 4, 3. 1, 
but returned unsuccessful to Si- 
nope, vi. 1. 16, where he was chosen 
commander in chief, vi. 1. 32, an 
office which he held only a week, 
vi. 2. 12, 14. Thence with a small 
force he marched to Calpe, vi. 2. 
14, 18, 3. 10, where he died, vi. 4. 
11. 


χειρόομαι, χειρώσομαι, ἐχειρωσά- 
μην, κεχείρωμαι [R. yep], handle, 
get into one’s power, subdue, Vii. 3. 
11, 

χειροπληθής, ἐς [R. xep+ R. 
πλα], hand-filling, as large as the 
hand will hold, iii. 3. 17. 

χειροποίητος, ov [R. xep + ποιέω], 
made by the hand of man, artiji- 
cial, iv. 3. 5. 


χείρων-χιών 290 


χείρων, ον, gen. ovos, used as 
comp. of κακός [R. xep], worse, of 
persons, inferior, v. 2.13. Phrase: 
χεῖρόν ἐστι αὐτῷ, it is the worse for 
him, vii. 6. 4, 39. 

Χερρόνησος, ἡ [xéppos, ὁ, main- 
land + ναῦς], land-island, penin- 
sula, Vi. 2.2; without an explana- 
tory adj. the Chersonese or Thracian 
Chersonésus is meant, a penin- 
sula stretching along the Helles- 
pont opposite the Asiatic coast, 
and consisting mostly of low hills. 
It contained Ionic cities which 
were founded in early times. The 
elder Miltiades formed it into 
a Graeco-Thracian _ principality 
about 550 B.c., and after the Per- 
sian war it was administered as 
an Athenian possession until con- 
quered by Macedonia in 343 z.c. 
wm 0, ἃ ὁ ἃ vi ἃ 26, vil ὁ 
14. 

χηλή, fs, hoof, cloven hoof; 
hence, from its projecting shape, 
breakwater, mole, vii. 1. 17. 

χήν, χηνός, ὁ, ἡ (of. Lat. dnser, 
goose, Eng. GANDER, GOOSE], goose, 
i. 9. 26. 

χθές, adv. [ε΄ Lat. heri, yester- 
day, Eng. vester-day], yesterday, 
vi. 4. 18. 

χίλιοι, az, a, thousand, Lat. mille, 
a Oy πὲ “ ἃ Vi. 2. 15. 

χῖλός, ὁ, green fodder, forage, 
provender, i. 5. 7, 9. 27, iv. 5. 25; 
with ξηρός, hay, iv. 5. 33. 

χίλόω [χῖλός7, fodder, feed, of 
horses, vii. 2. 21. 

χίμαιρα, as [ς΄ Eng. chimaera), 
she-goat, Lat. capra, iii. 2. 12. 

Xtos, ὁ [Xlos, ἡ, Chios], a Chian, 
native of Chios, iv. 1. 28, 6. 20, an 
island in the Aegéan west of Lydia, 
famous for the manufacture of wine 
and mastic. (Scio.) 

χιτών, vos, 6, under garment, 
chiton, corresponding in use to the 
Roman tunica. The garment in its 
simplest form was a double piece 
of cloth, oblong in shape, and 
somewhat wider than the breadth 


of the chest, one-half of which cov- 
ered the front of the body, the other 
the back. One side was closed by 
the fold of the cloth, the other was 
left open. The chiton was fastened 
on each shoulder by brooches, and 
the arms were thrust through the 
holes just beyond these, the sides of 
the garment dropping. But it might 
have either full or half-sleeves, and 
the open side was often closed by 
a seam. It was confined over the 
hips by the girdle, ξώνη, g.v. This 
garment, corre- 

sponding to the 

modern shirt or 

shift, was worn 

next the person 

by both men 

and women, 

But at Athens, 

the men’s chi- 

ton was of wool 

and came only 

tothe knees, the 

woman’s was ¢ »- 

of linen and 

reached to the rine 

feet. For the latter see 8.0. φιάλη, 
the figures at the centre and at the 
left, and s.v. κλένη, the woman’s 
figure. The soldier wore it under 
his cuirass, vy. 2.15. See the illus- 
trations s.v. ἅρμα (No. 8), ἀσπίς 
(No. 10), Owpat, κνημῖς (No. 39), 
and ὁπλέτης.. The chiton was, 
like the tudrwyv (q.v.), often orna- 
mented, and might be of brilliant 
colour, i. 2. 16. The under gar- 
ments of Persian’'noblemen were 
expensive, i. 5.8; the Macronians 
wore them made of hair, iv. 8. 3. 
Those of the Thracians, χιτῶνες 
περὶ τοῖς μηροῖς, Vii. 4. 4, seem to 
have been shirt and trousers com- 
bined. 

Χχιτωνίακος, ὁ [dim. of χιτώνἼ], 
Short chiton, Lat. tunicula, not 
reaching to the knees, v. 4. 13. 

χιών, dvos,  [cf. Lat. hiems, 
winter], snow, Lat. nix, iv. 4. 8, 
11, 5. 36, v. 3. 3, vii. 3. 42. 


237 χλαμύς- χρόνος 


χλαμύς, vdos, ἡ, cloak, mantle, 
chlamys, a garment worn esp. by 
horsemen, Vii. 4. 
4, but also by 
the foot soldier 
on the march 
and by travel- 
lers in general. 
It was an ob- 
long piece of 
cloth thrown 
over the left 
shoulder, the 
open ends of 
which were fas- 
tened over the 
right shoulder 
by a brooch. It 
was thus distin- 
guished fromthe 
ἱμάτιον (g.v.), 
which confined 
one and sometimes both of the 
arms. 

χοῖνιξ, cxos, ἡ, choenix, an Attic 
dry measure, i. 5.6, containing 1.094 
liters, or nearly one quart ΤΙ. S. 
dry measure. Forty-eight χοίνικες 
made one μέδιμνος, g.v. 

Χοίρειος, a, ον [χοῖρος], of swine ; 
κρέα xolpea, pork, iv. 5. 31. 

Χοῖρος, ὁ, ἡ, young pig, porker, 
Lat. porcus, vii. 8. 5. 

Χορεύω, χορεύσω, etc. [χορός], 
dance, Lat. salto, iv. 7. 16, v. 4. 17. 

Χορός, ὁ [cf. Eng. choir, chorus], 
dance, band of dancers, chorus, 
tragic or comic, v. 4. 12. 

Χόρτος, ὁ, fodder, grass, i. 5. 5, 
li. 4. 11, with κοῦφος, hay, i. 5. 10. 

Χράομαι, χρήσομαι, ἐχρησάμην, 
κέχρημαι, and pass. ἐχρήσθην, use, 
make use of, employ, Lat. itor, 
abs. or with dat., i. 4. 8, 9. 5, ii. 1. 
12, iii. 2. 21, iv. 4. 18, v. 4. 28, vi. 1. 
9; with two dats. or εἰς and acc., 
ii. 1. 6, iii. 4. 17, iv. 2. 28, v. 1. 16; 
with an acc., as τί βούλεται ἡμῖν 
χρῆσθαι, what does he want to use 
us for, i. 3. 18, ef. ii. 1. 14, iii. 1.40, 
V. 4. 9, vii. 2. 31; treat, of persons, 
with two dats. the second being 


sometimes preceded by ws, i. 4. 15, 
li. 5. 11, 6, 25, vii. 2.25; enjoy, have, 
Jind, i. 3. 5, 9. 17, ii. 6. 18, iv. 1. 22, 
6.3. Phrases: πρᾶξις raparAnola 
οἵᾳπερ ἐχρῆτο τοῖς ξένοις, a business 
like that in which he used merce- 
naries, i. 3.18; οὕτως αὐτοῖς χρῇσθε 
ὥσπερ ἄξιον, treht them exactly as 
they deserve, v. 7.5; χρῆσθαι ὅ τι 
ἂν βούλῃ, to deal with them as you 
please, vi. 6. 20. 

Χρή, -χρήσει, -Expyoe, impers., it 
is necessary, one must, it is need- 
Jul, with inf. or acc. and inf., i. 3. 
11, 4. 14, ii. 2. 4, 5. 27, πὲ 2. 24, 
V. 7. 5, Vi. 3. 18, vii. 5. 9. 

χρῃζω (χρῃδ-), need, want, long, 
desire, wish, abs. or with inf., i. 3. 
20, il. 5. 2, iii. 4. 41, v. 5. 2. 

Χρῆμα, aros, τό [χράομαι], a 
thing of use; pl., men’s things, 
property of any sort, goods, pos- 
sessions, effects, chattels, i. 3. 14, 
4. 8, 10. 18, ii. 4. 27, iii. 1. 37, v. 2. 
4, vi. 6.1; esp. money, i. 1. 9, 2. 
12, 9. 12, ii. 6. 5, vi. 4.8, vii. 6. 41. 

Χρηματιστικός, 7, ὄν [χρημα- 
τίζω, transact business, χρῆμα], 
pertaining to money-making; of 
ah omen, portending gain, vi. 1. 
23. 

Χρῆναι, See χρή. 

χρῆσθαι, 566 χράυμαι. 

χρήσιμος, 7, ον, and os, ον [χρῆ- 
gis, USC, χράομαι], of use, useful, 
valuable, serviceable, Lat. utilis, 
of persons and things, abs. or with 
dat., i. 6. 1, ii: 5. 23, fii. 4 17, ¥. 
6. 1. 

Xptpa or χρῖσμα, aros, τό [xptw, 
ef. Eng. chrism], unguent, oint- 
ment, iv. 4. 13. 

Xptw, xptow, Expioa, xéxpi(o) mat, 
ἐχρίσθην [cf. Lat. frid, rub, Eng. 
GRIND, GRIST, Christ |, touch slightly, 
rub, anoint ; mid., anoint oneself, 
iv. 4. 12. 

χρόνος, ὁ [ cf. Eng. ana-chronism, 
chrono-logy, chrono-meter], time, 
season, period, Lat. tempus, i. 8. 8, 
22, ii. 1.17, 3. 22, iii. 4. 12, 36, iv. 
2. 17, v. 2. 11, 8. 1, vi. τ 26, Ὁ, 


χρύσεος- ψηφίζω 238 


vii. 8.19. Phrases: πολὺν χρόνον, 
for a long while, i. 3. 2; πολλοῦ 
χρόνου, in a long while, 1, 9. 25. 

χρύσεος, 7, ov, contr. χρυσοῦς, ἢ, 
οῦν [χρῦσός], golden, of gold, i. 2. 
10, 27, 7.7; gilded, gold mounted, 
i. 2. 27, 8. 29, v. 3. 12. 

xptctov, τό [dim. of xpucds], a 
piece of gold, coined gold, gold, i. 
5.0, 7. 18, vil. & 1. 

Χρυσόπολις, ews, ἡ, Chrysopolis, 
a city on the Bosporus, opposite 
Byzantium. It was subject to 
Chalcédon, vi. 3. 16, 6. 38. (Scu- 
tari.) 

χρῦσός, ὁ [cf. Eng. Goin, chrys- 
alis, chryso-lite|, gold, Lat. aurum, 
iii. 1. 19. 

χρύσοχάλῖνος, ον [χρῦσός + χαλῖ- 
νός, ὁ, bridle], with gold mounted 
bridle, of a horse, i. 2. 27. 

χώρα, as [οἷ χῶρος], place, esp. 
one’s assigned place, in a military 
sense, position, post, station, i. 8. 
Δ κα SS, 10a BOG WE a. Ts 
station in society, office, rank, see 
phrases ; land, region, country, 
very freq., i. 1. 11, 5. 5, 6. 7, ii. 1. 
11, iii. 4. 31, iv. 5. 34, v. 2. 3, vi. 6. 
1, vii. 7.33. Phrases: κατὰ χώρᾶν 
ἔθεντο τὰ ὅπλα, see τίθημι; ἐν ἀν- 
δραπόδων χώρᾳ ἐσόμεθα, we shall 
pass for slaves, Lat. serudrum locd 
erimus, V. 6. 13; ἐν οὐδεμίᾳ χώρᾳ 
ἔσονται, they will have no place, be 
of no account, Υ. 7. 28. 

χωρέω, χωρήσω, ἐχώρησα, κεχώ- 
ρηκα, -κεχώρημαι, -εχωρήθην [χῶρος], 
give place, withdraw, move, move 
on, advance, march, of persons, 
i, 10. 13, ii. 4. 10, iv. 7:11, v. 4. 26; 
of missiles, with διά and gen., pen- 
etrate, iv. 2.28; of measures, hold, 
contain, i. 5. 6. 

χωρίζω, ἐχώρισα, κεχώρισμαι, ἐχω- 
ρίσθην [χωρίς], set apart, detach, 
vi. 5. 11; separate, pass., be remote, 
differ from, with gen., v. 4. 34. 

Χωρίον, τό [dim. of xpos], space, 
spot, place, iil. 3. 9, iv. 1. 16, 2. 28, 
Vv. 2. 2, vil. 1. 24; piece of land, 
estate, V. 3. 7; place, of towns and 


| cities, i. 4. 6, iii. 4. 24, v. 2. 3, vii. 
8. 15, esp. when fortified by nature 
or art, hence, stronghold, fortress, 
a &. BA; 1:6. 7, Ve 5. 17,4: Sl. 

χωρίς, adv., separately, apart, 
by onesely or themselves, ill. 5.17, 
| vi. 6. 2, vii. 2. 11; as prep. with 
gen., apart or away from, i. 4. 13. 

χῶρος, ὁ [cf χώρᾶ, Eng. an- 
| choret], a@ particular place, piece 
of ground, estate, v. 3. 10, 11, 13; 
country, in the phrase κατὰ τοὺς 
χώρους, up and down the country, 
Vii. 2. 3. 


Ψ, 


Ψάρος, 6, the Psarus, a large 
river, rising in Cataonia, and flow- 
ing southwesterly through Cilicia 
into the Mediterranean, ᾿ Ee 
(Seihfin.) 

ψέγω, ψέξω, ἔψεξα, blame, dis- 
parage, Vii. 7. 43. 

Ψέλιον or ψέλ- 
λιον, τό, armlet, 
bracelet, Lat. ar- 
milla, worn by 
men among the 
Persians asa » mark 
of distinction, i. 
2. 27, 5. 8, 8. 29. 

evdevédpa, as 
[ψευδής + R. ocd], 
sham ambuscade, V. 2. 28. 

Ψευδής, és [veddw], false, lying, 
untrue, Lat. falsus, li. 4.24; subst., 
τὰ ψευδῆ, lies, ii. 6. 26. 

Ψεύδω, ψεύσω, ἔψευσα, ἔψευσμαι, 
ἐψεύσθην [cf. Eng. pseud-onym], 
deceive, Lat. fall, mid., be deceit- 
Sul, lie, cheat, deceive, act Salsely, 
with acc. or πρός and acc. of pers., 
i. 3. 5, 10; abs., with acc., or περί 
and gen. of thing, i. 9. 7, ii. 6. 22, 
28, v. 6. 35, vii. 6. 15; pass., be de- 
ceived, abs, or with acc., i. 8. 11, ii. 
2. 13, iii. 2. 31. 

ψηφίζω (ψηφιδ.), ψηφιῶ, ἐψήφι- 
σα, -«ε«Ψήφικα, ἐψήφισμαι, ἐψηφίσθην 
[ψῆφος], reckon with pebbles; as 


No. 79. 


239 ψῆφος- ὥρα 


dep. mid., vote, resolve, decree, de- 
cide, with acc., inf., or acc. and 
inf., i. 4. 15, iii. 2. 31, v. 1. 4, Vi. 2. 
12, vii. 7. 18. 

ψῆφος, ἡ [cf ψάω, rub], pebble, 
esp. as used for voting, vote, ballot, 
Lat. suffragium, v. 8. 21; hence, 
decree, sentence, see ἐπάγω, Vii. 7. 
57. 

Widds, ἡ, bv [cf. Yaw, rub], 
stripped, naked, bare, i. 8.6; of a 
country, barren, i. 5. 5; as subst., 
οἱ idol, light-armed soldiers, light 
troops, iii. 3. 7, v. 2. 16, see 59". 
γυμνής and πελταστής. 

Ψιλόω, ψτλώσω, ἐψΐλωσα, ἐψιλώ- 
θην [ψιλός], strip, make bare, Lat. 
nudo ; pass., be deprived of, cleared 
of, or left by, with gen., i. 10. 13, 
iv. 3. 27. 

Ψοφέω, ἐψόφησα [ψόφος], make 
a sound, resound, ring, iv. 3. 29. 

ψόφος, ὁ, noise, iv. 2. 4. 

ψυχή, 7s [οὐ ψύχω, blow, breathe, 
Eng. psychic, psycho-logy, metem- 
psychosis], breath of life, Lat. 
anima, hence life, soul, spirit, 
heart, serving also for Lat. animus. 
Phrases: ἔχομεν ψυχὰς ἀμείνονας, 
we have braver spirits, te. more 
courage, iii. 1. 23, cf. 42; ras éav- 
τῶν ψυχὰς καὶ σώματα, their own 
lives and bodies, iii: 2.20; ἐκ τῆς 
ψυχῆς, from the bottom of my 
heart, Lat. ex animo, vii. 7. 48. 

Wixos, ous, τό [ef ψύχω, blow, 
breathe], cold, Lat. frigus, iv. 5. 12, 
ip ὠς 3; pl., intense cold, frost, iii. 
I 


2. 


ὦ, exclamation, O, frequently pre- 
fixed to the vocative, generally left 
untranslated on account of itsrarity 
in this use in English, i. 4. 16, 6. 7, 
ii. 1. 10, v. 5. 13, vii. 2. 24. 

ᾧ, see ὅς. 

ὧδε, adv. [ὅδε], as follows, thus, 
in the following manner, i. 1. 6, iii. 


I. 27, iv. 6. 7, ν. 4. 12; ὧδέ πως, 
somewhat as follows, 7.9. 

δή, fis [ᾷἄδω, cf. Eng. ode, com- 
edy, par-ody, pros-ody}, song, Lat. 
carmen, iv. 3. 27. 

ὡδοποιημένη, see ὁδοποιέω. 

το, φήθησαν, See οἴομαι. 

ὠθέω (we), wow and poetic 
ὠθήσω, ἔωσα, ἔωσμαι, ἐώσθην, push, 
shove ; mid., push out of one’s way, 
shove ‘out, with ἐκ and gen., ili. 4. 
48. 

ὠθισμός, ὁ [ωθίζομαι, jostle, ὠθέω], 
a pushing, a jostling, Vv. 2. 17. 

ῳκοδόμητο, see οἰκοδομέω. 

ὠμοβόειος, a a, ov, OF ὠμοβόινος, 7, 
ov [ὠμός + R. BoF], of raw ox-hide, 
made of untanned ox-hide, iv. 7.22, 
26, vii. 3. 32. 

ὦμος, 6 [ο΄ Lat. umerus, shoul- 
der|, the upper arm, shoulder, Vi. 

. 25. 
; ὠμός, 7, dv [φ΄. Lat. amarus, bit- 
ter], raw, uncooked, Lat. cridus, 
iv. 8.14; hence, of persons, rough, 
cruel, jierce, ii. 6. 12. 

ὥμοσαν, see ὄμνυμι. 

ὠνέομαι, ὠνήσομαι, ἐώνημαι, pass. 
ἐωνήθην (for 2 aor. mid. » ἐπριάμην is 
used, see πριάσθαι) [ὦνος, ὁ ὁ, pr oe 
buy, ' purchase, Lat. emo, li. 3. 27, 
V. 3. 7, vii. 2. 38, 3. 13; with gen. 
of price, iii. 1. 20, v. 1. 6, vii. 6. 24. 

ὠνήσατε, 566 ὀνίνημι. 

ὦνιος, a, ον [ὦνος, ὁ, price], pur- 
chaseable, for sale, Lat. uenalis ; 
subst., τὰ wa, wares, goods, i. 2. 
18, vii. 6. 24. 

ᾧοντο, see οἴομαι. 

Ὦπις, ἰδος, ἡ, Opis, a city on the 
Physcus, near the Tigris, in As- 
syria, ii. 4. 25. 

ὥρᾶ, as [cf. Eng. YEAR, hour, 
horo-scope], fixed time, period ; of 
the year, season, i. 4. 10, ii. 3. 18; 
of the day, time, hour, Lat. hora, 
iii. 5. 18, iv. 8. 21, vi. 5.15; in gen- 
eral, the right or proper time for 
doing anything, opportunity, abs., 
with inf., or dat. of pers. and inf., 
i. 3. 11, 12, iii. 4. 34, iv. 6. 16, v. 7. 
12, vi. 3. 20, vii. 3. 34. 


ὡραῖος --ὠτίς 240 


ὡραῖος, a, ov [wpa], at the right 
time, seasonable, of fruits, in their 
season, V. 3. 12; of persons, in the 
bloom of youth, ii. 6. 28; subst., 
Ta ὡραῖα, fruits of the season, V. 

a 

' ὥρμηντο, see dpudw. 

ὡς, originally a rel. adv. of man- 
ner [οὐ és], but developed into a 
great variety of uses. 

Rel. adv., as, Lat. ut, with verbs, 
i. 4. 5, 6. 3; 9. 1, ii. 4. 23, iv. 8. 12, 
v. 8. 25, vi. 3. 25, 4. 18, vii. 1. 27; 
with subst. or adj., i. 1. 2, ii. 5. 3, iii. 
3. 2, Vv. 3. 12, 5. 19; so with preps., 
3. 2. 1, 4, 8. 23, ti. 5. 3, iv. 3. 1, vi. 
1. 9; with circumstantial partics. 
ws shows that the partic. contains 
a thought or assertion of the sub- 
ject of the leading verb, or of some 
other person prominent in the sen- 
tence, without implying that it is 
the thought of the speaker or writer, 
and hence it may be rendered, acc. 
to the context and the kind of cir- 
cumstantial partic., as if, just as, 
thinking that, on the ground that, 
with the avowed intention, as 
though, etc., i. 1.3, 11, 2. 1, 19, ii. 3. 
Md ἡ. ἢ i ay dee. BR. AT, ts BB, BM. ἃ 
5, vi. 5. 28, vii. 1. 7, 8. 16, so with 
gen. or acc. abs., i. 1. 6, ii. 1. 21, 
iii. 4. 3, v. 2. 12, vi. 4. 22; with the 
absolute inf., ws συνελόντι εἰπεῖν, to 
put it briefly, iii. 1. 38; with nu- 
merals, about, i. 2. 4, 6. 1, 7: 15, of. 
vi. 5. 11, and the phrase ws ἐπὶ τὸ 
πολύ, for the most part, generally, 
ili. 1. 42, 43, 4. 35; of degree, with 
adjs. and advs., how, iii. 1. 40, iv. 
1. 20, vi. 6.32, esp. with sups., Lat. 
quam, as ws μάλιστα, as much as 
possible, i. 1. 6, ef. 3. 14, ii. 2. 12, 
5. 14, iii. 1. 38, iv.6.1. As an im- 
proper prep., only of persons, fo, i. 
2. 4, ii. 3. 29, 6. 1, vii. 7. 55. 

Conj., of time, as, when, after, 
with indic., i. 1. 4, 5. 12, 8. 18, iv. 
3. 27, v. 2. 6, vii. 1.19, ὡς τάχιστα, 
as soon as, iv. 3.9; introducing in- 
dir. disc. like ὅτι, that, i. 1 2 δ... 
8, ii. 1.14, 5. 6, vi. 1. 30; causal, tg 


when, since, for, because, Lat. ut, 
with indic., ii. 4. 17, v. 8. 10, vi. 1. 
32; final, denoting purpose, that, 
in order that, Lat. ut, with subjy. 
or opt., i. 3. 14, g. 28, ii. 4. 17, iii. 
1, 18, iv. 6, 15, v. 7. 18, once with 
indic., Vii. 6. 23, with ἄν ‘and subjv., 
ii. 5. 16, Vi. 3. 18; consecutive, de- 
noting result, so ‘as, so that, with 
ἢ. 3 10, ee Rs Wy Wee RR, 
freq. of an intended result, i. 5. 10, 
So 2) 2h, Wy. 3. 29, 6. 13, ν. 2. 12, 
so with COMPS., aS βραχύτερα ἢ ὡς 
ἐξικνεῖσθαι, too short to reach, iii. 
ἢ, 7, rarely with indic., vi. 1. 5. 
ὥς, ἃν. thus, so, ‘like οὕτως; 

οὐδ᾽ ὡς, not even under these cir- 
cumstances, 1. ἃ. 21, iil. 2. 83, vi. 
4. 22. 

ὡσαύτως, adv. [ws + αὐτός], in 
this same way, likewise, just so, 
lil, 2, 23, iv. 7. 13, v. 6. 9, Vii. 3. 
22. 

ὥσθ᾽, see wore. 

ὦσιν, see εἰμί. 

ὠσίν, 866 οὖς. 

ὥσπερ, ΤΕ]. adv. of manner [ws], 
like as, just as, even as, as it were, 
like, used like ws before substs., 
adjs., verbs, and preps., i. 4. 12, 5. 
8, 8, 8. 20, ti, 4. 10, 6. 6, iv. 3. 5, 
Υ͂. , Vi. 5. 31, vii. 2. 27; in com- 
parisons, with partic. in gen. abs. ᾿ 
i. 3. 16, so with acc. abs. > ὥσπερ 
ἐξὸν, just as if we might, iii. 1. 14. 
Phrases: ὥσπερ εἶχεν, just as he 
was, iv. 1. 19; ὥσπερ καὶ νῦν, ex- 
actly as at present, vii. 3. 10. 

ὥστε, rel. adv. [ws + τέ], 80 a8, 80 
that, with indic., i.-1. 8, 3. 10, 8. 
13, το. 19, ii. 3. 26, ἰῇ. 3 11, v. 4. 
20; with inf., i. x,.6, 4. 8, §: 13, ii. 
2 17, iv. 2. 27, ¥. 6. 35, 9. 7, Vi. . 
31, vii. 1. 41; on condition that, 
provided that, with inf., ii. 6. 6, v. 
6. 26, vii. 4. 12. 

ὦτα, see οὖς. 

ᾧτε, in the phrase ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε, see 
ἐπί. 
' ~~ fis, wound, hence, scar 
i. 9. 6. 

aris, (dos, ἡ, bustard, i. 5. 2, 3. 


241 ὥφελε-ὦφλε 


Ae, see ὀφείλω. 

λέω, ὠφελήσω, etc. [ὄφελος], 
help, succour, assist, benefit, be of 
use or of service, Lat. iwud, abs., 
with acc., or two accs., i. 1. 9, 3. 
6, iii. 3. 18, v. 6. 30, vii. 6. 11; pass., 


be helped, derive profit or advan- 
tage, V. 1. 12. 
ὠφέλιμος, ov [ὠφελέω], helping, 
useful, serviceable, i. 6. 2, iv. 1. 28. 
ὥφθημεν, see ὁράω. 
ὦφλε, 566 ὀφλισκάνω. 


LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. 


0. al 


Tus list gives the immediate sources of the preceding seventy-nine 
illustrations. The original sources are generally stated in the books 
to which reference is here made. Those referred to oftenest are the 
following : — 

Baumeister, Denkmédler des klassischen Altertums. ὃ vols. Miin- 
chen und Leipzig, R. Oldenbourg, 1885-1888. 

Guhl and Koner, The Life of the Greeks and Romans, translated 
from the third German edition. New York, D. Appleton and Com- 
pany, 1876. 

Hope, The Costume of the Ancients, new edition. 2vols. London, 
Chatto and Windus, 1875. 

Rich, Dictionary of Roman and Greek Antiquities, third edition. 
New York, D. Appleton and Company, 1874. 

Smith, Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiquities, third edition. 
2 vols. London, John Murray, 1890, 1891. 


. ἀκϊνάκης, Rich, p. 8. 
. ἀλέτης, Guhl and Koner, p. 519 (see also the following). 
. Overbeck und Mau, Pompeji, p. 387. 
. ᾿Αμαζών, Rich, p. 25. Illustrates also κράνος, πέλτη, σάγαρις, ὑπό- 
δημα, φαρέτρα, χιτών. 
. ἀμφορεύς, Smith, I., p.426. Illustrates also βακτηρία, δίφρος, χιτών. 
. ἀξίνη, Smith, II., p. 616. 
. ἅρμα, Rich, p. 228. 
. ἅρμα, Hope, I., plate 111. Illustrates also δόρυ, ζώνη, θώραξ, κράνος, 
πτέρυξ, στέφανος, τέθριππον, χαλῖνός (8.0. χαλϊνόω), χιτών. 
9. ἀσκός, Rich, p. 711. 
10. ἀσπίς, Hope, I., plate 136. Mlustrates also δόρυ, ζώνη, θώραξ, κνη- 
pts, κράνος, ὁπλίτης, πτέρυξ, χιτών. 
11. ἀσπίς, Riistow and Kéchly, Geschichte des griechischen Kriegs- 
wesens, fig. 17, p. 15. 


243 


244 


. αὐλός, Guhl and Koner, 5 German edit., p. 257 (see also Baumeis- 
ter, p. 1589). Illustrates also διδάσκαλος, δίφρος, ἱμάτιον. 

. βίβλος, Guhl and Koner, 5 German edit., p. 255. 

. δᾶρεικός, Rich, p. 233. Illustrates also veupd, τόξον. 

. διαγκυλόομαι, Guhl and Koner, p. 243. 

. δόλιχος, Krause, Gymnastik und Agonistik der Hellenen, Tafel ΥἹ., 
12, 13. 

. δόρυ, Riistow und Kochly, ibid., fig. 21, p. 18. 

. Sperravnddpos, Vollbrecht, Woérterbuch zu Xenophons Anabasis, 
Tafel IIL., fig. 40. Illustrates also ἄξων. 

. ἐγχειρίδιον, Smith, IL, p. 525. 

. εὔζωνος, Rich, p. 719. Illustrates also τόξον, ὑπόδημα, φαρέτρα, 
χιτών. 

. ζεῦγος, Rich, p. 358. 

. ζώνη, Rich, p. 161. Illustrates also ὑπόδημα, χιτών. 

. ζώνη, Rich, p. 162. 

25. θρόνος, Rich, p. 611. 

. θώραξ, Hope, I., plate 111. Illustrates also ζώνη, πτέρυξ, χιτών. 

‘ ἱμάτιον, Baumeister, p. 1685 (statue of Sophocles in the Lateran 
Museum at Rome). Illustrates also βίβλος, ὑπόδημα (both 
restorations). 

. ἱμάτιον, Guhl and Koner, p. 166. Illustrates also βακτηρία, ὑπό- 
δημα. 

, ἱππεύς, Baumeister, p. 2030. Illustrates also ἀσπίς, δόρυ, ζώνη, 
θώραξ, κράνος, παραμηρίδια, πτέρυξ, χαλῖνόφ (8.0. χαλινόω), 
χιτών. 

. ἱππόδρομος, Guhl and Koner, 5 German edit., p. 147. 

. ἱππόδρομος, Panofka, Bilder des antiken Lebens, Tafel LL, 4, 
Illustrates also μάστιξ, χαλῖνός (s.v. xahivow). 

. κάνϑυς, Hope, I., plate 14. Illustrates also λόγχη, ὑπόδημα. 

. καρβάτιναι, Rich, p. 118. 

. képas, Rich, p. 204. 

. κέρας, Museo Borbonico, V., Tavola xx. Illustrates also χαλῖνός 
(s.v. χαλινόω). 

. κῆρυξ, Rich, p. 147. Illustrates also βωμός, δόρυ, κηρύκειον, ξίφος, 
ὑπόδημα, χλαμύς. 

. κλίνη, Gerhard, Antike Bildwerke, Tafel LXXI. [Illustrates also 
αὐλός, ἱμάτιον, τράπεζα, χιτών. 

. See the following. 

. kvnpts, Hope, I., plate 104. Illustrates also ἀσπίς, Sépv, ζώνη, 


θώραξ, κράνος, χιτών. 


. κράνος, Hope, I., plate 135. 
. κράνος, Hope, I., plate 66. 
. kparhp, Gerhard, Awuserlesene griechische Vasenbilder, Vierter 


Theil, Tafel CCCXX. 


. μάχαιρα, Guhl and Koner, p. 245. 
. μνᾶ, British Museum, Guide to the Select Greek and Roman Coins 


exhibited in Electrotype, plate II. Illustrates also κράνος. 


. ναῦς, Baumeister, p. 1599. Illustrates also ἱστίον, κλῖμαξ, κυβερ- 


νήτης, κώπη; πηδάλιον. 


. νευρά, Hope, L., plate 13. Illustrates also τόξον. 
. ξίφος, Hope, II., plate 176. 
. ξίφος, Panofka, ibid., Tafel VI., 3. Illustrates also ἀσπίς, δόρυ, 


θώραξ, kvnpts, κράνος, λιθοβόλος (s.v. λίθος), πτέρνξ, χιτών. 


. οἰνοχόος, Guhl and Koner, p. 268. Illustrates also στέφανος. 
. ὁπλίτης, Hope, I., plate 70. Illustrates also ἀσπίς, δόρυ, θώραξ, 


κνημίς; κράνος, ξίφος, πτέρυξ, χιτών. 


51. ὅπλον, Panofka, ibid., Tafel VIII., 2 (see also Baumeister, p. 1582). 


Illustrates also ἀσπίς, θώραξ, κνημίς, κράνος, ξίφος, χιτών. 


. παγκράτιον, Guhl and Koner, p. 223. 

. πάλη, Krause, ibid., Tafel X., 26. 

. πελταστής, Guhl and Koner, p. 241. Illustrates also δόρυ, πέλτη. 
. πέλτη, Hope, L., plate 20. 

. πέλτη, Rich, p. 487. Illustrates also ἀναξυρίδες. 

. πεντηκόντορος, Panofka,. ibid., Tafel XV., 7. [Illustrates also 


ἱστίον, κυβερνήτης, κώπη, πηδάλιον. 


. προμετωπίδιον, Daremberg et Saglio, Dictionnaire des Antiquités, 


I., p.251. Illustrates also προστερνίδιον, χαλῖνός (8.υ. xadivew). 


. πυγμή, Guhl and Koner, p. 225. 
. πυρρίχη, Panofka, ibid., Tafel IX., 3. Illustrates also ἀσπίς, 


κράνος, ξίφος, σάτυρος. 


. σάγαρις, Hope, I., plate 20. 
. σάλπιγξ, Hope, 11., plate 156. Illustrates also ἀσπίς, ϑώραξ, κνη- 


pts, κράνος, χλαμύς. 


. σκηπτοῦχος, Hope, I., plate 14, 

. στάδιον, Guhl and Koner, p. 120. 

. στρεπτός, Rich, p. 678. 

. σφάττω, Rich, p. 341. Illustrates also βωμός, ξίφος, φιάλη. 

. σφενδονήτης, Rich, p. 306. 

. τέθριππον, Terracottas in the British Museum, plate XIX., 34. 


Illustrates also ἅρμα, χαλῖνός (s.v. xadivdw). 


. tudpa, Hope, I., plate 16, 


240 


. τόξον, Paris, from the Aegina Marbles (see Rich, p. 600). TIllus- 
trates also vevpa, τόξευμα, φαρέτρα. 
. τριήρης, Guhl and Koner, p. 260. : 
. τρίπους, Hope, IL, plate 218. Illustrates also κρᾶτήρ. GROUPS OF RELATED: WORDS. 
3. τράπεζα, Hope, I., plate 90. Illustrates also ἱμάτιον, κλένη, στέφα- 
νος. 
. ὑπόδημα, Guhl and Koner, p. 178. Illustrates also ἱμάς. 
. φαρέτρα, Wagner, Hellas, I., p. 58 (see alse Hope, I., 22). Illus- Tue Greek groups contain only words found in Xenophon’s Anab- 
trates also ἀναξυρίδες, veupd, τόξευμα, τόξον, ὑπόδημα. asis, except a few needed as connectives or to show the development 
. Φιάλη, Hope, I., plate 129. Illustrates also δίφρος, ζώνη, ἱμότιον, of the group. Compound verbs and proper names have generally been 
ὑπόδημα, χιτών. omitted. 
. χιτών, Rich, p. 697. In the Greek groups, simple words whose formation is to be spe- 
. χλαμύς, Hope, L., plate 71. Illustrates also δόρν, ὑπόδημα. cially noted are printed in black-face letter. These are generally 
. Ψέλιον, Rich, p. 57. formed on a stem derived directly from a root (not always determin- 
able) or from an ultimate theme. Simple words, on the contrary, 
which are formed on a stem derived from a stem that either appears 
in some preceding word or may easily be assumed, and compounds, 
are generally printed in light-face letter. Adjectives in -ros and -reos 
are treated as verb-forms. 

The eye is assisted in the analysis of the words by the use of 
hyphens, which mark off case-endings and personal endings and 
suffixes (except in some verbs, principally denominatives), and sepa- 
rate the parts of compounds. 

For fuller information about the words in the Latin groups, see 
the Table of Roots in Lewis’s Latin Dictionary for Schools or in his 
Elementary Latin Dictionary. 

* In the English groups, words in small capitals are cognates, 
those in black-face letter are borrowed words. For fuller information 
about the English words here given, see Skeat’s Etymological Diction- 


ary of the English Language. 


R. ay, ag, drive, lead, weigh. 


&y-w, drive, lead, bring ; &ya-v, adv. (orig. an acc.), very, exceedingly, 
(‘in a driving manner’); ἀγ-ών, Gv-os, ὁ, a bringing together, assembly, 
public contest ; ἀγων-ο-θέτη-ς, ov (cf. R. Oe), judge of a contest ; ἀγωνίζο- 
μαι, contend, fight, engage; ἀντ-αγωνίζο-μαι, struggle against, rival ; 
&y-pa, as, the chase, booty; ἀγρεύ-ω, take in the chase, catch; ἄγρ- 
urvo-s, o-v (cf. ὕπνος), hunting after sleep, wakeful; ἀγρυπνέω, lie 
awake ; fwypé-w (= fwo-aype-w, see ξωό-ς, alive), take alive ; ἀγ-ρό-ς, ὁ, 
field (place where cattle are driven); d-yp-to-s, ἃ, ο-ν, ranging the fields, 

247 


ἀγείρω 248 


wild ; ἀγ-ό-ς, ὁ, leader ; στρατ-ηγό-ς, ὁ (cf. R. στρα), leader of an army, 
general ; crparryé-w, be general, command ; συ-στράτηγο-ς, 6, fellow- 
general ; iwo-crpdrryo-s, 6, under-general, lieutenant-general ; ὑποστρα- 
τηγέω, be lieutenant-general ; srparny-la, as, office of general, gener- 
alship; στρατηγιά-ω, wish to be general; dox-a7yd-s, ὁ (of. R. Aex), 
leader of α λόχος, captain; oxayé-w, be captain ; ὑπο-λόχᾶγο-ς, 6, sub- 
captain, lieutenant; doxay-la, as, captaincy; οὐρ-ἃ γό-ς, ὁ (see οὐρᾶ, 
rear), leader of the rear; ἡγέο-μαι, lead, guide, command, infer, 
think; ἀφ-ηγέο-μαι, draw out, explain, recount; iyye-mwr, ὄνος, ὃ; 
leader, guide; ἡγεμον-(ἃ, as, leadership, supremacy; ἡγεμόςσυνα, τά, 
thank offerings for safe guidance. —dywy-f, ἣς (ay-ay, by reduplica- 
tion), a@ leading, carrying ; ἀπ-αγωγή, js, leading off, removal ; παρ- 
aywyh, is, transport ; aywy-6-s, 6-v, guiding, leading ; σττ-αγωγό-ς, ὁ-ν 
(see otro-s, grain), corn-carrying ; δημ-αγωγό-ς, ὁ (cf. R. $a), popular 
leader, demagogue ; Snuaywyé-w, play the demagogue ; ἀγώγ-ιμο-ς, ο-ν, 
easily carried ; ἀγώγιμα, τά, freight, cargo, wares. — G§-wv, ov-os, ὁ (ay 
+o=at), axle; ἅμαξα, ns (cf. dpa), wagon with two connected axles, 
prop., therefore, four-wheeled wagon ; ἀμαξοιτό-ς, ὁ-ν, passable by wag- 
ons; ἁμαξοιαῖο-ς, a, o-v, large enough to load a wagon; dpu-duata, ns 
(cf. R. ap), closed carriage ; ἄξ-ιο-ς, a, o-v, of equal weight, worth as 
much, worthy; ἀξίᾶ, as, worth, value, deserts; diib-w, think worthy, 
claim, demand; ἀξίω-μα, ar-os, τό, worth, dignity, authority; ἀξιο- 
orparnyo-s, o-v, worthy of being general. 

ag-5, lead, drive ; Ag-men, in-is, n., multitude, band ; ag-e-r, gri, 
m., field; ag-ili-s, adj., easily moving, nimble; axi-s, is, m., axle ; 
G-la, ae, f., wing. 

ACORN, ACRE, AXLE; agony, ant-agonist, strat-agem, strat-egy, 
strat-egic, ex-egesis, dem-agogue, par-agogic, ped-agogue, syn- 
agogue, axiom. 


ἀγείρω, collect (R. yap). 

&-yelpw (theme dyep-), bring together, collect ; &yop-a, as, assembly, 
meeting, meeting-place, market ; ἀγορᾶ-νόμο-ς, ὁ (cf. R. ven), market 
master ; ἀγορεύ-ω, speak in the assembly, harangue, say ; KaT-Hyyopo-s, 
o-v, speaking against, accusing; xarryopé-w, accuse; Kxaryyop-la, as, 
accusation ; μεγαλ-ήγορο-5, ον (cf. R. pax), talking big, boastful ; 
μεγαληγορέ-ω, boast, brag ; προ-ήγορο-ς, ὁ, advocate ; mponyopé-w, speak 
for, be spokesman ; ἀγοράζω, go to market, buy. 

gre-x, gre-g-is, m., flock, herd; 6-greg-iu-s, adj., select, extraor- 
dinary. 

pan-egyric, par-egoric. 


249 R. ayx-R. 1 aF 


R. ayx, ane, bend. 


ἀγκ-ών, Sv-os, ὁ, bend of the arm, elbow, bend; ἀγκ-ύλη, ns, loop, 
noose, thong of a javelin ;-év-ayxvAd-w, fit thongs on, fit with a thong ; 
δι-αγκυλίζο-μαι, δι-αγκυλό-ο-μαι, hold by the thong (putting the finger 
through it) ; Gyx-vpa, as, anchor; ἄγκ-ος, εος, τό, glen, valley; ὄγκ- 
o-s, ὁ, barb of an arrow. 


anc-u-s, I, m., one who crouches, servant (cf. Ancus Martius, servant 
of Mars); ancil-la, ae, f., maidservant; ang-u-lu-s, 1, m., angle, 
corner ; unc-u-s, 1, m., hook, barb. 


ANKLE, ANGLE (ish) ; anchor. 


R. a8 (afad), suad, be sweet. 


d-v-5-dv-w (theme dd-), please ; ao-pevo-s, 7, 0-v, well pleased, joy- 
ful ; τρισ-άσμενο-ς, ἡ, o-v (cf. τρεῖς), thrice glad, very glad ; ἥδ-ο-μαι, be 
glad, rejoice ; 45-ovh, js, joy, pleasure, delight ; nd-0-s, εἶα, v, sweet, 
pleasant, acceptable; ἡδέως, adv., sweetly, cheerfuliy, with pleasure ; 
ἡδύ-οινο-5, o-v (See olvo-s, wine), producing sweet wine; ἡδυ-παθής, és 
(cf. R. wwa), experiencing pleasure; ἡδυπαθέω, live pleasantly, be 
luxurious. 


sua-ui-s, adj., sweet, agreeable; suad-u-s, adj., persuasive ; suad- 
e-6, advise, persuade ; suaui-u-m or saui-u-m, 1, n., love-kiss. 


SWEET; hedon-ism. ‘ 


ἀείρω, raise. 

ἀείρω (theme dep-), Att. αἴρω (theme ap-), raise, lift ; ἄρ-δην, adv., 
raised up (‘from the ground up’), wholly, quite; aprd-w (formed on a 
stem ap-ro-), hang up, hang on to, fasten; Gop, dop-os, τό, Epic, hanger, 
sword ; per-hop-o-s, Att. μετ-έωρ-ο-ς, o-v, raised from the ground, in the 
air, on high. 

aorta, me?-eor. 


R. 1 ag, au, percerve. 


G-t-w (for af-w), perceive, esp. by the ear, hear; ots, wr-ts, τό 
(of-ar, o-ar, wr-), ear; αἰσθ-άν-ο-μαι (αἰσθ- for αρ-σθ), perceive, ob- 
serve ; αἰσθη-τικό-ς, ἡ, ὁ-ν, perceptive ; αἴσθη-σι-ς, €-ws, ἡ, perception. 

au-d-i-6, hear; au-r-i-s, is, 7.) ear; aus-cul-t6, hear with atten- 
tion ; 6-men, in-is, n., foreboding, sign. 


EAR; aesthetic, an-aesthetic, oto-logy. 


R. 2 αΕ-αἱρέω 250 


R. 2 ag, au, blow. 

αὔ-ρᾶ, as (a¢-pa), breeze ; a-fp, a-ép-os, 6, ἡ (af-ep), air; αὐ-λό-ς, ὁ, 
wind instrument, flute; αὐλέτωω, play the flute; αὐ-λή, js, courtyard 
(open to the air); avAlfo-ua:, lie in the open air, bivouac; ἀ-ε-τό.-ς, 
αἰ-ε-τό-ς, 6 (stem ar-, cf. Lat. aui-s), eagle (‘swift as the wind”) ; 
ol-wvd-s, ὁ (o¢-), bird of prey ; ἀτ-μό-ς, ὁ (αρ-τ), vapour, steam ; arulfw, 
steam. 


aui-s, is, 7, bird; Guu-m, I, n., egg; ue-nt-u-s, 1, m., wind. 


WEATHER, WIND; air, hydr-aulic, asthma, atmo-sphere. 


αἰδέομαι, be ashamed. 


al§-é-o-wat (theme aide-), poetic αἴδ-ο-μαι (theme aid-), be ashamed, 
fear, respect ; αἰδή-μων, ov, gen. ov-os, respectful, modest ; al§-as, ὁ-ος, 
ods, ἡ (stem aild-oc-), sense of shame, respect ; aido-io-s, a, o-v, regarded 
with reverence or shame; αἰδοῖα, τά, the private parts; ale-xpé-s, 
ἅ, 6-v (atd-xpo), shameful, base, infamous, disgraceful ; αἰσχρῶς, adv., 
disgracefully, ignominiously ; alo-xos, εος, τό (αιδ-χεσ), shame, dis- 
grace ; alox-ty-n, ns, shame, dishonour ; αἰσχύνω, dishonour, disgrace. 


aide, burn. 


at@-w (theme alé-), set on fire, kindle, burn; αἰθ-ήρ, ép-os, ὁ, bright 
upper air, ether ; at@p-to-s, o-v (αἰθρ-ιο- for aidep-o-), clear, bright ; ὑπ- 
αἰθριο-ς, o-v, under the open air; αἰθρ-ίᾶ, as, clear sky; δι-αιθριάζω, grow 
clear. 

aed-é-s, ium, f., hearth, house ; aedi-li-s, is, m., commissioner of 
buildings, aedile; aes-tu-s, tis, m., a raging (of fire or of waves) ; 
aes-ta-s, itis, f., summer. 


ether, ether-eal. 


aipéw, take (prob. R. fap). 


aip-é-w (theme aipe-), take, seize, capture ; alpe-rd-s, 4, ὅ-ν, that may 
be taken; av0-alpero-s, o-v (cf. αὐτός), self-appointed ; é-alpero-s, o-v, 
picked out, selected ; verbal aipe-réo-s, a, o-v, must be taken. — etX-o-v 
(theme éi-), 2 aor., 1 took; ἀλ-ίσκ-ο-μαι (theme ἀλ-, ddo-), be taken, 
be captured ; ddw-rd-s, ἡ, ό-ν, to be taken; alxu-ddwro-s, o-v (cf. R. ax), 
captured by the spear; dv-ddwro-s, o-v, not to be taken, invincible ; 
ἅλω-σι-ς, €-ws, ἡ, capture ; dddor-po-s, o-v, easy to capture. 


ap-haeresis, di-aeresis, syn-aeresis, heresy, heretic. 


251 αἰτέω-ἄλλος 


αἰτέω, ask for. 

alr-é-w, ask for, claim, demand ; alrn-ov-s, €-ws, ἡ, request, demand ; 
alr-(a, ds, orig. demand, then cause, blame, censure ; αἰτιά-ο-μαι, blame, 
reproach ; att-10-s, a, ο-ν, causing, to blame, culpable ; ἐπ-αίτιο-ς, ο-ν, 
blamed for, blameworthy ; vv-alrio-s, 0-v, jointly guilty ; ὑπ-αίτιο-ς, ο-ν, 
under a charge, accountable. 


R. ax, ac, sharp, pointed, swift. 

ἄκ-ων, ovr-os, ὁ, javelin, dart ; ἀκόντ-ιο-ν, τό, javelin, dart; ἀκοντίζω, 
hurl the javelin; ἀκόντι-σι-ς, €-ws, 7), javelin-throwing ; ἀκοντισ-τή-ς, οὔ, 
javelin-thrower ; ἀκ-μή, js, point, edge, highest point; ἀκμή-ν, adv. 
(ace. of ἀκμή), on the point, just; ἀκμάζω, be at the highest point ; 
αἰχμή, as (for ax-un), spear-point ; alxu-ddwro-s, o-v (cf. aipéw), cap- 
tured by the spear; GK-p0-S, a, 0-, pointed, at the point, highest ; 
ἄκρο-ν, τό, height ; ἀκρο-βολίζο-μαι (cf. βάλλων, throw from a distance 
or height ; dxpoBéd-ovs, €-ws, 7), skirmish ; ἀκρό-πολι-5, e-ws, ἡ (ef. R. 
wha), upper city, citadel ; ἀκρ-ωνυχίᾶ, as (ὄνυξ, vx-os, nail), nail-tip, 
spur, crest ; ἄκρᾶ, as, height, citadel. — ὡκ-ὑ-ς, εἴα, ὑ, swift. — ἵππο-ς, 
ὁ, ἡ (stem «x-fo), horse (‘the swift one’); ἵππ-αρχο-ς, ὁ (cf. apxe), 
cavalry commander ; immd-dpopo-s, ὁ (see dpdéuo-s, a running), race- 
course ; φίλ-ιππο-ς, o-v (cf. plros), fond of horses ; ἱππ-ικό-ς, %, é-v, of a 
horse or of cavalry ; ἱππάζο-μαι, drive or ride a horse; iwma-cla, as, a 
riding ; ἱππ-εύ-ς, é-ws, ὁ, horseman ; ἱππεύ-ω, ride; immela, as (for ἱππερ- 
a), cavalry ; τέθρ-ιππο-ν, τό- (cf. τέτταρες), team of four horses abreast, 
chariot and four. —0§-%-s, εἴα, ὑ (ox +o = οξ), sharp, sour , ὄξ-ος, ες, 
τό, sour wine. 

ac-ié-s, δῖ, ἢ, sharp edge or point; acu-s, iis, f., needle; acu-6, 
sharpen; Ac-er, adj., sharp, pungent ; Sc-ior, adj., swifter ; equ-u-s, 
i, m., horse. 

EDGE, EGG (‘egg on’); acme, acro-bat, acro-polis, acro-stic, etc. 


ἄλλος, other. 


ἄλλο-ς, 7, 0, other, another; ἀλλά, conj. (neut. plur. with changed 
accent), but (‘in another way’); ἄλλῃ, adv., in another way, else- 
where ; ἄλλως, adv., in another way, otherwise ; ἄλλο-σε, adv., to an- 
other place ; ἄλλο-τε, adv., at another time ; ἄλλο-θεν, adv., from another 
place ; ἀλλο-ῖο-ς, ἃ, ο-ν, of another kind; ἀλλήλ-ων (reduplicated stem 
ἀλλ-ηλο-), Of one another ; παρ-ἀλληλο-ς, ο-ν, beside one another, paral- 
lel; ἀλλάττω (theme ἀλλαγ-), make other, alter; ἀλλό-τριο-ς, A, ο-ν; 
another’s, strange, foreign. 


— 


toe — ~ -- 
— a re OR ey απ αν 


ee wt ΞᾺ -- 


a 


mee 


ἅμα-ἀνήρ ᾿ 252 


aliu-s, adj., other ; ali-bi, adv., elsewhere ; ali-quis, pron. indef., 
somebody ; ali-énu-s, adj., another's, strange, foreign ; al-ter, adj., the 
other ; ad-ulter, adj., adulterous ; alter-nu-s, adj., one after the other, 
in turn. 


ELSE ; allo-pathy, all-egory, par-allel, par-allax. 


apa, together. 


ἅμα, adv. (for caua), at the same time, together; du-ata, ns (cf. R. 
ay), wagon with two connected axles, prop., therefore, four-wheeled 
wagon ; duat-ré-s, d-v, passable by wagons; dyat-taio-s, a, o-v, Jit for 
a@ wagon, large enough to load a wagon; dpy-duata, ns (cf. R. ap), 
closed carriage. — 6p6-s, ἡ, ὅ-ν, Epic, one and the same; ὁμοῦ, adv., 
together, at once ; ὁμό-σε, to the same spot; ὅμως, conj., all the same, 
still, nevertheless ; ὁμό-λογο-ς, o-v (cf. R. Ney), agreeing ; ὁμολογέ-ω, agree, 
confess ; ὁμολογουμένως, avowedly, by common consent ἡ ὁμο-μήτριο-ς, a, 
o-v (see μήτηρ, mother), born of the same mother 7 ὁμο-πάτριο-ς, a, o-v 
(see πατήρ, father), begot by the same father ; ὁμο-τράπεζο-ς, o-v (ef. 
τέτταρες and R. awed), at the same table; 8u-npo-s, ὁ (cf. R. ap), pledge 
of unity, hostage ; Syu-ido-s, ὁ (see ἴλη, troop), crowd, throng; ὁμϊλέ-ω, 
be in company with ; ὅμο-ιο-ς, a, o-v, like, similar, resembling ; ὁμοίως, 
adv., in like manner, alike ἀν-ὅμοιο-ς, o-v, unlike, different ; ἀνομοίως, 
adv., differently ; dua-dd-s, ἡ, d-v, even, level > ὁμαλῶς, adv., evenly ; 
ὁμαλ-ής, és, even, level. 


sem-per, adv., always ; sin-guli, adj., one at a time, single ; seme-l, 
adv., once ; simu-l, adv., at the same time ; simi-li-s, adj., like, resem- 
bling. 


SAME, SOME ; Hama-dryad, hom-ily, homo-geneous, homo-logous, 
homoeo-pathy, an-omaly. 


avnp, man. 


ἀνήρ, dvip-ds, ὁ (stem dvep-), man, Lat. uir ; dvdp-eio-s, ἃ, o-v, manly, 
brave ; dviped-ry-s, nr-os, ἡ, manliness, valour ; ἀνδρίζω, make a man 
of, mid., act bravely ; ἄν-ανδρ-ο-ς, ο-ν, unmanly ; dvip-ayabla, as (see 
ἀγαθό-ς, good), manly virtue, valour ; ἄνθρ-ωπο-ς, ὁ, ἡ (cf. R. om), 
man (‘man-face’), Lat. homd; ἀνθρώπ-ινο-ς, 7, o-v, human; modv- 
άνθρωπο-ς, o-v (cf. R. wha), thickly populated. 


andr-oid, poly-andry, anthr-opology, mis-anthr-ope, phil-anthr- 
opy. 


253 avri-R. apx 


ἀντί, over against. 

ἀντί, prep., over against, against, instead of; dvrl-o-s, a, o-v, set 
against, opposite ; év-avrlo-s, a, ο-ν, opposite, in the opposite direction ; 
ἐναντιό-ο-μαι, set oneself against ; dvrid-w, ἀντιάζω, meet face to face; 
ἀντά-ω, go opposite, go to meet. 

ante, adv. and prep., before; anté-s, ium, m., rows (of vines); 
anti-quu-s, adj., old, ancient. 


A-long, AN-swer; anti-dote, ant-agonist, etc. 


R. ap, ar, fit. 


dp-ap-lox-w (theme dp-), fit or join together, suit; dp-e-lwv, ον, 
comp., jitter, better ; ἄρ-ι-στο-ς, ἡ, o-v, sup., jitiest, bravest, best; ap- 
τι, exactly, just, just now; ἀρθ-μό-ς, ὁ (ap +0), league, bond; ἀριθ- 
μό-ς, ὁ (ap-t-0), series, number; ἀριθμέ-ω, number, count; dpiOun-ro-s, 
h, ὅ-ν, easily counted, few; dv-aplOunro-s, ο-ν, not to be counted, in- 
numerable ; ἅρ-μα, ar-os, τό, team, chariot ; dpu-duata, ns (cf. ἅμα and 
R. ay), closed carriage (‘ chariot-wagon’) ; ἁρμόζω (from a stem dp-po-), 
Jit together, set in order, control; ἁρμοσ-τή-5, od, organizer, harmost ; 
ἁρμον-ἰᾷ, as (stem dp-uor-), means of fastening, framework, harmony ; 
Su-np-o-s, ὁ (cf. ἅμα), pledge of unity, hostage; wod-yp-ns, es (cf. R. 
wed), joined or reaching to the feet; ap-é-cx-w, swit, please ; ἀρ-ε-τή, 
his, Jitness, goodness, bravery, valour. 

ar-s, ar-ti-s, f., skill, art; in-er-s, adj., unskilful ; soll-er-s, adj., 
quite skilful, clever; ar-tu-s, adj., close, narrow; ar-tiis, uum, m., 
joints, limbs; ar-ma, Orum, n., armour, arms; ar-mu-s, 1, m., shoul- 
der. 

ARM, RIME (misspelt rhyme) ; aristo-cracy, arithmetic, /og-arithm, 
harmony. | 


R. apx, are, keep off. 


ἀρκ-έ-ω, fut. dpxé-cw, keep off, be enough, suffice. —aphy-w (ap-a-x, 
ap-n-y), ward off, help.—GXx-h, js (αλκ -- αρκ), defence, prowess; 
ἄλκ-ιμο-ς, o-v, able to defend, brave, warlike. — ἀλέξ- (ad-e-x-c), ward 
off, mid., defend oneself from, repulse. 

arc-e-6, shut up, keep away; arc-a, ae, f., chest, box; Arc-anu-s, 
adj., secret; arx, arc-i-s, f., stronghold, citadel ; arc-u-s, tis, m., bow. 


ARROW. 


LL LOCLL ILE | CL Ce A AT EE + cc mr ... 


tes 


A TIT oe σὸς EEG RS ne τς. P 


~ 


R. ἀρπ-αὐτός 254 


R. apr, rap, snatch, seize. 

ἅρπ-η, ns, bird of prey, kite; “Apw-wat, al, the Snatchers; ἅρπ-αξ, 
αγ-ος, ὁ, ἡ, rapacious ; ἁρπάζω, Epic fut. dpwdt-w (theme dpmray-), Att. 
ἁρπάσω (theme aprad-), snatch, plunder, pillage; apray-%, js, a seiz- 
ing, plundering, pillage. 

rap-i-6, seize, tear; rap-Ax, adj., tearing, furious ; rap-ina, ae, f., 
robbery, plunder ; rapi-du-s, adj., tearing away, impetuous. 

Harpy. 


ἄρχω, be first. 

apx-w, be first, in point of time, begin, in point of station, rule’; 
part. ἄρχων, ovr-os, ὁ, leader, ruler; ὑπ-άρχ-ω, be under as a founda- 
tion, support, exist, be; apx-h, js, beginning, rule, dominion; ἀρχα- 
fo-s, a, o-v, from the beginning, ancient, old; évwyor-dpxy-s, ov (see 
ἐνωμοτίᾶ, enomoty), commander of an enomoty; xwyu-dpxn-s, ov (cf. 
κεῖμαι), village chief; ἄρχ-ικό-ς, ἡ, ὅ-ν, fit to command; ἀρχ-ό-ς, ὁ, 
leader ; vr-apxo-s, ὁ, under officer, lieutenant ; dv-apxo-s, o-v, without 
leaders ; dvapx-la, as, lack of leaders, anarchy ; ἵππ-αρχο-ς, ὁ (cf. R. 
ax), cavalry commander; puov-apxo-s, ὁ (see udvo-s, alone), one who 
rules alone ; povapx-ia, ds, rule of one, monarchy ; vab-apxo-s, ὁ (cf. 
vats), commander of a fleet, admiral; vavapxé-w, be admiral; πείθ- 
apxo-s, o-v (cf. R. πιθ), obeying authority, obedient ; πειθαρχέ-ω, obey 
α superior, defer to; wodv-apx-la, as (cf. R. wda), command vested in 
many persons ; συμποσί-αρχο-ς, ὁ (cf. R. wo), president of a drinking- 
party; ταξί-αρχο-ς, ὁ (cf. R. trax), commander of a τάξις, taxiarch ; 
ppovp-apxo-s, ὁ (cf. πρό and R. 2 Fep), commander of a garrison. 

arch-bishop, arch-angel, archi-episcopal, arche-type, archaic, 
archaeo-logy, archives, an-archy, hier-archy, mon-archy, hept- 
archy, tetr-archy, etc. 


αὐτός, self, same. 


αὐτό-ς, αὐτή, αὐτό, self, same, in derivatives and compounds, self, 
same, very; αὐτοῦ, adv., in the very place, here, there; αὐτό-θεν, adv., 
Srom the very spot, hence, thence ; αὐτό-θι, adv., in this or that very place ; 
airé-ce, adv., to the place itself, thither ; αὕτως, adv., in the very man- 
ner; ὡσ-αύτως (see ws, thus), in this same way, likewise, just so; αὐθ- 
huepo-s, o-v (See hucpa, day), un the same day; αὐθημερό-ν, adv., on the 
same day; αὐθημερίζω, return on the same day; avé-alpero-s, o-v (cf. 
aipéw), self-appointed ; αὐτο-κέλευστο-ς, o-v (cf. R. wed), self-directed, 
of one’s own accord ; αὐτο-κράτωρ, op-os, ὁ, ἡ (cf. R. 1 wpa), being one’s 


255 R. βα-βάλλω 


own master, absolute; av’ré-uaro-s, ἡ, o-v (cf. R. pa), self-impelled, 
spontaneously ; avrd-yodo-s, ὁ (see βλώσκω, go), deserter; αὐτομολέ-ω, 
desert ; αὐτό-νομο-ς, o-v (cf. R. ven), under one’s own laws, independent ; 
ἑ-αυτοῦ, contr. αὑτοῦ, etc. (see ov, of him), of himself, etc. ; éu-avroi, 
etc. (see ἐγώ, I), of myself, etc.  σε-αυτοῦ, contr. σαυτοῦ, etc. (see σύ, 
you), of yourself, ete. 

auth-entic, auto-biography, auto-crat, auto-graph, auto-maton, 
auto-nomous, aut-opsy, tauto-logy. 


R. Ba, ba, ua, go. 

βαίνω (for Bav-w), fut. βή-σο-μαι, etc. (theme βα»-, Ba-), go, walk ; 
Ba-ré-s, 4, 6-v, passable ; &-Baro-s, o-v, impassable, not fordable; δύσ- 
Baro-s, o-v, hard to travel; dia-Bard-s, ἡ, 6-v, that can be crossed, ford- 
able; d-didBaro-s, o-v, not to be crossed; dvc-didBaro-s, o-v, hard to 
cross ; dia-Ba-réo-s, a, o-v, that must be crossed ; mpoo-Bato-s, ἡ, ὅ-ν. 
that can be approached, accessible ; βά-σι-ς, €-ws, ἡ, α going, stepping, 
step ; dvd-Bact-s, €-ws, ἡ, @ going up, ascent, expedition into the interior ; 
did -Bact-s, €-ws, ἡ, α Crossing, passage ; Ex-Bact-s, €-ws, ἡ, way out, egress ; 
κατά-βασι-ς, €-ws, ἡ, a going down, descent, march from the interior ; 
βάσι-μο-ς, o-v, passable ; βά-δην, adv., at a walk; βῆ-μα, ar-os, τό, step, 
stride; βω-μό-ς, ὁ, elevation, altar; Bé-Ba-vo-s, a, o-v (reduplicated 
perf. stem fe-Ba-), standing fast (cf. βέβηκα, stand fast), trusty, con- 
stant ; βεβαιό-τω, make sure; Bax-rnp-ia, as (βα - κ), walking-stick, 
staf’; βάδ-ο-ς, 6 (βα - δ), α going, walk; βαδίζω, go on foot, walk, 
march ; βι-βάζω (theme βιβαδ-), make go. 

ua-d-u-m, I, n., ford; uad-6, go, walk ; ue-n-i-6, come ; ar-bi-ter, 
tri, m., spectator, judge; am-bu-16, walk about; ba-c-ulu-m, ij, n., 
staff. 


COME; basis, base, bacteria. 


βάλλω, throw (R. Bad). 

βάλλω (for βαλ-ίω, theme Badr-), throw, throw at, hit; δια-βάλλω, 
throw across at with words, slander; Béd-os, ε-ος, τό, thing thrown, 
missile; Bod-h, fs, α throw; ἀνα-βολή, js, that which is thrown up, 
earthwork ; δια-βολή, Hs, slander ; εἰσ-βολή, ἧς, invasion, entrance, pass ; 
ἐμ-βολή, ἧς, invasion; προ-βολή, Hs, a throwing forward ; προσ-βολή, 
Rs, assault, charge; συμ-βολή, js, a hurtling together, encounter ; ὑπερ- 
Bor}, js, a throwing over, crossing; werpo-Bod-ia, as (see mérpo-s, 
stone), stone-throwing ; ἀκρο-βολίζο-μαι (cf. R. ax), throw from a dis- 
tance ; ἀκροβόλι-σι-ς, €-ws, ἡ, throwing from a distance, skirnvish. 


em-blem, pro-blem, dia-bolic, devil, para-ble, sym-bol. 


SS , Δ ΘΝ 


--.--- 


R. BoF-R. γεν 256 


R. Bog, bou, cry out. 

Bo-h, 7s, cry, shout; Bod-w, shout, cry aloud; Bon-@00-s, ov, and 
Bon-06-s, ὅ-ν (see θέω, run), hurrying to the shout, helping ; BonOé-w, 
help, rescue ; βοήθε-ια, as, help ; βοῦ-ς, Bo-ds, ὁ, ἡ, bull, ox, cow (‘the 
bellower’); βό-ειο-ς, a, o-v, Of an OX; ὠμο-βόειο-5, a, o-v, OF ὠμο-βό- 
tvo-s, 7, o-v (See wud-s, raw), of raw ox-hide; Bo-e-xd-s, ἡ, 6-v, Or Bo-i- 
κό-ς, H, ὅ-ν, Of an Ox; βου-λιμίᾷ, as (See Niud-s, hunger), ox-hunger, i.e. 
great hunger, bulimy  βουλιμιά-ω, have bulimy ; Bov-wdpo-s, o-v (cf. R. 
περ); Ox-piercing. 

bo-6, cry out; bG-s, bou-is, m. and f, bull, ox, cow; bibu-lu-s, 
adj., of oxen. 

cow ; bu-colic, buffalo, but-ter, hecatom-b. 


R. Bor, uol, will, wish. 

BovA-o-par, will, wish; βουλ-ή, ἧς, will, plan, consultation; ém- 
βουλή, Hs, α planning against, plot ; συμ-βουλή, ἣς, a planning together, 
advice ; ciu-Bovd-o-s, 6, adviser; βουλεύ-ω, plan, think up; βελ-τ-ίων, 
ov, gen. ov-os (stem BeXd-ro-), comp., better (‘more desired’); BéA-r- 
twTo-s, 7, 0-v, SuUp., best. 

uol-6, will, wish; uol-un-ta-s, itis, f, will, choice; n6l6 (ndn 
uold), be unwilling ; mal6 (magis uold), prefer. 


WILL, WELL, WEAL, WEALTH, WILD. 


R. γεν, gen, beget. 


yl-yv-o-par (for yi-yev-o-uar), be born, become; yév-va, as, descent ; 
‘yevva-io-s, a, o-v, befitting one’s birth, noble; yevvaid-rn-s, nr-os, ἡ; no- 
bility ; yév-os, e-os, τό, family, race; συγ-γενής, és, of the same race; 
ovyyéve-ta, as, kinship; yeve-d, as, birth; yév-o-s, ὁ, that which is be- 
gotten, offspring ; &x-yovo-s, o-v, born of, as subst. plur., descendants ; 
mwpd-yovo-s, ὃ, forefather; yov-eb-s, é-ws, 6, begetter, plur., parents ; 
γυν-ή, γυν-αικ-ός, ἡ, woman (orig. ‘mother’), 


gi-gn-6, produce, bear ; gen-iu-s, i, m., tutelar deity ; in-gen-uu-s, 
adj., freeborn, noble; gén-s, gen-ti-s, f., race, nation; gen-e-r, eri, m., 
son-in-law ; gen-us, er-is, n., birth, origin, kind; gn&-sc-o-r, na-sc- 
o-r, be born; na-tira, ae, f., birth, nature. 

CHICK, CHILD, CHIT, COLT, KID, KIN, KIND, KING, KITH; endo-gen, 
hydro-gen, genesis, hetero-geneous, genea-logy, cosmo-gony, theo- 


gony, miso-gynist., 


257 yévus-R. γνω 


yévus, chin. 


yévu-s, v-os, ἡ, under-jaw, chin; yév-evo-v, τό, part covered by the 
beard, chin; γενειά-ω, grow a beard; d-yéve.o-s, o-v, beardless. 


gen-ae, arum, f., cheeks. 


CHIN. 


γῆ, earth. 


γῆ, γῆς (for yea, etc., Epic and Tragic ya-ia), earth ; γήτινο-ς, ἡ, ο-ν, 
of earth ; γε-ώδης, es (cf. R. Ftd), earthy, deep-soiled ; γή-λοφο-ς, ὁ (see 
λόφο-ς, ridge, hill), mound of earth, hill; dvw-ye-w-v, τό, what is raised 
above the ground, upper floor ; κατά-γε-ιο-ς, o-v, under the earth, sub- 
terranean ; merb-ya-to-s OF μεσό-γε-ιο-5, o-v (see μέσο-ς, middle), inland; 
μεσόγαια Or μεσόγεια, as, midland, interior ; yn-i-rn-s, ov, countryman : 
γείτ-ων, ov-os, 6, neighbour. 


apo-gee, peri-gee, geo-desy, geo-graphy, geo-logy, geo-metry, 
ge-orgic. 


R. γνω, gna, gno, know. 


γι-γνώ-σκ-ω, know, think ; γνώ-μη, ns, thought, opinion ; γνώ-μων, 
ov-os, 6, one that knows; ἀ-γνώμων, ov, gen. ov-os, without knowledge, 
senseless ; ἀγνωμο-σύνη, ns, ignorance ; 6-vo-pa, ar-os, τό (for ο-γὙνο-μα 
with prothetic 6-), that by which one is known, name; ὀνομάζω, 
call by name; ὀνομασ-τί, adv., by name; dv-dvup-o-s, o-v, without 
name, nameless ; εὐ-ώνυμο-ς, o-v, of good name or omen; νό-ο-ς, contr. 
νοῦς, ὁ (for yvo-fo-s), power of thought, mind; voé-w, observe, think 
out; d-vdy-ro-s, o-v, not understanding, foolish; ἄ-γνο-ια, as, igno- 
rance; ayvoé-w, not know, not recognize; dudi-yvod-w, think on both 
sides, be in doubt ; ev-voo-s, οο-ν, kindly disposed ; εὔνοια, as, good-will ; 
edvo-ixd-s, ἡ, 6-v, well-disposed ; εὐνοϊκῶς, adv., with good will or affec- 
tion ; Kaxb-voo-s, oo-v (see κακό-ς, bad), ill-disposed ; κακό-νο-ια, as, 111- 
will ; διά-νοια, as, way of thinking, purpose ; ἔν-νοια, as, thought, inspi- 
ration ; mpé-voa, as, forethought. 


gna-ru-s, adj., knowing, skilled; nar-r-6, make known, tell ; na- 
uu-s (gna-uu-s), adj., diligent ; n6-se-6, learn-; n6-bili-s, adj., well- 
known ; n6-men, inis, n., name; i-gn6r6, not know ; no-ta, ae, f,, 
mark, sign. 

CAN, CUNNING, KEN, KEEN, KNOW, NAME, UN-COUTH; dia-gnosis, 
gnome, gnostic, a-gnostic, physio-gnomy, onomato-poeia, an- 
onymous, met-onymy, patr-onymic, pseud-onym, syn-onym. 


R. Sa-R. 2 Sax 258 


R. δα, da, divide, share. 


δῆ-μο-ς, ὁ, divided land, community, people; δημ-αγωγό-ς, ὁ (ef. 
R. ay), popular leader, demagogue ; δημαγωγέ-ω, play the demagugue ; 
Snub-cwo-s, a, o-v, belonging to the community ; ἀπό-δημο-ς, o-v, away 
from one’s country, abroad; ἀποδημέ-ω, be from home, go abroad ; 
ἔν-δημο-ς, o-v, at home, native. —Sac-pd-s, ὁ (δα - σ), division, tax; 
Sdop-ev-ci-s, ετως, ἡ, distribution. —Sam-dvn, ns (δα + 1), dividing of 
one’s fortune, expense; daravd-w, expend; ϑαψιλ-ἤς, és (for δαπ-τι- 
d-ns), liberal, plentiful ; ϑεῖπνο-ν, τό (for δεπ-ινο-ν), orig. distribution, 
hence, dinner; δειπνέ-ω, dine; d-derrvo-s, o-v, without dinner; σύν- 
δειπνο-ς, ὁ, companion at dinner ; δειπνο-ποιέ-ω (cf. wovéw), get dinner. 


dap-s, dap-is, f., feast ; dam-nu-m, I, n., expense, loss, injury. 
TIDE, TIME; dem-agogue, demo-cracy, demotic, en-demic, epi- 
demic. 


R. 1 Sax, dac, show, teach. 


δι-δαχ-ή, fs, teaching, instruction ; δι-δά-σκ-ω, fut. διδάξω, teach ; 
διδάσκ-αλο-ς, ὁ, teacher.—S8lx-n, ns, way pointed out, custom, right, 
justice ; ἄ-δικο-ς, o-v, unjust ; ἀδίκως, adv., unjustly ; ddicé-w, be unjust ; 
ἀδικ-ἰᾷ, as, injustice ; Slka-wo-s, a, o-v, right, lawful ; δικαίως, adv., with 
justice ; Sixad-ry-s, nr-os, ἡ, justice ; δικαιο-σύνη, ns, justice; δικάζω, 
give judgment ; δικασ-τή-ς, οὔ, one who gives judgment, dicast. — Selx- 
vu-pt, show, point out; Sety-pa, ar-os, τό, something to show with, 
sample. 

doc-e-6, teach; di-sc-6, learn ; in-dex, ic-is, m. and f., one who 
points out ; iti-dex, ic-is, m. and f., judge, juror ; causi-dic-u-s, 1, m., 
pleader, advocate ; dic6, dedicate ; dic-6, say, speak. 


TEACH, TOKEN; didactic, syn-dic, para-digm. 


R. 2 Sax, dac, take. 


Sdx-r-vAo-s, ὁ (formed on a stem dax-ro-), that which grasps, finger, 
toe; δακτύλοιο-ς, ὁ, finger-ring ; Séx-o-par, Ionic δέκ-ο-μαι, take, re- 
ceive; δοκ-ό-ς, ὁ, sustaining beam, joist ; dwpo-ddKo-s, o-v (Cf. R. 80), 
taking presents or bribes ; Swpodoxé-w, take bribes ; δοχ-ή, 7s, recepta- 
cle; διά-δοχο-ς, 6, one who takes in turn, successor. — δεξ-ιό-ς, a, ὅ-ν 
(Sex+o= det), on the right hand, right (since the right hand was 
oftenest used in taking); δεξιά, as (sc. χείρ), right hand ; δεξιό-ο-μαι, 
take by the right hand, welcome ; ὑπερ-δέξιο-ς, a, o-v, above on the right, 
above. 


259 R. ϑαρ-δέκα 


dig-itu-s, I, m., finger; dex-ter, adj., on the right, handy, skilful. 


TOE, TONGS; dactyl, date (the fruit), pan-dect, dock-yard 
synec-doche. 


R. dap, dal, split, tear. 


Sép-w, aor. ἐδάρην, take the skin off, flay Σ ved-5ap-ro-s, o-v (866 véo-s, 
new), freshly flayed; Sép-pa, ar-os, τό, hide, skin ; δερμάτ-ινο-ς,) ἢ, ο-ν 
leathern. | 


dol-6, split, hew; dol-or, oris, m., pain; dol-e-d, JSeel pain. 


TEAR, TIRE, TART (sour) ; epi-dermis, pachy-derm, taxi-dermy. 


R. δε, bind. 


Sé-w, collateral form δί-δη-μι, fut. δήσω, etc., bind; δε-σ-μό-ς, ὁ 
band, halter; στρωματό-δεσμο-ς, ὁ (cf. R. στρα), sack in which had: 
clothes were tied up ; ὑπό-δη-μα, ατ-ος, τό, that which is bound under 
the foot, sandal.—8et (for def-ec), impers., it is binding, one must; 
δέ-ω, fut. δεήσω, etc., be hindered, lack, mid. lack, wish, desire; Pi 
lack ; ἔνδε-ια, as, want, scarcity; ἡμι-δε-ἧς, és, wanting a half, half 
Jull ; ὑπο-δε-ής, és, comp. ὑποδεέσ-τερο-ς, rather deficient, inferior. 

dia-dem. 


δείδω, fear (prob. root Sv). 


δεί-διω, be afraid, fear; Sé-0s, ε-ος, τό, fear; d-de-hs, és, without 
Sear; ἀδεῶς, adv., fearlessly; Se-vd-s, ἡ, d-v, Srightful, terrible ; 
δεινῶς, adv., terribly ; δει-λό-ς, ἡ, ὅ-ν, cowardly ; ded-la, as, οὐνανάϊοι: 
δειλιά-ω, be afraid. 


di-ru-s, adj., fearful, awful. 


ἤ 
δέκα, ten. 


δέκα, ten; déxa-ro-s, ἡ, o-v, tenth > Sexd-rn, 1s, tenth part, tithe ; 
dexarev-w, exact the tenth part ; ἕν-δεκα (see els, one), eleven 7 évdéxaro-s, 
ἢ, o-v, eleventh ; δώ-δεκα (cf. δύο), twelve; τρισ-καί-δεκα (cf. τρεῖς), 
thirteen ; wevre-xal-dexa, also dexa-révre (cf. πέντε), fifteen ; ἑπτα-καί- 
δεκα (of. ἑπτά), seventeen; ὀκτω-καί-δεκα (cf. dura), eighteen. 


! decem, ten; dec-imu-s, tenth ; dé-ni, ten each ; dec-ur-ia, ae, f., 
division of ten men. 


TEN ; decade, deca-gon, deca-hedron, deca-logue, deca-syllable. 


R. δο-δύο 200 


R. do, da, do, give. 

δί-δω-μι, give; προ-δίδω-μι, give over, surrender, betray; mpodd-r7-s, 
ov, betrayer, traitor ; μισθο-δό-τη-5, ov (See μισθό-ς, wages), one who pays 
wages ; μισθοδοτέ-ω, pay wages, employ ; μισθοδο-σίᾶ, as, giving of pay ; 
δῶ-ρο-ν, τό, present, gift; Swpé-o-ua, give a present ; 5wpo-ddKo-s, o-v 
(cf. R. 2 Sax), taking presents or bribes ; dwpodoxé-w, take bribes. — 
δά-ν-ος, c-os, τό (a+), money lent; davelfw, lend money, mid., have 
money lent to one, borrow. 

dé (da-re), give; d6-s, do-ti-s, f., dowry ; d6-nu-m, 1, n., gift. 

dose, anec-dote, anti-dote. 


R. δοκ, dec, beseem. 


Sox-é-w, seem, seem right, think ; δόγ-μα, ar-os, τό, that which seems 
to one, principle; δόξα, ns (for dox-ca), opinion, renown ; ἔν-δοξο-ς, 
o-v, in renown ; δοξάζω, think, believe ; δόκ-ιμο-ς, ο-ν, approved ; δοκιμάζω, 
test, examine ; δοκιμα-σίᾶ, as, test, examination. 

dec-et, impers., it is seemly, it behooves ; dec-us, or-is, n., grace, 
glory; dec-or, or-is, m., comeliness; decGr-u-s, adj., seemly; dig- 
nu-s, adj., worthy. 

dogma, doxo-logy, hetero-dox, ortho-dox, para-dox. 


δύναμαι, be able. 
δύνα-μαι, be able, can; Svva-rd-s, ἡ, ὅ-ν, able, possible ; ἀ-δύνατο-ς, 
ο-ν, unable, impossible; Svvd-c-rn-s, ov, a mighty man, nobleman ; 
δύνα-μι- 5. €-ws, ἡ, ability, means. 
- dynamic, hydro-dynamics, dynamite, dynasty. 


δύο, two (root d¢a, dv). 

δύο (for 5fo), two; σύν-δυο, two by two; δώ-δεκα (cf. Sexa), twelve ; 
δεύ-τερο-ς, a, o-v, second; δι-ά, prep., orig. between, asunder, then 
through ; δί-χα, adv., in two parts; διχάζω, divide in two ; δί-ς, adv., 
twice, in composition also δι- ; δισ-χέλιοι, at, a (see χέλιοι, thousand), 
two thousand; δι-μοιρίᾷ, ds (μοῖρα, lot, portion, see μέρος, share), 
double share; Sl-rnxv-s, v (see πῆχυ-ς, cubit), of two cubits; δί- 
πλεθρο-ς, o-v (cf. R. waa), of two plethra; 5:-rddo-s, ἡ, ο-ν (cf. R. 
aha), two-fold, double; δι-πλάσιο-ς, a, o-v (cf. R. wha), two-fold; 
5t-ppo-s, ὁ (cf. R. dep), that which holds two, chariot-board; év- 
δίφρ-ιο-5, o-v, on the same seat with one; διᾶ-κόσιοι, at, a (Cf. ἑκατόν), 
two hundred. 


261 pie 


duo, duae, two; du-b-iu-s, adj., doubtful; bi-s, adv., twice; 
bi-ni, adj., two by two; di-s-, inseparable prefix, asunder ; due-llu-m, 
bellu-m, i, n., war. 


TWO, TWAIN, TWICE, TWIN; Qi-aeresis, di-lemma, di-ploma, di- 
phthong, dia-bolical, dia-critic, dia-gonal, dia-gram, di-ocese, hen- 
dia-dys. 


εἴκοσι, twenty. 


εἴκοσι (see Note), twenty ; τριά-κοντα (cf. τρεῖς), thirty ; τριᾶκόντ- 
opo-s, ἡ (cf. R. ep), thirty-oared ship; rerrapd-xovra (cf. τέτταρες), 
JSorty ; πεντή-κοντα (cf. πέντε), fifty ; πεντηκον-τήρ, ἢρ-ος, ὁ, commander 
of fifty men ; wevrnxdbvr-opo-s, ἡ (cf. R. ep), jifty-oared ship ; πεντηκοσ- 
τό-ς, ἡ, ὁ-ν, fiftieth ; πεντηκοστ-ύ-ς, ύ-ος, ἡ, the number fifty, body of 
Jifty men; ἑξή-κοντα (cf. ἕξ), sixty ; ἑβδομή-κοντα (cf. ἑπτά), seventy ; 
ὀγδοή-κοντα (cf. ὀκτώ), eighty ; ἐνενή-κοντα (cf. ἐννέα), ninety. 


uiginti, twenty ; tri-ginta, thirty, etc.; ni-cé-simu-s, adj., twenti- 
eth; tri-cé-simu-s, adj., thirtieth, etc.; ui-cé-ni, adj., twenty each ; 
tri-cé-ni, adj., thirty each ; quadra-gé-ni, adj., forty each, etc. 

TWENTY ; icosa-hedron, pente-cost. 

Nore. —ef-xoot, which appears in other Greek dialects as εί-κατι, 
βεί-κατι, was originally a compound meaning twice ten. Cf. δύο and 


δέ-κα (-κοσι and -xovra in tpid-xovra, etc., being reduced forms). Cf. 
Latin uiginti, English Twen-ry. 


ἑκατόν, hundred. 


ἑκατόν (see Note), one hundred ; διᾶ-κόσιοι, a, a (cf. δύο), two hun- 
dred; τριᾶ-κόσιοι, at, a (cf. τρεῖς), three hundred; τετρα-κόσιοι, at, a 
(cf. τέτταρες), four hundred ; πεντα-κόσιοι, at, a (cf. πέντε), five hun- 
dred ; ἑξα-κόσιοι, at, a (cf. ἕξ), six hundred ; ἑπτα-κόσιοι, at, a (cf. ἑπτά), 
seven hundred ; ὀκτα-κόσιοι, at, a (cf. ὀκτώ), eight hundred. 


cen-tu-m, one hundred ; du-cen-ti, two hundred, etc. ; cen-tur-ia, 
ae, f., division of one hundred men; centuri-6, On-is, m., commander 
of a hundred. 


HUNDRED ; hecatom-b. 


Nore. — ἑ-κατόν is a compound of ἕν, one (see els, one), and a base 
meaning hundred, xa-ro-v (for xav-ro-v), appearing also as -κοσιοι (cf. 
cen-tu-m, -cen-ti). 


ἐν--ἔοικα 


ἐν, ΤΉ. 

éy-(, ἐν, prep., in; εἰς (for ev-s), prep., into; ἐν-τός, adv., inside 
of ; ἔν-δο-ν, adv. (an acc. in form), inside; ἔνδο-θεν, adv., from the 
inside; ἔσω or εἴσω (for ev-cw), adv., inside; ἔσω-θεν, adv., from 
inside ; ἔν-θα, adv., where, there ; ἐνθά-δε, adv., here ; ἔνθα-περ, adv., 
there where ; ἔν-θεν, adv., from there; ἐνθέν-δε, adv., from hence ; év- 
ταῦθα, adv., therein ; ἐν-τεῦθεν, adv., thence ; €v-repo-v, τό, intestine. 

in, prep., in, into ; in-tus, adv., within ; intes-tinu-s, adj., internal, 
neut. plur. intestina as subst., intestines; in-de, adv., thence; in- 
ter, prep., between; inter-ior, adj., inner; in-timu-s, adj., inmost ; 
intra, prep., within ; intr6, adv., within. 


In; esoteric, dys-entery. 


ἐννέα, nine. 
é-vvéa (ἐ- prothetic), nine  ἐνενή-κοντα (cf. εἴκοσι), ninety ; éva-ro-s, 
n, o-v, ninth ; évd-xis, adv., nine times. 


nouem, nine ; n6na-ginta, ninety ; n6nu-s, adj., ninth; N6nae, 
arum, f., Nones (ninth day before the Ides). 


NINE ; ennea-gon, ennea-hedron. 


ἕξ, siz. 

ἕξ, six; ἑξά-κις, adv., six times; ἑξακισ-χίλιοι, at, a (see χΐέλιοι, 
thousand), six thousand ; ἐξά-πηχυ- or &-rnxv-s, v (See πῆχυ-ς:, cubit), 
of six cubits ; ἑξα-κόσιοι, at, a (cf. ἑκατόν), six hundred ; ἑξή-κοντα (cf. 
εἴκοσι), sixty ; Ex-ro-s, ἡ, o-v, sixth ; éxr-aio-s, a, o-v, on the sixth day. 


sex, six; sex-iéns, adv., six times; sex-tu-s, adj., sixth; sex- 
centi, sés-centi, six hundred ; sexa-ginta, sixty ; sé-méstri-s, adj., 
of six months. 


six; hexa-gon, hexa-meter. 


ἔοικα, be like. 


€-oux-a, pf. as pres. (theme elx-), be like, appear; part. ἐοικ-ὡς and 
εἰκ-ὡς, via, és, likely, natural ; εἰκότως, adv., naturally ; εἰκάζω, make 
like, compare, conjecture ; εἰκ-ὦν, ὀν-ος, ἡ, likeness, image; ἀ-εικ-ής, 
contr. alx-hs, és, unseemly, shameful ; αἰκίζω, treat shamefully, outrage, 
torture. 


icono-clast, icono-graphy. 


263 


ἑπτά, seven. 


ἑπτά, seven; éwra-xal-dexa (of. δέκα), seventeen ; ἑπτα-κόσιοι, at, a 
(cf. ἑκατόν), seven hundred ; ἑπτά-κις, adv., seven times; &B5-opo-s, 7, 
o-v (for ér-opo-s), seventh ; ἑβδομή-κοντα (cf. εἴκοσι), seventy. 

septem, seven; sept-iéns, adv., seven times; sept-imu-s, αὐ.) 
seventh ; septua-ginta, seventy ; septin-genti, seven hundred. 


SEVEN; hepta-gon, hepta-hedron, hept-archy, hebdomadal. 


R. ep, er, Ta, row. 

ép-é-ry-s, ov, Tower ; ὑπ-ηρέτη-ς, ov, rower, assistant of any sort, 
servant ; bmnperé-w, serve; ἐρεσ-ίᾶ (eper-ta), as, α rowing; ἐρέσσω 
(eper-w), TOW; Tpt-hp-nS, ετος, 7) (cf. τρεῖς), galley with three banks of 
oars, man-of-war ; Tpinp-trn-s, ov, man-of-war’s man ; πεντηκόντ-ορ-ο-ς, 
ἡ (cf. πέντε and εἴκοσι), fifty-oared ship ; τριᾶκόντ-ορ-ο-ς,) ἡ (cf. τρεῖς 
and εἴκοσι), thirty-oared ship. 

ré-mu-s, i, m., oar; tri-rémi-s, is, f., trireme ; ra-ti-s, is, f., raft, 
float. 


ROW, RUDDER. 


R. eo, es, live, be. 


εἰςμί (for εσ-μὸ), et (for εσ-ι, orig. εσ-σιν), ἐσ-τί, etc., be; part. wy, 
οὖσα, ὄν, gen. ὄντ-ος, etc. (stem drT-), older form ἐ-ών, etc. (stem ἐ-οντ- 
for ec-ovr-) ; ovo-la, as (for ovr-a), property (that which is), being, 
existence ; é&-ovela, as, possibility, power (cf. ἔξ-εστι, it is free to one, 
it is allowed) ; συν-ουσίᾶ, as, a being together ; ér-d{w (from a stem 
er-o- for o-er-o-), examine, test (see if a thing is) ; ἐξ-ετάζω, examine 
closely, inspect ; ἐξέτα-σι-ς, €-ws, h, examination, inspection, review ; 
ἔτ-υ-μο-ς, o-v (er-v- for o-er-v-), true, actual ; €r-o1-po-s, 7, ὁ-» OF o-s, 
o-v (ér- for o-er-), real, ready, prepared ; ἑτοίμως, adv., readily ; és 
(for eo-v-s), real, true, good ; neut. contracted as adv., εὖ, well. 

Nore. —The group is remarkable as showing in nearly all of the 
words a complete loss of the root. The following Latin words all 
preserve traces of it. 

s-u-m (for es-u-m), be, inf. es-se; ab-sén-s, adj., absent ; prae- 
sén-s, adj., present; s-6-1-8, adj., the real one, guilty, criminal ; 
er-u-s, i, m., master, lord. 

AM, ART, IS, ARE, SOOTH, SIN ; etymo-logy, eu-logy, ev-angelist. 


R. 1 Fep-R. Fer 264 


R. 1 fep, uer, speak. 
dpe (theme ép-), fut. ἐρῶ, pf. εἴρηκα, speak, say; pn-Td-s, ἡ, ὁ-ν, 
said, told; dwé-p-pyro-s, ο-ν, not to be told, secret; elph-vn, ns (for 


“-Ερη-νη), agreement, peace ; ῥή-τωρ, op-os, ὁ, speaker, orator ; ῥή-τρᾶ, 
as, verbal agreement, compact. 


uer-bu-m, i, n., word; uerb-dsu-s, adj., wordy. 
WORD; irenics, Irene. 


R. 2 fep, uer, protect, watch over. 


tp-x-os, ετος, τό, defence, wall; ἔρυ-μα, ar-os, τό (stem ἐρυ- for 
€-Fep-v, €-fpv), safeguard, protection ; ἐρυ-μνό-ς, ἡ, 6-v, defended, Sorti- 
fied; épt-x-w, hold back, keep off; obp-o-s, ὁ (for fop-o-s), watcher 
guardian ; p-op-o-s, 6, one who watches over, overseer 5 ppoup-b-s ὁ (for 
mpo-fop-0-s, Cf. mpd), one who watches in defence of, guard; Pini 
watch, guard; ppotp-apxo-s, ὁ (ef. ἄρχων), commander of a δὰ: 
φρούρ-ιο-ν, τό, guarded post, garrison ; τἱμ-ωρό-ς, ὁ-ν (for Ea 
cf. R. τι), watching over honour, avenging 3 Tiwwp-la, as, help ance 
geance ; τἱμωρέ-ω, help, avenge ; ve-wpb-s, ὁ (cf. vais), sunartacemiens 
of the dockyard ; νεώρ-ιο-ν, τό, place where ships are kept, dockyard ; 
ὁρά-ω, watch over, see, behold. 


t uer-e-or, reverence, fear ; ual-lu-s, i, m., stake, palisade ; uallu-m, 
1, n., rampart. 

@-WARE, be-WARE, WARY, WARD, WARN, WARES, WORTH, WEIR, 
WRAITH ; di-orama, pan-Orama, pyl-orus. 


R. ξεργ. 
épy-o-v, τό, work, deed ; apy-d-s, ὁ-ν (Epic d-epy-6-s), without work 
idle ; ev-epyé-ry-s, ov, ὁ, well doer, benefactor ; evepyeré-w, do a bind 
ness ; evepye-cla, as, kindness; xaxodpy-o-s, ὁ (Epic Ce see 
κακό-ς, bad), wrong doer; xaxovpyé-w, dou harm to " προ εν ὀ-ν 
working with ; ἐργάζο-μαι, do work, labour ; Wav-oipy-o-s, o-v (for ioe 
e-opy-o-s, Cf. was), that will do anything, villainous; wavovpy-la, as 
knavishness ; ὑπ-ουργ-ό-ς, ὁ-ν, serviceable, conducive to. ili 

WORK, WRIGHT, WROUGHT ; en-@rgy, Organ, orgy, ge-orgic, chir- 
urgeon, s-urgeon, lii-urgy, metall-urgy. pr γ. 


Ἷ 
Wl 


R. feo, ues, cover, clothe. 


év-vv-pe (for βεσ-νῦ-μι), Clothe; ἐσ-θή-ς, ἢτ-ος, ἡ, dress, clothes; 
εἶμα, ar-os, τό (for ξεσ-μα), garment; t-udr-w-v, τό, outer garment, 


himation ; to-mepo-s, o-v, of the evening (the ‘coverer’) ; éo-wépa, as, 
evening. 

ues-ti-s, is, f., clothing ; uas-u-m, 1, n., older form of uds, uas-is, 
n., vessel ; ues-per, eri or eris, m., evening star, evening. 


WEAR ; Hesperus. 


R. rex, uag, ueh, move, carry. 

bx-0-s, ὁ, carriage, chariot ; ὀχέ-ω, carry ; ὄχη-μα, aT-os, τό, convey- 
ance ; ox-erd-s, ὁ, conductor for water, ditch, drain; ὄχ-λο-ς, ὁ, that 
which moves in a mass, crowd, confusion; ὀχλέ-ω, move, disturb, 
trouble. 

uag-u-s, adj., rambling, unjixed ; ueh-é6, carry ; ueh-i-culu-m, 1, 7., 
carriage, conveyance ; uili-s, adj., cheap, worthless ; uéc-tor, Oris, m., 
traveller; uia, ae, f., way, road; uehe-mén-s, adj., eager, violent ; 
uéc-ti-gal, dlis, n., revenue, toll ; ué-lu-m, 1, 2., sail. 


WAG, WAGON, WAIN, WAY, WEIGH, WEDGE, WIGHT, WHIT, WING, 


WALL-eyed. 


R. £8, uid, see, know. 

elS-o-v (theme J5-), see; ἰδ-έα, as, look, form; εἶδ-ος, ε-ος, τό, 
look, shape ; εὐ-ειδής, és, good looking ; θυμο-ειδής, és (cf. R. 1 θυ), high- 
spirited ; μηνο-ειδής, és (uhvn, moon), crescent shaped ; σφαιρο-ειδής, és 
(σφαῖρα, ball), ball-like, spherical ; τιᾶρο-ειδής, és (see ridpa, tiara), 
tiara-shaped ; ἀντρώδης, es (for αντρο-ειδης, see ἄντρο-ν, cave), cave-like, 
cavernous ; γε-ώδης, es (cf. γῆ), earthy, deep-soiled ; εἴδ-ωλο-ν, τό, form, 
likeness, image; οἶδ-α, 2 pf. with pres. sense, know ; lo-rwp, op-os, ὁ, 
one who knows, wise man, judge; ἱστορέ-ω, seek to know, learn; 
ἱστορ-ἰἃ, as, knowledge got by inquiry. 

uid-e-6, see; ui-su-s, fis, m., look, vision ; é-uid-én-s, adj., looking 
out, obvious; pridén-s, «d)., foreseeing, prudent ; ui-tru-m, 1, 2., 
glass ; uis-6, look at attentively. 

WISE, WISE-@cre, WIT, WICKED, WITCH ; idea, spher-oid, typh-oid, 


idol, history. 


R. fix, wie, come. 

ἀφ-ικ-νέ-ο-μαι, arrive; ἱκ-ανό-ς, 4, ὅ-ν, coming up to, sufficient ; 
ἱκανῶς, adv., sufficiently ; tx-é-rn-s, ov, he that comes for aid, petitioner ; 
lxered-w, beg; olx-o-s, ὁ, place to which one comes, house, home ; 
olx-la, ds, house, dwelling ; οἴκο-ι, at home ; οἴκο-θεν, away from home ; 


RK. Luy—R. Oe °66 


οἴκ-α-δε, homeward ; οἰκο-δόμο-ς, ὁ (déu-w, build), house-builder ; olxo- 
δομέτω, build a house, build; οἰκο-νόμο-ς, ὁ (ef. R. ven), household 
superintendent ; olx-eio-s, ἃ, ο-ν, belonging to one’s house, familiar ; 
οἰκείως, adv., in a friendly way ; olxé-ry-s, ov, member of one’s house- 
hold, slave ; oixé-w, have a home, dwell ἡ οἴκη-σι-", e-ws, ἡ, act of dwell- 
ing, dwelling-place ; οἴκη-μα, ar-os, τό, dwelling, house ; οἰκίζω, found, 
Settle ; ἄπ-οικο-ς, o-v, away from home, as subst., colonist ; daock-la, as, 
colony ; Μοσσύν-οικοι, οἱ (see μόσσῦν, wooden tower), dwellers in wooden 
towers ; mepl-oxo-s, ο-ν, dwelling round ; περιοικέ-ω, live round or on 
the shore of. 


uic-u-s, 1, m., abode, street, village ; uic-inu-s, adj., of the neigh- 
bourhood ; uil-la, ae, f., country-seat. 


di-ocese, ecumenical, par-ochial, eco-nomy. 


R. fvy, iug, bind. 

ἴνγ-ό-ν, τό, yoke; ὑπο-ζύγ-ιο-ν, τό, beast under the yoke, beast of 
burden ; ζεύγ-νῦ-μι, yoke, join, fasten ἡ ζεῦγ-ος, ε-ος, τό, yoke of oxen, 
etc., team  ζευγ-ηλά-τη-ς, ov (see ἐλαύνω, theme é\a-, drive), one who 
drives a yoke of oxen, teamster ; gevyndaré-w, drive a yoke of oxen. 


jug-u-m, I, n., yoke; ii-mentu-m, i, n., beast of burden ; con- 
iinx, con-iux, iug-is, m. and J., husband, wife ; bigae, drum, ἢ, span 
of horses ; iixta, adv., adjoining, near ; iung-6, join. 


YOKE ; sy-zygy. 


Pe 
R. Ge, da, fa, place, put, make. 


τί-θη-μι, place, put, do; ἐπι-τίθημι, lay upon, mid., attack; ἐπίθε- 
σι-5) €-ws, ἡ, a setting on, attack ; eb-erlOe-ro-s, o-v, easily attacked or 
assailable ; d-ywv-0-0¢-rn-s, ov (ef. R. ay), judge of a contest ; θέεμι-ς, 
tr-os, ἡ, that which is laid down, law, right ; θε-σ-μό-ς, ὁ, law, ordi- 
nance ; παρα-κατα-θή-κη, ns, what is put down beside one, deposit ; ἀνά- 
θη-μα, at-os, τό, thing set up, votive offering ; σύν-θη-μα, ar-os, τό, 
thing agreed upon, agreement, watchword ; θη-σ-αυρό-ς, ὁ, something 
put away, treasure. 

-d6, only in compounds, as ab-d6, put away, cré-d6, put faith in, 
believe, per-d6, make away with, destroy ; fa-c-i-6, make, do ; 50, 
be done, become; pro-fic-i-sc-o-r, set oneself forward, set out; ftac- 
in-us, or-is, n., deed, misdeed; fac-ili-s, adj., easy to do. 


DO, DEED, DEEM, DOOM, king-pom; thesis, anti-thesis, paren- 
thesis, syn-thesis, theme, ana-thema, thesaurus, treasure. 


267 éa-R. 1 θυ 
. 
θέα, sight, spectacle (prob. root Oar). 
θέ-ἃ, as (Doric 64-a), sight, spectacle ; θαῦ-μα, ar-os, τό, something 
gazed at, wonder ; θαυμάζω, wonder at ; θαυμασ-τό-ς, ἡ, ὅ-ν, wonderful ; 
θαυμάσ-ιο-ς, a, o-v, wonderful ; θεά-ο-μαι (for Pear-o-uar), gaze at, look 
on; O€a-pa, ar-os, τό, sight ; θεω-ρό-ς, ὁ (Doric ea-pd-s), one who gazes ; 
Gewpé-w, be a spectator, review. 


theatre, amphi-theatre, theorem, theory. 


θεός, god. 

θε-ό-ς, ὁ, god, divinity; θεά, ἃς, goddess; Oe-io-s, a, o-v, divine; 
&-feo-s, o-v, godless, impious; θεο-σεβής, és (σέβ-ο-μαι, worship), god-~ 
fearing, religious ; θεοσέβε-ια, as, reliyion, piety. 

theo-crucy, theo-gony, theo-logy, theism, a-theism, pan-theism, 
poly-theism, apo-theosis, en-thusiasm, pan-theon. 


θρασύς, bold. 


θρασ-ύ-ς, εἶα, v, bold, daring, confident; θρασέως, adv., boldly ; 
θαρσύνω, θαρρύνω, make conjident, cheer ; θάρσ-ος, θάρρ-ος, ε-ος, τό, COR- 
Jidence, courage ; θαρρέ-ω, be confident, be of good cheer ; θαρρ-αλέο-ς, 
a, o-v, full of confidence ; θαρραλέως, adv., with confidence, boldly. 

fas-tu-s, tis, m., scorn, contempt ; fastid-iu-m, i, n. (for fastu-taed- 
iu-m), loathing, dislike. 


DARE, DURST; thrason-ical. 


R. 1 θυ, rush. 


θύ-ω, rush, rage; θύ-ελλα, ns, storm, hurricane ; θῦ-μό-ς, ὁ, the ani- 
mating principle in man, heart, wrath; θυμό-ο-μαι, be angry; θῦμο- 
ειἰδής, és (cf. R. FS), high-spirited ; ἄ-θῦμο-ς, o-v, without heart, dis- 


pirited; ἀθύμως, adv., faintheartedly ; GOup-la, as, faintheartedness ; 


dbvpé-w, be despondent ; verbal ἀθυμη-τέο-ς, a, o-v, must lose courage ; 
ἐν-θυμέ-ο-μαι, lay to heart, consider ; ἐνθύμη-μα, ar-os, τό, thought, idea ; 
ἐπι-θυμέ-ω, have one’s heart on, desire ; ἐπιθυμ-ίᾷ, as, desire, longing ; 
εὔ-θὺμο-ς, o-v, of good heart, cheerful; εὐθὺμέ-ο-μαι, be cheerful ; mpd- 
θῦμο-5, o-v, with mind intent, ready, willing ; προθύμως, adv., willingly ; 
d-mpb0uuo-s, o-v, not eager ; mpodvpu-la, as, readiness, eagerness ; προθῦμέ- 
ο-μαι, be eager; pd-Ovpo-s, o-v (see pd-du-s, easy), with mind at ease, 
indifferent, lazy ; ῥᾳθῦμ-ία, as, laziness; ῥᾳθυμέ-ω, live in idleness. 


R. 2 θυ-κεῖμαι 268 


R. 2 θυ, fu, smoke, sacrifice. 


θύ-ω, offer, sacrifice ; Ov-rhp, ἢρ-ος, ὁ, sacrificer; θυ-σίᾷ, as, sacri- 
Jice ; θῦ-μα, ar-os, τό, victim, sacrifice ; θυ-μ-έλη, ns, place for sacrijice, 
altar; Ovp-td-w, burn incense; θυμίᾶ-μα, ar-os, τό, incense; Ovua- 
τήριο-ν, τό, vessel for burning incense, censer ; θύ-ο-ν, τό, a tree the 
fragrant wood of which was burnt in sacrifice; θυό-εις, εσσα, ev, fra- 
grant ; θυ-ὠδης, es (ὄξω, smell), sweet-smelling ; θύ-μο-ν, τό, thyme. 


fii-mu-s, i, m., smoke; fii-n-us, er-is, n., funeral rites; fia-li-g6, 
in-is, f., soot ; fi-mu-s, 1, m., filth ; foe-du-s (for foui-du-s), adj., filthy. 


pust ; thyme. 


/ 
καίω, burn. 


KG-.w, Ka-w (theme xav-), burn; καῦ-σι-ς, e-ws, 7, @ burning ; καύσι- 
po-s, o-v, that can be burnt, combustible; xav-ré-s, Kav-o-Td-s, ἡ, ὅ-ν, 
burnt ; ἄ-καυστο-ς, o-v, unburnt ; ὁλο-καυτέ-τω (see ὅλο-ς, whole), bring 
a whole burnt offering ; xat-pa, ar-os, τό, heat. 


caustic, cauterise, holo-caust, calm. 


R. «aa, cal, call. 


xah-é-w, pf. κέ-κλη-μαι, etc., call ; κλῆ-σι-ς, €-ws, ἡ, a calling ; ἐκ-κλη- 
ala, as, regularly summoned assembly ; ἐκκλησιάζω, hold an assembly. 
— κῆρν-ξ, ὕκ-ος, ὁ (formed on a stem xnp-v-), herald, crier ; κηρύττω, 
be a herald, proclaim ; ἀ-κήρῦκ-το-ς, o-v, unproclaimed ; κηρὕκ-ειο-ς, ο-ν, 
of a herald; xnptxew-v, τό, herald’s staff.—«patw (for xpa-y-w), cry 
out, call aloud ; xpavy-h, 7s, outcry. 

cal-6, call together; Kale-ndae, arum, f., day of proclamation, 
Calends ; con-cil-iu-m, i, n., meeting ; n6men-cla-tor, Or-is, m., one 
who calls by name ; cla-m6, cry out; cla-ru-s, adj., clear; clas-si-s, 
is, f., class. 

HALE, HAUL, HAL-yard ; ecclesiastic. 


κεῖμαι, lie. 

κεῖ-μαι, lie; κοι-μά-ω, lay to rest; κῶ-μο-ς, ὁ, banquet (where the 
guests reclined); x@-py, ns, dwelling-place, village (‘ resting-place ᾽); 
κωμ-άρχη-ς, ov (cf. apxw), village chief; κωμή-τη-ς, ov, villager ; K@-pa, 
ατ-ος, τό, deep sleep. 

ci-ui-s, is, m., citizen ; tran-qui-llu-s, adj., quiet ; quié-s, étis, 7.) 
a lying still, rest ; quié-sc-6, keep quiet. 


269 R. κελ-π. 1 κρα 


HIVE, HIND (peasant), HOME; Cemetery, com-edy, comic, en- 
comium, coma. 


R. xed, cel, set in motion. 


κέλ-ο-μαι, set in motion, urge on; κέλ-λω, ὁ-κέλ-λω, drive on, run 
ashore ; xed-eb-w (for xed-ef-w), drive, order, command, bid; κελευ-σ- 
TO-s, ἡ, ὅ-ν, ordered, bidden; avro-xéXevoro-s, o-v (cf. αὐτός), self- 
directed ; éy-xédevoro-s, o-v, instigated ; mapa-xéhev-ci-s, €-ws, ἡ, AN en- 
couraging, cheering on; κέλ-ευ-θο-ς, ἡ, path, way, track ; ἀ-κόλουθο-ς, 
o-v, going the same way ; ἀκολουθέ-ω, follow ; κῶλ-ο-ν, τό, leg, member 
(‘the goer’); vew-xép-o-s, ὁ (see vad-s, temple), keeper of a temple (one 
who ‘goes about,’ 1.6. attends to a temple). 

cal-li-s, is, m. and f., foot-path ; cel-er, adj., swift ; pro-cel-la, ae, 
J., tempest; pro-cul, adv., in the distance; cele-ber, adj., trodden, 
Srequented ; col-6, pursue, attend to, care for; cur-r6, run; cur- 
ru-s, iis, m., chariot ; cris, tr-is, n., leg. 

CAR, HORSE, wWal-RUS, GARROTTE, GARTER; @-colyte, colon, bu- 
colic. 


κίνδῦνος, danger. 


κίνδῦνο-ς, ὁ, danger ; d-xivdtvo-s, o-v, without danger ; ἀκινδύνως, adv., 
without danger ; émi-xlvdvvo-s, o-v, dangerous ; φιλο-κίνδῦνο-ς, o-v (cf. 
φίλος), loving danger ; κινδυνεύ-ω, encounter danger ; κινδυνευ-τή-ς, οὔ, 
a daring person ; κινδύνευ-μα, ατ-ος, τό, risk, venture. 


R. «og, cau, perceive, beware. 

ἀ-κού-ω, perceive, hear; dxov-c-rd-s, ἡ, ὅ-ν, that may be heard, 
audible ; axov-h, ἀκο-ή, ἧς, hearing, sound heard, report; ἐπ-ήκο-ο-ς, 
o-v, within hearing ; ὑπ-ήκο-ο-ς, o-v, listening to, obedient. 

cau-e-6, take care; cau-tu-s, adj., careful ; cau-sa, ae, f., that of 
which one takes heed, cause. 

SHEEN, SHOW; acoustic. 


R. 1 «pa, cre, cer, do, make. 


αὐτο-κρά-τωρ, op-os, ὁ, ἡ (cf. αὐτός), being one’s own master ; κράτ- 
os, €-0s, TO (κρα - τ), strength, might; xparé-w, be strong, be mas- 
ter; κρείττων, ov (for xper-wyv), comp., stronger, better; κράτ-ιστο-ς, 
ἢ, o-v, sup., strongest, best; éy-xparhs, és, possessed of power; ém- 
κρατής, és, master of; ἐπικράτε-ια, ds, mastery ; παγ-κράτ-ιο-ν, τό (Cf. 


R. 2 xpa—R. λεγ 210 


mwas), complete contest, in which, combining both wrestling and boxing, 
all the powers of the fighter were called into action. 

Cer-és, er-is, f., Ceres (‘goddess of creation’); pr6-céru-s, adj., 
high, tall; caeri-m6n-ia, ae, f., religious rite; cor-p-us, or-is, n., 
body; cre-6, produce, create; cré-sc-6, come into being; in-cré- 
mentu-m, i, ἢ... growth. 


HARD ; auto-crat, aristo-cracy, demo-cracy, demo-crat, etc. 


R. 2 «pa, car, mix, cook. 


κρᾶ-σι-ς, €-ws, ἡ, α mixing, crasis; κρᾶ-τήρ, ρ-ος, ὁ, mixing bowl ; 
&-xpa-ro-s, o-v, unmixed ; KepG-vvi-pi, mix; d-xépa-wo-s, o-v, unmixed, 
pure ; wépa-po-s, ὁ, earth for mixing and baking, potter’s clay; κεράμ- 
wo-v, τό, earthen jar; κεραμ-εοῦς, ἃ, οὖν, of earth or clay. 


car-b-6, On-is, m., charcoal; cul-ina, ae, f., kitchen; cre-mé, 
burn ; crem-or, Or-is, m., broth. 


HEARTH ; Crasis, idiosyn-crasy, crater. 


R. Xa, lat, conceal. 

Aa-v-0-dv-w, lie hid, escape the notice of; 40-pq, adv., secretly ; 
λήθ-η, ns, forgetfulness ; ἀ-ληθ-ἤς, és, unconcealed, true; ἀλήθε-ια, as, 
truth, candour ; ἀληθο-ινό-ς, ἡ, d-v, genuine; ἀληθεύ-ω, speak the truth. 

la-te-6, lie hid; late-bra, ae, f., hiding-place ; latebr-6su-s, adj., 
abounding in coverts, secret. 

lethargy, Lethe. 


R. rey, leg, gather. 


λέγ-ω, gather, count, tell, say ; λεκ-τό-ς, ἡ, ὅ-ν, selected ; ἀπό-λεκτο-ς, 
o-v, selected; ἐπί-λεκτο-ς, o-v, selected ; verbal ex-réo-s, a, o-v, to be 
said ; λόγ-ο-ς, ὁ, word, saying, reason ; ἀπο-λογέ-ο-μαι, say in defence " 
σπουδαιο-λογέ-ω (σπουδαῖο-ς, serious), carry on an earnest conversation ͵ 
ὁμό-λογο-ς, ο-ν (cf. dpa), saying the same, agreeing ; ὁμολογέ-ω, agree, 
confess ; ὁμολογουμένως, avowedly, by common consent ἡ σύλ-λογο-ς, ὁ, 
α gathering, meeting; συλ-λογ-ή, Fs, a gathering, levy; λογίζο-μαι, 
take into account, consider ; ἀ-λόγισ-το-ς, o-v, not considering, foolish. 


leg-G, collect, read ; leg-i6, Sn-is, f., body of soldiers, legion; leg- 
ti-men, in-is, n., pulse ; supel-lex, lecti-li-s, f., furniture; 6-lega-n-s, 
adj., accustomed to select, fastidious, choice ; lig-nu-m, i, »., gathered 
wood, fire wood. 


271 ΗΝ. Aex—-R. μα 


RAKE, RECKON ; dia-lect, lexicon, ana-logy, apo-logy, bio-logy, 
chrono-logy, philo-logy, apo-logue, cata-logue, dia-logue, epi-logue, 
homo-logous, log-arithm, logic, syl-logism. 


R. rex, leg, lie. 

λέχ-ος, ε-ος, τό, couch, bed; λόχ-ο-ς, ὁ, a lying in wait, ambush, 
company of armed men ; λοχί-τη-5, ov, one of the same company ; dox- 
ay6-s, ὁ (ef. R. ay), leader of a λόχος, captain; λοχᾶ γέ-ω, be captain ; 
ὑπο-λόχᾶγο--, 6, sub-captain, lieutenant ; \oxay-la, as, captaincy. 


lec-tu-s, i, m., couch; lect-ica, ae, f., litter; 1éx, lég-is, f., law ; 
1ég6, send with a commission, depute ; con-lég-a, ae, m., partner in 


office. 


LIE, LAY, LAIR, LAW, LOG, LOW. 


R. μα, ma, think. 


μέ-μα-α (Epic pf. with present meaning), think upon, long for, de- 
sire ; αὐτό-μα-το-ς, ἡ, o-v (cf. αὐτός), of one’s own desire, self-impelled, 
spontaneously. — pav-la, ds (μα -Ἑ ν--Ξ μαν), excited thought, madness ; 
patvo-pat (for μαν-ἰο-μαι), rage, be mad ; μάν-τι-ς, €-ws, ὁ, one inspired, 
seer, prophet; μαντεύ-ο-μαι, prophesy, presage; pavrev-rd-s, ἡ, ὅ-ν, 
foretold or directed by an oracle ; payte-io-s, a, o-v, oracular ; μαντείᾷ, 
ds, prediction, oracle; pév-os, €-os, τό, spirit, might, disposition ; εὖ- 
μενής, és, well-disposed ; Μοῦ-σα, ys, Muse (‘inspirer of thought’); 
μέν-ω, bethink oneself, wait ; pov-h, fs, a tarrying, halt; μην-ὕ-ω, pul 
one in mind, point out, reveal ; pvd-o-par, be mindful of, pay court to ; 
προ-μνάο-μαι, sue for, solicit; μι-μνή-σκ-ω, remind, mid. and pass., 
remember ; μνή-μη, ns, remembrance; pvij-pa, ar-os, τό, memorial ; 
ὑπό-μνημα, ar-os, τό, memorial, reminder ; μνη-με-ῖο-ν, τό, monument ; 
μνή-μων, ov, gen. ov-os, mindful, of good memory ; μνημον-ικό-ς, ἡ, O-P, 
having a good memory ; μνημονεύ-ω, recall, recollect ; μνη-σί-κακό-ς, ο-ν 
(see xaxd-s, bad), mindful of wrongs received, bearing malice ; μνησι- 
xaxé-w, bear a grudge.—pa-v-0-dv-0 (ua+ θ-- pad), learn, find out ; 
μαθη-τή-ς, οὔ, learner, pupil ; μάθη-μα, ατ-ος, τό, what is learnt ; μάθ-ος, 
ε-ος, τό, learning, knowledge; φιλο-μαθής, ἐς (cf. φίλος), fond of know- 
ledge. —pd-vo-par (for μασ-ιο-μαι, wa+o= pac), long for, strive after, 
seek ; μασ-τεύ-ω, seek after. 


m4-s, ma-r-is, adj., male ; man-e-6, stay ; mén-s, men-ti-s, ἢ, mind ; 
me-min-i, remember ; com-min-i-sc-o-r, devise, invent ; Min-er-ua, 
ae, f., Minerva (goddess of wisdom); men-ti-o-r, invent, deceive, lie ; 


R. pax-R. ped 272 


mon-e-6, remind, admonish ; mOn-s-tru-m, 1, n., divine omen ; m6n- 
str6, show. 

MAN, MEAN (intend), MIND, MOOD; mania, maniac, necro-mancy, 
muse, museum, music, mentor, mnemonics, mathematics. 


R. wax, mac, be great, have power. 


μακ-ρό-ς, d, o-v, long; pax-ap, ap-os, ὁ, ἡ, powerful, rich; μακάρ- 
to-s, a, o-v, blessed, happy; μακαρίζω, regard as happy; μακαρισ-τό-ς, 
h, d-v, to be thought happy, enviable; μῆκ-ος, ε-ος, τό, length; μήκ- 
ιστο-9) 7, o-v, SUpP., longest. — μηχ-ανή, 7s, means for doing, ma- 
chine, device ; μηχανά-ο-μαι, devise, contrive; a-uhxavo-s, o-v, without 
means, impossible, impracticable. — péy-a-s, μεγά-λη, μέγα, great, large ; 
μεγάλως, adv., greatly, exceedingly ; meyad-tyyopo-s, o-v (cf. dyelpw), 
talking big, boastful; μεγαληγορέ-ω, boast, brag; μεγαλο-πρεπής, és 
(see πρέπω, befit), befitting a great man, magnificent ; μεγαλοπρεπῶς, 
adv., munificently, splendidly ; μείζων, ov (for μεγ-ἴων), comp., greater ; 
péy-torro-s, ἡ, o-v, SUP., greatest ; μέγε-θος, €-os, τό, bigness, size. 

mac-tu-s, adj., glorified, worshipped; mact6, magnify, glorify ; 
mag-nu-s, adj., great ; maior (for mag-ior), adj., greater ; maximu-s 
(for mag-simu-s), adj., greatest; mag-is, adv. (for mag-ius), more ; 
mag-is-ter, tri, m., master. 

MAKE, MADE, MAY, MIGHT, MUCH, MORE, MOST, MANY, MICKLE, 
MATCH, MATE, MAIN, MAID; Mmacro-cosm, mechanic, o-mega, mega- 
therium, megalo-saurus. 


R. pay, fight. 

pax-n, ns, battle; μάχ-ο-μαι, fight; uaxn-Tb-s, ἡ, ὅ-ν, to be fought 
with ; da-udxnTo-s, o-v, unconquerable, not having fought; ἀμαχη-τί, 
adv., without fighting ; 4-uaxo-s, o-v, without battle ; duax-el, adv., with- 
out resistance ; ἀπό-μαχο-Ξ, o-v, not fighting ; éwl-uaxo-s, o-v, that may be 
easily attacked ; rpé-yaxo-s, o-v, fighting in front, champion; mpopuax- 
ew, ὥν-ος, ὁ, rampart ; cvp-uaxo-s, o-v, fighting with, allied ; συμμαχέ-ω, 
be an ally; συμμαχ-ἰᾶ, as, alliance; dmdo-udxo-s, o-v (cf. R. cer), 
Jighting in heavy arms ; ὁπλομαχ-ἰᾶ, as, heavy infantry tactics ; πυργο- 
paxé-w (see ripyo-s, tower), storm a tower; pax-tpo-s, o-v, fit to fight ; 
μάχαιρα, as (for wax-ap-ia), sword ; μαχαίρ-ιο-ν, τό, dagger. 


R. per, mer, mind, regard. 


μέλ-ει, impers., ἐξ is a@ care, it concerns; d-pyed-hs, ἐς, without con- 
cern, heedless; ἀμελῶς, adv., heedlessly; duéde-1a, as, carelessness ; 


273 R. pry-R. νεμ 


duedé-w, be careless; ἠμελημένως, adv. (from the pf. mid. partic. of 
dpedéw), carelessly ; ἐπι-μελ-ής, és, careful ; ἐπιμέλε-ια, as, care ; ἐπιμελέ- 
ο-μαι OF ἐπιμέλ-ο-μαι, take care of ; μελέ-τη; ns, care, attention, practice ; 
pederd-w, attend to, practise ; wedern-pd-s, d, ὅ-ν, well trained ; μέλ-λω, 
bethink oneself, hesitate, be on the point of. 

mor-a, ae, f., delay; me-mor, adj., mindful ; memor-ia, ae, f., 
memory. 


“ie 


R. py, mic, mix. 

pty-vi-pt, ply-vi-w, mix, mingle ; μικ-τό-ς, ἡ, ὅ-ν, mixed, to be 
mixed ; ἄ-μικτο-ς, ο-ν, unmixed ; ply-a, μίγ-δα, μίγ-δην, adv., mixedly ; 
μῖξι-ς, e-ws (for piy-o1s), ἡ, a mingling, intercourse ; pigto-BdpBapo-s, 
o-v (see Bdp-Bapo-s, foreign), half barbarian, half Greek. ! 

mi-sc-e-6, mix; mix-tu-s, adj., mixed; pr6-misc-uu-s, αὐ.) 
mixed, indiscriminate. | 


MIX, MASH. 


vais, ship (R. va, vu, flow, swim). 

vat-s, ve-ws, ἡ, ship (‘swimmer’); vav-apxo-s, ὁ (cf. ἄρχω), com- 
mander of a fleet, admiral; vavapxé-w, be admiral; vav-xdnpo-s, ὁ 
(κλῇρο-ς, lot, share), ship-owner ; vav-rnyo-s, ὁ (cf. R. way), ship- 
builder ; vavrnyé-w, build ships ; ναυπηγή-σιμο-ς, ο-ν, jit for ship-build- 
ing ; vat-ry-s, ov, seaman, sailor ; vavt-txd-s, 4, ὅ-ν, belonging to ships, 
naval; ναῦ-λο-ν, τό, money for passage by ship; ναῦ-σθλο-ν, τό (for 
ναυ-στολο-ν, see στέλλω, send), fare ; vaval-mopo-s, o-v (cf. R. wep), that 
can be traversed in ships; vav-cla, as, sea-sickness ; ve-wpd-s, ὁ (cf. 
R. 2 Fep), superintendent of the dock-yard; νεώριο-ν, τό, dock-yard ; 
νό-το-ς, ὁ, southwest wind (which brings wet weather); νῆ-σο-ς, 7, 
island (‘swimming in the sea’); Ile\owd-»-vynao0-s, ἡ (Πέλοψ, Pelops), 
Peloponnésus (‘ Pelops’s Island’) ; Πελοποννήσ-ιο-ς, a, o-v, Peloponne- 
sian ; Xepod-vngo-s, Att. Xeppd-vynco-s, ἡ (χέρσο-ς, Att. xéppo-s, main- 
land), land-island, peninsula ; vé-w (theme vv-), swim. 

na-ui-s, is, f., ship; ma-t6, swim, float; na-tr-ix, icis, f., water- 
snake ; n6, na-re, swim ; nii-t-r-i-6, suckle, nourish. 

argo-naut, nautical, nautilus, nausea, a-ner-oid, Nereid, Naiad. 


R. vey, nem, allot. 


νέμ-ω, distribute, portion out, pasture; vép-o-s, ὁ, that which has 
been allotted, custom, law; νόμ-ιμο-5, ἡ, o-v, customary, lawful ; ἀγορᾶ- 
vouo-s, ὁ (cf. dyelpw), one who makes rules for the market, market- 


. 


ξένος-ὀκτώ 214 


master ; &-vouo-s, o-v, without law, lawless; ἀνομ-ίᾶ, as, lawlessness ; 
avrd-vouo-s, ο-ν (cf. αὐτός), under one’s own laws, independent ; oixo- 
vouo-s, ὁ (cf. R. Fux), one who controls a household, housekeeper ; 
νομίζω, regard as a custom, believe, think ; vop-h, js, distribution, esp. 
of food, pasturage, hence, herd ; mpo-vouy, js, a going forth for food, 
foraging. 

nem-us, or-is, n., woodland ; num-e-ru-s, 1, m., number. 

NIMBLE, NUMB; nemesis, anti-nomian, astro-nomy, auto-nomy, 
eco-nomy, nomad, numismatic. 


Eévos, stranger. 

tévo-s, Ion. ξεῖνο-ς, ὁ, stranger, foreigner, mercenary soldier, foreign 
guest, friend ; ev-te.vo-s, o-v, kind to strangers, hospitable ; fev-ta, as, 
bond of friendship ; ξέν-ιο-ς, a, o-v, belonging to. a guest, hospitable ; 
ξεν-ικό-5, ἡ, d-v, belonging to a mercenary soldier ; ξενότο-μαι, become a 
guest-friend, be entertained; tevifw, entertain; mpo-tevo-s, ὁ, public 
guest or friend ; mpotevé-w, be one’s πρόξενος, managé. 


xeno-gamy, xeno-mania, xen-yl. 


ὁδός, way, road (R. aed, go). 

65-6-s, ἡ, way, road; dv-odo-s, 7, way up; dv-odo-s, o-v, having no 
way ; &p-od0-s, ἡ, a going away, retreat; dl-od0-s, ἡ, way through, 
passage ; εἴσ-οδο-ς, ἡ, way into, entrance ; ἔξ-οδο-ς, ἡ, way oul, depart- 
ure; ἐπ-εξόδ-ιο-ς, o-v, belonging to a march out; ev-od0-s, ο-ν, easy to 
travel ; &p-od0-s, 7, way to, approach; wdp-odo-s, 7, way along, pas- 
sage ; περί-οδο-ς, ἡ, way round, circuit ; πρόσ-οδο-ς, ἡ, way to, approach ; 
εὐ-πρόσοδο-ς, o-v, easy to approach; cbv-od0-s, 7, meeting, encounter ; 
85-w0-s, o-v, belonging to a journey ; ἐφ-όδιο-ν, τό, provision for a jour- 
ney ; ὁδ-εύ-ω, go one’s way; ddo-mdpo-s, ὁ (cf. R. wep), one who goes 
by road or by land; ὁδοιπορέ-ω, go by land ; ὁδο-ποιό-ς, ὁ (¢f. ποιέω), 
one who makes a road ; ὁδοποιέ-ω, make a road. 

sol-u-m, i, n., ground; sol-ea, ae, f., sole, sandal; séd-ulu-s, 
adj., persistent, diligent. 

epis-ode, ex-odus, meth-od, peri-od, syn-od. 


ὀκτώ, eight. 

ὀκτώ, eight ; dxrw-xal-dexa (cf. δέκα), eighteen ; ὀκτά-κις, adv., eight 
times; ὀκτακισ-χίλιοι, at, a (See χέλιοι, thousand), eight thousand ; 
ὀκτα-κόσιοι, at, a (cf. ἑκατόν), eight hundred ; ὄγδο-ο-ς, ἡ, ο-ν (for oxro- 
o-s), eighth ; ὀγδοή-κοντα (cf. εἴκοσι), eighty. 


R. οπ--παῖς 


octo, eight; octa-uu-s, eighth ; Octd-ber, adj., of the eighth 
month (the year beginning with March); oct-ién-s, adv., eight times ; 

= s _ " hall r 
octo-ginta, eighty; octin-genti, eight hundred. 


EIGHT ; OCta-gon, octa-hedron, octo-syllabic. 


R. o7r, 0¢, see. 


| ὄψο-μαι (οπ-σο-μαι), fut., ὄπ-ωπ-α, 2 pf., etc., see ; ὀπ-τό-ς, %, 
o-v, seen, visible ; ὑπ-οπτο-ς, o-v, looked at Jrom beneath the brows 
viewed with suspicion ; ὑποπτεύ-ω, suspect ; ὑποψία, as (for ED Sl 
suspicion ᾽ ὄψι-ς, e-ws, ἡ (for or-cr-s), aspect, look ; Sp-pa, ar-os, τό, hi 
— op6-arps-s, ὁ (or + 6), eye.— Gp, wr-ds, ἡ, face, countenance: 
kahh-wrlfw (stem κάλλο-, see καλό-ς, beautiful), give a fine éophenauns 
or look to, adorn; καλλωπισ-μό-ς, ὁ, adornment » ἄνθρ-ωπ-ο-ς, ὁ (ef. 
ἀνήρ), man (‘man-face Ἶ); ἀνθρώπ-ινο-ς, ἡ, o-v, human ᾽ πολυ-άνθρωπο-ς 
o-v (of. R. wha), thickly populated ; μέτ-ωπο-ν, τό, JSorehead (the shine 
between the eyes); προ-μετωπ-ίδιο-ς, a, o-v, before or on the forehead ; 
προμετωπίδιο-ν, τό, frontlet (armour on horse’s forehead) ; i 
τό, face, countenance. 


oc-u-lu-s, 1, ἢν." eye. 


EYE, OGLE; aul-opsy, optic, syn-opsis, ophthalmia, antel-ope, 
anthr-opo-logy, misanthr-ope, philanthr-opy, pros-opo-poeia. 


R. way, pag, fiz. 


πάγ-ος, €-0s, τό, what is fixed, mountain-peak or rocky hill, also 
Jrost ; πήγ-νυ-μι, make solid, freeze > vav-rny-d-s, ὁ (of. vats), ship- 
builder ; vavrnyé-w, build ships ᾽ ναυπηγή-σιμο-ς, ἡ, 0-v, OF o-s, o-v, fit 
Jor ship-building. —wayx-t-s, cia, v, firm, thick ; πάχ-ος, ε-ος, τό 
thickness ; ἅ-παξ, adv., once for all, once. 

Pac-1-SC-Or, agree; pax, pac-is, f., compact, peace ; Ppa-n-g-6, 
fasten ; pa-lu-s, 1, m., stake ; com-pagé-s, is, J, @ joining together ; 
pag-u-s, 1, m., district, canton. | 

FADGE (in Shakspere = prosper), FANG, FEE, FAIR (adj.), FAIN; 
Areo-pagus, pachy-derm. 


παῖς, child (R. παρ, pu, beget). 


παῖ-ς (for παρ-ιδ-ς), παιδ-ός, ὁ, ἡ, child; παιδ-ίο-ν, τό, little child, 
infant ἡ παιδ-ίσκο-ς, ὁ, young boy ; παιδ-ίσκη, ns, maiden » παιδ-ικό-ς, %, 
o-v, ΟΥ̓ a child, childish, playful; παιδικά, τά, plaything, favourite ; 
παιδ-εραστή-ς, οὔ (see ἔρα-μαι, love), lover of boys ἡ παιδεύ-ω, train a 


πᾶς- ἢ. wed 276 


child, educate ; ἀ-παίδευ-το-5, 0-¥, uneducated ; wade-la, as, education, 
— πῶ.λο-ς, ὁ, ἢ (for rof-do-s), foal, Jilly. 


pi-p-illu-s, i, m., orphan boy, ward ; pii-bé-s, is, f., youth ; pu-er, 
eri, m. (for pou-er), boy, child ; puel-la, ae, f., girl; pul-la-s, i, m., 
young animal. 


FOAL, FILLY; encyclo-paedia, ped-agogue. 


πᾶς: all. 


πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν (stem παντ-), all ; πάντ-Ἡ, adv., in every way ; πάντως, 
adv., anyhow; παντα-χῇ, παντα-χοῦ, adv., everywhere ; πάντο-θεν, 
adv., from every side; mdvro-ce, adv., in every direction; παντο- 
δαπό-ς, ή, 6-v, of every sort, manifold ; mwavro-io-s, a, o-v, of all sorts; 
παντά-πᾶσι(ν), adv., altogether, entirely ; πάν-υ, adv., altogether, very ; 
παγ-κράτιο-ν, τό (cf. R. 1 xpa), all-round contest, pancratium ; παγ- 
xddero-s, o-v (see χαλεπό-ς, hard), very hard; παγχαλέπως, adv., very 
hardly ; παμ-πληθής, és (cf. R. waa), in full numbers, multitudinous ; 
wdu-wodv-s, πόλλη, ποὰν (cf. R. waa), very numerous ; παμ-πόνηρο-5) 
ο-ν (cf. R. σπα), wholly bad ; παν-οῦργο-ς, ο-ν (of. R. Fepy), that will 
do anything, villainous ; πανουργ-ἰᾶ, as, knavishness ; παν-τελής, és (cf. 
τέλος), all complete, perfect ; παντελῶς, adv., perfectly, wholly, utterly ; 
ἅ-πᾶς, ἅ-πᾶσα, ἅ-πᾶν, all together ; σύὐμ-πᾶς, aoa, av, all taken collec- 
tively, all together. 


dia-pason, pan-aceda, pan-demonium, pan-oply, pan-orama, pan- 
theism, pan-theon, panto-mime. 


R. 2rd, ped, tread. 


πέδ.ο-ν, τό, ground (that which is trod on); πεδ-ίο-ν, τό, level 
ground, plain ; πεδ-ινό-ς, ἡ, ὅ-ν, flat, level; δά-πεδο-ν, τό (intensive 
prefix δα-), solid ground ; στρατό-πεδο-ν, τό (cf. R. orpa), campi'g- 
ground, camp ; στρατοπεδεύ-ω, encamp ; Eu-medo-s, ο-ν, in the ground, 
firm ; ἐμπεδό-ω, make firm, hold fast ; πεῖό-ς, ἡ, o-v (for πεδ-ιο-5), on 
foot ; πεζῆ, adv., on foot ; πεζεύ-ω, travel on foot or by land ; awéla, 7s 
(for πεδ-ια), foot, bottom ; τρά-πεζα, 7s (cf. τέτταρες), sable with four 
legs ; ὁμο-τράπεζο-5, o-v (ef. ἅμα), at the same table ; συν-τράπεζο-5, ὁ; 
table-companion ; πέδ-η, ns, fetter for the foot; πεδά-ω, fetter, bind ; 
πηδ-ό-ν, τό, bottom or blade of an oar; πηδ-άλιο-ν, τό, rudder ; πηδά-ω, 
spring, leap ; πού-ς, ποδ-ός, ὁ, foot ; wod-hpns, es (cf. R. ap), reaching 
to the feet; ποδίζω, tie the feet ; dpyupd-mous, οδ-ος, ὁ, ἡ (see ἀργύρεος, 
of silver, silver-footed ; τρί-πους, οδ-ος (cf. τρεῖς), three-footed, tripod ; 


277 wévre—R. ep 


ἐμ-πόδ-ιο-ς, o-v, at the feet, in the way ; ἐμποδίζω, be in the way, hinder ; 
ἐμποδών, adv., in the way, hindering ; ἐκ-ποδών, adv., out of the way. 

pé-s, ped-is, m., foot; com-ped-és, plur., f., shackles; pede-s, 
i-t-is, m., foot-soldier ; pedes-ter, adj., on foot ; im-ped-i-6, hinder ; 
oppidu-m, i, n., town; pé-ior, adj., lower, worse ; pes-simu-s, adj., 
worst. 

FETCH, FETTER, FIT, FOOT, VAT; parallelopi-pedon, tra-pezium, 
tra-pez-oid, anti-podes, tri-pod. 


πέντε, five. 


πέντε, five; πεντε-καί-δεκα and dexa-révre (cf. δέκα), fifteen; πεντά- 
xis, adv., jive times ; πεντή-κοντα (cf. εἴκοσι), Jifty ; πεντηκον-τήρ, 7p-os, 
commander of fifty men ; wevrnxdvr-opo-s, ἡ (cf. R. ep), jifty-oared ship ; 
πεντηκοσ-τό-ς, ἡ, 6-v, Jiftieth ; πεντηκοστ-ού-ς, U-os, ἡ, the number Jifty, 
body of fifty men; πεντα-κόσιοι, at, a (Cf. ἑκατόν), Jive hundred ; πέμπ- 
ro-s, n, o-v (cf. Aeolic πέμπε, five), fifth ; πεμπτ-αῖο-5, a, o-v, on the fifth 
day. 

quinque, jive ; quin-tu-s, adj., fifth ; quinqu-iéns, adv., five times ; 
quin-decim, jifteen ; quinqua-ginta, jifty ; quin-gentt, Jive hundred. 

FIVE; penta-gon, penta-meter, penta-teuch, pente-cost. 


R. περ, per, press through. 


πείρω (theme περ-), pierce; περ-όνη, 7s, Longue of a brooch, pin; 
mepova-w, pierce ; δι-αμ-περ-ές, adv., through and through ; περά-ω, pass 
through, cross; πεῖρα, as (for rep-ta), trial, proof (‘probing’) ; πειρά- 
ο-μαι, try, attempt ; ἄ-πειρο-ς, o-v, not having tried, without experience, 
unskilled ; €u-meipo-s, o-v, acquainted with ; ἐμπείρως, adv., by experi- 
ence ; πόρ-ο-ς, ὁ, means of passing ; ἔμ-πορο-Ξ5, ὁ, one who travels, mer- 
chant ; ἐμπόρ-ιο-ν, τό, trading-place, market ; d5ol-mopo-s, o-v (cf. 686s), 
going by land; ὁδοιπορέτω, go by land; dvrl-wopo-s, o-v, on the other 
side of the way, opposite; &-mopo-s, o-v, without ways and means ; 
ἀπορέ-ω, be without ways and means, be perplexed ; ἀπορ-ἰᾶ, as, lack 
of means, embarrassment ; βου-πόρο-ς, o-v (cf. R. BoF), ox-ptercing ; 
δύσ-πορο-ς, o-v, hard to travel ; δυσπορ-ἰᾶ, as, difficulty of passing ; εὖ- 
mopo-s, o-v, easy to travel through ; εὐπορ-ἰᾶ, as, facility of obtaining ; 
vavol-mopo-s, o-v (cf. vats), that can be traversed in ships, navigable ; 
πορεύ-ω, make a way for, make go; πορευ-τό-ς, ἡ, ὅ-ν, passable ; δυσ- 
πόρευτο-ς, ο-ν, hard to get through ; verbal ropev-réo-s, a, o-v, that must 
be traversed ; mope-la, as, a going, journey, march ; πορίζω, cause to go, 
carry, bring, supply; wép-d, adv., through, beyond ; πέρᾶ-ν (prop. 


R. wer—-R. πλα 278 


acc.), on the further side ; ἀντι-πέρᾶν or ἀντι-πέρᾶς, κατ-αντιπέρᾶν or 


κατ-αντιπέρᾶς, adv., over against ; mwepa-io-s, a, o-v, on the other side, 
opposite ; mepaw-w, carry to the other side, transport ; wepalyw (theme 
mwepav-), bring to the other side, bring to an end, accomplish. 


peri-tu-s, adj., experienced ; peri-culu-m, 1, n., trial, risk, danger ; 
por-ta, ae, ἢ, gate; por-tu-s, is, m., harbour; porti-cu-s, iis, /., 
covered walk ; par6, make ready ; par, adj., equal; peren-dié, adv., 
on the day after to-morrow. 


FARE, FAR, FERRY, FRITH, FEAR, FRESH, FRISK ; em-pirical, pirate, 
pore, em-porium. 


R. πετ, pet, fly, fall. 


wér-o-pat, fly ; πτά-τω, stumble, dash ; wt-wr-w (for mi-rer-w), fall ; 
εὐ-πετ-ής, és, falling well, easy, without trouble ; εὐπετῶς, adv., easily ; 
πτε-ρό-ν, τό, feather, wing ; πτέρ-υξ, vy-os, ἡ, wing. 


pet-6, strive for, seek ; im-petu-s, iis, m., attack; pen-na, ae, ἢ, 
feather ; acci-piter, tris, m., hawk (‘ swift of wing’). 


FEATHER, FIND; asym-ptote, coleo-ptera, di-ptera, lepido-ptera, 
ortho-pterous. 


R. πιθ, fid, bind. 


wel0-w (theme πιθ-), bind to oneself, persuade, mid., let oneself be 
bound, obey ; verbal πεισ-τέο-ν, one must obey ; ἀ-πειθ-ής, és, disobedient ; 
ἀπειθέ-ω, disobey ; wel0-apxo-s, o-v (cf. apxw), obedient; πειθαρχέ-ω, 
obey authority, defer to; πισ-τό-ς, ἡ, ὅ-ν, that does obey, trusty, faith- 
Sul; πιστό-τη-Ξ, nr-os, ἡ, faithfulness ; ἄ-πιστο-Ξ, not to be trusted, 
faithless; ἀπιστέ-ω, distrust, suspect; dmir-la, as, suspicion; πίσ- 
τι-ς, €-ws, ἡ, trust, confidence ; πιστεύ-ω, have confidence in, believe. 

fid-é-s, f., trust, faith; fid-u-s, adj., trusty; fid-6, trust; foed- 
u-s, er-is, n., league. 


BIND, BOND, BAND, BUNDLE, BODY, BED. 


R. mda, pla, fill. 


πί-μ-πλη-μι, fut. πλή-σω, fill ; πλή-ρ-ης, es, full ; wAH-8-w, be full ; 
πλῇθ-ος, €-0s, τό, multitude; παμ-πληθής, és (cf. was), in full num- 
bers, multitudinous ; χειρο-πληθής, és (cf. R. xep), hand-jilling ; whé- 
θρο-ν, τό, extent, measure, plethron ; 5l-wdeOpo-s, o-v (cf. δύο), of two 
plethra ; ἡμί-πλεθρο-ν, τό, half a plethron ; τρί-πλεθρο-ς, ο-ν (cf. τρεῖς), 


279 R. πλεξ 


of three plethra; πλεθρι-αἴο-ς, a, o-v, of a plethron ; &-mhe-To-s, 0-¥; 
not to be filled or measured ; πλέ-ω-ς, w-v, full ; Ex-wew-s, ὡ-ν; jilled 
up; ἔμ-πλεω-ς, w-v, quite full; σύμ-πλεω-ς, w-v, quite full; πλε-ίων, 
ov, comp., more, greater ; πλεον-έἔκτη-5, ov (cf. R. vex), one who has 
or claims more than he ought; πλεονεκτέ-ω, claim too large a part, 
get the better; πλήν, adv. and prep., except (orig. ‘ more than ’) ; 
ardetoro-s, 7, o-v (for πλε-ιστο-5}.) SUP., Most ; πόλ-ι-ς, €-WS, ἢ; city, state 
(orig. ‘ press,’ ‘ crowd’); wodt-r7-s, ov, citizen ; πολιτεύ-ω, be a citizen ; 
πολίζω, found a city; πόλισ-μα, ατ-ος, τό, town; πολι-ορκέ-ω (866 elpyw, 
hem in), hem in a city, besiege ; ἀκρό-πολι-ς5,) e-ws, ἡ (cf. R. ax), upper 
city, citadel ; μητρό-πολι-5) €-ws, ἡ (see μήτηρ, mother), mother city, 
capital ; πλοῦ-το-ς, ὁ; fullness, plenty, riches ; πλούσ-ιο-ς, ἃ, 0-», rich " 
πλουσίως, adv., in riches ; πλουτέ-ω, be rich ; πλουτίζω, enrich wens 
πολ-λή, πολ-ὕ, much, many ; πάμ-πολυ-ς, πόλλη; πολυ (cf. was), very 
numerous ; πολλά-κις, adv., many times, often; πολλα-χῇ, adv., in 
many ways ; πολλα-χοῦ, adv., in many places ; πολυ-άνθρωπο-:, ο-ν (cf. 
ἀνήρ and R. om), thickly populated ; wodv-apxla, as (cf. Sexe), com 
mand vested in many persons ; πολυ-πράγμων; ov, ZEN. ov-os (see πρᾶττω, 
do), busy in many things, over-busy, officious ; πολυπρᾶγμονέτω, De ¥ 
busybody ; πολυ-τελής, és (cf. R. rad), requiring much Ont ays costly ; 
d-whd-o-s, 7, 0-v, simple, Srank ; δι-πλόο-ς, ἡ, o-v (cf. δύο), two-fold, 
double; rerpa-wddo-s, ἢ, 9-¥ (cf. τέτταρες); four-fold, quadruple ; δυ- 
πλάσιο-ς, a, o-v (cf. δύο), two-fold ; τρι-πλάσιο-ς, a, ὁ-» (cf. τρεῖς); 
three-fold ; πολλα-πλάσιο-ς, a, o-v, many times as many. 


im-ple-6, jill up; plé-nu-s, adj., full; plé-rus-que, adj., the most ; 
locu-plé-s, adj., rich in lands, rich; pliis, adj., more Ν plé-b-s, is, 
f., the common people ; po-pulu-s, I, m., people, nation ; pi-bli-cu-s, 
adj., of the people ; am-plu-s, adj., of large extent. 

FILL, FULL; plethora, pleio-cene, pleonasm, acro-polis, metro- 
polis, cosmo-polite, poly-gamy, poly-glot, poly-gon, poly-hedron, 
poly-nomial, poly-syllable, poly-theism, di-ploma. 


ν 


R. πλερ, plu, flow, sazl, rain. 


πλέ-ω, float, sail ; πλό-ο-ς, contr. πλοῦς, 6, α sailing, voyage; ἀπό- 
πλους, ὁ, a sailing back, homeward voyage ; περί-πλους; ὁ, voyage round ; 
πλο-ῖο-ν, τό, vessel, boat. 

plu-d, rain; pl6ro, weep ; pli-ma, ae, /., feather, plume ; plau-s- 
tru-m, I, ἢ...) wagon. 


FLY, FLOW, FLEE, FLIT, FLEET, FLUTTER, FLOAT, FLOOD, FLEA. 


R. πο-πρό 280 


R. πο, po, drink. 


πό-το-ς, ὁ, a drinking, drinking-party ; wo-ré-v, τό, that which is 
drunk, drink ; πό-σι-ς, €-ws, ἡ, α drinking, drink ; συμ-πόσι-ο-ν, TO 
drinking-party, symposium ; cvprocl-apxo-s, ὁ (cf. apxo), preuitens of 
a drinking-party ; φαρμακο-ποσ-ἰᾶ, as (see φάρμακο-ν, drug poison) 
a taking of physic or poison ; πο-τήρ, ἢρ-ος, 6, ΔΑ Ν ρου μεμα : tl 
o-v, τό, Cup; πῶ-μα, ar-os, τό, drink; ἔκ-πωμα, at-os, aidaihed-bun ; 
πί-ν-ὠ, aor. ἔ-πι-ον, pf. ré-rw-xa, drink. r 

po-to-s, adj., drunk ; p6t6, drink; p6-culu-m, I, n., cup; im- 
bu-6, moisten (‘cause to drink’); bi-b6, drink. 


sym-posium. 


il 
ποιέω, make. 


ποιέ-ω, make, do j κακο-ποιό-ς, ὅ-ν (see xaxd-s, bad), doing ill; κακο- 
ποιέ-ω, do ill to; ἄριστο-ποιέ-ο-μαι (see ἄριστο-ν, breakfast) “αὶ one’s 
breakfast ready ; Semvo-roé-w (cf. R. δα), get dinner; ταδὶ ποιη- 
réo-s, a, o-v, to be done; ποιη-τό-ς, 4, ὅ-ν, made, done; χειρο-ποίητο-ς 
οὖ (cf. R. xep), made by the hand of man; ποιη-τή-Ξς, οὔ, maker igi 
of verses, poet ; ποίη-σι-5, e-ws, ἡ, poetry ; γελωτο-ποιό-ς, ὁ (nee ie 
laughter), jester; ὁδο-ποιό-ς, ὁ (cf. ὁδός), one who makes a ie 
ὁδοποιέ-ω, make a road, make passable. 


ME osiggy poesy, posy, poet, poetry, onomato-poeia, pharmaco- 
eia. 


πρό, pro, before. 
πρό, prep., before, in front of, in behalf of; φρουρό-ς, ὁ (for mpo- 
i cf. R. 2 Fep), one who watches in defence of, guard ; ppovpé-w 
" Λ ‘ , 
wate » guard; ppotp-apxo-s, ὁ (cf. ἄρχω), commander of a watch; 
φρούρ"ο-ν, 76, guarded post, garrison ; πρό-τερο-ς, a, o-v, comp., former 
: Ι Ι ? 
abe mporepa-io-s, a, o-v, on the preceding day ; wp-tv (for προ-ιον) 
* . Ι 
ng indi until.; πρό-σω, by metathesis and assimilation πόρ-ρω 
adv., forwards, in advance, far off; πρωΐ, contr. πρῴ, adv., early ; πρῶ- 
re i 7 ΤΊ 7 πρωτεύ-ω, be first ; πρᾶν-ἧς, és (for mpa-fa-v-ns), bent 

, headlong ; πρῷ-ρα, as, prow; πρῳρ-εύ-Ξ, é-ws, ὁ | 
< eislp ae » aS, p ἡ mpwp-ev-s, é-ws, 6, man at the 
: By before ; prae, prep., before; pr-ior, adj., former ; pris- 
Swi Ἂ ete ve pris-tinu-s, adj., primitive; pri-mu-s, adj., jirst ; 
-r6, adv., forward; pr6-nu-s, adj., bent forw “ 
κεν, i ard ; -uu- | 
distinguished, peculiar. | Γ στ 
FOR, FORE, 


981 R. σαΕ-Ε. vex 


R. ca, 8a, sound, healthy. 
σῶ-ς, σᾶ, σῶ-ν, safe and sound ; σῴζω᾽ 
σω-τήρ, p-0s, ὁ, preserver, saviour ; 
σωτήρ-ιο-5)γ o-v, saving, salutary ; owrnp-la, as, safely; σώ-φρων, ον, 
gen. ov-os (Cf. φρήν), of sound mind, sensible, self-controlled ; σωφρονέ-ω, 
be of sound mind, be discreet ; σωφρονίζω, make discreet ; σωφρο-σύνη, 
ns, soundness of mind, moderation. 

sa-nu-s, adj., sound, healthy ; 808-pe-s, adj.; 


σῶ-ο-ς, a, o-v (for caf-o-s), OF 
(for cw-ifw), make safe, save; 


saved, unhurt. 


R. coed, sed, st. 

ἕζο-μαι (for ἐδ-ιο-μαι), poetic, seat oneself, sit ; καθ-έζο-μαι; sit down ; 
ἕδ-ρᾶ, as, seat ; ἐν-ἐδρᾶ, as, a sitting in wait, ambush ; évedpev-w, lie in 
ambush, waylay ; ψευδ-ενέδρᾶ, as (see ψευδής, false), sham ambuscade ; 
ἐφ-ἐδρᾶ, as, a sitting by; Epedpo-s, 0-r, sitting by, as subst., reserve 
force; Lo (for i5-w), poetic, sit, make sit; καθ-ίζω, make sit down, 


seat. 

sed-e-6, sit; sel-la, ae, 7. seat; 
séd-é-s, is, f., bench ; sid-6, sit down. 
cath-edral, chair, chaise, deca- 


sol-iu-m, i, ., seat, throne ; 


SIT, SET, SEAT, SADDLE, SETTLE ; 
hedron, tetra-hedron, san-hedrim. 


R. cerr, sec, follow. 

ἕπ-ω, be about, be busy with, mid. trr-o-par, busy oneself about, 
accompany, follow ; ὅπ-λο-ν, τό, implement, tool, plur., implements 
of war, gear, arms, armour ; &-owo-s, 0-¥, unarmed ; €v-omho-s, 0-7; 
well armed ; év-brh-t0-s, 0-¥, in or with arms; ὁπλο-μάχο- 5) ὁ-»ν (cf. R. 
pax), Jighting in heavy arms ; ὁπλομαχ-ἰᾶ, as, heavy infantry tactics ; 
ὁπλί-τη-5. OV, heavy-armed soldier ; ὁπλιτεύ-ω, serve as a heavy-armed 
soldier ; ὁπλῖτ-ικό-ς, ἡ, 4-¥, composed of heavy-armed troops ; ὁπλίζω, 
arm, equip; ἐξ-οπλίζω, arm fully ; ἐξοπλι-σίᾷ, as, state of being fully 
armed ; ὅπλι-σι-5,) €-ws, ἡ, equipment, accoutrements. 
soc-iu-s, 1, ™., 


sequ-o-r, follow ; sec-u-ndu-s, adj., following ; 


comrade. 
pan-oply. 


R. cex, hold, have. 

éx-o, fut. ἕξω or oxh-ow, 2 aor. 
gi-cex-w), hold, hold fast ; ὑπ-ισχ-νέ 
promise ; πλεον-ἐκ-τη-55) OV (ef. R. wha), 


t-cx-ov, have, hold; t-cx-a (for 
-o-uat, hold oneself under, engage, 
one who has or claims more 


R. oxa—-R. σπα 282 


than he ought; πλεονεκτέ-ω, claim too large a part, get the better: 
ἐχ-υρό-ς, d, d-», tenable, strong; ἐν-έχυρο-ν, τό, that which holds ati 
fast, pledge; ox-h, 7s, that which supports, nourishment; εὐ-ωχέ-ω 
nourtsh well, entertain ; ebwx-la, as, feast; ὀχ-υρό-ς, a, ὁ-ν, bilable 
strong ; hvi-oxo-s, ὁ (see ἡνία, reins), one who holds the reins, aie 
σκηπτοῦχο-ς, ὁ (σκῆπτο-ν, σκῆπ-τρο-ν, staff, sceptre), ἐδιῶν hearer : 
um-oxo-s, o-v, under control, subject to; σχε-δό-ν, adv., holding iy 
nearly ; σχέ-τλοιο-ς, a, ο-ν, holding out, unflinching, cruel ; it 
ar-os, τό, way of holding oneself, form ; σχο-λή, 7s, α holding up, ἴμεν. 
ure ; σχολα-ῖο-ς, a, o-v, leisurely, slow ; σχολαίως, adv., slowly ; σχολάζω 
be at leisure ; ἄ-σχολο-ς, 0-v, without leisure, busy; doxod-la, as ποι 
of leisure, business. ii 

SAIL; ep-och, ewn-uch, hectic, hector, scheme, school, scho- 
lastic, scholiast. 


R. oxa, sea, cover, dark. 


| σκι-ἅ, as, shadow, shade ; σκη-νή, 7s, covered place, tent ; σύ-σκηνο-ς, 
ὁ, tent-companion ; σκηνό-ω, pitch tents, encamp; σκήνω-μα, ατ-ος, τό 
tent, plur., quarters ; oxijv-os, €-os, τό, tent ; oxnvé-w, be quartered i mh 
oxnvé-w, be in quarters apart; verbal διασκηνη-τέο-ν, must ΘΑ ΕΑ! 
apart ; σκό-το-ς, ὁ, darkness ; oxor-aio-s, a, o-v, in the dark; σκότ-ος 
e-os, τό, darkness. ᾿ 


cae-cu-s, adj., blind; οο-ο1δ-5, adj., one-eyed. 
SHADE, SHADOW, SHED; scene, pro-scenium. 


R. σκυ, seu, cover, hide. 


σκῦ-τ-ος, ετος, τό, hide, leather ; cxtr-vo-s, ἡ, o-v, of leather, leath- 
ern; σκῦ-λο-ν, τό, armour, plur., arms stript from a dead enemy; 
σκυλεύ-ω, strip, spoil; σῦ-λο-ν, τό = cxiddov; cvdAd-w, strip off, spot: 
σκευ-ή, ἧς, attire, dress; παρα-σκευή, ἧς, preparation ; Pag a i a 
o-v, unprepared ; σκεῦ-ος, ε-ος, τό, utensil, gear; σκευο-φόρο-ς, o-v (cf. 
R. gep), baggage-carrying ; cxevogopé-w, carry baggage; σκευάζω, use 
utensils, make ready, attire. 

scu-ti-ca, ae, f., whip; cu-ti-s, is, Κι, skin; scti-tu-m, I, n., shield ; 
ob-scii-ru-s, adj., dark; cii-ri-a, ae, f., house, senate-house. . 


HIDE, HOUSE, HOARD, SCUM, SCOWL, SKULK, SKY, SHOWER; a-sylum. 


R. ova, spa, draw, stretch. 


σπά-ω, draw; ἀ-σπάζο-μαι, draw to oneself, embrace; στά-δ-ιο-ν, 
τό (for owa-5-10-v), extended space, stadium ; σπά-ν-ι-ς, €-ws, ἡ, scarce- 


283 R. ora-R. στρα 


ness, lack (‘ straining’); σπάν-ιο-ς, ἃ, o-v, scanty; σπανίζω, lack, need ; 
πέν-ο-μαι (for σπε-»-ο-μαι)» strain or exert oneself, toil, be poor ; πεν-ία, 
as, poverty; wév-y-s, 77-05, ὁ, day-labourer, poor man; πεῖνα, 7s 
(for rev-ia), hunger, famine; πεινά-ω, be hungry ; wév-o-s, ὁ, labour ; 
érl-rovo-s, o-v, laborious, painful ; rové-w, work hard; πονη-ρό-ς, a, 
é-v, troublesome, bad ; πονηρῶς, adv., with difficulty ; wap-wévnpo-s, ο-ν 
(cf. was), wholly bad; πά-σχ-ὦ (for πα-θ-σκ-ω), be drawn tight, 
suffer, experience ; πάθ-ος, ε-ος, τό, experience, accident ; ἀ-παθής, és, 
without experience of, free from; ἡδυ-παθής; és (cf. R. ad), expertenc- 
ing pleasure ; ἡδυπαθέ-ω, live pleasantly, be luxurious ; πάθη-μα, ατ-ος, 
τό, anything that is experienced, misfortune, wretchedness. 


spa-t-iu-m, I, ”., room, space ; pa-ti-o-r, bear, suffer ; spé-s, spel, 
f., hope ; pr6-spe-r-u-s, adj., according to hope, favourable ; pén-ir-ia, 
ae, f., destitution; pann-u-s, 1, m., piece of cloth; pal-la, ae, f,, 
mantle. 

SPAN, SPIN, SPINDLE, SPIDER, SPEED, SPADE; Spasm, pathos, allo- 
pathy, homoeo-pathy, anti-pathy, a-pathy, sym-pathy. 


R. ora, sta, stand, set. 


t-ory-pe (for σι-στη-μι), make stand ; στά-σι-ς, €-ws, 7, α standing, 
band, faction ; érl-cract-s, €-ws, ἡ, a stopping, halt; xard-cract-s, €-ws, 
ἡ, an establishing, state, condition ; στασιάζω, stand against, form a 
faction, revolt ; ἀντι-στασιάζω, form a faction against ; ἀντιστασιώ-της-ς; 
ov, one of the opposite faction ; ἐπι-στά-τη-ς, ov, One who stands over 
or has charge of ; ἐπιστατέ-ω, exercise command ; προ-στά-τη-5) OV, ONE 
who stands before, leader; προστατέ-ω, be leader or manager of; 
προστατεύ-ω, be at the head, take charge ; oré-ap, ar-os, τό, stiff fat, 
suet ; ἱ-στό-ς, ὁ (for oi-cro-s), mast ; lor-lo-v, τό, sail; σταυ-ρό-ς, ὁ, 
stake, palisade ; σταυρό-ω, fence with pales ; σταύρω-μα, aT-os, τό, stock- 
ade; στα-θ-μό-ς, ὁ; standing-place, stall, station. 

si-std, make stand, set; sta-tu-s, adj., χοᾶ; sta-ti-m, adv., on 
the spot, immediately ; sta-ti-6, dn-is, f., a standing ; sta-bulu-m, 1, 
n., stall; In-stau-r-6, establish ; st6, sta-re, stand; st&-men, in-is, 
n., warp, thread. 

STAND, STEAD, STUD, STEED, STOW ; apo-stasy, apo-state, ec-stasy, 
histo-logy, hydro-statics, sy-stem, stoic. 


R. otpa, stra, strew. 


στρα-τό-ς, 6, that which is spread out, encamped army ; στρατό-πεδο-ν, 
τό (of. R. wed), camping-ground, camp ; στρατοπεδεύ-ω, encamp ; στρατ- 


R. σφαλ-Η. trax 284 


nys-s, ὁ (of. R. ay), leader of an army, general ; στρατηγέ-ω, be gen- 
eral, command ; συ-στράτηγο-ς, ὁ, fellow-general ; ὑπο-στράτηγο-ς, ὁ, 
under-general ; ὑποστρατηγέ-ω, be lieutenant-general ; στρατηγ-ίᾶ, as, 
office of general, generalship ; στρατηγιά-ω, wish to be general; ἀξιο- 
στράτηγο--ς, o-v (cf. R.ay), worthy of being general ; στρατ-ιά, Gs, army ; 
orpdt-to-s, ἃ, o-v, warlike; orpariw-rn-s, ov, soldier ; OU-CTPATLWTN-S, 
ov, fellow-soldier ; φιλο-στρατιώτη-ς, ov (cf. φίλος), the soldiers friend ; 
orparet-w, make an expedition, go to war; στράτευ-μα, at-os, τό, 
army ; orpare-la, as, expedition, campaign ; émi-orparela, as, campaign 
against ; orép-vo-v, τό, breast (named with reference to its expanse); 
προ-στερν-ίδιο-ν, τό, breast-plate ; orpé-vvi-p, spread, strew ; στρῶ-μα, 
ar-os, τό, spread, coverlet, plur., bed-clothes ; oTpwuato-derpo-s, ὁ (cf. 
R. δε), sack in which bedclothes were tied up. 

stra-tu-s, adj., spread out; latu-s (for séld-tu-s), adj., broad ; 
ster-n-6, spread out; stel-la, ae, f., star; tor-u-s, i, m., stuffed bol- 
ster ; lo-c-u-s (for stlo-c-u-s), 1, m., place, spot ; stru-6, place together, 
arrange ; in-strii-mentu-m, i, n., implement, tool. 

STREW, STRAW, STAR; strat-agem, strat-egy, strat-egic. 


R. σφαλ, fal, trip. 

σφάλ-λω, trip up, pass., fall, fail ; σφαλ-ερό-ς, a, ὅ-ν, likely to trip, 
slippery, dangerous ; ἀ-σφαλ-ής, és, not liable to be tripped up, safe, 
sure; ἀσφαλῶς, adv., firmly, safely ; ἀσφάλε-ια, as, security. 

fal-16, trip, deceive ; fal-su-s, adj., deceptive. 

FALL, FELL, PALL; sphalerite. 


R. rax, tec, beget, hit, prepare. 


τί-κτιω (for ri-rx-w), beget, bring forth; rék-vo-v, τό, child; τέκ- 
pap, τό, fixed goal, mark, sign, proof ; τεκμαίρο-μαι (for Texmap-to-pac), 
settle by a mark, infer ; τεκμήρ-ιο-ν, τό, sign, proof; τέχ-νη, ns, work- 
manship, art, ways and means; rexv-tkd-s, %, é-v, artistic, artful ; 
τεχνικῶς, adv., artfully; τεχνάζω, use art, employ cunning; τάττω 
(for rax-w), arrange, form ; τακ-τό-ς, ἡ, d-v, arranged, set in order ; 
&-raxro-s, o-v, in disorder, undisciplined; draxré-w, be disorderly ; 
εὔ-τακτο-ς, o-v, well arranged, well disciplined ; εὐτάκτως, adv., with 
good discipline ; τάξι-ς, €-ws, ἡ, arrangement, rank ; d-ratla, as, dis- 
order, insubordination ; εὐ-ταξίαᾶ, as, discipline ; mwapd-Taki-s, €-ws, ἢ, 
order of battle; rati-apxo-s, ὁ (cf. &pxw), commander of a τάξις, 
taxiarch. — reby-w, make ready, make; τεῦχ-ος, €-0s, rd, tool, jar, 
chest ; tv-y-x-dv-@, hit, hit upon, reach, get; τύχ-η, ns, that which 


285 R. ταλ--τέλος 


touches man, luck, fortune ; eb-rux-la, as, good fortune, success ; ev- 
rux-hs, és, well off, lucky; εὐτυχέ-ω, be well off; εὐτύχη-μα, ατ-ος, Td, 
piece of good fortune, success. — τόξ-ο-ν, τό (Tox +0), bow; τοξ-ικό-ς, 
ή, ὅ-ν, belonging to the bow; τοξό-τη-5, ov, bowman ; τοξεύ-ω, shoot 
with a bow; τόξευ-μα, ατ-ος, τό, arrow. 

tig-nu-m, i, n., building stuff; tex-6, weave; té-la, ae, f., web; 
sub-ti-li-s, adj., woven fine; sub-té-men, in-is, n., woof; té-lu-m, 1, 
missile. 

THING, hus-TINGS; tactics, taxi-dermy, syn-tax, archi-tect, tech- 
nical, penta-teuch, toxico-logy, in-toxic-ate. 


R. tad, tal, lift. 


réA-a-s, τάλ-αινα, τάλ-αν, Dearing, enduring, suffering ; τάλαν-το-ν, 
τό, that which supports, balance, plur., pair of scales, then by transfer 
the weight in the scales, and as a definite weight, talent ; τέλλω (for 
red-w), raise oneself; ἀνα-τέλλω, rise (of heavenly bodies) ; ἐν-τέλλο- 
pat, lay a charge upon one, command ; τέλ-ος, €-os, τό, what is im- 
posed on one, tax, task,-office, plur., magistrates ; ἀ-τελής, és, free from 
a public tax; ἀτέλε-ια, as, freedom from a public tax, any exemption ; 
πολυ-τελής, és (cf. R. waa), requiring much outlay, costly ; λῦσι-τελής, 
és (see λύω, loose, free), paying expenses, profitable ; λῦσιτελέ-ω, be 
projitable; τόλ-μα, ns, courage to undertake a thing, hardihood; 
τολμά-ω, have the courage, venture, risk ; ev-Todpuo-s, o-v, Of good cour- 
age; τλή-μων, ov, gen. ov-os, enduring, suffering. 


tell-iis, iir-is, f., earth ; tol-16, lift; tol-er6, endure ; tul-i, I have 
borne ; opi-tulor, bear aid, help ; 1la-tu-s (for tla@-tu-s), part., carried. 


THOLE (endure); a-tlas, talent, tantalize. 


τέλος, end (R. rep, pass over). 


rép-pa, ar-os, τό, goal, limit ; τέρ-μων, ov-os, 6, boundary; τέλ-ος, 
ε-ος, τό, attained goal, end, result ; redé-w, bring to completion, fulfil 
an obligation, pay; ἐν-τελής, és, at the end, complete, in full; παν- 
τελής, és (cf. πᾶς), quite complete; παντελῶς, adv., wholly, utterly ; 
red-€-0-w, be completed, come into being, become ; τελ-ευ-τή, 7s, end, 
end of life; redevrd-w, end one’s life, die ; redevTa-io-s, ἃ, o-v, at the 
end, last. 

ter-minu-s, 1, m., end; tra-n-s, prep., across; trans-tru-m, 1, 2., 
cross-beam ; tra-me-s, it-is, m., cross-way. 


talisman. 


τέτταρες-τρεῖς οὔθ 


τέτταρες, four. 


τέτταρ-ες, a, four; τετταρά-κοντα (cf. εἴκοσι), forty; τέταρ-το-ς, η, 
o-v, fourth ; τετρα-κόσιοι, at, a (cf. ἑκατόν), four hundred; τετρά-κις, 
adv., four times; τετρακισ-χΐλιοι, ar, a (See χέἕέλιοι, thousand), four 
thousand ; rerpd-porpo-s, o-v (μοῖρα, lot, portion, see μέρος, share), four- 
fold ; τετραμοιρ-ἰᾶ, as, fourfold share ; τετρα-πλόο-ς, o-v (cf. R. wa), 
JSourfold, quadruple ; τρά-πεζα, ἧς (cf. R. wed), table with four legs; 
ὁμο-τράπεζο-ς, o-v (cf. Gua), at the same table; συν-τράπεζο-ς, ὁ, table- 
companion ; τέθρ-ιππο-ν, τό (cf. R. ax), team of four horses abreast, 
chariot and four. 

quattuor, four ; quar-tu-s, adj., fourth ; quater, adv., four times ; 
quadru-pés, adj., with four feet. 

FOUR, FORTY ; tetra-yon, tetra-hedron, tetr-archy, tra-pezium, 
tra-pezoid. 


R. τι, pay. 


rl-w, pay, value, honour ; rl-v-w, pay, pay for, mid., make pay for, 
punish ; ti-ph, js, value, worth, honour ; &-rivo-s, o-v, without honour, 
dishonoured ; ἀτιμάζω, dishonour ; &v-riwo-s, o-v, in honour, honoured ; 
ἐντίμως, adv., in honour; φιλό-τῖμο-ς, o-v (cf. φίλος), loving honour, 
ambitious, emulous ; φιλοτῖμέ-ο-μαι, be emulous or jealous, feel piqued ᾿ 
Tiu-wo-s, ἃ, ο-ν, valuable, honoured; riud-w, value, esteem ἡ Tipwpe-s, 
6-y (for riua-ropo-s, cf. R. 2 Fep), watching over honour, avenging ; 
Tipwp-la, as, help, vengeance ; riuwpé-w, help, avenge. 

timo-cracy. 


τρεῖς, three. 


τρεῖς, τρί-α, three ; τρισ-καί-δεκα (cf. δέκα), thirteen; rpid-xovra (cf. 
εἴκοσι), thirty; tpiaxdyr-opo-s, ἡ (cf. R. ep), thirty-oared ship; τριᾶ- 
κόσιοι, at, a (Cf. ἑκατόν), three hundred; τρι-ἤρης, ε-ος, ἡ (cf. R. ep), 
galley with three banks of oars, man-of-war ; rpinp-trn-s, ov, man-of- 
war's man; rpl-rnxu-s, v (see πῆχυ-ς, cubit), of three cubits; τρι- 
πλάσιο-ς, a, o-v (cf. R. wha), threefold; τρί-πλεθρο-ς, o-v (cf. R. mda), 
of three plethra ; τρί-πους, ουν, gen. ποδ-ος, three-footed, as subst., ὁ or ἡ; 
table with three legs; rpi-xoluxo-s, o-v (see χοῖνιξ, choenix), holding 
three choenixes ; rpl-xa or τρι-χῇ, adv., threefold, in three divisions ; 
tpl-ro-s, 7, o-v, third ; rprra-io-s, ἃ, o-v, on the third day; τρίς, adv., 
three times, thrice ; tpw-dopevo-s, ἡ, ο-ν (cf. R. dS), thrice glad, very 
glad ; τρισ-μύριοι, a, a (see μύριοι, ten thousand), thirty thousand; 
τρισ-χΐλιοι, at, a (See χέλιοι, thousand), three thousand. 


brép-R. ha 


trés, three; ter-tiu-s, ad)., third; ter-ni, adj., three each ; ter, 
adv., thrice. 

THREE, THRICE; triad, tri-brach, tri-glyph, tri-gonometry, tri- 
meter, tri-pod, tri-syllable. 


ὑπέρ, over. 

ὑπέρ (Epic ὑπείρ for ὑπε-ρι), over, above ; ὕπερθεν, adv., from above ᾿ 
UBp-t-s, ετως, ἡ, insolence, arrogance (‘uppishness’); ὑβρίζω, treat with 
insolence ; vBpt-oro-s, 7, 0-v (for the sup. form, ¢f. dpi-cro-s, R. ap), 
insolent; ὕψ-ι (ir +o= dy), adv., on high; inp-os, ε-ος, τό, height ; 
ὑψη-λό-ς, ἡ, ὁ-ν (for dpeo-do-s), high ; ὑπερ-ύψηλο-ς, o-v, exceeding high. 

sum-mu-s, adj., highest; super, prep., over; SUper-U-6, ad)., 
upper ; super-nu-s, adj., celestial. 


OVER, ort; hyper-bole, hyper-critical. 


ὕπνος, sleep (R. σραπ, sleep). 

ὕπ-νο-ς, ὁ (ὑπ for cum), sleep; ἄγρ-υπνο-ς, o-v (cf. R. ay), hunting 
after sleep, wakeful ; ἀγρυπνέ-ω, lie awake ; év-rv-w-s, ο-ν, happening 
in sleep; ἐνύπνιο-ν, τό, vision in sleep, dream. 


som-nu-s, i, m., sleep ; somn-iu-m, 1, n., dream; sOp-OF, Or-is, m., 
deep sleep. 
hypnotic, hypnot-ism. 


R. da, fa, shine, show. 


φη-μί, show by words, say ; φά-σκ-ω, say, allege; pd-or-s, €-ws, ἡ, 
assertion ; mpb-pact-s, €-ws, ἡ; allegation, pretext ; προφασίζο-μαι, set up 
as a pretext ; d-rpopdow-ro-s, o-v, not offering excuses ; ἀπροφασίστως, 
adv., without offering excuses, without evasion ; φω-νή, fs, sound, 
voice, language. — pa-t-8-ps-s, d, ὁ-ν, shining, bright. —dalve (pa+v), 
cause to shine, bring to light, show; av-epd-s, a, ὁ-ν, in plain sight, 
clear ; φανερῶς, adv., evidently ; d-pav-hs, és, invisible, hidden ; ἀφανίζω, 
make hidden, blot out; δια-φαν-ής, és, seen through, transparent ; δια- 
paras, adv., clearly, distinctly ; éu-pav-7s, és, in plain sight, visible ; 
ἐμφανῶς, adv., visibly; κατα-φαν-ής, és, in sight ; περι-φαν-ής, és, visible 
from every point; περιφανῶς, adv., manifestly, notably. — Φά-ος, €-05, 
τό (pat), light; φῶς, φωτ-ὄς, τό (φω ἰ τ), light. 

fa-ri, say; fa-t-e-o-r, confess; In-fi-ti-ae, arum, 7. denial; fa- 
bula, ae, f., story; fa-ma, ae, f., report ; fas, n., divine law. 


R. φερ-φίλος 288 


BAN, BANNS ; eu-phemism, pro-phesy, pro-phet, phase, em-phasis, 
phenomenon, dia-phanous, epi-phany, hiero-phant, phantasm 
phos-phorus, photo-graphy. 


R. dep, fer, bear. 


φέρ-ω, bear, bring ; δια-φέρω, bear apart, differ, part. διαφέρων, ovea 
ov, differing ; διαφερόντως, adv., differently from others, peculiarly, lian 
passingly ; pop-d, as, a carrying or taking ; μισθο-φορά, ἂς (see μισθό-ς, 
wages), wages received, pay; φΦόρ-ο-ς, ὁ, what is brought in, tribute ; 
gpopé-w, keep bringing, carry habitually, wear; ‘yeppo-pédpo-s, o-v (nee 
yéppo-v, wicker-shield), carrying wicker-shields ; did-popo-s, o-v, bear- 
ing apart, different ; dopuv-pépo-s, ὁ (see δόρυ, spear), one who carries a 
spear ; δρεπανη-φόρο-ς, ο-ν (see Spéwavo-v, scythe), scythe-bearing ; μισθο- 
pdpo-s, o-v (see μισθό-ς, wages), receiving pay, mercenary ; σκευο-φόρο-ς 
o-v (cf. R. ov), baggage-carrying ; cxevopopé-w, carry baggage ; νὰν 
gopo-s, o-v, bearing together, i.e. jitting, useful, advantageous . ὑδρο- 
φόρο-ς, ο-ν (see ὕδωρ, water), carrying water ; ὑδροφορέ-ω, carry ee 
φόρ-το-ς, ὁ, what is carried, load; popr-lo-v, τό, burden, load ; Ainoke 
é-ws, ὁ, bearer, carrier ; ἀμφορεύ-ς, é-ws, ὁ (for dudi-popeds, in Homer), 
vessel with handles on both sides; dl-pp-o-s, ὁ (cf. δύο), that ἌΡΝΑ 
holds two, chariot-board ; év-di@p-w-s, ο-ν, on the same seat with one; 
ὀστφρ-αίνο-μαι, 2 aor. do-pp-b-unv (stem οσ-φρο- for 05-ppo, ὄζω, oul, 
see εὐώδης, fragrant), have an odour brought to one, smell. 


fer-6, bear ; fer-ti-li-s, adj., fruitful ; lici-fer, adj., light-bringing ; 
f6r-s, fOr-ti-s, f., chance ; f6r-t-iina, ae, f., chance ; fair, fiir-is, m., thief. 
BEAR, BURDEN, BIER, Wwheel-BARROW, BIRTH, BAIRN; para-phern- 
» Ὺ » * 
alia, Christo-pher, dia-phoretic, meta-phor, phos-phorus. 


φίλος, one’s own, dear. 


φίλο--, n, ὁ-ν, dear, friendly; φίλ-ιο-ς, a, o-v, friendly; φιλ-ἰᾷ, as 
affection ; φιλ-ικό-ς, ἡ, ὁ-ν, of or befitting a friend, friendly ; achat 
adv., like a friend; φιλέ-ω, love; φίλ-ιππο-ς, ο-ν (cf. R. an), fond of 
horses ; pthb-Onpo-s, ο-ν (see θήρᾶ, a hunting), fond of hunting ; φιλο- 
κερδής, és (see κέρδος, gain), fond or greedy of gain ϑοεμδ ὁ be 
greedy of gain ; φιλο-κίνδῦνο-ς, ο-ν (cf. κίνδῦνος), loving danger, ty 
vga φιλο-μαθής, és (cf. R. pa), fond of knowledge ; φιλό-νεικο-ς, ο-ν 
(νεῖκος, strife), fond of strife; φιλονεικ-ἰᾷ, fondness of strife, rivalry ; 
Φιλύ-νἴκο-:, 0-»ν (see vixn, victory), fond of winning, emulous; at 
vix-la, as, eagerness to win, rivalry; φιλο-πόλεμο-ς, ο-ν (see sitninona! 
war), fond of war; girb-cogpo-s, ὁ (see σοφό-ς, wise), lover of know- 


289 φρήν-φυλάττω 


ledge; φιλο-στρατιώτη-:, ov (cf. R. στρα), the soldier’s friend ; φιλό- 
riuo-s, o-v (cf. R. τι), loving honour, emulous; φιλο-τιμέ-ο-μαι, be 
emulous or ambitious, feel piqued ; φιλό-φρων, ov, gen. ov-os (Cf. φρήν), 
Sriendly-minded ; φιλοφρονέ-ο-μαι, be well disposed, show kindness. 


biblio-phile, phil-anthropy, phil-harmonic, phil-ippic, philo-logy, 


philo-sophy, philtre. 


φρήν, midriff. 


φρήν, φρεν-ὁς, 7, midrif, diaphragm, heart, mind, understanding ; 


φρόν-ιμο-ς, o-v, having understanding, prudent; pov-ti-s, ἰδ-ος, 7, 


thought, care; φροντίζω, take thought, be anxious; ppové-w, have 
understanding, be wise; φρόνη-μα, aT-os, τό, mind, spirit; ἄ-φρων, ov, 
gen. ov-os, without sense, foolish ; ἀφρο-σύνη, ns, folly; σω-φρων, ov, 
gen. ov-os (cf. R. σα), of sound mind, sensible; σωφρονέ-ω, be of 
sound mind ; σωφρονίζω, make discreet, bring to reason; σωφρο-σύνη, 
ns, soundness of mind, moderation ; φιλό-φρων, ov, gen. ov-os (Cf. φίλος); 
friendly minded ; φιλοφρονέ-ο-μαι, be well disposed, show kindness. 


frantic, frenzy, phreno-logy. 


guy, fug, bend, flee. 


φεύγ-ω, flee, be banished; φυγ-ή, 7s, flight, banishment ; φυγ-ά-ς, 
ἀδ-ος, ὁ, one who has fled, exile, refugee. 


fug-a, ae, f., flight ; fug-i-6, Jlee ; fugi-t-iuu-s, adj., fugitive. 


Bow (bend), Bow (the weapon), BIGHT, BOUT, BUXOM. 


φυλάττω, watch. 
φυλάττω (for purax-ww), keep watch ; pf. partic. πε-φυλαγ-μένο-ς, ἢ; 


o-v, having taken care; πεφυλαγμένως, adv., cautiously ; ἀ-φύλακ-το-ς, 
o-v, unwatched, unguarded ; ἀφυλάκτως, adv., unguardedly, rashly ; 
ἀφυλακτέ-ω, be without a watch; pvdak-h, 75; watch, guard; mpo- 
φυλακή, Hs, advanced posts, pickets; Φύλαξ, ax-os, 6, watcher, guard ; 
νυκτο-φύλαξ, ax-os, ὁ (see νύξ, night), night-watch, picket ; ὀπισθο-φύλαξ, 
ax-os, ὁ (see ὄπισθεν, adv., at the rear), one who guards the rear, plur., 
rear-guard ; ὀπισθοφυλακέ-ω, guard the rear, form the rear guard; 
ὀπισθοφυλακ-ίᾶ, as, command of the rear; προ-φύλαξ, ax-os, 6, Outpost, 


sentinel. 
phylactery. 


R. xap-R. χερ 290 


R. yap, gra, rejoice. 

χαίρω (for xap-w), rejoice, be glad; χάρ-ι-ς, ιτ-ος, 7, that which 
causes joy, love, gratitude, favour; éi-xapi-s, ι, gen. ιτ-ος, pleasing, 
gracious ; χαρίζο-μαι, show kindness, gratify ; ἀ-χάρισ-το-ς, o-v, ungra- 
cious, unpleasant ; ἀχαρίστως, adv., ungraciously, without gratitude ; 
xapl-e-s, εσσα, ev, graceful, pretty. 

gra-tu-s, adj., agreeable ; gra-t-ia, ae, f., favour, gratitude. 

YEARN; eu-charist. 


R. yep, her, grasp. 

χείρ, χειρ-ός, ἡ, hand ; χειρο-πληθής, és (cf. R. πλα), hand-filling, as 
large as the hand will hold; xetpo-wolnro-s, o-v (cf. ποιέω), made by 
the hand of man, artificial; éy-xeipé-w, lay one’s hand on, make an 
attempt ; ἐπι-χειρέ-ω, put one’s hand to, attempt, try ; ὑπο-χείρ-ιο-ς, 0-v, 
under the hands of, subject to ; xelp-wv, ov, gen. ov-os, comp., subject or 
inferior to, worse; χειρό-ο-μαι, handle, subdue ἡ ἐγ-χειρ-ἰδ-ιο--, o-v, in 
the hand ; ἐγχειρίδιο-ν, τό, dagger ; δια-χειρίζω, have in hand, manage ; 
éy-xetpiiw, commit to the hands of, entrust ; eb-pera-xelpic-To-s, o-v, easy 
to handle or deal with. ) 

her-c-tu-m, I, n., inheritance ; hér-6-s, &d-is, m. and /., heir ; héréd- 
i-ta-s, at-is, f., heirship, inheritance. 

chiro-graphy, chiro-mancyff chir-urgeon, s-urgeon. 


will’ 


" 


/ il 
. ' ON ll 
v/ Ἢ (he Le im A δ ου ἄγ. abadce " — 

if »)ἘρέΗ;ὼαλανῳωων. ᾿ h : “icc κὰν πος 
" “σ᾽ " / r ci Zi "ἡ! “ a 1 Ate ᾿ 
4 f . , / νι Co ΤῸ en «. hewitt ” “". ! 

ὠὰ vate | Wa i AA ἡ 
‘ ; Wa a a 


ϊ, 
RA ΜΝ ων Δειυινεννι σε ἐ 
/ Nil αι. 


εἰ Ἄφιιςσ, Κ᾿. κν. 


Phict, Atm . 


beta SKM λὲν 


‘ " 
" | Ὁ 


m lari 
" 


wit 


ye ee Φ 4. 4. 4 γ-.. . / 7 
/ i , Ἷ ey 9 me as ΄ς } 
we ον ἀδὼν Ἢ ε “τοῦτος » ς ἐν ΔΙ y i Ta Sealy } 


i or 4 a. ijl. ) ἰ 

δ των ᾿τν ΦΞγσεν Be Ft Arey 

wil " i 1} Ἶ ᾿ Ι , 
tov They Kaecs 


ee We ho ty 


Ll x ’ ‘ A lhe a4 on, 5 


ERSITY LIBRARIES 


dicated below, or at the 
date of borrowing, 85 
arrangement with 


COLUMBIA UNIV 


s due on the date in 
efinite period after the 
ary rules or by special 


This book i 
E expiration of ad 
™" provided by the libr 

the Librarian in charge. 


DATE BORROWED DATE DUE DATE BORROWED DATE DUE 


-- 
| 
| 


BSeP 


C28 (546)M25 


a 


| 
i 

| 

Ν᾿ 


al 
\ 


ii 


COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY 


| OU) 


ὃς 
‘A yi Thy) 


As Ned 
Ag ὶ 
yee’ 


ban Wy χει ΟΣ x 


Ls 
Sa TaN cai 


" 
» 


oF ota th! 


ὦ 


we 

+. ‘ 
ξ % ve 

a ane Be ἃ 

at A os Tote tig Sg Le 

Paha rane anh 


